Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutC2015-348 - 11/10/2015 - Approved 2015-348 11/10/15 M2015-127 SafeNet Services LLC 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement,for the Project awarded on November 10,2015, is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner)and SafeNet Services.LLC (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: }IEB&Al Kruse Tennis Centers(Bond 20121—Re-Bid Package Project Number: E12118 PART A HEB • Demolition of existing stadium court and seating areas. • Addition of post tensioned concrete caps over existing courts 5,6,9, 10, 13,14,15, 16,and 17 and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications. • Addition of three new courts 20, 21 and 22 on suspended structural slab and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications including all electrical and lighting. • Demolition of existing backboard area. • Addition of padding to light poles @ courts 9, 10 and 12. • Addition of chain link cut corners at indicated on site drawings and details. • Modifications to chain link fencing at entrance to HEB facility. Fencing includes replacement of low fencing with high fencing at court no 1. • Addition of chain link fencing for access control to facility. • Include all chain link fencing related work. Al Kruse • Three courts( 5,6 and 7)to receive new asphalt overlay. • Seven courts(1,2,3,4,8,9,and 10)to be resurfaced. • Windscreens to be replaced at all courts. • Court 10 Backboard relocated to court 9. • Addition of padding to light poles at courts 1,4 and 7. • Include all chain link fencing related work. and-as-specified, INDEXED illuminate courts 10 and 11 PART-8- 14E8 ART 8-t1E8 installation of a new LULA lift. ,al-cfuse A A stripping, ADA signage and wheel stops. irrigation plans and specifications. piers for future shade structure. ARTICLE 2 — DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: CLK Architects & Associates 615 N. U_oper Broadway. Suite 1250 Corpus Christi. Tx 78401 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: Phil Boehk. PE — Acting Construction Engineer Cita of Corpus Christi — Engineering Services 4917 Holly Rd.. Bldg. #5 Corpus Christi. TX 78411 ARTICLE 3 — CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Project Part A is to be substantially complete and ready for operation within 180 days. The Project Part B is to be substantially complete and ready for operation within 180 days. Both Project Parts A and B are to be complete and eligible for Final Payment 30 days after the date for Substantial Completion. B. Milestones, and the dates for completion of each, are as defined in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial Toss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $250.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner $150.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4 — CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached in SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBIT A. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 13.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. PART A - PART B - Alternates: Total Base Bid Price $ 1 809,131.00 Total Base Bid Price $ NIL Add Alternate No. 1— HEB Tennis Center: $ N/A Addition of two (2) 36' tennis courts on suspended concrete slab include all surfacing, lighting, netting, and fencing as noted on plans and as specified. Add Alternate No. 2 — Al Kruse Tennis Center: $ N/A Mill top 2" of existing asphalt parking lot, repair pot holes & overlay 2" of new asphalt paving include all stripping and ADA signage and wheel stops. Add Alternate No. 3 — HEB Tennis Center: $ N/A Drip irrigation system — scope to include all Landscaping sheets and specifications on construction documents. Add Alternate No. 4 — HEB Tennis Center: $ N/A Flatwork, electrical rough -in and structural piers for future shade structure. Add Alternate No. 5 — HEB Tennis Center: $ N/A Pre -fabricated maintenance storage unit "20ft x 30ft Morgan Building or equal" and adjacent flatwork, include electrical to storage building and windstorm anchoring. Add Alternate No. 6 — HEB Tennis Center: $ N/A Courts 9 & 10, remove four existing interior light poles. Replace four existing corner light poles with new light poles & lights to illuminate courts 9,10 &11. ARTICLE 5 — PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 15 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to 95 percent of the total earned value to date for completed Work and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. The balance will be held as retainage. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.6, less the total of payments previously made and less set -offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, retainage may be required at a higher percentage rate if progress on the Project is considered to be unsatisfactory. If retainage in excess of the amount described above is held prior to Substantial Completion, the Owner will place the additional amount in an interest bearing account. Interest will be paid in accordance with Paragraph 6.01. E. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6 — INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. 6.02 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7 — CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site -related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 8 — ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 13.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice, the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9 — CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 2. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 3. Addenda. 4. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form Exhibit A. 5. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 10 — CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES One original signed Agreement will be required. The sequence of signatures will be completed in the following order: A. CONTRACTOR — Contract must be signed by a person authorized to bind the firm or company. If Contractor is a Corporation contracts must be Attested; B. ASSISTANT CITY ATTORNEY for the City; C. DIRECTOR OF ENGINEERING SERVICES; D. CITY SECRETARY for the City. ATTEST STI City Secretary J. . Edmonds, P.E. Director of Engineering Services APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM sst. City Attorney ATTEST (IF CORPORATION) (Seal Below) U.2.U.I. . . . _ _[2:- .1. . UIHU ST CDUNet:_ .._.._...1.L SECRETARY CONTRACTOR SafeNet Services LLC Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if r Person signing for Contractor is not President, Title: �) n Qit Vice President, Chief Executive Officer, or Chief Financial Officer 1321 Glenoak Drive Address Corpus Christi, TX 78418 City State Zip 361/937-9300 Phone dalexander@safenetservices.com EMail END OF SECTION 10/28/15 City of Corpus Christi — Engineering Services Sylvia Arriaga — Construction Contracts Mgr P. 0. Box 9277 Corpus Christi, Texas 78469-9277 RE: #E12118 — HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) David Alexander is Authorized Signatory for SafeNet Services, LLC 1321 Glenoak Dr Corpus Christi, TX 7841'8 tel (361) 937-9300 fax (361) 937-8853 00 30 00 BID FORM ARTICLE 1— BID RECIPIENT 1.01 In accordance with the Drawings, Specifications, and Contract Documents, this Bid Proposal shall be submitted no later than: Wednesday, April 8, 2015, 2:00 p.m. 1.02 Submit hard copy Bids, Bid Security, and all attachments to the Bid (See Section 7.01 below) to: The City of Corpus Christi, Texas City Secretary's Office 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 Attention: City Secretary Bid — HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) -Project No.: E12118 Re -Bid Package ARTICLE 2 — BIDDERS'S ACKNOWLEDGMENTS 2.01 Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement with Owner on the form included in the Contract Documents, to perform all Work specified or indicated in Contract Documents for the Contract Price indicated in this Bid or as modified by Contract Amendment. Bidder agrees to complete the Work within the Contract Times established in the Agreement or as modified by Contract Amendment and comply with the all other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 2.02 Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders, including those dealing with required Bonds. The Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 90 days after the opening of Bids. 2.03 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event of its failure to complete Work in accordance with the schedule set forth in the Agreement. 2.04 Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda: Addendum No. Addendum Date Signature cknowle ging Receipt 1—__/2/15 r it --- ARTICLE 3 — BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 3.01 The Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. Bid Form HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) -Project No.: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package Attachment 3 Page 1 of 7 003000-1 REV 01-23-2015 3.02 The Bidder has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. 3.03 The Bidder is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. 3.04 The Bidder has carefully studied the following Site -related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: A. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; B. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; C. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; D. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and E. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. 3.05 The Bidder has considered the: A. Information known to Bidder; B. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; C. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and D. The Contract Documents. 3.06 The Bidder has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 3.04 and 3.05 with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: A. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; B. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder; and C. Bidder's safety precautions and programs. 3.07 Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Bidder agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.08 The Bidder is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package Attachment 3 Page 2 of 7 Bid Form 00 30 00 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) -Project No.: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE REV 01-23-2016 3.09 The Bidder has correlated the information known to the Bidder, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. 3.10 The Bidder has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Bidder has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Bidder. 3.11 The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. 3.12 Bidder's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4 — BASIS OF BID 4.01 Bidder may bid on Part A or Part B or both Part A and B (bidders choosing to bid PartA & Part B as a Lump Sum must fill in all blanks in Section 4.02). Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for: PART A Base Bid Add Alternate 1 Add Alternate 6 PART B Base Bid Add Alternate 2 Add Alternate 3 Add Alternate 4 Add Alternate 5 $JR..%/��` _ (.:23`2L' $ I,i.� V /2/(2( $ 2r`r. $ 2/c 791.E s 3'/ 5.5 Lump Sum Lump Sum Lump Sum Lump Sum Lump Sum Lump Sum Lump Sum Lump Sum The Bidder selected for award of the Contract will be the Lowest responsible Bidder that submits a responsive Bid for Part A, or Part B or both Part A and B. Owner will, at its discretion, award the contract to the lowest responsible Bidder for Part A -Base Bid, plus any combination of Add Alternates and Part B -Base Bid, plus any combination of Add Alternates. Bid Form HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) -Project No.: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package Attachment 3 Page 3 of 7 003000-3 REV 01.23.2015 4.02 Bidder may also complete the Work as a whole in accordance with the Contract Documents in the form of a Lump Sum for the Base Bid: / lr Base Bid ter-- Add Alternate 1 $ � ��• � �,; r., Add Alternate 2 $ a 7.71 5rr� Add Alternate 3 $ /1(1; %V Add Alternate 4 $ �� �� ?' % Add Alternate 5 $ .� 5— r Add Alternate 6 $ %,i, r// The Bidder selected for award of the Contract will be the Lowest responsible Bidder that submits a responsive Bid. Owner will, at its discretion, award the contract to the lowest responsible Bidder for the Base Bid, plus any combination of Add or Deduct Alternates. ARTICLE 5 — EVALUATION OF BIDDERS 5.01 THE OWNER WILL CONSIDER THE GREATEST AMOUNT BID, THE BIDDER'S RESPONSIBILITY, AND WHETHER THE BIDDER HAS MET THE MINIMUM SPECIFIC PROJECT EXPERIENCE REQUIREMENTS TO DETERMINE THE LOWEST RESPONSIBLE BIDDER. THE OWNER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO WAIVE ANY AND ALL IRREGULARITIES IN DETERMINING THE BIDDERS' RESPONSIBILITY, AND WHETHER THE BIDDER HAS MET THE MINIMUM SPECIFIC PROJECT EXPERIENCE REQUIREMENTS TO DETERMINE THE LOWEST RESPONSIBLE BIDDER, AND RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REQUIRE THE SUBMISSION OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 5.02 The Owner has the right to accept a Bid, reject any and all Bids, to waive any and all irregularities in the Bids, or to reject non -conforming, non-responsive, or conditional Bids. In addition, the Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid where circumstances and developments have, in the opinion of the Owner, changed the responsibility of the Bidder. 5.03 Material misstatements in the documentation submitted to determine the Bidder's responsibility, including information submitted per SECTION 00 45 16 STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE, may be grounds for rejection of the Bidder's Bid on this Project. Any such misstatement, if discovered after award of the Contract to such Bidder, may be grounds for immediate termination of the Contract. Additionally, the Bidder will be liable to the Owner for any additional costs or damages to the Owner resulting from such misstatements, including costs and attorney's fees for collecting such costs and damages. Bid Form HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) -Project No.: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1 — RE -BID Package Attachment 3 Page 4 of 7 003000-4 REV 01-23-2015 ARTICLE 6—TIME OF COMPLETION 6.01 The Project Part A is to be substantially complete and ready for operation within 180 calendar days. The Project Part B is to be substantially complete and ready for operation within 180 calendar days. Both Project Parts A and B are to be complete and eligible for Final Payment 30 days after the date for Substantial Completion. 6.02 Project bid as a lump sum is to be substantially complete within 180 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in Paragraph 4.01 of the General Conditions. Project will be complete and eligible for Final Payment 30 days after the date for Substantial Completion. 6.03 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially complete and will be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions within the number of days indicated in SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBIT A. ARTICLE 7 — ATTACHMENTS TO THIS BID 7.01 AR submittals must be in hard copy for this Project. In compliance with the Bid Requirements in SECTION 00 11 16 INVITATION TO BID, the following are made a condition of this Bid: A. Bid Security. B. SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM and documentation of signatory authority. C. SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBIT A. D. SECTION 00 30 02 COMPLIANCE TO STATE LAW ON NONRESIDENT BIDDERS. E. SECTION 00 3004 CONFLICT OF INTEREST QUESTIONNAIRE. F. SECTION 00 30 05 DISCLOSURE OF INTEREST. G. SECTION 00 30 06 NON -COLLUSION CERTIFICATION. ARTICLE 8 — DEFINED TERMS 8.01 The terms used in this Bid have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions. The significance of terms with initial capital letters is described in the General Conditions. ARTICLE 9 —VENUE 9.01 Bidder agrees that venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas for any legal action. Bid Form HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) -Project No.: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1— REBID Package Attachment 3 Page 5 of 7 003000-5 REV 01-23-2015 ARTICLE 10 — SIGNATORY REQUIREMENTS FOR BIDDERS 10.01 Bidders must include their correct legal name, state of residency, and federal tax identification number in the Bid Form. 10.02 The Bidder, or the Bidder's authorized representative, shall sign and date the Bid Form to accompany all materials included in the submitted Bid. Bids which are not signed and dated in this manner, or which do not contain the required documentation of signatory authority may be rejected as non-responsive. The individual(s) signing the Bid must have the authority to bind the Bidder to a contract, and if required, shall attach documentation of signatory authority to the Bid Form. 10.03 Bidders who are individuals ("natural persons" as defined by the Texas Business Organizations Code §1.002), but who will not be signing the Bid Form personally, shall include in their bid a notarized power of attorney authorizing the individual designated as their authorized representative to submit the Bid and to sign on behalf of the Bidder. 10.04 Bidders that are entities who are not individuals shall identify in their Bid their charter or Certificate of Authority number issued by the Texas Secretary of State and shall submit with their Bid a copy of a resolution or other documentation approved by the Bidder's governing body authorizing the submission of the Bid and designating the individual(s) authorized to execute documents on behalf of the Bidder. Bidders using an assumed name (an "alias") shall submit a copy of the Certificate of Assumed Name or similar document. 10.05 Bidders that are not residents of the State of Texas must document their legal authority to conduct business in Texas. Nonresident Bidders that have previously registered with the Texas Secretary of State may submit a copy of their Certificate of Authority. Nonresident Bidders that have not previously registered with the Texas Secretary of State shall submit a copy of the Bidder's enabling documents as filed with the state of residency, or as otherwise existing. Bid Form HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) -Project No.: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package Attachment 3 Page 6 of 7 003000-6 REV 01.23-2015 ARTICLE 11- BID SUBMITTAL 11.01 This Bid is submitted by: Bidder: By: Name: Title: SafeNet Services, LLC (typ David Alexander or pr' efull leg 1 name of Bidder) I`( o-17- (individual's signature) (typed or printed) Owner Attest: \:-/,0_,L( y�L State of Residency: Federal Tax ID. No. Address for giving notices: Phone: (typed or printed) 4.. _ ( 1, I�' (1( y (individual's signature) Texas 18504381858 1321 Glenoak Drive Corpus Christi, Texas 78418 (361) 937-9300 Email: dalexander@safenetservices.com (Attach evidence of authority to sign if the authorized individual is not the Bidder, but an individual signing on behalf of another individual Bidder, or if the authorized individual is a representative of a corporation, partnership, or joint venture.) END OF SECTION ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package Attachment 3 Page 7 of 7 Bid Form 00 30 00 - 7 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) -Project No.: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE REV 01-23-2015 00 30 01 OIC FORM EXHIBIT A 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBIT A Project Name: HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE Project Number: E12118 Owner: City of Corpus Christi Bidder: SafeNet Services, LLC OAR: Jerry Shoemaker, P.E. Designer: CLKARCHITECTS & ASSOCIATES, INC. Basis of Bid Item DESCRIPTION Base Bid Part A • HEB/AI Kruse BASE 810 (per SECTION 0129 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT) HEB • Demolition of existing stadium court and seating areas. • Addition of post tensioned concrete caps over existing courts 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 17 and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications. • Addition of three new courts 20, 21 and 22 on suspended structural slab and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications including all electrical and lighting. • Demolition of existing backboard area. • Addition of padding to light poles @ courts 9, 10 and 12. • Addition of chain fink cut corners at indicated on site drawings and details. • Modifications to chain link fencing at entrance to HEB facility. Fencing includes replacement of low fencing with high fencing at court no 1. Bid Form Exhibit A HEB Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) - Project Number: E12118 - RE -BID Package ADDENDUM 1 ATTACHMENT 4 Page 1 of 4 aa -0s Tarn a SU Pa Bid HE AD 00 3001BID FORM EXHIBIT A Item DESCRIPTION Addition of two (2) 36' tennis courts on suspended concrete slab include all surfacing, lighting, netting, &L fencing as noted on plans and as specified. Courts 9 & 10, remove four existing interior light poles. • Addition of chain link fencing for access control to facility. • Include all chain link fencing related work. Replace four existing corner light poles with new light poles & lights to illuminate courts 9, 10 &11. ALKRUSE • Three courts (5, 6 and 7) to receive new asphalt overlay. / �J'� �)/!� $ ( ii 7 • Seven courts (1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 9, and 10) to be resurfaced. • Windscreens to be replaced at all courts. • Court 10 Backboard relocated to court 9. $ � _ 1 / 1 tir 7t.5 e - • Addition of padding to light poles at courts 1, 4 and 7. • Include all chain link fencing related work. SUBTOTAL PART A S/, r Part Al - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1 - HEB TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 0123 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) Alt. 1 Addition of two (2) 36' tennis courts on suspended concrete slab include all surfacing, lighting, netting, &L fencing as noted on plans and as specified. Courts 9 & 10, remove four existing interior light poles. $ 17 ^J L i/) Part A2 - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 6 - HER TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) Courts 9 & 10, remove four existing interior light poles. Alt. 6 Replace four existing corner light poles with new light poles & lights to illuminate courts 9, 10 &11. / �J'� �)/!� $ ( ii 7 TOTAL PART A $ � _ 1 / 1 tir 7t.5 e - Bid Form Exhibit A HEB Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) - Project Number: E12118 • RE -BID Package ADDENDUM 1 ATTACHMENT 4 Page 2of4 08.08.7014 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBIT A Item DESCRIPTION Part B • HEBIAI Kruse BASE BID (per SECTION 012901 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT) HEB • Demolition of viewing platform and Canopy between Courts 5-8 & 9-12 which includes demolition of seating areas, stairs, upper columns supporting roof canopy and the roof canopy to the top of the structural steel columns (existing lower columns to remain). • Replacing existing viewing platform with new accessible viewing platform Inclusive of installation of a new LULA lift. • Various site concrete paving/sidewalk upgrades. • Converting old locker room building to new pro shop and all related work as shown on plans. • Architectural, MEP and Structural repairs to existing Lounge Building. AL KRUSE • Accessible upgrades to existing sidewalks. • New accessible ramp at main entrance. • Renovation to existing Pro Shop providing accessible restrooms and new finishes including paint, new flooring, and new exterior doors. SUBTOTAL PART D - BASE BID Part 01 - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 2 - AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 0123 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) Alt. 2 Mill top 2" of existing asphalt parking lot, repair pot holes & overlay 2" of new asphalt paving include all stripping and ADA signage and wheel stops. $ ,7) C� v - o„ Bid Form Exhibit A HEB Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) - Project Number: 012118 - RE -BID Package ADDENDUM 1 ATTACHMENT4 3 of 00 3001 BID FORM EXHIBIT A Item DESCRIPTION Alt.4 Part 02 -ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 3 - HEB TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) Alt. 3 Complete Drip Irrigation System as shown on irrigation- plans and specifications. $ ) 2 C c e r jc TOTAL PART 8 > Part 83 - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO..4 • HEB TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 012310 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) Alt.4 Flatwork, electrical rough -in and structural piers for future shade structure. $ ) 2 C c e r jc Part 84 - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 5 • HEB TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION of 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) Alt. 5include Pre -fabricated maintenance storage unit "20ft x 30ft Morgan Building or equal" and adjacent flatwork, electrical to storage building and windstorm anchoring. --,11,5-27) $ ` TOTAL PART 8 $ 1 : :1.14. 1 ! `- Bidder agrees to reach Substantial Completion in 180 days Bidder agrees to reach Final Completion in 180 days Bid Form Exhibit A II ER M Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) - Project Number: E12118 - RE -BID Package ADDENDUM 1 ATTACHMENT 4 Page 4 of 4 n6 02.]074 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBIT A LUMP SUM 00 30 01 DID FORM EXHIBIT A Project Name: HEB & Al. KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) - RE -BID Package Project Number: E12118 Owner: City of Corpus Christi Bidder: •{r N + ` )t- \1(iie 3 L (, (', OAR: Jerry Shoemaker, P.E. Designer: CLK ARCI II TECTS & ASSOCIATES, INC. Basis of Bid Item DESCRIPTION LUMP SUM BID Base Bid BASE BID (per SECTION 01 2901 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT) Base Bid A. HEB Tennis Center: Demolition of existing stadium court and seating areas. Demolition of viewing platform to the top of the structural steel columns (existing columns to remain). Addition of post tensioned concrete caps over existing courts and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications. Addition of three new courts on suspended structural slab and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications. Replacing existing viewing platform with new accessible viewing platform inclusive of accessible platform lift. Converting old locker room building to new pro shop. Architectural, MEP & Structural repairs to existing Lounge Building. Various site concrete paving upgrades. GC is responsible to review plans and specifications for full scope of work at this site. B. Al Kruse Tennis Center: Accessible upgrades to existing sidewalks. New accessible ramp at main entrance. Three courts to receive new asphalt overlay. Seven courts to be resurfaced. Renovation to existing Pro Shop providing accessibility and new finishes. GC is responsible to review plans and specifications for full scope of work at this site. 5 C' % �, ) C ) ' SUBTOTAL BASE BID / !J $ ;�, f `I b C I1 Bid Form Exhibit HEB Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) - Project Number: E12118 - RE -BID Package ADDENDUM 1 ATTACHMENTS Page 1 of 3 04 03.2014 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBIT A LUMP SUM Item DESCRIPTION A Addition of two (2) 36' tennis courts on suspended concrete slab include all surfacing, lighting, netting, &,�,, fencing as noted on plans and as specified. LUMP SUM BID Part A -ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1 - HEB TENNIS CENTER (pe. SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) A Addition of two (2) 36' tennis courts on suspended concrete slab include all surfacing, lighting, netting, &,�,, fencing as noted on plans and as specified. Pre -fabricated maintenance storage unit "20ft x 30ft Morgan Building or equal" and adjacent flatwork, include electrical to storage building and windstormr anchoring. $ 1 •C. r �: C ` SUBTOTAL PART A- ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1 $ SUBTOTAL PART E - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 5 $ Part B -ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 2 - AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) C Mill top 2" of existing asphalt parking lot, repair pot Pre -fabricated maintenance storage unit "20ft x 30ft Morgan Building or equal" and adjacent flatwork, include electrical to storage building and windstormr anchoring. if $ 1•icf f `•( - B holes & overlay 2" of new asphalt paving include all f 5 JG SUBTOTAL PART E - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 5 $ $ 1•�� � h (/ SUBTOTAL PART D - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 4 stripping and ADA signage and wheel stops. $ $ q $ 51 416 C /� - SUBTOTAL PART 8 - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 2 $ Part C -ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 3 - HEB TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) C Complete Drip Irrigation System as shown on irrigation plans and specifications. Pre -fabricated maintenance storage unit "20ft x 30ft Morgan Building or equal" and adjacent flatwork, include electrical to storage building and windstormr anchoring. if $ 1•icf f `•( - SUBTOTAL PART C • ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 3 future shade structure. f 5 JG SUBTOTAL PART E - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 5 $ Part D -ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 4 - HEB TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 0123 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) Flatwork, electrical rough -in and structural piers for,� Pre -fabricated maintenance storage unit "20ft x 30ft Morgan Building or equal" and adjacent flatwork, include electrical to storage building and windstormr anchoring. - !C D future shade structure. f 5 JG SUBTOTAL PART E - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 5 $ 1•�� � h (/ SUBTOTAL PART D - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 4 $ $ Part E -ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 5 - HEB TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) Pre -fabricated maintenance storage unit "20ft x 30ft Morgan Building or equal" and adjacent flatwork, include electrical to storage building and windstormr anchoring. 51 f 5 JG SUBTOTAL PART E - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 5 $ Bid Form Exhibit A HEB Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) - Project Number: E12118 - RE -BID Package ADDENDUM 1 ATTACHMENT 509-052014 Page 2 of 3 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBIT A LUMP SUM Item DESCRIPTION TOTAL - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1- (PART A) $ HZ./- 2 3 LUMP SUM BID Part F -ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 6 - HEB TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 01 _3 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) TOTAL - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 3 - (PART C) $ £t ; 7q F Courts 9 & 10, remove four existing interior light poles. Replace four existing corner light poles with new light poles & lights to illuminate courts 9, 10 &11. TOTAL - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 5 - (PART E) S . A; S- ' i - TOTAL - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 6 - (PART r) $ ! -1',i , Cris � $ (1. ,ti SUBTOTAL PART F - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 6 $ BID SUMMARY TOTAL PROJECT BASE 81D $ /') 1 9t- L/; 142t, TOTAL - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1- (PART A) $ HZ./- 2 3 TOTAL - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 2 - (PART B) $ 1 y y'r =:-'-r TOTAL - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 3 - (PART C) $ £t ; 7q TOTAL -ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.4 - (PART D) $ . 2. 9.!FCT"= TOTAL - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 5 - (PART E) S . A; S- ' i - TOTAL - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 6 - (PART r) $ ! -1',i , Cris � Contract Times Bidder agrees to reach Substantial Completion in 180 days Bidder agrees to reach Final Completion in 180 days Bid Form Exhibit A HEB Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) - Project Number: E12118 - RE -BID Package ADDENDUM 1 ATTACHMENTS Page 3 of 3 ueoewra 00 30 02 COMPLIANCE TO STATE LAW ON NONRESIDENT BIDDERS Chapter 2252 of the Texas Government Code applies to the award of government contract to nonresident bidders. This law provides that: "a government entity may not award a governmental contract to a nonresident bidder unless the nonresident underbids the lower bid submitted by a responsible resident bidder by an amount that is not less than the amount by which a resident bidder would be required to underbid the nonresident bidder to obtain a comparable contract in the state in which the nonresident's principal place of business is located." "Nonresident bidder" refers to a person who is not a resident of Texas. "Resident bidder" refers to a person whose principal place of business is in this state, including a contractor whose ultimate parent company or majority owner has its principal place of business in this state. Check the statement that is correct for Bidder. ❑ Bidder qualifies as a nonresident bidder whose principal place of business or residency is in the State of E Bidder (includes parent company or majority owner) qualifies as a resident bidder whose principal place of business is in the State of Texas. The Owner will use the information provided in the State of Texas Comptroller's annual publication of other states' laws on contracts to evaluate the Bicls of nonresident Bidders. Bidder: Company Name: By: Name: Title: SafeNet Services, LLC (typed o printed) (signature -- attach evidence of authority to sign) David Alexander (typed or printed) Owner Business address: 1321 Glenoak Drive Phone: Corpus Christi, Texas 78418 (361) 937-9300 Email: dalexander©safenetservices.com END OF SECTION Compliance to State Law on Nonresident Bidders HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) - Project. Number: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE 003002-1 11-25-2013 00 30 04 CONFLICT OF INTEREST QUESTIONNAIRE CONFLICT OF INTEREST QUESTIONNAIRE FORM CIQ For vendor or other person doing business with local governmental entity This questionnaire reflects changes made to the law by H.B. 1491, 80th Leg., Regular Session. This questionnaire is being filed in accordance with Chapter 176, Local Government Code by a person who has a business relationship as defined by Section 176.001(1-a) with a local governmental entity and the person meets requirements under Section 176.006(a). By law this questionnaire must be filed with the records administrator of the local governmental entity not later than the 7th business day after the date the person becomes aware of facts that require the statement to be filed. See Section 176.006, Local Government Code. A person commits an offense if the person knowingly violates Section 176.006, Local Government Code. An offense under this section is a Class C misdemeanor. OFFICE USE ONLY Date Received 11 Name of person who has a business relationship with local govemmental entity. None J filing authority not incomplete or inaccurate.) x Check this box if you are filing an update to a previously filed questionnaire. (The law requires that you file an updated completed questionnaire with the appropriate later than the 7th business day after the date the originally filed questionnaire becomes 3 Name of local govemment officer with whom filer has employment or business relationship. None with whom the filer has an Code. Attach additional other than investment income, from or at the not received from the local respect to which the local in this section. Name of Officer This section (item 3 including subparts A, B, C & D) must be completed for each officer employment or other business relationship as defined by Section 176.001(1-a), Local Govemment pages to this Form CIQ as necessary. A. Is the local govemment officer named in this section receiving or likely to receive taxable income, income, from the filer of the questionnaire? Yes No N/A B. Is the filer of the questionnaire receiving or likely to receive taxable income, other than investment direction of the local government officer named in this section AND the taxable income is governmental entity? N/A Yes No C. Is the filer of this questionnaire employed by a corporation or other business entity with government officer serves as an officer or director, or holds an ownership of 10 percent or more? Yes No N/A D. Describe each employment or business relationship with the local govemment officer named J None Signature of person doing business with the governmental entity Date Adopted 06/29/2007 00 30 05 City of Corpus Christi Disclosure of Interest SUPPLIER NUMBER TO BE ASSIGNED BY CITY PURCHASING DIVISION CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI CCiorrpus DISCLOSURE OF INTEREST Chnsti City of Corpus Christi Ordinance 17112, as amended, requires all persons or firms seeking to do business with the City to provide the following information. Every question must be answered. If the question is not applicable, answer with "NA". See reverse side for Filing Requirements, Certifications and definitions. COMPANYNAME: SafeNet Services, LLC P. O. BOX: N/A STREET ADDRESS: 1321 Glenoak Drive FIRM IS: 1. Corporation 8 4. Association CITY: Corpus Christi ZIP:78418 - 2. Partnership 0 3. Sole Owner 0 5. Other LLC DISCLOSURE QUESTIONS If additional space is necessary, please use the reverse side of thisage or attach separate sheet. 1. State the names of each `employee" of the City of Corpus Christi having an "ownership interest" constituting 3% or more of the ownership in the above named "firm." Name Job Title and City Department (if known) None 2. State the names of each "official" of the City of Corpus Christi having an "ownership interest" constituting 3% or more of the ownership in the above named "firm." Name None Title 3. State the names of each "board member" of the City of Corpus Christi having an "ownership interest" constituting 3% or more of the ownership in the above named "firm." Name None Board, Commission or Committee 4. State the names of each employee or officer of a "consultant" for the City of Corpus Christi who worked on any matter related to the subject of this contract and has an "ownership interest" constituting 3% or more of the ownership in the above named "firm." Name None Consultant FILING REQUIREMENTS If a person who requests official action on a matter knows that the requested action will confer an economic benefit on any City official or employee that is distinguishable from the effect that the action will have on members of the public in general or a substantial segment thereof, you shall disclose that fact in a signed writing to the City official, employee or body that has been requested to act in the matter, unless the interest of the City official or employee in the matter is apparent. The disclosure shall also be made in a signed writing filed with the City Secretary. [Ethics Ordinance Section 2-349 (d)] CERTIFICATION I certify that all information provided is true and correct as of the date of this statement, that I have not knowingly withheld disclosure of any information requested; and that supplemental statements will be promptly submitted to the City of Corpus Christi, Texas as changes occur. Certifying Person: David Alexander Title: Owner (Type or Pring U__ Signature of Certifying-1------_____b_____,, lt(\ , Person: , t ----t-L: DEFINITIONS Date: 4/8/15 a. "Board member." A member of any board, commission, or committee appointed by the City Council of the City of Corpus Christi, Texas. b. "Economic benefit". An action that is likely to affect an economic interest if it is likely to have an effect on that interest that is distinguishable from its effect on members of the public in general or a substantial segment thereof. c. "Employee." Any person employed by the City of Corpus Christi, Texas either on a full or part- time basis, but not as an independent contractor. d. "Firm." Any entity operated for economic gain, whether professional, industrial or commercial, and whether established to produce or deal with a product or service, including but not limited to, entities operated in the form of sole proprietorship, as self-employed person, partnership, corporation, joint stock company, joint venture, receivership or trust, and entities which for purposes of taxation are treated as non-profit organizations. e. "Official." The Mayor, members of the City Council, City Manager, Deputy City Manager, Assistant City Managers, Department and Division Heads, and Municipal Court Judges of the City of Corpus Christi, Texas. f. "Ownership Interest." Legal or equitable interest, whether actually or constructively held, in a firm, including when such interest is held through an agent, trust, estate, or holding entity. "Constructively held" refers to holdings or control established through voting trusts, proxies, or special terms of venture or partnership agreements." g. "Consultant." Any person or firn, such as engineers and architects, hired by the City of Corpus Christi for the purpose of professional consultation and recommendation. 00 30 06 NON -COLLUSION CERTIFICATION STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF NUECES OWNER: City of Corpus Christi, Texas 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 CONTRACT: HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) E12118 Bidder certifies that the it has not been a party to any collusion among Bidders in the restraint of freedom of competition by agreement to submit a Bid at a fixed price or to refrain from bidding; or with any official or employee of the Owner as to quantity, quality, or price in the prospective contract, or any other terms of said prospective contract; or in any discussion between Bidders and any official of the Owner concerning exchange of money or other thing of value for special consideration in the letting of a contract. Company Name: By: Name: Title: Business address: Phone: SafeNet Services, LLC ((ryped or printed) (signature -- attach evidence of authority to sign) David Alexander (typed or printed) Owner 1321 Glenoak Drive Corpus Christi, Texas 78418 (361) 937-9300 Email: dalexander@safenetservices.com END OF SECTION Non -Collusion Certification HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) - Project Number: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE 003006-1 11-25-2013 Y, 00 6116 PAYMENT BOND BOND NO. CBB44593 Cont . Contractor as Principal Name: SafeNet Services, LLC Mailing address (principal place of business): 1321 Glenoak Drive Corpus Christi, TX 78418 Owner Name: City of Corpus Christi, Texas Mailing address (principal place of business): Capital Programs 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78469 Contract Project name and number: #E12118 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) ReBid Award Date of the Contract: November 10, 2015 Contract Price: 51,809,131.00 Bond Date of Bond: November 16 , 2 015 (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date of Contract) Surety Name: National American Insurance Company Mailing address (principal place of business): P.O. Box 9 Chandler, OK 74834 Physical address (principal place of business): 1300 S. Meridian, Ste. 250 Oklahoma City, OK 73108 Surety is a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the state of: Oklahoma By submitting this Bond, Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Telephone (main number): 1-800-953-6699 Telephone (for notice of claim): 1-800-822-7802 Local Agent for Surety Name: Not Needed Retaliatory Address: Telephone: Email Address: The address of the surety company to which any notice of claim should be sent may be obtained from the Texas Dept. of Insurance by calling the following toll-free number: 1-800-252-3439 Payment Bond Form #E12118 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) ReBid 006116-1 7-8-2014 Bond No. CBB44593 -Cont. Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal pays al! claimants providing labor or materials to him or to a Subcontractor in the prosecution of the Work required by the Contract then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas for any legal action. Contractor as Principal Signature: Name: Title: Email Address: ee Services, LLC d ale.U.andfx @ oa ne,4-96-v c ce9 . e.ow Surety National American Insurance Company. Signature: • /V . r r ----- Name: A.M. DiGeronimo Title: Ai- rorney-Tn-Farr Email Address: rony@nari mai a, L\ rom (Attach Power of Attorney and place surety seal below) END OF SECTION Payment Bond Form #E12118 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) ReBid 006116-2 7-8-2014 00 6113 PERFORMANCE BOND BOND NO. CBB4 4 5 9 3 Contractor as Principal Name: SafeNet Services, LLC Mailing address (principal place of business): 1321 Glenoak Drive Corpus Christi, TX 78418 Owner Name: City of Corpus Christi, Texas Mailing address (principal place of business): Capital Programs 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78469 Contract Project name and number: #E12118 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012 ReBid Award Date of the Contract: November 10, 2015 Contract Price: $1,809,131.00 Bond Date of Bond: November 16 , 2 015 (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date of the Contract) Surety Name: National American Insurance Company Mailing address (principal place of business): P.O. Box 9 Chandler, OK 74834 Physical address (principal place of business): 1300 S. Meridian, Ste. 250 Oklahoma City, OK 73108 Surety is a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the state of: Oklahoma By submitting this Bond, Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Telephone (main number): 1-800-953-6699 Telephone (for notice of claim): 1-800-822-7802 Local Agent for Surety Name: Not Needed Retaliatory Address: Telephone: Email Address: The address of the surety company to which any notice of claim should be sent may be obtained from the Texas Dept. of Insurance by calling the following toll-free number: 1-800-252-3439 Performance Bond #E12118 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) ReBid 006113-1 7-8-2014 Bond No. CBB44593 -Cont. Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal faithfully performs the Work required by the Contract then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas for any legal action. Contractor as Principal Signature: --- Name: Title: afe t Servi.es, LLC Dm i d Rkder 0\aa Email Address: V. Surety National American Insurance.Cornpany Signature: Name: Title: A.M. DiGeronimo Attorney -In -Fact Email Address: tony@nationalsuret"•r. corn (Attach Power of Attorney and place surety seal below) END OF SECTION Performance Bond #1E12118 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) ReBid 006113-2 7-8-2014 NATIONAL AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY CHANDLER, OKLAHOMA POWER OF ATTORNEY Number: CBB44593 DUPLICATES SHALL HAVE THE SAME FORCE AND EFFECT AS AN ORIGINAL ONLY WHEN ISSUED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE ORIGINAL. KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the National American Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Oklahoma, having its principal office in the city of Chandler, Oklahoma, pursuant to the following resolution, adopted by the Board of Directors of the said Company on the 8th day of July, 1987, to wit: 'Resolved, that any officer of the Company shall have authority to make, execute and deliver a Power of Attorney constituting as Attorney-in-fact, such persons, firms, or corporations as may be selected from time to time. Resolved that nothing in this Power of Attomey shall be construed as a grant of authority to the attomey(s)-in fact to sign, execute, acknowledge, deliver or otherwise issue a policy or policies of insurance on behalf of National American Insurance Company. Be It Further Resolved, that the signature of any officer and the Seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such powers so executed and certified by facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company in the future with respect to any bond and documents relating to such bonds to which it is attached.' National American Insurance Company does hereby make, constitute and appoint A.M. DiGeronimo its true and lawful attomey(s)-in-fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, places and stead, to sign, execute, acknowledge and deliver in its behalf, and its act and deed, as follows: The authority of said Attomey-in-fact to bind the company shall not exceed $3,000,000 for any single bond. And to bind National American Insurance Company thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bonds and documents relating to such bonds were, signed by the duly authorized officer of the National American Insurance Company, and all the acts of said Attomey(s) pursuant to the authority herein given, are hereby ratified and confirmed. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the National American Insurance Company has caused these presents to be signed by any officer of the Company and its Corporate Seal to be hereto affixed. STATE OF OKLAHOMA ) COUNTY OF LINCOLN ) SS: NATIONAL AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY )/K W. Brent LaGere, Chairman & Chief Executive Officer On this 2nd day of January, A.D. 2014, before me personally came W. Brent LaGere, to me known, who being by me duly swom, did depose and say; that he resides in the County of Lincoln, State of Oklahoma; that he is the Chairman and Chief Executive Officer of the National American Insurance Company, the corporation described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation and that he signed his name, thereto by like order. OFFICIAL SEAL JANET TAYLOR NOTARY PUBLIC OKLAHOMA OKLAHOMA COUNTY MY COMM. NO. 02006203 MY COMM. EXP. STATE OF OKLAHOMA COUNTY OF LINCOLN ) SS: quef-dalakt Notary Public My Commission Expires April 8, 2018 Commission #02006203 I, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of the National American Insurance Company, an Oklahoma Corporation, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing and attached POWER OF ATTORNEY remains in full force. Signed and Sealed at the City of Chandler. Dated the 16th day of November , 2015 c -51-r 4it Joyce M. Seitz, Assista)tf;Set;reiary r• $. 1 SAFEN-1 OP ID: MB ACORL7' �� CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MMIDDIYYW) 1111712015 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder Is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(les) must be endorsed. if SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER Phone: 361-664-5421 Keetch & Associates InsurancePHONE P. O. Box 1910 Fax: 361-6645425 Alice, TX 78333 Donna Kauf CONTACT NAME: FAX lC No, Ext: (ANC, No): ADDRESS: INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # Colony Insurance Company UABIUTY COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURED SafeNet Services LLC 7INSURERA: 1321 Glenoak Dr. Corpus Christi, TX 78418 INSURER B : Union Insurance Company 103GL000384801 / INSURER C : Travelers Lloyds Insurance 04/30/2016 / INSURERD : Evanston Insurance Company $ 1,000,000 INSURER E : $ 100,000 INSURER F : COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO,CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW. HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR R TYPE OF INSURANCE ADOL P—%VD SUM' POUCYNUMBER POLICY EFF (MMIDDIYYYYI POLICY EXP (MMIDDIYYYY} LIMITS A GENERAL X UABIUTY COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY 103GL000384801 / 04/30/2015 04/30/2016 / EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 PREMISES (Ea occurrence) $ 100,000 CLAIMS -MADE X OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5,000 PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ / 2,000,000 $ 2,000,000 GENL AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: 7 POLICY DCIJECT n LOC PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ B AUTOMOBILE X — — MERLIN AMY AUTO ALL OWNED— AUTOS HIRED AUTOS _ SCHEDULED ALTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS CAA4691462 / 04/30/2015 04/30/2016 / COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ 1,000,000 BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ $ D X UMBRELLA LIAB EXCESS LIAB X OCCUR CLAIMS -MADE CUBW6020115 V 07/06/2015 04/30/2016 / EACH OCCURRENCE 1,000,000 AGGREGATE _�. $ 1,000,000 DED X RETENTION $ 10,000 $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' UABILJTY ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE Y 1 N OFFICERIMEMBER EXCLUDED? LI (Mandatory In NH) If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below N / A WC STATU- TORY LIMITS OTH- ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ C Builders Risk QT6604243L362 06/01/2015 06/01/2016 See Below DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS !LOCATIONS I VEHICLES (Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, If more space Is required) Deductible $2500 in tier 1 locations. Wind/Hail excluded in tier 1 counties as described in the policy. BR Limits: FR/NC/SFR-$5,000,000 & Frame/BV/JM $1,000,000. Policies include an endorsement providing that 30 Days' Notice of Cancellation will be furnished to the certificate holder. Project - #E12118 HIB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) / CERTIFICATE HOLDER CITYCC2 Cityof Corpus Christi p Engineering Services P.O. Box 9277 Corpus Christi, TX 78469-9277 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHO4RIZED REPRESENTATIVE iiti_ ACORD 25 (2010/05) O 1988-2010 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD NOTEPAD INSURED'S NAME SafeNet Services LLC SAFEN-1 PAGE 2 OP ID: MB DATE 11/17/15 ..General Liability & Business Automobile policies include blanket automatic additional insured provision and blanket automatic waiver of subrogation endorsement but only as respect to the provisions in the endorsements attached to the policies. A� O® CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MMIDD/YYYY) 11/30/2015 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER David Carothers c/o Praxiom Risk Management, LLC 123 West Bloomingdale Avenue #300 Brandon, FL 33511 CONTACT NAME: PHONE 1 FAX (AJCEt):8) (8 350-7729 INC, No): E-MAILo ADDRESS: INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURER A : Zurich -American Insurance Company 16535 INSURED eEmployers Solutions, Inc. 12211 Huebner Road Suite 203 San Antonio, TX 78230 INSURER 8 : INSURER C PREM SESDAMAGEO(Ea occurRENTErence) INSURER D : INSURER E : INSURER F : COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: 15TX024839940 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR ADDL SUBR. POLICY EFF POLICY EXP 1 TYPE OF INSURANCE INSD WVD POLICY NUMBER LIMITS (MM/DD/YYYY) (MMIDDIYYYY)� COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE 5 CLAIMS -MADE I OCCUR PREM SESDAMAGEO(Ea occurRENTErence) 5 MED EXP (Any one person) S PERSONAL & ADV INJURY 5 GE 'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE S POLICY PRO- JECT LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OPAGG S OTHER. 5 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY _ COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) 5 ANY AUTO — BODILY INJURY (Per person) 5 ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per accident) 5 HIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) 5 5 UMBRELLA LIAB OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE S EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS -MADE AGGREGATE S DED I RETENT ONS S WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY PER OTH- X STATUTE ER A ECUTIVE Y / N N / A X WC 48-41-756-03 09/01/2015 ()9/01/2()16 E.L. EACH ACCIDENT S 1,000,000 OFFICER MEMBOER/EXCLUDED? (Mandatory in NH) E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYE S 1,000,000 If yes. descnbe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT S 1,000,000 Location Coverage Period: 09/01/2015 09/01/2016 Client# 272 -TX DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS 1 VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may bo attached If more space is requl ed) Alt. Emp: Safenet Services, LLC Job: #E12118 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) Coverage is provided for 1321 Glenoak Drive only those co -employees ! Waiver of Subrogation in favor of City of Corpus Christi of, but not subcontractors Corpus Christi, TX 78418 V to: Est. Start Date: 12/01/15 Completion Date: 05/29/16 Endorsements: Waiver of Subrogation, 30 days written cancel notice (10 days for non payment of premium) CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION City of Corpus Christi 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, TX 78401 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE / ACORD 25 (2014/01) O 1988-2014 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD V 103 GL 0003848-00 ENDT. #001 EFF: 04/30/2014 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. v ADDITIONAL INSURED - OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS - SCHEDULED PERSON OR ORGANIZATION INCLUDING NOTICE OF CANCELLATION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Name of Additional Insured Person(s) or Organization(s) (Additional Insured): Location(s) of Covered Operations: City of Corpus Christi Dept of Engineering Services R O. Box 9277 Corpus Christi, TX 78469 As designated in written contract with named insured A. SECTION II — WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include as an additional insured the person(s) or organization(s) shown in the Schedule, but only with respect to liability for "bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" caused, in whole or in part, by: 1. Your acts or omissions; or 2. The acts or omissions of those acting on your behalf; in the performance of your ongoing operations for the additional insured(s) at the location(s) designated above. B. With respect to the insurance afforded to these additional insureds, the following additional exclusions apply: This insurance does not apply to "bodily injury" or "property damage" occurring after: 1. All work, including materials, parts and equipment furnished in connection with such work, on the project (other than service, maintenance or repairs) to be performed by or on behalf of the additional insured(s) at the location of the covered operations has been completed; or 2. That portion of "your work" out of which the injury or damage arises has been put to its intended use by any person or organization other than another contractor or subcontractor engaged in performing operations for a principal as part of the same project. C. Cancellation - if we cancel this policy before the expiration date thereof, we will endeavor to mail 30 days written notice (10 days for non-payment of premium) to the additional insured, but failure to mail such notice shall impose no obligation or liability of any kind upon the Company, its agent or representatives. ALL OTHER TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE POLICY REMAIN UNCHANGED. U20100-0309 Includes copyrighted material of ISO Properties, Inc., Page 1 of 1 with its permission. Y 103 GL 0003848-00 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. CONTRACTORS PAC This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART A. SECTION II — WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include as an additional insured all persons or organizations as required by written contract with the named insured, but only with respect to: 1. Liability for "bodily injury" or "property damage" caused, in whole or in part, by "your work" performed for that additional insured at the location(s) as designated in a written contract and included in the "products -completed operations hazard". 2. Liability for "bodily injury". "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" caused, in whole or in part, by: a. Your acts or omissions; or b. The acts or omissions of those acting on your behalf; in the performance of your ongoing operations for the additional insured(s) at the location(s) as designated in a written contract. B. SECTION IV — COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS, Paragraph 4. Other Insurance is amended and the following added: If you are required by written contract to provide primary insurance, the insurance afforded by this Coverage Part for all persons or organizations included as additional insureds as required by written contract is primary insurance, and we will not seek contribution from any other insurance available to that additional insured. C. SECTION IV — COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS, Paragraph 8. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us is amended and the following added: We waive any rights of recovery we may have against any person or organization because of payments we make for injury or damage resulting from your ongoing operations or "your work" done under a contract with that person or organization and included in the "products -completed operations hazard" if: 1. You agreed to such waiver; 2. The waiver is included as part of a written contract or lease; and 3. Such written contract or lease was executed prior to any loss to which this insurance applies. D. For all sums which the insured becomes legally obligated to pay as damages caused by "occurrences" under SECTION 1 — COVERAGES, COVERAGE A BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY, and for all medical expenses caused by accidents under SECTION I — COVERAGES, COVERAGE C MEDICAL PAYMENTS, which can be attributed only to ongoing operations at any construction project involving the named insured during this policy period: 1. A separate Construction Project General Aggregate Limit applies to each construction project, and that limit is equal to the amount of the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations. 2. The Construction Project General Aggregate Limit is the most we will pay for the sum of all damages under SECTION I — COVERAGES, COVERAGE A BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY, except damages because of "bodily injury" or "property damage" included in the "products -completed operations hazard", and for medical expenses under SECTION I — COVERAGES, COVERAGE C MEDICAL PAYMENTS regardless of the number of: U649C-0111 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc. Page 1 of 2 with its permission. 103 GL 0003848.00 a. Insureds; b. Claims made or "suits° brought; or c. Persons or organizations making claims or bringing "suits". 3. Any payments made under SECTION I — COVERAGES, COVERAGE A BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY for damages or under SECTION 1 — COVERAGES, COVERAGE C MEDICAL PAYMENTS for medical expenses shall reduce the Construction Project General Aggregate Limit for that construction project. Such payments shall not reduce the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations nor shall they reduce any other Construction Project General Aggregate Limit for any other construction project involving the named insured during this policy period. 4. The limits shown in the Declarations for Each Occurrence, Damage to Premises Rented to You and Medical Expense continue to apply. However, instead of being subject to the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations, such limits will be subject to the applicable Construction Project General Aggregate Limit. 5. The most we will pay for the sum of all Construction Project General Aggregate Limits combined and to which this insurance applies is $5,000,000. E. For all sums which the insured becomes legally obligated to pay as damages caused by "occurrences" under SECTION 1 — COVERAGES, COVERAGE A BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY, and for all medical expenses caused by accidents under SECTION 1— COVERAGES, COVERAGE C MEDICAL PAYMENTS, which cannot be attributed only to ongoing operations at any construction project involving the named insured during this policy period: 1. Any payments made under SECTION I — COVERAGES, COVERAGE A BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY for damages or under SECTION 1 — COVERAGES, COVERAGE C MEDICAL PAYMENTS for medical expenses shall reduce the amount available under the General Aggregate Limit or the Products -Completed Operations Aggregate Limit, whichever is applicable; and 2. Such payments shall not reduce any Construction Project General Aggregate Limit. F. When coverage for liability resulting from the "products -completed operations hazard" is provided, any payments for damages because of "bodily injury° or "property damage° included In the "products - completed operations hazard" will reduce the Products -Completed Operations Aggregate Limit, and not reduce the General Aggregate Limit nor the Construction Project General Aggregate Limit. G. If the applicable construction project has been abandoned, delayed, or abandoned and then restarted, or if the authorized contracting parties deviate from plans, blueprints, designs, specifications or timetables, the project will still be deemed to be the same construction project. H. The provisions of SECTION III — LIMITS OF INSURANCE not otherwise modified by this endorsement shall continue to apply as stipulated. ALL OTHER TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE POLICY REMAIN UNCHANGED. U649C-0111 includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc. Page 2 of 2 with its permission. G'i9g0g70.z COMMERCIAL AUTO CLCA20140212 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. BUSINESS AUTO ULTRA PLUS ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM With respect to coverage provided by this endorseme:it, the provisions of the Coverage Form apply unless modified by the endorsement. SUMMARY OF COVERAGE EXTENSIONS Paragraph No Name Of Extension Limit or Included A. Additional "Insured" By Contract Or Agreement Included B. Airbags Coverage Extension Included C. Employees As Insureds Included D. Employee Hired Autos Included E. Hired Auto Physical Damage Coverage (Limited) $50,000 F. Knowledge Of Accident, Claim, Suit, Or Loss Included G. Limited Fellow Employee Coverage Included H. Limited Loan/Lease Gap Coverage $1,500 I. Limited Rental Reimbursement Coverage 45 Days Sublimits: 1. 550 Maximum Per Day - Private Passenger Auto 2. $75 Maximum Per Day - Other Than Private Passenger Auto 3. $2,250 Maximum Per Covered Loss J. Newly Formed Or Acquired Organizations Included K. Supplementary Payments - Increased Limits: 1. Bail Bonds $3,000 2. Loss Of Earnings (Per Day) $1,000 L. Towing And Labor Coverage Extension $75 M. Waiver Of Subrogation By Contract Or Agreement included The above is a summary only. Please consult the specific provisions that follow for complete information on the extensions provided. If there Is a conflict between this summary and the endorsement provisions that follow, the endorsement provisions shall prevail. CL CA 20 14 02 12 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Once, Inc., Page 1 of 7 with its permission. A. ADDITIONAL INSURED BY CONTRACT OR AGREEMENT 1. With respect to Section 0 - Liabtiity Coverage, Paragraph A.1. Who Is an Insured is changed to add as an additional insured any person or organization (other than the owner or anyone else from whom you hire of borrow a covered "auto") when you and such person or organization have agreed in writing in a contract or agreement that such person or organization be added as an additional insured on your policy. However, none of the following shall be an additional Insured under this endorsement a. Any `motor carrier for hire or his or her "employees"; or b. Any rail, water or air carrier or their "employees° for any covered "auto". 2. The Insurance afforded to such additional Insured(s) by this endorsement is subject to the following additional provisions: a. Such person or organization is an additional insured only with respect to their vicarious legal responsibility for "bodily injury" or "property damage" specifically caused, in whole or in part, by the operation or use of a covered "auto" by a person or organization for whom Liability Coverage is afforded under this policy or coverage part, and then only to the extent of that liability. b. Such person or organization is not an additional insured for any covered "auto" owned by, hired from, or borrowed from such person or organization. c. Such written contract or agreement must be executed prior to, and be in effect at theemtime of, the covered "bodily injury" or "property damage". e. Paragraph H. "Insured Contract" contained in Section V -Definitions is changed to add sub -paragraph d. to the end of that definition, as follows: An insured contract' does not indude that part of any contract or agreement: d. That pertains to the ownership, maintenance or use of an "auto" and which indemnifies a person or organization for other than the vicarious liability of such person or organization for "bodily injury" or "property damage" specifically caused. in whole or in part, by your operation or use of a covered "auto". Page 2of7 3. Paragraph A.1. Who Is An Insured contained in Section tI - t-Iabllity Insurance, is amended to delete sub-paragrabh c • B. AIRBAGS COVERAGE EXTENSION Exclusion B.3.a. contained in Section III - Physical Damage Coverage does not apply to the unintended discharge of an airbag. However, coverage is excess over any other collectible insurance or warranty spedfically designed to provide coverage. C. EMPLOYEES AS INSUREDS The following is added to the Section II - Liabllity Coverage, Paragraph A.1. Who Is An Insured Provision: Any "employee" of yours is an "insured" while using a covered "auto" you don't own, hire or borrow in your business or your personal affairs. However, the insurance provided by this provision, C. Employees As Insureds. does not apply if separate Employees As Insured coverage (or any similar or equivalent coverage) has been provided by a separate endorsement issued by us and made a part of this policy or coverage part. D. EMPLOYEE HIRED AUTOS 1. The following is added to Paragraph 5. Other Insurance of Paragraph B. General Conditions under Section IV - Business Auto Conditions Any covered "auto" hired or rented by your "employee" under a contract in that individual "employee's" name, with your permission, white performing duties related to the conduct of your business will be considered an "auto" you hire. However, with respect to this provision, none of the following are covered "autos": a. Any "auto" that is hired or rented with a driver; b. "Mobile equipment"; or c. Any other land vehicle that would qualify under the definition of "mobile equip- ment' under this policy or coverage part if it were not subject to a compulsory or financial responsibility law or other motor vehicle insurance law where it is licensed or principally garaged. 2. Any insurance afforded by this provision D. Employee Hired Autos does not apply if separate Employees Hired Autos coverage (or any similar or equivalent coverage) has been provided by a separate endorsement issued by us and made a part of this policy or coverage part includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc. CL CA 2014 0212 with its permission. E. HIRED AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE COV- ERAGE (LIMITED) hired "autos" are covered °autos" for Liability Coverage in this policy or coverage part, then such Physical Damage coverage that is provided in this policy or coverage part for your owned "autos" will be extended to certain "autos" you lease, hire, rent or borrow, subject to the following additional provisions: 1. This extension for Hired Auto Physical Damage Coverage (Limited) does not apply to: a. Any "auto" you Iease, hire, rent or borrow that is a land vehicle that would qualify under the definition of "mobile equipment" under this policy or coverage part if it were not subject to a compulsory or financial responsibility law or other motor vehicle insurance law where it is licensed or prindpally garaged; b. Any "auto" you tease, hire, rent or borrow from any of your "employees", partners (If you are a partnership), members (if you are a limited liability company) or members of their households; or c. Any other "auto" you lease, hire, rent, or borrow: (1) Fora period of more than 30 days; or (2) With a driver. 2. Coverage The Physical Damage coverage provided will be: (a) With respect to Other Than Collision coverage: (1) Comprehensive Coverage if any covered "auto" owned by you has this coverage under this policy or coverage part; or, (2) Specified Causes Of Loss Coverage if, under this coverage part or policy, any covered "auto" owned by you has this coverage and no other covered "auto* owned by you has Comprehensive Coverage; and (b) Collision Coverage if any covered "auto" owned by you has this coverage under this policy or coverage part 3. Limit Of insurance The most we will pay in any one loss" will be the lesser of: a. The actual cash value of the damaged or stolen "auto" as of the time of the "toss"; b. The cost to repair , or replace the damaged or stolen "auto" with other property of like kind and quality; or c. $50,000. except that such amount will be reduced by a deductible as determined by paragraph E.4. below. 4. Deductible Our obligation to pay for, repair, return or replace such damaged or stolen covered hired "auto" will be reduced by a deducible for each coverage afforded under E.2.(a) and E.2.(b) above equal to the amount of the largest deductible applicable for that coverage to any Covered "auto" owned by you. However, no deductible will apply to "toss" caused by fire or lightning. 5. Loss Of Use For any °auto° which is a covered "auto° under this extension E. Hired Auto Physical Damage Coverage (Limited), and subject to the coverages provided under paragraph E.2. Coverage above, we will also pay expenses for toss of use of such "auto", subject to the following additional provisions: a. Such "auto" is leased or rented under a written rental contract or agreement; b. Such loss of use is a direct consequence of a loss" covered under this extension E. Hired Auto Physical Damage Coverage (Limited): (1) For which an "insured" is legally responsible; and (2) As a result of which the leasing or rental entity sustains a monetary loss; c. The most we will pay for any expenses for loss of use is $300 per day, subject to a maximum of $2,100; and CL CA 2014 0212 Includes copyrighted material of insurance Services Office, Inc. Page 3 of 7 with its permission. d. Paragraph b. Loss Of Use Expenses of Paragraph 4. Coverage Extensions of Paragraph A. Coverage contained In Section Ill • Physical Damage • Coverage does not apply. 6. Other Insurance Coverage under this extension E. Hired Auto Physical Damage Coverage (Limited) will be excess over any other valid and collectible Insurance available to the "insured°, except that no coverage will be afforded if any physical damage coverage is provided for hired "autos" under item Four • Schedule Of Hired Or Borrowed Covered Auto Coverage And Premiums in the Business Auto Declarations In this policy or coverage part (or which would have been provided except for the application of an exclusion). F. KNOWLEDGE OF ACCIDENT, CLAIM, SUIT, OR LOSS Sub -paragraph a. contained in Paragraph A.2. Duties In The Event Of Accident, Claim, Suit or Loss, of Section IV - Business Auto Conditions is replaced by the following: a. In the event of "accident°, claim, 'suit" or loss", you must give us or our authorized representative prompt notice of the "accident° or "loss° only when the 'accident", claim, 'suit" or loss" is known to: 1. You, if you are an individual; 2. A partner, if you are a partnership:- 3. artnership;3. A manager, if you are a limited liability company; or 4. An "executive officer or the °employee" designated by you to give such notice, if you are an organization other than a partnership or a limited liability company. Include: (1) How, when and where the "accident or 'loss'occurred; (2) The Insureds" name and address; and (3) To the Went possible, the names and addresses of any injured persons and witnesses. G. LIMITED FELLOW EMPLOYEE COVERAGE Paragraph 5. Fellow Employee of Plaragraph B. Exclusions contained in Section Il - Liability Coverage is replaced by the following: 5. Fellow Employee "Bodily injury" to any fellow "employee of the Insured' arising out of and in the course of the fellow 'employee's" employment or while performing duties related to the conduct of your business. However, this exclusion does not apply to liability incurred by your "employees" that are "executive officers'. Such coverage is excess over any other collectible insurance. and Paragraph 5. Other Insurance of Paragraph B. General Conditions under Section IV • Business Auto Conditions is changed accordingly. Any insurance provided by this provision G. Limited Fellow Employee Coverage does not apply if separate Fellow Employee Coverage (or any similar or equivalent coverage) has been provided by a separate endorsement issued by us and made a part of this policy or coverage part. As used in this provision, °exeadive ofcee means a person holding any of the officer positions created by your charter, constitution, by-laws or any other similar governing document Page 4 of 7 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, inc. CL CA 2014 0212 with its permission. H. UMITED LOAN/LEASE GAP COVERAGE Raragraph 4. Coverage Extensions of Paragraph A. Coverage contained in Section 111 - Physical Damage Coverage is amended to add the following: In the event of a covered total "toss" to a covered "auto" which is either owned by you or is long- term leased by you fora period of 12 consecutive months or longer, we will pay any unpaid amount due on your loan or lease for such covered "auto", subject to the following additional provisions: 1. We WO only pay the lesser of: a. The sum of such unpaid amount, less (1) The amount paid under the Physical Damage Coverage Section of the policy or coverage part and (2) Any: (a) Overdue loan/lease payments at the time of the loss"; (b) Finandal penalties imposed under a tease for excessive use, abnormal wear and tear or high mileage; (c) Security deposits not returned by the Lesson (d) Costs for extended warranties, Credit Life Insurance, Health, Acddent or Disability Insurance purchased with the loan or tease; and (e) Canny -over balances from previous loans or leases; or b. $1.500. 2. This extension does not apply to any "auto" that is a land vehicle that would qualify under the definition of "mobile equipment' under this policy or coverage part if ft were not subject to a compulsory or financial responsibility law or other motor vehicle insurance law where it is licensed or principally garaged; 3. The insurance afforded for Limited Loan/Lease Gap Coverage in this exten- sion endorsement does not apply if separate Loan/Lease Gap Coverage is afforded for such covered "auto" in an endorsement issued by us and made a part of this policy or coverage part. CLCA20140212 1. UMITED RENTAL REIMBURSEMENT COV- ERAGE We will pay for rental reimbursement expenses incurred by you for the rental of an "auto" because of a covered physical damage loss" to a covered "auto" you own, subject to the following additional provisions: 1. As used in this Rental Reimbursement Coverage provision, "auto" means a land motor vehicle, trailer or semitrailer designed for travel on public roads. However, "auto" does not include: a. °Mobile equipment; or b. Any other land vehicle that would qualify under the definition of `mobile equip- ment' under this policy or coverage part If it were not subject to a compulsory or financial responsibility law or other motor vehicle insurance law where ft is licensed or principally garaged. 2. Payment applies in addition to the otherwise applicable amount of each coverage you have on the covered "auto". 3. No deductible applies to this coverage. 4. We will pay only for those expenses incurred during the policy period beginning 24 hours after the "loss" and ending, regardless of the expiration date of the policy, with the lesser of the following number of days: a. The number of days reasonably required to repair or replace the covered "auto"; or b. 45 days 5. Our payment is limited to the lesser of the following amounts: a. Necessary and actual expenses incurred. b. (1) $50 per day for a "private passenger auto" or a "light truck"; (II) $75 per day for other than a °private passenger auto" or a "light truth". subject to a maximum of $2,250. 6. This coverage does not apply while there are spare or reserve "autos* available to you for your operations. 7. Paragraph a. Transportation Expenses of Paragraph 4. Coverage Extension of Paragraph A. Coverage contained in Section W - Physical Damage Coverage, does not apply and is entirely deleted. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc. Page 5 of 7 with its permission. 8. The insurance afforded for Limited Rental Reimbursement Coverage in this extension endorsement does not apply If separate Rental Reimbursement Coverage is issued by us as an endorsement and made a part of this policy or coverage part. 9. As used in this coverage: a. "Private passenger auto" means a four- wheel auto of the private passenger or station wagon type; and b. "Light truck° means a pick-up or panel truck, sport utility vehicle or similar °auto", with a Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) of 11.000 pounds or less. Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the maximum loaded weight for which a single "auto" Is designed, as specified by the manufacturer. J. NEWLY FORMED OR ACQUIRED ORGANI- ZATIONS The Named Insured shown in the Business Auto Dedarations Is amended to include any organization you newly form or acquire. other than: (i) a partnership, joint venture. or limited liability company; or (II) an organization excluded either by the provisions of this Coverage Part, or by endorsement. and over which you maintain ownership or majority interest of more than 50%. subject to the following additional provisions: I. This insurance does not apply to any newly formed or acquired organization that is an 'insured" under any other automobile policy or would be an 'insured" under such policy but for its termination or the exhaustion of its Limit of Insurance. 2. Coverage under this provision does not apply to injury. damage. expense, or loss" that occurred before you formed or acquired the organization. 3. Coverage under this provision Is afforded only until the next anniversary date of this policys effective date after you acquire or form the organization, or the end of the policy period, whichever is earlier. K. SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS - INCREASED LIMITS iv . o The following changes are trade to the Paragraph a. Supplementary Payments of Paragraph 2 Coverage Extensions of Paragraph A. Coverage contained in Section U - LIablllty Coverage: 1. The limit shown in Subparagraph (2) for the cost of bail bonds is changed from $2,000 to $3,000. 2. The limit shown in Subparagraph (4) for all reasonable expenses incurred at our request, including actual loss of earnings because of time off work, is changed from $250 to $1,000 per day. L TOWING AND LABOR COVERAGE EX- TENSION Paragraph 2. Towing of Paragraph A. Coverage under Section Ill - Physical Damage Coverage is entirely replaced by the following: With respect to any "private passenger auto" or light truck" you own that is provided jah Comprehensive Coverage and Collision Coverage in this policy or coverage part, we will pay up to $75 for towing and labor costs incurred each time such "private passenger auto° or "light truck" is disabled, subject to the following additional provisions: 1. The labor must be performed at the place of disablement; 2. This coverage does not apply to stolen "autos". 3. If, at the time of disablement, such "private passenger auto" or "light truck" is also a covered "auto" for the Physical Damage Towing And Labor coverage shown under item Two of the Business Auto Declarations in this policy or coverage part, the most we will pay for each covered disablement is the greater of: a. The limit shown under Item Two in the Declarations, or b. $75 Page 6 of 7 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc. CL CA 2014 0212 with its permission. As used in this coverage: a,, °Private passenger auto" means a four-wheel auto of the private passenger or station wagon type; and b. "Light truck" means a pick-up or panel truck, sport utility vehicle or similar "auto", with a Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) of 11,000 pounds or less. Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the maximum loaded weight for which a single "auto" is designed, as spewed by the manufacturer. M. WAIVER OF SUBROGATION BY CONTRACT OR AGREEMENT The following is added to Paragraph A.S. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us contained in Section IV - Business Auto Conditions: Notwithstanding anything to the contrary to the previous paragraph, we waive any right of recovery we may have against a person or organization because of payments we make for "bodily injury", °property damage" or "toss" arising out of the operation. maintenance, use, loading or unload'mg of a covered "auto" when you and such person or organization have agreed in writing in a contract or agreement to waive such right of recovery, provided: 1. Such written contract or agreement was: a. Made prior to the covered injury or damage; and b. In effect at the time of the covered injury or damage; and 2. The injury or damage arises out of the operations contemplated by such written contract or agreement. This waiver applies only to such person or organization designated In such written contract or agreement. CL CA 20 14 02 12 includes copyrighted material of insurance Services Office, Inc. Page 7 of 7 with Its permission. CL IL 00 1211 10 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY AMENDMENT OF CANCELLATION.PROVISIONS This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE COVERAGE PART COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART COMMERCIAL INLAND MARINE COVERAGE PART COMMERCIAL LIABILITY UMBRELLA COVERAGE PART CONDOMINIUM DIRECTORS AND OFFICERS LIABILITY CRIME AND FIDELITY COVERAGE PART EMPLOYMENT-RELATED PRACTICES LIABILITY EMPLOYEE BENEFITS LIABILITY FARM COVERAGE PART FARM UMBRELLA LIABILITY COVERAGE PART LIQUOR LIABILITY COVERAGE PART OWNERS AND CONTRACTORS PROTECTIVE LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PRINTERS ERRORS AND OMISSIONS LIABILITY PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY RAILROAD PROTECTIVE LIABILITY COVERAGE PART If we cancel this policy, we will give the person or organization shown below the number of days' notice indicated in the Schedule below. Proof of mailing will be sufficient proof of notice. SCHEDULE 1. Number of days' notice: (a) Non-payment of premium: 10 days (b) Any reason other than non-payment of premium: 30 days. 2. Name and Address of Person or Organization: City of Corpus Christi Dept of Engineering Services Attn Contract Administrator PO Box 9277 Corpus Christi, TX 78469 CLIL00121110 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., Page 1 of 1 with its permission WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS LIABILITY INSURANCE POLICY WC 42 03 04 A (Ed. 1-00) TEXAS WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT This endorsement applies only to the insurance provided by the policy because Texas is shown in Item 3.A. of the Information Page. We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy. We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule, but this waiver applies only with respect to bodily injury arising out of the operations described in the Schedule where you are required by a written contract to obtain this waiver from us. This endorsement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. The premium for this endorsement is shown in the Schedule. Schedule 1. ® Specific Waiver City of Corpus Christi 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, TX 78401 ❑ Blanket Waiver Any person or organization for whom the Named Insured has agreed by written contract to furnish this waiver. 2. Operations: Job: #E12118 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) Waiver of Subrogation in favor of City of Corpus Christi Est. Start Date: 12/01/15 Completion Date: 05/29/16 3. Premium: The premium charge for this endorsement shall be $o percent of the premium developed on payroll in connection with work performed for the above person(s) or organization(s) arising out of the operations described. No Charge 4. Advance Premium: This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached and is effective on the date issued unless otherwise stated. (The information below is required only when this endorsement is issued subsequent to preparation of the policy.) Endorsement Effective: 12/01/2015 Insured: eEmployers Solutions, Inc. Insurance Company: Zurich -American Insurance Company Policy No: WC 48-41-756-03 Endorsement No: Premium: $ Countersigned by op , 4.„ esse WC 42 03 04 A (Ed. 1-00) Page 1 of 1 SHEET INDEX IDESCRIPTION ' CONSULTANTS SHEET NO. 0.1 TESTING SCHEDULE H� ANT No. SHEET NO. DESCRIPTION REFER TO SHEET 034 STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES - "TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES' FOR TESTING SCHEDULE, CALL BEFORE YOU DIG! 001 0.1 TRLE SHEET tr1�8771 Know 8!I ' ;: what's below. CaII before ou di . PARTICANTS REQUEST 48 HOURS (111;/CE BEFORE YOU D/G, DRILL, OR BLAST - STOP AND CALL 8 1 1 SURVEY: HEB TENNIS CENTER 001.1 CA -0.1 EXISTING CONDRIONS PLAN SURVEY: AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTER 001.2 CB -0.1 EXISTING CONDRIONS PLAN LANDSCAPING: HEB TENNIS CENTER 002 LA -1.1 IRRIGATION PLAN 003 LA -1.2 IRRIGATION PLAN Ep" 4. ' tAvi,.H :S. o y� 6,.. ,74�� � ,:e RC / a •,, k �� oF 0'4'. 004 LA -1.3 IRRIGATION PLAN -, San Patricia COUnty005 San THE LONE STAR NOTIFICATION COMPANY AT 1-800-669-8344 LA -1.4 IRRIGATION PLAN 006 LA -2.1 IRRIGATION DETAILS ARCHITECTURAL: HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTER 007 A-0.1 SITE RENOVATION DETAILS & NOTES DATE:02/202015 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 archltecis & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com 4cks tt RIVER TJL 624 ARCHITECTURAL: HEB TENNIS CENTER 008 AA -0.1 DEMOLITION SITE PLAN 009 M-0.2 RENOVATION SITE PLAN 010 M-0.3 ENLARGED TENNIS COURT RENOVATION PLAN 011 AA -0.4 ENLARGED TENNIS COURT RENOVATION PLANS 012 AA -0.5 ENLARGED SITE & TENNIS COURT PLAN 013014 M-0.6 ENLARGED SITE & TENNIS COURT RENOVATION PLAN M-0.7 SHEET NOT USED e 015 AA -0 8 TENNIS COURT STRIPINGPLANS YUO NUECES BAY 016 TFORM PLANS DEMO ^ 4 IZ es � moo, CoZ„t Y ` Gp RryfR AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTER COMPLEX TDLR NO: E A B P R J B 5 8 0 7 912 ITONN & RENOVATION PLAN 017 AA -L9 PROING SHOP 01 s =2.1 LOUNGE ENLARGED LRESTROOM P195 & INT. ELEVATIONS 020 AA -4.1 PRO SHOP EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS 021 M-4.2 VIEWING PLATFORM SECTION & ELEVATIONS 022 M-5.1 PRO SHOP & LOUNGE BLDG. SECTIONS & DETAILS en / \ .9 R0,40$q AA R0,40 023 -52 DETAILS Op S w tine/ 024 M-5.3 DETAILS - ',.T'.. g 1101 Ai` CENTER COMPLEX 025 M-6.1 SCHEDULES & DETAILS ARCHITECTURAL: AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTER N Herr 44 -� ` I HEB TENNIS TDLR NO: EABPRJB5807915 126 AB -1., SITE DEMOL TION PLAN 027 AB -0.2 SITE RENOVATION PLAN 028 AB -0.3 ENLARGED RAMP PLAN &SECTIONS 029 AB -0.4 COURT STRIPING PLANS m§ o GRAPHIC MAP SCALE CORPUS � CHRIS71 INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT rii .``030 AB -1.1 PRO SHOP DEMOLITION &RENOVATION PLAN 031 AB -2.1 ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN & INTERIOR ELEVATIONS �A00i 032 AB -3.1 PRO SHOP REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 'a� CORPUS CHRISTI BAY 033 Ae-s.1 SCHEDULES &DETAILS � 034 SA0.1 STRUCTURAL GENERAL STRUCTURAL: HEB (NOTESS ERa\ •moi -...i CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs W ti p 10000 0 10000 20000 30000SS` W POINT _'�c •' 035 SA0.2 STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES 036 SA1.0 OVERALL STEEL FOUNDATION PLAN 037 SA1.1 COURT PLAN TENNIS COURTS 16,17 AND 23,24 a(/ggR �m g eta �` 038 SA1.2 COURT CAP PLAN TENNIS COURTS 5 AND 6 p„0 :, ` ,go �� .� 039 SA1.3 FOUNDATION PLAN TENNIS COURTS 9 AND 10 040 SA1.4 COURT CAP PLAN TENNIS COURTS 13, 14 AND 15 041 SA1.6 FOUNDATION PLAN TENNIS COURTS 1, . AND 22 042 SA1.6 FOUNDATION PLAN TENNIS COURTS 1, 2, AND 3 q�M 043 SA1.7 FOUNDATION, 2ND LEVEL, AND ROOF FRAMING PLANS P0, OR/ 044 SA1.8 SHADE BUILDING FOUNDATION PLAN AND PRO SHOP EXISTING PLAN 2 2 O S LLI cc C ' - t ' _ :�.' - .' ¢, , \V =s - + -r N 4040\ ` ♦ / F.N. 43 S,1?gT g e N s ,,,,to �4'F / '�4ry0 ` 045 SA4.0 FOUNDATION DETAILS 046 SA4.1 FOUNDATION DETAILS C4 Yo 047 SA4.5 FOUNDATION DETAILS 04 oso c 048 SA4.6 FOUNDATION DETAILS 49 049 SA4.7 FOUNDATION DETAILS �C/ 050 544.8 TYPICAL METAL STUD DETAILS 2 a I' .9_- �0 Iii 0 - L^hS •*\r /'j/c, .� ;.... • A _ I rRN. / �., Ar 8 OOq 6r ,cOgO 0 051 SA5.0 TYPICAL FLOOR DETAILS Q �9 052 SA5.5 TYPICAL FLOOR DETAILS `" i R \� F- 053 SA5.6 TYPICAL BRACE DETAILS `� ,F‘-' 054 SA6.0 BRACE ELEVATIONS $o „^r �0 055 SA6.1 BRACE DETAILSy. 056 SA7.0 STAIR PLAN &DETAILS ''/� �`�` o- V STRUCTURAL: AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTER D E OTES 2444 ��TO�V 4 1.0 HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE TITLE SHEET r - £ �►• f' ` r' PRO.1 SHOPP LEVELCTURAL 3� P= . 058 SB1057 1 PLN95T F e B/0 2�'!vy rev MECHANICAL: HEB TENNIS CENTER •- yA . ``�/ =t M+• '�V - ` ' «1 ` ,� - PROJECT LOCATION HEB TENNIS CENTER COMPLEX 18305HELY ST. CORPUS CHRIST. TX 787O4 *ii,b._ Oso RP (L 059 MA -1 MECHANICAL HVAC FLOOR PLAN Crete v 0 060 MA -2 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES 061 MA -3 MECHANICAL DETAILS MECHANICAL: AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTER f�- ,`+ r�/ 4• A ' At.. 062 MB -1 MECHANICAL HVAC FLOOR PLAN k 063 MB -2 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES 'WHITECAP •JV 064 MB -3 MECHANICAL DETAILS -. P,f,A ' , �.' - "'•TSA a ,,-'3 w• :I,M - - cp PLUMBING: HEB TENNIS CENTER 065 PA -1 PLUMBING DEMOLITION PLAN 066PA-2 PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN FIXTURE HEB TENNIS CENTER VICINITY MAP 067 PA -3 PLUMBING SCHEDULES 068 PA -4 PLUMBING S Q° ti KRUSE TENNIS CENTER PLUMBING: AL PLANS FOR: e8 069 PB -1 PLUMBING DEMOLITION PLAN e 070PB-2 PLUMBING FUXTURE SCHEDULES 1 171 PB -3 PLUMBING DETAILS . -.. N - - - / ELECTRICAL:HEB TENNIS CENTER HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENT RS (BOND 20 12 072 EA -1 ELECTRICAL SITE DEMOLITION PLAN 073 EA -2 EXISTING LOCKER RM BLDG ELECTRICAL DEMO PLAN 074 EA -3 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN RE -BID PACK/LIGE 075 EA -5 MEWING PLATFORM & LOUNGE ELECTRICAL PLANS 077 EA -4 NEW PRO SHOP LIGHTING & POWER PLANS 076 EA -6 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES & ONE UNE RISER DIAGRAM 078 EA -7 ELECTRICAL DETAILS ELECTRICAL: AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTER PROJECT # E12118 079 EB -1 ELEC. DEMOUTON AND ELEC, FLOOR PLANS 080 EB -2 ELECTRICAL LEGEND AND DETAILS 080 - `" m• PROJECT LOCATION AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTER COMPLEX ST. SCHRISTI, CORPUS TX 78401 PREPARED BY T RELEASED FOR CO SUCTION: /� i n 1 A_4�A4 1� 1 26,f 4 m .L�, I[ir�-ctor of Capital Programs Date I 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY `IGarza + McLain SUITE 1250 N RI,ALEXIS W o CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS, INC. DOMINGUEZ L I_ SHEET 001 of 82 .-. \ T: 361.884.3295 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, INC. , ENG/NEER//VG 615 N. Upper Broadway, Suite 638 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 - • F: 361.884.3298 - ,. PP y 4833 Saratoga 8116 o 2 40 -- IYw 1,I architects & associatesMUNOZ �;� Corpus Christi, Texas 78477 ENGINEERING www.clkarch.com T ,a Corpus Christi, TX 78413 AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTER VICINITY MAP - (281) 494-1230 (voice) PH361 2882335 CIVIL. STRUCTURAL. MARINE (281) 494-1234 (fax) FX 361.288.7312 TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEYING Tape rIRM N P r so EM adlandarch@gmail.com PHONE: 361-946-0848 EMAIL: ramemunozengr9.com :410 ANDREA LN CORPUS CHRISTI, TX. 78414 CITY PROJECT# E12118 Ococo� C� PROJECT LOCATION co co VICINITY MAP SCALE: NTS EXISTING DRAIN EXISTING GRATE c j J ij ING> GRATE �x EXISTING CHAINLINK FENCE (TYP) 35 09 �J EXISTING , GRATE,• EXISTING TREE (TYP) EXISTING LIGHT POLE (TYP) i° ■ EXISTING OUTDOOR TENNIS COURT EXISTING STAIRS if EXISTING LIGHT POLE (TYP) EX STING GRATE . LI EXISTING SEATING AREA EXISTING OUTDOOR TENNIS COURT EXISTING RAMP 4l'e (R' I A 11 meq. 1041 TI►TI►Wiif. �41210FAMIS Esc ;; / ".,-c►-����.�� .. Y►TAT►T��: � .� �H►��.�. �. _il►lli►� Ii►�f'r► .J�3Ii►l.Ii►l.Ii►tivi �.;�C!�Ii��Ii► I.�s:.ii7 A��� !IIDI, : �Er�r. ��1� r� ` r`.1* EXISTING ANCURB & GUTTER EXISTING STORM WATER MANHOLE EXISTING CONDITIONS PLAN Qv /r EXISTING TRANSFORMER EXISTING STORM WATER MANHOLE WITH CCUURjB INLET ME MUNOZ ENGINEERING CIVIL• STRUCTURAL • MARINE TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEYING TBPE FIRM No. F-12240 PHONE: 361-946-4848 EMAIL: ram@munozengrg.com 3810 ANDREA LN CORPUS CHRISTI, TX, 78414 RAMIRO MUNOZ III, P.t N0. 100346 NOTES & LEGEND: 1. THE TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEY FOR THIS PROJECT WAS PERFORMED BY HYDROEX LLC ON 10-18-13 AND IS BASED ON NAD83/NAVD88 TEXAS STATE PLANE SOUTH ZONE 4205. 2. UTILITIES SHOWN ARE APPROXIMATE ONLY, CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. x PL —100.00 — EXIST ASPHALT PAVEMENT EXIST CONCRETE SIDEWALK EXIST CHAINLINK FENCE (TYP) EXIST LIGHT POLE (TYP) EXIST PROPERTY LINE (TYP) EXIST CONTOUR (TYP) EXIST TREE (TYP) EXIST STORM WATER MANHOLE BENCH MARKS & CONTROL POINT INFORMATION CONTROL NORTHING EASTING DESCRIPTION ELEVATION BM -1 17168161.44 1335838.25 POWER POLE 35.10' CP -1 17168312.56 1335848.20 60D NAIL --- CP-2 17168552.40 1335852.53 60D NAIL --- SCALE: 1" = 40' NORTH 40 0 40 80 SCALE: 1" = 40' DESCRIPTION >- m REVISION NO. DESCRIPTION m REVISION NO. CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. CA -0.1 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY O w CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 Capital Programs Cr LLJ w,~"cc U U (/) 4c7_ zQ 04 W L11 CrN o CNJ Q 06 0 Lll W SHEET 01.1 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 -- --- BR .,..___---- ll :::��■■, ,...�_ 1 DESCRIPTION 1 CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. CB-O.1 _��rrttilli �, . LARED°ST PROJECT LOCATION JIDIVI EXISTING Ilisuisi�t RE wartits{T1 PALM TREE STREET AGNES f� P) o ,� pGNEs ST �1 MUNOZ ENGINEERING ::...:... • ' .• • •. _EXISTING CONCRETE, 'PARKING LOT --- .3 ' EXISTING PICNIC TABLE oISSIMII A 7:1111_ - Ilz SST„l�� ����� ���� `lIC3810 > _ D �I , z• n lllSEMAIL:Oram@muozengg$com CIVIL• STRUCTURAL • MARINE TOPOBRAPRM No F RZEYING - ' ” ;; L•° a ° � 1111 ��1<�� ll„`��Da al D• ANDREA LN EXISTING = v SWALE `� f � .-- EXISTING � •.... ' • - !�if � � �� ..n,.�.°' � -i I1/�� EXISTING 2'-0" TALLll RETAINING WALL l +� I����s� IIh�+�`���r,+f�, I I EIS: l ST 1:11ERITE L��/�/ m•III Illll Ile yIlllll_, VIIIDRAINAGE +�� �� ��,1\ `���� CORPUS CHRISTI, TX, 78414 ��-_ 02 20 15 l / /l 0Fr;:., �- `p, .....• . .. of j..- � � , � * . �� * //� 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 IL T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com �� `.. %ts'` RETAINING WALL ISTING y 1 � �; `i��+ i EXISTING SIDEWALK �, BASKETBALL. TYP)OING CHAINLINK FENCE ! �� � CONCRETE STAIRS y_-�1ttsi1ti%aj1f1 • ll... ��l 1111116 EXISTING ASPHALT ��' PARKING AREA -1 PARK A� r , OttUa •• �_� (` r � _ �� trier " Italia EXISTING OUTDOOR Iiit . EXISTING BASKETBALL ; i:�. OUTDOOR COURT II' P • � I•` ---.y � o, ,� _ 0 II ��� PARK AVE ,�.Z 1111 III 0 ..., is RAMIRO MUNOZ III P. N0. 100346 /EXTU1GASPHALT _ PAVEMENT i' \" T NNIS COURT 0 94' ` Art VICINITY MAP CIS SCALE: NTS CP-1 _ ., , I _ „a INSET B �. m i�',_ -EXISTING !; EXISTING STORM WATER BM-1 GAZEBO r MANHOLE WITH CURB INLET J'' • EXISTING TIERED STONE EXISTING 1l RETAINING WALL z g� PERGOLA W/ I CONCRETE °n a —� IDATE I c' A ri • • EXISTING RETAINING FLATWORK tI � ° WALL w -�- �1 CP-1 �` II aliMilli�% IREVISION NO. �� in. EXISTING OUTDOOR , I ilY llir II TENNIS COURT II ~ wa IEXISTING RAMP • •�IIIIIA� � Nand en � I if � EXISTING EXISTING DECOMPOSED , g93-/ %�i .:•.._;","1� 8� Xg�6$ 9g 09 Sb.--- 93 X9a�.9. � �— � / /X 1 1X�p0i1 ,010 ga —98-°° I i + CITY of CORP TEX, Capital Prc i�_ :yam►- �1�!a I ELECTRICAL GRANITE 1 99 5° 4 %� yo i CP-2 • 'EXISTING PANEL EXISTING RESTROOM BM-1 x'..? ° +` -A� 1 le: BUILDING TENNIS CENTER II /- .':0 Z Ares BUILDING 6 l g6 $ab` 9' d f y r $ °� $$8 O i / 1 DESCRIPTION �. awn '� ♦ :133 4k _`'� ... a $3 ° ° +�\ °° •� ���°� L �.: EXISTING _ .: raor ,� A.°,"� MECHANICAL YARD D J \ ° °0°5°0 �� �•- ' `•,p 0 1 4 �!.:•� �' f 101 OHO ''/ y 1�., ,° INSET A 1` s 102. 9 1 ... 4 � 9 1 e 0 , �� 6 I 1 l 2 - 9 'S �/ M, 0 1 HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTER EXISTING CONDITIONS PLAN \ \ \ \ li \ ^ 1111k EXISTING TREE /� ... - GG�� o a c {TYP) P.�-gip � Itat I • 10•_,� h,,,� 999 X99.. g • / \ � � ° " • " ° EXIST NG OUTDOOR TENN S COURT ..d :35' X \ 0° _ ./ \ .0\9' .r� 1a „.. 914' , r �1 011 �1 r `I .,,)'r° Q Ji.La'. ��..• a ° 10 a ,II I.1 1 cva o2 �4 02. d I ° !dlJ \ ��,���,�.'� .i .. •• 00 ° EXISTING CURB & ii 11 �. '� oar c, 10.�.$01-Sr !' 1000 . r`- 50r !��..i ,;. ca \! ` r- 101.001 ,., i II. iii��,,,,�� , .Isr _ i, i. 410 10 ♦. g431 Q, .;v 4. 1 X1� i tB. 4l �' GUTTER �� 33 ,` 62 l iozsoo G %' 1 r 10��. I1 - - - _ —a. CLQ —� _1 _.__`_• - . .s;.. .- 102.50 '` ��a¢c•e. • 1. y,``-__� t // 0 1.0 � 45 14133 r ;:�'1103.50 .7�.+ � • ° �/ (9. �A00. `� ' �4 t, l'9 1 0 °I , "� 1'; 9a Sd II� --------------------- X07.00- ` �t 001'1056 $t EXISTING PARKING -__ •1$ ASPHALT LOT 0 6ISX1°139 'kb*, "''10a' ' d L. ° I ,.4l Ot9 / •-;131 _r 31 '� _„�.$�. - _e�� ►' ►' 04.4 ► 1: l $ 1c' p4. , '�. II /l X 103 63 ° 0 a a ° CP-2 - 10 � �' I. L------------ �� r i � = 44 10 �3 1g. I .299 I, �'. i01�� 02 'CC.' 3. 9' ++'-,1...�.�w $ .2542 -. 0102 NOTES & LEGEND: / II .. .-. .. - l�° res a1.'�-°':.:::.:::::::.:.::::::::::::::::.:::::::: , 69 1: x OHO /°h” Ar . THE TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEY FOR THIS PROJECT 0.55 03'4?• ` 4' !,44.44 r.'��~.xi�iV / , PERFORMED BY HYDROEX LLC ON 10-18-13 AND IS BASED ON ASSUMED COORDINATE SYSTEM. ee '\ 653-50 10310 :�?� s 9�y�&'t II 2. UTILITIES SHOWN ARE APPROXIMATE ONLY, CONTRACTOR TO pec FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. INSET A INSET B I 11 I I EXIST DECOMPOSED GRANITE SCALE 1 "=20' SCALE 1 "=20' EXIST ASPHALT PAVEMENT (TYP) IDATE 1 PLAN EXISTING C 0 N D ITI 0 N S PLAN ® 40 40 80 0 EXIST CONCRETE SIDEWALK (TYP) SHEET 01.2 of 82 SCALE: 1" = 40' EXIST FENCE (TYP) BENCH MARKS Sc CONTROL POINT INFORMATION NORTH SCALE: 1" = 40' —x— RECORD DRAWING NO. CP-204 % A EXIST LIGHT POLE (TYP) CONTROL NORTHING EASTING DESCRIPTION ELEVATION IREVISION NO. —1oo.00— — EXIST CONTOUR (TYP) BM-1 4976.46 4967.28 NO DESCRIPTION 100.00' -4t.0 EXIST TREE CP-1 5000.0 5000.0 PK NAIL --- (TYP) 14 CP-2 4865.65 4976.31 PK NAIL --- CITY PROJECT# E12118 1" 7 21.8 /i1 /iI GENERAL NOTES 6 16.5 E [• 8 2 7-1 1 1 6 3 0 8 1" 16.6 SLOPE SLOPE SLOPE 4 SLOPE SLC 1 0 °LOPE 1 3 Ow- e 1" 9 13.4 � I 1 1 1 • 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 _1 1 1 1 LEGEND SYMBOL MANUFACTURER c O Rainbird Rainbird Rainbird Hunter Hunter In I- I- IMI I- I- I- IMI I- I- I- I= Rainbird • Rainbird N King Brothers POC VIF UON Febco Base Line Point of Connection Verify in field Unless Otherwise Noted DESCRIPTION PSI 1800-15SST 25 1800-15RCS/15LCS 25 1800 -PRS -12 25 PROS-06-MP3000 25 PROS-06-MP2000 25 Main Line: 24" Depth. Sch. per Specs. See GPM RAD 1.11 4' x 28' .45 4' x 14' .6-2.4 12' .69-2.88 25' .31-1.16 17' Plan for size. Lateral Line: 18" Depth. Sch. 40. See chart for size. PEB Remote Control Valve: Size as shown on plan. 44-LRC/NP Quick Coupler Full Port True Union PVC Ball Valve: Line Size Existing Water Meter Existing 2" Backflow Controller (Model BL -1000X -WF -R24), w/ Rainbird Rain Check Rain Sensor. PIPE SIZING CHART - SCHEDULE 40 SPRAY HEADS / BUBBLERS LATERALS DRIP IRRIGATION SUPPLY LINES NETAFIM SUPPLY / EXHAUST HEADER Zone / Partial Zone Flow Pipe Size 0-8 GPM 8.1-13 GPM 13.1-22 GPM 22.1-30 GPM 30.1-50 GPM 50.1-75 GPM PVC 3/4" PVC 1" PVC 1-1/4" PVC 1-1/2" PVC 2" PVC 2-1/2" 3/4" is minimum pipe size. For rotor pipe sizing, see Plans - do not use this chart. Valve Station -- GPM Valve Size ALEXIS DOMINGUEZ LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, INC. 4833 Saratoga Blvd. #116 Corpus Christi, TX 78413 PH 361.288.2335 FX 361.288.7312 EM adlandarch@gmail.com 1. GUARANTEE: Guarantee the irrigation system for one year from date of acceptance. 2. VERIFICATION: The design pressure is 47.9 P.S.I. System design is based on 52 P.S.I. and 50 G.P.M. available at discharge outlet of meter. Verify same and notify Architect if such data adversely affects the operation of the system. Such notice shall be made in writing and prior to commencing any irrigation work. 3. UTILITIES: Verify location of all on-site utilities. Restoration of damaged utilities shall be made to the satisfaction of the Owner, and at no additional cost to the Owner. 4. SCHEMATIC: System features are shown schematically for graphic clarity. Install all piping and valves in common trenches where feasible and inside planting areas adjacent to walkways and inside medians whenever possible. 5. SPECIFICATIONS: See irrigation specifications for additional information. 6. CODES: Irrigation system shall be installed in accordance with all local codes and manufacturer's specifications. Notify Architect by telephone and in writing of any conflicts prior to installation. 7. QUICK COUPLING VALVES: Install on double swing joint. Locate 12" away from edge of walks, walls, curbs, and headerboards within planting areas. Provide one swivel, hose ell. 8. SLEEVING: Adequately size Sch. 40 pipe for all wiring and irrigation lines installed under paving areas and that pass through drainage trenches with drain rock. Install (with ends clearly marked above grade) at the necessary depth prior to the construction of paving areas or field bases. Sleeving to extend 12" from edge of paving or drainage trench into adjacent subgrade. No unsleeved piping, angle -bends, 90 -degree bends, or joints shall be allowed under paving. 9. HEAD ALLOWANCE: Allow in bid price an amount sufficient to provide and install an additional 5 sprinkler heads of each type specified on plan to accommodate field changes. These heads shall be located as directed by the Architect. Deliver to the owner any unused additional heads at the end of the maintenance period. 10. FIELD VERIFICATION: Field verify dimensions of all planting areas to receive irrigation. Determine nozzle pattern (1/2 head, 1/4 head, Adjustable Arc nozzle, etc.) based on field conditions. Adjust all nozzles in field for optimal coverage and to prevent overspray onto walks, paved areas, building, etc. 11. CONTROLLER: Install controller as shown on the Drawings. All above -grade conduit, either 24v. or 110v., shall be rigid steel securely fastened to structure and to controller. 12. POP-UP HEIGHT: Use 6" pop-up sprinklers in the turf areas and 12" pop-up sprinklers in the remaining planting areas, unless otherwise noted. All planting area beds 8' wide and less shall have 6" pop -ups. 13. POP-UP LOCATION: Distance of pop-up sprinkler from paving or headerboard is equal to riser height. 14. SCHEDULING: Prior to the end of the maintenance period, schedule the controller for repeat cycle irrigation and multiple programming. Provide at least three start times for turf and two start times for shrubs if over 5 minutes in length for any one station. Turf and shrubs shall be on separate programs. Shrubs shall be separated into two programs, one for sun valves, one for partial shade to shade valves. 15. PRESSURE REGULATION All sprays shall be installed with pressure regulating screens (PRS). ALL IRRIGATION WORK SHOWN ON THIS SHEET SHALL BE BID AS ALTERNATE #3. 20 02.,740.19 0 20 40 4' ti >- m ti 0 CONSULTANTS SHEET NO. LA -1.1 DATE:02/20/2015 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 E 0 0 0 U 3 121 cs 0 ets U O 4- 0 Capital Programs SHEET 002 of 82 RECORD DRA WING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 3/41 -� • 1 fiGC if;:nN\ %/ , / *k /� V \° \ 1 DESCRIPTION CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. LA -1.2 DATE:02/20/2015 1;li+iiii1l"i 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY Lill SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T:361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com I LLL '/w 1 • • 10 IBY • 3/1 1" 18.2 gk CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs I — tr IDATE ,, • I11 SLOPE SLOPE •1 ,, \ IREVISION NO. �I ■ i ■A_ 4.------„,„, I I 1 .Y. • IDESCRIPTION 1 A--->„..,,, .---,, 20 21- 22 ..... , . r _ .... _ . . . . ar I i li l� ■ „ rz7 HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE HEB TENNIS CENTER IRRIGATION PLAN 1 11 1 I• 1 rza,a ,„ `/ — ■ 1 _ 11 © 11 / 1 11 . •23 24- 1 1 ,. 1 1 IV• t IIO • SLOPE SLOPE ; 11 • Q� 1 �� 1 16.0 ` �-N- d e •SLOPE 111— SLOPE SLOPE I ,- it !••— r2o■ II 1 II lie a • • 1 1 SLOPE ■ ■ • 1 *" 6HEET LA -1.2 ! — NOTE SHEET L r� -1.4 luk ■ 7 im .a 1 IBY See Sheet LA for Irrigation Legend General Notes. ALEXIS DOMINGUEZ 1 -1.1 and LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, INC. 0) Saratoga Blvd. #116 i „ e Corpus Christi, TX 78413 at PH 361288.2335 • Oa FX 361.288.7312 �� +A EM adlandarch@gmail.com ,q�F O 44833 may, °-) G " v''' A' ^ Q F ��+� IDATE SHEET 003 of 82 RECORD DRA WING NO. CP -204 ° ° in a ALL IRRIGATION WORK SHOWN ON THIS QZ,'w is SHEET SHALL BE BID AS ALTERNATE #3. 20 0 20 40 11Z CITY PROJECT # E12118 ♦ /! l I`' am ! .' v A am 8H ET LA-1.1 11 IDESCRIPTION CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. LA-113 DATE:02/20/2015 •® a i w�IIIgLL iu11111111 SI. —LA-1.3— 4 s _I' / s 1 / ■ ■ ■ ! ■ r a e'Y M `■`YI ♦ .:. 11 �• to ■ a a 1 �l 11— _ Q —I Q J A,It; -,. SLOPE • a - o I— I— O WW W W 7.1. °. ia • L 1 2`^ / VJ �2 V J ,1,11,,,,,,"1l 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY ,�, SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T:361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com _ a o. I ; i7 • . ,f •/ •-o 7 _8_ _, — . ,,,, , F :il I • . I y / / / / r • • • 1 • /• � r t" ❑ L• ... • • 11 ct v i • Nay/, '♦ . . ■ IBY /♦/ • SLOPE ' 0 a�n�1Olpi ♦/♦• il / 11 \? I I gk CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs POC �'�, lI 48 - - - • • ■ . • • • • ■ i _ till, , ...,a le ite 4*, IDATE ip,4 © � �f ♦ ,-'A.1_1�1 'A.-NT-in-in., i _1 _1_1_1_1` Ir_ ■, 4_, - SA 3 4 5 _ 1 u u� c__�� .�i u e 11 ��� � I 1" 15.6 1" 19.7 1" 12.0 I ii IREVISION NO. n 1 1 1% — •CIA [D 11 IDESCRIPTION 1 1 1 i :1 I I 1 1 41. i 1 -4- 1 — • HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE HEB TENNIS CENTER IRRIGATION PLAN — I a I \ i •I i ` 1L - • _ It •J 1 ■ 2 I i c 1"16.9 i 1 1 \ p 5°O ""ell•�'^ pp 1" 18.0 r " I L • O , f1 - - - • - - - - it C LJ LJ LJ B 1. • • LJ ii Y. Y m Y Y Y Y ' — 1 I I I rl l rl l rl 1 1 1 1 1 rl l rl l rl l rl i rl 1 1 1 •!• 1 1 •11 I •11 •11 r11 r1 1 r11 r11 r11 1 I r11 1 r11 r11 r11 1 r1 r11 r11 1 1 •11 I r l m l r l l l r l r l r l 1 •!• 1, ,. 1 Pull 6 additional wire with common, coil in box. NOTE ALEXIS DOMINGUEZ IBY 1 See Sheet LA-1.1 for Irrigation Legend and General Notes. LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, INC. _o k 0. 4833 Saratoga Blvd. #116 I Corpus Christi, TX 78413 a PH 361.288.2335 • 402k. FX 361.288.7312 ), EM adlandarch@gmail.com i 4? ��.FOF1 SCAPE DOA,. 456 y% Ss / A ^ Qy �' 4 ,. IDATE SHEET 004 of 82 RECORD DRA WING NO. CP-204 ° in w a ALL IRRIGATION WORK SHOWN ON THIS ''« SHEET SHALL BE BID AS ALTERNATE #3.o 4 0 CITY PROJECT # E12118 20 0 20 40 11 i1,HEET LA -1.2 1 I IDESCRIPTION CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. LA -1.4 DATE:02/20/2015 – -1 HEET ii -- LA — — -1.4 — �I " 1 ! M rr d�I 3 I. i 1 _, _1 if 4.c � � T �� 1 1 �� W W ■ I. 1 I W 2 W 2 �I j• 1 '11iliiiil"i 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY i SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T:361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com 11 ♦ 1 �1 1 •11 SLOPE 0 11 lit Aid �ik,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _- - _ _ . Sr. ■�_II. /�, ♦ L T n O n Tu M - — _ i ■ i ! i i ♦/! � IBY H ////////////j///////////Ai / ♦ gk CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs H ill H 9:3.i , ♦ , IDATE 111 ♦ 12 IREVISION NO. I OV RE ' OV RE ' OV RE ' "'©Ap1" ' 14.9 Pull 6 ♦ additional wire with Ill common, coil in box. / / mi • IDESCRIPTION 1 H H / HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE HEB TENNIS CENTER IRRIGATION PLAN 1 i1 / / /K /// K////Y// // MI/ E 1 ig�7J I c ^i St _• ♦ / 2 _ _ • ALEXIS DOMINGUEZ IBY NOTE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, INC. 1 See Sheet LA -1.1 for Irrigation Legend and General Notes. yk,Q�O oor 4833 Saratoga Blvd. #116 i i Corpus Christi, TX 78413 a4 . PH 361.288.2335 iftnia FX 361.288.7312 �� +A EM adlandarch@gmail.com ,q�F OF 1450 ?y, o G " `' ^ Q ��+�' IDATE SHEET 005 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 ° Z ° in a ALL IRRIGATION WORK SHOWN ON THIS o`w'es SHEET SHALL BE BID AS ALTERNATE #3. 20 0 20 40 CITY PROJECT # E12118 FINISH GRADE. SEE SPECS FOR 1 DESCRIPTION I CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. L/t-2. 1 RELATION TO TOP OF VALVE BOX EPDXY/PASTE/RIVET/BRAND VALVE ID # ON BOX DATE:02/20/2015 VALVE ID TAG WITH ID #: SEE SPECS. WATER PROOF CONNECTORS W/ WIRE NUTS VALVE BOX W/ BOLT DOWN LID: SEE SPECS. / } —III—I I '11_111117 1111E111:-. \ ELECTRIC VALVE SEE IRRIGATION PLANS III—III -I I I=I �\ : 1-1• VALVE WIRE: 36" IN LOOSE COIL w to �p Il ` , . _ i `JC 4%/'1 --erne BALL VALVE: LINE SIZE. SEE VALVE MANIFOLD DETAIL cc SCH. 40 PVC 900 ELBOW QF1 , '� Ilei �;�ill+liiiil"I 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY Ii SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com J * om `1 SCH. 40 PVC UNION p ( SCHEDULE 40 P.V.C. NIPPLE SCH 40 P.V.C. LATERAL F IFI® LINE _ °°' °«, °°°°o°¢o' •o;•°°'o�0q� i 1 J0'° °• ° O� o °'- • '°.' ""'O'6 ':::, ��-_ Q 'gib' a•°o:•L--D. *?..:25,92z"ir. n'' - - �° N (LENGTH AS REQ'D), TYP. CONTROL WIRES SCH. 40 PVC UNION I \� ) MAINLINE FITTING SCH. 40 MALE ADAPTER 1/2" PEA GRAVEL OR DRAIN ROCK: 4" RODENT PROTECTION SCREEN: X" DEPTH X X" 19 MAINLINE / SUBMAIN: SCH 40 GAUGE WWM, WRAP ENDS OF SCREEN BRICK BLOCKING NOTE: 1. VALVES 2. BUNDLE 3. PROVIDE CONNECTION SHALL BE 6" BELOW TOP OF VALVE BOX AND TAPE WIRE EVERY 10 FEET 36" EXPANSION LOOP AT WIRE Intentionally Left Blank Control Valve Intentionally Left Blank @Remote 1" = 1'-0" 1" = 1'-0" © 1" = 1'-0" VALVE BOX W/ BOLT DOWN IBY 'D' LID: SEE SPECS. ALEXIS DOMINGUEZ........ DISTANCE FROM PAVING OR HEADERBOARD FINISH GRADE. SEE SPECS gk CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs D IS EQUAL TO RISER HEIGHT. �j� �j� FOR RELATION TO TOP OF LANDSCAPE ARCHFI'ECTURE, INC. �e\,pNDSC4p1 VALVE BOX D04,_444.. \�\V% \\ Ai \ \ \yU fl I I L J \�\y/ I I fl \� so �. I I I I( I� EI e 0 DATE FINISH GRADE: FLUSH W/ HEAD. Z , is 4833 Saratoga Blvd. #116Corpus it. R+ c SEE NOTE BELOW 111E111E — — —1-1— — ` P(' St Q — — — —I Christi, 78413 ��. I �—III—� 4� 1I=III-1 P14 36128 2335X 0 Z =I -II IIIIII- ,s• PX 361.288.7312 C ���y '— — SPRAY HEAD SEE IRRIGATION PLANS W III=1= 1 —� (=III—' �C.:� —I III I— 1� - : R Z - - SCH 40 MARLEX STREET ELLS, TYP. Q - FV -I I 1E11 IE -III III— - 1 I- TRUE UNION BALL VALVE: @ EM adlandarch(i�gmaiLcom �O INSTALL W/ HANDLE SIDE `� .. IREVISION NO. _i ASSEMBLE AS A 3-SWING JOINT H0- 1E11PVC - SCH. 40 45's W/ NIPPLES AS w REQUIRED, 18" LENGTH, TYP. ALL IRRIGATION WORK SHOWN ON THIS 12" NIPPLE: SCH 80 PVC ci PVC SCH. 40 COUPLING TYP. I ' SHEET SHALL BE BID AS ALTERNATE #3. _ 2 \ / IRRIGATION SUPPLY LINE, TYP. l PVC LATERAL: SEE SPECS Q ' ' 1 DESCRIPTION \ SCH 40 FITTING Al –I I I— 11=IIIIII111=� -_ °�Y .....i, i .4_9.oe•oM., r T — - �- 1 — CIl. 111= 1= 'It II ; II,„,III„III,„,II III— 1� , ,I BRICK BLOCKING NOTE: RODENT PROTECTION SCREEN: X” X X” 19 GAUGE 1. ALL IRRIGATION HEADS GRADE, NOT FLUSH TO TOP 2. ALL IRRIGATION HEADS USED OF TO BE IN CURB INSTALLED PLANTED SHRUB AREAS TO BE INSTALLED TO FINAL OR SIDEWALK. PERPENDICULAR TO FINAL GRADE. WWM, WRAP ENDS OF SCREEN HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE HEB TENNIS CENTER IRRIGATION DETAILS 3. ALL IRRIGATION HEADS TO BE INSTALLED WITH SWING JOINTS AS SHOWN. 1/2" PEA GRAVEL OR DRAIN-ROCK: 4" DEPTH 4. ALL POP-UP IRRIGATION HEADS SHALL HAVE CHECK VALVE INSTALLED IN THEM. COMPACTED SUBGRADE NOTE: BALL VALVES SHALL BE INSTALLED ON PIPE SIZES UP TO 3". RESILIENT SEATED VALVES ON PIPE OF BALL VALVE SHALL BE PARALLEL OVER 3". THE HANDLE TO THE SIDE OF PIPE. Head /5\I Ball Valve Intentionally Left Blank USpray 1" = 1'-0" \ 1" = 1'-0" © 1". 1'-0" FINISH GRADE. SEE SPECS FOR RELATION TO TOP OF VALVE BOX VALVE IDENTIFICATION TYPE: MFG MODEL NUMBER. GLUE PLATES TO COVER PGA VALVE BOX W/ BOLT DOWN LID: VALVE BOX W/ BOLT DOWN LID: i-SOV� SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. A16 CONTROLLER / / STATION (VALVE ID#): QC QUICK COUPLER VALVE : SEE EPDXY / PASTE / RIVET / BRAND ON LID BALL VALVE: SEE ( 5/- IRRIGATION PLANS 36" LONG #4 REBAR STAKE W/ 0 VALVE BOX COVER K_ 0 9} RAIN SHUT-OFF SWITCH: MOUNT IN LOCATION FOR UN-OBSTRUCTED NAN/ \/ \A\/_ \/ STAINLESS STEEL CLAMPS IN 2 RAINFALL, AND OUT OF THE WAY OF '��. TWO LOCATIONS _ _ _ REMOTE CONTROL VALVE BOX QUICK COUPLER BOX SHUT OFF VALVE BOX SPRAY. =III—III — —�-� = SCH 80 PVC NIPPLE }- 2" ANGLE IRON X 24" LONG W/SPRINKLER 12 MIN 12'MIN I1 1 I—I 1 I— CONTROLLER: ATTACH TO WALL PER SxS 1= _ III STAINLESS PIPE CLAMP _11 —III l II MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS PVC SUBMAIN II— 4" LONG SCH 80 PVC RISER I �L� 1L 2" SCH 80 STREET ELLS �v PVC MAIN _ I= �� ®® `' ♦ 120 VOLT WIRE IN STEEL CONDUIT SUPPLY LINE o•a �i �� •BLOCKING, ■ Ems 10c9°o - L _ •_ _� BRICK TYP. �� �♦�®� �♦� • VALVE BOXES FROM ELECTRIC SOURCE 1/2" PEA GRAVEL: 4" DEPTH, TYP. J L�/'� \Illp . .�� to:VALVE WIRES IN STEEL CONDUIT om° •°• �� RODENT PROTECTION SCREEN: A� EDGE OF PATH OR WALL (INSTALL 18 GA. MULTI STRAND FROM A' %2° X %2" 19 GAUGE WWM, WRAP SPLICE BOX TO CONTROLLER) ENDS OF SCREEN ,- ALIG BUILDING WALL KING BROS OR APPROVED EQUAL Z BRICK BLOCKING, TYP. BY SPEAR: SCH 80 1x12 OR 3/4x12 FINISH GRADE 1/2" PEA GRAVEL: 4" DEPTH, TYP. NOTE: SCH 80 STREET ELL RODENT PROTECTION SCREEN: %2" X )2 19 SCH 80 TEE 1. ALL VALVE BOXES NEED TO BE IDENTIFIED. EPDXY / PASTE / RIVET / BRAND VALVE ID # ON BOX. VALVE WIRE 2. VALVE BOXES SHALL HAVE 12" CLEARANCE FROM STRUCTURES AND ANY CONCRETE AREAS. SET BOXES PARALLEL GAUGE WWM, WRAP ENDS OF SCREEN VALVE BOX (SPLICE BOX) SIZE AS PVC SUBMAIN SCH 80 PVC NIPPLE SxS TO EACH OTHER AND PERPENDICULAR TO CONCRETE, SOUND WALL, HEADERBOARD, ETC. 2. SET BOXES 1-1 /2" ABOVE FINISHED GRADE IN MULCH-COVERED AREAS. SET BOXES 1/2" ABOVE GRADE IN TURF AREAS. BOXES NEEDED FOR WIRE SPLICE MIN. 18" COIL CONTROL WIRES TO BE PERPENDICULAR TO FINISH GRADE IDATE TE: N1 OGROUP QUICK COUPLER WITH VALVES FOR USE OF COMMON ISOLATION BALL VALVE. 2. SCHEDULE 80 PRE-ASSEMBLED SWING MAY BE USED ONLY. 3. SET RCV AND VALVE BOX ASSEMBLY IN GROUND COVER / SHRUB AND NOT IN SIDEWALK OR ROADWAY. 4. INSTALL EXTENSION BY VALVE BOX MANUFACTURER AS REQUIRED TO COMPLETELY ENCLOSE ASSEMBLY FOR EASY ACCESS. 5. VALVE BOXES THAT ARE RECTANGULAR SHALL HAVE 4 COMMON BRICKS INSTALLED UNDER EACH CORNER._" 11 0 III= . 4 • `O'cp = 111=1 I1-1111E_,/ P!j III= " /= 3" PEA GRAVEL SUMP SHEET 006 of 82 3. DO NOT INSTALL DIRECTLY ON TOP OF LIVE WATER MAINS. 4. BALL VALVE. MAY BE INSTALLED TO MAXIMUM OF 12" FROM FINAL GRADE WITH THE USE OF 45-DEGREE PIPE FITTINGS OR LEFT STRAIGHT IN LINE AT 18" DEEP ROUND VALVE BOXES SHALL HAVE 2 COMMON BRICKS INSTALLED UNDER THEM. THE BRICKS ARE ADDED FOR STABILITY. BRICKS SHALL NEVER BE PLACED OVER ANY PIPE OR ITEM THAT COULD FAIL DUE TO BRICK PLACEMENT. 6. AVOID HEAVILY COMPACTING SOIL AROUND VALVE BOXES TO PREVENT COLLAPSE AND DEFORMATION OF VALVE BOX SIDES. . • 11 III 11TiI �" III Ill 11 l IIS IIII li RECORD DRAWING NO. CP-204 z o Fli w a Quick Coupler 4 Valve Box Installation ,� Controller - Wall Mount Exterior (-7 1 " = v_0" 1"= 1'-0" 1 " = 1'-0„ CITY PROJECT# E12118 3000 PSI CONCRETE SIDEWALK --II 1/8" 1 2" REINFORCEMENT SIDEWALK MARKING DETAIL (DUMMY JOINTS) NOT TO SCALE SIDEWALK NOTES ; 1. STANDARD SIDEWALK SHALL NOT EXCEED 2% CROSS SLOPE AND SHALL NOT EXCEED 5% RUNNING SLOPE. 2. ALL EXPANSION JOINTS TO BE 3/4" THICK REDWOOD FOR FULL DEPTH OF SIDEWALK, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 3. ALL CONCRETE CLASS "A", 3,000 psi. ALL STEEL, GRADE 60, fy = 60,000 psi. 4. MINIMUM SIDEWALK CONCRETE THICKNESS = 4" EXPANSION BOARD CAP SEAL ,¢5x12' REBAR OR 3/4" DOWEL FIXED EN 3/4" REDWOOD EXPANSION JOINT co z SEE PLAN NOTE: PLANES OF WEAKNESS (DUMMY JOINTS) 1/2" DEEP SHALL BE TOOLED INTO SIDEWALK AT A SPACING EQUAL TO THE WIDTH OF THE SIDEWALK. NO. 4 DOWELS X 18" LONG ► ONE END SLEEVED OR GREASED X3/4" THICK EXPANSION JOINT O.C., MAX. i 4 x 4-W2.9 x W2.9 WELDED WIRE FABRIC *12" FOR 8' WALK PLAN OFT TO LKSIDEWA NOSCALE NEW SID ALK WELDED WIRE MESH REINFORCED OVER TOP OF DOWELS SEAL ANNULAR SPACE WITH POLYURETHANE JOINT SEALANT PER SPECIFICATION. ACKER R00 - td - /4' SPEED LS ¶RAN�FER SYSTEM IPSO 3/4 Li. -LOOSE FIT 1' SAND MIN. SIDEWALK/RAMP 11E TO FOUNDATION N.T.S. EXISTINGr a'.:. EOUNDATION. CO 18" 18" • .1• 3� ' 1,OUNDATION 6" 15 SECTION A -A DOWEL LOCATION (TYPICAL? NEW SIDEWALK INTERFACE WITH FOUNDATION N.T.S. EXISTING ASPHALTIC if PAVEMENT f 2" MIN. HMAC TYPE 'D' OVERLAY TACK COAT ASPHALT MILL & OVERLAY SECTION 0 1' 2' 3' 4' EXISTING a FOUNDATION ILL EXISTING CONCRETE FOR ffix12' SMOOTH DOWELS 0 18 0.C. SEE DOWEL. LOCATION DETAIL I• 3/4' REDWOOD EXPANSION JOINT RESERVED PARKING 3" 3" COLORS: LEGEND AND BORDER - GREEN; BACKGROUND - WHITE; WHITE SYMBOL ON BLUE BACKGROUND. }2 Ni $50-200 FINE } 11 +^ ITHOUT VEHICL I PERMIT 12" A } COLORS. LEGEND AND BORDER - GREEN BACKGROUND - WHITE PROVIDE 2° DIA. SCH. 80 GALV. PIPE WITH 30" MIN. BURY IN 12" DIA. CONCRETE MOUNTING HARDWARE SHALL BE HOT DIP GALVANIZED. NOTE: ALL ACCESSIBLE STRIPING, RAMPS, AND SIGNAGE SHALL COMPLY WITH TEXAS ACCESSIBUTLY STANDARDS (TAS) AS ADOPTED DEC. 17, 1993 OR LATEST REASONS. NOTE ONE SIGN PER ACCESSIBLE PARKING SPACE PERMANENTLY MOUNTED ON POLE MIN. 5' HIGH. ACCESSIBILITY SIGN DETAIL N.T.S. } RESERVED PARKING 3" 3" 1 • -i�i EAN ACCESSIBLE) "1 } uP } 11< LEGEND AND BORDER - GREEN; BACKGROUND - WHITE; WHITE SYMBOL ON BLUE BACKGROUND. ONLY RR VAN ACCESSIBLE SPACES (AIN. OF I OUT OF 8 RESRVID SPACES SHALL BE DESIGNATED VAN ACCESSIBLE AND BE SERVED BY AN AISLE AT LEAST B' FADE) I\ f^II_ IQ $50-200 FINE ITHOUT VEHICL PERMIT 12" } COLORS LEGEND AND BORDER - GREEN BACKGROUND - WHITE ti- PROVIDE 2" DIA. SCH. 80 GALV. PIPE WITH 30" MIN. BURY IN 12" DIA. CONCRETE MOUNTING HARDWARE SHALL BE HOT DIP GALVANIZED. * NO SEPARATE PAYMENT FOR ACCESSIBIUTY SIGNS. IT IS SUBSIDIARY TO REMAINDER OF PROJECT. NOTE: ONE SIGN PER ACCESSIBLE PARKING SPACE PERMANENTLY MOUNTED ON POLE MIN. 5' HIGH. VAN ACCESSIBLE SIGN DETAIL N.T.S. ADD ALTERNATES LIST A. ADD ALTERNATE NO. 1 - HEB TENNIS CENTER 1. ADDITION OF TWO (2) 36' TENNIS COURTS ON SUSPENDED CONCRETE SLAB. INCLUDE ALL FENCING, ACRYLIC SURFACING, GATES, LIGHTING, NETTING & SIDEWALKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE ADDITION OF THESE COURTS. APPROXIMATE AREA FOR THESE COURTS IS 3,738 SF (63' X 59'-4"). B. ADD ALTERNATE N0. 2 - AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTER 1. MILL 2" EXISTING ASPHALT ON EXISTING PARKING LOT & OVERLAY WITH NEW 2" ASPHALT PAVING AS SPECIFIED. INCLUDE IN PROPOSAL REPAIR OF POT HOLES (TXDOT STANDARDS) AND INCLUDE ALL NECESSARY STRIPPING, ADA SIGNS AND WHEELS STOPS. PAVING AREA IS APPROXIMATELY 8,338 SF. C. ADD ALTERNATE NO. 3 - HEB TENNIS CENTER 1. DRIP IRRIGATION REFER TO LANDSCAPING SHEETS 002 THRU 006. INCLUDE ALL WORK ASSOCIATED WITH THE SCOPE SHOWN ON LANDSCAPING DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. D. ADD ALTERNATE N0. 4 - HEB TENNIS CENTER 1. FLATWORK AND STRUCTURAL PIERS FOR FUTURE SHADE STRUCTURE. PROVIDE ALL WORK ASSOCIATED WITH THE INSTALLATION OF THE STRUCTURAL PIERS, ELECTRICAL AND FLATWORK. AREA TO BE 5,399 SF (44'-6" X 121'-4") AS SHOWN ON PLANS. E. ADD ALTERNATE N0. 5 - HEB TENNIS CENTER 1. PRE -FABRICATED MAINTENANCE STORAGE UNIT "MORGAN BUILDING OR EQUAL" 20FT X 30F7. ALTERNATE TO ALSO INCLUDE ELECTRICAL, PAD AND ANCHORAGE. FLAT WORK PAD AREA FOR THIS ALTERNATE IS 2,210 SF (74'-6" X 29'-8") REFER TO PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS. F. ADD ALTERNATE N0. 6 - HEB TENNIS CENTER 1. COURTS 9 & 10, REMOVE FOUR EXISTING INTERIOR LIGHT POLES. REPLACE FOUR EXISTING CORNER LIGHT POLES WITH NEW LIGHT POLES & LIGHTS TO ILLUMINATE COURTS 9, 10, & 11. INCLUDE ALL WORK NECESSARY FOR THIS SCOPE. General Notes 1. ALL SLOPES ARE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE. THE LEAST POSSIBLE SLOPE THAT WILL STILL DRAIN PROPERLY SHOULD BE USED. RAMP LENGTH OR GRADE OF APPROACH SIDEWALKS MAY BE ADJUSTED AS DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER. 2. THE MINIMUM SIDEWALK WIDTH IS 5'. WHERE A 5' SIDEWALK CAN NOT BE PROVIDED DUE TO SITE CONSTRAINTS, A MINIMUM 3' SIDEWALK WITH 5'X 5' PASSING AREAS AT INTERVALS NOT TO EXCEED 200 FT 15 REQUIRED. 3. LANDINGS SHALL BE 25 S.F. MINIMUM WITH A MAXIMUM 2% SLOPE IN ANY DIRECTION. 4. MANEUVERING SPACE AT THE BOTTOM OF CURB RAMPS SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 4'X 4' WHOLLY CONTAINED WITHIN THE CROSSWALK AND WHOLLY OUTSIDE THE PARALLEL VEHICULAR TRAVEL PATH. 5. MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE CROSS SLOPE ON SIDEWALK AND RAMP SURFACES IS 2%. 6. CURB RAMPS WITH RETURNED CURBS MAY BE USED ONLY WHERE PEDESTRIANS WOULD NOT NORMALLY WALK ACROSS THE RAMP. OTHERWISE, FLARED SIDES SHALL BE PROVIDED. 7. ALL CONCRETE SURFACES SHALL RECEIVE A LIGHT BROOM FINISH UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE IN THE PLANS. 8. RAMP TEXTURES IN PUBLIC ROW MUST CONSIST OF TRUNCATED DOMED SURFACES FOR RAMPS TEXTURES ARE REQUIRED TO BE DETECTABLE UNDERFOOT. SURFACES THAT WOULD ALLOW WATER TO ACCUMULATE ARE PROHIBITED. 9. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON CURB RAMP LOCATION, DESIGN, LIGHT REFLECTIVE VALUE AND TEXTURE MAY BE FOUND IN THE CURRENT EDITION OF THE TEXAS ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS (TAS) PREPARED AND ADMINISTERED BY THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF LICENSING AND REGULATION (TDLR). 10. RAISED MEDIANS SEPARATE OPPOSING DIRECTIONS OF TRAFFIC AND PROVIDE A REFUGE AREA FOR PEDESTRIANS UNABLE TO CROSS THE ENTIRE ROADWAY IN THE ALLOTTED SIGNAL PHASE. TO SERVE AS A REFUGE AREA, THE MEDIAN SHOULD BE A MINIMUM OF 5' WIDE. MEDIANS SHOULD BE DESIGNED TO PROVIDE ACCESSIBLE PASSAGE OVER OR THROUGH THEM. 11. SMALL CHANNEUZATION ISLANDS, WHICH CAN NOT PROVIDE A MINIMUM 5'X 5' LANDING AT THE TOP OF RAMPS, SHALL BE CUT THROUGH LEVEL WITH THE SURFACE OF THE STREET. 12. CROSSWALK DIMENSIONS, CROSSWALK MARKINGS AND STOP BAR LOCATIONS SHALL BE AS SHOWN ELSEWHERE IN THE PLANS. AT INTERSECTIONS WHERE CROSSWALK MARKINGS ARE NOT REQUIRED, RAMPS SHALL BE ALIGNED WITH THEORETICAL CROSSWALKS, OR AS DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER. 13. EXISTING FEATURES THAT COMPLY WITH TAS MAY REMAIN IN PLACE UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN ON THE PLANS. 14. HANDRAILS ARE NOT REQUIRED ON CURB RAMPS. CURB RAMPS SHALL BE PROVIDED WHEREVER ON ACCESSIBLE ROUTE CROSSES (PENETRATES) A CURB. 15. SHADED AREAS INDICATE LOCATIONS OF DETECTABLE WARNINGS. (COLOR / LIGHT REFLECTIVE VALUE AND TEXTURE CONTRAST) ACCESSIBLE NOTES 1. MAXIMUM SLOPE ON BARRIER FREE RAMPS MUST NOT EXCEED 1" PER FOOT AT ANY LOCATION. MAXIMUM CROSS SLOPE SHALL NOT EXCEED 1/4" PER FOOT. 2. DESIGNS SHOWN ARE FOR 6" CURBS. FOR CURBS WITH HEIGHT OTHER THAN 6", DIMENSION MUST BE ADJUSTED PROPORTIONATELY. 3. LOCATION OF BARRIER FREE RAMP MAY BE SHIFTED TO CLEAR OBSTRUCTIONS. 4. LOCATION - 4.1. CURB RAMPS SHALL BE PROVIDED WHEREVER AN ACCESSIBLE ROUTE CROSSES A CURB. 5. SLOPE - 5.1. TRANSITIONS FROM RAMPS TO WALKS, GUTTERS, OR STREETS SHALL BE FLUSH AND FREE OF ABRUPT CHANGES. MAXIMUM SLOPES OF ADJOINING GUTTERS, ROAD SURFACE IMMEDIATELY ADJACENT TO THE CURB RAMP, OR ACCESSIBLE ROUTE SHALL NOT EXCEED 1:20. THE MINIMUM WIDTH OF A CURB RAMP SHALL BE 36 IN., EXCLUSIVE OF FLARED SIDES. 6. WIDTH - 6.1. THE FULL WIDTH AND DEPTH OF CURB RAMPS ARE NOT REQUIRED. 7. SURFACE FINISH OF CURB RAMPS - 7.1. PRIVATE PROPERTY- TO HAVE A LIGHT REFLECTIVE VALUE AND TEXTURE THAT SIGNIFICANTLY CONTRASTS WITH THAT OF ADJOINING PEDESTRIAN ROUTES 7.2. PUBUC RIGHT-OF-WAY- FOR PURPOSES OF WARNING, THE FULL WIDTH AND 2' MINIMUM DEPTH OF THE SHORTEST SIDE OF CURB RAMPS SHALL HAVE A LIGHT REFLECTIVE VALUE AND TRUNCATED DOME TEXTURE THAT SIGNIFICANTLY CONTRASTS WITH THAT OF ADJOINING PEDESTRIAN ROUTES. 8. CONTRACTOR IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR RAMP AND SIDEWALK CONSTRUCTION COMPLYING WITH ALL CURRENT ADA REQUIREMENTS PLUS TEXAS ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS INCLUDING SLOPES, TEXTURE, COLOR CONTRASTS AND ELEVATIONS. PARKING SPACE NOTES: 1. ALL ACCESSIBLE STRIPING AND SIGNAGE SHALL COMPLY WITH TEXAS ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS (TAS) AS ADOPTED MARCH 15, 2012 OR LATEST REVISION. 2. ACTUAL PARKING SPACE DIMENSIONS MAY VARY SEE PLAN FOR ACTUAL LOCATION LAYOUT OR DIMENSIONS. 3. PARKING AREA STRIPING SHALL BE SHERWN WILLIAMS SET FAST ACRYLIC LATEX TRAFFIC MARKING PAINT (YELLOW-TM2161, BLUE -D/2133, RED-TM2132) AND SHALL BE A TWO COAT APPLICATION YIELDING A 15 MIL FILM THICKNESS. 4. NO SEPARATE PAYMENT FOR ACCESSIBILITY SIGNS, SYMBOLS, ETC. THEY ARE SUBSIDIARY TO REMAINDER OF PROJECT. GENERAL CONTRACTOR NOTES 1. REFERENCE M.E.P. DRAWINGS FOR MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL & PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS. 2. REFERENCE LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS FOR IRRIGATION DESIGN. 3. REFERENCE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS. 4. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE LOCATION OF SITE ACCESS AND CONSTRUCTION STAGING WITH OWNER. MATERIALS ARE TO BE STORED OFF SITE. 5. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO SECURE EACH AREA OF WORK FROM PUBLIC ACCESS. AREA OF WORK TO REMAIN SECURED UNTIL ACCEPTED FINAL COMPLETION. 6. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL, BY SUBMISSION OF HIS BID, OBLIGATE HIMSELF TO ALL REQUIREMENTS OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AS STATED ON THE DRAWINGS AND IN THE SPECIFICATIONS. 7. PRIOR TO BID SUBMITTAL, THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL CAREFULLY STUDY AND COMPARE THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS WITH EACH OTHER AND WITH INFORMATION FURNISHED BY THE OWNER, AND SHALL AT ONCE REPORT TO THE ARCHITECT ERRORS, INCONSISTENCIES AND OMISSIONS DISCOVERED. 8. PRIOR TO BID SUBMITTAL, THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE AND VERIFY FIELD CONDITIONS AND CAREFULLY COMPARE SUCH FIELD CONDITIONS AND OTHER INFORMATION KNOWN TO THE CONTRACTOR WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. ERRORS, INCONSISTENCIES AND OMISSIONS DISCOVERED SHALL BE REPORTED TO THE ARCHITECT AT ONCE. 9. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BID THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS AS DETAILED AND INSURE A FULL FINISHED PROJECT WITH NO ADDITIONAL COSTS INVOLVED OVER WHAT IS INCLUDED IN THE DOCUMENTS UNLESS MODIFIED BY CHANGE ORDER. 10. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE FIELD MEASUREMENTS AND VERIFY FIELD CONDITIONS AND SHALL CAREFULLY COMPARE SUCH FIELD MEASUREMENTS AND CONDITIONS AND OTHER INFORMATION KNOWN TO THE CONTRACTOR WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS BEFORE COMMENCING ACTIVITIES. 11. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL SUPERVISE AND DIRECT THE WORK, USING THE CONTRACTOR'S BEST SKILL AND ATTENTION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR CONSTRUCTION MEANS, METHODS, TECHNIQUES, SEQUENCES, AND PROCEDURES AND FOR COORDINATING ALL TRADES, AND ALL PORTIONS OF THE WORK UNDER THE CONTRACT, UNLESS CONTRACT DOCUMENTS GIVE OTHER SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS. 12. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL REPORT ANY UNFORESEEN FIELD CONDITIONS, ERRORS, INCONSISTENCIES AND OMISSIONS DISCOVERED AT ANY TIME BEFORE AND DURING THE WORK TO THE ARCHITECT, BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THAT PORTION OF THE WORK, AS HE WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL WORK AFFECTING THE PROJECT. 13. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO THE OWNER FOR ACTS AND OMISSIONS OF THE CONTRACTOR'S EMPLOYEES, SUBCONTRACTORS AND THEIR AGENTS AND EMPLOYEES, AND OTHER PERSONS PERFORMING PORTIONS OF HIS WORK UNDER A CONTRACT WITH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. 14. IF A CHANGE IS REQUESTED, THE ARCHITECT SHALL ISSUE AN APPROPRIATE CHANGE ORDER REQUEST, WHICH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PRICE OUT ACCORDINGLY. 15. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COVER NO WORK UNTIL REQUIRED INSPECTIONS HAVE BEEN MADE. 16. ALL WORK SHALL CONFORM TO THE INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE, 2009 EDITION. 17. ALL HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBLE REQUIREMENTS SHALL CONFORM TO THE ARCHITECTURAL BARRIERS TEXAS ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS (TAS), 2012 EDITION. 18. GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO PROTECT EXISTING CONSTRUCTION & FINISHES FROM DAMAGE AND/OR NEW FINISHES. GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO REPAIR AND/OR REFINISH EXISTING CONSTRUCTION & FINISHES RESULTING FROM NEW WORK AT THE EXPENSE OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. ti DESCRIPTION >- m CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. A-0.1 DATE:02/20/2015 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com ri 4- 0 Capital Programs (1) oes0 gcc ocC CC0 O LL,I W SHEET 007 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. ° CP -204 z z O 0 cc CITY PROJECT# E12118 ./ ` \ z U w o CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. AA -O • 1 HEB- SITE DEMOLITION KEYED NOTES / /• •/ `�/ � HEB GENERAL SITE DEMOLITION NOTES: OEXISTING BUILDING TO BE CONVERTED TO NEW PRO SHOP. SEE DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN FOR EXTENT OF DEMOLITION WORK. / / \ ' \ . 1. ALL MATERIALS WILL BE BROUGHT THROUGH THE EXISTING GATE, LOCATED AT THE SOUTH EASTERN SIDE OF THE / \ FACILITY OFF OF TOMPKINS STREET. , a..�� ttDAIQ • y� �. EXISTING •. S'�� e. 1 y n �� `*• `\ REMOVE EXISTING VIEWING PLATFORM, STAIRS, & SEATING, UPPER COLUMNS SUPPORTING ROOF CANOPY, AND THE EXISTING ROOF CANOPY. A PORTION OF THE EXISTING LOWER COLUMNS WILL REMAIN. REFER TO EXISTING PROPERTY LINE / / . \ j / \ 2.DEMOLITION WILL BEGIN ON THE PRACTICE COURT AND CONCRETE STADIUM FIRST. GENERAL CONTRACTOR WILL UTILIZE \ \ \ THIS PART OF THE SITE AS A "LAY DOWN" AREA FOR ALL MATERIALS AND THE JOB TRAILER. VERIFY FINAL LOCATION OF / RENOVATION PLAN & STRUCTURAL FOR EXTENT OF NEW PLATFORM CONSTRUCTION. / / \ JOB TRAILER WITH OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE AND ARCHITECT. REMOVE CONCRETE STADIUM STANDS AND ALL STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS, ROOF> FOUNDATION, AND / \ /' / / - \ \ 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROTECT ALL "AREA INLETS" FROM CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE ' Om SURROUNDING PAVING. INCLUDE ASSOCIATED LIGHTING & HANDRAILS. CONTRACTOR TO VISIT FACILITIES PRIOR TO / \ / \' FOR CLEANING AREA INLETS DURING CONSTRUCTION. SITE DEMOLITION SHALL NOT INTERFERE WITH UNDERGROUND STORM • tr. � jr. °1P_O_ F Iv' - �� DATE: 02/20/2015 BIDDING. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE TO INCLUDE ALL COSTS ASSOCIATED WITH DEMOLITION SCOPE. FOOTING EXISTING EASEMENT \ \ DRAIN SYSTEM. /. DEMOLITION FOR ALL VERTICAL STRUCTURES SHALL BE REMOVED TO A DEPTH OF 3'-0" BELOW FINISH GRADE. / \ \ / ` / r ' REMOVE EXISTING ELEVATED PLATFORM, STAIRS 8c SEATING, ASSOCIATED STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS, ROOF CANOPY, / \ ' " 4. REFER TO SHEET AA -0.2 FOR CONSTRUCTION PHASING SCHEDULE. ' j \ 4O FOUNDATION, SURROUNDING PAVING, AND LIGHTING. CONTRACTOR TO VISIT FACILITIES PRIOR TO BIDDING. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE TO INCLUDE ALL COSTS ASSOCIATED WITH DEMOLITION SCOPE. FOOTING DEMOLITION FOR ALL VERTICAL STRUCTURES SHALL BE REMOVED TO A DEPTH OF 3'-0" BELOW FINISH GRADE. / / / • / r-,------ _ T -n r -T -1-1 r -n- T -n r � \ \ \ _ EXISTING EASEMENT / 1111101 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY I;I SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com / 0 REMOVE EXISTING TENNIS COURT DOWN TO GRADE. (ASPHALT/CONCRETE ETC.) PREPARE AREA FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION. (SEE RENOVATION SITE PLAN - SHEET 009 AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL/ / . / /' 1 rtlmn 1 \ `-._ \ PROPERTY INFORMATION ON SHEET 041). / /./ —, —i ® --T -i 0 F- -, - - i g 1 111111 um nuu \ T, O i 1 \ EXISTING LINE \ \ \ U REMOVE AND SALVAGE EXISTING WIND SCREEN FOR RE -INSTALLATION BY CONTRACTOR./ /. . lin , 20 30 PRE- AB mL: --, %_, REMOVE EXISTING FENCING FABRIC. EXISTING FENCE POSTS TO REMAIN. SALVAGE GATES, HARDWARE AND / • / 4- ¢-; limen T: RAGE UNIT%ELEC r ,y \ \ 7 O WINDSCREENS FOR RE -INSTALLATION BY CONTRACTOR. cd -_4. _-r_� +- L_ . ¢-¢ _ r�--- Rini iiiiiiii 11111111 �XDAREA ,('•�� 1 ; c''' \\ \ / R SALVAGE AND RE -USE NET ON RENOVATED COURT. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR MAINTAINING THE INTEGRITY OF THE EXISTING NET. CONTRACTOR TO REINSTALL. / • r 1 1 n i %' i r -T- n -n 1 \ 9 REMOVE EXISTING NET POSTS & CONCRETE FOOTINGS AND DISCARD. / / / F 1---i F i 1 i H----_—� 11111111 11111111 LLLLuli ; ■ ' / ' \ . \ \ \' \ 10 REMOVE EXISTING "PRACTICE COURT" WALL, ASSOCIATED FENCING, AND EXISTING SLAB. PREPARE SOIL FOR NEW /• / L_1 1_J L_1 ! 1_J L_1 1_J I I 1--- ____T \ \ . \ \ CONSTRUCTION. (SEE RENOVATION SITE PLAN SHEET 09). /'// I E ©,® 11 \ \\ 1 1 REMOVE AND SALVAGE EXISTING SHADE STRUCTURE & BENCH FOR RE -INSTALLATION BY CONTRACTOR. /• / I j sTAD UM \ \ / I COU T r 1 \•\ „ \ REMOVE EXISTING TREES AND SHRUBS TO MAKE ROOM FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION. (SEE RENOVATION SITE PLAN / �l', Li \ ! i 12 ® - SHEET 009). �/ b 1 FUTURE ,q \\ / 0 ` a\ \13 REMOVE EXISTING SHRUBS AND ROOT SYSTEM. PREP FOR NEW SIDEWALK AT THIS LOCATION. / / / OSHADE E 1 1 i-- y \ ' \ 1 \ \ \ REMOVE EXISTING AND/OR PORTION OF EXISTING SIDEWALK AS SHOWN. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE CAUTIOUS IN AREAS OF SIDEWALK DEMOLITION AROUND "AREA DRAINS." AREA DRAINS SHALL REMAIN FUNCTIONAL AND CLEAR OF DEBRIS DURING DEMOLITION AND NEW CONSTRUCTION.. /LATW /// r -T 1 I ! T ' r -T T-, ( .TRUCTURE. ' RK & -,!ERS ALT. 4) ' , INEW ? SLAB SLgSpSNDED i NEW SU" ' NDED \ 1E080 SF ------------ — SLAB (ALT. 1) . / F 1 ' 1 -3773/3 -sr- / 15 O REMOVE PORTION OFL EXISTING LANDSCAPING AND PREP FOR NEW SIDEWALK CONSTRUCTION. REFERENCE RENOVATION SITE PLAN -SHEET 009. /. // --T ? ; i F - r , = 5,399 SF I 7 m / 16 REMOVE EXISTING AGED/DAMAGED WIND SCREENS AND DISPOSE OF. / / • / r--1 © r--1 8 mi null nrrrrn �\ . 111 111 ;11 CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs 42____,4____44_____ 2-r� ___-�: <"r r r -f `: 11 111 nl ; ,,-r / REMOVE EXISTING LIGHT POLE. //•Itil CA'� II IIIr0 Or til 10 %Tiffw DATE I 18 EXISTING COURT TO REMAIN. NO WORK IN THIS AREA UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. / 11 +�' dU fit. ' e , " ii ' I __t_____ _ i'i • / / ` _ ir� n 41, ® •/ "CONCRETE / F — y -- —y --i . \19/ ■ ��� ��e ►ice n- tie' 11,1 �► 1 M ►�� �S ►� 11 19 EXISTING DRAIN GUTTER" TO REMAIN. (FLOOR GUTTER .SYSTEM DIRECTS STORM WATER TO EXISTING /• / L _ �."•.- ✓1► •'•__�'• •/!• •'+_J AAs • •'• _/i• i AREA DRAINS). / AI _tea ' 1 / 20 EXISTING PRO SHOP BUILDING. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWING SHEET 74 FOR ELECTRICAL WORK. 0 p O / IREVISION NO. ./// L y----------------y-J L 1-J 0 -y-_-_-- 21 EXISTING TENNIS COURTS AT PAVILION NO WORK REQUIRED / // LOUNGE I. NOVATION O r -T- T-, r --1-T 22 REMOVE EXISTING ENTRY GATE & HARDWARE. ( ALT. 3) i ' i 1 / • ® 0 EXISTING ENTRY GATE TO REMAIN. / / L_; � _7 0 �-__-_T_/_-�---i F -r 1 '/ • • • 8 / 24 RENOVATE EXISTING LOUNGE BUILDING. SEE REFERENCED DRAWINGS FOR EXTENT OF DEMOLITION WOR!/ g4° °a n 1 \ / / O IREVISED KEY NOTES 1 DESCRIPTION 25 REMOVE THIS SECTION OF LOW CHAIN LINK FENCING TO BE REPLACED WITH 10'-0" CHAINLINK F 1'�C,E AND ° EX r o `'t-�-"-�-� ; r T�c -! � �-� �-¢ � --- LJ - --1-4 ~ -- /EXISTING ENTRY GATE WINDSCREEN. / F T— T-, r -T T-, 1 1 1 a , �� / :� :° 1 OFF OF TOMPKINS / 1 1 1 e STREET; CONSTRUCTION / 0 ; 1 1 0" n— ° (- a o n 1 9a24 i i ft 1 1— / ENTRY POINT. SEE // F-- a H F- i — —� / F -r-----I T -- o GENERAL NOTE #1. / /1 0 n ° HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE HEB TENNIS CENTER DEMOLITION SITE PLAN ' ' i_J / / / / ______8______6i______7____ _ _JY _ 1 11111111 nnlll — L_L L_y Yy_J 11111111 W / : la 00 / LLLWJJ , / / 19;.. (jUlft• 1 EXIST. LOCKER R - �' —� -- o ~/ / / / F- ---"----1 1 F --i--- �� o a o i /// o o pR�, •P Km r/�I�r i EXISThN,G RAMP - E • 10 yI rr /. / 1 t �I _r ©Il lwl I I1 r �.1 1.J / / L_L 1-J L-y-------W-y-J Wa / O 22 r \ \ , ©' / . COVERED COVER ID COVER D -/ e 'LI- c / EXISTpI\G PAVILION © EXISTING PROPERTY LINE < , NOT COURTS IN CONTRAC- \ I-1 ©• EH LJ © © / b_J 18 _ / / �— © -. . ©- M © IJ. HUERTA \ ` / • / IDATE I • / SHEET 008 of 82 a_ � / / RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 _ — / / A DEMOLITION SITE PLAN / ® 0 16' 32' 64' z o -(7) _ j LT tr SCALE: 1 32" = 1'-�" NORTH - CITY PROJECT# E12118 -- ___-�_ ter- - - - - 1/32" = 1'-O" CC CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. AA 0. 2 ' \•\ HEB GENERAL SITE RENOVATION NOTES: ADD ALTERNATES LIST •/ HEB- SITE RENOVATION KEYED NOTES \• \ / "SURFACE •/ \•• 1. REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS.FOR COAT" REQUIREMENTS AND COURT CLASSIFICATION. SEE A. ADD ALTERNATE NO. 1 - HEB TENNIS CENTER// \ \\ RENOVATION SITE PLAN FOR ALL LOCATIONS, O REFER TO CONSULTANTS SHEET NO. M-0.3 FOR SITE RENOVATION KEYED NOTES. 4 , y�4 ....• � :*•'a '��G •m+ T .: DATE:02/20/2015 D f''p°�� ?$+ ` nCi � 1 �� =yf ' ,0 �� • 1. ADDITION OF TWO (2) 36' TENNIS COURTS ON SUSPENDED CONCRETE SLAB. INCLUDE ALL III \ \ 2. REFERENCE SHEET AA-0.8 FOR COURT STRIPING REQUIREMENTS. STRIPING SHALL MEET THE AMERICAN FENCING, ACRYLIC SURFACING, GATES, LIGHTING, NETTING & SIDEWALKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE \ SPORTS BUILDERS ASSOCIATION GUIDELINES, ./ \ ADDITION OF THESE COURTS. APPROXIMATE AREA FOR THESE COURTS IS 3,738 SF (63' X 59'-41. / ----..C"- ` •/ \ 3. REFER TO SHEET AA-0.2 FOR CONSTRUCTION PHASING SCHEDULE. B. ADD ALTERNATE NO. 2 - AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTER HEB- SITE RENOVATION LEGEND 1. MILL 2" EXISTING ASPHALT ON EXISTING PARKING LOT Sc OVERLAY WITH NEW 2" ASPHALT // \ PAVING AS SPECIFIED. INCLUDE IN PROPOSAL REPAIR OF POT HOLES (TXDOT STANDARDS) AND e ♦ \� • INCLUDE ALL NECESSARY STRIPPING, ADA SIGNS AND WHEELS STOPS. PAVING AREA IS /•/ 1 \ XX.XX'_fr FINISH ELEVATION IN FEET (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE). REFER TO OVERALL SITE PLAN FOR LOCATION OF BENCH MARK AS NOTED. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE FINAL ELEVATIONS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. n APPROXIMATELY 8,338 SF. A I a o o a �❑ o ❑ a a o a o 4 -4,-, ,V C. ADD ALTERNATE NO. 3 - HEB TENNIS CENTER 009 I I •1 ° \ • \ \ \• HATCHED AREA INDICATES LIMIT OF ADD ALTERNATE AS THEY ARE KEYED AND DESCRIBED IN KEYED NOTES. REFER TO OTHER ADD ALTERNATES THAT 1. DRIP IRRIGATION REFER TO LANDSCAPING SHEETS 002 THRU 006. INCLUDE ALL WORK SAT sOPE - f _ ARE NOT SHOWN HATCHED. ASSOCIATED WITH THE SCOPE SHOWN ON LANDSCAPING DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. / 1 •/ ° \° ` \\N Vulli�i°!q ' ' .i 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY l! ,I SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com D. ADD ALTERNATE NO. 4 HEB TENNIS CENTER I r r \ I ° ` • 1. FLATWORK AND STRUCTURAL PIERS FOR FUTURE SHADE STRUCTURE. PROVIDE ALL WORK /•/ RI1Iiil ASSOCIATED WITH THE INSTALLATION OF THE STRUCTURAL PIERS, ELECTRICAL AND FLATWORK. AREA 1 �\ \ ``♦ POST TENSIONED CONCRETE TO BE 5,399 SF (44' 6" X 121' 4") AS SHOWN ON PLANS. •/ ° / i > 11111111 ® 1, 44.. - \ \ ` CAP MATERIAL E. ADD ALTERNATE NO. 5 - HEB TENNIS CENTER 1. PRE-FABRICATED MAINTENANCE STORAGE UNIT "MORGAN BUILDING OR EQUAL" 20FT X 30FT. / / � ° —' "/ L J I� L J — r [MB I I ; , `��'+�� ��� ® \ir \\ \ ``` QUANTITIES ALTERNATE TO ALSO INCLUDE ELECTRICAL, PAD AND ANCHORAGE. FLAT WORK PAD AREA FOR THIS / 1 ALTERNATE IS 2,210 SF (74'-6" X 29'-8") REFER TO PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS. ° / CONCRETE CAP ' Lail NI n \• COURTS 5 & 6: 9,991 CUBIC FEET OF CONCRETE. I / 13,660 cu ft,� 111111➢N•ii IIIIII I " 7 ` ' F. ADD ALTERNATE NO. 6 HEB TENNIS CENTER / ° \- COURTS 9 & 10: 11 490 CUBIC FEET OF CONCRETE. 33 �� 6 i • 1: COURTS 9 & 10, REMOVE FOUR EXISTING INTERIOR LIGHT POLES. REPLACE FOUR EXISTING I / / ° 1� I _ �. /Sr SLOPE SLoec \ COURTS 13, 14 & 15: 15 660 CUBIC FEET OF CONCRETE. CORNER LIGHT POLES WITH NEW LIGHT POLES & LIGHTS TO ILLUMINATE COURTS 9, 10, & 11. I - II ®J \ \ INCLUDE ALL WORK NECESSARY FOR THIS SCOPE. / I 1ors 1 COURTS 16 Sc 17: 9 245 CUBIC FEET OF CONCRETE. ° SLOPE SLOPE \ 01 *v / ® 91 difrire 01 syn n nnnn \\ • J :� - . LIRE. \ \ / ° ��a 0091 ® A 11 ( • K 1 NEW SUSPENDED ;�.� �1.1 O\ /• 1)091 -,'_i)# 9 SLAB 18,880 SF �►r»�• BY I ° 'MI l El i. ray _LAO retro 1,121 e s A ?PUS CHRISTI XAS Programs 11111 33 \`����\,A / L L IIIIIIII 4liNieStiqg • 11 �L J _ r''. 11111111_� ��-�— e" I�����.009 012 / RLE-JT J / I DATE . 0111 .. / 90 1 7-1 • _ n _ _. _ • Ni • iikI rel Immi ii , i 1' •/ A B II, �' IREVISION NO. A / ''' ` I RO` 10 ° SLOPE • / 009 �`�� SLOPE• *fr I i, —_ — I \ ` 00902: Ilnlu� • N1 1111'. / NEW VIEWING PLATFORM EXISTING ENTRY GATE OFF OF �/ I C p . �❑ a •� e • B� TOMPKINS STREET. �- ,. f/ nv, ' r.. i. a o o • N .0„ • / � 1 DESCRIPTION ° / A l� • XI 1�T L V- L J I� •/ �9� MM COcOnc-+ - •/ HEB- CONSTRUCTION °• IPI �1 1 0 0 " o ; • 4'.". SCHEDULE I ooc./PHASING HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE HEB TENNIS CENTER RENOVATION SITE PLAN ./ nD9 oriPHASE 1: k,4. • �; ' 1. DEMOLISH EXISTING BLEACHERS, TENNIS COURT, LIGHTING, PRACTICE III / //uN UITIII ` = SLOPE I ° ",�� 10 �., ° COURT, ELEVATED PLATFORMS, FENCING & SIDEWALKS IN AREA OF NEW COURTS 20, 21 & 22 AS DEFINED ON DEMOLITION SITE PLAN. RE nu till 1 �" 2. DEMOLISH VIEWING PLATFORM BETWEEN COURTS 9, 10, 11, 12 & / • / �9 991 , EXIST. RPM. 1 _ -. - - • -'� _. o� 8EXISTING 5, 6, 7, / • ° PPC0 ,� •. /H • I�1 41, ill. �. ® �� �—I� � //• R IN/ I!!IIr'u •/1. °II NEW VIEWING PLATFORM ON EXISTING VIEWING PLATFORM FO FOOTINGS. TINGS.T ./ ° A SLOPE • / 1 PHASE 3: • / 10 009 013 :' © 1 B • • 1. COURTS 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14, 15, 16 & 17: REMOVE EXISTING NET POSTS & FOOTINGS. •❑ .� 1 - - - - - - - 2. COURTS 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14, 15, 16 & 17: REMOVE EXISTING FENCE // I © 1 N / 3. COURTSA5, 6 HED 10, 13, 14, 15, 16 & 17: INSTALL NEW 1- ♦ ' , / POST-TENSIONED CABLE CAP OVER EXISTING SURFACE. Y.J 104 C10) I / PHASE 4: • 1. COURTS 20, 21, 22, 23 & 24: DRILL & POUR STRUCTURAL PIERS, LIGHT ��� COVERED COVERED COVIH POLE FOOTINGS & NET POST FOOTINGS. (SEE ADD ALTERNATE #1). 0091I . 009 Ic �I EXISTING PAVILION EI ./ •• 2. DRILL & POUR FOOTINGS FOR FUTURE SHADE STRUCTURE. (SEE ADD ALTERNATE #4). 3. INSTALL DRIP IRRIGATION SLEEVES WHERE REQUIRED PRIOR TO CONCRETE I I© NOT CbURTS IN CONTRACT I I I FLATWORK POURS. 7 PHASE 5: r 1_ 1U 4 % 1. COURTS 20, 21, 22, 23 & 24: POUR BEAMS Sc CAPS. (COURTS 23 & 24 L — _ _ -2-- _ L J _ _ _ I© ----------- �--� I• / INCLUDED IN ADD ALTERNATE #1). ©m © / 2. COURTS 20, 21 & 22: POUR STRUCTURAL SLAB & LIGHT POLE FOOTINGS. 3. POUR NEW CONCRETE FLATWORK. (SEE ADD ALTERNATES 4 & 5). I � PHASE 6: . irt 1 e © �, ©I / 1. INSTALL NEW FENCE FABRIC WHERE EXISTING FABRIC WAS REMOVED. ., \ r 00902 2. INSTALL NEW CUT-CORNER FENCING & LIGHT POLE ACCESS GATES WHERE _ �s ro _-INDICATED. ` ' 10 m • / • 3. COURTS 20, 21, 22, 23 24: INSTALL NEW FENCING. (COURTS 23 & 24 & INCLUDED IN ADD ALTERNATE #1). \ 'SAI / 4. APPLY FINISHED SURFACE &STRIPING ON ALL NEW CONCRETE COURTS. ■ / ❑ e ❑ e e ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ a e e • PHASE 7: \ 1. RENOVATE EXISTING LOUNGE BUILDING. — — �\ / W o \_ _ — — — O 2. RENOVATE EXISTING BUILDING FOR NEW PRO SHOP. _ _ _ / 3. INSTALL DRIP IRRIGATION (ALTERNATE NO. 3) SHEET 009 of 82 c//____` • / �_ �J • RECORD DRAWING NO. CP-204 35.10'-- \ / BM-PP A RENOVATION SITE PLAN0 16' 32' 64' IREVISION NO. I 009 009 SCALE: 1/32" = 1 '-0" NORTH CITY PROJECT# E12118 — — —_ --_ SCALE: 1/3 2= 11-0" -- 1 DESCRIPTION I CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. AA -0.3 FIELD VERIFY HEB- SITE RENOVATION KEYED NOTES OEXISTINGRK. PRO -SHOP BUILDING. REFERENCE RENOVATION FLOOR PLAN, STRUCTURAL & MEP FOR EXTENT OF NEW WO _a.•••;.. C 1� D•.! . , ,• • y,,:`` . • ••• S. �•�. II 4' `+�P p DATEr02/20/2015 qe•$* t . +Q i • �. p '� :' y i +0 2 NEW VIEWING PLATFORM OVER SALVAGED COLUMNS. PROVIDE NEW PLATFORM, NEW ROOF, NEW STAIRS & NEW 010 024 ® VERTICAL WHEELCHAIR LIFT. REFERENCE PLATFORM DRAWINGS FOR EXTENT OF NEW CONSTRUCTION. REF. STRUCTURAL DRAWING SHEET 043; REF. ELECTRICAL DRAWING SHEET 076 FOR UNDER CANOPY UGHTING. NEW CONCRETE CAP, SURFACE COATING AND STRIPING OVER EXISTING COURT. PROVIDE NEW NET POSTS & POST FOOTINGS AT ORIGINAL POST LOCATIONS, NEW CRANKS, & CENTER 11E DOWNS. SEE REFERENCED ® '.—.—.—.—.—.-- ■ n \ l DRAWINGS FOR DIMENSIONS AND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. REF. STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR INFORMATION ON CONCRETE CAP REQUIREMENTS. . �� y 437.04 � 1.1 0 PAVILION TENNIS COURTS TO REMAIN. NO WORK INCLUDED FOR THIS AREA 16 / `� ° ADD ALTERNATE #1:"PRACTICE& 24". SEE KEYED NOTE #4 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. ° ?% mm • O PROVIDE TOTAL OF (2) PRACTICE BACKBOARDS. c � � " CO O RE -INSTALL SALVAGED TENNIS NET. i11;0111 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY I" SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com c V © 1 ; 7 ❑ O INSTALL NEW TENNIS NET. SLOPE c 36,53' SLOPE 36.22' $ O NEW 10'-0" TALL CHAIN UNK FENCE WITH GALVANIZED 4" DIAM. POSTS. POSTS SHALL BE 10'-0" O.C. PROVIDE 3'-0" ACCESS GATES AS SHOWN & NEW WINDSCREENS. NEW 36" TALL CHAIN LINK FENCE WITH GALVANIZED 4" DIAM. POSTS. POSTS SHALL BE 10'-0" 0.C. PROVIDE c 0 3'-0" WIDE OPENING WHERE SHOWN. c _ 0 NEW 13'-0" WIDE CHAIN LINK "CUT CORNER" WITH GALVANIZED 1-5/8" DIAM. RAILING. PROVIDE A 2'-0" WIDE GATE TO ACCESS LIGHT POLE. SEE REFERENCED ELEVATION. NEW PROTECTIVE PADDING AS SPECIFIED AROUND EXISTING UGHT POLE SECURELY WRAPPED/TIED AROUND POLE. FIELD VERIFY COLOR TBD. PADDING NOT REQUIRED UNDER ADD ALTERNATE #6. c - - ] ADD ALTERNATE #4: PROVIDE STRUCTURAL FOOTINGS FOR FUTURE METAL BUILDING STRUCTURE. PROVIDE c ° rr TM r1 n ® ®MEDIUM DUTY CONCRETE FLATWORK IN AREA AS DEFINED BY SITE RENOVATION PLANS. REFERENCE STRUCTURAL SHEET 044 AND ELECTRICAL DRAWING SHEET 74 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. C ALTERNATE #4: 36" SQUARE OPENING IN CONCRETE FIATWORK AT PIER LOCATION. INSTALL CONCRETE ®ADD PAVERS OVER SAND TO FILL VOID IN FLATWORK. PAVERS TO BE FLUSH WITH FLATWORK. c ° 0NEW LIGHT DUTY CONCRETE SIDEWALK/PAVING. TIE INTO EXISTING WHERE APPUCABLE. SIDEWALK SHALL NOT EXCEED 2% CROSS SLOPE AND 5% IN DIRECTION OF TRAVEL c ] ® NEW CONCRETE PAVING TO BE FLUSH WITH TOP OF EXISTING CONCRETE DRAIN INLET CASING. c ° 0 RE -INSTALL SALVAGED WINDSCREENS. ° 0 INSTALL NEW WINDSCREENS. m c O 0 6> c L I 1 f — - -I I + LA El II u u PROVIDE &INSTALL NEW LIGHT POLE. REFERENCE ELECTRICAL DRAWING SHEET 74 AND STRUCTURAL DRAWING SHEET 045 FOR REQUIREMENTS. s � CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs - - - - - - -i° I 0 `-� - - - - - -I-� 20 - 1 - - - - - - - -° n n • ADD ALTERNATE #1: EXTEND CONCRETE SIDEWALK TO NEW GATE OPENING AS SHOWN. IIIIIIII I DATE I ° L__ J L__ J 3 IIIIIIII 0 RE -INSTALL SALVAGED SHADE STRUCTURE AND BENCH. ° CONCRTE A ' IIIIIIII IIIIIIII NEW SHADE STRUCTURE AND BENCH. MATCH EXISTING SHADE STRUCTURE BENCH. & c LI 11 LI LI NEW CONTROLLED ACCESS GATES: 8' TALL CHAIN LINK FENCE & FABRIC WITH GALVANIZED 4" DIAM. POSTS. 11 fl II n ® PROVIDE 4'-0" AND 6'-0" ACCESS DOORS WITH GATE LOCKS. PROVIDE REMOVABLE ASTRAGAL POST. IREVISION NO. 2 15 , 6 6 IIIIIIII ® EXISTING PRO SHOP BUILDING TO REMAIN AS IS (NOT IN CONTRACT) UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE. 010 024 ! / c ' I I I I I 1 I 1 0 NEW CONTROLLED ACCESS GATES: 8' TALL CHAIN LINK FENCE & FABRIC WITH GALVANIZED 4" DIAM. POSTS. - IIIIIIII PROVIDE 4'-0" ACCESS GATE WITH GATE LOCK. ° ADD ALTERNATE #5: NEW PRE -FAB STORAGE UNIT. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWING SHEET 74 FOR POWER ® REQUIREMENTS. MEDIUM DUTY CONCRETE FLAT WORK TO BE CONSTRUCTED AS PART OF ALTERNATE. SEE SITE c L1 ll LI LI RENOVATION PLAN SHEET 009 & 012 FOR LIMIT OF FLATWORK. 1 DESCRIPTION RENOVATE EXISTING LOUNGE BUILDING. SEE REFERENCED DRAWINGS FOR EXTENT OF NEW WORK. c ® 2 c ' ❑ 010024 27 INSTALL NEW CHAIN LINK FENCE FABRIC ON EXISTING POSTS/RAILING. • 0 EXISTING METER ACCESS COVER IN CONCRETE BASE. SEE REFERENCED DETAIL FOR MODIFICATION. c ° SLOPE 36.22' SLOPE 0 NEW 3'-0" WIDE SINGLE GATE WITH LOCK/LATCH MECHANISM. HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE HEB TENNIS CENTER ENLARGED TENNIS COURT RENOVATION PLAN Q ®i NEW 3'-0" X 1'-0" X 6" DEEP REINFORCED CONCRETE STEP. c © ❑ 1W c O ® RAISE EXISTING GATE AS REQUIRED TO CLEAR NEW TENNIS COURT SURFACE. ® 36.53' 00 ire vis •' 36 ® NEW 4'-0" WIDE SINGLE GATE WITH LOCK LATCH MECHANISM. / 37.04' ❑ a s �`'� �" ® PRIOR TO BID, GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO VISIT ALL COURTS TO FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND �.' ✓ DETERMINE CONFLICTS WITH CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. REPORT PERCEIVED CONFLICTS TO ARCHITECT. • 0/ 46: REMOVE EXISTING LIGHT POLE, SEE ELECTRICAL 72 FOR ° 34 ADD ALTERNATE ANCHORING & WIRING. SHEET INFORMATION. 31> ADD ALTERNATE #6: REMOVE EXISTING UGHT POLE & CONCRETE BASE FOOTING. INSTALL NEW LIGHT POLE WITH 3 6 { ® NEW LIGHTS & CONCRETE BASE FOOTING. SEE ELECTRICAL & STRUCTURAL FOR INFORMATION. 010 024 010 024 0 EXISTING LIGHT POLE TO REMAIN. ®NEW 10'-O" TALL CHAIN LINK FENCE WITH GALVANIZED 4" DIAM. POSTS. POSTS SHALL BE 10'-O" 0.C. & NEW WINDSCREENS. REFER TO SHEET 23 FOR CHAIN UNK TYPICAL DETAILS AND REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS. A ENLARGED TENNIS COURT RENOVATION PLAN 0 5' 10' 20' 009010 SCALE: 3/32" = 1'-0" NORTH SCALE: 3/32 = 1'-0" HEB- SITE RENOVATION LEGEND XX.XX' FINISH ELEVATION IN FEET (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE). REFER TO OVERALL SITE PLAN FOR LOCATION OF BENCH MARK AS NOTED. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE FINAL ELEVATIONS WFTH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. CO \\N„. \ \ \\ \ I HATCHED AREA INDICATES LIMIT OF ADD ALTERNATE AS THEY ARE KEYED AND DESCRIBED IN KEYED NOTES. REFER TO OTHER ADD ALTERNATES THAT ARE NOT SHOWN HATCHED. IDATE I SHEET 010 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 IREVISION NO. CITY PROJECT # E12118 IDESCRIPTION I CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. AA -0.4 HEB- SITE RENOVATION KEYED NOTES OX REFER TO CONSULTANTS SHEET NO. M-0.3 FOR SITE RENOVATION KEYED NOTES. yett �' .... i�0 �.�i '/►' �� r DATE:02/20/2015 .•+f.� • r. �� EH •• # • 81 111'-4" 1071-011 . 8 FIELD VERIFY / / FIELD VERIFY 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 L°411 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com 3 6 ® ® 36 • 2 �® 36 011024 011024 Q. 0 011024 o . � o 1 U�® �® .‘. a G \ �o r-- 1 37.54' • 37.00' SLQPE - �� 36.22' 36.00' Q LUPE IIIP 3 011 024 I 1 . . BY St S © wv CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capita! Programs t1 .. �: 4 y_; . ®P ®® ADD ALT. #6 .fir ®m , ®® FIELD VERIFY • IDATE ' . Go • O® \ I 1 O O i--- O IREVISION NO. o> CVS ---b - • - ---\ -h • �{- I 9--------� o • c„ -J ---- LEI — _ _ • 3 0113024 • CON9RETE CAP 00 • � 0,1024 CONCRETE CAP 0,1024 • . 1 DESCRIPTION ©o 11)m 1 i 90cuft. 9s245cuft. . _a r 4 HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE HEB TENNIS CENTER ENLARGED TENNIS COURT RENOVATION PLANS ADD ALT. #6 . , . 3 . . 1 . . 011 024 SLOPE- • 37.00' 36.22' 36.22' _ 36.00' SLQPE I 37.54' a a ®® ®® • N 27 d R.00 ,. 1®® 0 bko . 'ice to, 0 IJ L— T. n •0112024 m® ® — I, tiT 2 © ENLARGED TENNIS COURT RENOVATION PLAN m o 5' 'o' 20' B 011024 ENLARGED TENNIS COURT RENOVATION PLAN ® 0 5' 10' 20' gip SCALE: 3/32" = 1'-0" NORTH009 SCALE: 3/32 = 1'-0" 011 SCALE: 3/32" = 1'-0" NORTH SCALE: 3/32 = 1'-0" HEB- SITE RENOVATION LEGEND XX.XX' fr FINISH ELEVATION IN FEET (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE). REFER TO OVERALL SITE PLAN FOR LOCATION OF BENCH MARK AS NOTED. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE FINAL ELEVATIONS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. O SHEET 011 of 82 HATCHED AREA INDICATES LIMIT OF ADD ALTERNATE AS THEY ARE KEYED AND DESCRIBED IN KEYED NOTES. REFER TO OTHER ADD ALTERNATES THAT ARE NOT SHOWN HATCHED. RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 IREVISION NO. I CITY PROJECT# E12118 31'-10 3/4" 14 Ad - Kis) 35.24' 12'-6" {CL 35.28' 44'-6 1/4" HEB- SITE RENOVATION KEYED NOTES REFER TO CONSULTANTS SHEET NO. M-0.3 FOR SITE RENOVATION KEYED NOTES. 64-8" 30 35 28' ..:\3Q.f T ` P EUNIT,E ( ALT. 5). 54'-8" 35.43' 24'-0" 5 012 024 24'-0" 54'-8" 1 (14 VERIFY CENTER OF OPENINGS IN FLATWORK 34.94' N O CC 0 N V) z 0 O 0 O 0 w 0 0 0 O 12 CENTERLINE OF FUTURE SHADE STRUCTURE . TO ALIGN WITH CENTERLINE OF NEW\ TENNIS COURT 35.23' 25 S O N O Z Z W L Q 9'-11 3/4' 1- 13 W 0 w a COO °0 O Z O w w Cr) 35.43' 29 CENTERLINE OF NEW TENNIS COURT I 0 N 35.23' L. 35:19' 21'-0" 1' 12'-0" {*} N 36.08' SLOPE 36'-0" FINISH ELEVATION IN FEET (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE). REFER TO OVERALL SITE PLAN FOR LOCATION OF BENCH MARK AS NOTED. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE FINAL ELEVATIONS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. S HATCHED AREA INDICATES LIMIT OF ADD ALTERNATE AS THEY ARE KEYED AND DESCRIBED IN KEYED NOTES. REFER TO OTHER ADD ALTERNATES THAT ARE NOT SHOWN HATCHED. E M 1 .4 • \ , �. DE \\10,. c\ \ \ „<„.\\,.N _2_1 SUPE B 1 2-0 ..M SF FENCE OPENING J O I 0, I 0 N 35.23' L. 35:19' 21'-0" 1' 12'-0" {*} N 36.08' SLOPE 14 SLOPE 12'— SLOPE SW - 36'-0" 36'-0" — -J L D SLOPE SLOPE 36.08' 36.04' SLOPE 14 0 Z w 0 0 W 0 35.63' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEB- SITE RENOVATION LEGEND iik XX.XX' FINISH ELEVATION IN FEET (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE). REFER TO OVERALL SITE PLAN FOR LOCATION OF BENCH MARK AS NOTED. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE FINAL ELEVATIONS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. S HATCHED AREA INDICATES LIMIT OF ADD ALTERNATE AS THEY ARE KEYED AND DESCRIBED IN KEYED NOTES. REFER TO OTHER ADD ALTERNATES THAT ARE NOT SHOWN HATCHED. E M 011/44 .4 • \ , �. DE \\10,. c\ \ \ „<„.\\,.N _2_1 SUPE B 1 SL ,88 SF 14 SLOPE 12'— SLOPE SW - 36'-0" 36'-0" — -J L D SLOPE SLOPE 36.08' 36.04' SLOPE 14 0 Z w 0 0 W 0 35.63' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEB- SITE RENOVATION LEGEND iik XX.XX' FINISH ELEVATION IN FEET (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE). REFER TO OVERALL SITE PLAN FOR LOCATION OF BENCH MARK AS NOTED. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE FINAL ELEVATIONS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. S HATCHED AREA INDICATES LIMIT OF ADD ALTERNATE AS THEY ARE KEYED AND DESCRIBED IN KEYED NOTES. REFER TO OTHER ADD ALTERNATES THAT ARE NOT SHOWN HATCHED. A M 5 35.63' 0 0 012 024 63'-0" ADD ALTERNATE #1 30'-10" 32'-2" 0; 0 35.38' 225'-8" t . _l AENLARGED SITE & TENNIS COURT PLAN 009 012/ SCALE: 3/32" = 1'-0" NORTH SCALE: 3/32 = 1'-0" 20' 29'-4" ti CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. AA -0.5 DATE:02/20/2015 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 .clkarch.com co 11.1 CD ¢¢ U U co a WZ M W La W Cr Crj N_ O ACV Q C2Sp Ca W o0 CC W LUU CO W CO LLJ /Q CL LL 0 V l W CO LU0 z W SHEET 012 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 A Mil S MEI A M 011/44 .4 • \ , �. \\10,. c\ \ \ „<„.\\,.N 35.38' 225'-8" t . _l AENLARGED SITE & TENNIS COURT PLAN 009 012/ SCALE: 3/32" = 1'-0" NORTH SCALE: 3/32 = 1'-0" 20' 29'-4" ti CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. AA -0.5 DATE:02/20/2015 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 .clkarch.com co 11.1 CD ¢¢ U U co a WZ M W La W Cr Crj N_ O ACV Q C2Sp Ca W o0 CC W LUU CO W CO LLJ /Q CL LL 0 V l W CO LU0 z W SHEET 012 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 1 DESCRIPTION I CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. AA-O.6 ,os'-s° HEB- SITE RENOVATION KEYED NOTES FIELD VERIFY 0EXISTING PRO-SHOP BUILDING. REFERENCE RENOVATION FLOOR PLAN, STRUCTURAL & MEP FOR EXTENT OF NEW WORK. ��N�� % �y; i1 4_4r t `� T': DATE:02/20/2015 D • � / "': 2 NEW VIEWING PLATFORM OVER SALVAGED COLUMNS. PROVIDE NEW PLATFORM, NEW ROOF, NEW STAIRS & NEW 013 024 © VERTICAL WHEELCHAIR LIFT. REFERENCE PLATFORM DRAWINGS FOR EXTENT OF NEW CONSTRUCTION. REF. O® STRUCTURAL DRAWING SHEET 043; REF. ELECTRICAL DRAWING SHEET 076 FOR UNDER CANOPY LIGHTING. G. (36) II I ; i \J NEW CONCRETE CAP, SURFACE COATING AND STRIPING OVER EXISTING COURT. PROVIDE NEW NET POSTS & I PDRAWINGSTFORS com coi �o c Qs iii ® © _ DIM NSIONSLAND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.KREF. STRUCTUR RAL DRAWNGSEFORENFORMATIION ON CONCRETE CAP REQUIREMENTS n OPr �%" PAVILION TENNIS COURTS TO REMAIN. NO WORK INCLUDED FOR THIS AREA CO• CP "PRACTICE Y n I ADD ALTERNATE #1: NEW COURTS 23 & 24". SEE KEYED NOTE #4 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. •l' © PROVIDE TOTAL OF (2) PRACTICE BACKBOARDS. I'RE-INSTALL e I 0 SALVAGED TENNIS NET. iuiiil"1' i 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY ;'i'.I SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com 36.80 clip ®� 36.13' I ,� SLOPE LJ " O INSTALL NEW TENNIS NET. I . E �, G Ei \ o / ® NEW 10'-0" TALL CHAIN LINK FENCE WITH GALVANIZED 4" DIAM. POSTS. POSTS SHALL BE 10'-0" O.C. PROVIDE 3'-0" ACCESS GATES AS SHOWN & NEW WINDSCREENS. • O NEW 36" TALL CHAIN LINK FENCE WITH GALVANIZED 4" DIAM. POSTS. POSTS SHALL BE 10'-0" 0.C. PROVIDE 3'-O" WIDE OPENING WHERE SHOWN. iiiRO S H •P I • 0 NEW 13'-0" WIDE CHAIN LINK "CUT CORNER" WITH GALVANIZED 1-5/8" DIAM. RAILING. PROVIDE A 2'-O" WIDE TO ACCESS LIGHT POLE. SEE REFERENCED ELEVATION. iGATE NEW PROTECTIVE PADDING AS SPECIFIED AROUND EXISTING LIGHT POLE SECURELY WRAPPED/TIED AROUND POLE. ,_ . ` I n COLOR TBD. PADDING NOT REQUIRED UNDER ADD ALTERNATE #6. ©• ADD ALTERNATE #'4: PROVIDE STRUCTURAL FOOTINGS FOR FUTURE METAL BUILDING STRUCTURE. PROVIDE a .I „ 1 I jilt 1 1 ® MEDIUM DUTY CONCRETE FLATWORK IN AREA AS DEFINED BY SITE RENOVATION PLANS. REFERENCE STRUCTURAL 14117, H SHEET 044 AND ELECTRICAL DRAWING SHEET 74 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. xiliF ADD ALTERNATE #4: 36" SQUARE OPENING IN CONCRETE FLATWORK AT PIER LOCATION. INSTALL CONCRETE I I ❑ H LJ ® PAVERS OVER SAND TO FILL VOID IN FLATWORK. PAVERS TO BE FLUSH WITH FLATWORK. I i n 1 1 ❑ 0 0 NEW LIGHT DUTY CONCRETE SIDEWALK/PAVING. 11E INTO EXISTING WHERE APPLICABLE. SIDEWALK SHALL NOT EXCEED 2% CROSS SLOPE AND 5% IN DIRECTION OF TRAVEL. U 1 ® NEW CONCRETE PAVING TO BE FLUSH WITH TOP OF EXISTING CONCRETE DRAIN INLET CASING. a I1 1t'-2 -� 0 RE-INSTALL SALVAGED WINDSCREENS. 0 0 11PJ ' I` >.. m m INSTALL NEW WINDSCREENS. 1 1 1 1 PROVIDE & INSTALL NEW UGHT POLE. REFERENCE ELECTRICAL DRAWING SHEET 74 AND STRUCTURAL DRAWING c, N W EE e- - -b 0 I -- - rr n n n I ❑ A5.32' 01 SHEET 045 FOR REQUIREMENTS. s � s � � s CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs 9 �� I - I 0 ADD ALTERNATE #1: EXTEND CONCRETE SIDEWALK TO NEW GATE OPENING AS SHOWN. L _ - J o I DATE I I I. I• • 1 � = RE-INSTALL SALVAGED SHADE STRUCTURE AND BENCH. 1 CONCRETE CAP _�__ $�11 _ 020 41) ® NEW SHADE STRUCTURE AND BENCH. MATCH EXISTING SHADE STRUCTURE & BENCH. u u u L I ••7 NEW CONTROLLED ACCESS GATES: 8' TALL CHAIN LINK FENCE & FABRIC WITH GALVANIZED 4" DIAM. POSTS. EXIST 22 991 u . • PROVIDE 4'-0" AND 6'-0" ACCESS DOORS WITH GATE LOCKS. PROVIDE REMOVABLE ASTRAGAL POST. z p iii w . i . EXISTING PRO SHOP BUILDING TO REMAIN AS IS (NOT IN CONTRACT) UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE. ® ® R R M . g _ 1• L J NEW CONTROLLED ACCESS GATES: 8' TALL CHAIN LINK FENCE & FABRIC WITH GALVANIZED 4" DIAM. POSTS. a a J ® f I PROVIDE 4'-O" ACCESS GATE WITH GATE LOCK. PRO SHOP = 1 " ADD ALTERNATE NEW PRE-FAB STORAGE UNIT. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWING SHEET 74 FOR POWER ®® I ®® 35. 2'I I 1 I ® #5: REQUIREMENTS. MEDIUM DUTY CONCRETE FLAT WORK TO BE CONSTRUCTED AS PART OF ALTERNATE. SEE SITEce I RENOVATION PLAN SHEET 009 & 012 FOR LIMIT OF FLATWORK. • • - j RENO VAT I O N 1 1 DESCRIPTION 1 IX5.32' RENOVATE EXISTING LOUNGE BUILDING. SEE REFERENCED DRAWINGS FOR EXTENT OF NEW WORK. I © j� r; H ® I al MPf 1 O ® INSTALL NEW CHAIN LINK FENCE FABRIC ON EXISTING POSTS/RAILING. 35.32' •: T.O. FLOOR IEXISTING METER ACCESS COVER IN CONCRETE BASE. SEE REFERENCED DETAIL FOR MODIFICATION. 22 HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE HEB TENNIS CENTER ENLARGED SITE & TENNIS COURT RENOVATION PLAN I • 0 NEW 3'-0" WIDE SINGLE GATE WITH LOCK/LATCH MECHANISM. SLOPE ► 36.80' 36.13' f l Iw . • ' 30 " 6" NEW 3'-0" X 1 -0 X DEEP REINFORCED CONCRETE STEP. i 35.26• e ®® ®® I e H RAISE EXISTING GATE AS REQUIRED TO CLEAR NEW TENNIS COURT SURFACE. f t- y , ® I I 1 i IF 0 A 0 \0 L1 r N .► I) (0�`• L. 35.32' 35.32' 1 0 , 32 NEW 4'-0" WIDE SINGLE GATE WITH LOCK/LATCH MECHANISM. eLna' 0 C • 35.16' 1 I I� LJ PRIOR TO BID, GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO VISIT ALL COURTS TO FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDffIONS AND oo 1 '• ® •' -• • —•—• • 1 DETERMINE CONFLICTS WITH CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. REPORT PERCEIVED CONFLICTS TO ARCHITECT. I 35.24' 35.26' ADD ALTERNATE #6: REMOVE EXISTING UGHT POLE, ANCHORING & WIRING. SEE ELECTRICAL SHEET 72 FOR 0 6,�,� 34 INFORMATION. S`0-0 ° /24) 0 ADD ALTERNATE #6: REMOVE EXISTING UGHT POLE & CONCRETE BASE FOOTING. INSTALL NEW LIGHT POLE WITH \ / 424 ® NEW LIGHTS & CONCRETE BASE FOOTING. SEE ELECTRICAL & STRUCTURAL FOR INFORMATION. H 0 EXISTING LIGHT POLE TO REMAIN. ' • ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ® NEW 10'-0" TALL CHAIN LINK FENCE WITH GALVANIZED 4" DIAM. POSTS. POSTS SHALL BE 10'-0" 0.C. & NEW WINDSCREENS. REFER TO SHEET 23 FOR CHAIN LINK TYPICAL DETAILS AND REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS. 0'..r = 0 L OS • • • A ENLARGED SITE (Sc TENNIS COURT RENOVATION PLAN 0 5' ,o• 20• HEB- SITE RENOVATION LEGEND 009013 ® SCALE: 3/32" = 1'-0" NORTH SCALE: 3/32 = 1'-0" XX.XX' _P FINISH ELEVATION IN FEET (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE). REFER TO OVERALL SITE PLAN FOR LOCATION OF BENCH MARK AS NOTED. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE FINAL ELEVATIONS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. HATCHED AREA INDICATES LIMIT OF ADD ALTERNATE AS THEY ARE KEYED AND DESCRIBED IN KEYED NOTES. REFER TO OTHER ADD ALTERNATES THAT ARE NOT SHOWN HATCHED. CO IDATE I SHEET 013 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP-204 IREVISION NO. CITY PROJECT# E12118 EET NO1' USED CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. AA -0.7 DATE:02/20/2015 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 E 0 U 0 13. Q 0 CicC U U CC O W m U Cr W Z O r J p W Q Z 2 Lu oa O CO coCD Q LLl 0 0 C0 w a SHEET 014 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT# E12118 HEB TENNIS COURT GENERAL NOTES: DESCRIPTION CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. AA -O. 8 36'-0" 36'-0" 1. FIELD COLOR, EXTERIOR OF COURT BOUNDARY, TO BE GREEN. %A . •C. " • h: ♦ % . is ARS 04, t;: i • • 0 / 4'-6 131-6" 13 -6 4'-6" / / 4'-6" 13'-6" Q 13'-6" 4 -6 / 2. GREEN & BLUE FIELD COLORS TO MATCH EXISTING ON-SITE COLORS. / / / / / f / / ,'1.F'i �� h..o.F..Kti-I, DATE:02/20/2015 \ s N 4" LONG CENTER MARK. - ' \ x N \ 4" LONG CENTER MARK. - iiilj�l 1.11 i f i 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com -co!'\•\ co \ \ ``. �' ) 2" LONG CENTER MARK CN o, 3'-2" 20'-8"/3'-2" 0 20'-8" 0 0 N I 0 N /3'-2"/ 18'-0" SEE KEYED NOTES COURT FOR NETS, POSTS & POST INFORMATION. AT EACH NET FOOTING SEE KEYED N TES AT EACH COURT FOR fNJETS, NET POSTS & POST FOOTING INFORMATION. 9'-0" 9'-0" 1 0 0 o 0 o IBY - C - - - -_� e `` C `� - - - - CO 4" LONG CEN R MARK. lersi;4 wv CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs \ h � 10 I 0Ch " 0" _ 0" 0 IDATE 0 �3'_O" 0 i i 0 o (NJ 0 b CV SEE KEYED NOTES AT EACH 1D 0 COURT FOR NETS, NET IREVISION NO. POSTS & POST INFORMATION. FOOTING x O (\i1/4 M 4 vO C N 0 0 cV 1 0 0 o, 2" LON CENTER MARK o, _ CO 1 DESCRIPTION C•4 2'-0" 0CNI 2 0" 'co4" �� io lc - 0 - 0 LONG CE ER MARK. 4" LONG CE ER MARK. co HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE HEB TENNIS CENTER TENNIS COURT STRIPING PLANS \ \ -\--\ - -- 0 0 4" LONG CENTER MARK. 0 78'/60'/36' (BLENDED) STRIPING PLAN 78'/60' COURT (BLENDED) STRIPING PLAN (ADD ALT. #1) 36' COURT STRIPING PLAN SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" TYPICAL FOR COURTS: COVERED 1 & 3, 5, 9, 13, 15, 20, 22. SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" TYPICAL FOR COURTS: COVERED 2, 6, 10, 14, 21. SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" TYPICAL FOR COURTS: 23, 24. HEB TENNIS COURT STRIPING KEYED NOTES O ALL WHITE LINES TO BE 2" WIDE. OALL LIGHT BLUE LINES TO BE 1 1/2" WIDE. O ALL LIGHT BLUE LINES ARE TO TERMINATE 3" FROM WHITE LINES WHERE APPLICABLE. O FIELD COLOR, INTERIOR OF COURT BOUNDARY, TO BE BLUE. >- ro COURT STRIPING LEGEND IDATE I 2" WIDE (WHITE) COURT STRIPING. SHEET 015 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 1 1/2" WIDE (LIGHT BLUE) COURT STRIPING. IREVISION NO. CITY PROJECT# E12118 SEE ENLARGED PLAN AT OPPOSITE END OF PLATFORM FOR SIMILAR (OPPOSITE HAND) CONSTRUCTION OF STAIR. T r , 1 1 1 1 SEE ENLARGED PLAN AT OPPOSITE END OF PLATFORM FOR SIMILAR (OPPOSITE HAND) CONSTRUCTION OF STAIR. I I I I I I 1 I I 1 rr r.;, I I 0 X r 20'-1 1/2" F.V. EXISTING A 009 016 20'-0" F.V. EXISTING (u) 20'-0" F.U. EXISTING PLATFORM PLAN: GROUND LEVEL SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" EXISTING COLUMNS/FOOTINGS. TYPICAL OF 16. SEE STRUCTURAL. 20'-0" F.V. EXISTING 20'-0" F.V. EXISTING 421 20'-0" F.V. EXISTING NORTH I!� I I FT 1 1 1 1 1 0 4' 8' 19'-9 3/4" F.V. EXISTING SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" 16' 1 1 1 1 1 1 GALVANIZED PIPE GUARD RAILING BOTH SIDES FROM STAIR TO STAIR. RAILING INFILL TO BE CHAIN LINK FENCING. SEE EXTERIOR ELEVATION & STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. B 009 016 PLATFORM PLAN: PLATFORM LEVEL SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" r REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR CONCRETE PAD VERTICAL PLATFORM LIFT AS SPECIFIED -Ln 6'-9" MATCH ELEVATION OF EXISTING PAVING 5'-0 1/2" 7'-0" GALVANIZED CAIN DETECTION PIPE RAILING ANCHORED TO EXISTING CONCRETE PAVING. SEE REFERENCED ELEVATION. r NEW COLUMNS. TYPICAL OF 16.' SEE STRUCTURAL. t 3'-0" LEVEL PAD L 1'-0" HANDRAIL EXTENSION N 7" / jr AMP DOWN 1"/F7. 2'-4 1/2" RAMP, F.V. LEVEL SLOPE ENLARGED STAIR/ELEVATOR PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = i'-0" 7'-0" 3'-2" 21 0 2' 4' NORTH SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 01 tip Q w 8' EXIST NG CONCRETE PAVING LEVEL. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR CONCRETE PAD N I X 0 w NORTH 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 4' 8' SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" VERTICAL PLATFORM LIFT AS SPECIFIED. CENTER CLEAR OPENING ON LEVEL CONCRETE PAD BELOW. 4\ INSTALL GALVANIZED STEEL FILLER PLATE AT VOID SPACES 0 W 0 0 16' 45.22' J 1 GUARD RAILING. SEE EXTERIOR ELEVATION & STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. HANDRAIL WELDED TO GUARD RAILING. -r r 1'-0" } 6'-9 1/8" VERIFY mow 5'-0 1/4" CLEAR OPENING 0) LLI HANDRAIL EXTENSION \-r 45.22' ENLARGED STAIR/ELEVATOR PLAN 01 016) SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 1 1 1 1 r -I J L 1 L J CONCRETE FILLED STEEL TREAD PANS BETWEEN STEEL STRINGERS. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. EQUAL RISERS NOT TO EXCEED 7" EACH. 13'-9" 15 TREADS AT 11" EACH 0 2' 4' NORTH SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" D 8' \016016/ HEB- SITE RENOVATION LEGEND T - 1 -. I '- i---� -` 1 "t L a ' SLOPE DN. �'/ r 5'-0 1/2" 7'-0" GALVANIZED CAIN DETECTION PIPE RAILING ANCHORED TO EXISTING CONCRETE PAVING. SEE REFERENCED ELEVATION. r NEW COLUMNS. TYPICAL OF 16.' SEE STRUCTURAL. t 3'-0" LEVEL PAD L 1'-0" HANDRAIL EXTENSION N 7" / jr AMP DOWN 1"/F7. 2'-4 1/2" RAMP, F.V. LEVEL SLOPE ENLARGED STAIR/ELEVATOR PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = i'-0" 7'-0" 3'-2" 21 0 2' 4' NORTH SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 01 tip Q w 8' EXIST NG CONCRETE PAVING LEVEL. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR CONCRETE PAD N I X 0 w NORTH 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 4' 8' SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" VERTICAL PLATFORM LIFT AS SPECIFIED. CENTER CLEAR OPENING ON LEVEL CONCRETE PAD BELOW. 4\ INSTALL GALVANIZED STEEL FILLER PLATE AT VOID SPACES 0 W 0 0 16' 45.22' J 1 GUARD RAILING. SEE EXTERIOR ELEVATION & STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. HANDRAIL WELDED TO GUARD RAILING. -r r 1'-0" } 6'-9 1/8" VERIFY mow 5'-0 1/4" CLEAR OPENING 0) LLI HANDRAIL EXTENSION \-r 45.22' ENLARGED STAIR/ELEVATOR PLAN 01 016) SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 1 1 1 1 r -I J L 1 L J CONCRETE FILLED STEEL TREAD PANS BETWEEN STEEL STRINGERS. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. EQUAL RISERS NOT TO EXCEED 7" EACH. 13'-9" 15 TREADS AT 11" EACH 0 2' 4' NORTH SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" D 8' \016016/ HEB- SITE RENOVATION LEGEND XX.XX' FINISH ELEVATION IN FEET (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE). REFER TO OVERALL SITE PLAN FOR LOCATION OF BENCH MARK AS NOTED. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE FINAL ELEVATIONS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. HATCHED AREA INDICATES LIMIT OF ADD ALTERNATE AS THEY ARE KEYED AND DESCRIBED IN KEYED NOTES. REFER TO OTHER ADD ALTERNATES THAT ARE NOT SHOWN HATCHED. } ti >- m ti CONSULTANTS SHEET NO. AA -0.9 DATE:02/20/2015 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 co E o co U J` c0 u co 13 11 3 0 U Capita! Programs Ct U LIJ cc Q ces SHEET 016 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT# E12118 0 a DESCRIPTION I CONSULTANTS SHEET NO. AA -1.1 0 Q 1 ®® " •.... %4ED. 5� i0./ i' '��j�!�e qRe�, ?' Jl ►. i : •i IT- 1 I I I- II II GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES 11 1/ 7'-0" y 3'-4" y 5'-3 1 /2" 11� 1 /2 8'-0 1/4" 7-6 3/8" 11 1/2" @ II II 011 � F.V. 1 R.O. 1 F.V. F.V. /A N. IIIP i 11 I-- - 11 4 ji ,-,; © 111 / 11 / \ 11 1 1. IT IS THE INTENT OF THE DEMOLITION TO 017 019 111 / 11 \ 11 \ 111 REMOVE ALL EXISTING CONSTRUCTION WHICH 0 U 017022 �� 111 0- ~0 \ 111 CONFLICTS WITH THE INTENT OF NEW © — u CONSTRUCTION AND EVERY DEMOLITION DETAIL 1 1 MAY NOT NECESSARILY BE COVERED ON THESE 105.1 I % I r›:. LJ • i`r' ` ,.0 •....•• DATE:02/20/2015 b1 F1# C DRAWINGS. CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE ALL r. DEMOLITION WORK EVEN IF NOT SPECIFICALLY 6'-3 1/8" / CALLED FOR AS NECESSARY IN THE SCOPE OF THE RENOVATION EFFORTS. 1 --, , JANITOR'S \ ICE I r MEN'S TOILEt M.(osf 1) I . CLOSET I \ M106 i 2. WHERE REMOVAL OF EXISTING WALLS, C / \ ‘ ' 1 l� I I .- PARTITIONS, EQUIPMENT AND/OR WORK TO 1 A i AA1 �� _ ' 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 WI CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com I L -I_1 -0 T r -1 EXISTING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT DISTURBS ' �. II B .' O EXISTING MECHANICAL PLUMBING, AND >- i VP I t 1 I `m -^ i ELECTRICAL SERVICES, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL �,�,, / s - MAKE PERMANENT REVISIONS AS REQUIRED AND j oJ_ C '-� �` IF NECESSARY PROVIDE TEMPORARY SERVICES 1 0 \ / T TO AREAS NOT SCHEDULED FOR DEMOLITION r' '- ' M W AND REMODELING. (� 0,0° - RETAIL STORAGE I 1 0 WOMEN'S TOILET AA104 — i N RM. e> t 1 (1071 O I Q AA107 10T \--______\ ill II Q GENERAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES r 104. int o Oo 1. FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING COLUMN LOCATIONS; Al W 14 I N. IF THERE COORDINATE ARE ANY DISCREPANCIES IN THE DRAWINGS WITH THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO _ ° I _ BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION.` j7 I 2. MINIMUM DOORS 18" CLEAR AT THE PULL SIDE OF AND MIN. 12" ON PUSH SIDE. CONTRACTOR TENNIS PRO o STAFF/CHECK-IN "' -00 r -- 4 4 TO NOTIFY TO MEETING ARCHITECT IF A DOOR IS FOUND NOT THESE REQUIREMENTS. AA102�, AA103 ` T' co r 3. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY EXISTING C 1 e T Q T iier .r.r.r CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs r-0 0 0 FOUNDATION AND COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECT IF r- \ DISCREPANCIES ARE FOUND IN THE DRAWINGS. D ' �� NEW WALLS AND STUDS TO LIE ON EXISTINGIlr OVERHANG o .- FOUNDATION. BRICK TO EDGE OF w DATE FOUNDATION 1/2",L.0 o 4. ALL EXPOSED EXISTING COLUMNS TO BE CLEANED to & PAINTED AS SPEC IFIED.O IN Let.' 1 5. REFER INFORMATION. TO DRAWING SHEET 75 FOR ELECTRICAL �>- ' � 3' 6" I REVISION NO. - 1 LC "' s2 ---u L---] _1 ; 10. '1-T - -1- n - - °s F. I N,;' I 1 1 -11 Th I I vv// I 't Ali 1 I— I / \ I (. 0.3) (00.4 o L--- N [DESCRIPTION I --= I II 1 E---- O PRO SHOP RENOVATION KEYED NOTES .. - — I II I - - °,� . °�. 0 .— I ,/� I / \ \ '� 1 I I II I I 1 I I H �\// I , / \ \ I 0 Note Number Note Text N L - - - _ _ _ _ _ - J -= 1 L - - J C- — - ' - - -J 1 HVAC UNIT - WALL MOUNTED PACKAGE UNIT AT LOCATIONS SHOWN ON PLAN. SEE MECHANICAL > '' `` O� - ' (\ \ DRAWING SHEET 59 FOR ADDITIONAL "' �� cis HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE HEB TENNIS CENTER DEMOLITION & RENO VA TION PLAN PRO SHOP / 1 II 1 h II i� \/ 1 INFORMATION. \, � B2 Itl I ' H \ 1 1 1 /' \ ��--� //\\ 2 ALIGN GYP BOARD. WITH EXISTING COLUMN L----- \ I I / �_ E== 3 NEW HANDICAP ACC ESSIBLE DRINKING °; RETAIL AREA r FOUNTAIN. FOUNTAIN. SEE PLUMBING DRAWING SHEET 66 _` AA100 �_� \ / FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. \ \ /� I / 1-� j\ 1 /H \ 1 4 PAINT EXISTING CONCRETE COLUMN AS SPECIFIED. . _ _ Fff -� ��\ C__ -J I I 1 —7 - \\ / 5 REPAIR CONCRETE COLUMN SPALLING WITH EPDXY GROUT PRIOR TO PAINTING. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. 1 p' 1 - > I ,�� I / , I \ 1 N J 0-0 I 1 I WALL TYPES . 4 K 2) I I I , A 1 I A 3-5/8" METAL STUDS WITH 5/8" GYP. BD EACH �- o I I 0 Q _ I I SIDE. TAPE, FLOAT, TEXTURE AND FINISH GYP. BD. AS I 1 ` I SPECIFIED & SCHEDULED . PROVIDE BATT INSULATION C5) I I BETWEEN STUDS; EXTEND STUDS TO ROOF STRUCTURE. -�- O �1/4 - 1%N. B 6" METAL STUDS WITH 5/8" GYP. BOTH SIDES, TAPE, - - _ _ \ FLOAT TEXTURE AND FINISH GYP. BD. AS SPECIFIED & > C \ SCHEDULED . PROVIDE BATT INSULATION BETWEEN / 1 / STUDS; EXTEND STUDS TO ROOF STRUCTURE. M o FF - i -ib_ ' B2 3-5/8" METAL STUDS WITH 5/8" GYP. ONE MAINTENANCE 1 \ SIDE. TAPE, FLOAT TEXTURE AND FINISH GYP. STORAGE . N 1 \ 1 BD. AS SPECIFIED & SCHEDULED. EXTEND 1 1 STUDS TO CEILING OR ROOF STRUCTURE IF NO AA101 A 1 CEILING 15 SCHEDULED. v it31.1 pI 1 I 3/4" STUCCO ABOVE BRICK WAINSCOT (WITH WATERTABLE •- 0 J 0 C ON 1 /2" SHEATHING ON 3-5/8" METAL STUDS WITH 5/8" (100. GYP. BOARD ON INTERIOR SIDE. TAPE, FLOAT, TEXTURE AND FINISH GYP. BD. AS SPECIFIED & SCHEDULED APPLY — . m -METAL VAPOR BARRIER ON EXTERIOR FACE OF SHEATHING. PROVIDE �A-- BATT INSULATION BETWEEN STUDS; SEE WALL SECTIONS, PRO SHOP DEMOLITION PLAN FINISH SCHEDULE, SPECIFICATIONS, & STRUCTURAL 1.1 © 0 a` DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. ,?:_170, 1/4" = 1'-0" Jr 3 -5/8" STUDS 1/2"CEMENTITIOUS BOARD �� �� i _ ® D Iia ON INTERIOR SIDE WITH TILE FINISH AS SPECIFIED 0 LL 1' o TENNIS NORTH &SCHEDULED. EXTEND WALL TO CEILING �> e lD DEMOLITION KEYED NOTES HEB CENTER D2 6" METAL STUDS WITH 1/2" CEMENTITIOUS BOARD 3'-4" 3'-4" 1'-8"� 3-10 1/2" 1'-8 SHEET 01 7 of 82 WITH TILE FINISH ON BOTH SIDES AS SPECIFIED l <EQ. Note Number Note Text & SCHEDULED. EXTEND WALL TO CEILING. 1 15'-7 1/2" i 1 1 '-EQ. �6 1/2" `6 1/2" 15' 6 5/8' 11, 1/)" RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 :T�2" D3 3-5/8" METAL STUDS WITH 1/2" CEMENTITIOUS BOARD 1 EXISTING COLUMN TO REMAIN WITH TILE FINISH ON BOTH SIDES AS SPECIFIED & F.V. F.V F.V. IREVISION NO. I 2 DEMOLISH ALL EXISTING INTERIOR & EXTERIOR DOORS & WALLS; CAP OFF EXISTING SCHEDULED. EXTEND WALL TO CEILING. C PLUMBING. REFER TO MEP DRAWING SHEETS 59, 65, 66, 73. & 75 FOR ADDITIONAL D4 3-5/8" METAL STUDS 1/2" CEMENTITIOUS BOARD WITH TILE FINISH ON ONE SIDE & 5/8" BOARD ONE SIDE WITH 017 020 INFORMATION. FINISH AS SPECIFIED & SCHEDULED. EXTEND WALL TO 49 3 DEMOLISH EXISTING DRINKING FOUNTAIN. CEILING B PRO SHOP RENOVATION PLAN CITY PROJECT # E12118 017 017 NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0" D DESCRIPTION 1 CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. AA -1.2 14vP ED A•� •ArLOSE O ..................k4 Q• 8022• DATE:02/20/2015 L©Eo.„OFFICE- FIELD VERIFY - 615 NI. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com OFFICE is I t�B/) 0 0 0Q I1ECH 0 ak OFFICE OFFICE 1 %Ft ELECT. __./ ® I LEC . im0 3 0 LOUNGE 0 r LOUNGE e0 / 0 � A I a 3 1 war CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs (6) h O 14'-0” 6 h 0 14'-0" �� / A LOUNGE BLDG. PLAN 0 DEMOLITION 0 0 F.V. O LOUNGE BLDG. RENOVATION "B PLAN F.V. • 80318 1/8" = 1-0" 0 018018 `"J 1/8" = 1'-0" 1111 1111 1 DESCRIPTION HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE HEB TENNIS CENTER LOUNGE BLDG. DEMO. & RENO. PLANS © 0 G E 00 0 0 0 I 018022 018024 1 ! 0 O "••• / 0 o /10100 7-5-- LOUNGE BUILDING ELEVATION D LOUNGE BUILDING ELEVATION - NEW SLIDING WINDOWS Ty, 1/8" = 1'-0" ism 1/8" =11-0" xx LOUNGE BUILDING RENOVATION KEYED NOTES Note Number Note Text 1 NEW WINDSTORM -RATED SLIDING WINDOWS AS SPECIFIED. SEE REFERENCED SECTIONS. O LOUNGE BUILDING DEMOLITION KEYED NOTES . vamt 2 REMOVE RUST, CLEAN WITH RUST REMOVER, DRY, PAINT WITH COLD Note Number Note Text O■.GALV. `—�-1'I 'Isi I' 01 �I PAINTPREP AND PAINT ALL EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL - EPDXY PAINT. I' 11 ' ' 1 REMOVE EXISTING STOREFRONT WINDOWS AND SLIDING DOORS TO EXISTING COLUMNS. I piI 3 REMOVE RUST, CLEAN WITH RUST REMOVER. FILL EXISTING COLUMN WITH EPDXY GROUT FULL HEIGHT. REFER TO STRUCTURAL FOR m J �=— -PAINT. COLUMN REPAIRS. PREP AND PAINT EXPOSED COLUMNS - EPDXY GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES 4 NEW COLUMN. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWING SHEET 042. 5 EXISTING ROOF; REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWING SHEET 042 FOR Pl.- REPAIR WORK. 1. IT IS THE INTENT OF THE DEMOLITION TO REMOVE ALL EXISTING CONSTRUCTION WHICH CONFLICTS WITH THE INTENT OF NEW CONSTRUCTION AND EVERY 6 EXISTING STOREFRONT WINDOW SYSTEM IDATE I DEMOLITION DETAIL MAY NOT NEC ESSARILY BE CONVERED ON THESE DRAWINGS. SHEET 018 of 82 CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE ALL DEMOLITION WORK EVEN IF NOT SPECIFICALLY CALLED FOR. GENERAL RENOVATION NOTES 2. WHERE REMOVAL OF EXISTING WALLS, PARTITIONS, EQUIPMENT AND/OR WORK TO EXISTING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT DISTURBS EXISTING MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, AND ELECTRICAL SERVICES, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE PERMANENT REVISIONS AS REQUIRED AND IF NECESSARY PROVIDE TEMPORARY SERVICES TO AREAS NOT SCHEDULED FOR DEMOLITION AND REMODELING. E-'- \ LOUNGE BUILDING - 3D VIEW 1. REFER TO MECHANICAL SHEET 59 FOR ADD ALTERNATE NO. 3 INFORMATION. REFER TO SHEET 76 FOR ELECTRICAL WORK. PATCH, REPAIR & MATCH EXISTING FINISHES ON ANY WALLS AFFECTED BY THIS WORK. 2. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWING SHEET 042 FOR ROOF AND STRUCTURAL RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -20 4 v T O Z Z p ct 01801 STEEL WORK. CITY PROJECT # E12118 e'-D ,/4„ DESCRIPTION 1 CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. AA-2.1 //, „„ ,„„/„?///////\.., itis 4ED P A�c• l� s �� • • � • 0 \ J ,\ O� / iii •Sfl0. DATE:02/20/2015 1 '' MEN'S TOILET RM. �,5•,�`•;4. T41• 019 ' AA106 ' J ' ' @ KEYED NOTES - INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND ENLARGED PLANS w ` _� r; ///��`� D ,' \ \ 0 Note Number Note Text 615 NI. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 !AM CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com 019 019 .././ 1 24" X 36" MIRROR AS SPECIFIED O ©\ \ 2 SOAP DISEPENSER AS SPECIFIED o \ 3 WALL MOUNTED LAVATORY; REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWING SHEET 66. TOILET TO MEET ADA/TAS REQUIRMENTS; INSULATE ALL PIPES. \ EXPOSED DRAIN O 4 FLOOR MOUNTED WATER CLOSET; REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWING SHEET 66. TOILET TO MEET ADA/TAS REQUIRMENTS. \ 5 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER AS SPECIFIED. \ C 6 GRAB BAR AS SPECIFIED. 12 7 PLASTIC LAMINATE UPPER AND BASE CABINET 8 MOP SHELF WITH MOP AND BROOM HOLDERS AND HOOKS 9 4 1/4" X 4 1/4" SEMI-GLOSS CERAMIC TILE 01 plor- 7ti \ 10 SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL - WOMEN'S T/R ONLY. \ 11 FLOOR MOP SINK. SEE PLUMBING SHEET 66. / D ` 1'-7" , 12 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER AS SPECIFIED. MOUNT BOTTOM AT 48" ABOVE FLOOR. 0 i O 019019 13 TILE OVER BAC KERB OARD OVER EXISTING COLUMN. r 'i ¢ 14 BULLNOSE 4 1/4" X 4 1/4" SEMI-GLOSS TILE AT ALL EDGES -6 1/8" +' WOMEN'S TOILET v w �i cji RM. 1 fl AA107 / CVo �, ,\ �F r / MODULAR BRICK AS SPEC IFIED •.� ° irit war CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs -- > GROUT BRICK TO COLUMN -__- -♦- I • ///////// _< .. de b a I 1/2" SHEATHING AS j�x j/ ���// EXISTING COLUMN / SPEC IFIED<11) __-nn-___t___-nn-___-�- 3 5/8" METAL STUDS 9 J_ 0 ` / 5/8„ • d 6'-0" GYP. 3 5/8" METAL STUDS BOARD TILE AS SPECIFIED s 0 �6) B / OVER 1 -0 6" METAL STUDS BAC KERBOARD 1 �� '-6" / 3 019 0�--„ LA O v 2 -0" 1- / / f / A ENLARGED PLAN 1� COLUMN DETAIL f m ,/ C r " 1so1 " 1 DESCRIPTION I X1701 _ 1/2"1 0 1"_ 1 -0 w 10 /7° F- oc O w ` O • x "cl � Z J Z ' "(NIl i+� o rn to .. if. C N h i - o O HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE HEB TENNIS CENTER ENLARGED RESTROOM PLAN & INT. ELEVATIONS O , 'r d m \', 1'-5" jr '- PLASTIC LAMINATE 1'-0" ON 3/4" PLYWOOD DOOR, TOP, C TOILET - SIDE ELEVATION D TOILET ELEVATION c_ BOTTOM & EXPOSED END 19101 1/2" = 1-0" g:111' 1/2" = 1'-0" i MELAMINE ON 3/4" PLYWOOD ADJUSTABLE SHELF im E V, WITH FINISHED END 019 019 CO N 1/4 PAINTED 1 PLYWD. BACK ON 1X WOOD NAILERS Q L 2-0" Co 4" PLASTIC LAMINATE ' 1 BACKSPLASH AND >I. RADIUSED EDGE 3'-2 1 /4" CERAMIC TILE II r j O9 14 PLASTIC LAMINATE �(/ l ON 3/4" PLYWOOD 'coD 7 DOORS & DRAWERS WATER HEATER 0 MELAMINE ON 3/4" w w PLYWOOD SHELVES �~ 1/4" PAINTED c..> 0 0 0 `i'a PLYWD. BACK w >- m ON 1 X NAILERS M 0 _ 1_ iv < < X `r F.F. �� RUBBER FINISHED FLOOR i4"� BASE 6'-0" It 0" 2X WD. BASE FRAMING IDATE I SHEET 019 of 82 B COUNTER ELEVATION E MILLWORK SECTION F JANITOR'S CLOSET ELEVATION RECORD DRAWING NO. CP-204 ,1.01 • 1/2" = 1 -0X . " ' 1 01 • 3/4"= 1'-0" ' 171 01 /2= 1-0" " ' ° z z 0 v, ccili CITY PROJECT # E12118 0 0 0 0 0 DESCRIPTION I CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. AA-4.1 itiop Ate fl� 111/IlII © ;/ 0 ,,�•1 O F C'• ..... DATE:02/20/2015 C 05.1) \ n ����MMIII♦� ^11 11.x-----1�---------� I I I I I I I 1 1 I IMMINIM MMMM MOMMIM MCI= —=-- —1.�f������� —I________ �� / 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r I I I I I 1 , •, 1 ����� _ .1���S��i�� / 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I •111•11111•1111111•11•1fl111111•111111 NMI .������n 1111111••111111111•1111= ,..— . 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 I r 1 I I 1 1 1 I 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 WI CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com I fl ---I•—I• ------- __r—__-1 1 111 _t•__i_______t•_t•_t•_t•___ ---1���� • 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 I 1 I I 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PRO SHOP - NORTH A ELEVATION O 17 02 1/4" = 1'-0" 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 '.. 0 0 0 , 0 • / / /' / \ .- ,. - / / \ \ \ - \ \ CDD 1) I� /C00.2) (06.1>\ _,..' � 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1, 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 I I I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 III 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1- :007.D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I I I 1 1 1 1 L2 M W '\ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 " 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 .. 1 1 1 1 1 1 \ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 \ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ; , , 11 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 r 1, 1 .: 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I r 1 r 1, 1 1 1, I r 1 1 1 `1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I 1 1 r \ 1 1 1 1 1 1 , 1 I I 1 r 1- i I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 - \ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r I 1 1 1 1 I I I / L . / 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 \ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 \ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 / 0 V / 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I I I I I I l l l l l l l I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A 1 1 1 1 1 1 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1- A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 L 6 r : \ / 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 \ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 // 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 iier .r.r.r CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs L' \ / 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 111111 1 1 1 1 1 1 \ 113111 1- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 \ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 / 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 \ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1•1 \\ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I l f l f l f l f l f l f l f l f 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 \v 111111111111111 111111111111111111 1111111111111 111,.•1111111111111 .1111111111111 1111111 1111111111111111 // '= DATE 7 B-.. 0 0 HEB PRO SHOP - EAST ELEVATION 0 I REVISION NO. 17 02Q) 1/4" = 0 1'-011 0 / 2 1 DESCRIPTION I 0 0 — ;- HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE HEB TENNIS CENTER PRO SHOP - EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 3 1 1 1 1/ 1- ------------------------w---------111111flIIIII----------- .' I I[ 1 1 1 1 1 1! 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Y� / r A - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 11 1 1 1 1 1 I I I I I I I I 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Imo/ 1 1 I^ I \ p/ / l l l f l l I l l 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1! 11 ill 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 11111111111111 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 71]1]111! L 1111111111111111111111111111111 11111111111111111111111 11]1111111111111111- 1111111111111111 r 1 111 111 111111111111111 11111111111111111113111113111111111111111111111 1111111111 (C-.\ HEB ELEVATION 31111111 1111 11111111111111111111 r1 PRO SHOP - SOUTH `g117 1/4" = 1'-0" 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 is I 0 — :4 0 0 0 _.. ' _- - / \ 0 \ \ / \ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (100.i)> 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 • 1 1 1 1 1 '--- >.• M W • 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1[ - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 _LI1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1_ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 j - 1 1 1 1 1 11 , 111111111111111111111111111111111111 111111111111111111111111111111111111 111111111111 / 1111111111111•,.7111111111111111 71111111111111111111_ 1 1111111111 \ / ]✓ ` I I I I I I I I I I I 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I I I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 / 1[ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I 1 , I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (' • 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 \ / 3 1 1 1 1 I 1 `y •- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1• 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 - 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 I 1 L 1 3 I 1 1 3 1 1 1 I 1 1 -. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 / 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 J. - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 \ 7 I 1 _ ry EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS - KEYED NOTES ll�� 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 / / 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 r - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V \ / / 1i I I 1 1 1 E - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 - II 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 / 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 `1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 \ / '1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 131/1113 111113111111 11111113111311111111131311131113111 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I Note E113111111131311111111111111111111131 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 31111111311111313111111111 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1`• 111111111111 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1` 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 \ �/ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 T Number Note Text w ~ ¢ o 1 DOOR LOUVER; SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS. 2 EXISTING ROOF; EPDXY PAINT EXISTING FASCIA. SHEET 020 of 82 3 STUCCO AS SPECIFIED 4 CAST STONE SILL RECORD DRAWING NO. CP-2�4 i `h 5 MODULAR B RICK WAINSCOT 6 EPDXY PAINT EXISTING COLUMN IREVISION NO. I HEB PRO SHOP - WEST 7 THROUGH WALL LOUVER. SEE MECHANICAL DRAWING SHEET 59 FOR MORE INFORMATION. EXTERIOR ELEVATION 8 NEW HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE HI-LO DRINKING FOUNTAIN. MOUNTING HEIGHT PER ADA/TAS REQUIREMENTS FROM EXTERIOR PAVING SURFACE. 1702 CITY PROJECT # E12118 114"=1'-013 2� OPPOSITE HAND 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4'-0" / GALVAN ZED PPE GUARD RAILING BOTH SIDES FROM STAIR TO STAIR. RAILING INFILL TO BE CHAIN L NK FENCING. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWING SHEETS 043 & 052. F PBR METAL ROOF AS SPECIFIED. B 021 021 NEW COLUMNS. TYPICAL OF 16. SEE STRUCTURAL SHEET 043. NtSEE STRUCTURAL DRAWING SHEET 043 FOR CONSTRUCTION OF NEW VIEWING PLATFORM. MAXIMUM SPACING OF ALL VERTICAL GUARD RAIL POSTS. •. 4 i Al VIEWING PLATFORM EXTERIOR ELEVATION VERTICAL PLATFORM LIFT AS SPECIFIED EXISTING COLUMNS/FOOTINGS. TYPICAL OF 16. SEE STRUCTURAL SHEET 043. • 016 021 SCALE: 3/16" = 1'-0" 12 r3 PBR METAL ROOF AS SPECIFIED. —i If REFER TO STRUCTURAL FOR FRAMING & DECKING. ALL EXPOSED STEEL TO BE GALVANIZED. PAINT PER SPECIFICATIONS. 42" HIGH GUARD RAILING. SEE EXTERIOR ELEVATION AND REFERENCED DETAIL. REFER TO STRUCTURAL ThiFft 041 FOR FRAMING & DECKING. ALL EXPOSED STEEL TO BE GALVANIZED. / 41- I �-rn'mW. NT 11-11- �I lLJI- EXISTING COLUMNS. PAINT PER SPECIFICATIONS. EXISTING TENNIS COURT CHAIN LINK FENCING TO REMAIN. VERTICAL PLATFORM LIFT AS SPECIFIED SEE STRUCTURAL SHEET 043 FOR NEW VERTICAL PLATFORM LIFT CONCRETE PAD. l I I—Ju—ul n�—HSI —rp T 'I m II �..+I' 'I� I''^—p�I��� �i ILJTI�T 11=11 �i IIJILJMTI 1_ �I (I I— 'T! I��r#L ill � —L VIEWING PLATFORM SECTION SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" 1-1/4" STD. GALVANIZED HORIZONTAL RAIL. EXISTING TENNIS COURT CHAIN LINK FENCING TO REMAIN. N N M GALVANIZED PIPE GUARD RAILING BOTH SIDES FROM STAIR TO STAIR. RAILING INFILL TO BE CHAIN LINK FENCING. SEE EXTERIOR ELEVATION & STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF NEW VIEWING PLATFORM. x EXISTING COLUMN TO RECEIVE PAINT PER SPECIFICATIONS. CONCRETE FILLED STEEL TREAD PANS BETWEEN STEEL STRINGERS. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWING SHEET 56. EQUAL RISERS NOT TO EXCEED 7" EACH. c ---:1 • C 021 021 ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL TO BE GALVANIZED AND PAINTED MAXIMUM SPACING OF ALL VERTICAL GUARD RAIL POSTS. GALVANIZED CAIN DETECTION PIPE RAILING ANCHORED TO EXISTING CONCRETE PAVING N C---7 C::::] C1-117 ENLARGED STAIR ELEVATION 7'-7 1/2" 3'-0" 11" GUARD RAILING. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWING SHEET 056. HANDRAIL WELDED TO GUARD RAILING. 1'-0" HANDRAIL EXTENSION 021021/SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" INSTALL CONTINUOUS GALVANIZED FLAT BAR ALL FOUR SIDES OF GALVANIZED CHAIN LINK INSTERTS BETWEEN VERTICAL POSTS & HORIZONTAL RAILINGS. ATTACH CHAIN LINK INSERTS TO PIPE FRAMES WITH GALVANIZED STRAPS AT 12" 0.C. MAX. 1-1/4" STD. GALVANIZED VERTICAL POST. SEE STRUCTURAL FOR SUPPORT. 1-1/4" STD. GALVANIZED HORIZONTAL RAIL. REFER TO STRUCTURAL FOR FRAMING & DECKING. ALL EXPOSED STEEL TO BE GALVANIZED. o GUARDRAIL DETAIL ®® SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" PBR METAL ROOF AS SPECIFIED. SCULPTURED SAVE TRIM BY ROOF MANUFACTURER. 2 ROOF EAVE DETAIL r -- REFER REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWING SHEET 056 FOR CONCRETE PAD OUTSIDE CLOSURE BY ROOF MANUFACTURER. RIDGE TRIM BY ROOF MANUFACTURER. REFER TO STRUCTURAL FOR FRAMING & DECKING. ALL EXPOSED STEEL T GALVANIZED. 0211021 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" ROOF RIDGE DETAIL SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RIDGE SUPPORT PLATE BY ROOF MANUFACTURER. ›- 03 ti >- m ti CONSULTANTS SHEET NO. AA -4.2 DATE:02/20/2015 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 0 > U Capita! Programs 0 Q craoz N 0 czc W uj co W U U CO W CnLLJ O LUJ W SHEET 021 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT# E12118 DESCRIPTION 1 CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. AA -5.1 ',n r � _ n :h. sis ; • • • Ale 4. I, • • I►t • I 1 . 1 - 1• F , . Al.:. EXISTING ROOF I[ I 022 022 • r .a r" --c REFER TO • STRUCTURAL •••� .`T� •.... DATE:02/20/2015 e,� O F t$ f ._ WALL f" • 3 5/8" METAL STUDS ra i ANCHORING •'` /� •-fl f.:, }I = �A— BUILDING J SECTION STUCCO AS SPECIFIED OVER VAPOR BARRIER AS ;'� f �/ . • .';„ -1r 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 !All CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com 1( 02 1/4" = 1'—O" SPECIFIED �• i:-: / : 2'-6,. 5/8" 6 — GYPSUM EXISTING X 022 02 1 1/2" GLASS ' WALL — ( ROOF MAT SHEATHING BOARD lJ PLASTIC STRUCTURE AS SPECIFIED J MOLDING i PLASTIC LAMINATE ON LAMINATE ON e 1 , i _ L.) 3/4" MEDIUM DENSITY 3/4" MDF I i liJ" " 11 FIBERBOARD OR #45 WITH STUCCO AS CAULK EXTERIOR GRADE 2X DENSITY PARTICLE BOARD; RADIUSED EDGE sr RADIUSED EDGE { I SPECIFIED , J WOOD NAILER ALL SIDES OF WINDOW; ANCHOR TO CONTINUOUS MEET WINDSTORM frir METAL DRIP 2X 6 WOODcrate EXISTING BEAMS FLASHING AT 27" MIN. C LR. OPENING WINDOW AS BLOCKING '� • SPECIFIED & {. • CAULK 1/2" GLASS -MAT WITH SCHEDULED PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" MEDIUM DENSITY FIBERBOARD OR #45 I I° I 5/8.. VAPORGYPSBAUM GYPSUM WALL BOARD AS SPECIFIED o - DENSITY PARTICLE -der- fi BOARD. -- INSULATION AS 1 HEAD DETAIL SPEC IFIED 5/8" GYP=;i12 2 3" = 1'—O" — BOARD - , _ '� 2X TREATED WOOD BLOCKING 4" RUBBER BASE BOTH CAULK N INU U 5/8" GYP BD SIDES WINDSTORM RATED SLIDING WINDOW AS SPECIFIED & irit war CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs 3 5/8° METAL STUDS FLASHING AT ALUMINUM WINDOW WINDOW PROVIDED BY SCHEDULED • 7D- CAP DETAIL SLIDING WINDOW HEAD STOREFRONT z sc y CAULK 2202 3" = 1'-O" �� MANUF. [ f DETAIL J MOLDING 2202 1 1/2" = 1'-0" � "' STUCCO A5 -_r:• ,2 PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISH '( O• SPECIFIED COUNTER SECTION ��� N OVER 3/4° MEDIUM DENSITY OVER VAPOR FIB ER$CARD OR #45 DENSITY ' EXTERIOR GRADE 2X WOOD NAILER ALL SIDES • • 1702 1 1/2" = 1'-0"Li ,�� BARRIER AS PARTICLE BOARD SPECIFIED = i OF WINDOW; ANCHOR TO - ; , MEET WINDSTORM REQUIREMENTS PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISH VAPOR BARRIER OVER 3/4"MEDIUM OVER 1/2" ,•1 . 3 5/8" STUDS A DENSITY FIBERBOARD OR GLASS MAT #45 DENSITY PARTICLE SHEATHING AS -- - I 3 5/8" METAL BOARD SPECIFIED k D 022 022 STUCCO - 5/8" 2 X 6 WOOD B LOC KING CASINGI 1 DESCRIPTION 1 •,;.. GYP. BD. 6 BEAD COUNTERTOP EDGE DETAIL 2202 �• -4011111 3" = l'—O" CONT. 4 v a ' INSULATION j— STEEL TUBE; REFER CAULKING •A . .A ° AS SPECIFIED — rte= • TO STRUCTURAL — 1 o . . DRAWING SHEET 42 M �' I D 9 D . I / EXISTING f VBERIFY; SIZES FIELDi FOR MORE INFORMATION. _ ��� II" wo I d CAST STONE C c ' �. o a , p HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE IPHEB TENNIS CENTER RO SHOP & LOUNGE BLDG. SECTIONS & DETAIL SILL j BLOCOKIONG I CAULKING ; 4 � ' � {"� /_� 0221022 I �' 022(022 / - ���� 4 110 � 5/8" GYP. 3 5/8' i, �p- I VAPOR BARRIER / ` BD (60TH I� METAL STUDS 7 P �' OVER 1/2" SIDES) :I GLASS MAT .shiAl 3 5/8" METAL EXISTING BEAMS; — — — — J SHEATHING AS SPECIFIED , / • ;/ STUDS FIELD VERIFY 4" RUBBER _ `` Orr BASE (BOTH SIDES) �+ ) 1 _ _ _ _ • SIZES / / / / A I 2 SILL DETAIL zlz 3.. = 1'-0.. C� WALL SECTION : -v44 1702 1 1/2" = 1'-0" �g I pp sIz 4 BRICK TIES VAPOR BARRIER �~ VAPOR BARRIER AT 16" 0.C. '� WINDSTORM P AS SPECIFIED o �• I VERTICALLYO& SSHEAT ING AS SPECIFIED RATED SLIDING OVER 1/2" ALUMINUM ELAS -MAT 4 I HORIZONTALLY �' -' WINDOW .Is SHEATHING 40 MODULAR I I — — — BRICK 2X TREATED VAPOR 5WOOD 402 rairl" r SPEC IFIED ARRIER S I 022 022 BLOCKING\ 7Yt N, �� Al 022 022 OVERGLAS-MAT 1 s STUCCO AS PAINTED WOOD SHEATHING CELLULAR BATT SPECIFIED �� SILL T = PLASTIC INSULATION - m !it,. 40 �yGPSUM — _404 16" O.C. VAPOR BARRIE , 40 000--(; WALL BOARD> ris4 GYP OVER 1/2"GLASS MAT = I {� V / GYP. BD. SHEATHING cS I : GALVANIZED AS SPECIFIED � CAULK — C ONT.��� Ln ', 5/8 I DATE I Milii..__ METAL STUDS �,Fe 40 THROUGH WALL METAL /3 METAL ���3 4111 FLASHING; � :•i STUD SHEET 022 of 82 A 5/8" 4„5/8..A RUBBER BASE 4" I I APPLY VAPOR METAL EXISTING CONT- i RUBBER p PAVEMENT STUDS BARRIER OVER RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 \ SEALANT I. BAS I 1 FLASHING EXISTING FLANGE { INSULATION AS I FOUNDATION iiID AO lift 4" RUBBER O o cn ct BASE SPECIFIED r /-/ 1/2" —Ilikil EXISTING 5 SHUTTER COUNTER DETAIL 5/8" GYP. BD. 1 G WALL SECTION — LOUNGE E WALL SECTION — LOUNGE WALL SECTION — NEW PRO F SHOP FOUNDATION 3 WALL BASE DETAIL CITY PROJECT # E12118 22 02 1 1/2" = 1'-0" ' 18 02 1" = 1'-0" 18 02 1" = 1'-0" ' 22 02 1" = 1'—O" 22 02 3" = 1'-0" 0 CN N 0 I M \ NET POST AS SPECIFIED. NET POST COLLAR. ADJUST AS REQUIRED. 3/4" THICK EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL AROUND NET POST FOOTING. SEAL TOP WITH POLYURETHANE SEALANT. L 21'-0" V) 0 4-7 6'-6" (REFER TO STRU OOTING DEPTH BELOW 1=I=11 1II III I-11=11-1 3,000 PSI CONCRLIE 1111 FOOTING. -I POST SLEEVE SET IN 11 11 A d II CONCRETE FOOTING. 11'-0" AT COURTS #23 & #24 ADD ALTERNATE #1) A 1'-6" DIAMETER Q d A 4 1=111-1111- 1 -111 -III II11 III 11 I I II 11 I I -11I 11 11 111 11 111 -111 1 A111I I I I -11 1 11111 -� 11111I 11 1 1 I 11111 — I —11111111-111=11-1 —I TENNIS NET POST DETAIL AT SUSPENDED SLAB TENNIS NET. SEE SITE PLAN FOR INFORMATION. TENNIS NET CENTER TIE -DOWN AS SPECIFIED EMBEDDED IN SLAB. EXISTING GRADE. REFER TO STRUCTURAL FOR SUB -GRADE PREPARATION & SUSPENDED SLAB INFORMATION. SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" NOT TO EXCEED 1O'-0" 10'-0" TOP RAIL. 1'! RAIL BRACING.w..•:. SW, TYPICAL • 44•443.4%•00 VS k41041101110 b AIN' LINK QF'ENC 4. 4 �'EAS SP€CIEIED.• '' • m—IIi�III� �-T ITI��I TIII r'"II nig I T��I i ii 17(IIITL I�I grr-L n-FLIII� O I 0 V) a r 4-14-r I N Cc "v0Zo Z U LJ 1' 2" DIA. CONCRETE FENCE © FENCE POSTS (TYPICAL) 7 �4 r r LJ I � CHAIN LINK FENCE ELEVATION SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0" -r=� r 0 I 0 0 M d 4 111 IIIIIIII- IIII �IIIIII —I I 1-1 1 1—I NET POST AS SPECIFIED. NET POST COLLAR. ADJUST AS REQUIRED. 3/4" THICK EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL AROUND NET POST FOOTING. SEAL TOP WITH POLYURETHANE SEALANT. 6'-S" (REFER TO STRUCTURAL) w 0 w FOOTING DEPTH BELOW 0 - CC CC 21'-O" 4Q d <7 4 d POST SLEEVE SET IN CONCRETE FOOTING. LI TI 1 1 1=111-1 I I— I IIIII I III II =1 1 IIII 3,000 PSI CONCRETE FOOTING. I I 11 a 1'-8" 1 7 a d A II III III =1 DIAMETER _ I I I I—I I I—I 11IIII 1111111 III III=1 , 1 111 III 111 (I 11 11 1 I 111 TENNIS NET. SEE SITE PLAN FOR INFORMATION. TENNIS NET CENTER TIE -DOWN AS SPECIFIED EMBEDDED IN SLAB. 41 81. //ii/ i 17 EXISTING ASPHALT SURFACE OVER EXISTING GRADE. REFER TO STRUCTURAL FOR NEW CONCRETE POST TENSIONED CABLE SLAB OVERLAY INFORMATION. TENNIS NET POST DETAIL AT OVERLAY SLAB SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" PRACTICE BACKBOARD ELEVATION SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0" 11- III -III 11=111=111 I1I IIII�III 2-1 EXISTING LIGHT POLE BEYOND. 13'-O" NEW FENCE TOP RAIL CONNECTED TO EXISTING/NEW TOP RAIL AT EACH END WHERE APPLICABLE. NEW FENCE RAIL CONNECTED TO NEW HORIZONTAL RAILS. PROVIDE NEW END POST AT ALL CUT CORNERS SEPARATE FROM EXISTING FENCING. CORE DRILL IN SLAB PER STANDARD DETAILS.. : NEW CHAIN LINK FENCE FABRIC. NEW FENCE MID -RAIL CONNEC TO EXISTING/NEW MID -RAIL AT` k,EACH °END. WHEREAPPLICABLE.' 2H .5.6 NEW 2'-0 WIDE GATE WITH LATCH FOR ACCESS TO LIGHT POLE.. ANCHOR T9 pp9F stm , GATE FLA4.41 NEW FENCE BOTTOM RAIL CONNECTED TO EXISTING/NEW BOTTOM RAIL AT / EACH END WHERE APPLICABLE. CHAIN LINK SCALE: 3/8" = "CUT CORNER" ELEVATION REVISION NO. 0 0 C0 w a CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. AA -5.2 DATE:02/20/2015 r o < 10 3 N w Qce m cew a 10 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com Capita! Programs Ct W CD U CC LLIW LU W it W (N1 LU Ct -15 N m Q W CC) SHEET 023 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT# E12118 24'-U" T INSTALL BACKjOARD ON 4 EQUALLY• • 04 • S• ♦ a�o - _ SPACED TREA INSTALL ON FENCE MANUFACTERERS ED HORIZONTAL 2X4'S.1044 POSTS PER RECOMMENDATIONS. _ • 4 •s 0•4 aha, • Do � • 0 •••00s • **MOOMA SEE SPECIFICATIONS BACKBOARDS. FOR INFORMATION ON • H ••A 0400 - - 2" WHITE UNE ON FACE OF BACKBOARD. \ ••44,4 ****-0.04 s•400.0•0 • 0 PLAYING SURFACE. .4 •ii•a* . Wood •�s'�Ss re 4 • 4 s••••••• .•••I.O.•41000 ••••• s••••••0 *?t ••/�•i••�sds�sS's�i4 • S• ss. ---s• --•i PRACTICE BACKBOARD ELEVATION SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0" 11- III -III 11=111=111 I1I IIII�III 2-1 EXISTING LIGHT POLE BEYOND. 13'-O" NEW FENCE TOP RAIL CONNECTED TO EXISTING/NEW TOP RAIL AT EACH END WHERE APPLICABLE. NEW FENCE RAIL CONNECTED TO NEW HORIZONTAL RAILS. PROVIDE NEW END POST AT ALL CUT CORNERS SEPARATE FROM EXISTING FENCING. CORE DRILL IN SLAB PER STANDARD DETAILS.. : NEW CHAIN LINK FENCE FABRIC. NEW FENCE MID -RAIL CONNEC TO EXISTING/NEW MID -RAIL AT` k,EACH °END. WHEREAPPLICABLE.' 2H .5.6 NEW 2'-0 WIDE GATE WITH LATCH FOR ACCESS TO LIGHT POLE.. ANCHOR T9 pp9F stm , GATE FLA4.41 NEW FENCE BOTTOM RAIL CONNECTED TO EXISTING/NEW BOTTOM RAIL AT / EACH END WHERE APPLICABLE. CHAIN LINK SCALE: 3/8" = "CUT CORNER" ELEVATION REVISION NO. 0 0 C0 w a CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. AA -5.2 DATE:02/20/2015 r o < 10 3 N w Qce m cew a 10 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com Capita! Programs Ct W CD U CC LLIW LU W it W (N1 LU Ct -15 N m Q W CC) SHEET 023 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT# E12118 SEE SITE PLAN FOR LIMIT OF CHAIN LINK FABRIC REPLACEMENT ON EXISTING FENCE POSTS. RE -LOCATE EXISTING FENCE BOTTOM RAIL TO HEIGHT AS SHOWN. EXISTING PAVING/GRADE TO REMAIN. RE -LOCATE EXISTING METER COVER TO NEW FRAMED OPENING. AFTER OVERLAY SLAB IS COMPLETED & CURED, FILL IN VOID AROUND METER BOX WITH CONCRETE. NEW CONCRETE POST -TENSIONED CABLE SLAB. FORM AROUND EXISTING METER BOX. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. APPLY BOND BREAKER TO SLAB BEFORE FILL IS POURED. .4 4 4 4 4 -2 4 a 44 I 1 1 4 4a 4 4 4 a 4 4 a e 4 4 d 4 4d I II II II II II IJ a ° EXISTING ASPHALT SURFACE OVER EXISTING GRADE. REFER TO STRUCTURAL FOR POST TENSIONED CABLE SLAB OVERLAY INFORMATION. C 4 d 4 4 d 4 a 44 6" MIN. le 11 11111 SLAB OVERLAY PERIMETER DETAIL AT EXISTING METER BOX SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" SEE SITE PLAN FOR LIMIT OF CHAIN LINK FABRIC REPLACEMENT ON EXISTING FENCE POSTS. RE -LOCATE EXISTING FENCE BOTTOM RAIL TO HEIGHT AS SHOWN. EXISTING PAVING/GRADE TO REMAIN. / ° 4 4 EXISTING LIGHT POLE. CHAMFER EDGE OF CONCRETE 1/2". (TYPICAL). 4 4 a ° 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 a AFTER OVERLAY SLAB IS COMPLETED & CURED, FILL IN VOID WITH CONCRETE. 4 4 a 4.4 ° 4 4 a 4 4 4 .4 a1 4 ° 4 44 oi d 44 N W Q SEE STRUCTURAL APPLY BOND BREAKER TO SLAB BEFORE FILL IS POURED. 4 \\ 1,-10" FIELD VERIFY \ \ MIN. EXIST NG ASPHALT SURFACE OVER EXISTING GRADE. REFER TO STRUCTURAL FOR .JEW (CONCRETE POST TENSIONED CABLE LAB �OVERLAY .INFORMATION. I I IILII 1 I 11111 11—IIIA I I III 111, 111 111, 1,,111 1 \� �11111111111111111111111 II SLAB OVERLAY PERIMETER DETAIL AT EXISTING LIGHT POLE SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" SEE SITE PLAN FOR LIMIT OF CHAIN LINK FABRIC REPLACEMENT ON EXISTING FENCE POSTS. EXISTING CONCRETE �\ OVERLA T [//// \\ 2 4 EXISTING LIGHT POLE. III—III= 1,1,1 1 I 1 4 d d 4 EXISTING CONCRETE BEAM & BASE FOR LIGHT POLE. II —III ,I III NEW POST TENSIONED CABLE CONCRETE SLAB OVERLAY. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. UJ SEE STRUCTURAL EXISTING ASPHALT SURFACE OVER EXISTING GRADE. REFER TO STRUCTURAL FOR POST TENSIONED CABLE SLAB OVERLAY INFORMATION. SLAB OVERLAY DETAIL AT EXISTING OVERLAY & LIGHT POLE SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" N w SEE STRUCTURAL ® INTERIOR POSTS 0 SEE SITE PLAN FOR LIMIT OF CHAIN LINK FABRIC REPLACEMENT ON EXISTING FENCE POSTS. RE -LOCATE EXISTING FENCE BOTTOM RAIL TO HEIGHT AS SHOWN. N EXISTING PAVING/GRADE TO REMAIN. ® END & CORNER POSTS * CC U) w N CHAMFER EDGE OF CONCRETE 1/2". (TYPICAL). NEW POST TENSIONED CABLE CONCRETE SLAB OVERLAY. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. 4 A a 111 \// /////ii////�i /. / r•i/ /ii, EXISTING ASPHALT SURFACE OVER EXISTING GRADE. REFER TO STRUCTURAL FOR NEW CONCRETE POST TENSIONED CABLE SLAB OVERLAY INFORMATION. 1117-1"—n,111 ;III„ I_ II ,,IIII,III; SLAB OVERLAY PERIMETER DETAIL SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" NEW CHAIN LINK FENCE AS SPECIFIED. FENCE BOTTOM RAIL. III=III=III —111 3/4" THICK EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL AROUND NET POST FOOTING. SEAL TOP WITH POLYURETHANE SEALANT. 1. 111 I I 1 1 4 7 II 4 d d4 4 N SEE STRUCTURAL STRUCTURAL SLAB. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. 4 a 111II1 11 11III iii—ii III III III IIIIII ubbS 3,bb0-PSI RETE BEAM. SEE URAL. III =1 I I I IG; NU IIIIIII1: 1 -2" h POST SLEEVE SET IN •`-h1 1-1 I CONCRETE FOOTING. IIII —1111 bfflHfflH-TJItV PERIMETER BEAM DETAIL AT SUSPENDED SLAB METER EXISTING GRADE. REFER TO STRUCTURAL FOR SUB -GRADE PREPARATION & SUSPENDED SLAB INFORMATION. 3,000 PSI CONCRETE FOOTING \40.1024 / SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'- " SEE SITE PLAN FOR LIMIT OF CHAIN LINK FABRIC REPLACEMENT ON EXISTING FENCE POSTS. AFTER OVERLAY SLAB IS COMPLETED & CURED, FILL IN VOID BETWEEN OLD AND NEW CONCRETE OVERLAYS WITH CONCRETE. NEW POST TENSIONED CABLE CONCRETE SLAB OVERLAY. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. EXISTING CONCRETE OVERLAY TO REMAIN. ////// r,\ \\ A' .4 a 44 APPLY BOND BREAKER c SLAB BEFORE FILL IS POUF 3 TO ED. 4 4 4 A //i///i// \\ 11I I III III III , „ \\\\. SEE PLAN III 111 1 1 1 EXISTING ASPHALT SURFACE OVER -EXISTING GRADE. REFER TO STRUCTURAL FOR POST TENSIONED CABLE SLAB OVERLAY INFORMATION. SEE STRUCTURAL SLAB OVERLAY DTL. AT EXIST. OVERLAY 02402" SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 4 SEE SITE PLAN FOR LIMIT OF CHAIN LINK FABRIC REPLACEMENT ON EXISTING FENCE POSTS. RE -LOCATE EXISTING FENCE BOTTOM RAIL TO HEIGHT AS SHOWN. 4 a 4 4 4 APPLY BOND BREAKER SLAB BEFORE FILL IS POUR 4 4 AFTER OVERLAY SLABS ARE COMPLETED & CURED, FILL IN VOID BETWEEN NEW CONCRETE OVERLAYS WITH CONCRETE. \\ 4 4 4 1 —I -EXISTING ASP14LT SJRFACE —E STIIt II TENS ONEI.ALE SLAB OVERLAY INFORMATION.GRA¢ REF'ERIQ UCTURA= FOR -NEW CO TETE -DO,T 1 I1 1 1 11 1 1_ 111 1 s SLAB OVERLAY DETAIL AT EXISTING DIVIDER FENCE SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" U7 w SEE STRUCTURAL REVISION NO. 0 z z 0 0 113 w cc CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. AA -5.3 DATE:02/20/2015 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com cr T (,)U noil R. Q Amid cr 0 U 0 Capital Programs ct I— CD U Qc a Wcn I,I coci)J W ctLIJ LL.I CC r 4 N m cm WI Q ce O Ca Ca SHEET 024 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 DESCRIPTION I CONSULTANTS SHEET NO. AA -6.1 3,..,.„„,pe C41 ;�� '; � �`•;• i 0 DOOR SCHEDULE - HEB PRO SHOP ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE - HEB PRO SHOP D O O R FRAME DETAILS WALLS CEILING SIZE NUMBER NAME FLOOR BASE NORTH I EAST SOUTH WEST FINISH REMARKS • � ;' '•'4' OF C DATE:02/20/2015 DOOR NO. WIDTH HEIGHT THK ELEV. MATL FINISH HARWARE SIZE MATL FINISH HEAD JAMB SILL AA100 RETAIL AREA VINYL PLANK 4" RUBBER PAINT PAINT PAINT PAINT ETR—PAINT 100.1 6' — 0" 7' — 0" 2" E ALUM. STOREFRONT BRONZE ANODIZED SET 2 2" ALUM ANOD. 4/025 4/025 SIM — AA101 MAINTENANCE STORAGE SEALED CONCRETE 4" RUBBER EPDXY PAINT EPDXY PAINT EPDXY PAINT EPDXY PAINT ETR—PAINT 100.2 3' — 0" 7' — 0" 1 3/4" D ALUM. BRONZE ANODIZED SET 2 2" ALUM ANOD. 4/025 4/025 SIM — AA102 TENNIS PRO VINYL PLANK 4" RUBBER PAINT PAINT PAINT PAINT ETR—PAINT 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 WI CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com I STOREFRONT AA103 STAFF/CHECK—IN VINYL PLANK 4" RUBBER PAINT PAINT PAINT PAINT ETR—PAINT 100.3 3' — 0" 7' — 0" 1 3/4" D ALUM. STOREFRONT BRONZE ANODIZED SET 2 2" ALUM ANOD. 4/025 4/025 SIM — AA104 RETAIL STORAGE SEALED C ONC RETE 4" RUBBER PAINT PAINT PAINT PAINT ETR—PAINT 101.1 3' — 0" 7' — 0" 1 3/4" C HOLLOW METAL — PAINT SET 4 2" HOLLOW METAL — GALVANIZED PAINT 9/025 9/025 SIM. — AA105 JANITOR'S CLOSET SEALED CONCRETE 4" RUBBER EPDXY PAINT EPDXY PAINT EPDXY PAINT EPDXY PAINT ETR—PAINT CERAMIC TILE AT MOP SINK GALVANIZED AA106 MEN'S TOILET RM. SEALED 4" RUBBER CERAMICTILE CERAMICTILE CERAMICTILE CERAMICTILE ETR—PAINT 104.1 3' — 0" 7' — 0" 1 3/4" B SOLID CORE PLASTIC LAMINATE SET 1 2" HOLLOW METAL — PAINT 2/025 2/025 SIM 1/025 CONCRETE WOOD GALVANIZED AA107 WOMEN'S TOILET SEALED CERAMIC TILE — COVE CERAMICTILE CERAMICTILE CERAMICTILE CERAMICTILE ETR—PAINT 105.1 3' — 0" 7' — 0" 1 3/4" A HOLLOW PAINT SET 4 2" HOLLOW METAL — PAINT 9/025 9/025 SIM. — RM. CONCRETE METAL — GALVANIZED GALVANIZED Xx WINDOW SCHEDULE - HEB PRO SHOP 106.1 3' — 0" 7' — 0" 1 3/4" A HOLLOW PAINT SET 3 2" HOLLOW METAL — PAINT 9/025 9/025 SIM. — METAL — GALVANIZED MARK TYPE HEAD JAMB SILL MATERIAL FINISH GALVANIZED Al FIXED 3/025 3/025 SIM 6/025 ALUMINUM BRONZE 107.1 3' — 0" 7' — 0" 1 3/4" A HOLLOW PAINT SET 3 2" HOLLOW METAL — PAINT 9/025 9/025 SIM. — ANODIZED METAL — GALVANIZED GALVANIZED A2 SLIDING 4/022 7/025 5/022 SLIDING MATCH EXISTING A3 SLIDING 4/022 7/025 5/022 SLIDING MATCH EXISTING 1 l 6'-0" if 1 l m V / A A / iier .r.r.r CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs N N \ N I DATE LOUVER AS \; CO , ,' ,' FINISHED FLOOR SPECIFIED; MEP R TO A B C D E 0 w co w W FINISHED FLOOR�h DRAWINGS. DOOR TYPES \ ALUMINUM Al FIXED WINDOW A2 A3 ALUMINUM SLIDING WINDOW O" I REVISION NO. WINDOW TYPES [DESCRIPTION 1 /\cr INSULATION 2X WOOD B LOC KING STUC CO AS 5/8" GWB. MEMBRANE � . SPEC FLIED OVER FLASHING INSULATION 1/2" GLASS MAT STUCCO AS SPECIFIED SHEATHING WITH HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE HEB TENNIS CENTER SCHEDULES & DETAILS 3 5/8" MT'L. STUDS ® ` -, . }j' z OVER 1/2" GLASS MAT SHEATHING WITH VAPOR : =- VAPOR BARRIER AS 16" O.C. ` ti _ 3 SDS METAL _�' BARRIER AS SPEC IFIED MEMBRANE n ;_ _},'* SPECIFIED z - FLASHING • = r STUDS - x `� CASING BEAD AND CASING BEAD ® CONT. METAL DRIP DOOR 5/8" GYP. �'^ `-, •- 3 5/8" METAL ; FLASHING FRAME FRAME AS } BOARD W SEALANT STUDS ;r DOOR AS BEYOND SCHEDULED '�' SCHEDULED7 i= \ 1; :}. m __ "" L CONT. w J MOLDING METAL 5/8" GYP. •' 1 :'i DRIPBOARD "•• FLOOR FLASHING SEALANT FINISH AS SCHEDULED BACKER AT HEAD 6 DOOR ROD & WINDOW AS J MOLDING SEALANT ��— SC HED_ SPECIFIED BACKER DOOR HEAD DETA L (JAMB ROD SEALANT & DOOR EC D 1 1 \ DOOR SILL DETAIL " 2 `SIMILAR) \ t10� 3" = 1'-0" 51025 1 3" = 1' /WINDOW HEAD DETAIL (JAMB 3 SIMILAR) 025025 3" = 1'-0"STOREFRONT DOOR HEAD 4 \ DETAIL J MOLDING 502, 3" = 1'-0" WINDOW AS 3-5/8" METAL 5/8" GYP. BD. SPECIFIED STUCCO AS SPECIFIED 4. OVER 1/2" GLASS—MAT INSULATION STUCCO AS STUDS SHEATHING WITH VAPOR 5/8" ' IFIED S VER SEALANT BACKER ROD BARRIER 1/2" GLASSPEC MAT 2X WOOD INSULATION r AND SEALANT MEMBRANE FLASHI CASING BEAD MB FLASHING BOARD SHEATHING WITH BLOCKING AS SPECIFIED ;: VAPC AS v v J MOLDING �,� !�! �� h 1 CONT. GALV METAL FLASHING SLIDING WINDOW SEALANT 2X WOOD FRAMING 3 5/8" SPE44111 FIEDRRIER �-_ 5' �=e� OVER STUCCO JAMB METALAl MEMBRANE �iI WINDOW JAMB }'` CASING BEAD CO STUDS %w = ► �� FLASHING 5/8" GYP. z �y ;f ' z . BOARD r CASING BEAD _. — ...... .... —..., � ..,.....,._...a......,...: y,,. J MOLDING 1. g CONT. METAL DRIP Irk FLASHING AT HEAD 3 5/8" METAL :j. • z MEMBRANE — . ,.�� SPEC STUCCO AS SPECIFIED STUDS GLASS—MAT AI ,:�,` SPECIFIED 1E 6" OVER 1/2 _ w p � SHEATHING WITH VAPOR MEMBRANE FLASHING INSULATION k', - �A a�� FLASHMEMB ING SEALANT BARRIER AS SPECIFIED ' SEALANT AS STUCCO AS — l SHEET 025 of 82 SPECIFIED , SEALANT MEMBRANE CASING 1/2SPECGLADSSOMAT MEMBRANE SHEATHINGWITHFLASHING FLASHING RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 BEAD J MOLDING VAPOR BARRIER AS IREVISION NO. I SPECIFIED 3 5/8" METAL STUD DOOR & FRAME AS STOREFRONT DOOR JAMB \ / 6 STOREFRONT WINDOW SILL 5 \DETAIL / 7 \ 5/8" GYP. BOARD SLIDING WINDOW JAMB DTL SPECIFIED HM DOOR HEAD DETAIL (JAMB 8 SIMILAR) CITY PROJECT # E12118 025 0, 3" = 1'-0" \025 \ 025 3" = 1'-0" ,\T025i 3" = 1'-0"X025025 3" = 1'-0" I! I 10'-1 B 11 3 0 B ENLARGED SITE DEMOLITION PLA 0260261 SCALE: 3/32" = 1'-0" 0 5' 10' 20' NORTH SCALE: 3/32 = 1'-0" AL KRUSE SITE DEMOLITION KEYED NOTES 0 ADD ALTERNATE #2: SEE RENOVATION SITE PLAN FOR EXISTING PARKING LOT ASPHALT WORK. ®REMOVE SECTIONS OF EXISTING CONCRETE WALKS/CURBS WHERE INDICATED. SAW CUT EXISTING SIDEWALK AT TERMINATION OF DEMOLITION TO ACCEPT NEW SIDEWALK/RAMP TIE-IN. SEE RENOVATION PLANS FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION. OEXISTING BASKETBALL COURT CONCRETE SLAB & GOALS TO REMAIN. EXISTING TENNIS COURTS TO REMAIN. SEE RENOVATION PLANS FOR NEW SURFACING. / 5 \ \ / EXISTING TENNIS NET POSTS TO REMAIN. REMOVE EXISTING NET REEL ASSEMBLY, CABLE ROLLER, ETC. TO PREPARE FOR NEW NET POST ASSEMBLY INSTALLED OVER EXISTING PIPE. SALVAGE NET FOR RE -INSTALLATION. UREMOVE EXISTING WINDSCREEN AT ALL COURTS. 0 REMOVE EXISTING CHAIN LINK FENCE FABRIC & WINDSCREEN. FENCE POSTS & RAILING TO REMAIN. OSEE REFERENCED PLANS FOR RENOVATIONS TO EXISTING PRO SHOP. (9) REMOVE EXISTING WOOD PRACTICE BACKBOARD. 0 EXISTING CHAIN LINK FENCE TO REMAIN UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. (TYPICAL). 11 REMOVE EXISTING NET CENTER TIE DOWN IN PREPARATION FOR NEW CENTER TIE DOWN. 12 REMOVE EXISTING NET POST REEL ASSEMBLY IN PREPARATION FOR NEW NET POST REEL AS SPECIFIED. SALVAGE NET FOR RE -INSTALLATION BY CONTRACTOR. rA\ SITE DEMOLITION PLAN 02' SCALE: 1/32" = 0 16' 32' 64' NORTH SCALE: 1/32" = 1'-0" DESCRIPTION m ti 0 CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. AB -0.1 DATE:02/20/2015 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY 00 10 Lt) NO 0 W n CP") F- N CC U D 0 O U T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 .clkarch.com 0 ti Capital Programs Cn Ct E- O cc U U Z � U CO W CN Er N Q z oes ca W o0 w Z U a_ Z CO Z Lu O W W (ncc cc W cn Q SHEET 026 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 1 . i ..ii iii a ii . • _____ , , ,.., .„ ___ 0 . W o CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. A8-0.2 ..,,s.. Cy•y ., I _... ..: A,04. I ` i . _ „al I \o_ *1! ,____.--------.____-------- N 4.. 103.89' 11 �. o h DATE:02/20/2015 es, O Fvvvv It o 103.68' •M , `ill\libiglifp� IOW 103.56' l� �' - o o 0 1 ll��� ql;Pliiio°'q 615 NI. UPPER BROADWAY 11I1 SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com I r� o-• 111 •I _LISlal l0.97I - - - -- - ®; /� 104.09'/ I � �,Nelp . \ 103.75' \8•- cP,�. l 103.89' 0 2'-6" 36'-0" 2'-6" 36'-0" 2'-6" 36'-0" 2'-6" /� , 103.77 I� 104.15ci- ���■ �1 � f Ni‘riutik1 , • ir I J I 10 ®® ®♦=Niti,>���• I Pill •°� 1 1104.07' if 104.19' ® 8 118M2SF 9 10 4is 0 4„,, ( r al 1,Wa Mall lis3/4Neit 1111 ;I III , ��q't. , erii44," N 1 ,`` 103.58' __ i \ \ ,�•�" itip-r--ip '8'-o. / \---- G co 103.60' - - - (�n 11P diA ihilL :Sri I 1 CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs I lk /410fr tik...' ' IDATE I 7 AD 1I In 11 •I 105.20, 102.10' 4 T.O. FLOOR [1 1 �� I \*-1-\S\ 11 _ _ lo ���li II ,OO.OD !J IREVISION NO. m. . wmi n;' - - BM CHIP SQUARE ` ,� - - - "' 1 %,083 SF G 102.18' If I ON CONCRETE - al 1 ijii_'"1 ` \ 'ti Y 1 1 5 6 7111 IrMirPM M 102.25' FM®\7F-eItJ 1 DESCRIPTION S. 0 5' 10' 20' I DLA\ iB EI\LAPGED SITE PE\OVATI01V i� HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTER SITE RENOVATION PLAN illni� (2,2%.702y SCALE: 3/32" = 1'-0" NORTH SCALE; 3/32 = 1'-0" ' 4 1 AL KRUSE SITE RENOVATION KEYED NOTES • w ' 8'-2" ONOT USED - - - - OSEE REFERENCED PLANS FOR RENOVATIONS TO EXISTING PRO SHOP. 29,526 SF 0 NEW ACRYLIC COURT STRIPING AS SPECIFIED. SEE STRIPING PLANS SHEET 029 FOR VARIOUS STRIPING LAYOUTS. 4O NEW 24'-0" LONG X 8'-0" HIGH FIBERGLASS TENNIS BACKBOARD AS SPECIFIED. SEE REFERENCED ELEVATION. 0 'in 15'-0" 11 4 3 2 I OINSTALL NEW CHAIN UNK FENCE FABRIC ON EXISTING FENCE POSTS/RAILING. NEW 4'-O" WIDE SINGLE GATE WITH LOCK/LATCH MECHANISM. I r 41/ /� \ / ER INCLUDE CABLE REEL (ONE PER COURT), CABLE ROLLER CAP & ANCHORING. FIELD VERIFY SIZE OF EXISTING POST & PROVIDE NECESSARY ADJUSTMENTSINSTALLNEW ASNET NEEDEDPOST TOASSEMBLY FIT OVERASSPECIFIED EXISTING OVPOST. SEEEXISTING REFERENCEDNETPOST. DETAILNEW 2NET, SHEETPOST 028.TO ® - _ _ipp - - ` 21 ADD ALTERNATE #2: MILL & OVERLAY FULL DEPTH OF EXISTING ASPHALT PAVING DOWN TO EXISTING SUB -GRADE FILL MATERIAL. AREA IS APPROXIMATELY 8,400 50. FT.. PRIOR TO OVERLAY, EXISTING FILL TO BE PROOF -ROLLED TO il 8 DETERMINE LOW/SOFT AREAS: IF REQUIRED, PLACE NEW SELECT FILL IN LOW AREAS & PROOF ROLL UNTIL SUB -GRADE IS CONSISTENTLY COMPACTED, (PAVING AT HANDICAPPED PARKING AREA SHALL NOT SLOPE MORE THAN 2% IN ANY PROPERTY LINE. DIRECTION). REFER TO SHEET A0.1 FOR PAVEMENT SECTION. 0 iir OREPLACE EXISTING HANDICAPPED PARKING SIGN, POST Sc FOOTING WITH NEW VAN ACCESSIBLE SIGN, POST & FOOTING. (ADD ALTERNATE #2) 0" rA a I a 15'-O" 10 INSTALL NEW STANDARD HANDICAPPED PARKING SIGN, POST & FOOTING. (ADD ALTERNATE #2) " 20'- y 36'-0" y y 36'-0" y y 36'-0" y y 36'-0" y 21'-0" 11 NEW PAINTED PARKING STRIPES ON ENTIRE PARKING LOT AS SHOWN. (ADD ALTERNATE #2) 1 1 'I 12 1 1112' " 112)-0"1 1112' NEW LIGHT DUTY CONCRETE CROSS SHALL NOT EXCEED 2% &SLOPES IN TRAVEL DIRECTION SHALL NOT EXCEED 5%. DUMMY JOINTS SHALL BE TOOLED INTO SIDEWALK AT A SPACING EQUAL TO OR LESS THAN THE I -- -0 0" 0" SIDEWALK. -SLOPES ABUTS EXISTING SIDEWALK. RE -GRADE UNDER SIDEWALK AS REQUIRED &COMPACT SOIL. 1/ (NJ 13 NEW CONCRETEWHEELSTOPODOWELEDPANTO NEWASPHALTPAVING; ADD ALTERNATE #2. NEW LIGHT DUTY CONCRETE RAMP/LANDING WITH NEW CURB/GUTTER DOWELED TO EXISTING & NEW CONCRETE SOIL CONTAINMENT CURB. RAMP CROSS -SLOPES SHALL NOT EXCEED 2% AND RAMP SLOPE SHALL BE 8.33% (1:12). 1 CHANGES IN ELEVATION, AT TRANSITIONS FROM HANDICAPPED ACCESS AISLE TO ASPHALT & EXISTING SIDEWALK, SHALL NOT EXCEED 1/4". RAMP AND CURBS TO BE DOWELED TO EXISTING. n4 \ / INSTALL NEW CENTER NET TIE DOWN. SEE REFERENCED DETAIL. I CO 16 CORE DRILL 4" DIA. HOLE THROUGH EXISTING CONCRETE RETAINING WALL AND EPDXY IN PVC PIPE SLEEVE TO DRAIN EXISTING PLANTER AREA. PVC PIPE SLEEVE TO EXTEND 2" BEYOND EXTERIOR FACE OF RETAINING WALL. BOTTOM OF HOLE TO MATCH ELEVATION OF SOIL IN PLANTER AT HOLE LOCATION. A SITE E \ OVAT 0 \ PLAN 0 16' 32' 64' 17PREPARE EXISTING ACRYLIC SURFACED ASHPALT FOR NEW ACRYLIC RESURFACING AS SPECIFIED ON ENTIRE COURT. REPLACE EXISTING NET REELS WITH NEW NET REELS TO FIT POSTS. SEE SHEET 029 FOR COURT STRIPING. 027027 SCALE: 1/32" = 1'-0" NORTH SCALE: 1/32" = 1'-0" 18 PREPARE EXISTING ACRYLIC SURFACED ASPHALT FOR NEW ASPHALT OVERLAY AS SPECIFIED ON ENTIRE COURT. SEE SHEET 029 FOR COURT STRIPING. IDATE I 19 REMOVE EXISTING WIND SCREENS AND INSTALL NEW WIND SCREENS TO MATCH EXISTING AT ALL COURTS. AL KRUSE- SITE RENOVATION LEGEND SHEET 027 of 82 20 BILIGHT DUTY CONCRETE LANDING &RAMP POURED OVER EXISTING CONCRETE SIDEWALK. EXTEND TO EDGE OF EXISTING SIDEWALK. LANDING TO BE FLUSH WITH FLOOR AT DOOR AND SLOPE AWAY AT 2%. DOWEL INTO EXISTING L,NG FOUNDATION. SEE REFERENCED SECTION. FINISHED ELEVATION IN FEET (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE). REFER TO RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 XX, OVERALL SITE PLAN FOR LOCATION OF BENCH MARK AS NOTED. CONTRACTOR 21 INSTALL PROTECTIVE PADDING, AS SPECIFIED, AROUND BASE OF EXISTING TENNIS COURT LIGHT POLE. COLOR TBD. TO COORDINATE FINAL ELEVATIONS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. IREVISION NO. 22 NEW PEDESTAL STYLE SPLIT LEVEL DRINKING FOUNTAIN AS SPECIFIED. REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS. 0 NEW LIGHT DUTY CONCRETE LEVEL LANDING SURFACE TO MATCH SURFACE OF NEW ASPHALT COURT OVERLAY. \ NI HAND AELNOTEOF REFER TERNATERAS T Y ARNATESETHAT 24 NEW LIGHT DUTY CONCRETE RAMP UP TO NEW LANDING. RAMP NOT TO EXCEED 1:12 SLOPE. ARE NOT SHOWN HATCHED. CITY PROJECT# E12118 1,-0" MATCH ELEVATION WHERE NEW SIDEWALK TIES INTO EXISTING CONCRETE WALK. 104.19' Lon 104.29' 104,66' r MATCH ELEVATION WHERE RAMP TIES INTO EXISTING CONCRETE WALK. 10'-O" RAMP DOWN 1 1 105.03' 105.10' 105.20' GALVANIZED 1-1/4'0 (1.66 0.D.) STD PIPE RAILING (TYPICAL). 105.03 105.20' ENLARGED RAMP/LANDING PLAN CALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" 0 0 N EXISTING SIDEWALK. EXPANSION JOINT & DOWELS. GALVANIZED 1-1/4"0 (1.66 O.D.) 1, 1'-0" STD PIPE RAILING (TYPICAL). ° .4 4 1 1 11=I11=1 1 =111111.111111 11 1111 i1Ji1 =111111, µH l= I --='_i: ±HH=1.1=RHH=N1-1F-Hir {H=�}H�1=+L+=-I± ,--1 I±HII-IILLL III -I 11-11 I-1 11=11 I-11 I-11 I-111=111=111= -I 11=1 11=1 I I-1 11=1 11=1 I-1 11=1 11=1 11=1 I I-1 I=1 I I-1 11=1 I I- =1 1=1 11=1 -1 I III=1 I E11=11 I -i 1 I. 11 11-111-I I I-11-11 IJ 11-111-111-111 11_ -11 I111=111=111=111 11 E 111=111=111-111-111=111=11 -_ 1-111-111-111=111= I-1 I=111=111=11=- 11111111 1111 11=111=1I 111 111 11111 11111 11111 E 11111 1 11111 � 11111 111 111 X111 � 11111 1 III-III=III=1 _ 11=111_111=III=III=III III=11 —111 III 11 111-111 III 111 111 1 1-11 —1 1_ _i iL 4- 8" WIDE BEAM BEYOND. RAMP SECTION AT MAIN PRO SHOP ENTRANCE SCALE: 1/2" - 1'-0" NEW 3,000 PSI CONCRETE RAMP/LANDING REINFORCED WITH #3 REBAR PACED 12" O.C. BOTH WAYS. naeraele rat - SSSS S 111=1 1=111= I 1=1 =111=111=111=111=111=11=III=1 1111111III111=1 -111=11=111=I I I=111=1_• IH NE1 1=1 11=11 1 1=1 I H H I 1=111=' !!-111-i I-1 1=111=1 1=1 _I 1=1 11=1 1=1 11=1 1=1 11=1 1=1 11=1 1=1 I. ;III=111 11 ==111==1 1-111=111-111-11' 11 111.-1111 it I I111 -I I1=1I I-111-111111-111-1 EXISTING SIDEWALK GALVANIZED PIPE SLEEVE SIZED TO ACCEPT RAILING. EMBED IN CONCRETE 6". TYPICAL. PORTION OF EXISTING SIDEWALK TO BE DEMOLISHED AS NEEDED TO CONSTRUCT RAMP. SLOPE NOT TO EXCEED 1:12. EXPANSION JOINT & DOWELS. EXISTING SIDEWALK. ///� /� �,; � ' ° 11=111=111U 1=1 I F I I 1=111 -� 1111=1 111111=111 -lit fi l 1 �I 11-111=11111 I. -1 fr=)1111-111-1111 I I; LANDING CENTERED ON EXISTING DOORWAY RAMP RAMP/LANDING SECTION AT EAST PRO SHOP ENTRANCE SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" EXISTING GRADE. COMPACTED SELECT FILL. EXISTING BUILDING STRUCTURE. NEW 3,000 PSI CONCRETE RAMP/LANDING REINFORCED WITH #3 REBAR SPACED 12" 0.C. BOTH WAYS. EXPANSION JOINT & DOWELS. COMPACTED SELECT FILL MINIMUM 6" BELOW NEW RAMP/LANDING. EXISTING GRADE. EXISTING PERIMETER CHAIN LINK FENCE POST & CONCRETE BEAM. Co _r 0 viveravenverii von BACKBOARD ELEVATION INSTALL BACKIOARD ON 4 EQUALLY SPACED TREA ED HORIZONTAL 2X4'S. INSTALL ON F=NCE POSTS PER MANUFACTERERS RECOMMENDATIONS. SEE SPECIFIC 'TIONS FOR INFORMATION ON BACKBOARDS. 2" WHITE LINE ON FACE OF BACKBOARD.Nos itiv I 'Ara .111 lAsittat I PLAYING SURFACE. atal t4LRad �i4• 7ad Isearati07 � 67dati07 � 67dViti07 � 67d Ati07A07 � �A17 � 07 //////// /////////////////////////////////////// 027 028 SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0" AL KRUSE - SITE RENOVATION KEYED NOTES REFER TO CONSULTANTS SHEET NO. AB -0.2 FOR SITE RENOVATION KEYED NOTES. AL KRUSE- SITE RENOVATION LEGEND XX.XX' FINISHED ELEVATION IN FEET (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE). REFER TO OVERALL SITE PLAN FOR LOCATION OF BENCH MARK AS NOTED. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE FINAL ELEVATIONS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. HATCHED AREA INDICATES LIMIT OF ADD ALTERNATE AS THEY ARE KEYED AND DESCRIBED IN KEYED NOTES. REFER TO OTHER ADD ALTERNATES THAT ARE NOT SHOWN HATCHED. INSTALL NEW ALUMINUM ASPHALT RESTRAINT EDGING AS SPECIFIED. INSTALL NEW 1 1/2" THICK ASPHALT OVERLAY AS SPECIFIED. EXISTING FENCE POST CONCRETE FOOTING. ASPHALT OVERLAY SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" EXISTING ASPHALT SURFACE OVER EXISTING GRADE. PERIMETER EDGE DETAIL M NET POST AS SPECIFIED. INSTALL OVER EXISTING NET POST. NET POST COLLAR. ADJUST AS REQUIRED. INSTALL NEW 1 1/2" THICK ASPHALT OVERLAY AS SPECIFIED. CENTER OF POST TO COURT CENTERLINE 1 1 1 I II I 1 1 1 I I I I I I I III 0271028 EXISTING NET POST CONCRETE FOOTING. TENNIS NET. SEE SITE PLAN FOR INFORMATION. TENNIS NET CENTER TIE -DOWN AS SPECIFIED. EMBED IN NEW 12" DIA. X 8" DEEP CONCRETE BASE. EXISTING ASPHALT SURFACE OVER EXISTING GRADE. NET POST DETAIL AT ASPHALT OVERLAY SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" REVISION NO. CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. AB -0.3 DATE:02/20/2015 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com Capital Programs Ct W CD U C) cn Uj W Ct N Q oCO Cn W O cc W U Luco W U 0- W cc cr) cc CC 0 J Q SHEET 028 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT# E12118 36'-0" 36'-0" 36'-0" 27'-0° IDESCRIPTION I CONSULTANT'S SHEET N0. A B 0.4 / // 13'-6" 13'-6" 4'-6" / r / / 4'-6" 13'-6" 13'-6" 4'-6" / / / / 4'-6" 131-61" 13'-6" 4'-6" / / / / 13'-6" 13'-6" / / aila.13 i •% f '1►' /,+Cts tp �' DATE:02/20/2015 At, �� • 18'-2" 20'-10" 1' 20'-10" L 18'-2" 4" LONG CENTER MARK. — 0.4_4 1 \ 4" LONG CENTER MARK. — `l 1 4" LONG CENTER MARK. 18'-0" 21'-0" 1 21'-O" _ 18'-0" 4" LONG CENTER MARK. -co-0, 2" LONG CENTER MARK o m 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com \ \ \ \ 4,3'-2" 2D'=8" .3'-2"r 20'-8" 0 sa O I N SEE KEYED NOTES AT EACH O _I N SEE KEYED NOTES AT EACH SEE KEYED NOTES AT EACH SEE KEYED NOTES COURT FOR NETS, POSTS & POST INFORMATION. AT EACH NET FOOTING a a COURT FOR NETS POST POST REQUIREMENTS. & NET ° o COURT POST P OR NETS ST REQUIREMENTS. & NET COURT FOR POST POST NETS REQUIREMENTS. & NET h Y c 4' Y Oa0 O Y ^ ./ 4' �. O VD oD h EQUAL ^ h EQUAL 00 h EQUAL / N./ EQUAL 0 0 -OX, 1 D" /3-/ /3I DX . D A 4.3-/ r r 1 r r CD b 0 IBY �w CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs 0 0 0 0 O IDATE NO 0 0 o o IREVISION NO. 2" LON CENTER MARK s m 0 _ 4" LONG CE ER MARK. — 0 4" LONG CE ER MARK. — 0 4" LONG CENTER MARK. 4" LONG CENTER MARK 0 O IDESCRIPTION 1 .ENDED LINES. REVISED STRIPPING TO COURTS 8, 9, & 10 0 o 78'/60'/36 (BLENDED) STRIPING PLAN 78'/60' COURT (BLENDED) STRIPING PLAN 78' COURT STRIPING PLAN 78' X 27' COURT STRIPING PLAN HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTER COURT STRIPING PLANS SCALE: 1/8- = 1'-0" TYPICAL FOR COURTS: #8 & #10. SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" COURT: #9 SCALE: 1/8- = 1'-0" COURTS #1 THROUGH #4, #6 & #7 SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" COURT #5 AL KRUSE COURT GENERAL NOTES: 1. GREEN FIELD COLOR TO MATCH EXISTING ON-SITE GREEN COLOR. AL KRUSE COURT STRIPING KEYED NOTES ING PLAN FOR 78, 60 & 36 B O ALL WHITE UNES TO BE 2" WIDE. O ALL LIGHT BLUE LINES TO BE 1 1/2" WIDE. O ALL LIGHT BLUE LINES ARE TO TERMINATE 3" FROM WHITE UNES WHERE APPLICABLE. D STRIPP COURT STRIPING LEGEND 0 0 4 m 2" WIDE (WHITE) COURT STRIPING. a 1 1/21" WIDE (LIGHT BLUE) COURT STRIPING. x 12.5.2015 ti o SHEET 029 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP-204 IREVISION NO. I CITY PROJECT# E12118 L _LL�J J WOMEN'S LOCKER RM 71 TT1—TTT—TT • LJ_ I—L_L—I-1_J —, — J L -MEWS-LOCK-ER RM L T H L H L AL KRUSE PRO SHOP 0 1 I-7 I L I J a/ I \ / 1 \ 0 / �J H A 0 MECH. n / O DEMOLITION KEYED NOTES - AL KRUSE Note Number Note Text 1 REMOVE TOILET PARTITION; PATCH FLOOR & WALLS 2 REMOVE MIRROR OVER SINK. 3 DEMOLISH RAISED SHOWER FLOOR AND PLUMBING; REFER TO RENOVATION FLOOR PLAN AND PLUMBING DRAWING SHEET 69 FOR NEW WORK. 4 REMOVE DOOR & FRAME; PREPARE FOR NEW DOOR & FRAME AS SCHEDULED. 5 DEMOLISH SHOWER AND PLUMBING FIXTURES; REFER TO RENOVATION FLOOR PLAN AND PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR NEW WORK. 6 REMOVE EXISTING LOCKERS. 7 EXISTING DOUBLE SIDED BENCH TO BE REMOVED 8 REMOVE EXISTING DOOR AND THRESHOLD PREPARE FOR NEW STOREFRONT DOOR TO MATCH EXISTING; 9 REMOVE EXISTING SOAP DISPENSER; PATCH WALL. 10 DEMOLISH GRAB BAR. 11 REMOVE EXISTING FRP AND PREPARE FOR NEW GRAB BARS. 12 REMOVE EXISTING WALL; PATCH FLOOR, WALL & CEILING. 13 REMOVE EXISTING PLUMBING FIXTURES. PATCH FLOOR AND WALLS. 14 MOVE EXISTING SOAP DISPENSER WHERE SHOWN ON RENOVATION PLAN. 15 VERIFY MIRROR HEIGHT MEETS TAS REQUIREMENTS. IF MIRROR IS NOT 40" TO REFLECTIVE SURFACE, REMOVE AND REINSTALL. 16 REMOVE PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER AND REINSTALL PER RENOVATION PLAN. DEMO FLOOR PLAN 114" = 1'-0" NORTH %B GENERAL RENOVATION NOTES 1. REFER TO ELECTRICAL SHEET 079 FOR ELECTRICAL WORK. 2. REFER TO MECHANICAL SHEET 062 FOR MECHANICAL WORK. 3. REFER TO SHEET 058 FOR STRUCTURAL WORK. W a 6" MIN WOMEN'S ll LOCKER RM WOMEN'S ENTRY r MEN'S LOCA E 10 RM D4 AB 19.2/ D2 L MEN'S SHOWER AB114 —10 D D4 D4 82 sn- 18115) MEN'S ENTRY 1 AB111 AB116 o -L D3 D2 r AL KRUSE PRO SHOP AB108 x x RENOVATION - KEYED NOTES - AL KRUSE Note Number Note Text 1 NEW ADA/TAS COMPLIANT DRINKING FOUNTAIN. SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS - SHEET 69. 2 NEW GRAB BAR; ADD BLOCKING TO WALL AS REQUIRED. 3 NEW ADA/TAS COMPLIANT URINAL. SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS SHEET 69. 4 LOWER EXISTING SOAP DISPENSER & PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER WHERE CONTROLS ARE 44" ABOVE FLOOR, PATC H WALL. 5 NEW SHOWER CURTAIN & ROD 6 RELOCATED EXISTING SOAP DISPENSER. DISPENSER CONTROLS TO BE 44" ABOVE FINISH FLOOR. 7 NEW ADA/TAS COMPLIANT FOLDING BENCH AS SPECIFIED. 8 NEW SOLID PLASTIC PEDESTAL LOCKER BENCH ANCHORED TO FLOOR. 9 NEW STAINLESS STEEL TOILET PARTITION AS SPECIFIED. 10 NEW SOLID PLASTIC DOUBLE TIER "Z" LOCKERS - 15" WIDE X 12" DEEP X 72" HIGH 11 NEW STANDARD HEIGHT URINAL. SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS. 12 NEW DOUBLE SWING STOREFRONT DOOR AND THRESHOLD (MATCH PREVIOUS DOOR SIZE); 13 NEW MIRROR OVER SINK AS SPECIFIED. 14 SOLID PLASTIC LOCKER END PANEL 15 SOLID PLASTIC LOCKER FILLER PANEL 16 HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE SOLID PLASTIC DOUBLE TIER "Z" LOCKERS - 15" WIDE X 12" DEEP X 72" HIGH AL KRUSE RENOVATION FLOOR PLAN B B WALL TYPES 3-5/8" METAL STUDS WITH 5/8" GYP. BD EACH SIDE. TAPE, FLOAT, TEXTURE AND FINISH GYP. BD. AS SPECIFIED & SCHEDULED . PROVIDE BATT INSULATION BETWEEN STUDS; EXTEND STUDS TO ROOF STRUCTURE. 6" METAL STUDS WITH 5/8" GYP, BOTH SIDES, TAPE, FLOAT TEXTURE AND FINISH GYP. BD. AS SPECIFIED & SCHEDULED . PROVIDE BATT INSULATION BETWEEN STUDS; EXTEND STUDS TO ROOF STRUCTURE. 030 62 3-5/8" METAL STUDS WITH 5/8" GYP. ONE SIDE. TAPE, FLOAT TEXTURE AND FINISH GYP. BD. AS SPECIFIED & SCHEDULED. EXTEND STUDS TO CEILING OR ROOF STRUCTURE IF NO CEILING IS SCHEDULED. 3/4" STUCCO ABOVE BRICK WAINSCOT (WITH WATERTABLE ON 1/2" SHEATHING ON 3-5/8" METAL STUDS WITH 5/8" GYP. BOARD ON INTERIOR SIDE. TAPE, FLOAT, TEXTURE AND FINISH GYP. BD. AS SPECIFIED & SCHEDULED . APPLY VAPOR BARRIER ON EXTERIOR FACE OF SHEATHING. PROVIDE BATT INSULATION BETWEEN STUDS; SEE WALL SECTIONS, FINISH SCHEDULE, SPECIFICATIONS, & STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. D D2 D4 3-5/8" METAL STUDS 1/2" CEMENTITIOUS BOARD ON INTERIOR SIDE WITH TILE FINISH AS SPECIFIED & SCHEDULED. EXTEND WALL TO CEILING 6" METAL STUDS WITH 1/2" CEMENTITIOUS BOARD WITH TILE FINISH ON BOTH SIDES AS SPECIFIED & SCHEDULED. EXTEND WALL TO CEILING. 3-5/8" METAL STUDS WITH 1/2" CEMENTITIOUS BOARD WITH TILE FINISH ON BOTH SIDES AS SPECIFIED & SCHEDULED. EXTEND WALL TO CEILING. 3-5/8" METAL STUDS 1/2" CEMENTITIOUS BOARD WITH TILE FINISH ON ONE SIDE & 5/8" BOARD ONE SIDE WITH FINISH AS SPECIFIED & SCHEDULED. EXTEND WALL TO CEILING ,0030 1/4" = 1'-0" NORTH 031 DESCRIPTION m ti REVISION NO. >- m ti CONSULTANTS SHEET NO. AB -1 .1 LO CO O N N O CO, CO CO CO � CO CO CO • X CO CO r u- 1= ce U N 0- a O .clkarch.com Capital Programs HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS C/D /777 III DEMOLITION & RENO VA TION PLAN- PRO SHOP SHEET 030 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 8'-7 1/8" 0 r I MEN'S SHOWER AB114 5'-6 1/8" F.V. EQ EQ EQ L EQ EQ. y EQ. 5 0" ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN - MEN'S LOCKER ROOM 1/2" = 1'-0" 0 Z z z 0 0 J 0 3'-6" ENLARGED WOMEN'S LOCKER B RM. PLAN 30 033) 1/2" = 1'-O" -0" -0" 3'-0" MIN C LEARANC E (:)3.1 0/ 1/2" = 1'-0" 1'-6" ji 1'-6" C� TYICAL ACCESSIBLE SHOWER ENLARGED PLANS & INTERIOR ELEVATION KEYED NOTES Note Number Note Text 1 NEW ADA/TAS COMPLIANT CONTINUOS SHOWER GRAB BAR 2 NEW 36" GRAB BAR AS SPECIFIED 3 NEW 42" GRAB BAR AS SPECIFIED 4 GARMENT HOOK AS SPECIFIED - MOUNT 44" AFF. 5 SHOWER CURTAIN AS SPECIFIED 6 SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL AS SPECIFIED (ONLY LADIES) 7 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER AS SPECIFIED 8 ACCESSIBLE SHOWER STALL; SEE TYPICAL ACCESSIBLE SHOWER FLOOR PLAN & ELEVATIONS. 9 TOILET PARTITION AS SPECIFIED. 10 EXTENT OF WALL TILE IN SHOWER AREA TERMINATES HERE; SEE DASHED LINE. 12 EXTENT OF FLOOR TILE IN SHOWER AREA TERMINATES HERE; 13 NEW ADA/TAS COMPLIANT FOLDING BENCH AS SPECIFIED 14 NEW ADA/TAS COMPLIANT URINAL 15 NEW STANDARD HEIGHT URINAL 16 NEW ADA/TAS COMPLIANT HANDHELD SHOWER SPRAY UNIT AS SPECIFIED. 17 NEW SHOWER HEAD AND CONTROL AS SPECIFIED. 18 NEW URINAL SCREEN AS SPECIFIED. 0 -�l ADA ADA TOILET - FRONT 1 1 ELEVATION �031031/ 1/2" = t0 ■■■ nnu ==MMMENEM ■■■■■■■■■ ■■■■■■■■. •••rPIi•• ■■■uII +I■■■■ ■■■EIIII ■■■■ ■■■■11■� I ■■ ■■■■IIS I ■■■ ■■■■I. I ■■■■ MENIQIIPim ■■■ for1 • ■■■■II Il , ■ I,I,I, ll fra-I, ■■■■■■■■■ mmmmmmmmm MMM■■■EE■ •i■I,■•IIif■ =MEN■M ■■■■■■■■■ ■�■■■n• N TYPICAL ACCESSIBLE SHOWER - CONTROL WALL (3\ ELEVATION . w '*0 1/2" = 1'-0" ( w N 0 O a �..)1"-4 0 N 0 z a a 0 0 O ADA TOILET - SIDE 2\ ELEVATION1 031 031 c I 1 1 /2" = 1'-0" TYPICAL ACCESSIBLE SHOWER - BACK WALL 4\ ELEVATION 031031/ 1/2" = 1'-0" LtCL1 OF TO _ET 0 CO j- � LJ - 0 MEN'S TOILET/SHOWER 6 \ ELEVATION 0 1- 031031 1/2" = 1'-O" i 3'-0" TYPICAL ACCESS BLE SHOWER - SEAT WALL ELEVATION 1/2" = 1'-0" DESCRIPTION m O REVISION NO. ti Q CONSULTANTS SHEET NO. AB -2.1 Q o 0 w Q � O� e W 0 7,5 0 NN 0 M M n V V 't o C r" X e0 r) i_ N ce 0 N 0 O 0 .clkarch.com Capital Programs HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS KRUSE TENNIS CENTER Q ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN & INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SHEET 031 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 GENERAL NOTES DESCRIPTION 1 CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. AB-3.1 ;Os i C. i40%%% �`� ` 'lila `�, ..Ale +Q I il ni • ,•1 *11 1. CONTRACTOR TO REMOVE AND STORE ALL I FURNITURE AND FIXTURES IN PRO SHOP — Jm \ __/ r i BEFORE BEGINNING WORK. CONTRACTOR TO LT) REINSTALL OR PLACE FURNITURE AFTER CEILING AND WALL WORK IS COMPLETE. •,,``�P DATE:02/20/2015 of erc'' I II WOMEN'S WOMEN'S _ LOCKER RM LOCKER RM _ I11 AB109 J U 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com r 1 1 - I- -I nCI EQ EQ 1 1 + L WOMEN'S ENTRY -I 1c1/1 WOMEN'S ENTRY _ AB 116 1T LJ— 11 D — — rl r--1 1 1 1 1 1 r-I r� 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 I — — m 1 1 1 1 .r�.r CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs EH }'-1 la N 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 V — — \ DATE ini 1-si 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 AL KRUSE PRO 0 F "1 I- I I I I MEN'S ENTRY s v SHOP —. I REVISION NO. MEN'S ENTRY I`-1 I I 1 1 pl AL KRUSE PRO AB115 AB108. LJ SHOP H 1 I I I 1 ICI I 1 II 1 . 1 I 11 L J int •3, , 3, 11 1 II 1 DESCRIPTION JI — 1 1 7 . I-1 I—I MEN'S LOCKER I I I I I I MEN'S LOCKER RM �I h! lul RM 3 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 AB112 3 1 HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTER PRO SHOP REFLECTED CEILING PLANS MEN'S SHOWER MECH. Li 1 1 1 1 MEN'S SHOWER _ MECH. HI 11 rl rm L100 ©0—JLC'! 1 I I A6114 v AB111 J L _ I I 11 "" K1)`` 0) 2 ri LJ LJ — I I L J II A AL KRUSE REFLECTEDAL CEILING DEMOLITION PLAN 1B-\ KRUSE REFLECTED CEILING RENOVATION PLAN 032 032 1/4" = 1'-0" X032 0, 1/4" = 1'-0" KEYED NOTES - DEMOLITION RCP KEYED NOTES - RENOVATION RCP Note Number Note Text Note Number Note Text 1 RE-LOCATED LIGHT FIXTURE. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS, SHEET 79. 1 EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURETO REMAIN. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWING SHEET 79. 2 INSTALL 5/8" GYP BOARD OVER EXISTING CEILING. TAPE, FLOAT, TEXTURE, AND PAINT CEILING. 2 REMOVE EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURE TO ALLOW FOR CEILING WORK. RE-INSTALL FIXTURE WHERE 3 EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURE REINSTALLED. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS, SHEET 79. INDICATED ON CEILING RENOVATION PLAN. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWING SHEET 79. 3 PATCH, REPAIR, AND MATCH EXISTING CEILING FINISH WHERE WALLS & LIGHT FIXTURES ARE REMOVED. 4 REMOVE & RE-LOCATE EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURE WHERE INDICATED ON CEILING RENOVATION PLAN. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS SHEET 79. Q 0 SHEET 032 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP-204 ° z z 0 ccLu CITY PROJECT # E12118 DESCRIPTION 1 CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. AB-6.1 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE - AL KRUSE 4ED••Aire+ v — •• ,I►t� ,#��j/�� s t • '*• WALLS CEILING NUMBER NAME FLOOR BASE NORTH EAST SOUTH WEST FINISH REMARKS,�7c AB108 AL KRUSE PRO SHOP EXISTING TO REMAIN 4" RUB BER BASE PAINT PAINT PAINT PAINT PAINT ON 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD PATCH AND REPAIR ALL EXISTING REMAINING WALLS AB109 WOMEN'S LOCKER RM EXISTING TO REMAIN/TILE 4" RUBBER BASE FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS/C ERAMIC TILE FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PAN ELS/C ERAMIC TILE FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS/C ERAMIC TILE FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS EPDXY PAINT SEE FLOOR PLAN AND REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR LIMIT OF FINISHES tr.e., ��'4' •...• DATE:02/20/2015 OF c AB111 MEC H. EXISTING TO REMAIN EXISTING TO REMAIN EXISTING TO REMAIN EXISTING TO REMAIN EXISTING TO REMAIN EXISTING TO REMAIN EXISTING TO REMAIN AB112 MEN'S LOCKER RM EXISTING TO REMAIN 4" RUBBER BASE FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS EPDXY PAINT SEE FLOOR PLAN AND REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR LIMIT OF FINISHES 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 !All CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com AB114 MEN'S SHOWER TILE TILE COVE TILE TILE TILE TILE EPDXY PAINTED GYPSUM BOARD SEE FLOOR PLAN AND REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR LIMIT OF FINISHES AB115 MEN'S ENTRY EXISTING TO REMAIN 4" RUBBER BASE FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS — FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS EPDXY PAINT AB116 WOMEN'S ENTRY EXISTING TO REMAIN 4" RUBBER BASE FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS EPDXY PAINT DOOR SCHEDULE - AL KRUSE DOOR FRAME DETAILS SIZE DOOR NO. WIDTH HEIGHT THK MATL FINISH HARDWARE MATL FINISH HEAD JAMB SILL REMARKS AB115.1 3' — 0" 7' - 0" 1 3/4" SOLID CORE WOOD STAINED & VARNISHED TO MATCH EXISTING 5 WOOD PAINT — — 1/033 FIELD VERIFY SIZE OF EXISTING DOOR & FRAME. NEW DOOR AND FRAME TO MATCH EXISTING SIZES .� AB116.1 3' — 0" 7' — 0" 1 3/4" SOLID CORE WOOD STAINED & VARNISHED TO MATCH EXISTING 5 WOOD PAINT — — 1/033 FIELD VERIFY SIZE OF EXISTING DOOR & FRAME. NEW DOOR AND FRAME TO MATCH EXISTING SIZES irit war CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs DOOR AS SC HEDULED eo DOOR FRAME BEYOND FLOOR FINISH AS SCHEDULED 1 DESCRIPTION I HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTER SCHEDULES & DETAILS AL KRUSE TYPICAL INT. SILL 1 DETAIL 033033 1 1/2" = 1'-0" >- m IDATE I SHEET 033 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP-204 ° z z 0 ccilj CITY PROJECT # E12118 I. COORDINATION A. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to obtain all Contract Documents and Addenda and to submit such documents to all subcontractors and material suppliers prior to the submittal of shop drawings, fabrication of any structural members, and construction. B. The General Contractor shall compare the Architectural, Structural Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, and other series drawings and report any discrepancies between each set of drawings and within each set of drawings prior to fabrication and installation of any structural members. C. The details designated as "Typical Details" apply generally to the Drawings in all areas where conditions are similar to those described in the details. D. All structural elements of the project have been designed by the Structural Engineer to resist the required code vertical and lateral forces that could occur in the final completed structure only. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all required bracing during construction to maintain the stability and safety of all structural elements during the construction process until the lateral -load resisting or stability -providing system is completely installed and the structure is completely tied together. E. The Contract Structural Drawings and Specifications represent the finished structure, and except where specifically shown, do not indicate the means or methods of construction.The Contractor and their Sub -Contractors shall supervise and direct the Work and shall be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, procedures, techniques, sequences and safety measures including, but not limited to, adherences to all OSHA guidelines.The Engineer shall not hove control of, and shall not be responsible for, construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or any other person performing any of the Work, or for the failure of any of these persons to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. F. Where conflict exists among the various parts of the structural contract documents, structural drawings, general notes, and specifications, the strictest requirements, as indicated by the Engineer, shall govern. G. Periodic site observation by field representatives of Garza + McLain Structural Engineers, Inc.is solely for the purpose of determining if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Structural Contract Documents. This limited site observation is not intended to be a check of the quality or quantity of the Work, but rather a periodic check in an effort to inform the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the work of the Contractor. II. SUBSTITUTIONS All requests for substitutions of materials or details shown in the contract documents shall be submitted for approval during the bidding period. Once bids are accepted, proposed substitutions will be considered only when they are officially submitted with an identified savings to be deducted from the contract and/or schedule impact and the material or product has been approved by the International Code Council Evaluation Service (ICCES) and / or TDI and the ICCES reports and or TDI Certifications are included in the request. Submittals not satisfying the above criteria will not be considered. III. CODES A. The General Building Code used as the basis for the structural design is as follows: 1. International Building Code IBC 2009 with the city of Corpus Christi Amendments. 2. International Building Code, 2006 Edition with the Texas Windstorm Adopted Amendments. 8. Structural Concrete: Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete, American Concrete Institute, ACI 318. C. Structural Steel: Steel Construction Manual, American Institute of Steel Construction, 13th Edition. D. Light Gauge Steel: Specifications for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural members, AISI, latest edition. IV. DESIGN LOADS A. Dead Loads include the self weight of the structural elements and the following superimposed loads: 1. Superimposed Dead 2. Roofing 8. Live Loads 5 psf 2 psf OCCUPANCY OR USE UNIFORM (Psf) 1. Roof (unreduced) 20 2. Floor 100 3. Stairs 100 C. Wind loads Wind lateral load on structural frame is based Wind Storm amendments using the following: Basic Wind Speed (3 sec) Exposure Importance Factor CONCENTRATED (lbs) N/A 300 on ASCE7-05 and the IBC2006 Texas 120 mph B 1.0 a. Gross Wind Uplift Pressures on Roof Components and Cladding with a Kd factor equal to 0.85 are as follows: Roof Area i. Typical Building ("a"= 3'-0" ft) Interior (Field) Perimeter Band ("a" region) Corners ("a"x"a" region) 10 Sqft Trib Area 29 psf 48.2 psf 72.6 psf b. Gross Wind Pressures on Wall Components and Cladding 10 Sqft Trib Area Wall Area ii. Typical Building ("a"= 3'-0" ft) Interior (Field) Corners ("a" region) c. Refer to ASCE 7 for the definition 31.2 psf 35.4 psf of "a". 100 Sqft Trib Area 26.3 31.2 31.2 psf psf psf are as follows: 100 Sqft Trib Area 27 psf 30 psf D. Texas Architectural Barrier Act Standard. The structural strength of grab bars, tub and shower seats, fasteners, and mounting devices shall meet the following specification: 1. Bending stress in a grab bar or seat induced by the maximum bending moment from the application of 250 Ibf shall be less than the allowable stress for the material of the grab bar or seat. S Tf UCS TURA L GENERAL NOTES 2. Shear stress induced in a grab bar or seat by the application of 250 lbf shall be less than the allowable shear stress for the material of the grab bar or seat. If the connection between the grab bar or seat and its mounting bracket or other support is considered to be fully restrained, then direct and torsional shear stresses shall be totaled for the combined shear stress, which shall not exceed the allowable shear stress. 3. Shear force induced in a fastener or mounting device from the application of 250 lbf shall be less than the allowable lateral load of either the fastener or the mounting device or the supporting structure, whichever is the smaller allowable load. 4. Tensile force induced by a fastener by a direct tension force of 250 lbf plus the maximum moment from the application of 250 Ibf shall be less than the allowable withdrawal load between the fastener and the supporting structure. 5. Grab bars shall not rotate within their fittings. E. Lateral Force Resisting System: The ability of the structural frame to resist lateral loads and provide stability under gravity loads derives from the complete installation of the lateral -force resisting system and diaphragms described below. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide all temporary bracing required to maintain the stability and safety of all elements during the construction process until all of these elements ore completely installed and all designated concrete elements (if any) have reached a minimum of 75% of their desired strength. The required structural elements are: a. Lateral -force resisting system [METAL BUILDING ALTERNATE NO. 4] i. Rigid moment frames as noted on plans by others ii. Roof Diaphragms Consists of Tie Rod X -brace at Rigid frames that links the lateral force resisting system to all frames and columns b. Lateral force resisting system [PLATFORM] i. Knee moment frames, Braced Frames, Moment Frames. ii. Metal roof diaphragm attached to all roof members and lateral resisting system. V. SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall be prepared for all structural items and submitted for review by the Engineer. Contract Drawings shall not be reproduced and used as shop drawings. All items deviating from the Contract Drawings or from previously submitted shop drawings shall be clouded. B. The contractor shall review shop drawings for compliance with the contract documents and shall certify that he has done so by a stamp noting that the drawings have been "Approved" and which bears the signature (or initials) of an authorized representative of the contractor and the date. Submittals which do not reflect the contractor's approval, signature and dote will be returned without review. C. The contractor shall be responsible for delays caused by rejection of inadequate shop drawings. D. Where review and return of shop drawings is required or requested, the engineer will review each submittal and, where possible, return within two weeks of receipt. E. Corrections or comments on shop drawings or manufacturer's data sheets do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the plans and specifications. The engineer's review is for general conformance with the requirements of the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correcting all quantities and dimensions, selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction, and coordinating his work with that of all other contractors. F. General Contractor shall submit electronic copies of al submittals Engineer will review, comment and transfer comments onto the electronic copy for distribution to architect, owner, and contractor. General Contractor will be responsible for providing and distributing Engineers comments to their subcontractors. G. Submittal List and Schedule - The General Contractor shall prepare a detailed list and schedule of al submittal items to be sent to the Structural Engineer prior to the start of construction. This list shall be updated and revised and kept current as the job progresses. The submittal list shall be organized as shown below: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Manufacturers literature for products, assemblies and hardware 3. Products, assemblies and hardware 4. Product certifications, mill certificates and affidavits 5. Texas Windstorm Certification of all component and cladding items. H. Shop Drawings 1. The General Contractor shall submit for Engineer review shop drawings for the following items: a. Reinforcing Steel b. Embedded Items (Plates, Angles, Bolts, etc) or Items attached to the structural frame for building cladding attachment or for attachment of other items. (#) c. Concrete Mix Designs (30 Tests) d. Post -Tension reinforcing e. Structural Steel f. Miscellaneous steel g. Cold formed metal framing h. Pre-engineered metal building drawings i. Pre-engineered metal building reactions are calculations (*,#) j. Metal Form Deck k. Roof Deck I. Pre Cast Steps m. Vapor Retarder n. Epoxy Grout Items marked (*) shall be designed by an engineer and drawings shall be sealed by a registered engineer in the state where the project is located. Items marked (#) shall be submitted to Engineer for Owner's record only and will not have the Engineer's shop drawing stamp affixed. (*,#) 2. The omission from the shop drawings of any material required by the Contract Documents to be furnished shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of furnishing and installing such materials, regardless of whether the shop drawings have been reviewed and approved. I. Manufacturers Literature - Submit two copies of manufacturer's literature for all materials and products used in the construction of the project. J. Reproduction - The use of reproductions of these contract documents by an contractor, subcontractor, erector, fabricator, or material supplier in lieu of preparation of shop drawings signifies his acceptance of all information shown hereon as correct, and obligates himself to any job expense, real or implied, arising due to any errors that may occur hereon. K. Refer to Texas Department of Windstorm section of these notes for additional information. VI. CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE A. CLASSES OF CONCRETE All concrete shall conform to the requirements as specified in the table below unless noted otherwise on the drawings: Concrete Mix Schedule: Conc. Class Strength psi Agg. Agg. Slump Type Size Inches Max w/c Notes A 3000 NWT 1 1/2" 4 B C 5000 NWT 1 1/2" 4 3000 NWT 1/2" 4 a) "NWT" refers to normal concrete having air dry unit weight of approximately 145 PCF (ASTM 33 aggregate). b) Where w/c ratio is not indicated in the Concrete Mix Schedule, it shall be as necessary to meet strength requirements. c) Where the w/c ratio is shown, it shall be adhered to regardless of strength requirements. d) "Strength" is required compressive cylinder strength at an age of 28 days Mix Usage Schedule: Description of Use Concrete Class Air Content All U.N.O. POST -Tension SLAB Caps Viewing Platform LVL 2 A B C B. Maximum shrinkage of the concrete shall be 0.03% at 28 days as determined by ASTM C157. C. Horizontal construction joints in concrete pours shall be permitted only where indicated on the drawings. All vertical construction joints shall be mode in the center of spans in accordance with the typical details. Contractor shall submit proposed locations for construction joints not shown on drawings for review by the Architect and Structural Engineer. Additional construction joints may require additional reinforcing as specified by the Engineer which shall be provided by the contractor at no additional cost to the owner. D. Embedded conduits, pipes, and sleeves shall meet the requirements of ACI 318-95, Section 6.3, including the following: 1. Conduits and pipes embedded within a wall, or beam (other than those passing through) shall not be larger in outside dimension than 1/3 the overall thickness of the slab, wall or beam in which they are embedded. 2. Conduits, pipes and sleeves shall not be spaced closer than three diameters or widths on center. 3. There shall be no conduits or pipes running within the slab thickness or beam. VII. CONCRETE REINFORCING A. Concrete reinforcement for the project shall conform to the following: 1. All Reinforcing Steel shall be ASTM A615, Grade 60 unless noted otherwise in the drawings or these notes. B. Detailing of reinforcing steel shall conform to the American Concrete Institute 315 Detailing Manual and all hooks and bends in reinforcing bars shall conform to ACI detailing standards unless shown otherwise. C. In unscheduled Slabs and Beams detail reinforcing as follows: 1, Class B Lap beam top reinforcing bars at mid span. 2. Provide Class B lap at other location pending Engineer's approval. 3. Provide standard hooks in top bars and bottom bars at discontinuous ends. 4. Provide 2-#4 diagonal bars at all slab re-entrant corners placed under the top mat of steel. D. Welding of reinforcing steel will not be permitted unless specifically shown on drawings. E. Heat shall not be used in the fabrication or installation of reinforcement. F. Reinforcing steel clear cover shall be as follows: 1. Slab -On -Fill 2. Grade Beams 3. Structural Slab 4. Footing Shafts 5. Caps 6. PT CAPS VIII. STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Material Centered 3" Bottom, 3" Sides, 1h" Top Centered 3" Sides and Bottom 3" Sides, 3" Bottom, 2" Top Centered 1. All hot rolled steel members shall be new domestic, and conform to ASTM specification A6. 2. ASTM Specification and Grade. Clearly mark the grade on each member. 3. Unless noted otherwise structural steel members shall be: a. W -shapes shall conform to ASTM A992. ASTM A572 Grade 50 may be substituted for A992. b. Channels shall conform to ASTM A36, c. Angles shall conform to ASTM A36. d. Steel pipe shall conform to ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B. e. Square or rectangular hollow structural shape members shall conform to ASTM A500 Grade 8, Fy = 46ksi. f. Structural steel plate shall conform to ASTM A36 g. Any other steel shall conform to ASTM A992 or ASTM A572-50 B. Fabrication 1. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. 2. Dimensional tolerances of fabricated structural steel shall conform to Section 6.4 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice unless noted otherwise. 3. Splicing of structural steel members is prohibited without prior approval of the Engineer as to location and type of splice to be made. Any member having splice not shown and detailed on shop drawings will be rejected. 4. At square or rectangular hollow Structural shape members provide a fitted end cap at ends. C. Erection 1. Erection tolerances of anchor bolts, embedded items, and all structural steel unless specified otherwise on the drawings shall conform to the AISC Code of Standard Practice. 2. Field cutting of structural steel or any field modifications to structural steel shall not be made without prior approval of the Engineer. 3. Contractor shall protect any unprimed structural steel from detrimental effects of corrosion, as required, until the steel is enclosed and protected by the new construction. D. Contractor shall coordinate structural steel fireproofing requirements. All interior structural steel scheduled or indicated to receive spray applied fireproofing shall be delivered to the project site unprimed. Steel exposed to corrosive conditions after installation shall be primed with a protective coating which does not diminish the bond between the spray applied fireproofing, and the steel substrate. Any primer, and/or coating applied to structural steel shall be approved for use in the applicable U.L. Fire Resistance Assembly used on the project. E. Contractor shall provide an allowance for one ton of structural steel to be Fabricated, Delivered, Detailed, and Installed in the field as directed by the engineer. All man hours, lifts, cutting torches, welding, machines and supervision by G.C. shall be in cost of the tonnage. IX. STRUCTURAL STEEL CONNECTIONS A. Welded Connections Garza + McLain STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS, INC. 615 N. Upper Broadway, Suite 638 Corpus Christi, Texas 78477-0050 (361) 652-7440 (voice) FIRM NO.: F-9331 EXPIRATION: 531-2015 JOB NO.: 130101 1. All welding shall conform to ANSI/AWS D1.1, latest edition. 2. Fillet welds with no size specified shall be 3/16" or minimum size required by AISC, whichever is larger. B. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, Bolts shall be 3/4" diameter domestic and conform to ASTM A325. Bolts shall be designed using values for bearing type bolts with thread allowed in the shear plane. 1. Bolts shall be tightened to "snug tight" as defined by AISC U.N.O. C. All Anchor Rods Shall Conform To ASTM F1554 Grade 55. Supplement 2 D. All adhesive anchors shall conform to Hilti Hit-HY 150 max adhesive anchoring system or approved equal. Anchors shall be Hilti HAS Rods X. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES A. Work specified herein shall be performed by a qualified Independent Testing Laboratory, selected and paid by the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Independent Testing Laboratory at least 24 hours of advance of materials that require testing. The contractor shall pay for all retests of materials not meeting the requirements in the Contract Documents. Reports of each Test shall be prepared by the Independent Testing Laboratory and submitted promptly to the Owner, Contractor, Architect, and Engineer. Items found not to comply with the Construction Documents shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Contractor and Architect/ Engineer for resolution. 8. Concrete inspection and testing: 1. Secure composite samples of concrete at the jobsite in accordance with ASTM C172. 2. Mold and cure four specimens from each sample in accordance with ASTM C31. Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C39 for each pour of concrete. 3. Test one cylinder e 7 days, 2 0 28 days, and hold one for 56 days (test only if 28 day strength is low.) 4. Perform one strength test (four cylinders) for each 50 cubic yards of fraction thereof, of each mix design placed in one day. Test one cylinder ® 7 days, 2 ® 28 days, and hold one for 56 days (test only if 28 day strength is low.) 5. Make one slump test for each set of cylinders following the procedural requirements of ASTM 0143 and C172. 6. Determine total air content of air entrained concrete in accordance with ASTM C231. Perform ane test for each strength test. C. Concrete Reinforcement:lnspect all concrete reinforcing steel and embedded metal assemblies prior to placement of concrete for compliance with Contract Documents and shop drawings. All instances of non-compliance shall be immediately brought to the attention of the contractor for correction, and if uncorrected, reported to the engineer. D. Structural steel: Field inspection of proper erection of all members, visual examination of all field welding, visual inspection of all bolts, and inspection of all shop fabricated members upon arrival at the jobsite for conformance with accepted fabrication and erection drawings, verification of welder's certificates. E. Special Inspections: Special Inspections shall be performed in accordance with Chapter 17 of the 2009 IBC by a Special Inspector hired by the Owner to perform the Special Inspections listed in the Building Permit. The Special Inspector shall be qualified by an approved agency according to the City to perform the special inspections for which they will be undertaking. The Contractor shall coordinate with and notify the Special Inspector of all tests. The Special Inspector shall be responsible to verify that the items detailed in the Construction Documents were built accordingly and shall prepare, sign, and submit reports to the Registered Design Professional (RDPiRC) in Responsible Charge for all time spent at the site and shall notify the General Contractor responsible for the quality of the Project of the non -complying items. These Special inspections are in addition to other listed in these Structural Notes, Project Specifications or required by TDI. Submit all Inspection reports to owner, Contractor Architect & Engineer. Xl. TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF WINDSTORM CERTIFICATION A. Texas Department of Windstorm Certification: The project is located in NUECES County an Inland I wind zone designated catastrophe area. All exterior windows, doors, wall coverings, roof coverings, canopies and mechanical equipment and their attachment to the main structure must be designed for a component and cladding wind pressure corresponding to a 3 -sec gust of 120 mph wind speed Exposure B 1=1.0 according to the International Building Code 2006 with the Texas Windstorm Requirements. All products will require certification stating that the products have been designed and installed for the components and cladding uniform static wind pressure of the aforementioned codes. The sub -contractor shall submit the wind storm product certification, the component and cladding wind pressure the product was designed for, any manufacture certification in regards to Texas Windstorm, and the connection requirements for the product to the Engineer of Record. In addition, all exterior openings i.e. windows and doors shall be resistant to wind debris and contain impact resistant products or shutters. Products certified by the Florida Building Code meeting the projects design criteria, may also be submitted as an as equal. All other items submitted shall be rejected with a revise and resubmit if the submittal does not contain the information requested and is not signed and sealed by a Texas PE. The submitted must meet all air infiltration requirements of TDI. B. Glazed Exterior openings and doors shall be Impact resistant from windstorm debris and be designed and attached to meet the Impact Resistance and 45 psf windpressure. C. Texas Windstorm Component and Cladding Submittals The Contractor and Subcontractors must submit products approved by the Texas Department of Insurance or Equal. When submitting an equal Test Reports, Engineered Calculations and Elevations with Attachment Anchorage must be submitted. Any submittal without proper certifications and data proving that the product meets TDI will be rejected. All submitted products to have ICCESR reports. All exterior cladding submittals shall be submitted for review whether listed below or not. a. Exterior Glazing b. Exterior Doors c. Exterior wall metal panels d. Exterior cladding e. Metal Roof D. Texas Windstorm Inspections 1. Foundations a. Footings 2. Slab -on -fill a. Beams b. Slab Reinforcing 3. Exterior Mounted lights 4. Roof Panel attachment 5. Roof Blocking f. Exterior Lighting g. Exterior wall cladding and Attachment h. Roof Mounted Mechanical exhaust fans i. Roof Panel 6. Exterior Doors 7. Pre -Engineered building and connections 8. Roof Mounted MEP Equipment 9. Louvers 10. Exterior Cladding 11. Roof trim 12. Structural Steel E. TDI Corrosion Resistance Requirements for Construction in the Designated Catastrophe Zone. as defiend by TDI, the following modifications must be made to the Fastener Schedule: 1. Inland I and Inland 11 Areas - Metal connectors and fasteners located in open areas shall be either stainless steel and meet ASTM A167; hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and meet ASTM A123 or ASTM A153; hot -dip galvanized or electrogalvanized in accordance with ASTM A641; mechanically deposited zinc coatings in accordance with ASTM B695; or electrodeposited zinc coatings in accordance with ASTM B633. 2. Inland I and Inland 11 Areas - Metal connectors and fasteners located in vented or enclosed areas may meet the requirements of R325.1.2.1 or shall be epoxy -coated in accordance with ASTM A899. CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. SA0.1 OF GABRIEL GARZA $1 tv. anaan :ce. o d=.I9./S DATE: 02/12/2014 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY 0 w 1- 5 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com Lu 0 REVISION NO. DESCRIPTION co W U co W co zC Q oesW SHEET 034 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 1 3. Exception for all Areas - Metal connectors and fasteners located in conditioned areas (Heated and Cooled Living Areas) are not required to be corrosion resistant. One-half inch diameter or greater steel bolts are not required to be corrosion resistant. 4. Open Areas Shall Include Porches, Decks, Carports, Exterior Wall Coverings, Roof Coverings, Metal Ties for Stone and Masonry Veneer, The Underside of Elevated Structures, Anchors for Securing Mechanical Equipment, Garage Door Attachments, Roof Vent Attachments, Skylight Attachments, and Impact Protective Systems (Shutters). 5. Vents Areas Shall Include Attics, Exterior Wall Stud Cavities, Crawl Spaces, Window and Exterior Door Attachments, Roof Sheathing, and Wall Sheathing. Seaward Areas - Inland 1 Areas - Inland II Areas - 130 mph 120 mph 110 mph XII. DRILLED AND UNDER -REAMED FOOTINGS A. Pier design is in accordance with the recommendations in the following Design geotechnical report: a. Geotechnical Engineer: RETL b. Date of report: AUGUST 26, 2013 c. Report number: GH3206 B. Footing design is based on an Allowable bearing pressure of 3100 psf. C. Bearing stratum shown on the Footing details is 15'-0" below existing grade. D. Footings not specifically located on the plan shall be located on centerline of column above. Where no column occurs, locate on centerline of wail or beam. E. Provide dowels from Shafts into concrete above using same bar size and number as shown for pilaster above. Where no pilaster occurs, use dowels of same size and number as shaft reinforcing steel. Extend dowels 36 bar diameters into beam, wall, pilaster or column u.n.o F. Elevation of top of Shafts, unless noted otherwise on the drawings is at the bottom of the deepest intersecting beam or wall supported by the pier. G. Reinforcing cage shall be held securely away from earth at sides and bottom by sets of 3 spacers at a maximum spacing of 8_ft. along the length of the cage and 1'-0" from the bottom. H. Shaft reinforcing and concrete shall be placed immediately after drilling operations are complete; in no case shall a pier be drilled that cannot be poured by the end of the workday. I. See plans and details for shaft and Under -reamed footing sizes, reinforcing and depth. J. The contractor shall verify depths of Footings before shaft steel is cut. Shaft steel may be delivered to the jobsite in standard lengths and cut as required. Provide 64 bar diameter laps in all vertical pier reinforcing. K. Reinforcing steel shop drawings shall include placing drawings for templates to set dowels in Shafts L. Top of Shaft shall be of the specified diameter. Form top of shaft required to maintain the specified diameter. Any concrete extending beyond the specified diameter shall be removed. M. Temporary steel casing may be required during shaft drilling operations. Refer to Geotechnical Report. Prior to the placement of concrete, any seepage water shall be removed from the pier holes. Special construction procedures in accordance with ACI 336.1-89 and ACI 336.3R-89 and specifications shall be followed during extraction of the casing and during concrete placement. N. All Footings shall be inspected by a representative of RETL in order to ensure that the proposed bearing material has been reached in accordance with the recommendations given in the geotechnical report. 0. The contractor and Geotechnical Engineer shall make and maintain accurate records of the drilled Shaft depths, bearing stratum, depth of penetration into bearing stratum, diameter and location (including off center eccentricities), Footing Under -reamed and shall submit this information to the Engineer. XIII. LIGHT GAUGE METAL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS A. All studs and runner tracks shall be formed from steel that corresponds to the minimum requirements of AISI Standards, Latest Edition. B. Physical properties and allowable load capacities of members shall be developed in accordance with the latest edition of the AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members." C. Cutting of light gage steel members shall be performed with a saw. Torch cutting shall not be permitted. D. Holes that ore field cut through light gage members shall be made with the limitations of the product design and shall be reinforced as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Horizontal bracing for walls shall be provided at 4 ft o.c. maximum in accordance with the typical details. F. All power actuated fasteners shall be 0.157" diameter X -U fasteners as manufactured by Hilti with an embedment equal to 1% inches unless noted otherwise. G. Place a continuous runner at the bottom and top of all stud walls. Bottom runner shall be connected to support member with one P.A.F. at a maximum spacing of 16" o.c. unless noted otherwise. H. Product Identification 1. All material shall meet the requirements of ASTM A653 with minimum yield strength of 50 KSI unless noted otherwise. 2. All galvanized material to meet the requirements of ASTM with a minimum G90 coating. 3. Fastening of components shall be with #10 or #12 self tapping screws. 4. Installation of studs shall be as per Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association - Light Weight Steel Framing Systems Manual, ASTM C955, ASTM C1007 and Project Specifications. 5. Minimum 12" unpunched steel required at both ends of members. 6. Thicknesses 18 GA = 0.0451" 16 GA = 0.0566" 14 GA = 0.0713" 12 GA = 0.1017" STRUCTURAL GENE Q lL, NOTES I. Stud 1. Use three studs at the corner of all exterior walls. 2. Ends of studs must seat firmly in runner track which must have full bearing on structure. 3. Attach each runner track leg to each stud flange with one #10-16 screw or #12 screw. 4. No notching or coping of stud is allowed. 5. All light gauge steel wall studs shall be full height or span to supports with no splices in stud unless detailed otherwise. 6. All horizontal bracing shall be installed at the time the wall is erected. 7. All multiple studs attach together with 2-#12 TEK screws ® 12"o.c. vertically no exceptions. J. Attachments 1. Use #10-16 screws for steel to steel connections except as noted on plans and 1 details. 2. A %" (minimum) clearance must be maintained from all edges of steel members locating screws. A 'Ai" (minimum) on center spacing must be maintained between ajacent screws. 3. Refer to Details for Sheathing Attachment. K. Headers H. All Mechanical, Electrical, and other Equipment Hung from Pre -Engineered Frames Structure or Secondary Members must be Accounted for in their Design. Verify Location and Magnitude of these Loads. I. The Design of All members must be less than or Equal to one for 5 significant figures no exception. XV. POST -TENSIONED CAPS A. Tendon placement, integrity of protective wrapping, and stressing operation shall be observed by the Testing Laboratory. B. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings showing the following: 1. Tendon layouts and profiles, stressing and dead_ end anchorage details, stressing sequence, tendon forces and detail design calculations, openings, and other related details. 2. Calculations for tendon forces and elongations, anchorage stresses, and system losses. 3. Certified mill reports for all prestressing reinforcing steel. C. Post -tensioning reinforcing shall be 1/2 inch diameter, seven wire, stress relieved strand in conforming to ASTM A416 with a minimum yield strength of 270 ksi. D. All anchorages, couplers and miscellaneous hardware shall be standard products as manufactured by the Post -Tensioning Supplier and shall be approved by ICBO. Anchorages shall conform to ACI 318-95. Minimum concrete cover over anchorages shall be 2 inches. 1. Full height studs of corresponding size and appropriate gauge are required immediately adjacent to the jamb studs at each side of opening, see typical details. L. Refer to typical details shown in the contract drawings no deviations without signed and sealed calculations and details. XIV. PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING [ ALTERNATE NO. 4] A. Codes and Standards: a. Building Code, See Structural General Notes. b. AISC Manual of Steel Construction (Latest Edition). c. AISI Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members (Latest Edition references in city Building Code) B. The Entire Building Structure is included and covers Rigid Moment Frames. Portal Moment Frames, Longitudinal Bracing, Roof purlins, Roof Deck Panels and Horizontal cross bracing in plane of roof, as well as Anchor bolt diameter and Embedment. C. Design the Pre -Engineered Metal Building Structure to the following Criteria: a. Vertical Dead Load for Roof (Not Including Rigid Frames and Purlins) minimum 2 psf. b. Vertical Live Load (Reducible for Tributary Areas) 20 Psf. c. Lateral Wind Load per Building Code. Design Wind Speed shall be 120 MPH Minimum; exposure C; 1=1.0 Requirements: a. Provide Necessary Plan and Elevation Drawings for Approval, showing all Structural Framing, and other Secondary Framing to provide a complete Structure. b. Provide and Submit for Review all Design Calculations and Drawings. Such Calculations and Drawings to Bear the Seal and Signature of a Professional Engineer Registered in the State of Texas. c. Provide Building Cross Sections and Elevations for Review which clearly show the primary Structural Rigid Moment Frame, Portal Moment Frame, end wall post and beams, interior Columns, and other Structural members that are to be used on the submitted building. Size of all Standards AISC Members and of all web and flange sections used in built up member shall be noted as well as all bolts and welding. d. Height, Width, and Depth of all members must be clearly dimensioned. Clips or connections welded to the frame at the manufacture's plant must be shown and noted. ASTM Designations and yield stress of all Material used will be indicated. e. Include details that clearly show rigid frame base, Haunch, Ridge plate Connections and other Member -to -Member connections. f. Either hand or computerized calculations may be submitted. Computer printouts to be for the particular building submitted and indicating all dimensions, Loading and Loading Combinations as well as size and Geometrical section properties of members designed. Vertical and Horizontal reactions at base will be Diagrammatically shown, or clearly identified. Calculations will be provided for all base, Haunch, and Ridge plate connections of rigid Moment Frames, Portal Moment Frames, End wall post and beams, and interior columns as well as other Special Structural Members. Secondary Framing Design Calculations must indicate the Size, Shape, and Section Properties of all light gauge sections used for Purlins, Opening Jambs, Heads and Sills, Struts and Bracing. h. Roof Purlins must be designed for positive and negative pressures with component and cladding pressures. i. Wind Load Design must indicate method of Transferring Forces to: j. At End bay Sidewoll Wind Load to Endwall Foundations. Calculations to show how Wind Load Bearing is Transferred to the Eave Strut. k. Portal Moment Frames and Vertical Cross -Bracing to be used to resist Horizontal Wind Forces. Design of all connections to be clearly indicated. 1. Design of Horizontal Cross -Bracing in plane of Roof Framing must be complete and indicate method of transferring tributary Wind Load to Rigid Frames or to Sidewall Portal Moment Frames and/or Vertical Cross -Bracing. E. Metal Roofing Panels: D. g• a. Design of Primary and Secondary Structural Members and exterior covering material is to be in accordance with the Metal Building manufacture's Association (MBMA) *Low Rise Building systems manual* as applicable and AISI *Specification of design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members* as Applicable as well as TDI. b. Design Panels to Support Both Vertical Downward Loads and Uplift Load due to Wind Forces. For an open building component cladding windpressure c. Deck Panel Design Calculations must Show the Shape, Dimensions, Section Properties and Yield Stress of the particular Decking being used, span charts and fasteners. d. Roof system must be TDI or Florida Building Code Approved. e. Panels to be of Material, Type, and Finish as Noted by Architect. f. Panel Ends and Edges to be Lapped and Fastened Together. g. Panel to be Properly Positioned and Aligned. h. Panel -to -Structural Members and Panel -to -Panel Fastners must be made with a positive connection at each Purlin and each Side Lap. Provide Fasteners which have a Capacity to resist the Appropriate Tributary Uplift Force and are of a Type which Permits Thermal Movement (Expansion and Contraction) to take place without Detrimental Effect to the Roof Panel and Structure. i. Openings Through Roof Panels must be Structurally Analyzed. Headers and Purlins of Proper Size and Strength to Support Tributary Vertical Loads to be Provided. F. All Columns Base Plate Must be set and Grouted under for Full Contact bearing. G. All Bases for the Columns to be "Pinned" and not Assumed as Fixed. No Moment forces to be transferred into the building foundation. increase the forces in the Rigid Frames due to Ya" lateral movement of the supports. E. Tendons shall be unbonded and protected from corrosion by plastic sheathing and grease conforming to the requirements of PTI Specification for Unbonded Single Strand Tendons, latest edition. Sheathing shall have a minimum thickness of 25 mils. Sheathing shall be continuous between anchorages. Tears in sheathing shall be repaired. F. Place a minimum of two #4 bars continuous along edges behind all slab anchorages (dead and live ends). G. Tendons shall be fabricated with sufficient length beyond edge form to allow stressing. Fixed end and intermediate anchors shall be placed on the tendon prior to shipment to the jobsite. H. Tendons shall be placed to conform to the control points shown on the Drawings. Profile dimensions locate the center of gravity of the tendon or tendon group steel (CGS). I. Tendons shall be secured to a sufficient number of positioning devices, spaced at a maximum of 3'_ 6" on center, to ensure correct location during and after concrete placement. J. Slight deviations in the spacing of slab tendons will be permitted if required to avoid openings, inserts, and dowels which are specifically located. Tendons shall clear openings by 6" minimum, and shall have a maximum horizontal deviation of 1:6 beginning no closer than 1'_ 0" from opening edge. K. Tendons shall not be stressed over 100 feet in a one end pull or 200 feet in a two end pull except as approved by the Engineer. A record of all stressing forces and elongations shall be made and submitted to the Engineer within 48 hours of stressing. Measured elongations shall not vary by more than 7% from calculated values. L. After stressing is complete and tendon elongations have been approved by the Engineer, tendons shall be cut or burned off to provide a minimum 1 inch cover. Fill anchor recesses flush with non_ shrink epoxy grout. M. If concrete is placed by pump, horses shall be provided to support the hose. The hose shall not be allowed to rest on the tendons. Concrete shall not be placed by bucket directly on the tendons. The Contractor shall take precautions to assure complete consolidation on concrete behind post_ tensioning anchorages. N. Embedded conduits, pipes, or sleeves shall not be placed within 18 inches of a post tensioning anchorage. 0. Grout or concrete containing chlorides, fluorides, sulfides, nitrates, or other substances detrimental to prestressing steel shall not be used. P. Contractor shall accurately locate post tension tendons prior to drilling or cutting the slab for Installation of expansion anchors, etc. Post tension tendons shall not be damaged. 0. Stress 25 percent of the slab tendons the day after concrete placement. The remainder of the tendons shall be stressed when the concrete has attained at least 75 percent of the specified 28 day strength. XVI. METAL DECKS A. Form Deck 1. Metal Roof Deck Schedule Location Dense Gauge Depth Floor 1.0 22 Concrete Section Properties Type Sp Sn Ip In NWT 0.130 0.134 0.073 0.088 Sp = positive section modulus in3 Sn = negative section modulus in3 1p = moment of inertia In = negative moment of inertia 2. Sheet steel for9 alvanized floor deck and accessories shall conform to ASTM A653-94, Structural Quality, with a minimum yield strength of 33 ksi. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A924-94 with a minimum coating of G60 as defined in A653-94. 3. Place deck panels on structural supports and adjust to final position with ends lapped 2 inches over structural supports. Lap sides of deck 1 corrugation. Provide minimum end bearing of 2 inches. 4. Attach form deck to members with puddle welds with washers on a 33/4 pattern with 2-#10 TEK screw side lap fasteners. 5. Do not use admixtures with chloride salts in concrete for slabs over metal deck. XVII. VAPOR RETARDER Vapor Retarder shall conform to ASTM E1745 Class A or better with a maximum water vapor permeance of 0.01 perms per ASTM E96 no less than 10 mils. XIV. EPDXY GROUT Epoxy Grout shall conform to Euclid E3 -Hp or Approved Equal with service temperatures up to 270T, compressive strength of 14,000 at 28 days with coarse aggregate. XV. CARTON FORMS Carton forms shall be 8" deep, made out of corrugated fiber board and designed to support 1000psf Garza + McLain STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS, INC. 615 N. Upper Broadway, Suite 638 Corpus Christi, Texas 78477-0050 (361) 652-7440 (voice) FIRM NO.: F-9331 EXPIRATION: 531-2015 JOB NO.: 130101 DESCRIPTION m Lu O REVISION NO. DESCRIPTION CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. SA0.2 ` :17-S t o F rf+94i * i d\ *�/ P GABRIEL GARZA a\ 90960 y• d=.IC./S DATE: 02/12/2014 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY 0 w 1- 5 1/3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com Lu 0 REVISION NO. SHEET 035 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 Garza + McLain 1 DESCRIPTION I CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. S,A 1 ■ 0 1 STSuit 6 ENGINEERS, INC. 615 N. Upper Broadway, Suite 638 Corpus Christi, Texas 78477-0050 (361) 652-7440 (voice) FIRM NO.: F-9331 EXPIRATION: 5-31-2015 JOB NO.: 130101 A *MOAN '1- 4.gyp...... .-, bp �9,�, o ` N GABRIEL GARZA 90960 \�1?! o a brit,/5 f t Mit f! f 36 40'� 1 1-I 1- -- r r a- 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 LW!' T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com f - ®® I 1 Y 1- - I �1 - 15 13 —Ire: - i 1 - FI -� -- (3644 1 �� I 1 A 4') I I I -- \ I 1 36 _y_ r j % l' 1 1 r -I r - , 1 I-_-"- �--1- - _L - 4 - 4-1_ J- J- -L + � -- ia: L - "Ill n i{4�{i-h{ ESUS l 11 mit 1 1 1 + I I+ I I �� 20 21 22 T I A - `�� ` ) l� 36 37 3639 - r a m - t r - - --rl— - - `2' CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs - 1 1 - 23 24 • �.-• 10 9 &B2 i 36 42 Lu Q o .� I -I - 1 - ( 1 I -r 'I 1 It itjittts_ittttttit�f II .) ` [REVISION NO. I - r I I - 1 I- r - - I r t I I+ 1 1 1---‘ I r 1 LI I I {T T {1 { { TI { { { II Ti; I; 1 ■ I L - r, r t rrt r -It rrt r J r :I I I .••- 1 DESCRIPTION 1 A,B,C 36 43 16 17 r -F I I I M - 1 r —MrJ ( - ■ r - HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE OVERALL STEEL FOUNDATION PLAN 6 5 1 - r 1 J —t 1 �� r A .. .■ A iH {{�t{� IJ lA� 1 I 1 J B i 3� A OVERALL SITE PLAN 36 44 >- al o 361.3_6 SCALE: N.T.S. NORTH SHEET 036 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP-204 IREVISION NO. I CITY PROJECT# E12118 6"107'-0" FIEILD VERIFY 6 " 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 10'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-O" 12'-0" Y/ 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0"/4'-0" / 4'-0" 4'-0"/4'-0" / 4'-0" 4'-0"/4'-0" / 4'-011,4' -0"1,4,'-0" / / 4'-0" 42-01/4'-0"4,4'-0"4,4' / -0",' / 4'-0" -0 "t8lK 4'-01./4'-0"4,4' / -0" 4'-0" 1 I81K I81K I81K I81K I81K I81K I81K I81K /4'-0"/4'-0" I81K I81K I81K I81K I81K co Y n o 40.5K 1411 81K 81K 81K tsiKo 81K =1 $ $81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 4 81K 40.5 �0. I I I+ v j it 1 11'-6" 6 12'-0" 12'-0" u 12'-0" 4 12'-0" ,4'-0" L,4'-0" L,4'-0" Y O .cci) , Y A 37 47 37 47 T 5 I 1 I SLAB �- .O. w 8'-0" _10.SLAB 36.00') $ 0 I 121\--117) 0 I ;\-1644.--, O I \ ♦ 4 Y_ f- Y Y CO 1- 4. Y Y Y 14 ,4'-0" 64'-0"1,4'-0" ♦ 'rt15 ~ A Y 11-5 37 47 de- I I I- .x♦mi O I Y 0 I _,,_ ` I i� Y SEE PLAN16 NOTE 7 SEE NOT PLAN 7 17x O J J.L� /oiY 071 D Y \\�0i ��MIN 1 SEE PLAN N m 0 c1 Y ' NOTE 7 - Z Ns 0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" O I ‘1- 4- Y 00 ♦ 0 I �T \ 4 Y �1 NEW POST -T SION SLAB CAP oOVER "T ` Y �_1 EXISTIN VARIES, SEE PROVIDE #4 COURT THICKNESS LAN NOTE 6. 12"O.C. EA WAY oY a TOP (2" CLEAIR COVER) � O I d_\__Qo4_, \ t 0 I Y 1e;rt A 37 47 O I \ }t0.41 Y_ °D ♦ O I `r Y 87 0 I Y 0 1 \ Y I (36.00') T.O. SLAB I I Y ` 1' �1 I Y 37 7 N - o (37.54') T.O. SLAB O I 4 Y l 6 11 I 40.5K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 181K 81K 81K 181K 81K 81K KAP COURT CAP PLAN TENNIS COU 81K 81K81K 1811< 81K 81K TS 16 AND 17 81K 81K 81K 1811< 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K K 6 CO 3D co ID ETD OD Y co co I 0 01.3 0 co 0 40.5K 4/42 1 14/42 63' -0" Garza + McLain STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS, INC. 615 N. Upper Broadway, Suite 638 Corpus Christi, Texas 78477-0050 (361) 652-7440 (voice) FIRM NO.: F-9331 EXPIRATION: 531-2015 JOB NO.: 130101 4/42 61 -8" 11 12'-0" 15 O" 14/42 4/42 16/42 16/42 i.63' J. SLAB 12'-O" 1 2'-8" 12'-O" 1 2'-0" 6" ---o) T_.. 23 SEE PLAN NOTE 7 14/42 14/42 14/42 \ 14/42 14/42 B 37 48 14/42 14/42 14/42 SEE P NOTE r kili KL 14/42 35.10' T.O. SLAB 14/42 14/42 _7 _7111). 14/42 B 4 SEE NOT PLAN �a 7 14/42 6" STRUCTJRAL SLAB REINF WITI- #6012"O.C. EA. WAY CENTERED 37 48 14/42 14/42 O N 14/42 c N 14/42 35.10 T.O. SLAB 14/42 14/42 4/42 14/42 PLAN NOTES: 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 COURT FOUNDATION PLAN TENNIS COURTS 23 AND 24 [ALTERNATE NO.1 ] SCALE: 1/8"=1'-O" 1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY AND/OR DETERMINE ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND DETAILS PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION AND SUBMITTING SHOP DRAWINGS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES OR SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR WHICH DETAILS FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION HAVE NOT BEEN PROVIDED PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK NO EXCEPTION. 2. BASED UPON ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS ENCOUNTERED AT THE JOB SITE, ADDITIONAL NEW FRAMING OR MODIFICATIONS TO EITHER THE NEW OR EXISTING FRAMING SHOWN MAY BE REQUIRED AS DIRECTED BY THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL INFORMATION REQUIRED BY THE SUB CONTRACTORS AND MATERIAL SUPPLIERS BASED UPON FIELD MEASUREMENTS AND DETERMINATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS AT THE JOB SITE. THIS INFORMATION SHALL BE INDICATED ON THE SHOP DRAWINGS SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW TO THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER NO EXCEPTION. 3. AFTER SLAB HAS BEEN POURED, INFILL LOW SPOTS PRIOR TO ADDING COURT SURFACE. 4. NEW SLAB TO BE POURED FLAT Ys" PER 10'-0" 5. ADD ALTERNATE #6 NEW LIGHT POLE; SEE F/45 6. SLAB THICKNESS VARIES, G.C. TO FIELD VERIFY EXISTING ELEVATIONS PRIOR TO START OF CONSTRUCTION. ALL POST TENSION CABLES TO HORIZONTAL. 7. SEE DETAIL D SHEET 049 TYPICAL. 8. 14/42 INDICATES A DRILLED AND UNDER -REAMED FOOTING, SEE DETAIL A SHEET 045. NORTH POST -TENSION NOTES: 1. VERIFY ALL SLAB DROPS, OFFSETS AND BLOCKOUTS ON ARCHITECTURAL PLANS AS WELL AS EXISTING CONDITIONS AND NOTIFY THE PROJECT ENGINEER OF RECORD OF ANY DISCREPANCIES THAT MAY EXIST. 2. COORDINATE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS WITH ARCHITECTURAL AND MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR ALL OPENINGS, INSERTS AND ANY OTHER RELATED ITEMS. 3. SUPPORT TENDONS AND REINFORCING BARS SECURELY TO PREVENT BOTH VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL MOVEMENT DURING CONCRETE PLACEMENT. 4. IF TENDON SHEATHING IS DAMAGED, RE -SHEATH AFFECTED LENGTH TO PREVENT BONDING OF CONCRETE TO TENDON. 5. TENDON ANCHORAGES SHALL CONFORM TO ACI 318. 6. ALL PRESTRESSING STEEL SHALL CONSIST OF SEVEN (7) WIRE STRESS -RELIEVED STRANDS CONFORMING TO A.S.T.M. A-416, MINIMUM Fy=270 KSI. STRANDS SHALL BE COATED WITH PERMANENT LOW RELAXATION LUBRICANT AND WRAPPED WITH PLASTIC SHEATHING BY A CERTIFIED PTI PLANT. 7. ALL TENDONS SHALL BE 1/2"0 - INITIALLY STRESSED AT 33 KIPS MAXIMUM PER STRAND, WITH A SEATING LOSS OF 1/4" INCH MAXIMUM PER STRAND. 8. INSTALL ANCHORED (DEAD) END OF ALL TENDONS WITH A PLASTIC CAP. INSTALL NON -SHRINK GROUT IN STRESSED (LIVE) END POCKET OF ALL TENDONS. 9. A DOUBLE ARROW END INDICATES A STRESSING END FOR 1 BEAM TENDON +1 SLAB TENDON, A DOUBLE (DEAD) END INDICATES A TAIL END FOR 1 BEAM +1 SLAB TENDON, A SINGLE ARROW END INDICATES 1 STRESSING END FOR SLAB TENDON, A SINGLE (DEAD) END INDICATES A TAIL END FOR SLAB TENDON. 36 37 SCALE: 1/8"=1'-0" C1� NORTH CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. SA1.1 `� t• t4i * GABRZA SI 1433%.---44%97:61: �y 1• ot.I9./S DATE: 02/12/2014 O ti 0 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com Lu 0 REVISION NO. DESCRIPTION Lu 0 W CD Q W 120 O 0 COURT CAP PLAN TENNIS COURTS 16,17 AND 23,24 SHEET 037 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 0 120'-0" FIELD VE 40.5K 81K .81K 0 I N . , 8'-0" 81K .81K .811< N N to 0 N 0 Ar 0 I (36.80') T.O. SLAB /),-SEE PLAN NOTE 7 N N O 8'-0„ 0 (36.80') T.O. SLAB 81K �81K 81 6 L 38147 40.5K 81K 181 K 4'--0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 12'-0" 81K 81K 81K 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0 12'-0" A 38147 A 81K .81K 81K 811< 38 47 NEW POST -TENSION SLAB AP OVER XISTING COURT THI KNESS VARIE , SEE PLAN NOTE 6 PROVIDE #4 0 12"0.C. EA WAY TOP (P" CLEAR COVER) 81K 1.81K ji81K 81K t811< �81K 811< t81K 1K 81K ill< 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-O" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" � 12'-0" / 12'-0» / 1'-10" / 12'-0» 108'-10" FIELD VERIFY A \ COUPT CAP PLAN TENNIS COURTS 5 8c 6 1K SEE PLAN NOTE 7 (36.13' T.O. S 4' 0",4' 0",4' O"4.4' O„/4K O",4K 0„4.4' O„/4' O„811K 81K 4' 0"4.4' 0" 1K 811< 40.5K 81K 12'-0" 12'-O" 12'-0" Garza + McLain STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS, INC. 615 N. Upper Broadway, Suite 638 Corpus Christi, Texas 78477-0050 (361) 652-7440 (voice) FIRM NO. F-9331 EXPIRATION: 5-31-2015 JOB NO.: 130101 7- HOLD DOWNS PLAN NOTES: 1. HOLD DOWN WILL DEPEND UPON TYPE OF BLDG SELECTED, G.C. TO PROVIDE AN ALLOWANCE TO USE A SIMPSON S/LT T20 TENSION TIE WITH A Y2 EXPANSION ANCHOR MIN SIMPSON 3Y2 G.C. TO SUBMIT STORAGE BLDG FOR WIND STORM TIE DOWN DETERMINATION PRE-FA3. STORAGE 3LDG. B [ALTEP\ATE \O. 5] \36 38 / SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" NORTH POST -TENSION NOTES: 1. VERIFY ALL SLAB DROPS, OFFSETS AND BLOCKOUTS ON ARCHITECTURAL PLANS AS WELL AS EXISTING CONDITIONS AND NOTIFY THE PROJECT ENGINEER OF RECORD OF ANY DISCREPANCIES THAT MAY EXIST. 2. COORDINATE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS WITH ARCHITECTURAL AND MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR ALL OPENINGS, INSERTS AND ANY OTHER RELATED ITEMS. 3. SUPPORT TENDONS AND REINFORCING BARS SECURELY TO PREVENT BOTH VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL MOVEMENT DURING CONCRETE PLACEMENT. 4. IF TENDON SHEATHING IS DAMAGED, RE -SHEATH AFFECTED LENGTH TO PREVENT BONDING OF CONCRETE TO TENDON. 5. TENDON ANCHORAGES SHALL CONFORM TO ACI 318. 6. ALL PRESTRESSING STEEL SHALL CONSIST OF SEVEN (7) WIRE STRESS -RELIEVED STRANDS CONFORMING TO A.S.T.M. A-416, MINIMUM Fy=270 KSI. STRANDS SHALL BE COATED WITH PERMANENT LOW RELAXATION LUBRICANT AND WRAPPED WITH PLASTIC SHEATHING BY A CERTIFIED PTI PLANT. 7. ALL TENDONS SHALL BE 1/2"O - INITIALLY STRESSED AT 33 KIPS MAXIMUM PER STRAND, WITH A SEATING LOSS OF 1/4" INCH MAXIMUM PER STRAND. 8. INSTALL ANCHORED (DEAD) END OF ALL TENDONS WITH A PLASTIC CAP. INSTALL NON -SHRINK GROUT IN STRESSED (LIVE) END POCKET OF ALL TENDONS. 9. A DOUBLE ARROW END INDICATES A STRESSING END FOR 1 BEAM TENDON +1 SLAB TENDON, A DOUBLE (DEAD) END INDICATES A TAIL END FOR 1 BEAM +1 SLAB TENDON, A SINGLE ARROW END INDICATES 1 STRESSING END FOR SLAB TENDON, A SINGLE (DEAD) END INDICATES A TAIL END FOR SLAB TENDON. PLAN NOTES: 1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY AND/OR DETERMINE ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND DETAILS PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION AND SUBMITTING SHOP DRAWINGS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES OR SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR WHICH DETAILS FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION HAVE NOT BEEN PROVIDED PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK NO EXCEPTION. 2. BASED UPON ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS ENCOUNTERED AT THE JOB SITE, ADDITIONAL NEW FRAMING OR MODIFICATIONS TO EITHER THE NEW OR EXISTING FRAMING SHOWN MAY BE REQUIRED AS DIRECTED BY THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL INFORMATION REQUIRED BY THE SUB CONTRACTORS AND MATERIAL SUPPLIERS BASED UPON FIELD MEASUREMENTS AND DETERMINATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS AT THE JOB SITE. THIS INFORMATION SHALL BE INDICATED ON THE SHOP DRAWINGS SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW TO THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER NO EXCEPTION. 3. AFTER SLAB HAS BEEN POURED, INFILL LOW SPOTS PRIOR TO ADDING COURT SURFACE. 4. NEW SLAB TO BE POURED FLAT )6" PER 10'-0" 5. ADD ALTERNATE #6 NEW LIGHT POLE; SEE F/45 6. SLAB THICKNESS VARIES, G.C. TO FIELD VERIFY EXISTING ELEVATIONS PRIOR TO START OF CONSTRUCTION. ALL POST TENSION CABLES TO HORIZONTAL. 7. SEE DETAIL D SHEET 049 TYPICAL. 8. 14/42 INDICATES A DRILLED AND UNDER -REAMED FOOTING, SEE DETAIL A SHEET 045. 36138 % SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" NORTH CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. SA1.2 *4 GABRIEL GARZA SI tom.. 90960 �y • (St./et/SI DATE: 02/12/2014 0 U 0 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY 0 W I - CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com ti REVISION N 0 ti 0. 0 w 0 0 z 0 LU W U LU 0 W co CC zC Q oesLU COURT CAP PLAN TENNIS COURTS 5 AND 6 SHEET 038 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 NOTE 5 �_81K 1'1K 1 Y 120'-0" FIEL 0 Y 40.5K 81K 811K 8 � 1K 481K Kj. 0 I Y 81K 81K 81K 81 JI oo 8'-0" \ 0 Y cataN 0 Y ;ac1n O Y ;21- \ m� 0 O Y "21- \ cn 0 1 Y \ CO (0 I TI N K 81K 811< 8K 8K 81K (37.00') T.O. SLAB int 0 N 0 SEE PLAN NOTE 7 co NOTE 5 8'-0" cO 10.5K IE1K IB1K 4'-0" L4'-0"1,4'-0' 12'-0" .00') . SLAB K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 1K 81K 1K 81K .S. t M. A 81K 81K 81 8T1K 81K 10 '81K I'81K 1181K 81K 1181K 1181K 81 /4'-0" I'4'-0" L4'-0"/4'-0" L4'-0" 1.4'-0"4' 12'-0" / 12'-0" A 39 47 l K I81K 1181K T81K 81 -0" 1,4'-0" L4'-0"/4'-0" 12'-0" 811< 81K 81K A 1 81K 81K SEE PLAN NOTE 7 81K 81K 81K s 1K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 9 ■ 81K SEE PLAN NOTE 7 NEW POST -TENSION SLAB AP OVER EXISTING COURT THIO NESS VARIES, SEE PLAN NOTE 6. PROVIDE #4 © 12"O.C. EA WAY TOP (2j' CLEAR COVER) 0 I 0 1K 8 8 K 1K 0.5K 40.5K ,40.5K NOTE 5 K 81K 81 / 8'-O" (36.22') T.O. SLAB / .203 35.20'-' T.O. FLOOR Y On L - -003 35.53' T.O. FLOOR (36.22') T.O. SLAB 8'-O" CO 0 �CO CO 0 00 D. 39 Vi tiK " l 81K 81K1K 81K 81K 81K �81K �\SKNOTE 5 81K 81K 81K I81K I81K 81K ff 3';2" 4'-0"1,4'-0" I "'(((.4'-0"/4'-0" L4'-0" L4'-0" 4'-0" 1.4'-0" 4'-O"/ " 7 -2" / 7'-2 / 12'-0" / 12'-0" / 12'-0" 12'-0" 111'-4" FIELD VERIFY (6139 SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" A EOU\DATION PLAN TE\NIS COURTS 9 AND 10 6" 47 Garza + McLain STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS, INC. 615 N. Upper Broadway, Suite 638 Corpus Christi, Texas 78477-0050 (361) 652-7440 (voice) FIRM NO.: F-9331 EXPIRATION: 5-31-2015 JOB NO.: 130101 POST -TENSION NOTES: 1. VERIFY ALL SLAB DROPS, OFFSETS AND BLOCKOUTS ON ARCHITECTURAL PLANS AS WELL AS EXISTING CONDITIONS AND NOTIFY THE PROJECT ENGINEER OF RECORD OF ANY DISCREPANCIES THAT MAY EXIST. 2. COORDINATE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS WITH ARCHITECTURAL AND MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR ALL OPENINGS, INSERTS AND ANY OTHER RELATED ITEMS. 3. SUPPORT TENDONS AND REINFORCING BARS SECURELY TO PREVENT BOTH VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL MOVEMENT DURING CONCRETE PLACEM ENT. 4. IF TENDON SHEATHING IS DAMAGED, RE -SHEATH AFFECTED LENGTH TO PREVENT BONDING OF CONCRETE TO TENDON. 5. TENDON ANCHORAGES SHALL CONFORM TO ACI 318. 6. ALL PRESTRESSING STEEL SHALL CONSIST OF SEVEN (7) WIRE STRESS -RELIEVED STRANDS CONFORMING TO A.S.T.M. A-416, MINIMUM Fy=270 KSI. STRANDS SHALL BE COATED WITH PERMANENT LOW RELAXATION LUBRICANT AND WRAPPED WITH PLASTIC SHEATHING BY A CERTIFIED PTI PLANT. 7. ALL TENDONS SHALL BE 1/2"0 - INITIALLY STRESSED AT 33 KIPS MAXIMUM PER STRAND, WITH A SEATING LOSS OF 1/4" INCH MAXIMUM PER STRAND. 8. INSTALL ANCHORED (DEAD) END OF ALL TENDONS WITH A PLASTIC CAP. INSTALL NON -SHRINK GROUT IN STRESSED (LIVE) END POCKET OF ALL TENDONS. 9. A DOUBLE ARROW END INDICATES A STRESSING END FOR 1 BEAM TENDON +1 SLAB TENDON, A DOUBLE (DEAD) END INDICATES A TAIL END FOR 1 BEAM +1 SLAB TENDON, A SINGLE ARROW END INDICATES 1 STRESSING END FOR SLAB TENDON, A SINGLE (DEAD) END INDICATES A TAIL END FOR SLAB TENDON. PLAN NOTES: 1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY AND/OR DETERMINE ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND DETAILS PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION AND SUBMITTING SHOP DRAWINGS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES OR SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR WHICH DETAILS FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION HAVE NOT BEEN PROVIDED PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK NO EXCEPTION. 2. BASED UPON ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS ENCOUNTERED AT THE JOB SITE, ADDITIONAL NEW FRAMING OR MODIFICATIONS TO EITHER THE NEW OR EXISTING FRAMING SHOWN MAY BE REQUIRED AS DIRECTED BY THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL INFORMATION REQUIRED BY THE SUB CONTRACTORS AND MATERIAL SUPPLIERS BASED UPON FIELD MEASUREMENTS AND DETERMINATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS AT THE JOB SITE. THIS INFORMATION SHALL BE INDICATED ON THE SHOP DRAWINGS SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW TO THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER NO EXCEPTION. 3. AFTER SLAB HAS BEEN POURED, INFILL LOW SPOTS PRIOR TO ADDING COURT SURFACE. 4. NEW SLAB TO BE POURED FLAT Ya" PER 10'-0" 5. ADD ALTERNATE #6 NEW LIGHT POLE; SEE F/45 6. SLAB THICKNESS VARIES, G.C. TO FIELD VERIFY EXISTING ELEVATIONS PRIOR TO START OF CONSTRUCTION. ALL POST TENSION CABLES TO HORIZONTAL. 7. SEE DETAIL D SHEET 049 TYPICAL. 8. 14/42 INDICATES A DRILLED AND UNDER -REAMED FOOTING, SEE DETAIL A SHEET 045. NORTH DESCRIPTION m Lu O REVISION NO. DESCRIPTION CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. SA1.3 r,;• * �1r . yj !* ; d\ *�/ GABRIEL GARZA �'•: 90960 a sehle +94.- • d=.I9./S DATE: 02/12/2014 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY _'10 1- w CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com Lu 0 CC LU I -U CDRR V LU 00 CO W W CC N t� O Q oes 0 W m REVISION NO. FOUNDATION PLAN TENNIS COURTS 9 AND 10 SHEET 039 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 rL SLAB 150'-0" FIELD VERIFY 12'-0" 12'-0" 12' -0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 5' 0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 4 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 0 4" FIELD VE 0 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 8'-O" O 1 0 1 0 1tit (36.53') T.O. SLAB 1 N 2 N N O 1 0 1` d 0 1 Y rio- O I jri- 0 I O 0 I Y I Y T I Y 0 0 1 0 O I 0 0 SEE IPLAN NOTE 7 (36.53') T.O. SLAB (37.04') T.O. SLAB SLOPE 24'-0" 4 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" SLOPE 15 SEE PLAN NOTE 7 { A 40 47 81K 8 K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 14 A 40147 ISEE PLAN NOTE 7 NEW POST -TENSION SLAB (TAP OVER EXISTING COURT THIO NESS VARIES, SEE PLAN NOTE 6. PROVIDE #4 0 12"O.C. EA WAY TOP (A" CLEAR COVER) 3 O 0.5K 40.5K (36.22') T.O. SLAB A 40 SEE FLAN NOTE 7 47 Garza + McLain STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS, INC. 615 N. Upper Broadway, Suite 638 Corpus Christi, Texas 78477-0050 (361) 652-7440 (voice) FIRM NO.: F-9331 EXPIRATION: 5-31-2015 JOB NO.: 130101 POST -TENSION NOTES: 1. VERIFY ALL SLAB DROPS, OFFSETS AND BLOCKOUTS ON ARCHITECTURAL PLANS AS WELL AS EXISTING CONDITIONS AND NOTIFY THE PROJECT ENGINEER OF RECORD OF ANY DISCREPANCIES THAT MAY EXIST. 2. COORDINATE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS WITH ARCHITECTURAL AND MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR ALL OPENINGS, INSERTS AND ANY OTHER RELATED ITEMS. 3. SUPPORT TENDONS AND REINFORCING BARS SECURELY TO PREVENT BOTH VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL MOVEMENT DURING CONCRETE PLACEMENT. 4. IF TENDON SHEATHING IS DAMAGED, RE -SHEATH AFFECTED LENGTH TO PREVENT BONDING OF CONCRETE TO TENDON. 5. TENDON ANCHORAGES SHALL CONFORM TO ACI 318. 6. ALL PRESTRESSING STEEL SHALL CONSIST OF SEVEN (7) WIRE STRESS -RELIEVED STRANDS CONFORMING TO A.S.T.M. A-416, MINIMUM Fy=270 KSI. STRANDS SHALL BE COATED WITH PERMANENT LOW RELAXATION LUBRICANT AND WRAPPED WITH PLASTIC SHEATHING BY A CERTIFIED PTI PLANT. 7. ALL TENDONS SHALL BE 1/2"0 — INITIALLY STRESSED AT 33 KIPS MAXIMUM PER STRAND, WITH A SEATING LOSS OF 1/4" INCH MAXIMUM PER STRAND. 8. INSTALL ANCHORED (DEAD) END OF ALL TENDONS WITH A PLASTIC CAP. INSTALL NON -SHRINK GROUT IN STRESSED (LIVE) END POCKET OF ALL TENDONS. 9. A DOUBLE ARROW END INDICATES A STRESSING END FOR 1 BEAM TENDON +1 SLAB TENDON, A DOUBLE (DEAD) END INDICATES A TAIL END FOR 1 BEAM +1 SLAB TENDON, A SINGLE ARROW END INDICATES 1 STRESSING END FOR SLAB TENDON, A SINGLE (DEAD) END INDICATES A TAIL END FOR SLAB TENDON. ro 8 -0 K 81K :1K 81K :1K 81K 81K ;1K 81K 81K 1K 81K 0.5K 40.5K 40.5K 81K 81K 81K 81K 81K 1K 1K 0 I Y 81K 811‹ 8 K 81K 81K 8 A CCOURT CAP PLAN TENNIS COURTS 13, 14 AMD 15 36 40 SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" K 81K K 81 81K 8 K 81K 81K 8 K 81K 81K 8 K 81K 81K0 8 K 81 K K NOTE 5 PLAN NOTES: 1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY AND/OR DETERMINE ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND DETAILS PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION AND SUBMITTING SHOP DRAWINGS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES OR SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR WHICH DETAILS FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION HAVE NOT BEEN PROVIDED PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK NO EXCEPTION. 2. BASED UPON ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS ENCOUNTERED AT THE JOB SITE, ADDITIONAL NEW FRAMING OR MODIFICATIONS TO EITHER THE NEW OR EXISTING FRAMING SHOWN MAY BE REQUIRED AS DIRECTED BY THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL INFORMATION REQUIRED BY THE SUB CONTRACTORS AND MATERIAL SUPPLIERS BASED UPON FIELD MEASUREMENTS AND DETERMINATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS AT THE JOB SITE. THIS INFORMATION SHALL BE INDICATED ON THE SHOP DRAWINGS SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW TO THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER NO EXCEPTION. 3. AFTER SLAB HAS BEEN POURED, INFILL LOW SPOTS PRIOR TO ADDING COURT SURFACE. 4. NEW SLAB TO BE POURED FLAT )fi" PER 10'-0" 5. ADD ALTERNATE #6 NEW LIGHT POLE; SEE F/45 6. SLAB THICKNESS VARIES, G.C. TO FIELD VERIFY EXISTING ELEVATIONS PRIOR TO START OF CONSTRUCTION. ALL POST TENSION CABLES TO HORIZONTAL. 7. SEE DETAIL D SHEET 049 TYPICAL. 8. 14/42 INDICATES A DRILLED AND UNDER -REAMED FOOTING, SEE NORTH CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. SA1.4 o F rf+94i /C /\ �/ GABRIEL GARZA SI �\ 90960 �y • tn./9./S DATE: 02/12/2014 0 ti U w 0 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY 0 L N w CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com Lu O REVISION NO. DESCRIPTION Lu 0 di 0 LU W U LU 0 W co zC J Q oesaaW COURT CAP PLAN TENNIS COURTS 13,14 AND 15 SHEET 040 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 154'-8" 6" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 9'-8" 12'-0" 53,-4" 2'-0" 12'-0 12'-0" 12'-0" 2'-0" I 4/42 14/42 r\ Th 1 14/42 a N \r4 14/42 r K `x14/42 rjd -14/42 0 0 II 14/42 � I 0 �h —11/14/42 N 14/42 35.23' T.O. SLAB' 0 N \\ 14/42 35.23' -14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 —'SEE PLAN NOTE 7 \ 1 T.O. SLA 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 11 14/42 1:9 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 11; 14/42 14/42 2 I� 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 (4) 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 `U 14/42 14/42 B -14/42 14/42 J 14/42 SEE PLAN' NOTE 7 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 KA FOU\DATIO\ 14/42 PLAN TENNIS COURTS 20. 21 AND 22 16/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 41148 14/42 14/42 14/42 36.08' J T O. SLAB 73355.10' .T.O.FLOOR 14/42 14/42 14/42 SLOPE 14/42 14/42 9 14/42 LN\_ ELI 14/42 -14/42 r 14/42 14/42 SLOPE 14/42 SEE PLAN NOTE 7 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 \ 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 36.0' 14/42 T.O. SLAB 14/42 14/42 14/42 2 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 C T T \ 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 35.63' T.O. SLAB 14/42 T-14/42 " STRUCTURAL SLAB �� EINF WITH #6@12"0. . . WAY CENTERED 14/42 c 14/42 14/42 14/42 SEE PLAN NOTE 7 14/42 14/42 14/42 14/42 iumni 14/42 14/42 B 41 48 14/42 I -14/42 `I -14/42 711 -14/42 14/42 { 1 GI) 1 /I 5, 0" 16/42/-- 11\ ® ®r 16/42 35.63' T.O. SLAB 14/42 14/42 Garza + McLain STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS, INC. 615 N. Upper Broadway, Suite 638 Corpus Christi, Texas 78477-0050 (361) 652-7440 (voice) FIRM NO.: F-9331 EXPIRATION: 531-2015 JOB NO.: 130101 PLAN NOTES: 1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY AND/OR DETERMINE ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND DETAILS PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION AND SUBMITTING SHOP DRAWINGS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES OR SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR WHICH DETAILS FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION HAVE NOT BEEN PROVIDED PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK NO EXCEPTION. 2. BASED UPON ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS ENCOUNTERED AT THE JOB SITE, ADDITIONAL NEW FRAMING OR MODIFICATIONS TO EITHER THE NEW OR EXISTING FRAMING SHOWN MAY BE REQUIRED AS DIRECTED BY THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL INFORMATION REQUIRED BY THE SUB CONTRACTORS AND MATERIAL SUPPLIERS BASED UPON FIELD MEASUREMENTS AND DETERMINATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS AT THE JOB SITE. THIS INFORMATION SHALL BE INDICATED ON THE SHOP DRAWINGS SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW TO THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER NO EXCEPTION. 3. AFTER SLAB HAS BEEN POURED, INFILL LOW SPOTS PRIOR TO ADDING COURT SURFACE. 4. NEW SLAB TO BE POURED FLAT Ya" PER 10'-0" 5. ADD ALTERNATE #6 NEW LIGHT POLE; SEE F/45 6. SLAB THICKNESS VARIES, G.C. TO FIELD VERIFY EXISTING ELEVATIONS PRIOR TO START OF CONSTRUCTION. ALL POST TENSION CABLES TO HORIZONTAL. 7. SEE DETAIL D SHEET 049 TYPICAL. 8. 14/42 INDICATES A DRILLED AND UNDER—REAMED FOOTING, SEE DETAIL A SHEET 045. 49 SCALE: 1/8" _ 01N NORTH CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. SA1.5 rf+9i !* /\ 4*�/ to GABRIEL GARZA �\ 90960 �y 1• d=.I9./S DATE: 02/12/2014 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY 0 L N W 1- CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com Lu 0 REVISION NO. DESCRIPTION Lu 0 di 0 LIJ W U 0 zC J ;06 Q W LLI W C0 cccU m W 120 FOUNDATION PLAN TENNIS COURTS 20, 21 AND 22 SHEET 041 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 1'-3' 4'-0„ F1 r N 12'-11" FIELD VERIFY 13'-11" FIELD VERIFY 14'-0" FIELD VERIFY C 42 14'-0" 14'-0" 4'-0" 1'-3" 1 FIELD VERIFY FIELD VERIFY 7'-0" 7'-0" 7'-0" 7-0" TYP. t t C -----i F1 r -----I 42 48 F1 r-----1 r---- C1 I ®c1 I I C1 I 48 42146 F1 /7// REPAIR NOTE 1 F1 C1 REPAIR NOTE 1 REPAIR NOTE 1 —J REPAIR NOTE 1 F1 A L 1 c1 / / 7/ REPAIR NOTE 1 REPAIR NOTE 1 r REPAIR NOTE 1 REPAIR NOTE 1 // REPAIR NOTE 1 F1 — — 1 C1 C1 0 F1 J F1 c1 REPAIR MOTE 1 42 48 1 F1 L. --J F1 --J PLAN --J PLAN NOTES: 1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY AND/OR DETERMINE ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND DETAILS PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION AND SUBMITTING SHOP DRAWINGS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES OR SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR WHICH DETAILS FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION HAVE NOT BEEN PROVIDED PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK NO EXCEPTION. 2. BASED UPON ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS ENCOUNTERED AT THE JOB SITE, ADDITIONAL NEW FRAMING OR MODIFICATIONS TO EITHER THE NEW OR EXISTING FRAMING SHOWN MAY BE REQUIRED AS DIRECTED BY THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL INFORMATION REQUIRED BY THE SUB CONTRACTORS AND MATERIAL SUPPLIERS BASED UPON FIELD MEASUREMENTS AND DETERMINATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS AT THE JOB SITE. THIS INFORMATION SHALL BE INDICATED ON THE SHOP DRAWINGS SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW TO THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER NO EXCEPTION. 3. REFER TO ARCH'L DWGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 4. REFER TO PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS AND STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 5. NOTATION THUS: OA INDICATES A HSS4x4xY4 POST, SEE B SHEET 049 6. NOTATION THUS: F1 INDICATES A SCHEDULED SPREAD FOOTING, SEE H SHEET 046. 7. C1 IS A 16"o CONCRETE COLUMN REINFORCED WITH (6)-#6 VERTICAL BARS AND #4 TIES ® 6"O.C., SEE DETAIL F SHEET 052 REPAIR NOTES: 1. REMOVE RUST, CLEAN WITH RUST REMOVER, FILL EXISTING COLUMN WITH EPDXY GROUT FULL HEIGHT, PREP METAL SURFACE FOR EXPDXY PAINT WITH UNIVERSAL METAL PRIMER AND PAINT ALL EXPOSED STEEL BULB TEES WITH EPDXY PAINT. [A LOU\GE LEVEL 1 PLAN F1 42 / SCALE: 1 /4" = 1'-0" N • 12'-11" FIELD VERIFY 13'-11" FIELD VERIFY 14'-0" FIELD VERIFY EN 14'-0" FIELD VERIFY HSS3x3xY4 HSS3x3xY4 14'-0" FIELD VERIFY HSS3x3xY4 HSS3x3xY4 Garza + McLain STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS, INC. 615 N. Upper Broadway, Suite 638 Corpus Christi, Texas 78477-0050 (361) 652-7440 (voice) FIRM NO.: F-9331 EXPIRATION: 531-2015 JOB NO.: 130101 4 1 HSS3x3xY4 4 V HSS3x3xY4 0,0.0 40► ► 4 t ► 7, 4-► 4 HSS3x3xY4 HSS3x3xY4HSS3x3x4 HSS3x3xY4 = /16P igsraffeer MC • • HSS3x3xY4 ,0 PLAN NOTES: 1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY AND/OR DETERMINE ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND DETAILS PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION AND SUBMITTING SHOP DRAWINGS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES OR SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR WHICH DETAILS FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION HAVE NOT BEEN PROVIDED PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK NO EXCEPTION. 2. BASED UPON ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS ENCOUNTERED AT THE JOB SITE, ADDITIONAL NEW FRAMING OR MODIFICATIONS TO EITHER THE NEW OR EXISTING FRAMING SHOWN MAY BE REQUIRED AS DIRECTED BY THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL INFORMATION REQUIRED BY THE SUB CONTRACTORS AND MATERIAL SUPPLIERS BASED UPON FIELD MEASUREMENTS AND DETERMINATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS AT THE JOB SITE. THIS INFORMATION SHALL BE INDICATED ON THE SHOP DRAWINGS SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW TO THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER NO EXCEPTION. 3. REFER TO ARCH'L DWGS FOR ADDITONAL INFORMATION. 4. REFER TO PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS AND STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. REPAIR NOTES: 0 REMOVE RUST, CLEAN WITH RUST REMOVER, DRY, PREP METAL SURFACE FOR EXPDXY PAINT WITH UNIVERSAL METAL PRIMER AND PAINT ALL EXPOSED STEEL BULB TEES WITH EPDXY PAINT 0 REPLACE EXISTING TECTUM PANEL, LIGHT WEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE FILL AND PATCH ROOFING AS REQ'D. 0 REPLACE EXITING BULB TEES AS REQ'D MATCH. (i LOU\GE ROOF PLAN \36 49 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'—O" CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. SA1.6 o F rf+94, '7. • 'jrsle'•. *yj et GABRIEL GARZA SI tea :t 90960 �y /y ss aG\2e • d=.I9./C DATE: 02/12/2014 0 0 0 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY 0 N w 1 - CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com ti REVISION NO. DESCRIPTION 0 LU U 0 LU W zC J Q oesLU 0 FOUNDATTON PLAN TENNIS COURTS 1, 2, AND 3 SHEET 042 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 Garza + McLain 1 DESCRIPTION I CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. C VA 1. 7 STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS, INC. 615 N. Upper Broadway, Suite 638 Corpus Christi, Texas 78477-0050 (361) 652-7440 (voice) FIRM NO.: F-9331 EXPIRATION: 5-31-2015 JOB NO.: 130101 0 0 0 4 © 6 O 8 PLAN NOTES. MAMU4 d - C9 * -* \ ` - N GABRIEL GARZA r 04 O % ° 90960 �% N y�/<<"1 �' �:�_��`= ¢w III -Q. y7" r ~ RC\\ o 6i,/9./5 20F.VY2 20.V. 2 20'-0" 20'-0" 20'-0" 19'F93/a" / / F.V. / / / / V. ® / 1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY AND/OR DETERMINE ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND DETAILS PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION AND SUBMITTING SHOP DRAWINGS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL 0 X BRACE 0 A X -BRACE • w O VP 0 NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES OR SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR WHICH DETAILS 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com A y �I C/P C/P I C/P C/P C/P C/P C/P I I C/P I I 1 OR NEW CONSTRUCTION HAVE NOT BEEN PROVIDED PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK NO EXCEPTION. I > 2. BASED UPON ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS ENCOUNTERED AT o X -BRACE X -BRACE THE JOB SITE, ADDITIONAL NEW FRAMING OR MODIFICATIONS TO EITHER THE NEW OR EXISTING FRAMING SHOWN MAY BE REQUIRED AS DIRECTED BY THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL INFORMATION B C/P C/PC/P �C/PC/P C/P C/P C/P REQUIRED BY THE SUB CONTRACTORS AND MATERIAL ®EXISTING COLUMN, SUPPLIERS BASED UPON FIELD MEASUREMENTS AND PLAN NOTE 3 DETERMINATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS AT THE JOB SITE. THIS INFORMATION SHALL BE INDICATED ON THE SHOP A FOUNDATION N® PLAN SEE NOTE 3 SHEET 043 TYP. ALL COLUMNS. DRAWINGS SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW TO THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER NO EXCEPTION. 3. EXISTING COLUMN TO BE SAND BLASTED TO REMOVE ALL RUST, CLEANED WITH RUST REMOVER, AND PAINTED G.C. TO FIELD VERIFY THAT EXISTING COLUMN IS A HSS6x6xY4 SUBMIT VERIFICATION TO ENGINEER. ® 4. REFER TO ARCH'L DWGS FOR ADD'L INFORMATION. 36 43 SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" Z 4 0 0 0 6 0 8 NORTH NOTATIONS: 1. C/P: EXISTING COLUMN ABD DRILLED PIER TO BE REUSED IN CONSTRUCTION PROVIDED HSS COLUMN IS A HSS6x6xy4 G.C. TO FIELD VERIFY AND SUBMIT TO A/E TEAM. 2. F.V.: FIELD VERIFY DIMENSION. 3. T1: TRUSS T1, SEE DETAIL C SHEET 055. 4. C2: HSS6x6x/4 COLUMN. m CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs W 0 iA� " \� 20'-1Y2" 20'-0" 20' O" 20'-0" 20'-0" 43 52 20'-0" 19'-93/4" " F.V. ' / /F.V. / F.V. '� 'F/ `n F.V. F.V. F.V. F.V. I `lt 43 56 HSS 12X4XY4" HSS 12X4XY4" HSS 12X4XY4" HSS 12X4XY4" HSS 12X4XY4" HSS 12X4XY4" HSS 12X4XY4" 45.22' [REVISION NO. I A \ �\ RC2 W12x26 C2 W12x26 C2 W12x26 C2 W12x26 C2 W12x26 C2 W12x26 C2 W12x26 C2> FIN. SURFACE \ 1 rl I I I I I� i� � W12x16 W12x16 W12x16 W12x16 W12x16 W12x16 / I ��. W12x16 I I 1 i 1;�All , �� - d 517x707 1 O1 I -- W12x16 Nl W12x16 N j W12X16 N 1 W12x16 NJ W12x16 N W12x16 UIII N W12X16CO \ / `)W12x16N _,II o G I I I II1IIJP r OPEN N 1 DESCRIPTION '- 42 53 W12x26 W12x26 W12x26 W12x26 W12x26 W12x26 ® B C2 C2 C2� C24 C2� C2� C2E1 C2� A \ = las 45.34' HSS 12X4XY4" HSS 12X4XY4" HSS 12X4XY4" HSS 12X4XY4" HSS 12X4XY4" \\\ \ HSS 12X4XY4" \ W12 SS 12X4XY4" W12 �® W12 FIN. W12x26 TYP. C ® SURFACE LO 43 54 IOW HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE FOUNDATION, 2ND LEVEL AND ROOF FRAMING PLANS (B LEVEL 2 FRAMING P.AN NEW CONSISTING OVER REINFORCED WWF 3Y2" COMPOSITE SLAB OF 2X" OF CONCRETE 1" DEEP FORM DECK, WITH 6X6W2.9xW2.9 CHAIRED WITH 1Y2" CLR COVER. 3 6 43 SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" " 0 0 20'-1Y2" 0 20'-0" 4 20'-0" 0 20'-O" 6 20'-0" / 0 20'-O" 8 19'-93/4" /7 NORTH 8" F.V. F.V. F.V. F.V. F.V. F.V. '� F.V. HSS7x4x5/16 HSS7x4x5As HSS7x4x5/16 HSS7x4X 4R HSS7x4x9iF HSS7x4x5.4R HSS7x4x5AR HSS7x4x5/m HSS7x4x5/t6 HSS7x4x5/ HSS7x4x5/t6 HSS7x4x5/t6 HSS7x4x{ HSS7x4x5/� 1.5 F 22Go, GALV ROOF DECK A 1 O O O O O O O H H I I I I I I I 43 52 II > 42 53 HSS7x4x5/16 HSS7x4x5/6 HSS7x4x5/6 HSS7x4x5/ HSS7x4xN6 HSS7x4x5/6 HSS7x4x5/6 O '1110 es HSS7x4x5/ty HSS7x4xX6 HSS7x4x516 HSS7x4x5/6 I HSS7x4xN6 � HSS7x4x5/i6 01 - >- B �) HSS7x4x5/6 HSS7x4x5/6 HSS7x4x5/6 HSS7x4x5/6 HSS7x4x%6 o HSS7x4x5/6 HSS7x4x5/6 HSS7x4x5/6 o C o r -C- ROOF 4354 FRAMING PLAN SHEET 043 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 IREVISION NO. I \6 4,22 SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-o" NORTH CITY PROJECT# E12118 0 I N 0 0 0 0 NN 0 in T 30'-0" 18/42 PLAN NOTES: TYP. TOP OF FOOTING ELEV. 34.50' 18/42 EXISTING PAVING 18/42 18/42 18/42 r 18/42 1. REFERENCE FINISH FLOOR ELEVATION = 0'-0" UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE TOP OF CONCRETE BELOW REF FIN FLOOR DENOTES. 2. CENTERLINES OF FOOTINGS NOT SPECIFICALLY LOCATED ON PLAN BY NOTE OR DIMENSION SHALL BE LOCATED AS FOLLOWS: A. SUPPORTING FREESTANDING COLUMNS: CENTERLINES OF COLUMN. 3. REFER TO SA4.0 AND SA4.1 SHEETS FOR TYPICAL FOUNDATION DETAILS. 4. REFER TO PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS AND STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 5. BREAK OUT EXISTING PAVING AS REQUIRED TO INSTALL NEW FOUNDATIONS, REPLACE EXISTING PAVING AS REQUIRED AFTER FOOTING INSTALLATION. 6. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AS WELL AS STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1. FOUNDATION IS DESIGNED FOR ALL COLUMNS IN RIGID AND PORTAL FRAMES TO BE PINNED. ASHADE 3UILDING FOUNDATION PLAN [ALT. 4 36 44 1 SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" 4 NORTH a Mir PLAN NOTES A 44 a ® MVP HI. C'ACKED ASPALLING ONCRETE REPAIR,/SEE DETAIL SHEET 049 35.32' T.O. E TING FL HI. re HI. R RACKED ND SPACING CONCR E REPAID, SEE DETA A SHE 049 0 1 44 47 44 47 1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY AND/OR DETERMINE ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS ND CONDITIONS SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND DETAILS PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION AND SUBMITTING SHOP DRAWINGS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES OR SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR WHICH DETAILS FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION HAVE NOT BEEN PROVIDED PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK NO EXCEPTION. 2. BASED UPON ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS ENCOUNTERED AT THE JOB SITE, ADDITIONAL NEW FRAMING OR MODIFICATIONS TO EITHER THE NEW OR EXISTING FRAMING SHOWN MAY BE REQUIRED AS DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL INFORMATION REQUIRED BY THE SUB CONTRACTORS AND MATERIAL SUPPLIERS BASED UPON FIELD MEASUREMENTS AND DETERMINATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS AT THE JOB SITE. THIS INFORMATION SHALL BE INDICATED ON THE SHOP DRAWINGS SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW TO THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER NO EXCEPTION. 3. REFER TO ARCH'L DWGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 4. REFER TO PROJECTS SPECIFICATIONS AND STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. �g 44 PRO SHOP EXISTING PLAN SCALE: 3/4" = 1.-0" NORTH Garza + McLain STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS, INC. 615 N. Upper Broadway, Suite 638 Corpus Christi, Texas 78477-0050 (361) 652-7440 (voice) FIRM NO.: F-9331 EXPIRATION: 531-2015 JOB NO.: 130101 DESCRIPTION m Lu O REVISION NO. DESCRIPTION CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. SA1.8 ..":.......7„,.....7.„8 r 9y :77-,../rf+*4/ * GABRIEL GARZA 4a'• 90960 �ysehle +94.- N. d=.I9./S DATE: 02/12/2014 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY 0 L W H N CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com m Lu 0 CC I, CD U0 zo CO c`ziE_I-U Ca W I -U CCcNiQ ces O W m REVISION NO. SHEET 044 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 SHAFT Garza + McLain 1 DESCRIPTION I CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. S4/1 4 0 SEE PLAN FOR DETAILS /DIAMETER STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS. INC. REGARDING GRADE BEAMS 615 N. Upper Broadway, Suite 638 AND PIER CAPS CorpusTexas78477-00$O.: (361)652-7440 (voice)M NOF-9331 d- _�4.ss pF�TU 1+, o -62...' �� ''•9s�I� �' 'WITH * :::.. yABRIELGARZA i 90960 : �� % o h���11s�'S'... . \ Gl= J. a brit./S EARING GRADE. :PORT. 71 0 -o m A r = DOWELS, SEE DETAIL B 537-2075 SHEET 046 AT GRADE BEAMS, EXPIRPTION: JOB NO.. 130101 AT COLUMNS PROVIDE DOWELS THE SAME NUMBER AND SIZE AS THE PIER.. SHAFT REINFORCING STEEL A 90' STD HOOK. o I- o (f) o_ 0 \ N �araW N 0 � SCHEDULED 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com / !/ VERTICAL REINFORCING TO APPROVED SOIL 8 TIES AS SCHEDULED UNDERREAMED DRILLED PIER VERTICAL DIMENSION HOOK -J Z SHAFT REINFORCEMENT SCHEDULE a DIMENSIONDETAILING A OR G w SHAFT VERTICAL TIES 711 wo I- % W O DIAMETER BARS (USE #3©12" U.N.O.) \w °ce mL 12 3-#5 #3@12 0 1 w 14,164-#6#3©12 4db OR 2Y2" MIN. in d 18 5-#6 #3©12 N 90' HOOK 180' HOOK 20 6 #5 #3©120 SHAFT/ UNDERREAM DIAMETER 24 8-#6 #3© 12 12-#6 RECOMMENDED END 30 #3©12 36 10-#7 #3©12 S1 S2 S3 HOOKS, ALL GRADES AR OF =(I !— 1 ! III— S�MEBSIZ AND BAR FINISHED BEND DIAMETER 180° HOOK 90' HOOK Ink 1 —I I = -III—III—� SPACING AS SIZE A OR G,(IN.) J. (IN.) A OR G,(IN.) -I I—Iii— 1=u-11 �,� SCHEDULED D. (IN.) —� ! _ I I I-1 I I—I STIRRUPS _ 120° STD �,1 90° STD. G .� ,� �, #3 2 1 /2 5 3 6 CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs I _—I— —I —i l_ I III—III—III—III 1=111=111=111=1 HOOK y �� HOOKaz #4 3 6 4 8 w #5 3 3/4 7 5 10 w ~ O UNDERREAMDIAMETER z #6 4 1/2 8 6 12 o 3. C( S^4 CQ #7 5 1/2 10 7 14 0 #8 6 11 8 16 la_ #9 9 1/2 15 11 3/4 19 TES: #10 10 1/2 17 13 1/4 22 ELEVATION N 110 ALL HOOKS TO BE FABRICATED AS REQUIRED BY ACI -318. [REVISION NO. I 3 BARS 4 BARS 5 OR MORE BARS 2. TOP CAP OF STIRRUPS S2 AND S9 SHALL BE INSTALLED #11 12 19 14 3/4 24 NOTES: SUCH THAT 135' HOOK END IS NOT ON THE SIDE #14 18 1/2 27 21 3/4 31 1. SEE B SHEET 045 FOR SHAFT REINFORCING AND BAR PLACEMENT. CONFINED BY THE SLAB. #18 24 36 28 1/2 41 NOTES: A TYPICAL UNDERREAMED DRILLED SHAFT WITH FOOTING DETAIL 1. /B. 2. SEE TYPICAL DRILLED PIER WITH UNDERREAMED SHAFT DETAIL. EQUALLY SPACE ALL VERTICAL BARS. SHAFT BAR PLACEMENT PLANS c TYPICAL STIRRUP TYPES D= INSIDE DDIAMETER OF BEND D TYPICAL DETYAIL END HOOK TYPES 1 DESCRIPTION lir SCALE: NTS I\ 45 45 7 SCALE: NTS nip SCALE: NTS 45 45 SCALE: 3/4" = 1.-0" HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE FOUNDATION DETAILS LIGHT POLE AND ANCHOR BOLTS BY OTHERS, SEE - ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS MINIMUM LENGTH Ya X2"XD'-2" PLATE TOP OF COLUMN 3/4" CHAMFER AROUND AS REQUIRED TO = BASE PLATE 12db FOR BASE PERIMETER ACCOMODATE GROUT, SSI #6,#7,#8, A BASE PLATE, WASHER, gg 6 db FOR #3,#4,#5 24"b BASE ABOVE GRADE, NUT, PLUS 1)c 6db T.O. CONCRETE SEE ARCHIL tSEE DETAILS I 11 REFER TO ELECTRICAL DWGS. THREADS AS REQUIRED o J Z II FOR EMBEDDED CONDUIT 1- C J g z p 1 a / iI II FINISH GRADE OR PAVING,Ld SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS 0 I-1-1 O co m 1- 00 - — I �� -i'.'' A OR G wz w \ 90' HOOK -11I REINF: WITH 8—#7 VERT. 0 J #3 TIES ©12" _ db HEAVY HEX NUT o O FOR #8 BARS CORNER TIE HOOK cn o AND SMALLER (TOP & BOT) ¢ �6 ��� z zjO ��6 \ 90' o NOTES: SEE PLAN J cn Z 1 ( 135' 1. THE GENERAL BUILDING CODE USED AS THE - FULLY ENGAGE THREADS WITH FOR COLUMN w NUT AND DAMAGE THREADS, EC BASIS FOR THE STRUCTURAL DESIGN IS THE c� SEE NOTE 2�w Zo 0 0 O A 3'' 2006 IBC WITH TDI AMENDMENTS AND IBC Cr c(R WITH CITY OF CORPUS NUTS WITH WASHERS CROSS TIE 2009 AMENDMENTS A. BASIC WIND SPEED (3 SEC) 120 MPH -D ILI EXPOSURE C, 1=1.0 o J REFER TO SCHEDULE 2. COORDINATE LOCATION WITH ARCHT'L, CIVIL NOTES: w ¢ FOR BASE PLATE AND STIRRUP AND TIE AND MEP DRAWINGS. 1. SEE COLUMN SCHEDULE FOR ANCHOR BOLT SIZE. ANCHOR BOLTS 3. CONCRETE SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM 2. ROD THREADS AT THE EMBEDED END SHALL BE DAMAGED AT TWO ,. TOP OF BEAM, PIER, HOOK SCHEDULE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 3000 psi. WITH PLACES DIRECTLY BELOW THE HEAVY HEX NUT. n ®e PIER CAP, OR FOOTING AGGREGATE SIZE OF 1Y2 -INCHES. 3. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, ALL BOLTS SHALL BE TIGHTENED TO Si ��_ BAR SIZE D (IN.) 90' HOOK A OR G (IN.) 135' HOOK A OR G (IN.) I 24" DIA. 4. FOUNDATION DESIGN IS BASED ON FOLLOWING A "SNUG TIGHT" CONDITION AS DEFINED BY AISC AFTER THE cr I, CRITERIA, NOTIFY IF DIFFERENT: BASE SHEAR CONCRETE IS AT LEAST 14 DAYS OLD. wc >- in "ff "ff Z o LEVELING NUTS AT #3 1 1/2 4 4 OF 704 Abs AND A MAXIMUM BASE MOMENT 4. THE HOLE IN THE PLATE WASHER SHALL BE 1/16" LARGER THAN OF 7,540 ft -Abs FOR A 25'-0" POLE THE BOLT DIAMETER. 00w ELEVATION ,, aOPTION CONTRACTORS 5. SEE SPECIFICATION AND STRUCTURAL NOTES FOR GROUT I v #4 2 4 1/2 4 1/2 REQUREMENTS. up } .1 #5 2 1/2 6 5 1/2 Dw 2 N w cO /E D= INSIDE DIAMETER OF BEND TYPICAL DETAIL STIRRUP AND TIE HOOK TYPES F TYPICAL LIGHTPOLE FOUNDATION DETAIL /--- TYPICAL ANCHOR BOLT DETAIL o Ind NOTES: THE LETTER 'T" DENOTES BASE PLATE THICKNESS. TYPICAL COLUMN BASE PLATE DETAIL SHEET 045 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 IREVISION NO. I \ 1-5 ` 45 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" 45 45 SCALE: NTS 4� 5 45 �� SCALE: NTS \ 45 45 7 N._____., / SCALE: NTS CITY PROJECT# E12118 GRADE BM, 48 BAR DIAMETERS Garza + McLain 1 DESCRIPTION I SHEET N0. SA4.1 / EACH LEG TYPICAL SEE PLAN STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS. INC. N. Broadway, Suite 638 DIAMETERS Corpus Christi, Tex s78477-0050 j _ _ -, , � J Q 0 (361) 652-7440 (voice) FIRM NO.: F-9331 EXPIRATION: 5-31-2015 JOB NO.. 130101 ���P.46%.OF•, hilt.fr o =•....1„�� sic,/ ��, * : ? * c� GABRIEL GARZA c� ° 90960 13 % ,14,/,..; o o • : F IP- �� �fl S ' �c3� H �\ �� o bi.l9•lS 4-#6 DOWELS TO - CONSTRUCTION JOINT WITHIN GRADE BEAM OR o MIDDLE THIRD OF SPAN REINF.TOP OBAR LONGITUDINAL WALL f 48 BAR E.Q. E.Q. VAPOR RETARDER, •I�PI�IIK CORNER BARS EACH FACE = 4-#6 2 ADDITIONAL STIRRUPS SEE SHEET 035 TO MATCH INTERMEDIATE CORNER BARS EACH FACE TO ADDITIONAL x5'-0" AT JOINT 6" 6" 6" 6" EACH SIDE OF JOINT TOP OF PIER BARS IN DISCONTINUOUS MATCH SMALLER BAR AT EACH FACE / / / / / FINISH a INTERSECTION. PROVIDE CORNER (2) TOP OF \ FLOOR w o m MEMBER BARS SHOWN AT INTERMEDIATE �� "D" 1 "D" DEPTH OF BEAM GRADE BEAM i w `w' w w ° ° HORIZONTAL BARS �` w1- o�oww 1 o m a o DRILLED PIER OR / 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com p 2 Q. o= m d °' � r DRILLED AND UNDER REAMED FOOTING SHAFT, PLAN BEAM REINFORCING CONTINUOUS THROUGH CONSTRUCTION JOINT ° I gym` o SEE PLAN N o to NOTES: o .. 1 MATCH SIZE, LOCATION AND NUMBER OF HORIZONTAL ° . �. GRADE WIDTH BOTTOM LONIGITUDINAL a. REINF. BAR , . ° I BEAM AND WALL BARS, EXCEPT THAT WHERE THERE ARE MORE THAN 2 TOP OR BOTTOM BARS, ONLY THE INSIDE 1 1/2" DEEP SHEAR KEY \ /BEAM CORNER d AND OUTSIDE BARS MUST BE MATCHED. 2. STOP DETAILED REINF. 2" SHORT OF FORM. BAR INTERSECTING GRADE BEAM ELEVATION TYPICAL GRADE BEAM TYPICAL GRADE BEAM TYPICAL CORNER BARS AT WALL OR KEY WIDTH r-, DETAIL AT CORNER e OR WALL TO PIER DETAIL c GRADE BEAM INTERSECTION DETAIL NOTES: GRADEWIDTH B"TM W c4,..6 46 SCALE: NTS 46 46 SCALE: NTS 46 46 SCALE: NTS 1. CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT CONSTRUCTION JOINT LAYOUT AND COORDINATE WITH REINFORCING STEEL < 12" 3 1/2" J \ FABRICATOR. 12" TO 16" 5 1/2" 2. JOINT TO BE LOCATED AT MIDDLE THIRD OF SPAN. 16" TO 20" 7 1/4" O EII O 3. THIS DETAIL, APPLIES TO BEAMS < 4'-O" DEPTH. 20" TO 24" 9 1/4" 24" TO 30" 11 1/4" SEE PLAN SEE PLAN / CANTILEVER / / SPAN 4 TOP BARS SEE PROVIDE 90 DEG HOOKS FOR TOP, PROVIDE 90 DEG HOOKS FOR TOP, Lu LAYER - LONG WAY WHERE TOP TYPICAL BEAM BARS / CONSTRUCTION J 01 NT DETAILco CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs PLAN BOTTOM AND FACE BARS AT END DO NOT 54 BAR DIA. SPLICE FOR BARS INI SPLICE TOP CANTILEVER p BOTTOM AND INTERMEDIATE BARS AT 0 ARE SPECIFIED 1 / D SPAN OF DISCONTINUOUS ENDS TOP AND FACE BARS AT MIDSPAN U.N.O. END SPAN OF DISCONTINUOUS T.O. BEAM ENDS N LAYER 3 TOP BARS - SHORT WAY I \46146 SCALE: NTS \1 Lu ti o \ a 1 i ��zI GRADE BEAM 0 z- O - _ -, S TENSION LAP SPLICES — CLASS B FOR TOP & BOTTOM BARS EXTEND WITHIN EDGE BARS TO 2" OF` OF FTG I w o o� v F ' (GRADE 60 UNCOATED BARS -NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE) [REVISION NO. I • F'c=3000 F'c=4000 F'c=5000 BAR psi psi psi SIZE i _ Id TOP Id BOT Id TOP Id BOT Id TOP Id BOT 1 #3 2'-4" 1'-9" 2'-0" 1'-6" 1'-10" 1'-5" TOP, BOTTOM, & FACE BARS AS > o #4 3'-1" 2'-4" 2'-8" 2'-l" 2'-5" 1'-10" ----J L.---- DETAILED OR -J L ---- - - - - J L - - - - SEE PLAN 0 LAYER 1 BOTTOM LAYER 2 BOTTOM #5 3'-10" 3'-0" 3'-4" 2'-7" 3'-0" 2'-4" SCHEDULED 48 BAR DIA. SPLICE B.O. FIG. BARS - LONG WAY BARS - SHORT WAY #6 4'-8" 3'-7" 4' O" 3'-1" 3' 7" 2' 9" 1 DESCRIPTION STIRRUP SPA. FOR BOOM BARS #7 6'-9" 5'-2" 5'-10" 4'-6" 5'-3" 4'-O" WIDTH OF AS INDICATED AT SUPPORT U.N.O. WIDTH OF WIDTH OF #8 7'-9" 5'-11" 6'-8" 5'-2" 6'-0" 4'-7" FOOTING FOOTING FOOTING #9 8'-8" 6'-8" 7'-6" 5'-9" 6'-9" 5'-2" #10 9'-10" 7'-6" 8'-6" 6'-6" 7'-7" 5'-10" NOTE: BAR SPLICE LENGTHS SHALL BE #11 10'-11" 8'-4" 9'-5" 7'-3" 8'-5" 6'-6" HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE FOUNDATION DETAILS AS INDICATED UNLESS SCHEDULED OR TYPICAL DETAIL BAR LAYER DIAGRAM NOTED OTHERWISE. GRADE BEAM REINFORCING TYPICAL DETAIL RECTANGULAR SPREAD FOOTING E. (F\ - • 46 46 SCALE: NTS4� 6 46 SCALE: NTS NOTE: "A" FOOTING SCHEDULE FOR CLASS SPLICE (PERMITTED ONLY WHEN NOT MORE THAN HALF THE BARS SPLICED & SPICES STAGGERED BY THE DISTANCE OF SPLICE LENGTH), USE SAME AS "Id" = TENSION DIMENSIONS BOTTOM REINFORCING TOP REINFORCING DEVELOPMENT LENGTH TABLE. MARK L W DEPTH LONGITUDINAL TRANSVERSE LONGITUDINAL TRANSVERSE F1 4'-0" 4'-0" 1'-3" 5-#5 5-#5 TENSION LAP SPLICES — CLASS B %G FOR TOP AND BOTTOM BARS K-6 46 SCALE: NTS SEE PLAN FOR I I 1 SPECIFIC DETAILS 1 1 _ cLi- I ww ao ix 4-#6 DOWELS TO GRADE BEAM 1 1, 1 [FOOTINGSCHEDULEDcp 1 1 o 0 1 1 I 5Itz o Lu p U 1- • SEE PLAN w B.O. FTG >m 1' 6" SCHEDULED F{FG DIMENSION NOTES: / W o H 1. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ALL REINFORCING STEEL ARE BOTTOM BARS. 2. T=TOP BARS, B=BOTTOM BARS, T&B = TOP AND BOTTOM BARS. 3. SEE TYPICAL SPREAD FOOTING BAR DIAGRAM FOR LAYERED PLACEMENT OF BARS AS WELL AS DISTRIBUTION OF REINFORCING 4. REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH 3" SIDE COVER AND THE MAXIMUM SPACING NOTED IN THE SCHEDULE. 5. SPACING IS NOTED AS CENTER OF BAR TO CENTER OF BAR. SPREAD FOOTING SCHEDULE TYPICAL GRADE FOOTING DETAIL CL GRADE BEAM AND FOOTING BEAM TO SHEET 046 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 IREVISION NO. I CITY PROJECT# E12118 46 46 / SCALE: NTS 46 48 SCALE: NTS Garza + McLain 1 DESCRIPTION I CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. SS7 —Ii— MTL BLDG 615 N. Upper Broadway, Suitee 638 Suit6L ENGINEERS. INC.A4.5 —IT Corpus Christi, Texas 78477-0050 (361) 652-7440 (voice) FIRM NO. F-8331 r7 1 ' ''. i 4 2 j` *j N i*: .*� GABRI0EL GARZA Co. s':°:#' aNEW 6=.19./� 1 COLUMN. [FUTURE] NEW PT SLAB, EXPIRATION1-2015 ION B NO. 5-313301010101 SEE PLAN mN m PAVING, SEE 1 \ PAVING, SEE /*: PT TENDON gwwg SEE SLAB to Y cn SITE PLAN SITE \\ 1 NEW MTL STUD SITE PLAN c� < A 1 1 `/ w WALL, SEE SCHEDULEwEXISTVINIGG e ILEI / _ — ., �eIIIIIIIL ^ CONT. TRACK 1—#5 TOP & l I I I] BOTTOM ),48" \ \ EXISTING PAVING OR GRADE II pal l v 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com 111- �\ FIN FLOOR 11 11 N Co J l �6"0 CSN4111111 • ;TENDON EXISTING TENNIS COURT SURFACE \ \ -' - 1;- I L • ,• • 1' \ 1-#5 VERTICAL Atli •• _, DRILLED SHAFT TYPICAL PT CAP PERIMETER DETAIL I 2'-0" EXISTING FDN DWLS SAME SIZE VOID BOX, A 2-#5 MAX TYP. AND NUMBER AS SEE TYP. 47 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" (TOP & BOT) DRILLED SHAFT • DETAIL E/048 DRILLED SHAFT, SEE PLAN (j POST TENSION AT CORNER CONDITION _ c TYPICAL DETAIL AT PROSHOP FOUNDATION Co TYPICAL DETAIL AT COVERED AREA [ALT. 4] \ 1f.._.-7 47 1 / SCALE: N.T.S. 44 47 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" 44 47 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" 3.5"0 STD Y2" BELOW SLAB CHAIN LINK 1,_6., NET POST ADD'L SLAB BAR „L >- m CHAMFER EXISTING COLUMN, SEE PLANOPENING FENCE POST BY OTHERS SQUARE EACH FACE OF P605 SEALED JOINT 1Y4" DEEP WITH 1" CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs NOTES FOR REMEDIATION PRIOR TO ADDING NEW CAP CHAMFER / SEB PLAN BACKER ROD 1 GRADE, PROVIDED EXISTING COLUMN SEE ARCH'L jjj /// FIN FLOOR 3/4" TO 1" w I` O 1 MEETS DESIGN REQUIREMENTf_HIE m STRUCTURAL SLAB, FIELD VERIFY - • • ro / NEW CONCRETE CAP OVER 11==111= III � / SEE PLAN _ _ - - \ // EXISTING EXISTING BASE PLATE AND -ISI-III= ' PAVING ANCHOR BOLTS -Waft 1 T �� [REVISION NO. I I,' N 11 11 \cn VOID BOXES, °' S S V" IS w SEE TYP. I w 0 1-1 ' ��//e,,,/��i F/048 O> j 2-#5 CONT TOP AND BOTTOM WITH ' '� DETAIL 1111#3S2®12"O.C. 47 47 _ _ I \ VOID BOXES, COMPRESSIVE FILLER STRUCTURAL SLAB, SEE TYP. . . __- R o SEE PLAN DETAIL E/48 MATERIAL STOP 2Y2„ FROM TOP OF PAVING VAPOR RETARDER, EE ,` 1 DESCRIPTION 9 DRILLED SHAFT //"C-51---" 1'-2"411.0 STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES SHEET 035 0 •. ® FENCE POST f VOID BOXES, SEE 1 I y 1'-3" • (4) #6 VERTICAL �( 1'-6" COMPRESSIVE FILLER MATERIAL 1Y2" COMPRESSIVE FILLER MATERIAL TYP. DETAIL E/048 PLAN BARS WITH #3 TIES ® 8"O.C. HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE FOUNDATION DETAILS TYPICAL DETAIL AT EXISITNG VIEWING TENNIS COURT NET POST PLAN i-i- PLATFORM COLUMN F TYPICAL DETAIL G BLOCKOUT TYPICAL DETAIL \471477 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" 47 47 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" 47147 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" 1, 1-6 j, vi N H DIAMETER NET POST BLOCK OUT TYPICAL DETAIL AT STRUCTURAL SLAB STRUCTURAL SLAB, SEE PLAN \ \\ Yg 1-w m Lu g cn STRUCTURAL SEE PLAN SEE• SLAB, \ Y 1-w m g v1 g Lu EE LAN SP \ 47 47 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" T.O. SLABPLAN / T.O. SLAB • 1 • f Ai • • • .: pA t_. AI • • 1 -_I 1 ° I I_ N - =III-�-1 = LI - F fl N NEW PT SLAB, SEE PLAN ((ft)) °� m VOID BOXES, VOID BOXES, VOID BOXES, VOID BOXES, 16" THICK CONCRETE 3'-0"xl'-0"x0'-6" PT TENDON w w SEE TYP. DETAIL F/048 11 SEE TYP. DETAIL F/O48 SEE TYP. DETAIL F/048 1 SEE TYP. 1 DETAIL F/048 PAD REINF. WITH REINFORCED SEE CONCRETE STEP SLAB z 1'-0" Cy.)¢ Ln w 1 m •, 1 ,• ♦ y I #4©12"0.C. EA. WAY a~_ 2 l EXISTING TOP. & BOTTOM allalliMI / o 144 o PAVING EXISTING PAVING \ >- Op //. Z��� \m®ice VAPOR RETARDER, SEE STRUCTURAL ♦•-•' '� ', SEE STRUCTURAL VAPOR RETARDER, SEE STRUCTURAL I VAPOR HEIAKDER SEE STRUCTURAL 1• • • r %?/ //2 GENERAL NOTES GENERAL NOTES GENERAL NOTES GENERAL NOTES °' I 1 SEE SHEET 035 SEE SHEET 035 SEE SHEET 035 SEE SHEET 035 EXISTING _,,,_ =111' • 113" VOID BOX, SEE TYP. . - \ w I-- SEE DETAIL B VOID BOX, DRILLED SHAFT • PAVING 2-#3 / SHEET 048 FOR REINF STL t / SEE TYP. DWLS DETAIL E/048 I DETAIL E/048 DSHAFT RILLED SEE PLAN LONGITUDINAL (2) 3i"0x1'-4 EXISTING TENNIS BAR WITH #3 SMOOTH DOWEL ASPHALT COURT TRANSVERSE EQUALLY SPACED SURFACE SHEET 047 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP-204 DETAIL J DETAIL GRADE BEAM AND DRILLED SHAFT K DETAIL LTYPICAL PT CAP PERIMETER DETAIL IREVISION NO. I 47 47 SCALE: 3/4" = V-0" 47 47 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" 47 47 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" 47 47 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-O" CITY PROJECT# E12118 Garza + McLain 1 DESCRIPTION I CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. SA4.6 SPECIFIED STRUCTURALENGINEERS.!NC. COLJMN DIAM=TER 615 N. Upper Broadway, Suite 638 Corpus Christi, Texas 78477-0050 (361) 652-7440 (voice) FIRM NO F-9331 t1 ` ��P,..E OF Thr 9llll o ..-42,••• A 't lj N * GABRIEL GARZ:it:. %�'• 90960 0oI ill 3, As, .. ` r o 0/.04(4)-#6 SEE PLAN GRADE BEAM PAVING OR CONCRETE EXPIRATION: 5-31-2015 130101 FINISHED GRADE, STRUCTURAL COLUMN,JOB LONGITUDINAL STL, SEE DETAILS SEE ARCH'L f/ SLAB, SEE PLAN FIN. FLOOR I SEE PLAN GRADE II II COLUMN REINF, � liFIN. ----1 SEE PLAN 71 I— IIII��IIIIH r-- -- I_` -- -III- I T---1•/�s�}1G I.I II li » lk---i FLOOR $FIN. DWLS IN 12" N 1-' I VOID BOXES, SEE TYP. F/048 f I- 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com ' a ' I 1 SQUARE PATTERN I WITH (2)-#3 TIESL ' 3-#6 CONT TOP VAPOR RETARDER, SEE STRUCTURAL rn 1 I- I I— — '�' — — — — & BOTTOM WITH I GENERAL NOTES SEE SHEET 035 o I a S2012 O.C. COLUMN DWLS, I III#3 - CONT TOP I I L o w z 0 1 1 I I \ SAME NUMBER NO COL. I L_ _ J (4)-#7 AND BOTTOM WITH #352©12"O.C. a — o_ VOID BOXES SEE SCHEDULED , cn 1_1 � SPREAD FOOTING SCHEDULED SPREAD FOOTING \ DRILLED SHAFT DOWELS, SEE TYP. DETAIL DETAIL E SHEET 048 DRILLED SHAFT o \-- DIME SION / 1,-3" rDIMENSION / /VOID BOXES, SEE 21-0" DETAIL E SHEET 048 GRADE BEAM TO SPREAD FOOTING DETAIL B DETAIL c DETAIL / / 42 48 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" 48 48 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" 42148 / l� SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" 4'-0" m N X12°O.C. w » #5 1 -6 TYPICAL STRUCTURAL SLAB, U zg i w SEE PLAN FOR REINFORCING STRUCTURAL SEE PLAN FIN FLOOR CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs PAVING OR FINISHED GRADE, w mv7 STRUCTURALr SLAB .. —-, . . a o ti ck 'I_ SLAB, SEE PLAN / SEE ARCH v - - - `` � \ \ • , I FIN. FLOOR ' , - l tt14tZ 6VOB,EE [REVISION NO. I I-I I 1 I � 1- 't" —T — TL i 1 I —1 1-1 T— T— le 1 ,y VAPOR RETARDER, SEE � /' Intl iv I VOID BOXES, GRADE BEAM 2ND POUR \ VOID BOXES, �> SEE STRUCTURAL v GENERAL NOTESSEE PREPARED SUBGRADE, TECHNICAL STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES SEE SHEET 035 I "I- 1 '�' VAPOR RETARDER, SEE - STRUCTURAL GENERAL - NOTES SEE SHEET 035 �., * •' SEE TYP. F/48 " 12-#6AVERT I _ T _ Ya PLYWOOD REPORT PROTECTION BOARD BARS WITH T _ T 1 DESCRIPTION (4)-#4::: SEE DETAIL B VAPOR RETARDER, SEE 6" VOID BOXES, SEE SHEET 048 FOR REINF. „ o STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES SEE SHEET 0351 I TYP. DETAIL E/048 VAPOR RETARDER, SEE \- NOTES: SHAFT DOWELS, SEE TYP DETAIL 1. SLAB REINFORCING STEEL INDICATED ON PLAN SHALL BE CONTINUOUS. SPLICES ALL STRUCTURAL GENERAL/ NOTES SEE SHEET 035 1Y2"/41- VOID BOXES, \1Y2" REINFORCING STEEL WITH 50 BAR DIAMETER CONTACT LAP SPLICES. TOP 1 DRILLED SHAFT, BARS SHALL21T6„ SEE DETAIL HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE FOUNDATION DETAILS 1'-3" BE SPLICED AT MID SPAN (MIDPOINT BETWEEN SUPPORTS). BOTTOM BARS SEE TYP. E/048 SPLICED OVER SUPPORTS. SHALL BE 'i SQLARE / /D DETAIL E TRAPEZOIDAL VOID BOX TYPICAL VOID BOX DETAIL 2. REFER IFM TO THE PLAN, SECTIONS & DETAILS, FOR ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS. TYPICAL DETAIL STRUCTURAL SLAB ON VOID BOXES rcTh (t TYPICAL CAP PIER & PIER CAP AT DRILLED FOOTING DETAIL 48 48 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-O" PIER REINF/ DOWELS, SEE DETAIL `^ FLOOR 48 a w o 48 SCALE: N.T.S. PIER REINF/ DOWELS, SEE DETAIL ALFIN. \ 48 FLOOR 4, SCALE: N.T.S. to \,` PIER REINF/ DOWELS, SEE DETAIL Kt8 FIN. FLOOR 4)% SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" ALFIN. T.O. CONC. \ / T.O. CONC. T.O. CONC. CONCRETE w N 01 _ ¢ CONCRETE w 01 J_ ¢ CONCRETE REMOVE ALL CONCRETE w cn (n J a BEAM o BEAM BEAM DOWN TO BOTTOM OF o DO NOT PUT VOID BOX TOPPING COAT OF CONCRETE GRADE BEAM PIER ��� T.O. PIER T.O. PIER w" 'no FIFO 0 \ $T.O. r 1 • 0 0 ,k VOID BOXES, "1 alLOWER POUR PIER 1 SEE TYP. E/048 THAN BOTTOM OF 1 VOID BOXES, SEE TYP. E/048 VOID BOXES, SEE TYP. E/048 �S PLAN FOR GRADE BEAM , 4...._...->--__-----SEE PLAN FOR PLAN FOR SEE SEE IDEAL CONDITION PIER REFERENCE ACCEPTABLE CONDITION PIER REFERENCE PIER REFERENCE Q Q TOP OF PIER ALIGNS WITH TYPICAL TOP OF PIER BELOW TYPICAL TYPICAL B.O. GRADE BEAM. BOTTOM OF GRADE BEAM; NOT-ACCEPTABLE CONDITION SHEET 048 of 82 H-� POUR GRADE BEAM DOWN INTO PIER. TYPICAL TOP OF DRILLED SHAFT DETAIL (CONDITIONS) RECORD DRAWING NO. CP-204 IREVISION NO. I 48 48 / N.T.S. CITY PROJECT# E12118 1 DESCRIPTION I CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. SA4.7 REPAIR DEFECTIVE AREAS Garza + McLain WIIHCH IN DIMENSIONS7RUCT 1 -IN VOIDS ANY ING WITH A POLYMER REPAIR MORTAR WLENGINEERS.INC. Corpus Christi, Texas 78477-0050 INFILL WITH Co u UpperCrii Broadway,as 47Su-0te 50 APPROVED BOTTOM OR (361) 652-7440 (voice) EXFIRM NO F-9331 PIRATION: 5-31-2015 EXISTING BEAM JOB NO. 130101 �����maim tl d - =?PSrL OF pE '.,, o ; * .. �� •' •.9 %**��' N GARZA �o: 90960 �tu % Co SAW CUT w MATERIAL /ROOF SOFFIT SPALL a (NOTE 2) INFILL COLUMN WITH Mr INTO EXISTINZ GROUT.PDXY RECTANGLE CONCRETE \ (NOTE 3) 5 5GABRIEL -------- , t'dar41 Z w w w w w w E01.04 0 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com SECTION "A" (1) "' "' w E NOTES: Ir 01 1- 0 - - 1. REMOVE EXISTING CONCRETE A MINIMUM OF AN INCH OF PAST THE LIMITS 0 OF THE SPALLED CONCRETE AT EACH END, CUT THE SPALLED SURFACE p 0 HSS6x4xY4 LSH 1= v HSS6x4xY4 LSH R �2'-10" INTO A RECTANGULAR CONFIGURATION. TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE T.O. TUBE w EXISTING CONCRETE PAST THE DEFINED LIMITS. > 2. REMOVE EXISTING PAINT AND CLEAN EXISTING REINFORCING STEEL IN ACCORDANCE TO ICRI TECHNICAL GUIDELINE No. 03732. THEN MECHANICALLY ABRADE THE REINFORCING USING ONE OF THE INDUSTRY STANDARD METHODS. 3. REMOVE ANY PAINT AND ANY LOOSE CONCRETE, ROUGHEN THE CONCRETE SURFACE TO A 1/4" AMPLITUDE. w > w > o I co FORM AROUND COLUMN 4. MEASURE EXISTING DIAMETER OF CLEANED REBAR AND NOTIFY ENGINEER IF FINAL DIAMETER IS LESS THAN 90% OF THE ORIGINAL DIAMETER. IF FINAL DIAMETER IS LESS THAN 90% STRENGTHENING MAY BE REQUIRED. 5. BRUSH ON Sika Aromatic 110 Epocem PRIOR TO PLACING PATCH MATERIAL. 6. PATCH SPALLED AREA WITH Sika Repair 223. 7. FOLLOW ALL MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS WITH THE PATCHING MATERIALS. N NOTES: SUCH THAT GROUT DOES NOT POUR OUT AT BOTTOM, ONCE DRIED, SAND AND PAINT, SEE ARCH'L >- FULL CIRCUMFERENCE CONCRETE 1.L THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY AND/OR DETERMINE ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND DETAILS PRIOR TO % A SURFACE CORROSION REPAIR . BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION AND SUBMITTING SHOP DRAWINGS. THE CONTRACTOR Y4 I CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs 49 „ 49 SCALE: 3/4" = 1 -0 SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES OR SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR WHICH DETAILS FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION HAVE NOT BEEN PROVIDED PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK NO EXCEPTION. 2. BASED UPON ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS ENCOUNTERED AT THE JOB SITE, ADDITIONAL NEW FRAMING OR MODIFICATIONS TO EITHER THE NEW OR EXISTING(9 FRAMING SHOWN MAY BE REQUIRED AS DIRECTED BY THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL INFORMATION REQUIRED BY J Lu O THE SUB CONTRACTORS AND MATERIAL SUPPLIERS BASED UPON FIELD MEASUREMENTS AND DETERMINATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS AT THE JOB SITE. [REVISION NO. I 3.5"0 STD \\in__ PIPE P605 SEALED JOINT 1Y4" DEEP WITH 1" BACKER ROD NEW PT SLAB 1B� THIS INFORMATION SHALL BE INDICATED ON THE SHOP DRAWINGS SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW TO THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER NO EXCEPTION. LOUNGE ROLLING COUNTER SHUTTER DOOR ELEVATION EXISTING BASE PLATE REMOVE RUST, CLEAN WITH RUST REMOVER, PAINT. C COLUMN REPAIR DETAIL NEW PT%4" TO 1" 4� 9 49 / SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" \ 42 49 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 1 DESCRIPTION FIELD VERIFY L SLAB w > 9 w 1n = • F LI HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE FOUNDATION DETAILS w z L_ UI -N, • • Li 1-0 it . \ zo -11 I - EXISTING SLAB 1 \ EXISTING SLAB ww_ w `` =l _i COMPRESSIVE FILLER > a a I M • MATERIAL STOP 23 " FROM TOP OF PAVING iO • • 1'-6" (D \ / TENNIS NET POST DETAIL AT / OVERLAY SLAB 4 9 49 / SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" >- al o SHEET 049 of 82 RECORD DRA WING NO. CP -204 IREVISION NO. I CITY PROJECT# E12118 1 DESCRIPTION I CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. S144. 4 #10 TEK SCREW Garza + McLain METAL STUD, ' S7RUCTUWLENGINEERS.INQ8 SEE SCHEDULE P.A.F. EACH SIDE OF SPLICE TYP. 615 N. Upper Broadway, Suite 638 Corpus Christi, Texas 78477-0050 (361) 652-7440 (voice) FIRM NO. F-9331 EXPIRATION: 5-31-2015 JOB NO. : 130101 \+t1 ��'P�� �F • �� 9i11�I� t. cni s�r,_ ARZA •.• / .90960el �,_ �f'• Li o 2"x2"x16 GA. CLIP ANGLE WITH (4) #8-18 SCREWS11 11,1" POWER FASTENER, SCHEDULELEG � BOTTOM RUNNER TRACK, SEE SCHEDULE ACTUATED SEE BOTTOM STUD RUNNER ATTACHMENT TRACK (ANGE LENGTH SHA27�%' ®...................................................•.i'-t-4, LESS THAN STUD WIDTH)x. #12-TEK SCREWS AT EACH STUD WALL STUD, FLANGE INTO TRACK SEE PLAN TYPICALoOTE: TO NOTE: PROVIDE BRIDGING DETAIL B TYPICAL U—CHANNEL 04'-o"O.C. TRACK4001.00 I I .1.111111 SPLICE AT CENTER BETWEEN STUDS VERTICALY TYPICAL BOTTOM RUNNER BRIDGING %c TRACK AT SLPICE DETAIL (D- BOTTOM TRACK AT CORNER DETAIL iTYPICAL '--0 ETAL STUD, SEE SCHEDULE 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com \ 0 5 SCALE: NTS/ iiSCALE: NTS ` 50 50 SCALE: NTS \5 a / SCALE:C-SECT SPLICE USING SHORT #10 SCREWS AS STUD `� LOCATION STUDS (TYPICAL) SPACING TRACK BOTTOM CONNX. INT. CONNX. TOP CONNX. SECTION OF STUD (SAME 1 IN. O.C. (TYP.) SIZE AND GAUGE AS EXISTING VERTICALLY SLOTTED TRACK 14Ga MAXTRAK-SLT (BY DIETRICH) ATTACH ALL HEIGHTS 362S162-54 16"O.C, 362T125-43 0.157 X -U VERTICAL) STUD MEMBERS CONCRETE TO STRUCTURE WITH (1)-0.1570 X -U SLAB FASTENER EACH STUD TYPICAL SCHEDULE NOTES: 440 MTL STUD, SEE 1. WALL HEIGHT IS THE DISTANCE BETWEEN LEVELS. 2. REFER TO STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES FOR REQUIREMENTS OF P.A.F. SCHEDULE RUNNER 3. CONNECTION OF TOP TRACK IS BASED ON ATTACHING METAL STUD TO )6" TRACK THICK MATERIAL. 4. METAL STUD BOTTOM TRACK GAUGE SHALL BE 16 GA. U.N.O. ° / \ / H \ TYPICAL HOLE PATCH DETAIL �� TYPICAL STUD TO TOP TRACK 5. BOTTOM FASTENER AT EACH STUD UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 6. SPACE STUDS 012"o.C. 4'-0' FROM ALL CORNERS. Al STEEL ATTAC H M ETN DETAIL 7. REFER TO STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES FOR ATTACHMENT OF SHEATHING AT if50 50 SCALE: NTS MTL STUD JAMB, NUMBER AND SIZE PER SCHEDULE > m - - 50 / / SCALE: NTS F- FRONT SIDE OF STUD AS WELL AS BACK SIDE OF PARAPET. EXTERIOR NON—LOAD BEARING MTL STUD SCHEUDLE 2-#10TEK EACH SIDE/EACH FACE OF SPLICE SEETYPITRACK ICAL FACE, CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs cu Q 50 50 SCALE: NTS TYPICAL DETAIL RUNNER OPNG DETAIL �G TRACK SPLICE (TOP) SSCREW EE DTLLL, EACH S CRIPPLE WALL 174" 16"Ga FLAT STRAP 50 50 SCALE: NTS CRIPPLE STUD AT JAMBS SAME SIZE [REVISION NO. I ABOVE WINDOWS LARGER THAN 4'-0" EACH SIDE EXTERIOR OPENING NON—LOAD BEARING , SCHEDULED AND GAGE AS STUDS HEADER, SEE DETAILS OF WALL TYP. METAL STUD SCHEDULE H< \ JAMB STUDS \\i \\` VARIES SEE DTLS yr DETAILS No. OF No. OF HEAD SILL CONNX BOTTOM r �r--� r r OPENING SIZE JAMB STUDS JACK STUDS DETAIL DETAIL TO STRUC TRACK DETAIL 1 I 1 DESCRIPTION �' BRIDGING, SEE < 6'-0" 3 1 DETAIL C DETAIL B L/50 K/50 ° TYP. DETAIL o SCREW EACH FACE SEE ARCH'L COORDINATE \ 1 I `\ EXACT DIMENSIONS WITH __ L _1L___1roy BASE TRACK WINDOWS/DOOR w NOTES: H Et 1. ATTACH MULTIPLE STUDS WITH 2-#12 TEK 012"O.C. HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE TYPICAL METAL STUD DETAILS NOTE: z o o 0 o 0 w u7 p w o 2. REFER TO ARCH'L DRAWINGS FOR WINDOW DOOR OPENING SIZE. NOTE: JACK STUD NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY / WINDOW FRAME IS NOT 3. ATTACH DOORS AND WINDOWS PER MANUFACTURER'S GUIDELINES AND SHOWN FOR CLARITY RECOMENDATIONS. DETAIL A "S" / z 4. NOTATION THUS DENOTES WALL STUD SPACING REFER TO SCHEDULE. TYPICAL DETAIL WINDOW SILL PS t= _O 5. REFER TO SCHEDULE FOR TYPICAL STUD SIZES, PROVIDE SAME STUD AT j BUILT OPENING JAMB SCHEDULE ci 1 3 < x = Lull! L— DOORS AND WINDOWS AS SPECIFIED IN METAL STUD SCHEDULE. 6. REFER TO TYPICAL DETAILS FOR P.A.F. SIZE AND EMBEDMENT. L1Yz"x1Y2"x12Ga. CLIP WITH 50150 SCALE: NTS cn 4-#12 TEK SCREWS INTO JAMB STUD AND 4#12II WALL STUD TRACK SCREWS INTO HEADER. \ TRACK TYP. WALL STUDS \ S CRIPPLE STUD TYPICAL WALL SCHEDULED � SEE SCHED. \� ATTACH TO JAMB / JAMB STUDS ®® STUDS, SEE SCHED. WITH #12 TEK SCREWS 1 3625162-54 TRACK, JACK STUD / BOTTOM • 1 SEE DETAILS L__ J L1Y2x1Y2x12Ga o as a TOP TRACK, SAME CONCRETE -�--o GAUGE AS VERTICAL FOUNDATION, a a a o STUDS SEE PLAN a 4 ' 4-#12 TEK SCREWS 2 EACH FACE DETAIL C SCHEDULED JACK STUD (i\ TYPICAL WINDOW/DOOR JAMBSTUD SCHEDULE DETAIL DETAIL B \ 505 SCALE: NTS SEE PLAN a , — I u 354" MULTIPLE MTL ad STUD, SEE SCHEDULE \ >- ap CL362-68 [AS MANUFACTURED BY THE STEEL NEI WORK] 6 SCREWS PATTERN #3 INTO STUD; (1)Y2"0 ADHESIVE ANCHOR VERTI CLIP THE EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB w MINIMUM EMBEDMENT 6" INTO CONCRETE (2)-SL600 (BY SE Y2"95 A307 ROD WITH SIMPSON STEEL NETWORK) ATTACHED TO SLIP TRACK, SEE DETAILS U-1 o EPDXY-TIE ANCHORING ADHESIVE OR STL BM WITH (2)-0.157"95 P.A.F. AND (3)-#12 SCREWS INTO STUD 1-u Q O a a APPROVED EQUAL (ONE EACH SIDE) a 6" MTL STUD MULTIPLE STUDS, SHEET 050 of 82 a a TRACK 3 SEE SCHEDULE RECORD DRAWING NO. CP-204 �K CONNECTIONLTATLFOUNDATIONDDETAIL GRADE BEAM, SEE PLAN �� TOPTYPICAL TRACK ATTACHMEN STUD T DETAILO IREVISION NO. I I\ 50 50 SCALE: NTS \,5,(2 50 / SCALE: 3/4" = 1 '-O" CITY PROJECT# E12118 3" COMPOSITE SLAB Garza + McLain 1 DESCRIPTION I CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. S14 5. 0 SEE LENGTH OF WELD S-0" RETURN, 2x WELD SIZE CONSISTING OF 2 -INCHES OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS. INC. CONCRETE OVER 1.00 GALV 615 N. Upper Broadway, Suite 638 WELD TO BE SIZED FORM DECK REINFORCED Corpus Christi, Texas 78477-0050 `` t1' 62PA�•�F'••T �I/� o ? 62/ • �� ••'9�''l `�' * . / * N GAB 90960 RZA� oN o �� fr: �• .4. o Q=./9./5 /331 PLAN #3 DOWELS 4" (361)652-7440 (voice)FIRM NO WITH 6x6 W2.9xW2.9 WWF.EXPIRATION: 5-31-2015 BY CONTRACTOR INJOB ©18"0.C. WITH 1-#4 „ „ NO.: 130101 C 31 ACCORDANCE WITH CONT., PLACE ON TOP MAXIMUM SLAB OVERHANG — A �j DETAIL E SHEET 051 OF MESH FIN FLOOR 1/4111 8 SLAB THICKNESS EDGE FORM GAUGE 3" 5 1/2" 6 1/2" _ \ ANGLES BOLTEDW 16 GA. 4 1/2" / 3" 1 1/2" / w I• OR WELDED TO FORMETM, SEEL SCHEDULE - - - - w g \ 14 GA. 4 BEAM 12 GA. 9 1/2" 8"12 6"3" '�`� WELD TO BE SIZED1 • I■ CONTRACTOR IN 10 GA. 12" 11" 9 1/2" ACCORDANCE WITH FORM DECK 'A" DETAIL E SHEET 051 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com IF DIMENSION EXCEEDS TABLE MAXIMUMS, PROVIDE ANGLE SUPPORT, CONTINUOUS PER DETAIL SC -2A. PROVIDE 1/2" ANGLE TO BE SIZED 1 CHAIR BY CONTRACTOR IN STL BEAM SPACING, STL BEAM, MIN. RETURN LIP ON EDGE FORMS. VARIES, SEE PLAN r• ----,DETAIL ACCORDANCE WITH E SHEET 051 / SEE PLAN A TYPICAL EDGE CONDITION COMPOSIT SLAB DETAIL B. SUPPORTING BEAM OR EMBED TYP WELDED DOUBLE ANGLE CONNECTION DETAIL TYPICAL COMPOSITE SLAB c REINFORCEMENT DETAIL 5151 SCALE: NTS 51 51 SCALE: NTS 51 51 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" T, SEE STANDARD NOTE "D" ;VARIESjj,, BEAM ANGLE NO. OF ROWS MAX. BEAM 1 SIZE LENGTH (L) OF BOLTS (N) REACTION (KIPS) W8 5 1/2" 2 48 N BOLTS (43" 1 8 W10 5 1/2" 2 48 m I GAGE W12 8 1/2" 3 76 J IT 8 1/2" 3 76 T f CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs / DECK _\__ I W16 11 1/2" 4 101 JOIST I W18 14 1/2" 5 125 SPAN y SPACING J. ti O W21 17 1/2" 6 101 W24 17 1/2" 6 160 / 0 I 1Y" W27 20 1/2" 7 180 (1)-#4 EA. SIDE OF / N MIN. COPE AS REQUIRED AT BEAM W40 30 9 318 (1)-#4 IN CENTER OPENING. PLACE IN OF SLAB, EA SIDE CENTER OF SLAB [REVISION NO. I TO BEAM CONNECTION (6" 14" GA. SHEET if MAX.) (LENGTH="A"+4'-0") � METAL CLOSURE a I NOTES: M W2.9xW2.9@MID la A. NOTED REACTIONS ARE FOR FACTORED LOADS. B. REFER TO "STRUCTURAL STEEL CONNECTIONS" IN THE STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES. C. MINIMUM CONNECTION: ANGLE THICKNESS IS m m o 6x6 TYPICAL, ©W40 PROVIDE 5/s ANGLE 1/4"/il, 1 -0 J I- N 1 DESCRIPTION HEIGHT OF TC CHAIR 1- cn REINFORCING AS REQ'DTHICKNESS TYPICAL DOUBLE \,'II% D. BOLTS ARE 3% TYPICAL BOLTS ARE A325 -N. "STANDARD" - - 1 o N ANGLE CONNECTION E. BEAM CONNECTIONS ARE U.N.O. "A" ON PLAN. '� FLOOR r WELD STL BEAM 1 � $FIN F. CONTRACTOR SHALL CHECK DESIGN OF ALL SCHEMATIC SECTION - BEAM OR COLUMN WELD "A" BEAMS REQUIRING COPES GREATER THAN WEB, OR COLUMN STANDARD CONN. - 6" SHOWN IN DETAIL BASED ON REACTIONS SCHEMATIC PLAN HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE TYPICAL FLOOR DETAILS N FLANGE W40. -Y4" SHOWN IN TABLE. CONNECTION ANGLES, NOTES: BOLTS AND WELDS SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 1. SEE PLAN FOR SLAB REINFORCEMENT NOT SHOW CLARITY. 1 .00 FORMDECK BOLTED/BOLTED BOLTED/WELDED THAT SHOWN. 2. COORDINATE SIZE AND LOCATIONS OF OPENINGS ARCHITECTURAL & MECHANICAL DRAWINGS. NOTES: (GALV) CONNECTION CONNECTION 3. MAXIMUM DIMENSION "A" (PERPENDICULAR TO DECK SPAN) SHALL BE 2'-2". FOR "A" DIMENSION D 1. T=TOTAL 2. TC=CONCRETE TYPICAL PLACEMENT SLAB THICKNESS SLAB THICKNESS ABOVE METAL DECK DECK REINFORCEMENT DETAIL %E TYPICAL AISC TYPE 2 SIMPLE FRAMING CONNECTION DETAIL /F GREATER THAN 2'-2", OPENING SHALL BE REFERED TO ENGINEER FOR FRAMING. 4. FIELD CUT OPENING IN METAL DECK AFTER CONCRETE SLAB HAS ATTAINED A MINIMUM OF 75% OF ITS SPECIFIED 28 -DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH. 5. WWF SLAB REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE CUT AROUND OPENING, WWF SHALL EXTEND TO WITHING 2" OF OPENING ON ALL SIDES. 6. PROVIDE REINFORCEMENT AS SHOWN FOR SQUARE, RECTANGULAR AND ROUND OPENINGS. TYPICAL DETAIL FLOOR OPENING 51 51 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" CL OF COLUMN AND BM I\ 51 51 SCALE: NTS `\ 51 51 SCALE: NTS STEEL JOIST CL COLUMN - - _ - wr+l./AND BEAM II[ 1 CL L2x2Y2"xY4" (LLH) TO SUPPORT DECK LENGTH = COLUMN WIDTH + 2" m G. CL TYPICAL DETAIL DECK EDGE SUPPORT WITH BEAM CONSTRUCTION ick Q SHEET 051 of 82 ECORDDRAWINGNO. R CP -204 51 51 SCALE: NTS IREVISION NO. I CITY PROJECT# E12118 Garza + McLain 1 DESCRIPTION I CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. SA515615 STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS. INQ N. Upper Broadway, Suite 638 NEW COL, Corpus Christi, Texas 78477-0050 (361) 652-7440 (voice) FIRM NO. F-9331 �������p F �% �E...... rd., If ?—p •-.. -( f o F t ** ` N i GABRIEL GARZA $ :-----,. % ° ' 90960 1 i N • `'b'.... ..4v ffl s�.Q, �r a 0 oidt.IS EXPIRATION : 5-31-2015 SEE PLAN JOB NO.: 130101 CONCRETE SLAB, SEE PLAN a EXISTING 12" TUBEf��"s' II / HAND RAIL, I/ TYP DETAIL COMPOSITE SLAB, 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com STEEL BEAM, SEE PLAN STEEL 3 SEE / 'x4"x0'-3Y" Ra z BEAM, PLAN SEE PLAN I 1 — _ j `� PLAN \ FE'3/a"sx1'-2" WITH ISTU T.O. SLAB I J r�r`nrn. EXISTING (4)-3/4"0 A325 BOTTOM / I - 12" TUBE TOP AND BOTTOM STL 1 o NEW HSS 3x3, SEE EXISTING CONCRETE BM, SEE PLAN o PLAN. PAINTED, NEW EMBED Yz"x10"x10" I LIGHT GA SLAB POUR CLOSUE�� ARCH'L WSEE _g VENEER, SLIP TRACK, SEE STEEL BEAM, D.IBA.(7" GAGE SEE ARCH'L TYP DETAILS SEE PLAN STEEL BEAM, HSS BM, SEE PLAN WT MOMENT SEE PLAN — MTL STUD, CONNECTION NEW CONCRETE SEE SCHED /3"XSY2"XO'-332" WITH (2) 3%"0A325 BOLTS t COLUMN COLUMN, SEE PLAN TYPICAL DETAIL AT PRO SHOP ROOF ED CB DETAIL EXISTING COLUMN, SEE PLAN (c. DETAIL B DETAIL SCALE: NTS \ 52152 CLASS SCALE: NTS B LAP <-315..y / SCALE: NTS 52 52 SCALE: NTS 2'-6» 0 m WORK POINT. SEE SEE WOOD BLOCKING ATTACH HSS3x3 PLAN ®12"O.C. ,PLAN! WITH Ya" SCREW ©240.C. CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs aann-<:N ROOF PANEL, CONCRETE SLAB, ! y It a / SEE PLAN au PLAN SEE ARCH'L Lu ti cc O SSS+ auSEE a a� T.O. FLOOR �1 ���5+, x 0) L a Q Ya» BENT ROOF DECK, A _ ' PLATE Ya' BENT PLATE SEE PLAN Id [REVISION NO. I TRUSS TOP > STL BEAM CHORD 6 PAINTED #6 VERTICAL COLUMN BARS EQUALLY DETAIL (7 SPACED TYPICAL COLUMN PLACEMENT DETAILS S DETAIL H DETAIL 1 DESCRIPTION 52 /2 SCALE: NTS 4� 2 52 SCALE: NTS EG 52 / SCALE: NTS 4352 SCALE: NTS HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE TYPICAL FLOOR DETAILS >m o SHEET 052 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP-204 IREVISION NO. I CITY PROJECT# E12118 Garza + McLain 1 DESCRIPTION I CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. SA516 SEE PLAN STRUCTURALSuiENGINEERS. INQ 615 N. Upper Broadway, Suitee638 O Corpus Christi, Texas 78477-0050 (361) 652-7440 (voice) FIRM F-933121 EXPIRATION TIOO N: 5330101 JOB NO.: 130101 ���4, 4 c p F `TF p o i GABRIELGARZA Ret: ••, 90960 o 33 9 ' `b'.... `��= f ��li J. 4G"- a 0 0/.04 / STL BM, SEE PLAN DSA5.6 Z } z CSA5.6 COLUMN, SEE PLAN z/—TOPOFRAMP HANDRAIL, SEE TYP DETAIL 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com z D g z D g J O W illve J OVN W / LH 1 u) N' IP o BRACE, SEE CSF ELEVATION "GUSSET b PLATE STL BM, SEE PLAN -i--I�% 3/4"0 � BSA5.6 (1) �� A325 BOLT �,�Nit BRACE, SEE ELEVATION STL BM, T.O. SLAB COAT EACH SIDE OF AT CROSSING COLUMN,EP�N SEE PLAN WITHANGE TEFLON CONCRETE %e" GUSSET FOUNDATION A TYPICAL COLUMN TO BRACE CONNECTION DETAIL B TYPICAL COLUMN TO BRACE CONNECTION DETAIL (cam TYPICAL DETAIL X BRACE D TYPICAL BRACE TO COLUMN CONNECTION DETAIL AT RAMP m 53 53 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" 53 53 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"5� 3 53 i SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" 5353 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs Luti Q 0 [REVISION NO. I 1 DESCRIPTION HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE TYPICAL BRACE DETAILS >m Lu o SHEET 053 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 IREVISION NO. I CITY PROJECT# E12118 Garza + McLain 1 DESCRIPTION I CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. /_`. O �V\ S,A/�S7Suit 0 SEE PLAN 0 SEE PLAN 4 0 SEE PLAN W SEE PLAN1(21 z 6 ENGINEERS. INC. 615 N. Upper Broadway, Suite 638 Corpus Christi, Texas 78477-0050 (361) 652-7440 (voice) FIRM NO.: F-9331 EXPIRATION: 5-31-2015 JOB ION 130101 `��\���11t1 =�?�� �F`T�( �l�l * . : * N j GARRIEL GARZA .°.. 90960 N L• •• y/�ii� ,5, ii Al.. `,.r ~ •H bi•/9./S / / C MI �S PLAN SEE PLAN z z J J og ozg 0 a 0 W W J W J 0 W 0 ON 00) W W _ _ U) U) SEE PLAN SEE PLAN z z m co `s -i'6 J J �6+ +l 0 ozg s 2 0 a 0 W W W J W J W 0 W 0 ON 0V) W W _ _ (i) V) SEE PLAN W W W1 W ZI _ I 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com U S0'-4" Q tl M T.O. EXISTING PIER AKNEE BRACE FRAM ELEVATION ALONG GRID CA/ & B CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs 54 5_4" SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" SEE PLAN B (57,/ SEE PLAN SEE PLAN Lu O [REVISION NO. I 0 6 0 8 / / 2'-6" 2'-6" / / W z SEE PLAN —I SEE PLAN SEE PLAN SEE PLAN / / / / F21 NEW_ 1 DESCRIPTION TLN mi STL BM, STL BM STL BM, STL BM, HSS4x4xy4" T.O. SRSEE SEE PLAN SEE PLAN SEE PLAN SEE PLAN 1 New PLAN NSS�xAxS/16 NSW NSS,k4/ TSEE T.O. STL HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE BRACE ELEVATIONS I NEW HSS7x4x546 igick SEE PLAN I tc tis 5 T.O. STL Z JI Z Z Z Z 16 <6 0 I 0z +�+1 +6+� Uz 0 0 U c5 .,/6. . g .5 .5 .0_ W W D a O W JW LLI JW LLI J W LA JW W W W 0 W O N O N O N O N W W W W 2 2 2 2 u) Nu) u) Z 2 0 0 U oz 0 0 Ja _lc- O W O W W W = = 0 0W N 0) W W z SEE PLAN z Q W W N s J SEE PLAN ¢ / 1NEW STEEL BEAM, SEE PLAN PLAN NEW W12x26SEE SSEE T.O. STL PLAN (i B- KNEE BRACE FRAME ALONG GRIDS A 8c B 1T.O. STL 4154 / \/ SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-O" z MOMENT MOMENT Z 0I CONNX. CONNX. m 0 0 0 U Id a W'a W' W ~'W ~ N'W NW 0 IN U ZZ E H N N X W W GRADE OR Z W N >-- M PAVING, SEE CIVIL o -o" Lu o SHEET 054 of 82 /cam VIEWING PLATFORM FRAME ELEVATION DETAIL FIN. FLOOR RECORD DRA WING NO. CP -204 IREVISION NO. I c:13 5_42 SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-O" CITY PROJECT# E12118 Garza + McLain 1 DESCRIPTION I CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. SA611 3'-6" 3'-6" 3'-5y2" S7 Suit6L ENGINEERS. INC.615 N. Upper Broadway, Suitee 638 Corpus Christi, Texas 78477-0050 (361) 652-7440 (voice) FIRM NO. F-9331 EXPIRATION : 5-31-2015 JOB NO.: 130101 �%%\%\qtl P•,�E•OF 7 lb ` GAB 90960RZA :0:4.o . Q'•.•;:jam 7 •A ;-' 0 0/.04\ 0 =io ._}o < Q STL BEAM = �� yo ot. STL BEAM \ -i NEW STL ,N \V NEW STL z,V BEAM \N. \ NEW STL / CO // BEAM I ///"� / / // / / / , //// /�-/ 7 / / //BEAM `° I I1 ``' 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com N\ KNEE MOMENT FRAME BRACE, SEE ELEVATIONSj/ 7 KNEE MOMENT FRAME BRACE I WORK POINT WORK I POINT � �� v1 A DETAIL 6" EXISTING COL COL B DETAIL 6" EXISTING COL COL 55 55 SCALE: NTS 2' 8" 0 5' 2" 5'-2" 55 0 55 SCALE: NTS 2' 8" m CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs Lu O f / N55�1 X4X5A 6 c N 2 HSSzkk 6 a to I [REVISION NO. I c TRUSS T1 HSS7x4x5/16 PROFILE 1 DESCRIPTION 55 55 SCALE: NTS HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE BRACE DETAILS >m Lu ¢ 0 SHEET 055 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 IREVISION NO. I CITY PROJECT# E12118 CONT. 1Ya"� Garza + McLain 1 DESCRIPTION I CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. S,A 1. 0 STDSTRUCTURAL ENGINEERS. INQ 615 N. Upper Broadway, Suite 638 8 1'-7" CONT. Corpus Christi, Texas 78477-0050 (361) 652-7440 (voice) FIRM NO. F-9331 EXPIRATION : 5-31-2015 F Tlrl��l ����E ......................... ````\\\..\...+t1 � N GABRIEL GARZA 0, � •, 90960 :'� % o "At.' -� \ Ger a 10 b=./9.15 JOB NO.: 130101 I, 1 2'-1 0" 1Ya"0 STD T 56 56 Ci 7X2D 7 STAIR STRINGER, A SEE PLAN E No 3 16 U a 1- 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com 56 56 N x ' ' B CLIP L4x4x3/a"x0' 4" ~ N cJ 56 56 LONG WITH 3/41'0 LONG EXP. BOLT " M w 1" NOSING x5Y4" i) O STD = a \ 3" PRECAST z 11 VERTICAL RAIL c TREAD 012X20.7 (1.66 O.D.) \ a w 0 0 11" � vl U C EXISTING SLAB, w z 1Y4"0 STD STAIR STRINGER, a 56 56 SEE PLAN a•, v`'i SEE PLAN •: t �. PLAN NOTES: .7 / 1. REFER TO ARCH'L DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 2. STAIR PARTIAL PLANS SHOW MEMBER SIZES AND TYPICAL DETAILS THAT MEET THE CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI BUILDING 1/41/ I I I DIMENSION LINE OF STAIRS CODE REQUIREMENTS. EXACT LAYOUT OF THE STAIR AND NOTES: ADDITIONAL MISC. STEEL MEMBERS REQUIRED IS THE 1. GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE COORDINATION OF NOSING RESPONSIBILITY OF THE STAIR FABRICATOR AND MUST BE STAIR STRINGER LOCATIONS WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND SHOWN ON THE STAIR SHOP DRAWINGS FOR REVIEW BY THE PROVIDE TURNDOWNS WHERE REQUIRED. NOT SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. A ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER. DETAIL B TYPICAL DETAIL SLAB—ON—GRADE CONNECTION TO NEW STEEL STAIR R 3' PRECAST TREAD D TYPICAL SECTION AT STAIRWAY co L2"x2"x446"x0'-8" WITH (2) 56 56 SCALE: 1 /4' = c-0"\ 56 56 SCALE: NTS Ya" STIFFENER SHORT SLOTTED HOLES 56156 SCALE = 3/4" = 1'-0" AT EA. GUARD VERTICAL STRINGER, 1 SEE PLAN NOTES: CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs 1. REFER TO ARCH'L DWGS FOR EXACT SEE PLAN O HANDRAIL AND GUARDRAIL LAYOUT. 2. VERTICAL GUARD SIZE AND MEETS THE IBC ti O SEE PLAN), 2006 BUILDING CODE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. J � � a 0 I= / CONCRETE SLAB, SEE PLAN rC-- TYPICAL VERTICAL GUARDRAIL CONNECTION DETAIL SCHEMATIC LAYOUT [REVISION NO. I LuN Lu vv) ;� �� SEE PLAN,5 6 56 / SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" w` T.O. LVL 2 a />.., n n %1 i 7 7 'W YY 7 1 DESCRIPTION 11 z7 / 7 i STL BEAM, STAIR SEE PLAN STL BEAM, SEE PLAN STRINGER TYPICAL SECTION AT STAIRWAY HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE STAIR PLAN AND DETAILS (E 56 56 SCALE = 3/4" = 1'-0" >m o SHEET 056 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 IREVISION NO. I CITY PROJECT# E12118 I. CODES A. The General Building Code used as the basis for the structural design is as follows: 1. International Building Code IBC 2009 with the city of Corpus Christi Amendments. 2. International Building Code, 2006 Edition with the Texas Windstorm Adopted Amendments. B. Structural Concrete: Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete, American Concrete Institute, ACI 318. C. Structural Steel: Steel Construction Manual, American Institute of Steel 13th Edition. II. DESIGN LOADS Construction, A. Wind loads Wind lateral load on structural frame is based on ASCE7-05 and the IBC2006 Texas Wind Storm amendments using the following: Basic Wind Speed (3 sec) 120 mph Exposure B Importance Factor 1.0 a. Gross Wind Uplift Pressures on Roof Components and Cladding with a Kd factor equal to 0.85 are as follows: Roof Area i. Typical Building ("a"= 3'-0" ft) Interior (Field) Perimeter Band ("a" region) Corners ("a"x"a" region) b. Gross Wind Pressures on Wall Wall Area ii. Typical Building ("a"= 3'-0" ft) Interior (Field) Corners ("a" region) III. SUBMITTALS 10 Sqft Trib Area 29 48.2 72.6 psf psf psf Components and Cladding c. Refer to ASCE 7 for the definition of 10 Sqft Trib Area 31.2 psf 35.4 psf 100 Sqft Trib Area 26.3 31.2 31.2 psf psf psf are as follows: 100 Sqft Trib Area 27 psf 30 psf A. Shop drawings shall be prepared for all structural items and submitted for review by the Engineer. Contract Drawings shall not be reproduced and used as shop drawings. All items deviating from the Contract Drawings or from previously submitted shop drawings shall be clouded. B. The contractor shall review shop drawings for compliance with the contract documents and shall certify that he has done so by a stamp noting that the drawings have been "Approved" and which bears the signature (or initials) of an authorized representative of the contractor and the date. Submittals which do not reflect the contractor's approval, signature and date will be returned without review. C. The contractor shall be responsible for delays caused by rejection of inadequate shop drawings. D. Where review and return of shop drawings is required or requested, the engineer will review each submittal and, where possible, return within two weeks of receipt. E. Corrections or comments on shop drawings or manufacturer's data sheets do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the plans and specifications. The engineer's review is for general conformance with the requirements of the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correcting all quantities and dimensions, selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction, and coordinating his work with that of all other contractors. F. General Contractor shall submit four maximum bond copies. Engineer will review, comment and retain one copy of each submittal and transfer comments onto the remaining bond copies for distribution to architect, owner, and contractor. Additional copies submitted will not have comments transferred to them. General Contractor will be responsible for providing and distributing Engineers comments to their subcontractors. G. Submittal List and Schedule - The General Contractor shall prepare a detailed list and schedule of al submittal items to be sent to the Structural Engineer prior to the start of construction. This list shall be updated and revised and kept current as the job progresses. The submittal list shall be organized as shown below: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Manufacturers literature for products, assemblies and hardware 3. Products, assemblies and hardware 4. Product certifications, mill certificates and affidavits 5. Texas Windstorm Certification of all component and cladding items. H. Shop Drawings 3. The General Contractor shall submit for Engineer review shop drawings for the following items: a. Reinforcing Steel b. Embedded Items (Plates, Angles, Bolts, etc) or Items attached to the structural frame for building cladding attachment or for attachment of items. (#) c. Concrete Mix Designs (30 Tests) d. Post -Tension reinforcing e. Structural Steel f. Miscellaneous steel g. Cold formed metal framing h. Pre-engineered metal building drawings (*,#) i. Pre-engineered metal building reactions are calculations j. Pre -Engineered Ramp (*,#) Items marked (*) shall be designed by an engineer and drawings shall be sealed by a registered engineer in the state where the project is located. Items marked (#) shall be submitted to Engineer for Owner's record only and will not have the Engineer's shop drawing stamp affixed. 2. The omission from the shop drawings of any material required by the Contract Documents to be furnished shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of furnishing and installing such materials, regardless of whether the shop drawings have been reviewed and approved. 1. Manufacturers Literature - Submit two copies of manufacturer's literature for all materials and products used in the construction of the project. J. Reproduction - The use of reproductions of these contract documents by an contractor, subcontractor, erector, fabricator, or material supplier in lieu of preparation of shop drawings signifies his acceptance of all information shown hereon as correct, and obligates himself to any job expense, real or implied, arising due to any errors that may occur hereon. other SSCCCOTUflL GECCECClLl CC()TES K. Refer to Texas Department of Windstorm section of these notes for additional information. IV. CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE A. CLASSES OF CONCRETE All concrete shall conform to the requirements as specified in the table noted otherwise on the drawings: Concrete Mix Schedule: below unless Conc. Strength Agg. Agg. Class psi Type Size Slump Inches Max w/c Notes A B a) b) c) d) 3000 NWT 1 1/2" 4 5000 NWT 1 1/2" 4 "NWT" refers to normal concrete having air dry unit weight of approximately 145 PCF (ASTM 33 aggregate). Where w/c ratio is not indicated in the Concrete Mix Schedule, it shall be as necessary to meet strength requirements. Where the w/c ratio is shown, it shall be adhered to regardless of strength requirements. "Strength" is required compressive cylinder strength at an age of 28 days Mix Usage Schedule: Description of Use Concrete Class Air Content All U.N.O. POST -Tension Caps A B B. Maximum shrinkage of the concrete shall be 0.03% at 28 days as determined by ASTM C157. C. Horizontal construction joints in concrete pours shall be permitted only where indicated on the drawings. All vertical construction joints shall be made in the center of spans in accordance with the typical details. Contractor shall submit proposed locations for construction joints not shown on drawings for review by the Architect and Structural Engineer. Additional construction joints may require additional reinforcing as specified by the Engineer which shall be provided by the contractor at no additional cost to the owner. D. Embedded conduits, pipes, and sleeves shall meet the requirements of ACI 318-95, Section 6.3, including the following: 1. Conduits and pipes embedded within a wall, or beam (other than those passing through) shall not be larger in outside dimension than 1/3 the overall thickness of the slab, wall or beam in which they are embedded. 2. Conduits, pipes and sleeves shall not be spaced closer than three diameters or widths on center. 3. There shall be no conduits or pipes running within the slab thickness or beam. V. CONCRETE REINFORCING A. Concrete reinforcement for the project shall conform to the following: 1. All Reinforcing Steel shall be ASTM A615, Grade 60 unless noted otherwise in the drawings or these notes. B. Detailing of reinforcing steel shall conform to the American Concrete Institute 315 Detailing Manual and all hooks and bends in reinforcing bars shall conform to ACI detailing standards unless shown otherwise. C. In unscheduled Slabs and Beams detail reinforcing as follows: 1. Class B Lap beam top reinforcing bars at mid span. 2. Provide Class B lap at other location pending Engineer's approval. 3. Provide standard hooks in top bars and bottom bars at discontinuous ends. 4. Provide 2-#4 diagonal bars at all slab re-entrant corners placed under the top mat of steel. D. Welding of reinforcing steel will not be permitted unless specifically shown on drawings. E. Heat shall not be used in the fabrication or installation of reinforcement. F. Reinforcing steel clear cover shall be as follows: 1. Slab -On -Fill 2. Grade Beams 3. Structural Slab 4. Footing Shafts 5. Caps XII. TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF WINDSTORM CERTIFICATION Centered 3" Bottom, 3" Sides, 1h" Top Centered 3" Sides and Bottom 3" Sides, 3" Bottom, 2" Top A. Texas Department of Windstorm Certification: The project is located in NUECES County an Inland 1 wind zone designated catastrophe area. All exterior windows, doors, wall coverings, roof coverings, canopies and mechanical equipment and their attachment to the main structure must be designed for a component and cladding wind pressure corresponding to a 3 -sec gust of 120 mph wind speed Exposure B 1=1.0 according to the International Building Code 2006 with the Texas Windstorm Requirements. All products will require certification stating that the products have been designed and installed for the components and cladding uniform static wind pressure of the aforementioned codes. The sub -contractor shall submit the wind storm product certification, the component and cladding wind pressure the product was designed for, any manufacture certification in regards to Texas Windstorm, and the connection requirements for the product to the Engineer of Record. In addition, all exterior openings i.e. windows and doors shall be resistant to wind debris and contain impact resistant products or shutters. Products certified by the Florida Building Code meeting the project design criteria, may also be submitted as an as equal. All other items submitted shall be rejected with a revise and resubmit if the submittal does not contain the information requested and is not signed and sealed by a Texas PE. The submitted must meet all air infiltration requirements of TDI. B. Glazed Exterior openings and doors shall be Impact resistant from windstorm debris and be designed and attached to meet the Impact Resistance and 45 psf windpressure. C. Texas Windstorm Component and Cladding Submittals The Contractor and Subcontractors must submit products approved by the Texas Department of Insurance or Equal. When submitting an equal Test Reports, Engineered Calculations and Elevations with Attachment Anchorage must be submitted. Any submittal without proper certifications and data proving that the product meets TDI will be rejected. All submitted products to have ICCESR reports. All exterior cladding submittals shall be submitted for review whether listed below or not. a. Exterior Glazing D. Texas Windstorm Inspections 1. Exterior Cladding Garza + McLain STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS, INC. 615 N. Upper Broadway, Suite 638 Corpus Christi, Texas 78477-0050 (361) 652-7440 (voice) FIRM NO.: F-9331 EXPIRATION: 531-2015 JOB NO.: 130101 DESCRIPTION m Lu O REVISION NO. DESCRIPTION CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. S80.1 _`��t of rf+94i *47.7 d\ *�/ P GABRIEL GARZA a 90960 AV 44415,1s% +9 as dj.I9./5' DATE: 02/12/2014 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY 0 L w 1- 5 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com Lu 0 LIJ LU CD U 0 Co CC) W W CC N zC O Q oes 0 ca W m REVISION NO. STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES SHEET 057 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 Garza + McLain 1 DESCRIPTION I CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. S81 ■0 STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS. INC. 615 N. Upper Broadway, Suite 638 Corpus Christi, Texas 78477-0050 (361) 652-7440 (voice) FIRM NO.: F-9331 EXPIRATION: 5-31-2015 JOB NO.: 130101 4.St.OF re 0 2,1.70:.,.. . .-, :4- 4 o 0 * ` A *�j N i * ` * i GABRIEL GARZA i C 90960 :'� % N 0 '11.4.5, � tG_r� tzE 11 `\ `` ci ot.19'15 L F\ ____ AS REQUIRED TO I INSTALL NEW MEP UTILITY j /// / ,n \\A /\ . 1�'•, _ IL }1r\\ �' MIN. MEP MIN. CUT TRENCHISCING ENT CENNF. ATTERLINE AND UP TO INSTALL NEWR °n 1 "� i 0 SEE NOTE 4 BEND AND aa'J— 0 z/ .J #3®12"O.C. LAP WITH NEW STEEL REINF. 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 architects & associates F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com A ' a , , EN -M - L_ - * F\ 1 EXISTING SLAB -ON -FILL EACH WAY AFTER PIPE IS INSTALLED, SEE NOTE 4. ER •\ j, ; N./ FLOOR „A kFIN =109 i \ C \ \ 1 1— ` gc� of 1- III 1 Vii, �j7//'w7/,.", f I I— �, w ' _ �;�'V/�� �; A\/ <* EXISTING —� y'. V�; II z 1- I I1 I / � w % - REMOISTURETARDER ��//\�//� \/\�// i vi w ° ( L� /\\\ .\�\ / / / SEE w �n NEW MOISTURE / -_MEP O IF- /� �� o RETARDER 15 MIL LAP 6" ,N \/i �`/� /V/\ / r' �`� �° WITH EXISTING TYPICAL, PROVIDE 6" 6" 1 \ I \ �`� �� FULL PATCH NEW �v 1 �► - _ 1 I I y II NEW UTILITY COMPACTED LINE, SEE MEP SELECT 1-f 1--9Y9-J FILL ■' / u NOTE 3 1 — $ ' &.= y NOTES: 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AN ALLOWANCE 5. CONCRETE TO BE FLUSH AND TO SEAL ALL NEW CONCRETE WITH A SEALING SMOOTH WITH EXISTING. COMPOUND THAT WILL ALLOW THE FLOORING 6. CLEAN AND PREPARE CONCRETE a m 0 TO BOND WITH THE CONCRETE SURFACE, SEE SURFACE AND APPLY EPDXY STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES. BONDING AGENT PRIOR TO 2. REFER TO ARCH'L AND MEP DRAWINGS FOR PLACEMENT OF NEW CONCRETE. EXACT LOCATION OF NEW UTILITY LINES. 7. MINIMIZE DISTURBANCE OF CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs SEE DETAIL 3. FOR BIDDING PURPOSES ASSUME A 5" EXISTING SUBGRADE AS MUCH W ti ¢O NOTE 3 BSB -4.0 THICK SLAB. AS POSSIBLE. 4. IF REINFORCING IS CUT PROVIDE #4x2'-0" DWLS ®24"O.C. STAGGERED EACH SIDE DRILL AND EPDXY DWLS A MINIMUM OF 5Y2" INTO CONCRETE. AL KRUSE PRO [REVISION NO. I F SHOP ,, AB108 TYPICAL NEW TRENCH DETAIL AT MEN'S LOCKER �'' — B EXISTING SLAB—ON—FILL CONSTRUCTION RM r , r % — 58 58 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" AB112 _, ;' — m 1 DESCRIPTION 6 0 --, �r-, ;; r II .. r---r--r-� LL n J �V A / T III 1 1 I i I 1 1 - --- . T -- T V �l� / / Y4"x2"xO'-2" PLATE HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE PRO SHOP LEVEL 1 PLAN / _ O MINIMUM LENGTH TOP OF COLUMN \\ 1r i /�". r AS REQUIRED TO = BASE PLATE LJ + o\ ACCOMODATE GROUT,■II \ / \ / r I MECH. BASE PLATE, WASHER, M -,_._ --_ va ,I A NUT, PLUS 1Y2" o AL T.O. CONCRETE ��\ II ��� / ABM SEE DETAILS © / \\ / \ �7 vv v v r -t / , 1 /^ �� (�__� I I I1 / V� 1� 1 i / % - �, / I- z LJ 0 I (1) < 0 w Q5 w O r ll -I – m H M _ et H )1-11 , /�„ .-- STU=AGE Ill z w . J o w co HEAVY HEX NUT (TOP & 80T) II■I FULLY ENGAGE THREADS WITH SEE PLAN NUT AND DAMAGE THREADS, FOR COLUMN PLAN NOTES: 1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY AND/OR DETERMINE ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS (� SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND DETAILS PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION AND SUBMITTING SHOP DRAWINGS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES OR SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR WHICH DETAILS FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION HAVE NOT BEEN PROVIDED PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK NO EXCEPTION. NOTES: SEE NOTE 2 zo w 1= 5 w w o ce a v) a NUTS WITH WASHERS REFER TO SCHEDULE FOR BASE PLATE AND 2. BASED UPON ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS ENCOUNTERED AT THE JOB SITE, ADDITIONAL NEW FRAMING OR 1. SEE COLUMN SCHEDULE FOR ANCHOR BOLT SIZE. r ANCHOR BOLTS MODIFICATIONS TO EITHER THE NEW OR EXISTING FRAMING SHOWN MAY BE REQUIRED AS DIRECTED 2. ROD THREADS AT THE EMBEDED END SHALL BE DAMAGED AT TWO THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL INFORMATION REQUIRED BY THE rBY TOP OF BEAM, PIER, PLACES DIRECTLY BELOW THE HEAVY HEX NUT. ■. PIER CAP, OR FOOTING SUB CONTRACTORS AND MATERIAL SUPPLIERS BASED UPON FIELD MEASUREMENTS AND DETERMINATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS AT THE JOB SITE. THIS INFORMATION SHALL BE INDICATED ON THE SHOP DRAWINGS 3. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, ALL BOLTS SHALL BE TIGHTENED TO - .4 j�- SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW TO THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER NO EXCEPTION. A "SNUG TIGHT" CONDITION AS DEFINED BY AISC AFTER THE vi 3. PROVIDE WINDSTORM APPROVED STORE FRONT DOOR, DOOR SHALL BE IMPACT RESISTANT. CONCRETE IS AT LEAST 14 DAYS OLD. CO _1 4. THE HOLE IN THE PLATE WASHER SHALL BE 1/16" LARGER THAN Y o THE BOLT DIAMETER. 0 w° 5. SEE SPECIFICATION AND STRUCTURAL NOTES FOR GROUT F N REQUREMENTS. " 4 a a 4 ° ° a a e ° 4 G LEVELING NUTS AT CONTRACTORS OPTION m �A AL KRUSE LEVEL 1 PLAN c TYPICAL ANCHOR BOLT DETAIL 0w ow ix cn o D NOTES: TYPICAL THE LETTER "T" DENOTES BASE PLATE COLUMN BASE THICKNESS. PLATE DETAIL Lu o SHEET 058 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP_204 IREVISION NO. I 58 58 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-O" 58158 SCALE: NTS 58 58 SCALE: NTS CITY PROJECT# E12118 i a op 0 00 DEMOLITION SCOPE; CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF ALL EXISTING DUCTS, FANS, GRILLS, CONDENSORS, AND WINDOW UNITS FROM THIS BUILDING. ROOF/ATTIC VENTS SHALL BE REMOVED AND OPENINGS SEALED WITH ALUMINUM CAP FLA HING. OPENINGS SHALL BE SEALED AIR AND WATER TIGHT WITH AN APPROVED MATERIAL oD L—J J 00 6 J 01 =1R N I v / 1 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION PLAN 59 59 SCALE: 1/4"= 1'-0" 4' 2' 0 4' SCALE: 1 /4'1= 1' -0" r z Z c 30/20 / DOOR LOUVER n12x12 I 1300 CFM 1 UP TO 12x12 ROOF CAP AHL -1H Q RETAIL STORAGE AA104 EF -1H JANITOR'S CLOSET AA105 10x6 100 CFM m o< ACCU-1H ON ROOF t d e U TENNIS PRO AA102 1J aN 20x24 ❑F 1920 CFM 0 MEN'S TOILET RM. L 110x6 ,, n 100 II1I�I l� CFM �Il „Li AAI 06 u 0 WOMEN'S TOI RM. AA107 --k- 1111) +- 0 AHU-2H STAFF/CHECK-IN AA103 30/20 DOOR LOUVER Z RETAIL AREA AA100 18x8 18x8 18x8 n 450 n 450 n 450 CFM CFM CFM t 1 , I /— 22/14 AHU-2HQ 18x8 8 200 CFM AA1 O1' MAINTENANCE STORAGE B 18/8 18x8 220 CFM V V ACCU -21-1. 2 1 MECHANICAL HVAC FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1/4"= 1'-0" 4' 2' 0 4' SCALE: 1/4' = 1' -0" z Z MECHANICAL KEYED NOTES: ROUTE CONDENSATE DRAIN LINE FULL SIZ TO FLOOR DRAIN. ® PUMP 3/4" CONDENSATE DRAIN LINE FROM DUCTLESS AIR HANDLER OVER HEAD TO MOP SINK IN JANITORS CLOSET. Q AS PART OF ALTERNATE BID ITEM No. 3, REMOVE AND REPLACE EXISTING ROOF CURB WITH NEW 14" INSULATED ROOF CURB. SECURE CURB TO STRUCTURE AS PER STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS RECOMMENDATIONS. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE WINDSTORM CERTIFICATION FOR ALL MECHANICAL WORK DONE ON THE ROOF. ® AS PART OF ALTERNATE BID ITEM No. 3, REPLACE EXISTING DUCT WORK ON THE ROOF WITH NEW ALUMINUM DUCT WORK WITH INTERNAL INSULATION. INSULATION SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM THERMAL VALUE OF R-8. CAULK AND SEAL ALL JOINTS AND SEAMS. LOUNE MECHGANICAL HVAC FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1/8"= 1'-0" 8' 4' 0 8' SCALE: 1 /8" =1' -0" zz NOTE: ALL EQUIPMENT CURBS, DUCTS, ETC. MOUNTED ON THE ROOF SHALL BE FASTENED TO THE ROOF IN A SECURE MANNER AND CERTIFIED BY A STRUCTURAL ENGINEER TO MEET TDI WINDSTORM REQUIREMENTS. IJ ❑ LID CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. MA -1 DATE: 02/20/15 DESCRIPTION >- 0 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY 0 N w 1- D CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 .clkarch.com Lu 1- 0 REVISION NO. DESCRIPTION 02/20/2015 OF l r 70Pr • SEAN M. RODRIGUEZ,j v' 1 ,0 t. ' C7 ,0. :.c S/• ENG/NEER //VC 5658 S. Staples, Suits 380 Corpus Christi, Tx 78413 P: (381)852-2727 F: (381)852-2922 Texas Firm Registration No. F-005318 13162 U Capital Programs w 0 CO w W H U LIJ U C J w m W ::)CO N_ N Q oo Q CO CO REVISION NO. SHEET 59 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 a rn N I i 0 N r CCI cD 1'0 t0 i - AIR HANDLING UNIT SCHEDULE MARK AHU-1H AHU-2H THERMOSTAT -TEMPERATURE SENSOR SERVES SERVES PROSHOP SALES AHU-2H DIRECT/INLINE TYPE TITUS 300FL TOTAL BTUH 9000 60 SUPPLY AIR (CFM) 400 1920 AMBIENT TEMP. (F) 98 OUTSIDE AIR (CFM) N/A 285 DUCT - CROSSHATCHING INDICATES LINER STEPS OF CAPACITY EXT. SP.ON. WG) 0.15 0.5 SONES 5.8 S.E.E.R. 13 13 120/1/60 k VOLTS/PH/HZ 115/1/60 200/3/60 208/3/60 ELBOW W/TURNING VANES FAN MOTOR HORSEPOWER 1/8 3/4 21.4 MAX. FAN RPM N/A 1750 MOCP FLEXIBLE CONNECTION - DUCT COOLNO COL PIPE TURNING UPWARD 0 MANUFACTURER MAX. COIL FACE VEL. (FPM) CARRIER BRANCH TAP MIN. ROWS PIPE BRANCHING OFF UPWARD 24ABB360A005 D4 EAT DB/NB ('F) 75/62.5 77.5/65.2 1,2,3 1 RISE LAT DB/WB (f) 55/54 54.5/53.7 VERTICAL OFFSET GRAND TOTAL (MBH) 9 59 TOTAL SENSIBLE (MBH) 9 44.8 OPPOSED BLADE VOLUME DAMPER (OBVD) HEATING COL SUPPLY AIR DUCT TURNING DOWNWARD / �J N 1 KW @208V N/A 11.3 FIRE DAMPER RETURN AIR DUCT TURNING DOWNWARD EAT DB (F) 67 EXHAUST AIR DUCT TURNING UPWARD X ,I LAT DB CO MIN. 87 /V ELECTRICAL DATA MOTORIZED DAMPER/BALANCING DAMPER • SMOKE DAMPER VOLTS/PH/HZ 120/1/60 208/3/60 FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER Is MCA 1.0 31.3 ACCESS DOOR MOCP 15 50 8D0 01 MANUFACTURER CARRIER CARRIER MODEL NO. FX4DNB061TOOA NOTES: 4 1,2,3,4 NOTES: 1. PROVIDE EACH UNIT WITH SLIDE OUT FILTER SECTION WITH 30% DISPOSABLE FILTERS. 2. PROVIDE SINGLE POINT WIRING CONNECTION. ELECTRIC STRIP HEATERS SHALL BE INTERNAL OF THE UNIT CASING AND A MINIMUM OF 2 STAGES WHEN ABOVE 10KW. 3. PROVIDE ALTERNATE DRIVE AND MOTOR FROM MANUFACTURE AS REQUIRED. 4. EQUIVALENT MANUFACTURE'S ARE LIEBERT. CONDENSING UNIT SCHEDULE MARK ACCU-1H ACCU-2H THERMOSTAT -TEMPERATURE SENSOR SERVES RESTROOMS SERVES AHU-1H AHU-2H DIRECT/INLINE - > TITUS 300FL TOTAL BTUH 9000 60 EXT. SP (IN WG) 0.50 AMBIENT TEMP. (F) 98 98 1312 D DUCT - CROSSHATCHING INDICATES LINER STEPS OF CAPACITY 1 1 -CHS SONES 5.8 S.E.E.R. (EER) 13 13 120/1/60 k TITUS 350FS VOLTS/PHASE/HERTZ 208/1/60 208/3/60 ELBOW W/TURNING VANES MODEL NUMBER 100SQN1OD MCA 21.4 1,2,3„4,5 PIPE TURNING DOWNWARD MOCP FLEXIBLE CONNECTION - DUCT 30 PIPE TURNING UPWARD 0 MANUFACTURER CARRIER CARRIER BRANCH TAP MODEL NO. PIPE BRANCHING OFF UPWARD 24ABB360A005 D4 VERTICAL OFFSET DOWN NOTES: 1,2,3 1,2,3 1 RISE VERTICAL OFFSET UP VALVE NOTES: 1. EQUIVALENT MANUFACTURE'S ARE CARRIER, TRANE, AND YORK. 2. SIZE REFRIGERANT LINES AS PER MANUFACTURE'S RECOMMENDATION. 3. PROVIDE WITH MANUFACTURES FREEZE STAT. 4. EQUIVALENT MANUFACTURE'S ARE LIEBERT. FAN SCHEDULE MARK EF -1H O THERMOSTAT -TEMPERATURE SENSOR SERVES RESTROOMS O SMOKE DETECTOR TYPE DIRECT/INLINE - > TITUS 300FL CFM 300 8 EXT. SP (IN WG) 0.50 20/12 ALL ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, WITH FRAME FOR LAY -IN OR SURFACE MOUNTNG FRAME. PROVIDE O.B.D. FOR DUCTED EXHAUST. FAN RPM 1312 D DUCT - CROSSHATCHING INDICATES LINER HP 111 WATTS D -CHS SONES 5.8 DUCT TRANSITION it VOLTAGE/PHASE/HZ 120/1/60 k TITUS 350FS MANUFACTURER COOK F ELBOW W/TURNING VANES MODEL NUMBER 100SQN1OD 1. PROVIDE FRAME TO MATCH CEILING 2. RE: ARCH. DRAWINGS FOR FINISH. 3. RE: FLOOR PLAN FOR NECK SIZES. 4. PAINT NECK INTERIOR FLAT BLACK. 5. EQUIVALENT MANUFACTURERS NOTE 1,2,3„4,5 PIPE TURNING DOWNWARD NOTES: 1. PROVIDE INSULATED HOUSING AND RC -75 VIBRATION ISOLATORS. 2. PROVIDE FACTORY MOUNTED PREWIRED DISCONNECT. 3. PROVIDE BACKDRAFT DAMPER, INLET AND OUTLET FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS. 4. EQUIVALENT MANUFACTURES ARE GREENHECK. 5. FAN TO BE CONTROLLED BY TIMECLOCK (8AM-8PM/7 DAYS/WK). TIMECLOCK PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY DIVISION 16. MECHANICAL LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION O THERMOSTAT -TEMPERATURE SENSOR O HUMIDISTAT OR HUMIDITY SENSOR O SMOKE DETECTOR 1 AIR FLOW DIRECTIONAL ARROWS - > TITUS 300FL PRIMARY DUCT, ROUND 20"0 8 8 PRIMARY DUCT, RECTANGULAR THUS 350FL 20/12 ALL ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, WITH FRAME FOR LAY -IN OR SURFACE MOUNTNG FRAME. PROVIDE O.B.D. FOR DUCTED EXHAUST. C DRAIN PIPING D DUCT - CROSSHATCHING INDICATES LINER 1.\\\�\�\\ ALL ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, WITH FRAME FOR LAY -IN CEILING. PROVIDE 0.B.D. FOR DUCTED EXHAUST/RETURN. D -CHS - RUSKIN ELF6375DX DUCT TRANSITION it E - k TITUS 350FS 20"x24" BAR GRILLE RETURN AIR GRILLE ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, WITH FRAME FOR SURFACE MOUNTING. COLOR BY ARCHITECT. F ELBOW W/TURNING VANES 4. TYPE.(RE: ARCH. REFLECTED CEILING PLAN.) ARE PRICE, KRUEGER. 1. PROVIDE FRAME TO MATCH CEILING 2. RE: ARCH. DRAWINGS FOR FINISH. 3. RE: FLOOR PLAN FOR NECK SIZES. 4. PAINT NECK INTERIOR FLAT BLACK. 5. EQUIVALENT MANUFACTURERS C PIPE TURNING DOWNWARD FLEXIBLE CONNECTION - DUCT PIPE TURNING UPWARD 0 PIPE BRANCHING OFF DOWNWARD BRANCH TAP PIPE BRANCHING OFF UPWARD O D4 VERTICAL OFFSET DOWN SHUTOFF OR DRAIN VALVE SLI DROP 1 RISE VERTICAL OFFSET UP VALVE D4 VERTICAL OFFSET N/ V♦ 1 SUPPLY AIR DUCT TURNING UPWARD 1.1 -in OPPOSED BLADE VOLUME DAMPER (OBVD) SUPPLY AIR DUCT TURNING DOWNWARD / �J N 1 RETURN AIR DUCT TURNING UPWARD f FIRE DAMPER RETURN AIR DUCT TURNING DOWNWARD / I n EXHAUST AIR DUCT TURNING UPWARD X ,I BBDD EXHAUST AIR DUCT TURNING DOWNWARD /V MD/BD MOTORIZED DAMPER/BALANCING DAMPER • SMOKE DAMPER BES1 FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER AIR DEVICE SCHEDULE MARK MFG. & MODEL TYPE REMARKS TITUS TDC-AA 24"X24" LOUVERED FACE SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER ALL ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, WITH 4 WAY PATTERN AND FRAME FOR LAY -IN CEILING. A RETURN AIR GRILLE TITUS 300FL 18"X8" BAR GRILLE SUPPLY AIR GRILLE ALL ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, WITH FRAME FOR LAY -IN OR SURFACE MOUNTNG FRAME. 8 REFRIGERANT PIPE ROUTING THUS 350FL 10"X6" BAR GRILLE RETURN/EXHAUST AIR GRILLE ALL ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, WITH FRAME FOR LAY -IN OR SURFACE MOUNTNG FRAME. PROVIDE O.B.D. FOR DUCTED EXHAUST. C DRAIN PIPING D TITUS 50F 12"X12" EGG CRATE RETURN/EXHAUST AIR GRILLE ALL ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, WITH FRAME FOR LAY -IN CEILING. PROVIDE 0.B.D. FOR DUCTED EXHAUST/RETURN. D -CHS - RUSKIN ELF6375DX 12"X12" DRAINABLE EXHAUST LOUVER ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, WITH FRAME FOR METAL PANEL INSTALLATION. PROVIDE WITH 1/2" BIRD SCREEN. COLOR BY ARCHITECT. E - TITUS 350FS 20"x24" BAR GRILLE RETURN AIR GRILLE ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, WITH FRAME FOR SURFACE MOUNTING. COLOR BY ARCHITECT. F NOTES: TYPE.(RE: ARCH. REFLECTED CEILING PLAN.) ARE PRICE, KRUEGER. 1. PROVIDE FRAME TO MATCH CEILING 2. RE: ARCH. DRAWINGS FOR FINISH. 3. RE: FLOOR PLAN FOR NECK SIZES. 4. PAINT NECK INTERIOR FLAT BLACK. 5. EQUIVALENT MANUFACTURERS MECHANICAL LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION ea CEILING DIFFUSER RETURN AIR GRILLE /\ EXHAUST REGISTER REFRIGERANT PIPE ROUTING R DRAIN PIPING D CHILLED WATER SUPPLY PIPING -CHS - CHILLED WATER RETURN PIPING CHR - HEATING WATER SUPPLY PIPING HWS - HEATING WATER RETURN PIPING HWR C PIPE TURNING DOWNWARD PIPE TURNING UPWARD 0 PIPE BRANCHING OFF DOWNWARD PIPE BRANCHING OFF UPWARD O D4 SHUTOFF OR DRAIN VALVE VALVE D4 CONTROL PANEL l 1.1 -in OPPOSED BLADE VOLUME DAMPER (OBVD) MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER (MVD) (OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER IN RECTANGULAR DUCT, BUTTERFLY DAMPER IN ROUND DUCT) 1 FIRE DAMPER m BBDD BACKDRAFT DAMPER MD/BD MOTORIZED DAMPER/BALANCING DAMPER • INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCT, MAX. 5 FT Is AAD ACCESS DOOR AIR DEVICE DESIGNATION/NECK SIZE/CFM A 8D0 01 KEYED NOTE REFERENCE LEGEND 0 ACC.DR. AFF CFM C.PNL DB EAT ESP EWT FC FLA FPI FT W.G. GA. GALV GPM HVAC IN W.G. KW LAT LWT MBH MOCP 0/A PD R/A RLA RPM S/A SP SQ FT SS SST WB WP SQUARE ROUND ACCESS DOOR ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE CONTROL PANEL DRY BULB ENTERING AIR TEMPERATURE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE FLEXIBLE CONNECTION FULL LOAD AMPS FINS PER INCH FOOT WATER GAUGE GAUGE GALVANIZED GALLONS PER MINUTE HEATING VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING INCH WATER GAUGE KILOWATT LEAVING AIR TEMPERATURE LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE THOUSAND BTU PER HOUR MAXIMUM OVER CURRENT PROTECTION OUTSIDE AIR PRESSURE DROP RETURN AIR RUNNING LOAD AMPS REVOLUTION PER MINUTE SUPPLY AIR STATIC PRESSURE SQUARE FEET STAINLESS STEEL SATURATED SUCTION TEMPERATURE WET BULB WEATHERPROOF NOTE: ALL SYMBOLS & ABBREVIATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO THIS PROJECT 02/20/2015 ,Z7%,"1OF°reA +, + *o ° %� '1%.* �i • SEAN M. RODRIGUEZ%°°pi•j � e S..V ON ° ❑O NL!G ENG/NEER //V C 5656 S. Staples. Suite 360 Corpus Christi, TX 78413 P: (361)852-2727 F: (361)852-2922 Texas Firm Registration No. F-005318 13162 CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. MA -2 DATE: 02/20/15 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY 0 N w c7 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 E 0 U 0 0 U DESCRIPTION r_11111111111111�1� REVISION NO. DATE he - U CC w w LU Q CO w w 0 w N r CNI0 0 O CID LU w 0) CO w w CD LU J Lli 0 CD Q LU U U SHEET 60 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 rn rcLN ai I rn 0 • '- N rn I ▪ N t0 10 a10 GALVANIZED ALL THREAD RODS. ELEVATED REGULATOR DURO DYNE MODEL SRTS - 1 1/2 OR APPROVED EQUAL SUPPLY W AIR DUCT 1 IMillgandillnalarnaWAIMININWEIMIME *SUPPLY AIR FLOW INSULATION STANDOFFD UNDER "1.5D" -___�_�_�-��- BRANCH DUCT ALL BRANCH CONNECTIONS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER A -� ' REGULATOR F STEEL „ a ELECTRICAL CONDUIT (TYPICAL) 45'� SEAL ALL JOINTS STAINLESS STEEL CLAMP STAINLESS STEEL CLAMP RECTANGULAR 1/4 OF DIAMETER OF 1/4 W (4" MIN.) AND LOCKING QUADRANT, O 0 / DUCT TIGHT PIPES IIIII Q USE YOUNG'S REGULATOR IN CEILING IF DAMPER III DUCT TAP DUCT _ - - ROUND DUCT (4" MIN.) \ DAMPER ROD INSIDE BEARINGq " I II III' UIlIIIIlL• - »TRANSITION D SPUTTER DAMPER ID TO STRUCTURE EXCEPT ALLOW MIN. 2" / IS NOT ACCESSIBLE. PARALLEL BLADE DAMPER SHALL BE FROM p% G, FOR EXTERNAL INSULATION ' AIR FLOW WA EA y AIR FLOW SA USED IF BRANCH DUCT HEIGHT IS 9" OR LESS INSIDE. ROUND DUCT ` � RECTANGULAR DUCT TAP TO ROUND DUCT J • COR\CEILING * LIGHT FIXTURE ,'.' t. �. SECURELY ATTACH I''��"�"'"''"""' ROUND FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTION a �_4 LOCKING QUADRANT DAMPER ON INSULATION STAND-OFF (MIN. 1-1/4"; TO DAMERD BLADE 3/8"I WITH BEARING ROD NYLON 1/4.NOTES: DIMENSIONAL RELATIONSHIPS NOTE: TRUNK DUCT THIS CONNECTION SHALL BE TYPICAL BRANCH DUCT CONNECTIONS TO RECTANGULAR INCLUDING SUPPLY, RETURN, OUTSIDE FOR ALL RECTANGULAR TRUNK DUCTS, AIR AND EXHAUST DUCTS. •-_*'nn 1. PIPES AND ELECTRICAL CONDUIT CAN BE ROUTED BETWEEN JOISTS OR THROUGH JOIST WEB SPACE AS REQUIRED. 2- DUCT SHALL BE LOCATED AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE. 2. U.L. DESIGN ASSEMBLY NUMBERS ARE SHOWN ON ARCHITECTURAL PLANS WHEN REQUIRED. 3. INSTALLATION OF ALL SERVICES MUST BE COORDINATED BY THE CONTRACTOR. ( 1. ANGLE 'A' TO BE 15' OR LESS 2. SEE FLOOR PLANS FOR B, 3. D = 1.5 x B 4. E = D + 3" MINIMUM 5. VERTICAL DIMENSION TO BE 6. CHANGE IN VERTICAL DIMENSION AFTER TURNS. C, MAINTAINED (BOTH SIDES) & W. THRU F. TO OCCUR l MINIMUM 26 1" INSULATION WITHr GAUGE VINYL VAPOR BARRIER NOTE: 1. ALL FLEXIBLE DUCT OFFSETS AND BENDS U.L. 181 CLASS 1 SHALL MAINTAIN A RADIUS OF 1.5 X ("D") FLEXIBLE DUCT MINIMUM 3'-0" AND MAXIMUM 6'-0" 2.TYPICAL OF ROUND DUCT CONNECTIONS TO RECTANGULAR DUCTS ?We NOTE: SEE FLOOR PLAN FOR SIZES 4 RECTANGLUAR TAP TO ROUND TRANSITION NOT TO SCALE 1 TYPA MEP INSTALLATION DETAIL NOT TO SCLE 2 RECTANGULAR BRANCH DUCT TAP NOT TO SCALE 3 SPIN—IN DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 5 SPLITTER DAMPER DETAIL NOT TO SCALE PROVIDE INSULATED GALVANIZED ALL THREAD MOTOR HOUSING SUPPORT RODS ATTACHED TO STRUCTURE SIZED PER VIBRATION ISOLATORS MFG. RECOMMENDATIONS SUPPLY AIR DUCT SEE PLAN FOR SIZES. COOLING COIL DRAIN CONNECTION UNION OUTSIDE AIR DUCT SEE PLAN FOR SIZES. / REFRIGERANT LINES SIZE AS PER MFG'S RECOMMENDATION. SHORT NIPPLE (TYPICAL OF 4) (TYPICAL OF 4) FLEXIBLE j SAME SIZE AS CASING CONNECTION W1TH CAPPED TEE FITTINGS (MIN. 3/4"0). RETURN AIR DUCT SEE PLAN FOR SIZES. ti CONNECTION DUCT SIZE RE: FLOOR PLAN 111(rd.—rfAIOI MOUNT MOTOR & ACCESS DOOR PARALLEL WITH FLOOR ,'` r FAN TRANSITION CABINET FLEXIBLE CONNECTION j j / AHU j AIR HANDLING UNIT ��;�;� /�1111 A 'I -- SLOPE 1/8"/FT HORIZONTAL RUN / TO FLOOR DRAIN II INSULATE INTERIOR ds�`lnns•��s ��.— II OR ROOF DRAIN NOT LESS THAN 1" DEEPER THAN 1 -1/4"X1 -1/4"X1 /8" WELDED ANGLE FRAME. / SEE SCHEDULE r 3/4" CONDENSATE CONDENSATE DRAIN WITH ,1 im1 1 1 TOTAL FAN STATIC ARMAFLEX AP PRESSURE -2000 (25/50) NOTE: 1. MAINTAIN MINIMUM 1" AIR GAP AT FLOOR DRAIN OR ROOF DRAIN. 2. ALL CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING SHALL BE SCHEDULE 40 GALVANIZED WITH MALLABLE IRON SCREWED FITTINGS. PROVIDE BRACE ON ALL FOUR SIDES. PAINT WITH 1 COAT OF RUST t I ! WITH P -TRAP TO FLOOR DRAIN IN MECHANICAL ROOM. PROHIBITIVE PAINT AND 2 COATS FLAT BLACK. _ _ rn 9• .•-• " •• > > - * ^ - =• t 7 COOLING COIL CONDENSATE DRAIN NOT TO SCALE CEILING g INLINE EXHAUST FAN DETAIL TO SCALE g AHUDETAIL SCALENOT NOT TO DE 02/20/2015 •••„•9s•6 pi SEAN M. RODRIGUEZ 96478 v i SI S• N _R i ENG//VEER//VG 5858 S. Staple, Suite 380 Corpus Christi, TX 78413 P: (381)852-2727 F: (381)852-2922 Texas Firm Recit lUon No. F-005318 13162 w Q 0 REVISION NO. z 0 1- a Fe 0 to w 0 w 0 CONSULTANT'S SHEET N0. MA -3 DATE: 02/20/15 < o 3 N w Q O L cem LU Lu 10 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com L.L 0 (121111 D Ill Q w OH 4— O U ›— Capital Programs CO w LUU u) LU w CO Q m LU w 0 U 0 CO w CNJ N Z O m LU J Z w U U zz Q CCI LU w SHEET 61 of 82 RECORD DRAWING N0. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 - H _J - n - J _H - j I 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 L_L —I—L J__I—LJ MEN'S LOCKER RM AB112 1 -7 -I -n 1 1 1 1 1 L_ L = = r---- --Tr II y 1111 II 1111 fi u ( 1 Ilf L_LJ—L_JJ—I_-L -I I T _-4 _ _J WOMEN'S LOCKER RM AB109 7T7-1-TT-CT7 I I I I I I I I I r -i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r� 7,7 ILA DMOIIITION SCOPE: CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF ALL EXISTING DUCTS, FANS, GRILLS IN THE RESTROOM AREAS AND PREP FOR NEW FANS,, DUCTS AND GRILLS. CLEAN, PROTECT AND PAINT ALL OTHER GRILLS IN THE 4UILDING. 1 1 ___i___i 1 1 1 1 LJ I r-- I r Th 1 1 I I 1 1 I L --J--_ ___J IFA - A t WH \ill)1, //C / lib__ MECH. AB111 L LJ r 1 1 1 1 1--1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 IF -1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F-1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LJ AL KRUSE PRO SHOP AB108 771 62 STORAGE 1 \MECHANICAL DEMOLITION PLAN 62 SCALE: 114"= 1'-0" 1 EXISTING CONDENSING UNIT TI_J—L—I—J—L_I__1_.1L) -I 12/10 UP 1• •• I 1 • 1- _ I MEN'S LOCKER � 1 RM 12/10 ' I- AB112 V MEN'S SHOWER AB1 14 P MEN'S ENTRY 12/10 AB11i O 1 1 12/10 UP TO ROOF CAP ►�_II%II.�� EF -2K �� 2/ 0 12/10 WOMEN'S LOCKER RM AB -1-091 WOMEN'S ENTRY B116 w II ---7 WH \iii A C j MECH. AB111 w AL KRUSE PRO SHOP AB108 11\ /n\ 7` 1 Y Y I lu 1 1 i CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. MB -1 DATE: 02/20/15 DESCRIPTION 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com w H 0 2 MECHANICAL HVAC FLOOR PLAN 62 62 SCALE: 1/4"=11-0" 02/20/2015 of°reX9s+1 SEAN M. RODRIGUEZj Se i. oN ❑O LIQ LSU ENG/NEER //V G 5656 S. Staples. Suite 360 Corpus Christi, TX 78413 P: (361)852-2727 F: (361)852-2922 Texas Firm Registration No. F-005318 13162 REVISION NO DESCRIPTION Capital Programs w 1- a 0 CO It w Q Z Q w 0 U z cc O cn U O z o CO LL w m z U t—LV ZQ w F- _ = CV w —1 ft o C/) Q `'J E2z -o Q Q z m m ¢ LLU UJ REVISION NO SHEET 62 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 MECHANICAL LEGEND SYMBOL MECHANICAL LEGEND ii SYMBOL CEILING DIFFUSER 24"X24" LOUVERED FACE SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER / DESCRIPTION RETURN AIR GRILLE / /\ TO EXHAUST REGISTER 390 THERMOSTAT -TEMPERATURE SENSOR REFRIGERANT PIPE ROUTING R O 12"X8" BAR GRILLE RETURN/EXHAUST AIR GRILLE ALL ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, WITH FRAME FOR LAY -IN OR SURFACE MOUNTNG FRAME. PROVIDE O.B.D. FOR DUCTED EXHAUST. HUMIDISTAT OR HUMIDITY SENSOR D O HP CHILLED WATER SUPPLY PIPING SMOKE DETECTOR — _tiL-3 8.0 CHILLED WATER RETURN PIPING CHR AIR FLOW DIRECTIONAL ARROWS 120/1/60 l `IL HEATING WATER SUPPLY PIPING HWS — PRIMARY DUCT, ROUND 20"0 a 1. PROVIDE FRAME TO MATCH CEILING 2. RE: ARCH. DRAWINGS FOR FINISH. 3. RE: FLOOR PLAN FOR NECK SIZES. 4. PAINT NECK INTERIOR FLAT BLACK. 5. EQUIVALENT MANUFACTURERS NOTE PIPE TURNING DOWNWARD C NOTES: 1. PROVIDE INSULATED HOUSING AND RC -75 VIBRATION ISOLATORS. 2. PROVIDE FACTORY MOUNTED PREWIRED DISCONNECT. 3. PROVIDE BACKDRAFT DAMPER, INLET AND OUTLET FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS. 4. EQUIVALENT MANUFACTURES ARE GREENHECK. 5. FAN TO BE CONTROLLED BY TIMECLOCK (8AM-8PM/7 DAYS/WK). TIMECLOCK PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY DIVISION 16. PRIMARY DUCT, RECTANGULAR 0 20/12 11 PIPE BRANCHING OFF DOWNWARD PIPE BRANCHING OFF UPWARD O DUCT - CROSSHATCHING INDICATES LINER SHUTOFF OR DRAIN VALVE \ VALVE D4 CONTROL PANEL 1 4. DUCT TRANSITION .f-ln. OPPOSED BLADE VOLUME DAMPER (OBVD) MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER (MVD) (OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER IN RECTANGULAR DUCT, BUTTERFLY DAMPER IN ROUND DUCT) ELBOW W/TURNING VANES IL s 11 t BACKDRAFT DAMPER EEE MD/BD MOTORIZED DAMPER/BALANCING DAMPER INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCT, MAX. 5 FT FLEXIBLE CONNECTION - DUCT I ) ) )) AAD ACCESS DOOR 1 AIR DEVICE DESIGNATION/NECK SIZE/CFM 1 BRANCH TAP 01 KEYED NOTE REFERENCE VERTICAL OFFSET DOWN DROP VERTICAL OFFSET UP 1 RISE VERTICAL OFFSET II)/ � SUPPLY AIR DUCT TURNING UPWARD X } SUPPLY AIR DUCT TURNING DOWNWARD SUPPLY n /V RETURN AIR DUCT TURNING UPWARD V RETURN AIR DUCT TURNING DOWNWARD /I n 11 EXHAUST AIR DUCT TURNING UPWARD } EXHAUST AIR DUCT TURNING DOWNWARD /v II ___r SMOKE DAMPER FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER MECHANICAL LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION TYPE ii SERVES CEILING DIFFUSER 24"X24" LOUVERED FACE SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER / TYPE RETURN AIR GRILLE / /\ TITUS 50F EXHAUST REGISTER 390 B REFRIGERANT PIPE ROUTING R 0.50 12"X8" BAR GRILLE RETURN/EXHAUST AIR GRILLE ALL ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, WITH FRAME FOR LAY -IN OR SURFACE MOUNTNG FRAME. PROVIDE O.B.D. FOR DUCTED EXHAUST. DRAIN PIPING D TITUS 50F HP CHILLED WATER SUPPLY PIPING CHS — SONES 8.0 CHILLED WATER RETURN PIPING CHR — 120/1/60 HEATING WATER SUPPLY PIPING HWS — F HEATING WATER RETURN PIPING HWR 1. PROVIDE FRAME TO MATCH CEILING 2. RE: ARCH. DRAWINGS FOR FINISH. 3. RE: FLOOR PLAN FOR NECK SIZES. 4. PAINT NECK INTERIOR FLAT BLACK. 5. EQUIVALENT MANUFACTURERS NOTE PIPE TURNING DOWNWARD C NOTES: 1. PROVIDE INSULATED HOUSING AND RC -75 VIBRATION ISOLATORS. 2. PROVIDE FACTORY MOUNTED PREWIRED DISCONNECT. 3. PROVIDE BACKDRAFT DAMPER, INLET AND OUTLET FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS. 4. EQUIVALENT MANUFACTURES ARE GREENHECK. 5. FAN TO BE CONTROLLED BY TIMECLOCK (8AM-8PM/7 DAYS/WK). TIMECLOCK PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY DIVISION 16. PIPE TURNING UPWARD 0 PIPE BRANCHING OFF DOWNWARD PIPE BRANCHING OFF UPWARD O SHUTOFF OR DRAIN VALVE DI1 VALVE D4 CONTROL PANEL 1 1 .f-ln. OPPOSED BLADE VOLUME DAMPER (OBVD) MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER (MVD) (OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER IN RECTANGULAR DUCT, BUTTERFLY DAMPER IN ROUND DUCT) FIRE DAMPER s 11 EiBDD BACKDRAFT DAMPER EEE MD/BD MOTORIZED DAMPER/BALANCING DAMPER INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCT, MAX. 5 FT I ) ) )) AAD ACCESS DOOR AIR DEVICE DESIGNATION/NECK SIZE/CFM A $O� 01 KEYED NOTE REFERENCE FAN SCHEDULE MARK EF -1K AND 2K TYPE REMARKS SERVES RESTROOMS 24"X24" LOUVERED FACE SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER ALL ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, WITH 4 WAY PATTERN AND FRAME FOR LAY -IN CEILING. TYPE BELT/INLINE TITUS 50F CFM 390 B EXT. SP (IN WG) 0.50 12"X8" BAR GRILLE RETURN/EXHAUST AIR GRILLE ALL ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, WITH FRAME FOR LAY -IN OR SURFACE MOUNTNG FRAME. PROVIDE O.B.D. FOR DUCTED EXHAUST. FAN RPM 1532 TITUS 50F HP 1/4 D SONES 8.0 12"X12" DRAINABLE EXHAUST LOUVER ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, WITH FRAME FOR METAL PANEL INSTALLATION. PROVIDE WITH 1/2” BIRD SCREEN. COLOR BY ARCHITECT. VOLTAGE/PHASE/HZ 120/1/60 RUSKIN ELF6375DX MANUFACTURER COOK F MODEL NUMBER 100SQNB 1. PROVIDE FRAME TO MATCH CEILING 2. RE: ARCH. DRAWINGS FOR FINISH. 3. RE: FLOOR PLAN FOR NECK SIZES. 4. PAINT NECK INTERIOR FLAT BLACK. 5. EQUIVALENT MANUFACTURERS NOTE 1,2,3„4,5 NOTES: 1. PROVIDE INSULATED HOUSING AND RC -75 VIBRATION ISOLATORS. 2. PROVIDE FACTORY MOUNTED PREWIRED DISCONNECT. 3. PROVIDE BACKDRAFT DAMPER, INLET AND OUTLET FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS. 4. EQUIVALENT MANUFACTURES ARE GREENHECK. 5. FAN TO BE CONTROLLED BY TIMECLOCK (8AM-8PM/7 DAYS/WK). TIMECLOCK PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY DIVISION 16. AIR DEVICE SCHEDULE MARK MFG. & MODEL TYPE REMARKS TITUS TDC-AA 24"X24" LOUVERED FACE SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER ALL ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, WITH 4 WAY PATTERN AND FRAME FOR LAY -IN CEILING. A TITUS 50F 24"X24" EGG CRATE RETURN/EXHAUST AIR GRILLE ALL ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, WITH FRAME FOR LAY -IN OR SURFACE MOUNTNG FRAME. PROVIDE O.B.D. FOR DUCTED EXHAUST. B TITUS 350FL 12"X8" BAR GRILLE RETURN/EXHAUST AIR GRILLE ALL ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, WITH FRAME FOR LAY -IN OR SURFACE MOUNTNG FRAME. PROVIDE O.B.D. FOR DUCTED EXHAUST. C TITUS 50F 12"X12" EGG CRATE RETURN/EXHAUST AIR GRILLE ALL ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, WITH FRAME FOR LAY -IN CEILING. PROVIDE 0.B.D. FOR DUCTED EXHAUST/RETURN. D RUSKIN ELF6375DX 12"X12" DRAINABLE EXHAUST LOUVER ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, WITH FRAME FOR METAL PANEL INSTALLATION. PROVIDE WITH 1/2” BIRD SCREEN. COLOR BY ARCHITECT. E RUSKIN ELF6375DX 36"x12" DRAINABLE OUTSIDE AIR LOUVER ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, WITH FRAME FOR METAL PANEL INSTALLATION. PROVIDE WITH 1/2" BIRD SCREEN. COLOR BY ARCHITECT. F NOTES: TYPE.(RE: ARCH. REFLECTED CEILING PLAN.) ARE PRICE, KRUEGER. 1. PROVIDE FRAME TO MATCH CEILING 2. RE: ARCH. DRAWINGS FOR FINISH. 3. RE: FLOOR PLAN FOR NECK SIZES. 4. PAINT NECK INTERIOR FLAT BLACK. 5. EQUIVALENT MANUFACTURERS 02/20/2015 r , *o° ��i • SEAN M. RODRIGUEZj 96478 . I' 'E SC .4,4- hSyo * ' "IAN ❑O LIQ LSU ENG/NEER //V C 5656 S. Staples. Suite 360 Corpus Christi, TX 78413 P: (361)852-2727 F: (361)852-2922 Texas Firm Registration No. F-005318 13162 w H Q 0 1 REVISION NO w 1- Q 0 CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. MB -2 DATE: 02/20/15 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 0 co co 42-1111 D Q III W OH U `F- O> - U Capital Programs CO CC w z w U (1) z w LU oesQ w w C9 U 0 0 0 CIO SHEET 63 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 GALVANIZED ALL THREAD RODS. W Ale PIPES STEEL O • ELECTRICAL CONDUIT (TYPICAL) DUCT TIGHT TO STRUCTURE EXCEPT ALLOW MIN. 2" FOR EXTERNAL INSULATION CEILING LIGHT FIXTURE NOTES: 1. PIPES AND ELECTRICAL CONDUIT CAN BE ROUTED BETWEEN JOISTS OR THROUGH JOIST WEB SPACE AS REQUIRED. 2— DUCT SHALL BE LOCATED AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE. 2. U.L. DESIGN ASSEMBLY NUMBERS ARE SHOWN ON ARCHITECTURAL PLANS WHEN REQUIRED. 3. INSTALLATION OF ALL SERVICES MUST BE COORDINATED BY THE CONTRACTOR. BRANCH DUCT 1/4 W (4" MIN.) ALL BRANCH CONNECTIONS /./—SSHALL BE PROVIDED WITH OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER HALL LOCKING QUADRANT, USE YOUNG'S REGULATOR IN CEILING IF DAMPER IS NOT ACCESSIBLE. PARALLEL BLADE DAMPER SHALL BE USED IF BRANCH DUCT HEIGHT IS 9" OR LESS INSIDE. AIR FLOW SA TRUNK DUCT NOTE: THIS CONNECTION SHALL BE TYPICAL FOR ALL RECTANGULAR BRANCH DUCT CONNECTIONS TO RECTANGULAR TRUNK DUCTS, INCLUDING SUPPLY, RETURN, OUTSIDE AIR AND EXHAUST DUCTS. INSULATION STUFFED UNDER STANDOFF "1.5D ELEVATED REGULATOR DURO DYNE MODEL SRTS — 1 1/2 OR APPROVED EQUAL STEELCLAMP STAINLESS �-. STAINLESS STEEL CLAMP DAMPER ROD INSIDE BEARING SECURELY ATTACH ROD cdrea/i!//�..,..iii.������i���„oi...� TO DAMPER � � ' BLADE ir 3/8"$ ROD WITH NYLON BEARING MINIMUM 26 \___ GAUGE /11 r I�IIIIIIIR� NOTE: 1. ALL FLEXIBLE DUCT OFFSETS AND BENDS SHALL MAINTAIN A RADIUS OF 1.5 X ("D") MINIMUM 3'—O" AND MAXIMUM 6'—O" 2.TYPICAL OF ROUND DUCT CONNECTIONS TO RECTANGULAR DUCTS 1" INSULATION WITH VINYL VAPOR BARRIER U.L. 181 CLASS 1 FLEXIBLE DUCT SUPPLY AIR DUCT RECTANGULAR DUCT TAP ROUND DUCT *SUPPLY AIR FLOW ROUND FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTION— NOTE: SEE FLOOR PLAN FOR SIZES SEAL ALL JOINTS 1/4 OF DIAMETER OF ROUND DUCT (4” MIN.) TRANSITION FROM RECTANGULAR DUCT TAP TO ROUND DUCT LOCKING QUADRANT DAMPER ON INSULATION STAND—OFF (MIN. 1-1/4"; 1 TYP. MEP INSTALLATION DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 2 RECTANGULAR BRANCH DUCT TAP NOT TO SCALE 3 SPIN -IN DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 4 RECTANGLUAR TAP TO ROUND TRANSITION NOT TO SCALE REGULATOR SPLITTER DAMPER AJ' F DIMENSIONAL RELATIONSHIPS 1. ANGLE 'A' TO BE 15' OR LESS (BOTH SIDES) 2. SEE FLOOR PLANS FOR B, C, & W. 3. D = 1.5 x B 4. E = D + 3" MINIMUM 5. VERTICAL DIMENSION TO BE MAINTAINED THRU F. 6. CHANGE IN VERTICAL DIMENSION TO OCCUR AFTER TURNS. 5 SPLITTER DAMPER DETAIL NOT TO SCALE GALVANIZED ALL THREAD SUPPORT RODS ATTACHED TO STRUCTURE SIZED PER MFG. RECOMMENDATIONS (TYPICAL OF 4) FLEXIBLE CONNECTION DUCT SIZE RE: FLOOR PLAN PROVIDE INSULATED MOTOR HOUSING VIBRATION ISOLATORS (TYPICAL OF 4) MOUNT MOTOR & ACCESS DOOR PARALLEL WITH FLOOR jr: LFAN CABINET CEILING 6 INLINE EXHAUST FAN DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 02/20/2015 OF•E��s+i SEAN M. RODRIGUEZ ❑O LIQ LSU ENG/NEER //V G 5656 S. Staples. Suite 360 Corpus Christi, TX 78413 P: (361)852-2727 F: (361)852-2922 Texas Firm Registration No. F-005318 13162 >- m 0 z z 0 co w CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. MB -3 DATE: 02/20/15 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 2 0 cov co 42-1111 D Q III w OH U `F- O U Capital Programs 0 z Z 0 w Cn LU 1-0 zQ LU U UQ Cn 0 z- LU F ' w w Cn LJ ED Q 0 06 Q m LU `J w W U CI) z w w C!) Ct J Q 0 J Q U z Q w SHEET 64 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 E N) tri 1 to co 3 oN a of 1 .-N t0 Nrnr 11 II 1 11 11 11 11 1 • DEMOLITION SCOPE: CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF ALL EXISTING PLUMBING FIXTURES; GAS WATER HEATER, WATER CLOSETS, LAVATORIES, ETC. FROM THIS BUILDING. ROOF VENTS SHALL BE REMOVED AND OPENINGS SEALED WITH ALUMINUM CAP FLASHING. OPENINGS SHALL BE SEALED AIR AND WATER TIGHT WITH AN APPROVED MATERIAL. REFER TO NEW PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN. 1 T ., 1 1 L__J LL n r 7 1 I 4 4' 1 11 11 11 11 — 1 Il— i 1 11 II II 1 11 PLUMBING DEMOLITION PLAN 65 65/ SCALE: va•= r -n.. 65 65) SCALE: 1/4"= 1'-0" r D z GENERAL PLUMBING NOTES: 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS AT THE JOB SITE BEFORE COMMENCING ANY PHASE OF THE WORK. ADJUSTMENTS FOR FIT AND COORDINATION SHALL BE MADE AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY CONFLICTS, DISCREPANCIES OR OMISSIONS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF THE CONTRACT WORK. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW ALL ARCHITECTURAL, CIVIL, MECHANICAL & STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR ANY ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE HIS WORK WITH OTHER TRADES. 4. SEAL ALL WALL, ROOF, AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS WITH UL LISTED FIRE SEALANT. 5. REMOVE AND CAP ABOVE CEILING LEVEL ALL DOMESTIC WATER AND VENT PIPING LOCATED IN WALLS THAT ARE TO BE DEMOLISH. PLUMBING KEYED NOTES • EXISTING DOMESTIC WATER VALVE AT THIS APPROXIMATE LOCATION TO REMAIN. FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION. • ALL EXISTING SANITARY IN BUILDING TO BE ABANDON. FIELD LOCATE SANITARY ENTRANCE TO BUILDING. FILL ALL ABANDON SANITARY LINE WITH A SLURRY CEMENT. FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION AND METHODS WITH OWNER/ ARCHITECT. • EXISTING NATURAL GAS METER TO BE REMOVED. CAP EXISTING LINE. PROVIDE INDICATION OF EXISTING GAS LINE BELOW. FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION. • EXISTING WATER ENTRANCE TO REMAIN. CAP EXISTING LINE ABOVE CEILING. FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION. REFER TO NEW PLUMBING PLAN FOR CONTINUATION TO NEW PLUMBING FIXTURES. L ❑ ❑ LJ 2/20/2015 OF. T.Xgs11+ to ,Acr SEAN M. RODRIGUEZ..j •96478 • . Y� i N RG ENG/NEER //VC 58.513 S. Staples, Suits 380 Corpus Christi, TX 78413 P: (381)852-2727 F: (381)852-2922 Texas Firm RegishaUoa No. F-005318 13162 CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. PA -1 DATE: 02/20/15 DESCRIPTION 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY 0 (V w 1- CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com w 1- 0 REVISION NO. DESCRIPTION U Capital Programs r w 0 etw z¢ w U Q CJS0 w Ct D C V N Q 06 p m m LU J H 0 I— U U O z � zw F-0 m LU ca J 0 REVISION NO. SHEET 65 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 F7 3 in co of N 0 a) I f N c0 0) M EWC1 es 1 3"FD1 — 2"V HD1 5 7 1. WC1 r 2"V w1 3"SS 4 3"SS 3"VTR 10 / / / / / 2"SS 3"FD1 O D \ LV11, MEN'S TOILET RM. 0 \ \."". \ -;: : 3"V —4"SS- 3"SS 11 WOMEN'S TOILET RM. AA 107 :0: 3"FD1 LV1 AA106 FLOW: 39.5 D.F.0 4"SS®1 %SLOPE —S 2 ENLAREGED PLUMBING DWV PLAN P2 NFH B1 P21 SCALE: 1/2"= 1'-0" EWC1 a ® EWH1 3/4"CW 0 1 4 9 3/4"CW 3/4"CW 3/4"HW&CW D TO EWH1 3/4"HW&CW DOWN TO MOP SINK cr- WC1 1 "CW DOWN TO WATER CLOSETS 3/4"HW WC1 1 /2"CW MEN S TOILET RM. AA106 1 MV1 0 0 0 LV1/ 1 MV1 1-1/2"CW 3/4"CW L, WOMEN'S TOILET RM. -a AA107 0 1 1-1/2"CW SEE DETAIL 1 SHT 66 FOR CONTINUATION S (.6 3 \ ENLARGED PLUMBING WATER PLAN 66 SCALE: 1/2"= 1'-0" IN MI MI i 4 1 JANITOR CLOSE AA105 1 1 0 RETAIL STORAGE AA104 TENNIS PRO AA 102 2"VTR 1- MEN S TOILET RM. T AA106 0 4 u C WOMEN'S TOILET RM. AA107 ■ ■ DCO 1 S ‘Qt( RE: ENLARGED PLANS THIS SHEET STAFF/CHECK-IN AA 103 RETAIL AREA AA100 a 3"FD1 MAINTENANCE STORAGE AA101 3/4"CW a DEMAND: 46W.S.F.0 45.51 GPM 3"SS FLOW: 39.5 D.F.0 4"SS 1 %SLOPE 4"SS LSD 1AI 1 NFHBI EXIST CW --"C 1-1/2"CW UNDERGROUND PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN 66 66 SCALE: 1/4"= 1'-0" r r Z GENERAL PLUMBING NOTES: 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS AT THE JOB SITE BEFORE COMMENCING ANY PHASE OF THE WORK. ADJUSTMENTS FOR FIT AND COORDINATION SHALL BE MADE AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY CONFLICTS, DISCREPANCIES OR OMISSIONS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF THE CONTRACT WORK. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW ALL ARCHITECTURAL, CIVIL, MECHANICAL & STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR ANY ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE HIS WORK WITH OTHER TRADES. 4. SEAL ALL WALL, ROOF, AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS WITH UL LISTED FIRE SEALANT. 5. REMOVE AND CAP ABOVE CEILING LEVEL ALL DOMESTIC WATER AND VENT PIPING LOCATED IN WALLS THAT ARE TO BE DEMOLISH. PLUMBING KEYED NOTES E1 NEW 4"SS TO TIE INTO EXISTING SANITARY SEWER. CUT AND PATCH FLOOR AS REQUIRED. FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION, FLOW DIRECTION AND INVERT OF SANITARY LINE, ADJUST ROUTING ACCORDINGLY. • NEW COLD WATER TO TIE INTO EXISTING DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY AT THIS APPROXIMATE LOCATION. FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION. • EXISTING WATER SHUT—OFF VALVE TO REMAIN. ® PROVIDE 1/2" LINE TO FLOOR DRAIN TRAP PRIMER FROM LAVATORY TAIL PIECE TRAP PRIMER CONNECTION. REFER TO DETAIL. • HUB DRAIN TO CONNECT ABOVE MOP SINK P—TRAP AS IN—DIRECT WASTE. REFER TO PLUMBING DETAIL. • ROUTE ICE MACHINE DRAIN AND ICE BIN DRAIN TO FLOOR DRAIN. FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF ICE MACHINE. REFER TO PLUMBING DETAIL. • ROUTE WATER HEATER T&P AND PAN DRAIN TO HUB DRAIN. TERMINATE AT HUB DRAIN WITH PROPER AIR GAP. • PROVIDE NEW ELECTRIC WATER HEATER. MOUNT HEATER ABOVE MOP SINK. REFER TO PLUMBING DETAIL. FIELD COORDINATE EXACT MOUNTING LOCATION. INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION. • PROVIDE WATER CONNECTION TO ICE MACHINE. FIELD VERIFY EXACT SUPPLY SIZE REQUIRED. INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION. 10 REUSE EXISTING VENT THROUGH ROOF PENETRATION. 11 INSTALL NEW DOMESTIC WATER SHUT OFF VALVE IN THIS APPROXIMATE LOCATION. INSTALL IN CAST IRON VALVE BOX AND COVER. U❑ ❑EJ 2/20/2015 sP.................... • to SEAN M. RODRIGUEZj e, . 96478 .•fte r �`, ENG/NEER//VG 5656 S. Staples, Suite 360 Corpus Christi, TX 78413 P: (381)852-2727 F: (361)852-2922 Texas Firm Registration No. F-005318 13162 >- m CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. PA -2 DATE: 02/20/15 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY 0 (V w 1- D CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 0 0 0 3U w 1- 0 REVISION NO. DESCRIPTION U >— w 0 (1) LLJ LLJ U CO LLJ LLJ C!) D Ct CO LLJ 0 00 LL co 0 REVISION NO. SHEET 66 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 a N) Cri 3 oN of a I N V) N M PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE PLAN MARK MINIMUM ROUGH -IN SIZES DESCRIPTION WST & VENT DRAIN CW HW WATER CLOSET WC1 FLOOR MOUNT) FLUSH VALVE) DOMESTIC HOT & COLD WATER ABOVE GRADE 4" 2" 4" 1" ---- KOHLER No. K-4302 "HIGHCREST", FLOOR MOUNT, WHITE V.C. ELONGATED SIPHON JET (1.6 GPF) BOWL WITH 1-1/2" TOP SPUD, BEMIS No. 1955CWH WHITE OPEN FRONT SEAT LESS COVER AND SLOAN "ROYAL" 111 FLUSH VALVE. FIXTURE MUST MEET ADA/TDLR. ------ VENT PIPING LAVATORY LV1 (WALL HUNG) -SD- 2" 1-1/2" 1-1/4" 1/2" 1/2" KOHLER No. K-2005 "KINGSTON" WALL MOUNTED WHITE V.C. LAVATORY WITH FRONT OVERFLOW. FAUCET SHALL BE SINGLE LEVER OPERATED ZURN No. Z7440 -VP -CST CHROME PLATE FINISH FAUCET, 2.0 GPM VANDAL RESISTANT AERATOR, REPLACEABLE CERAMIC DISC CARTRIDGE, FIXED GRID DRAIN STRAINER, SEMI CAST BRASS OFFSET TAILPIECE AND P -TRAP WITH C.O. STOPS AND SUPPLIES. PROVIDE TRUEBRO FACTORY CUT LAV SHIELD No. 2018 -KO -K FOR EXPOSED PIPING. PROVIDE MIFAB MC -41 SERIES FLOOR MOUNTED CONCEALED ARM CARRIER WITH TWO UPRIGHTS. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR MOUNTING HEIGHT. 4, G ELECTRIC WATER COOLER EWC1 (BI LEVEL COOLER) 2" 1-1/2" 1-1/2" 1/2" ---- ELKAY No. EZSTL8C BARRIER -FREE, LEAD FREE, DUAL HEIGHT WALL MOUNT COOLER, 8.0 GPH CAPACITY, COOLED TO 50'F WITH 80'F AMBIENT WATER TEMP., UNIT SHALL USE 3.7 FL. AMPS. WIRED FOR 120V/10/60Hz. POWER. PROVIDE ELKAY APRON LKAPREZL UNDER UPPER UNIT. PROVIDE MIFAB FLOOR MOUNTED WATER COOLER SUPPORT SYSTEM. PROVIDE CAST BRASS P -TRAP WITH C.O., STOPS AND SUPPLIES. COLOR TO BE SELECTED BY ARCHITECT. MOUNT LOWER UNIT AT ADA HEIGHT. ELECTRIC WATER HEATER EWH ---- ---- ---- 3/4" 3/4" A.O. SMITH No. EJC -10, 10 GALLON STORAGE W/ ONE 4500 W ELEMENT. UNIT SHALL HAVE 8 GPH FIRST HR RECOVERY AT 90' F. TEMPERATURE RISE. UNIT SHALL BE RATED FOR 150PSI WORKING PRESSURE, GLASS LINED TANK, ASME TPR VALVE, 6 YEAR WARRANTY, BRASS DRAIN VALVE, AND MFG'S HEAT TRAPS. UNIT SHALL BE 208 VOLT, SINGLE PHASE. MOP SINK MS1 3" 2" 3" 1/2" 1/2" FIAT MSB -2424 MOLDED STONE 24"x24"x10" WITH AND STAINLESS STEEL CAP ON THRESHOLD MODEL E -88-M; CAULK OUTLET BRASS DRAIN WITH S.S. STRAINER. PROVIDE A KOHLER No. K8907 -RP SERVICE SINK FAUCET WITH VACUUM BREAKER HOSE END SPOUT, PAIL HOOK AND TOP REINFORCING BRACKET. PROVIDE WITH MOP HANGER BRACKET FOR UP TO 3 MOPS. FLOOR DRAIN FD1 3" 2" 3" >a ZURN No.ZN-415 CAST IRON DRAIN WITH 6" DIAMETER TYPE 'B' STRAINER AND 1/2" IPS TRAP PRIMER CONNECTION AND DEEP SEAL TRAP. PROVIDE PROSET SYSTEMS TRAP GUARD INSERT No. TG33-Z-415. NON -FREEZE HOSE BIBB NFHB ____ ____ _-__ 3/4" ---- WOODFORD MODEL #B65, AUTOMATIC DRAINING, FREEZELESS WALL HYDRANT W/ ANTI-SPHON VACUUM BREAKER ENCLOSED IN A BRASS FLUSH WALL BOX. MIXING VALVE MV2 SEE PLAN ---- ---- 1/2" 1 /2" PROVIDE WATTS THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE No. MMV-M1 WITH 1/2" INLET AND 1/2" OUTLET CONNECTIONS, INTEGRAL FILTER WASHERS ,HOT AND COLD CHECK VALVES AND CHECK STOPS, AND STAINLESS STEEL SPRINGS. SET TEMPERATURE LIMIT AT 110'F. ASSE 1070 CERTIFIED WATER HAMMER ARRESTOR WHA SEE PLAN SEE PLAN SEE PLAN ---- ---- SIOUX CHIEF MODEL 652A. TYPE I COPPER TUBE, POLY PISTON WITH TWO EPDM 0 -RINGS. INSTALL TO MANUFACTURES SPECIFICATIONS. FLOOR SINK 3"FS1 3" 2" 3" ---- ---- J.R. SMITH MODEL NO. 3150-41 INDIRECT WASTE DRAIN WITH 1/2 GRATE COVER, DOME BOTTOM STRAINER. y UNION UN I 6` THERMOMETER WELL 1. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY ELEVATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF FINISHED FLOORS AND WALLS. TRUE ALL DRAINS, ROUGH -INS AND CARRIERS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PROPOSED ELEVATIONS AND FINISHED SURFACES. 2. MOUNTING HEIGHT ELEVATION OF ALL WALL HUNG OR COUNTER MOUNTED FIXTURES SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF ROUGH -IN WORK. 3. FOR ALL FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT WITH ASSOCIATED TRIM OR COMPONENT ACCESSORIES, PROVIDE UNDER SEPARATE DIVISIONS AND REQUIRING PLUMBING CONNECTIONS; THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD COORDINATE EXACT REQUIREMENTS OF, MAKE PROVISIONS FOR, AND SUPPLY ALL MATERIALS AND LABOR FOR MAKING FINAL CONNECTIONS. 4. CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO SHOP DRAWINGS OF EQUIPMENT TO BE SUPPLIED FOR FINAL COORDINATION OF ALL ROUGH -IN OPENINGS BEFORE BEGINNING WORK. 5. ALL FIXTURE AND EQUIPMENT STUB -OUTS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A STOP VALVE. ALL FIXTURE STOPS SHALL BE SOLID BRASS, LOOSE KEY OPERATED, CHROME PLATED (WERE EXPOSED), AND FITTED TIGHT TO CHROME PLATED BRASS WALL ESCUTCHEON PLATES. SUPPLY RISERS SHALL BE TYPE "L" TUBING, CHROME PLATED. PROVIDE 1/2" FIP X 3/8" OD COMPRESSION FITTINGS FOR ALL SINKS, LAVATORIES, AND SIMILAR FIXTURES. 6. ALL P -TRAPS WITHIN THE BUILDING, ABOVE GRADE AND EXPOSED TO INSPECTION SHALL BE CHROME PLATED ADJUSTABLE, CAST BRASS WITH CLEANOUT PLUG. PROVIDE CAST SLIP NUTS AND WASHERS, 17 GAGE SEAMLESS TUBULAR BRASS DRAIN TO WALL AND WALL FLANGE. PROVIDE 1-1/2" P -TRAP FOR ALL LAVATORIES AND SIMILAR FIXTURES. PROVIDE 1-1/2" P -TRAP FOR ALL SINKS AND SIMILAR FIXTURES, MCGUIRE OR EQUAL 7. ALL ROUGH -IN OPENINGS SHALL BE FITTED WITH CHROME PLATED, WROUGHT BRASS DEEP BELL OR BOX ESCUTCHEON PLATES FITTED TIGHT TO PIPE AND FLUSH TO WALL. STEEL ESCUTCHEON PLATES ARE NOT ACCEPTED. 8. ALL EXPOSED BRASS SHALL BE CHROME PLATED. 9. ALL HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBLE FIXTURES SHALL BE OF APPROVED TYPES AND WITH REQUIRED CONTROLS INSTALLED TO HEIGHTS AND CLEARANCES, AS PRESCRIBED BY THE AMERICAN DISABILITIES ACT (ADA) AND THE TEXAS ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS (TAS). FIXTURES SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL FEDERAL, STATE, AND LOCAL ACCESSIBILITY CODE REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE FIXTURES WITH DEPTHS AT MAXIMUM PERMITTED AND AVAILABLE FOR INTENDED FIXTURE USE. 10. INSULATE ALL EXPOSED WATER AND DRAIN LINES ON ADA/TAS ACCESSIBLE LAVATORIES AND SINKS WITH MCGUIRE PRO WRAP OR EQUAL. PROVIDE OFFSET DRAIN FITTINGS WHERE REQUIRED TO PROVIDE MINIMUM CLEARANCES. 11. ALL ADA/TAS SINKS SHALL BE STAMPED WITH DRAIN OUTLET AT THE REAR OF THE BOWL. 12. PLUMBING FIXTURES SHALL BE OF WATER CONSERVATION TYPE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SENATE BILL 587 FOR WATER SAVING PERFORMANCE. LAVATORY AND SINK FAUCETS SHALL INCLUDE 2.2 GPM FLOW CONTROL. 13. ORIENT ADA/TAS WATER CLOSET FLUSH VALVE WITH OPERATOR ON LARGE SIDE OF ENCLOSURE AND BELOW GRAB BARS. 14. SEAL ALL SPACES BETWEEN PLUMBING FIXTURES AND MOUNTING SURFACES WITH WHITE LATEX CAULK WIPED SMOOTH AND FLUSH WITH FIXTURE. 15. FLOOR DRAINS SHALL BE INSTALLED AT LOW POINTS OF UNIFORMLY SLOPED FLOOR. CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD COORDINATE WITH STRUCTURAL TO INSURE FLOORS ARE UNIFORMLY SLOPED ACROSS ENTIRE TOILET ROOMS OR OVER AS WIDE AN AREA AS PRACTICAL FOR OPEN AREA FLOOR DRAINS. CONVEX FLOOR SLOPE IN THE IMMEDIATE VICINITY OF THE FLOOR DRAIN IS NOT ACCEPTABLE. 16. EQUIVALENT MANUFACTURES OF CHINA FIXTURES ARE KOHLER, ELJIER, AND CRANE. EQUIVALENT MANUFACTURES OF STAINLESS FIXTURES ARE JUST AND ELKAY. 17. WATER HEATER SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH CODE APPROVED VACUUM BREAKER AND BRASS ASME TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE. ROUTE TPR DRAIN LINE FULL SIZED TO EXTERIOR OF BUILDING AND TERMINATE 6" ABOVE FINISHED GRADE, OR AS INDICATED ON PLANS. 18. ROOF PENETRATIONS SHALL BE DONE IN STRICT COMPLIANCE WITH THE ARCHITECTS SPECIFICATIONS AND SHALL BE LEAK PROOF. 19. FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS AND LOCATION OF STUB OUTS. NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF ANY DISCREPANCIES IMMEDIATELY WHICH MAY AFFECT THE INTENDED DESIGN. 20. ALL PLUMBING WORK SHALL BE DONE IN STRICT COMPLIANCE WITH ALL STATE AND LOCAL CODES. 21. THE PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL GUARANTEE THE COMPLETE PLUMBING SYSTEM TO BE A PERIOD OF 12 MONTHS FROM DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE. 22. ALL WATER HEATER SUPPLY CONNECTIONS SHALL HAVE HEAT TRAP NIPPLE CONNECTIONS. RECIRCULATION SYSTEM IS PROVIDED. FREE OF DEFECTS IN WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS FOR HEAT TRAP NIPPLES NOT REQUIRED IF HOT WATER PLUMBING PIPE MATERIALS SCHEDULE PIPING SYSTEM PIPING MATERIAL SANITARY SEWER BELOW GRADE SCHEDULE 40 DWV PVC SANITARY DRAIN AND VENTS ABOVE GRADE SCHEDULE 40 DWV PVC* DOMESTIC HOT & COLD WATER BELOW GRADE COPPER, TYPE "K" SOFT DOMESTIC HOT & COLD WATER ABOVE GRADE COPPER, TYPE "L" HARD DRAWN HOT WATER PIPE INSULATION 1" RIGID FIBER GLASS GAS PIPING SCHEDULE 40 BLACK STEEL *SCHEDULE 40 DWV PVC SHALL NOT BE USED IN RETURN AIR PLENUMS. WHERE CEILING PLENUMS ARE USED FOR RETURN AIR, CONTRACTOR SHALL ONLY USE BELL AND SPIGOT SERVICE WEIGHT CAST IRON PIPE. PLUMBING LEGEND DISREGARD LEGEND ITEMS NOT INDICATED ON DRAWINGS SYMBOL DESCRIPTION ABBR. SOIL OR WASTE PIPING B.G. WST - SOIL OR WASTE PIPING A.G. WST -GW- GREASE WASTE PIPING GW ------ VENT PIPING V -SD- STORM DRAIN PIPING SD -OD- OVERFLOW STORM DRAIN PIPING OD GAS LINE G - G- FIRE OR SPRINKLER LINE F - F- DOMESTIC COLD WATER CW DOMESTIC HOT WATER HW - DOMESTIC HOT WATER RETURN HWR - TEMPERED DOMESTIC HOT WATER TW -TW - da GATE VALVE GV da GLOBE VALVE GLV >a BALL VALVE BV CHECK VALVE CKV -N. 4 BALANCING VALVE BAV � BUTTERFLY VALVE BTV PLUG VALVE PLV 'i' PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE PRV oA PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE T&P STRAINER STR y UNION UN I 6` THERMOMETER WELL TW PRESSURE GAUGE PG THERMOMETER THRM 1-1 CONDENSATE OR INDIRECT DRAIN D D 3 BRANCH CONNECTION, TOP -- BRANCH CONNECTION, BOTTOM -- ELBOW UP -- 0 ELBOW DOWN -- I0 FLOOR CLEANOUT (INTERIOR) FCO 0 CLEANOUT AT GRADE (EXTERIOR) COG ,J WALL CLEANOUT WCO �O FLOOR DRAIN FD FLOOR SINK FS h -{; HOSE BIBB HB 11 WALL HYDRANT WH NEW TO EXISTING PIPE CONNECTION -- H P X PLUMBING RISER IDENTIFICATION P/X DS DOWNSPOUT RISER IDENTIFICATION DS/X FIRE RISER IDENTIFICATION F/X © ABBREVIATIONS ABBR. ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AFF ACCESS PANEL AP BELOW FINISHED FLOOR BFF BOTTOM OF PIPE BOP INDIRECT DRAIN D FINISHED FIN FLOOR FLR - INVERT ELEVATION INV. EL. NORMALLY CLOSED NC SOFT WATER SW TRAP PRIMER TP TYPICAL TYP VENT THRU ROOF VTR 2/20/2015 r �E OF TE�s1+ AiAre *ifi SEAN M. RODRIGUEZ j ) 96478 SwN�'�1feb L� U ENG/NEER //V G 5656 S. Staples, Suite 360 Corpus Christi, TX 78413 P: (361)852-2727 F: (361)852-2922 Texas Firm Registration No. F-005318 1 31 62 0 z z 0 0) w DESCRIPTION REVISION NO. DATE CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. PA -3 DATE: 02/20/15 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY 0 N Lu 1- CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 E 0 U U 0 U 33 U Capital Programs cn LU LU w I- 0 zQ U Q OD 0 z � w cD IF LL w CID (NJ Ct 'ED cNj J Q Qz Oso mm Lu LU LLJ U C/) w w C/) LU 0 w U LU x LL z co D 0 SHEET 67 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 VACUUM RELIEF.7 VALVEf FIELD FABRICATED /HEAT TRAPS OR LAVATORY AS SPECIFIED 11 PDI SIZE "A" NSTALL PER PDI STANDARDS AND MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS HOT OR COLD WATER SUPPLY IF HORIZONTAL BRANCH IS LESS THAN 20' LONG, PROVIDE ONE WHA AT END OF LINE IF BRANCH IS GREATER THAN 20' LONG, PROVIDE ANOTHER WHA IN MIDDLE, EACH SIZED FOR HALF THE FIXTURE UNITS —� PROVIDE COMPRESSION AT SHALL 2" EACH A SECTION OF HIGH STRENGTH INSULATION EACH HANGER POINT. INSULATION BE HALF ROUND AND EXTEND BEYOND GALVANIZED SHIELD WAY. r 1" MIN. ,r GALVANIZED Y IRON ROD &AHANGER INTEGRAL HEAT TRAP i FITTINGS S > - S < IIF -111 �A =UNION (TYP.) SINGLE FIXTURE ° ° ° ° ° MULTIPLE FIXTURES jl A.S.M.E. RATED TEMPERATURE AND RELIEF jPRESSURE FACE OF WALL -gra all " PDI PIPE FIXTURE SIOUX CHEIF FIXTURE UNIT TABULATION J.R. SMITH FIGURE 2698 RUN DIRECT TO WALL, i PIPE J 1 INS ATI N J UL 0 16 GAUGE GALVANIZED SHEET SHIELD U -CLAMP I OR CLAMP L VALVE EWH 1 o / / /7' / / // SIZE SIZE UNIT LOAD MODEL No. ' FIXTURE COLD HOT WATER SAVER TRAP KEEP COPPER TUBING PRIMER (TYPE "K") SHORT AS POSSIBLE. A 1/2" 1-11 652-A VALVE WATER CLOSET 10 -- B 3 4" /-- 12-32 653-8 TANK WATER CLOSET 5 FINISHED WALL/FLOOR �J % / / � _ C 1" 33-60 654 C URINAL 5CONDUIT COORDINATE FLOOR DRAIN THA - WI ARCHI- TECTURAL PLANS TANK DRAIN �� /���j �LOCATION D 1-1 /4" 61-113 655-D LAVATORY/SINK 1.5 1.5 E 1-1 /2" 114-154 656-E JANITOR'S SINK 3 3 I I 18 GAL. GALV. �'� F 2" 154-330 657-F SHOWER/BATHTUB 2 2 METAL / " - , I el" "� ��„�� 1�1L DRAIN PAN 3/4" TREATED Y - '•a:: ""' .. � . '.Q. .. •: E triN) to c" 3 oN a of 1 .-N t— NM =L 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 L H / II y 1111 II 1111 II ( , 1111 11 1J 11 .-- \ \ /' \ / I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LL_J_I--1_l_L_L�J r L r L TTS-�T-I-STT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 J J II �\ 11 II 1 h / \ 1 L__�I 0 DEMOLITION SCOPE: CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF ALL EXISTING PLUMBING FIXTURES INDICATED HERE; WATER HEATER, WATER CLOSETS, LAVATORIES, ETC. FROM THIS BUILDING. ROOF VENTS SHALL BE REUSED WHERE POSSIBLE. EXISTING OPENINGS SHALL BE SEALED AIR AND WATER TIGHT WITH AN APPROVED MATERIAL. REFER TO NEW PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN. /I WH \iii // 1 /II / CI 1 I I I I LJ r -I I ---ll----ll-----1 l! J 1 STORAGE PLUMBING DEMOLITION PLAN SCALE: 114"= 1'-0" r z GENERAL PLUMBING NOTES: 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS AT THE JOB SITE BEFORE COMMENCING ANY PHASE OF THE WORK. ADJUSTMENTS FOR FIT AND COORDINATION SHALL BE MADE AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY CONFLICTS, DISCREPANCIES OR OMISSIONS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF THE CONTRACT WORK. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW ALL ARCHITECTURAL, CIVIL, MECHANICAL & STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR ANY ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE HIS WORK WITH OTHER TRADES. 4. SEAL ALL WALL, ROOF, AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS WITH UL LISTED FIRE SEALANT. 5. REMOVE AND CAP ABOVE CEILING LEVEL ALL DOMESTIC WATER AND VENT PIPING LOCATED IN WALLS THAT ARE TO BE DEMOLISH. PLUMBING KEYED NOTES E1 PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW URINAL AND CARRIER. ADJUST EXISTING DWV AND WATER ROUGH -IN TO ACCOMMODATE NEW FIXTURE. PATCH AND REPAIR FLOOR AND WALL TO MATCH EXISTING. ❑2 RELOCATE EXISTING WATER CLOSET. ADJUST EXISTING DWV AND WATER ROUGH -IN TO ACCOMMODATE NEW FIXTURE. PATCH AND REPAIR FLOOR AND WALL TO MATCH EXISTING. ❑3 EXISTING WATER HEATER TO REMAIN. E EXISTING MOP SINK TO REMAIN. ❑5 PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW LAVATORY AND CARRIER. ADJUST EXISTING DWV AND WATER ROUGH -IN TO ACCOMMODATE NEW FIXTURE. PATCH AND REPAIR FLOOR AND WALL TO MATCH EXISTING. E EXISTING WATER CLOSET TO REMAIN REPLACE EXISTING SEAT WITH A BEMIS MODEL 1955 CUH AND REPLACE EXISTING FLUSH VALVE WITH SLOAN "ROYAL" 1 1 1, ADA COMPLIANT VALVE. g 1 —1-_L-L-I--L--_L-S 1-- 1 1 I\ / v D 3"SD1 3"SD1 3"SD1 Ala IMO 1 I- 1 _J I X'1 - T-77 i •1 1 1 1 J 1 1 11 1 EXISTING LV LV1 EXISTING WC --� Ir --7 WH \/ /11 /11 / C L== EXISTING ® MOP SINK emenweremere K,,,,_____ EXISTING WC 3"SD1 1 3"SD1 v JO, �2 WC1 u WC1 LJ EXISTING LV 1 \/m\/rill \/11 Y Yin I 11 III 1 211._ __JI / _ za / 2 PLUMBING DWV PLAN 69 69 SCALE: 1/4"= 1'-0" �Z Z oLJ ❑ LJ 2/20/2015 — OFrrl r �p .......F{g s�1 � SEAN M. RODRIGUEZ /� _ 96478 . Y� ..i /41 Spr _N R ENG/NEER /NC 5856 S. Staples, Suits 380 Corpus Christi, TX 78413 P: (381)852-2727 F: (381)852-2922 Texas Firm RegishaUoa No. F-005318 13162 CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. PB -1 DATE: 02/20/15 DESCRIPTION } m 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY 0 (V Lu 1- CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com w Q 0 REVISION NO. DESCRIPTION 0 (1) w �II OLLI H U 4- 0 U ›- Capital Programs Lu 0 (n ww z¢ U Q U3 0 W m uj W Ct o CV Q o2S 0 m m LU w CL Z Z U — 0 W Liu 0 W U, U) CC) J D J 0 REVISION NO. SHEET 69 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 a to N) Cri 3 oN of a I V) N M PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE PLAN MARK MINIMUM ROUGH -IN SIZES DESCRIPTION WST & VENT DRAIN CW HW WATER CLOSET WC1 FLOOR MOUNT) FLUSH VALVE) DOMESTIC HOT & COLD WATER ABOVE GRADE 4" 2" 4" 1" ---- KOHLER No. K-4302 "HIGHCREST", FLOOR MOUNT, WHITE V.C. ELONGATED SIPHON JET (1.6 GPF) BOWL WITH 1-1/2" TOP SPUD, BEMIS No. 1955CWH WHITE OPEN FRONT SEAT LESS COVER AND SLOAN "ROYAL" 111 FLUSH VALVE. FIXTURE MUST MEET ADA/TDLR. ------ VENT PIPING LAVATORY LV1 (WALL HUNG) -SD- 2" 1-1/2" 1-1/4" 1/2" 1/2" KOHLER No. K-2005 "KINGSTON" WALL MOUNTED WHITE V.C. LAVATORY WITH FRONT OVERFLOW. FAUCET SHALL BE SINGLE LEVER OPERATED ZURN No. Z7440 -VP -CST CHROME PLATE FINISH FAUCET, 2.0 GPM VANDAL RESISTANT AERATOR, REPLACEABLE CERAMIC DISC CARTRIDGE, FIXED GRID DRAIN STRAINER, SEMI CAST BRASS OFFSET TAILPIECE AND P -TRAP WITH C.O. STOPS AND SUPPLIES. PROVIDE TRUEBRO FACTORY CUT LAV SHIELD No. 2018 -KO -K FOR EXPOSED PIPING. PROVIDE MIFAB MC -41 SERIES FLOOR MOUNTED CONCEALED ARM CARRIER WITH TWO UPRIGHTS. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR MOUNTING HEIGHT. 4, G ELECTRIC WATER COOLER EWC1 (BI LEVEL COOLER) 2" 1-1/2" 1-1/2" 1/2" ---- ELKAY No. EZSTL8C BARRIER -FREE, LEAD FREE, DUAL HEIGHT WALL MOUNT COOLER, 8.0 GPH CAPACITY, COOLED TO 50'F WITH 80'F AMBIENT WATER TEMP., UNIT SHALL USE 3.7 FL. AMPS. WIRED FOR 120V/10/60Hz. POWER. PROVIDE ELKAY APRON LKAPREZL UNDER UPPER UNIT. PROVIDE MIFAB FLOOR MOUNTED WATER COOLER SUPPORT SYSTEM. PROVIDE CAST BRASS P -TRAP WITH C.O., STOPS AND SUPPLIES. COLOR TO BE SELECTED BY ARCHITECT. MOUNT LOWER UNIT AT ADA HEIGHT. ELECTRIC WATER HEATER EWH ---- ---- ---- 3/4" 3/4" A.O. SMITH No. EJC -10, 10 GALLON STORAGE W/ ONE 4500 W ELEMENT. UNIT SHALL HAVE 8 GPH FIRST HR RECOVERY AT 90' F. TEMPERATURE RISE. UNIT SHALL BE RATED FOR 150PSI WORKING PRESSURE, GLASS LINED TANK, ASME TPR VALVE, 6 YEAR WARRANTY, BRASS DRAIN VALVE, AND MFG'S HEAT TRAPS. UNIT SHALL BE 208 VOLT, SINGLE PHASE. MOP SINK MS1 3" 2" 3" 1/2" 1/2" FIAT MSB -2424 MOLDED STONE 24"x24"x10" WITH AND STAINLESS STEEL CAP ON THRESHOLD MODEL E -88-M; CAULK OUTLET BRASS DRAIN WITH S.S. STRAINER. PROVIDE A KOHLER No. K8907 -RP SERVICE SINK FAUCET WITH VACUUM BREAKER HOSE END SPOUT, PAIL HOOK AND TOP REINFORCING BRACKET. PROVIDE WITH MOP HANGER BRACKET FOR UP TO 3 MOPS. FLOOR DRAIN FD1 3" 2" 3" >a ZURN No.ZN-415 CAST IRON DRAIN WITH 6" DIAMETER TYPE 'B' STRAINER AND 1/2" IPS TRAP PRIMER CONNECTION AND DEEP SEAL TRAP. PROVIDE PROSET SYSTEMS TRAP GUARD INSERT No. TG33-Z-415. NON -FREEZE HOSE BIBB NFHB ____ ____ _-__ 3/4" ---- WOODFORD MODEL #B65, AUTOMATIC DRAINING, FREEZELESS WALL HYDRANT W/ ANTI-SPHON VACUUM BREAKER ENCLOSED IN A BRASS FLUSH WALL BOX. MIXING VALVE MV2 SEE PLAN ---- ---- 1/2" 1/2" PROVIDE WATTS THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE No. MMV-M1 WITH 1/2" INLET AND 1/2" OUTLET CONNECTIONS, INTEGRAL FILTER WASHERS ,HOT AND COLD CHECK VALVES AND CHECK STOPS, AND STAINLESS STEEL SPRINGS. SET TEMPERATURE LIMIT AT 110'F. ASSE 1070 CERTIFIED WATER HAMMER ARRESTOR WHA SEE PLAN SEE PLAN SEE PLAN ---- ---- SIOUX CHIEF MODEL 652A. TYPE I COPPER TUBE, POLY PISTON WITH TWO EPDM 0 -RINGS. INSTALL TO MANUFACTURES SPECIFICATIONS. FLOOR SINK 3"FS1 3" 2" 3" ---- ---- J.R. SMITH MODEL NO. 3150-41 INDIRECT WASTE DRAIN WITH 1/2 GRATE COVER, DOME BOTTOM STRAINER. y UNION UN I 6` THERMOMETER WELL 1. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY ELEVATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF FINISHED FLOORS AND WALLS. TRUE ALL DRAINS, ROUGH -INS AND CARRIERS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PROPOSED ELEVATIONS AND FINISHED SURFACES. 2. MOUNTING HEIGHT ELEVATION OF ALL WALL HUNG OR COUNTER MOUNTED FIXTURES SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF ROUGH -IN WORK. 3. FOR ALL FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT WITH ASSOCIATED TRIM OR COMPONENT ACCESSORIES, PROVIDE UNDER SEPARATE DIVISIONS AND REQUIRING PLUMBING CONNECTIONS; THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD COORDINATE EXACT REQUIREMENTS OF, MAKE PROVISIONS FOR, AND SUPPLY ALL MATERIALS AND LABOR FOR MAKING FINAL CONNECTIONS. 4. CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO SHOP DRAWINGS OF EQUIPMENT TO BE SUPPLIED FOR FINAL COORDINATION OF ALL ROUGH -IN OPENINGS BEFORE BEGINNING WORK. 5. ALL FIXTURE AND EQUIPMENT STUB -OUTS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A STOP VALVE. ALL FIXTURE STOPS SHALL BE SOLID BRASS, LOOSE KEY OPERATED, CHROME PLATED (WERE EXPOSED), AND FITTED TIGHT TO CHROME PLATED BRASS WALL ESCUTCHEON PLATES. SUPPLY RISERS SHALL BE TYPE "L" TUBING, CHROME PLATED. PROVIDE 1/2" FIP X 3/8" OD COMPRESSION FITTINGS FOR ALL SINKS, LAVATORIES, AND SIMILAR FIXTURES. 6. ALL P -TRAPS WITHIN THE BUILDING, ABOVE GRADE AND EXPOSED TO INSPECTION SHALL BE CHROME PLATED ADJUSTABLE, CAST BRASS WITH CLEANOUT PLUG. PROVIDE CAST SLIP NUTS AND WASHERS, 17 GAGE SEAMLESS TUBULAR BRASS DRAIN TO WALL AND WALL FLANGE. PROVIDE 1-1/2" P -TRAP FOR ALL LAVATORIES AND SIMILAR FIXTURES. PROVIDE 1-1/2" P -TRAP FOR ALL SINKS AND SIMILAR FIXTURES, MCGUIRE OR EQUAL 7. ALL ROUGH -IN OPENINGS SHALL BE FITTED WITH CHROME PLATED, WROUGHT BRASS DEEP BELL OR BOX ESCUTCHEON PLATES FITTED TIGHT TO PIPE AND FLUSH TO WALL. STEEL ESCUTCHEON PLATES ARE NOT ACCEPTED. 8. ALL EXPOSED BRASS SHALL BE CHROME PLATED. 9. ALL HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBLE FIXTURES SHALL BE OF APPROVED TYPES AND WITH REQUIRED CONTROLS INSTALLED TO HEIGHTS AND CLEARANCES, AS PRESCRIBED BY THE AMERICAN DISABILITIES ACT (ADA) AND THE TEXAS ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS (TAS). FIXTURES SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL FEDERAL, STATE, AND LOCAL ACCESSIBILITY CODE REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE FIXTURES WITH DEPTHS AT MAXIMUM PERMITTED AND AVAILABLE FOR INTENDED FIXTURE USE. 10. INSULATE ALL EXPOSED WATER AND DRAIN LINES ON ADA/TAS ACCESSIBLE LAVATORIES AND SINKS WITH MCGUIRE PRO WRAP OR EQUAL. PROVIDE OFFSET DRAIN FITTINGS WHERE REQUIRED TO PROVIDE MINIMUM CLEARANCES. 11. ALL ADA/TAS SINKS SHALL BE STAMPED WITH DRAIN OUTLET AT THE REAR OF THE BOWL. 12. PLUMBING FIXTURES SHALL BE OF WATER CONSERVATION TYPE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SENATE BILL 587 FOR WATER SAVING PERFORMANCE. LAVATORY AND SINK FAUCETS SHALL INCLUDE 2.2 GPM FLOW CONTROL. 13. ORIENT ADA/TAS WATER CLOSET FLUSH VALVE WITH OPERATOR ON LARGE SIDE OF ENCLOSURE AND BELOW GRAB BARS. 14. SEAL ALL SPACES BETWEEN PLUMBING FIXTURES AND MOUNTING SURFACES WITH WHITE LATEX CAULK WIPED SMOOTH AND FLUSH WITH FIXTURE. 15. FLOOR DRAINS SHALL BE INSTALLED AT LOW POINTS OF UNIFORMLY SLOPED FLOOR. CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD COORDINATE WITH STRUCTURAL TO INSURE FLOORS ARE UNIFORMLY SLOPED ACROSS ENTIRE TOILET ROOMS OR OVER AS WIDE AN AREA AS PRACTICAL FOR OPEN AREA FLOOR DRAINS. CONVEX FLOOR SLOPE IN THE IMMEDIATE VICINITY OF THE FLOOR DRAIN IS NOT ACCEPTABLE. 16. EQUIVALENT MANUFACTURES OF CHINA FIXTURES ARE KOHLER, ELJIER, AND CRANE. EQUIVALENT MANUFACTURES OF STAINLESS FIXTURES ARE JUST AND ELKAY. 17. WATER HEATER SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH CODE APPROVED VACUUM BREAKER AND BRASS ASME TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE. ROUTE TPR DRAIN LINE FULL SIZED TO EXTERIOR OF BUILDING AND TERMINATE 6" ABOVE FINISHED GRADE, OR AS INDICATED ON PLANS. 18. ROOF PENETRATIONS SHALL BE DONE IN STRICT COMPLIANCE WITH THE ARCHITECTS SPECIFICATIONS AND SHALL BE LEAK PROOF. 19. FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS AND LOCATION OF STUB OUTS. NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF ANY DISCREPANCIES IMMEDIATELY WHICH MAY AFFECT THE INTENDED DESIGN. 20. ALL PLUMBING WORK SHALL BE DONE IN STRICT COMPLIANCE WITH ALL STATE AND LOCAL CODES. 21. THE PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL GUARANTEE THE COMPLETE PLUMBING SYSTEM TO BE A PERIOD OF 12 MONTHS FROM DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE. 22. ALL WATER HEATER SUPPLY CONNECTIONS SHALL HAVE HEAT TRAP NIPPLE CONNECTIONS. RECIRCULATION SYSTEM IS PROVIDED. FREE OF DEFECTS IN WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS FOR HEAT TRAP NIPPLES NOT REQUIRED IF HOT WATER PLUMBING PIPE MATERIALS SCHEDULE PIPING SYSTEM PIPING MATERIAL SANITARY SEWER BELOW GRADE SCHEDULE 40 DWV PVC SANITARY DRAIN AND VENTS ABOVE GRADE SCHEDULE 40 DWV PVC* DOMESTIC HOT & COLD WATER BELOW GRADE COPPER, TYPE "K" SOFT DOMESTIC HOT & COLD WATER ABOVE GRADE COPPER, TYPE "L" HARD DRAWN HOT WATER PIPE INSULATION 1" RIGID FIBER GLASS GAS PIPING SCHEDULE 40 BLACK STEEL *SCHEDULE 40 DWV PVC SHALL NOT BE USED IN RETURN AIR PLENUMS. WHERE CEILING PLENUMS ARE USED FOR RETURN AIR, CONTRACTOR SHALL ONLY USE BELL AND SPIGOT SERVICE WEIGHT CAST IRON PIPE. PLUMBING LEGEND 2/20/2015 r DISREGARD LEGEND ITEMS NOT INDICATED ON DRAWINGS SYMBOL DESCRIPTION ABBR. SOIL OR WASTE PIPING B.G. WST - SOIL OR WASTE PIPING A.G. WST -GW- GREASE WASTE PIPING GW ------ VENT PIPING V -SD- STORM DRAIN PIPING SD -OD- OVERFLOW STORM DRAIN PIPING OD GAS LINE G - G- FIRE OR SPRINKLER LINE F - F- DOMESTIC COLD WATER CW DOMESTIC HOT WATER HW - DOMESTIC HOT WATER RETURN HWR - TEMPERED DOMESTIC HOT WATER TW -TW - da GATE VALVE GV da GLOBE VALVE GLV >a BALL VALVE BV CHECK VALVE CKV 4 BALANCING VALVE BAV � BUTTERFLY VALVE BTV PLUG VALVE PLV 'i' PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE PRV oA PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE T&P STRAINER STR y UNION UN I 6` THERMOMETER WELL TW PRESSURE GAUGE PG THERMOMETER THRM 1-1 CONDENSATE OR INDIRECT DRAIN D D 3 BRANCH CONNECTION, TOP - -- BRANCH CONNECTION, BOTTOM -- III III ELBOW UP -- 0 ELBOW DOWN -- I0 FLOOR CLEANOUT (INTERIOR) FCO 0 CLEANOUT AT GRADE (EXTERIOR) COG ,J WALL CLEANOUT WCO �O FLOOR DRAIN FD FLOOR SINK FS h -{; HOSE BIBB HB 11 WALL HYDRANT WH NEW TO EXISTING PIPE CONNECTION -- H P X PLUMBING RISER IDENTIFICATION P/X DS DOWNSPOUT RISER IDENTIFICATION DS/X FIRE RISER IDENTIFICATION F/X © ABBREVIATIONS ABBR. ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AFF ACCESS PANEL AP BELOW FINISHED FLOOR BFF BOTTOM OF PIPE BOP INDIRECT DRAIN D FINISHED FIN FLOOR FLR - INVERT ELEVATION INV. EL. NORMALLY CLOSED NC SOFT WATER SW TRAP PRIMER TP TYPICAL TYP VENT THRU ROOF VTR tar OF TE4s1+ AiAre *ifi SEAN M. RODRIGUEZ j ) 96478 SwN�'�1 "'♦ L� U ENG/NEER //V G 5656 S. Staples, Suite 360 Corpus Christi, TX 78413 P: (361)852-2727 F: (361)852-2922 Texas Firm Registration No. F-005318 1 31 62 0 z z 0 0) w DESCRIPTION REVISION NO. DATE CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. PB -2 DATE: 02/20/15 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY 0 N Lu 1- CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 E 0 U U 0 U 33 2 0 co co 4.71111 Q lel W OI - U > 0 U Capital Programs cn LU 1- U zQ U Q 0 2 - LLJ cD IF W LLJ (NJ Ct 'ED cNj J Q Qz Oso mm LU Ct LLJ W U z LJJ LJJ W 0 LLJ COU LLJ LL Z co D Cl_ SHEET 70 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 VACUUM RELIEF — VALVE y. FIELD FABRICATED HEAT TRAPS OR LAVATORY AS PDI SIZE "A" 'JINSTALLPER PDI STANDARDS AND MANUFACTURER'S HOT OR COLD WATER SUPPLYINTEGRAL BRANCH IS LESS THAN 20' LONG, PROVIDE ONE WHA AT END OF LINE IF BRANCH IS GREATER THAN 20' LONG, PROVIDE ANOTHER WHA IN MIDDLE, EACH PROVIDE A SECTION COMPRESSION STRENGTH AT EACH HANGER POINT. SHALL BE HALF ROUND 2" BEYOND GALVANIZED EACH WAY. OF HIGH INSULAON INSULATION AND EXTEND SHIELD r 1" MIN. , - GALVANIZED IRON HANGER Y ROD & HANGER HEAT TRAPHORIZONTAL FITTINGS S > S < ANDS-1II INSTRUCTIONS SIZED FOR HALF THE FIXTURE UNITS SPECIFIED �� —UNION (TYP.) SINGLE FIXTURE ° ° ° • MULTIPLE FIXTURES j A.S.M.E. RATED• TEMPERATURE AND%/77//7 PRESSURE RELIEF OF WALL ���� •I ,I, % PDI PIPE FIXTURE SIOUX CHEIF FIXTURE UNIT TABULATION J.R. SMITH FIGURE 2698 RUN DIRECT TO WALL, T i INSULATION 16 GAUGE GALVANIZED SHEET SHIELD 1 U -CLAMP OR CLAMP VALVE EW'H-1 / /� / / � / SIZE SIZE UNIT LOAD MODEL No. •PIPE FIXTURE COLD HOT WATER SAVER TRAP KEEP COPPER TUBING PRIMER ems, POSSIBLE.) SHORT AS A 1/2" 1-11 652-A VALVE WATER CLOSET 10 B 3 4 " 12-32 653-B TANK WATER CLOSET 5 -- FINISHED WALL/FLOOR � //� �/ �CONDUIT / // C 1"33-60 654-C URINAL 5 COORDINATE FLOOR DRAIN LOCATION WITH ARCHI- TECTURAL PLANS TANK DRAIN / - D 1-1/4" 61-113 655-D LAVATORY SINK 1.5 1.5 E 1-1 2" 114-154 656 E JANITOR'S SINK 3 3 � 18 GAL. GALV. I _I F 2" 154-330 657-F SHOWER/BATHTUB 2 2 SHEET METAL �� li„� \ , _ DRAIN PAN 3 4" TREATED / �y \ ^ ,. .. '^ "-.7= 'Yr: %A:, :1 ..... . :..,, ,r,..,: '.: re -44.: ; . VI PC TO PROVIDE OR APPROVED X1010 AND NEVER UPSIDE SHOWN SERVICING WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS EQUIVALENT WITH PISTON ANSI #A112.26.1M CERTIFICATION. DOWN. INSTALL IN LINE ON THE DRAWINGS AND/OR PER OR REPLACEMENT, WHERE REQUIRED. BY SIOUX CHIEF, PRECISION PLUMBING PRODUCTS, WATTS AND 0 -RING CONSTRUCTION, HAVING PDI #YM- 20 , ASSE INSTALL IN HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL POSITION, BUT WITH WATER FLOW DIRECTION IF POSSIBLE. SIZE THE UNITS AS THE TABLES SHOWN ABOVE. PROVIDE ACCESS PANEL FOR 11111111/11101111/11111111 INSULATION 1 2 16 GAUGE GALVANIZED v 1/2" TRAP PRIMER INLET PIPING IN WALL AND UNDER FLOOR PLYWOOD PIPE TO FLOOR2" 0 0 GALV. ANGLE IRON SUPPORT / GALVANIZED IRON SHEET SHIELD FULLY TRAPEZE OR WRAPPED AROUND UNISTRUT INSULATION DRAIN BRACKET MOUNTED ON WALL 1 WATER HEATER DETAIL NOT TO SCALE PWHE201 2 LAVATORY TRAP PRIMER NOT TO SCALE DETAIL PPTP105 3 WATER HAMMER NOT TO SCALE ARRESTOR PPTP100 4 PIPE HANGER FOR INSUL. PIPE NOT TO SCALE PWHE203 FINISHED FLOOR 10" DIA. SEWER CAST IRON BOX YARD CLEANOUT FINISHED GRADE //l ------..,".----- ,--.--.- /� 1 �`yi _4 rr 6-1/2" OOR SINK (OR FLOOR DRAIN) INSTALL BELOW REF. ARCH. FINISHED FLOOR ELEV. AND SLOPE FLOOR DRAIN. REF: STRUCT. SEEPAGE FLANGE; PROVIDE CLAMP COLLAR AND FLASHING FOR ALL IN MEMBRANE SLABS. STAINLESS STEEL CLAMP BY ( ROOFING �_ RISE ABOVE ROOF 15" MINIMUM , IIIA 1 1 F J ..:... ;.',}::=,.-•.:.L. �. i t I1 CONTRACTOR) BOOT (BY ROOFING CONTRACTOR) ROOF (AS SPECIFIED) ROOF SEALER (BY ROOFING CONTRACTOR) METAL ROOF SYSTEM (REF. ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS) —I 11.1 CONCRETE PAD� — I I— II1-- _ —III— III 24° 1/2" TRAP REFILL INLET WHERE REQUIRED 3X4 INCREASER 4" DIAMETER _ I I III REFER TO PLANS INLET NOTE: WALL HYDRANTS SHOWN UNIT FURNISHED WITH VACUUM BREAKER WITHOUT LOCKING 7-1/2" DOOR FOR CLARITY. AND LOCKING T -KEY HANDLE. SEE FLOOR PLAN I ON SHEET CONTINUATION P 1 FOR =III- —I I FOR PIPE NOT SHOWN SIZES _I'-I' 1 IIIail i�� II - Vj,m 4" DEEP SEAL P -TRAP - MAXIMUM LENGTH FOR UNVENTED FIXTURES 1I I I I L U L I I I -III ROUTE AS INDICATED _ SIZE AS INDICATED ON DRAWING 111111H-11111111 IIIIIII I. III I III) — 5 FLOOR DRAIN DETAIL NOT TO SCALE PPWD100 6 VENT THRU ROOF NOT TO SCALE PPNA.103 7 DOUBLE CLEANOUT NOT TO SCALE PPTP100 8 WALL HYDRANT DETAIL NOT TO SCALE PHI -1104 COLD WATER RISER \ EXTERIOR WALL MOP SINK �� PROVIDE SHUTOFF VALVE ON ROUGH -IN INSTALL WATER FILTER PER MANUF. INSTRUCTIONS IF FURNISHED W/ ICE MACH. - MAKE ACCESSIBLE 71 COLD WATER DOWN IN PARTITION WHERE SHOWN ON PLAN FINISHED FLOOR REF: ARCH. /HUB DRAIN (WHERE ALLOWED BY CODE) INSTALL 1-1/2" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR ELEV. SEEPAGE FLANGE; PROVIDE CLAMP COLLAR AND FLASHING FOR ALL IN MEMBRANE SLABS. REFER TO PLAN FOR CONTINUATION / INSULATE PIPING IN EXTERIOR WALLS AS PER SPECIFICATIONSSUPPLY 12"MIN. 24"MAX. FIN. 1 L7� DIELECTRIC UNION FOR DISSIMILAR METALS FINISHED GRADE REF: CIVIL DRAWINGS C.I. ROADWAY BOX WITH ADJ. It ADAPTER AND SIX FOOT LONG, REINFORCED FOOD '..:; ;•' :. - ' • %' ' 1- ":e .4•u: .i..: :.: _-.e CUBER GRADE PLASTIC TUBING TO CUBEB WATER INLET. USE HOSECLAMPS AS FL00)RfL00R TOP MARKED WATER & SET FLUSH TO FINISHED PAVING OR 2" ABOVE EARTHEN GRADE 24" 3X4 INCREASER DRAIN / f CONNECT TO CUBER REQUIRED .". _,.. ,.. xis ;• .: ::m r� w<., t, ? [ . .. ::1'444: .:: AND ICE BIN DRAIN OUTLETS AS REQUIRED ICE BIN IW INDIRECT DRAIN OPEN TO ATMOSPHERE AT UPPER END • r\ \ -\ hili \-1% SLOPE SLEEVE OPENING SEAL � FLOOR//�� AND \\\\\�j\\�� WATERTIGHT _\ \ // O//O//%/ �\\�\\\�% �\ v., .''�\\�j \�' 24" MIN. - 3" TEE ELBOW CONNECTION _I'-I' FLOOR r°' -13 1 I t t iLSIIiI " FS-IN PROVIDE AIR GAP OF TWICE PIPE DIAMETER PROVIDE FLOOR SINK AT FRONT EDGE OR SIDE EDGE OF ICE MACHINE, WHERE ACCESSIBLE FOR CLEANING - NOT UNDER ANY EQUIPMENT PROVIDE COLD WATER ROUGH -IN AT TOP OF ICE MACHINE. ARRANGEMENT SHOWN IS SCHEMATIC. ADJUST AS REQUIRED TO SUIT CONDITIONS. VERIFY CONNECTIONS WITH MANUFACTURER. ' ►� IS / O/ %''�//:'• i/ 6" MIN. C.I. ROADWAY BOX WITH ADJ. \ �� ,. , / TOP MARKED WATER & SET FLUSH TO FINISHED PAVING OR 2" GATE OR BALL VALVE W1TH RAISED TEE OR NUT OPERATOR DEEP SEAL P -TRAP MAXIMUM LENGTH FOR UNVENTED FIXTURES ABOVE EARTHEN GRADE 9 WATER PIPE ENTRY DETAIL NOT TO SCALE PWR104 10 TIE IN ABOVE MOP SINK TRAP NOT TO SCALE PPTP105 11 ICE MAKER CONNECTION NOT TO SCALE 12 GENERAL HUB DRAIN DETAIL NOT TO SCALE PPYN101 C2/20/2,0E5y 1.OFrls A.1.1 + i SEAN M. RODRIGUEZ°°j � )•• 96478 »°° i 1 ``S/ON . 4P "'♦ 00 �N �w� L� U EA/C/A/EE/2/A/C 5656 S. Staples, Suite 360 Corpus Christi, TX 78413 P: (361)852-2727 F: (361)852-2922 Texas Firm Registration No. F-005318 1 31 62 0 z z 0 0) w DESCRIPTION it REVISION NO. DATE CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. PB -3 DATE: 02/20/15 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY 0 CN w F c.7 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 N V A2 0.6 V QJ Jo 0 co co 471111 AMlitS W O145 >- - U Capital Programs LU LU LJJ 1— U U U up — 0 oW co IFLL LLJ (NJ L CV J Q Qz oa p CO CO LU SHEET 71 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 ////""//////////L'7777/w///7 ///// 7777/ //////////// ////////// 7777/// 7777 //////////// ////////// /////////x /// //////////// ////////// /////// // //////////// //7777//// /////// // d/� 1 ----� /moi----� j%� '�----� �, //• 5 k//) 14 /,1 13 (// //)1--T—IV//)1— -T--I V//1 1--T--1 4/// t3/2 r//,I r//) r/, //A (//,I (//A r// //' O VI O I/VI 1 0 L'/ //A I' /A I� k/� E3 /,1 I� / ,1 f //A I' / / // C// r/E /7! 1--1--I I'//) 1--1--I k//1 1--1--I l/// //A r/,a r//,1 r// Er/ I Iyi//A I Ir/7)i I r//g //�/7 TT�/TT //�/-7T 7-,—,471, //-�/7 TT„14// //////////////////////////////////, ////////////////////////////////// E�//////////////////////////////// / //////////////////////, //////////// 9 ' •r3/{] / / / / / c////////////////////G/ /E}//M/, / 4 //////////////////' aEXISTING COURT(S) TO REMAIN. NO ELECTRICAL/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / // / / OR LIGHTING WORK UNLESS SPECIFICALLY / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / // / / / INDICATED OTHERWI-SE. .//// f f---r-ijj,z(---I1/// 12 11 10 r7/) 09 V///� r -T- 1 V//AI 1--T--1 VA, Iv//1 /�J/, 1 / / // REMOJ EXISTING R CEPTACLk AND OUTLET EBOX, EXTEND RACEWAY (RGS CONDUIT) UP TO ELEVATION ABOVE NEW COURT PLAYING SURFACE. DISCONNECT POWER -TO - EXISTING VIEWING PLATFORM. REFER TO CO NEW ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN FOR MORE INFORMATION. L3Sa1 „/9 //A /7/ J V///, 0 C///, r//,1r//';rt I // 1__1 1_-1_1 r/ ( iT/ �) // / I I (0,51/g, //,E /,,,,,,,,///////////////, 7777/ /////////// 7777// / ///// /////////// ////2:, / r0///// /////////// 7777/ • 41114a. tray •45174414es r • • iver n d 9 Df REMOVE EXISTING LIGHTS AT EXISTING VIEWING PLATFORM 08 /�////0//N/n/'IIr;IIfb I7 /H"W 07 EXISTING COURT(S) T REMAIN. NO ELECTRICAL OR LIGHTING WORK UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED OTHERWISE. 41 11 I: //9 / / /,r////OP ////n///3/ ///// //////////////// / ///,///////////////// / 'I I- ///////// 7777/ //////,/,/ /// ///////////////// /// / // �' 1° I 1/ / �° AI < JB II i1 v L- I 1 1 —T EXISTING I LOUNGE r EXISTINGrl - PRO SHOP II® 11 1 11 C V,/ /TT/7?T//�?T�/7 TT/ /s 7/7 /7/7/7 7/7/7/7/7/7 /7/ ���1� //////// ////////////// /7777// //////,///// 7777// //////////////ra „ /1.. a as a. as as as at as %k �� `1► rift► -w1 - vi1► `fir lil 01 91 0 01 4 3 EXISTI VG COURT(S) TO REMAIN NO ELECTRICAL OR LIGHTING WORK UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED OTHERWISE. _ 11 11 11 11 11 2 1 EXISTING LOCKER ROOM BUILDING L 0411. (111 4I_`. irkt Itrir ilk, r /la /war 1 EXISTI VGI COURT(S) T REMAIN NO ELECTRICAL OR LIGHTING WORK UNLESS - SPECIFICALLY INDICATED OTHERWISE. 0 EXI BLEA TO DEMO DISCO POWE LIGH AN RECEPTA TING HERS BE (SHED. NECT TO ING LES. tiats_E&e ev aliehalt was Stralltnraink- ‚kask �i ;SwRAWIfilaTIMIlr 1 72 72 e. B m II EXISTING STADIUM CD COURT TO BE DEMOLISHED. REMOVE EXISTING— COURT LIGHTING m ,AND RELATED ELECTRICAL (FED FROM PANEL IDENTIFIED BY KEY NOTE #3). m SALVAGE LIGHTS FOR OWNER, DO NOT DISCARD. 41.1A - #111114144210A A A fe GENERAL NOTES: A. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS AT THE JOB SITE BEFORE COMMENCING ANY PHASE OF THE WORK. ADJUSTMENTS FOR FIT AND COORDINATION SHALL BE MADE AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY CONFLICTS, DISCREPANCIES OR OMISSIONS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF THE CONTRACT WORK. B. CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW ALL ARCHITECTURAL, CIVIL, MECHANICAL & STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR ANY ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. C. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE HIS WORK WITH OTHER TRADES. D. SEAL ALL WALL, ROOF, AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS WITH UL LISTED FIRE SEALANT. 01 EXSING PRAC ICE COURT 0 BE DEMOL SHED ■ ■ //I r//,1 I 7/ ///I L///11 V/,® //9 Mil 0 r// //% I.%/1 V//'® //� l --L--1 r//J 1__1 —I I/// ///i r//2 //7 ■ //1 I///1j I I ��//// ///7�TT/7 TT////'/7TT/77T/// ////7/77/7////77/7/7////. /7/7/7/7/////////////// //,///////////////7,7,7, • 18 19 EXISTING COURT(S) TO REMAIN. NO ELECTRICAL OR LIGHTING WORK UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED OTHERWISE. ELECTRICAL SITE DEMOLITION PLAN Z SCALE: 1"= 30'-0” II 11 11 II II �41� 4 \ tr 4 ELECTRICAL SITE DEMO KEY NOTES: 0 EXISTING COURT(S) TO BE RE -TOPPED IN/ CONCRETE PER STRUCTURAL AND ARCHITECTURAL. NO ELECTRICAL OR LIGHTING WORK UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED OTHERWISE. 20 EXISTING 120/240V 3PH 4W DELTA SERVICE TO BE REPLACED. RE: ONE -LINE RISER DIAGRAM ON DETAIL #2, SHEET 77. 30 EXISTING DISTRIBUTION PANEL FEEDING COURT LIGHTING TO BE REMOVED. PANEL FEEDS LIGHTING ON VARIOUS COURTS FOR WHICH LIGHTING WILL REMAIN. PROTECT CONDUCTORS FOR EXTENSION TO NEW PANEL PER NEW ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN. ® EXISTING COURT LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN. REFER TO NEW ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN FOR EXTENSION OF SOME SERVICES AND MODIFICATION OF CONTROL. 50 AEP SITE LIGHT TO REMAIN. © REMOVE PANEL AND ASSOCIATED FEEDER AND BRANCH WIRING. FIELD VERIFY PANEL FEEDS ONLY LOADS AT BLEACHER STRUCTURE PRIOR TO REMOVAL. 0 REFER TO NEW PRO SHOP ELECTRICAL PLANS, DETAIL #2, SHEET 75 FOR WORK REQUIRED IN THIS AREA. © REMOVE EXISTING IN -GRADE JUNCTION BOX AND REPLACE PER NEW SITE PLAN. COURT TO BE RE -TOPPED. COORDINATE WORK CAREFULLY WITH CONCRETE SUBCONTRACTOR/GENERAL CONTRACTOR. ® UNDER ALTERNATE BID ITEM #6 - REMOVE EXISTING LIGHT POLE. SALVAGE LIGHTS FOR OWNER. PROVIDE IN -GRADE JUNCTION BOX PER NEW SITE PLAN. UTILIZE EXISTING CONDUITS FOR NEW CIRCUITRY PER SHEET 74. COVER SHALL BE FLUSH WITH NEW COURT TOPPING. REFER TO NEW SITE PLAN FOR NEW LIGHTING AT THIS COURT. © UNDER ALTERNATE BID ITEM #6 - REMOVE EXISTING LIGHT POLE. SALVAGE LIGHTS FOR OWNER. UTILIZE CONDUITS FOR NEW LIGHTING CIRCUITRY (RE: NEW SITE PLAN SHEET 74). REFER TO SHEET 74 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REGARDING THE DEMOLITION OF EXISTING POLE FOOTINGS WHERE APPLICABLE. ., of i`�t 2/20/15 k .k er RO....� /JOHN A.DRIGUEZ III j 90273 ; oIU N RG ENG/NEER//VC 5656 S. Staples. Sults 360 Corpus ChStI, TX 78413 P: (361)852-2727 F: (361)852-2922 Texas Firm Registration No. F-005318 1 31 62 CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. EA -1 DATE: 02/20/15 DESCRIPTION 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY 0 N w 1— CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 .clkarch.com W Q O REVISION NO. DESCRIPTION U Capital Programs W O CO w W Z � 0 CO 0_ W m W Ct � N C Y O J Q 060 CO COLLI w LLJCO 0 W CO LLJ 0 0 LLJ COJ 0 J 0 Ct C.) w REVISION NO. SHEET 72 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 ■ ■ 0 COVERED ■ ■ TENNIS COURTS C3 L --- --- _ 2Il9 d 9 © ®' L. b I P - C1 C3 b 9 d EX REMAIN. OR L SPEC STING GHTING I COURT(S) NO FICALLY OTHERWISE. ELECTRICAL WORK INDICATED UNLESS TO I b P b ELECTRICAL SITE DEMOLITION PLAN Z SCALE: 1"= 30'-0” II 11 11 II II �41� 4 \ tr 4 ELECTRICAL SITE DEMO KEY NOTES: 0 EXISTING COURT(S) TO BE RE -TOPPED IN/ CONCRETE PER STRUCTURAL AND ARCHITECTURAL. NO ELECTRICAL OR LIGHTING WORK UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED OTHERWISE. 20 EXISTING 120/240V 3PH 4W DELTA SERVICE TO BE REPLACED. RE: ONE -LINE RISER DIAGRAM ON DETAIL #2, SHEET 77. 30 EXISTING DISTRIBUTION PANEL FEEDING COURT LIGHTING TO BE REMOVED. PANEL FEEDS LIGHTING ON VARIOUS COURTS FOR WHICH LIGHTING WILL REMAIN. PROTECT CONDUCTORS FOR EXTENSION TO NEW PANEL PER NEW ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN. ® EXISTING COURT LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN. REFER TO NEW ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN FOR EXTENSION OF SOME SERVICES AND MODIFICATION OF CONTROL. 50 AEP SITE LIGHT TO REMAIN. © REMOVE PANEL AND ASSOCIATED FEEDER AND BRANCH WIRING. FIELD VERIFY PANEL FEEDS ONLY LOADS AT BLEACHER STRUCTURE PRIOR TO REMOVAL. 0 REFER TO NEW PRO SHOP ELECTRICAL PLANS, DETAIL #2, SHEET 75 FOR WORK REQUIRED IN THIS AREA. © REMOVE EXISTING IN -GRADE JUNCTION BOX AND REPLACE PER NEW SITE PLAN. COURT TO BE RE -TOPPED. COORDINATE WORK CAREFULLY WITH CONCRETE SUBCONTRACTOR/GENERAL CONTRACTOR. ® UNDER ALTERNATE BID ITEM #6 - REMOVE EXISTING LIGHT POLE. SALVAGE LIGHTS FOR OWNER. PROVIDE IN -GRADE JUNCTION BOX PER NEW SITE PLAN. UTILIZE EXISTING CONDUITS FOR NEW CIRCUITRY PER SHEET 74. COVER SHALL BE FLUSH WITH NEW COURT TOPPING. REFER TO NEW SITE PLAN FOR NEW LIGHTING AT THIS COURT. © UNDER ALTERNATE BID ITEM #6 - REMOVE EXISTING LIGHT POLE. SALVAGE LIGHTS FOR OWNER. UTILIZE CONDUITS FOR NEW LIGHTING CIRCUITRY (RE: NEW SITE PLAN SHEET 74). REFER TO SHEET 74 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REGARDING THE DEMOLITION OF EXISTING POLE FOOTINGS WHERE APPLICABLE. ., of i`�t 2/20/15 k .k er RO....� /JOHN A.DRIGUEZ III j 90273 ; oIU N RG ENG/NEER//VC 5656 S. Staples. Sults 360 Corpus ChStI, TX 78413 P: (361)852-2727 F: (361)852-2922 Texas Firm Registration No. F-005318 1 31 62 CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. EA -1 DATE: 02/20/15 DESCRIPTION 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY 0 N w 1— CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 .clkarch.com W Q O REVISION NO. DESCRIPTION U Capital Programs W O CO w W Z � 0 CO 0_ W m W Ct � N C Y O J Q 060 CO COLLI w LLJCO 0 W CO LLJ 0 0 LLJ COJ 0 J 0 Ct C.) w REVISION NO. SHEET 72 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 DEMOLITION GENERAL NOTES: A. IT IS THE CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILTY TO HAVE VERIFIED EXISTING JOB -SITE CONDITIONS DURING THE BIDDING PERIOD SO HE WILL HAVE OBTAINED THE SCOPE OF WORK. THE ELECTRICAL WORK SHALL INCLUDE MATERIALS AND OUTLETS, CONSISTING OF FIXTURES, DEVICES, EQUIPMENT OR APPARTUS. NOT ALL EXISTING OUTLETS ARE NECESSARILY INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. B. WHEN OULETS ARE REMOVED, CONDUIT AND WIRE SHALL BE REMOVED BACK TO THE NEAREST REMAINING ACTIVE J -BOX OR PANEL. C. RECONNECT ALL LIGHTS THAT MAY HAVE BEEN INTERRUPTED BECAUSE OF REMODELING WORK. D. PROVIDE ALL APPURTENANCES REQUIRED TO REROUTE, RELOCATE, REMOVE, OR REINSTALL ALL ITEMS DESCRIBED IN THESE NOTES. E. VERIFY THE LOADING OF EACH CIRCUIT AFFECTED BY REMODELING WORK. THE MAXIMUM LOAD OF ANY BRANCH CIRCUIT MUST NOT EXCEED 80% OF ITS RATING. F. REMOVE ALL OUTLETS AND WIRING ASSOCIATED WITH ALL EQUIPMENT BEING REMOVED, INCLUDING MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING EQUIPMENT. ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION KEY NOTES: REMOVE EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURE AND CIRCUITRY, AND UTILIZE EXISTING OUTLET BOX FLUSH IN CONCRETE STRUCTURE FOR NEW LIGHTING. EXISTING TELECOMMUNICATIONS RISER. REMOVE DURING DEMOLITION PHASE AND REINSTALL DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE. REMOVE EXISTING SURFACE -MOUNTED J -BOX, CONDUIT, & CONDUCTORS FEEDING TENNIS COURT LIGHTING. RE -FEED PER NEW ELECTRICAL PLAN(S), SHEET 75. 111 REMOVE EXISTING J -BOX, CONDUIT, & CONDUCTORS FEEDING BUILDING BACK TO MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL IN COVERED COURT ELECTRICAL ROOM. 0 0 r� 0 po o `` II II II II II 1 REMOVE ALL AND SPECIAL AREA, UNLESS BUILDING IS BRANCH CIRC(. PRO SHOF COVERED Cl ROOM. REM CONDUCTORS BACK LIG-ITING, POWER, S STEMS IN THIS NOTED OTHERWISE. ED WITH MULTIPLE ITS FROM EXISTING AND EXISTING )URT ELECTRICAL OVE ALL BRANCH FEEDING BUILDING 0 SOURCE. F \ Op Inr 0D 'O J �= Qo I C = Do IN v I1 II II II II Fr II II II II II EXISTING LOCKER ROOM ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN 73 73 SCALE: 1/4"= 1'-0" z of r ii 2M-0/15 JOHN X. RODRIGUEZa 0 III 0 90273 r \ S/QNAL ai O� U Y 114 ENG//VEER//VG 5658 S. Staples, Suite 360 Corpus Christi, TX 78413 P: (361)852-2727 F: (361)852-2922 Texas Firrn Registration No. F-005318 13162 CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. EA -2 DATE: 02/20/15 z 0 a a 0 0) w 0 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY 0 W 1— CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 www.clkarch.com w 0 0 z Z 0 w DESCRIPTION 0 Capital Programs w 1- 0 CC U zUJ CO w CO LLJ z O w 0 U C w CO LLJ U COO z_ >G L1.1 REVISION NO SHEET 73 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 ch Ew off COCa oLJ ✓ W I m LO▪ _ 0 N M W of 1 r N CD �r 7 / ///// SLOE III 1111)111_ lid 11 11 SLOPE SLOPE LOCATION OF FIXTURE PAVILLION ELECTRICAL SERVICE. STUB UP CONDUITS FOR PAVILLION '"y--74-1, AT THIS LOCATION. METER, PANEL 'L' AND TENNIS LTG CONTROL CABINET .,, 5 E—LINE RISER ALT. #5 L-7,9,1 UG FEEDER TO NEW\ MAINTENANCE BUILDING PER ONE—LINE DIAGRAM 7 GENERAL NOTES: A. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS AT THE JOB SITE BEFORE COMMENCING ANY PHASE OF THE WORK. ADJUSTMENTS FOR FIT AND COORDINATION SHALL BE MADE AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY CONFLICTS, DISCREPANCIES OR OMISSIONS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF THE CONTRACT WORK. B. CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW ALL ARCHITECTURAL, CIVIL, MECHANICAL & STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR ANY ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. C. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE HIS WORK WITH OTHER TRADES. D. SEAL ALL WALL, ROOF, AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS WITH UL LISTED FIRE SEALANT. L-13,15,17 /// T-6 ® #8 AWG ❑ ❑ FUTUR. . 'SHADE UCTUR /PAVILLION cti 0' #8WG StOPE 20 0 / R EW L LL IN OUTED SLOPE 1:120 A 2- i-- A 1 0 1:120 U RTS :CIfCIAT 3 SHALL INC CO SLOPE 1:120 2 ONS. BF NTROL 2 SLOPE 1.120 eL_ L-25;27,29 STUPE SLOPE T-9 T-10 SIM 0.#8 AWG #8 AWG A8- SLOPE L-8.10,12 -23- .21 >3 SLOPE 1.120 0 8- 0 11 11 11 11 11 UG CONDUIT TO F SW PRO SHOP PANEL 'PS' PER// / ONE— NE DIAG_•M_ �/_ e COVERED COURT ELC IRICAL ROOM EXISTING MDP CUT/PATCH EXISTING CONCRETE WALK tJ&S 0411. - rat 1 \ ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN 74 74 SCALE: 1"= 30'-0" -o r Z NEW ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN KEY NOTES: 01 EXTEND EXISTING CONDUIT ADJACENT TO LIGHT POLE UP TO ELEVATION 12" ABOVE NEW COURT CAP LEVEL (W/ RGS CONDUIT). PROVIDE NEW CAST FS/FD OUTLET BOX, NEW GFCI RECEPTACLE W/ WP COVER AND 2" RGS SUPPORT (WITH CAP), AND NEW CONDUCTORS BACK TO EXISTING PRO SHOP. CONDUCTORS SHALL BE (6) #10AWG, (2) FOR RECEPTACLE, (3) FOR CANOPY LIGHTING AND (1) COMMON EQUIPMENT GROUND. PROVIDE DEEP STAINLESS STEEL UNISTRUT VERTICAL SUPPORT, EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE COURT CAP. 02 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT PER ONE—LINE FOR FUTURE ELECTRICAL AT PAVILLION. 03 NEW LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL 'LC -2' PER LIGHTING CONTROL ONE—LINE DIAGRAM (TO CONTROL EXISTING COURT LIGHTING FED FROM THIS AREA). INSTALL PANEL ON AVAILABLE WALL SPACE. RE—CIRCUIT THE EXISTING 120V CONTROL VOLTAGE FOR EXISTING CONTACTORS VIA NEW CONTROL PANEL 'LC -2'. ® NEW LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL 'LC -4' TO CONTROL EXISTING COURT LIGHTING SERVED FROM THIS AREA. RE; TO LIGHTING CONTROL ONE—LINE DIAGRAM. © PROVIDE NEW PANEL 'M' AS SCHEDULED IN NEW MAINTENANCE BUILDING. BUILDING WILL BE OF PORTABLE TYPE CONSTRUCTION AND BUILT OFF—SITE. INSTALL PANEL INSIDE NEW BUILDING AND ENERGIZE VIA FEEDER PER ONE—LINE DIAGRAM. OWNER TO INSTALL RELATED BRANCH WIRING AT A LATER TIME. RISE UP ON EXTERIOR OF BUILDING AND LB INTO BACK OF PANEL. © 17X30 IN—GRADE QUAZITE BOX #PT1730BA18 & COVER PT1730HA00, TIER 15 (OR EQUAL) AT LOCATION OF EXISTING PANEL SERVING COURT LIGHTING PER KEY NOTE #3/SHEET 72 AND DETAIL #2/SHEET 77. PROVIDE EXTENSION OF EXISTING CIRCUITS TO NEW PANEL 'L' VIA NEW LIGHTING CONTROL CABINET PER ONE—LINE DIAGRAM. REFER TO PANEL SCHEDULE FOR WIRE SIZES AND QUANTITIES. 07 THE ROUGH—IN/UNDERGROUND CONDUIT SHALL BE PROVIDED UNDER THE ALTERNATE #4 BID ITEM. GEAR/CONDUCTORS/LIGHTING, ETC. ARE NOT PART OF THIS CONTRACT. © EXISTING COURT LIGHTING IN THIS AREA TO REMAIN AND TO REMAIN IN—USE THROUGHOUT THIS PROJECT. 09 UNDER BASE BID, EXISTING COURT LIGHTING IN THIS AREA TO REMAIN AND TO REMAIN IN—USE THROUGHOUT THIS PROJECT. REFER TO ALTERNATE #6 FOR LIGHTING REPLACEMENT. ® (2) 1-1/4"C (ALTERNATE BID ITEM #4) FOR FUTURE PAVILLION ELECTRICAL. COORDINATE EXACT STUB UP LOCATIONS SO THAT THEY DO NOT INTERFERE WITH FUTURE STEEL COLUMNS. 0 THIS LIGHT POLE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. POLE SHALL REMAIN UNDER BASE BID, BUT BE REMOVED UNDER ALTERNATE BID ITEM #6. IN—GRADE JUNCTION BOX SHALL BE INSTALLED AT THIS LOCATION OF POLE REMOVAL FOR ALTERNATE #6. BOX SHALL BE QUAZITE #PC1212BA12 W/ COVER #PC1212HAO0 (OR EQUAL). UTILIZE EXISTING CONDUITS TO SERVE NEW POLE LIGHTS. © ALTERNATE #6—NEW LIGHT POLE AND COURT LIGHTING PER SPECIFICATION. REMOVE EXISTING POLE LIGHT ASSEMBLY. DEMO EXISTING FOUNDATION TO 12" BELOW EXISTING COURT SURFACE. TOP OF EXPOSED REMAINING FOUNDATION SHALL NOT CONTACT NEW COURT TOPPING. CONSULT WITH STRUCTURAL ENGINEER FOR EXACT SEPARATION REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE NEW QUAZITE #PC1212BA12 IN GRADE BOX W/ COVER #PC1212HAO0 OR EQUAL) ABOVE EXISTING FOUNDATION, FLUSH WITH NEW COURT LEVEL, AND EXTEND EXISTING STUB—UPS INTO BOX. SERVE NEW POLE FROM THIS BOX WITH NEW 1-1/4"C. O CIRCUIT NEW POLE LIGHTING TO EXISTING FPE PANELS IN EXISTING PRO SHOP VIA EXISTING CONDUITS. PROVIDE NEW 30A/3P BREAKER IN EXISTING PANEL. CONDUCTORS AS INDICATED ADJACENT TO THIS NOTE. ® EXISTING IN—GRADE FIBER OPTIC PULL BOX. © NEW 2"C FOR FIBER OPTIC CABLING TO EXISTING PULL BOX. REFER TO SHEET 75 FOR STUB UP LOCATION. CUT/PATCH CONCRETE OR BORE AS REQUIRED. ® EXISTING POLE FOUNDATION. REFER TO KEY NOTE #12 FOR PARTIAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS. COORDINATE EXACT PLACEMENT OF NEW PRE—CAST BASE AROUND EXISTING FOOTING. © UNDER BASE BID, EXISTING COURT LIGHTING IN THIS AREA TO REMAIN AND TO REMAIN IN—USE THROUGHOUT THIS PROJECT. REFER TO ALTERNATE #6 FOR PARTIAL LIGHTING REPLACEMENT. ® 1"C FOR LIGHTING CONTROL COMMUNICATIONS PER LIGHTING CONTROL ONE—LINE DIAGRAM. FIELD VERIFY EXACT ROUTING. FOR EXISTING BUILDINGS NOT BEING RENOVATED, RISE UP EXTERIOR OF BUILDING WITH RGS CONDUIT AND LB INTO BUILDING AT AN ACCESSIBLE LOCATION. FIELD VERIFY EXACT REQUIREMENTS. ROUTING SHALL BE COORDINATED AND APPROVED WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. O BORE OR CUT/PATCH THIS SECTION OF EXISTING FLATWORK. 2/20/15 • it•: � \ / •* / JOHN A. RODRIGUEZ III j 90273 LID DI U ENG/NEER/NG 5656 S. Staples, Sults 360 TX 78413 P: (381)852-2727Chi: (381)852-2922 Texas Firm RegWnoBan No. F-005318 13162 >- 0 w Q 0 REVISION NO. DESCRIPTION W 0 CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. EA -3 DATE: 02/20/15 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY 0 N w 1- D In CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 r2I 0 06 .clkarch.com Go cc 0 (11E1111 1.1! IIS Ct 0w U 4— O 1— U Capital Programs C!) CtW U CO W CO Ct 06 Go W 0 0 m W r O CSJ 0 0 CO SHEET 74 of 82 RECORD DRAWING N0. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 21 NEW TENNIS CO GH#ING PER SPE DIC .TF11 I IC,HTN THROUGH LIG-IT reawct A 2- i-- A 1 0 1:120 U RTS :CIfCIAT 3 SHALL INC CO SLOPE 1:120 2 ONS. BF NTROL 2 SLOPE 1.120 eL_ L-25;27,29 STUPE SLOPE T-9 T-10 SIM 0.#8 AWG #8 AWG A8- SLOPE L-8.10,12 -23- .21 >3 SLOPE 1.120 0 8- 0 11 11 11 11 11 UG CONDUIT TO F SW PRO SHOP PANEL 'PS' PER// / ONE— NE DIAG_•M_ �/_ e COVERED COURT ELC IRICAL ROOM EXISTING MDP CUT/PATCH EXISTING CONCRETE WALK tJ&S 0411. - rat 1 \ ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN 74 74 SCALE: 1"= 30'-0" -o r Z NEW ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN KEY NOTES: 01 EXTEND EXISTING CONDUIT ADJACENT TO LIGHT POLE UP TO ELEVATION 12" ABOVE NEW COURT CAP LEVEL (W/ RGS CONDUIT). PROVIDE NEW CAST FS/FD OUTLET BOX, NEW GFCI RECEPTACLE W/ WP COVER AND 2" RGS SUPPORT (WITH CAP), AND NEW CONDUCTORS BACK TO EXISTING PRO SHOP. CONDUCTORS SHALL BE (6) #10AWG, (2) FOR RECEPTACLE, (3) FOR CANOPY LIGHTING AND (1) COMMON EQUIPMENT GROUND. PROVIDE DEEP STAINLESS STEEL UNISTRUT VERTICAL SUPPORT, EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE COURT CAP. 02 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT PER ONE—LINE FOR FUTURE ELECTRICAL AT PAVILLION. 03 NEW LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL 'LC -2' PER LIGHTING CONTROL ONE—LINE DIAGRAM (TO CONTROL EXISTING COURT LIGHTING FED FROM THIS AREA). INSTALL PANEL ON AVAILABLE WALL SPACE. RE—CIRCUIT THE EXISTING 120V CONTROL VOLTAGE FOR EXISTING CONTACTORS VIA NEW CONTROL PANEL 'LC -2'. ® NEW LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL 'LC -4' TO CONTROL EXISTING COURT LIGHTING SERVED FROM THIS AREA. RE; TO LIGHTING CONTROL ONE—LINE DIAGRAM. © PROVIDE NEW PANEL 'M' AS SCHEDULED IN NEW MAINTENANCE BUILDING. BUILDING WILL BE OF PORTABLE TYPE CONSTRUCTION AND BUILT OFF—SITE. INSTALL PANEL INSIDE NEW BUILDING AND ENERGIZE VIA FEEDER PER ONE—LINE DIAGRAM. OWNER TO INSTALL RELATED BRANCH WIRING AT A LATER TIME. RISE UP ON EXTERIOR OF BUILDING AND LB INTO BACK OF PANEL. © 17X30 IN—GRADE QUAZITE BOX #PT1730BA18 & COVER PT1730HA00, TIER 15 (OR EQUAL) AT LOCATION OF EXISTING PANEL SERVING COURT LIGHTING PER KEY NOTE #3/SHEET 72 AND DETAIL #2/SHEET 77. PROVIDE EXTENSION OF EXISTING CIRCUITS TO NEW PANEL 'L' VIA NEW LIGHTING CONTROL CABINET PER ONE—LINE DIAGRAM. REFER TO PANEL SCHEDULE FOR WIRE SIZES AND QUANTITIES. 07 THE ROUGH—IN/UNDERGROUND CONDUIT SHALL BE PROVIDED UNDER THE ALTERNATE #4 BID ITEM. GEAR/CONDUCTORS/LIGHTING, ETC. ARE NOT PART OF THIS CONTRACT. © EXISTING COURT LIGHTING IN THIS AREA TO REMAIN AND TO REMAIN IN—USE THROUGHOUT THIS PROJECT. 09 UNDER BASE BID, EXISTING COURT LIGHTING IN THIS AREA TO REMAIN AND TO REMAIN IN—USE THROUGHOUT THIS PROJECT. REFER TO ALTERNATE #6 FOR LIGHTING REPLACEMENT. ® (2) 1-1/4"C (ALTERNATE BID ITEM #4) FOR FUTURE PAVILLION ELECTRICAL. COORDINATE EXACT STUB UP LOCATIONS SO THAT THEY DO NOT INTERFERE WITH FUTURE STEEL COLUMNS. 0 THIS LIGHT POLE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. POLE SHALL REMAIN UNDER BASE BID, BUT BE REMOVED UNDER ALTERNATE BID ITEM #6. IN—GRADE JUNCTION BOX SHALL BE INSTALLED AT THIS LOCATION OF POLE REMOVAL FOR ALTERNATE #6. BOX SHALL BE QUAZITE #PC1212BA12 W/ COVER #PC1212HAO0 (OR EQUAL). UTILIZE EXISTING CONDUITS TO SERVE NEW POLE LIGHTS. © ALTERNATE #6—NEW LIGHT POLE AND COURT LIGHTING PER SPECIFICATION. REMOVE EXISTING POLE LIGHT ASSEMBLY. DEMO EXISTING FOUNDATION TO 12" BELOW EXISTING COURT SURFACE. TOP OF EXPOSED REMAINING FOUNDATION SHALL NOT CONTACT NEW COURT TOPPING. CONSULT WITH STRUCTURAL ENGINEER FOR EXACT SEPARATION REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE NEW QUAZITE #PC1212BA12 IN GRADE BOX W/ COVER #PC1212HAO0 OR EQUAL) ABOVE EXISTING FOUNDATION, FLUSH WITH NEW COURT LEVEL, AND EXTEND EXISTING STUB—UPS INTO BOX. SERVE NEW POLE FROM THIS BOX WITH NEW 1-1/4"C. O CIRCUIT NEW POLE LIGHTING TO EXISTING FPE PANELS IN EXISTING PRO SHOP VIA EXISTING CONDUITS. PROVIDE NEW 30A/3P BREAKER IN EXISTING PANEL. CONDUCTORS AS INDICATED ADJACENT TO THIS NOTE. ® EXISTING IN—GRADE FIBER OPTIC PULL BOX. © NEW 2"C FOR FIBER OPTIC CABLING TO EXISTING PULL BOX. REFER TO SHEET 75 FOR STUB UP LOCATION. CUT/PATCH CONCRETE OR BORE AS REQUIRED. ® EXISTING POLE FOUNDATION. REFER TO KEY NOTE #12 FOR PARTIAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS. COORDINATE EXACT PLACEMENT OF NEW PRE—CAST BASE AROUND EXISTING FOOTING. © UNDER BASE BID, EXISTING COURT LIGHTING IN THIS AREA TO REMAIN AND TO REMAIN IN—USE THROUGHOUT THIS PROJECT. REFER TO ALTERNATE #6 FOR PARTIAL LIGHTING REPLACEMENT. ® 1"C FOR LIGHTING CONTROL COMMUNICATIONS PER LIGHTING CONTROL ONE—LINE DIAGRAM. FIELD VERIFY EXACT ROUTING. FOR EXISTING BUILDINGS NOT BEING RENOVATED, RISE UP EXTERIOR OF BUILDING WITH RGS CONDUIT AND LB INTO BUILDING AT AN ACCESSIBLE LOCATION. FIELD VERIFY EXACT REQUIREMENTS. ROUTING SHALL BE COORDINATED AND APPROVED WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. O BORE OR CUT/PATCH THIS SECTION OF EXISTING FLATWORK. 2/20/15 • it•: � \ / •* / JOHN A. RODRIGUEZ III j 90273 LID DI U ENG/NEER/NG 5656 S. Staples, Sults 360 TX 78413 P: (381)852-2727Chi: (381)852-2922 Texas Firm RegWnoBan No. F-005318 13162 >- 0 w Q 0 REVISION NO. DESCRIPTION W 0 CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. EA -3 DATE: 02/20/15 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY 0 N w 1- D In CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 r2I 0 06 .clkarch.com Go cc 0 (11E1111 1.1! IIS Ct 0w U 4— O 1— U Capital Programs C!) CtW U CO W CO Ct 06 Go W 0 0 m W r O CSJ 0 0 CO SHEET 74 of 82 RECORD DRAWING N0. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 08 PS -6 OB VIA LTG CONTROL 1 LC -3 / 1 I /1 1 I 1 1 I 1 I 1 I 1 I 1 I I i B r C4X SAW B4X 1 AX Il 1 L DX DX 0 OA 08 MO A A A4 El 08 PS -4 _ 08 a EX .11 I I-11 !al OB — OB 1 \ LIGHTING PLAN 75 75 SCALE: 114"= 1'-0" -13 r Z OB PS -33 PS -31 © LTG CONTROL LC -3 0 2 \ POWER PLAN 75175 SCALE: 1/4"= 1'-O" r D Z GENERAL NOTES: A. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS AT THE JOB SITE BEFORE COMMENCING ANY PHASE OF THE WORK. ADJUSTMENTS FOR FIT AND COORDINATION SHALL BE MADE AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY CONFLICTS, DISCREPANCIES OR OMISSIONS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF THE CONTRACT WORK. B. CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW ALL ARCHITECTURAL, CIVIL, MECHANICAL & STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR ANY ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. C. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE HIS WORK WITH OTHER TRADES. D. ALL CONDUIT SHALL BE AS STRAIGHT AS POSSIBLE AND PARALLEL OR PERPENDICULAR TO BUILDING LINES. E. PROVIDE MULTI -CONDUCTOR HOMERUNS AS SHOWN AND USE A #10 AWG NEUTRAL. PROVIDE GREEN GROUND WIRE IN ALL RACEWAYS. F. SEAL ALL WALL, ROOF, AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS WITH UL LISTED FIRE SEALANT. G. ALL CONDUIT SHALL BE ROUTED CONCEALED WITHIN WALLS AND/OR ABOVE CEILINGS. H. REFER TO DETAIL #1/SHEET 78 FOR EXACT MOUNTING HEIGHTS OF ALL DEVICES. POWER KEY NOTES: 01 PROVIDE NEW IN -GRADE QUAZITE ENCLOSURE #PC1212BA12 W/ COVER #PC1212HA00. INTERCEPT EXISTING FEEDER TO TENNIS COURT LIGHTING, ROUTE THROUGH IN -GRADE ENCLOSURE, AND EXTEND UNDERGROUND TO EXISTING CIRCUIT. 02 STUB -UP NEW FIBER CABLING IN 2"C. CONDUIT SHALL BE INSTALLED FROM EXISTING FIBER OPTIC PULL BOX AS INDICATED ON SHEET 74. 03 INSTALL IN MILLWORK. FIELD COORDINATE INSTALLATION WITH OTHER TRADES. EACH DATA/PHONE COMBINATION OUTLET SHALL HAVE ONE (1) 1"C TO DATA RACK LOCATION. ® LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL 'LC -3' PER ONE -LINE RISER DIAGRAM. PANEL SHALL CONTROL EXTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING ON THIS BUILDING AND EXHAUST FAN PER OTHER KEY NOTES. © PROVIDE LOCK -OUT ACCESSORY AT BRANCH BREAKER TO SERVE AS DISCONNECTING MEANS. © CIRCUIT #29 TO BE SPARE CONDUCTOR IN CASE FUTURE EQUIPMENT REQUIRES 208V. O 7 PROVIDE CONDUCTORS AND RACEWAY TO INDOOR UNIT PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. © FROM OUTDOOR UNIT. RE: KEY NOTE ABOVE. 09 30A/2P/FUSIBLE/N-3R DISCONNECT SWITCH. o 60A/3P/NF/N-3R DISCONNECT SWITCH. 10 30A/3P/NF/N-1 DISCONNECT SWITCH. o 100A/3P/NF/N-1 DISCONNECT SWITCH. ® UNDERGROUND CONDUIT, 1"C W/ (3) #8 & (1) #10 AWG GROUND TO MATCH EXISTING CONDUIT INSTALLED EXPOSED ON BUILDING. O CHELSAE SWITCH CONTROL FOR ALL TENNIS COURT AND PAVILION LIGHTIN PER KEY NOTE #6 SHEET 77. O ALL CIRCUITRY RETAIL AREA SHALL BE INSTALLED HORIZONTALLY IN ADJACENT WALLS. CONCRETE ROOF STRUCTURE WILL SERVE AS EXPOSED CEILING AND NO CONCEALED AREA WILL BE PROVIDED IN WHICH TO INSTALL CIRCUITRY. ONLY LIGHTING CIRCUITRY ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY WILL BE ALLOWED EXPOSED ON UNDERSIDE OF ROOF STRUCTURE. 9 TRANSFORMER DISCONNECT SWITCH PER ONE -LINE. PROVIDE LABEL INDICATING 'MAIN SERVICE DISCONNECT'. LIGHTING KEY NOTES: ❑1 CIRCUIT TO PS -8. ALL CIRCUITRY RETAIL AREA SHALL BE INSTALLED HORIZONTALLY IN ADJACENT WALLS. CONCRETE ROOF STRUCTURE WILL SERVE AS EXPOSED CEILING AND NO CONCEALED AREA WILL BE PROVIDED IN WHICH TO INSTALL CIRCUITRY. ONLY LIGHTING CIRCUITRY ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY WILL BE ALLOWED EXPOSED ON UNDERSIDE OF ROOF STRUCTURE. Artt,T-rOF Til 21219/15At l /1 * / *'/ H1:::RODRIGZ Ij ,0190273e i q(1\1`:' ELI ❑E RG ENG/NEER//VG 5656 S. Staples, Suits 380 TX 78413 P: 1)652--2727 (61 F: (361)852-2922 Texas Fkm Registration No. F-005318 1 31 62 DESCRIPTION w Q ❑ REVISION NO. DESCRIPTION CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. EA -4 DATE: 02/20/15 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 U Capital Programs CO LL CO LIJLL D CO J LL LIJ 0 0 co CV 0 O 0 03 Q 0_ Ckf LL LL LL U � (!) Z z = LLI J CO 0 LL O _(/) 0 0 LL SHEET 75 of 82 RECORD DRAWING N0. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 E O u-) I IR LLI 0 I W CD I co 10 �10 LL� (4) #10AWG TO EXISTING PANEL IN 7\ LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL 'LC -2' (VIA INDICATED JUNCTION BOX THIS SHEET) 4UP WNL (2) #10AWG CONDUCTORS FOR RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT, (4) #10AWG CONDUCTORS FOR LIGHTING, (2) #10AWG CONDUCTORS FOR CHAIR LIFT AND ONE #10 EQUIP GROUND TO J—BOX ON SHEET 74 OG OG 01 NL OG OG WNL 1 OG N 1 VIEWING PLATFORM GROUND LEVEL ELECTRICAL PLAN 76 76 SCALE: 1/8"= 11-0" r Z DOWN 01 NL OG DOWN` WF* 00 OG O NL OG OG 00 01 NL VIEWING PLATFORM 2 UPPER LEVEL ELECTRICAL PLAN 76 76 SCALE: 1/8"= 11-0" VIEWING PLATFORM ELECT. KEY NOTES: 01 CIRCUIT THIS FIXTURE AS NIGHT LIGHT, ON AT DUSK AND OFF AT DAWN. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL CONDUCTOR AS REQUIRED. 02 PROVIDE NEW 120V CIRCUIT (#10AWG) TO EXISTING PANEL IN EXISTING PRO—SHOP FOR NEW CHAIR LIFT. PROVIDE NEW 15A/1P BRANCH BREAKER IN EXISTING PANEL TO FEED LIFT. CIRCUIT TO EXISTING JUNCTION BOX AND UTILIZE EXISTING UNDERGROUND CONDUIT. 3 LOUNGE ELECT. KEY NOTES: 01 REMOVE EXISTING LIGHT AND PROVIDE NEW CEILING FAN. 20 PROVIDE NEW RECEPTACLE AND DATA OUTLET FOR POINT OF SALE. UTILIZE EXISTING CIRCUIT IN AREA AND EXTEND AS REQUIRED. PROVIDE METALLIC SURFACE RACEWAY AND BOXES AS REQUIRED, WIREMOLD 500 SERIES OR EQUAL. 0 DISCONNECT EXISTING HVAC UNIT ON ROOF AND RECONNECT UPON COMPLETION OF RE—ROOFING WORK. COORDINATE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND ROOFING CONTRACTOR. 2 E- 1 I e I � CLOSET o0 OFFICE CLOSET Ve I � I I dc MECH. OFFICE CLOSE ELECT. $P LOUNGE t H O I I A E L LOUNGE ELECTRICAL PLAN o- 76 76 SCALE: 1/8"= 1'-0" -o r Z _ol of T 11 2/20/I5 l od r / JOHN A. RODRIGUEZ III j • 90273 a i 1 a I /_ • �-, o1 RG ENC/NEER/NC 5658 S. Stapes. Suite 360 Corpus ChSti, TX 78413 P: (381)852-2727 F: (381)852-2922 Texas Firm Registration No. F-005318 1 31 62 CONSULTANTS SHEET NO. EA -5 DATE: 02/20/15 DESCRIPTION r 0 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY 0 10 CV w F - v) CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 .clkarch.com W a 0 REVISION NO. DESCRIPTION } 0 w 0 W Z � W U Q - LU F W CON it csjQ 11 oe$ O CO CO W REVISION NO. U Capital Programs z CL U U W j W W W U O � Z Z Z W ots LU • (Ify J 0 CD SHEET 76 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 PANEL 'L' W/ SPD 225 AMP, M.C.B., 120/240V, 30, 4W, S/N, SURFACE, NEMA 4X—SS, 22 KAIC DELTA CKT # LOAD SERVED LOAD CONDUIT & WIRE SIZE BKR SIZE A B C BKR SIZE CONDUIT & WIRE SIZE LOAD LOAD SERVED CKT # 1 SPD #10 AWG A #10 AWG 900 PRACT LTG POLE T-2 2 3 " #10 AWG 30/3 B 20/3 #10 AWG 0 4 5 #10 AWG C #10 AWG 900 06 7 COURT LTG POLE T-1 1800 #8 AWG A #8 AWG 900 PRACT LTG POLE T-3 8 9 " 1800 #8 AWG 30/3 B 20/3 #8 AWG 0 10 11 " 1800 #8 AWG C #8 AWG 900 12 13 COURT LTG POLE T-2 1800 #8 AWG A 14 15 " 1800 #8 AWG 30/3 B 16 17 " 1800 #8 AWG C 60/2 RE: ONE—LINE PANEL 'PV' 18 19 COURT LTG POLE T-3 1800 #4 AWG A RE: ONE—LINE 20 21 1800 #4 AWG 30/3 B 22 23 PP 1800 #4 AWG C 60/2 RE: ONE—LINE NEW MAINT BLDG 24 25 COURT LTG POLE T-4 1800 #6 AWG A RE: ONE—LINE " 26 27 PP1800 #6 AWG 30/3 B 28 29 PR1800 #6 AWG C 30 31 A 32 33 B 34 35 C 36 37 A 38 39 B 40 41 C 42 CONNECTED LOAD = 25200 VA DEMAND = 31500 VA PHASE A = 9000 VA PHASE B = 7200 VA PHASE C = 9000 VA PANEL 'L2' W/ SPD 225 AMP, M.C.B., 120/240V, 30, 4W, S/N, SURFACE, NEMA 4X—SS, 22 KAIC DELTA CKT # LOAD SERVED LOAD CONDUIT & WIRE SIZE BKR SIZE A B C BKR SIZE CONDUIT & WIRE SIZE LOAD LOAD SERVED CKT # 1 3 5 7 EXIST COURTS 16/17 SPD 9 11 13 EXIST COURTS 16/17 15 17 " 19 EXIST COURTS 18/19 21 23 25 EXIST COURTS 18/19 27 29 31 EXIST COURTS 18/19 33 " 35 " " #10 AWG #10 AWG #10 AWG #6 AWG #6 AWG #6 AWG #6 AWG #6 AWG #6 AWG #6 AWG #6 AWG #6 AWG #6 AWG _#6 AWG #6 AWG #4 AWG #4 AWG #4 AWG A 30/3 B 40/3 C A 40/3 B A 40/3 B A 40/3 B A 40/3 13 A 60/3 B 37 EXIST COURTS 13-15 39 41 " CONNECTED LOAD = 0 VA DEMAND = 0 VA #4 AWG #4 AWG #4 AWG 1 A 60/3 13 C C C C C C PHASE A = 0 VA #6 AWG #6 AWG #6 AWG PHASE 13 = 0 VA EXIST COURTS 13-15 2 4 6 8 PHASE C = 0 VA 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 28 28 30 32 34 38 38 40 42 PANEL 'PS' W/ SPD 225 AMP, M.C.B., 120/208V, 30, 4W, S/N, SURFACE, NEMA 1, 10 KAIC CKT # LOAD SERVED LOAD CONDUIT & WIRE SIZE BKR SIZE AB C BICR SIZE CONDUIT & WIRE SIZE LOAD LOAD SERVED CKT # 1 SPD #10 AWG A 20/1 #12 AWG LIGHTING 2 3 " #10 AWG 30/3 B 20/1 #12 AWG LIGHTING 4 5 " #10 AWG , , C 20/1 #12 AWG EXTERIOR LTG 6 7 AHU-2H 8520 #4 AWG A' 20/1 #12 AWG EXIT/EMERG LTG 8 9 " 8520 #4 AWG 80/3 B 20/1 #12 AWG 555 IT RACK 10 11 8520 #4 AWG C 20/1 #12 AWG 720 RR/EXTER RECEPT 12 13 ACCO -2H 3216 #8 AWG A 20/1 #12 AWG 720 RECEPT 14 15 3216 #8 AWG 45/3 B 20/1 #12 AWG 540 STAFF RECEPT 16 17 " 3216 #8 AWG C 20/1 #12 AWG 800 COPIER 18 19 ICE MACH 1777 #12 AWG 20/2 A 20/1 #12 AWG 540 COUNTER RECEPT 20 21 1777 #12 AWG B 20/1 #12 AWG 900 RECEPT 22 23 EWH 2250 #10 AWG 30/2 C 20/1 #12 AWG 1080 RECEPT 24 25 2250 #10 AWG A 20/1 #12 AWG 900 MAINT/EXTER RECEP 26 27 ACCU-111 1640 #12 AWG 20/1 B 20/1 SPARE 28 29 SPARE #12 AWG 20/1 C 20/1 SPARE 30 31 EF -1H 250 #12 AWG 20/1 A 20/1 SPARE 32 33 IRRIGATION 180 #12 AWG 20/1 B 34 35 SPARE 20/1 C 36 37 SPARE 20/1 A 38 39 SPARE 20/1 B 40 41 SPARE 20/1 C 42 CONNECTED LOAD = 52087 VA PHASE A = 18173 VA PHASE B = 17328 VA PHASE C = 16586 VA DEMAND = 40549 VA PROVIDE EXTERNAL PERMANENT PHENOLIC LABEL IDENTIFYING MAIN AS 'MAINT. BLDG. MAIN DISCONNECT' PANEL 'M' 60 AMP, M.C.B., 120/240V, 10, 3W, S/N, SURFACE, NEMA 1, 10 KAIC CKT # LOAD SERVED CONDUIT & WIRE SIZE BKR SIZE A 13 BKR SIZE CONDUIT & WIRE SIZE LOAD LOAD SERVED CKT # 1 3 5 SPARE SPARE CONNECTED LOAD = 0 VA DEMAND = 0 VA 20/1 A 20/1 20/1 B 20/1 A B SPARE SPARE 2 4 6 1 77 77 PROVIDE NEW 200A/3P BREAKER IN EXISTING 'MDP' (SQUARE D I—LINE). REFER TO SHEETS 72& 74 FOR MORE INFORMATION. #2 NEW PRO SHOP ONE -LINE RISER DIAGRAM NO SCALE EQUIPMENT SHOWN ON ONE PLANE FOR CLARITY PURPOSES. INSTALL CONTROL CABINETS AND LIGHTING CONTROL ON OPPOSITE SIDE OF RACK TO MINIMIZE REQUIRED RACK WIDTH NEW 240V 3PH 320A METER SOCKET. ELEVATION— SHALL MATCH EXISTING OR BE SLIGHTLY LOWER TO ENSURE EXISTING SECONDARY CONDUCTORS CAN BE RE—USED. EXISTING UG SECONDARY FROM POLE MOUNTED XFMRS TO REMAIN PANEL 'L2' 0 0 PANEL 1: EXISTING PANEL M DP 2 1/2"C 3—#3/0 1—#6G 200A/3P/NF/N-1 DISCONNECT SWITCH „1„ XFMR 'T—PS', 75KVA 220V DELTA PRIM 120/208V 3PH 4W WYE SECONDARY. COORDINATE TAPS TO ACHIEVE 120/208V SECONDARY FROM 125/216V PRIMARY. 2 1/2"C 4— #4/0 1—#4G —2"C W/ FEEDERS AS REQUIRED (5) 2"C, CONDUCTORS PER SCHEDULE SPORTS LIGHTING =CONTROL PER SPECS —1-1/2"C W/ CONTROL CKTS AS REQUIRED J ® LTG PANEL LC 1 30" PANEL MULTIPLE CONDUITS TO INDICATED SPORTS LIGHTING LOADS, POLES T-1, T-2, T-3 & T-4. ONE -LINE KEY NOTES: 01 3" RGS CONDUIT WITH CORRSION RESISTANT 3M TAPE FROM BOTTOM TO 12" ABOVE GRADE. PROVIDE PIPE CAP. 02 THRU—BOLT, WELD OR PIPE CLAMP, TYPCIAL 03 1-5/8" GALVANIZED UNISTRUT OR EQUAL, TYPICAL • REMOVE EXISTING SECONDARY RISER TO METER AND REPLACE W/ NEW CONDUIT AND EXPANSION COUPLING. O PROVIDE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM PER NEC 250 AND DETAIL #4/SHEET 78. ® CHELSAE SWITCH, #CH6—BIV—IVORY. 07 2-1/2"C, (3)#4/OAWG & (1)#2/OAWG ® (7) 60A/3P ELECTRICALLY HELD LIGHTING CONTACTORS IN N -3R ENCLOSURE. CIRCUIT EXTENSION OF EXISTING LIGHTING CIRCUITS VIA THESE CONTACTORS. CIRCUIT COIL VOLTAGE TO LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL LC -1 RELAYS. CONTROL ZONES SHALL BE SAME AS EXISTING. LC -1 RELAYS WILL PROVIDE 120V COIL VOLTAGE TO APPLICABLE CONTACTORS. 09 1-1/2"C WITH CONTROL CONDUCTORS AS REQUIRED. NOTE: ALL EQUIPMENT, FEEDERS AND ASSOCIATED ITEMS ARE TO BE NEW UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE ON THIS SHEET. FUTURE PANEL 'PV' 1-1/2"C (3) #6 (1) #10G 2"C NO CONDUCTORS TO IN—GRADE JUNCTION BOX AT EXISTING PANEL LOCATION TO RE—FEED EXISTING COURT LIGHTING, RE: PANEL SCHEDULE L2 FOR MORE INFORMATION. SPLICE EXISTING CONDUCTORS TO NEW LINE CONDUCTORS. GiPONE LN' MAINT. 2 \AVILION OID ARAM LOCATED AT RACK BETWEEN PAVILION AND MAINTENANCE BLDG LTG CONTROL PANEL 'LC -1' 77 77./ NO SCALE LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL SCHEDULE: LC -1 LC -2 LC -3 LC -4 LC&D #GR1408—LT—ENC—SM—NE4 W/ GR1408—LT—INT-6NCL—REMOTE—DV-1VB LC&D #GR1416—LT—ENC—SM—NE1 W/ GR1416LT—INT-10NCL—REMOTE—DV-1VB LC&D #GR2432—SM—NE1 W/ GR2432—INT-4NCL—DTCMOD—DV-1VB LC&D #GR1408—LT—ENC—SM—NE1 W/ GR1408—LT—INT-8NCL—REMOTE—DV-1VB LOCATED IN NEW CLASSROOM/OFFICE ELECTRICAL CLOSET LTG CONTROL PANEL 'LC -2' O 0 O 0 O 0 O 0 O 0 O 0 O 0 O 0 O 0 LOCATED IN NEW PRO SHOP (PROVIDE PHONE LINE TO UNIT) 3/4"C (1) CAT 5e DATA CABLE LTG CONTROL PANEL 'LC -3' 1 "C (1) DIRECT BURIAL RATED CAT 5e DATA CABLE (3_7 7 — 1"0 (1) DIRECT BURIAL RATED CAT 5e DATA CABLE LOCATED IN COVERED COURT STRUCTURE ELECTRICAL ROOM LTG CONTROL PANEL 'LC -4' ONE -LINE RISER DIAGRAM NO SCALE L 1"C (1) DIRECT BURIAL RATED CAT 5e DATA CABLE r*e:%*�d /t4JOH0N A.90273RODRIGUEZ III f .,., ,..,,.,',,,,..o;.eve ‘4/e&. --- a; NRG ENG//VEER//VG 5858 S. Staples, Suite 380 Corpus Christi, TX 78413 P: (361)852-2727 F: (361)852-2922 Texas Firm Registration No. F-005318 13162 >- m w Q 0 w Q 0 CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. EA -6 DATE: 02/20/15 3 O w Q w 0_ a D CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 1111742 0 U U Capital Programs LU LLJz 0 COz LJJ LLJ (1) Q CO LJJ uJ 0 0 CC) LJJ CC CN CDGV 0 O w 0 LLJ CO z LJJ CO 0 UJ LLJ Z UJ 0 oio CO LJJ LLJ0 0 J Q U_ 0 J LJJ SHEET 77 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 ELECTRICAL LEGEND NOTE: NOT ALL SYMBOLS MAY APPLY TO THIS JOB! SYMBOL DESCRIPTION B-2 $3 $4 $D $os $K $M 11 0 • 0 0 v v TV 0 IH8I WP EWC EWH E.C. NL RCP 0 0 Lfl L FACP DCHT MS 0 ❑S ESD rPl MN FACP HOMERUN TO CIRCUIT AND PANEL INDICATED NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR HOT CONDUCTOR GROUNDING CONDUCTOR TRAVELER SWITCH LEG TOGGLE SWITCH – 120/277V, 20A THREEWAY SWITCH – 120/277V, 20A FOURWAY SWITCH – 120/277V, 20A DIMMER SWITCH OCCUPANCY SENSOR SWITCH KEY SWITCH – 120/277V, 20A MOTOR RATED SWITCH DUPLEX RECEPTACLE – 125V,20A,1P GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER DUPLEX RECEPTACLE 1 25V,20A,1 P ISOLATED GROUND RECEPTACLE – 125V,20A,1P SINGLE RECEPTACLE – 250V, AMPS PER PANEL SCHEDULE QUADRAPLEX RECEPTACLE – 125V,20A,1P ISOLATED GROUND QUADRAPLEX RECEPTACLE 1 25V,20A, 1 P SINGLE RECEPTACLE – 125V,20A,1 P ISOLATED GROUND SINGLE RECEPTACLE 125V,20A,1 P DUPLEX RECEPTACLE – 125V,20A,1P (FLOOR MOUNTED) JUNCTION BOX, SIZED PER N.E.C. TELEPHONE OUTLET BOX WITH CONDUIT TO ACCESSIBLE LOCATION ABOVE CEILING DATA/TELEPHONE OUTLET BOX WITH CONDUIT TO ACCESSIBLE LOCATION ABOVE CEILING DATA OUTLET BOX WITH CONDUIT TO ACCESSIBLE LOCATION ABOVE CEILING TELEVISION OUTLET BOX WITH CONDUIT TO ACCESSIBLE LOCATION ABOVE CEILING SPEAKER PUSHBUTTON HOLD UP BUTTON WEATHER PROOF ELECTRIC WATER COOLER ELECTRIC WATER HEATER ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR NIGHT LIGHT – ON 24 HOURS CIRCULATION PUMP 120V, 240V, 240V, 208V, 208V, 277V, 480V, 480V, 1P EQUIPMENT 1 P EQUIPMENT 3P EQUIPMENT 1 P EQUIPMENT 3P EQUIPMENT 1 P EQUIPMENT 3P EQUIPMENT 1P EQUIPMENT CONNECTION CONNECTION CONNECTION CONNECTION CONNECTION CONNECTION CONNECTION CONNECTION DISCONNECT SWITCH – SIZE AND POLE AS NOTED COMBINATION STARTER/DISCONNECT SWITCH STARTER MANUAL MOTOR STARTER PANELBOARD AS SPECIFIED FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL EXHAUST FAN SAFE DOOR CONTACT/ HEAT THERMAL SECURITY PANEL GENERAL PAGING SYSTEM SECURITY MOTION SENSOR FIRE ALARM AUDIO HORN FIRE ALARM PULL STATION FIRE ALARM AUDIO/VISUAL SIGNAL MOTION DETECTOR FIRE ALARM ADA VISUAL SIGNAL FIRE ALARM SHUT DOWN RELAY SMOKE DETECTOR HEAT DETECTOR DUCT MTD. SMOKE DETECTOR DOOR CONTACTOR ROUGH–IN WITH CONDUIT TO ACCESSIBLE LOCATIONS ABOVE CEILING. KEY PAD FIRE ALARM ANNUCIATOR FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL BUSHING 6-411 BUSHING SPEAKER W/BACK BOX BUSHING– BUSHING– BUSHING-. LAY–IN CEILING • TV OUTLET WITH COAX CONNECTOR REFER TO ARCHITECTUAL ELEVATIONS (--- , O O 1 t � • 1 --1- 1" MIN. CONDUIT INSULATED THROAT CONNECTOR 18• A.F.F. i( 48" A.F.F. 4 i i®® I 1 1 • • 1 II 4 I I ® JI DATA/TELEPHONE OUTLET i FIRE ALARM A/V DEVICE KEYPAD/ HAND SET INTERCOM/ CARD READER (!---�---) r 1 1 9 1 19 1 I I 1 1 H 1 1 11 1 L_•_J L__J REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR BOX AND CONDUIT TYPE AND SIZES, TYP. NOTE: COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF ALL DEVICES WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ROUGH–IN. LIGHT SWITCHES 80N A.F.F. TYPICAL -DEVICE -MOUNTING -ELEVATIONS NOT TO SCALE PROVIDE ALL THREAD ROD BOLTED TO BAR JOISTS PROVIDE PIPE CLAMPS AS REQUIRED PROVIDE UNISTRUT CHANNEL AND ALL NECESSARY MOUNTING HARDCWARE UNISTRUT ONDUIT DETAIL I NOT TO SCALE H 3 SWITCHED AC BALLAST L EMERGENCY BALLAST AC BALLAST EMERGENCY BALLAST NIGHT LIGHTS (UNSWITCHED) EMERGENCY BALLAST WIRING NOT TO SCALE N 1–#3/0 IN 3/4" RGS FULL SIZE COPPER GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR PER N.E.C. TABLE 250-66 NEUTRAL BUS SERVICE EQUIPMENT CONCRETE ENCASED ELECTRODE ENCASED BY A MINIMUM OF 2" CONCRETE OF FOUNDATION CONSISTING OF AT LEAST 20' OF ONE OR MORE STEEL REINFORCING BARS NOT LESS THAN 1/2" DIAMETER OR AT — LEAST 20' OF BAR COPPER CONDUCTOR NOT SS;.1HA AWG. #4 AWG COPPER PER N.E.C. 250-66(b) BOLTED TYPE CONNECTION SUITABLE FOR DIRECT BURIAL OR EXOTHERMIC WELD (TYP) 4 #6 AWG COPPER PER N.E.C. 250-66(a) EQUIPMENT GROUNDING BUS CONNECTION SHALL BE CADWELD COPPER–BASED EXOTHERMIC WELD. METAL FRAME OF BUILDING FINISHED GRADE COPPER BONDED STEEL ELECTRODE 5/8" IN DIAMETER 1O'-0" LONG WITH A MINIMUM OF 8'-0" IN DIRECT CONTACT WITH THE EARTH PER N.E.C. 250-52 (c) 3. METAL UNDERGROUND WATER PIPE IN DIRECT CONTACT WITH THE EARTH FOR 10'-0" OR MORE. GROUNDING_ELECTRODE- SYSTEM -DETAIL NOT TO SCALE LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE TYPE MANUFACTURER & CATALOG NO. VOLTAGE LAMPS MOUNTED DESCRIPTION A ACUITY #TLB-3-32–MVOLT–GEB10IS 120 AX ACUITY #TLB-3-32-MVOLT-GEB101S-EL 120 B SAME AS TYPE 'A' 120 B4X ACUITY #LB-3-32-MVOLT-GEB101S-EL 120 CX ACUITY #TUNS-2-32-MVOLT-GEB10IS-EL-WG 120 C4X ACUITY #UNS-2-32-MVOLT=GEB10IS-EL-WG 120 D ACUITY #VW-2-32-MVOLT-GEB10IS 120 DX ACUITY #VW-2-32-MVOLT-GEB10IS-EL 120 EX ACUITY #LHQM-S-W-3-R 120 OA ACUITY #TDMW-2-32-MVOLT-GEB10IS-EL 120 OB ACUITY #OFLR-6LC-120-BZ 120 OEM ACUITY #AFN-CBA-EXT 120 6-32WT8 SURFACE 6-32WT8 SURFACE 6-32WT8 SURFACE 3-32WT8 SURFACE 4-32WT8 SURFACE 2-32WT8 SURFACE 2-32WT8 SURFACE 2-32WT8 SURFACE INCL SURFACE 4-32WT8 SURFACE LED/INCL EAVE/SURFACE INCL SURFACE TANDEM (8') FLUORESCENT WRAP TANDEM (8') FLUORESCENT WRAP / BATTERY PACK TANDEM J8') FLUORESCENT WRAP / BATTERY PACK 4' FLUORESCENT WRAP W/ BATTERY PACK 8' FLUORESCENT STRIP W/ BATTERY & WIREGUARD 4' FLUORESCENT STRIP W/ BATTERY & WIREGUARD 4' FOUGH SERVICE FLUORS. STRIP 4' ROUGH SERVICE FLUORS. STRIP W/ BATTERY PACK EXIT LIGHT W/ EMERG HEADS 8' VAPORTITE STRIP Wl BATTERY LED FLOOD, NO INTEGRAL CONTROL EXTERIOR EMERG EGRESS FIXTURE, COLOR BY ARCH Tet 2/w/ / JOHN A. RODRIGUEZ III j 90273` a 11i�0\1"` ENC/NEER /A/C 5656 S, Staples, Suite 360 Corpus Christi, TX 78413 P: (361)852-2727 F: (361)852-2922 Telae Firm Registration No. F-005318 13162 z O t- a O w 0 >- m w 4- 0 REVISION NO. z 0 4- a 0 0) w >- co LU 4- 0 O z z O 0) W CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. EA -7 DATE: 02/20/15 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY 0 Lr) N w I- CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 F: 361.884.3298 .clkarch.com U Capital Programs W -1 W U 10 z¢ zQ W F— M W W = W SHEET 78 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 co 03 L CD0 1 N ceD 01 N w CO 1 N ‘- 0.) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LJ - Al_ LA_I_LJ L_ r -T -I-17 -1 LIGHTING IN THIS 1 1 1 1 I AREA TO REMAIN UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE U r i II y 1111 II II 'III II , , 1111 I� II Il II ° I / wH 11 / X11 // C I Nom_/ /=_ 3 J — 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 L_L_l_L_LJ_LL_LJ_J L- L LIGHTING IN THIS AREA TO REMAIN UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE I -TJ -1- I I I 1 I I 1 1 —11 L --J ✓ i k LIGHTING IN THIS AREA TO REMAIN UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE h I LL ✓ -I I I I I I L J r� L I II I I Y Y 11 1 Y J 11 11 1 --JL--JL__JI 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ileal 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1- -J 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 LJ -7I it \X/ 1 II / \ 1 IL ` IIC - - 71 tC\ I�r _ ===� rn I I I 1 I 1 I 1 1--I I 1 I 1 I 1 I 1 I- -I I 1 I 1 I 1 1 1I, L ----JI =- 7 -7 %11 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN 79 79/ SCALE: 1/4'•=1• , 79 79/ SCALE: 1/4"= 1' 0" DEMOLITION GENERAL NOTES: A. IT IS THE CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILTY TO HAVE VERIFIED EXISTING JOB -SITE CONDITIONS DURING THE BIDDING PERIOD SO HE WILL HAVE OBTAINED THE SCOPE OF WORK. THE ELECTRICAL WORK SHALL INCLUDE MATERIALS AND OUTLETS, CONSISTING OF FIXTURES, DEVICES, EQUIPMENT OR APPARTUS. NOT ALL EXISTING OUTLETS ARE NECESSARILY INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. B. WHEN OULETS ARE REMOVED, CONDUIT AND WIRE SHALL BE REMOVED BACK TO THE NEAREST REMAINING ACTIVE J -BOX OR PANEL. C. D. E. RECONNECT ALL LIGHTS THAT MAY HAVE BEEN INTERRUPTED BECAUSE OF REMODELING WORK. PROVIDE ALL APPURTENANCES REQUIRED TO REROUTE, RELOCATE, REMOVE, OR REINSTALL ALL ITEMS DESCRIBED IN THESE NOTES. VERIFY THE LOADING OF EACH CIRCUIT AFFECTED BY REMODELING WORK. THE MAXIMUM LOAD OF ANY BRANCH CIRCUIT MUST NOT EXCEED 80% OF ITS RATING. F. REMOVE ALL OUTLETS AND WIRING ASSOCIATED WITH ALL EQUIPMENT BEING REMOVED, INCLUDING MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING EQUIPMENT. == ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION KEY NOTES: ❑1 REMOVE LIGHT FIXTURE. REFER TO NEW LIGHTING PLAN FOR NEW WORK AND UTILIZE EXISTING CIRCUIT. NOT ALL DEVICES, EQUIPMENT AND LIGHTING IS INDICATED. CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT SITE PRIOR TO BID AND INCLUDE IN HIS OR HER BID A FULL DEMOLITION SCOPE OF WORK. ` '1 1 1 1 2c1_ _L PROVIDE NEW LAMPS AND LENSES FOR ALL LIGHT FIXTURES THAT ARE TO REMAIN IN THIS BUILDING 1— —T77 -T-7-1 J I 1 I 1 1 1 1 EX I I I I__1-L-I_J 1 r G l— PROVIDE NEW LAMPS AND LENSES FOR ALL LIGHT ''FIXTURES THAT ARE TO REMAIN IN THIS BUILC'NG GENERAL NOTES: 0 a PROVIDE NEW LAMPS AND LENSES FOR ALL LIGHT FIXTURES THAT ARE TO REMAIN IN THIS BUILDING ==�1�--�I--� L— I I I 0 \I:A /1 WH 111 / I /II //r1 3 0 T\ 1- Ill-/ Y , Y li 3 Y 1 11 111 11 -- - -JIB- - JI 2 \ ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN 79 79 A. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS AT THE JOB SITE BEFORE COMMENCING ANY PHASE OF THE WORK. ADJUSTMENTS FOR FIT AND COORDINATION SHALL BE MADE AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY CONFLICTS, DISCREPANCIES OR OMISSIONS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF THE CONTRACT WORK. B. CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW ALL ARCHITECTURAL, CIVIL, MECHANICAL & STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR ANY ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. C. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE HIS WORK WITH OTHER TRADES. D. ALL CONDUIT SHALL BE AS STRAIGHT AS POSSIBLE AND PARALLEL OR PERPENDICULAR TO BUILDING LINES. E. PROVIDE MULTI -CONDUCTOR HOMERUNS AS SHOWN AND USE A #10 AWG NEUTRAL. PROVIDE GREEN GROUND WIRE IN ALL RACEWAYS. F. SEAL ALL WALL, ROOF, AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS WITH UL LISTED FIRE SEALANT. G. ALL CONDUIT SHALL BE ROUTED CONCEALED WITHIN WALLS AND/OR ABOVE CEILINGS. H. REFER TO DETAIL #1/SHEET 80 FOR EXACT MOUNTING HEIGHTS OF ALL DEVICES. SCALE: 1/4"= 1 L_1 li r, I 331 EX 0 7 ELECTRICAL KEY NOTES: O NEW LIGHT FIXTURE AS SCHEDULED, TYPICAL. CIRCUIT TO EXISTING CIRCUIT AND CONTROL. 0 PROVIDE RECEPTACLE FOR NEW DRINKING FOUNTAIN. PROVIDE NEW 20A/1P BREAKER IN EXISTING PANEL AND CIRCUIT VIA #12 AWG. 03 EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURE TO REMAIN. PROVIDE NEW LAMPS AND LENS COVER, TYPICAL UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE. ® NEW EXIT LIGHT. CIRCUIT TO ADJACENT UNSWITCHED CIRCUIT. 2/20/15 °, .. ceo-S5`0 gstp 1es - JOHN A. RODRIGUEZ III j °°°.e°°°°..° °675T,73. °°°°,.° e.°°°% 1:'lPfdNc.,\ 0X\\ NRG ENC/NEER//VC 5858 S. Staples. Suite 360 Corpus Christi, TX 78413 P: (351)552-2727 F: (361)852-2922 Texas Finn Registration No. F-005318 13162 CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO. EB -1 DATE: 02/20/15 0 CN N Lu l— P N E 0 U U 0 3U 3 3 >-03 Lu 0 REVISION NO. DESCRIPTION >- co w Q O Ct LUW U LLJ z W CO Et J co COW w W COU z Z UJ COLLJ J C/3 Z Ct 00 J LL w W oo z 0 J LU 12) U W W REVISION NO. SHEET 79 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 o co LP. o U uicnto cc 0I CA w ori 1 W ro t0 L ELECTRICAL LEGEND NOTE: NOT ALL SYMBOLS MAY APPLY TO THIS JOB! SYMBOL DESCRIPTION 8-2. N N E$3 $4 $D SOS $K $M 0 E 0 0 Q y V v TV 0 II-1BI WP EWC EWH E.C. NL RCP 0 0 Ski HOMERUN TO CIRCUIT AND PANEL INDICATED NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR HOT CONDUCTOR GROUNDING CONDUCTOR TRAVELER SWITCH LEG TOGGLE SWITCH - 120/277V, 20A THREEWAY SWITCH - 120/277V, 20A FOURWAY SWITCH - 120/277V, 20A DIMMER SWITCH OCCUPANCY SENSOR SWITCH KEY SWITCH - 120/277V, 20A MOTOR RATED SWITCH DUPLEX RECEPTACLE - 125V,20A,1P GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER DUPLEX RECEPTACLE 125V,20A,1P ISOLATED GROUND RECEPTACLE - 125V,20A,1P SINGLE RECEPTACLE - 250V, AMPS PER PANEL SCHEDULE QUADRAPLEX RECEPTACLE - 125V,20A,1P ISOLATED GROUND QUADRAPLEX RECEPTACLE - 125V,20A,1 P SINGLE RECEPTACLE - 125V,20A,1P ISOLATED GROUND SINGLE RECEPTACLE - 125V,20A,1 P DUPLEX RECEPTACLE - 125V,20A,1P FLOOR MOUNTED) JUNCTION BOX, SIZED PER N.E.C. HUMIDIFIER OUTLET BOX WITH CONDUIT TO ACCESSIBLE LOCATION ABOVE CEILING THERMOSTAT OUTLET BOX WITH CONDUIT TO ACCESSIBLE LOCATION ABOVE CEILING CLOCK OUTLET TELEPHONE OUTLET BOX WITH CONDUIT TO ACCESSIBLE LOCATION ABOVE CEILING DATA/TELEPHONE OUTLET BOX WITH CONDUIT TO ACCESSIBLE LOCATION ABOVE CEILING DATA OUTLET BOX WITH CONDUIT TO ACCESSIBLE LOCATION ABOVE CEILING TELEVISION OUTLET BOX WITH CONDUIT TO ACCESSIBLE LOCATION ABOVE CEILING SPEAKER PUSHBUTTON HOLD UP BUTTON WEATHER PROOF ELECTRIC WATER COOLER ELECTRIC WATER HEATER ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR NIGHT LIGHT - ON 24 CIRCULATION PUMP 120V, 1P EQUIPMENT 240V, 1P EQUIPMENT 240V, 3P EQUIPMENT 208V, 1P EQUIPMENT 208V, 3P EQUIPMENT 277V, 113 EQUIPMENT 480V, 3P EQUIPMENT 480V, 1P EQUIPMENT HOURS CONNECTION CONNECTION CONNECTION CONNECTION CONNECTION CONNECTION CONNECTION CONNECTION DISCONNECT SWITCH - SIZE AND POLE AS NOTED COMBINATION STARTER/DISCONNECT SWITCH STARTER MANUAL MOTOR STARTER PANELBOARD AS SPECIFIED BUSHING BUSHING 11) SPEAKER W/BACK BOX • 0 TV OUTLET WITH COAX CONNECTOR REFER TO ARCHITECTUAL ELEVATIONS 1 • 1 • 1 1 • 1 • 1 •1 I ®I® I INSULATEDTHROAT CONNECTOR T 18" A.F.F. I Q I • J DATA/TELEPHONE OUTLET BUSHING BUSHING PlR BUSHING RR 48" A.F.F. 1 • • G®0 KEYPAD/ INTERCOM/ CARD READER 1 Q 1 1 pp LAY -IN CEILING FIRE ALARM A/V DEVICE HAND SET r-: r-: 1 1 1 El REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR BOX AND CONDUIT TYPE AND SIZES, TYP. LIGHT SWITCHES 80' A.F.F. NOTE: COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF ALL DEVICES WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. 1 TYPICAL DEVICE ELEVATIONS (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE) NOT TO SCALE PROVIDE ALL THREAD ROD BOLTED TO BAR JOISTS PROVIDE PIPE CLAMPS AS REQUIRED PROVIDE UNISTRUT CHANNEL AND ALL NECESSARY MOUNTING HARDWARE H SWITCHED AC BALLAST EMERGENCY BALLAST AC BALLAST L EMERGENCY BALLAST NIGHT UGHTS (UNSWITCHED) N 2 UNISTRUT CONDUIT DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 3 EMERGENCY BALLAST WIRING NOT TO SCALE NOTE: THIS SHEET *80 OF 82 IS THE FINAL SHEET. ea.": FOF T 1111 2/W/15 JOHN A. RODRIGUEZ III j ....e.......90273.......e ..i �Pd'ee NC: ELI ❑E N RG ENC/NEER //V C 5658 S. Staples. Suite 360 Corpus Christi. T% 78413 P: (361)852-2727 F: (361)852-2922 Texas Flrm Regletration No. F-005318 1 31 62 CONSULTANTS SHEET NO. EB -2 DESCRIPTION m w Q 0 REVISION NO. DESCRIPTION DATE: 02/20/15 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78477-0050 T: 361.884.3295 U co w 0 (1) LU I -U rocU - W LU � CV C ot?S 0 CO CO W J Q w w LU U 0 Z W 0 W f— co < ct D U_ W J REVISION NO. SHEET 80 of 82 RECORD DRAWING N0. CP -204 CITY PROJECT # E12118 00 9101 ADDENDUM NUMBER 1— RE -BID Package Project: HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) RE -BID Package Project Number: E12118 Owner: City of Corpus Christi City Engineer: ieff Edmonds, P.E. Designer: CLK Architects & Associates Addendum No. 01 Specification Section: 00 9101 Issue Date: April 2, 2015 Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the Bid Form submitted for this Project. Failure to acknowledge receipt of this addendum in the Bid Form may render the Bid as non-responsive and serve as the basis for rejecting the Bid. Make the additions, modifications or deletions to the Contract Documents described in this Addendum. Approved by: Atilano Javier Huerta, AIA Name 4/02/2015 Date Addenda Items: Revise forms: CCR 00 0100 Table of Contents (Attach. 1) CCR 0011 16 Invitation to Bid (Attach. 2) CCR 00 30 00 Bid Form (Attach. 3) CCR 00 30 01 Bid Form Exhibit A, Part A & B (Attach. 4) CCR 00 30 01 Bid Form Exhibit A, Lump Sum (Attach. 5) CCR 00 52 23 Agreement (Attach. 6) CCR 01 1100 Summary of Work (Attach. 7) Drawings (Attach. 8) Pre -Bid Sign -in Sheet (Attach. 9) Addenda No. 01 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) Project No. E12118 RE -BID Package CLK Architects & Associates License No. 18183 00 91 01 - 1 REV 04-02-2014 ARTICLE 1— BIDDING REQUIREMENTS 1.01 ACKNOWLEDGE ADDENDA A. Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the Bid Form submitted for this Project. Failure to acknowledge receipt of this addendum in the Bid Form may render the Bid as non- responsive and serve as the basis for rejecting the Bid. 1.02 MODIFICATIONS TO THE BIDDING REQUIREMENTS A. N/A ARTICLE 2 — MODIFICATIONS TO THE SPECIFICATIONS OR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS. 2.01 ADD, DELETE OR REPLACE SPECIFICATION SECTIONS (OR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS) A. Delete the following Specification Sections (or Technical Specifications): Deleted Specification Sections (or Technical Specifications) SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 0011 16 INVITATION TO BID SECTION 00 30 00 BID FORM SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM, EXHIBIT A SECTION 00 52 23 AGREEMENT SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK B. Add the following Specification Sections (or Technical Specifications): Added Specification Sections (or Technical Specifications) SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OF CONTENTS (ATTACHMENT 1) SECTION 00 11 16 INVITATION TO BID (ATTACHMENT 2) SECTION 00 30 00 BID FORM (ATTACHMENT 3) SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM, EXHIBIT A, PART A & B (ATTACHMENT 4) SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM, EXHIBIT A, LUMP SUM (ATTACHMENT 5) SECTION 00 52 23 AGREEMENT (ATTACHMENT 6) SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK (ATTACHMENT 7) Addenda No. 01 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) Project No. E12118 RE -BID Package 009101-2 REV 04-02-2014 ARTICLE 3 — MODIFICATIONS TO THE DRAWINGS 3.01 ADD, DELETE OR REPLACE Drawing Sheets A. Delete the following Drawing Sheets: Deleted Drawing Sheets Sheet 017 of 82 Sheet 019 of 82 Sheet 021 of 82 Sheet 030 of 82 Sheet 056 of 82 Sheet 66 of 82 Sheet 67 of 82 Sheet 69 of82 Sheet 70 of 82 Sheet 75 of 82 B. Add the following Drawing Sheets: Added Drawing Sheets Sheet 017 of 82 (Attachment 8) Sheet 019 of 82 (Attachment 8) Sheet 021 of 82 (Attachment 8) Sheet 030 of 82 (Attachment 8) Sheet OS6 of 82 (Attachment 8) Sheet 66 of 82 (Attachment 8) Sheet 67 of 82 (Attachment 8) Sheet 69 of82 (Attachment 8) Sheet 70 of 82 (Attachment 8) Sheet 75 of 82 (Attachment 8) Addenda No. 01 NEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) Project No. E12118 RE -BID Package 009101-3 REV 04-02-2014 ARTICLE 4 — CLARIFICATIONS 4.01 QUESTIONS & CLARIFICATIONS A. Remove Sections 07250, Weather Barriers and 15951, Controls, from Table of Contents; sections not included in Project. B. Replace Sections, 00 0100 Table of Contents, 00 11 16 Invitation to Bid, 00 30 00 Bid Form, 00 30 01 Bid Form Exhibit A, 00 52 23 Agreement, 01 1100 Summary of Work with corresponding Attachments. 4.02 CLARIFICATIONS A. Structural drawings for courts 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14, 15, 16, & 17; include note for Post Tension slabs to include #4 rebar at 12" O.C. each way over the PT tendons and with 2" of concrete coverage. This requirement is to meet minimum code steel reinforcement for concrete slabs. Contractor to include this reinforcing on all slabs as noted. 4.03 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Hellas TPS 5000 System is approved as an equal to specified product court surfacing materials. Number of finish coats and warranty shall meet or exceed specifications. B. Laykold/APT Surface Systems is approved as an equal to specified product court surfacing materials. Number of finish coats and warranty shall meet or exceed specifications. C. TUFFEC - ATHLETIC LOCKERS is approved as an equal to specified product for lockers. Warranty and performance shall meet or exceed specified product. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1 Addenda No. 01 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) Project No. E12118 RE -BID Package 009101.4 REV 04-02-2014 00 0100 TABLE OF CONTENTS ADDENDUM 1- RE-8ID Package ATTACHMENT 1 Page 1 of 6 Table of Contents HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) — Project Number: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE 00 0100 -1 REV 10-14-2014 Division / Section Title Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements 0011 16 Invitation to Bid (Rev 01/23/2015) 00 2113 Instructions to Bidders (Rev 01/23/2015) 00 30 00 Bid Form (Rev 01/23/2015) 00 30 01 Bid Form Exhibit A (Rev 10/14/20141 00 30 02 Compliance to State Law on Nonresident Bidders 00 3004 Conflict of Interest Questionnaire 00 30 05 Disclosure of Interest 00 30 06 Non -Collusion Certification 00 4516 Statement of Experience 00 52 23 Agreement (Rev 10/14/2014) 00 6113 Performance Bond (Rev 7/3/20141 00 6116 Payment Bond (Rev7/3/2014) 00 72 00 General Conditions 00 72 01 Insurance Requirements (Rev 7/3/2014) 00 72 02 Wage Rate Requirements 00 72 03 Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Division 01 General Requirements 01 11 00 Summary of Work 01 23 10 Alternates and Allowances 0129 00 Application for Payment Procedures 0129 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 01 31 13 Project Coordination ADDENDUM 1- RE-8ID Package ATTACHMENT 1 Page 1 of 6 Table of Contents HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) — Project Number: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE 00 0100 -1 REV 10-14-2014 01 31 14 Change Management 0133 00 Document Management 0133 01 Submittal Register (Rev 7/3/2014) 0133 02 Shop Drawings 0133 03 Record Data 0133 04 Construction Progress Schedule 0133 05 Video and Photographic Documentation 0135 00 Special Procedures 0140 00 Quality Management 0150 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 0157 00 Temporary Controls 0170 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements Division 01 Architectural General Requirements 01605 Product Options and Substitutions PART 5 Standard Specifications Division 02 Sitework 02120 Chainlink Fence 02120 Site Clearing and Stripping 02140 Site Grading 02180 Removing Old Structures 02210 Select Material 02220 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities and Sewers 02222 Trench Safety for Excavations 02525 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement (Class A) (5-34) 02526 Asphalt Tennis Court Overlay 02561 Concrete Sidewalks 02564 Concrete Curb Ramps 02760 Asphalt Edging ADDENDUM 1- RE -BID Package ATTACHMENT 1 Page 2 of 6 Table of Contents NEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) — Project Number: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE 000100-2 REV 1044-2014 02791 Asphalt Tennis Court Surfacing 02792 Concrete Tennis Court Surfacing 02810 Landscape Irrigation 02882 Tennis Court Net Posts Division 03 Concrete 03000 Flat Work — Portland Cement Concrete 03200 Flat Work — Reinforcing Steel 03800 Flat Work — Concrete Structures Division 04 Masonry 04200 Clay Unit Masonry Division 05 Metals Refer to Structural Drawings Division 06 Wood & Plastics 06100 Rough Carpentry 06220 Finish Carpentry and Millwork Division 07 Thermal Moisture Protection 07100 Gypsum Sheathing 07100 Waterproofing and Dampproofing 07200 Insulation 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal 07612 Metal Roof Panels 07920 Joint Sealers Division 08 Doors & Windows 08100 Steel Doors and Frames ADDENDUM 1- RE -BID Package ATTACHMENT 1 Page 3 of 6 Table of Contents WEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) — Project Number: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE 000100-3 REV 10-14-2014 08200 Plastic Laminated Wood Doors 08505 Aluminum Fixed Windows — Impact Resistant 08505 Aluminum Sliding Windows — Impact Resistant 08700 Finish Hardware 08800 Glass and Glazing Division 09 Finishes 09220 Lath, Plaster and Stucco Work 09250 Gypsum Drywall 09650 Resilient Flooring 09655 Resilient Rubber Wall Base 09900 Painting Division 10 Specialties 10150 Toiiet Partitions 10520 Fire Protection Specialties 105126 Plaster Lockers and Benches 10800 Toilet Accessories Division 11 Equipment 11480 Backboards 1165 00 Sport Nets and Recreational Equipment Division 12 Furnishings NO WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION Division 13 Special Construction NO WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION Division 14 Conveying Systems 14420 Vertical Wheelchair Lifts ADDENDUM 1- RE -BID Package ATTACHMENT 1 Page 4 of 6 Table of Contents HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) — Project Number: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE 000100-4 REV 10-14-2014 PART T Technical Specifications Division 15 Mechanical 15050 Basic Materials & Methods 15051 Starting of Systems 15060 Mechanical Demolition for Remodeling 15070 Inside Utility Trench Excavation, Backfill and Compaction 15080 Outside Utility Trench Excavation, Backfill and Compaction 15140 Supports and Anchors 15170 Motors and Motor Controllers 15171 Combination and Non -Combination Motor Starters 15190 System Identification & Pipe Marking 15240 Sound & Vibration Control 15260 Piping Insulation 15290 Duct Insulation 15410 Plumbing Piping & Valves 15430 Plumbing Specialties 15440 Plumbing Fixtures 15530 Refrigerant Piping 15671 Air Cooled Condensing Units 15854 DX Fan Coil Units 15860 Power Ventilators 15881 Air Distribution Devices 15885 Air Filters 15890 Metal Ductwork 15910 Ductwork Accessories 15990 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Division 16 Electrical 16010 General Electrical Provisions 16060 Grounding ADDENDUM 1- RE -BID Package ATTACHMENT 1 Page 5 of 6 Table of Contents HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) — Project Number: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE 000100-5 REV 10.14-2014 16075 Electrical Identification 16123 Wire and Cable 16136 Raceways 16140 Wiring Devices 16441 Disconnect Switches 16442 Low Voltage Panel Boards 16461 Dry -Type Distribution Transformers 16510 Luminaires 16515 Lighting Control System 16789 Exterior Athletic Lighting Appendix Title 1 Geotechnical Report — HEB Tennis Center END OF SECTION ADDENDUM 1- RE -BID Package ATTACHMENT 1 Page 6 of 6 Table of Contents HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) — Project Number: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE 00 01 00 - 6 REV 10-14.2014 0011 16 INVITATION TO BID ARTICLE 1— GENERAL NOTICE 1.01 The City of Corpus Christi, Texas (Owner) is requesting Bids for the construction of the following Project: Name of Project: HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) — Re -Bid Package Owner's Project Identification No.: Project No. E12118 Bidder will have the option of bidding on Part A (Base Bid, Additive Alternate 1, and Additive Alternate 6) or Part B (Base Bid and Additive Alternate 2 thru 5), or both Part A and Part B as a Lump Sum. To clarify: 1) Part A 2) Part B 3) Part A and Part B as a Lump Sum fl Parameters for PART A Scope: HEB • Demolition of existing stadium court and seating areas. • Addition of post tensioned concrete caps over existing courts 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 17 and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications. • Addition of three new courts 20, 21 and 22 on suspended structural slab and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications including all electrical and lighting. • Demolition of existing backboard area. • Addition of padding to light poles @ courts 9,10 and 12. • Addition of chain link cut corners at indicated on site drawings and details. • Modifications to chain link fencing at entrance to HEB facility. Fencing includes replacement of low fencing with high fencing at court no 1. • Addition of chain link fencing for access control to facility. • Include all chain link fencing related work. Al Kruse • Three courts ( 5, 6 and 7) to receive new asphalt overlay. • Seven courts (1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 9, and 10) to be resurfaced. • Windscreens to be replaced at all courts. • Court 10 Backboard relocated to court 9. • Addition of padding to light poles at courts 1, 4 and 7. • Include all chain link fencing related work. invitation to Bid WEB & AI Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) Project No. E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package Attachment 2 Page 1 of 7 001116-1 REV 0123-2r,.,:} 1 Part A Additive Alternatives • Additive Alternative 1— HEB Tennis Center—Addition of two (2) 36' tennis courts on suspended concrete slab include all surfacing, lighting, netting and fencing as noted on plans and as specified. • Additive Alternative 6 — HEB Tennis Center— Remove four existing interior light poles on Courts 9 and 10. Replace four existing corner light poles with new light poles & Lights to illuminate courts 9, 10 and 11 Parameters for PART B Scope: HEB • Demolition of viewing platform and Canopy between Courts 5-8 & 9-12 which includes demolition of seating areas, stairs, upper columns supporting roof canopy and the roof canopy to the top of the structural steel columns (existing lower columns to remain). • Replacing existing viewing platform with new accessible viewing platform inclusive of installation of a new LULA lift. • Various site concrete paving/sidewalk upgrades. • Converting old locker room building to new pro shop and all related work as shown on plans. • Architectural, MEP and Structural repairs to existing Lounge Building. Al Kruse • Accessible upgrades to existing sidewalks. • New accessible ramp at main entrance. • Renovation to existing Pro Shop providing accessible restrooms and new finishes including paint, new flooring, and new exterior doors. Part B Additive Alternatives • Additive Alternative 2 — Al Kruse Tennis Center — Mill top 2 inches of existing asphalt parking lot, repair pot holes and overlay 2 inches of new asphalt paving including all stripping, ADA signage and wheel stops. • Additive Alternative 3 — HEB Tennis Center — Complete Drip Irrigation System as shown on irrigation plans and specifications. • Additive Alternative 4 — HEB Tennis Center — Flatwork, electrical rough -in and structural piers for future shade structure. • Additive Alternative 5 — HEB Tennis Center— Pre -Fabricated maintenance storage unit "20 ft X 30 ft Morgan Building or equal" and adjacent flatwork, including electrical to storage building and windstorm anchoring. ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package Attachment 2 Page 2 of 7 Invitation to Bid 0011 16 - 2 WEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) Project No. E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE REV 01.23.2915 Parameters for Part A & Part B LUMP SUM Bidding: HEB Tennis Center: Demolition of existing stadium court and seating areas. Demolition of viewing platform to the top of the structural steel columns (existing columns to remain). Addition of post tensioned concrete caps over existing courts and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications. Addition of three new courts on suspended structural slab and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications. Replacing existing viewing platform with new accessible viewing platform inclusive of accessible platform lift. Converting old locker room building to new pro shop. Architectural, MEP & Structural repairs to existing Lounge Building. Various site concrete paving upgrades. GC is responsible to review plans and specifications for full scope of work at this site. Al Kruse Tennis Center: Accessible upgrades to existing sidewalks. New accessible ramp at main entrance. Three courts to receive new asphalt overlay. Seven courts to be resurfaced. Renovation to existing Pro Shop providing accessibility and new finishes. GC is responsible to review plans and specifications for full scope of work at this site. Alternates a. Add Alternate No. 1 — HEB Tennis Center Addition of two (2) 36' tennis courts on suspended concrete slab include all surfacing, lighting, netting, & fencing as noted on plans and as specified. b. Add Alternate No. 2 — Al Kruse Tennis Center Mill top 2" of existing asphalt parking lot, repair pot holes & overlay 2" of new asphalt paving include all stripping and ADA signage and wheel stops. c. Add Alternate No. 3 — HEB Tennis Center Drip irrigation system — scope to include all Landscaping sheets and specifications on construction documents. d. Add Alternate No. 4 — HEB Tennis Center Flatwork, electrical rough -in and structural piers for future shade structure. e. Add Alternate No. 5 — HEB Tennis Center Pre -fabricated maintenance storage unit "20ft x 30ft Morgan Building or equal" and adjacent flatwork, include electrical to storage building and windstorm anchoring. f. Add Alternate No. 6 — HEB Tennis Center Courts 9 & 10, remove four existing interior light poles. Replace four existing corner light poles with new light poles & lights to illuminate courts 9, 10 &11. Invitation to Bid HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) Project No. E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package Attachment 2 Page 3 of 7 001116-3 REV 01434Ni 1.02 The Engineer's Opinion of Probable Construction Cost for Part A Base Bid is 51.436.000.00 and Part B Base Bid is 5740.000.00. The Project Part A is to be substantially complete and ready for operation within 180 calendar days. The Project Part B is to be substantially complete and ready for operation within 180 calendar days. Both Project Parts A and B are to be complete and eligible for Final Payment 30 days after the date for Substantial Completion. 1.03 The Engineer's Opinion of Probable Construction Cost for the Project as a Lump Sum (Part A & Part B), is 52.180.00.00. The Project is to be substantially complete and ready for operation within ,J$Q days. The Project is to be complete and eligible for Final Payment 30 days after the date for Substantial Completion. ARTICLE 2 — EXAMINATION AND PURCHASE OF DOCUMENTS 2.01 Advertisement and bidding information for the Project can be found at the following website: http://www.cctexas.com/business/supplierportal 2.02 Contract Documents may be downloaded or viewed free of charge at this website. It is the downloader's responsibility to determine that a complete set of documents, as defined in the Agreement are received. 2.03 This website will be updated periodically with Addenda, lists of interested parties, reports, or other information relevant to submitting a Bid for the Project. 2.04 Notify Architect by emailing nsbullard@clkarch.com if you are a General Contractor interested in bidding this project so that a General Contractor Bidders list can be assembled and posted on regular basis on portal. ARTICLE 3 — PRE-BID CONFERENCE 3.01 A non -mandatory pre-bid conference for the Project will be held on Wednesday, March 25 2015. 10:30 a.m. at the following location: HEB Tennis Center 1520 Shely St. Corpus Christi, Texas 78404 Invitation to Bid HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) Project No. E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package Attachment 2 Page 4 of 7 00 11 16 4 RV/0121201s ARTICLE 4 — QUESTIONS REGARDING BIDDING PROCESS OR SOLICITATION DOCUMENTS 4.01 Questions are to be submitted using the Question and Answer process on the Owner's Bidding Website. Responses to questions submitted will be posted on the website by the Owner for the benefit of all Bidders. Responses will be posted for questions submitted by noon seven (7) days prior to the date of the bid opening. Inquiries made after this period may not be addressed. 4.02 A response to a question posted on the website that requires modification of the Contract Documents will be made by Addenda. Modifications to the Contract Documents prior to the award of contract can only be made by Addenda. Only answers in Addenda authorized by the Owner will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. ARTICLE 5 — MINORITY / MBE / DBE PARTICIPATION POLICY 5.01 Selected Contractor is required to comply with the Owner's Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy as indicated in SECTION 00 72 03 MINORITY / MBE / DBE PARTICIPATION POLICY. 5.02 Minority participation goal for this Project has been established to be 45% of the Contract Price. 5.03 Minority Business Enterprise participation goal for this Project has been established to be 15% of the Contract Price. ARTICLE 6 — BID SECURITY 6.01 Bidders must submit an acceptable Bid Security with their Bid as a guarantee that the Bidder will enter into a contract for the Project with the Owner within 10 days of Notice of Award of the Contract. The security must be payable to the City of Corpus Christi, Texas in the amount of 5 percent of the greatest amount bid. 6.02 Bid Security may be in the form of a Bid Bond or a cashier's check, certified check, money order, or bank draft from a chartered financial institution authorized to operate in the State of Texas. 6.03 Bid Bond Requirements: 1. A Bid Bond must guarantee, without qualification or condition, that the Owner will be paid a sum equal to 5 percent (5%) of the greatest amount bid if, within 10 calendar days of Notice of Award of the Contract, the Bidder/Principal: a. fails to enter into a contract for the Project with the Owner; or b. fails to provide the required Performance and Payment Bonds. 2. A Bid Bond may not limit the sum payable to the Owner to be the difference between the Bidder/Principal's bid and the next highest bidder. Invitation to Bid HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) Project No. E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package Attachment 2 Page 5 of 7 001116-5 REV 01-23.2015 3. The Bid Bond must reference the Project by name as identified in Article 7. 4. Bidders may provide their surety's standard bid bond form if revised to meet these Bid Bond Requirements. 6.04 Failure to provide an acceptable Bid Security will constitute a non-responsive Bid which will not be considered. 6.05 Failure to provide the required Performance and Payment Bonds will result in forfeiture of the Bid Security to the City as liquidated damages. ARTICLE 7 — DELIVERY OF BIDS 7.01 Sealed Bids (hard copy) must be submitted to the City Secretary's Office (City Hall Building, l51 Floor, 1201 Leopard Street, Corpus Christi, Texas 78401) no later than 2:00 p.m.. Wednesday April 8, 2015 to be accepted. The Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud at this time at the City Council Chambers or Staff Room, is' floor of the City Hall Building. Bids received after this time will not be accepted. Address envelopes or packages: City of Corpus Christi City Secretary's Office City Hall Building, 1st Floor 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 Attention: City Secretary Bid — HEB & AL Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012), Project No. E12118 7.02 Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud at 2:00 P.m., Wednesday. April 8, 2015, at the following location: City Hall Building - City of Corpus Christi First Floor City Council Chambers or Staff Room 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 ARTICLE 8 — AWARD OF CONTRACT 8.01 It is the intent of the Owner to award this Contract to the lowest responsible Bidder who submits a responsive Bid. The Owner reserves the right to adopt the most advantageous interpretation of the Bids submitted in the case of ambiguity or lack of clearness in stating Bid prices, to reject any or all Bids, and/or waive formalities. Bids may not be withdrawn within 90 days from the date on which Bids are opened. Invitation to Bid HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) Project No. E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package Attachment 2 Page 6 of 7 001116-6 REV 01.23.2015 ARTICLE 9 — OTHER CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 9.01 Contractors for this Project must pay no Tess than the prevailing wage rates for the area established by the Owner and included in the Contract Documents. 9.02 Contractors for this Project must obtain and provide the necessary insurance, including Workers' Compensation Insurance, as required by the General Conditions and SECTION 00 72 01 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS. 9.03 Performance and Payment Bonds are required. END OF SECTION Invitation to Bid WEB & AI Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) Project No. E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1-- RE -BID Package Attachment 2 Page 7 of 7 001116-7 REV 01.23.2015 00 30 00 BID FORM ARTICLE 1— BID RECIPIENT 1.01 In accordance with the Drawings, Specifications, and Contract Documents, this Bid Proposal shall be submitted no later than: Wednesday, April 8, 2015, 2:00 p.m. 1.02 Submit hard copy Bids, Bid Security, and all attachments to the Bid (See Section 7.01 below) to: The City of Corpus Christi, Texas City Secretary's Office 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 Attention: City Secretary Bid — HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) -Project No.: E12118 Re -Bid Package ARTICLE 2 — BIDDERS'S ACKNOWLEDGMENTS 2.01 Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement with Owner on the form included in the Contract Documents, to perform all Work specified or indicated in Contract Documents for the Contract Price indicated in this Bid or as modified by Contract Amendment. Bidder agrees to complete the Work within the Contract Times established in the Agreement or as modified by Contract Amendment and comply with the all other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 2.02 Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders, including those dealing with required Bonds. The Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 90 days after the opening of Bids. 2.03 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event of its failure to complete Work in accordance with the schedule set forth in the Agreement. 2.04 Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda: Addendum No. Addendum Date Signature Acknowledging Receipt ARTICLE 3 — BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 3.01 The Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. Bid Form WEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) -Project No.: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package Attachment 3 Page 1 of 7 003000-1 REV 01-23.2015 3.02 The Bidder has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. 3.03 The Bidder is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. 3.04 The Bidder has carefully studied the following Site -related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: A. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; B. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; C. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; D. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and E. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. 3.05 The Bidder has considered the: A. Information known to Bidder; B. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; C. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and D. The Contract Documents. 3.06 The Bidder has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 3.04 and 3.05 with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: A. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; B. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder; and C. Bidder's safety precautions and programs. 3.07 Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Bidder agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.08 The Bidder is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. Bid Form HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) -Project No.: E12118 RE -BED PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package Attachment 3 Page 2 of 7 003000-2 REV 01-23-2015 3.09 The Bidder has correlated the information known to the Bidder, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. 3.10 The Bidder has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Bidder has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Bidder. 3.11 The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. 3.12 Bidder's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4 — BASIS OF BID 4.01 Bidder may bid on Part A or Part B or both Part A and B (bidders choosing to bid Part A & Part 8 as a Lump Sum must fill in all blanks in Section 4.02). Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for: PART A Base Bid $ Lump Sum Add Alternate 1 $ Lump Sum Add Alternate 6 $ Lump Sum PART B Base Bid $ Lump Sum Add Alternate 2 $ Lump Sum Add Alternate 3 $ Lump Sum Add Alternate 4 $ Lump Sum Add Alternate 5 $ Lump Sum The Bidder selected for award of the Contract will be the Lowest responsible Bidder that submits a responsive Bid for Part A, or Part B or both Part A and B. Owner will, at its discretion, award the contract to the lowest responsible Bidder for Part A -Base Bid, plus any combination of Add Alternates and Part B -Base Bid, plus any combination of Add Alternates. Bid Form NEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012).Project No.: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package Attachment 3 Page 3 of 7 003000-3 REV 01.23.2015 4.02 Bidder may also complete the Work as a whole in accordance with the Contract Documents in the form of a Lump Sum for the Base Bid: Base Bid $ Add Alternate 1 $ Add Alternate 2 $ Add Alternate 3 $ Add Alternate 4 $ Add Alternate 5 $ Add Alternate 6 $ The Bidder selected for award of the Contract will be the Lowest responsible Bidder that submits a responsive Bid. Owner will, at its discretion, award the contract to the lowest responsible Bidder for the Base Bid, plus any combination of Add or Deduct Alternates. ARTICLE 5 — EVALUATION OF BIDDERS 5.01 THE OWNER WILL CONSIDER THE GREATEST AMOUNT BID, THE BIDDER'S RESPONSIBILITY, AND WHETHER THE BIDDER HAS MET THE MINIMUM SPECIFIC PROJECT EXPERIENCE REQUIREMENTS TO DETERMINE THE LOWEST RESPONSIBLE BIDDER. THE OWNER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO WAIVE ANY AND ALL IRREGULARITIES IN DETERMINING THE BIDDERS' RESPONSIBILITY, AND WHETHER THE BIDDER HAS MET THE MINIMUM SPECIFIC PROJECT EXPERIENCE REQUIREMENTS TO DETERMINE THE LOWEST RESPONSIBLE BIDDER, AND RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REQUIRE THE SUBMISSION OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 5.02 The Owner has the right to accept a Bid, reject any and all Bids, to waive any and all irregularities in the Bids, or to reject non -conforming, non-responsive, or conditional Bids. In addition, the Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid where circumstances and developments have, in the opinion of the Owner, changed the responsibility of the Bidder. 5.03 Material misstatements in the documentation submitted to determine the Bidder's responsibility, including information submitted per SECTION 00 4516 STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE, may be grounds for rejection of the Bidder's Bid on this Project. Any such misstatement, if discovered after award of the Contract to such Bidder, may be grounds for immediate termination of the Contract. Additionally, the Bidder will be liable to the Owner for any additional costs or damages to the Owner resulting from such misstatements, including costs and attorney's fees for collecting such costs and damages. Bid Form WEB & AI Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) -Project No.: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package Attachment 3 Page 4 of 7 003000-4 REV 01-23-2014 ARTICLE 6—TIME OF COMPLETION 6.01 The Project Part A is to be substantially complete and ready for operation within 180 calendar days. The Project Part B is to be substantially complete and ready for operation within 180 calendar days. Both Project Parts A and B are to be complete and eligible for Final Payment 30 days after the date for Substantial Completion. 6.02 Project bid as a lump sum is to be substantially complete within 180 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in Paragraph 4.01 of the General Conditions. Project will be complete and eligible for Final Payment 30 days after the date for Substantial Completion. 6.03 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially complete and will be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions within the number of days indicated in SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBIT A. ARTICLE 7 — ATTACHMENTS TO THIS BID 7.01 All submittals must be in hard copy for this Project. In compliance with the Bid Requirements in SECTION 00 11 16 INVITATION TO BID, the following are made a condition of this Bid: A. Bid Security. B. SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM and documentation of signatory authority. C. SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBIT A. D. SECTION 00 30 02 COMPLIANCE TO STATE LAW ON NONRESIDENT BIDDERS. E. SECTION 00 30 04 CONFLICT OF INTEREST QUESTIONNAIRE. F. SECTION 00 30 05 DISCLOSURE OF INTEREST. G. SECTION 00 30 06 NON -COLLUSION CERTIFICATION. ARTICLE 8 — DEFINED TERMS 8.01 The terms used in this Bid have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions. The significance of terms with initial capital letters is described in the General Conditions. ARTICLE 9 — VENUE 9.01 Bidder agrees that venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas for any legal action. Bid Form HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) -Project No.: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package Attachment 3 Page 5 of 7 003000-5 REV 01.23- 2015 ARTICLE 10 —SIGNATORY REQUIREMENTS FOR BIDDERS 10.01 Bidders must include their correct legal name, state of residency, and federal tax identification number in the Bid Form. 10.02 The Bidder, or the Bidder's authorized representative, shall sign and date the Bid Form to accompany all materials included in the submitted Bid. Bids which are not signed and dated in this manner, or which do not contain the required documentation of signatory authority may be rejected as non-responsive. The individual(s) signing the Bid must have the authority to bind the Bidder to a contract, and if required, shall attach documentation of signatory authority to the Bid Form. 10.03 Bidders who are individuals ("natural persons" as defined by the Texas Business Organizations Code §1.002), but who will not be signing the Bid Form personally, shall include in their bid a notarized power of attorney authorizing the individual designated as their authorized representative to submit the Bid and to sign on behalf of the Bidder. 10.04 Bidders that are entities who are not individuals shall identify in their Bid their charter or Certificate of Authority number issued by the Texas Secretary of State and shall submit with their Bid a copy of a resolution or other documentation approved by the Bidder's governing body authorizing the submission of the Bid and designating the individual(s) authorized to execute documents on behalf of the Bidder. Bidders using an assumed name (an "alias") shall submit a copy of the Certificate of Assumed Name or similar document. 10.05 Bidders that are not residents of the State of Texas must document their legal authority to conduct business in Texas. Nonresident Bidders that have previously registered with the Texas Secretary of State may submit a copy of their Certificate of Authority. Nonresident Bidders that have not previously registered with the Texas Secretary of State shall submit a copy of the Bidder's enabling documents as filed with the state of residency, or as otherwise existing. Bid Form HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2014 -Project No.: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package Attachment 3 Page 6 of 7 • 003000-6 REV 01-23.2015 ARTICLE 11- BID SUBMITTAL 11.01 This Bid is submitted by: Bidder: By: Name: Title: Attest: (typed or printed full legal name of Bidder) (individual's signature) (typed or printed) (typed or printed) State of Residency: Federal Tax ID. No. Address for giving notices: (individual's signature) Phone: Email: (Attach evidence of authority to sign if the authorized individual is not the Bidder, but an individual signing on behalf of another individual Bidder, or if the authorized individual is a representative of a corporation, partnership, or joint venture.) END OF SECTION Bid Form HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) -project No.: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1- RE -BID Package Attachment 3 Page 7 of 7 003000-7 REV 01-23-2015 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBIT A 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBIT A Project Name: HEB & Al. KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE Project Number: E12118 Owner: City of Corpus Christi Bidder: OAR: Jerry Shoemaker, P.E. Designer: CLK ARCHITECTS & ASSOCIATES, INC. Basis of Bid Item DESCRIPTION Base Bid Part A - HEBIAI Kruse BASE BID (per SECTION 0129 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT) HEB • Demolition of existing stadium court and seating areas. • Addition of post tensioned concrete caps over existing courts 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 17 and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications. • Addition of three new courts 20, 21 and 22 on suspended structural slab and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications including all electrical and lighting. • Demolition of existing backboard area. • Addition of padding to light poles @ courts 9, 10 and 12. • Addition of chain link cut corners at indicated on site drawings and details. • Modifications to chain link fencing at entrance to HEB facility. Fencing includes replacement of low fencing with high fencing at court no 1. Bid Form Exhibit A HEB AI Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) - Project Number: E12118 - RE -BID Package ADDENDUM 1 ATTACHMENT4 Page 1 of 4 0808-2014 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBIT A Item DESCRIPTION Alt. 6 Courts 9 & 10, remove four existing interior light poles. Replace four existing corner light poles with new light poles & lights to illuminate courts 9, 10 &11. • Addition of chain link fencing for access control to facility. $ TOTAL PART A • Include all chain link fencing related work. AL KRUSE • Three courts (5, 6 and 7) to receive new asphalt _overlay. • Seven courts (1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 9, and 10) to be resurfaced. • Windscreens to be replaced at all courts. • Court 10 Backboard relocated to court 9. • Addition of padding to light poles at courts 1, 4 and 7. • Include all chain link fencing related work. SUBTOTAL PART A !$ Part Al - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1- HEB TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 0123 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCESi Alt. 1 Addition of two (2) 36' tennis courts on suspended concrete slab include all surfacing, lighting, netting, & fencing as noted on plans and as specified. Part A2 - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 6 - HEB TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 0123 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) Alt. 6 Courts 9 & 10, remove four existing interior light poles. Replace four existing corner light poles with new light poles & lights to illuminate courts 9, 10 &11. $ TOTAL PART A $ Bid Form Exhibit A HEB Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) - Project Number: E12118 - RE -BID Package ADDENDUM 1 ATTACHMENT 4 Page 2 of 4 D8-08.2014 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBIT A Item DESCRIPTION ' Mill top 2" of existing asphalt parking lot, repair pot holes & overlay 2" of new asphalt paving include all stripping and ADA signage and wheel stops. Part B - HEB/AI Kruse BASE BID (per SECTION 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT) $ HEB • Demolition of viewing platform and Canopy between Courts 5-8 & 9-12 which includes demolition of seating areas, stairs, upper columns supporting roof canopy and the roof canopy to the top of the structural steel columns (existing lower columns to remain). • Replacing existing viewing platform with new accessible viewing platform inclusive of installation of a new LULA lift. • Various site concrete paving/sidewalk upgrades. • Converting old locker room building to new pro shop and all related work as shown on plans. o Architectural, MEP and Structural repairs to existing Lounge Building. AL KRUSE • Accessible upgrades to existing sidewalks. • New accessible ramp at main entrance. • Renovation to existing Pro Shop providing accessible restrooms and new finishes including paint, new flooring, and new exterior doors. SUBTOTAL PART B - BASE BID $ Part 61 - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 2 - AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION D123 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) Alt. 2 Mill top 2" of existing asphalt parking lot, repair pot holes & overlay 2" of new asphalt paving include all stripping and ADA signage and wheel stops. $ Bid Form Exhibit A HEB Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) - Project Number: E12118 - RE -BID Package ADDENDUM 1 ATTACHMENT 4 Page 3 of 4 08.08.2014 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBITA Item DESCRIPTION Alt. 5 Pre -fabricated maintenance storage unit "20ft x 30ft Morgan Building or equal" and adjacent flatwork, include electrical to storage building and windstorm anchoring. Part 62- ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 3 - HEB TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) Alt. 3 Complete Drip Irrigation System as shown on irrigation plans and specifications. $ $ Part 63 - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 4 - HEB TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) Alt. 4 Flatwork, electrical rough -in and structural piers for future shade structure. Part B4 - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 5 - HEB TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANC Es I Alt. 5 Pre -fabricated maintenance storage unit "20ft x 30ft Morgan Building or equal" and adjacent flatwork, include electrical to storage building and windstorm anchoring. $ TOTAL PART B $ Bidder agrees to reach Substantial Completion in Bidder agrees to reach Final Completion in 180 180 days days Bid Form Exhibit A HEB Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) - Project Number: E12118 - RE -BID Package ADDENDUM 1 ATTACHMENT 4 Page 4 of 4 aa.m.2O14 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBIT A LUMP SUM 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBIT A Project Name: HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) - RE -BID Package Project Number: E12118 Owner: City of Corpus Christi Bidder: BASE BID (per SECTION 0129 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT) OAR: Jerry Shoemaker, P.E. Designer: CLK ARCHITECTS & ASSOCIATES, INC. Basis of Bid Item DESCRIPTION LUMP SUM BID Base Bid BASE BID (per SECTION 0129 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT) Base Bid A. HEB Tennis Center: Demolition of existing stadium court and seating areas. Demolition of viewing platform to the top of the structural steel columns (existing columns to remain). Addition of post tensioned concrete caps over existing courts and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications. Addition of three new courts on suspended structural slab and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications. Replacing existing viewing platform with new accessible viewing platform inclusive of accessible platform lift. Converting old locker room building to new pro shop. Architectural, MEP & Structural repairs to existing Lounge Building. Various site concrete paving upgrades. GC is responsible to review plans and specifications for full scope of work at this site. B. Al Kruse Tennis Center: Accessible upgrades to existing sidewalks. New accessible ramp at main entrance. Three courts to receive new asphalt overlay. Seven courts to be resurfaced. Renovation to existing Pro Shop providing accessibility and new finishes. GC is responsible to review plans and specifications for full scope of work at this site. $ SUBTOTAL - BASE BID $ HEB Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) - Project Number: E12118 - RE -BID Package ADDENDUM 1 ATTACHMENT 5 P5ge 1 of 3 as -a8•2014 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBIT A LUMP SUM Rem DESCRIPTION Addition of two (2) 36' tennis courts on suspended concrete slab include all surfacing, lighting, netting, & fencing as noted on plans and as specified. B Mill top 2" of existing asphalt parking lot, repair pot holes & overlay 2" of new asphalt paving include all stripping and ADA signage and wheel stops. LUMP SUM BID Part A -ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1- HEB TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) A Addition of two (2) 36' tennis courts on suspended concrete slab include all surfacing, lighting, netting, & fencing as noted on plans and as specified. B Mill top 2" of existing asphalt parking lot, repair pot holes & overlay 2" of new asphalt paving include all stripping and ADA signage and wheel stops. ` $ _ SUBTOTAL PART A - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1 $ Part B -ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 2 - AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) I B Mill top 2" of existing asphalt parking lot, repair pot holes & overlay 2" of new asphalt paving include all stripping and ADA signage and wheel stops. ` SUBTOTAL PART B - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 2 $ Part C -ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 3 - HEB TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) - r Complete Drip Irrigation System as shown on irrigation plans and specifications. ` SUBTOTAL PART C - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 3 $ Part D -ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 4 - HEB TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES] D Flatwork. electrical rough -in and structural piers for future shade structure. ` SUBTOTAL PART D - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.4 $ Part E ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.5 - HEB TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) E Pre -fabricated maintenance storage unit "20ft x 30ft Morgan Building or equal" and adjacent flatwork, include electrical to storage building and windstorm anchoring. SUBTOTAL PART E - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.5 $ Bid Form Exhibit A HEB Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) - Project Number: E12118 - RE -BID Package ADDENDUM 1 ATTACHMENT 5 Page 2 of 3 08-09.2at4 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBITA LUMP SUM Item DESCRIPTION 1 $ Bidder agrees to reach Final Completion in It LUMP SUM BID Part F -ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 6 - HEB TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) $ TOTAL - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 3 - (PART C) F Courts 9 & 10, remove four existing interior light poles. Replace four existing corner light poles with new light poles & lights to illuminate courts 9, 10 &11. $ TOTAL - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 5 - (PART E) $ TOTAL - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 6 - (PART F) $ SUBTOTAL PART F - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 6 BID SUMMARY TOTAL PROJECT BASE BID 1 $ Bidder agrees to reach Final Completion in TOTAL - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1- (PART A) $ TOTAL - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 2 - (PART B) $ TOTAL - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 3 - (PART C) $ TOTAL - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 4 - (PART 0) $ TOTAL - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 5 - (PART E) $ TOTAL - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 6 - (PART F) $ Contract Times Bidder agrees to reach Substantial Completion in 180 days Bidder agrees to reach Final Completion in 180 days Bid Form Exhibit A HEB AI Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) - Project Number: E12118 - RE -BID Package ADDENDUM 1 ATTACHMENT 5 Page 3 of 3 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement, for the Project awarded on, is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1— WORK (Contractor). 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) — Re -Bid Pac1osg proiect Number: E12118 fl Parameters for PART A Scope: HEB • Demolition of existing stadium court and seating areas. • Addition of post tensioned concrete caps over existing courts 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 17 and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications. • Addition of three new courts 20, 21 and 22 on suspended structural slab and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications including all electrical and lighting. • Demolition of existing backboard area. • Addition of padding to light poles @ courts 9, 10 and 12. • Addition of chain link cut corners at indicated on site drawings and details. • Modifications to chain link fencing at entrance to HEB facility. Fencing includes replacement of low fencing with high fencing at court no 1. • Addition of chain link fencing for access control to facility. • Include all chain link fencing related work. Al Kruse • Three courts ( 5, 6 and 7) to receive new asphalt overlay. • Seven courts (1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 9, and 10) to be resurfaced. • Windscreens to be replaced at all courts. • Court 10 Backboard relocated to court 9. • Addition of padding to light poles at courts 1, 4 and 7. • Include all chain link fencing related work. Agreement HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) -Project No. E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package ATTACHMENT 6 Page 1 of 11 00 52 23 - 1 REV 10.14-2014 Part A - Additive Alternatives • Additive Alternative 1— HEB Tennis Center—Addition of two (2) 36' tennis courts on suspended concrete slab include all surfacing, lighting, netting and fencing as noted on plans and as specified. • Additive Alternative 6 — HEB Tennis Center — Remove four existing interior light poles on Courts 9 and 10. Replace four existing corner light poles with new light poles & Lights to illuminate courts 9,10 and 11. 2' Parameters for PART B Scope: HEB • Demolition of viewing platform and Canopy between Courts 5-8 & 9-12 which includes demolition of seating areas, stairs, upper columns supporting roof canopy and the roof canopy to the top of the structural steel columns (existing lower columns to remain). • Replacing existing viewing platform with new accessible viewing platform inclusive of installation of a new LULA lift. • Various site concrete paving/sidewalk upgrades. • Converting old locker room building to new pro shop and all related work as shown on plans. • Architectural, MEP and Structural repairs to existing Lounge Building. Al Kruse • Accessible upgrades to existing sidewalks. • New accessible ramp at main entrance. • Renovation to existing Pro Shop providing accessible restrooms and new finishes including paint, new flooring, and new exterior doors. Part B - Additive Alternatives • Additive Alternative 2 — Al Kruse Tennis Center — Mill top 2 inches of existing asphalt parking lot, repair pot holes and overlay 2 inches of new asphalt paving including all stripping, ADA signage and wheel stops. • Additive Alternative 3 — HEB Tennis Center — Complete Drip Irrigation System as shown on irrigation plans and specifications. • Additive Alternative 4 — HEB Tennis Center — Flatwork, electrical rough -in and structural piers for future shade structure. • Additive Alternative 5 — HEB Tennis Center — Pre -Fabricated maintenance storage unit "20 ft X 30 ft Morgan Building or equal" and adjacent flatwork, including electrical to storage building and windstorm anchoring. Agreement HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) -Project No. E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package ATTACHMENT 6 Page 2 of 11 005223-2 REV 10.14.2014 Parameters for Part A & Part B LUMP SUM Bidding: HEB Tennis Center: Demolition of existing stadium court and seating areas. Demolition of viewing platform to the top of the structural steel columns (existing columns to remain). Addition of post tensioned concrete caps over existing courts. Addition of three new courts on suspended structural slab and lighting. Replacing existing viewing platform with new accessible viewing platform inclusive of accessible platform lift. Converting old locker room building to new pro shop. Architectural, MEP & Structural repairs to existing Lounge Building. Various site concrete paving upgrades. Al Kruse Tennis Center: Accessible upgrades to existing sidewalks. New accessible ramp at main entrance. Three courts to receive new asphalt overlay. Seven courts to be resurfaced. Renovation to existing Pro Shop providing accessibility and new finishes. Alternates a. Add Alternate No. 1— HEB Tennis Center: Addition of two (2) 36' tennis courts on suspended concrete slab include all surfacing, lighting, netting, & fencing as noted on plans and as specified. b. Add Alternate No. 2 — Al Kruse Tennis Center: $ Mill top 2" of existing asphalt parking lot, repair pot holes & overlay 2" of new asphalt paving include all stripping and ADA signage and wheel stops. c. Add Alternate No. 3 — HEB Tennis Center: $ Drip irrigation system — scope to include all Landscaping sheets and specifications on construction documents. d. Add Alternate No. 4 — HEB Tennis Center: Flatwork, electrical rough -in and structural piers for future shade structure. e. Add Alternate No. 5 — HEB Tennis Center: $ Pre -fabricated maintenance storage unit "20ft x 30ft Morgan Building or equal" and adjacent flatwork, include electrical to storage building and windstorm anchoring. f. Add Alternate No. 6 — HEB Tennis Center: $ Courts 9 & 10, remove four existing interior light poles. Replace four existing corner light poles with new light poles & lights to illuminate courts 9, 10 &11. ARTICLE 2 — DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: CLK Architects & Associates 615 N. Upper Broadway. Suite 1250 Cornus Christi. Tx 78401, Agreement HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) -Project No. E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package ATTACHMENT 6 Page 3 of 11 005223-3 REV 10.14.2014 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project,is: Mr. John Maggiore Project Manager Capital Programs. City of Cornus Christi 1201 Leopard St, Corpus Christi. Tx 78401 ARTICLE 3 — CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Project Part A is to be substantially complete and ready for operation within 180 calendar days. The Project Part B is to be substantially complete and ready for operation within 180 calendar days. Both Project Parts A and B are to be complete and eligible for Final Payment 30 days after the date for Substantial Completion. B. Project bid as a lump sum is to be substantially complete within 180 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in Paragraph 4.01 of the General Conditions. Project will be complete and eligible for Final Payment 30 days after the date for Substantial Completion. C. Milestones, and the dates for completion of each, are as defined in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual Toss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $250.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner $150.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions. Agreement HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) -Project No. E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package ATTACHMENT 6 Page 4 of 11 005223-4 REV 10 14=2014 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. S. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4— CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached in SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBIT A. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 13.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. PART A - Total Base Bid Price PART B - Total Base Bid Price $ Alternates Add Alternate No. 1— HEB Tennis Center: $ Addition of two (2) 36' tennis courts on suspended concrete slab include all surfacing, lighting, netting, and fencing as noted on plans and as specified. Add Alternate No. 2 — Al Kruse Tennis Center: $ Mill top 2" of existing asphalt parking lot, repair pot holes & overlay 2" of new asphalt paving include all stripping and ADA signage and wheel stops. Add Alternate No. 3 — HEB Tennis Center: $ Drip irrigation system — scope to include all Landscaping sheets and specifications on construction documents. Add Alternate No. 4 — HEB Tennis Center: Flatwork, electrical rough -in and structural piers for future shade structure. Add Alternate No. 5 — HEB Tennis Center: $ Pre -fabricated maintenance storage unit "20ft x 30ft Morgan Building or equal" and adjacent flatwork, include electrical to storage building and windstorm anchoring. Agreement HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) -Project No. E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package ATTACHMENT 6 Page 5 of 11 005223-5 REV 10-14-2014 Add Alternate No. 6 — HEB Tennis Center: Courts 9 & 10, remove four existing interior light poles. Replace four existing corner light poles with new light poles & lights to illuminate courts 9,10 &11. LUMP SUM BID (Part A & Part Bi Total Base Bid Price $ Alternates g. Add Alternate No. 1 — HEB Tennis Center: $ Addition of two (2) 36' tennis courts on suspended concrete slab include all surfacing, lighting, netting, & fencing as noted on plans and as specified. h. Add Alternate No. 2 — Al Kruse Tennis Center: $ MITI top 2" of existing asphalt parking lot, repair pot holes & overlay 2" of new asphalt paving include all stripping and ADA signage and wheel stops. i. Add Alternate No. 3 — HEB Tennis Center: $ Drip irrigation system — scope to include all Landscaping sheets and specifications on construction documents. Add Alternate No. 4 — HEB Tennis Center: j. Flatwork, electrical rough -in and structural piers for future shade structure. k. Add Alternate No. 5 — HEB Tennis Center: $ Pre -fabricated maintenance storage unit "20ft x 30ft Morgan Building or equal" and adjacent flatwork, include electrical to storage building and windstorm anchoring. I. Add Alternate No. 6 — HEB Tennis Center: $ Courts 9 & 10, remove four existing interior light poles. Replace four existing corner light poles with new light poles & lights to illuminate courts 9, 10 &11. ARTICLE 5 — PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 15 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions, 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 2Sth day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. Agreement HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) -Project No. E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package ATTACHMENT 6 Page 6 of 11 005223-6 REV 1014-2014 B. Progress payments equal to 95 percent of the total earned value to date for completed Work and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. The balance will be held as retainage. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.B, less the total of payments previously made and less set -offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, retainage may be required at a higher percentage rate if progress on the Project is considered to be unsatisfactory. If retainage in excess of the amount described above is held prior to Substantial Completion, the Owner will place the additional amount in an interest bearing account. Interest will be paid in accordance with Paragraph 6.01. E. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6— INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. 6.02 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7 — CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. Agreement HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) -Project No. E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package ATTACHMENT 6 Page 7 of 11 005223-7 REV 10-14-2014 C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site -related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. Agreement NEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) -Project No. E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package ATTACHMENT 6 Page 8 of 11 005223-8 REV 10-142014 J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 8— ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 13.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice, the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9 — CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 2. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 3. Addenda. 4. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form Exhibit A. S. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. Agreement HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) -Project No. E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package ATTACHMENT 6 Page 9 of 11 005223-9 REV 10-142014 ARTICLE 10—CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES Four original duplicates of the signed Contracts will be required. The sequence of signatures will be completed in the following order: A. CONTRACTOR — Contract must be signed by a person authorized to bind the firm or company. If Contractor is a Corporation contracts must be attested; B. ASSISTANT CITY ATTORNEY for the City; C. DIRECTOR OF CAPITAL PROGRAMS; D. CITY SECRETARY for the City. Agreement HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) -Project No. E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package ATTACHMENT 6 Page 10 of 11 00 52 23-10 REV 10-14-2014 The Effective Date of the Contract is ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI Rebecca Huerta City Secretary Director of Capital Programs APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: Veronica Ocanas Senior Assistant City Attorney ATTEST (IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR (Seal Below) Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President, Vice President, Chief Executive Officer, or Chief Financial Officer By: Title: Address City State Zip Phone Fax EMail END OF SECTION Agreement HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) -Project No. E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package ATTACHMENT 6 Page 11 of 11 00 52 23-11 REV 10-142014 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Construct Work as described in the Contract Documents. 1. Provide the materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make the Project completely and fully useable. 2. Provide the labor, equipment, tools, and consumable supplies required for a complete Project. 3. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OAR. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK PART A A. Work is described in general, non-inclusive terms as: HEB • Demolition of existing stadium court and seating areas. • Addition of post tensioned concrete caps over existing courts 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 17 and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications. • Addition of three new courts 20, 21 and 22 on suspended structural slab and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications including all electrical and lighting. • Demolition of existing backboard area. • Addition of padding to light poles @ courts 9, 10 and 12. • Addition of chain link cut corners at indicated on site drawings and details. • Modifications to chain link fencing at entrance to HEB facility. Fencing includes replacement of low fencing with high fencing at court no 1. • Addition of chain link fencing for access control to facility. • Include all chain link fencing related work. Al Kruse • Three courts ( 5, 6 and 7) to receive new asphalt overlay. • Seven courts (1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 9, and 10) to be resurfaced. • Windscreens to be replaced at all courts. • Court 10 Backboard relocated to court 9. • Addition of padding to light poles at courts 1, 4 and 7. • Include all chain link fencing related work. ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package ATTACHMENT 7 Page 1 of 5 Summary of Work HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) — Project Number: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE 011100-1 11-25-2013 PART B Part A Additive Alternatives • Additive Alternative 1— HEB Tennis Center—Addition of two (2) 36' tennis courts on suspended concrete slab include all surfacing, lighting, netting and fencing as noted on plans and as specified. • Additive Alternative 6 — HEB Tennis Center — Remove four existing interior Tight poles on Courts 9 and 10. Replace four existing corner light poles with new light poles & Lights to illuminate courts 9,10 and 11. HEB • Demolition of viewing platform and Canopy between Courts 5-8 & 9-12 which includes demolition of seating areas, stairs, upper columns supporting roof canopy and the roof canopy to the top of the structural steel columns (existing lower columns to remain). • Replacing existing viewing platform with new accessible viewing platform inclusive of installation of a new LULA lift. • Various site concrete paving/sidewalk upgrades. • Converting old locker room building to new pro shop and all related work as shown on plans. • Architectural, MEP and Structural repairs to existing Lounge Building. Al Kruse • Accessible upgrades to existing sidewalks. • New accessible ramp at main entrance. • Renovation to existing Pro Shop providing accessible restrooms and new finishes including paint, new flooring, and new exterior doors. Part B Additive Alternatives • Additive Alternative 2 —Al Kruse Tennis Center — Mill top 2 inches of existing asphalt parking lot, repair pot holes and overlay 2 inches of new asphalt paving including all stripping, ADA signage and wheel stops. • Additive Alternative 3 — HEB Tennis Center— Complete Drip Irrigation System as shown on irrigation plans and specifications. • Additive Alternative 4 — HEB Tennis Center— Flatwork, electrical rough -in and structural piers for future shade structure. • Additive Alternative 5 — HEB Tennis Center— Pre -Fabricated maintenance storage unit "20 ft X 30 ft Morgan Building or equal" and adjacent flatwork, including electrical to storage building and windstorm anchoring. ADDENDUM 1— RE-B1D Package ATTACHMENT 7 Page 2 of 5 Summary of Work HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) — Project Number: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE 011100-2 11-25-2013 LUMP SUM (Part A & Part B) HEB Tennis Center: Demolition of existing stadium court and seating areas. Demolition of viewing platform to the top of the structural steel columns (existing columns to remain). Addition of post tensioned concrete caps over existing courts and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications. Addition of three new courts on suspended structural slab and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications. Replacing existing viewing platform with new accessible viewing platform inclusive of accessible platform lift. Converting old locker room building to new pro shop. Architectural, MEP & Structural repairs to existing Lounge Building. Various site concrete paving upgrades. General Contractor is responsible to review plans and specifications for full scope of work at this site. Al Kruse Tennis Center: Accessible upgrades to existing sidewalks. New accessible ramp at main entrance. Three courts to receive new asphalt overlay. Seven courts to be resurfaced. Renovation to existing Pro Shop providing accessibility and new finishes. General Contractor is responsible to review plans and specifications for full scope of work at this site. Alternates a. Add Alternate No. 1— HEB Tennis Center Addition of two (2) 36' tennis courts on suspended concrete slab include all surfacing, lighting, netting, & fencing as noted on plans and as specified. b. Add Alternate No. 2 — Al Kruse Tennis Center Mill top 2" of existing asphalt parking lot, repair pot holes & overlay 2" of new asphalt paving include all stripping and ADA signage and wheel stops. c. Add Alternate No. 3 — HEB Tennis Center Drip irrigation system — scope to include all Landscaping sheets and specifications on construction documents. d. Add Alternate No. 4 — HEB Tennis Center Flatwork, electrical rough -in and structural piers for future shade structure. e. Add Alternate No. 5 — HEB Tennis Center Pre -fabricated maintenance storage unit "20ft x 30ft Morgan Building or equal" and adjacent flatwork, include electrical to storage building and windstorm anchoring. f. Add Alternate No. 6 — HEB Tennis Center Courts 9 & 10, remove four existing interior light poles. Replace four existing corner light poles with new light poles & lights to illuminate courts 9, 10 &11. ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package ATTACHMENT 7 Page 3 of 5 Summary of Work HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) — Project Number: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE 011100-3 11-25-2013 1.03 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The following items of work are not included in this Contract, but may impact construction scheduling and completion: 1. None. B. In the case of a disagreement between the above list and those specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Contractor is to base his Proposal on the most expensive listing. C. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction and testing of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. 1.04 WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner plans to perform the following items of work which are not included in this Contract, but may impact the construction scheduling and completion: 1. None. B. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. C. Owner will provide normal operation and maintenance of the existing facilities during construction, unless otherwise stated. 1.05 CONSTRUCTION OF UTILITIES A. Pay for temporary power, including but not limited to construction cost, meter connection fees, and permits. 1.06 USE PRIOR TO FINAL COMPLETION A. Owner has the right to use or operate any portion of the Project that is ready for use after notifying the Contractor of its intent to do so. B. The execution of Bonds is understood to indicate the consent of the surety to these provisions for use of the Project. C. Provide an endorsement from the insurance carrier permitting use of Project during the remaining period of construction. ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package ATTACHMENT 7 Page 4 of 5 Summary of Work HES & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) — Project Number: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE 011100-4 11-25-2013 D. Conduct operations to insure the least inconvenience to the Owner and general public. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION ADDENDUM 1— RE -BID Package ATTACHMENT 7 Page 5 of 5 Summary of Work HEB & AI Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) — Project Number: E12118 RE -BID PACKAGE 011100-5 11-25-2013 a. o.ev 0 c 3 7 ea w M-4 g I ''' 1 » OEMOLmON KEYED �D .. 41 _..:_:) i? _cui_i 1 � I — — -- n , 7N NC Ir -w g I DEMOLISH ALL EXISTING INTERIOR d PLUMBING. REFER TO MEP DRAWING S INFORMATION. DEMOLISH EXISTING DRINKING FOUNT EXISTING COLUMN TO REMAIN 11 o v z JI ii 11 fir'. •--=.. ''- -� i•J R III ilia ,'11111 IIILII u 11 11 `„/I I`v'11`\/• 1, \/ 1 1,�\\ 1.,..\\/ 1 t 1 I I t ii u ,' 1� 1 t I 1 1,�\` ii 1 1 ii u . 1 11 r 1 I 1 1 u ii -�- I I 1 II ,.....4 \ • u F=_IA T I t t 1 r i,.J -I -f EXTERIOR ODORS 6 WALLS: CAP OFF EXISTING HEETS 59, 65, fib, 73, d 75 FOR ADDITIONAL AIN. u NOTES - HEB TENNIS CENTER ,1r,' _ u 11 1 I 1 --�---_U____LI-L-.__J-J L--- II_-----yt------fir- 41) 11n r,� y Z. -1 ',/ 1\, 1 L . 1L' I 1 11 u -- II L I 1 I 11 11 II If'.., 11r', 1111-`-, II illi el a tei 11 11 ii i 11 11 11 II II 11 II 11 ������ I I \,/ 11 \ r I I .. it \, " I 1I /`1 1 " II 1 i\1 11 ''1 ' _NI ' ?i J ck ‘..Ni LL' ‘,1L ` I __-_-I� - i 1 1 1 11 LI 11 1� n 1 1 -.._ 1 1 - - I I 4-L. L. JL _1_1 r` / n 1 1 I / 1....1 11, 1 I i I I 1 n it u rib�1q� y LJ I1m� I1y� Li LJ LP ♦ t. u = x „® O . R' pp a4 ASE" Mg" ig t� 22�oznigm7 n .'i §a ro WON T Oc .t.,t1 MAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES r�.�• e8�i,Pvr muggy GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES n7 u u NV �� b lc" i1� a a i��R cF.�8 Itis G7i,p a� yl� • @s�it .Zp p ^ 2 iti .A pa, 3s_ n 22 Sw. nnnrR ' yy x�I pb.ni. 81‹ In 5w m< a R u MUM. $b �a�� i s:v2°..-S4 n m z nI9Lo GI aes-• �'• .Y`_ raw-- K -A II�� I� '11 >rEIv,'g"�* LI AG'S2 m la l+ o��b Pe 'm_ b v Win zln nyi,-.y.. ';YN c a n �Fnsg a�np Ann- a . A= a1*1' a F p9InV 1.se� ay x-, va ^ 02 mNal.' g02 _ 62rAi �s�� a y� 1 y `1 ly S K NA na .' �.I n ^Fey a�.�;� fpp xml� - . jogn amvg :-Y. I. E P F+ `o FA u� a Cod" z O A �vn .Y� fr^ Ny o p { .N��I mg PAINT EXISTING CONCRETE COLUMN AS SPECIFIED. z c"� z ov1 1x'19 zf m1^�' ri 10 nm pZ ljlp MVAC UNIT - NALL MOUNTED PACKAGE L LOCATIONS SHOWN ON PLAN. SEE MECHA DIUIING SHEET 59 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. ALIGN GYP BOARD. TRH EXISTING C OLUM g R ^P O r Q Y O x - r^lo - A,rp PR;.; im Iv a XAAg O _ 9Cf NSt�i 4' rGa ;I Ig-� ,� '_� nF �zc y z a g- 2V wpf. ..ti y p� 2 C2QQoa *+ mr EnRgl61Zapym r$ 5ZgVig~ eo AnjF Kao �•�pee�S JIj npF N _$ p4. IZi1 a Q' ' \ Y nmrpa•Ai � �p2 a- x7� p ,T. zya u@i N -,MV l:1 o =4i n C PAX p1zR^w 2 �52'p :. ci dg p p 5J_ nrsolaP . go u z n2 Y0°�i^11 CID II I/7' 7'-�' CV. r { /• 3'-4 I/7• I 1/ Fa. r-0 ' t .3-11' 3•-11• 1'-6 r r 11 I/7• F.Y. , 3.-4• 11 1/7• F.V. •y 3'-1• • 3'-4• �+ Ea. 3' -It• 3'-1t' E0. 11 1/7• /! F.V. I 'a 6 SI8 t• e_ 0 { A.a. rm. 9 a 1 0 f1t KptY V • IK P�" VOU.VAON3d dOkS C -' I 1 `n �O b D I I it--ifli IIJr t. L 1�-rl"I1----/. 111-*. 1- g 4 D - $ IL n Y ' s I. 0. u di ° 0 11,4 11o o jEl ® . EI •�� O r ght_.— I 1 , 1 I 1 I 0 ? \ 4 I ® I � - ' �-.1!u g tom_ r 0 u 4k NIP k.� d ` I. ll moi/ w n 1 C ® }4- +�_ �� •.._i� ^1 I�.I c I I I Imo. Ami ri i�l I�1 I.I I �/ - S Z® C + A 0'-li ! ✓!• 6'-t 7 . A e.-+• 3.-01/7• Ea 3-- 11• 3-11- Ea. 3•-4• Y -r p 3•-4• Eo. 3'-I1' 3• -Ir E0. 1 R.O. F Y. 1• ,7'-0 t/7• I 1'j' 1'-0• t I lc •t7 -0 7/F' I I• 13' 1 F/0 13'-11 0/0• .Y F.Y. i.V. .V. f Y. ' V ` F V F.Y Qf 04/01/3110 UK 01 -LEVEL ORWK0 C FOUNTAIN - RELOCATED REVISIONNO. GATE BY OESCRIPFIQN REVISIONNO. CLAVE ! BY OESCRIPFION 1 " .,, 4 SHEET 0' 7 of 82 RECORD ORAINNG NO CP -204 HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE _ = 815 N. UPPER BROADWAY 31AIE,250 CORPUS CHRISTL EX 70177.350 • al y ; CONSULTANT'S sHEETNO AA -1.1 ......r CITY of CORPUS CHRIST! ► vcl10«h T 361.881.3295 a .„,,,d,„. F 961.081.]290 HEB TENNIS CENTER DEMOLITION & RENOVATION PLAN PRO SHOP TEXAS Capital Programs *' .clach ca o �'_a• z 0 I ��11 om ,�' o c I , - �•� � e i a co � !• � i ikiv 7■m 1c \ . o rr �� rrIC r5I' 0?t f Q ..... • __; _ 2 1' 0• 1• , — -- 12.P 1 • • ,.... , til 111" _ • • • \ -0. R.O.• COAL T T j EWA 7.10' 1'-f Z•C P '• > C :: P 'go ` � - - - �1 SI m v n IP* n ti iq$ mP 12U El Lai 9 - p.` €mi 5xg 'p� i Ll e N•t, eaayy'�i O�O� goA. l TA g 111 5a m ymq r z�F�°o TAG ma ^� 8 4e"mi O 36 gl 'ile 5 ini N• 3 g ` P F N I�\ Lal e a Oy pp 77,SSg = n .Yw. S a� k1N 1■■■■■■■ 1.1 z ■■■■■■■M ■■■E■R■_ L._ ^ REEMEREE JI b REMEMBER 4 b •n –REMEMBER . o ■■■■■■■■■ LA ■■■■Ir■■■t n. ■■■■►0 11}}1j r :` m _ p / ---- ♦ U N IOP O VPN ♦ 1.41.4 •• e zz OR mfg` �+1 yr, • ip n ��� N ■ I'1 Z � 9 ��$ 1 - 5 V N N �� Q v. . J . , )i t '" cx a i en ' R -3-i'^ Rzoan ^:'''iye`1 c■ __" -_-_-.,-� _- .._____.. -. i%a.,yf=c a 'Cm(011ai''no '(1g IM a m? L A r N m m .f' a' J� 0 10 OVER EXISTING COWAN. 1/4' SEMI -GLOSS TILE AT ALL E PUMPING SHEET 60. R AS SPECIFIED. MOUNT BOTTOM O. R AND BASE CABINET w0 BROOM HOLDERS ASO HOOK° -GLOSS CERAMIC TILE SAL - WOMEN'S T/R ONLY IT: REFER 10 PLUMBINC DRAWING CLOSET; REFER TO PLUMBII C 01 AS SPECIFIED X% nn n c :D sows - INTERIOR ELEV,+ "q'CrmJ 1 3 4'uA■, 1I D L�. ROAMS01 REFLEC T4E S1»1 CE 4 z rr 7uAY • z m n o E ii m H S n N .. P 3 t U E �i" D ttti ftt[ a .��II --. A ' 8 1rr z� P C ,5d+ 1111 A o G Wig S RGED PLANS g O RUBBER" O c Di� II I I 1 a-. C 21 n n m 6i C -ISO 1 2 a N 4 N i7'-1 t Or 4 e'-5• e FV O4/01/2015 Cu 01 -LEVEL ORRIMINO FOUNTNN EIEVAT1ON N]OE0 REWSIONNO. DATE _ 8Y DESCRIPi/ON REVISION NO. 0417E 811' DESCRMFTDN 1 e m SHEET 019 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO CP -204 HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SURE 1250 CORPUS CHRISIL Tx 76477-0050 k" M , : , -a CONSULTANTS S, TNO AA -2.1 v - �, ill • x . ........ CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI L ► T 361884.3295 cI° 6134.3798 ° HEB TENNIS CENTER ENLARGED RESTROOM PLAN & INT. ELEVATIONS TEXAS Capital Programs v n m 3 n 3 OA 0 CO ,-X 60 1 = ; A , �rrll \''' ... 2 '1 -. -ti \ rn O'a 1 1 EXTERIOR ELEVATION cts 11\ z1 1� Pi R. t oe El i 3L----- __ . I w a EA § ,i�fa� ii 3 ;Dagir RAWgi . F. 1 3.- • I N n T !l/T• . m MLB 1aFE 8 g 7. E. 9 a g Ilii s5R t 0g .` Pig %t4ip 10;1 cirk i 1 1 VW 2gli i 44.46,: ni a 0 lgM9 page -1.g 00 A 1 150:exl :.::::..:::: W gbw! .... .:......... x. _ V 7 cDTIfg 4„ 4i./ ---.—ir. -4 14 xi 11 r 0 a 1 .Rtr� ELEVATION r ; � .�� 1 .11 y p m 1 . rn.. . . ,,-.1\liP A il!i;K! _ 7 . ,. __ s WSW TO UP OF •%/ //43o*r HNgiNL � — _ r , • \\t JIMIIIIII E„ ., — 4-• I I 7 : m ' rn n 1 /)' l F 40 IA it i ra 714 F EP CD 1 1! 11 g 8 2E 1 q a lig / \ 4Jl/T015 alO Mal WWI IRE/HS REFER TO STRU UIN. •YPR'A& ®1H VMS REVISION NO. DATE Sy DESCRIPTION REVISION NO DATE HY DESCRIPTION n 0, ti m SHEET 021 of 62 RECORD ORAWWGNO CP -204 HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS.. (BOND 2012) REBID PACKAGE C = acdlecfs 615 N. UPPER B SIRE 250 CORPUS CHRISTI. TX 76477-0054 6 ,idles F' 341.118.1.3295 1:B64 B •OADWAY R y� o . s1 ' — g 5 IV CITY of CORPUS CHRIST! TEXAS Capital Programs HEB TENNIS CENTER VIEWING PLATFORM SECTION & ELEVATIONS a u w„ = o. m .i m u .... HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE SOU° PLASTIC DOUBLE TIER 7' LOCKERS 15- FIDE X 12' DEEP X 72' HIGH SOLID PLASTIC LOCKER ENO PANEL SOLIO PLASTIC LOCKER FILLER PANEL NEW DOUBLE SWING STOREFRONT DOOR ANO THRESHOLD (MATCH PREVIOUS DOOR SIZE). ,NEW MIRROR OVER SINK A5 SPEC FI(° NEW SOLIO PLASTIC DOUBLE TIER '2' LOCKERS - 15' WIOE X 12"PEEP k 72- H1GH NEW STANDAR° HEIGHT URINAL SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS. NEW SOLID PLASTIC PEDESTAL L00000 BENCH ANCHORED TO FLOOR NEW STAINLESS STEEL TOILET PARTITION AS SPECIFIED. RELOCATED EX155100 SOAP 01SPEN5ER. DISPENSER CONTROLS TO BE 44" ABOVE FINISH FLOOR. NEW ADA/TAS COMPLIANT FOL01NG BENC- A5 SPEC FIE°. LOWER EXISTING SOAP 015PEN5ER & PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER WHERE CONTROLS ARE 44' ABOVE FLOOR, PATCH WALL NEW SHOWER CIJRTMN i ROD zzz iii Op nRn 0 0 tgt P 61 M o n y C Z C M! t 1 Z E 41 w..,46 c '^ n 32 . TEac n m N = 0 = O = m n N S 9 0 0 0 r 0 A O N z Z 0 O 0 A 5 d] c N co 1 I0 0 Jab 0 0 =ii- PIRg 1,40 yVO IPS "'97° m-9 To, WE so= k AI r r r IL, _1 i. 0 I 4 `• I I. F a 1 7 7 1.—LIJ—L1 T T7 -1-1--1-1-1-I . a 1 1 J 1 1 L 1.1. L1_1_ mn r1 1 11 I 11 I II I o r I o r.. o ' - FA 1- E5 F L 1 • 0, I 1 1 Ic=i==T ` i 111 • /Ir. .r 1 I/ '•ISI, 1�1/ K. v.K_ I l " _.y r-1 a00 VAE 972 P1p 1999 .9 �N d rp al 1c ra rs A 5114111E ACCESSITLE ORRIKWC fOUN1ARf CHANCED 10 0I -LEVEL ORWKWG rn1141AM HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE AL KRUSE TENNIS C ENTER DEMOLITION & RENOVATION PLAN— PRO SHOP CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs 61514. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRI5IL 25 76177-0050 E 361 661.3295 f 361.661.3296 www.clkarch... ID § 01 Jo 9 ailed I9 3usui C__ 1611-1 ARCH ij a 9 § @ HE & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENT RS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE STAIR PLAN AND DETAILS CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs m.UPPER ROADWAY S_,s COM sa_n_,_ ,m__ .»_.3m _aa ._ WOE: 02)12/2014 NM 31. 3013 - 1:43wn 13167-PI.61.9 8,...t: 8-: 0 f:7 La La 11' 0 � � 7 A CI 1� , -rc-- ENLARGED PLUMBII - a ` 1 f �` 11 s — INLAREGED PLUME ^- m0 , V o iti4fl cow 11 �� / o o i ^I : � I� I ` i �[ . . \ ;N 1 O 4 i' � i a 1 — 0 gl 0 m1,511 ..., m .-..._ : T., -u 0 // v B u D Ft A 3 El iLe Q 0 i 0 zzA - z ozns C m _ _ m m r �A / 'f: ii � ICI 1 r _ 1r I I 11 0 I O X 1 a > FI * m i Z C 9 v fol $ I ; It 1r ,11 a i MEN'S TOILET RM. AAbD? I . n _ LA q • • • If y_.J ft - 1 Z 11Yd I 1 1E ! - -fl0xIIX 01 DO q 1(11:1° JR 2 ' icz' 7) ' • ' a��.r• ' . e 1:11i1 ID Il 9 11 1 11 41 ig O= ft 11 1 e s g Pig ll V ,p, li 0 2 a %.4 11 ;1 I in igi vi A 11 1�. 1 a ;1 O fgsii! 5 � 1 oz ill 4,.` 1'9 ID 9 9 9 0 9 pp li 01 i 10 p� gAO A tx 261 • ' 41 ti l i / i g'mg 1- 51 r 1 1 % . 1g 5AtA § li a, 11 Ai / iAgpppAge i 9 QV 2 § 0 pi iii i as!�, gR 1 i g PI } a V . Y N P § Z 1 ill ill xl fil $ a z 2g igx ii ,1 s'itil r NI 2 iici g5 0 p irg c ci Ai x A al 14 x zco i 0 Jo e1 i g ^fl z I1 iF El AA cmn 1 il 11 ::1C ' F er € C P NO.1 3/3112015 NRG ADDENDUM R1 REVISION NO. DATE BY DESCRIPTION REVISION NO, DATE BY DESCRIPTION CITY PROJECT it E12116 —I SHEET 66 of 82 RECCRO DRAWING NO. CP -204 HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE p Irrw. CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capita! Programs L P0„,,ec I 61511 UPPER BROADWAY sunE I25D CORPUS CHRISTI. TX 78477-0050 T• 36r.681.3295 S rnwciule5 F- 361.881.3296 � V S. )1""g 1 N HEB TENNIS CENTER PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN .nw, ckolch.com a a c 3 0 n 3 m 0 t0 - 0 0 Mar 31. 2913 - 4:45gn 13147_1.1.drg !ATER HAMMER ARRESTOR SEE MB4A PLAN • • • Z � E §-1 PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE 1yy�11 11 1 U � N N • A N '91 1 N N N Z U 1 ' V V •1 = \, ' �3 = g I 1 � i 1 .•� 1 I 1 1 1 ` Y . 1 1 1 S j IS � 1 2 j � g e : {{�� at ; 4 7, 0 z f; ane 1/ 1 I 1 1/. 40 443 gsx: hil y RI! PA In iimp hgl„gt`; ?AV 1; ; li 91 0. -An r i" {j� i2 111 I. I 1i g AM lagli !Ig. / 1� Iflg jik'l �3 ' N TEMPERATURE 1115E. INT SHALL BE RATED IDR 150P51 WORKING PRESSURE. GLASS 11NE0 TANK. ASRE TPR VALVE, 6 TEAR WARRANTT. BRASS DRMN VALVE. AND MFG'S HEAT TRAPS. UHT Swat BE 2011 VDU. SWCLE PIIAS'i. Mit 1,54;1! • DiFgPO 1�i sop c1 KiQ2 hA,51 li t UT" IA 4 1 i p [ TIN Alleff ,grAg7 o i �X tj a . c i le* libel O�e Tigg W 0 " 'Prig' � i51 edg Illi� E DCII I p 42$ • - P.1i y�QQC ik gr 3 Piggsfiv 0111/5 aoss el A,/111 A1 Ilin gAill a I PLUMBING PIPE MATERIALS SCHEDULE RPM SYSTEM PANG MATERIAL wawa SENER BELOW GRADE SCHEDULE 40 0IIv RAG swum. DRAW NO VENTS ABOVE GRADE SCHEDULE 40 0141 PVC• --- DOMESTIC HOT k COLD RATER BELON GRADE COPPER, TYPE 1C SOFT DOMESTIC HOT k COLO RATER ABOVE 6RAOE COPPER. TYPE L HARD DRAWN ? Ia 0 V w Y r Y N O M O r P Y it ii is 11 li a .111 8 1 li ili:�11; _ ir1 1III p P'S 15 11 1 r1 �IA,gT a 111 1 } 13'/p 1 OI1I1 1 ill 6q4 li le 654 41 gli 11 ! 1 4 Id 11 li i . 1 i Ill i 01 1 I lei / 5 hi I lil gil ill 11 a F; 1 510 ss 1z Z1 1'11 hJ 1 Al 6 11y 1 li 1 4 1 CO liq 1 !I 1 it ir al 1P 11 § A ; 1 mg; 1 g q . & lal 1 1 g 1g 1.2 i x ofla as 2 g g £ 8 h 7 Afif 111 4 s ililil 2 AA a A JJQQ y1 Til 7R F 11 512 f ; € 111 1 ■ ir 1 q ; 1 i I 1 Rii 1 1 11 / Al : 11"1 514 i. 9 , i ii ' 'g 1il ! ! 1 ; !I ! 11 1 1 ! ill 1 !:: 1411 lE 1 1 t 1 Ill i A A i• $ . ,. IPl i p ; al 1 lb § oqx1 1 / a.. 1 e T In 41 11 °; 51 11 i fi I 1 If 1 i • •. 1111111111111 1111111111111 ,.�, 0 Kro4,L11111l11� l' 11-"fiffifHli 11ttlitliq PLUMBING LEGEND 015REGARD LEGEND ITEMS NOT POCAT(D oN ORAWWGS ANEW 1N 1 weft { RI ❑❑ 1� Z ❑❑ :! ►fin`,.... `„ g 'If q 0350"0 A11/RUDNJ lif i illit Tiff s Q Q 'i A 1 f0 _ HOSE BBB NALL HYDRANT HEN TO EmSTLHG PIPE CONNECTION PLUMBING RISER IDENTIFICATION (pys r1 CONDENSATE OR *ERECT DRAW BRANCH CONNECTION. TP BRANCH Co►WECO0II. BD1TO4 ELBOW UP UNION THERMOMETER WELL BUTTERTLY VALVE _. PLUG VALVE PRESSURE REOUONG VALVE PRESSURE RENEE VALVE STRA601 QIEo( VALVE B4MKWG VALVE ! iiql i 5d i } � 1! l' il ]T FGR aR WASTE PIP111G 0.0. IL OR PASTE PIPING A.G. EASE NASTE PIPRC NT RPoIG n 4, l i g i �i i� o " 1/1 ro I 1 x +� n 1 I: i p c f ? ¢l n n i i g N 1 NO. 1 313112015 NRG ADDENDUM MI REVISION NO. GATE BY DESCRIPTION REVISION NO. GATE BY DESCRIPTION t m SHEET 67 of 82 RECORD DRANK NO. CP -204 HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE _ 11 .... ► ��nl,� 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SURE „ CORPUS CHRISTI. 1M 78477-00.50 f.36I.554R .329 y N CONSULTANTS SHEET NO. PA -3 r CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs HEB TENNIS CENTER PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULES a. com D. 3 as n 3 Nat 31, 2015 - 4:46pm 13102_P l.d. g )I:i::IC_ 1-,-1_!-L1J-L1_ -1 -7 r- 1 _J 1- 1 PLUMBING C 69 69 SCALE l 4.1 T 1_ 1 r L I 1 i 1 I I 1 I I-T1-r-T1-rT- I A� I <I I I r�1 U n v 05 f 1li1 2 1 \ 11 1 ' 1— - Q may, q---1 II C) > I Il (7 I I- -- I 11 I 11 , w 12 i 1L = PRRRf 1... .. ..._J ` � I 'F iF Z —" L-- 14 1 11 �rraall�y�� I- gim _ K- , _ is FR6 r L-7--'1'-- -'1 L_.-. A�p 4 114 N11y � i i - _. ��-_T----T.-..'--T--•-T----T----Z t--ir,_----,-_1r---, 1•-I1 ___1i Ji -. n 1 _ 11 1' ' r‘ ry-' rr". r 1 •�1 1 •�1 1 • i le r{{ el 1 1 I 1 1 1- FII �11rv. II �v 1/� L " 1 1 " 1 1 -1 _ -L-_ _ _. -1____________- \IliJ I1 E I r! _. I I ! 1 1 , .. I 'Ne 11 I IJ • a ti .1.- i- 111\x 1 Wo J 0 0 0 000 8 9 "1 1 LP .,. w ;' 111 11 gg xi . x103"li i i i i i j i a€ x APi pig Ai'l Cg 1 A § 2 L- 1 21 AR ggil§ -3° itA $ s oQ r7 IF 8 A _ - f �^ xi 11 rs= — r_ ` h 6 1s Alo 8 8i ° 1$4 &d§ 6p0i A Adi A P51 41 m 1 o? g fl f 42 rsils IL PLUMBING NOTE; 613 V N o "'— r-,--� - L_ -- I r l -N7: 8 11 ill 1�51 nC ANE a §8 gx I k > c o i'f m wig 11 1111A m 11 1 K i 3X, F 1 Fo : m 1 1 1Y �� § Z GI ID r 8 nIP 6 15 i f A 4 g 5 1 li g .11 !01 A . ' x Xlg R a N 7 r 1 = / . II 07t5; 1[(;��,I L ---d p i I--.....� / �1 =•'r, • }-1_-L-__L_LJLI - K -I 1 , 1 ry y r CP hr l r -" J ❑ I� < 8 l Z ❑❑ r 9 0ilii - i ° !h ❑❑ 3 L 9. cyl m l ,�z ,,,,u... -- , n .1. • • 1 ' . 1 . f .- — — ra NO.1 3/3111015 NRG ADDENDUM 11 REVISION NO DATE BY DESCRIPTION REVISION NO DATE BY DESCRIPTION CITY PROJECT # E12118 I SHEET 69 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO. CP -204 HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS1 (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE � w.~r CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs 615 N. UPPER BROADWAY SUITE 1250 CORPUS CHRISO, TX 79477-0050 L� \ T°361.8843295 m "T �ka°�c�° g rM g W o AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTER PLUMBING DEMOLITION PLAN Addendum 1 (Attachment 8) Page 9 of 10 �y3V3V2oa 11 • tie W • ❑❑ 1>U ENG/NEER/NG _�j_- Su, n -_ 1 pnw►rq —1.. --.-may 1 13162 1 D 4 11- q I? a 1•IA 5 il116 1 PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE UfNI411111 O1111CN_IN CI)CC 1 1. it4 1 1 4 1 4 1 1 N 1 R g 4 z 12 N ZZZ 1 1 1 N 1 N _ _ I \ 1 N 1 1 1 1 ` 1 S. _ 1 � 1 I - N 1 1 1 , N a ' ` m 1 1 1ll yny� i! -20 ii 1 - N ki a_ li ii Al 1 yyirli r:!A Id 151; hA; !ill - •• i CCN SSSS1�1py!c $ 0 i 11 e-li ml 7 Ig ,yA ,' 111���111 !! 1$ ni THI P_ :;!. 1E4; c 4 IQ 2 G N S ti GG 111.747 lCp y ai.). pF !Wr I. ' . WHIPI bigir fahl ci%1 dyagl g P 144sAjilllia d 1 1101P1 ,,MItii a�1 �d c X126 „qg . ;4c Xj Si. w ii� P�I�ZS ' 9k10 1AC Qjy�€ e0•- `� A �rcQ1yu S� '3- r1 i 4 nt. 7 — y ti =p d; Y Y 6 ;i ;c Id i 111 li Iii 1 li 16y e§'grtl LL I !g a ii il 1 1;,; , m m i g: 1 ANN � . ��3�cbi�11Isy� 1 1ii ee i ; Oil 1 1 Y 1 q i 1 g 1 § 4 i 1 1 !! I i fit=aSg r . x /18'i3 i n 1gi 1 1 11 IgIlrA/ili 2 1 1 so li a lil idli: .F, 4/ i ; 1 ii, i q ; N O a P 11 T €€ c II ig li AA i ; q ig li la i 1r a2 lig il mil 11 111 :? 1 illi3 A /41 1 i� 1 pa 131? ,illi atals 2 2 / IN j 11 P 1► ' 4 M 1g 1€ii 11 1• r•,1 11 I/ Ill 91 a 11; Iii 1; Pis �'F^ it /1lf 14 ! le 1 2 _ 0 1 !fl 4 1: / 14 IS §11 3 Y'h 1/1 1 1 1 11IaIR 8 15 Q Al lq 1S 1 i N A 1 bi li aa1AA gilr.7( G 4111 !i s i PLUMBING PIPE MATERIALS SCHEDULE PIPING SYSTEM PPM ISATERLAL SANITARY SEWER BELOW GRADE SCHEDULE 40 0W PCC - SANITARY GRAIN MO VENTS ABOVE GRADE SCHEDULE 40 DIVA PVC' 11111 11111 Si'4 iKS Il !1'1I11fH'iHfff}tffIfTtfflt IIIII 1111 111111111111111 I PLUMBING LEGEND DISREGARD LEGEND ITEMS NOT INDICATED +ON DRAWINGS mem 1DESCRIPTION I A88R. a a ¢ i c �j S NOSE BIN WALL HYDRANT NEW TO EXISTNC PPE CONNECTION 1 ELBOW DOWN FLOCK =ANOUT (INTERIOR) sumo T AT GRADE (EXTERIOR) WALL CLEANOUT Tiq 1 PLUG VALVE PRESSURE AMONG VALVE eALANOHC VALVE BUTTERFLY VALVE %W A DOMESTIC HOT WATER DOMESTIC HOT WATER RETURN TEMPERED DOMEEI1C HOT MATER Will g g Sal OR WASTE PIPING B.G. SOL OR WASTE PPWC A.C. GREASE WASTE PIPING NO 1 3riIr2015 FRO ADDENDUM 11 REVISION NO. DATE BY DESCRIPTION REVISION NO. DATE BY DESCRIPTION SHEET 70 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO CP -204 HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE CITY of CORPUS Capital _ _ — — .^.. ." CHRISTI !,-„,,,c„,...„,, \ 615 N. UPPER [SROAOWAY suITE Izso CORPUS CHRISTI. TK 76277-0050 T'361E&1.3245 a..m .a.m 29B CONSULTANTS SWUNG. PB -2 AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTER PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULES TEXAS Programs - G a a c 5 qaOD CD CD 0 0 0 Nat 31. 20IS - 4 1pn 13162_E I-HEB.d.p gf , ;LI' ------._Ag_ pp ( f A ° 1. 1 i 1 �- m j 1 k1xip I r Imo— / ° 1 N r I ii ......... PING PLAN .{'. \\j7 m l { 1I I 1 il -~ I I I + 1 i 1 •► Y f 5 1r • ! to i r ` 40 Q / I 1 I r 1 1 ^. I f. 1 1 a • ®tS a g1211 , m 1 Qf b mm = - - IIJ L V 0,1 N •_ Y II yy 2: is v i •0 L $ aO© Z 1 E `air.._., • WOMEN'S T1R m = A p � A O © r.4 l �1 - a 1 _ ' x z 1 lc' 1 �, ,1, 1--1 I_[>siir..1111-1 --, .. IF xiZ _ Q �, 1 I q �� 9I `_�, ,.P.*..\',, I�©}.� N ©� '�-•3•.•W t � •. pa 00 TripGi Milpiaigii S b _►,., i •s A 1 {�� ���%��� N fj4� ■� FMO m4 DO 0 CD 0 ©®®S®o® � IMIP *g91G 1 S _ 1 �- i1 1 1 142+1 aF 3 �1�03i��zfZ`�16$gX�a:gni TiT - }1' � C bi: E0° s i z g 1'1 15 R - O ! ' Ai fi y ( 1�[1 �__�� } 1•.�\f�K YIt.....0 ti: 9 A 414 ' A ©0 0 0 Oj_ 1_�e o � � � �=7 �-7; � t� it a A14; 11111 2E� %i e =rn 171r F � 1"1E'l gill :1014-7Q_ ig _ Eilill9ii fi r R ii � �QyyaW rQ �= N� ti P a SS b NF • _ 1M F 1 F Ai 0 = 11 TO , 4r 4 n @ r o E� SIR rm 111g1 . 1, IP1 X11 Ita FA a• s , �p ��i 1 � 1 F i 2 IFti . h RI �)1 z M .1 y•s r A y� � iip� co? P •9 IA owo mOm � � Q I 8151 i Aj �i : i i I li 4 i A Apals F a {17 Z rn■�,� r n�� _ -- ••fL2 NO. 1 3/3112015 NRO ADDENDUM 11 REVISION NO. DATE BY DESCRIPTION REVISION NO. DATE BY DESCRIPTION CITY PROJECT p E12118 I SHEET 75 of 82 RECORD DRAWING NO CP -204 HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE -BID PACKAGE Q =SURE =Pr= CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Capital Programs "`""�` 675 N. UPPER BROADWAY 1250 CORPUS CHRIST, Tx 78<77-4050 ILT-361.66a.3295 y a q CONSULTANT'S SHEET NO EA -4 HEB TENNIS CENTER NEW PRO SHOP LIGHTING & POWER PLANS 1www.Ckolch[DIII • HEB & Al. Kruse Tennis (Bond 2012) Project No, E12118 t (1, Location. Nlfl Ir.n aCtr 1520Skst k. CIL TY Dam ime: wed 25 Mardi 2015.10301 m. IIIREMEM 435 R JERRY �VICE .A MJEK t• PRESIDENT MAJEK Io■MOLIT1ON 301.087-6603 C]ff 361,007 -5672 Fttr 3G1,5,40 '.Sit--CclO El OD Ctrntwcll Ln Corpus Christi. TX 71348Q Wrrrta tiSCom ov-S..7 e }K rlL+ai rl ILENE Pale 1 cl t ADDENDUM 1 (ATTACHMENT 9) CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) RE-BID PACKAGE PROJECT NUMBER: E12118 CLK Architects & Associates Record Drawing Number: CP-204 February 20, 2015 Table of Contents 00 01 00 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 10-14-2014 00 01 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS Division / Section Title Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 11 16 Invitation to Bid (Rev 01/23/2015) 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders (Rev 01/23/2015) 00 30 00 Bid Form (Rev 01/23/2015) 00 30 01 Bid Form Exhibit A (Rev 10/14/2014) 00 30 02 Compliance to State Law on Nonresident Bidders 00 30 04 Conflict of Interest Questionnaire 00 30 05 Disclosure of Interest 00 30 06 Non-Collusion Certification 00 45 16 Statement of Experience 00 52 23 Agreement (Rev 10/14/2014) 00 61 13 Performance Bond (Rev 7/3/2014) 00 61 16 Payment Bond (Rev 7/3/2014) 00 72 00 General Conditions 00 72 01 Insurance Requirements (Rev 7/3/2014) 00 72 02 Wage Rate Requirements 00 72 03 Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Division 01 General Requirements 01 11 00 Summary of Work 01 23 10 Alternates and Allowances 01 29 00 Application for Payment Procedures 01 29 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 01 31 13 Project Coordination 01 31 14 Change Management 01 33 00 Document Management 01 33 01 Submittal Register (Rev 7/3/2014) 01 33 02 Shop Drawings 01 33 03 Record Data Table of Contents 00 01 00 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 10-14-2014 Division / Section Title 01 33 04 Construction Progress Schedule 01 33 05 Video and Photographic Documentation 01 35 00 Special Procedures 01 40 00 Quality Management 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 57 00 Temporary Controls 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements Division 01 Architectural General Requirements 01605 Product Options and Substitutions PART S Standard Specifications Division 02 Sitework 02120 Chainlink Fence 02120 Site Clearing and Stripping 02140 Site Grading 02180 Removing Old Structures 02210 Select Material 02220 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities and Sewers 02222 Trench Safety for Excavations 02525 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement (Class A) (S-34) 02526 Asphalt Tennis Court Overlay 02561 Concrete Sidewalks 02564 Concrete Curb Ramps 02760 Asphalt Edging 02791 Asphalt Tennis Court Surfacing 02792 Concrete Tennis Court Surfacing 02810 Landscape Irrigation 02882 Tennis Court Net Posts Division 03 Concrete 03000 Flat Work – Portland Cement Concrete Table of Contents 00 01 00 - 3 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 10-14-2014 Division / Section Title 03200 Flat Work – Reinforcing Steel 03800 Flat Work – Concrete Structures Division 04 Masonry 04200 Clay Unit Masonry Division 05 Metals Refer to Structural Drawings Division 06 Wood & Plastics 06100 Rough Carpentry 06220 Finish Carpentry and Millwork Division 07 Thermal Moisture Protection 07100 Gypsum Sheathing 07100 Waterproofing and Dampproofing 07200 Insulation 07250 Weather Barriers 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal 07612 Metal Roof Panels 07920 Joint Sealers Division 08 Doors & Windows 08100 Steel Doors and Frames 08200 Plastic Laminated Wood Doors 08505 Aluminum Fixed Windows – Impact Resistant 08505 Aluminum Sliding Windows – Impact Resistant 08700 Finish Hardware 08800 Glass and Glazing Table of Contents 00 01 00 - 4 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 10-14-2014 Division / Section Title Division 09 Finishes 09220 Lath, Plaster and Stucco Work 09250 Gypsum Drywall 09650 Resilient Flooring 09655 Resilient Rubber Wall Base 09900 Painting Division 10 Specialties 10150 Toilet Partitions 10520 Fire Protection Specialties 105126 Plaster Lockers and Benches 10800 Toilet Accessories Division 11 Equipment 11480 Backboards 11 65 00 Sport Nets and Recreational Equipment Division 12 Furnishings NO WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION Division 13 Special Construction NO WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION Division 14 Conveying Systems 14420 Vertical Wheelchair Lifts PART T Technical Specifications Division 15 Mechanical 15050 Basic Materials & Methods 15051 Starting of Systems Table of Contents 00 01 00 - 5 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 10-14-2014 Division / Section Title 15060 Mechanical Demolition for Remodeling 15070 Inside Utility Trench Excavation, Backfill and Compaction 15080 Outside Utility Trench Excavation, Backfill and Compaction 15140 Supports and Anchors 15170 Motors and Motor Controllers 15171 Combination and Non-Combination Motor Starters 15190 System Identification & Pipe Marking 15240 Sound & Vibration Control 15260 Piping Insulation 15290 Duct Insulation 15410 Plumbing Piping & Valves 15430 Plumbing Specialties 15440 Plumbing Fixtures 15530 Refrigerant Piping 15671 Air Cooled Condensing Units 15854 DX Fan Coil Units 15860 Power Ventilators 15881 Air Distribution Devices 15885 Air Filters 15890 Metal Ductwork 15910 Ductwork Accessories 15951 Controls 15990 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Division 16 Electrical 16010 General Electrical Provisions 16060 Grounding 16075 Electrical Identification 16123 Wire and Cable 16136 Raceways 16140 Wiring Devices 16441 Disconnect Switches Table of Contents 00 01 00 - 6 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 10-14-2014 Division / Section Title 16442 Low Voltage Panel Boards 16461 Dry-Type Distribution Transformers 16510 Luminaires 16515 Lighting Control System 16789 Exterior Athletic Lighting Appendix Title 1 Geotechnical Report – HEB Tennis Center END OF SECTION Invitation to Bid 00 11 16 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) Project No. E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 01-23-2015 00 11 16 INVITATION TO BID ARTICLE 1 – GENERAL NOTICE 1.01 The City of Corpus Christi, Texas (Owner) is requesting Bids for the construction of the following Project: Name of Project: HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Re-Bid Package Owner’s Project Identification No.: Project No. E12118 PART A HEB • Demolition of existing stadium court and seating areas. • Addition of post tensioned concrete caps over existing courts 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 17 and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications. • Addition of three new courts 20, 21 and 22 on suspended structural slab and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications including all electrical and lighting. • Demolition of existing backboard area. • Addition of padding to light poles @ courts 9, 10 and 12. • Addition of chain link cut corners at indicated on site drawings and details. • Modifications to chain link fencing at entrance to HEB facility. Fencing includes replacement of low fencing with high fencing at court no 1. • Addition of chain link fencing for access control to facility. • Include all chain link fencing related work. Al Kruse • Three courts ( 5, 6 and 7) to receive new asphalt overlay. • Seven courts (1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 9, and 10) to be resurfaced. • Windscreens to be replaced at all courts. • Court 10 Backboard relocated to court 9. • Addition of padding to light poles at courts 1, 4 and 7. • Include all chain link fencing related work. Part A Additive Alternatives • Additive Alternative 1 – HEB Tennis Center – Addition of two (2) 36’ tennis courts on suspended concrete slab include all surfacing, lighting, netting and fencing as noted on plans and as specified. • Additive Alternative 6 – HEB Tennis Center – Remove four existing interior light poles on Courts 9 and 10. Replace four existing corner light poles with new light poles & Lights to illuminate courts 9, 10 and 11 Invitation to Bid 00 11 16 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) Project No. E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 01-23-2015 PART B HEB • Demolition of viewing platform and Canopy between Courts 5-8 & 9-12 which includes demolition of seating areas, stairs, upper columns supporting roof canopy and the roof canopy to the top of the structural steel columns (existing lower columns to remain). • Replacing existing viewing platform with new accessible viewing platform inclusive of installation of a new LULA lift. • Various site concrete paving/sidewalk upgrades. • Converting old locker room building to new pro shop and all related work as shown on plans. • Architectural, MEP and Structural repairs to existing Lounge Building. Al Kruse • Accessible upgrades to existing sidewalks. • New accessible ramp at main entrance. • Renovation to existing Pro Shop providing accessible restrooms and new finishes including paint, new flooring, and new exterior doors. Part B Additive Alternatives • Additive Alternative 2 – Al Kruse Tennis Center – Mill top 2 inches of existing asphalt parking lot, repair pot holes and overlay 2 inches of new asphalt paving including all stripping, ADA signage and wheel stops. • Additive Alternative 3 – HEB Tennis Center – Complete Drip Irrigation System as shown on irrigation plans and specifications. • Additive Alternative 4 – HEB Tennis Center – Flatwork, electrical rough-in and structural piers for future shade structure. • Additive Alternative 5 – HEB Tennis Center – Pre-Fabricated maintenance storage unit “20 ft X 30 ft Morgan Building or equal” and adjacent flatwork, including electrical to storage building and windstorm anchoring. "Bidder will have the option of bidding on Part A (Base Bid, Additive Alternate 1, and Additive Alternate 6) or Part B (Base Bid and Additive Alternate 2 thru 5) or Both Part A and Part B." 1.02 The Engineer’s Opinion of Probable Construction Cost for Part A Base Bid is $1,436,000.00 and Part B Base Bid is $740,000.00. The Project Part A is to be substantially complete and ready for operation within 180 calendar days. The Project Part B is to be substantially complete and ready for operation within 180 calendar days. Both Project Parts A and B are to be complete and eligible for Final Payment 30 days after the date for Substantial Completion. ARTICLE 2 – EXAMINATION AND PURCHASE OF DOCUMENTS 2.01 Advertisement and bidding information for the Project can be found at the following website: http://www.cctexas.com/business/supplierportal Invitation to Bid 00 11 16 - 3 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) Project No. E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 01-23-2015 2.02 Contract Documents may be downloaded or viewed free of charge at this website. It is the downloader’s responsibility to determine that a complete set of documents, as defined in the Agreement are received. 2.03 This website will be updated periodically with Addenda, lists of interested parties, reports, or other information relevant to submitting a Bid for the Project. 2.04 Notify Architect by emailing nsbullard@clkarch.com if you are a General Contractor interested in bidding this project so that a General Contractor Bidders list can be assembled and posted on regular basis on portal. ARTICLE 3 – PRE-BID CONFERENCE 3.01 A non-mandatory pre-bid conference for the Project will be held on Wednesday, March 25, 2015, 10:30 a.m. at the following location: HEB Tennis Center 1520 Shely St. Corpus Christi, Texas 78404 ARTICLE 4 – QUESTIONS REGARDING BIDDING PROCESS OR SOLICITATION DOCUMENTS 4.01 Questions are to be submitted using the Question and Answer process on the Owner’s Bidding Website. Responses to questions submitted will be posted on the website by the Owner for the benefit of all Bidders. Responses will be posted for questions submitted by noon seven (7) days prior to the date of the bid opening. Inquiries made after this period may not be addressed. 4.02 A response to a question posted on the website that requires modification of the Contract Documents will be made by Addenda. Modifications to the Contract Documents prior to the award of contract can only be made by Addenda. Only answers in Addenda authorized by the Owner will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. ARTICLE 5 – MINORITY / MBE / DBE PARTICIPATION POLICY 5.01 Selected Contractor is required to comply with the Owner’s Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy as indicated in SECTION 00 72 03 MINORITY / MBE / DBE PARTICIPATION POLICY. 5.02 Minority participation goal for this Project has been established to be 45% of the Contract Price. 5.03 Minority Business Enterprise participation goal for this Project has been established to be 15% of the Contract Price. ARTICLE 6 – BID SECURITY 6.01 Bidders must submit an acceptable Bid Security with their Bid as a guarantee that the Bidder will enter into a contract for the Project with the Owner within 10 days of Notice of Award of the Invitation to Bid 00 11 16 - 4 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) Project No. E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 01-23-2015 Contract. The security must be payable to the City of Corpus Christi, Texas in the amount of 5 percent of the greatest amount bid. 6.02 Bid Security may be in the form of a Bid Bond or a cashier’s check, certified check, money order, or bank draft from a chartered financial institution authorized to operate in the State of Texas. 6.03 Bid Bond Requirements: 1. A Bid Bond must guarantee, without qualification or condition, that the Owner will be paid a sum equal to 5 percent (5%) of the greatest amount bid if, within 10 calendar days of Notice of Award of the Contract, the Bidder/Principal: a. fails to enter into a contract for the Project with the Owner; or b. fails to provide the required Performance and Payment Bonds. 2. A Bid Bond may not limit the sum payable to the Owner to be the difference between the Bidder/Principal’s bid and the next highest bidder. 3. The Bid Bond must reference the Project by name as identified in Article 7. 4. Bidders may provide their surety’s standard bid bond form if revised to meet these Bid Bond Requirements. 6.04 Failure to provide an acceptable Bid Security will constitute a non-responsive Bid which will not be considered. 6.05 Failure to provide the required Performance and Payment Bonds will result in forfeiture of the Bid Security to the City as liquidated damages. ARTICLE 7 – DELIVERY OF BIDS 7.01 Sealed Bids (hard copy) must be submitted to the City Secretary’s Office (City Hall Building, 1st Floor, 1201 Leopard Street, Corpus Christi, Texas 78401) no later than 2:00 p.m., Wednesday April 8, 2015 to be accepted. The Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud at this time at the City Council Chambers or Staff Room, 1st floor of the City Hall Building. Bids received after this time will not be accepted. Address envelopes or packages: City of Corpus Christi City Secretary’s Office City Hall Building, 1st Floor 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 Attention: City Secretary Bid – HEB & AL Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012), Project No. E12118 Invitation to Bid 00 11 16 - 5 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) Project No. E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 01-23-2015 7.02 Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud at 2:00 p.m., Wednesday, April 8, 2015, at the following location: City Hall Building - City of Corpus Christi First Floor City Council Chambers or Staff Room 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 ARTICLE 8 – AWARD OF CONTRACT 8.01 It is the intent of the Owner to award this Contract to the lowest responsible Bidder who submits a responsive Bid. The Owner reserves the right to adopt the most advantageous interpretation of the Bids submitted in the case of ambiguity or lack of clearness in stating Bid prices, to reject any or all Bids, and/or waive formalities. Bids may not be withdrawn within 90 days from the date on which Bids are opened. ARTICLE 9 – OTHER CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 9.01 Contractors for this Project must pay no less than the prevailing wage rates for the area established by the Owner and included in the Contract Documents. 9.02 Contractors for this Project must obtain and provide the necessary insurance, including Workers’ Compensation Insurance, as required by the General Conditions and SECTION 00 72 01 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS. 9.03 Performance and Payment Bonds are required. END OF SECTION Instructions to Bidders 00 21 13 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012)-Project No.: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 01-23-2015 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ARTICLE 1 – DEFINED TERMS 1.01 Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. ARTICLE 2 – BIDS RECEIVED 2.01 Refer to SECTION 00 11 16 INVITATION TO BID for information on receipt of Bids. ARTICLE 3 – COPIES OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 3.01 Obtain a complete set of the Contract Documents as indicated in SECTION 00 52 23 AGREEMENT. 3.02 Use complete sets of Contract Documents in preparing Bids; Bidder assumes sole responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Contract Documents. 3.03 OPT makes copies of Contract Documents available for the sole purpose of obtaining Bids for completion of the Project and does not confer a license or grant permission or authorization for any other use. ARTICLE 4 – STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE 4.01 The three lowest Bidders must submit the information required in SECTION 00 45 16 STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE within 7 days of the date Bids are due to demonstrate that the Bidder meets the minimum requirements to complete the Work. ARTICLE 5 – EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 5.01 Before submitting a Bid: A. Examine and carefully study the Contract Documents, including any Addenda and related supplemental data. B. Become familiar with all federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, or the completion of Work. C. Carefully study and correlate the information available to the Bidder with the Contract Documents, Addenda, and the related supplemental data. D. Notify the OAR of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Bidder discovers in the Contract Documents, Addenda, and the related supplemental data. E. Determine that the Contract Documents, Addenda, and the related supplemental data are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for completion of Work. Instructions to Bidders 00 21 13 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012)-Project No.: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 01-23-2015 5.02 The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 5, that without exception the Bid is premised upon completion of Work required by the Contract Documents, Addenda, and the related supplemental data, that the Bidder has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, and discrepancies that the Bidder has discovered in the Contract Documents, Addenda, and the related supplemental data and the written resolutions provided by the OAR are acceptable to the Bidder, and that the Contract Documents, Addenda, and the related supplemental data are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for completion of Work. ARTICLE 6 – INTERPRETATIONS AND ALTERNATE BIDS 6.01 Submit all questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents, Addenda, and the related supplemental data to the OAR using the Owner’s Bidding Website as indicated in SECTION 00 11 16 INVITATION TO BID. 6.02 Submit any offer of alternate terms and conditions, or offer of Work not in strict compliance with the Contract Documents to the OAR no later than 14 days prior to the date for opening of Bids. OAR and Designer will issue Addenda as appropriate if any of the proposed changes to the Contract Documents are accepted. A Bid submitted with clarifications or taking exceptions to the Contract Documents, except as modified by Addenda, may be considered non-responsive. 6.03 Addenda may be issued to clarify, correct, or change the Contract Documents, Addenda, or the related supplemental data as deemed advisable by the Owner or Designer. ARTICLE 7 – BID SECURITY 7.01 Bidders must submit an acceptable Bid Security as required by SECTION 00 11 16 INVITATION TO BID. 7.02 Owner may annul the Notice of Award and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited if the apparent Selected Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Agreement or Amendments to the Agreement. The Bid Security of other Bidders whom the Owner believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the Owner until the earlier of 7 days after the Effective Date of the Contract or 90 days after the date Bids are opened. 7.03 Bid Securities are to remain in effect until the Contract is executed. The Bid Securities of all but the three lowest responsible Bidders will be returned within 14 days of the opening of Bids. Bid Securities become void and will be released by the Owner when the Contract is awarded or all Bids are rejected. ARTICLE 8 – PREPARATION OF BID 8.01 The Bid Form is included with the Contract Documents and has been made available at the Owner’s Bidding Website. Complete all blanks on the Bid Form by typing or printing in ink. Indicate Bid prices for each Bid item or alternate shown. Instructions to Bidders 00 21 13 - 3 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012)-Project No.: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 01-23-2015 8.02 Execute the Bid Form as indicated in the document and include evidence of authority to sign. 8.03 Acknowledge receipt of all Addenda by filling in the number and date of each Addendum. Provide a signature as indicated to verify that the Addenda were received. A Bid that does not acknowledge the receipt of all Addenda may be considered non-responsive. 8.04 Provide the name, address, email, and telephone number of the individual to be contacted for any communications regarding the Bid in the Bid Form. 8.05 Provide evidence of the Bidder’s authority and qualification to do business in the State of Texas or covenant to obtain such qualification prior to award of the Contract. ARTICLE 9 – CONFIDENTIALITY OF BID INFORMATION 9.01 In accordance with Texas Government Code 552.110, trade secrets and confidential information in Bids are not open for public inspection. Bids will be opened in a manner that avoids disclosure of confidential information to competing Bidders and keeps the Bids from the public during considerations. All Bids are open for public inspection after the Contract is awarded, but trade secrets and confidential information in Bids are not typically open for public inspection. The Owner will protect this information to the extent allowed by Laws and Regulations. Clearly indicate which specific documents are considered to be trade secrets or confidential information by stamping or watermarking all such documents with the word “confidential” prominently on each page or sheet or on the cover of bound documents. Place “confidential” stamps or watermarks so that they do not obscure any of the required information on the document, either in the original or in a way that would obscure any of the required information in a photocopy of the document. Photocopies of “confidential” documents will be made only for the convenience of the selection committee and will be destroyed after the Effective Date of the Contract. Original confidential documents will be returned to the Bidder after the Effective Date of the Contract if the Bidder indicates that the information is to be returned with the Bid, and arrangements for its return are provided by the Bidder. ARTICLE 10 – SUBMITTAL OF BID 10.01 Complete and submit the Bid Form along with all required documents identified in the Bid Form. This Project requires all submittals in hard copy only. ARTICLE 11 – MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID 11.01 A Bid may be withdrawn by a Bidder, provided an authorized individual of the Bidder submits a written request to withdraw the Bid prior to the time set for opening the Bids. 11.02 A Bidder may withdraw its Bid within 24 hours after Bids are opened if the Bidder files a signed written notice with the Owner and promptly, but no later than 3 days, thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of the Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in Instructions to Bidders 00 21 13 - 4 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012)-Project No.: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 01-23-2015 the preparation of its Bid. The Bid Security will be returned if it is clearly demonstrated to the Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in its Bid. A Bidder that requests to withdraw its Bid under these conditions may be disqualified from responding to a reissued Invitation to Bid for the Work to be furnished under these Contract Documents. ARTICLE 12 – OPENING OF BIDS 12.01 Bids will be opened at the time and place indicated in SECTION 00 11 16 INVITATION TO BID. The Owner will read aloud the names of the Bidders and the apparent Bid amounts shown on the Bid Summary for all Bids received in time to be considered. ARTICLE 13 – BIDS REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE 13.01 All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for 90 days, but the Owner may, at its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid Security prior to the end of this period. ARTICLE 14 – EVALUATION OF BIDS 14.01 The Owner will consider the amount bid, the Bidder’s responsibilities, and whether the Bidder has met the minimum specific project experience requirements. 14.02 Owner may conduct such investigations as it deems necessary to establish the responsibility of the Bidder and any Subcontractors, individuals, or entities proposed to furnish parts of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 14.03 Submission of a Bid indicates the Bidder’s acceptance of the evaluation technique and methodology as well as the Bidder’s recognition that some subjective judgments must be made by the Owner during the evaluation. Each Bidder agrees to waive any claim it has or may have against the OPT and their respective employees, arising out of or in connection with the administration, evaluation, or recommendation of any Bid. ARTICLE 15 – AWARD OF CONTRACT 15.01 The Bidder selected for award of the Contract will be the lowest responsible Bidder that submits a responsive bid. Award of Contract will be to the lowest, responsible Bidder that submitted a responsive Bid that demonstrates that the Bidder meets all of requirements of the Bidding Documents, including the minimum specific project experience requirements. Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, including without limitation, non-conforming, non- responsive, or conditional Bids. The Owner reserves the right to waive any or all formalities. 15.02 More than one Bid for the same Work from an individual or entity under the same or different names will not be considered. Reasonable grounds for believing that any Bidder has an interest in more than one Bid for the Work shall be cause for disqualification of that Bidder and the rejection of all Bids in which that Bidder has an interest. Instructions to Bidders 00 21 13 - 5 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012)-Project No.: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 01-23-2015 ARTICLE 16 – BONDS AND INSURANCE 16.01 Article 6 of the General Conditions sets forth the Owner’s requirements as to Bonds and insurance. When the Selected Bidder delivers the executed Agreement to the Owner, it must be accompanied by the required Bonds and evidence of insurance. 16.02 Provide Performance and Payment Bonds for this Project that fully comply with the provisions of Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. Administration of Bonds will conform to Texas Government Code Chapter 2253 and the provisions of these Contract Documents. ARTICLE 17 – SIGNING OF AGREEMENT 17.01 The City Engineer or Director of Capital Programs will submit recommendation for award to the City Council for those project awards requiring City Council action. The Selected Bidder will be required to deliver the required Bonds and insurance certificates and endorsements along with the required number of counterparts (4) of the Agreement and attached documents to the Owner within 14 days. The Contract will be signed by the City Manager or his/her designee after award and the Bidder’s submission of required documentation and signed counterparts. The Contract will not be binding upon Owner until it has been executed by both parties. Owner will process the Contract expeditiously. However, Owner will not be liable for any delays prior to the award or execution of Contract. ARTICLE 18 – SALES AND USE TAXES 18.01 The Owner generally qualifies as a tax exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Texas and is usually not subject to any City or State sales or use taxes, however certain items such as rented equipment may be taxable even though Owner is a tax-exempt agency. Assume responsibility for including any applicable sales taxes in the Contract Price and assume responsibility for complying with all applicable statutes and rulings of the State of Texas Comptroller. 18.02 It is the Owner’s intent to have this Contract qualify as a “separated contract.” ARTICLE 19 – WAGE RATES 19.01 This Contract is subject to Texas Government Code Chapter 2258 concerning payment of prevailing wage rates. Requirements for paying the prevailing wage rates are discussed in SECTION 00 72 02 WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS. Bidders must pay not less than the minimum wage shown on this list and comply with all statutes and rulings of the State of Texas Comptroller. ARTICLE 20 – BIDDER’s CERTIFICATION OF NO LOBBYING 20.01 In submitting its Bid, Bidder certifies that it has not lobbied the City or its officials, managers, employees, consultants, or contractors in such a manner as to influence or to attempt to influence the bidding process. In the event it reasonably appears that the Bidder influenced or attempted to influence the bidding process, the City may, in its discretion, reject the Bid. Instructions to Bidders 00 21 13 - 6 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012)-Project No.: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 01-23-2015 ARTICLE 21 – REJECTION OF BID 21.01 The following will be cause to reject a Bid: A. Bids which are not signed by an individual empowered to bind the Bidder. B. Bids which do not have an acceptable Bid Security, with Power of Attorney, submitted as required by SECTION 00 11 16 INVITATION TO BID. C. More than one Bid for same Work from an individual, firm, partnership or corporation. D. Evidence of collusion among Bidders. E. Sworn testimony or discovery in pending litigation with Owner which discloses misconduct or willful refusal by bidder to comply with subject contract or instructions of Owner. F. Failure to have an authorized agent of the Bidder attend the mandatory Pre-Bid Conference, if applicable. G. Bids received from a Bidder who has been debarred or suspended by Owner. H. Bids received from a Bidder when Bidder or principals are currently debarred or suspended by Federal, State or City governmental agencies. 21.02 The following may be cause to reject a Bid or cause to deem a Bid non-responsive or irregular. The City reserves the right to waive any irregularities and any or all formalities: A. Poor performance in execution of work under a previous City of Corpus Christi contract. B. Failure to achieve reasonable progress on an existing City of Corpus Christi contract. C. Default on previous contracts or failure to execute Contract after award. D. Evidence of failure to pay Subcontractors, Suppliers or employees in accordance with Contract requirements. E. Bids containing omissions, alterations of form, additions, qualifications or conditions not called for by Owner, or incomplete Bids may be rejected. In any case of ambiguity or lack of clarity in the Bid, OWNER reserves right to determine most advantageous Bid or to reject the Bid. F. Failure to acknowledge receipt of Addenda. G. Failure to submit post-Bid information specified in Section 00 45 16 STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE within the allotted time(s). H. Failure to timely execute Contract after award. I. Previous environmental violations resulting in fines or citations by a governmental entity (i.e. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Texas Commission on Environmental Quality, etc.). J. Bidder’s Safety Experience. Instructions to Bidders 00 21 13 - 7 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012)-Project No.: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 01-23-2015 K. Failure of Bidder to demonstrate, through submission of the Statement of Experience, the experience required as specified in Section 00 45 16 STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE, if that Section is included in the bidding documents. L. Evidence of Bidder’s lack of sufficient resources, workforce, equipment or supervision, if required by inclusion of appropriate requirements in Section 00 45 16 STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE. M. Evidence of poor performance on previous Projects as documented in Owner’s project performance evaluations. N. Unbalanced Unit Price Bid: “Unbalanced Bid” means a Bid, which includes a Bid that is based on unit prices which are significantly less than cost for some Bid items and significantly more than cost for others. This may be evidenced by submission of unit price Bid items where the cost are significantly higher/lower than the cost of the same Bid items submitted by other Bidders on the project. END OF SECTION Bid Form 00 30 00 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012)-Project No.: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 01-23-2015 00 30 00 BID FORM ARTICLE 1 – BID RECIPIENT 1.01 In accordance with the Drawings, Specifications, and Contract Documents, this Bid Proposal shall be submitted no later than: Wednesday, April 8, 2015, 2:00 p.m. 1.02 Submit hard copy Bids, Bid Security, and all attachments to the Bid (See Section 7.01 below) to: The City of Corpus Christi, Texas City Secretary’s Office 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 Attention: City Secretary Bid – HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012)-Project No.: E12118 Re-Bid Package ARTICLE 2 – BIDDERS’S ACKNOWLEDGMENTS 2.01 Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement with Owner on the form included in the Contract Documents, to perform all Work specified or indicated in Contract Documents for the Contract Price indicated in this Bid or as modified by Contract Amendment. Bidder agrees to complete the Work within the Contract Times established in the Agreement or as modified by Contract Amendment and comply with the all other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 2.02 Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders, including those dealing with required Bonds. The Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 90 days after the opening of Bids. 2.03 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event of its failure to complete Work in accordance with the schedule set forth in the Agreement. 2.04 Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda: Addendum No. Addendum Date Signature Acknowledging Receipt ARTICLE 3 – BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS 3.01 The Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. Bid Form 00 30 00 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012)-Project No.: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 01-23-2015 3.02 The Bidder has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. 3.03 The Bidder is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. 3.04 The Bidder has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: A. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; B. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; C. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; D. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and E. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. 3.05 The Bidder has considered the: A. Information known to Bidder; B. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; C. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and D. The Contract Documents. 3.06 The Bidder has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 3.04 and 3.05 with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: A. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; B. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder; and C. Bidder’s safety precautions and programs. 3.07 Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Bidder agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.08 The Bidder is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. 3.09 The Bidder has correlated the information known to the Bidder, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. Bid Form 00 30 00 - 3 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012)-Project No.: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 01-23-2015 3.10 The Bidder has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Bidder has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Bidder. 3.11 The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. 3.12 Bidder’s entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4 – BASIS OF BID 4.01 Bidder may bid on Part A or Part B or both Part A and B. Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for: PART A Base Bid $_____________________________ Lump Sum Add Alternate 1 $ _____________________________ Lump Sum Add Alternate 6 $ _____________________________ Lump Sum PART B Base Bid $ _____________________________ Lump Sum Add Alternate 2 $ _____________________________ Lump Sum Add Alternate 3 $ _____________________________ Lump Sum Add Alternate 4 $ _____________________________ Lump Sum Add Alternate 5 $ _____________________________ Lump Sum The Bidder selected for award of the Contract will be the Lowest responsible Bidder that submits a responsive Bid for Part A, or Part B or both Part A and B. Owner will, at its discretion, award the contract to the lowest responsible Bidder for Part A-Base Bid, plus any combination of Add Alternates and Part B-Base Bid, plus any combination of Add Alternates. ARTICLE 5 – EVALUATION OF BIDDERS 5.01 The Owner will consider the greatest amount bid, the Bidder’s responsibility, and whether the Bidder has met the minimum specific project experience requirements to determine the lowest responsible Bidder. The Owner reserves the right to waive any and all irregularities in determining the Bidders’ responsibility, and whether the Bidder has met the minimum specific project experience requirements to determine the lowest responsible Bidder, and reserves the right to require the submission of additional information. Bid Form 00 30 00 - 4 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012)-Project No.: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 01-23-2015 5.02 The Owner has the right to accept a Bid, reject any and all Bids, to waive any and all irregularities in the Bids, or to reject non-conforming, non-responsive, or conditional Bids. In addition, the Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid where circumstances and developments have, in the opinion of the Owner, changed the responsibility of the Bidder. 5.03 Material misstatements in the documentation submitted to determine the Bidder’s responsibility, including information submitted per SECTION 00 45 16 STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE, may be grounds for rejection of the Bidder’s Bid on this Project. Any such misstatement, if discovered after award of the Contract to such Bidder, may be grounds for immediate termination of the Contract. Additionally, the Bidder will be liable to the Owner for any additional costs or damages to the Owner resulting from such misstatements, including costs and attorney’s fees for collecting such costs and damages. ARTICLE 6 – TIME OF COMPLETION 6.01 The Project Part A is to be substantially complete and ready for operation within 180 calendar days. The Project Part B is to be substantially complete and ready for operation within 180 calendar days. Both Project Parts A and B are to be complete and eligible for Final Payment 30 days after the date for Substantial Completion. 6.02 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially complete and will be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions within the number of days indicated in SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBIT A. ARTICLE 7 – ATTACHMENTS TO THIS BID 7.01 All submittals must be in hard copy for this Project. In compliance with the Bid Requirements in SECTION 00 11 16 INVITATION TO BID, the following are made a condition of this Bid: A. Bid Security. B. SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM and documentation of signatory authority. C. SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBIT A. D. SECTION 00 30 02 COMPLIANCE TO STATE LAW ON NONRESIDENT BIDDERS. E. SECTION 00 30 04 CONFLICT OF INTEREST QUESTIONNAIRE. F. SECTION 00 30 05 DISCLOSURE OF INTEREST. G. SECTION 00 30 06 NON-COLLUSION CERTIFICATION. ARTICLE 8 – DEFINED TERMS 8.01 The terms used in this Bid have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions. The significance of terms with initial capital letters is described in the General Conditions. Bid Form 00 30 00 - 5 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012)-Project No.: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 01-23-2015 ARTICLE 9 – VENUE 9.01 Bidder agrees that venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas for any legal action. ARTICLE 10 – SIGNATORY REQUIREMENTS FOR BIDDERS 10.01 Bidders must include their correct legal name, state of residency, and federal tax identification number in the Bid Form. 10.02 The Bidder, or the Bidder’s authorized representative, shall sign and date the Bid Form to accompany all materials included in the submitted Bid. Bids which are not signed and dated in this manner, or which do not contain the required documentation of signatory authority may be rejected as non-responsive. The individual(s) signing the Bid must have the authority to bind the Bidder to a contract, and if required, shall attach documentation of signatory authority to the Bid Form. 10.03 Bidders who are individuals (“natural persons” as defined by the Texas Business Organizations Code §1.002), but who will not be signing the Bid Form personally, shall include in their bid a notarized power of attorney authorizing the individual designated as their authorized representative to submit the Bid and to sign on behalf of the Bidder. 10.04 Bidders that are entities who are not individuals shall identify in their Bid their charter or Certificate of Authority number issued by the Texas Secretary of State and shall submit with their Bid a copy of a resolution or other documentation approved by the Bidder’s governing body authorizing the submission of the Bid and designating the individual(s) authorized to execute documents on behalf of the Bidder. Bidders using an assumed name (an “alias”) shall submit a copy of the Certificate of Assumed Name or similar document. 10.05 Bidders that are not residents of the State of Texas must document their legal authority to conduct business in Texas. Nonresident Bidders that have previously registered with the Texas Secretary of State may submit a copy of their Certificate of Authority. Nonresident Bidders that have not previously registered with the Texas Secretary of State shall submit a copy of the Bidder’s enabling documents as filed with the state of residency, or as otherwise existing. Bid Form 00 30 00 - 6 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012)-Project No.: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 01-23-2015 ARTICLE 11 – BID SUBMITTAL 11.01 This Bid is submitted by: Bidder: (typed or printed full legal name of Bidder) By: (individual’s signature) Name: (typed or printed) Title: (typed or printed) Attest: (individual’s signature) State of Residency: Federal Tax ID. No. Address for giving notices: Phone: Email: (Attach evidence of authority to sign if the authorized individual is not the Bidder, but an individual signing on behalf of another individual Bidder, or if the authorized individual is a representative of a corporation, partnership, or joint venture.) END OF SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBIT A Bid Form Exhibit A HEB Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) - Project Number: E12118 - RE-BID PACKAGE Page 1 of 4 08-08-2014 Project Name: Project Number: Owner: Bidder: OAR: Designer: Item LUMP SUM BID HEB • Demolition of existing stadium court and seating areas. • Addition of three new courts 20, 21 and 22 on suspended structural slab and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications including all electrical and lighting. • Demolition of existing backboard area. • Addition of padding to light poles @ courts 9, 10 and 12. • Addition of chain link cut corners at indicated on site drawings and details. • Modifications to chain link fencing at entrance to HEB facility. Fencing includes replacement of low fencing with high fencing at court no 1. 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBIT A DESCRIPTION Base Bid Part A - HEB/Al Kruse BASE BID (per SECTION 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT) Basis of Bid HEB & AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTERS (BOND 2012) RE-BID PACKAGE City of Corpus Christi Jerry Shoemaker, P.E. CLK ARCHITECTS & ASSOCIATES, INC. E12118 • Addition of post tensioned concrete caps over existing courts 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 17 and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications. 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBIT A Bid Form Exhibit A HEB Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) - Project Number: E12118 - RE-BID PACKAGE Page 2 of 4 08-08-2014 Item LUMP SUM BIDDESCRIPTION • Addition of chain link fencing for access control to facility. • Include all chain link fencing related work. AL KRUSE • Three courts ( 5, 6 and 7) to receive new asphalt overlay. • Seven courts (1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 9, and 10) to be resurfaced. • Windscreens to be replaced at all courts. • Court 10 Backboard relocated to court 9. • Addition of padding to light poles at courts 1, 4 and 7. • Include all chain link fencing related work. Alt. 1 Addition of two (2) 36’ tennis courts on suspended concrete slab include all surfacing, lighting, netting, & fencing as noted on plans and as specified. Part A2 - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 6 - HEB TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) Alt. 6 Courts 9 & 10, remove four existing interior light poles. Replace four existing corner light poles with new light poles & lights to illuminate courts 9, 10 &11. TOTAL PART A ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1 - HEB TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) SUBTOTAL PART A - BASE BID 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBIT A Bid Form Exhibit A HEB Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) - Project Number: E12118 - RE-BID PACKAGE Page 3 of 4 08-08-2014 Item LUMP SUM BIDDESCRIPTION Part B - HEB/Al Kruse BASE BID (per SECTION 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT) HEB • Demolition of viewing platform and Canopy between Courts 5-8 & 9-12 which includes demolition of seating areas, stairs, upper columns supporting roof canopy and the roof canopy to the top of the structural steel columns (existing lower columns to remain). • Replacing existing viewing platform with new accessible viewing platform inclusive of installation of a new LULA lift. • Various site concrete paving/sidewalk upgrades. • Converting old locker room building to new pro shop and all related work as shown on plans. • Architectural, MEP and Structural repairs to existing Lounge Building. AL KRUSE • Accessible upgrades to existing sidewalks. • New accessible ramp at main entrance. • Renovation to existing Pro Shop providing accessible restrooms and new finishes including paint, new flooring, and new exterior doors. SUBTOTAL PART B - BASE BID ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 2 - AL KRUSE TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) Alt. 2 Mill top 2” of existing asphalt parking lot, repair pot holes & overlay 2” of new asphalt paving include all stripping and ADA signage and wheel stops. 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBIT A Bid Form Exhibit A HEB Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) - Project Number: E12118 - RE-BID PACKAGE Page 4 of 4 08-08-2014 Item LUMP SUM BIDDESCRIPTION Part B2- ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 3 - HEB TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) Alt. 3 Complete Drip Irrigation System as shown on irrigation plans and specifications. Part B3 - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 4 - HEB TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) Alt. 4 Flatwork, electrical rough-in and structural piers for future shade structure. Part B4 - ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 5 - HEB TENNIS CENTER (per SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES) Alt. 5 Pre-fabricated maintenance storage unit “20ft x 30ft Morgan Building or equal” and adjacent flatwork, include electrical to storage building and windstorm anchoring. TOTAL PART B 180 days 210 days Bidder agrees to reach Substantial Completion in Bidder agrees to reach Final Completion in Compliance to State Law on Nonresident Bidders 00 30 02 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 00 30 02 COMPLIANCE TO STATE LAW ON NONRESIDENT BIDDERS Chapter 2252 of the Texas Government Code applies to the award of government contract to nonresident bidders. This law provides that: “a government entity may not award a governmental contract to a nonresident bidder unless the nonresident underbids the lower bid submitted by a responsible resident bidder by an amount that is not less than the amount by which a resident bidder would be required to underbid the nonresident bidder to obtain a comparable contract in the state in which the nonresident’s principal place of business is located.” “Nonresident bidder” refers to a person who is not a resident of Texas. “Resident bidder” refers to a person whose principal place of business is in this state, including a contractor whose ultimate parent company or majority owner has its principal place of business in this state. Check the statement that is correct for Bidder. ☐ Bidder qualifies as a nonresident bidder whose principal place of business or residency is in the State of . ☐ Bidder (includes parent company or majority owner) qualifies as a resident bidder whose principal place of business is in the State of Texas. The Owner will use the information provided in the State of Texas Comptroller’s annual publication of other states’ laws on contracts to evaluate the Bids of nonresident Bidders. Bidder: Company Name: (typed or printed) By: (signature -- attach evidence of authority to sign) Name: (typed or printed) Title: Business address: Phone: Email: END OF SECTION Adopted 06/29/2007 FORM CIQ OFFICE USE ONLYThis questionnaire reflects changes made to the law by H.B. 1491, 80th Leg., Regular Session. This questionnaire is being filed in accordance with Chapter 176, Local Government Code by a person who has a business relationship as defined by Section 176.001(1-a) with a local governmental entity and the person meets requirements under Section 176.006(a). By law this questionnaire must be filed with the records administrator of the local governmental entity not later than the 7th business day after the date the person becomes aware of facts that require the statement to be filed. See Section 176.006, Local Government Code. A person commits an offense if the person knowingly violates Section 176.006, Local Government Code. An offense under this section is a Class C misdemeanor. CONFLICT OF INTEREST QUESTIONNAIRE For vendor or other person doing business with local governmental entity Check this box if you are filing an update to a previously filed questionnaire. (The law requires that you file an updated completed questionnaire with the appropriate filing authority not later than the 7th business day after the date the originally filed questionnaire becomes incomplete or inaccurate.) Name of person who has a business relationship with local governmental entity.1 2 3 Date Received Name of local government officer with whom filer has employment or business relationship. Name of Officer This section (item 3 including subparts A, B, C & D) must be completed for each officer with whom the filer has an employment or other business relationship as defined by Section 176.001(1-a), Local Government Code. Attach additional pages to this Form CIQ as necessary. A. Is the local government officer named in this section receiving or likely to receive taxable income, other than investment income, from the filer of the questionnaire? Yes No B. Is the filer of the questionnaire receiving or likely to receive taxable income, other than investment income, from or at the direction of the local government officer named in this section AND the taxable income is not received from the local governmental entity? Yes No C. Is the filer of this questionnaire employed by a corporation or other business entity with respect to which the local government officer serves as an officer or director, or holds an ownership of 10 percent or more? Yes No D. Describe each employment or business relationship with the local government officer named in this section. Signature of person doing business with the governmental entity Date 4 SUPPLIER NUMBER __________ TO BE ASSIGNED BY CITY PURCHASING DIVISION CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI DISCLOSURE OF INTEREST City of Corpus Christi Ordinance 17112, as amended, requires all persons or firms seeking to do business with the City to provide the following information. Every question must be answered. If the question is not applicable, answer with “NA”. See reverse side for Filing Requirements, Certifications and definitions. COMPANY NAME: P. O. BOX: STREET ADDRESS: CITY: ZIP: - FIRM IS: 1. Corporation 2. Partnership 3. Sole Owner 4. Association 5. Other ____________________________________ DISCLOSURE QUESTIONS If additional space is necessary, please use the reverse side of this page or attach separate sheet. 1. State the names of each “employee” of the City of Corpus Christi having an “ownership interest” constituting 3% or more of the ownership in the above named “firm.” Name Job Title and City Department (if known) 2. State the names of each “official” of the City of Corpus Christi having an “ownership interest” constituting 3% or more of the ownership in the above named “firm.” Name Title 3. State the names of each “board member” of the City of Corpus Christi having an “ownership interest” constituting 3% or more of the ownership in the above named “firm.” Name Board, Commission or Committee 4. State the names of each employee or officer of a “consultant” for the City of Corpus Christi who worked on any matter related to the subject of this contract and has an “ownership interest” constituting 3% or more of the ownership in the above named “firm.” Name Consultant FILING REQUIREMENTS If a person who requests official action on a matter knows that the requested action will confer an economic benefit on any City official or employee that is distinguishable from the effect that the action will have on members of the public in general or a substantial segment thereof, you shall disclose that fact in a signed writing to the City official, employee or body that has been requested to act in the matter, unless the interest of the City official or employee in the matter is apparent. The disclosure shall also be made in a signed writing filed with the City Secretary. [Ethics Ordinance Section 2-349 (d)] CERTIFICATION I certify that all information provided is true and correct as of the date of this statement, that I have not knowingly withheld disclosure of any information requested; and that supplemental statements will be promptly submitted to the City of Corpus Christi, Texas as changes occur. Certifying Person: Title: (Type or Print) Signature of Certifying Person: Date: DEFINITIONS a. “Board member.” A member of any board, commission, or committee appointed by the City Council of the City of Corpus Christi, Texas. b. “Economic benefit”. An action that is likely to affect an economic interest if it is likely to have an effect on that interest that is distinguishable from its effect on members of the public in general or a substantial segment thereof. c. “Employee.” Any person employed by the City of Corpus Christi, Texas either on a full or part - time basis, but not as an independent contractor. d. “Firm.” Any entity operated for economic gain, whether professional, industrial or commercial, and whether established to produce or deal with a product or service, including but not limited to, entities operated in the form of sole proprietorship, as self-employed person, partnership, corporation, joint stock company, joint venture, receivership or trust, and entities which for purposes of taxation are treated as non-profit organizations. e. “Official.” The Mayor, members of the City Council, City Manager, Deputy City Manager, Assistant City Managers, Department and Division Heads, and Municipal Court Judges of the City of Corpus Christi, Texas. f. “Ownership Interest.” Legal or equitable interest, whether actually or constructively held, in a firm, including when such interest is held through an agent, trust, estate, or holding entity. “Constructively held” refers to holdings or control established through voting trusts, proxies, or special terms of venture or partnership agreements.” g. “Consultant.” Any person or firm, such as engineers and architects, hired by the City of Corpus Christi for the purpose of professional consultation and recommendation. Non-Collusion Certification 00 30 06 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 00 30 06 NON-COLLUSION CERTIFICATION STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF NUECES OWNER: City of Corpus Christi, Texas 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 CONTRACT: HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) E12118 Bidder certifies that the it has not been a party to any collusion among Bidders in the restraint of freedom of competition by agreement to submit a Bid at a fixed price or to refrain from bidding; or with any official or employee of the Owner as to quantity, quality, or price in the prospective contract, or any other terms of said prospective contract; or in any discussion between Bidders and any official of the Owner concerning exchange of money or other thing of value for special consideration in the letting of a contract. Company Name: (typed or printed) By: (signature -- attach evidence of authority to sign) Name: (typed or printed) Title: Business address: Phone: Email: END OF SECTION Statement of Experience 00 45 16 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 00 45 16 STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE ARTICLE 1 – REQUIREMENT TO PROVIDE A STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE 1.01 To be considered a responsive Bidder, the three lowest Bidders must complete and submit the Statement of Experience within 5 days after the date Bids are due to demonstrate the Bidders’ responsibility and ability to meet the minimum requirements complete the Work. Failure to submit the required information in the Statement of Experience may result in the Owner considering the Bid non-responsive and result in rejection of the Bid by the Owner. The Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited if Bidder fails to deliver the Statement of Experience in an attempt to be released from its Bid. Bidders may be required to provide supplemental information if requested by the Owner to clarify, enhance or supplement the information provided in the Statement of Experience. 1.02 Bidders must provide the information requested in this Statement of Experience using the forms attached to this Section. A copy of these forms can be provided in Microsoft Word to assist with the preparation of the Statement of Experience. Information in these forms must be provided completely and in detail. Information that cannot be totally incorporated in the form may be included in an attachment to the form. This attachment must be clearly referenced by attachment number in the form, and the attached material must include the attachment number on every sheet of the attachment. The attachment must include only the information that responds to the question or item number to which the attachment information applies. ARTICLE 2 – EXPERIENCE REQUIREMENTS 2.01 The Bidder agrees that, in addition to determining the apparent low Bid, the Owner will consider the responsiveness of the Bids and the responsibility of the Bidders in awarding a Contract for this Project. Information that indicates the Bidder or a Subcontractor is not responsible or that might negatively impact a Bidder’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Time and for the Contract Price may result in the Owner rejecting the Bid. 2.02 If none of the three apparent low Bidders are deemed responsible, the Owner may notify the next apparent low Bidders in order, who will then be required to submit the Statement of Experience for review, until a Contract is awarded or all Bids have been rejected. 2.03 The Bidder is responsible for the accuracy and completeness of all of the information provided by the Bidder or a proposed Subcontractor in response to this Statement of Experience. 2.04 Provide general information about the organization as required in Table 1. Describe the organizational structure of the Bidder's organization as it relates to this Project in Table 2. 2.05 Provide information on the experience of proposed key personnel. A. Provide information on the key personnel that will be actively working on this Project in Tables 3 through 6. Key personnel include the Project Manager, Project Superintendent, Safety Manager, and Quality Control Manager. If key personnel are to fulfill more than one of the roles listed above, provide a written narrative describing how much time will be devoted to each function, their qualifications to fulfill each role, and the percentage of their time that will be devoted to each role. If the individual is not to be devoted solely to this Statement of Experience 00 45 16 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 Project, indicate how that individual’s time is to be divided between this Project and other assignments. B. The Bidder may provide information on an alternate individual if the Bidder is not able to commit to one individual for the Project at the time the Bid is submitted. Qualifications of these individuals will be considered in determining whether the experience of the Bidder meets the minimum requirements. The Bidder must provide the services of the proposed key personnel for the life of the Project as a condition of qualification. Failure to provide the proposed Key Personnel may result in the disqualification of the Bidder and may void the award of the Contract. C. Provide biographical information for each primary and alternate candidate as an attachment that includes: technical experience, managerial experience, education and formal training, and a work history which describes project experience, including the roles and responsibilities for each assignment. Additional information demonstrating experience that meets the minimum requirements in this Statement of Experience should also be included. Bidders are to include a list of the current project assignments for each of the individuals proposed, the anticipated completion date for this assignment, and the percentage of the time they will have available to devote to this Project to demonstrate their availability for this project. D. The Project Manager and Project Superintendent must have at least 5 years’ recent experience in the management and oversight of projects of a similar size and complexity to this Project. This experience must include scheduling of manpower and materials, safety, coordination of Subcontractors, experience with the submittal process, Federal and State wage rate requirements, and contract close-out procedures. The Project Superintendent is to be present at the Site at all times that Work is being performed. Foremen must have at least 5 years’ recent experience in similar work and be subordinate to the Project Superintendent. Foremen cannot act as a superintendent without prior written approval from the Owner. 2.06 Provide information on the project experience and past performance of the organization and Key Personnel. A. Provide a list of projects currently under construction and projects completed by the Organization in the last 5 years using copies of Table 7. Highlight the project information that demonstrates the experience of Bidder with similar projects and the experience of proposed Key Personnel. Experience must include the satisfactory completion of at least five similar projects within the last 5 years for the Bidder's organization and for proposed Key Personnel, that are equal to or greater in size and magnitude than the current Project. B. In determining the responsibility of the Bidder, the Owner will consider the Bidder’s past projects and any substandard quality of workmanship on completed projects. The Owner will consider whether the Bidder’s past project experience shows substandard quality of workmanship, issues related to a substandard appearance of the completed work, the amount of warranty or rework required, problems with durability and maintainability of the completed project, and problems with the lack of quality of documentation provided. In addition to the work produced, the Owner may consider issues related to the quality of construction practices, responsiveness to the owner’s needs during construction, an inability to work in the spirit of partnering, and any non-responsiveness of the Bidder to Statement of Experience 00 45 16 - 3 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 make warranty corrections. Information to make this determination will come from Owner's interviews with references provided for this project. By listing reference contact information in this Statement of Experience, Bidder indicates its approval for OPT to contact the individuals listed as a reference. 2.07 The Owner will consider any percentages in excess of 15 percent of change orders for projects as an indicator of ability to complete Projects within the Contract Price. Provide a tabulation of budget performance on all projects completed by the Bidder within the last 5 years on Table 8 to demonstrate the ability of the Bidder to complete projects for the Contract Price. Lines may be added beneath project change order breakdowns to add explanatory comments. 2.08 Provide information to demonstrate the ability of the Bidder to complete projects on time. Bidders are to provide a tabulation of all projects completed by the Organization within the last 5 years on Table 9 to demonstrate performance in completing projects on time. Comments may be added to the tabulations to indicate the reasons for amending completion dates. 2.09 Provide information to demonstrate the ability of the Bidder to provide subcontracting opportunities that will meet the Owner’s established goals for Minority, MBE, and DBE participation in the Project. List all Work to be performed by qualified Minority, MBE, and DBE proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers in Table 10. Include percentages of Work subcontracted to each to demonstrate compliance with Owner's stated goals. ARTICLE 3 – STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE REQUIREMENTS 3.01 Provide one printed copy of the Statement of Experience using the referenced tables and narrative descriptions as described in Article 2. Pages are to be 8-1/2 x 11 pages using a minimum font size of 10. A limited number of 11 x 17 sheets may be used, and must be folded to the size of an 8-1/2 x 11 page. 3.02 Provide a digital copy of the Statement of Experience in Portable Document Format (PDF) on a CD, portable drive, or other digital recording device. This digital copy is to include all information required to evaluate the Bid and should match the content of the printed copy of the Bid. When creating the digital copy: A. Create PDF documents from native format files. B. Rotate pages so that the top of the document appears at the top of the file when opened in PDF viewing software. C. Submit PDF documents with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the original documents. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. D. Submit color PDF documents if color is used in the printed version of the documents. Statement of Experience 00 45 16 - 4 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 Table 1 – Organization Information Organization doing business as: Business Address of Principal Office Telephone No. Website Form of Business (check one) ☐ Corporation ☐ Partnership ☐ Individual If a Corporation State of Incorporation Date of Incorporation Chief Executive Officer’s Name President’s Name Vice President’s Name(s) Secretary’s Name Treasurer’s Name If a Partnership Date of Organization Form of Partnership: ☐ General ☐ Limited If an Individual Name Ownership of Organization List of companies, firms, or organizations that own any part of the organization. Names of Companies, Firms, or Organizations Percent Organization History List of names that this organization currently, has, or anticipates operating under including the names of related companies presently doing business. Names of Organizations From Date To Date Indicators of Organization Size Average number of current full-time employees Average estimate of revenue for the current year Statement of Experience 00 45 16 - 5 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 Table 1 – Organization Information Surety Name of Surety Surety is a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the state of Is surety authorized to provide surety bonds in the State of Texas? ☐ Yes ☐ No Is surety listed in “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury? ☐ Yes ☐ No Mailing Address (principal place of business) Physical Address(principal place of business) Telephone (Main) Telephone (for Notice of Claim) Local Agent for Surety Address for Local Agent Telephone for Local Agent Insurance Name of Insurance Provider Provider is a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the state of Is Provider licensed or authorized to issue insurance policies in the State of Texas? ☐ Yes ☐ No Does Provider have an A.M. Best Rating of A-VIII or Better? ☐ Yes ☐ No Mailing Address (principal place of business) Physical Address(principal place of business) Telephone (Main) Telephone (for Notice of Claim) Local Agent for Provider Address for Local Agent Telephone for Local Agent Financial Summary Information Date of Bidder's most current financial statement Date of Bidder's most current audited financial statement Financial indicators from the most current financial statement: Bidder's Current Ratio (Current Assets / Current Liabilities) Bidder's Quick Ratio ((Cash and Cash Equivalents + Accounts Receivable + Short Term Investments) / Current Liabilities)) Statement of Experience 00 45 16 - 6 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 Table 1 – Organization Information Organization doing business as: Previous History with Owner List projects that have been completed with the Owner over the last 5 years. If more than 5 projects, list only the most recent. Project Name Year 1 2 3 4 5 Construction Site Safety Experience Provide Bidders Experience Modification Ratio (EMR) History for the last 3 years. Provide documentation of the EMR. Year EMR Year EMR Year EMR Previous Bidding and Construction Experience Has Bidder or a predecessor organization ever been disqualification as a bidder within the last 5 years? List Projects below and provide full details in a separate attachment if yes. Has Bidder or a predecessor organization been released from a bid or proposal in the past five years? List Projects below and provide full details in a separate attachment if yes. Has Bidder or a predecessor organization ever defaulted on a project or failed to complete any work awarded to it? List Projects below and provide full details in a separate attachment if yes. Has Bidder or a predecessor organization been involved in claims or litigation involving project owners within the last 5 years? List Projects below and provide full details in a separate attachment if yes. Have liens or claims for outstanding unpaid invoices been filed against the Bidder for services or materials on any projects begun within the preceding 2 years. Specify the name and address of the party holding the lien or making the claim, the amount and basis for the lien or claim, and an explanation of why the lien has not been released or that the claim has not been paid if yes. Statement of Experience 00 45 16 - 7 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 Table 2 – Project Information Organization doing business as: Proposed Project Organization Provide a brief description of the organizational structure proposed for this project indicating the names and functional roles of proposed key personnel and alternates. Division of work between Bidder and Proposed Subcontractor and Suppliers Provide a list of Work to be self-performed by the Bidder and the Work contracted to Subcontractors and Suppliers for more than 10 percent of the Work (based on estimated subcontract or purchase order amounts and the Contract Price). Description of Work Name of Entity Performing the Work Estimated Percentage of Contract Price Subcontractor Construction Site Safety Experience Provide Experience Modification Ratio (EMR) History for the last 3 years for Subcontractors that will provide Work valued at 25% or more of the Contract Price. Provide documentation of the EMR. Subcontractor Year EMR Year EMR Year EMR Subcontractor Year EMR Year EMR Year EMR Statement of Experience 00 45 16 - 8 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 Table 3 – Proposed Project Manager Organization doing business as: Primary Candidate Name of individual Years of experience as Project Manager Years of experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Project Manager Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Reference Contact Information Name Name Title/Position Title/Position Organization Organization Telephone Telephone Email Email Project Project Role on project Role on project Alternate Candidate Name of individual Years of experience as Project Manager Years of experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Project Manager Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Reference Contact Information Name Name Title/Position Title/Position Organization Organization Telephone Telephone Email Email Project Project Role on project Role on project Statement of Experience 00 45 16 - 9 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 Table 4 – Proposed Project Superintendents Organization doing business as: Primary Candidate Name of individual Years of experience as Project Superintendent Years of experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Superintendent Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Reference Contact Information Name Name Title/Position Title/Position Organization Organization Telephone Telephone Email Email Project Project Role on project Role on project Alternate Candidate Name of individual Years of experience as Project Superintendent Years of experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Superintendent Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Reference Contact Information Name Name Title/Position Title/Position Organization Organization Telephone Telephone Email Email Project Project Role on project Role on project Statement of Experience 00 45 16 - 10 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 Table 5 – Proposed Project Safety Managers Organization doing business as: Primary Candidate Name of individual Years of experience as Project Safety Manager Years of experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Safety Manager Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Reference Contact Information Name Name Title/Position Title/Position Organization Organization Telephone Telephone Email Email Project Project Role on project Role on project Alternate Candidate Name of individual Years of experience as Project Safety Manager Years of experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Safety Manager Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Reference Contact Information Name Name Title/Position Title/Position Organization Organization Telephone Telephone Email Email Project Project Role on project Role on project Statement of Experience 00 45 16 - 11 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 Table 6 – Proposed Project Quality Control Managers Organization doing business as: Primary Candidate Name of individual Years of experience as Quality Control Manager Years of experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Quality Manager Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Reference Contact Information Name Name Title/Position Title/Position Organization Organization Telephone Telephone Email Email Project Project Role on project Role on project Alternate Candidate Name of individual Years of experience as Quality Control Manager Years of experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Quality Manager Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Reference Contact Information Name Name Title/Position Title/Position Organization Organization Telephone Telephone Email Email Project Project Role on project Role on project Statement of Experience 00 45 16 - 12 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 Table 7 – Current Projects and Projects Completed within the Last 5 Years Project Owner Project Name General Description of Project Project Budget and Schedule Performance Budget History Schedule Performance Amount % of Bid Date Days Bid Notice to Proceed Change Orders Contract Substantial Completion Date at Notice to Proceed Owner Enhancements Contract Final Completion Date at Notice to Proceed Unforeseen Conditions Change Order Authorized Substantial Completion Date Design Issues Change Order Authorized Final Completion Date Total Actual / Estimated Substantial Completion Date Final Cost Actual / Estimated Final Completion Date Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager Name Percentage of time devoted to the Project Proposed for this Project Did Individual start and complete the project? If not, who started or completed the Project in their place? Reason for change Reference Contact Information Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email Owner Designer Construction Manager Surety Issues / disputes resolved or pending resolution by arbitration, litigation, or dispute review boards Number of issues resolved Total amount involved in resolved issues Number of issues pending Total amount involved in resolved Issues Statement of Experience 00 45 16 - 13 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 Table 8 – Demonstration of Budget Performance Organization doing business as Provide information on all projects completed by the Bidder within the last 5 years. Owner Name Project Description Original Contract Price Owner Enhancements Unforeseen Conditions Design Issues Total Changes Percent Changes Statement of Experience 00 45 16 - 14 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 Table 9 – Demonstration of On-Time Performance Organization doing business as Provide information on all projects completed by the Bidder within the last 5 years. Owner Name Project Description Original Contract Date for Substantial Completion Original Contract Date for Final Completion Amended Contract Date for Substantial Completion Amended Contract Date for Final Completion Actual Contract Date for Substantial Completion Actual Contract Date for Final Completion Statement of Experience 00 45 16 - 15 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 Table 10 – Demonstrated Minority, MBE, DBE Participation Organization doing business as Project Subcontractors and Suppliers Provide a list of anticipated Minority, MBE, DBE Subcontractors or Suppliers contracts that will be used to demonstrate compliance with the Owner's Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy Name Work to be Provided Estimated % of Contract Price Minority, MBE, or DBE Firm Statement of Experience 00 45 16 - 16 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 ARTICLE 4 – CERTIFICATION 4.01 By submitting this Statement of Experience and related information; Bidder certifies that it has read this Statement of Experience and that Bidder’s responses are true and correct and contain no material misrepresentations; and that the individual signing below is authorized to make this certification on behalf of the Bidder’s organization. The individual signing this certification shall attach evidence of individual’s authority to bind the organization to an agreement. Bidder: (typed or printed) By: (individual’s signature) Name: (typed or printed) Title: (typed or printed) Designated Representative: Name: Title: Address: Telephone No.: Email: END OF SECTION Agreement HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012)-Project No. E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 00 52 23 - 1 REV 10-14-2014 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement, for the Project awarded on, is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1 – WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Re-Bid Package Project Number: E12118 PART A HEB • Demolition of existing stadium court and seating areas. • Addition of post tensioned concrete caps over existing courts 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 17 and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications. • Addition of three new courts 20, 21 and 22 on suspended structural slab and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications including all electrical and lighting. • Demolition of existing backboard area. • Addition of padding to light poles @ courts 9, 10 and 12. • Addition of chain link cut corners at indicated on site drawings and details. • Modifications to chain link fencing at entrance to HEB facility. Fencing includes replacement of low fencing with high fencing at court no 1. • Addition of chain link fencing for access control to facility. • Include all chain link fencing related work. Al Kruse • Three courts ( 5, 6 and 7) to receive new asphalt overlay. • Seven courts (1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 9, and 10) to be resurfaced. • Windscreens to be replaced at all courts. • Court 10 Backboard relocated to court 9. • Addition of padding to light poles at courts 1, 4 and 7. • Include all chain link fencing related work. Part A Additive Alternatives • Additive Alternative 1 – HEB Tennis Center – Addition of two (2) 36’ tennis courts on suspended concrete slab include all surfacing, lighting, netting and fencing as noted on plans and as specified. Agreement HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012)-Project No. E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 00 52 23 - 2 REV 10-14-2014 • Additive Alternative 6 – HEB Tennis Center – Remove four existing interior light poles on Courts 9 and 10. Replace four existing corner light poles with new light poles & Lights to illuminate courts 9, 10 and 11 PART B HEB • Demolition of viewing platform and Canopy between Courts 5-8 & 9-12 which includes demolition of seating areas, stairs, upper columns supporting roof canopy and the roof canopy to the top of the structural steel columns (existing lower columns to remain). • Replacing existing viewing platform with new accessible viewing platform inclusive of installation of a new LULA lift. • Various site concrete paving/sidewalk upgrades. • Converting old locker room building to new pro shop and all related work as shown on plans. • Architectural, MEP and Structural repairs to existing Lounge Building. Al Kruse • Accessible upgrades to existing sidewalks. • New accessible ramp at main entrance. • Renovation to existing Pro Shop providing accessible restrooms and new finishes including paint, new flooring, and new exterior doors. Part B Additive Alternatives • Additive Alternative 2 – Al Kruse Tennis Center – Mill top 2 inches of existing asphalt parking lot, repair pot holes and overlay 2 inches of new asphalt paving including all stripping, ADA signage and wheel stops. • Additive Alternative 3 – HEB Tennis Center – Complete Drip Irrigation System as shown on irrigation plans and specifications. • Additive Alternative 4 – HEB Tennis Center – Flatwork, electrical rough-in and structural piers for future shade structure. • Additive Alternative 5 – HEB Tennis Center – Pre-Fabricated maintenance storage unit “20 ft X 30 ft Morgan Building or equal” and adjacent flatwork, including electrical to storage building and windstorm anchoring. ARTICLE 2 – DESIGNER AND OWNER’S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: CLK Architects & Associates 615 N. Upper Broadway, Suite 1250 Corpus Christi, Tx 78401 2.02 The Owner’s Authorized Representative for this Project is: [To Be Determined] Agreement HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012)-Project No. E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 00 52 23 - 3 REV 10-14-2014 ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Project Part A is to be substantially complete and ready for operation within 180 days. The Project Part B is to be substantially complete and ready for operation within 180 days. Both Project Parts A and B are to be complete and eligible for Final Payment 30 days after the date for Substantial Completion. B. Milestones, and the dates for completion of each, are as defined in SECTION 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $250.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner $150.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Agreement HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012)-Project No. E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 00 52 23 - 4 REV 10-14-2014 ARTICLE 4 – CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached in SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM EXHIBIT A. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 13.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. PART A - Total Base Bid Price $ PART B - Total Base Bid Price $ Alternates Add Alternate No. 1 – HEB Tennis Center: $___________________________ Addition of two (2) 36’ tennis courts on suspended concrete slab include all surfacing, lighting, netting, and fencing as noted on plans and as specified. Add Alternate No. 2 – Al Kruse Tennis Center: $___________________________ Mill top 2” of existing asphalt parking lot, repair pot holes & overlay 2” of new asphalt paving include all stripping and ADA signage and wheel stops. Add Alternate No. 3 – HEB Tennis Center: $_________________________ Drip irrigation system – scope to include all Landscaping sheets and specifications on construction documents. Add Alternate No. 4 – HEB Tennis Center: $__________________________ Flatwork, electrical rough-in and structural piers for future shade structure. Add Alternate No. 5 – HEB Tennis Center: $__________________________ Pre-fabricated maintenance storage unit “20ft x 30ft Morgan Building or equal” and adjacent flatwork, include electrical to storage building and windstorm anchoring. Add Alternate No. 6 – HEB Tennis Center: $__________________________ Courts 9 & 10, remove four existing interior light poles. Replace four existing corner light poles with new light poles & lights to illuminate courts 9, 10 &11. ARTICLE 5 – PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 15 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to 95 percent of the total earned value to date for completed Work and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. The balance will be held as retainage. Agreement HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012)-Project No. E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 00 52 23 - 5 REV 10-14-2014 C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.B, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner’s option, retainage may be required at a higher percentage rate if progress on the Project is considered to be unsatisfactory. If retainage in excess of the amount described above is held prior to Substantial Completion, the Owner will place the additional amount in an interest bearing account. Interest will be paid in accordance with Paragraph 6.01. E. At the Owner’s option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR’s estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6 – INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. 6.02 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; Agreement HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012)-Project No. E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 00 52 23 - 6 REV 10-14-2014 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor’s safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. L. Contractor’s entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. Agreement HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012)-Project No. E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 00 52 23 - 7 REV 10-14-2014 ARTICLE 8 – ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 13.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice, the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor’s records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor’s fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 01 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 2. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 3. Addenda. 4. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor’s Bid Form Exhibit A. 5. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 10 – CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES Four original duplicates of the signed Contracts will be required. The sequence of signatures will be completed in the following order: A. CONTRACTOR – Contract must be signed by a person authorized to bind the firm or company. If Contractor is a Corporation contracts must be Attested; B. ASSISTANT CITY ATTORNEY for the City; C. DIRECTOR OF CAPITAL PROGRAMS; D. CITY SECRETARY for the City. Agreement HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012)-Project No. E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 00 52 23 - 8 REV 10-14-2014 The Effective Date of the Contract is . ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI Rebecca Huerta City Secretary Director of Capital Programs APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: Veronica Ocanas Senior Assistant City Attorney ATTEST (IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR (Seal Below) By: Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President, Vice President, Chief Executive Officer, or Chief Financial Officer Title: Address City State Zip Phone Fax EMail END OF SECTION Performance Bond 00 61 13 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 07-03-2014 00 61 13 PERFORMANCE BOND BOND NO.________________________ Contractor as Principal Surety Name: Name: Mailing address (principal place of business): Mailing address (principal place of business): Physical address (principal place of business): Owner Name: City of Corpus Christi, Texas Mailing address (principal place of business): Capital Programs 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 Surety is a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the state of: By submitting this Bond, Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Contract Project name and number: Telephone (main number): Telephone (for notice of claim): Local Agent for Surety Name: Award Date of the Contract: Address: Contract Price: Bond Telephone: E-Mail Address: Date of Bond: The address of the surety company to which any notice of claim should be sent may be obtained from the Texas Dept. of Insurance by calling the following toll-free number: 1-800-252-3439 (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date of the Contract) Said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument in 4 copies, each one of which shall be deemed an original. Performance Bond 00 61 13 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 07-03-2014 Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal faithfully performs the Work required by the Contract then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas for any legal action. Contractor as Principal Surety Signature: Signature: Name: Name: Title: Title: Email Address: Email Address: (Attach Power of Attorney and place surety seal below) END OF SECTION Payment Bond Form 00 61 16 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV. 07-03-2014 00 61 16 PAYMENT BOND BOND NO._____________________ Contractor as Principal Surety Name: Name: Mailing address (principal place of business): Mailing address (principal place of business): Physical address (principal place of business): Owner Name: City of Corpus Christi, Texas Mailing address (principal place of business): Capital Programs 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 Surety is a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the state of: By submitting this Bond, Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Contract Project name and number: Telephone (main number): Telephone (for notice of claim): Local Agent for Surety Name: Award Date of the Contract: Address: Contract Price: Bond Telephone: E-Mail Address: Date of Bond: The address of the surety company to which any notice of claim should be sent may be obtained from the Texas Dept. of Insurance by calling the following toll-free number: 1-800-252-3439 (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date of Contract) Said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument in 4 copies, each one of which shall be deemed an original. Payment Bond Form 00 61 16 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV. 07-03-2014 Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal pays all claimants providing labor or materials to him or to a Subcontractor in the prosecution of the Work required by the Contract then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas for any legal action. Contractor as Principal Surety Signature: Signature: Name: Name: Title: Title: Email Address: Email Address: (Attach Power of Attorney and place surety seal below) END OF SECTION General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 1  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS  Table of Contents  Page  Article 1 – Definitions and Terminology ....................................................................................................... 5  1.01 Defined Terms ............................................................................................................................... 5  1.02 Terminology ................................................................................................................................ 10  Article 2 – Preliminary Matters ................................................................................................................... 11  2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance ............................................................................. 11  2.02 Copies of Documents .................................................................................................................. 12  2.03 Before Starting Construction ...................................................................................................... 12  2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives ................................ 12  Article 3 – Contract Documents:  Intent, Requirements, Reuse ................................................................. 12  3.01 Intent ........................................................................................................................................... 12  3.02 Reference Standards ................................................................................................................... 14  3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ...................................................................................... 14  3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents ................................................................................. 15  3.05 Reuse of Documents ................................................................................................................... 15  Article 4 – Commencement and Progress of the Work .............................................................................. 15  4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ............................................................. 15  4.02 Starting the Work ........................................................................................................................ 15  4.03 Progress Schedule ....................................................................................................................... 16  4.04 Delays in Contractor’s Progress .................................................................................................. 16  Article 5 – Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental  Conditions ................................................................................................................................................... 17  5.01 Availability of Lands .................................................................................................................... 17  5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas ........................................................................................................ 17  5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ............................................................................................ 18  5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ............................................................................... 18  5.05 Underground Facilities ................................................................................................................ 20  5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site ............................................................................. 21  Article 6 – Bonds and Insurance ................................................................................................................. 23  6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds .................................................................................. 23  6.02 Licensed Sureties......................................................................................................................... 23  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 2  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  6.03 Insurance ..................................................................................................................................... 24  Article 7 – Contractor’s Responsibilities ..................................................................................................... 24  7.01 Supervision and Superintendence .............................................................................................. 24  7.02 Labor; Working Hours ................................................................................................................. 24  7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ........................................................................................... 25  7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others .................................................................... 25  7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties ........................................................................................................... 26  7.06 Permits ........................................................................................................................................ 27  7.07 Taxes ........................................................................................................................................... 27  7.08 Laws and Regulations .................................................................................................................. 27  7.09 Safety and Protection.................................................................................................................. 28  7.10 Safety Representative ................................................................................................................. 29  7.11 Hazard Communication Programs .............................................................................................. 29  7.12 Emergencies ................................................................................................................................ 29  7.13 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee ......................................................................... 29  7.14 Indemnification ........................................................................................................................... 30  7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services ................................................................................ 31  Article 8 – Other Work at the Site ............................................................................................................... 32  8.01 Other Work ................................................................................................................................. 32  8.02 Coordination ............................................................................................................................... 33  8.03 Legal Relationships ...................................................................................................................... 33  Article 9 – Owner’s and OPT’s Responsibilities ........................................................................................... 34  9.01 Communications to Contractor .................................................................................................. 34  9.02 Replacement of Owner’s Project Team Members ...................................................................... 34  9.03 Furnish Data ................................................................................................................................ 34  9.04 Pay When Due ............................................................................................................................. 34  9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests ................................................................................... 34  9.06 Insurance ..................................................................................................................................... 34  9.07 Modifications .............................................................................................................................. 34  9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals ............................................................................................... 34  9.09 Limitations on OPT’s Responsibilities ......................................................................................... 34  9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ...................................................................... 34  9.11 Compliance with Safety Program ................................................................................................ 35  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 3  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  Article 10 – OAR’s and Designer’s Status During Construction .................................................................. 35  10.01 Owner’s Representative .......................................................................................................... 35  10.02 Visits to Site ............................................................................................................................. 35  10.03 Resident Project Representatives ........................................................................................... 35  10.04 Rejecting Defective Work ....................................................................................................... 35  10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments ........................................................................ 35  10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ................... 36  10.07 Limitations on OAR’s and Designer’s Authority and Responsibilities ..................................... 36  Article 11 – Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work .................................................... 36  11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents ....................................................... 36  11.02 Owner‐Authorized Changes in the Work ................................................................................ 37  11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ........................................................................................ 37  11.04 Change of Contract Price ........................................................................................................ 38  11.05 Change of Contract Times ....................................................................................................... 39  11.06 Change Proposals .................................................................................................................... 39  11.07 Execution of Change Orders ................................................................................................... 39  11.08 Notice to Surety ...................................................................................................................... 40  Article 12 – Claims ....................................................................................................................................... 40  12.01 Claims ...................................................................................................................................... 40  Article 13 – Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work ...................................................................... 42  13.01 Cost of the Work ..................................................................................................................... 42  13.02 Allowances .............................................................................................................................. 44  13.03 Unit Price Work ....................................................................................................................... 45  13.04 Contingencies .......................................................................................................................... 45  Article 14 – Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work .................... 46  14.01 Access to Work ........................................................................................................................ 46  14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals ........................................................................................... 46  14.03 Defective Work ....................................................................................................................... 47  14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work................................................................................................ 47  14.05 Uncovering Work .................................................................................................................... 48  14.06 Owner May Stop the Work ..................................................................................................... 48  14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work ....................................................................................... 48  Article 15 – Payments to Contractor; Set‐Offs; Completion; Correction Period ........................................ 49  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 4  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  15.01 Progress Payments .................................................................................................................. 49  15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title ................................................................................................ 51  15.03 Substantial Completion ........................................................................................................... 51  15.04 Partial Utilization ..................................................................................................................... 51  15.05 Final Inspection ....................................................................................................................... 52  15.06 Final Payment .......................................................................................................................... 52  15.07 Waiver of Claims ..................................................................................................................... 52  15.08 Correction Period .................................................................................................................... 53  Article 16 – Suspension of Work and Termination ..................................................................................... 53  16.01 Owner May Suspend Work ..................................................................................................... 53  16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ............................................................................................ 54  16.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience ................................................................................ 55  16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate ............................................................................... 55  Article 17 – Final Resolution of Disputes .................................................................................................... 56  17.01 Methods and Procedures ........................................................................................................ 56  Article 18 – Miscellaneous .......................................................................................................................... 56  18.01 Computation of Times ............................................................................................................ 56  18.02 Independent Contractor ......................................................................................................... 56  18.03 Cumulative Remedies ............................................................................................................. 56  18.04 Limitation of Damages ............................................................................................................ 57  18.05 No Waiver ............................................................................................................................... 57  18.06 Severability .............................................................................................................................. 57  18.07 Survival of Obligations ............................................................................................................ 57  18.08 No Third Party Beneficiaries ................................................................................................... 57  18.09 Assignment of Contract .......................................................................................................... 57  18.10 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity .......................................................................................... 57  18.11 Controlling Law ....................................................................................................................... 57  18.12 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue ..................................................................................... 57  18.13 Waiver of Trial by Jury ............................................................................................................ 58  18.14 Compliance with Laws ............................................................................................................ 58  18.15 Enforcement ........................................................................................................................... 58  18.16 Subject to Appropriation ......................................................................................................... 58  18.17 Contractor’s Guarantee as Additional Remedy ...................................................................... 58  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 5  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY  1.01 Defined Terms  A. A term with initial capital letters, including the term’s singular and plural forms, has the  meaning indicated in this paragraph wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or  Contract Documents.  In addition to the terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital  letters in the Contract Documents may include references to identified articles and  paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms.  1. Addenda ‐ Documents issued prior to the receipt of Bids which clarify or modify the  Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents.  2. Agreement ‐ The document executed between Owner and Contractor covering the  Work.  3. Alternative Dispute Resolution ‐ The process by which a disputed Claim may be settled  as an alternative to litigation, if Owner and Contractor cannot reach an agreement  between themselves.  4. Application for Payment ‐ The forms used by Contractor to request payments from  Owner and the supporting documentation required by the Contract Documents.  5. Award Date – The date the City Council of the City of Corpus Christi (City) authorizes  the City Manager or designee to execute the Contract on behalf of the City.  6. Bid ‐ The documents submitted by a Bidder to establish the proposed Contract Price  and Contract Times and provide other information and certifications as required by  the Bidding Requirements.  7. Bidding Documents ‐ The Bidding Requirements, the proposed Contract Documents,  and Addenda.  8. Bidder ‐ An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner.  9. Bidding Requirements ‐ The Invitation for Bids, Instructions to Bidders, Bid Security,  Bid Form and attachments, and required certifications.  10. Bid Security ‐ The financial security in the form of a bid bond provided by Bidder at the  time the Bid is submitted and held by Owner until the Agreement is executed and the  evidence of insurance and Bonds required by the Contract Documents are provided.  A  cashier’s check, certified check, money order or bank draft from any State or National  Bank will also be acceptable.  11. Bonds ‐ Performance Bond, Payment Bond, Maintenance Bond, and other Surety  instruments executed by Surety.  When in singular form, refers to individual  instrument.  12. Change Order ‐ A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract and  signed by Owner and Contractor which modifies the Work, Contract Price, Contract  Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 6  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  13. Change Proposal ‐ A document submitted by Contractor in accordance with the  requirements of the Contract Documents:  a. Requesting an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times;  b. Contesting an initial decision concerning the requirements of the Contract  Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents;  c. Challenging a set‐off against payment due; or  d. Seeking a Modification with respect to the terms of the Contract.  14. City Engineer ‐ The Corpus Christi City Engineer and/or his designated representative  as identified at the preconstruction conference or in the Notice to Proceed.  15. Claim ‐ A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor submitted in accordance with  the requirements of the Contract Documents.  A demand for money or services by an  entity other than the Owner or Contractor is not a Claim.  16. Constituent of Concern ‐ Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated  biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous wastes, and substances, products, wastes, or other  materials that are or become listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to:  a. The Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42  U.S.C.  §§9601 et seq.  (“CERCLA”);  b. The Hazardous Materials Transportation Act, 49 U.S.C.  §§5501 et seq.;  c. The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, 42 U.S.C.  §§6901 et seq.  (“RCRA”);  d. The Toxic Substances Control Act, 15 U.S.C.  §§2601 et seq.;  e. The Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C.  §§1251 et seq.;  f. The Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C.  §§7401 et seq.; or  g. Any other Laws or Regulations regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or  standards of conduct concerning hazardous, toxic, or dangerous waste,  substance, or material.  17. Contract ‐ The entire integrated set of documents concerning the Work and describing  the relationship between the Owner and Contractor.  18. Contract Amendment ‐ A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the  Contract and signed by Owner and Contractor which:  a. Authorizes new phases of the Work and establishes the Contract Price, Contract  Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work; or  b. Modifies the terms and conditions of the Contract, but does not make changes in  the Work.  19. Contract Documents ‐ Those items designated as Contract Documents in the  Agreement.  20. Contract Price ‐ The monetary amount stated in the Agreement and as adjusted by  Modifications, and increases or decreases in unit price quantities, if any, that Owner  has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the  Contract Documents.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 7  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  21. Contract Times ‐ The number of days or the dates by which Contractor must:  a. Achieve specified Milestones;  b. Achieve Substantial Completion; and  c. Complete the Work.  22. Contractor ‐ The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for  performance of the Work.  23. Contractor’s Team ‐ Contractor and Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities  directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to perform part of the Work or  anyone for whose acts they may be liable.  24. Cost of the Work ‐ The sum of costs incurred for the proper performance of the Work  as allowed by Article 13.  25. Defective ‐ When applied to Work, refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or  deficient in that it:  a. Does not conform to the Contract Documents;  b. Does not meet the requirements of applicable inspections, reference standards,  tests, or approvals referred to in the Contract Documents; or   c. Has been damaged or stolen prior to OAR’s recommendation of final payment  unless responsibility for the protection of the Work has been assumed by Owner  at Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraphs 15.03 or 15.04.  26. Designer ‐ The individuals or entity named as Designer in the Agreement and the  subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by  Designer to provide design or other technical services to the Owner.  Designer has  responsibility for engineering or architectural design and technical issues related to  the Contract Documents.  Designers are Licensed Professional Engineers or Registered  Architects qualified to practice their profession in the State of Texas.  27. Drawings ‐ The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and  character of the Work.  Shop Drawings and other Contractor documents are not  Drawings.  28. Effective Date of the Contract ‐ The date indicated in the Agreement on which the City  Manager or designee has signed the Contract.  29. Field Order ‐ A document issued by OAR or Designer requiring changes in the Work  that do not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times.  30. Hazardous Environmental Condition ‐ The presence of Constituents of Concern at the  Site in quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property  exposed to Constituents of Concern.  The presence of Constituents of Concern at the  Site necessary for the execution of the Work or to be incorporated in the Work is not a  Hazardous Environmental Condition provided these Constituents of Concern are  controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and  the requirements of the Contract.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 8  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  31. Indemnified Costs ‐ All costs, losses, damages, and legal or other dispute resolution  costs resulting from claims or demands against Owner’s Indemnitees.  These costs  include fees for engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals.  32. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations ‐ Applicable laws, statutes, rules,  regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of governmental bodies, agencies,  authorities, and courts having jurisdiction over the Project.  33. Liens ‐ Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract related funds, real  property, or personal property.  34. Milestone ‐ A principal event in the performance of the Work that Contractor is  required by Contract to complete by a specified date or within a specified period of  time.  35. Modification ‐ Change made to the Contract Documents by one of the following  methods:  a. Contract Amendment;  b. Change Order;  c. Field Order; or  d. Work Change Directive.  36. Notice of Award ‐ The notice of Owner’s intent to enter into a contract with the  Selected Bidder.  37. Notice to Proceed ‐ A notice to Contractor of the Contract Times and the date Work is  to begin.  38. Owner ‐ The City of Corpus Christi (City), a Texas home‐rule municipal corporation and  political subdivision organized under the laws of the State of Texas, acting by and  through its duly authorized City Manager and his designee, the City Engineer (the  Director of Engineering Services), and the City’s officers, employees, agents, or  representatives, authorized to administer design and construction of the Project.  39. Owner’s Authorized Representative or OAR ‐ The individual or entity named as OAR in  the Agreement and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or  indirectly employed or retained by them to provide construction management services  to the Owner.  The OAR may be an employee of the Owner.  40. Owner’s Indemnitees ‐ Each member of the OPT and their officers, directors,  members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors.  41. Owner’s Project Team or OPT ‐ The Owner, Owner’s Authorized Representative,  Resident Project Representative, Designer, and the consultants, subconsultants,  individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide  services to the Owner.  42. Partial Occupancy or Use ‐ Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work  for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial  Completion of all the Work.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 9  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  43. Progress Schedule ‐ A schedule prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the  sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor’s plan to accomplish  the Work within the Contract Times.  44. Project ‐ The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner under the Contract  Documents.  45. Resident Project Representative or RPR ‐ The authorized representative of OPT  assigned to assist OAR at the Site.  As used herein, the term Resident Project  Representative includes assistants and field staff of the OAR.  46. Samples ‐ Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship representing  some portion of the Work that are used to establish the standards for that portion of  the Work.  47. Schedule of Documents ‐ A schedule of required documents, prepared, and  maintained by Contractor.  48. Schedule of Values ‐ A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating  portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for  Contractor’s Applications for Payment.  49. Selected Bidder ‐ The Bidder to which Owner intends to award the Contract.  50. Shop Drawings ‐ All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or  information that are specifically prepared or assembled and submitted by Contractor  to illustrate some portion of the Work.  Shop Drawings, whether approved or not, are  not Drawings and are not Contract Documents.  51. Site ‐ Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner  upon which the Work is to be performed.  The Site includes rights‐of‐way, easements,  and other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for use by the Contractor.  52. Specifications ‐ The part of the Contract that describes the requirements for materials,  equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain  administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work.  53. Subcontractor ‐ An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with  other Subcontractors or Suppliers for the performance of a part of the Work.  54. Substantial Completion ‐ The point where the Work or a specified part of the Work is  sufficiently complete to be used for its intended purpose in accordance with the  Contract Documents.  55. Supplementary Conditions ‐ The part of the Contract that amends or supplements the  General Conditions.  56. Supplier ‐ A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor  having a direct contract with Contractor or with Subcontractors or other Suppliers to  furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work.  57. Technical Data ‐ Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the  Supplementary Conditions with respect to either:  a. Subsurface conditions at the Site;  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 10  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  b. Physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the  Site, except Underground Facilities; or  c. Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site.  58. Underground Facilities ‐ All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires,  manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, other similar facilities or appurtenances, and  encasements containing these facilities which are used to convey electricity, gases,  steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, fiber optic  transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or  chemicals, or traffic or other control systems.  59. Unit Price Work ‐ Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.  60. Work ‐ The construction of the Project or its component parts as required by the  Contract Documents.  61. Work Change Directive ‐ A directive issued to Contractor on or after the Effective Date  of the Contract ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work.  The Work  Change Directive serves as a memorandum of understanding regarding the directive  until a Change Order can be issued.  1.02 Terminology  A. The words and terms discussed in this Paragraph 1.02 are not defined, but when used in  the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning.  B. It is understood that the cost for performing Work is included in the Contract Price and no  additional compensation is to be paid by Owner unless specifically stated otherwise in the  Contract Documents.  Expressions including or similar to “at no additional cost to Owner,”  “at Contractor’s expense,” or similar words mean that the Contractor is to perform or  provide specified operation of Work without an increase in the Contract Price.  C. The terms “day” or “calendar day” mean a calendar day of 24 hours measured from  midnight to the next midnight.  D. The meaning and intent of certain terms or adjectives are described as follows:  1. The terms “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered,” “as directed,” or similar terms in  the Contract Documents indicate an exercise of professional judgment by the OPT.  2. Adjectives including or similar to “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,”  “satisfactory,” or similar adjectives are used to describe a determination of OPT  regarding the Work.  3. Any exercise of professional judgment by the OPT will be made solely to evaluate the  Work for general compliance with the Contract Documents unless there is a specific  statement in the Contract Documents indicating otherwise.  4. The use of these or similar terms or adjectives does not assign a duty or give OPT  authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or assign a duty or give  authority to the OPT to undertake responsibilities contrary to the provisions of Articles  9 or 10 or other provisions of the Contract Documents.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 11  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  E. The use of the words “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” and “provide” have the following  meanings when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment:  1. Furnish means to supply and deliver the specified services, materials, or equipment to  the Site or other specified location ready for use or installation.  2. Install means to complete construction or assembly of the specified services,  materials, or equipment so they are ready for their intended use.  3. Perform or provide means to furnish and install specified services, materials, or  equipment, complete and ready for their intended use.  4. Perform or provide the specified services, materials, or equipment complete and ready  for intended use if the Contract Documents require specific services, materials, or  equipment, but do not expressly use the words “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or  “provide.”  F. Contract Documents are written in modified brief style:  1. Requirements apply to all Work of the same kind, class, and type even though the  word “all” is not stated.  2. Simple imperative sentence structure is used which places a verb as the first word in  the sentence.  It is understood that the words “furnish,” “install,” “perform,”  “provide,” or similar words include the meaning of the phrase “The Contractor shall...”  before these words.  3. Unless specifically stated that action is to be taken by the OPT or others, it is  understood that the action described is a requirement of the Contractor.  G. Words or phrases that have a well‐known technical or construction industry or trade  meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with this recognized meaning  unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents.  H. Written documents are required where reference is made to notices, reports, approvals,  consents, documents, statements, instructions, opinions or other types of communications  required by the Contract Documents.  Approval and consent documents must be received  by Contractor prior to the action or decision for which approval or consent is given.  These  may be made in printed or electronic format through the OPT’s project management  information system or other electronic media as required by the Contract Documents or  approved by the OAR.  I. Giving notice as required by the Contract Documents may be by printed or electronic media  using a method that requires acknowledgment of the receipt of that notice.  ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS  2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance  A. Provide required Bonds with the executed Agreement.  B. Provide evidence of insurance required by the Contract Documents with the executed  Agreement.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 12  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  2.02 Copies of Documents  A. OPT is to furnish one fully executed Agreement and one copy of the executed Contract  Documents in electronic portable document format (PDF).  This document is the Project  Record Copy of the Contract Documents.  2.03 Before Starting Construction  A. Provide the following preliminary documents in accordance with the Contract Documents  within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract:  1. Progress Schedule;  2. Schedule of Documents; and  3. Schedule of Values and projected cash flow information.  2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives  A. Attend the preconstruction conference as required by the Contract Documents.  B. Designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Contractor.   These individuals must have the authority to transmit and receive information, render  decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of the Contractor.  C. Owner is to designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the  Owner and the limits of their authority with regard to acting on behalf of the Owner.  ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:  INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE  3.01 Intent  A. Requirements of components of the Contract Documents are as binding as if required by all  Contract Documents.  It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally  complete Project.  The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work  required to complete the Project.  Additional details required for the correct installation of  selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OPT.  1. The Contract requirements described in the General Conditions, Supplementary  Conditions, and General Requirements (Division 01 Sections of the Specifications)  apply to Work regardless of where it is described in the Contract Documents, unless  specifically noted otherwise.  2. In offering a Bid for this Project and in entering into this Contract, Contractor  represents:  a. Contractor has studied the Contract Documents, the Work, the Site, local  conditions, Laws and Regulations, and other conditions that may affect the Work;  b. Contractor has studied the Technical Data and other information referred to in  the Contract Documents and has or will make additional surveys and  investigations as deemed necessary for the performance of the Work;  c. Contractor has correlated these studies and observations with the requirements  of the Contract Documents; and  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 13  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  d. Contractor has taken all of this information into consideration in developing the  Contract Price offered and that the Contract Price offered provides full  compensation for providing the Work in accordance with the Contract  Documents.  3. Organization of the Contract Documents is not intended to control or lessen the  responsibility of the Contractor when dividing Work among Subcontractors or  Suppliers, or to establish the extent of Work to be performed by trades,  Subcontractors, or Suppliers.  Specifications or details do not need to be indicated or  specified in each Specification or Drawing.  Items shown in the Contract Documents  are applicable regardless of their location in the Contract Documents.  4. Standard paragraph titles and other identifications of subject matter in the  Specifications are intended to aid in locating and recognizing various requirements of  the Specifications.  Titles do not define, limit, or otherwise restrict Specification text.  5. Provide the labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may be  inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as  being required to produce the indicated result, whether specifically called for in the  Contract Documents or not.  Include these related costs in the offered Contract Price.  B. Provide equipment that is functionally complete as described in the Contract Documents.   The Drawings and Specifications do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to  complete the installation of products purchased by the Owner or Contractor.  Additional  details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the  Contractor and coordinated with the Designer through the OAR.  C. Comply with the most stringent requirements where compliance with two or more  standards is specified and they establish different or conflicting requirements for the Work,  unless the Contract Documents indicate otherwise.  D. Provide materials and equipment comparable in quality to similar materials and equipment  incorporated in the Project or as required to meet the minimum requirements of the  application if the materials and equipment are shown in the Drawings but are not included  in the Specifications.  E. The Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents governs if there is a discrepancy  between the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents and subsequent electronic or  digital versions of the Contract Documents, including printed copies derived from these  electronic or digital versions.  F. The Contract supersedes all prior written or oral negotiations, representations, and  agreements.  The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and  Contractor.  The Contract Documents may be modified only by a Modification.  G. Request clarification from OAR for a decision before proceeding if Contractor is not clear on  the meaning of the Contract Documents.  OAR is to issue clarifications and interpretations  of the Contract Documents in accordance with the Contract Documents.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 14  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  3.02 Reference Standards  A. Standard Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations:  1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference  standards, or codes of technical societies, organizations, or associations, or to Laws or  Regulations, whether specific or implied, are those in effect at the time Contractor’s  Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price unless specifically  stated otherwise in the Contract Documents.  2. No provision of referenced standard specifications, manuals, reference standards,  codes, or instructions of a Supplier changes the duties or responsibilities of OPT or  Contractor from those described in the Contract Documents or assigns a duty to or  gives authority to the OPT to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or  undertake responsibilities inconsistent with the Contract Documents.  3. The provisions of the Contract Documents take precedence over standard  specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier  unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents.  B. Comply with applicable construction industry standards, whether referenced or not.  1. Standards referenced in the Contract Documents govern over standards not  referenced but recognized as applicable in the construction industry.  2. Comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents if they produce a higher  quality of Work than the applicable construction industry standards.  3. Designer determines whether a code or standard is applicable, which of several are  applicable, or if the Contract Documents produce a higher quality of Work.  C. Make copies of reference standards available if requested by OAR.  3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies  A. Reporting Discrepancies:  1. Carefully study the Drawings and verify pertinent figures and dimensions with respect  to actual field measurements before undertaking the Work.  Immediately report  conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor discovers or has actual  knowledge of to the OAR.  Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error,  ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR  or by a Modification to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01.  2. Immediately notify the OAR of conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the  Contract Documents or discrepancies between the Contract Documents and:  a. Applicable Laws or Regulations;  b. Actual field conditions;  c. Standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes; or  d. Instructions of Suppliers.  3. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy  is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 15  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01, except in an emergency as  required by Paragraph 7.12.  4. Contractor is liable to the OPT for failure to report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or  discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor has actual knowledge.  5. Contractor is deemed to have included the most expensive item, system, procedure,  etc. in the Contract Price if a conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in components  of the Contract Documents was known, but not reported prior to submitting the Bid or  when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price.  3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents  A. Submit questions concerning the non‐technical or contractual / administrative  requirements of the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions  arise.  OAR is to provide an interpretation of the Contract Documents regarding these  questions and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor.  B. Submit questions regarding the design of the Project described in the Contract Documents  to the OAR immediately after those questions arise.  OAR is to request an interpretation of  the Contract Documents from the Designer.  Designer is to respond to these questions by  providing an interpretation of the Contract Documents.  OAR will coordinate the response  of the OPT to Contractor.  C. OPT may initiate a Modification to the Contract Documents through the OAR if a response  to the question indicates that a change in the Contract Documents is required.  Contractor  may appeal Designer’s or OAR’s interpretation by submitting a Change Proposal.  3.05 Reuse of Documents  A. Contractor’s Team has no rights to the Contract Documents and may not use the Contract  Documents, or copies or electronic media editions of the Contract Documents, other than  for the construction of this Project.  This provision survives final payment or termination of  the Contract.  B. Contractor is allowed to retain a copy of the Contract Documents for record purposes,  unless specifically prohibited by the Owner for security reasons.  Surrender paper and  digital copies of the Contract Documents and other related documents and remove these  documents from computer equipment or storage devices as a condition of final payment if  the Owner so directs.  ARTICLE 4 – COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK  4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed  A. The Contract Times commence to run on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed.  4.02 Starting the Work  A. Begin performing the Work on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed.  Do not begin  Work prior to having the insurance required in Article 6 in force or before the date  indicated in the Notice to Proceed.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 16  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  4.03 Progress Schedule  A. Construct the Work in accordance with the Progress Schedule established in accordance  with the Contract Documents.  1. Adjust the Progress Schedule as required to accurately reflect actual progress on the  Work.  2. Submit proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that change the Contract  Times in accordance with the requirements of Article 11.  B. Continue performing Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during disputes or  disagreements with Owner.  Do not delay or postpone Work pending resolution of disputes  or disagreements, or during an appeal process, except as permitted by Paragraph 16.04, or  as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree.  4.04 Delays in Contractor’s Progress  A. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times if OPT directly  delays, disrupts, or interferes with the performance or progress of the Work.  The  Contractor agrees to make no Claim for damages for delay in the performance of the  Contract occasioned by an act or omission to act of the OPT and agrees that the extension  of time provides an equitable adjustment.  B. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays,  disruptions, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor’s Team.  C. No time extensions are allowed for weather conditions, other than those listed in  Paragraph 4.04.D.1, for Projects using calendar days or a fixed date to establish the  Contract Time.  Contractor is to include the cost associated with weather related delays in  the Contract Price and assumes the risks associated with delays related to weather  conditions.  D. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times if Contractor’s  performance or progress is delayed, disrupted, or interfered with by unanticipated causes  not the fault of and beyond the control of OPT or Contractor.  These unanticipated causes  may include:  1. Severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes e.g. fires, floods, hurricanes, epidemics,  and earthquakes;  2. Acts or failures to act of utility owners other than those performing other work at or  adjacent to the Site by arrangement with the Owner, as contemplated in Article 8; and  3. Acts of war or terrorism.  4. Rain days in excess of the number of days allocated for rain as described in the  Supplementary Conditions.  E. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting  from the following are governed by Article 5:  1. The existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition;  2. An Underground Facility not shown or not indicated with reasonable accuracy by the  Contract Documents; and  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 17  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  3. Hazardous Environmental Conditions.  These adjustments in Contract Times are the Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the  delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph.  F. Article 8 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the  Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site.  G. Notify the OAR immediately of a potential delaying, disrupting, or interfering event.  Submit  a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times within 30  days of the commencement of the delaying, disrupting, or interfering event.  H. Contractor is only entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Times for specific delays,  disruptions, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work that can be  demonstrated to directly impact the ability of the Contractor to complete the Work within  the Contract Times.  No adjustments in Contract Times are allowed for delays on  components of the Work which were or could have been completed without impacting the  Contract Times.  I. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay,  disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of the Owner if this delay is  concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference attributable to or within the control of  the Contractor’s Team.  ARTICLE 5 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS  ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS  5.01 Availability of Lands  A. Owner is to furnish the Site and inform the Contractor of encumbrances or restrictions  known to Owner related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in  performing the Work.  B. Provide for additional lands and access Contractor requires for temporary construction  facilities or storage of materials and equipment, other than those identified in the Contract  Documents.  Provide documentation of authority to use these additional lands to OAR  before using them.  5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas  A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas:  1. Confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of  materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site, adjacent areas  that Owner or Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or  agreements, and other adjacent areas as permitted by Laws and Regulations.  Assume  full responsibility for damage or injuries which result from the performance of the  Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor’s Team, including:  a. Damage to the Site;  b. Damage to adjacent areas used for Contractor’s Team’s operations;  c. Damage to other adjacent land or areas; and  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 18  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  d. Injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of these lands or areas.  2. Take the following action if a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant  of adjacent land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other  actions or conduct of the Contractor’s Team:  a. Take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.09; and  b. Attempt to settle the claim through negotiations with the owner or occupant, or  otherwise resolve the claim by mediation or other dispute resolution proceeding  or at law.  5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions  A. The Supplementary Conditions identify:  1. Those reports known to OPT of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or  adjacent to the Site;  2. Those drawings known to OPT of physical conditions related to existing surface or  subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; and  3. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings.  B. Data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, and the  results of tests performed on materials described in geotechnical data reports specifically  prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data,  unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions.  C. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in these reports  and drawings, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents.  Except for this  reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner’s  Indemnitees with respect to:  1. The completeness of reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including aspects  of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be  employed by Contractor, or Contractor’s safety precautions and programs;  2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or  shown or indicated in the drawings; or  3. Contractor’s interpretation of or conclusions drawn from Technical Data or other data,  interpretations, opinions, or information.  5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions  A. Notify OAR immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, after becoming aware of a  subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site, and before  further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any related Work  that:  1. Establishes that the Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided  in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate;  2. Requires a change in the Drawings or Specifications;  3. Differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 19  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  4. Is of an unusual nature and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered  and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the  Contract Documents.  Do not further disturb or perform Work related to this subsurface or physical condition,  except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12, until permission to do so is issued  by OAR.  B. OAR is to notify the OPT after receiving notice of a differing subsurface or physical  condition from the Contractor.  Designer is to:  1. Promptly review the subsurface or physical condition;  2. Determine the necessity of OPT’s obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect  the subsurface or physical condition;  3. Determine if the subsurface or physical condition falls within one or more of the  differing Site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A;  4. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in  connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question;  5. Determine the need for changes in the Drawings or Specifications; and  6. Advise OPT of Designer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations.  C. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in  question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer’s findings,  conclusions, and recommendations.  D. Possible Contract Price and Contract Times Adjustments:  1. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times  to the extent that a differing subsurface or physical condition causes a change in  Contractor’s cost or time to perform the Work provided the condition falls within one  or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A.  Any adjustment in Contract  Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of  Paragraph 13.03.  2. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times  with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if:  a. Contractor knew of the existence of the subsurface or physical condition at the  time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and  Contract Times;  b. The existence of the subsurface or physical condition could have been discovered  or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or  studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding  Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor’s Bid is submitted  or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or  c. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A.  3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal no later than 30 days after OAR’s issuance  of the OPT’s statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in  question.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 20  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  4. A Change Order is to be issued by the OAR if Owner and Contractor agree that  Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times and  agree to the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times.  5.05 Underground Facilities  A. The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to  existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is based on information and data  furnished to OPT by the owners of these Underground Facilities or by others.  OPT is not  responsible for the accuracy or completeness of information or data provided by others  that OPT makes available to Contractor.  The Contractor is responsible for:  1. Reviewing and checking available information and data regarding existing  Underground Facilities at the Site;  2. Complying with Laws and Regulations related to locating Underground Facilities before  beginning Work;   3. Locating Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents;  4. Coordinating the Work with the owners, including Owner, of Underground Facilities  during construction; and  5. The safety and protection of existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site  and repairing damage resulting from the Work.  B. Notify the OAR and the owner of the Underground Facility immediately if an Underground  Facility is uncovered or revealed at the Site that was not shown in the Contract Documents,  or was not shown with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents.  Do not further  disturb conditions or perform Work affected by this discovery, except in the event of an  emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12.  C. The Designer is to take the following action after receiving notice from the OAR:  1. Promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether the Underground  Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or  indicated with reasonable accuracy;  2. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in  connection with this Underground Facility;  3. Determine the extent to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications  to document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground  Facility; and  4. Advise OAR of Designer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations and provide  revised Drawings and Specifications if required.  D. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question  and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer’s findings, conclusions, and  recommendations.  E. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times as  provided in Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 to the extent that the existing Underground Facility  at the Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 21  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  or indicated with reasonable accuracy.  Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is  paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03.  F. Contractor is not entitled an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with  respect to an existing Underground Facility at the Site if:  1. Contractor knew of the existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site at the  time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract  Times;  2. The existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site could have been  discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests,  or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding   Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor’s Bid is submitted or  when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or  3. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.05.B.  G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or  extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times no later than 30 days after  OAR’s issuance of OPT’s statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility.  5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site  A. The Supplementary Conditions identify:  1. Those reports and drawings known to OPT relating to Hazardous Environmental  Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and   2. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings.  B. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in reports and  drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions identified in the Supplementary  Conditions, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents.  Except for the  reliance on expressly identified Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make  claims against Owner’s Indemnitees with respect to:  1. The completeness of these reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including  aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of  construction to be employed by Contractor or Contractor’s safety precautions and  programs related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions;  2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or  shown or indicated in the drawings; or  3. Any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from Technical Data or other  data, interpretations, opinions, or information.  C. The results of tests performed on materials described in environmental reports specifically  prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data  unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions.  D. Contractor is not responsible for removing or remediating Hazardous Environmental  Conditions encountered, uncovered, or revealed at the Site unless this removal or  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 22  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the  Work.  E. Contractor is responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing and remediating  Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor’s Team and paying associated  costs.  1. Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition and  impose a set‐off against payments to Contractor for associated costs if Contractor’s  Team creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition and Contractor does not take  acceptable action to remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition.  2. Contractor’s obligation to indemnify Owner’s Indemnitees for claims arising out of or  related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14.  F. Immediately notify the OAR and take the following action if Contractor uncovers or reveals  a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site or adjacent areas used by the Contractor’s  Team that was not created by the Contractor’s Team:  1. Secure or otherwise isolate this condition;  2. Stop Work in affected areas or connected with the condition, except in an emergency  as required by Paragraph 7.12; and  3. Do not resume Work in connection with the Hazardous Environmental Condition or in  affected areas until after OPT has obtained required permits and OAR sends notice to  the Contractor:  a. Specifying that this condition and affected areas are or have been rendered safe  for the resumption of Work; or  b. Specifying special conditions under which Work may be resumed safely.  4. Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by the Hazardous  Environmental Condition to be deleted from the Work following the procedures in  Article 11 if Contractor does not agree to:  a. Resume the Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe; or   b. Resume the Work under the special conditions provided by the OAR.  5. Owner may have this deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner’s own forces  or others in accordance with Article 8.  G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may impose a set‐off if an agreement  is not reached within 10 days of OAR’s notice regarding the resumption of Work as to  whether Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or on  the amount or extent of adjustments resulting from this Work stoppage or special  conditions under which Contractor agrees to resume Work.  H. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of  Constituents of Concern or a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at  the Site.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 23  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  ARTICLE 6 – BONDS AND INSURANCE  6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds  A. Furnish Performance and Payment Bonds, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price,  as security for the faithful performance and payment of Contractor’s obligations under the  Contract Documents.  These Bonds are to remain in effect until 1 year after the date of final  payment.  Furnish other Bonds as required by the Contract Documents.  B. Bonds furnished by the Contractor must meet the requirements of Texas Insurance Code  Chapter 3503, Texas Government Code Chapter 2253, and all other applicable Laws and  Regulations.  C. Notify OAR immediately if the surety on Bonds furnished by Contractor:  1. Is declared bankrupt, or becomes insolvent;  2. Has its right to do business in Texas terminated; or  3. Ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 6.02.  Provide a Bond and surety which comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.02 within  20 days after the event giving rise to this notification.  D. Contractor is to use amounts paid by Owner to Contractor under the Contract for the  performance of the Contract and to satisfy claims against the Payment Bond.  E. Notify the OAR of claims filed against the Payment Bond.  Notify the claimant and OAR of  undisputed amounts and the basis for challenging disputed amounts when a claimant has  satisfied the conditions prescribed by Texas Government Code Chapter 2253.  Promptly pay  undisputed amount.  F. Owner is not liable for payment of costs or expenses of claimants under the Payment Bond.   Owner has no obligations to pay, give notice, or take other action to claimants under the  Payment Bond.  G. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner’s termination rights  under Article 16 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain required Bonds.  H. OPT will provide a copy of the Payment Bond to Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other persons  or entities claiming to have furnished labor or materials used in the performance of the  Work that request this information in accordance with Texas Government Code Chapter  2253.  6.02 Licensed Sureties  A. Provide Bonds in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents from sureties named in  the list of “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal  Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Circular 570 (amended) by  the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury.    B. Provide Bonds required by the Contract Documents from surety companies that are duly  licensed or authorized to provide bonds in the State of Texas.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 24  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  6.03 Insurance  A. Obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in SECTION 00 72 01  INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS.  B. Deliver evidence of insurance in accordance with SECTION 00 72 01 INSURANCE  REQUIREMENTS to the Owner to demonstrate that Contractor has obtained and is  maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required by the Contract.  Provide  copies of these certificates to each named insured and additional insured as identified in  the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise.  ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES  7.01 Supervision and Superintendence  A. Supervise, inspect, and direct the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract  Documents.  Contractor is solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques,  sequences, and procedures of construction.  B. Provide a competent resident superintendent acceptable to the OPT.  The resident  superintendent or acceptable qualified assistant is to be present at all times when Work is  being done.  Do not replace this resident superintendent except under extraordinary  circumstances.  Provide a replacement resident superintendent equally competent to the  previous resident superintendent if replacement is required.  Notify the Owner prior to  replacing the resident superintendent and obtain Owner’s consent to the change in  superintendent.  7.02 Labor; Working Hours  A. Provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and  perform Work to complete the Project.  Maintain good discipline and order at the Site.  B. Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the  safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent to the Site  and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents.  C. Do not perform Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or legal holiday without OAR’s consent.  The  following legal holidays are observed by the Owner:  Holiday Date Observed  New Year’s Day January 1  Memorial Day Last Monday in May  Independence Day July 4  Labor Day First Monday in September  Thanksgiving Day Fourth Thursday in November  Friday after Thanksgiving Friday after Thanksgiving  Christmas Day December 25  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 25  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  D. If a legal holiday falls on a Saturday, it will be observed the preceding Friday.  If a legal  holiday falls on a Sunday, it will be observed the following Monday.  E. Pay additional cost incurred by Owner for services of the OAR or RPR to observe Work  constructed outside of regular working hours.  OAR will issue a Set‐off in the Application for  Payment for this cost per Paragraph 15.01.B  7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment  A. Provide services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and  machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities,  temporary facilities, and other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance,  testing, start‐up, and completion of the Work, whether or not these items are specifically  called for in the Contract Documents.  B. Provide new materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work.  Provide special  warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Document.  Provide satisfactory  evidence, including reports of required tests, as to the source, kind, and quality of materials  and equipment as required by the Contract Documents or as requested by the OAR.  C. Store, apply, install, connect, erect, protect, use, clean, and condition materials and  equipment in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, unless otherwise  required by the Contract Documents.  7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others  A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the  Work.  All Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner.  B. Contractor must retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities  for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required to do so by the Contract  Documents.  C. Submit a list of proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers to OAR prior to entering into  binding subcontracts or purchase orders.  These proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers are  deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection  within 30 days after receiving this list.  D. Contractor is not required to retain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or  entities to furnish or perform part of the Work after the Effective Date of the Contract if  Contractor has reasonable objection.  E. Owner may require the replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or  entities retained by the Contractor.  Provide an acceptable replacement for the rejected  Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity.  Owner also may require Contractor  to retain specific replacements, subject to Contractor’s reasonable objections.  F. Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times with  respect to a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entities required by Owner.   The Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time with  respect to replacement of any individual deemed unsuitable by the OPT.  Notify OAR  immediately if a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entity increases the  Contract Price or Contract Times.  Initiate a Change Proposal for the adjustment within 10  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 26  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  days of Owner’s notice to replace a Subcontractor, Supplier, or other entity retained by  Contractor to perform part of the Work.  Do not make the replacement until the change in  Contract Price or Contract Times has been accepted by the Owner if Change Proposal is to  be submitted.  G. Owner’s initial acceptance of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities, or  their replacements, does not constitute a waiver of the obligation of the Contractor to  complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.  H. Maintain a current and complete list of Subcontractors and Suppliers that are to perform or  furnish part of the Work.  I. Contractor is fully responsible for the acts and omissions of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and  other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work.  J. Contractor is solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of  Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work.  K. Require Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or  furnishing Work to communicate with OPT through Contractor.  L. Contracts between the Contractor and their Subcontractors or Suppliers may specifically  bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract  Documents.  Contractor is responsible for meeting the requirements of the Contract  Documents if they choose to not bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to applicable terms  or conditions of the Contract Documents.  1. All Subcontractors employed on this Project must be required to obtain Workers’  Compensation Insurance.  2. Proof of this insurance will be required prior to the start of any Work.  M. OPT may furnish information about amounts paid to Contractor for Work provided by  Subcontractors or Suppliers to the entity providing the Work.  N. Nothing in the Contract Documents:  1. Creates a contractual relationship between members of the OPT and members of the  Contractor’s Team.  2. Creates an obligation on the part of the Owner to pay or to see to the payment of  money due members of the Contractor’s Team, except as may be required by Laws  and Regulations.  7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties  A. Pay license fees, royalties, and costs incident to the use of inventions, designs, processes,  products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the performance of the  Work, or to incorporate these inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which  are patented or copyrighted by others in the Work.  The Contract Documents identify  inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices OPT knows are patented or copyrighted  by others or that its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of a  license fee or royalty to others.  Contractor is to include the cost associated with the use of  patented or copyrighted products or processes, whether specified or selected by the  Contractor, in the Contract Price.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 27  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  B. Contractor’s obligation to indemnify Owner’s Indemnitees for claims arising out of or  related to infringement of patent rights and copyrights are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14.  7.06 Permits  A. Obtain and pay for construction permits and licenses.  OPT is to assist Contractor in  obtaining permits and licenses when required to do so by applicable Laws and Regulations.   Pay governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work  which are applicable at the time the Contractor’s Bid is submitted or when Contractor  negotiates the Contract Price.  7.07 Taxes  A. Contractor is responsible for all taxes and duties arising out of the Work.  The Owner  generally qualifies as a tax exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Texas  and is usually not subject to any city or state sales or use taxes, however certain items such  as rented equipment may be taxable even though Owner is a tax‐exempt agency.   Contractor is responsible for including in the Contract Price any applicable sales and use  taxes and is responsible for complying with all applicable statutes and rulings of the State  Comptroller.  Pay sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by  Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations.  B. The Owner is exempt from the Federal Transportation and Excise Tax.  Contractor must  comply with all federal regulations governing the exemptions.  C. Products incorporated into the Work are exempt from state sales tax according to the  provisions of Subchapter H, Chapter 151, of the Texas Tax Code.  D. Contractor may not include any amounts for sales, use, or similar taxes for which the  Owner is exempt in the Contract Price or any proposed Change Order or Application for  Payment.  E. Obtain tax exemption certificates or other documentation necessary to establish Owner’s  exemption from such taxes.  7.08 Laws and Regulations  A. Give required notices and comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance  of the Work.  OPT is not responsible for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with Laws or  Regulations except where expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations.  B. Pay costs resulting from actions taken by Contractor that are contrary to Laws or  Regulations.  Contractor is not responsible for determining that the design aspects of the  Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations.   This does not relieve Contractor of its obligations under Paragraph 3.03.  C. Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of changes in Laws or Regulations  that may affect the cost or time of performance of the Work, including:  1. Changes in Laws or Regulations affecting procurement of permits; and  2. Sales, use, value‐added, consumption, and other similar taxes which come into effect  after Contractor’s Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 28  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may initiate a Claim within 30 days of  this notice if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount  or extent of adjustments in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from these changes.  7.09 Safety and Protection  A. Contractor is solely responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising safety  precautions and programs in connection with the Work.  This responsibility does not relieve  Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the  performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations.  B. Take necessary precautions for the safety of persons on the Site or who may be affected by  the Work, and provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to:  1. Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work, whether stored  on or off Site; and  2. Other property at or adjacent to the Site, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks,  pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground  Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of  construction.  C. Comply with applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety and protection of  persons or property.  Erect and maintain necessary safeguards for safety and protection.   Notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities, and other utilities;  and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site when  prosecution of the Work may affect them.  Cooperate with them in the protection,  removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress.  1. Comply with requirements of Underground Facility Damage Prevention and Safety Act,  Texas Utilities Code Chapter 251.  2. Comply with all applicable safety rules and regulations of the Federal Occupational  Health and Safety Act of 1970 and subsequent amendments (OSHA).  D. Remedy damage, injury, or loss to property referred to in Paragraph 7.09.B caused by  Contractor’s Team.  Pay remediation costs unless the damage or loss is:  1. Attributable to the fault of the Contract Documents;  2. Attributable to acts or omissions of OPT; or  3. Not attributable to the actions or failure to act of the Contractor’s Team.  E. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection of persons or the Work or  property at or adjacent to the Site continues until Work is completed and resumes  whenever Contractor’s Team returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations  or to conduct other tasks.  F. Comply with the applicable requirements of the Owner’s safety program if required to do  so in the Supplementary Conditions.  A copy of the Owner’s safety program will be  provided in the Bidding Documents.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 29  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  7.10 Safety Representative  A. Provide a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and  responsibilities are the prevention of accidents and maintaining and supervising safety  programs.  7.11 Hazard Communication Programs  A. Coordinate the exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication  information required to be made available or exchanged between or among employers at  the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations.  7.12 Emergencies  A. Act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss in emergencies affecting the safety or  protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site.  Notify OAR  immediately if Contractor believes that significant changes in the Work or variations from  the Contract Documents have been caused or are required as a result of this need to act.  A  Modification is to be issued by OAR if OPT determines that the incident giving rise to the  emergency action was not the responsibility of the Contractor and that a change in the  Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to  this emergency.  7.13 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee  A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that Work is in accordance with the Contract  Documents and is not Defective.  Owner is entitled to rely on Contractor’s warranty and  guarantee.  Assume and bear responsibility for costs and time delays associated with  variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents.  B. This Contractor’s warranty and guarantee excludes defects or damage caused by improper  maintenance or operation, abuse, or modification by OPT; or normal wear and tear under  normal usage.  C. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete Work in accordance with the Contract  Documents is absolute.  None of the following constitute an acceptance of Defective Work  or a release of Contractor’s obligation to perform Work in accordance with the Contract  Documents:  1. Observations by OPT;  2. Recommendation by OAR or payment by Owner of progress or final payments;  3. The issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion;  4. Use or occupancy of part of the Work by Owner;  5. Review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample;  6. Inspections, tests, or approvals by others; or  7. Correction of Defective Work by Owner.  D. The Contract Documents may require the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract  between the Owner and a contractor or supplier.  The specific warranties, guarantees, and  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 30  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  correction obligations contained in an assigned contract govern with respect to  Contractor’s performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in an assigned  contract.  7.14 Indemnification  A. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, AND HOLD  HARMLESS THE OWNER’S INDEMNITEES FROM AND AGAINST CLAIMS, DAMAGES, LOSSES AND EXPENSES,  INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ATTORNEY’S FEES OR DISPUTE RESOLUTION COSTS, ARISING OUT OF OR  RESULTING FROM PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK, VIOLATIONS OF LAWS OR REGULATIONS, OR BODILY  INJURY, DEATH, OR DESTRUCTION OF TANGIBLE PROPERTY CAUSED BY THE ACTS OR OMISSIONS OF THE  CONTRACTOR’S TEAM, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER SUCH CLAIM, DAMAGE, LOSS OR EXPENSE IS ALLEGED TO  BE CAUSED IN PART BY AN OWNER’S INDEMNITEE HEREUNDER, SUBJECT TO THE OWNER’S DEFENSES AND  LIABILITY LIMITS UNDER THE TEXAS TORT CLAIMS ACT.  HOWEVER, NOTHING HEREIN SHALL BE CONSTRUED  TO REQUIRE CONTRACTOR TO INDEMNIFY AN OWNER’S INDEMNITEE AGAINST A CLAIM, LOSS, DAMAGE OR  EXPENSE CAUSED BY THE (I) NEGLIGENCE OR FAULT, (II) BREACH OR VIOLATION OF A STATUTE, ORDINANCE,  GOVERNMENTAL REGULATION, STANDARD OR RULE, OR (III) THE BREACH OF CONTRACT BY AN OWNER’S  INDEMNITEE.  PROVIDED FURTHER HOWEVER, AND IN ADDITION TO THE ABOVE, CONTRACTOR  INDEMNIFIES EACH OF OWNER’S INDEMNITEES AGAINST CLAIMS FOR THE BODILY INJURY OR DEATH OF AN  EMPLOYEE OF THE CONTRACTOR’S TEAM OF ANY TIER EVEN IF CAUSED BY THE SOLE OR CONCURRENT  NEGLIGENCE OF AN OWNER’S INDEMNITEE.  B. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, AND HOLD  HARMLESS THE OWNER’S INDEMNITEES FROM AND AGAINST INDEMNIFIED COSTS, ARISING OUT OF OR  RELATING TO: (I) THE FAILURE TO CONTROL, CONTAIN, OR REMOVE A CONSTITUENT OF CONCERN  BROUGHT TO THE SITE BY CONTRACTOR’S TEAM OR A HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION CREATED  BY CONTRACTOR’S TEAM, (II) CONTRACTOR’S TEAM’S ACTION OR INACTION RELATED TO DAMAGES,  DELAYS, DISRUPTIONS, OR INTERFERENCE WITH THE WORK OF OWNER’S EMPLOYEES, OTHER  CONTRACTORS, OR UTILITY OWNERS PERFORMING OTHER WORK AT OR ADJACENT TO THE SITE, OR (III) THE  CORRECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK.  NOTHING IN THIS PARAGRAPH OBLIGATES THE CONTRACTOR TO  INDEMNIFY THE OWNER’S INDEMNITEES FROM THE CONSEQUENCES OF THE OWNER’S AND OWNER’S  INDEMNITEES OWN NEGLIGENCE.  PROVIDED FURTHER HOWEVER, AND IN ADDITION TO THE ABOVE,  CONTRACTOR INDEMNIFIES THE OWNER’S INDEMNITEES AGAINST CLAIMS FOR THE BODILY INJURY OR  DEATH OF AN EMPLOYEE OF THE CONTRACTOR’S TEAM OF ANY TIER EVEN IF CAUSED BY THE SOLE OR  CONCURRENT NEGLIGENCE OF OWNER’S INDEMNITEES.  C. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, AND HOLD  HARMLESS THE OWNER’S INDEMNITEES FROM AND AGAINST INDEMNIFIED COSTS RESULTING FROM  INFRINGEMENT ON PATENT RIGHTS OR COPYRIGHTS BY CONTRACTOR’S TEAM TO THE FULLEST EXTENT  PERMITTED BY LAW.  D. The indemnification obligations under this paragraph are not limited by the amount or type  of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for members of the Contractor’s  Team or other individuals or entities under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit  acts, or other employee benefit acts in claims against Owner’s Indemnitees by an employee  or the survivor or personal representative of employee of Contractor’s Team.  E. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 do not extend to the liability of  Designer arising out of the preparation of the Contract Documents or giving directions or  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 31  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  instructions, or failing to give them, to the extent they are obligated to do so if that is the  primary cause of the injury or damage.  F. Notify the other party within 10 days if Owner or Contractor receives notice of any claim or  circumstances that could give rise to an indemnified loss.  The notice must include the  following:  1. A description of the indemnification event in reasonable detail;  2. The basis on which indemnification may be due; and  3. The anticipated amount of the indemnified loss.  This notice does not stop or prevent Owner’s Indemnitees from later asserting a different  basis for indemnification or a different amount of indemnified loss than that indicated in  the initial notice.  Owner’s Indemnitees do not waive any rights to indemnification except  to the extent that Contractor is prejudiced, suffers loss, or incurs expense because of the  delay if Owner does not provide this notice within the 10‐day period.  G. Defense of Indemnification Claims:  1. Assume the defense of the claim with counsel chosen by the Contractor and pay  related costs, unless Owner decides otherwise.  Contractor’s counsel must be  acceptable to Owner.  Control the defense and any negotiations to settle the claim.   Advise Owner’s Indemnitees as to its defense of the claim within 10 days after being  notified of the indemnification request.  Owner’s Indemnitees may assume and control  the defense If Contractor does not assume the defense.  Pay all defense expenses of  the Owner’s Indemnitees as an indemnified loss.  2. Owner’s Indemnitees may retain separate counsel to participate in, but not control,  the defense and any settlement negotiations if Contractor defends the claim.   Contractor may not settle the claim without the consent or agreement of Owner.   Contractor may settle the claim with Owner’s consent and agreement unless it:  a. Would result in injunctive relief or other equitable remedies or otherwise require  Owner’s Indemnitees to comply with restrictions or limitations that adversely  affect Owner’s Indemnitees;  b. Would require Owner’s Indemnitees to pay amounts that Contractor does not  fund in full; or  c. Would not result in Owner and Owner’s Indemnitees’ full and complete release  from all liability to the plaintiffs or claimants who are parties to or otherwise  bound by the settlement.  7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services  A. Contractor is not required to provide professional design services unless these services are  specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless these  services are required to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means,  methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures.  Contractor is not required to provide  professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations.  B. The Contract Documents specify performance and design criteria related to systems,  materials, or equipment if professional design services or certifications by a design  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 32  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of  Contractor.  These services or certifications must be provided by the licensed Texas  Professional Engineer or Registered Architect who prepares, signs, and seals drawings,  calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other documents.  C. OPT is entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services,  certifications, or approvals performed by Contractor’s design professionals, provided OPT  has specified to Contractor the performance and design criteria that these services must  satisfy.  D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 7.15, Designer’s review and approval of design calculations and  design drawings is only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with the  performance and design criteria given and the design concepts expressed in the Contract  Documents.  Designer’s review and approval of Shop Drawings and other documents is only  for the purpose stated in the Contract Documents.  E. Contractor is not responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria  specified by OPT.  Advise OPT if the performance or design criteria are known or considered  likely to be inadequate or otherwise deficient.  ARTICLE 8 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE  8.01 Other Work  A. Owner may arrange for other work at or adjacent to the Site which is not part of the  Contractor’s Work.  This other work may be performed by Owner’s employees or through  other contractors.  Utility owners may perform work on their utilities and facilities at or  adjacent to the Site.  Include costs associated with coordinating with entities performing  other work or associated with connecting to this other work in the Contract Price if this  other work is shown in the Contract Documents.  B. OPT is to notify Contractor of other work prior to starting the work and provide any  knowledge they have regarding the start of utility work at or adjacent to the Site to  Contractor.  C. Provide other contractors:  1. Proper and safe access to the Site;  2. Reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment;  and  3. Reasonable opportunity to execute their work.  D. Provide cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work required to properly connect or integrate  with other work.  Do not endanger the work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise  altering the work of others without the consent of OAR and the others whose work will be  affected.  E. Inspect the work of others and immediately notify OAR if the proper execution of part of  Contractor’s Work depends upon work performed by others and this work has not been  performed or is unsuitable for the proper execution of Contractor’s Work.  Contractor’s  failure to notify the OAR constitutes an acceptance of this other work as acceptable for  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 33  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  integration with Contractor’s Work.  This acceptance does not apply to latent defects or  deficiencies in the work of others.  F. Take adequate measures to prevent damages, delays, disruptions, or interference with the  work of Owner, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent  to the Site.  8.02 Coordination  A. Owner has sole authority and responsibility for coordination of this other work unless  otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.  The Owner is to identify the entity with  authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities of the various contractors, the  limitations of their authority, and the work to be coordinated prior to the start of other  work at or adjacent to the Site.  8.03 Legal Relationships  A. Contractor may be entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times if, while  performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the OPT, other contractor, or  utility owner:  1. Damages the Work or property of Contractor’s Team;  2. Delays, disrupts, or interferes with the execution of the Work; or  3. Increases the scope or cost of performing the Work through their actions or inaction.  B. Notify the OAR immediately of the event leading to a potential Change Proposal so  corrective action can be taken.  Submit the Change Proposal within 30 days of the event if  corrective action has not adequately mitigated the impact of the actions or inactions of  others.  Information regarding this other work in the Contract Documents is used to  determine if the Contractor is entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times.   Changes in Contract Price require that Contractor assign rights against the other contractor  or utility owner to Owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference  that is the subject of the adjustment.  Changes in Contract Times require that the time  extension is essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract  Times.  C. Take prompt corrective action if Contractor’s Team damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes  with the work of Owner’s employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other  work at or adjacent to the Site or agree to compensate other contractors or utility owners  for correcting the damage.  Promptly attempt to settle claims with other contractors or  utility owners if Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of other  contractors or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site.  D. Owner may impose a set‐off against payments due to Contractor and assign the Owner’s  contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations  described in this Paragraph 8.03 to other contractors or utility owners if damages, delays,  disruptions, or interference occur.  E. Contractor’s obligation to indemnify Owner’s Indemnitees for claims arising out of or  related damages, delays, disruptions, and interference with other work at the Site are as  set forth in Paragraph 7.14.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 34  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  ARTICLE 9 – OWNER’S AND OPT’S RESPONSIBILITIES  9.01 Communications to Contractor  A. OPT issues communications to Contractor through OAR except as otherwise provided in the  Contract Documents.  9.02 Replacement of Owner’s Project Team Members  A. Owner may replace members of the OPT at its discretion.  9.03 Furnish Data  A. OPT is to furnish the data required of OPT under the Contract Documents.  9.04 Pay When Due  A. Owner is to make payments to Contractor when due as described in Paragraphs 15.01.D  and 15.06.D.  9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests  A. Owner’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements are described in Paragraph  5.01.  OPT will make copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions  and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at  the Site available to Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 5.03.  9.06 Insurance  A. Owner’s responsibilities with respect to purchasing and maintaining insurance are  described in Article 6.  9.07 Modifications  A. Owner’s responsibilities with respect to Modifications are described in Article 11.  9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals  A. OPT’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals are described  in Paragraph 14.02.  9.09 Limitations on OPT’s Responsibilities  A. The OPT does not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, and is not responsible  for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or  related safety precautions and programs, or for failure of Contractor to comply with Laws  and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work.  OPT is not responsible for  Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.  9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition  A. OPT’s responsibility for undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Conditions is described in  Paragraph 5.06.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 35  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  9.11 Compliance with Safety Program  A. Contractor is to inform the OPT of its safety programs and OPT is to comply with the  specific applicable requirements of this program.  ARTICLE 10 – OAR’S AND DESIGNER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION  10.01 Owner’s Representative  A. OAR is Owner’s representative.  The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of  authority of OAR as Owner’s representative are described in the Contract Documents.  10.02 Visits to Site  A. Designer is to make periodic visits to the Site to observe the progress and quality of the  Work.  Designer is to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with  the Contract Documents based on observations made during these visits.  Designer is not  required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections to check the quality or quantity of  the Work.  Designer is to inform the OPT of issues or concerns and OAR is to work with  Contractor to address these issues or concerns.  Designer’s visits and observations are  subject to the limitations on Designer’s authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs  9.09 and 10.07.  B. OAR is to observe the Work to check the quality and quantity of Work, implement Owner’s  quality assurance program, and administer the Contract as Owner’s representative as  described in the Contract Documents.  OAR’s visits and observations are subject to the  limitations on OAR’s authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07.  10.03 Resident Project Representatives  A. Resident Project Representatives assist OAR in observing the progress and quality of the  Work at the Site.  The limitations on Resident Project Representatives’ authority and  responsibility are described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07.  10.04 Rejecting Defective Work  A. OPT has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 14.  OAR is to issue a  Defective Work Notice to Contractor and document when Defective Work has been  corrected or accepted in accordance with Article 14.  10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments  A. Designer’s authority related to Shop Drawings and Samples are described in the Contract  Documents.  B. Designer’s authority related to design calculations and design drawings submitted in  response to a delegation of professional design services are described in Paragraph 7.15.  C. OAR and Designer’s authority related to Modifications is described in Articles 11.  D. OAR’s authority related to Applications for Payment is described in Articles 13 and 15.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 36  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work  A. OAR is to render decisions regarding non‐technical or contractual / administrative  requirements of the Contract Documents and will coordinate the response of the OPT to  Contractor.  B. Designer is to render decisions regarding the conformance of the Work to the requirements  of the Contract Documents.  Designer will render a decision to either correct the Defective  Work, or accept the Work under the provisions of Paragraph 14.04, if Work does not  conform to the Contract Documents.  OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to  Contractor.  C. OAR will issue a Request for a Change Proposal if a Modification is required.  OAR will  provide documentation for changes related to the non‐technical or contractual /  administrative requirements of the Contract Documents.  Designer will provide  documentation if design related changes are required.  D. Contractor may appeal Designer’s decision by submitting a Change Proposal if Contractor  does not agree with the Designer’s decision.  10.07 Limitations on OAR’s and Designer’s Authority and Responsibilities  A. OPT is not responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor’s Team.  No actions or failure  to act, or decisions made in good faith to exercise or not exercise the authority or  responsibility available under the Contract Documents creates a duty in contract, tort, or  otherwise of the OPT to the Contractor or members of the Contractor’s Team.  ARTICLE 11 – AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; CHANGES IN THE WORK  11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents  A. The Contract Documents may be modified by a Contract Amendment, Change Order, Work  Change Directive, or Field Order.  1. Contract Amendment:  Owner and Contractor may modify the terms and conditions of  the Contract Documents without the recommendation of the Designer using a  Contract Amendment.  A Contract Amendment may be used for:  a. Changes that do not involve:  1) The performance or acceptability of the Work;  2) The design as described in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise; or  3) Other engineering, architectural or technical matters.  b. Authorizing new phases of the Work and establishing the Contract Price, Contract  Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work when  using phased construction or purchasing Goods and Special Services to be  incorporated into the Project.  2. Change Order:  All changes to the Contract Documents that include a change in the  Contract Price or the Contract Times for previously authorized Work, or changes to the  Work requiring Designer’s approval must be made by a Change Order.  A Change  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 37  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  Order may also be used to establish modifications of the Contract Documents that do  not affect the Contract Price or Contract Times.  3. Work Change Directive:  A Work Change Directive does not change the Contract Price  or the Contract Times, but is evidence that the parties expect that the modifications  ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive are to be incorporated in a  subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations on the Contract Price and  Contract Times.  Contractor must submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment of  the Contract Price or the Contract Times no later than 30 days after the completion of  the Work set out in the Work Change Directive if negotiations are unsuccessful under  the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including  Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05.  4. Field Order:  Designer may require minor changes in the Work that do not change the  Contract Price or Contract Times using a Field Order.  OAR may issue a Field Order for  non‐technical, administrative issues.  Submit a Change Proposal if Contractor believes  that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times  before proceeding with the Work described in the Field Order.  B. Perform added or revised Work under the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents  for the same or similar Work unless different Drawings, Specifications, or directions are  provided in the Modification.  11.02 Owner‐Authorized Changes in the Work  A. Owner may order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work at any time as  recommended by the Designer to the extent the change:  1. Involves the design as described in the Contract Documents;  2. Involves acceptance of the Work; or   3. Involves other engineering, architectural or technical matters.  B. These changes may be authorized by a Modification.  Proceed with the Work involved or, in  the case of a deletion in the Work, immediately cease construction activities with respect  to the deleted Work upon receipt of the Modification.  Nothing in this paragraph obligates  the Contractor to undertake Work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be  performed in a manner consistent with Contractor’s safety obligations under the Contract  Documents or Laws and Regulations.  11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work  A. Contractor is not entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the  Contract Times with respect to Work performed that is not required by the Contract  Documents, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.12, or in the  case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05.  B. Contractor is responsible for costs and time delays associated with variations from the  requirements of the Contract Documents unless the variations are specifically approved by  Change Order.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 38  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  11.04 Change of Contract Price  A. The Contract Price can only be changed by a Change Order.  Any Change Proposal for an  adjustment in the Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06.  Any  Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Article 12.  B. An adjustment in the Contract Price is to be determined as follows:  1. By applying unit prices to the quantities of the items involved, subject to the  provisions of Paragraph 13.03, where the Work involved is covered by unit prices in  the Contract Documents;  2. By a mutually agreed lump sum where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices  in the Contract Documents; or  3. Payment on the basis of the Cost of the Work determined as provided in Paragraph  13.01 plus a Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit determined as provided in  Paragraph 11.04.D when the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the  Contract Documents or the parties do not reach a mutual agreement to a lump sum.  C. The original Contract Price may not be increased by more than 25 percent or the limit set  out in Texas Local Government Code 252.048 or its successor statute.  Owner may decrease  the Work by up to 25 percent of the Contract Price without adjusting Contractor’s fee.  D. Contractor’s Fee:  Determine the Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit as follows:  1. A mutually acceptable fixed fee; or   2. A fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the  Work:  a. The Contractor’s fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.C.1  and 13.01.C.2;  b. The Contractor’s fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 13.01.C.3;  c. Fees are to be determined as follows where one or more tiers of subcontracts are  used:  1) The Subcontractor’s fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs  13.01.C.1 and 13.01.C.2 for the Subcontractor that actually performs the  Work at whatever tier; and  2) The Contractor and Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the  Subcontractor that actually performs the Work are to be allowed a fee of 5  percent of the fee plus underlying costs incurred by the next lower tier  Subcontractor;  d. No fee is payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 13.01.C.4, and  13.01.D;  e. Five percent of the net decrease in the cost is to be deducted for changes which  result in a net decrease in Contract Price; and  3. The adjustment in Contractor’s fee is based on the net change in accordance with  Paragraphs 11.04.D.2.a through 11.04.D.2.e, inclusive when both additions and credits  are involved in any one change.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 39  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  11.05 Change of Contract Times  A. The Contract Times can only be changed by Change Order.  Any Change Proposal for an  adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06.  Any  Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Article  12.  B. An adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the limitations described in Paragraph  4.04.  11.06 Change Proposals  A. Submit a Change Proposal to the OAR to:  1. Request an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times;  2. Appeal an initial decision by OPT concerning the requirements of the Contract  Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents;  3. Contest a set‐off against payment due; or  4. Seek other relief under the Contract Documents.  B. Notify the OAR immediately if a Change Proposal is to be submitted.  Submit each Change  Proposal to OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal.   Submit the following as part of the Change Proposal:  1. Any proposed change in Contract Price, Contract Times, or other relief, accompanied  by a statement that the requested Change Order is the entire adjustment to which  Contractor believes it is entitled;  2. The reason for the proposed change; and  3. Supporting data, accompanied by a statement that the supporting data is accurate and  complete.  C. OAR is to advise OPT regarding the Change Proposal.  OPT is to review each Change  Proposal and Contractor’s supporting data, and within 30 days after receipt of the  documents, direct the OAR to either approve or deny the Change Proposal in whole or in  part.  OAR is to issue a Change Order for an approved Change Proposal.  The Contractor  may deem the Change Proposal to be denied if OAR does not take action on the Change  Proposal within 30 days and start the time for appeal of the denial under Article 12.  11.07 Execution of Change Orders  A. Owner and Contractor are to execute Change Orders covering:  1. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by Owner and  Contractor, including undisputed sums or amount of time for Work actually performed  in accordance with a Work Change Directive;  2. Changes in Contract Price resulting from Owner set‐offs unless the set‐off has been  successfully challenged by Contractor;  3. Changes in the Work which are:  a. Ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02.A,  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 40  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  b. Required because Defective Work was accepted under Paragraph 14.04 or  Owner’s correction of Defective Work under Paragraph 14.07, or  c. Agreed to by the Owner and Contractor; and  4. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes under Paragraph  11.06 or Article 12.  B. Acceptance of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes a full accord and satisfaction for  any and all claims and costs of any kind, whether direct or indirect, including but not limited  to impact, delay, or acceleration damages arising from the subject matter of the Change  Order.  Each Change Order must be specific and final as to prices and extensions of time,  with no reservations or other provisions allowing for future additional money or time as a  result of the particular changes identified and fully compensated in the Change Order.  The  execution of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes conclusive evidence of Contractor’s  agreement to the ordered changes in the Work.  This Contract, as amended, forever  releases any claim against Owner for additional time or compensation for matters relating  to or arising out of or resulting from the Work included within or affected by the executed  Change Order.  This release applies to claims related to the cumulative impact of all Change  Orders and to any claim related to the effect of a change on unchanged Work.  C. All Change Orders require approval by either the City Council or Owner by administrative  action.  The approval process requires a minimum of 45 days after submission in final form  with all supporting data.  Receipt of Contractor’s submission by Owner constitutes neither  acceptance nor approval of a Bid, nor a warranty that the Bid will be authorized by City  Council or administrative action.  The time required for the approval process may not be  considered a delay and no extensions to the Contract Times or increase in the Contract  Price will be considered or granted as a result of the process.  Contractor may proceed with  Work if a Work Change Directive is issued.  D. A Change Order is deemed to be in full force as if executed by Contractor if the Contractor  refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of this  Paragraph 11.07.  11.08 Notice to Surety  A. Notify the surety of Modifications affecting the general scope of the Work, changes in the  provisions of the Contract Documents, or changes in Contract Price or Contract Times.   Adjust the amount of each Bond when Modifications change the Contract Price.  ARTICLE 12 – CLAIMS  12.01 Claims  A. Follow the Claims process described in this Article for the following disputes between  Owner and Contractor:  1. A demand or assertion by Owner to Contractor, submitted in accordance with the  requirements of the Contract Documents:  a. Seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times;  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 41  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  b. Contesting an initial decision by Designer concerning the requirements of the  Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents;  c. Contesting Designer’s decision regarding a Change Proposal;  d. Seeking resolution of a contractual issue that OAR has declined to address; or  e. Seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract.  2. A demand or assertion by Contractor to Owner, submitted in accordance with the  requirements of the Contract Documents:  a. Contesting OPT’s decision regarding a Change Proposal; or  b. Seeking resolution of a contractual issue that OPT has declined to address.  B. Notify the OAR no later than 7 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim or, in  the case of appeals regarding Change Proposals, within 7 days of the decision under appeal.   The responsibility to substantiate a Claim rests with the entity making the Claim.  In the  case of a Claim by Contractor seeking an increase in the Contract Price or Contract Times,  Contractor must certify that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data is  accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor’s knowledge and belief, the  amount of time or money requested accurately reflects the full amount to which  Contractor is entitled.  C. The entity receiving a Claim is to review the Claim giving full consideration to its merits.   The Owner and Contractor are to seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of  information and direct negotiations.  The Owner and Contractor may extend the time for  resolving the Claim by mutual agreement.  Notify OAR of actions taken on a Claim.  D. Owner and Contractor may mutually agree to mediate the underlying dispute at any time  after initiation of a Claim.  1. The agreement to mediate suspends the Claim submittal and response process.  2. Owner or Contractor may unilaterally terminate the mediation process after 60 days  from the agreement to mediate and resume the Claim submittal and decision process  as of the date of the termination.  The Claim process resumes as of the date of the  conclusion of the mediation, as determined by the mediator, if the mediation is  unsuccessful in resolving the dispute.  3. Owner and Contractor are to each pay one‐half of the mediator’s fees and costs.  E. If the entity receiving a Claim approves the Claim in part or denies it in part, this action is  final and binding unless the other entity invokes the procedure described in Article 17 for  final resolution of disputes within 30 days of this action.  F. Notify the OAR if efforts to resolve the Claim are not successful and the Claim is denied.  A  denial of the Claim is final and binding unless the other entity invokes the procedure  described in Article 17 for the final resolution of disputes within 30 days of the denial.  G. The results of the agreement or action on the Claim is to be incorporated in a Change Order  by the OAR to the extent they affect the Contract Documents, the Contract Price, or the  Contract Times if the Owner and Contractor reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 42  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  ARTICLE 13 – COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK  13.01 Cost of the Work  A. The Cost of the Work is the sum of costs described in this Paragraph 13.01, except those  excluded in Paragraph 13.01.D, necessary for the proper performance of the Work.  The  provisions of this Paragraph 13.01 are used for two distinct purposes:  1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract  Price under cost‐plus, time‐and‐materials, or other cost‐based terms; or  2. To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set‐off, or other  adjustment in Contract Price.  B. Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the  change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment when the value of  the adjustment is determined on the basis of the Cost of the Work.  C. Costs included in the Cost of the Work may not exceed the prevailing costs in the proximate  area of the Site for similar work unless agreed to by the Owner.  Cost of the Work includes  only the following items:  1. Payroll costs for Contractor’s employees performing the Work, including one foreman  per crew, and other required and agreed upon personnel for the time they are  employed on the Work.  Employees are to be paid according to wage rates for job  classifications as agreed to by Owner.  Where the Cost of the Work is being used under  provisions of Paragraph 13.01.A.2, rates paid for this Work are to be the same as paid  for Contract Work as established by certified payroll.  Payroll costs may include:  a. Actual costs paid for salaries and wages;  b. Actual cost paid for fringe benefits, which may include:  1) Social security contributions,  2) Unemployment,  3) Excise and payroll taxes,  4) Workers’ compensation,  5) Health and retirement benefits,  6) Bonuses, and  7) Paid time off for sick leave, vacations, and holidays; and  c. Actual cost of additional compensation paid for performing Work outside of  regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, to the extent  authorized by Owner.  2. Cost of materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including  transportation and storage costs and required Suppliers’ field services.  Contractor  may retain cash discounts unless Owner provided funds to the Contractor for early  payment of these materials and equipment.  Cash discounts are to be credited to  Owner if the Owner provides funds for early payment.  Make provisions for trade  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 43  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  discounts, rebates, refunds, and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment  and reduce the Cost of the Work by these amounts.  3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by  Subcontractors.  Obtain competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to Owner  unless Owner agrees to use Subcontractors proposed by the Contractor.  Bids are to  be opened in the presence of the OAR and other designated members for the OPT.   Provide copies of bids to the OAR to use in determining, with the OPT, which bids are  acceptable.  The Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee are determined in the same  manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 13.01 if  the subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of  the Work plus a fee.  4. Supplemental costs including the following:  a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of  Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work;  b. Costs of materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and  temporary facilities at the Site including transportation and maintenance costs;  c. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers consumed in the performance of  the Work.  Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers which are used but not  consumed in the performance of the Work and which remain the property of  Contractor, less their market value when Work is completed;  d. Rental of construction equipment, including the costs of transporting, loading,  unloading, assembling, dismantling, and removing construction equipment,  whether rented from Contractor or others, in accordance with rental agreements  approved by Owner.  Costs for rental of equipment will not be paid when the  equipment is no longer necessary for the Work.  Justify idle time for equipment  by demonstrating that it was necessary to keep equipment on Site for related  future Work;  e. Applicable sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work for  which the Owner is not exempt, and which Contractor pays consistent with Laws  and Regulations;  f. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor’s Team;  g. Royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses;  h. Cost of additional utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site;  i. Minor expense items directly required by the Work; and  j. Premiums for Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents.  D. The Cost of the Work does not include the following items:  1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals of  partnerships and sole proprietorships, general managers, safety managers,  superintendents, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants,  purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, clerks, and other personnel employed  by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office, for  general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 44  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 13.01.C.1 or specifically  covered by Paragraph 13.01.C.4.  These administrative costs are covered by the  Contractor’s fee.  2. Office expenses other than Contractor’s office at the Site.  3. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital  employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments.  4. Costs due to the actions of Contractor’s Team for the correction of Defective Work,  disposal of materials or equipment that do not comply with Specifications, and  correcting damage to property.  5. Losses, damages, and related expenses caused by damage to the Work or sustained by  Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work.  Contractor is entitled to  recover costs if covered by insurance provided in accordance with Article 6.  Such  losses may include settlements made with the approval of Owner.  Do not include  these losses, damages, and expenses in the Cost of the Work when determining  Contractor’s fee.  6. Any Indemnified Cost paid with regard to Contractor’s indemnification of Owner’s  Indemnitees.  7. Other overhead or general expense costs and the costs of items not described in  Paragraphs 13.01.C.  E. The Contractor’s fee is determined as follows:  1. In accordance with the Agreement when the Work is performed on a cost‐plus basis.  2. In accordance with Paragraph 11.04.C for Work covered by a Modification determined  on the basis of Cost of the Work.  F. Establish and maintain records in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices  and submit these records, including an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting  data, in a form and at intervals acceptable to OAR whenever the Cost of the Work is to be  determined pursuant to this Paragraph 13.01.  13.02 Allowances  A. Include allowances specified in the Contract Documents in the Contract Price and provide  Work covered by the allowance as authorized by the Owner through the OAR.  B. Contractor agrees that:  1. The cash allowance is used to compensate the Contractor for the cost of furnishing  materials and equipment for the Work covered by the allowance item in the Contract  Documents.  Cost may include applicable taxes.  Make provisions for trade discounts,  rebates, and refunds and reduce the allowance costs by these amounts.  2. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead,  profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included  in the Contract Price and not in the allowances; and  3. Costs for cash allowances and installation costs as described in Paragraphs 13.02.B.1  and 13.02.B.2 above are included in the Contract Price.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 45  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  C. OAR will issue a Change Order to adjust the Contract Price by the difference between the  allowance amount and the actual amount paid by Contractor for Work covered by the  allowance.  The Change Order will be issued at the time costs are incurred by Contractor for  Work covered by the allowance and this Work is included on the Application for Payment.  13.03 Unit Price Work  A. The initial Contract Price for Unit Price Work is equal to the sum of the unit price line items  in the Agreement.  Each unit price line item amount is equal to the product of the unit price  for each line item times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement.  B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for  the purpose of comparing Bids and determining an initial Contract Price.  Payments to  Contractor for Unit Price Work are to be based on actual quantities measured for Work in  place.  C. Each unit price is deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate  to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item.  D. OAR is to determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed  by Contractor to be incorporated into each Application for Payment.  OAR’s decision on  actual quantities is final and binding, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03.E.  E. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may file a Claim, seeking an  adjustment in the Contract Price within 30 days of OAR’s decision under Paragraph 13.03.D,  if:  1. The total cost of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to 20 percent or more of  the total Contract Price and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit  Price Work performed by the Contractor differs by more than 20 percent from the  estimated quantity of an item indicated in the Agreement;  2. There is no corresponding adjustment with respect to other items of Work; and   3. Contractor believes it has incurred additional expense as a result of this condition or if  Owner believes that the quantity variation entitles Owner to an adjustment in the  Contract Price.  13.04 Contingencies  A. Contingency funds may be included in the Contract Price to pay for Work not defined  specifically by the Contract Documents that is essential to the completion of the Project.   Contingency funds will be as described in the Agreement.  B. The contingency funds may be used for costs incurred by the Contractor provided these  costs are approved by the Owner.  Costs are to be determined and documented in  accordance with Paragraph 13.01.  The contingency funds are not to be used for the  following items:  1. Cost overruns due to changes in material costs after the Contract Price is established,  unless specific price escalation provisions are made in the Agreement.  2. Rework required to correct Defective Work.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 46  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  3. Inefficiencies in completing the Work due to the Contractor’s selected means,  methods, sequences, or procedures of construction.  4. Work Contractor failed to include in the Contract Price.  5. Changes required by changes in Laws and Regulations enacted after the Contract Price  is established.  6. Any Work that does not constitute a change in Scope in the Work included in the  Contract Price.  C. OAR is to issue a Change Order for approved expenditures from contingency funds.  When  the Change Order is issued, the costs are to be added to the Application for Payment.   Contractor is to maintain a tabulation showing the contingency amount, adjustments to the  contingency amount, and amounts remaining as the Project progresses.  D. Any contingency amounts that are not included in a Change Order are retained by the  Owner.  A Change Order will be issued to deduct unused contingency amounts from the  Contract Price prior to Final Payment.  ARTICLE 14 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL, OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE  WORK  14.01 Access to Work  A. Provide safe access to the Site and the Work for the observation, inspection, and testing of  the Work in progress.  Contractor can require compliance with Contractor’s safety  procedures and programs as part of providing safe access.  14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals  A. OPT may retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or  other qualified individual or entity to perform inspections.  Notify OAR when the Work is  ready for required inspections and tests.  Provide adequate notice to allow for coordination  with entities providing inspection or testing as determined by the OAR.  Cooperate with  inspection and testing personnel and assist with providing access for required inspections,  tests, and handling test specimens or Samples.  B. Arrange for and facilitate inspections, tests, and approvals required by Laws or Regulations  of governmental entities having jurisdiction that require Work to be inspected, tested, or  approved by an employee or other representative of that entity.  Pay associated costs and  furnish OAR with the required certificates of inspection or approval.  C. Arrange, obtain, and pay for inspections and tests required:  1. By the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate  responsibility for a specific inspection or test to OPT;  2. To attain OPT’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work;  3. By manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents;  4. For testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to  be incorporated into the Work;   General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 47  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  5. For acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior  to Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work;  6. For re‐inspecting or retesting Defective Work, including any associated costs incurred  by the testing laboratory for cancelled tests or standby time; and  7. For retesting due to failed tests.  D. Provide independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or  entities acceptable to OPT to provide these inspections and tests.  14.03 Defective Work  A. It is Contractor’s obligation to assure that the Work is not Defective.  B. OPT has the authority to determine whether Work is Defective and to reject Defective  Work.  C. OAR is to notify Contractor of Defective Work of which OPT has actual knowledge.  D. Promptly correct Defective Work.  E. Take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner’s special warranties or  guarantees when correcting Defective Work.  F. Pay claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to Defective Work,  including:  1. Costs for correction, removal, and replacement of Defective Work;  2. Cost of the inspection and testing related to correction of Defective Work;  3. Fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because of Defective Work;  and  4. Costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from Defective Work.  14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work  A. Owner may elect to accept Defective Work instead of requiring correction or removal and  replacement of Defective Work provided:   1. This acceptance occurs prior to final payment;  2. Designer confirms that the Defective Work is in general accordance with the design  intent and applicable engineering or architectural principles; and  3. Designer confirms that acceptance of the Defective Work does not endanger public  health or safety.  B. Owner may impose a reasonable set‐off against payments due under Article 15 for costs  associated with OPT’s evaluation of Defective Work to determine if it can be accepted and  to determine the diminished value of the Work.  Owner may impose a reasonable set‐off  against payments due under Article 15 if the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease  in the Contract Price to compensate Owner for the diminished value of Defective Work  accepted.  OAR is to issue a Modification for acceptance of the Defective Work prior to final  payment.  Pay an appropriate amount to Owner if the acceptance of Defective Work occurs  after final payment.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 48  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  14.05 Uncovering Work  A. OPT has the authority to require inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not the  Work is fabricated, installed, or completed.  B. Work that is covered prior to approval of the OAR must be uncovered for OPT’s observation  if requested by OAR.  Pay for uncovering Work and its subsequent restoration unless  Contractor has given OAR timely notice of Contractor’s intention to cover the Work and  OAR fails to act with reasonable promptness in response to this notice.  C. Provide necessary labor, material, and equipment and uncover, expose, or otherwise make  available the portion of the Work suspected of being Defective for observation, inspection,  or testing if OPT considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by  Designer or inspected or tested by others as directed by the OAR.  1. Pay for claims, costs, losses, and damages associated with uncovering, exposing,  observing, inspecting, and testing if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective.   Pay costs for correction of Defective Work.  Pay for reconstruction, repair, or  replacement of work of others if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective.  2. Submit a Change Proposal for an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the  Contract Times directly attributable to this uncovering, exposure, observation,  inspection, testing, and reconstruction if the uncovered Work is found to be not  Defective.  14.06 Owner May Stop the Work  A. Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work if:  1. The Work is Defective;  2. Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment;  or  3. Contractor performs Work that may fail to conform to the Contract Documents when  completed.  This stop work order is to remain in effect until the reason for the stop work order has been  eliminated.  Owner’s right to stop the Work does not create a duty to exercise this right for  the benefit of Contractor’s Team or surety.  14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work  A. Owner may remedy the following deficiencies after 7 days’ notice to Contractor if:  1. Contractor fails to correct Defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as  required by OPT;   2. Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; or  3. Contractor fails to comply with other provisions of the Contract Documents.  B. Owner may:  1. Exclude Contractor from the Site;  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 49  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  2. Take possession of the Work and suspend Contractor’s services related to the Work;  and  3. Incorporate stored materials and equipment in the Work.  C. Allow OPT access to the Site and off Site storage areas to enable Owner to exercise the  rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07.  D. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the  rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07 are to be charged against Contractor as a  set‐off against payments due under Article 15.  These claims, costs, losses, and damages  include costs of repair and the cost of replacement of work of others destroyed or  damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor’s Defective Work.  E. Contractor is not allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of delays in the  performance of the Work attributable to the exercise of the Owner’s rights and remedies  under this Paragraph 14.07.  ARTICLE 15 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET‐OFFS; COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD  15.01 Progress Payments  A. Progress payments are to be submitted to the OAR on the Application for Payment form  provided by the OAR following procedures in the Contract Documents.   1. Progress payments for lump sum Work are to be paid on the basis of the earned value  to date at the amounts shown in the Schedule of Values submitted as required by  Paragraph 2.03.  Final payment will be for the total lump sum amount.  2. Progress payments for Unit Price Work are based on the number of units completed as  determined under the provisions of Paragraph 13.03.  3. Progress payments for Work to be paid on the basis of the Cost of the Work per  Paragraphs 13.01, 13.02 and 13.04 are to be paid for Work completed by Contractor  during the pay period.  B. Reduction in Payment by Owner:  1. Owner is entitled to impose a set‐off against payment based on the following:  a. Claims made against Owner or costs, losses, or damages incurred by Owner  related to:  1) Contractor’s conduct in the performance of the Work, including, but not  limited to, workplace injuries, non‐compliance with Laws and Regulations, or  patent infringement; or  2) Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid  damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent  to the Site, including but not limited to, workplace injuries, property damage,  and non‐compliance with Laws and Regulations.  b. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental  Condition for which Contractor is responsible;  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 50  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  c. Work is Defective, or completed Work has been damaged by Contractor’s Team,  requiring correction or replacement;  d. Owner has been required to correct Defective Work or complete Work in  accordance with Paragraph 14.07;  e. The Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;  f. Events have occurred that would constitute a default by Contractor justifying a  termination for cause;  g. Liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor’s failure to achieve  Milestones, Substantial Completion, or completion of the Work;  h. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has  delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and  discharge of these Liens;  i. Owner has been notified of failure to make payments to Subcontractors,  Suppliers, or Employees;  j. Failure to submit up‐to‐date record documents as required by the Contract  Documents;  k. Failure to submit monthly Progress Schedule updates or revised schedules as  requested by the OAR;  l. Failure to provide Project photographs required by the Contract Documents;  m. Failure to provide Certified Payroll required by the Contract Documents;  n. Compensation for OPT for overtime charges of OAR or RPR, third review of  documents, review of substitutions, re‐inspection fees, inspections or designs  related to correction of Defective Work, or other services identified as requiring  payment by the Contractor;  o. Costs for tests performed by the Owner to verify that Work previously tested and  found to be Defective has been corrected;  p. OPT has actual knowledge of the occurrence of events that would constitute a  default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the  Contract Documents with associated cost impacts;  q. Other items entitling Owner to a set‐off against the amount recommended; or  r. Payment would result in an over‐payment of the Contract Price.  2. Compensation for services of OPT staff is to be at the rates established by negotiations  between OPT and Contractor.  3. OAR is to notify Contractor stating the amount and the reasons for an imposed set‐off.   The Owner is to pay the Contractor amounts remaining after deduction of the set‐off.   Owner is to pay the set‐off amount agreed to by Owner and Contractor if Contractor  remedies the reasons for the set‐off.  Contractor may submit a Change Proposal  contesting the set‐off.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 51  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  C. Delayed Payments:  1. No money shall be paid by Owner upon any claim, debt, demand, or account  whatsoever, to any person, firm, or corporation who is in arrears to Owner for taxes;  and Owner shall be entitled to counterclaim and automatically offset against any such  debt, claim, demand, or account in the amount of taxes so in arrears and no  assignment or transfer of such debt, claim, demand, or account after said taxes are  due, shall affect the right of Owner to offset said taxes, and associated penalties and  interest if applicable, against the same.  2. No payment will be made for Work authorized by a Work Change Directive until the  Work Change Directive is incorporated into a Change Order.  Payment can be included  in an Application for payment when the Change Order is approved.   D. The Owner is to pay the amount of payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after  receipt of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR.  15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title  A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to the Work, materials, and equipment  furnished under the Contract is to pass to Owner free and clear of Liens, title defects, and  patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations no later than 7 days after the time of  payment by Owner of the Application for Payment which includes these items.  15.03 Substantial Completion  A. Notify OAR when Contractor considers the entire Work substantially complete and request  a Certificate of Substantial Completion.  B. OPT is to inspect the Work after Contractor’s notification to determine if the Work is  substantially complete.  OAR is to either issue the Certificate of Substantial Completion  which sets the date of Substantial Completion or notify Contractor of the reasons the  Project is not considered to be substantially complete.  C. The OPT and Contractor are to meet to discuss Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work  following Substantial Completion.  Items to be discussed at this meeting include:  1. Review of insurance policies with respect to the end of the Contractor’s coverage, and  confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance  policy held by Owner;  2. Owner’s assumption of responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work,  maintenance, and utilities upon Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work;  3. Contractor’s obligations for operations and maintenance during performance and  acceptance testing;  4. Contractor’s access to the Site to complete punch list items; and  5. Procedures for correction of Defective Work during the 1‐year correction period.  15.04 Partial Utilization  A. Owner may use or occupy substantially completed parts of the Work which are specifically  identified in the Contract Documents, or which OPT and Contractor agree constitutes a  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 52  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  separately functioning and usable part of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of the  Work.  Owner must be able to use that part of the Work for its intended purpose without  significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work.   Contractor and OPT are to follow the procedures of Paragraph 15.03 for this part of the  Work.  B. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to  compliance with the requirements of Article 6.  15.05 Final Inspection  A. OPT is to make a final inspection upon notice from Contractor that the entire Work or  portion to be accepted under Paragraph 15.04 is complete.  OAR is to notify Contractor of  Work determined to be incomplete or Defective.  Immediately take corrective measures to  complete the Work and correct Defective Work.  15.06 Final Payment  A. Make Application for Final Payment after completing required corrections identified during  the final inspection and delivering items and documents required by the Contract  Documents.  Provide the following with the final Application for Payment:  1. Consent of Surety to Final Payment acknowledging unsettled disputes; and  2. Certification of Payment of Debts and Claims or Certification of Release of Liens or  furnish receipts or releases in full from Subcontractors and Suppliers.  B. OAR is to either recommend payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner if OPT  is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations under the  Contract Documents have been fulfilled or notify the Contractor of the OPT’s reasons for  not recommending final payment.  C. The Work is complete, subject to surviving obligations, when it is ready for final payment as  established by the OAR’s recommendation of payment of the final Application for Payment  to Owner and the issuance of a Certificate of Final Completion.  D. The Owner is to pay the amount of final payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days  after receipt of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from  the OAR.  15.07 Waiver of Claims  A. The making of final payment does not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights  against Contractor.  Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from:  1. Unsettled Liens or claims for non‐payment;  2. Defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 15.05;  3. Contractor’s failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of specified  special guarantees; or  4. Contractor’s continuing obligations under the Contract Documents.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 53  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  B. Contractor waives claims and rights against Owner by accepting final payment with the  exception of those Claims made in accordance with the provisions of Article 17 and  specifically noted in the Certificate of Final Completion.  15.08 Correction Period  A. Promptly correct Defective Work without cost to Owner for 1 year after the date of  Substantial Completion or longer periods of time prescribed by the terms of the Contract  Documents.  B. Promptly correct damages to the Site or adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use  through construction easements or other agreements.  Promptly correct damages to Work  or the work of others.  Make corrections without cost to Owner.  C. Owner may have the Defective Work and damages described in Paragraphs 15.08.A and  15.08.B corrected if Contractor does not comply with the terms of OAR’s instructions, or in  an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage.  D. Contractor’s obligation to indemnify Owner’s Indemnitees for claims arising out of or  related to the correction of Defective Work are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14.  E. The correction period starts to run from the date when a specific item of equipment or  systems are placed in continuous beneficial use by Owner before Substantial Completion of  Work if so provided in the Specifications or if accepted for beneficial use by the Owner.  F. The correction period is extended for an additional period of 1 year for Defective Work  corrected after the date of Substantial Completion or after the accepted date the  correction period starts to run as described in Paragraph 15.08.E.  This extended correction  period starts to run when Defective Work has been satisfactorily corrected under this  Paragraph 15.08.  G. Contractor’s obligations under this Paragraph 15.08 are in addition to other obligations or  warranties.  The provisions of this Paragraph 15.08 are not a substitute for, or a waiver of,  the provisions of applicable statutes of limitation or repose.  ARTICLE 16 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION  16.01 Owner May Suspend Work  A. Owner may suspend the Work or a portion of the Work for a period of not more than 90  consecutive days, at any time and without cause, by notice to Contractor.  This notice fixes  the date on which Contractor is to resume Work.  Contractor is entitled to adjustments in  the Contract Price and Contract Times directly attributable to this suspension only if efforts  are made to mitigate the cost impacts of the suspension.  Meet with the Owner within 10  days of the notice of suspension to discuss specific strategies to reduce or eliminate the  cost of delays.  Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment no later than 30 days after  the date fixed for resumption of Work.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 54  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause  A. The occurrence of one or more of the following events constitutes a default by Contractor  and justifies termination for cause:  1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract  Documents, including failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials  or equipment;  2. Failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule;  3. Failure of the Contractor to provide a satisfactory replacement Bond or insurance in  the event either is lost or canceled;  4. Failure of Contractor to maintain financial solvency to adequately complete the  Project as indicated by one or more of the following:  a. A petition of bankruptcy is filed by or against Contractor,  b. Contractor is adjudged as bankrupt or insolvent,  c. Contractor or surety makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors,  d. A receiver is appointed for the benefit of Contractor’s creditors, or  e. A receiver is appointed on account of Contractor’s insolvency;  5. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of public bodies having jurisdiction; or  6. Contractor’s repeated disregard of the authority of OPT.  B. Contractor and surety must provide adequate assurance of future performance in  accordance with the Contract Documents that is satisfactory to Owner if Contractor is  believed to be in financial distress due to the existence of one or more of the indicators  listed in Paragraph 16.02.A.4.  Owner may terminate this Contract if Contractor and surety  fail to provide adequate documentation satisfactory to Owner within 10 days of OAR’s  request for this information.  C. Owner may declare Contractor to be in default, give notice to Contractor and surety that  the Contract is terminated, and enforce the rights available to Owner under the  Performance Bond after giving Contractor and surety 10 days’ notice that one or more of  the events identified in Paragraph 16.02.A has occurred.  D. Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate the  materials and equipment stored and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient if  Owner has terminated the Contract for cause.  E. Owner may elect not to proceed with termination of the Contract under this Paragraph  16.02 if Contractor begins to cure the cause for termination within 7 days of receipt of  notice of intent to terminate.  F. Contractor is not entitled to receive further payments until the Work is completed if Owner  proceeds as provided in this Paragraph 16.02.  The amount of the Contract Price remaining  is to be paid to the Contractor if the unpaid balance exceeds the cost to complete the  Work.  This cost to complete the Work may include related claims, costs, losses, damages,  and the fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals  retained by Owner.  Pay the difference to Owner if the cost to complete the Work including  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 55  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  related claims, costs, losses, and damages exceeds the unpaid balance of the Contract  Price.  Claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner are to be reviewed as to their  reasonableness and incorporated in a Change Order by OAR.  Owner is not required to  obtain the lowest price for the Work performed when exercising its rights or remedies  under this paragraph.  G. Termination does not affect the rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or against  surety under the Payment Bond or Performance Bond.  Owner does not release Contractor  from liability by paying or retaining money due Contractor.  16.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience  A. Owner may terminate the Contract without cause after giving 7 days’ notice to Contractor  of the effective date of termination.  Contractor is to be paid for the following if Owner  terminates for convenience:  1. Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective  date of termination;  2. Actual costs sustained prior to the effective date of termination for Work in progress,  plus a fee calculated in accordance with Paragraph 11.04.D.; and  3. Reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to  prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal.  B. No payment is payable to Contractor for loss of anticipated overhead, profits or revenue, or  other economic loss arising out of or resulting from this termination.  16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate  A. Contractor may terminate the Contract and issue a Change Proposal requesting payment  from Owner on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 16.03 after 10 days’ notice to OAR  provided that, through no act or fault of Contractor:  1. The Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days by Owner;  2. OAR fails to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted; or  3. Owner fails to pay Contractor sums determined to be due, other than the final  payment, within 30 days after payment is recommended by OAR; and   4. OPT does not remedy this suspension or failure within 10 days after receipt of the  notice.  B. Contractor may stop Work, without prejudice to other rights or remedies in lieu of  terminating the Contract if OAR has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30  days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed to pay Contractor within 30 days after  payment is recommended by OAR.  The provisions of this paragraph are not intended to  preclude Contractor from submitting a Change Proposal for an adjustment in Contract Price  or Contract Times for damage directly attributable to Contractor’s stopping the Work as  permitted by this paragraph.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 56  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  ARTICLE 17 – FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES  17.01 Methods and Procedures  A. The Owner or Contractor may appeal a Claim, approved or denied in part or in full, by:  1. Electing to invoke the dispute resolution process if one is provided for in the  Supplementary Conditions;  2. Agreeing with the other party to submit the dispute to a dispute resolution process; or  3. Notifying the other party of the intent to submit the dispute to a court of competent  jurisdiction if no dispute resolution process is provided for in the Supplementary  Conditions or mutually agreed to.  ARTICLE 18 – MISCELLANEOUS  18.01 Computation of Times  A. Exclude the first day and include the last day when determining dates for a period of time  referred to in the Contract Documents by days.  The last day of this period is to be omitted  from the determination if it falls on a Saturday, Sunday, or a legal holiday.  B. All references and conditions for a Calendar Day Contract in the Contract Documents apply  for a Fixed Date Contract.  A Fixed Date Contract is one in which the calendar dates for  reaching Substantial Completion and/or final completion are specified in lieu of identifying  the number of days involved.  18.02 Independent Contractor  A. Contractor is to perform its duties under this Contract as an independent contractor.  The  Contractor’s Team and their personnel are not considered to be employees or agents of the  Owner.  Nothing in this Contract is to be interpreted as granting Contractor’s Team the  right or authority to make commitments for the Owner.  This Contract does not constitute  or create a joint venture, partnership, or formal business organization of any kind.  18.03 Cumulative Remedies  A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and  remedies available to the Owner or Contractor by these General Conditions are in addition  to, and are not a limitation of, the rights and remedies which are otherwise imposed or  available by:  1. Laws or Regulations;  2. Special warranties or guarantees; or  3. Other provisions of the Contract Documents.  B. The provisions of this Paragraph 18.03 are as effective as if repeated specifically in the  Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy  to which they apply.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 57  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  18.04 Limitation of Damages  A. Owner’s Indemnitees are not liable to Contractor for claims, costs, losses, or damages  sustained by Contractor’s Team associated with other projects or anticipated projects.  18.05 No Waiver  A. The failure of Owner or Contractor to enforce any provision of this Contract does not  constitute a waiver of that provision, affect the enforceability of that provision, or the  enforceability of the remainder of this Contract.  18.06 Severability  A. If a court of competent jurisdiction renders a part of this Contract invalid or unenforceable,  that part is to be severed and the remainder of this Contract continues in full force.  18.07 Survival of Obligations  A. Representations, indemnifications, warranties, guarantees, and continuing obligations  required by the Contract Documents survive completion and acceptance of the Work or  termination of the Contract.  18.08 No Third Party Beneficiaries  A. Nothing in this Contract can be construed to create rights in any entity other than the  Owner and Contractor.  Neither the Owner nor Contractor intends to create third party  beneficiaries by entering into this Contract.  18.09 Assignment of Contract  A. This Contract may not be assigned in whole or in part by the Contractor without the  consent of the Owner.  18.10 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity  A. The Owner has not waived its sovereign immunity by entering into and performing its  obligations under this Contract.  18.11 Controlling Law  A. This Contract is governed by the laws of the State of Texas without regard to its conflicts of  laws.  Venue for legal proceedings lies exclusively in Nueces County, Texas.  18.12 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue  A. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, Contractor will have at least 90 days to  give notice of a claim for damages as a condition precedent to the right to sue on the  Contract, subject to the contractual Claims and Alternative Dispute Resolution processes  set forth herein.  General Conditions 00 72 00 ‐ 58  Corpus Christi Standards ‐ Regular Projects 11‐25‐2013  18.13 Waiver of Trial by Jury  A. Owner and Contractor agree that they have knowingly waived and do hereby waive the  right to trial by jury and have instead agreed, in the event of any litigation arising out of or  connected to this Contract, to proceed with a trial before the court, unless both parties  subsequently agree otherwise in writing.  18.14 Compliance with Laws  A. Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 as amended (ADA) and Texas  Architectural Barriers Act and all regulations relating to either statute.  B. Comply with all applicable federal, state, and city laws, rules and regulations.  18.15 Enforcement  A. The City Manager or designee and the City Attorney or designee, are fully authorized and  will have the right to enforce all legal rights and obligations under the Contract without  further authorization from City Council.  18.16 Subject to Appropriation  A. Funds are appropriated by the Owner on a yearly basis.  If for any reason funds are not  appropriated in any given year, the Owner may direct suspension or termination of the  Contract.  If the Contractor is terminated or suspended and the Owner requests  remobilization at a later date, the Contract may request payment for  demobilization/remobilization costs.  Such costs shall be addressed through a Change  Order to the Contract.  Under no circumstances may a provision or obligation under this  Contract be interpreted as contrary to this paragraph.  18.17 Contractor’s Guarantee as Additional Remedy  A. The Contractor’s guarantee is a separate and additional remedy available to benefit the  Owner.  Neither the guarantee nor the expiration of the guarantee period will operate to  reduce, release, or relinquish any rights or remedies available to the Owner for any claims  or causes of action against the Contractor or any other individual or entity.  END OF SECTION  Insurance Requirements 00 72 01 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 07-03-2014 00 72 01 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS ARTICLE 1 – INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS 1.01 CONTRACTOR’S INSURANCE AMOUNTS A. Provide the insurance coverage for at least the following amounts unless greater amounts are required by Laws and Regulations: Type of Insurance Minimum Insurance Coverage Commercial General Liability including 1. Commercial Form 2. Premises - Operations 3. Explosions and Collapse Hazard 4. Underground Hazard 5. Products / Completed Operations Hazard 6. Contractual Liability 7. Broad Form Property Damage 8. Independent Contractors 9. Personal & Advertising Injury $1,000,000 Per Occurrence $2,000,000 Aggregate Business Automobile Liability - Owned, Non-Owned, Rented and Leased $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit Workers’ Compensation Statutory Employer’s Liability $500,000/ 500,000/ 500,000 Excess Liability/Umbrella Liability $1,000,000 Per Occurrence Contractor’s Pollution Liability / Environmental Impairment Coverage Not limited to sudden and accidental discharge. To include long-term environmental impact for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants. $2,000,000 Per Claim ☐ Required X Not Required Builder’s Risk (All Perils including Collapse) Equal to Contract Price ☐ Required X Not Required Installation Floater Equal to Contract Price ☐ Required X Not Required Owner’s Protective Liability Equal to Contractor’s liability insurance ☐ Required X Not Required 1.02 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Provide insurance coverages and limits meeting the requirements for insurance in accordance with Article 6 of the General Conditions and this Section. Insurance Requirements 00 72 01 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 07-03-2014 B. Provide endorsements to the policies as outlined in this Section. C. Obtain insurance from companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the State of Texas to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Provide insurance from companies that have an A.M. Best rating of A-VIII or better. D. Furnish copies of policies and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles upon request by OPT or any named insured or additional insured. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this Contract. E. The name and number of the Project must be referenced on the certificate of insurance. F. OPT’s failure to demand such certificates or other evidence of the Contractor’s full compliance with the insurance requirements or failure to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided is not a waiver of the Contractor’s obligation to obtain and maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. G. Notify the Owner if the Contractor fails to purchase or maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not be allowed to perform any Work on the Project until the required insurance policies are in effect. A Certificate of Liability Insurance shall be submitted to the OPT. H. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16 of the General Conditions if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain the required insurance. I. Owner does not represent that the insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract are adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor’s interests. J. The required insurance and insurance limits do not limit the Contractor’s liability under the indemnities granted to Owner’s Indemnitees in the Contract Documents. K. Provide for an endorsement that the “other insurance” clause shall not apply to the OPT where the OPT is an additional insured shown on the policy. Contractor’s insurance is primary and non-contributory with respect to any insurance or self-insurance carried by the OPT for liability arising out of operations under this Contract. L. Include the Owner and list the other members of the OPT and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds on all policies with the exception of the workers’ compensation policy and Contractor’s professional liability policy. 1.03 CONTRACTOR’S INSURANCE A. Purchase and maintain workers’ compensation and employer’s liability insurance for: 1. Claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts. Obtain workers’ compensation coverage through a licensed insurance company in accordance with Texas law and written on a policy and endorsements approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. Provide insurance in amounts to meet all workers’ compensation obligations. Provide an “All Other States” endorsement if Contractor is not domiciled in Texas and policy is not written in accordance with Texas Department of Insurance rules. Insurance Requirements 00 72 01 - 3 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 07-03-2014 2. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor’s employees. 3. United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers’ Compensation Act and Jones Act coverage (if applicable). 4. Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable). B. Purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor. Provide coverage on an occurrence basis, against: 1. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor’s employees; 2. Claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained; 3. By any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor; 4. By any other person for any other reason; and 5. Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including any resulting loss of use. C. Provide Contractor’s commercial general liability policy that is written on a 1996 (or later) ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements: 1. Products and completed operations coverage as required in this Section. Insurance is to remain in effective for 3 years after final payment. Furnish evidence of the continuation of this insurance at final payment and again each year for 3 years after final payment to Owner and each named insured or additional insured. a. Eliminate the exclusion with respect to property under the care, custody, and control of Contractor. Provide and maintain Installation Floater insurance for property under the care, custody, or control of Contractor in lieu of elimination of the exclusion, or if required by this Section. Provide Installation Floater insurance that is a broad form or “All Peril” policy providing coverage for all materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work. 1) Provide coverage under the Contractor’s Installation Floater that includes: a) Faulty or Defective workmanship, materials, maintenance, or construction; b) Cost to remove Defective or damaged Work from the Site or to protect it from loss or damage; c) Cost to cleanup and remove pollutants; d) Coverage for testing and startup; e) Any loss to property while in transit; f) Any loss at the Site; g) Any loss while in storage, both on and off the Site; and Insurance Requirements 00 72 01 - 4 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 07-03-2014 h) Any loss to temporary Project Works if their value is included in the Contract Price. 2) Coverage cannot be contingent on an external cause or risk or limited to property for which the Contractor is legally liable. Provide limits of insurance adequate to cover the value of the installation. Pay any deductible carried under this coverage and assume responsibility for claims on materials, supplies, machinery, fixture, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work while in transit or in storage. 2. Blanket contractual liability coverage for Contractor’s contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.14 of the General Conditions, and all other contractual indemnity obligations of Contractor in the Contract Documents. 3. Broad form property damage coverage. 4. Severability of interest. 5. Underground explosion and collapse coverage. 6. Personal injury coverage. 7. Endorsement CG 2032, “Additional Insured - Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured” or its equivalent. D. Purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance, or use of any motor vehicle. E. Purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer’s liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Provide coverage that is at least as broad as all underlying policies. Provide a policy that provides first-dollar liability coverage as needed. F. Provide Contractor’s commercial general liability and automobile liability policies that: 1. Are written on an occurrence basis; 2. Include the individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds; 3. Include coverage for the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors for each named insured or additional insured; 4. Provide primary coverage for all claims covered by the policies, including those arising from both ongoing and completed operations. G. Purchase and maintain insurance coverage for third-party injury and property damage claims, including clean-up costs that result from Hazardous Environmental Conditions which result from Contractor’s operations and completed operations. Provide Contractor’s pollution liability insurance that includes long-term environmental impacts for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants and is not limited to sudden and accidental discharge. The completed operations coverage is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. The policy must name OPT and any other individuals and entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds. Insurance Requirements 00 72 01 - 5 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 07-03-2014 H. Purchase and maintain applicable professional liability insurance, or have Subcontractors and Suppliers do so, if Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier will provide or furnish professional services under this Contract. I. The policies of insurance required by this Section must: 1. Include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Section or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater. 2. Contain a provision that coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Contractor, Owner, and all named insureds and additional insureds. 3. Remain in effect at all times when Contractor is performing Work or is at the Site to conduct tasks arising from the Contract Documents. 4. Be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims resulting from the Contractor’s performance of the Work and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether performed by Contractor, Subcontractor, Supplier, anyone directly or indirectly employed or retained by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable. J. The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met directly by those policies and may not by rely on excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies to meet the coverage requirement. 1.04 OWNER’S PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE A. Purchase and maintain an Owner’s Protective Liability insurance policy with the Owner as the named insured and other members of the OPT as additional insureds. Provide a policy that will protect the OPT from claims which arise from operations under the Contract Documents. Provide this coverage in the same amounts required for the Contractor’s liability insurance and from the same company that provides the Contractor’s liability insurance. 1.05 PROPERTY INSURANCE A. Purchase and maintain builder’s risk insurance in the amount of the full replacement cost of the Project. This policy is subject to the deductible amounts requirements in this Section or those required by Laws and Regulations and must comply with the requirements of Paragraph 1.06. This insurance shall: 1. Include the OPT, Contractor, and all Subcontractors, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, as named insureds. 2. Be written on a builder’s risk “all risk” policy form that includes insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and insures against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other than that Insurance Requirements 00 72 01 - 6 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 07-03-2014 caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by this Section. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder’s risk, by endorsement or otherwise, this insurance may be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor. 3. Cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property. 4. Cover materials and equipment in transit or stored prior to being incorporated in the Work. 5. Cover Owner-furnished or assigned property. 6. Allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner. 7. Allow for the waiver of the insurer’s subrogation rights as set forth below. 8. Provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered. 9. Not include a co-insurance clause. 10. Include a broad exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any Defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions. 11. Include testing and startup. 12. Be maintained in effect until the Work as a whole is complete, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner and Contractor. B. Evidence of insurance provided must contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each named insured. C. Pay for costs not covered by the policy deductible. D. Notify builder’s risk insurance provider if Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 15.04 of the General Conditions. Maintain the builder’s risk insurance in effect during this Partial Occupancy or Use. E. Contractor may purchase other special insurance to be included in or to supplement the builder’s risk or property insurance policies provided under this Section. F. Contractor, Subcontractors, or employees of the Contractor or a Subcontractor owning property items, such as tools, construction equipment, or other personal property not expressly covered in the insurance required by the Contract Documents are responsible for providing their own insurance. 1.06 WAIVER OF RIGHTS A. Insurance shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of the additional insureds identified in SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. B. All policies purchased in accordance with this Section are to contain provisions to the effect that the insurers have no rights of recovery against OPT, named insureds or additional Insurance Requirements 00 72 01 - 7 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 07-03-2014 insureds in the event of a payment for loss or damage. Contractor and insurers waive all rights against the Owner’s Indemnities for losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by these policies and any other applicable property insurance. None of these waivers extend to the rights Contractor has to the proceeds of insurance as trustee. C. Contractor is responsible for assuring that agreements with Subcontractors contains provisions that the Subcontractor waive all rights against Owner’s Indemnitees, Contractor, named insureds and additional insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder’s risk insurance and other property insurance. 1.07 OWNER’S INSURANCE FOR THE PROJECT A. Owner is not responsible for purchasing and maintaining any insurance to protect the interest of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work. The stated limits of insurance required are minimum only. Determine the limits that are adequate. These limits may be basic policy limits or any combination of basic limits and umbrella limits. In any event, Contractor is fully responsible for all losses arising out of, resulting from, or connected with operations under this Contract whether or not these losses are covered by insurance. The acceptance of evidence of insurance by the OPT, named insureds, or additional insureds does not release the Contractor from compliance with the insurance requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 2 – EVIDENCE OF INSURANCE 2.01 ACCEPTABLE EVIDENCE OF INSURANCE A. Provide evidence of insurance acceptable to the Owner with the executed Contract Documents. Provide the following as evidence of insurance: 1. Certificates of Insurance on an acceptable form; 2. Riders or endorsements to policies; and 3. Policy limits and deductibles. B. Provide a list of “Additional Insureds” for each policy. C. Provide evidence that waivers of subrogation are provided on all applicable policies. D. Provide evidence of requirements for 30 days’ notice before cancellation or any material change in the policy’s terms and conditions, limits of coverage, or change in deductible amount. 2.02 CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE A. Submit Certificates of Insurance meeting the following requirements: 1. Form has been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101; or 2. Form is a standard form deemed approved by the Department under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101. Insurance Requirements 00 72 01 - 8 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 07-03-2014 3. No requirements of this Contract may be interpreted as requiring the issuance of a certificate of insurance on a certificate of insurance form that has not first been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. B. Include the name of the Project in the description of operations box on the certificate of insurance. 2.03 INSURANCE POLICIES A. Provide a copy of insurance policies, declaration pages and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles if requested by the Owner. B. Owner may require the deletion, revision, or modification of particular policy terms, conditions, limitations, or exclusions (except where policy provisions are established by Laws or Regulations binding upon either of the parties hereto or the underwriter of any such policies). Comply with these requests and submit a copy of the replacement certificate of insurance to Owner at the address provided below within 10 days of the requested change. 2.04 CONTINUING EVIDENCE OF COVERAGE A. Provide updated, revised, or new evidence of insurance in accordance this Section prior to the expiration of existing policies. B. Provide evidence of continuation of insurance coverage at final payment and for the following 3 years. 2.05 NOTICES REGARDING INSURANCE A. Submit notices regarding insurance are to be sent to the Owner at the following address: City of Corpus Christi – Engineering Attn: Construction Contract Admin. P.O. Box 9277 Corpus Christi, TX 78469-9277 B. Submit questions regarding insurance requirements to the Construction Contract Administrator by calling 361-826-3530. ARTICLE 3 – TEXAS WORKERS’ COMPENSATION INSURANCE REQUIRED NOTICE 3.01 WORKERS’ COMPENSATION INSURANCE COVERAGE A. Definitions: 1. Certificate of coverage (“certificate”) - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC- 81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers’ compensation insurance coverage for the person’s or entity’s employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the Project. Insurance Requirements 00 72 01 - 9 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 07-03-2014 2. Duration of the Project - includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the Contractor’s/person’s Work on the Project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. 3. Persons providing services on the Project (“Subcontractor” in §406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the Project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the Project. “Services” include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. “Services” does not include activities unrelated to the Project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the Contractor providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project. C. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor’s current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. E. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: 1. A certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and 2. No later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The Contractor shall post on each Project Site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers’ Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. Insurance Requirements 00 72 01 - 10 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE REV 07-03-2014 I. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: 1. Provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project; 2. Provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project; 3. Provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 4. Obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: a. A certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning Work on the Project; and b. A new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 5. Retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; 6. Notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and 7. Contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers’ compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission’s Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The Contractor’s failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the Contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. END OF SECTION Wage Rate Requirements 00 72 02 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 00 72 02 WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS ARTICLE 1 – PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS 1.01 PAYMENT OF PREVAILING WAGE RATES A. Contractor and any Subcontractors employed on this Project shall pay not less than the rates established by the Owner as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2258. 1.02 RECORDS A. In accordance with Tex. Gov’t Code §2258.024, the Contractor and its Subcontractors, if any, shall keep a record showing: 1. The name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor or Subcontractor in the construction of the Work; and 2. The actual per diem wages paid to each worker. B. The record shall be open at all reasonable hours to inspection by the officers and agents of the Owner. 1.03 LIABILITY; PENALTY; CRIMINAL OFFENSE A. Tex. Gov’t Code §2258.003 – Liability: An officer, agent, or employee of the Owner is not liable in a civil action for any act or omission implementing or enforcing Chapter 2258 unless the action was made in bad faith. B. Tex. Gov’t Code §2258.053(b) – Penalty: Any Contractor or Subcontractor who violates the requirements of Chapter 2258, shall pay to the Owner, on whose behalf the Contract is made, $60 for each worker employed or each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the Contract. C. Tex. Gov’t Code §2258.058 – Criminal Offense: 1. An officer, agent, or representative of the Owner commits an offense if the person willfully violates or does not comply with a provision of Chapter 2258. 2. Any Contractor or Subcontractor, or an agent or representative of the Contractor or Subcontractor, commits an offense if the person violates Tex. Gov’t Code §2258.024. 3. An offense is punishable by: a. A fine not to exceed $500; b. Confinement in jail for a term not to exceed 6 months; or c. Both a fine and confinement. 1.04 PREVAILING WAGE RATES A. The minimum rates for various labor classifications as established by the Owner are shown below: Wage Rate Requirements 00 72 02 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 Wage Determination (WD) No Construction Type Project Type TX-51 Building Building Construction Projects (does not include residential construction consisting of single family homes and apartments up to and including 4 stories) END OF SECTION General Decision Number: TX140051 08/15/2014 TX51 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20130051 State: Texas Construction Type: Building Counties: Nueces and San Patricio Counties in Texas. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include residential construction consisting of single family homes and apartments up to and including 4 stories) Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/03/2014 1 08/15/2014 BRTX0001-005 05/01/2011 Rates Fringes BRICKLAYER.......................$ 20.90 7.18 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ELEC0278-001 08/16/2013 Rates Fringes ELECTRICIAN......................$ 23.70 3%+6.60 ---------------------------------------------------------------- * IRON0066-002 12/01/2013 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER.......................$ 19.80 5.95 ---------------------------------------------------------------- PAIN0130-001 07/01/2009 Rates Fringes PAINTER..........................$ 17.35 6.35 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SUTX1987-002 03/01/1987 Rates Fringes CARPENTER........................$ 9.96 Cement Mason/Finisher............$ 12.50 LABORER: Mason Tender...........$ 7.25 LABORER..........................$ 7.25 Plumbers and Pipefitters (Including HVAC).................$ 10.05 Power equipment operators: Backhoe.....................$ 7.84 ROOFER...........................$ 9.20 TRUCK DRIVER.....................$ 7.50 ---------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ================================================================ Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). ---------------------------------------------------------------- The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particular rate is union or non-union. Union Identifiers An identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than "SU" denotes that the union classification and rate have found to be prevailing for that classification. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2011. The first four letters , PLUM, indicate the international union and the four-digit number, 0198, that follows indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable , i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. The date, 07/01/2011, following these characters is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate/collective bargaining agreement which would be July 1, 2011 in the above example. Union prevailing wage rates will be updated to reflect any changes in the collective bargaining agreements governing the rates. 0000/9999: weighted union wage rates will be published annually each January. Non-Union Identifiers Classifications listed under an "SU" identifier were derived from survey data by computing average rates and are not union rates; however, the data used in computing these rates may include both union and non-union data. Example: SULA2004-007 5/13/2010. SU indicates the rates are not union majority rates, LA indicates the State of Louisiana; 2004 is the year of the survey; and 007 is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. A 1993 or later date, 5/13/2010, indicates the classifications and rates under that identifier were issued as a General Wage Determination on that date. Survey wage rates will remain in effect and will not change until a new survey is conducted. ---------------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ================================================================ END OF GENERAL DECISION Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy 00 72 03 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 00 72 03 MINORITY / MBE / DBE PARTICIPATION POLICY ARTICLE 1 – PARTICIPATION POLICY 1.01 POLICY A. It is the policy of the City of Corpus Christi that maximum opportunity is afforded minorities, women, and Minority Business Enterprises (MBE) to participate in the performance of contracts awarded by the City of Corpus Christi in support of Equal Employment Opportunity goals and objectives of the Affirmative Action Policy Statement of the City dated October 1989, and any amendments thereto. In accordance with such policy, the City has established goals, as stated herein, both for minority and female participation by trade and for Minority Business Enterprise. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Prime Contractor: Any person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture as herein provided which has been awarded a City contract. B. Subcontractor: Any named person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture as herein identified as providing work, labor, services, supplies, equipment, materials, or any combination of the foregoing under contract with a prime contractor on a City contract. C. Minority Business Enterprise: A business enterprise that is owned and controlled by one or more minority person(s). Minority person(s) must collectively own, operate and/or actively manage, and share in payments from such an enterprise in the manner hereinafter set forth: 1. Owned: a. For a sole proprietorship to be deemed a minority business enterprise, it must be owned by a minority person. b. For an enterprise doing business as a partnership, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the partnership property must be owned by one or more minority person(s). c. For an enterprise doing business as a corporation, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the corporate shares must be owned by one or more minority person(s). 2. Controlled: a. The primary power, direct or indirect, to manage a business enterprise rests with a minority person(s). 3. Share in Payments: a. Minority partners, proprietors, or stockholders of the business enterprise, must be entitled to receive 51 percent or more of the total profits, bonuses, dividends, interest payments, commissions, consulting fees, rents, procurement, and subcontract payments, and any other monetary distribution paid by the business enterprise. Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy 00 72 03 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 D. Minority: Minority persons include Blacks, Mexican-Americans and other persons of Hispanic origin, American Indians, Alaskan Natives, and Asians or Pacific Islanders. For the purposes of this policy, women are also considered as minorities. E. Female Owned Business Enterprise: A sole proprietorship that is owned and controlled by a woman, a partnership at least 51 percent of whose assets or partnership interests are owned by one or more women, or a corporation at least 51 percent of whose assets or interests in the corporate shares are owned by one or more women. F. Joint Venture: A joint venture means an association of two or more persons, partnerships, corporations, or any combination thereof, founded to carry on a single business activity which is limited in scope and direction. The degree to which a joint venture may satisfy the stated MBE goal cannot exceed the proportionate interest of the MBE as a member of the joint venture in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. For example, a joint venture which is to perform 50 percent of the Work itself and in which a minority joint venture partner has a 50 percent interest, shall be deemed equivalent to having minority participation in 25 percent of the Work. Minority members of the joint venture must have financial, managerial, or technical skills in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. 1.03 GOALS A. The goals for participation by minorities and Minority Business Enterprises expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor’s aggregate work force on all construction Work for the Contract award shall be as specified in SECTION 00 11 16 INVITATION TO BID. B. These goals are applicable to all the construction work (regardless of federal participation) performed in the Contract, including approved Change Orders. The hours of minority employment must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the Contract and in each trade. The transfer of minority employees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor’s percentage is prohibited. 1.04 COMPLIANCE A. Upon completion of the Project, a final breakdown of MBE participation, substantiated by copies of paid invoices, shall be submitted by the Contractor to the City Engineer. B. Make bi-weekly payroll submittals to the City Engineer. The Contractor is to indicate the percent of minority and female participation, by trade, which has been utilized on the Project. Along with the request for final payment on the Project, the Contractor will indicate, in writing, the overall participation in these areas which have been achieved. The City Engineer may withhold monthly or final payments to the Contractor for failure to submit bi-weekly payrolls in a timely fashion or to submit overall participation information as required. END OF SECTION Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS and other provisions of the Contract Documents. All provisions not amended or supplemented in these Supplementary Conditions remain in effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below. ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY SC-1.01 DEFINED TERMS A. Delete the last sentence in Paragraph 1.01.A.26 and replace with the following: “Designers are Licensed Professional Engineers, Registered Architects, or Registered Landscape Architects qualified to practice their profession in the State of Texas.” B. The members of the OPT as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.41 consists of the following organizations and are to be named as an additional insured on all insurance policies, except workers compensation and Contractor’s professional liability insurance: City of Corpus Christi, Texas CLK Architects & Associates C. Paragraph 1.01.A.54 “Substantial Completion” is more specifically defined for this Project as: 1. The following items are fully functional and suitable for operation in accordance with the Contract Documents: a. All tennis courts are accessible and playable. b. All structures and remodeling has been completed. c. All accepted alternates have been completed. 2. Only the following items not yet complete in accordance with the Contract Documents: a. Punch list items such as touch up painting and minor miscellaneous items. ARTICLE 4 – COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK SC-4.04 DELAYS IN CONTRACTOR’S PROGRESS A. The allocation for delays in the Contractor’s progress for rain days as set forth in General Conditions Paragraph 4.04.D are to be determined as follows: 1. Include rain days in developing the schedule for construction. Schedule construction so that the Work will be completed within the Contract Times assuming that these rain days will occur. Incorporate residual impacts following rain days such as limited access to and within the Site, inability to work due to wet or muddy Site conditions, delays in delivery of equipment and materials, and other impacts related to rain days when Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 developing the schedule for construction. Include all costs associated with these rain days and residual impacts in the Contract Price. 2. A rain day is defined as any day in which the amount of rain measured by the National Weather Services at the Power Street Stormwater Pump Station is 0.50 inch or greater. Records indicate the following average number of rain days for each month: Month Day Month Days January 3 July 3 February 3 August 4 March 2 September 7 April 3 October 4 May 4 November 3 June 4 December 3 3. A total of 29 rain days have been set for this Project. An extension of time due to rain days will be considered only after 29 rain days have been exceeded in a calendar year and the OAR has determined that a detrimental impact to the construction schedule resulted from the excessive rainfall. Rain days are to be incorporated into the schedule and unused rain days will be considered float time which may be consumed by the Owner or Contractor in delay claims. ARTICLE 5 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS SC-5.03 SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.03.A which describe subsurface and physical conditions. 1. Geotechnical Reports include the following: a. Subsurface Investigation, Laboratory Testing Program and Foundation Recommendations for the proposed Tennis Center Repairs and Upgrades – City of Corpus Christi Project No. E12118 – HEB Tennis Complex, 1520 Shely Street, Corpus Christi, Texas – August 26, 2013. Refer to geotechnical report attached at the end of these specifications (Appendix 1). SC-5.06 HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AT SITE A. No reports of explorations or tests for Hazardous Environmental Conditions at or contiguous to the Site are known to Owner.” ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES SC-7.04 CONCERNING SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS A. Add the following sentence to the end of Paragraph 7.04.A: Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 3 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 “The Contractor must perform at least 50 percent of the Work, measured as a percentage of the Contract Price, using its own employees." END OF SECTION Summary of Work 01 11 00 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Construct Work as described in the Contract Documents. 1. Provide the materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make the Project completely and fully useable. 2. Provide the labor, equipment, tools, and consumable supplies required for a complete Project. 3. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OAR. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work is described in general, non-inclusive terms as: PART A HEB • Demolition of existing stadium court and seating areas. • Addition of post tensioned concrete caps over existing courts 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 17 and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications. • Addition of three new courts 20, 21 and 22 on suspended structural slab and all related work as outlined on plans and specifications including all electrical and lighting. • Demolition of existing backboard area. • Addition of padding to light poles @ courts 9, 10 and 12. • Addition of chain link cut corners at indicated on site drawings and details. • Modifications to chain link fencing at entrance to HEB facility. Fencing includes replacement of low fencing with high fencing at court no 1. • Addition of chain link fencing for access control to facility. • Include all chain link fencing related work. Al Kruse • Three courts ( 5, 6 and 7) to receive new asphalt overlay. • Seven courts (1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 9, and 10) to be resurfaced. • Windscreens to be replaced at all courts. • Court 10 Backboard relocated to court 9. • Addition of padding to light poles at courts 1, 4 and 7. • Include all chain link fencing related work. Part A Additive Alternatives • Additive Alternative 1 – HEB Tennis Center – Addition of two (2) 36’ tennis courts on Summary of Work 01 11 00 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 suspended concrete slab include all surfacing, lighting, netting and fencing as noted on plans and as specified. • Additive Alternative 6 – HEB Tennis Center – Remove four existing interior light poles on Courts 9 and 10. Replace four existing corner light poles with new light poles & Lights to illuminate courts 9, 10 and 11. PART B HEB • Demolition of viewing platform and Canopy between Courts 5-8 & 9-12 which includes demolition of seating areas, stairs, upper columns supporting roof canopy and the roof canopy to the top of the structural steel columns (existing lower columns to remain). • Replacing existing viewing platform with new accessible viewing platform inclusive of installation of a new LULA lift. • Various site concrete paving/sidewalk upgrades. • Converting old locker room building to new pro shop and all related work as shown on plans. • Architectural, MEP and Structural repairs to existing Lounge Building. Al Kruse • Accessible upgrades to existing sidewalks. • New accessible ramp at main entrance. • Renovation to existing Pro Shop providing accessible restrooms and new finishes including paint, new flooring, and new exterior doors. Part B Additive Alternatives • Additive Alternative 2 – Al Kruse Tennis Center – Mill top 2 inches of existing asphalt parking lot, repair pot holes and overlay 2 inches of new asphalt paving including all stripping, ADA signage and wheel stops. • Additive Alternative 3 – HEB Tennis Center – Complete Drip Irrigation System as shown on irrigation plans and specifications. • Additive Alternative 4 – HEB Tennis Center – Flatwork, electrical rough-in and structural piers for future shade structure. • Additive Alternative 5 – HEB Tennis Center – Pre-Fabricated maintenance storage unit “20 ft X 30 ft Morgan Building or equal” and adjacent flatwork, including electrical to storage building and windstorm anchoring. Summary of Work 01 11 00 - 3 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 1.03 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The following items of work are not included in this Contract, but may impact construction scheduling and completion: 1. None. B. In the case of a disagreement between the above list and those specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Contractor is to base his Proposal on the most expensive listing. C. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction and testing of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. 1.04 WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner plans to perform the following items of work which are not included in this Contract, but may impact the construction scheduling and completion: 1. None. B. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. C. Owner will provide normal operation and maintenance of the existing facilities during construction, unless otherwise stated. 1.05 CONSTRUCTION OF UTILITIES A. Pay for temporary power, including but not limited to construction cost, meter connection fees, and permits. 1.06 USE PRIOR TO FINAL COMPLETION A. Owner has the right to use or operate any portion of the Project that is ready for use after notifying the Contractor of its intent to do so. B. The execution of Bonds is understood to indicate the consent of the surety to these provisions for use of the Project. C. Provide an endorsement from the insurance carrier permitting use of Project during the remaining period of construction. D. Conduct operations to insure the least inconvenience to the Owner and general public. Summary of Work 01 11 00 - 4 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Alternates: 1. This Section describes each alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the Work when this alternate is made a part of the Work in the Agreement. 2. Drawings and Specifications will outline the extent of Work to be included in the alternate Contract Price. 3. Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work as required to properly integrate the Work under each alternate, and provide a complete and functional Project as required by the Contract Documents. 4. Bids for alternates may be accepted or rejected at the option of the Owner. 5. Owner may incorporate these alternates in the Contract when executed, or may issue a Change Order to incorporate these alternates within 120 days at the prices offered in the Bid, unless noted otherwise. A Request for a Change Proposal may be issued after 120 days or other designated time period to negotiate a new price for incorporating the Work into the Project. B. Allowances: 1. Include specified allowance amount in the Contract Price. 2. The amount of each allowance includes: a. The cost of the product to the Contractor less any applicable trade discounts. b. Delivery to the Site. c. Applicable taxes. 3. Include in the Contract Price all costs for: a. Handling at the Site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage per SECTION 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION. b. Cost for labor and equipment for installation and finishing. c. Cost for related products not specifically listed in the allowance required for installation, including consumable supplies and materials. d. All overhead, profit, and related costs. 4. Assist Owner in the selection of products. a. Identify qualified Suppliers. b. Obtain bids from qualified Suppliers. c. Present available alternates to the Owner through the OAR. Notify OAR of: 1) Any objections to a particular Supplier or product. Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 2) Effect on the Construction Schedule anticipated by the selection of each option. 3) Cost of each option. 5. Upon selection of the product: a. Purchase and install the product. b. Contractor’s responsibilities for products shall be the same as for products selected by the Contractor. 6. Submit a Change Proposal per SECTION 01 31 14 CHANGE MANAGEMENT to adjust Contract Price if the net cost of the product is more or less than the specified amount. a. Adjust the unit cost applied to the quantities installed per the method of payment described in SECTION 01 29 00 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PROCEDURES for products specified as Unit Price Work. b. Do not perform Work until selection of alternate has been approved by the Owner. c. Provide actual invoices for the materials. 1.02 DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. Provide documents for materials furnished as part of the alternate in accordance with SECTION 01 33 00 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES A. Add Alternate No. 1 – HEB Tennis Center 1. Addition of two (2) 36’ tennis courts on suspended concrete slab. Include all fencing, acrylic surfacing, gates, lighting, netting & sidewalks associated with the addition of these courts. Approximate area for these courts is 3,738 SF (63’ x 59’-4”). B. Add Alternate No. 2 – Al Kruse Tennis Center 1. Mill 2” existing asphalt on existing parking lot & overlay with new 2” asphalt paving as specified. Include in proposal repair of pot holes (TXdot standards) and include all necessary stripping, ADA signs and wheels stops. Paving area is approximately 8,338 SF. C. Add Alternate No. 3 – HEB Tennis Center 1. Drip irrigation refer to landscaping sheets 002 thru 006. Include all work associated with the scope shown on landscaping drawings and specifications. D. Add Alternate No. 4 – HEB Tennis Center 1. Flatwork and structural piers for future shade structure. Provide all work associated with the installation of the structural piers, electrical and flatwork. Area to be 5,399 SF (44’-6” x 121’-4”) as shown on plans. Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10 - 3 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 E. Add Alternate No. 5 – HEB Tennis Center 1. Pre-fabricated maintenance storage unit “Morgan Building or equal” 20ft x 30ft. Alternate to also include electrical, pad and anchorage. Flat work pad area for this alternate is 2,210 SF (74’-6” x 29’-8”) refer to plans for additional details. F. Add Alternate No. 6 – HEB Tennis Center 1. Courts 9 & 10, remove four existing interior light poles. Replace four existing corner light poles with new light poles & lights to illuminate courts 9, 10 &11. Include all work necessary for this scope. 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF ALLOWANCES A. None. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Application for Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 01 29 00 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Submit Applications for Payment for completed Work and for materials and equipment in accordance with the General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, the Agreement, and this Section. The Contract Price is to include costs for: 1. Providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; 2. Installing Owner furnished equipment and materials; 3. Providing Work for Alternates and Allowances; 4. Commissioning, start-up, training and initial maintenance and operation; 5. Acceptance testing in manufacturer’s facilities or on Site; 6. All home office overhead costs and expenses, including profit made directly or indirectly for the Project; 7. Project management, Contract administration, field office, and field operations staff, including supervision, clerical support, and technology system support; 8. Professional services including design fees, legal fees, and other professional services; 9. Bonds and insurance; 10. Permits, licenses, patent fees, and royalties; 11. Taxes; 12. Providing all documents and Samples required by the Contract Documents; 13. Facilities and equipment at the Site including: a. Field offices, office furnishings, and all related office supplies, software, and equipment, b. Storage facilities for Contractor’s use, storage facilities for stored materials and equipment, including spare parts storage, c. Shops, physical plant, construction equipment, small tools, vehicles, technology and telecommunications equipment, d. Safety equipment and facilities to provide safe access and working conditions for workers and for others working at the Site, e. Temporary facilities for power and communications, f. Potable water and sanitation facilities, and g. Mobilization and demobilization for all of these facilities and equipment; 14. Products, materials, and equipment stored at the Site or other suitable location; 15. Products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project; Application for Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 16. Temporary facilities for managing water, including facilities for pumping, storage, and treatment as required for construction and protection of the environment; 17. Temporary facilities for managing environment conditions and Constituents of Concern; 18. Temporary facilities such as sheeting, shoring, bracing, formwork, embankments, storage facilities, working areas, and other facilities required for construction of the Project; 19. Temporary and permanent facilities for protection of all overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 20. Temporary and permanent facilities for removal, relocation, or replacement of any overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 21. Products, materials, and equipment consumed during the construction of the Project; 22. Contractor labor and supervision to complete the Project, including that provided through Subcontractors or Suppliers; 23. Correcting Defective Work during the Contract Times, during the Correction Period, or as required to meet any warranty provision of the Contract Documents; 24. Risk associated with weather and environmental conditions, start-up, and initial operation of facilities including equipment, processes, and systems; 25. Contractor’s safety programs, including management, administration, and training; 26. Maintenance of facilities, including equipment, processes, and systems until operation is transferred to Owner; 27. Providing warranties, extended or special warranties, or extended service agreements; 28. Cleanup and disposal of any and all surplus materials; and 29. Demobilization of all physical, temporary facilities not incorporated into the Project. B. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price. C. Provide written approval of the surety company providing Bonds for the Schedule of Values, Application for Payment form, and method of payment prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. Submit approval using the Consent of Surety Company to Payment Procedures form provided. Payment will not be made without this approval. D. OAR may withhold processing Applications for Payment if any of the following processes or documentation are not up to date: 1. Progress Schedule per SECTION 01 33 04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE. 2. Project photographs per SECTION 01 33 05 VIDEO AND PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION. 3. Record Documents per SECTION 01 31 13 PROJECT COORDINATION. 4. Documentation required to comply with Owner’s Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy. Application for Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 3 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit a detailed Schedule of Values for the Work at least 10 days prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. B. Submit the Schedule of Values in the form for Attachment A - Tabulation of Earned Value of Original Contract Performed. C. Do not submit an Application for Payment until the Schedule of Values has been approved by the OAR. D. Subdivide each line item in the Schedule of Values into two payment components. The first component is the direct cost for products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project. The second component is all other cost associated with the item in the Agreement. The sum of the two components must equal the value of the line item in the Schedule of Values. E. Where a percentage of the line value is allowed for a specified stage of completion, show the value for each stage of completion as a component of that line item cost. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF ANTICIPATED PAYMENTS AND EARNED VALUE A. Submit a schedule of the anticipated Application for Payments showing the application numbers, submission dates, and the anticipated amount to be requested. Incorporate retainage into the development of this schedule of anticipated payments. B. Submit a tabulation of the anticipated Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to create a graphic (curve) representation of the anticipated progress on the Project each month. Adjust this table and curve to incorporate Modifications. Use this curve to compare actual progress on the Project each month by comparing the anticipated cumulative Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to the actual Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials each month. Use the comparison of values to determine performance on budget and schedule. C. Update the Schedule of Payments as necessary to provide a reasonably accurate indication of the funds required to make payments each month to the Contractor for Work performed. 1.04 BASIS FOR PAYMENTS A. Lump Sum Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the earned value of Work completed during the payment period expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each line item during the payment period per the Contract Documents. 2. Payment amount is the value of Work completed per the Contract Documents multiplied by the percentage of Work completed. 3. Payment for lump sum items divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value per Paragraph 1.02.E.3 will be made for the measured number of units. 4. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 1.05. Application for Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 4 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 1.05 PAYMENT FOR STORED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT. A. Store materials and equipment properly at the Site. 1. Payment will be made for the invoice amount less the specified retainage. 2. Payment for materials and equipment show in the Application for Payment on Attachment A or Attachment B - Tabulation of Work on Approved Contract Modifications will be made for the invoice amount, up to the value show in the Schedule of Values for that line item. Costs for material and equipment in excess of the value shown in the Schedule of Values may not be added to other line items. 3. Payment will be made in full for the value shown in the line item for products and materials if invoices for materials and equipment are less than the amount shown in the line item and it can be demonstrated that no additional materials or equipment are required to complete Work described in that item. 4. Provide invoices at the time materials are included on Attachment D - Tabulation of Values for Materials and Equipment. Include invoice numbers on Attachment D so that a comparison can be made between invoices and amounts included on Attachment D. B. Provide a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of Liens. Provide documentation of payment for materials and equipment with the next Application for Payment. Adjust payment to the amount actually paid if this differs from the invoice amount. Remove items from the tabulation of materials and equipment if this documentation is not provided. Payment will not be made for material and equipment without documentation of payment. C. Provide evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner’s interest. D. The Work covered by progress payments becomes the property of the Owner at the time of payment. The Contractor’s obligations with regard to proper care and maintenance, insurance, and other requirements are not changed by this transfer of ownership until accepted in accordance with the General Conditions. E. Payment for materials and equipment does not constitute acceptance of the product. 1.06 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES A. Include amounts for specified Alternate Work in the Agreement in accordance with SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES. B. Include amounts for specified Allowances for Work in the Agreement in accordance with SECTION 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES. 1.07 RETAINAGE AND SET-OFFS A. Retainage will be withheld from each Application for Payment per the Agreement. Retainage will be released per the General Conditions. B. Reduce payments for set-offs per the General Conditions. Include Attachment C – Tabulation of Set-Offs in the Application for Payment. Application for Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 5 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 1.08 PROCEDURES FOR SUBMITTING AN APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Submit a draft Application for Payment to the OAR each month at least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for Owner to make progress payments. Do not submit Applications for Payment more often than monthly. Review the draft Application for Payment with the OAR to determine concurrence with: 1. The earned value for each lump sum item including the value of properly stored and documented materials and equipment for each item in the original Contract. 2. The quantity of Work completed for each unit price item. 3. Set-offs included in the Application for Payment. 4. Values requested for materials and equipment consistent with invoices for materials and equipment. B. Submit Applications for Payment monthly through the OAR after agreement has been reached on the draft Application for Payment. 1. Number each application sequentially and include the dates for the application period. 2. Show the total amounts for earned value of original Contract performed, earned value for Work on approved Contract Amendments and Change Orders, retainage, and set- offs. Show total amounts that correspond to totals indicated on the attached tabulation for each. 3. Include Attachment A to show the earned value on each line item in the Schedule of Values for Work shown in the original Contract. 4. Include Attachment B to show the earned value on line item for approved Change Orders. Add items to Attachment B as Change Orders are approved. Change Orders must be approved before payment can be made on Change Order items. 5. Include Attachment C to document set-offs required per the Contract Documents. Show each set-off as it is applied. Show a corresponding line item to reduce the Set off amount if a payment held by a set-off is released for payment. 6. Include Attachment D to allow tracking of invoices used to support amounts requested as materials in Attachments A and B. Enter materials to show the amount of the invoice assigned to each item in Attachment A or B if an invoice includes materials used on several line items. 7. Complete the certification stating that all Work, including materials and equipment, covered by this Application for Payment have been completed or delivered and stored in accordance with the Contract Documents, that all amounts have been paid for Work, materials, and equipment for which previous payments have been made by the Owner, and that the current payment amount shown in this Application for Payment is now due. C. Submit attachments in Portable Document Format (PDF): 1. Generate attachments to the Application for Payment using the Excel spreadsheet provided. Application for Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 6 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 2. Submit PDF documents with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. 1.09 RESPONSIBILITY OF OWNER’S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE A. OAR will review draft Application for Payment with Contractor to reach an agreement on the values that will be recommended for payment by the OAR. B. OAR will review Application for Payment submitted by Contractor to determine that the Application for Payment has been properly submitted and is in accordance with the agreed to draft Application for Payment. C. OAR is to either recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner or notify the Contractor of the OPT’s reasons for not recommending payment. Contractor may make necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment if it is not recommended within 10 days after receipt of the notice. OAR will review resubmitted Application for Payment and reject or recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner as appropriate. D. OAR’s recommendation of the Application for Payment constitutes a representation by OPT that based on their experience and the information available: 1. The Work has progressed to the point indicated; 2. The quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents; and 3. Requirements prerequisite to payment have been met. E. This representation is subject to: 1. Further evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole; 2. The results of subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents; or 3. Any other qualifications stated in the recommendation. F. OPT does not represent by recommending payment: 1. Inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work; or 2. Other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to additional compensation or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor may or may not exist. G. Neither OPT’s review of Contractor’s Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor OAR’s recommendation of payment imposes responsibility on OPT: 1. To supervise, direct, or control the Work; 2. For the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or safety precautions and programs; 3. For Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor’s performance of the Work; Application for Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 7 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 4. To make examinations to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the monies paid on account of the Contract Price; or 5. To determine that title to the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of Liens. 1.10 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Include adjustments to the Contract Price in the final Application for Payment for: 1. Approved Change Orders and Contract Amendments, 2. Allowances not previously adjusted by Change Order, 3. Deductions for Defective Work that has been accepted by the Owner, 4. Penalties and bonuses, 5. Deductions for liquidated damages, 6. Deduction for all final set-offs, and 7. Other adjustments if needed. B. OAR will prepare a final Change Order reflecting the approved adjustments to the Contract Price which have not been covered by previously approved Change Orders and if necessary reconcile estimate unit price quantities with actual quantities. C. Submit the final Application for Payment per the General Conditions, including the final Change Order. Provide the following with the Final Application for Payment: 1. Evidence of payment or release of liens on the forms provided and as required by the General Conditions. 2. Consent from Surety to Final Payment. 1.11 PAYMENT BY OWNER A. Owner is to pay the amount recommended for monthly payments within 30 days after receipt of the OAR’s recommended Application for Payment. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON LUMP SUM ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for lump sum payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that lump sum item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in SECTION 01 29 00 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PROCEDURES for each lump sum item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the lump sum price. B. Measurement for progress payments will be made on the basis of the earned value for each item shown as a percentage of the cost for the lump sum item as described in SECTION 01 29 00 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PROCEDURES. Payment at Final Completion will be equal to the total lump sum amount for that item. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON UNIT PRICE ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in unit price payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that unit price item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in SECTION 01 29 00 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PROCEDURES for each unit price item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the unit price. B. Measurement for payments will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. Measurement will be as indicated for each unit price item. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT FOR BASE BID ITEMS Bid Item A: 1. Include the following costs in this Bid item: a. Bonds and insurance; b. Transportation and setup for equipment; c. Transportation and/or erection of all field offices, sheds, and storage facilities; d. Salaries for preparation of documents required before the first Application for Payment; e. Salaries for field personnel assigned to the Project related to the mobilization of the Project; and Mobilization may not exceed 5 percent of the total Contract Price. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 2. Measuring for payment is on a lump sum basis to include all cost associated to build facility improvements as out lined on plans and specifications. Payment for mobilization will be based on the earned value of Work completed. Bid Item B: 1. Include the following costs in this Bid item: a. Bonds and insurance; b. Transportation and setup for equipment; c. Transportation and/or erection of all field offices, sheds, and storage facilities; d. Salaries for preparation of documents required before the first Application for Payment; e. Salaries for field personnel assigned to the Project related to the mobilization of the Project; and Mobilization may not exceed 5 percent of the total Contract Price. 2. Measuring for payment is on a lump sum basis to include all cost associated to build facility improvements as out lined on plans and specifications. Payment for mobilization will be based on the earned value of Work completed. 1.04 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT FOR ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES Additive Alternate No. 1 – HEB Tennis Center: Addition of two (2) 36’ tennis courts on suspended concrete slab include all surfacing, lighting, netting, & fencing as noted on plans and as specified. Measuring for payment is on a lump sum basis. Additive Alternate No. 2 – Al Kruse Tennis Center: Mill top 2” of existing asphalt parking lot, repair pot holes & overlay 2” of new asphalt paving include all stripping and ADA signage and wheel stops. Measuring for payment is on a lump sum basis. Additive Alternate No. 3 – HEB Tennis Center: Complete Drip Irrigation System as shown on irrigation plans and specifications. Measuring for payment is on a lump sum basis. Additive Alternate No. 4 – HEB Tennis Center: Flatwork, electrical rough-in and structural piers for future shade structure. Measuring for payment is on a lump sum basis. Additive Alternate No. 5 – HEB Tennis Center: Pre-fabricated maintenance storage unit “20ft x 30ft Morgan Building or equal” and adjacent flatwork, include electrical to storage building and windstorm anchoring. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01 - 3 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 Measuring for payment is on a lump sum basis. Additive Alternate No. 6 – HEB Tennis Center: Courts 9 & 10, remove four existing interior light poles. Replace four existing corner light poles with new light poles & lights to illuminate courts 9, 10 & 11. Measuring for payment is on a lump sum basis. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish resources required to complete the Project with an acceptable standard of quality within the Contract Times. B. Construct Project in accordance with current safety practices. C. Manage Site to allow access to Site and control construction operations. D. Construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. E. Provide temporary controls for pollutions, management of water and management of excess earth as required in SECTION 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Employ competent workmen, skilled in the occupation for which they are employed. Provide Work meeting quality requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Remove Defective Work from the Site immediately unless provisions have been made and approved by the OPT to allow repair of the product at the Site. Clearly mark Work as Defective until it is removed or allowable repairs have been completed. 1.03 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Provide documents in accordance with SECTION 01 33 00 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT. 1. Provide copies of Supplier’s printed storage instructions prior to furnishing materials or products and installation instructions prior to beginning the installation. 2. Incorporate field notes, sketches, recordings, and computations made by the Contractor in Record Drawings. 1.04 PERMITS A. Obtain building permits for the Project from the local authorities having jurisdiction. Pay building permit fees and include this cost in the Contract Price. B. Obtain environmental permits required for construction at the Site. C. Provide required permits for transporting heavy or oversized loads. D. Provide other permits required to conduct any part of the Work. E. Arrange for inspections and certification by agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. F. Make arrangements with private utility companies and pay for fees associated with obtaining services, or for inspection fees. G. Retain copies of permits and licenses at the Site and observe and comply with all regulations and conditions of the permit or license. Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 1.05 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Manage safety to protect the safety and welfare of persons at the Site. B. Provide safe access to move through the Site. Provide protective devices to warn and protect from hazards at the Site. C. Provide safe access for those performing tests and inspections. D. Comply with latest provisions of the Occupational Health and Safety Administration and other Laws and Regulation. E. Cooperate with accident investigations. Provide two copies of all reports, including insurance company reports, prepared concerning accidents, injury, or death related to the Project to the OAR as Record Data per SECTION 01 33 03 RECORD DATA. 1.06 ACCESS TO THE SITE A. Maintain access to the facilities at all times. Do not obstruct roads, pedestrian walks, or access to the various buildings, structures, stairways, or entrances. Provide safe access for normal operations during construction. B. Provide adequate and safe access for inspections. Leave ladders, bridges, scaffolding, and protective equipment in place until inspections have been completed. Construct additional safe access if required for inspections. C. Use roadways for construction traffic only with written approval of the appropriate representatives of each entity. Roadways may not be approved for construction traffic. Obtain written approval to use roads to deliver heavy or oversized loads to the Site. Furnish copies of the written approvals to the Owner as Record Data per SECTION 01 33 03 RECORD DATA. 1.07 CONTRACTOR’S USE OF SITE A. Limit the use of Site for Work and storage to those areas designated on the Drawings or approved by the OAR. Coordinate the use of the premises with the OAR. B. Provide security at the Site as necessary to protect against vandalism and loss by theft. C. Do not permit alcoholic beverages or illegal substances on the Site. Do not allow persons under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances to enter or remain on the Site at any time. Persons on Site under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances will be permanently prohibited from returning to the Site. Criminal or civil penalties may also apply. D. Park construction equipment in designated areas only and provide spill control measures as discussed in SECTION 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS. E. Park employees’ vehicles in designated areas only. F. Obtain written permission of the Owner before entering privately-owned land outside of the Owner’s property, rights-of-way, or easements. G. Do not allow the use of audio devices, obnoxious, vulgar or abusive language, or sexual harassment in any form. These actions will cause immediate and permanent removal of the offender from the premises. Criminal or civil penalties may apply. Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 3 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 H. Require Workers to wear clothing that is inoffensive and meets safety requirements. Do not allow sleeveless shirts, shorts, exceedingly torn, ripped, or soiled clothing to be worn on the Project. I. Do not allow firearms or weapons of any sort to be brought on to the Site under any conditions. No exception is to be made for persons with concealed handgun permits. Remove any firearms or weapons and the person possessing these firearms or weapons immediately from the Site. 1.08 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES A. Examine the Site and review the available information concerning the Site. Locate utilities, streets, driveways, fences, drainage structures, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. Verify the elevations of the structures adjacent to excavations. Report any discrepancies from information in the Contract Documents to the OAR before beginning construction. B. Determine if existing structures, poles, piping, or other utilities at excavations will require relocation or replacement. Prepare a Plan of Action per SECTION 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. Coordinate Work with local utility company and others for the relocation or replacement. C. Protect buildings, utilities, street surfaces, driveways, sidewalks, curb and gutter, fences, wells, drainage structures, piping, valves, manholes, electrical conduits, and other systems or structures unless they are shown to be replaced or relocated on the Drawings. Restore damaged items to the satisfaction of the OPT and utility owner. D. Carefully support and protect all structures and/or utilities so that there will be no failure or settlement where excavation or demolition endangers adjacent structures and utilities. Do not take existing utilities out of service unless required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. Notify and cooperate with the utility owner if it is necessary to move services, poles, guy wires, pipelines, or other obstructions. E. Protect existing trees and landscaping at the Site. 1. Identify trees that may be removed during construction with OPT. 2. Mark trees to be removed with paint. 3. Protect trees to remain from damage by wrapping trunks with 2 x 4 timbers around the perimeter, securely wired in place, where machinery must operate around existing trees. Protect branches and limbs from damage by equipment. 4. Protect root zone from compaction. 1.09 PRE-CONSTRUCTION EXPLORATORY EXCAVATIONS A. None. Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 4 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 1.10 DISRUPTION TO SERVICES / CONTINUED OPERATIONS A. Existing facilities are to continue in service as usual during the construction unless noted otherwise. Owner or utilities must be able to operate and maintain the facilities. Keep disruptions to existing utilities, piping, process piping, or electrical services to a minimum. 1. Do not restrict access to critical valves or operators. 2. Limit operations to the minimum amount of space needed to complete the specified Work. 3. Maintain storm sewers and sanitary sewers in service at all times. Provide temporary service around the construction or otherwise construct the structure in a manner that the flow is not restricted. B. Provide a Plan of Action in accordance with SECTION 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES if facilities must be taken out of operation. 1.11 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Perform complete field measurements prior to purchasing products or beginning construction for products required to fit existing conditions. B. Verify property lines, control lines, grades, and levels indicated on the Drawings. C. Check Shop Drawings and indicate the actual dimensions available where products are to be installed. D. Include field measurements in Record Drawings as required in SECTION 01 31 13 PROJECT COORDINATION. 1.12 REFERENCE DATA AND CONTROL POINTS A. The OPT will provide the following control points: 1. Base line or grid reference points for horizontal control. 2. Benchmarks for vertical control. B. Locate and protect control points prior to starting the Work and preserve permanent reference points during construction. Designated control points may be on an existing structure or monument. Do not change or relocate points without prior approval of the OAR. Notify OAR when the reference point is lost, destroyed, or requires relocation. Replace Project control points on the basis of the original survey. C. Provide complete engineering layout of the Work needed for construction. 1. Provide competent personnel. Provide equipment including accurate surveying instruments, stakes, platforms, tools, and materials. 2. Provide surveying with accuracy meeting the requirements established for Category 5 Construction Surveying as established in the Manual of Practice of Land Surveying in Texas published by the Texas Society of Professional Surveyors, latest revision. 3. Record Data and measurements per standards. Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 5 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 1.13 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver products and materials to the Site in time to prevent delays in construction. B. Deliver packaged products to Site in original undamaged containers with identifying labels attached. Open cartons as necessary to check for damage and to verify invoices. Reseal cartons and store properly until used. Leave products in packages or other containers until installed. C. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored at the Site. D. Store products at locations acceptable to the OAR and to allow Owner access to maintain and operate existing facilities. E. Store products in accordance with the Supplier’s storage instructions immediately upon delivery. Leave seals and labels intact. F. Provide additional storage areas as needed for construction. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weather-tight enclosures or storage sheds. Provide and maintain storage sheds as required for the protection of products. Provide temperature, humidity control, and ventilation within the ranges stated in the Supplier’s instructions. Remove storage facilities at the completion of the Project. G. Protect the pipe interior. Keep all foreign materials such as dirt, debris, animals, or other objects out of the pipe during the Work. Cap or plug ends of installed pipe in an approved manner when pipe is not being installed. Clean or wash out pipe sections that become contaminated before continuing with installation. Take precautions to prevent the pipe from floating or moving out of the proper position during or after laying operations. Immediately correct any pipe that moves from its correct position. H. Provide adequate exterior storage for products that may be stored out-of-doors. 1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids to support materials and products above ground which has been sloped to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling or staining. 2. Cover products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements, with impervious sheet materials. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation below covering. 3. Store loose, granular materials on clean, solid surfaces, or on rigid sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter. 4. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. 5. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids with stored materials. 6. Pipes and conduits stored outdoors are to have open ends sealed to prevent the entrance of dirt, moisture, and other injurious materials. Protect PVC pipe from ultraviolet light exposure. 7. Store light weight products to prevent wind damage. I. Maintain storage facilities. Inspect stored products on a weekly basis and after periods of severe weather to verify that: Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 6 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 1. Storage facilities continue to meet specified requirements; 2. Supplier’s required environmental conditions are continually maintained; and 3. Products that can be damaged by exposure to the elements are not adversely affected. J. Replace any stored item damaged by inadequate protection or environmental controls. K. Payment may be withheld for any products not properly stored. 1.14 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Provide positive methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations and provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from disbursing into the atmosphere. Control dust and dirt from demolition, cutting, and patching operations. B. Clean the Project as Work progresses and dispose of waste materials, keeping the Site free from accumulations of waste or rubbish. Provide containers on Site for waste collection. Do not allow waste materials or debris to blow around or off of the Site. Control dust from waste materials. Transport waste materials with as few handlings as possible. C. Comply with Laws and Regulations. Do not burn or bury waste materials. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris from the Site and legally dispose of these at public or private disposal facilities. D. Provide a final cleaning to thoroughly clean the entire Site and make ready for acceptance. 1. Remove construction debris, boxes, and trash from the Site. 2. Remove construction storage sheds and field offices. 3. Restore grade to match surrounding condition and remove excess dirt. 4. Sweep all drives and parking lots clean of dirt and debris. Use water trucks or hose down paved site to like new appearance. 1.15 MAINTENANCE OF ROADS, DRIVEWAYS, AND ACCESS A. Maintain roads and streets in a manner that is suitable for safe operations of public vehicles during all phases of construction unless the Owner approves a street closing. Do not close public roads overnight. B. Submit a Notification by Contractor for Owner’s approval of a street closing. The request shall state: 1. The reason for closing the street. 2. How long the street will remain closed. 3. Procedures to be taken to maintain the flow of traffic. C. Construct temporary detours, including by-pass roads around construction, with adequately clear width to maintain the free flow of traffic at all times. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the detour and excavations. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the Work in accordance with all provisions of the latest edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 7 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 D. Assume responsibility for any damage resulting from construction along roads or drives. 1.16 AREA ACCESS AND TRAFFIC CONTROL A. Provide traffic control measures to assure a safe condition and to provide a minimum of inconvenience to motorists and the public. Provide all-weather access to all residents and businesses at all times during construction. Provide temporary driveways and/or roads of approved material during wet weather. Maintain a stockpile of suitable material on the Site to meet the demands of inclement weather. B. Schedule operations to minimize adverse impact on the accessibility of adjoining properties. Sequence construction to build driveways in half widths, construct temporary ramps, or any other measure required to maintain access to adjoining properties. C. Comply with the Owner’s Uniform Barricading Standards and Practices. Copies of this document are available through the Owner’s Traffic Engineering Department. Secure required permits from the Owner’s Traffic Engineering Department. 1.17 OVERHEAD ELECTRICAL WIRES A. Comply with OSHA safety requirements regarding construction equipment working beneath overhead electrical wires. Prevent and pay for repairs for damage to existing overhead electrical wires or facilities. B. Provide for adequate safety with regard to overhead lines whether overhead lines are or are not shown in the Contract Documents. 1.18 BLASTING A. Blasting is not allowed for any purpose. 1.19 ARCHAEOLOGICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cease operations immediately and contact the Owner for instructions if historical or archaeological artifacts are found during construction. B. Conduct all construction activities to avoid adverse impact on the Sites where significant historical or archaeological artifacts are found or identified as an area where other artifacts could be found. 1. Obtain details for Working in these areas. 2. Maintain confidentiality regarding the Site. 3. Adhere to the requirements of the Texas Historical Commission. 4. Notify the OAR and the Texas Historical Commission. C. Do not disturb archaeological sites. 1. Obtain the services of a qualified archaeological specialist to instruct construction personnel on how to identify and protect archaeological finds on an emergency basis. 2. Coordinate activities to permit archaeological work to take place within the area. Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 8 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 a. Attempt to archaeologically clear areas needed for construction as soon as possible. b. Provide a determination of priority for such areas. D. Assume responsibility for any unauthorized destruction that might result to such Sites by construction personnel, and pay all penalties assessed by the State or Federal agencies for non-compliance with these requirements. E. Contract Times will be modified to compensate for delays caused by such archaeological finds. No additional compensation will be paid for delays. 1.20 ENDANGERED SPECIES RESOURCES A. Do not perform any activity that is likely to jeopardize the continued existence of a threatened or endangered species as listed or proposed for listing under the Federal Endangered Species Act (ESA), and/or the State of Texas Parks and Wildlife Code on Endangered Species, or to destroy or adversely modify the habitat of such species. B. Cease Work immediately in the area of the encounter and notify the OAR if a threatened or endangered species is encountered during construction. OPT will implement actions in accordance with the ESA and applicable State statutes. Resume construction in the area of the encounter when authorized to do so by the OAR. 1.21 COOPERATION WITH PUBLIC AGENCIES A. Cooperate with all public and private agencies with facilities operating within the limits of the Project. B. Provide a 48-hour notice to any applicable agency when work is anticipated to proceed in the vicinity of any facility by using Texas 811 at 811 and the Lone Star Notification Company at 1-800-669-8344. C. For the Contractor’s convenience, the following telephone numbers are listed: Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number City Engineer 826-3500 Project Architect 361-884-3295 Javier Huerta 361-884-3295 Traffic Engineering 826-3540 Police Department 882-2600 Water Department 826-1881 (826-1888 after hours) Wastewater Department 826-1800 (826-1818 after hours) Gas Department 885-6900 (885-6913 after hours) Storm Water Department 826-1875 (826-3140 after hours) Parks & Recreation Department 826-3461 Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 9 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number Streets and Solid Waste Services 826-1940 AEP 1-877-373-4858 SBC / AT&T 881-2511 (1-800-824-4424 after hours) City Street Div. for Traffic Signal/ Fiber Optic Locate 826-1946 826-3547 Cablevision 857-5000 (857-5060 after hours) ACSI (Fiber Optic) 887-9200 (Pager 800-724-3624) KMC (Fiber Optic) 813-1124 (Pager 888-204-1679) ChoiceCom (Fiber Optic) 881-5767 (Pager 850-2981) CAPROCK (Fiber Optic) 512-935-0958 (Mobile) Brooks Fiber Optic (MAN) 972-753-4355 Regional Transportation Authority 289-2712 Port of Corpus Christi Authority Eng. 855-6153 TxDOT Area Office 808-2384 Corpus Christi ISD 886-9005 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Project Coordination 01 31 13 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 01 31 13 PROJECT COORDINATION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Administer Contract requirements to construct the Project. Provide documentation per the requirements of this Section. Provide information as requested by the OPT. 1.02 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Provide documents in accordance with SECTION 01 33 00 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT. B. Use the forms provided for Contract administration, applications for payment, document submittals, documentation of test results, equipment installation and documentation, and Project closeout. A digital copy of the required forms will be provided to the Contractor before or at the pre-construction conference. 1.03 COMMUNICATION DURING THE PROJECT A. The OAR is to be the first point of contact for all parties on matters concerning this Project. B. The Designer will coordinate correspondence concerning: 1. Documents, including Applications for Payment. 2. Clarification and interpretation of the Contract Documents. 3. Contract Modifications. 4. Observation of Work and testing. 5. Claims. C. The OAR will normally communicate only with the Contractor. Any required communication with Subcontractors or Suppliers will only be with the direct involvement of the Contractor. D. Direct written communications to the OAR at the address indicated at the pre-construction conference. Include the following with communications as a minimum: 1. Name of the Owner. 2. Project name. 3. Contract title. 4. Project number. 5. Date. 6. A reference statement. E. Submit communications on the forms referenced in this Section or in SECTION 01 33 00 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT. Project Coordination 01 31 13 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 1.04 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Pre-Construction Conference: 1. Attend a pre-construction conference. 2. The location of the conference will be determined by the OAR. 3. The time of the meeting will be determined by the OAR but will be after the Notice of Award is issued and not later than 15 days after the Notice to Proceed is issued. 4. The OPT, Contractor’s project manager and superintendent, representatives of utility companies, and representatives from major Subcontractors and Suppliers may attend the conference. 5. Provide and be prepared to discuss: a. Preliminary construction schedule per SECTION 01 33 04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE. b. Schedule of Values and anticipated Schedule of Payments per SECTION 01 29 00 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PROCEDURES. c. List of Subcontractors and Suppliers. d. Contractor’s organizational chart as it relates to this Project. e. Letter indicating the agents of authority for the Contractor and the limit of that authority with respect to the execution of legal documents, Contract Modifications, and payment requests. B. Progress Meetings: 1. Attend meetings with the OAR and Owner. a. Meet on a monthly basis or as requested by the OAR to discuss the Project. b. Meet at the Site or other location as designated by the OAR. c. Contractor’s superintendent and other key personnel are to attend the meeting. Other individuals may be requested to attend to discuss specific matters. d. Notify the OAR of any specific items to be discussed a minimum of 1 week prior to the meeting. 2. Provide information as requested by the OAR or Owner concerning this Project. Prepare to discuss: a. Status of overall Project schedule. b. Contractor’s detailed schedule for the next month. c. Anticipated delivery dates for equipment. d. Coordination with the Owner. e. Status of documents. f. Information or clarification of the Contract Documents. g. Claims and proposed Modifications to the Contract. Project Coordination 01 31 13 - 3 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 h. Field observations, problems, or conflicts. i. Maintenance of quality standards. 3. OAR will prepare minutes of meetings. Review the minutes of the meeting and notify the OAR of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in the minutes of the following meeting or as an attachment to the minutes. C. Pre- Submittal and Pre-Installation Meetings: 1. Conduct pre-submittal and pre-installation meetings as required in the individual technical Specifications or as determined necessary by the OAR (for example, instrumentation, roofing, concrete mix design, etc.). 2. Set the time and location of the meetings when ready to proceed with the associated Work. Submit a Notification by Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 1.07 for the meeting 2 weeks before the meeting. OPT must approve of the proposed time and location. 3. Attend the meeting and require the participation of appropriate Subcontractors and Suppliers in the meeting. 4. Prepare minutes of the meeting and submit to the OPT for review. OPT will review the minutes of the meeting and notify the Contractor of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in a revised set of meeting minutes. 1.05 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION A. Submit Request for Information (RFI) to the Designer to obtain additional information or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1. Submit a separate RFI for each item on the form provided. 2. Attach adequate information to permit a written response without further clarification. Designer will return requests that do not have adequate information to the Contractor for additional information. Contractor is responsible for all delays resulting from multiple document submittals due to inadequate information. 3. A response will be made when adequate information is provided. Response will be made on the RFI form or in attached information. B. Response to an RFI is given to provide additional information, interpretation, or clarification of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and does not modify the Contract Documents. C. Designer will initiate a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP) per SECTION 01 31 14 CHANGE MANAGEMENT if the RFI indicates that a Contract Modification is required. D. Use the Project Issues Log to document decisions made at meetings and actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 1.06. E. Use the Action Item Log to document assignments for actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 1.06. Project Coordination 01 31 13 - 4 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 1.06 DECISION AND ACTION ITEM LOG A. OAR will maintain a Project Decision Log to document key decisions made at meetings, telephone conversation or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report any discrepancies to the OAR for correction or discussion at the next monthly meeting. B. OAR will maintain an Action Item log in conjunction with the Project Decision Log to track assignments made at meetings, telephone conversation, or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the Action Item Log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report actions taken subsequent to the previous progress meeting on items in the log assigned to the Contractor or through the Contractor to a Subcontractor or Supplier to the OAR. Report on status of progress 1 week prior to each progress meeting established in Paragraph 1.04 to allow OAR to update the log prior to the Progress meetings. 3. Be prepared to discuss the status at each meeting. C. Decisions or action items in the log that require a change in the Contract Documents will have the preparation of a Modification as an action items if appropriate. The Contract Documents can only be changed by a Modification. 1.07 NOTIFICATION BY CONTRACTOR A. Notify the OAR of: 1. Need for testing. 2. Intent to work outside regular working hours. 3. Request to shut down facilities or utilities. 4. Proposed utility connections. 5. Required observation by OAR, Designer, or inspection agencies prior to covering Work. 6. Training. B. Provide notification a minimum of 2 weeks in advance in order to allow OPT time to respond appropriately to the notification. C. Use “Notification by Contractor” form provided. 1.08 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain at the Site one complete set of printed Record Documents including: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Modifications. Project Coordination 01 31 13 - 5 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 5. Record Data and approved Shop Drawings. 6. Construction photographs. 7. Test Reports. 8. Clarifications and other information provided in Request for Information responses. 9. Reference standards. B. Store printed Record Documents and Samples in the Contractor’s field office. 1. Record Documents are to remain separate from documents used for construction. 2. Provide files and racks for the storage of Record Documents. 3. Provide a secure storage space for the storage of Samples. 4. Maintain Record Documents in clean, dry, legible conditions, and in good order. 5. Make Record Documents and Samples available at all times for inspection by the OPT. C. Maintain a digital record of Specifications and Addenda to identify products provided in PDF format. 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number, and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. D. Maintain a digital record of Drawings in PDF format. 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number, and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. 3. Record information as construction is being performed. Do not conceal any Work until the required information is recorded. 4. Mark Drawings to record actual construction, including the following: a. Depths of various elements of the foundation in relation to finished first floor datum or the top of walls. b. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances constructed and existing utilities encountered during construction. c. Location of utilities and appurtenances concealed in the Work. Refer measurements to permanent structures on the surface. Include the following equipment: 1) Piping. 2) Ductwork. 3) Equipment and control devices requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 4) Valves, unions, traps, and tanks. 5) Services entrance. 6) Feeders. Project Coordination 01 31 13 - 6 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 7) Outlets. d. Changes of dimension and detail. e. Changes by Modifications. f. Information in Request for Information or included in the Project Issues Log. g. Details not on the original Drawings. Include field verified dimensions and clarifications, interpretations, and additional information issued in response to RFIs. 5. Mark Drawings with the following colors: a. Highlight references to other documents, including Modifications in blue; b. Highlight mark ups for new or revised Work (lines added) in yellow; c. Highlight items deleted or not installed (lines to be removed) in red; and d. Highlight items constructed per the Contract Documents in green. 6. Submit Record Documents to Designer for review and acceptance 30 days prior to Final Completion of the Project. E. Applications for Payment will not be recommended for payment if Record Documents are found to be incomplete or not in order. Final payment will not be recommended without complete Record Documents. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Change Management 01 31 14 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 01 31 14 CHANGE MANAGEMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUESTS FOR CHANGE PROPOSAL A. Designer will initiate Modifications by issuing a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP). 1. Designer will prepare a description of proposed Modifications. 2. Designer will issue the Request for a Change Proposal form to Contractor. A number will be assigned to the Request for a Change Proposal when issued. 3. Return a Change Proposal in accordance with Paragraph 1.02 to the Designer for evaluation by the OPT. 1.02 CHANGE PROPOSALS A. Submit a Change Proposal (CP) to the Designer for Contractor initiated changes in the Contract Documents or in response to a Request for Change Proposal. 1. Use the Change Proposal form provided. 2. Assign a number to the Change Proposal when issued. 3. Include with the Change Proposal: a. A complete description of the proposed Modification if Contractor initiated or proposed changes to the OPT’s description of the proposed Modification. b. The reason the Modification is requested, if not in response to a Request for a Change Proposal. c. A detailed breakdown of the cost of the change if the Modification requires a change in Contract Price. The itemized breakdown is to include: 1) List of materials and equipment to be installed; 2) Man hours for labor by classification; 3) Equipment used in construction; 4) Consumable supplies, fuels, and materials; 5) Royalties and patent fees; 6) Bonds and insurance; 7) Overhead and profit; 8) Field office costs; 9) Home office cost; and 10) Other items of cost. d. Provide the level of detail outline in the paragraph above for each Subcontractor or Supplier actually performing the Work if Work is to be provided by a Subcontractor or Supplier. Indicate appropriate Contractor mark-ups for Work Change Management 01 31 14 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 provided through Subcontractors and Suppliers. Provide the level of detail outline in the paragraph above for self-performed Work. e. Submit Change Proposals that comply with Article 13 of the General Conditions for Cost of Work. f. Provide a revised schedule. Show the effect of the change on the Project Schedule and the Contract Times. B. Submit a Change Proposal to the Designer to request a Field Order. C. A Change Proposal is required for all substitutions or deviations from the Contract Documents. D. Request changes to products in accordance with SECTION 01 33 02 SHOP DRAWINGS. 1.03 DESIGNER WILL EVALUATE THE REQUEST FOR A MODIFICATION. A. Designer will issue a Modification per the General Conditions if the Change Proposal is acceptable to the Owner. Designer will issue a Change Order or Contract Amendment for any changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. 1. Change Orders and Contract Amendments will be sent to the Contractor for execution with a copy to the Owner recommending approval. A Work Change Directive may be issued if Work needs to progress before the Change Order or Contract Amendment can be authorized by the Owner. 2. Work Change Directives, Change Orders, and Contract Amendments can only be approved by the Owner. a. Work performed on the Change Proposal prior to receiving a Work Change Directive or approval of the Change Order or Contract Amendment is performed at the Contractor’s risk. b. No payment will be made for Work on Change Orders or Contract Amendments until approved by the Owner. B. The Contractor may be informed that the Request for a Change Proposal is not approved and construction is to proceed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.04 EQUAL NON SPECIFIED PRODUCTS A. The products of the listed Suppliers are to be furnished where Specifications list several manufacturers but do not specifically list “or equal” or “or approved equal” products. Use of any products other than those specifically listed is a substitution. Follow the procedures in Paragraph 1.05 for a substitution. B. Contractor may submit other manufacturers’ products that are in full compliance with the Specification where Specifications list one or more manufacturers followed by the phase “or equal” or “or approved equal.” 1. Submit a Shop Drawing as required by SECTION 01 33 02 SHOP DRAWINGS to document that the proposed product is equal or superior to the specified product. 2. Prove that the product is equal. It is not the OPT’s responsibility to prove the product is not equal. Change Management 01 31 14 - 3 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 a. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is equal to the Contract Document requirements. b. Make a direct comparison with the specified manufacturer’s published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the Shop Drawing. c. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed product is final. 3. Provide a typewritten certification that, in furnishing the proposed product as an equal, the Contractor: a. Has thoroughly examined the proposed product and has determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to the product specified. b. Has determined that the product will perform in the same manner and result in the same process as the specified product. c. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds as for the product specified. d. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the product into the construction and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. e. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. 4. A Change Proposal is not required for any product that is in full compliance with the Contract Documents. If the product is not in full compliance, it may be offered as a Substitution. 1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions are defined as any product that the Contractor proposes to provide for the Project in lieu of the specified product. Submit a Change Proposal per Paragraph 1.02 along with a Shop Drawing as required by SECTION 01 33 02 SHOP DRAWINGS to request approval of a substitution. B. Prove that the product is acceptable as a substitute. It is not the Designer’s responsibility to prove the product is not acceptable as a substitute. 1. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is acceptable to meet the intent of the Contract Documents requirements. 2. Make a direct comparison with the specified Suppliers published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the documents submitted. 3. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed substitute product is final. C. Provide a written certification that, in making the substitution request, the Contractor: 1. Has determined that the substituted product will perform in substantially the same manner and result in the same ability to meet the specified performance as the specified product. Change Management 01 31 14 - 4 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 2. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds for the substituted product as specified or as would be provided by the manufacturer of the specified product. 3. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. 4. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. D. Pay for review of substitutions in accordance with SECTION 01 33 02 SHOP DRAWINGS. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Document Management 01 33 00 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 01 33 00 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Submit documentation as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Submit legible, accurate, complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Documents not meeting these criteria will be returned without review. 1.03 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review documents prior to submitting. Make certifications as required by the Contract Documents and as indicated on forms provided. B. Provide a Schedule of Documents to list the documents that are to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that documents must be returned to comply with the Project schedule. Use the form provided for this list. C. Incorporate the dates for processing documents into the Progress Schedule required by SECTION 01 33 04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE. 1. Provide documents in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of documents when preparing the Progress Schedule. Assume a 14 day review cycle for each document unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents or agreed to by Designer and Contractor. 3. Schedule submittal of documents to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for processing documents so construction of the Project is not delayed. 1.04 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Submit documents through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested with a completed Document Transmittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. 2. The Document Transmittal form is to be the first page in the document submitted. 3. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). Document Management 01 33 00 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 a. Create PDF document using Bluebeam Revu software or other compatible software that will create files that can be opened and annotated using Bluebeam Revu software. b. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. c. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. d. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. e. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the document. f. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. g. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. h. Use Bluebeam Revu software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for “Drop Metadata.” Uncheck the “Drop Metadata” box when reducing file size i. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 1.05 DOCUMENT NUMBERING A. Assign a number to the documents originated to allow tracking of the documents during the review process. 1. Assign the number consisting of a prefix, a sequence number, and a letter suffix. Prefixes shall be as follows: Prefix Description Originator AP Application for Payment Contractor CO Change Order OAR CP Change Proposal Contractor CTR Certified Test Report Contractor FO Field Order OAR NBC Notification by Contractor Contractor PD Photographic Documentation Contractor RCP Request for a Change Proposal OAR RD Record Data Contractor RFI Request for Information Contractor SD Shop Drawing Contractor Document Management 01 33 00 - 3 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 Prefix Description Originator SCH Schedule of Progress Contractor 2. Issue sequence numbers in chronological order for each type of document. 3. Issue numbers for resubmittals that have the same number as the original document followed by an alphabetical suffix indicating the number of times the same document has been sent to the Designer for processing. For example: SD 025 A represents Shop Drawing number 25 and the letter “A” designates that this is the second time this document has been sent for review. 4. Clearly note the document number on each page or sheet of the document. 5. Correct assignment of numbers is essential since different document types are processed in different ways. B. Include reference the Drawing number and/or Specification Section, detail designation, schedule, or location that corresponds with the data on the document transmittal forms. Other identification may also be required, such as layout drawings or schedules to allow the reviewer to determine where a particular product is to be used. 1.06 DOCUMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Furnish documents as indicated below or in individual Specification Sections. Submit documents per the procedures described in the Contract Documents. B. Submit documents per the Specification Section shown in the following table: Document Type Specification Section Application for Payment 01 29 00 Change Proposal 01 31 14 Certified Test Report 01 33 02 for approval of product 01 40 00 to demonstrate compliance Notification by Contractor 01 31 13 Photographic Documentation 01 33 05 Progress Schedules 01 33 04 Record Data 01 33 03 Request for Information 01 31 13 Shop Drawings 01 33 01 (See section for list) Schedule of Values 01 29 00 Substitutions 01 31 14 Suppliers and Subcontractors 01 31 13 and 01 33 03 Document Management 01 33 00 - 4 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01 33 01 Submittal Register Submittal Register HEB Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) - Project Number : E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 01 33 01-1 08-08-2014 Product Information Sample or Mockup Operations Data 2120 Chainlink Fence 2210 Select Material 2222 Trench Safety for Excavations 2525 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement (Class A) (S-34) 2526 Asphalt Tennis Court Overlay 2561 Concrete Sidewalks 2564 Concrete Curb Ramps 2760 Asphalt Edging 2791 Asphalt Tennis Court Surfacing 2792 Concrete Tennis Court Surfacing 2810 Landscape Irrigation 2882 Tennis Court Net Posts 3000 Flat Work – Portland Cement Concrete 3200 Flat Work – Reinforcing Steel 3800 Flat Work – Concrete Structures 4200 Clay Unit Masonry 7100 Gypsum Sheathing 7100 Waterproofing and Dampproofing 7200 Insulation 7250 Weather Barriers 7600 Flashing and Sheet Metal 7612 Metal Roof Panels 7920 Joint Sealers 8100 Steel Doors and Frames 8200 Plastic Laminated Wood Doors 8505 Aluminum Fixed Windows – Impact Resistant 8505 Aluminum Sliding Windows – Impact Resistant 8700 Finish Hardware 8800 Glass and Glazing 9220 Lath, Plaster and Stucco Work 9250 Gypsum Drywall 9650 Resilient Flooring 9655 Resilient Rubber Wall Base 9900 Painting 10150 Toilet Partitions 10520 Fire Protection Specialties 105126 Plaster Lockers and Benches 10800 Toilet Accessories 11480 Backboards 116500 Sport Nets and Recreational Equipment 14420 Vertical Wheelshair Lifts 15140 Supports and Anchors 15170 Motors and Motor Controllers 15171 Combination and Non-Combination Motor Starters 15190 System Identification & Pipe Marking 15240 Sound & Vibration Control 15260 Piping Insulation 15290 Duct Insulation 15410 Plumbing Piping & Valves 15430 Plumbing Specialties 15440 Plumbing Fixtures 15530 Refrigerant Piping 15671 Air Cooled Condensing Units Paragraph No. Specification Section Specification Description Types of Submittals Required Submittal Register HEB Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) - Project Number : E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 01 33 01-2 08-08-2014 Product Information Sample or Mockup Operations Data Paragraph No. Specification Section Specification Description Types of Submittals Required 15854 DX Fan Coil Units 15860 Power Ventilators 15881 Air Distribution Devices 15885 Air Filters 15890 Metal Ductwork 15910 Ductwork Accessories 15951 Controls 15990 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 16060 Grounding 16075 Electrical Identification 16123 Wire and Cable 16136 Raceways 16140 Wiring Devices 16441 Disconnect Switches 16442 Low Voltage Panel Boards 16461 Dry-Type Distribution Transformers 16510 Luminaires 16515 Lighting Control System 16789 Exterior Athletic Lighting Shop Drawings 01 33 02 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 01 33 02 SHOP DRAWINGS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Shop Drawings are required for those products that cannot adequately be described in the Contract Documents to allow fabrication, erection, or installation of the product without additional detailed information from the Supplier. B. Submit Shop Drawings as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Provide detailed information for the products proposed for the Project regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Allow the Designer to advise the Owner if products proposed for the Project by the Contractor conform, in general, to the design concepts of the Contract Documents. C. Contractor’s responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Shop Drawings, Samples, or mockups. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Shop Drawings not meeting these criteria will be rejected. B. Demonstrate that the proposed products are in full and complete compliance with the design criteria and requirements of the Contract Documents, or will be if deviations requested per Paragraph 1.10 are approved. C. Furnish and install products that fully comply with the information included in the document submittal. 1.03 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Include Shop Drawings in the Schedule of Documents required by SECTION 01 33 00 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT to indicate the Shop Drawings to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. Refer also to SECTION 01 33 01, SUBMITTAL REGISTER for a complete listing of shop drawings. B. Incorporate the dates for processing Shop Drawings into the Progress Schedule required by SECTION 01 33 04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE. 1. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of Shop Drawings when preparing the Progress Schedule. Include time for making revisions to the Shop Drawings and resubmitting the Shop Drawing for a least a second review. Assume a 14 day review cycle for each Shop Drawings 01 33 02 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 time a Shop Drawing is submitted for review unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Schedule document submittals to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for ordering, fabricating, delivering, and installing product so construction of the Project is not delayed. C. Complete the following before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample: 1. Prepare Shop Drawing Review and coordinate the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect to Shop Drawings and Samples; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. D. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Shop Drawing; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Shop Drawing have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Shop Drawing are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Shop Drawing related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. E. Review Shop Drawings prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Shop Drawings have been reviewed by the Contractor and are in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Shop Drawings except for deviations specifically brought to the Designer’s attention on an attached Shop Drawing Deviation Request form in accordance with Paragraph 1.10. F. Fabrication or installation of any products prior to the approval of Shop Drawings is done at the Contractor’s risk. Defective products may be rejected at the Owner’s option. G. Payment will not be made for products for which Shop Drawings or Samples are required until these are approved by the Designer. Shop Drawings 01 33 02 - 3 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 1.04 SHOP DRAWING REQUIREMENTS A. Provide adequate information in Shop Drawings and Samples so Designer can: 1. Assist the Owner in selecting colors, textures, or other aesthetic features. 2. Compare the proposed features of the product with the specified features and advise Owner that the product does, in general, conform to the Contract Documents. 3. Compare the performance features of the proposed product with those specified and advise the Owner that the product does, in general, conform to the performance criteria specified in the Contract Documents. 4. Review required certifications, guarantees, warranties, and service agreements for compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Include a complete description of the product to be furnished, including: 1. Type, dimensions, size, arrangement, and operational characteristics of the product; 2. Weights, gauges, materials of construction, external connections, anchors, and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt, or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. C. Submit Shop Drawings that require coordination with other Shop Drawings at the same time. Shop Drawings requiring coordination with other Shop Drawings will be rejected until a complete package is submitted. 1.05 SPECIAL CERTIFICATIONS AND REPORTS A. Provide all required certifications with the Shop Drawings as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Shop Drawing. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Shop Drawing. 2. Certification of Local Field Service (CLS): A certified letter stating that field service is available from a factory or supplier approved service organization located within a 300 mile radius of the Site. List names, addresses, and telephone numbers of approved service organizations on or attach it to the certificate. 3. Certification of Adequacy of Design (CAD): A certified letter from the manufacturer of the equipment stating that they have designed the equipment to be structurally stable Shop Drawings 01 33 02 - 4 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 and to withstand all imposed loads without deformation, failure, or adverse effects to the performance and operational requirements of the unit. The letter shall state that mechanical and electrical equipment is adequately sized to be fully operational for the conditions specified or normally encountered by the product’s intended use. 1.06 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Shop Drawing. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1 year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required by Specification Sections. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS. 1.07 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Submit Shop Drawings through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Shop Drawing submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. The Shop Drawing submittal form is to be the first document in the file submitted. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF document using Bluebeam Revu software or other compatible software that will create files that can be opened and annotated using Bluebeam Revu software. b. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. c. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. d. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. e. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Shop Drawing. Submit Samples and color charts per Paragraph 1.08.A. f. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. g. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. Shop Drawings 01 33 02 - 5 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 h. Use Bluebeam Revu software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for “Drop Metadata.” Uncheck the “Drop Metadata” box when reducing file size. i. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 3. Submit each specific product or class of material separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Shop Drawings for more than one product in the same Shop Drawing. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Shop Drawings. a. Use terms and symbols in Shop Drawings consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Shop Drawings. c. Provide a legend for symbols used on Shop Drawings. 6. Mark Shop Drawings to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, c. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Use the following conventions to markup Shop Drawings for review: 1. Make comments and corrections in the color blue. Add explanatory comments to the markup. 2. Highlight items in black that are not being furnished when the Supplier’s standard drawings or information sheets are provided so that only the products to be provided are in their original color. 3. Make comments in the color yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Make comments in the color orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. 5. Mark dimensions with the prefix FD to indicate field verified dimensions on the Shop Drawings. C. Submit a Change Proposal per SECTION 01 31 14 CHANGE MANAGEMENT to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of “or equal” Shop Drawings 01 33 02 - 6 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. D. Designate a Shop Drawing as requiring priority treatment in the comment section of the Shop Drawing submittal form to place the review of the Shop Drawing ahead of other Shop Drawings previously delivered. Shop Drawings are typically reviewed in the order received, unless Contractor requests that a different priority be assigned. Priority Shop Drawings will be reviewed before other Shop Drawings for this Project already received but not yet reviewed. Use of this priority designation for Shop Drawings may delay the review of Shop Drawings previously submitted, pushing the processing of Shop Drawings beyond the 14 day target. Contractor is responsible for delays resulting from the use of the priority designation status on Shop Drawings. E. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 1.03. 1.08 SAMPLE AND MOCKUP SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Submit color charts and Samples for every product requiring color, texture, or finish selection. 1. Submit color charts and Samples only after Shop Drawings for the products have been approved. 2. Deliver all color charts and Samples at one time. 3. Provide Samples of adequate size to clearly illustrate the functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 4. Indicate the full range of color, texture, and patterns. 5. Deliver color charts and Samples to the field office and store for the duration of the Project 6. Notify the Designer that color charts and Samples have been delivered for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. 7. Submit color charts and Samples not less than 30 days prior to when these products are to be ordered or released for fabrication to comply with the Project schedule. 8. Remove Samples that have been rejected. Submit new Samples following the same process as for the initial Sample until Samples are approved. 9. Dispose of Samples when related Work has been completed and approved and disposal is approved by the Designer. At Owner’s option, Samples will become the property of the Owner. B. Construct mockups for comparison with the Work being performed. 1. Construct mockups from the actual products to be used in construction per detailed Specification Sections. 2. Construct mockups of the size and in the area indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Construct mockups complete with texture and finish to represent the finished product. Shop Drawings 01 33 02 - 7 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 4. Notify the Designer that mockups have been constructed and are ready for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. Allow 2 weeks for OPT to approve of the mockup before beginning the Work represented by the mockup. 5. Remove mockups that have been rejected. Construct new mockups following the same process as for the initial mockup until mockup is approved. 6. Protect mockups until Work has been completed and accepted by the OPT. 7. Dispose of mockups when related Work has been completed and disposal is approved by the Designer. 1.09 REQUESTS FOR DEVIATION A. Submit requests for deviation from the Contract Documents for any product that does not fully comply with the Contract Documents. B. Submit requests for deviation using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form provided. Identify each deviation request as a separate item. Include all requested deviations that must be approved as a group together and identify them as a single item. C. Include a description of why the deviation is required and the impact on Contract Price or Contract Times. Include the amount of any cost savings to the Owner for deviations that result in a reduction in cost. D. Submit as a Change Proposal prior to submitting the Shop Drawing if the deviation will result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. E. A Modification must be issued by the Designer for approval of a deviation. Approval of a requested Shop Drawing deviation by the Designer on the Shop Drawings Deviation Request form indicates approval of the requested deviation only on its technical merits as generally conforming to the Contract Documents. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. 1.10 DESIGNER RESPONSIBILITIES A. Shop Drawings will be received by the Designer. Designer will log the documents and review per this Section for general conformance with the Contract Documents. 1. Designer’s review and approval will be only to determine if the products described in the Shop Drawing or Sample will, after installation or incorporation into the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Designer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 3. Designer’s review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. B. Comments will be made on items called to the attention of the Designer for review and comment. Any marks made by the Designer do not constitute a blanket review of the Shop Drawings 01 33 02 - 8 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 document submittal or relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or deviations from the Contract requirements. 1. Designer will respond to Contractor’s markups by either making markups directly in the Shop Drawings file using the color green or by attaching a Document Review Comments form with review comments. 2. Shop Drawings that are reviewed will be returned with one or more of the following status designations: a. Approved: Shop Drawing is found to be acceptable as submitted. b. Approved as Noted: Shop Drawing is Approved so long as corrections or notations made by Designer are incorporated into the Show Drawing. c. Not Approved: Shop Drawing or products described are not acceptable. 3. Shop Drawing will also be designated for one of the following actions: a. Final distribution: Shop Drawing is acceptable without further action and has been filed as a record document. b. Shop Drawing not required: A Shop Drawing was not required by the Contract Documents. Resubmit the document per SECTION 01 33 03 RECORD DATA. c. Cancelled: This action indicates that for some reason, the Shop Drawing is to be removed from consideration and all efforts regarding the processing of that document are to cease. d. Revise and resubmit: Shop Drawing has deviations from the Contract Documents, significant errors, or is inadequate and must be revised and resubmitted for subsequent review. e. Resubmit with corrections made: Shop Drawing is “Approved as Noted,” but has significant markups. Make correction and notations to provide a revised document with markup incorporated into the original document so that no markups are required. f. Returned without review due to excessive deficiencies: Document does not meet the requirement of the Specifications for presentation or content to the point where continuing to review the document would be counterproductive to the review process or clearly does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Revise the Shop Drawing to comply with the requirements of this Section and resubmit. g. Actions a through c will close out the Shop Drawing review process and no further action is required as a Shop Drawing. Actions d through f require follow up action to close out the review process. 4. Drawings with a significant or substantial number of markings by the Contractor may be marked “Approved as Noted” and “Resubmit with corrections made.” These drawings are to be revised to provide a clean record of the Shop Drawing. Proceed with ordering products as the documents are revised. 5. Dimensions or other data that does not appear to conform to the Contract Documents will be marked as “At Variance With” (AVW) the Contract Documents or other Shop Drawings 01 33 02 - 9 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 information provided. The Contractor is to make revisions as appropriate to comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bring deviations to the Shop Drawings to the attention of the Designer for approval by using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Use a single line for each requested deviation so the Status and Action for each deviation can be determined for that requested deviation. If approval or rejection of a requested deviation will impact other requested deviations, then all related deviations should be included in that requested deviation line so the status and action can be determined on the requested deviation as a whole. D. Requested deviations will be reviewed as possible Modification to the Contract Documents. 1. A Requested deviation will be rejected as “Not Approved” if the requested deviation is unacceptable. Contractor is to revise and resubmit the Shop Drawing with corrections for approval. 2. A Field Order will be issued by the Designer for deviations approved by the Designer if the requested deviation is acceptable and if the requested deviation will not result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Requested deviations from the Contract Documents may only be approved by Field Order. 3. A requested deviation will be rejected if the requested deviation is acceptable but the requested deviation will or should result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Submit any requested deviation that requires as change in Contract Price or Contract Times as a Change Proposal for approval prior to resubmitting the Shop Drawing. E. Contractor is to resubmit the Shop Drawing until it is acceptable and marked Approved or Approved as Noted and is assigned an action per Paragraph 1.10.B that indicates that the Shop Drawing process is closed. F. Information that is submitted as a Shop Drawings that should be submitted as Record Data or other type of document, or is not required may be returned without review, or may be deleted. No further action is required and the Shop Drawing process for this document will be closed. 1.11 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make all corrections or changes in the documents required by the Designer and resubmit to the Designer until approved. 1. Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for the original document. 2. Highlight or cloud in green those revisions which have been made in response to the previous reviews by the Designer. This will include changes previously highlighted or clouded in yellow to direct attention to Designer to items requiring selections or decisions by the Designer or highlighted or clouded in orange for a requested deviation from the Contract Documents. 3. Highlight and cloud new items in yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. Shop Drawings 01 33 02 - 10 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 4. Highlight and cloud new items in orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Numbering for these new items is to start with the next number following the last Shop Drawing deviation requested. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Excessive review of Shop Drawings is defined as any review required after the original review has been made and the first resubmittal has been checked to see that corrections have been made. 2. Review of Shop Drawings or Samples will be an additional service requiring payment by the Contractor if the Contractor submits a substitution for a product for which a Shop Drawing or Sample has previously been approved, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor. 3. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed in SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. 4. A Set-off will be included in each Application for Payment to pay cost for the additional review to the Owner on a monthly basis. The Set-off will be based on invoices submitted to Owner for these services. 5. Need for more than one resubmission or any other delay of obtaining Designer’s review of Shop Drawings will not entitle the Contractor to an adjustment in Contract Price or an extension of Contract Times. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Record Data 01 33 03 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 01 33 03 RECORD DATA 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Submit Record Data as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. Provide Record Data for all products unless a Shop Drawing is required for the same item. B. Submit Record Data to provide documents that allow the Owner to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Review detailed information about the products regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Provide replacement or repair of the products at some future date. C. Contractor’s responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the receipt or cursory review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. D. Provide various reports or other documents that Contract Documents required be submitted for record purposes. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Record Data not meeting these criteria will be rejected. 1.03 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Submit Record Data for the following items: Items Record Data Description As-builts Submit As-built drawings to Architect after project completion Owner’s Manuals Provide Owner (2) sets of Owner’s Manuals to owner with warranties and certificates as required specifications. B. Include Record Data in the Schedule of Documents required by SECTION 01 33 00 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT to indicate the Record Data to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Complete the following before submitting Record Data: 1. Prepare Record Data and coordinate with Shop Drawings or Samples, other Record Data, and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information; Record Data 01 33 03 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. D. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Record Data; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Record Data have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Record Data are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Record Data related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. E. Review Record Data prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Record Data has been reviewed by the Contractor and is in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Record Data. 1.04 RECORD DATA REQUIREMENTS A. Include a complete description of the material or equipment to be furnished, including: 1. Type, dimensions, size, arrangement, model number, and operational parameters of the components; 2. Weights, gauges, materials of construction, external connections, anchors, and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt, or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. 1.05 SPECIAL CERTIFICATIONS AND REPORTS A. Provide all required certifications with the Record Data as specified in the individual Specification Sections: Record Data 01 33 03 - 3 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Record Data. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Record Data. 1.06 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Record Data. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1 year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required by Specification Sections. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS. 1.07 RECORD DATA SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Submit Record Data through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Record Data submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. The Record Data submittal form is to be the first document in the file. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF document using Bluebeam Revu software or other compatible software that will create files that can be opened and annotated using Bluebeam Revu software. b. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. c. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. d. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. e. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Record Data. f. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. g. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. Record Data 01 33 03 - 4 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 h. Use Bluebeam Revu software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for “Drop Metadata.” Uncheck the “Drop Metadata” box when reducing file size. i. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 3. Submit each specific product, class of material, or product separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Record Data for more than one system in the same Record Data. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Record Data. a. Use terms and symbols in Record Data consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Record Data. c. Provide a legend for symbols used on Record Data. 6. Mark Record Data to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, c. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Submit a Change Proposal per SECTION 01 31 14 CHANGE MANAGEMENT to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of “or equal” products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. C. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 1.03. 1.08 DESIGNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Record Data will be received by the Designer, logged, and provided to Owner as the Project record. 1. Record Data may be reviewed to see that the information provided is adequate for the purpose intended. Record Data not meeting the requirements of Paragraph 1.02 may be rejected as unacceptable. 2. Record Data is not reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents. Comments may be returned if deviations from the Contract Documents are noted during the cursory review performed to see that the information is adequate. 3. Contractor’s responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by a Modification. Record Data 01 33 03 - 5 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 B. Designer may take the following action in processing Record Data: 1. File Record Data as received if the cursory review indicates that the document meets the requirements of Paragraph 1.02. Document will be given the status of “Filed as Received” and not further action is required on that Record Data. 2. Reject the Record Data for one of the following reasons: a. The document submittal requirements of the Contract Documents indicate that the document submitted as Record Data should have been submitted as a Shop Drawing. The Record Data will be marked “Rejected” and “Submit Shop Drawing.” No further action is required on this document as Record Data and the Record Data process will be closed. Resubmit the document as a Shop Drawing per SECTION 01 33 02 SHOP DRAWINGS. b. The cursory review indicates that the document does not meet the requirements of Paragraph 1.02. The Record Data will be marked “Rejected” and “Revise and Resubmit.” Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked “Filed as Received.” When Record Data is filed, no further action is required and the Record Data process will be closed. c. The Record Data is not required by the Contract Documents nor is applicable to the Project. The Record Data will be marked “Rejected” and “Cancel - Not Required.” No further action is required and the Record Data process will be closed. C. Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked “Filed as Received.” 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Construction Progress Schedule 01 33 04 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 01 33 04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Prepare and submit a Progress Schedule for the Work and update the schedule on a monthly basis for the duration of the Project. B. Provide schedule in adequate detail to allow Owner to monitor progress and to relate document processing to sequential activities of the Work. C. Incorporate and specifically designate the dates of anticipated submission of documents and the dates when documents must be returned to the Contractor into the schedule. D. Assume complete responsibility for maintaining the progress of the Work per the schedule submitted. E. Take the requirements of SECTION 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES into consideration when preparing schedule. 1.02 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Submit Progress Schedules in accordance with SECTION 01 33 00 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT. B. Submit a preliminary schedule within 10 days after the Notice of Award. The schedule is to be available at the pre-construction conference. C. Submit a detailed schedule at least 10 days prior to the first payment request. D. Submit Progress Schedules updates monthly with Applications for Payment to indicate the progress made on the Project to that date. Failure to submit the schedule may cause delay in the review and approval of Applications for Payment. 1.03 SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS A. Schedule is to be in adequate detail to: 1. Assure adequate planning, scheduling, and reporting during the execution of the Work; 2. Assure the coordination of the Work of the Contractor and the various Subcontractors and Suppliers; 3. Assist in monitoring the progress of the Work; and 4. Assist in evaluating proposed changes to the Contract Times and Project schedule. B. Provide personnel with 5 years’ minimum experience in scheduling construction work comparable to this Project. Prepare the schedule using acceptable scheduling software. C. Provide the schedule in the form of a computer generated critical path schedule which includes Work to be performed on the Project. It is intended that the schedule accomplish the following: 1. Give early warning of delays in time for correction. Construction Progress Schedule 01 33 04 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 2. Provide detailed plans for the execution of the Work in the form of future activities and events in sequential relationships. 3. Establish relationships of significant planned Work activities and provide a logical sequence for planned Work activities. 4. Provide continuous current status information. 5. Allow analysis of the Contractor’s program for the completion of the Project. 6. Permit schedules to be revise when the existing schedule is not achievable. 7. Log the progress of the Work as it actually occurs. D. Prepare a time scaled CPM arrow or precedence diagram to indicate each activity and its start and stop dates. 1. Develop Milestone dates and Project completion dates to conform to time constraints, sequencing requirements and Contract completion date. 2. Use calendar day durations while accounting for holidays and weather conditions in the projection of the duration of each activity. 3. Clearly indicate the critical path for Work to complete the Project. E. Provide a time scaled horizontal bar chart which indicates graphically the Work scheduled at any time during the Project. The chart is to indicate: 1. Complete sequence of construction by activity; 2. Identification of the activity by structure, location, and type of Work; 3. Chronological order of the start of each item of Work; 4. The activity start and stop dates; 5. The activity duration; 6. Successor and predecessor relationships for each activity; 7. A clearly indicated single critical path; and 8. Projected percentage of completion, based on dollar value of the Work included in each activity as of the first day of each month. F. Provide a schedule incorporating the Schedule of Documents provided in accordance with SECTION 01 33 00 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT indicating: 1. Specific dates each document is to be delivered to the Designer. 2. Specific dates each document must be received in order to meet the proposed schedule. 3. Allow a reasonable time to review documents, taking into consideration the size and complexity of the document, other documents being processed, and other factors that may affect review time. 4. Allow time for re-submission of the each document. Contractor is responsible for delays associated with additional time required to review incomplete or erroneous Construction Progress Schedule 01 33 04 - 3 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 documents and for time lost when documents are submitted for products that do not meet Specification requirements. 1.04 SCHEDULE REVISIONS A. Revise the schedule if it appears that the schedule no longer represents the actual progress of the Work. 1. Submit a written report if the schedule indicates that the Project is more than 30 days behind schedule. The report is to include: a. Number of days behind schedule; b. Narrative description of the steps to be taken to bring the Project back on schedule; and c. Anticipated time required to bring the Project back on schedule. 2. Submit a revised schedule indicating the action that the Contractor proposes to take to bring the Project back on schedule. B. Revise the schedule to indicate any adjustments in Contract Times approved by Modification. 1. Include a revised schedule with Change Proposals if a change in Contract Times is requested. 2. OPT will deem any Change Proposal that does not have a revised schedule and request for a change in Contract Times as having no impact on the ability of the Contractor to complete the Project within the Contract Times. C. Updating the Project schedule to reflect actual progress is not considered a revision to the Project schedule. D. Applications for Payment may not be recommended for payment without a revised schedule and if required, the report indicating the Contractor’s plan for bringing the Project back on schedule. 1.05 FLOAT TIME A. Define float time as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date of a chain of activities on the construction schedule. B. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or Owner. C. Where several subsystems each have a critical path, the subsystem with the longest time of completion is the critical path and float time is to be assigned to other subsystems. D. Contract Times cannot be changed by the submission of a schedule. Contract Times can only be modified by a Change Order or Contract Amendment. E. Schedule completion date must be the same as the Contract completion date. Time between the end of construction and the Contract completion date is float time. Construction Progress Schedule 01 33 04 - 4 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Video and Photographic Documentation 01 33 05 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 01 33 05 VIDEO AND PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide a video recording of the Site prior to the beginning of construction. 1. Record the condition of all existing facilities in or abutting the construction area (right- of-way) including but not limited to streets, curb and gutter, utilities, driveways, fencing, landscaping, etc. 2. Record after construction staking is complete but prior to any clearing. 3. Provide one copy of the recording, dated and labeled to the OAR before the start of construction. Provide additional recording as directed by the OAR if the recording provided is not considered suitable for the purpose of recording pre-existing conditions. B. Furnish an adequate number of photographs of the Site to clearly depict the completed Project. 1. Provide a minimum of ten different views. 2. Photograph a panoramic view of the entire Site. 3. Photograph all significant areas of completed construction. 4. Completion photographs are not to be taken until all construction trailers, excess materials, trash, and debris have been removed. 5. Employ a professional photographer approved by the OAR to photograph the Project. 6. Provide one aerial photograph of the Site from an angle and height to include the entire Site while providing adequate detail. C. All photographs, video recordings, and a digital copy of this media are to become the property of the Owner. Photographs or recordings may not be used for publication, or public or private display without the written consent of the Owner. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide clear photographs and recordings taken with proper exposure. View photographs and recordings in the field and take new photographs or recordings immediately if photos of an adequate print quality cannot be produced or video quality is not adequate. Provide photographs with adequate quality and resolution to permit enlargements. 1.03 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Submit photographic documentation as Record Data in accordance with SECTION 01 33 00 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT. B. Submit two DVDs of the video recording as Record Data in accordance with SECTION 01 33 00 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT. Video and Photographic Documentation 01 33 05 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 PHOTOGRAPHS A. Provide photographs in digital format with a minimum resolution of 1280 x 960, accomplished without a digital zoom. B. Take photographs at locations acceptable to the OAR. C. Provide two color prints of each photograph and a digital copy on a DVD of each photograph taken. D. Identify each print on back with: 1. Project name. 2. Date, time, location, and orientation of the exposure. 3. Description of the subject of photograph. E. Submit photograph in clear plastic sheets designed for photographs. Place only one photograph in each sheet to allow the description on the back to be read without removing the photograph. F. Final photographs are to include two 8-by-10-inch glossy color prints for each of ten photographs selected by the OAR. These photographs are in addition to normal prints. 2.02 VIDEO RECORDING A. Provide digital format on DVD that can be played with Windows Media Player in common format in full screen mode. B. Identify Project on video by audio or visual means. C. Video file size should not exceed 400 MB. D. Video resolution shall be 1080p. E. The quality of the video must be sufficient to determine the existing conditions of the construction area. Camera panning must be performed while at rest, do not pan the camera while walking or driving. Camera pans should be performed at intervals sufficient to clearly view the entire construction area. F. DVD shall be labeled with construction stationing and stationing should be called out, voice recorded, in the video. G. The entire construction area recording shall be submitted at once. Sections submitted separately will not be accepted. Note to Specifier: Delete the following paragraph if Project is not a pipeline project. H. Pipeline projects should be recorded linearly from beginning to end. 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Special Procedures 01 35 00 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE A. Perform the Work as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times and in the sequence to minimize disruptions to Tennis Facility: 1. Provide Tennis Facility means of accessing courts that are not under this contract while construction is in progress. Coordinate with Tennis Pro at facilities. B. Consider the sequences, duration limitations, and governing factors outlined in this Section to prepare the schedule for the Work. C. Perform the Work not specifically described in this Section as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times. 1.02 PLAN OF ACTION A. Submit a written plan of action for approval for shutting down essential services. These include: 1. Electrical power, 2. Control power, 3. Pipelines or wastewater systems, 4. Communications equipment, and 5. Other designated functions. B. Describe the following in the plan of action: 1. Scheduled dates for construction; 2. Work to be performed; 3. Utilities, piping, or services affected; 4. Length of time the service or utility will be disturbed; 5. Procedures to be used to carry out the Work; 6. Plan of Action to handle emergencies; 7. List of manpower, equipment, and ancillary supplies; 8. Backups for key pieces of equipment and key personnel; 9. Contingency plan that will be used if the original schedule cannot be met; and C. Submit plan 2 weeks prior to beginning the Work. Special Procedures 01 35 00 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Quality Management 01 40 00 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 01 40 00 QUALITY MANAGEMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review the OPT’s Quality Management Program and prepare and submit the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan. B. Implement the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan to control the quality of the Work and verify that the Work meets the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1. Inspect products to be incorporated into the Project. Ensure that Suppliers have adequate quality control systems to ensure that products that comply with the Contract Documents are provided. 2. Integrate quality control measures into construction activities to produce Work which meets quality expectations of the Contract Documents. Inspect the Work of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers. Correct Defective Work. 3. Provide and pay for the services of an approved professional materials testing laboratory acceptable to the OPT to provide testing that demonstrates that products proposed in Shop Drawings and Record Data for the Project fully comply with the Contract Documents. 4. Provide facilities, equipment, and Samples required for quality control inspections and tests: a. Give the OAR adequate notice before proceeding with Work that would interfere with inspections or testing; b. Notify the OAR and testing laboratories prior to the time that testing is required, providing adequate lead time to allow arrangements for inspections or testing to be made; c. Do not proceed with any Work that would impact the ability to correct defects or Work that would require subsequent removal to correct defects until testing services have been performed and results of tests indicate that the Work is acceptable; d. Cooperate fully with the performance of sampling, inspection, and testing; e. Provide personnel to assist with sampling or to assist in making inspections and field tests; f. Obtain and handle Samples for testing at the Site or at the production source of the product to be tested; g. Provide adequate quantities of representative products to be tested to the laboratory at the designated locations; h. Provide facilities required to store and cure test Samples; i. Provide calibrated scales and measuring devices for the OPT’s use in performing inspections and testing; Quality Management 01 40 00 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 j. Provide adequate lighting to allow OPT observations; and k. Make Contract Documents available to testing agencies when requested. 5. Provide safe access for all inspection and testing activities, including those to be conducted as part of the OPT’s Quality Management Program. 6. Document Defective Work though Certified Test Reports and Defective Work Notices. Document that corrective actions have been taken to correct any defects and that corrected Work is in compliance with the Contract Documents. 7. Apply quality control measures to documentation provided for the Project. 8. Implement countermeasures to prevent future Defective Work. C. Perform tests as indicated in this and other Sections of the Specifications. Technical Specifications govern if any testing and inspection requirements of this Section conflict with the testing and inspection requirements of the technical Specifications. D. All verification testing is to be observed by the OAR or designated representative. E. Send test reports to the Designer. F. Provide an update on quality control activities at monthly progress meetings required by SECTION 01 31 13 PROJECT COORDINATION. G. Owner will withhold payment for Defective Work, or Work that has not been tested or inspected in accordance with the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan, the OPT’s Quality Control Program, or the Contract Documents. H. Work performed that is connected or adjacent to Defective Work or Work that would have to be removed to correct Defective Work is also considered to be Defective. Contractor is responsible for all cost with replacing any acceptable Work that must be removed, or might be damaged by corrective actions. 1.02 QUALITY MANAGEMENT ACTIVITIES BY THE OPT A. OPT will perform its own quality assurance tests independent of the Contractor’s Quality Control Program. Assist the OPT and testing organizations in performing quality assurance activities per Paragraph 1.01. B. Quality assurance testing performed by the OPT will be paid for by the Owner, except for verification testing required per Paragraph 1.07. C. Quality assurance activities of the OPT, through their own forces or through contracts with consultants and materials testing laboratories are for the purpose of monitoring the results of the Contractor’s Work to see that it is in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Quality assurance activities or non-performance of quality assurance activities by the OPT do not: 1. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to provide Work or furnish products that conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; Quality Management 01 40 00 - 3 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 3. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for damage to or loss of Work or products before OPT’s acceptance; 4. Constitute or imply OPT’s acceptance; and 5. Affect the continuing rights of the Owner after OPT’s acceptance of the completed Work. D. Work is subject to OPT’s quality assurance observations or testing at any time. Products which have been tested or inspected and approved by OPT at a supply source or staging area may be inspected or tested again by the OPT before, during or after incorporation into the Work and rejected if products do not comply with the Contract Documents. 1.03 CONTRACTOR’S USE OF OPT’S TEST REPORTS A. OPT has prepared a Quality Management Plan that describes, in general, the OPT’s anticipated quality assurance testing program for this Project. This testing program will be made available to Bidders during the bidding phase. This plan outlines only the testing in general terms and may not reflect actual testing. Actual testing will depend on the Contractors means, methods and procedures of construction which will not be known until the Contractor begins Work and submits their own Quality Control Plan for review. There is no guarantee that all testing will be performed. B. Contractor will receive copies of all test reports documenting OPT’s quality assurance activities. Contractor is entitled to rely on the accuracy of these tests results and use these as part of their quality control efforts. C. Contractor is to determine additional testing or inspections that may be required to implement the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan. Include cost for additional testing and inspections required to meet Contractors quality control obligations, including the cost for correcting Defective Work in the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal if OPT’s quality assurance testing program deviates significantly from the OPT’s Quality Management Plan, and Contractor can demonstrate that additional cost was incurred to implementing the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan resulting from these deviations. 1.04 DOCUMENTATION A. Provide documentation which includes: 1. Contractor’s Quality Management Plan that establishes the methods of assuring compliance with the Contract Documents. Submit this plan as a Shop Drawings per SECTION 01 33 02 SHOP DRAWINGS. 2. A Statement of Qualification for any proposed testing laboratories that includes a list of the engineers and technical staff that will provide testing services on the Project, descriptions of the qualifications of these individuals, list of tests that can be performed, equipment used with date of last certification, and a list of recent projects for which testing has been performed with references for those projects. 3. Provide Certified Test Reports for products to be incorporated into the Project. Provide reports to indicate that proposed products comply with the Contract Documents or indicate that proposed products do not comply with the Contract Quality Management 01 40 00 - 4 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports as part of a Shop Drawings submitted per SECTION 01 33 02 SHOP DRAWINGS. 4. Provide Certified Test Reports for inspection and testing required in this Section and in other Specification Sections. Provide reports to indicate that Work complies with the Contract Documents or indicate that Work does not comply with the Contract Documents they are not in compliance and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports on forms provided per SECTION 01 33 00 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT. 1.05 STANDARDS A. Provide testing laboratories that comply with the American Council of Independent Laboratories (ACIL) “Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifications.” B. Perform testing per recognized test procedures as listed in the various Sections of the Specifications, standards of the State Department of Highways and Public Transportation, American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), or other testing associations. Perform tests in accordance with published procedures for testing issued by these organizations. 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Handle and protect test specimens of products and construction materials at the Site in accordance with recognized test procedures. Provide facilities for storing, curing, processing test specimens as required by test standard to maintain the integrity of Samples. 1.07 VERIFICATION TESTING FOR CORRECTED DEFECTS A. Provide verification testing on Work performed to correct Defective Work to demonstrate that the Work is now in compliance with the Contract Documents. Document that Defective Work has been corrected and verify that the OAR closes the item in the Defective Work Register. B. Pay for verification testing. OPT may perform verification testing as part of their Quality Management Program and impose a Set-off to recover the cost for this testing. C. Conduct the same tests or inspections used to determine that the original Work was Defective. Different tests or methods may be used if approved by the OPT. 1.08 TEST REPORTS A. Certified Test Reports are to be prepared for all tests. 1. Tests performed by testing laboratories may be submitted on their standard test report forms if acceptable to the OPT. These reports must include the following: a. Name of the Owner, Project title and number and Contractor; b. Name of the laboratory, address, and telephone number; c. Name and signature of the laboratory personnel performing the test; d. Description of the product being sampled or tested; Quality Management 01 40 00 - 5 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 e. Date and time of sampling, inspection, and testing; f. Date the report was issued; g. Description of the test performed; h. Weather conditions and temperature at time of test or sampling; i. Location at the Site or structure where the test was taken; j. Standard or test procedure used in making the test; k. A description of the results of the test; l. Statement of compliance or non-compliance with the Contract Documents; and m. Interpretations of test results, if appropriate. 2. Submit reports on tests performed by Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers on the forms provided by the OAR. 3. OPT will prepare test reports on test performed by the OPT. B. Send test report to Designer within 24 hours of completing the test. Flag tests reports with results that do not comply with Contract Documents for immediate attention. C. Payment for Work may be withheld until test reports indicate that the Work is not Defective. 1.09 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Immediately correct any Defective Work or notify the OAR why the Work is not to be corrected immediately and when corrective action will be completed. B. No payment will be made for Defective Work. Remove Work from the Application for Payment if Work paid for on a previous Application for Payment is found to be Defective. 1.10 LIMITATION OF AUTHORITY OF THE TESTING LABORATORY A. The testing laboratory representatives are limited to providing testing services and interpreting the results of the test performed. B. The testing laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Alter the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Accept or reject any portion of the Work; 3. Perform any of the duties of the Contractor; or 4. Direct or stop the Work. 1.11 QUALITY CONTROL PLAN A. Submit the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan for approval as a Shop Drawing per SECTION 01 33 02 SHOP DRAWINGS. Use Contractor’s Quality Control Plan Checklist provided to review the document before submitting and include a copy of the completed checklist with the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan. Do not begin Work until the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan is approved. Submit an interim plan covering only the portion of Work to be Quality Management 01 40 00 - 6 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 performed if the Contractor plans to begin Work prior to submitting the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan for the Project. Do not begin Work on other parts of the Project until the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan is approved or another interim plan covering the additional Work to be started is approved. B. Provide a Contractor’s Quality Control Plan that incorporates construction operations at both the Site and production Work at remote locations and includes Work by Subcontractors and Suppliers. The Contractor’s Quality Control Plan is to include: 1. A description of the quality control organization, including an organization chart showing lines of authority to control the quality of Work; 2. Documentation describing name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and level of authority of the Quality Control Manager; 3. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of other persons assigned a quality control function; 4. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing documentation, including documentation provided by Subcontractors and Suppliers; 5. Control, verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test. Include: a. Name of tests to be performed, b. Specification paragraph requiring test, c. Parameters of Work to be tested, d. Test frequency, e. Persons responsible for each test, and f. Applicable industry testing standards and laboratory facilities to be used for the test; 6. Integrate the OPT quality assurance testing into the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan, specifically identifying the tests or inspections in Paragraph 1.11.B.5 that will be provided by the OPT as part of their Quality Management Program; 7. Procedures for tracking and documenting quality management efforts. 8. Procedures for tracking Defective Work from initial identification through acceptable corrective action. Indicate how documentation of the verification process for deficiencies will be made. 9. Reporting procedures which incorporate the use of forms provided by the OAR. 10. The name of the proposed testing laboratories along with documentation of qualifications per Paragraph 1.04. C. The Quality Control Manager must have authority to reject Defective Work and redirect the efforts of the Contractor’s Team to prevent or correct Defective Work. D. Notify the Designer of any changes to the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan or quality control personnel. Quality Management 01 40 00 - 7 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 E. Meet with the OPT 7 days after Contractor’s Quality Control Plan is submitted and before start of construction to discuss the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan and expedite its approval. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 IMPLEMENT CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL PLAN A. Perform quality control observations and testing as required in each Section of the Specifications and where indicated on the Drawings. B. Includes the following phases for each definable Work task. A definable Work task is one which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate control requirements, may be provided by different trades or disciplines, or may be Work by the same trade in a different environment. 1. Planning Phase: Perform the following before beginning each definable Work task: a. Review the Contract Drawings. b. Review documents and determine that they are complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. c. Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved. d. Examine the work area to assure that all required preliminary Work has been completed and complies with the Contract Documents. e. Examine required materials, equipment, and Sample Work to assure that they are on hand, conform to Shop Drawings and Record Data, and are properly stored. f. Review requirements for quality control inspection and testing. g. Discuss procedures for controlling quality of the Work. Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for the Work task. h. Check that the portion of the plan for the Work to be performed incorporates document review comments. i. Discuss results of planning phase with the OAR. Conduct a meeting attended by the Quality Control Manager, the OAR, superintendent, other quality control personnel as applicable, and the foreman responsible for the Work task. Instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions by separate meeting minutes prepared by the Quality Control Manager and attached to the quality control report. j. Do not move to the next phase unless results of investigations required for the planning phase indicate that requirements have been met. Quality Management 01 40 00 - 8 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 2. Work Phase: Complete this phase after the Planning Phase: a. Notify the OAR at least 24 hours in advance of beginning the Work and discuss the review of the planning effort to indicate that requirements have been met. b. Check the Work to ensure that it is in full compliance with the Contract Documents. c. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full compliance with Contract Documents. Verify required control inspection and testing is performed. d. Verify that established levels of workmanship meet acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required Sample panels as appropriate. e. Repeat the Work phase for each new crew to work on-site, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met. 3. Follow-up Phase: Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements: a. Make checks daily and record observations in the quality control documentation. b. Conduct follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional Work tasks that may be affected by the Defective Work. Do not build upon nor conceal Defective Work. c. Conduct a review of the Work one month prior to the expiration of the correction period prescribed in the General Conditions with the OPT. Correct defects as noted during the review. C. Conduct additional planning and Work phases if: 1. The quality of on-going Work is unacceptable; 2. Changes are made in applicable quality control staff, on-site production supervision or crews; 3. Work on a task is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity; or 4. Other quality problems develop. END OF SECTION Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide temporary facilities, including OPT’s field office and the Contractor’s field offices, storage sheds, and temporary utilities needed to complete the Work. B. Install and maintain temporary Project identification signs. Provide temporary on-site informational signs to identify key elements of the construction facilities. Do not allow other signs to be displayed. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide a total electrical heating and cooling system for the OPT’s field office capable of maintaining the following conditions: 1. Heating: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 10 degrees ambient. 2. Cooling: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 105 degrees ambient. 3. Relative humidity: 48 to 54 percent. B. Inspect and test each service before placing temporary utilities in use. Arrange for all required inspections and tests by regulatory agencies, and obtain required certifications and permits for use. 1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Arrange transportation, loading, and handling of temporary buildings and sheds. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Locate buildings and sheds at the Site as indicated or as approved by the OPT. B. Prepare the Site by removing trees, brush, or debris and performing demolition or grubbing needed to clear a space adequate for the structures. C. Pay for the utilities used by temporary facilities during construction. D. Provide each temporary service and facility ready for use at each location when the service or facility is first needed to avoid delay in the performance of the Work. Provide OPT’s field office complete and ready for occupancy and use within 7 days of the Notice to Proceed. E. Maintain, expand as required, and modify temporary services and facilities as needed throughout the progress of the Work. F. Remove services and facilities when approved by the OAR. G. Operate temporary facilities in a safe and efficient manner. 1. Restrict loads on temporary services or facilities to within their designed or designated capacities. 2. Provide sanitary conditions. Prevent public nuisance or hazardous conditions from developing or existing at the Site. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 3. Prevent freezing of pipes, flooding, or the contamination of water. 4. Maintain Site security and protection of the facilities. 1.05 OPTIONS A. Construction offices may be prefabricated buildings on skids or mobile trailers. B. Storage sheds may be prefabricated buildings on skids or truck trailers. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES A. A field office is not required for this project. The Contractor however may bring to site a field office at their own cost if they so choose to do so. Contractor will be responsible for all cost associated with a field office including installation and utilities. 2.02 TEMPORARY STORAGE BUILDINGS A. Furnish storage buildings of adequate size to store any materials or equipment delivered to the Site that might be affected by weather. 2.03 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide sanitary facilities at the Site from the commencement of the Project until Project conclusion. Maintain these facilities in a clean and sanitary condition at all times, and comply with the requirements of the local health authority. On large sites, provide portable toilets at such locations that no point in the Site shall be more than 600 feet from a toilet. B. Use these sanitary facilities. Do not use restrooms within existing or Owner-occupied buildings. 2.04 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide heating devices needed to protect buildings during construction. Provide fuel needed to operate the heating devices and attend the heating devices at all times they are in operation, including overnight operations. 2.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide the temporary utilities for administration, construction, testing, disinfection, and start-up of the Work, including electrical power, water, and telephone. Pay all costs associated with furnishing temporary utilities. 1. Provide a source of temporary electrical power of adequate size for construction procedures. a. Use existing power systems where spare capacity is available. Provide temporary power connections that do not adversely affect the existing power supply. Submit connections to the OAR for approval prior to installation. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 3 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 b. Provide electrical pole and service connections that comply with Laws and Regulations and the requirements of the power company. 2. Provide telephone service to the Site and install telephones inside the Contractor’s and the OPT’s field office. 2.06 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Provide temporary water. Potable water may be purchased from the Owner by obtaining a water meter from the Owner and transporting water from a water hydrant. Non-potable water may be used for hydraulic testing of non-potable basins or pipelines. Include the cost of water in the Contract Price. B. Contractor must comply with the City of Corpus Christi’s Water Conservation and Drought Contingency Plan as amended (the “Plan”). This includes implementing water conservation measures established for changing conditions. The City Engineer will provide a copy of the Plan to Contractor at the pre-construction meeting. The Contractor will keep a copy of the Plan on the Site throughout construction. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 LOCATION OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Locate temporary facilities in areas approved by the OAR. Construct and install signs at locations approved by the OAR. Install informational signs so they are clearly visible. 3.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS A. The Owner will furnish two Project signs to be installed by the Contractor. The signs must be installed before construction begins and will be maintained throughout the Project period by the Contractor. The locations of the signs will be determined in the field by the OAR. 3.03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide temporary lighting inside buildings once buildings are weatherproof. B. Provide lighting that is adequate to perform Work within any space. Temporary lights may be removed once the permanent lighting is in service. C. Provide portable flood lights at any time that Work will be performed outside the structure at night. Provide adequate lighting at any location Work is being performed. 3.04 DRINKING WATER A. Provide all field offices with potable water. Provide a dispenser and cooling apparatus if bottled drinking water is provided. B. Pay for water services and maintain daily. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 4 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 3.05 CONSTRUCTION FENCE A. Install and maintain a construction fence around the Site and off-site storage yards. Fence must be a minimum 6 feet high chain link construction unless shown otherwise. Provide gates with padlocks. 3.06 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Remove temporary buildings, sheds, and utilities at the conclusion of the Project and restore the Site to original condition or finished in accordance with the Drawings. B. Remove informational signs upon completion of construction. C. Remove Project identification signs, framing, supports, and foundations upon completion of the Project. 3.07 MAINTENANCE AND JANITORIAL SERVICE A. Provide janitorial service (sweeping/mopping) for the OPT’s field office on a weekly basis or as requested. Empty trash receptacles daily or as needed. B. Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition. Repair damage to structures, framings, or signs. C. Repair any damage to Work caused by placement or removal of temporary signage. D. Service, maintain, and replace, if necessary, the OPT’s field office computer equipment throughout the Project as required by the OPT including replacement cartridges for all office equipment. END OF SECTION Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. B. Construct temporary impounding works, channels, diversions, furnishing and operation of pumps, installing piping and fittings, and other construction for control of conditions at the Site. Remove temporary controls at the end of the Project. C. Provide a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) as required by Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) General Permit No. TXR150000 for stormwater discharges from construction activities. Comply with all requirements of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) and Laws and Regulations. File required legal notices and obtain required permits prior to beginning any construction activity. D. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to prevent stormwater pollution for the duration of the Project. Provide and maintain erosion and sediment control structures as required to preventive sediment and other pollutants from the Site from entering any stormwater system including open channels. Remove pollution control structures when no longer required to prevent stormwater pollution. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct and maintain temporary controls with adequate workmanship using durable materials to provide effective environmental management systems meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations. Use materials that require minimal maintenance to prevent disruption of construction activities while providing adequate protection of the environment. B. Periodically inspect systems to determine that they are meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.03 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Provide documents requiring approval by the OPT as Shop Drawings in accordance with SECTION 01 33 02 SHOP DRAWINGS. B. Provide copies of notices, records, and reports required by the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations as Record Data in accordance with SECTION 01 33 03 RECORD DATA. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Provide a SWPPP that complies with all requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. B. Perform Work to comply with the City of Corpus Christi Code of Ordinances, Part III, Chapter 14, Article X - titled “STORM WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLANS” and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 1.05 PERMITS A. Submit the following to the TCEQ and the Operator of any Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) receiving stormwater discharges from the Site: 1. Notice of Intent (NOI) at least 48 hours prior to beginning construction activity. Construction activity may commence 24 hours after the submittal of an electronic NOI. 2. Notice of Change (NOC) letter when relevant facts or incorrect information was submitted in the NOI, or if relevant information in the NOI changes during the course of construction activity. 3. Notice of Termination (NOT) when the construction Project has been completed and stabilized. B. Post a copy of the NOI at the Site in a location where it is readily available for viewing by the general public and as required by Laws and Regulations prior to starting construction activities and maintain the posting until completion of the construction activities. C. Maintain copies of a schedule of major construction activities, inspection reports, and revision documentation with the SWPPP. 1.06 STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL A. Comply with the current requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 as set forth by the TCEQ for the duration of the Project: 1. Develop a SWPPP meeting all requirements of the TPDES General Permit. 2. Submit of a Notice of Intent to the TCEQ. 3. Develop and implement appropriate Best Management Practices as established by local agencies of jurisdiction. 4. Provide all monitoring and/or sampling required for reporting to the TCEQ. 5. Submit reports to the TCEQ as required as a condition of the TPDES General Permit. 6. Submit copies of the reports to the Designer as Record Data in accordance with SECTION 01 33 03 RECORD DATA. 7. Retain copies of these documents at the Site at all times for review and inspection by the OPT or regulatory agencies. Post a copy of the permit as required by Laws and Regulations. 8. Assume sole responsibility for implementing, updating, and modifying the TPDES General Permit per Laws and Regulations for the SWPPP and Best Management Practices. B. Use forms required by the TCEQ to file the Notice of Intent. Submit the Notice of Intent at least 2 days prior to the start of construction. Develop the SWPPP prior to submitting the Notice of Intent. Provide draft copies of the Notice of Intent, SWPPP, and any other pertinent TCEQ submittal documents to Owner for review prior to submittal to the TCEQ. C. Return any property disturbed by construction activities to either specified conditions or pre-construction conditions as set forth in the Contract Documents. Provide an overall erosion and sedimentation control system that will protect all undisturbed areas and soil Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 3 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 stockpiles/spoil areas. Implement appropriate Best Management Practices and techniques to control erosion and sedimentation and maintain these practices and techniques in effective operating condition during construction. Permanently stabilize exposed soil and fill as soon as practical during the Work. D. Assume sole responsibility for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures for furnishing, installing, and maintaining erosion and sedimentation control structures and procedures and overall compliance with the TPDES General Permit. Modify the system as required to effectively control erosion and sediment. E. Retain copies of reports required by the TPDES General Permit for 3 years from date of Final Completion. 1.07 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Prevent the contamination of soil, water, or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. Provide adequate measures to prevent the creation of noxious air-borne pollutants. Prevent dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. Do not dump or otherwise discharge noxious or harmful fluids into drains or sewers, nor allow noxious liquids to contaminate public waterways in any manner. B. Provide equipment and personnel and perform emergency measures necessary to contain any spillage. 1. Contain chemicals in protective areas and do not dump on soil. Dispose of such materials at off-site locations in an acceptable manner. 2. Excavate contaminated soil and dispose at an off-site location if contamination of the soil does occur. Fill resulting excavations with suitable backfill and compact to the density of the surrounding undisturbed soil. 3. Provide documentation to the Owner which states the nature and strength of the contaminant, method of disposal, and the location of the disposal site. 4. Comply with Laws and Regulations regarding the disposal of pollutants. C. Groundwater or run-off water which has come into contact with noxious chemicals, sludge, or sludge-contaminated soil is considered contaminated. Contaminated water must not be allowed to enter streams or water courses, leave the Site in a non-contained form, or enter non-contaminated areas of the Site. 1. Pump contaminated water to holding ponds constructed by the Contractor for this purpose, or discharge to areas on the interior of the Site, as designated by the OAR. 2. Construct temporary earthen dikes or take other precautions and measures as required to contain the contaminated water and pump to a designated storage area. 3. Wash any equipment used for handling contaminated water or soil within contaminated areas three times with uncontaminated water prior to using such equipment in an uncontaminated area. Dispose of wash water used to wash such equipment as contaminated water. Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 4 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 1.08 EARTH CONTROL A. Remove excess soil, spoil materials, and other earth not required for backfill at the time of generation. Control stockpiled materials to eliminate interference with Contractor and Owner’s operations. B. Dispose of excess earth off the Site. Provide written approval from the property owner for soils deposited on private property. Obtain approval of the Owner if this disposal impacts the use of Site or other easements. 1.09 OZONE ADVISORY DAYS A. N/A 1.10 MANAGEMENT OF WATER A. Manage water resulting from rains or ground water at the Site. Maintain trenches and excavations free of water at all times. B. Lower the water table in the construction area by acceptable means if necessary to maintain a dry and workable condition at all times. Provide drains, sumps, casings, well points, and other water control devices as necessary to remove excess water. C. Provide continuous operation of water management actions. Maintain standby equipment to provide proper and continuous operation for water management. D. Ensure that water drainage does not damage adjacent property. Divert water into the same natural watercourse in which its headwaters are located, or other natural stream or waterway as approved by the Owner. Assume responsibility for the discharge of water from the Site. E. Remove the temporary construction and restore the Site in a manner acceptable to the OAR and to match surrounding material at the conclusion of the Work. 1.11 DEWATERING A. N/A 1.12 DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINATED GROUNDWATER A. N/A 1.13 DISPOSAL OF HIGHLY CHLORINATED WATER A. N/A 1.14 WINDSTORM CERTIFICATION A. All affected materials and installation shall comply with Texas Department of Insurance Requirements for windstorm resistant construction for design wind speed as required by Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 5 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 IBC 2009. The project structural engineer is to perform all inspections and provide documentation for windstorm certification to the Texas Board of Insurance. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary design/assembly documentation for all new windows, doors, louvers, etc. to the windstorm engineer/inspectors required to conform with the requirements of the Texas Department of Insurance. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials that comply with Laws and Regulations. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTING, MAINTAINING AND REMOVING TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Construct temporary controls in accordance with Laws and Regulations. B. Maintain controls in accordance with regulatory requirements where applicable, or in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Remove temporary controls when no longer required, but before the Project is complete. Correct any damage or pollution that occurs as the result of removing controls while they are still required. END OF SECTION Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 1 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Comply with requirements of the General Conditions and specified administrative procedures in closing out the Contract. 1.02 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Submit certifications and releases on forms provided. 1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Notify the Designer that the Work or a designated portion of the Work is substantially complete per the General Conditions. Include a list of the items remaining to be completed or corrected before the Project will be considered to be complete. B. OPT will visit the Site to observe the Work within a reasonable time after notification is received to determine the status of the Project. C. Designer will notify the Contractor that the Work is either substantially complete or that additional Work must be performed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 1. Designer will notify the Contractor of items that must be completed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 2. Correct the noted deficiencies in the Work. 3. Notify the Designer when the items of Work in the Designer’s notice have been completed. 4. OPT will revisit the Site and repeat the process. 5. Designer will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion to the Contractor when the OPT considers the Project to be substantially complete. The Certificate will include a tentative list of items to be corrected before Final Payment will be recommended. 6. Review the list and notify the Designer of any objections to items on the list within 10 days after receiving the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 1.04 FINAL INSPECTION A. Notify the Designer when: 1. Work has been completed in compliance with the Contract Documents; 2. Equipment and systems have been tested per Contract Documents and are fully operational; 3. Final Operations and Maintenance Manuals have been provided to the Owner and all operator training has been completed; 4. Specified spare parts and special tools have been provided; and Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 2 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 5. Work is complete and ready for final inspection. B. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and ready for Final Payment within a reasonable time after the notice is received. C. Designer will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. D. Take immediate steps to correct Defective Work. Notify the Designer when Defective Work has corrected. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and the Work is acceptable. Designer will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. E. Submit the Request for Final Payment with the closeout documents described in Paragraph 1.06 if notified that the Project is complete and the Work is acceptable. 1.05 REINSPECTION FEES A. Owner may impose a Set-off against the Application for Payment in accordance with the General Conditions to compensate the OPT for additional visits to the Project if additional Work is required. 1.06 CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS SUBMITTAL A. Record Documents per SECTION 01 31 13 PROJECT COORDINATION. B. Warranties and bonds. C. Equipment installation reports on equipment. D. Shop Drawings, Record Data, and other documents as required by the Contract Documents. E. Evidence of continuing insurance and bond coverage as required by the Contract Documents. F. Final Photographs per SECTION 01 33 05 VIDEO AND PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION. 1.07 TRANSFER OF UTILITIES A. Transfer utilities to the Owner when the Certificate of Substantial Completion has been issued and the Work has been occupied by the Owner. B. Submit final meter readings for utilities and similar data as of the date the Owner occupied the Work. 1.08 WARRANTIES, BONDS, AND SERVICES AGREEMENTS A. Provide warranties, bonds, and service agreements required by SECTION 01 33 02 SHOP DRAWINGS or by the individual Specification Sections. B. The date for the start of warranties, bonds, and service agreements is established per the General Conditions. C. Compile warranties, bonds, and service agreements and review these documents for compliance with the Contract Documents. Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 3 HEB & Al Kruse Tennis Centers (Bond 2012) – Project Number: E12118 RE-BID PACKAGE 11-25-2013 1. Provide a log of all equipment covered under the 1 year correction period specified in the General Conditions and all products for which special or extended warranties or guarantees are provided. Index the log by Specification Section number on forms provided. Include items 2.e through 2.g below in the tabulation. 2. Provide a copy of specific warranties or guarantees under a tab indexed to the log. Each document is to include: a. A description of the product or Work item; b. The firm name, with the name of the principal, address, and telephone number; c. Signature of the respective Supplier or Subcontractor to acknowledge existence of the warranty obligation for extended warranties and service agreements; d. Scope of warranty, bond, or services agreement; e. Indicate the start date for the correction period specified in the General Conditions for each product and the date on which the specified correction period expires. f. Indicate the start date for extended warranties for each product and the date on which the specified extended warranties period expires. g. Start date, warranty or guarantee period, and expiration date for each warranty bond and service agreement; h. Procedures to be followed in the event of a failure; and i. Specific instances that might invalidate the warranty or bond. D. Submit digital copies of the documents to the Designer for review. E. Submit warranties, bonds and services agreements within 10 days after equipment or components placed in service. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Section 01605 Page 1 of 4 SECTION 01605 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 1.1.1 Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1 - General Requirements of the Specifications apply to this work. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES: 1.2.1 General Requirements for product options and substitution procedures. 1.3 RELATED WORK: 1.3.1 Related Work of Other Sections: 1.3.1.1 Section 01010 - Summary of Work. 1.3.1.2 Section 01340 - Submittals. 1.3.1.4 Section 01600 - Material and Equipment. 1.3.1.5 Section 01700 - Project Closeout. 1.4 General: 1.4.1 In addition to General Conditions, Article V, paragraphs 5.13 and 5.14, comply with product option and substitution requirements specified in this Section. 1.5 MATERIAL AND PRODUCT OPTIONS: 1.5.1 Materials and Products Specified by Reference Standards, by Performance, or by Description Only: Any product meeting specified requirements. 1.5.2 Materials and Products Specified by Naming Products of One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for an Equivalent Product: Submit one of the products listed which complies with specified requirements or submit a request for substitution for a product of manufacturer not specifically named which complies with specified requirements. 1.5.3 Materials and Products Specified by Naming Products of Several Manufacturers Meeting Specifications: Submit one of the products listed which complies with specified requirements or submit a request for substitution for a product of manufacturer not specifically named which complies with specified requirements. Section 01605 Page 2 of 4 1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS: 1.6.1 Within thirty (30) days after date of Owner's Notice to Proceed, A/E will consider requests from Contractor for substitutions. Subsequently, substitutions will be considered only when a material or product becomes unavailable due to no fault of Contractor and as follows: 1.6.1.1 Lockouts. 1.6.1.2 Strikes. 1.6.1.3 Bankruptcy. 1.6.1.4 Discontinuation of product. 1.6.1.5 Proven shortage. 1.6.1.6 Other similar occurrences. 1.6.2 Each proposed substitution of materials or products for that specified is a representation by Contractor that it has personally investigated the substitution and determined that the proposed substitution is equivalent or superior to that specified in quality, durability and serviceability, design, appearance, function, finish, performance, and of size and weight which will permit installation in spaces provided and allow adequate service access. Additionally, Contractor agrees that it will provide and do the following: 1.6.2.1 Same warranty for substitution as for specified product or material. 1.6.2.2 Coordinate installation and make other changes which may be required for Work to be complete in all respects. 1.6.2.3 Waive claims for additional costs which may subsequently become apparent. 1.6.2.4 Verify that proposed materials and products comply with applicable building codes and governing regulations and, where applicable, has approval of governing authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6.3 A/E will review requests from Contractor for substitutions with Owner. Do not purchase or install substitute materials and products without written approval. A/E will give written notice to Contractor of acceptance or rejection within a reasonable time. 1.6.4 Document each request for substitution with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. As appropriate include: 1.6.4.1 Reason for the proposed substitution. 1.6.4.2 Change in Contract Sum and Contract Time, if any. 1.6.4.3 Effect on Construction Progress Schedule and completion date. 1.6.4.4 Changes in details and construction of related work required due to substitution. Section 01605 Page 3 of 4 1.6.4.5 Drawings and samples. 1.6.4.6 Product identification and description. 1.6.4.7 Performance and test data. 1.6.4.8 Itemized comparison of the qualities of the proposed substitution to the product specified including durability, serviceability, design, appearance, function, finish, performance, size, and space limitations, vibration, noise, and weight. 1.6.4.9 Availability of maintenance service, source and interchangeability of parts or components. 1.6.4.10 Additional information as requested. 1.7 In the event of credit change in the cost, the Owner shall receive all benefit of the reduction in cost of the proposed substitution. Credit shall be established prior to final approval of the proposed substitution and will be adjusted by Change Order. 1.8 Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without separate written request, without having been reviewed and approved by Contractor, or when acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents without additional compensation to A/E. 1.9 In the event that the Contractor or subcontractor has neglected to place an order for specified materials and products to meet the Construction Progress Schedule, specified requirements, color schemes, or other similar provisions, such failure or neglect shall not be considered legitimate grounds for an extension of completion time nor shall arbitrary substitutions be considered to meet completion date. 1.10 Only one request for substitutions will be considered for each product. When substitutions are not accepted, provide specified product. 1.11 Should substitution be accepted, and substitution subsequently is defective or otherwise unsatisfactory, replace defective material with specified material at no cost to Owner. 1.7 COORDINATION: 1.7.1 When a specified, optional, specified by reference standard, or proposed substitution item of equipment or material is submitted which requires minor changes or additions to the designed structure, finishes or to mechanical and/or electrical services due to its requirements being different from those shown on the Contract Documents, itemize the changes required and attach to submittal. Do not proceed with changes without approval in writing from the Architect. Section 01605 Page 4 of 4 1.7.2 Contractor shall make adjustments and changes required to coordinate work for installation of optional materials and products, approved substitutions and materials and products specified by reference standards without additional costs to Owner or Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED. PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED. END OF SECTION Section 02120 Page 1 of 3 SECTION 02120 CHAINLINK FENCE PART 1 SCOPE Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment and perform all work for the repairing of existing fences as required and applicable to complete the project in a first class manner. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 Fabric: Chain Link Fabric shall be #9 ga. and have a uniform square mesh measuring approximately 1-3/4" between its parallel sides. It shall be zinc-coated by the hot-dip process after fabrication. The weight of zinc-coating shall not be less than 1.2 ounces per square foot of actual surface area. The zinc used for the coating shall conform to the grades specified in ASTM Designation 136 Standard Specification for Slab Zinc. Knuckle bottom wires and hold off finish surface minimum 3/4". 2.2 Rails 2.2.1 Top Rail: The fence shall have a top rail for its full length, constructed of standard hot-dip galvanized pipe, 1-5/8" o.d. weighing 2.27 lbs. per linear foot and is to be provided with outside sleeve type couplings not less than 6" long, with .070 minimum wall thickness. 2.2.2 Mid-Rail: Shall be continuous for its full length, at approximately 5' high, constructed of standard hot-dip galvanized pipe, 1-5/8" o.d., weighing 2.27 lbs. per linear foot and provided with outside sleeve type couplings not less than 6" long, with .070 minimum wall thickness. 2.2.3 Bottom Rail: Shall be continuous for its full length, constructed of standard hot-dip galvanized pipe, 1-5/8" o.d., weighing 2.27 lbs. per linear foot and provided with outside sleeve type couplings not less than 6" long, with .070 minimum wall thickness. 2.3 Line Post: Line post shall be 4" o.d., hot-dip galvanized pipe, weighing 9.1 lbs. per linear foot, of sufficient length to allow for installation to a depth of approximately 3' below ground level in a 12" diameter hole filled with concrete having a minimum compressive strength of 2500 p.s.i. at 28 days. 2.4 Post tops shall be ornamental. Top shall be provided with a hole suitable for the through passage of top rail. The post tops shall fit over the outside of post and shall exclude moisture from tubular post. 2.5 Post shall be set in line of fence not to exceed 10' on centers. Section 02120 Page 2 of 3 2.6 Terminal Post; End, corner, gate and pull post shall be 4" o.d. hot-dip galvanized standard weight pipe weighing 9.1 lbs. per linear foot, of sufficient length to allow for installation to a depth of approximately 48" below ground level in a 12" diameter hole filled with concrete having a minimum compressive strength of 2500 p.s.i. at 28 days. 2.7 Gates: Gates shall be swing type complete with latches, stops, keepers, hinges and provision for pad locking. 2.7.1 Gate frames shall be constructed of 2" o.d. pipe, welded into a one-piece unit, welds to be chipped and painted with a zinc base paint. 2.7.2 Fabric shall be the same type as used in the fence construction. The fabric shall be attached securely to the gate frame at intervals not exceeding 15 inches. 2.7.3 Hinges shall be of adequate strength for gate, and with large bearing surfaces for clamping in position. The hinges shall not twist or turn under action of the gate. The gates shall be capable of being opened and closed easily by one person. 2.7.4 Latches, stops and keepers shall be provided for all gates. Forked latches shall be provided and arranged for locking. Keeper shall consist of a mechanical device for securing the free end of the gate when in the full open position. 2.8 All pipe shall be Schedule 40, ASTM A-120 galvanized pipe. PART 3 DETAILS 3.1 All materials and workmanship shall be of first class in every respect, shall be done in a neat, workmanlike manner. 3.2 Line post shall be spaced at intervals not to exceed 10'-0" when measured center to center between terminal post. In general, in determining the post spacing, measurement will be made parallel to the slope of the natural ground, and all post shall be placed in a vertical position except where designated by the Owner or the representative of the Owner. 3.3 All posts shall be set in holes 12" in diameter. After the post has been set and plumbed, the hole shall be filled with 2500 psi concrete. The exposed surface of the concrete shall be crowned to shed water. Section 02120 Page 3 of 3 3.4 End, corner, gate and pull post shall be set as shown herein fore. All changes in direction of fence line of 30 degrees or more shall be considered as corners. 3.5 Fabric shall be placed on inside face of post. The fabric shall be stretched taut approximately 1" above the ground, and securely fastened to the post. The fabric shall be cut and each span shall be attached independently at all terminal posts. Fastening to terminal posts shall be with stretcher bars and fabric bands spaced at maximum 15" intervals. Fastening to line posts shall be with tie wire, metal bands, or other approved method, attached at maximum 15" intervals. The top edge of the fabric shall be fastened to the top rail with wire ties at intervals not exceeding 18". The bottom edge of fabric shall be fastened to the bottom tension wire with wire ties not exceeding 24". Rolls of wire fabric shall be joined by weaving a single strand into the ends of the coils to form a continuous mesh. END OF SECTION 02120 Page 1 of 1 SECTION 02120 SITE CLEARING AND STRIPPING 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for clearing, grubbing, and stripping of objectionable matter as required to complete the project and shall include removing and disposing of trees, stumps, brush, roots, vegetation, rubbish and other objectionable matter from the project site. 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS The site shall be cleared of all trees, stumps, brush, roots, vegetation, rubble and other objectionable matter as indicated on drawings and/or as directed by the Engineer. Tree stumps and roots shall be grubbed to a minimum depth of 2 feet below natural ground. Areas, which underlie compacted backfill, shall be stripped of all vegetation, humus and other objectionable matter encountered within the top 6" of the soil. All material removed from site under this operation shall become the Contractor's responsibility. The material shall be disposed of either at a disposal site indicated on the drawings or at a site obtained by the Contractor. 3. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT Unless indicated otherwise in the Proposal, site clearing shall not be measured for pay, but shall be considered subsidiary to the project. 02140 Page 1 of 1 SECTION 02140 SITE GRADING 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for backfill and grading of the site to complete the project. 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Prior to site grading, the site shall be cleared in accordance with Standard Specification Section 02120 (Site Clearing and Stripping). Unless specified otherwise on drawings, the existing surface shall be loosened by scarifying or plowing to a depth of not less than 6 inches. The loosened material shall be recompacted with fill. Fill shall be uniform as to material, density, and moisture content. Fill shall be free of large clods, large rocks, organic matter, and other objectionable material. No fill, that is placed by dumping in a pile or windrow, shall be incorporated into a layer in that position; all such piles and windrows shall be moved by blading or similar method. All fill shall be placed in layers approximately parallel to the finish grade and in layers not in excess of 6 inches of uncompacted depth, unless indicated otherwise on drawings. The fill shall be compacted to a density which approximates that of natural ground unless indicated otherwise on drawings. The Engineer may order test rolling to evaluate the uniformity of compaction. All irregularities, depressions, and soft spots which develop shall be corrected by the Contractor. Excess material from excavation, that is not incorporated into the site as fill, shall be become property of the Contractor and disposed of away from the job site, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. 3. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT Unless indicated otherwise in the Proposal, Site Grading shall not be measured for pay, but shall be considered subsidiary to the project. 02180 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 02180 REMOVING OLD STRUCTURES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall provide for the removal and disposal of old structures or portions of old structures, as noted on the plans, and shall include all excavation and backfilling necessary to complete the removal. The work shall be done in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. 2. METHOD OF REMOVAL Culverts or Sewers. Pipe shall be removed by careful excavation of all dirt on top and the sides in such manner that the pipe will not be damaged. Removal of sewer appurtenances shall be included for removal with the pipe. Those pipes, which are deemed unsatisfactory for reuse by the Engineer, may be removed in any manner the Contractor may select. Concrete Structures. Unwanted Concrete structures or concrete portions of structures shall be removed. The unwanted structure shall be removed to the lines and dimensions shown on the plans, and these materials shall be disposed of as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. Any portion of the existing structure, outside of the limits designated for removal, damaged during the operations of the Contractor shall be restored to its original condition at his entire expense. Explosives shall not be used in the removal of portions of the existing structure unless approved by the Engineer, in writing. Concrete portions of structures below the permanent ground line, which will not interfere in any manner with the proposed construction, may be left in place, but removal shall be carried at least 5 feet below the permanent ground line and neatly squared off. Reinforcement shall be cut off close to the concrete. Backfill and compact in one-foot lifts and to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor. Steel Structures. Steel structures or steel portions of structures shall be dismantled in sections as determined by the Engineer. The sections shall be stored, if the members are to be reused. Rivets and bolts connecting steel railing members, steel beams of beam spans and steel stringers of truss spans shall be removed by butting the heads with a "cold cut" and punching or drilling from the hole, or by such other method as will not injure the members for re-use and will meet the approval of the Engineer. The removal of rivets and bolts from connections of truss members, bracing members, and other similar members in the structure will not be required unless specifically called for on the plans or special provisions and the Contractor shall have the option of dismantling these members by flame-cutting the members immediately adjacent to the connections. Flame Cutting will not be permitted, however, when plans or special provisions call for the structure unit to be salvaged in such manner as to permit re-erection. In such case, all members shall be carefully matchmarked with paint in accordance with diagram furnished by the Engineer prior to dismantling and all rivets and bolts shall be removed from the connections in the manner specified in the first portion of this paragraph. Tim ber Structures Timber structures or timber portions of structures to be reused shall be removed in such manner as to damage the timber for further use as little as possible. All bolts and nails shall be removed from such lumber as deemed salvable by the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, timber piles shall be either pulled or cut off at the point not less than 2 feet below ground line, with the choice between these two methods resting with the Contractor, unless otherwise specified. Brick or Stone Structures. Unwanted brick or stone structures or stone portions of structures shall be removed. Portions of such structures below the permanent ground line, which will not in any manner 02180 Page 2 of 2 interfere with the proposed construction, may be left in place, but removal shall be carried at least 5 feet below the permanent ground line and neatly squared off. Backfill and compact in one-foot lifts and to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor. Salvage. All material such as pipe, timbers, railings, etc., which the Engineer deems as salvable for reuse, and all salvaged structural steel shall be delivered to a designated storage area. The I-beams, stringers, etc., which are specified to be dismantled without damage for reuse, and all steel members when matchmarked and dismantled for reuse, shall be blocked off the ground in an upright position to protect the members against further damage. Materials, other than structural steel, which are not deemed salvable by the Engineer, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed to suitable disposal sites off of the right-of-way arranged for by the Contractor, or otherwise disposed of in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. Where temporary structures are necessary for a detour adjacent to the present structure, the Contractor will be permitted to use the material in the old structure for the detour structure, but he shall dismantle and stack or dispose of the material as required above as soon as the new structure is opened for traffic. Backfill. All excavation made in connection with this specification and all openings below the natural ground line caused by the removal of old structures or portions thereof shall be backfilled to the level of the original ground line, unless otherwise provided on the plans. That portion of the backfill, which will support any portion of the roadbed or embankment, shall be placed in layers of the same depth as those required for placing embankment. Material in each layer shall be wetted uniformly, if required, and shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor. In places inaccessible to blading and rolling equipment, mechanical or hand tamps or rammers shall be used to obtain the required compaction. That portion of the backfill which will not support any portion of the roadbed or embankment shall be placed as directed by the Engineer in such manner and to such state of compaction as will preclude objectionable amount of settlement. 3. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT Unless indicated otherwise in the Proposal, this work shall not be measured for pay but shall be subsidiary to the project. 02210 Page 1 of 1 SECTION 02210 SELECT MATERIAL 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the use of select material to be used to treat designated sections of roadways, embankments, trenches, etc. Select material shall be a mixture of sand and clay or other suitable granular material. The material shall be free from vegetation, debris and clay lumps. That portion of the select material passing a 40-mesh sieve shall have a liquid limit of 45 maximum, a plasticity index range from 6 to 13, and a calculated linear shrinkage of 8.5 maximum. 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Select material shall be mixed uniformly and placed in layers not to exceed 6" loose depth. The material shall be brought to the wet side of optimum moisture content and compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor Density or as specified on the drawings. Each layer shall be complete before the succeeding layer is placed. The finished surface of the select material shall conform to the grade and section shown on the plans. 3. MEASUREM ENT & PAYMENT Unless indicated otherwise in the Proposal, select material shall not be measured for pay, but shall be subsidiary to the appropriate bid item. 02220 Page 1 of 3 SECTION 02220 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES AND SEWERS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for excavation and backfill for utilities and sewers required to complete the project. 2. CONSTRUCTION (1) Unless otherwise specified on the plans or permitted by the Engineer, all sewers, pipe, and conduit shall be constructed in open cut trenches with vertical sides. Trenches shall be sheathed and braced as necessary throughout the construction period. Sheathing and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor (Section 02222). Trenches shall have a maximum width of one foot beyond the horizontal projection of the outside surfaces of the pipe and parallel thereto on each side unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall not have more the 200 feet of open trench left behind the trenching operation and no more then 500 feet of ditch behind the ditching machine that is not compacted as required by the plans and specification. No trench or excavation shall remain open after working hours. For all utility conduit and sewer pipe to be constructed in fill above natural ground, the embankment shall first be constructed to an elevation not less than one foot above the top of the pipe or conduit after which excavation for the pipe or conduit shall be made. If quicksand, muck, or similar unstable material develop or is encountered during the excavation, the following procedure shall be used unless other methods are called for on the plans. If the unstable condition is a result of ground water, the Contractor, prior to additional excavation shall control it. After stable conditions have been achieved, unstable soil shall be removed or stabilized to a depth of 2 feet below the bottom of pipe for pipes 2 feet or more in height; and to a depth equal to the height of pipe, 6 inch minimum, for pipe less then 2 feet in height. Such excavation shall be carried at least 1 foot beyond the horizontal limits of the structure on all sides. All unstable soil so removed shall be replaced with suitable stable material, placed in uniform layers of suitable depth as directed by the Engineer, and each layer shall be wetted, if necessary, and compacted by mechanical tamping as required to provide a stable condition. For unstable trench conditions requiring outside forms, seals, sheathing, and bracing, any additional excavation and backfill required shall be done at the contractor's expense. (2) Shaping of Trench Bottom. The trench bottom shall be undercut a minimum depth sufficient to accommodate the class of bedding indicated in the plans and specification. (3) Dewatering Trench. Pipe or conduit shall not constructed or laid in a trench in the presence of water. All water shall be removed from the trench sufficiently prior to the pipe or conduit planing operation insure a relatively dry (no standing water), firm bed. The trench shall be maintained in such dewatered condition until the trench has been backfilled to a height at lease one-foot above the top of pipe. Removal of water may be accomplished by bailing, pumping, or by a well-points installation as conditions warrant. Removal of well-points shall be at rate of 1/3 per 24 hours (every third well-point). 02220 Page 2 of 3 (4) Excavation in Streets. Excavation in streets, together with the maintenance of traffic where specified, and the restoration of the pavement riding surface shall be in accordance with plan detail, or as required by other applicable specifications. (5) Removing Old Structures. When old masonry structures or foundations are encountered in the excavation, such obstructions shall be removed for the full width of the trench and to a depth of 1- foot below the bottom of the trench. When old inlets or manholes are encountered and no plan provision is made for adjustment or connection to the new utility, such manholes and inlets shall be removed completely to a depth 1-foot below the bottom of the trench. In each instance, the bottom to the trench shall be restored to grade by backfilling and compacting by the methods provided hereinafter for backfill. Where the trench cuts through storm or sanitary sewers which are known to be abandoned, these sewers shall be cut flush with sides of the trench and blocked with a concrete plug in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. (6) Protection of Utilities. The Contractor shall conduct his work such that a reasonable minimum of disturbance to existing utilities will result. Particular care shall be exercised to avoid the cutting or breakage of water and gas lines. Such lines, if broken, shall be restored promptly by the Contractor. When active sanitary sewer lines are cut in the trenching operations, temporary flumes shall be provided across the trench, while open, and the lines shall be restored when the backfilling has progressed to the original bedding lines of the sewer so cut. The Contractor shall inform utility owners sufficiently in advance of the Contractor's operations to enable such utility owners to reroute, provide temporary detours, or to make other adjustments to utility lines in order that the Contractor may proceed with his work with a minimum of delay. The Contractor shall not hold the City liable for any expense due to delay or additional work because of utility adjustments or conflicts. (7) Excess Excavated Material. All materials from excavation not required for backfilling the trench shall be removed, by the Contractor, from the job site promptly following the completion of work involved. (8) Backfill A. Backfill Procedure Around Pipe All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the pipes or conduits are properly laid. In addition to the specified pipe bedding material, the backfill around the pipe as applicable, shall be select material as described by Standard Specification 022100 "Select Material", free of large hard lumps, or other debris. The backfill shall be deposited in the trench simultaneously on both sides of the pipe for the full width of the trench, in layers not to exceed six (6) inches (loose measurement), wetted if required to obtain proper compaction, and thoroughly compacted by mechanical tampers. A thoroughly compacted material shall be in place between the external wall of the pipe and the undisturbed sides of the trench and to a level twelve (12) inches above the top of the pipe. B. Backfill Over One Foot Above Pipe The backfill for that portion of trench over (1) foot above the pipe or conduit shall be selected excavated material free of hard lumps, rock fragments, or other debris, placed in layers not more than 6 inches in depth (loose measurement), wetted if required and thoroughly compacted by use of mechanical tampers to the natural bank density and not less than 95% Std. Proctor. Flooding 02220 Page 3 of 3 of backfill is not allowed. Jetting of backfill will be allowed in sandy soils and in soils otherwise approved by the Engineer. Regardless of backfill method, no lift shall exceed one foot and density shall not be less than 95% Std. Proctor. A period of not less than twenty-four (24) hours shall lapse between the time of jetting and the placing of the top four (4) feet of backfill. When indicated on the plans or at utility line crossings that are under pavements, trenches shall be backfilled to the road base with "Hasty Backfill" cement-stabilized sand containing a minimum of 1-1/2 sacks of standard Type I Portland cement per cubic yard of sand. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless indicated otherwise in the Proposal, Excavation and backfill for utilities and sewers shall not be measured and paid for separately. It shall be considered subsidiary to the items for which the excavation is required. Section 02222 Page 1 of 1 SECTION 02222 TRENCH SAFETY FOR EXCAVATIONS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for providing for worker safety in excavations and trenching operations required to complete the project. 2. REQUIREMENTS Worker Safety in excavations and trenches shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards, 29 CFR Part 1926 Subpart P - Excavations. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor, and not the City or Engineer, to determine and monitor the specific applicability of a safety system to the field conditions to be encountered on the job site during the project. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the City and Engineer from all damages and cost that may result from failure of methods or equipment used by the Contractor to provide for worker safety. Trenches as used herein, shall apply to any excavation into which structures, utilities, or sewers are placed regardless of depth. Trench Safety Plan as used herein, shall apply to all methods and materials used to provide for worker safety in excavation and trenching operations required during the project. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Trench Safety shall not be measured for pay, but shall be considered subsidiary to the project. Measurement shall be taken along the centerline of the trench. Revision current for Texas Code Chapter 756 Subchapter C. Trench Safety Section 02525 Page 1 of 8 SECTION 02525 HOT MIX ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT (Class A) (S-34) 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work required for furnishing and laying Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete (HMAC) surface, binder and base courses required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS 2.1. Aggregate: The aggregate shall consist of a blend of course aggregate, fine aggregate and, if required, a mineral filler. 2.1.1. Coarse Aggregate shall consist of that fraction of aggregate retained on a No. 10 sieve and shall consist of crushed furnace slag, crushed stone, or crushed gravel. Deterious material in coarse aggregate shall not exceed 2% per TEX-217-F. Course aggregate shall be crushed such that a minimum of 85% of the particles have more than one crushed face, unless noted otherwise on plans. Los Angeles abrasion losses for course aggregate shall not exceed 40% by weight for the surface course and 45% for the binder and base courses per TEX-410- A. Polish Value not less than 30 for aggregate used in the surface course per TEX-438-A. 2.1.2. Fine Aggregate is defined as the fraction passing a No. 10 sieve and shall be of uniform quality. Fine aggregate shall consist of screenings of material that passes the Los Angeles abrasion requirements per above. Screenings shall be blended with a maximum of 15% un-crushed aggregate or field sand for Type D mixes or a maximum of 10% uncrushed aggregate or field sand for Type A, B, and C mixes. Grading of fine aggregate shall be as follows: Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight No. 10 100 No. 200 0-15 2.1.3 Filler shall consist of dry stone dust, Portland cement, hydrated lime, or other approved by the Engineer. Section 02525 Page 2 of 8 Grading of filler shall be as follows: Sieve Size Minimum Percent Passing by Weight No. 30 95 No. 80 75 No. 200 55 2.2 Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP): Reclaimed asphalt pavement may be incorporated into the hot mix asphalt concrete furnished for the project, provided that the mixture is designed per the TX DOT Methods and meets the applicable provisions of said TX DOT Item 340 and this specification. 2.3 Asphalt: Asphalt Material shall be in accordance with Section 025404 "Asphalt, Oils, and Emulsions" and AASHTO. 2.3.1 Paving Mixture: APPLICATION ASPHALT GRADE Residential or low volume PG 64-22 Collector Surface Course PG 70-22 Binder Course PG 64-22 Arterial Surface Course PG 76-22 Binder Course PG 64-22 Base Courses PG 64-22 2.3.2 Tack Coat shall consist of an emulsion, SS-1 diluted with equal volume of water and applied at a rate ranging from 0.05 to 0.15 gallons per square yard. 3. PAVING MIXTURE 3.1 Mix Design: The mixture shall be designed in accordance with TX DOT Bulletin C-14 and TEX-204-F to conform to the requirements of this specification. The Contractor shall furnish the mix design for the job-mix to be used for the project, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. The mix design shall be submitted prior to placement of mixture. The design procedures are actually intended to result at a job-mix with properties in compliance with these specifications and when properly placed the job-mix will be durable and stable. The sieve analysis of the job-mix shall be within the range of the Master Section 02525 Page 3 of 8 Gradation and Tolerances specified herein. The job-mix shall meet the density and stability requirements as specified and shall be included with the mix design as submitted per above. If the specific gravity of any of the types of aggregates differ by more than 0.3, use volume method. Plot sieve analysis of job-mix; percent passing versus size on four-cycle semi-log paper or other appropriate type paper. Show tolerance limits and Limits of Master Gradation. 3.2 Master Gradation of Aggregate: The aggregate for the type of mix specified shall be within the following tabulated limits per TEX-200-F (Dry Sieve Analysis): * 2-8 when Test Method Tex-200-F, Part II (Washed Sieve Analysis) is used. Sieve Size Type A B C D Coarse Base Fine Base Course Surface Fine Surface 1-1/2" 100 1-1/4" 95-100 1" 100 7/8" 70-90 95-100 100 5/8" 75-95 95-100 1/2" 50-70 100 3/8" 60-80 70-85 85-100 1/4" No. 4 30-50 40-60 43-63 50-70 No. 10 20-34 27-40 30-40 32-42 No. 40 5-20 10-25 10-25 11-26 No. 80 2-12 3-13 3-13 4-14 No. 200 1-6* 1-6* 1-6* 1-6* VMA % minimum 11 12 13 14 Section 02525 Page 4 of 8 3.3 Tolerances: The mixture delivered to the job site shall not vary from the job-mix by more than the tolerances specified below. The gradation of the produced mix shall not fall outside the Master Grading Limits, with the following exceptions: for Type B material courser than 3/8" and for Type D material courser than #4. Variations from job-mix shall not exceed the following limits, except as noted above: Item: Tolerances Percent by Weight or Volume 1" to No. 10 Plus or Minus 5.0 No. 40 to No. 200 Plus or Minus 3.0 Asphalt Weight Plus or Minus 0.5 Asphalt Volume Plus or Minus 1.2 3.4 Mix Properties: The mixture shall have a minimum Hveem stability of 40 for Type A,B, and C mixes and 35 for Type D mixes per TEX-208-F at an optimum density of 96% (plus or minus 1.5) of theoretical maximum per TEX-227-F and TEX-207-F. 3.5 Sampling and Testing of raw materials: The Contractor shall sample materials as necessary to produce a mix in compliance with these specifications. 4. EQUIPMENT 4.1 Mixing Plants. Mixing plants shall be either the weight batching type or the drum mix type. Both types shall be equipped with satisfactory conveyors, power units, aggregate handling equipment, aggregate screens and bins (weigh batch only), and pollution control devices as required. 4.2 Truck Scales. A set of truck scales, if needed for measurement, shall be placed at a location approved by the Engineer. 4.3 Asphalt Material Heating Equipment. Asphalt material heating equipment shall be adequate to heat the required amount of material to the desired temperature. Agitation with steam or air will not be permitted. The heating apparatus shall be equipped with a recording thermometer with a 24-hour continuous chart that will record the temperature of the asphalt at the highest temperature. 4.4 Surge-Storage System. A surge-storage system may be used provided that the mixture coming out of the bins is of equal quality to that coming out of the mixer. The system shall be equipped with a gob hopper, rotating chute, or other devices designed to minimize segregation of the asphalt mixture. 4.5 Laydown Machine. The laydown machine shall be capable of producing a surface that will meet the requirements of the typical cross section, of adequate power to propel the delivery vehicles, and produce the surface tolerances herein required. It shall be wide enough to lay a 28-foot back-back street in a maximum of two passes. Section 02525 Page 5 of 8 4.6 Rollers. All rollers shall be self propelled and of any type capable of obtaining the required density. Rollers shall be in satisfactory operating condition and free from fuel, hydraulic fluid, or any other fluid leaks. 5. STORAGE, PROPORTIONING, AND MIXING 5.1 Storage and Heating of Asphalt Materials. Asphalt cement shall not be heated to a temperature in excess of that recommended by the producer. Asphalt storage equipment shall be maintained in a clean condition and operated in such a manner that there will be no contamination with foreign matter. 5.2 Feeding and Drying of Aggregates. The feeding of various sizes of aggregate to the dryer shall be done in such a manner that a uniform and constant flow of materials in the required proportions will be maintained. In no case shall the aggregate be introduced into the mixing unit at a temperature in excess of 350 degrees F. 5.3 Proportioning. All materials shall be handled and proportioned in a manner that yield an acceptable mixture as herein specified and as defined by the job-mix. 5.4 Mixing. 5.4.1 Weight Batch Plant. In charging the weigh box and in charging the pugmill from the weigh box, such methods or devices shall be used as necessary to minimize segregation of the mixture. 5.4.2 Drum Mix Plant. The amount of aggregate and asphalt cement entering the mixer and the rate of travel through the mixer shall be coordinated so that a uniform mixture of the desired gradation and asphalt content will be produced. 5.4.3 The mixture produced from each type of plant shall not vary from the job-mix by more than the tolerances and restrictions herein specified. The mixture when discharged from the plant shall have a moisture content not greater than one percent by weight of total mix when determined by Test Method TEX-212-F. 5.4.4 The mixture produced from each type of plant shall be at a temperature between 250 and 325 degrees F. After a target mixing temperature has been established, the mixture when discharged from the mixer shall not vary from this temperature by more than 25 degrees F. 6. CONSTRUCTION METHODS 6.1 Construction conditions. For mat thicknesses greater than 1.5 inches, the asphalt material may be placed with a laydown machine when the air temperature is 40 degrees F. and rising but not when the air temperature is 50 degrees and falling. In addition, mat Section 02525 Page 6 of 8 thickness less than and including 1.5 inches shall not be placed when the temperature of the surface on which the mat is placed is below 50 degrees F. 6.2 Prime Coat. If a prime coat is required, it shall be applied and paid for as a separate item conforming to the requirements of the specification, "Prime Coat", except the application temperature shall be as provided above. The tack coat or asphaltic concrete shall not be applied on a previously primed flexible base until the primed base has completely cured to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 6.3 Tack Coat. Before the asphalt mixture is laid, the surface upon which the tack coat is to be placed shall be thoroughly cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The surface shall be given a uniform application of tack coat using materials and rates herein specified and/or as shown on the plans. The tack coat shall be rolled with a pneumatic tire roller as necessary. 6.4 Transporting Asphalt Concrete. The asphalt mixture shall be hauled to the job site in tight vehicles previously cleaned of all foreign matter. In cool weather or for long hauls, canvas covers and insulated truck beds may be necessary. The inside of the bed may be given a light coating of lime water or other suitable release agent necessary to prevent from adhering. Diesel oil not allowed. 6.5 Placing. The asphalt mixture shall be spread on the approved prepared surface with a laydown machine or other approved equipment in such a manner such that when properly compacted, the finished surface will be smooth or uniform density, and meet the requirements of the typical cross sections as shown on the plans. 6.5.1 Flush Structures. Adjacent to flush curbs, gutters, liners and structures, the surface shall be finished uniformly high so that when compacted, it will be slightly above the edge of the curb and flush structure. 6.5.2 Construction joints of successive courses of asphaltic material shall be offset at least six inches. Construction joints on surface courses shall coincide with lane lines, or as directed by the Engineer. 6.6 Compacting. The asphalt mixture shall be compacted thoroughly and uniformly with the necessary rollers to obtain the required density and surface tolerances herein described and any requirements as shown on the plans. Regardless of the method of compaction control followed, all rolling shall be completed before the mixture temperature drops below 175 degrees F. 6.7 In-Place Density. In-place density control is required for all mixtures except for thin, irregular level-up courses. Material should be compacted to between 96% and 92% of maximum theoretical density or between 4% and 8% air voids. Average density shall be greater than 92% and not individual determination shall be lower than 90%. Testing shall be in accordance with TEX-207-F and TEX-227-F. Section 02525 Page 7 of 8 Pavement specimens, which shall be either cores or sections of the compacted mixture, will be tested as required to determine the percent air voids. Other methods, such as nuclear determination of in-place density, which correlate satisfactorily with actual project specimens may be used when approved by the Engineer. 6.8 Thickness. The total compacted average thickness of the combined HMAC courses shall not be less than the amount specified on the drawings. No more than 10% of the measured thicknesses shall be more than 1/4" less than the plan thickness(es). If so, the quantity for pay shall be decreased as deemed appropriate by the Engineer. 6.9 Surface smoothness criteria and tests. The pavement surface after compaction, shall be smooth and true to the established lines, grade, and cross-section. The surface shall be tested by the City with the Mays Roughness Meter. 6.10 The Mays Roughness Value for each block (intersection to intersection) or 600-foot section, whichever is the lesser, shall not exceed ninety inches per mile per traffic lane. For each block of 600-foot section not meeting this criteria, the Engineer shall have the option of requiring that block or section to be reworked to meet the criteria, or paying an adjusted unit price for the surface course. The unit price adjustment shall be made on the following basis: Adjusted Unit Price = (Adjustment Factor) X Surface Course Unit Bid Price The adjustment factor shall be: For Residential Streets: Adjustment Factor = 1.999 - 0.0111 M For All Other Class Streets (Non Residential) Adjustment Factor = 1.287 - 0.0143 M Where M - Mays Roughness Value In no case shall the Contractor be paid more than the unit bid price. If the surface course is an inverted penetration (surface treatment) the Mays Roughness Value observed will be reduced by ten inches per mile, prior to applying the above criteria. Localized Defects (obvious settlements, humps, ridges, etc.) shall be tested with a ten-foot straightedge placed parallel to the roadway centerline. The maximum deviation shall not exceed 1/8 inch in ten feet. Areas not meeting this criteria shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Section 02525 Page 8 of 8 6.11 Opening to Traffic. The pavement shall be opened to traffic when directed by the Engineer. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that all construction traffic allowed on pavement open to the public will be subject to the State laws governing traffic on highways. If the surface ravels, it will be the contractor's responsibility to correct this condition at his expense. 7. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT Unless indicated otherwise in the Proposal, Hot Mix Asphalt Pavement shall be measured by one of the following methods: A. Measured by the square yard of the type and thickness of "Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete" as shown on the plans. B. Measured by the total weight of "Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete" of the type specified on the plans delivered to the job site. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with copies of the "pay ticket" identifying the truck and showing the gross empty weight of the truck with driver as it arrives at the plant and the gross loaded weight of the truck with driver as it leaves the plant. The measured amount will be the difference of the loaded and empty trucks converted to tons. Payment shall be full compensation for quarrying, furnishing all materials, freight involved; for all heating, mixing, hauling, cleaning the existing base course or pavement, tack coat, placing asphaltic concrete mixture, rolling and finishing; and for all manipulations, labor, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete the work except prime coat when required. The prime coat, performed where required, will be measured and paid for in accordance with the provisions governing the specification, Section 025412 "Prime Coat". All templates, straightedges, scales, and other weights and measuring devices necessary for the proper construction, measuring and checking of the work shall be furnished, operated and maintained by the Contractor at his expense. END OF SECTION Section 02526 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 02526 ASPHALT TENNIS COURT OVERLAY PART 1 SCOPE 1.1 Furnish and install all materials shown and specified for overlaying of existing tennis courts with new asphalt & playing surface. 1.2 Refer to Section 02525 – Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement for information on asphalt. 1.3 Refer to Section 02760 – Asphalt Edging for information on perimeter asphalt restraint edging. 1.4 Refer to Section 02791 – Asphalt Tennis Court Surfacing for information on playing surface system application. 1.4 Materials shall be equal to those listed below. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 Tennis Courts 2.1.2 Petromat® Underlayment Fabric. 2.1.3 Permaloc Asphalt Restraint Edging, used to terminate overlay system at perimeter. 2.1.4 Playing surface finish system on asphalt as specified. PART 3 APPLICATION 3.1 Tennis Courts 3.1.1 Install asphalt restraint edging. 3.1.2 Apply 1 1/2” of type “D” modified hot mix asphalt base over Petromat® underlayment fabric. 3.1.3 Prepare and finish surface as specified. Section 02526 Page 2 of 2 PART 4 GENERAL 4.1 All work shall be performed in a workmanlike manner. The contractor shall keep the site and courts free from accumulations of waste materials, debris, etc. caused by the work or his employees. Upon completion of the project and before requesting final inspection, the site and his work shall be “broom clean” or its equivalent. END OF SECTION 02561 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 02561 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 1. DESCRIPTION The specification shall consist of sidewalks, with reinforcing steel, composed of Portland cement concrete, constructed as herein specified on an approved subgrade, in conformity with the lines and grades established by the Engineer and the details shown on the plans. 2. MATERIALS Materials and proportions used in construction under this item shall conform to the requirements as specified for Class "A" concrete under the specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". Reinforcing steel, if required, shall conform to the requirements as specified in the specification Section 03200 "Flat Work - Reinforcing Steel". Expansion joint filler shall be premoulded material meeting the requirements specified in the specification Section 03800 "Flat Work - Concrete Structures". Cap seal shall be Greenstreak or approved equal. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS The subgrade shall be excavated, compacted and shaped to line, grade and cross-section and, hand tamped and sprinkled. The subgrade shall be moist at the time the concrete is placed. Forms shall be of wood or metal, of a section satisfactory to the Engineer, straight, free from warp, and of a depth equal to the thickness of the finished work. They shall be securely staked to line and grade and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. The reinforcing steel, if required, shall be placed in position as shown on the plans. Care shall be exercised to keep all steel in its proper location. Sidewalks shall be constructed in sections of the lengths shown on plans. Unless otherwise provided by the plans, no section shall be a length less than 8 feet and any section less than 8 feet shall be removed by the Contractor at his own expense. The different sections shall be separated by a premoulded or board joint of the thickness shown on the plans, placed vertically and at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the sidewalks. Where the sidewalk or driveways abut a curb or retaining wall, approved expansion material shall be placed along their entire length. Similar expansion material shall be placed around all obstructions protruding through sidewalks or driveways. 02561 Page 2 of 2 Concrete shall be mixed in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer, placed in the forms to the depth specified and spaded and tamped until thoroughly compacted and mortar entirely covers the surface. The top surface shall be floated with a wooden float to a gritty texture. The outer edges and joints shall then be rounded with approved tools to the radii shown on plans. Sidewalks shall be marked into separate sections, each 4 feet in length, by the use of approved jointing tools. When completed, the sidewalks and driveways shall be cured with Type 2, white pigmented curing compound. Other methods of curing as outlined in the specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures" will be acceptable with a required curing period of 72 hours. 4. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT Unless indicated otherwise in the Proposal, Concrete Sidewalk and Driveway will not be measured for payment, but shall be considered subsidiary to the project. 02564 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 02564 CONCRETE CURB RAMPS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for constructing Concrete Curb Ramps required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Concrete shall be class "A" in accordance with Section 03000 of the Standard Specifications. Reinforcement shall be 4x4 - W2.9 welded wire fabric in accordance with Section 03200 of the Standard Specifications. Crushed granite shall be 1/2 inch, in accordance with AASHTO M43 Size Number 6. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS The subgrade shall be shaped to line, grade, cross section, and shall be of uniform density and moisture, when concrete is placed. The subgrade shall be hand tamped and sprinkled to achieve the desired consistency and uniform support. Ramps shall be constructed of Class A concrete to line and section as shown on the plans. Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, ramps shall have a minimum concrete thickness in excess of 4", prior to application of exposed aggregate surface texture. Slopes, S, shall be as follows unless shown otherwise on the Drawings: RAMPS Ramp in direction of travel . . . . . S < 1:12 Side slope of ramp (flare) . . . . . S < 1:10 Cross Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:100 < S < 1:50 ADJOINING AREAS Landings adjacent to ramp . . . . . . S < 1:20 Driveways abutting tied sidewalk . . S < 1:10 Width of ramp shall be 36", exclusive of flare, unless shown otherwise in the Drawings. No ramp shall be less than 36" wide. Obstructions shall be removed or relocated, as appropriate, or the location of the ramp may be shifted, if authorized. Surfacing shall be as indicated in the details on the drawings. 02564 Page 2 of 2 Pavement Markings for street crossings shall be placed such that the crosswalk is properly aligned with respect to the curb ramp. See striping details for proper alignment of striping with respect to intersection and curb ramp. Properly constructed curb ramp shall be true to line, section, grade and shall be free of loose granite surfacing and irregularities. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless indicated otherwise in the Proposal, Concrete curb ramps shall not be for pay, but should be considered subsidiary to the project. Section 02760 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 02760 ASPHALT EDGING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WARRANTY A. 15-year limited material warranty for asphalt restraint edging from manufacturing defects in workmanship or material. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ASPHALT RESTRAINT EDGING A. Product: Permaloc AsphaltEdge, with 0.210 inch (5.33 mm) thick exposed top lip x 1.5" (38mm) high x 8 feet (2.44 meters) long, extruded aluminum, alloy 6005, T-5 hardness as manufactured by Permaloc Corporation, Holland MI 49424, telephone (800) 356-9660 or (616) 399-9600. Horizontal base to have upward facing angle profile designed to integrate restraint and asphalt surfaces for straight-line and curvilinear applications. Section shall have holes in base spaced 4 inches (102 mm) apart along its length to receive anchors. B. Connection Method: Section ends shall splice together with horizontal 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) thick x 1 inch (25 mm) wide, or 0.530 inch (13.5 mm) wide for 1 inch (25 mm) high edging x 4 inches (102 mm) long aluminum sliding connector. C. Anchors: 3/8 inch x 10 inches (9.5 mm x 254 mm) bright spiral steel spike, 3/16 inch x 1-1/2 inches (4.8 mm x 38 mm) or longer Ardox concrete nail, or drive pin fastener equal to Hilti DX 40 powder actuated pin or Ramset Trakfast Automatic Fastening System pin. D. Finish: Black DuraFlex Painted. Paint finish shall comply with AAMA 2603 for electrostatically baked on paint. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF ASPHALT RESTRAINT EDGING A. Base Installation: 1. Level base beneath restraint edging. B. Edging Installation: 1. Install edging leaving 3/8" (9.5 mm) between sections for expansion. 2. Drive spikes through edging holes in base of asphalt restraint edging (or drive nails through aluminum base when using powder actuated fastening system) at spaces for following applications: a. Anchor each section end with anchor. Section 02760 Page 2 of 2 3. Securely connect sections in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Provide additional anchors at closer spacing as necessary to firmly secure edging for permanent intended use. END OF SECTION Section 02791 Page 1 of 6 SECTION 02791 ASPHALT TENNIS COURT SURFACING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Textured acrylic surfacing for asphalt tennis courts. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Related Work 1. Asphalt Edging (Section 02760) 2. Tennis Court Net Posts (Section 02882) B. References 1. National Asphalt Paving Association (NAPA) 2. United States Tennis Association (USTA) 3. International Tennis Federation (ITF) 4. American Sport Builders Association (ASBA) 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surfacing shall conform to the guidelines of the ASBA for planarity. B. All surface coatings products shall be supplied by a single manufacturer. C. The contractor shall record the batch number of each product used on the site and maintain it through the warranty period. D. The contractor shall provide the inspector, upon request, an estimate of the volume of each product to be used on the site. E. The installer shall be an authorized applicator of the specified system. F. The manufacturer’s representative shall be available to help resolve material questions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer specifications for components, color chart and installation instructions. Section 02791 Page 2 of 6 B. Authorized Applicator certificate from the surface system manufacturer. E. ITF classification certificate for the system to be installed. F. Reference list from the installer of at least 5 projects of similar scope done in each of the past 3 years. G. Current Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). H. Product substitution: If other than the product specified, the contractor shall submit at least 7 days prior to the bid date a complete type written list of proposed substitutions with sufficient data, drawings, samples and literature to demonstrate to the owners satisfaction that the proposed substitution is of equal quality and utility to that originally specified. Information must include a QUV test of at least 1000 hours illustrating the UV stability of the system. The color system shall have an ITF pace rating in Category 2. Under no circumstances will systems from multiple manufacturers be considered. 1.4 MATERIAL HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer specifications and MSDS. B. Deliver product to the site in original unopened containers with proper labels attached. C. All surfacing materials shall be non flammable. 1.5 GUARANTEE A. Provide a guarantee against defects in the materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of substantial completion. 1.6 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer shall be regularly engaged in construction and surfacing of acrylic tennis courts, play courts or similar surfaces. B. Installer shall be an Authorized Applicator of the specified surface system. C. Installer shall be a builder member of the ASBA and have a minimum of five (5) years of experience in tennis court surfacing. 1.7 MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS A. System manufacturer shall provide documentation that the surface to be installed has been classified by the ITF as a medium pace surface. Section 02791 Page 3 of 6 B. System manufacturer shall be a US owned company. C. Syst em manufacturer shall be a member of the ASBA. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. California Products Corp., Andover, MA. 01810 / Plexipave System www.plexipave.com B. Substitutions: Submit requests at least 7 days prior to the bid date with a complete type written list of proposed substitutions with sufficient data, drawings, samples and literature to demonstrate to the owners’ satisfaction that the proposed substitution is of equal quality and utility to the specified product. Information must include a QUV test of at least 1000 hours illustrating the UV stability of the system. The system shall have an ITF pace rating in Category 2. Under no circumstance may the final color surface contain silica sand added at the job site. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Patching Mix (California Court Patch Binder) - for use in patching cracks, holes, depressions and other surface imperfections. B. Crack Filler (Plexipave Crack Filler) - for use in filling fine cracks. C. (2) Coats of Acrylic Filler Course (California Acrylic Resurfacer) – for use as filler for new or existing asphalt surfaces. The 100% acrylic filler shall be blended with approved silica sand at the job site. D. (3) Coats of Acrylic Color Playing Surface (Plexipave) – for use as the finish color and texture. Plexipave is factory blended to achieve the correct surface texture. E. Line Paint (California Line Paint) – for use as the line marking on the court/play surface. 2.3 MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS A. Court Patch Binder – 100% acrylic resin blended with Portland Cement and silica sand. 1) Percent solids by weight (minimum) 46% 2) Weight 8.7-8.9 lbs./gallon B. Plexipave Crack Filler – 100% acrylic resin heavily filled with sand. Section 02791 Page 4 of 6 1) Percent solids by weight (minimum) 85% 2) Percent solids by weight (minimum) 15 lbs./gallon C. California Acrylic Resurfacer – 100% acrylic resin (no vinyl copolymerization constituent). The product shall contain not less than 3.5% attapulgite. 1) Percent solids by weight (minimum) 26.7% 2) Weight 8.7-8.9 lbs./gallon D. Plexipave Color Base – 100% acrylic resin containing no vinyl copolymerization constituent. Contains not more than 63% rounded silica sand. 1) Percent solids by weight (minimum) 74% 2) Weight 13.1-14.1 lbs./gallon E. California Line Paint – 100% acrylic resin containing no alkyds or vinyl constituents. Texturing shall be rounded silica sand. 1) Percent solids by weight (minimum) 60.5% 2) Weight 12-12.3 lbs./gallon All surfacing materials shall be non-flammable and have a VOC content of not less than 100g./ltr. Measured by EPA method 24. Local sands are not acceptable in the color playing surface. Sands must be incorporated at the manufacturing location to insure quality and stability. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 WEATHER LIMITATIONS A. Do not install when rainfall in imminent or extremely high humidity prevents drying. B. Do not apply unless surface and air temperature are 50°F and rising. C. Do not apply if surface temperature is in excess of 140°F. 3.2 PREPARATION FOR ACRYLIC COLOR PLAYING SYSTEM A. Clean surfaces of loose dirt, oil, grease, leaves, and other debris in strict accordance with manufacturer’s directions. Pressure washing will be necessary to adequately clean areas to be coated. Any areas previously showing algae growth shall be treated with Clorox or approved product to kill the organisms and then be properly rinsed. Section 02791 Page 5 of 6 B. Holes and cracks: Cracks and holes shall be cleaned and a suitable soil sterilant, as approved by the owner, shall be applied to kill all vegetation 14 days prior to use of Court Patch Binder according to manufacturer's specifications. C. Depression: Depressions holding enough water to cover a five cent piece shall be filled with Court Patch Binder Patching Mix. 3 gallons of Court Patch Binder, 100 lbs. 60-80 silica sand, 1 gallon Dry Portland Cement (Type I). This step shall be accomplished prior to the squeegee application of Acrylic Resurfacer. The contractor shall flood all the courts and then allow draining. Define and mark all areas holding enough water to cover a nickel. After defined areas are dry, prime with tack coat mixture of 2 parts water/l part Court Patch Binder. Allow tack coat to dry completely. Spread Court Patch Binder mix true to grade using a straight edge (never a squeegee) for strike off. Steel trowel or wood float the patch so that the texture matches the surrounding area. Never add water to mix. Light misting on surface and edges to feather in is allowed as needed to maintain work ability. Allow to dry thoroughly and cure. NO WORK FROM THIS STAGE ON SHALL COMMENCE UNTIL AN INSPECTOR HAS ACCEPTED THE SURFACE. D. Filler Course. (Acrylic Resurfacer): Filler course shall be applied to the clean underlying surface in one application to obtain a total quantity of not less than .06 gallon per square yard based on the material prior to any dilution. Acrylic Resurfacer may be used to pre-coat depression and crack/hole repairs to achieve better planarity prior to filler course application. 1. Over a properly repaired surface of asphalt on existing courts, apply two coats of Acrylic Resurfacer according to the following mix: Acrylic Resurfacer 55 gallons Water 20 - 40 gallons Sand 600-800 pounds / 60-80 mesh Liquid Yield 112-138 gallons On new asphalt, two coats of Acrylic Resurfacer shall be used to properly fill all voids in the asphalt surface. Use clean, dry 50-60 mesh sand and clean, potable water to make mixes. The quantity of sand and water in the above mix may be adjusted within above limits to complement the roughness and temperature of the surface. 2. Mix the ingredients thoroughly using accepted mixing devices and use a 70 Durometer rubber bladed squeegee to apply each coat of Acrylic Resurfacer as required. 3. Allow the application of Acrylic Resurfacer to dry thoroughly. Scrape off all ridges and rough spots prior to any subsequent application of Acrylic Resurfacer or subsequent cushion or color surface system. Section 02791 Page 6 of 6 3.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC COLOR PLAYING SURFACE A. All areas to be color coated shall be clean, free from sand, clay, grease, dust, salt or other foreign matters. The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's approval, prior to applying any surface treatment. B. Application shall be made by 50 durometer rubber faced squeegees. The Fortified Plexipave mixture should be poured on to the court surface and spread to a uniform thickness in a regular pattern. C. A total of 3 applications of Fortified Plexipave shall be made to achieve a total application rate of not less than .15 gal./sy. No application should be made until the previous application is thoroughly dry. 3.4 LINE PAINTING A. Line shall be 2” wide unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Lines hall be carefully laid out in accordance with ASBA and USTA guidelines. The area to be marked shall be taped to insure a crisp line. The California Line Paint shall have a texture similar to the surrounding play surface. Application shall be made by brush or roller at the rate of 150-200 sg./gal. (3/4 gal. per tennis court). 3.5 PROTECTION A. Erect temporary barriers to protect coatings during drying and curing. B. Lock gates to prevent use until acceptance by the owner’s representative. 3.6 CLEAN UP A. Remove all containers, surplus materials and debris. Dispose of materials in accordance with local, state and Federal regulations. B. Leave site in a clean and orderly condition. END OF SECTION Section 02792 Page 1 of 7 SECTION 02792 CONCRETE TENNIS COURT SURFACING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Textured acrylic surfacing for concrete tennis courts. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Related Work 1. Concrete Pavement (See structural drawings) 2. Tennis Court Net Posts (Section 02882) B. References 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 2. United States Tennis Association (USTA) 3. International Tennis Federation (ITF) 4. American Sport Builders Association (ASBA) 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surfacing shall conform to the guidelines of the ASBA for planarity. B. Concrete shall have a vapor barrier in accordance with ASTM E-1745. C. Concrete mixes should be placed with a water/cement ratio of .45. D. Curing compounds should not be used unless the curing compound manufacturer specifically states the surface may be coated with water based acrylic coatings. E. All surface coatings products shall be supplied by a single manufacturer. F. The contractor shall record the batch number of each product used on the site and maintain it through the warranty period. G. The contractor shall provide the inspector, upon request, an estimate of the volume of each product to be used on the site. H. The installer shall be an authorized applicator of the specified system. Section 02792 Page 2 of 7 I. The manufacturer’s representative shall be available to help resolve material questions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer specifications for components, color chart and installation instructions. B. Authorized Applicator certificate from the surface system manufacturer. A. ITF classification certificate for the system to be installed. B. Reference list from the installer of at least 5 projects of similar scope done in each of the past 3 years. C. Current Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). D. Product substitution: If other than the product specified, the contractor shall submit at least 7 days prior to the bid date a complete type written list of proposed substitutions with sufficient data, drawings, samples and literature to demonstrate to the owners satisfaction that the proposed substitution is of equal quality and utility to that originally specified. Information must include a QUV test of at least 1000 hours illustrating the UV stability of the system. Test method similar to ASTM G53. The color system shall have an ITF pace rating in Category 2. Under no circumstances will systems from multiple manufacturers be considered. 1.5 MATERIAL HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer specifications and MSDS. B. Deliver product to the site in original unopened containers with proper labels attached. C. All surfacing materials shall be non flammable. 1.6 GUARANTEE A. Provide a guarantee against defects in the materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of substantial completion. 1.7 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS Section 02792 Page 3 of 7 A. Installer shall be regularly engaged in construction and surfacing of acrylic tennis courts, play courts or similar surfaces. B. Installer shall be an Authorized Applicator of the specified surface system. C. Installer shall be a builder member of the ASBA and have a minimum of five (5) years of experience surfacing tennis courts. 1.8 MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS A. System manufacturer shall provide documentation that the surface to be installed has been classified by the ITF as a medium pace surface. B. System manufacturer shall be a US owned company. C. System manufacturer shall be a member of the ASBA. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. California Products Corp., Andover, MA. 01810 / Plexipave System www.plexipave.com B. Substitutions: Submit requests at least 7 days prior to the bid date with a complete type written list of proposed substitutions with sufficient data, drawings, samples and literature to demonstrate to the owner’s satisfaction that the proposed substitution is of equal quality and utility to the specified product. Information must include a QUV test of at least 1000 hours illustrating the UV stability of the system. The system shall have an ITF pace rating in Category 2. Under no circumstance may the final color surface contain silica sand added at the job site. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Patching Mix (California Court Patch Binder) - for use in patching cracks, holes, depressions and other surface imperfections. B. Crack Filler (Plexipave Crack Filler) - for use in filling fine cracks. C. Concrete Preparer is a specially formulated acid heat for use in neutralizing the concrete in preparation for the Plexipave System. Section 02792 Page 4 of 7 D. Adhesion Primer – (California TiCoat) is a two component water based epoxy primer for uncoated concrete surfaces. E. (2) Coats of Acrylic Filler Course (California Acrylic Resurfacer) – for use as filler for new or existing concrete surfaces. The 100% acrylic filler shall be blended with approved silica sand at the job site. F. (3) Coats of Acrylic Color Playing Surface (Plexipave) – for use as the finish color and texture. Plexipave is factory blended to achieve the correct surface texture. G. Line Paint (California Line Paint) – for use as the line marking on the court/play surface. 2.3 MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS A. Court Patch Binder – 100% acrylic resin blended with Portland Cement and silica sand. 1) Percent solids by weight (minimum) 46% 2) Weight 8.7-8.9 lbs./gallon B. Plexipave Crack Filler – 100% acrylic resin heavily filled with sand. 1) Percent solids by weight (minimum) 85% 2) Percent solids by weight (minimum) 15 lbs./gallon C. Concrete Preparer – Phosphoric Acid based surface treatment 1) Percent solids by weight (minimum) 25.5% 2) Weight 9.5-9.6 lbs./gallon D. California TiCoat – 2 component epoxy primer 1) Percent solids by weight (minimum) 34.6-34.8% 2) Weight 8.55-8.70 lbs./gallon E. California Acrylic Resurfacer – 100% acrylic resin (no vinyl copolymerization constituent). The product shall contain not less than 3.5% attapulgite. 1) Percent solids by weight (minimum) 26.7% 2) Weight 8.7-8.9 lbs./gallon F. Plexipave – 100% acrylic resin containing no vinyl copolymerization constituent. Section 02792 Page 5 of 7 Contains not more than 63% rounded silica sand. 1) Percent solids by weight (minimum) 74% 2) Weight 13.1-14.1 lbs./gallon G. California Line Paint – 100% acrylic resin containing no alkyds or vinyl constituents. Texturing shall be rounded silica sand. 1) Percent solids by weight (minimum) 60.5% 2) Weight 12-12.3 lbs./gallon All surfacing materials shall be non-flammable and have a VOC content of not less than 100g./ltr. Measured by EPA method 24. Local sands are not acceptable in the color playing surface. Sands must be incorporated at the manufacturing location to insure quality and stability. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 WEATHER LIMITATIONS A. Do not install when rainfall in imminent or extremely high humidity prevents drying. B. Do not apply unless surface and air temperature are 50°F and rising. C. Do not apply if surface temperature is in excess of 140°F. 3.2 PREPARATION FOR ACRYLIC COLOR PLAYING SYSTEM A. Clean surfaces of loose dirt, oil, grease, leaves, and other debris in strict accordance with manufacturer’s directions. Pressure washing will be necessary to adequately clean areas to be coated. Any areas previously showing algae growth shall be treated with Clorox or approved product to kill the organisms and then be properly rinsed. B. Holes and cracks: Cracks and holes shall be cleaned and a suitable soil sterilant, as approved by the owner, shall be applied to kill all vegetation 14 days prior to use of Court Patch Binder according to manufacturer's specifications. C. Depression: Depressions holding enough water to cover a five cent piece shall be filled with Court Patch Binder Patching Mix. 3 gallons of Court Patch Binder, 100 lbs. 60-80 silica sand, 1 gallon Dry Portland Cement (Type I). This step shall be accomplished prior to the squeegee application of Acrylic Resurfacer. The contractor shall flood all the courts Section 02792 Page 6 of 7 and then allow draining. Define and mark all areas holding enough water to cover a nickel. After defined areas are dry, prime with tack coat mixture of 2 parts water/l part Court Patch Binder. Allow tack coat to dry completely. Spread Court Patch Binder mix true to grade using a straight edge (never a squeegee) for strike off. Steel trowel or wood float the patch so that the texture matches the surrounding area. Never add water to mix. Light misting on surface and edges to feather in is allowed as needed to maintain work ability. Allow to dry thoroughly and cure. NO WORK FROM THIS STAGE ON SHALL COMMENCE UNTIL AN INSPECTOR HAS ACCEPTED THE SURFACE. D. Acid Treatment: Concrete Preparer shall be applied to all uncoated concrete surfaces at the rate of .01 to .012 gallon per square yard. Dilute 1 gallon of Concrete Preparer with 4 gallons of potable water. Apply liberally to the surface and spread with a soft hair push broom. After the surface has dried remove any dust or latent material. E. Primer: California Ti Coat shall be applied to all uncoated concrete surface prior to application of filler materials. Apply at an application rate of .025-.03 gallon per square yard. 1. Mix component A with Component B at a ratio of 1:1. Let stand for 20-30 minutes prior to use. 2. Apply with a short nap phenolic core roller. 3. Allow the Ti Coat to dry for approximately 1-3 hours until the surface is slightly tacky to the touch. In no case shall the surface be left overnight before receiving an application of Acrylic Resurfacer. F. Filler Course. (Acrylic Resurfacer): On the properly applied Ti Coat the filler course shall be applied to the clean underlying surface in one application to obtain a total quantity of not less than .06 gallon per square yard based on the material prior to any dilution. Acrylic Resurfacer may be used to pre-coat depression and crack/hole repairs to achieve better planarity prior to filler course application. 1. Over a properly repaired surface of concrete, apply two coats of Acrylic Resurfacer according to the following mix: Acrylic Resurfacer 55 gallons Water 20 - 40 gallons Sand 600-800 pounds / 60-80 mesh Liquid Yield 112-138 gallons 2. Mix the ingredients thoroughly using accepted mixing devices and use a 70 Section 02792 Page 7 of 7 Durometer rubber bladed squeegee to apply each coat of Acrylic Resurfacer as required. 3. Allow the application of Acrylic Resurfacer to dry thoroughly. Scrape off all ridges and rough spots prior to any subsequent application of color surface system. 3.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC COLOR PLAYING SURFACE A. All areas to be color coated shall be clean, free from sand, clay, grease, dust, salt or other foreign matters. The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's approval, prior to applying any surface treatment. B. Application shall be made by 50 durometer rubber faced squeegees. The Fortified Plexipave mixture should be poured on to the court surface and spread to a uniform thickness in a regular pattern. C. A total of 3 applications of Fortified Plexipave shall be made to achieve a total application rate of not less than .15 gal./sy. No application should be made until the previous application is thoroughly dry. 3.4 LINE PAINTING A. Line shall be 2” wide unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Lines hall be carefully laid out in accordance with ASBA and USTA guidelines. The area to be marked shall be taped to insure a crisp line. The California Line Paint shall have a texture similar to the surrounding play surface. Application shall be made by brush or roller at the rate of 150-200 sg./gal. (3/4 gal. per tennis court). 3.5 PROTECTION A. Erect temporary barriers to protect coatings during drying and curing. B. Lock gates to prevent use until acceptance by the owner’s representative. 3.6 CLEAN UP A. Remove all containers, surplus materials and debris. Dispose of materials in accordance with local, state and Federal regulations. B. Leave site in a clean and orderly condition. END OF SECTION HEB TENNIS CENTER LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION - SECTION 02810 PART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent: Furnish all labor, material, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary for the installation of a complete and operational automatic Landscape Irrigation system as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. The work includes: 1. Trenching, excavation, backfill including base and backfill materials. 2. Electrical and wiring/conduit work associated with the system. 3. Maintenance of the system during the maintenance period. 4. Connection to existing mains. B. Related Work 1. Earthwork and Grading 2. Electrical 1.03 STANDARDS A. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all materials and methods shall conform to the applicable current sections of: 1. Applicable ASTM Specifications as they apply to the work in this Section. 2. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) 3. NEC (National Electrical Code) 4. American Society of Irrigation Consultants (ASIC) Guideline 100 for Earth Grounding Electronic Equipment in Irrigation Systems 1.04 REVIEWS A. Contractor shall specifically request at least (2) two days in advance the following reviews prior to progressing with the work: 1. Preliminary Review-II – Main-line layout, trenching, pressure-test. 2. Intermediate Review - Irrigation coverage, Requirements for irrigation coverage inspection are specified herein. 3. Substantial Completion Review - valve box inspection, and overall operation of the irrigation system. 4. Final Review (at the completion of Maintenance Period) - all punch-list items identified at Substantial Completion Review. 5. Each review shall be conducted only after all items pertaining to that review as noted above and in related Sections have been completed by the Contractor. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All materials shall be new and of the best quality available unless otherwise specified. Manufacturer shall be clearly marked on all material, containers, or certificates of contents for inspection. B. Submittals: Within fourteen (14) days after Notice to Proceed submit product data on all irrigation equipment. C. Any desired substitutions for irrigation equipment require submittals for specific written approval. SEPTEMBER 19, 2014 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION SECTION 02810- 1 HEB TENNIS CENTER 1.06 UTILITIES A. Contractor shall verify location of all on site utilities prior to trenching. Notify Architect by telephone and in writing of any conflicts prior to installation. Restoration of damaged utilities shall be made at the Contractor's expense to the satisfaction of the Architect. 1.07 CODES A. Irrigation system and electrical power to controller shall be installed and tested in accordance with local codes and manufacturer's specifications. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.01 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Unless otherwise noted: 1. PVC material shall conform to ASTM D-1784 2. Lateral pipe shall be ASTM D-1785 SCH-40 PVC 3. Mainline for pipes up to 2” diameter shall be ASTM D-1785 SCH-40 PVC. 4. All PVC solvent weld fittings for lateral piping shall be Schedule 40 PVC. 5. Main line fittings shall be Schedule 40 PVC. 6. All threaded fittings for lateral pipe shall be Schedule 40 PVC heavy wall. 7. All main line threaded fittings shall match the pipe type. 8. All risers and nipples shall be Schedule 80 PVC. 9. Plastic threaded fittings shall have Permatex #2 thread sealant with Teflon or equal. 10. PVC cement shall be IPS (Industrial Poly Chemicals) for solvent weld, with associated primer to fit pipe type and size. 2.03 SLEEVING A. All main and lateral lines located beneath paving shall be sleeved with Schedule 40 PVC pipe unless otherwise noted. 2.04 CONDUCTORS A. Control Wire: Type UF, 600v. insulation, copper, common ground white, U.L. approved for irrigation control use. 1. Minimum wire gauge #14, use gauge appropriate to distance to account for voltage loss. 2. Splices shall be sealed with approved wire nuts enclosed in resin–filled envelopes. B. Controller Power: Conductor shall be insulated copper, THHN/THWN (Thermoplastic High Heat- resistant / Water-resistant Nylon-coated), solid or stranded. 1. Conductors shall be No.12 AWG (American Wire Gauge) minimum size. Use size and number of conductors appropriate to distance to account for voltage loss. 2. Follow standard electrical practices for wire color code. 2.05 VALVE BOXES A. Valve boxes: Pre-cast lockable plastic by Carson Industries LLC, or approved equal, free of all cracks, chips or structural defects. Size as required by equipment plus adequate clearance to operate valves unless otherwise noted. 1. Boxes subject to vehicular traffic shall be concrete and have traffic lid covers. 2. Plastic valve box lids shall be branded with the valve station # as connected to the controller as indicated on the Plans. Concrete / iron valve box lids shall be labeled with the valve station # using a weather resistant method. 3. Plastic valve boxes in turf areas shall be green color unless otherwise noted. 4. Plastic valve boxes in planting / mulch areas shall be black color unless otherwise noted. SEPTEMBER 19, 2014 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION SECTION 02810- 2 HEB TENNIS CENTER B. Valve identification tags: as manufactured by Christy Enterprises, Anaheim CA, (800)258-4583, or approved equal. 1. A Valve ID tag, with the valve station # clearly marked with weatherproof method, shall be attached to the inside of each remote control valve, and attached by means of a weatherproof tie. 2.06 IRRIGATION EQUIPMENT A. As shown on the Plans. 2.07 CONDUIT A. Conduits: Shall be U.L. listed and bear the label of the national board of fire underwriters, and shall be of a rigid nonmetallic type, Schedule 40 PVC plastic for underground installations, rated 90 degrees C, with glue-on PVC couplings and factory made elbows and sweeps; Carlon "plus 80". 1. Couplings and connectors shall be made watertight in all runs. Utilize solvent cement of type approved by conduit manufacturer. 2. Conduits shall be joined by approved conduit couplings and shall have ends butted in all cases where couplings are used. 3. Provide adapters and locknuts where conduit is attached to metal boxes and panels. 4. Bends shall be made with standard conduit elbows or conduit bent to not less than same radius. All bends shall be free from dents or flattening. PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Acceptance of Work: Site grading shall be completed and/or accommodated to specified tolerances before trenching. The contractor shall be responsible for verifying the existing conditions on site and the removal and or reinstallation required making the grades. B. Schematic: System features are shown schematically for graphic clarity. Install all piping and valves in common trenches where feasible and inside planting areas. C. Coordination: Coordinate trenching as required with trenching contractor as well as with any other trades affected by irrigation installation. D. Grading: Contractor shall be responsible for installing all irrigation features to their finished elevation and at depths indicated. E. Finish Grade: Unless otherwise noted, all heads shall be set at, and perpendicular to, finish grade. F. Record Plans of As-Built Conditions: Contractor shall regularly update a print of the system and any changes made to the system throughout the project. Features below ground shall be indicated with at least two measurements from surface features such as pavements, fences and buildings. Indicate actual control and ball valve and quick coupler locations in a similar manner. 1. All final changes shall be recorded on a reproducible plan before trenches are backfilled. The as-built plan shall be completed and submitted to the Architect before final payment shall be made for work installed. G. Quick Coupler Keys: Contractor shall supply the Owner with a minimum of two (2) quick coupler keys at the time of Final Inspection. H. Guarantee: Contractor shall guarantee irrigation system for one year from date of acceptance. SEPTEMBER 19, 2014 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION SECTION 02810- 3 HEB TENNIS CENTER 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Point of Connection: shall be below grade. B. Trenching: Trenching for mainline, sleeves, and laterals shall be to the required depths as shown on the Plans. Maintain excavations free of water while installing pipe and until backfilled. C. Pipelines: pipelines shown parallel on the Plan may be installed in a common trench. Where required, snake pipe from side to side when trench exceeds 30 feet in length. 1. Where pipelines are shown parallel to or adjacent to shrub or ground cover areas, they shall be installed in these areas. 2. Where shown parallel to or adjacent to lawn areas versus pavement, they shall be installed in the lawn area. All changes in depth of pipe shall be accomplished using 45 degree fittings. D. Sleeves: Contractor shall adequately size sleeves for all wiring and irrigation lines to be placed (with ends clearly marked above grade) under driveways and walks prior to their construction. 1. Sleeves shall continue a minimum of 1 foot into planting areas. 2. All wiring shall be in a separate sleeve. E. Fabrication: All manifolds shall be neat, orderly, and constructed for ease in maintenance operations. Install manifolds to allow valve boxes to be parallel to each other and to adjacent walls, walks, and curbs. Cuts and joints shall be free of burrs, smooth and minimum in quantity. F. Control Wire: 1. Install control wire in pipe trenches wherever practical. All wire shall be installed below or level with the bottom of adjacent pipes. 2. Tape to pipe every 10 feet. Conduits or sleeve required shall be sized based on control wires as specified herein. 3. All wiring above finish grade shall be enclosed in steel conduit. 4. All splices shall be sealed with 3M connectors or equal. All intermittent wire splices between valves or between controller valves shall be installed in a valve box, locations as approved by the Architect. 5. Control wire for unused stations shall be pulled as noted on the Plans. 6. Extra valve wires in addition to those required for unused stations shall be pulled as noted on the Plans. 7. Color of control wire shall be different than pilot wire. 8. Provide 24" excess wiring in each valve box or pull box. Neatly coil in valve box or pull box. 9. All wiring shall be tested for continuity, open circuits and unintentional grounding prior to connecting. G. Irrigation Equipment: 1. Install irrigation equipment as shown on the Plans. H. Backfilling: 1. Cover no joints until system has been pressure tested and approved by the Architect. Level bottom trenches for a smooth flat grade, and excavate bell holes where necessary to ensure that pipe rests for entire length on solid ground. Should rock or other unsuitable material be encountered, excavate to 6" below bottom of pipe and replace with well tamped and compacted approved backfill material or sand before laying pipe. When piping has been installed, tested, inspected, and approved, backfill excavations with clean earth from excavation, or with imported sandy soil in layers not exceeding 8". The top 6" of the trenches shall contain on-site near surface soils. Backfill with potentially damaging rocks and debris shall not be permitted. Moisten and machine tamp, and restore the ground or paving to original condition. 2. Backfill shall be compacted per specification, see Section 02200 Earthwork and Grading. 3. After backfilling, remove from the premises all surplus earth resulting from this work and dispose of same, to the satisfaction of the Architect. SEPTEMBER 19, 2014 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION SECTION 02810- 4 HEB TENNIS CENTER I. Flushing of System: After installation of pipe lines and sprinkler risers, but before installation of sprinkler heads, thoroughly flush the system under full water main pressure to remove any foreign material in the pipes. Backfill and settle soil. Rake smooth to match surrounding grade. J. Coverage Adjustments: Adjust all heads for arc, radius, riser height, and distribution for uniform and optimum coverage. Such adjustments shall include nozzle changes without additional cost to the Owner. K. Valve Boxes: Install valve boxes so that the top of box is ½” above finish grade in turf areas and 1-½” above finish grade in mulch areas. Install valve box assembly in ground cover / shrub and not in hard paved areas. Install in lawn area only if groundcover does not exist adjacent to lawn. 1. Each valve shall have a valve-identification tag, the corresponding valve box cover shall be branded with the valve identification number. L. Clean-up: Keep project area clean on a daily basis, removing debris from the site. 3.04 CONTROLLER A. Installation: Install controller onto concrete base or on to wall per the Plans. B. Power: Install power to controller following all applicable electrical codes. Install GFCI switch and 9-volt battery. 1. For multiple controllers – each controller shall have a separate, dedicated common. 3.05 VALVE STATIONING A. Contractor shall clearly label and sequence stations for ease in maintenance operations. Final valve stationing shall be marked clearly on the as-built plans. 1. Provide laminated copies, 11x17 and 8.5x11 sizes, of the marked-up as built plans with color- coded valve zones (Valve-stationing Plans), for reference purposes inside the controller. 2. Verify and document station sequence and run-times (Controller Schedule) with maintenance personnel. 3.06 PRESSURE TEST A. Pressure Test: 1. Notify the Owner a minimum of two working days prior to pressure test. 2. Exercise caution in filling the system to prevent excessive surge pressure and water hammer. 3. Pipe subject to continuous water pressure (pressure lines) shall be tested at 125 lbs. of hydro- static pressure for two hours with a maximum 5 PSI drop. Repair any leaks, if necessary, and re-test. 4. The Contractor must furnish all equipment and temporary connections required for tests. B. Closing in Un-inspected Work: The Contractor shall pay all costs necessitated by requiring opening, restoration and correction of all work closed in or concealed before inspection, testing as required and approval by Architect. Notify Architect 48 hours in advance of required testing. 3.07 IRRIGATION COVERAGE A. Inspection of irrigation coverage shall take place during the Intermediate Review, as specified herein. 1. The Contractor shall, in the presence of the Architect, perform a coverage and operation test to determine if the system is fully operational. 2. If it is determined that adjustments in the irrigation equipment and the re-spacing of heads and/or relocation of emitters will provide more complete coverage, the Contractor shall make such adjustments prior to planting. Adjustments may also include changes in nozzle or emitter sizes and degrees of arc as necessary. SEPTEMBER 19, 2014 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION SECTION 02810- 5 HEB TENNIS CENTER 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for making changes and obtaining complete and adequate coverage in all irrigated areas at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.08 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. The Contract lump sum price paid for Landscape Irrigation shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all labor, material, equipment, tools, and incidentals, for all work involved as specified in this Section, as shown on the Drawings, and as directed by the Architect, and no separate payment shall be made. END OF SECTION SEPTEMBER 19, 2014 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION SECTION 02810- 6 Section 02882 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 02882 TENNIS COURT NET POSTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Net Posts. B. Net Cable Reels. C. Net Center Tie Down Anchors. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02790 – Tennis Court Resurfacing. B. Section 02791 – Tennis Court Overlay. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340. B. ( Product Data ): Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Installation methods. 2. Maintenance instructions. C. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products and installation shall comply with the following: 1. USTA (United States Tennis Association). 1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty for Partitions: Provide warranty for repair or replacement for defects in materials, hardware or workmanship for the period specified below from the date of Substantial Completion, when properly stored, handled and maintained under normal usage. 1. Baked On Powder Coat Finish: 1 year. 2. Net Cable Reel Mechanism: 1 year. Section 02882 Page 2 of 2 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work with placement of concrete paving, asphalt paving & post footing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Douglas Sports Nets & Equipment, which is located at: 3441 S 11th Ave, Eldridge, IA 52748; Tel: 1-800-553-8907. Web: www.douglas-sports.com B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01605. 2.2 NET POSTS A. Sidewinder 3-1/2”, Green Item No. 63005. 2.3 NET REELS A. Replacement Reel-1, Green Item No. 33430. 2.4 CENTER TIE DOWN ANCHOR A. Universal Center Tie Down Anchor, Item No. 63428. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until installation conditions and substrates have been properly prepared. 3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum variation from true position: 1/4 inch (6 mm). B. Maximum variation from plumb: 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Touch-up minor scratches and nicks in paint finish with same color and type of paint as original finish. Repair such that damage and refinishing cannot be detected. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces and wash with mild soap. Do not use abrasives. END OF SECTION 03000 Page 1 of 12 SECTION 03000 FLAT WORK - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for the materials used; for the storing and handling of materials; and for the proportioning and mixing of concrete for culverts and incidental concrete construction. The concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, aggregates (fine and coarse), admixtures if desired or required, and water, proportioned and mixed as hereinafter provided. 2. MATERIALS (1) Cement The cement shall be either Type I, II or III Portland Cement conforming to ASTM Designation: C 150, modified as follows: Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer, the specific surface area of Type I and II cements shall not exceed 2000 square centimeters per gram (Wagner Turbidimeter - Test Method Tex-310-D). For concrete piling, the above limit on specific surface area is waived for Type II cement only. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer, with each shipment, a statement as to the specific surface area of the cement expressed in square centimeters per gram. For cement strength requirements, either the tensile or compressive test may be used. Either Type I or II cement shall be used unless Type II is specified on the plans. Except when Type II is specified on the plans, Type III cement may be used when the anticipated air temperature for the succeeding 12 hours will not exceed 600F. Type III cement may be used in all precast prestressed concrete, except in piling when Type II cement is required for substructure concrete. Different types of cement may be used in the same structure, but all cement used in any one monolithic placement shall be of the same type and brand. Only one brand of each type will be permitted in any one structure unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. Cement may be delivered in bulk where adequate bin storage is provided. All other cement shall be delivered in bags marked plainly with the name of the manufacturer and the type of cement. Similar information shall be provided in the bills of lading accompanying each shipment of packaged or bulk cement. Bags shall contain 94 pounds net. All bags shall be in good condition at time of delivery. All cement shall be properly protected against dampness. No caked cement will be accepted. Cement remaining in storage for a prolonged period of time may be retested and rejected if it fails to conform to any of the requirements of these specifications. (2) Mixing Water Water for use in concrete and for curing shall be free from oils, acids, organic matter or other deleterious substances and shall not contain more than 1000 parts per million of chlorides as CL nor than 1000 parts million of sulfates as SO4. 03000 Page 2 of 12 Water from municipal supplies approved by the State Health Department will not require testing, but water from other sources will be sampled and tested before use in structural concrete. Tests shall be made in accordance with the "Standard Method of Test for Quality of Water to be used in Concrete" (AASHO Method T-26), except where such methods are in conflict with provisions of this specification. (3) Coarse Aggregate Coarse aggregate shall consist of durable particles of gravel, crushed blast furnace slag, crushed stone, or combinations thereof; free from frozen material or injurious amount of salt, alkali, vegetable matter, or other objectionable material either free or as an adherent coating; and its quality shall be reasonably uniform throughout. It shall not contain more than 0.25 percent by weight of clay lumps, nor more than 1.0 percent by weight of shale, nor more than 5 percent of weight of laminated and/or friable particles when tested in accordance with Test Method Tex-413.A. It shall have a wear of not more than 40 percent when tested in accordance with Test Method Tex-410-A. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, coarse aggregate will be subjected to five cycles of the soundness test in accordance with Test Method Tex-411-A. The loss shall not be greater than 12 percent when sodium sulfate is used, or 18 percent when magnesium sulfate is used. Permissible sizes of aggregate shall be governed by Table 4, except that when exposed aggregate surfaces are required, coarse aggregate gradation will be as specified on the plans. When tested by approved methods, the coarse aggregate, including combinations of aggregates when used, shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 1. TABLE 1 Coarse Aggregate Gradation Chart Percent Retained on each Sieve Aggregate Grade No. Nominal Size 2.5 In. 2 In. 1.5 In. 1 In. 3/4 In. 1/2 In. 3/8 In. No. 4 No. 8 1 2 in. 0 0 to 20 15 to 50 60 to 80 95 to 100 2 (467)* 1.5 in. 0 0 to 5 30 to 65 70 to 90 95 to 100 4 (57)* 1 in. 0 0 to 5 40 to 75 90 to 100 95 to 100 8 3/8 in. 0 0 to 5 35 to 80 90 to 100 *Numbers in parenthesis indicate conformance with ASTM C33. The aggregate shall be washed. The Loss by Decantation (Test Method Tex-406-A) plus the allowable weight of clay lumps, shall not exceed one percent, or the value shown on the plans, whichever is smaller. (4) Fine Aggregate Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, hard, durable and uncoated particles of natural or manufactured sand or a combination thereof, with or without a mineral filler. It shall be free from frozen material or injurious 03000 Page 3 of 12 amounts of salt, alkali, vegetable matter or other objectionable material and it shall not contain more than 0.5 percent by weight of clay lumps. When subjected to the color test for organic impurities (Test Method Tex- 408-A), it shall not show a color a darker than standard. The fine aggregate shall produce a mortar having a tensile strength equal to or greater than that of O ttawa sand mortar when tested in accordance with Test Method Tex-317-D. Where manufactured sand is used in lieu of natural sand for slab concrete subject to direct traffic, the acid insoluble residue of the fine aggregate shall be not less than 28 percent by weight when tested in accordance with Test Method Tex-612-J. When tested by approved methods, the fine aggregate or combinations of aggregates, including mineral filler, shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 2. Table 2 Fine Aggregate Gradation Chart Percent Retained on Each Sieve Aggregate Grade No. 3/8 In. No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 30 No. 50 No. 100 No. 200 1 0 0 to 5 0 to 20 15 to 50 35 to 75 70 to 90 90 to 100 97 to 100 NOTE 1: Where manufactured sand is used in lieu of natural sand, the percent retained on the No. 200 sieve shall be 94 to 100. NOTE 2: Where the sand equivalent value is greater than 85, the retainage on the No. 50 sieve may be 70 to 94 percent. Fine aggregate will be subjected to the Sand Equivalent Test (Test Method Tex-203-F). The sand equivalent shall not be less than 80 nor less than the value shown on the plans, whichever is greater. For Class A and C and E Concrete, the fineness modulus as defined below for fine aggregates shall be between 2.30 and 3.10. The fineness modulus will be determined by adding the percentages by weight retained on the following sieves, and dividing by 100; Nos. 4, 8, 16, 30, 50 and 100. 03000 Page 4 of 12 (5) Mineral Filler Mineral filler shall consist of stone dust, clean crushed sand, or other approved inert material. (6) Mortar (Grout) Mortar for repair of concrete shall consist of 1 part cement, 2 parts finely graded sand, and enough water to make the mixture plastic. When required to prevent color difference, white cement shall be added to produce the color required. When required by the Engineer, latex adhesive shall be added to the mortar. (7) Admixtures Calcium Chloride will not be permitted. Unless otherwise noted, air-entraining, retarding and water reducing admixtures may be used in all concrete and shall conform to the following requirements: A "water-reducing, retarding admixture" is defined as a material which, when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity, will reduce the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency and will retard the initial set of the concrete. A "water-reducing admixture" is defined as a material which, when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity, will reduce the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency. (a) Retarding and Water Reducing Admixtures. The admixture shall meet the requirements for Type A and Type D admixture as specified in ASTM Designation: C 494, modified as follows: (1) The water-reducing retarder shall retard the initial set of the concrete a minimum of 2 hours and a maximum of 4 hours, at a specified dosage rate, at a temperature of 900F. (2) The cement used in any series of tests shall be either the cement proposed for specific work or a "reference" Type I cement from one mill. (3) Unless otherwise noted on the plans, the minimum relative durability factor shall be 80. The air entraining admixture used in the referenced and test concrete shall be neutralized Vinsol resin. (b) Air Entraining Admixture. The admixture shall met the requirements of ASTM Designation: C 260 modified as follows: (1) The cement used in any series of tests shall be either the cement proposed for specific work or a "reference" Type I cement from one mill. (2) Unless otherwise noted on the plans, the minimum relative durability factor shall be 80. The air entraining admixture used in the referenced concrete shall be neutralized Vinsol resin. 3. STORAGE OF CEMENT All cement shall be stored in well ventilated weatherproof buildings or approved bins, which will protect it from dampness or absorption of moisture. Storage facilities shall be ample, and each shipment of packaged cement shall be kept separated to provide easy access for identification and inspection. The Engineer may permit small quantities of sacked cement to be stored in the open for a maximum of 48 03000 Page 5 of 12 hours on a raised platform and under waterproof covering. 4. STORAGE OF AGGREGATE The method of handling and storing concrete aggregate shall prevent contamination with foreign materials. If the aggregates are stored on the ground, the sites for the stock piles shall be clear of all vegetation and level. The bottom layer of aggregate shall not be disturbed or used without recleaning. When conditions require the use of two or more sizes of aggregates, they shall be separated to prevent intermixing. Where space is limited, stock piles shall be separated by physical barriers. Methods of handling aggregates during stockpiling and subsequent use shall be such that segregation will be minimized. Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, all aggregate shall be stockpiled at least 24 hours to reduce the free moisture content. 5. MEASUREMENT OF MATERIALS The measurement of the materials, except water, used in batches of concrete shall be by weight. The fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and mineral filler shall be weighed separately. Where bulk cement is used it shall be weighed separately but batch weighing of sacked cement will not be required. Where sacked cement is used, the quantities of material per batch shall be based upon using full bags of cement. Batches involving the use of fractional bags will not be permitted. Allowance shall be made for the water content in the aggregates. Bags of cement varying more than 3 percent from the specified weight of 94 pounds may be rejected, and when the average weight per bag in any shipment, as determined by weighing 50 bags taken at random , is less than the net weight specified, the entire shipment may be rejected. If the shipment is accepted, the Engineer will adjust the concrete mix to a net weight per bag fixed by an average of all individual weights which are less than the average weight determined from the total number weighed. 6. CLASSIFICATION AND MIX DESIGN It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish the mix design, using a Coarse Aggregate Factor acceptable to the Engineer, for the class (es) of concrete specified. The mix shall be designed by a qualified concrete technician to conform with the requirement contained herein and in accordance with the THD Bulletin C-11. The Contractor shall perform, at his own expense, the work required to substantiate the design, except the testing of strength specimens, which will be done by the Engineer. Complete concrete design data shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine and measure the batch quantity of each ingredient, including all water, so that the mix conforms to these specifications and any other requirements shown on the plans. In lieu of the above mix design responsibility, the Contractor may accept a design furnished by the Engineer, however, this will not relieve him of providing concrete meeting the requirements of these specifications. Trial batches will be made and tested using all the proposed ingredients prior to the placing of concrete, and when the aggregate and/or brand of cement or admixture is changed. Trial batches shall be made in the mixer to be used on the job. When Transit Mix concrete is to be used, the trial designs will be made in a transit mixer representative of the mixers to be used. Batch size shall not be less than 50 percent of the rated mixing capacity of the truck. Mix designs from previous or concurrent jobs may be used without trial batches if it is shown that no 03000 Page 6 of 12 substantial change in any of the proposed ingredients has been made. The coarse aggregate factor shall not be more than 0.82, except that when the voids in the coarse aggregate exceed 48 percent of the total dry loose volume, the coarse aggregate factor shall not exceed 0.85. The coarse aggregate factor shall not be less than 0.70 for Grades 1, 2 and 3 aggregate. If the strength required for the class of concrete being produced is not secured with the cement specified in Table 4, the Contractor may use an approved water reducing or retarding admixture, or he shall furnish aggregates with different characteristics which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or permitted as temporary measure until the redesign is checked. Water reducing or retarding agents may be used with all classes of concrete at the option of the Contractor. When water reducing or retarding agents are used at the option of the Contractor, reduced dosage of the admixture will be permitted. Entrained air will be required in accordance with Table 4. The concrete shall be designed to entrain 5 percent air when Grade 2 coarse aggregate is used and 6 percent when Grade 3 coarse aggregate is used. Concrete as placed in the structure shall contain the proper amount as required above with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percentage points. Occasional variations beyond this tolerance will not be cause for rejection. When the quantity of entrained air is found to be above 7 percent with Grade 2 coarse aggregate or 8 percent for Grade 3 coarse aggregate, additional test beams or cylinders will be made. If these beams or cylinders pass the minimum flexural or compressive requirements, the concrete will not be rejected because of the variation in air content. 7. CONSISTENCY In cases where the consistency requirements cannot be satisfied without exceeding the maximum allowable amount of water, the Contractor may use, or the Engineer may require, an approved water reducing or retarding agent or the Contractor shall furnish additional aggregates, or aggregates with different characteristics, which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until aggregates are changed and designs checked with the difference aggregates or admixture. The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. When field conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for the final concrete surface finishing operation, the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only, and shall be held to a minimum. The concrete shall be workable, cohesive, possess satisfactory finishing qualities, and of the stiffest consistency that can be placed and vibrated into a homogenous mass. Excessive bleeding shall be avoided. Slump requirements will be as specified in Table 3. TABLE 3 Slump Requirements Concrete Designation Desired Slump Max. Slump Structural Concrete (1) Thin-Walled Sections (9" or less) (2) Slabs, Caps, Columns, Piers, Wall Sections 9", etc. 4 3 5 4 03000 Page 7 of 12 Underwater or Seal Concrete Riprap, Curb, Gutter and Other Misc. Concrete 5 2.5 6 4 NOTE: No concrete will be permitted with slump in excess of the maximums shown. 8. QUALITY OF CONCRETE General The concrete shall be uniform and workable. The cement content, maximum allowable water cement ration, the desired and maximum slump and the strength requirements of the various classes of concrete shall conform to the requirements of Table 3 and Table 4 and as required herein. During the process of the work, the Engineer will cast test cylinders or beams as a check on the compressive or flexural strength of the concrete actually placed. A test shall be defined as the average of the breaking strength of two cylinders or two beams, as the case may be. Specimen will be tested in accordance with Test Methods Tex-418-A or Tex-420-A. Test beams or cylinders will be required as specified on the plans. For small placements on structures such as manholes, inlets, culverts, wingwalls, etc., the Engineer may vary the number of tests to a minimum of one for each 25 cubic yards placed over a several day period. All test specimens, beams of cylinders, representing tests for removal of forms and/or falsework shall be cured using the same methods, and under the same conditions as the concrete represented. "Design Strength" beams and cylinders shall be cured in accordance with THD Bulletin C-11. The Contractor shall provide and maintain curing facilities as described in Bulletin C-11 for the purpose of curing test specimens. Provision shall be made to maintain the water in the curing tank at temperatures between 700F and 900F. When control of concrete quality is by twenty-eight day compressive tests, job control will be by seven day compressive tests which are shown to provide the required twenty-eight day strength, based on results from trial batches. If the required seven day strength is not secured with the cement specified in Table 4, changes in the batch design will be made. TABLE 4 Classes of Concrete Class of Concrete Sx. Cement per C.Y. Min. Comp Strength (f'c) 28 Day psi Min. Beam Strength 7 Day psi Max. Water Cement Ratio Coarse Aggr. No. A* 5.0 3000 500*** 6.5 2-4-8**** B* 4.5 2500 417 8.0 2-4-8**** C* 6.0 3600 600*** 6.0 1-2-4** D 6.0 3000 500 7.0 2-4 S 6.5 4000 570 5.0 2-4 * Entrained Air (slabs, pier and bent concrete) 03000 Page 8 of 12 ** Grade 1 coarse Aggregate may be used in foundation only (except cased drilled shafts) *** When Type II Cement is used with Class C Concrete, the 7 day beam break requirement will be 550 psi; with Class A, 460 psi. min. **** Permission to use Grade 8 Aggregate must have prior approval of the Engineer 9. MIXING CONDITIONS The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use. Any concrete which is not in place within the limits outlined in specifications, Section 038000 "Concrete Structures", Article "Placing Concrete General", shall not be used. Retamping of concrete will not be permitted. In threatening weather, which may result in conditions that will adversely affect quality of the concrete to be placed, the Engineer may order postponement of the work. Where work has been started and changes in weather conditions require protective measures, the Contractor shall furnish adequate shelter to protect the concrete against damage from rainfall, or from freezing temperatures. If necessary to continue operations during rainfall, the Contractor shall also provide protective coverings for the material stock piles. Aggregate stock piles need be covered only to the extent necessary to control the moisture conditions in the aggregates to adequately control the consistency of the concrete. 10. MIXING AND MIXING EQUIPMENT (a) All equipment, tools, and machinery used for hauling materials and performing any part of the work shall be maintained in such condition to insure completion of the work under way without excessive delays for repairs or replacements. The mixing shall be done in a batch mixer of approved type and size that will produce uniform distribution of the material throughout the mass. Mixers may be either the revolving drum type or the revolving blade type, and shall be capable of producing concrete meeting the requirements of these specifications. After all the ingredients are assembled in the drum, the mixing shall continue not less than 1 minute for mixers of one cubic yard or less capacity plus 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof. The mixer shall operate at the speed and capacity designated by the Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of the Associated General Contractors of America. The mixer shall have a plate affixed showing the manufacturer's recommended operating data. The absolute volume of the concrete batch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer. The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before any materials are placed therein for the succeeding batch. The first batch of concrete materials placed in the mixer for each placement shall contain an extra quantity of sand, cement, and water sufficient to coat the inside surface of the drum. Upon the cessation of mixing for any considerable length of time, the mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned. The concrete mixer shall be equipped with an automatic timing device which is put into operation when the skip is raised to its full height and dumping. This device shall lock the discharging mechanism and prevent emptying of the mixer until all the materials have been mixed together for the minimum time required, and it shall ring a bell after the specified time of mixing has elapsed. The water tank shall be arranged so that the amount of water can be measured accurately, and when the tank starts to discharge, the inlet supply shall cut off automatically. 03000 Page 9 of 12 Whenever a concrete mixer is not adequate or suitable for the work, it shall be removed from the site upon a written order from the Engineer and a suitable mixer provided by the Contractor. Pick-up and thro-over blades in the drum of the mixer which are worn down more than 10 percent in depth shall be repaired or replaced by new blades. Improperly mixed concrete shall not be placed in the structure. Job mix concrete shall be concrete mixed in an approved batch mixer in accordance with the requirements stated above, adjacent to the structure for which the concrete is being mixed, and moved to the placement site, in non-agitating equipment. 11. READY-MIX PLANTS A. General. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish concrete meeting all requirement of the governing specifications items and concrete not meeting the slump, workability and consistency requirements of the governing specification item shall not be placed in the structure or pavement. Ready-Mixed Concrete shall be mixed and delivered by means of one of the following approved methods. (1) Mixed completely in a stationary mixer and transported to the point of delivery in a truck agitator or a truck mixer operating at agitator or a truck mixer operating at agitation speed. (Central-Mix Concrete) (2) Mixed complete in a truck mixer and transported to the placement site at mixing and/or agitating speed (Transit-Mix Concrete), subject to the following provisions. (a) Truck mixers will be permitted to transport concrete to the job site at mixing speed if equipped with double actuated counters which will separate revolutions at mixing speed from total revisions. (b) Truck mixers equipped with a single actuated counter counting total revolutions of the drum shall mix the concrete at the plant not less than 50 nor more than 70 revolutions at mixing speed, transport it to the job site at agitating speed and complete the required mixing before placing the concrete. (3) Mixed completely in a stationery mixer and transported to the job site in approved non-agitating trucks with special bodies. This method of transporting will be permitted for concrete pavement only. B. Equipment (1) Batching Plant. The batching plant shall be provided with adequate bins for batching all aggregates and materials required by the specifications. Bulk cement shall be weighed on a scale separate from those used for other materials and in a hopper entirely free and independent of that used for weighing the aggregates. (2) Mixers and Agitators. (a) General: Mixers shall be of an approved stationary or truck-type capable of combining the ingredients into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Facilities shall be provided to permit ready access to the inside of the drum for 03000 Page 10 of 12 inspection, cleaning and repair of blades. Mixers and agitators shall be subject to daily examination for changes in condition due to accumulation of hardened concrete and/or wear of blades and any hardened concrete shall be removed before the mixer will be permitted to be used. Worn blades shall be repaired or replaced with new in accordance with the manufacturer's design and arrangement for that particular unit when any part or section is worn as much as 10 percent below the original height of the manufacturer's design. (b) Stationary Mixers: These shall conform to the requirements of Article "Mixing and Mixing Equipment". Truck mixers mounted on a stationary base will not be considered as a stationary mixer. (c) Truck Mixer: In addition, truck mixers shall comply with the following requirements: An engine in satisfactory working condition and capable of accurately growing the desired speed of rotation shall be mounted as an integral part of the mixing unit for the purpose of rotating the drum. Truck mixers equipped with a transmission that will govern the speed of the drum within the specified rpm will not require a separate engine. All truck mixers shall be equipped with actuated counters by which the proper number of revolutions of the drum as specified in "Part A" above may be readily verified. The counters shall be read and recorded at the start of mixing at mixing speeds. 03000 Page 11 of 12 Each until shall have adequate water supply and accurate metering or gauging devices for measuring the amount used. (d) Agitators: Concrete agitators shall be of the truck type, capable of maintaining a thoroughly mixed and uniform concrete mass and discharging it within the same degree of uniformity specified for mixers. Agitators shall comply with all of the requirements for truck mixers, except for the actual mixing requirements. C. Operation of Plant and Equipment Delivery of ready-mixed concrete shall equal or exceed the rate approved by the Engineer for continuous placement. In all cases, the delivery of concrete to the placement site shall assure compliance with the time limits in the applicable specification for depositing successive batches in any monolithic unit. The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that adequate standby trucks are available. A standard ticket system will be used for recording concrete batching, mixing and delivery date. Tickets will be delivered to the job inspector. Loads arriving without ticket and/or in unsatisfactory condition shall not be used. When a stationary mixer is used for the entire mixing operation, the mixing time for one cubic yard of concrete shall be one minute plus 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof. This mixing time shall start when all cement, aggregates and initial water have entered the drum. The mixer shall be charged so that some of the mixing water will enter the drum in advance of the cement and aggregate. All of the mixing water shall be in the drum by the end of the first one-fourth of the specified mixing time. Water used to flush down the blades after charging shall be accurately measured and included in the quantity of mixing water. The introduction of the initial mixing water, except blade wash down water and that permitted in this Article, shall be prior to or simultaneous with the charging of the aggregates and cement. The loading of truck mixers shall not exceed 63 percent of the total volume of the drum. W hen used as an agitator only, the loading shall not exceed 80 percent of the drum volume. When Ready-Mix Concrete is used, additional mortar (one sack cement, three parts sand and sufficient water) shall be added to the batch to coat the drum of the mixer or agitator truck and this shall be required for every load of Class C concrete only and for the first batch from central mix plants. A portion of the mixing water, required by the batch design to produce the desired slump, may be withheld and added at the job site, but only with permission of the Engineer and under his supervision. When water is added under the above conditions, it shall be thoroughly mixed as specified below for water added at the job site. Mixing speed shall be attained as soon as all ingredients are in the mixer, and each complete batch (containing all the required ingredients) shall be mixed not less than 70 nor more than 100 revolutions of the drum at mixing speed except that when water is added at the job site, 25 revolutions (minimum) at mixing speed, will be required to uniformly disperse the additional water throughout the mix. Mixing speed shall be as designated by the manufacturer. All revolutions after the prescribed mixing time shall be at agitating speed. The agitating speed shall be not less than one nor more than 5 rpm. The drum shall be kept in continuous motion from the time mixing is started until the discharge is completed. 12. PLACING, CURING AND FINISHING The placing of concrete, including construction of forms and falsework, curing and finishing, shall be in 03000 Page 12 of 12 accordance with the specification, Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". 13. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT The quantities of concrete of the various classifications which will constitute the completed and accepted structure of structures in place will not be measured for pay, but shall be considered subsidiary to the project. Unless indicated otherwise in the proposal, payment shall be compensation for finishing, hauling, and mixing all concrete material; placing, curing and furnishing all concrete; all grouting and pointing; furnishing and placing drains; furnishing and placing metal flashing strips; furnishing and placing expansion joint material required by this specification; and for all forms and falsework, labor, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 03200 Page 1 of 5 SECTION 03200 FLAT WORK - REINFORCING STEEL 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the furnishing and placing of reinforcing steel, deformed and smooth, of the size and quantity designated on the plans and in accordance with these specifications. 2. MATERIALS Unless otherwise designated on the plans, all bar reinforcement shall be deformed, and shall conform to ASTM Designation: A 615, Grades 40, 60 and 75, and shall be open hearth, basic oxygen, or electric furnace new billet steel. Large diameter new billet steel (Nos. 14 and 18), Grade 75, will be permitted for straight bars only. Where bending of bar sizes No. 14 or No. 18 of Grades 40 and 60 is required, bend testing shall be performed on representative specimens as described for smaller bars in the applicable ASTM Specification. The required bend shall be 90 degrees around a pin having a diameter of 10 times the nominal diameter of the bar. Spiral reinforcement shall be smooth (not deformed) bars or wire of the minimum diameter shown on the plans, and shall be made by one or more of the following processes: open hearth, basic oxygen, or electric furnace. Bars shall be rolled from billets reduced from ingots and shall comply with ASTM, Designation: A 306, Grade 65 minimum (Referenced to ASTM Designation: A 29 is voided. Dimensional tolerances shall be in accordance with ASTM Designation: A 615, or ASTM Designation: A 615, Grade 40 or 60, except for deformations. Wire shall be cold-drawn from rods that have been hot-rolled from billets and shall comply with ASTM Designation: A 185. In cases where the provisions of this specifications are in conflict with the provisions of the ASTM Designation to which reference is made, the provisions of this specification shall govern. Report of chemical analysis showing the percentages of carbon, manganese, phosphorus and sulphur will be required for all reinforcing steel, when it is to be welded. The nominal size and area and the theoretical weight of reinforcing steel bars covered by this specification is as follows: Bar Size Number Nominal Diameter In. Nominal Area Sq. In. Weight Per Linear Foot 2 0.250 0.05 0.167 3 0.375 0.11 0.376 4 0.500 0.20 0.668 5 0.625 0.31 1.043 6 0.750 0.44 1.502 7 0.875 0.60 2.044 8 1.000 0.79 2.670 03200 Page 2 of 5 9 1.128 1.00 3.400 10 1.270 1.27 4.303 11 1.410 1.56 5.313 14 1.693 2.25 7.6 18 2.257 4.00 13.60 Smooth round bars shall be designated by size number through No. 4. Smooth bars above No. 4 shall be designated by diameter in inches. When wire is ordered by gauge numbers, the following relation between number and diameter, in inches, shall apply unless otherwise specified: Gauge Number Equivalent Diameter Inches Gauge Number Equivalent Diameter Inches 0 0.3065 8 0.1620 1 0.2830 9 0.1483 2 0.2625 10 0.1350 3 0.2437 11 0.1205 4 0.2253 12 0.1055 5 0.2070 13 0.0915 6 0.1920 14 0.0800 7 0.1770 3. BENDING The reinforcement shall be bent cold, true to the shapes indicated on the plans. Bending shall preferably be done in the shop. Irregularities in bending shall be cause for rejection. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the inside diameter of bar bends, in terms of the nominal bar diameter (d), shall be as follows: Bends of 900 and greater in stirrups, ties and other secondary bars that enclose another bar in the bend. Grade 40 Grade 60 #3, #4, #5 3d 4d #6, #7, #8 4d 5d All bends in main bars and in secondary bars not covered above. Grade 40 Grade 60 Grade 75 #3 thru #8 5d 6d -- #9, #10 5d 8d -- #11 5d 8d 8d 03200 Page 3 of 5 #14, #18 10d 10d -- 4. TOLERANCES Fabricating Tolerances for bars shall be within 3% of specified or as follows: 5. STORING Steel reinforcement shall be stored above the surface of the ground upon platforms, skids, or other supports and shall be protected as far as practicable from mechanical injury and surface deterioration caused by exposure to conditions producing rust. When placed in the work, reinforcement shall be free from dirt, paint, grease, oil, or other foreign materials. Reinforcement shall be free from injurious defects such as cracks and laminations. Rust, surface seams, surface irregularities or mill scale will not be cause for rejection, provided the minimum dimensions, cross-sectional area and tensile properties of a hand wire crushed specimen meets the physical requirements for size and grade of steel specified. 6. SPLICES No splicing of bars, except when provided on the plans or specified herein, will be permitted without written approval of the Engineer. Splices not provided for on the plans will be permitted, but not included for measurement, in Grade 40 bars only, sizes No. 8 and smaller, subject to the following: For bars exceeding 40 feet in plan length, the distance center to center of splices shall not be less than 40 feet and no individual bar length shall be less than 10 feet. Splices will not be permitted in bars less than 40 feet in plan length. Splices which are not shown on the plans, but permitted hereby, shall be made in accordance with Table 1 below. The specified concrete cover shall be maintained at such splices and the bars placed in contact and securely tied together. 03200 Page 4 of 5 Splices will not be permitted in main reinforcement at points of maximum stress. When permitted in main bars, splices in adjacent bars will be staggered a minimum of two splice lengths. TABLE 1 Minimum Lap Requirements Lap Uncoated Coated Lap in inches > 40d 60d Where d = Bar diameter in inches Welding of reinforcing bars may be used only where shown on the plans or as permitted herein. All welding operations, processes, equipment, materials, workmanship, and inspection shall conform to the requirements of the plans and of the specifications. All splices shall be of such dimension and character as to develop the full strength of bar being spliced. End preparation for butt welding reinforcing bars, shall be done in the field. Delivered bars shall be of sufficient length to permit this practice. For box culvert extensions with less than one foot of fill, the existing longitudinal bars shall have a 20 diameter lap with the new bars. For extensions with more than one foot of fill, a minimum of 6 inch lap will be required. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, dowel bars transferring tensile stresses, shall have a minimum embedment equal to the minimum lap requirements shown in Table 1. Shear transfer dowels shall have a minimum embedment of 12 inches. 7. PLACING Reinforcement shall be placed as near as possible in the position shown on the plans. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, dimensions shown for reinforcement are to the centers of the bars. In the plane of the steel parallel to the nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than one- twelfth of the spacing between bars. In the plane of the steel perpendicular to the nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than one-quarter inch. Cover of concrete to the nearest surface of steel shall meet the above requirements but shall never be less than one inch. Vertical stirrups shall always pass around the main tensions members and be attached securely thereto. The reinforcing steel shall be spaced its required distance from the form surface by means of approved galvanized metal spacers, metal spacers with plastic coated tips, stainless steel spacers, plastic spacers, or approved pre-cast mortar or concrete blocks. For approval of plastic spacers on project, representative samples of the plastic shall show no visible indications of deterioration after immersion in a 5 percent solution of sodium hydroxide for 120 hours. All reinforcing steel shall be sited at all intersections, except that where spacing is less than one foot in each direction, alternate intersections only, need be tied. Before any concrete is placed, all mortar shall be cleaned from the reinforcement. Pre-cast mortar or concrete blocks to be used for holding steel in position adjacent to formed surfaces shall be cast in molds meeting the approval of the Engineer and shall be cured by covering with wet burlap or cotton mats for a period of 72 hours. The blocks shall be cast in the form of a frustum of a cone or pyramid with the smaller face placed against the forms. 03200 Page 5 of 5 A suitable tie wire shall be provided in each block, to be used for anchoring to the steel. Except in unusual cases, and when specifically otherwise authorized by the Engineer, the size of the surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall not exceed two and one-half inches square or the equivalent thereof in cases where circular or rectangular areas are provided. Blocks shall be cast accurately to the thickness required, and the surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall be a true plane free of surface imperfections. Reinforcement shall be supported and tied in such manner that a sufficiently rigid case of steel is provided. If the cage is not adequately supported to resist settlement or floating upward of the steel, overturning of truss bars, or movement in any direction during concrete placement, permission to continue concrete placement will be withheld until corrective measures are taken. Sufficient measurements shall be made during concrete placement to insure compliance with the first paragraph of this specification. Mats of wire fabric shall overlap each other sufficiently to maintain a uniform strength and shall be fastened securely at the ends and edges. No concrete shall be deposited until the Engineer has inspected the placement of the reinforcing steel and given permission to proceed. 8. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Reinforcing steel is considered subsidiary to the various items shown in the proposal and shall not be measured and paid for as a separate item. 03800 Page 1 of 14 SECTION 03800 FLAT WORK - CONCRETE STRUCTURES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for construction of all types of structures involving the use of structural concrete, except where the requirements are waived or revised by other governing specifications. All concrete structures shall be constructed in accordance with the design requirements and details shown on the plans; in conformity with the pertinent provisions of the items contracted for; the incidental specifications referred to; and in conformity with the requirements herein. 2. MATERIALS (1) Concrete. All concrete shall conform to the provisions of the specification, "Portland Cement Concrete". The class of concrete for each type of structure or unit shall be as specified on the plans, or by pertinent governing specifications. (2) Expansion Joint Material (a) Preformed Fiber Material. Preformed fiber expansion joint material shall be of the dimensions shown on the plans. At the Contractor's option, the material shall be one of the following types, unless otherwise noted on the plans: 1. "Preformed Bituminous Fiber Materials" shall meet the requirements of the Standard Specifications for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction, ASTM Designation: D1751. 2. "Preformed Non-Bituminous Fiber Material" shall meet the requirements of the Standard Specifications for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction, ASTM Designation: D1751, except that the requirements pertaining to bitumen content, density and water absorption shall be voided. (b) Joint Sealing Materials. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, joint sealing material shall conform to the following requirements. The material shall adhere to the sides of the concrete joint or crack and shall form an effective seal against infiltration of water and incompressible. The material shall not crack or break when exposed to low temperatures. 1. Class 1-a. (Two component, Synthetic Polymer, Cold Extruded Type). Curing is to be by polymerization and not by evaporation of solvent or fluxing of harder particles. This type is specifically designed for vertical or sloping joints and hence not self leveling. It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature leveling. It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature of 770F  30F maximum of 24 hours. For performance requirements see under b-2 below. 03800 Page 2 of 14 2. Class 1-b. (Two component, Synthetic Polymer, Cold Pourable, Self Leveling Type). Curing is to be by polymerization and not by evaporation of solvent or fluxing of harder particles. It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature of 770F  30F maximum of 3 hours. Performance Requirements. Class 1-a and 1-b, when tested in accordance with Test Method Tex-525-C, shall meet the above curing times and requirements as follows: It shall be of such consistency that it can be mixed and poured, or mixed and extruded into joints at temperatures above 600F. Penetration, 770F. 150 gm. cone, 5 sec., max.-cm.................. 0.90 Bond and Extension 75%, O0F, 5 cycles Dry Concrete Blocks............................ Pass Wet Concrete Blocks............................ Pass Steel Blocks...(Primed if specified by Manuf.). Pass Flow at 2000F................................. None Water Content % by weight, max................. 5.0 Resilience Original sample min. % (cured)................. 50 Oven aged at 1580F min. % .................... 50 For Class 1-a Material Only Cold Flow (10 min.)............................ None (c) Asphalt Board. Asphalt Board shall consist of two liners of 0.016 inch asphalt impregnated paper, filled with a mastic mixture of asphalt and vegetable fiber and/or mineral filler. Boards shall be smooth, flat and sufficiently rigid to permit installation. When tested in accordance with Test Method Tex-524-C, the asphalt board shall not deflect from the horizontal more than one inch in three and one-half inches. (b) Rebonded Neoprene Filler. Rebonded neoprene filler shall consist of ground closed-cell neoprene particles, rebonded and molded into sheets of uniform thickness of the dimensions shown on plans. Filler material shall have the following physical properties and shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: D1752, Type 1 where applicable: PROPERTY METHOD REQUIREMENT Color ASTM D1752 Type 1 Black Density ASTM D1752 Type 1 40 PCF Min Recovery ASTM D1752 Type 1 90% Min. Compression ASTM D1752 Type 1 50 to 500 psi Extrusion ASTM D1752 Type 1 0.25 In. Max. Tensile Strength ASTM D1752 Type 1 20 psi Min. Elongation 75% Min The manufacturers shall furnish the Engineer with certified test results as to the compliance with the above requirements and a 12 inch x 12 inch x 1 inch sample from the shipment for approval. 03800 Page 3 of 14 (3) Curing Materials (a) Membrane curing materials shall comply with the "Standard Specification Liquid Membrane- Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete", ASTM Designation: C 309, Type 1 clear or translucent, or Type 2 white pigmented. The material shall have a minimum flash-point of 800F when tested by the "Pensky-Martin Closed Cup Method". It shall be of such consistency that it can be satisfactorily applied as a fine mist through an atomizing nozzle by means of approved pressure spraying equipment at atmospheric temperatures above 400F. It shall be of such nature that it will not produce permanent discoloration of concrete surfaces nor react deleteriously with the concrete or its components. Type 1 compound shall contain a fugitive dye that will be distinctly visible not less than 4 hours nor more than 7 days after application. The compound shall produce a firm, continuous, uniform moisture impremeable film free from pinholes and shall adhere satisfactorily to the surfaces of damp concrete. It shall, when applied to the damp concrete surface, at the rate of coverage specified herein, dry to touch in not more than 4 hours and shall adhere in a tenacious film without running off or appreciable sagging. It shall not disintegrate, check, peel or crack during the required curing period. The compound shall not peel or pick up under traffic and shall disappear from the surface of the concrete by gradual disintegration. The compound shall be delivered to the job only in the manufacturer's original containers, which shall be clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name, the trade name of the material, and a batch number or symbol with which test samples may be correlated. The water retention test shall be in accordance with Test Method Tex-219-F. Percentage loss shall be defined as the water lost after the application of the curing material was applied. The permissible percentage moisture loss (at the rate of coverage specified herein) shall not exceed the following: 24 hours after application......................2 percent 72 hours after application......................4 percent Type 1 (Resin Base Only) curing compound will be permitted for slab concrete in bridge decks and top slabs of direct traffic culverts. (b) Mat curing of concrete is allowed where permitted by Table 1 in this specification or where otherwise approved by the Engineer. 3. EXPANSION JOINTS Joints and devices to provide for expansion and contraction shall be constructed where and as indicated herein or on the plans. All open joints and joints to be filled with expansion joint material, shall be constructed using forms adaptable to loosening or early removal. To avoid expansion or contraction damage to the adjacent concrete, these forms shall be loosened as soon as possible after final concrete set to permit free movement without requiring full form removal. Prior to placing the sealing material, the vertical facing the joint shall be cleaned of all laitance by sandblasting or by mechanical routing. Cracked or spalled edges shall be repaired. The joint shall be blown clean of all foreign material and sealed. Where preformed fiber joint material is used, it shall be anchored to the concrete on one side of the joint 03800 Page 4 of 14 by light wire or nails, to prevent the material from falling out. The top one inch of the joint shall be filled with joint sealing material. Finished joints shall conform to the indicated outline with the concrete sections completely separated by the specified opening or joint material. Soon after form removal and again where necessary after surface finishing, all projecting concrete shall be removed along exposed edges to secure full effectiveness of the expansion joints. 4. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS The joint formed by placing plastic concrete in direct contact with concrete that has attained its initial set shall be deemed a construction joint. The term monolithic placement shall be interpreted to mean at the manner and sequence of concrete placing shall not create construction joints. Construction joints shall be of the type and at the locations shown on the plans. Additional joints will not be permitted without written authorization from the Engineer, and when authorized, shall have details equivalent to those shown on the plans for joints in similar locations. Unless otherwise provided, construction joints shall be square and normal to the forms. Bulkheads shall be provided in the forms for all joints, except when horizontal. Construction joints requiring the use of joint sealing material shall be as detailed on the plans. The material will be specified on the plans without referenced to joint type. A concrete placement terminating at a horizontal construction joint shall have the top surface roughened thoroughly as soon as practicable after initial set is attained. The surfaces at bulkheads shall be roughened as soon as the forms are removed. The hardened concrete surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose material, laitance, dirt or foreign material and saturated with water so it is moist when placing fresh concrete against it. Forms shall be drawn tight against the placing of the fresh concrete. 5. FORMS (1) General. Except where otherwise specified, forms may be of either timber or metal. Forms for round columns exposed to view shall be of steel, except that other materials will be allowed with written permission of the Engineer. Forming plans shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval as specified. Forms shall be designed for the pressure exerted by a liquid weighing 150 pounds per cubic foot. The rate of placing the concrete shall be taken into consideration in determining the depth of the equivalent liquid. For job fabricated forms, an additional live load of 50 pounds per square foot shall be allowed on horizontal surfaces. The maximum unit stresses shall not exceed 125 percent of the allowable stresses used by the State Department of Highways and Public Transportation for the design of structures. Commercially produced structural units used in form work shall not exceed the manufacturer's maximum allowable working load for moment, shear or end reaction. The maximum working load shall include a live load of 35 pounds per square foot of horizontal form surface and sufficient details and data shall be submitted for use in checking form work details for approval. Forms shall be practically mortar-tight, rigidly braced and strong enough to prevent bulging between supports and maintained to the proper line and grade during concrete placement. Forms shall be maintained in a manner that will prevent warping and shrinkage. 03800 Page 5 of 14 Offset at form joints shall not exceed one-sixteenth of an inch. Deflections due to cast-in-place slab concrete and railing shown in the dead load deflection diagram shall be taken into account in the setting of slab forms. All forms and footing areas shall be cleaned of any extraneous matter before placing concrete. Permission to place concrete will not be given until all such work is completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If, at any stage of the work, the forms show signs of bulging or sagging, the portion of the concrete causing such condition shall be removed immediately, if necessary, and the forms shall be reset and securely braced against further movement. (2) Timber Forms. Lumber for forms shall be properly seasoned, of good quality, and free from imperfections which would affect its strength or impair the finished surface of the concrete. The lumber used for facing or sheathing shall be finished on at least one side and two edges and shall be sized to uniform thickness. Form lining will be required for all formed surfaces, except for the inside of culvert barrels, inlets and manholes; surfaces that are subsequently covered by backfill material or are completely enclosed; and, any surface formed by a single finished board. Lining will not be required when plywood forms are used. Form lining shall be of an approved type such as masonite or plywood. Thin membrane sheeting, such as polyethylene sheets, shall not be used for form lining. Forms may be constructed of plywood not less than one-half inch in thickness, with no form lining required. The grain of the face plies on plywood forms shall be placed parallel to the span between the supporting studs or joists. Plywood used for forming surfaces which remain exposed shall be equal to that specified as B-B Plyform Class I or Class II Exterior of the U. S. Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standard, latest edition. Forms or form lumbers to be reused shall be maintained clean and in good condition. Any lumber which is split, warped, bulged, marred or has defects that will produce inferior work shall not be used and, if condemned, shall be promptly removed from the work. Studs and joists shall be spaced so that the facing form material remains in true alignment under the imposed loads. Walls shall be spaced close enough to hold forms securely to the designated lines and scabbed at least 4 feet on each side of joints to provide continuity. A row of walls shall be placed near the bottom of each placement. Facing material shall be placed with parallel and square joints and securely fastened to supporting studs. Forms for surfaces receiving only an ordinary finish and exposed to view shall be placed with the form panels symmetrical, i.e., long dimensions set in the same direction. Horizontal joints shall be continuous. Molding specified for chamfer strips or other uses shall be made of materials of a grade that will not split when nailed and which can be maintained to a true line without warping. Wood molding shall be mill cut 03800 Page 6 of 14 and dressed on all faces. Unless otherwise provided, forms shall be filleted at all sharp corners and edges with triangular chamfer strips measuring three-fourths inch on the sides. Forms for railing and ornamental work shall be constructed to standards equivalent to first-class millwork. All moldings, panel work and bevel strips shall be straight and true with nearly mitered joints designed so the finished work is true, sharp and clean cut. All forms shall be constructed to permit their removal without marring or damaging the concrete. The forms may be given a slight draft to permit ease of removal. Metal form ties of an approved type or a satisfactory substitute shall be used to hold forms in place and shall be of a type that permits ease of removal of the metal as hereinafter specified. All metal appliances used inside of forms for alignment purposes shall be removed to a depth of at least one-half inch from the concrete surface. They shall be made so the metal may be removed without undue chipping or spalling, and when removed, shall leave a smooth opening in the concrete surface. Burning off of rods, bolts or ties will not be permitted. Any wire ties used shall be cut back at least one-half inch from the face of the concrete. Devices holding metal ties in place shall be capable of developing the strength of the tie and adjustable to allow for proper alignment. Metal and wooden spreaders which are separate from the forms shall be removed entirely as the concrete is being placed. Adequate clean-out openings shall be proved for narrow walls and other locations where access to the bottom of the forms is not readily attainable. Prior to placing concrete, the facing of all forms shall be treated with oil or other bond breaking coating of such composition that it will not discolor or otherwise injuriously affect the concrete surface. Care shall be exercised to prevent coating of the reinforcing steel. (3) Metal Forms. The foregoing requirements for timber forms as regard to design, mortar-tightness, filleted corners, beveled projections, bracing, alignment, removal, reuse and wetting shall also apply to metal forms, except that these will not require lining, unless specifically noted on the plans. The thickness of form metal shall be as required to maintain the true shape without warping or bulging. All bolt and rivet heads on the facing sides shall be countersunk. Clamps, pins or other connecting devices shall be designed to hold the forms rigidly together and to allow removal without injury to the concrete. Metal forms which do not present a smooth surface or line up properly shall not be used. Metal shall be kept free from rust, grease or other foreign materials. 6. PLACING REINFORCEMENT Reinforcement in concrete structures shall be placed carefully and accurately and rigidly supported as provided in the specification, Section 03200 "Reinforcing Steel". Reinforcing steel supports shall not be welded to I-beams or girders. 7. PLACING CONCRETE-GENERAL 03800 Page 7 of 14 The minimum temperature of all concrete at the time of placement shall be not less than 500F. The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. When conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for finishing, the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only, and shall be held to a minimum amount. Fog spray for this purpose may be applied with hand operated fogging equipment. The maximum time interval between the addition of cement to the batch, and the placing of concrete in the forms shall not exceed the following: Air or Concrete Temperature Maximum Time Non-Agitated Concrete Up to 800F 30 minutes Over 800F 15 minutes Agitated Concrete 900F or above 45 minutes 750F to 890F 60 minutes 350F to 740F 90 minutes The use of an approved retarding agent in the concrete will permit the extension of each of the above temperature-time maximums by 30 minutes for direct traffic culverts, and one hour for all other concrete except that the maximum time shall not exceed 30 minutes for non-agitated concrete. Before starting work, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer fully of the construction methods he proposes to use, the adequacy of which shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall give the Engineer sufficient advance notice before placing concrete in any unit of the structure to permit the inspection of forms, reinforcing steel placement, and other preparations. Concrete shall not be placed in any unit prior to the completion of form work and placement of reinforcement therein. Concrete mixing, placing and finishing shall be done in daylight hours, unless adequate provisions are made to light the entire site of all operations. Concrete placement will not be permitted when impending weather conditions will impair the quality of the finish work. If rainfall should occur after placing operations are started, the Contractor shall provide ample covering to protect the work. In case of drop in temperature, the provisions set forth in Article "Placing Concrete in Cold Weather" of this specification shall be applied. The placing shall be regulated so the pressures caused by the plastic concrete shall not exceed the loads used in form design. The method of handling, placing and consolidation of concrete shall minimize segregation and displacement of the reinforcement, and produce a uniformly dense and compact mass. Concrete shall not have a free fall of more than 5 feet, except in the case of thin walls such as in culverts. Any hardened concrete spatter ahead of the plastic concrete shall be removed. 03800 Page 8 of 14 The method and equipment used to transport concrete to the forms shall be capable of maintaining the rate of placement approved by the Engineer. Concrete may be transported by buckets, chutes, buggies, belt conveyors, pumps or other acceptable methods. When belt conveyors or pumps are used, sampling for testing will be done at the discharge end. Concrete transported by conveyors shall be protected from sun and wind, if necessary, to prevent loss of slump and workability. Pipes through which concrete is pumped shall be shaded and/or wrapped with wet burlap, if necessary, to prevent loss of slump and workability. Concrete shall not be transported through aluminum pipes, tubes or other aluminum equipment. Chutes, troughs, conveyors or pipes shall be arranged and used so that the concrete ingredients will not be separated. When steep slopes are necessary, the chutes shall be equipped with baffle boards or made in short lengths that reverse the direction of movement, or the chute ends shall terminate in vertical down-spouts. Open troughs and chutes shall extend, if necessary, down inside the forms or through holes left in them. All transporting equipment shall be kept clean and free from hardened concrete coatings. Water used for cleaning shall be discharged clean of the concrete. Each part of the forms shall be filled by depositing concrete as near its final position as possible. The coarse aggregate shall be worked back from the face and the concrete forced under and around the reinforcement bars without displacing them. Depositing large quantities at one point and running or working it along the forms will not be allowed. Concrete shall be deposited in the forms in layers of suitable depth but not more than 36 inches in thickness, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The sequence of successive layers or adjacent portions of concrete shall be such that they can be vibrated into a homogenous mass with the previously placed concrete without a cold joint. Not more than one hour shall elapse between adjacent or successive placement of concrete. Authorized construction joints shall be avoided by placing all concrete between the authorized joints in one continuous operation. An approved retarding agent shall be used to control stress cracks and/or unauthorized cold joints in mass placements where differential settlement and/or setting time may induce stress cracking. Opening in forms shall be provided, if needed, for the removal of laitance of foreign matter of any kind. All forms shall be wetted thoroughly before the concrete is placed therein. All concrete shall be well consolidated and the mortar flushed to the form surfaces by continuous working with immersion type vibrators. Vibrators which operate by attachment to forms or reinforcement will not be permitted, except on steel forms. At least one stand-by vibrator shall be provided for emergency use in addition to the ones required for placement. The concrete shall be vibrated immediately after deposit. Prior to the beginning of work, a systematic spacing of the points of vibration shall be established to insure complete consolidation and through working of the concrete around the reinforcement, embedded fixtures, and into the corners and angles of the forms. Immersion type vibrators shall be inserted vertically, at point 18 to 30 inches apart, and slowly withdrawn. The vibrator may be inserted in a sloping or horizontal position in shallow slabs. The entire depth of each lift shall be vibrated, allowing the vibrator to penetrate several inches into the preceding lift. Concrete along construction joints shall be thoroughly consolidated by operating the vibrator along and close to but not against the joint surface. The vibration shall continue until thorough consolidation, and complete embedment of reinforcement and fixtures is produced, but not long enough to cause segregation. Vibration may be supplemented by hand spading or rodding, if necessary, to insure the flushing or mortar to the surface of all forms. 03800 Page 9 of 14 Slab concrete shall be mixed in a plant located off the structure. Carting or wheeling concrete batches over completed slabs will not be permitted until they have aged at least four full curing days. If carts are used, timber planking will be required for the remainder of the curing period. Carts shall be equipped with pneumatic tires. Curing operations shall not be interrupted for the purpose of wheeling concrete over finished slabs. After concrete has taken its initial set, at least one curing day shall elapse before placing strain on projecting reinforcement to prevent damage to the concrete. The storing of reinforcing or structural steel on completed roadway slabs generally shall be avoided and, when permitted, shall be limited to quantities and distribution that will not induce excessive stresses. 8. PLACING CONCRETE IN COLD WEATHER (1) Cast-in-Place Concrete. Concrete may be placed when the atmospheric temperature is not less than 350F. Concrete shall not be placed in contact with any material coated with frost or having a temperature less than 320F. Aggregates shall be free from ice, frost and frozen lumps. When required, in order to produce the minim um specified concrete temperature, the aggregate and/or the water shall be heated uniformly, in accordance with the following: The water temperature shall not exceed 1800F, and/or the aggregate temperature shall not exceed 1500F. The heating apparatus shall heat the mass of aggregate uniformly. The temperature of the mixture of aggregates and water shall be between 500F and 850F before introduction of the cement. All concrete shall be effectively protected as follows: (a) The temperature of slab concrete of all unformed surfaces shall be maintained at 500F or above for a period of 72 hours from time of placement and above 400F for an additional 72 hours. (b) The temperature at the surface of all concrete in piers, culverts walls, retaining walls, parapets, wingwalls, bottoms of slabs, and other similar formed concrete shall be maintained at 400F or above for a period of 72 hours from time of placement. (c) The temperature of all concrete, including the bottom slabs of culverts placed on or in the ground, shall be maintained above 320F for a period of 72 hours from time of placement. Protection shall consist of providing additional covering, insulated forms or other means, and if necessary, supplementing such covering with artificial heating. Curing as specified under Article "Curing Concrete" of this specification shall be provided during this period until all requirements for curing have been satisfied. When impending weather conditions indicate the possibility of the need for such temperature protection, all necessary heating and covering material shall be on hand ready for use before permission is granted to begin placement. Sufficient extra test specimen will be made and cured with the placement to ascertain the condition of the concrete as placed prior to form removal and acceptance. (2) Precast Concrete. A fabricating plant for precast products which has adequate protection from 03800 Page 10 of 14 cold weather in the form of permanent or portable framework and covering, which protects the concrete when placed in the forms, and is equipped with approved steam curing facilities, may place concrete under any low temperature conditions provided: (a) The framework and covering are placed and heat is provided for the concrete and the forms within one hour after the concrete is placed. This shall not be construed to be one hour after the last concrete is placed, but that no concrete shall remain unprotected longer than one hour. (b) Steam heat shall keep the air surrounding the concrete between 500F and 850F for a minim um of three hours prior to beginning the temperature rise which is required for steam curing. (c) For fabricating plants without the above facilities and for job site precast products, the requirements of the Article "Curing Concrete" of this specification will apply. The Contractor is responsible for the protection of concrete placed under any and all weather conditions. Permission given by the Engineer for placing during freezing weather will in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for producing concrete equal in quality to that placed under normal conditions. Should concrete placed under such conditions prove unsatisfactory, it shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost. 9. CURING CONCRETE The Contractor shall inform the Engineer fully of the methods and procedures proposed for curing; shall provide the proper equipment and material in adequate amounts, and shall have the proposed method, equipment and material approved prior to placing concrete. Inadequate curing and/or facilities therefore shall be cause for the Engineer to stop all construction on the job until remedial action is taken. All concrete shall be cured for a period of 4 curing days except as noted herein. EXCEPTIONS TO 4-DAY CURING Description Required Curing Top slabs of Direct Traffic 8 curing days (Type I or III) cement Culverts 10 curing days (Type II cement) Concrete Piling (non-prestressed) 6 curing days When the air temperature is expected to drop below 350F, the water curing mats shall be covered with polyethylene sheeting, burlap-polyethylene blankets or other material to provide the protection required by Article "Placing Concrete in Cold Weather" of these specifications. A curing day is defined as a calendar day when the temperature, taken in the shade away from artificial heat, is above 500F for at least 19 hours, (colder days if satisfactory provisions are made to maintain the temperature at all surfaces of the concrete above 400F for the entire 24 hours). The required curing period shall begin when all concrete therein has attained its initial set. The following methods are permitted for curing concrete subject to the restrictions of Table 1 and the following requirements for each method of curing. 03800 Page 11 of 14 (1) Form Curing. When forms are left in contact with the concrete, other curing methods will not be required except for cold weather protection. (2) Water Curing. All exposed surfaces of the concrete shall be kept wet continuously for the required curing time. The water used for curing shall meet the requirements for concrete mixing water as specified in the specification, Section 030030 "Concrete for Structures". Sea water will not be permitted. Water which stains or leaves an unsightly residue shall not be used. (a) Wet Mat. Cotton mats shall be used for this curing method. They shall be placed as soon as possible after the surface has sufficiently hardened to prevent damage to the concrete. (See Article, "Placing Concrete" of this specification.) Damp burlap blankets made from nine ounce stock may be placed on the damp concrete surface for temporary protection prior to the application of the cotton mats which may be placed dry and wetted down after placement. The mats shall be weighted down adequately to provide continuous contact with all concrete surfaces where possible. The surfaces of the concrete shall be kept wet for the required curing time. Surfaces which cannot be cured by contact shall be enclosed with mats, anchored positively to the forms, or to the ground, so that outside air cannot enter the enclosure. Sufficient moisture shall be provided inside the enclosure to keep all surfaces of the concrete wet. (b) Water Spray. This method shall consist of overlapping sprays or sprinklers, that keeps all unformed surfaces continuously wet. (c) Ponding. This method requires the covering of the surfaces with a minimum of two inches of clean granular material, kept wet at all times, or a minimum of one- inch depth of water. Satisfactory provisions shall be made to provide a dam to retain the water or saturated sand. (3) Membrane Curing. This consists of curing concrete pavement, concrete pavement (base), curbs, gutters, retards, sidewalk, driveways, medians, islands, concrete riprap, cement stabilized riprap, concrete structures and other concrete as indicated on the plans by impervious membrane method. Unless otherwise provided herein or shown on the plans, either Type 1 or Type 2 membrane curing compound may be used where permitted except that Type 1 (Resin Base Only) will be permitted for slab concrete in bridge decks and top of direct traffic culverts. TABLE 1 REQUIRED PERMITTED STRUCTURE UNIT DESCRIPTION WATER FOR CURING MEMBRANE FOR INTERIM CURING WATER FOR CURING MEMBRANE FOR INTERIM CURING 1 Top slabs of direct traffic culverts X X 2 Top surface of any concrete unit upon which concrete is to 03800 Page 12 of 14 be placed and bonded at a later interval (Stub walls, risers, etc.)Other superstructure concrete (wing walls, parapet walls, etc.) X 3 Concrete pavement (base), curbs, gutters, retards, sidewalks, driveways, medians, islands, concrete structures, concrete riprap, etc. X* X* 4 All substructure concrete, culverts, box sewers, inlets, manholes, retaining walls X* X* *Polyethylene sheeting, burlap polyethylene mats or laminated mats to prevent outside air from entering will be considered equivalent to water or membrane curing for items 3 and 4. Membrane curing shall be applied to dry surfaces, but shall be applied just after free moisture has disappeared. Formed surfaces and surfaces which have been given a first rub shall be dampened and shall be moist at the time of application of the membrane. When membrane is used for complete curing, the film shall remain unbroken for the minimum curing period specified. Membrane which is damaged shall be corrected immediately by reapplication of membrane. Unless otherwise noted herein or on the plans, the choice of membrane type shall be at the option of the Contractor. Only one type of curing compound will be permitted on any one structure. The membrane curing compound shall be applied after the surface finishing has been completed, and immediately after the free surface moisture has disappeared. The surface shall be sealed with a single uniform coating of curing compound applied at the rate of coverage recommended by the manufacturer and directed by the Engineer, but not less than 1 gallon per 180 square feet of area. The Contractor shall provide satisfactory means and facilities to properly control and check the rate of applications of the compound. The compound shall be thoroughly agitated during its use and shall be applied by means of approved mechanical power pressure sprayers. The sprayers used to apply the membrane to concrete pavement or concrete pavement (base) shall travel at uniform speed along the forms and be mechanically driven. The equipment shall be of such design that it will insure uniform and even application of the membrane material. The sprayers shall be equipped with satisfactory atomizing nozzles. Only on small miscellaneous items will the Contractor be permitted to use hand-powered spray equipment. For all spraying equipment, the Contractor shall provide facilities to prevent the loss of the compound between the nozzle and the concrete surface during the spraying operations. The compounds shall not be applied to a dry surface and if the surface of the concrete has become dry, it shall be thoroughly moistened prior to application of membrane by fogging or mist application. Sprinkling or coarse spraying will not be allowed. At locations where the coating shows discontinuities, pinholes, or other defects; or if rain falls on the newly-coated surface before the film has dried sufficiently to resist damage, an additional coat of the 03800 Page 13 of 14 compound shall be applied immediately at the same rate of coverage specified herein. To insure proper coverage, the Engineer shall inspect all treated areas after application of the compound for the period of time designated in the governing specification for curing, either for membrane curing or for other methods. Should the foregoing indicate that any area during the curing period is not protected, an additional coat or coats of the compound shall be applied immediately, and the rate of application of the membrane compound shall be increased until all areas are uniformly covered. When temperatures are such as to warrant protection against freezing, curing by this method shall be supplemented with an approved insulating material capable of protecting the concrete for the specified curing period. If at any time there is reason to believe that this method of curing is unsatisfactory or is detrimental to the work, the Contractor, when notified, shall immediately cease the use of this method and shall change to curing by one of the other methods specified under this contract. 10. REMOVAL OF FORMS Except as herein provided, forms for vertical surfaces may be removed when the concrete has aged not less than one day when Type I and Type II cement is used, and not less than one-half day when Type III cement is used, provided it can be done without damage to the concrete. Forms for inside curb faces may be removed in approximately three hours provided it can be done without damage to the curb. 11. FINISHING EXPOSED SURFACES Concrete shall be finished as required in the Standard Specifications for the respective items or as otherwise specified on the plans. An ordinary surface finish shall be applied to all concrete surfaces either as a final finish or preparatory to a higher finish. Ordinary Surface Finish shall be as follows: After form removal, all porous or honey-combed areas and spalled areas shall be corrected by chipping away all loose or broken material to sound concrete. Feather edges shall be eliminated by cutting a face perpendicular to the surface. Shallow cavities shall be repaired using adhesive grout or epoxy grout. If judged repairable by the Engineer, large defective areas shall be corrected using concrete or other material approved by the Engineer. Holes and spalls caused by removal of metal ties, etc., shall be cleaned and filled with adhesive grout or epoxy grout. Exposed parts of metal chairs on surfaces to be finished by rubbing, shall be chipped out to a depth of one-half inch and the surface repaired. All fins, runs, drips or mortar shall be removed from surfaces which remain exposed. Form marks and chamfer edges shall be smoothed by grinding and/or dry rubbing. Grease, oil, dirt, curing compound, etc., shall be removed from surfaces requiring a higher grade of finish. Discolorations resulting from spillage or splashing of asphalt, paint or other similar material shall be removed. Repairs shall be dense, well bonded and properly cured, and when made on surfaces which remain exposed and do not require a higher finish, shall be finished to blend with the surrounding 03800 Page 14 of 14 concrete. 12. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No direct measurement or payment will be made for the work to be done or the equipment to be furnished under this specification, but it shall be considered subsidiary to the particular items required by the plans and the contract. Section 04200 Page 1 of 8 SECTION 04200 CLAY UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Clay masonry units and accessories including: 1. Brick units. 2. Anchors and ties. 3. Expansion joints. 4. Flashing. 5. Reinforcement. 6. Mortar. 7. Cleaning. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 0611 – Rough Carpentry. B. Section 07100 – Waterproofing and Dampproofing. C. Section 07250 – Weather Barriers. D. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal. E. Section 08100 – Steel Doors and Frames. F. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. B. ASTM A 82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. C. ASTM A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. D. ASTM A 615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. E. ASTM A 616 - Standard Specification for Rail-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. F. ASTM A 617 - Standard Specification for Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. Section 04200 Page 2 of 8 G. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. H. ASTM A 775 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars. I. ASTM A996 - Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. J. ASTM B 370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. K. ASTM C 67 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile. L. ASTM C 216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale). M. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. N. ASTM C 652 - Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale). O. ASTM C 1088 - Standard Specification for Thin Veneer Brick Units Made from Clay or Shale. P. ASTM D 1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular MaterialsSponge or Expanded Rubber. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. B. Samples: Furnish not less than five individual brick as samples, showing extreme variations in color and texture. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: B. Brick Tests: Sample and test shall be in accordance with ASTM C 67. C. Test Reports: 1. Testing and reports shall be completed by an independent laboratory. 2. Test reports for each type of building and facing brick shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review. 3. Test reports shall indicate: Section 04200 Page 3 of 8 a. Compressive strength. b. 24 hour cold water absorption. c. 5-hour boil absorption. d. Saturation coefficient. e. Initial rate of absorption. f. Efflorescence. D. Certificates: Prior to delivery, submit to Architect/Engineer certificates attesting compliance with the applicable specifications for grades, types or classes included in these specifications. E. Costs of Tests: Cost of tests shall be borne by the purchaser, unless tests indicate that units do not conform to the requirements of the specifications, in which case cost shall be borne by the seller. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store brick off the ground to prevent contamination by mud, dust or other materials likely to cause staining or other defects. C. Cover all materials with a nonstaining waterproof membrane material when necessary to protect from elements. D. Store different types of materials separately. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Work: 1. Wall Covering: a. During erection, cover top of wall with strong nonstaining waterproof membrane at end of each day or shutdown. b. Cover partially completed walls when work is not in progress. c. Extend cover minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) down both sides. d. Hold cover securely in place. 2. Load Applications: a. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours after building masonry columns or wall. b. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry columns or walls. 3. Stain Prevention: a. Prevent grout or mortar from staining the face of masonry. b. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with face of such masonry. c. Protect all sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar. d. Protect base of wall from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter. e. Scaffold boards shall be turned on edge when work is not in Section 04200 Page 4 of 8 progress. B. Cold Weather Protection: 1. Preparation: a. When ice or snow has formed on masonry bed, remove by carefully applying heat not to exceed 120 degrees F (49 degrees C) until surface is dry to the touch. b. Remove all masonry deemed frozen or damaged. 2. Products: a. When brick suction exceeds BIA reference standard, sprinkle with heated water: 1) When units are above 32 degrees F (0 degrees C), heat water above 70 degrees F (21 degrees C). 2) When units are below 32 degrees F (0 degrees C), heat water above 130 degrees F (54 degrees C). b. Use dry masonry units. c. Do not use wet or frozen units. 3. Construction Requirements While Work is Progressing: a. Air temperature 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) to 32 degrees F (0 degrees C): 1) Heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) to 32 degrees F (0 degrees C). b. Air temperature 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C): 1) Heat sand and mixing water to produce temperatures between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and 120 degrees F (49 degrees C). 2) Maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing. c. Air temperatures 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C) to 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C). 1) Heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and 120 degrees F. (49 degrees C). 2) Maintain mortar temperatures on boards above freezing. 3) Use salamanders or other heat sources on both sides of walls under construction. 4) Use windbreaks when wind is in excess of 15 mph (24 kms/h). d. Air temperature 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C) and below: 1) Heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and 120 degrees F (49 degrees C.). 2) Provide enclosures and auxiliary heat to maintain air temperature above 32 degrees F (0 degrees C). 3) Minimum temperature of units when laid: 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C). Section 04200 Page 5 of 8 4. Protection requirements for completed masonry and masonry not being worked on: a. Mean daily air temperature 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) to 32 degrees F (0 degrees C): 1) Protect masonry from rain or snow for 24 hours by covering with weather-resistive membrane. b. Mean daily air temperature 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C): 1) Completely cover masonry with weather-resistive membrane for 24 hrs. c. Mean daily temperature 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C) to 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C): 1) Completely cover masonry with insulating blankets or equal protection for 24 hours. d. Mean daily air temperature 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C) and below: 1) Maintain masonry temperature above 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) for 24 hours by: a) Method: Enclosure and supplementary heat. C. Hot Weather Protection: 1. When temperature exceeds 100 degrees F or 90 degrees F with 8 mph wind (above 38 degrees C or 32 degrees C with 13 kms/h wind). a. Maintain temperature of mortar and grout between 70 degrees F and 120 degrees F (21 degrees C and 49 degrees C). 1) Limit spread of mortar bed to 4 feet (1.2 m). Place units within 1 minute of spreading mortar. b. Partially or recently completed walls may be fog sprayed and/or covered with opaque plastic or canvas or both to control moisture evaporation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Belden Brick Company (The), which is located at: 700 W. Tuscarawas St. P. O. Box 20910 ; Canton, OH 44702; Tel: 330-456- 0031; Fax: 330-456-2694; Email: request info (info@beldenbrick.com); Web: www.beldenbrick.com B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01605. 2.2 CLAY MASONRY UNITS A. All brick specified and shown on drawing shall be as Manufactured by The Belden Brick Company or equal. 1. Modular Size Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade SW, Section 04200 Page 6 of 8 a. Type FBX. b. Size: 7-5/8” by 2-1/4” by 3-5/8” B. Provide brick similar in texture, color and physical properties to those available for inspection at the Architect/Engineer's office and/or as supplied on the approved sample panel. C. Shapes: Special shapes are required to be used per architectural detail(s). D. All brick supplied shall be pre-blended by the manufacturer. 2.3 ANCHORS AND TIES A. Corrugated Ties: ASTM A 1008, 20 Gage, Galvanized: ASTM A 153, Class B-2. 2.4 FLASHING A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 2.5 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Backer Rod: Extruded, Closed Cell Polyethylene. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Weepholes: 1. Plastic Weep/Vents. 2.7 MORTAR A. Mortar shall conform to ASTM C 270 under the guidelines provided in BIA Technical Notes #8 Series. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Cleaning Reinforcement: 1. Remove mud, loose rust, ice and other coatings from reinforcement which would interfere with bond. C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for Section 04200 Page 7 of 8 achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 BONDING A. Lay masonry in bond pattern as indicated on drawings or general notes. 1. Reference BIA Technical Note #30 for additional requirements. 3.5 LAYING MASONRY A. Lay masonry with full head and bed joints. B. Lay all brick plumb and true to lines. C. Where fresh mortar joins partially set mortar, remove loose brick and mortar, and lightly wet exposed surface of set masonry. D. Toothing shall be subject to approval by the Architect/Engineer. E. When adjustment is necessary to be made after mortar begins to harden, remove hardened mortar and replace with fresh mortar. 3.6 TOOLING AND POINTING A. Joint Profile: Tool mortar joints to a concave appearance. 3.7 FLASHING A. Clean surface of masonry from projections which might puncture flashing. B. Place through-wall flashing on bed of mortar. C. Cover flashing with mortar. D. Lap flashing a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm). E. Leave flashing project from face of wall approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) to form a drip. Flashing shall be cut back to the face of the wall after inspection, if the drip is deemed objectionable by Architect. 3.8 WEEPHOLES A. Provide weep holes in head joints of the first brick course immediately above flashing by placing weeps no more than 24 inches (610 mm) on center horizontally. B. Keep cavity free from mortar. 3.9 EXPANSION JOINTS Section 04200 Page 8 of 8 A. Keep clean from all mortar and debris. B. Locate as shown on drawing. C. Install backer rod. D. Install sealant. Prime surfaces if necessary. 3.10 CLEANING A. Cut out all defective mortar joints and holes in exposed masonry and provide new mortar. B. Clean pre-selected sample wall area. Do not proceed with cleaning until approved by Architect. C. Clean brick as outlined in BIA Technical Notes 20 Revised II. D. All cleaning practices and product used shall be in accordance with cleaning products manufacturer's printed instructions. END OF SECTION Section 06100 Page 1 of 5 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Wood grounds, nailers, and blocking. B. Wood furring. C. Finish carpentry is specified in another section within Division 6. 1.3 REFERENCES: A. Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20 and with applicable rules of the respective grading and inspecting agencies for species and products indicated. B. Plywood Product Standards: Comply with PS 1 (ANSI A 199.1) or, for products not manufacturer under PS 1 provisions, with applicable APA Performance Standard for type of panel indicated. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for materials listed below: B. Material Certificates: Where dimensional lumber is provided to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses, submit listing of species and grade selected for each use, and submit evidence of compliance with specified requirements. Compliance may be in form of a signed copy of applicable portion of lumber producer's grading rules showing design values for selected species and grade. Design values shall be as approved by the Board of Review of American Lumber Standards Committee. Section 06100 Page 2 of 5 C. Wood Treatment Data: Submit treatment manufacturer's instructions for proper use of each type of treated material. 1. Pressure Treatment: For each type specified, include certification by treating plant stating chemicals and process used, net amount of preservative retained and conformance with applicable standards. 2. For water-borne treatment include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to a maximum of 15% prior to shipment to project site. 3. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Include certification by treating plant that treated material complies with governing ordinances and that treatment will not bleed through finished surfaces. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials dry at all times. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air circulation within and around stacks. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow attachment of other work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Lumber, General: 1. Factory-mark each piece of lumber with type, grade, mill and grading agency, except omit marking from surfaces to be exposed with transparent finish or without finish. 2. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing. Section 06100 Page 3 of 5 B. Boards (less than 2" thick): 1. Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide lumber of 19% maximum moisture content (S-DRY) and of following species and grade: a. Redwood Construction Common (RIS), Southern Pine No. 2 Boards (SPIB), or any species grade Construction Boards (WCLB or WWPA). C. Miscellaneous Lumber: 1. Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including bucks, nails, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping and similar members. Provide lumber of sizes indicated, worked into shapes shown, and as follows: a. Moisture content: 15% maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. 2. Grade: Construction Grade light framing size lumber of any species or board size lumber as required. Provide construction grade boards (RIS or WCLB) or No. 2 boards (SPIB or WWPA). D. Plywood. 1. Trademark: Identify each plywood panel with appropriate APA trademark. 2. Concealed Performance-Rated Plywood: Where plywood panels will be used for the following concealed types of applications, provide APA Performance- Rated Panels complying with requirements indicated for grade designation, span rating, exposure durability classification, edge detail (where applicable) and thickness. E. Miscellaneous materials. 1. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated and as recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size and type recommended by the manufacturer for each use including recommending nails. Section 06100 Page 4 of 5 2.2 WOOD TREATMENT: A. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as "Trt-Wd" or "Treated", or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPB Standards listed below. Mark each treated item with the AWPB Quality Mark Requirements. 1. Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives to comply with AWPB LP-2. After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content, respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent. Treat indicated items and the following: a. Wood nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and waterproofing. b. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for treatment and to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. C. Kiln-dry treated items to maximum moisture content of 19%. D. Provide UL label on each piece of fire-retardant lumber or plywood. E. Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. General: 1. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. 2. Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true and cut and fitted. Section 06100 Page 5 of 5 3. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards. 4. Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required. B. Wood Grounds, Nailers, Blocking and Sleepers: 1. Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. 2. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. 3. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key-bevelled lumber not less than 1-1/2" wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. C. Wood Furring: 1. Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required tolerance of finished work. 2. Firestop furred spaces on walls at each floor level and at ceiling line of top story, with wood blocking or noncombustible materials, accurately fitted to close furred spaces. END OF SECTION Section 06220 Page 1 of 4 SECTION 06220 FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK PART 1 SCOPE 1.1 Furnish and install all finish carpentry and millwork as shown and specified. Provide all labor, equipment, materials, operations, and incidentals necessary and required to complete the work. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act B. ANSI/HPHA HP - American Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood C. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials D. AWI - Quality Standards E. AWPA - American Wood Protection Association F. FS MM-L-736 - Lumber/Hardwood G. NEMA LD-3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates H. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association I. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood J. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard K. UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Perform work to premium quality in accordance with "Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI). A. Section 400A for Custom Wood Casework B. Work in this section shall be performed by a firm licensed by the AWI Quality Certification Program. C. Work in this section shall comply with the specified grades of "custom grade" and sections: 400A for custom wood casework. Specific methods of fabrication and materials as listed in the following specifications shall prevail over requirements of Section 06220 Page 2 of 4 AWI custom grade. D. Certification shall be evidenced through application of AWI Quality Certification labels and/or the issuance of an AWI letter of licensing for the project. E. Certification labels shall be applied to each item of work. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 CONCEALED PLYWOOD (non-structural) A. Thickness as shown on drawings B. Exterior grade C-D, APA, fir C. Interior grade A-B, APA, fir 2.2 PLYWOOD SHELVING A. Plywood for utility shelving and for utility usage shall be sanded interior grade plywood, 3/4" thick, 1" thick for spans greater than 3'-0", graded "A-C Int-DF-PA." B. Plastic Laminate Clad Shelving: Plywood shall be interior grade, 3/4" thick, graded "A, Int-DF-PA" in accordance with Prod. Std. PS-1. 2.3 ROUGH HARDWARE A. Furnish rough hardware as required for proper installation of carpentry and millwork. 2.4 PLASTIC LAMINATE A. At plastic laminate countertops, surface, edge, and backsplash shall be 0.050 inch thick, high pressure laminate, melamine plastic. Color, pattern and finish shall be as selected by the Architect. 2.5 WOOD VENEERS A. Veneer shall be custom grade, transparent finish. Veneer shall be “Red Oak” species of wood and finish shall be as selected by the Architect. All exposed and semi- exposed surfaces shall receive finish. B. Glass: All glass shown in millwork shall be minimum 3/16" tempered, with a clear color. Where specified, Plexiglas shall be minimum 3/16" thick with rounded edges. 2.6 PARTICLEBOARD Section 06220 Page 3 of 4 A. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1 Type 1.M-2 or better with minimum density of 45 lbs. per cubic foot, internal bond of 80 psi; and minimum screw holding capacity of 250 lbs. on faces and 225 lbs. on edges. B. Particleboard for tops with sinks or subject to high moisture conditions shall be moisture resistant particleboard core Type 2-M-2. PART 3 DETAIL REQUIREMENTS 3.1 Wood shall be well seasoned, sound and free from sap, mineral streaks, and other defects. 3.2 Lumber moisture content - finish wood: kiln dried 6 to 8% moisture content. 3.3 All carpentry and millwork shall be performed in a first class manner in compliance with the current approved standards for the applicable work by experienced and skilled mechanics. 3.4 Edge band all exposed plywood edges at shelves with hardwood. 3.5 All finish carpentry joints shall be hand sanded and scribed where required for proper fit. Joints shall be according to good construction practice and shall be subject to Architect's approval. 3.6 All exposed millwork, frames, joints, etc. shall be carefully made; exposed surfaces shall be straight, clean and free of machine marks, scratches, etc. 3.7 Conform to the applicable provisions of AWI, Recommended Millwork Specifications. 3.8 Rough lumber dimensions shown are nominal; finish lumber dimensions are actual. 3.9 Set all nails. 3.10 Protect all carpentry and millwork; replace if damaged. 3.11 No hammer marks or imperfections allowed on finish work. 3.12 Install all hardware unless noted otherwise. 3.13 Un-worked materials shall be suitably stored and protected. 3.14 Worked or in-place materials shall be protected during construction. 3.15 Plastic laminate shall be WilsonArt or approved equal. 3.16 All hardware required for the construction of cabinetry shall be furnished by the millwork supplier. Section 06220 Page 4 of 4 A. Cabinet Hinges – Nexis Impresso 110, Self-close, full overlay. B. Cabinet Pulls – Häfele “Bordeaux Collection”: Bronze finish. C. CompX National #C8053 Disc tumbler cam locks w/master keying ability; US 10B finish D. EPCO #592 heavy duty magnetic catch - AL finish E. Häfele Door Silencers - clear silicone F. Hanger rods – 1-1/16” diam. Model 770, manufactured by Knape & Vogt with Model 735 saddles by Knape & Vogt – chrome-look finish G. Heavy Duty shelf supports – Häfele HA282.47.402 - (finish as selected by Architect) H. #255 standards #256 shelf clips - zinc finish J. Round wire management grommets: “35 Series” as manufactured by Outwater Plastics Industries, Inc.; color(s) to be selected by Architect. END OF SECTION Section 07100 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 07100 GYPSUM SHEATHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Fiberglass-mat faced, moisture resistant gypsum sheathing. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07100 Waterproofing and Dampproofing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM C473 Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel Products. 2. ASTM C518 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 3. ASTM C1002 Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs. 4. ASTM C1177 Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. 5. ASTM C1280 Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing. 6. ASTM E72 Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction. 7. ASTM E96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for each product specified. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Provide products that offer twelve months of coverage against in-place exposure damage (delamination, deterioration and decay). B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: 1. Five years against manufacturing defects. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS Section 07100 Page 2 of 2 A. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC: 1. Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Sheathing: DensGlass Gold. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C1177: 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Width: 4 feet. 3. Length: 8 feet. 4. Weight: 1900 pounds per M square feet. 5. Edges: Square. 6. Surfacing: Coated fiberglass mat on face, back, and long edges. 7. Racking Strength (Ultimate, not design value) (ASTM E72): Not less than 540 pounds per square foot, dry. 8. Flexural Strength, Parallel (ASTM C473): 80 lbf, parallel. 9. Humidified Deflection (ASTM C1177): Not more than 1/4 inch. 10. Permeance (ASTM E96): 23 perms. 11. R-Value (ASTM C518): 0.56. 12. Acceptable Products: a. 1/2 inch DensGlass Gold, Georgia-Pacific Gypsum. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Screws: ASTM C1002, corrosion resistant treated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Inspection: Verify that project conditions and substrates are acceptable, to the installer, to begin installation of work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: In accordance with ASTM C1280 and the manufacturer’s recommendations. 1. Manufacturer’s Recommendations: a. Current “Product Catalog”, Georgia-Pacific Gypsum. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect gypsum board installations from damage and deterioration until date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Section 07100 Page 1 of 3 SECTION 07100 WATERPROOFING AND DAMPPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install all waterproofing and damp proofing shown and specified. Provide all labor, equipment, materials, operations and incidentals necessary and required to complete the work. Section includes Cavity Wall Drainage, Drip Edge, Termination Bar and Miscellaneous Flexible Flashing. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04200 Clay Unit Masonry 2. Section 07100 Gypsum Sheathing 3. Section 07200 Insulation 1.2 REFERENCES A. Industry Standards: 1. ASTM 2. BIA 3. MCAA B. Industry Standards: 1. BIA Tech Note: Brick Construction - #7 Water Penetration Resistance - Design and Detail 2. BIA Tech Note: Brick Construction - #28B Brick Veneer/Steel Stud Walls 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Terms: 1. Cavity Wall Flashing 2. Foundation Sill Flashing 3. Through Wall Flashing 4. Termination Bar 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide in accordance with Section 01340 – Submittals 1. Product data and installation instructions. 2. Two sections demonstrating lap joint: Each 18” x 14” 3. Adhered flashing samples available Section 07100 Page 2 of 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Mortar Net® USA Ltd, 326 Melton Road, Burns Harbor, IN 46304 Ph: 800-664-6638 Fax: 219-787-5088 www.MortarNet.com 2.2 PRODUCTS A. Mortar Net’s “TotalFlash®” system is designed to replace traditional flashing systems. Custom configurations for headers and door openings are available. The TotalFlash® system consists of: 40 mil polymeric, UV stable membrane, incorporating DuPont's Elvaloy® KEE polymer; Mortar Net® Drainage/Weep System, Mortar Net® Stainless Steel Drip Edge, if required; and Mortar Net® Termination Bar. B. TotalFlash® System: 1. 40 mil polymeric, UV stable membrane, incorporating DuPont's Elvaloy® KEE polymer. C. Drip Edge: 1. 304 Stainless Steel Drip Edge pre-attached to the flashing membrane and designed to divert moisture away from the masonry wall. a. 28 gauge (.014) 304 Stainless Steel with formed drip edge b. Length: 5.4 feet (1625.6 mm) c. Width: 3.0 inches (76.2 mm) D. Termination Bar: 1. Pre-attached termination bar is designed to fasten flashing system to the substrate or can be tucked into mortar joint. 2. Strip manufactured from high strength corrosion resistance plastic with pre- drilled holes for attachment. 3. Length 5 feet 4. Hole spacing 6 inches E. Screws: 1. Provided self-tapping hex head screws designed to allow attachment to Masonry, Wood or Steel Stud. Section 07100 Page 3 of 3 a. #14 x 2” b. Quantity per box 100 (10 screws per 5-1/2 foot section) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install Flashing/Drainage System in accordance with Manufacturer’s installation instructions. B. Install system as required by detailed project drawings for cavity wall drainage. END OF SECTION Section 07200 Page 1 of 3 SECTION 07200 INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of insulation work is shown on drawings and indicated by provisions of this Section. B. Applications of insulation specified in this section include the following: 1. Blanket-type building insulation 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Thermal Resistivity: Where thermal resistivity properties of insulation materials are designated by R-values they represent the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1" thick, measured by test method included in referenced material standard or otherwise indicated. They are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees Fahrenheit between the two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through one square foot per hour at mean temperatures indicated. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials which are identical to those whose fire performance characteristics, as listed for each material or assembly of which insulation is a part, have been determined by testing, per methods indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions for each type of insulation and vapor retarder material required. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. General Protection: Protect insulation from physical damage and from becoming wet, soiled, or covered with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection during installation. Section 07200 Page 2 of 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Glass Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation: 1. Inorganic (non-asbestos) fibers formed into flexible resilient flexible blankets or semi-rigid batts; ASTM C 665, Type as indicated, densities of not less than 0.5 lb. per cubic foot for glass fiber units, K-value of 0.27; manufacturer's standard lengths and widths as required to coordinate with spaces to be insulated; types as follows: 2. Provide Type I unfaced units where indicated, semi-rigid in vertical spaces and where self-support is required. 3. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: Certain-Teed Products Corp.; Valley Forge, PA Manville Bldg. Materials Corp.; Denver, CO Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.; Toledo, OH B. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Mechanical Anchors: Type and size shown or, if not shown, as recommended by insulation manufacturer for type of application, condition of substrate, and meeting building code requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION: A. Installer must examine substrates and conditions under which insulation work is to be performed, and must notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with work. Section 07200 Page 3 of 3 2. Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections which interfere with placement. 3. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. B. General Building Insulation: 1. Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's recommendations. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. 2. Stuff loose mineral fiber insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40% of normal maximum volume (to a density of approximately 2.5 lbs. per cubic foot). 3.3 PROTECTION: A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor barriers from harmful weather exposures and from possible physical abuses, where possible by non-delayed installation of concealing work or, where that is not possible, by temporary covering or enclosure. Installer shall advise Contractor of exposure hazards, including possible sources of deterioration and fire hazards. END OF SECTION Section 07600 Page 1 of 4 SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 SCOPE 1.1 Furnish and install all flashing and sheet metal work as shown or specified. 1.2 Reference Standards: 1.2.1 AA - Aluminum Construction Manual: Aluminum Sheet Metal Work and Building Construction. 1.2.2 ANSI/ASTM B32 - Specification for Solder Metal. 1.2.3 ASTM A167 - Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. 1.2.4 ASTM B209 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. 1.2.5 ASTM B370 - Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. 1.2.6 ASTM A526 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Commercial Quality. 1.2.7 ASTM A527 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Lock-Forming Quality. 1.2.8 ASTM D2822 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement. 1.2.9 SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.2.10 NRCA - Roofing Manual. 1.2.11 NAAMM - Metal Finishes Handbook. 1.2.12 AISI - Stainless Steel - Uses in Architecture. 1.2.13 CDA - Copper Roofing - A Practical Handbook. Section 07600 Page 2 of 4 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Sheet Materials 2.1.1 Galvanized Sheet Metal: Standard galvanized steel sheet, meeting requirements of ASTM A653/A653M and ASTM A924/A924M, as applicable, with minimum zinc coating of 1.25 ounces per square foot and 0.2 percent copper bearing, and mill phosphatized for maximum paint adherence. Where sheet metal gage is not indicated, provide 24 gage. 2.1.2 Aluminum Sheet Metal: ASTM B209, 5005 or 3003-H14 aluminum alloy as appropriate, clear anodized or epoxy coated. Where aluminum sheet thickness is not indicated, provide 0.0201 inch thickness. 2.1.3 Stainless Steel: Stainless steel sheet for architectural applications, meeting the requirements of ASTM A167, Type 304 or Type 316, with No. 4 finish. Where stainless steel sheet gage is not indicated, provide 26 gage. 2.2 Accessories 2.2.1 Fasteners: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. Type and size to suit application. 2.2.2 Bituminous Coating: SSPC - Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, free of sulfur, compounded for 15-mil. dry film thickness per coat. 2.2.3 Sealant: Exterior quality conforming to Section 07920. 2.2.4 Reglets: Metal units compatible with flashing, noncorrosive. 2.3 Neoprene Washers: Required for all fasteners which will remain exposed to the weather. 2.4 Roofing Cement: ASTM D2822, asphaltic. 2.5 Metal Accessories: Sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with adjoining materials, noncorrosive, size and gauge required for performance. 2.6 Lead sleeves, 4 lbs. PART 3 DETAIL REQUIREMENTS 3.1 Water and weather tight. Section 07600 Page 3 of 4 3.2 Lines, arises and angles sharp and true; plain surfaces, free from wavers and buckles. 3.3 Provide seamed edges on all exposed work. 3.4 Pipe, Vent and Mechanical Equipment Flashing 3.4.1 Pipe and vent piping to be flashed with lead sleeves (4 lb.), minimum 10" flanges on roof. 3.4.2 Pipe and vent pipe flashing furnished by Plumber and installed by Roofer. 3.4.3 Mechanical equipment flashing furnished by Roofer, supervised by Mechanical Equipment Contractor. 3.5 Preparation 3.5.1 Inspection: 3.5.1.1 Before starting the work of this section, verify other work affecting sheet metal work is complete and approved. 3.5.1.2 Beginning of sheet metal work means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.5.2 For Roofing Work: 3.5.2.1 Exercise care when working on or about roof surfaces to avoid damaging or puncturing membranes and flashings. 3.5.2.2 Place plywood panels on roof surfaces adjacent to work of this section and on access routes. Keep in place until completion of work. 3.6 Installation Requirements 3.6.1 Perform sheet metal work in accordance with approved shop drawings and installation instructions and recommendations of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 3.6.1.1 Anchor work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion; conceal fasteners where possible. 3.6.1.2 Set units true to line and level. 3.6.1.3 Install work with laps, joints and seams watertight and weatherproof. 3.6.2 Underlayment: For stainless steel or aluminum to be installed directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a slip sheet of red rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment. Section 07600 Page 4 of 4 3.6.3 Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. 3.6.4 Install counterflashing in reglets, either by snap-in seal arrangement or by welding in place for anchorage and filling reglet with mastic or elastomeric sealant. 3.6.5 Flashing Attachment: 3.6.5.1 Secure all flashing 16" o.c. 3.6.5.2 Install parapet cap flashing with continuous hold-down clips secured 16" on centers. 3.6.5.3 Exposed fasteners shall be complete with neoprene washers 16" o.c. 3.7 Cleaning and Protection 3.7.1 Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. 3.7.2 Protection: Protect flashings and sheet metal work during construction from damage or deterioration. END OF SECTION Section 07612 Page 1 of 12 SECTION 07612 METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. General 1. Furnish all labor, material, tools, equipment and services for all pre-formed roof, as indicated, in accord with provisions of Contract Documents. 2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades. 3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. 4. See Division 1 for General Requirements. B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Windstorm Construction Requirements: Section 01450. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable standards: 1. SMACNA: “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual”, Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. 2. AISC: “Steel Construction Manual”, American Institute of Steel Construction. 3. AISI: “Cold Form Steel Design Manual”, American Iron and Steel Institute. 4. UL: “Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies”, Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Section 07612 Page 2 of 12 5. UL: “Test Standard For Impact Resistance”, Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 6. FM: “Test requirements for Class 1 panel roofs”, Factory Mutual Research Corporation. 7. ICBO: Evaluation Report No. ER-5409, ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. 8. ASTM E 1592-95: “Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference”, American Society for Testing and Materials. [# 16 inch wide, 22 gauge only] 9. ASTM E 1680-95: “Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems”, American Society for Testing and Materials. 10. ASTM E 1646-95: “Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference”, American Society for Testing and Materials. 11. ASTM A 792-83-AZ50: “Specifications for Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process, General Requirements (Galvalume®)”, American Society for Testing and Materials. 12. ASTM E 1514-93: “Standard Specification for Structural Standing Seam Steel Roof Panel Systems”, American Society for Testing and Materials. 13. ASTM A446, Grade E 14. ASTM A525 B. Manufacturer’s qualifications: 1. Manufacturer has a minimum of three years experience in manufacturing metal roof systems of this nature. Panels specified in this section shall be produced in a factory environment (not job site roll formed) with fixed-base roll forming equipment assuring the highest level of quality control. A letter from the manufacturer certifying compliance will accompany the product material submittals. Section 07612 Page 3 of 12 C. Installation contractor’s qualifications: 1. Installation contractor shall be an approved installer, certified by the manufacturer before beginning of installation of the metal roof system, and meet the following minimum criteria: a. Maintain $250,000 minimum general liability insurance coverage. b. Maintain statutory limits of worker’s compensation coverage as mandated by law. c. Has no viable claims pending regarding negligent acts or defective workmanship on previously performed or current projects. d. Has not filed for protection from creditors under any state or federal insolvency or debtor relief statutes or codes. e. Project foreman is the person having received specific training in the proper installation of the specified metal roof system and will be present to supervise whenever material is being installed. Specific training program shall include the following: 1. The instructor must have a minimum of 10 years’ experience in the application of metal roof systems. 2. A formal syllabus for the classroom and hands-on training. 3. Classroom instruction with review and thorough understanding of the specific product’s technical manual. 4. Hands-on mock-up instruction with a review and thorough understanding of the specific product’s details. 5. The installation contractor must pass a written and oral exam. f. Provide five references from five different architects or building owners for projects that have been in service for a minimum of two years, stating satisfactory performance by the installation contractor. g. Provide certification letter that installation contractor has a minimum of three years’ of metal product installation experience immediately preceding the date upon which work is to commence. D. Pre-installation Conference: 1. Prior to installation of roofing system, conduct a pre-installation conference at the project site. Section 07612 Page 4 of 12 2. Attendance: Owner, Architect, Contractor, Project Superintendent, and Roof Applicator. 3. Agenda: a. Roofing details and agenda. b. Critical work sequencing and review of phasing plan. c. Inspection sequencing. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Performance Testing: 1. Metal roof system must be tested and approved by Texas Department of Insurance. 2. Resist the roof design pressures calculated in accordance with 2009 IBC. Determine panel bending and clip-to-panel strength by testing in accordance with ASTM E 1592-95. Capacity for gauge, span or loading other than those tested may be determined by interpolating test results. 3. Metal roof system must meet the air infiltration requirements of ASTM E 1680-95 when tested with a 6.24 PSF pressure differential with resulting air infiltration of 0.0071 cfm/sq ft. 4. Metal roof system must meet the water penetration requirements of ASTM E 331-83 when tested with a 6.24 PSF pressure differential with no uncontrollable water leakage when five gallons per hour of water is sprayed per square foot of roof area. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Roof Design Loads: 1. Design criteria shall be in accordance with IBC 2009 Building Code. And must meet Texas Department of Insurance Requirements. Section 07612 Page 5 of 12 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: 1. Shop drawings show methods of erection, elevations and plans of roof panels, sections and details, anticipated loads, flashings, roof curbs, vents, sealants, interfaces with all materials not supplied and proposed identification of component parts and their finishes. B. Performance Tests: 1. Submit certified test results by a recognized testing laboratory or manufacturer’s lab (witnessed by a professional engineer) in accordance with specified test methods for each panel system. C. Calculations: 1. Submit engineering calculations defining cladding loads for all roof areas based on specified building codes, allowable clip loads and required number of fasteners to secure the panel clips to the designated substructure. 2. Compute uplift loads on clip fasteners with full recognition of prying forces and eccentric clip loading. Calculate holding strength of fasteners in accordance with submitted test data provided by the fastener manufacturer based on length of embedment and properties of materials. 3. Include thermal calculations and indicate how panel clips, eave, rake, and ridge details will accommodate actual thermal movement. 4. Include valley, gutter, and downspout design capacities for the applicable rainfall intensity for a 5 minute duration, 25 year recurrence in accordance with MBMA County Climate Data. D. Samples: 1. Submit samples and color chips for all proposed finishes. a. Submit one 8 inch long sample of panel, including clips. b. Submit two 3 inch x 5 inch color chip samples in color selected by the architect (owner). Section 07612 Page 6 of 12 E. Warranty(s): Metal roof system manufacturer, upon final acceptance for project, furnish a warranty: 1. Covering bare metal against rupture, structural failure and perforation due to normal atmospheric corrosion exposure for a period of 20 years. 2. Covering panel finish against cracking, checking, blistering, peeling, flaking, chipping, chalking and fading for a period of twenty (20) years. 3. Submit specimen copy of manufacturer’s Weathertightness Warranty, including evidence of application for warranty and manufacturer’s acceptance of applicator and warranty conditions. F. Metal roof system fabrication certification: 1. Submit a letter from the metal roof system manufacturer certifying the panels have been produced in a factory environment (not job site roll formed) with fixed-base roll forming equipment. G. Metal roof system installation inspection reports: 1. At completion of project, submit manufacturer’s quality report of field inspections, including final inspection punch list. H. Installation contractor’s qualifications: 1. Submit certificate from manufacturer certifying that installer of the metal roof system has met all of the criteria outlined in “1.02 C. Installer’s qualifications” and is an authorized installer certified by the manufacturer. 2. Submit the formal syllabus for the classroom and hands-on training. 3. Submit five references from five different architects or building owners for projects that have been in service for a minimum of two years, stating satisfactory performance by the installation contractor. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Section 07612 Page 7 of 12 1. Deliver metal roof system to job site properly packaged to provide protection against transportation damage. B. Handling: 1. Exercise extreme care in unloading, storing and erecting metal roof system to prevent bending, warping, twisting and surface damage. C. Storage: 1. Store all material and accessories above ground on well skidded platforms. Store under waterproof covering. Provide proper ventilation of metal roof system to prevent condensation build-up between each panel. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting or other surface damage. 1.7 WEATHERTIGHTNESS WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall provide to the Owner, a single source warranty signed by the roofing manufacturer of the Roof System as outlined below: 1. For a period of twenty (20) years from the date of substantial completion, the roofing manufacturer WARRANTS to the Building Owner (“Owner”): that the roofing manufacturer’s furnished roof panels, flashing, and related items used to fasten the roof panels and flashing to the roof structure (“Roof System”) will not allow intrusion of water from the exterior of the roofing manufacturer’s Roof System into the building envelope, when exposed to ordinary weather conditions and ordinary wear and usage. The Date of substantial completion is the date that is certified by the Architect, Owner, or Owner’s Representative, when the roofing manufacturer’s Roofing System is completed and accepted by or on behalf of the Owner. 2. The roofing manufacturer shall have the SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE obligation for all warranty work commencing on the date of substantial completion and under all circumstances, terminates on the 20th year anniversary of the date certified as Substantial Completion of the roofing manufacturer’s Roof System. During the period in which the roofing manufacturer has any warranty obligation, the roofing manufacturer shall take appropriate actions necessary to cause the non-performing portions of the Roof System to perform their proper functions. Section 07612 Page 8 of 12 B. Roofing Manufacturer’s Liability 1. The total liability of the roofing manufacturer under this warranty is limited solely to two (2) times the cost of the roofing manufacturer’s Roof System as invoiced to the roofing manufacturer’s customer. The roofing manufacturer shall have the right to charge to the liability account, all reasonable expenses (including, but not limited to, investigation expenses) incurred in satisfying the requirements of this warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. MBCI Metal Roof and Wall Systems, Division of NCI Group, Inc.; Houston TX. Tel: (877)713-6224; Email: info@mbci.com; Web: www.mbci.com. 1. Basis of Design: MBCI “PBR” Panel. 2. Coverage Width: 36 inches. 3. Major Rib Spacing: 12 inches on center. 4. Rib Height: 1-1/4 inch. 5. Nominal Coated Thickness: 0.022 inch/26 gage. 6. Panel Surface: Smooth. 7. Exterior Finish: Signature 300. 8. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 9. Other manufacturers desiring approval, comply with Section 01605. B. Substrate: 1. Galvalume Plus® steel sheet, minimum yield of 50,000 PSI. C. Fasteners: 1. As required by Manufacture and as required by Texas Department of Insurance. Section 07612 Page 9 of 12 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: 1. All self-tapping/self-drilling fasteners, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and other suitable fasteners shall be designed to withstand specified design loads. a. Use long life fasteners for all interior and exterior metal roof system applications. b. Provide fasteners with a factory applied coating in a color to match metal roof system application. c. Provide neoprene washers under heads of exposed fasteners. d. Locate and space all exposed fasteners in a true vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper torque settings to obtain controlled uniform compression for a positive seal without rupturing the neoprene washer. B. Accessories: 1. Provide all components required per the metal roof system manufacturer’s approved shop drawings for a complete metal roof system to include panels, panel clips, trim/flashing, fascias, ridge, closures, sealants, fillers and any other required items. a. All outside closures will be fabricated from Galvalume Plus® sheet steel of the same gauge, finish and color as the panels. b. All tape seal is to be a pressure sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with a release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, non-sagging, non-toxic, non-staining tape seal approved by the metal roof system manufacturer. c. All joint sealant is to be a one-part elastomeric polyurethane sealant approved by the metal roof system manufacturer. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Material shall be in-line tension leveled prior to roll forming panel profile. B. Where possible, roll form panels in continuous lengths, full length of detailed runs. C. Standard panel length shall be no more than 45 feet long (for longer length availability, contact manufacturer). D. Fabricate trim/flashing and accessories to detailed profiles. Section 07612 Page 10 of 12 E. Fabricate trim/flashing from same material as panel. 2.4 PREFABRICATED CURBS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Comply with loading and strength requirements as indicated where units support work of other trades. Coordinate dimensions of curbs and supports with equipment supplier/manufacturer. B. Fabricate curbs of structural aluminum (Min. .080 in. thickness for mechanical gear up to 1000 lbs; .125 in. thickness for mechanical gear between 1000 lbs and 2000 lbs; use a two curb system per the manufacturer above 2000 lbs.), factory primed and prepared for painting with mitered and welded corner joints. Provide integral base plates and water diverters/crickets. The upper flange of the curb must be a minimum of 18" above the water diverter. (This allows 12" of free area after the panel is lapped over the flange on the high side). Curbs shall be designed to install under metal roof system on the high side and over metal roof system on the low side. C. Minimum height of prefabricated curb will be 8 inches above the finished metal roof system. D. Curbs shall be constructed to match the slope of the roof and provide a level top surface for mounting equipment. E. Curb flanges must be constructed to match the configuration of the metal roof panels. F. Submit roof curb manufacturer’s shop drawings to metal roof system manufacturer for review prior to fabrication. 2.5 PREFABRICATED ROOF JACKS A. Pipe flashings shall be a one piece: EPDM (ethylene propylene diene monomer) molded rubber boot having a serviceable temperature range of 60°F to 270°F (for standard applications) and shall be resistant to ozone and ultraviolet rays. Units shall have an aluminum flanged base ring. Do not install pipe flashings through any panel seams - install ONLY in the flat portion of the panel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examination: Section 07612 Page 11 of 12 1. Inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to a point where this work may continue. 2. Verify that installation may be made in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer’s instructions. This specifically includes verifying that secondary structural members and/or decking are installed to meet UL and building code requirements. Coordinate with metal roof system manufacturer to insure that reduced clip spacings at eave, rake, ridge and corner areas are accommodated. B. Discrepancies: 1. In event of discrepancy, notify the architect (owner). 2. Do not proceed with installation until discrepancies have been resolved. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install metal roof system so that it is weathertight, without waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses or distortion, allowing for expansion and contraction. B. Install metal roof system in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and shop drawings. C. Provide concealed anchors at all panel attachment locations. D. Install panels plumb, level and straight with seams and ribs parallel, conforming to design as indicated. 3.3 ROOF CURB INSTALLATION A. Comply with metal roof system manufacturer’s shop drawings, instructions and recommendations for installation of roof curbs. Refer to metal roof system manufacturer’s standard installation details. Anchor curbs securely in place with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Section 07612 Page 12 of 12 1. During installation, provide for two on-site inspections of roof application by a qualified technical representative of the manufacturer. 2. Upon completion of installation, provide a final inspection by a technical representative of roofing manufacturer to confirm that roofing system has been installed in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. 3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTION A. Dispose of excess materials and remove debris from site. B. Clean work in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. C. Protect work against damage until final acceptance. D. Replace or repair to the satisfaction of the architect (owner), any work that becomes damaged prior to final acceptance. E. Touch up minor scratches and abrasions with touch up paint supplied by the metal roof system manufacturer. F. Do not allow panels or trim to come in contact with dissimilar metals such as copper, lead or graphite. Water run-off from these materials is also prohibited. This specifically includes condensate from roof top units. A/C units. END OF SECTION Section 07920 Page 1 of 10 SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 01600, submit a complete listing of all manufacturers, products, model numbers, and designs proposed for use in the Work of this Section. B. Maintain two copies of all shop drawings, product data, and samples, manufacturer's specifications, recommendations, installation instructions, and maintenance data at the Project Site. At Project Closeout, turn over both copies to the Architect who will transmit one copy to the Owner. C. Submit only the items listed below to the Architect for review in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division One sections. D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. E. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. F. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. G. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. H. Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on preconstruction testing specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. I. Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application. Include information specified in "Field Quality Control" Article. Section 07920 Page 2 of 10 J. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. K. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating sealants comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations. L. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1. Use manufacturers standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. a. Perform tests under environmental conditions replicating those that will exist during installation. 2. Submit not fewer than nine pieces of each type of material, includi ng joint substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers. 5. Preconstruction testing will not be required if joint sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted. Section 07920 Page 3 of 10 C. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected. 4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint sealant manufacturer's technical representative present. 5. Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand-pull method described below: a. Install joint sealants in 60-inch- (1500-mm-) long joints using same materials and methods for joint preparation and joint-sealant installation required for the completed Work. Allow sealants to cure fully before testing. b. Make knife cuts from one side of joint to the other, followed by two cuts approximately 2 inches (50 mm) long at sides of joint and meeting cross cut at one end. Place a mark 1 inch (25 mm) from cross-cut end of 2-inch (50- mm) piece. c. Use fingers to grasp 2-inch (50-mm) piece of sealant between cross-cut end and 1-inch (25-mm) mark; pull firmly at a 90-degree angle or more in direction of side cuts while holding a ruler along side of sealant. Pull sealant out of joint to the distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesive capability, but not less than that equaling specified maximum movement capability in extension; hold this position for 10 seconds. d. For joints with dissimilar substrates, check adhesion to each substrate separately. Do this by extending cut along one side, checking adhesion to opposite side, and then repeating this procedure for opposite side. 6. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained. 7. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. Section 07920 Page 4 of 10 1.3 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by elastomeric sealant manufacturer agreeing to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1.4 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses. Section 07920 Page 5 of 10 B. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at the time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated. C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. 1. Porous joint surfaces include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Marble. d. Granite. e. Limestone. f. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. D. Continuous-Immersion-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants will be immersed continuously in water, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247, including initial six-week immersion period and one additional four-week immersion periods, and have not failed in adhesion or cohesion when tested with substrates indicated for Project. E. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600 ANSI 51 Protocol. 1.5 SILICONE ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANTS A. Low-Modulus, Nonacid,-Curing Silicone Sealant: 1. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 2. Class: 50 3. Additional Movement Capability: 50 percent movement in extension and 50 percent movement in compression. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. Section 07920 Page 6 of 10 6. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per ASTM C 1248. 7. Applications: All exterior locations not otherwise indicated, and sealant joints on interior side of components subject to thermal movement from external heat sources, included but not limited to EIFS to EIFS, or EIFS to other surfaces. 8. Products: a. Spectrem 3; Tremco Inc.. b. No Substitutions B. Medium-Modulus Nuetral, Nonacid,-Curing Silicone Sealant: 1. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 2. Class: 25. 3. Additional Movement Capability: 50 percent movement in extension and 50 percent movement in compression 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 6. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per ASTM C 1248. 7. Applications: All structural glazing and internal seals for glazing system. 8. Products: a. Spectrem 2; Tremco Inc. b. No Substitutions 1.6 POLYURETHANE ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS 1.7 PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANT A. Multicomponent Pourable Urethane Sealant: 1. Products: a. Tremco; THC-901; for horizontal slopes up to 10%; b. Tremco; THC-900; for horizontal slopes up to 5%. 2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and P (pourable). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: T (traffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. Section 07920 Page 7 of 10 1.8 SOLVENT-RELEASE JOINT-SEALANT A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Solvent-Release Joint-Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 1085 1. Products: a. Butyl: Tremco Inc. 2. Applications: Concealed interior locations. B. Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant: Solvent-release-curing, pigmented, synthetic-rubber sealant complying with AAMA 803.3 and formulated for sealing joints 3/16 inch (5 mm) or smaller in width. 1. Products: PTI 200; H.B. Fuller Company. 1.9 LATEX JOINT-SEALANT A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834. 1. Products: a. Tremflex 834; Tremco Inc. b. AC-20; Pecora Corporation. c. PSI-701; Polymeric Systems, Inc. d. Sonolac; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. e. Chem-Calk 600; Bostik Inc 2. Applications: All exposed interior locations except where elastomeric sealants are indicated or required. 1.10 ACOUSTICAL JOINT-SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following: 1. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 2. Products: a. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; USG Corp., United States Gypsum Co. b. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corporation. Section 07920 Page 8 of 10 B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission. 1. Acoustical Sealant; Tremco Inc. 2. Product BA 98; Pecora Corporation 1.11 MILDEW-RESISTANT SILICONE SEALANT: A. Provide products formulated with fungicide that are intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and temperature extremes, and that comply with the following: 1. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 2. Class: 25. 3. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 4. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 5. Applications: Sealant joints at perimeter of plumbing fixtures, countertops, and all other interior locations subject to exposure to moisture. 6. Products: a. Tremsil 200; Tremco Inc. b. Sanitary 1700; GE Silicones. c. NuFlex 302; NUCO Industries, Inc. d. 898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant; Pecora Corporation. e. PSI-611; Polymeric Systems, Inc. f. 786 Mildew Resistant; Dow Corning. 1.12 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Closed Cell Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type recommended by sealant manufacturer and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. Section 07920 Page 9 of 10 C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 1.13 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS: A. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions except where more stringent require- ments are shown or specified, and except where manufacturer's technical representative directs otherwise. 3.2 JOINT PREPARATION: A. Clean out joints immediately before installation of sealant or calking compound. Re move dirt, insecure coatings, moisture and other substances which could interfere with bond or sealant or calking compound. Etch concrete and masonry joint surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Roughen vitreous and glazed joint surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 1. Prime or seal joint surfaces where indicated,and where recommended by sealant manufacturer. Do not allow primer/sealer to spill or migration onto adjoining surf- aces. Section 07920 Page 10 of 10 3.3 INSTALLATION: A. Set joint filler units as depth or position in joint to coordinate with other work, including installation of bond breakers, backer rods and sealants. Do not leave voids or gaps be- tween ends of joint filler units. B. Install sealant backer rod for liquid-applied sealants, except where shown to be omitted or recommended to be omitted by sealant manufacturer for application indicated. C. Employ only proven installation techniques, which will ensure that sealants are deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. Ex cept as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cove, so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt. D. Install sealant to depths as shown or, if not shown, as recommended by sealant manufac- turer but within the following general limitations, measured at center (thin) section of bead. 1. For joint sealed with non-elastomeric sealants and calking compounds, fill joints to a depth of 50% of joint width. E. Spillage: Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfa c- es, or to migrate into voids of adjoining surfaces. Clean adjoining surfaces by whatever means may be necessary to eliminate evidence of spillage. F. Recess exposed edges of gaskets and exposed joint fillers slightly behind adjoining su r- faces, unless otherwise shown, so that compressed units will not protrude from joints. 3.4 CURE AND PROTECTION: A. Cure sealants and calking compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and su r- face durability. Advise Contractor of procedures required for cure and protection of joint sealers during construction period, so that they will be without deterioration or damage (other than normal wear and weathering) at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION Section 08100 Page 1 of 10 SECTION 08100 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the steel doors and frames work as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including but not limited to, the following: 1. Interior and exterior hollow metal doors and frames for fire rated and unrated door openings. 2. Trimmed openings. 3. Interior hollow metal vision panels. 4. Preparation of metal doors and frames to receive finish hardware, including reinforcements, drilling and tapping necessary. 5. Preparation of hollow metal doors to receive glazing where required. 6. Furnishing anchors for building into masonry and drywall. 7. Factory prime painting of work of this Section. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Masonry – Division 4 B. Rough Carpentry - Section 06100. C. Finish hardware - Section 08700. D. Painting - Section 09900. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, label compliance, sound and fire-resistance ratings, and finishes for each type of door and frame specified. Section 08100 Page 2 of 10 B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, dimensions of profiles and hardware preparation, location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessories. C. Door Schedule: Submit schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. 1. Coordinate glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. D. Oversize Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies, submit certification of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that each door and frame assembly has been constructed to comply with design, materials, and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing custom steel doors and frames similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames palleted, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. B. Inspect doors and frames, on delivery, for damage. Minor damage may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are approved by Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. C. Store doors and frames under cover at building site. Place units on minimum 4- inch high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation. Section 08100 Page 3 of 10 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FABRICATION - GENERAL A. Fabricate hollow metal units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles. Weld exposed joints continuously, grind, dress, and make smooth, flush and invisible. Metallic filler to conceal manufacturing defects is not acceptable. B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips or Jackson heads for exposed screws and bolts. C. At exterior locations provide doors and frames which have been fabricated as thermal insulating assemblies. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal rated assemblies with U factors of 0.24 Btu (hr./ft. 2/deg F.) D. Prepare hollow metal units to receive finish hardware, including cutouts, reinforcing, drilling and tapping in accordance with Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware suppliers. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 "Specifications for Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware". E. Locate finish hardware as shown on final shop drawings in accordance with locations noted herein. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide products manufactured by Amweld Building Products, Inc., Ceco Door Products, Pioneer Industries, or approved equal meeting these specifications. 2.3 FRAMES A. Materials 1. Frames for interior openings shall be either commercial grade cold-rolled steel conforming to ASTM A366-68 or commercial grade hot-rolled and pickled steel conforming to ASTM A569-66T. Metal thickness shall be not less than sixteen (16) ga. for frames in openings 4'-0" or less in width; not less than fourteen (14) ga. for frames in openings over 4'-0" in width. All exterior frame openings shall be 14 gauge Galvanized steel. B. Design and Construction 1. All frames shall be custom made welded units with integral trim, of the sizes and shapes shown on approved shop drawings. Knocked-down frames will not be accepted. Section 08100 Page 4 of 10 2. All finished work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, square, true and free of defects, warp or buckle. Moulded members shall be clean cut, straight and of uniform profile throughout their lengths. 3. Jamb depths, trim, profile and backbends shall be as shown on drawings. 4. Frames shall have corners mitered, reinforced and continuously welded full depth and width of frame; conforming to NAAMM Standard HMMA-820. 5. Minimum depth of stops shall be 5/8". 6. Frames for multiple or special openings shall have mullion and/or rail members which are closed tubular shapes having no visible seams or joints. All joints between faces of abutting members shall be securely welded and finished smooth. 7. Hardware Reinforcements a. Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for fully templated mortised hardware only, in accord with approved hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier. Where surface-mounted hardware is to be applied, frames shall have reinforcing plates. b. Minimum thickness of hardware reinforcing plates shall be as follows: 1). Hinge and pivot reinforcements - seven (7) ga., 1-1/4" x 10" minimum size. 2). Strike reinforcements - twelve (12) gauge 3). Flush bolt reinforcements - twelve (12) gauge 4). Closer reinforcements - twelve (12) gauge 5). Reinforcements for surface mounted hardware - twelve (12) gauge. 8. Floor Anchors a. Floor anchors shall be securely welded inside each jamb for floor anchorage. b. Where required, provide adjustable floor anchors, providing not less than two (2) inch height adjustment. c. Minimum thickness of floor anchors shall be fourteen (14) gauge. 9. Jamb Anchors a. Frames for installation in masonry walls shall be provided with adjustable jamb anchors of the stirrup and strap type. Anchors shall be not less than sixteen (16) gauge steel or 0.156" diameter steel wire. Section 08100 Page 5 of 10 Stirrup straps shall be not less than 2" x 10" in size, corrugated and/or perforated. The number of anchors provided on each jamb shall be as follows: 1). Frames up to 7'-6" height - three (3) anchors. 2). Frames 7'-6" to 8'-0" height - four (4) anchors. 3). Frames over 8'-0" height - one (1) anchor for each 2' or fraction thereof in height. b. Frames for installation in stud partitions shall be provided with steel anchors of suitable design, not less than eighteen (18) gauge thickness, securely welded inside each jamb as follows: 1). Frames up to 7'-6" height - four (4) anchors. 2). Frames 7'-6" to 8'-0" height - five (5) anchors. 3). Frames over 8'-0" height - five (5) anchors plus one additional for each 2' or fraction thereof over 8'-0". c. Frames to be anchored to previously placed concrete or masonry shall be provided with minimum 3/8" concealed bolts set into expansion shields or inserts at six (6) inches from top and bottom and twenty four (24) inches o.c. Reinforce frames at anchor locations with sixteen (16) gauge sheet steel stiffeners welded to frame at each anchor. 10. Frames for installation in masonry wall openings more than 4'-0" in width shall have an angle or channel stiffener factory welded into the head. Such stiffeners shall be not less than twelve (12) gauge steel and not longer than the opening width, and shall not be used as lintels or load bearing members. 11. Dust cover boxes (or mortar guards) of not thinner than twenty six (26) gauge steel shall be provided at all hardware mortises on frames to be set in masonry or plaster partitions. 12. All frames shall be provided with a steel spreader temporarily attached to the feet of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. 13. Loose glazing stops shall be of cold rolled steel, not less than twenty (20) gauge thickness, butted at corner joints and secured to the frame with countersunk cadmium-or zinc-plated screws. Interior frames may be provided with snap-on glazing stops. 14. Drill stops to receive three (3) silencers on strike jambs of single door frames and two (2) silencers on heads of double-door frames. C. Finish: After fabrication, all tool marks and surface imperfections shall be removed, and exposed faces of all welded joints shall be dressed smooth. Frames shall then be chemically treated to insure maximum paint adhesion and shall be coated on all accessible surfaces with one coat of rust-inhibitive baked- Section 08100 Page 6 of 10 on alkyd primer standard with the manufacturer which is fully cured before shipment to a dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 2.4 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. Materials: Doors shall be made of commercial quality, level, cold rolled steel conforming to ASTM A366-68 and free of scale, pitting or other surface defects. Face sheets for interior doors shall be not less than sixteen (16) gauge. All exterior doors shall be not less than 16 gauge galvanized steel. B. Design and Construction 1. All doors shall be custom made, of the types and sizes shown on the approved shop drawings, and shall be fully welded seamless construction with no visible seams or joints on their faces or vertical edges. Minimum door thickness shall be 1-3/4". 2. All doors shall be strong, rigid and neat in appearance, free from warpage or buckles. Corner bends shall be true and straight and of minimum radius for the gauge of metal used. 3. Face sheets shall be stiffened by continuous vertical formed steel sections spanning the full thickness of the interior space between door faces. These stiffeners shall be not less than twenty two (22) gauge spaced not more than six (6) inches apart and securely attached to face sheets by spot welds not more than five (5) inches o.c. Spaces between stiffeners shall be sound- deadened and thermal insulated the full height of the door with an inorganic non-combustible batt-type material. a. Honeycomb or polystyrene door fillers are not acceptable. 4. Door faces shall be joined at their vertical edges by a continuous weld extending the full height of the door. All such welds shall be ground, filled and dressed smooth to make them invisible and provide a smooth flush surface. 5. Top and bottom edges of all doors shall be closed with a continuous recessed steel channel not less than sixteen (16) gauge, extending the full width of the door and spot welded to both faces. 6. Edge profiles shall be provided on both vertical edges of doors as follows: a. Single-acting swing doors - beveled 1/8" in two (2) inches. b. Double acting swing doors - rounded on 2-1/8" radius. Section 08100 Page 7 of 10 7. Hardware Reinforcements a. Doors shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for fully templated hardware only in accord with the approved hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier. Where surface-mounted hardware (or hardware, the interrelation of which is to be adjusted upon installation - such as top and bottom pivots, floor closers, etc.) is to be applied, doors shall have reinforcing plates. b. Minimum gauges for hardware reinforcing plates shall be as follows: 1). Hinge and pivot reinforcement - seven (7) gauge. 2). Reinforcement for lock face, flush bolts, concealed holders, concealed or surface mounted closers - twelve (12) gauge. 3). Reinforcements for all other surface mounted hardware - sixteen (16) gauge. 8. Glass Mouldings and Stops a. Where specified or scheduled, doors shall be provided with hollow metal mouldings to secure glazing by others in accordance with glass opening sizes shown on drawings. b. Fixed mouldings shall be securely welded to the door on the security side. c. Loose stops shall be not less than twenty (20) gauge steel, with mitered corner joints, secured to the framed opening by cadmium or zinc- coated countersunk screws space eight (8) inches o.c. Snap-on attachments will not be permitted. Stops shall be flush with face of door. 9. Doors requiring acoustic gasket hardware, the door leaf shall be solid core steel, 1-3/4” thick flush construction with a minimum face density of 5 lb/ft sq. Steel door leaf shall be constructed from welded 18 gauge cold rolled steel seamless sheet with a solid core of fiber board or other material providing he 5 lb/ft sq. density. C. Finish: After fabrication, all tool marks and surface imperfections shall be dressed, filled and sanded as required to make all faces and vertical edges smooth, level and free of all irregularities. Doors shall then be chemically treated to insure maximum paint adhesion and shall be coated, on all exposed surfaces, with manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive alkyd primer as specified for frames which fully cured before shipment. D. Flatness: Doors shall maintain a flatness tolerance of 1/16" maximum, in any direction, including in a diagonal direction. Section 08100 Page 8 of 10 2.5 LABELED DOORS AND FRAMES A. Labeled doors and frames shall be provided for those openings requiring fire protection ratings as scheduled on drawings. Such doors and frames shall be labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories or other nationally recognized agency having a factory inspection service. B. If any door or frame specified by the Architect to be fire-rated cannot qualify for appropriate labeling because of its design, size, hardware or any other reason, the Architect shall be so advised before fabricating work on that item is started. 2.6 HARDWARE LOCATIONS A. The location of hardware on doors and frames shall be as follows unless otherwise required by prevailing Handicap Codes: 1. Hinges: Top five (5) inches from head of frame to top of hinge; bottom 10" ± 1" from finish floor to bottom of hinge; intermediate centered between top and bottom hinges. 2. Unit and integral type locks and latches - thirty eight (38) inches to centerline of knob. 3. Deadlocks: Sixty (60) inches to centerline of cylinder. 4. Panic Hardware: Thirty eight (38) inches to centerline of cross bar. 5. Door Pulls: Forty two (42) inches to center of grip. 6. Push-Pull Bars: Forty two (42) inches to centerline of bar. 7. Push Plates: Forty eight (48) inches to centerline of plate. All of the above dimensions are from finished floor. CLEARANCES B. Fabricate doors and frames to meet edge clearances as follows: 1. Jambs and Head: 3/32 inch. 2. Meeting Edges, Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch. 3. Bottom: 3/8 inch, if no threshold or carpet. 4. Bottom: 1/8 inch, at threshold or carpet. C. Fire rated doors shall have clearances as required by NFPA 80. Section 08100 Page 9 of 10 2.7 MANUFACTURING TOLERANCES A. Manufacturing tolerance shall be maintained within the following limits: 1. Frames for Single Door or Pair of Doors a. Width, Measured Between Rabbets at the Head 1). Nominal opening width +1/16", -1/32" b. Height (total length of jamb rabbet): 1). Nominal opening height + 3/64" c. Cross Sectional Profile Dimensions 1). Face: + 1/32" 2). Stop: + 1/32" 3). Rabbet: + 1/64" 4). Depth: + 1/32" 5). Throat: + 1/16". Frames overlapping walls to have throat dimension 1/8" greater than dimensioned wall thickness to accommodate irregularities in wall construction. 2. Doors a. Width: + 3/64" b. Height: + 3/64" c. Thickness: + 1/16" d. Hardware Cutout Dimensions 1). Template dimensions +0.015", -0" e. Hardware Location: + 1/32" 2.8 PREPARATION FOR FINISH HARDWARE A. Prepare door and frames to receive hardware: 1. Hardware supplier shall furnish hollow metal manufacturer approved hardware schedule, hardware templates, and samples of physical hardware where necessary to insure correct fitting and installation. 2. Preparation includes sinkages and cut-outs for mortise and concealed hardware. B. Provide reinforcements for both concealed and surface applied hardware: 1. Drill and tap mortise reinforcements at factory, using templates. 2. Install reinforcements with concealed connections designed to develop full strength of reinforcements. Section 08100 Page 10 of 10 2.9 REJECTION A. Hollow metal frames or doors which are defective, have hardware cutouts of improper size or location, or which prevent proper installation of doors, hardware or work of other trades, shall be removed and replaced with new at no cost. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where steel doors and frames are to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 06100 for installation procedures for all work of this Section. END OF SECTION Section 08200 Page 1 of 5 SECTION 08200 PLASTIC LAMINATED WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections apply to work of this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent and location of each type of wood door is indicated on drawings and in schedules. B. Types of doors required include the following: 1. Solid core flush wood doors with plastic laminate faces. C. Factory-fitting to frames (pre-fitting) and factory-preparation for hardware (pre- machining) for wood doors is included in this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. NWWMA Quality Marking: Mark each wood door with NWWDA Wood Flush Door Certification Hallmark certifying compliance with applicable requirements of NWWDA I.S. 1 Series. For manufacturers not participating in NWWDA Hallmark Program, a certification of compliance may be substituted for marking of individual doors. B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Provide wood doors which are identical in materials and construction to units tested in door and frame assemblies per ASTM E 152 and which are labeled and listed for ratings indicated by UL, Warnock Hersey, or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Temperature Rise Rating: For doors which require a 1.5 hr rating, provide doors which have Temperature Rise Rating of 450 degrees Fahrenheit maximum in thirty (30) minutes of fire exposure on all fire-rated assemblies. 2. Oversize Fire-Rated Wood Doors: For door assemblies exceeding sizes of tested assemblies provide manufacturer's certificate stating that doors conform to all standard construction requirements of tested and labeled fire door assemblies except as to size. Section 08200 Page 2 of 5 A. Manufacturer: Obtain doors from a single manufacturer to ensure uniformity in quality of appearance and construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1.4 REFERENCES: A. Comply with the applicable requirements of the following standards unless otherwise indicated. 1. ANSI/NWMA I.S. l, "Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors" published by National Woodwork Manufacturers Association (NWMA). 1.5 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit door manufacturer's product data, specifications and installation instructions for each type of wood door. 1. Include details of core and edge construction, trim for openings and louvers (if any) and similar components. 2. Include certifications as may be required to show compliance with specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, requirements for factory finishing and other pertinent data. C. Samples: Submit samples of the following: 1. Plastic Laminate Finished Doors: Submit sample of available laminate finishes. D. Specific Product Warranty: Submit written agreement in door manufacturer's standard form signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors which have warped (bow, cup or twist) or which show telegraphing of core construction below in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of NWMA and AWI. 1. Warranty shall be in effect during following period of time after date of substantial completion. a. Solid Core Flush Interior Doors: Life of installation. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Protect wood doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and Section 08200 Page 3 of 5 recommendations of NWWDA pamphlet "How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood Doors", as well as with manufacturer's instructions, and as otherwise indicated. B. Package doors at factory prior to shipping using cartoning method. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering doors which may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the following: Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division VT Industries, Inc. Graham Wood Doors 2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: A. General: Provide wood doors complying with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kinds and types of doors indicated and as specified. 1. Exposed Surfaces: Provide kind shown or scheduled and as further specified. Provide same exposed surface material on both faces of each door, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 GENERAL FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS: A. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors and panels as shown. Comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of doors required. B. Light Openings: Factory cut openings. Trim openings for fire-rated and non-fire- rated doors with thru-bolted metal frames. 2.4 INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS: A. Solid Core Doors: Color to be selected by architect from WilsonArt® Standard or Enhanced Performance “Aeon” Finish. 1. Faces: HGS (nominal 0.048) high pressure decorative laminate 2. Core Construction: PC (Particleboard core) Section 08200 Page 4 of 5 B. Fire-Rated Solid Core Doors: 1. Faces and AWI Grade: Provide faces to match non-rated doors in same area of building, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction as required to provide fire-resistance rating indicated. 3. Edge Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated edge construction for improved screw-holding capability and split resistance as compared to edges composed of a single layer of treated lumber. 2.5 PREFITTING AND PREPARATION FOR HARDWARE: A. Pre-fit and pre-machine wood doors at factory. (Contractor's Option). B. Comply with tolerance requirements of AWI for pre-fitting. Machine doors for hardware requiring cutting of doors. Comply with final hardware schedules and door frame shop drawings and with hardware templates and other essential information required to ensure proper fit of doors and hardware. C. Take accurate field measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with machining in factory. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Installer must examine door frames and verify that frames are correct type and have been installed as required for proper hanging of corresponding doors and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION: A. Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging. B. Hardware: For installation see Division-8 "Finish Hardware" Section of these specifications. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions and of referenced AWI standard and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames in accordance with requirements of NFPA No. 80. Section 08200 Page 5 of 5 D. Job-Fit Doors: Align doors to frame for proper fit and uniform clearance at each edge and machine for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. Bevel non-fire rated doors 1/8" in 2" at lock and hinge edges. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8" in 2" at lock edge. E. Pre-fit Doors: Fit to frames and machine for hardware to whatever extent not previously worked at factory as required for proper fit and uniform clearance at each edge. F. Clearance: For non-rated doors provide clearances of 1/8" at jambs and heads; 1/8" at meeting stiles for pairs of doors; and 1/2" from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4" clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. 1. For fire-rated doors, provide clearances complying with NFPA 80. The non- combustible clearance between the bottom of flush mounted doors and a raised non-combustible sill shall not exceed 3/8 inches. Where there is no sill, the maximum clearance between the bottom of the door and the floor shall not exceed 3/4 inches. 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Operation: Re-hang or replace doors, which do not swing or operate freely, as directed by Architect. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors damaged during installation, as directed by Architect. C. Protection and Completed Work: Advise Contractor of proper procedures required for protection of installed wood doors from damage or deterioration until acceptance of work. END OF SECTION Section 08505 Page 1 of 5 SECTION 08505 ALUMINUM FIXED WINDOWS – IMPACT RESISTANT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Furnish and install aluminum architectural windows complete with hardware and related components as shown on drawings and specified in this section. B. Windows shall be EFCO® Series 660 Thermal H-HC50 Single Hung & Series 6600 Thermal F-AW80 Fixed or approved equal by architect. Architect may request the following items prior approval for review: 1. A sample window, 24" (610 mm) x 36" (914 mm) single unit, as per requirements of architect. 2. Test reports documenting compliance with requirements of Section 1.05. C. Glass and Glazing 1. All units shall be factory glazed “TDI - Impact resistant”. D. Single Source Requirement 1. All products listed in Section 1.02 shall be by the same manufacturer. 1.02 Related Work A. Section 08410 – Aluminum Door Entrances. 1.03 Laboratory Testing and Performance Requirements A. Test Units 1. Air, water, and structural test unit shall conform to requirements set forth in ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2/NAFS-02 and manufacturer's standard locking/operating hardware and insulated glazing configuration. 2. Thermal test unit sizes shall be 48" (1219 mm) x 72" (1828 mm). Unit shall consist of a single hung window. B. Test Procedures and Performances 1. Windows shall conform to all ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2/NAFS-02 requirements for the window type referenced in 1.01.B. In addition, the following specific performance requirements shall be met. 2. Air Infiltration Test a. With ventilators closed and locked, test unit in accordance with ASTM E 283 at a static air pressure difference of 6.24 psf (299 Pa). b. Air infiltration shall not exceed .10 cfm/SF (.50 l/s•m²) of unit. Section 08505 Page 2 of 5 3. Water Resistance Test a. With ventilators closed and locked, test unit in accordance with ASTM E 331/ASTM E 547 at a static air pressure difference of 12.0 psf (575 Pa). b. There shall be no uncontrolled water leakage. 4. Uniform Load Deflection Test a. With ventilators closed and locked, test unit in accordance with ASTM E 330 at a static air pressure difference of 50.0 psf (2394 Pa), positive and negative pressure. b. No member shall deflect over L/175 of its span. 5. Uniform Load Structural Test a. With ventilators closed and locked, test unit in accordance with ASTM E 330 at a static air pressure difference of 75.0 psf (3591 Pa), both positive and negative. b. At conclusion of test there shall be no glass breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, support arms or actuating mechanisms, nor any other damage that would cause the window to be inoperable. 6. Forced Entry Resistance a. Windows shall be tested in accordance to ASTM F 588 or AAMA 1302.5 and meet the requirements of performance level 10. 7. Condensation Resistance Test (CRF) a. With ventilators closed and locked, test unit in accordance with AAMA 1503.1. b. Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF) shall not be less than 43 (frame) and 58 (glass) when glazed with 1" (25 mm) insulated – 1/4" (6 mm) clear, 1/2" (12 mm) air, 1/4" (6 mm) clear low emissivity glass. 8. Thermal Transmittance Test (Conductive U-Value) a. With ventilators closed and locked, test unit in accordance with AAMA 1503.1. b. Conductive thermal transmittance (U-Value) shall not be more than 0.55 BTU/hr•ft2•°F (3.12 W/m²•K) when glazed with 1" (25 mm) insulated – 1/4" (6 mm) clear, 1/2" (12 mm) air, 1/4" (6 mm) clear low emissivity glass. 9. Thermal Transmittance Test (Conductive U-Value) a. With ventilators closed and locked, test unit in accordance with NFRC-102. b. Conductive thermal transmittance (U-Value) shall not be more than 0.51 BTU/hr•ft2•°F (2.89 W/m²•K) when glazed with 1" (25 mm) insulated – 1/4" (6 mm) clear, 1/2" (12 mm) air, 1/4" (6 mm) clear low emissivity glass. 1.04 Quality Assurance A. Provide test reports from AAMA accredited laboratories certifying the performance as specified in 1.05. B. Test reports shall be accompanied by the window manufacturer’s letter of certification, stating the tested window meets or exceeds the referenced criteria for the appropriate ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2/NAFS-02 window type. 1.05 Submittals Section 08505 Page 3 of 5 A. Contractor shall submit shop drawings; finish samples, test reports, and warranties. 1. Samples of materials as may be requested without cost to owner, i.e., metal, glass, fasteners, anchors, frame sections, mullion section, corner section, etc. 1.06 Warranties A. Total Window System 1. The responsible contractor shall assume full responsibility and warrant for one year the satisfactory performance of the total window installation which includes that of the windows, hardware, glass (including insulated units), glazing, anchorage and setting system, sealing, flashing, etc., as it relates to air, water, and structural adequacy as called for in the specifications and approved shop drawings. 2. Any deficiencies due to such elements not meeting the specifications shall be corrected by the responsible contractor at his expense during the warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 Materials A. Aluminum 1. Extruded aluminum shall be 6063-T6 alloy and tempered. B. Hardware 1. Sweep latches shall be of white bronze with a US25D brushed finish. 2. An optional extruded aluminum spring catch shall be provided at the sill of the lower sash. 3. Windows with spring latches shall also have standard sweep latches at the meeting rail. C. Balances 1. Balances shall be of appropriate size and capacity to hold sash in position in accordance with AAMA 101, Section 2.2.1.3.2, and AAMA 902, Section 8.1. 2. Balances shall be tested in accordance with AAMA 902, “Voluntary Specification for Sash Balances”. 3. Balances shall meet all minimum AAMA 902 Class 1 requirements with a minimum .70 Manually Applied Force ratio (MAF). D. Weather-Strip 1. All primary weather-strip shall be FIN-SEAL® or equal. E. Thermal Barrier 1. All exterior aluminum shall be separated from interior aluminum by a rigid, structural thermal barrier. For purposes of this specification, a structural thermal barrier is defined as a system that shall transfer shear during bending and, therefore, promote composite action between the exterior and interior extrusions. Section 08505 Page 4 of 5 2. Sills are thermally broken with 2 thermal struts, consisting of glass reinforced polyamide nylon, mechanically crimped in raceways extruded in the exterior and interior extrusions. All other frames and sash are thermally broken using the latest technology in two-part, high-density polyurethane. A nonstructural thermal barrier is unacceptable. 2.02 Fabrication A. General 1. All aluminum frame and vent extrusions shall have a minimum wall thickness of .080” (2 mm). Frame sill members shall have a minimum wall thickness of .094” (2.3 mm). 2. Mechanical fasteners, welded components, and hardware items shall not bridge thermal barriers. 3. Depth of frame shall not be less than 3 7/8” (98 mm). B. Frame 1. Frame components shall be mechanically fastened. C. Sash 1. All sash extrusions shall have a minimum wall thickness of .080” (2 mm). 2. All horizontal sash extrusions shall be tubular. 3. Corner connections shall be mechanically fastened. D. Glazing 1. All units shall be glazed with the manufacturer’s standard sealant process provided the glass is held in place by a removable, extruded aluminum, glazing bead. The glazing bead must be isolated from the glazing material by a gasket. E. Finish 1. Anodic a. Finish all exposed areas of aluminum windows and components with electrolytically deposited color in accordance with Aluminum Association Designation AA-M10-C22-( ). Color shall be (Clear). AA Description Description Arch. Class AAMA Guide Spec. AA-M10-C22-A41 or A31Clear Anodized I or II 611-98 Section 08505 Page 5 of 5 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Inspection A. Job Conditions 1. Verify that openings are dimensionally within allowable tolerances, plumb, level, clean, provide a solid anchoring surface, and are in accordance with approved shop drawings. 3.02 Installation A. Use only skilled tradesmen with work done in accordance with approved shop drawings and specifications. B. Plumb and align window faces in a single plane for each wall plane, and erect windows and materials square and true. Adequately anchor to maintain positions permanently when subjected to normal thermal movement, specified building movement, and specified wind loads. C. Adjust windows for proper operation after installation. D. Furnish and apply sealants to provide a weather tight installation at all joints and intersections and at opening perimeters. Wipe off excess material and leave all exposed surfaces and joints clean and smooth. 3.03 Anchorage A. Adequately anchor to maintain positions permanently when subjected to normal thermal movement, specified building movement, and specified wind loads. 3.04 Protection and Cleaning A. After completion of window installation, windows shall be inspected, adjusted, put into working order and left clean, free of labels, dirt, etc. Protection from this point shall be the responsibility of the general contractor. END OF SECTION Page 1 of 11 SECTION 08505 - ALUMINUM SLIDING WINDOWS – IMPACT RESISTANT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Material: aluminum windows as on the drawings and specified in this section. B.Installation: labor, tools, and material needed to install aluminum windows. C.Glass and glazing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS - Section 079200 – Joint Sealants 1.03 REFERENCES A.AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association - www.aamanet.org 1.AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-08 “NAFS - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for windows, doors, and skylights” 2.AAMA 502-12 "Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Newly Installed Fenestration Products" 3.AAMA 611-12 "Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum" 4.AAMA 701/702-11 "Voluntary Specification for Pile Weatherstripping and Replaceable Fenestration Weatherseals” 5.AAMA 910-10 “Voluntary ‘Life Cycle’ Specifications and Test Methods for AW Class Architectural Windows and Doors” 6.AAMA 1503-09 "Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors, and Glazed Wall Sections" 7.AAMA 2605-13 “Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels” Page 2 of 11 8.AAMA CW-10-12 "Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to Site" B.ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials – www.astm.org 1.ASTM E90-09 "Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements" 2.ASTM E283-12 "Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen" 3.ASTM E330-14 "Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference" 4.ASTM E331-09 "Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference" 5.ASTM E547-09 "Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential" 6.ASTM E2190-10 "Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation" 7.ASTM F588-07 “Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry Resistance of Window Assemblies, Excluding Glazing Impact” C.IGCC – Insulating Glass Certification Council – www.igcc.org D.NFRC – National Fenestration Rating Council – www.nfrc.org 1.NFRC 100-2010 “Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U Factors” 2.NFRC 102-2010 “Procedure for Measuring the Steady-State Thermal Transmittance of Fenestration Systems” Page 3 of 11 E.SGCC – Safety Glazing Certification Council – www.sgcc.org 1.ANSI Z97.1-09 “American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials used in Buildings – Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test” 2.16 CFR 1201 “Consumer Product Safety Commission Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials – codified at Title 16, Part 1201 of the Code of Federal Regulations 2011 Edition” 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.AAMA Designation: AW-PG80-HS. B.Windows: 4-1/4" frame depth; extruded aluminum with integral structural thermal break installed by the window manufacturer in the frame and sash members; equal-leg [flange] frame; exterior and interior finishes applied by the window manufacturer; frames and sash assembled by the window manufacturer. C.Lineal Thermal Break: The thermal break separating the exterior and interior aluminum extrusions shall be a mechanical crimp-in-place system utilizing multi- directional glass fiber reinforced polyamide nylon struts with locking mechanical connections to the aluminum extrusions. The thermal break shall not be compromised by hardware or metal fasteners. D.Mid-span Thermal Break: polyamide; mounted within the aluminum frame head and sill; to provide a true thermal break for both the exterior and interior sash tracks. E.Configuration: horizontal sliding; XX where “X” = sliding sash, “O” = fixed sash; [XO;] [OX;] “X” sash slide open for ventilation. F.Glazing: exterior ExxonMobil Santoprene™ foam gasket; 1" insulating glass; two weep holes under each glass pocket for drainage; foam backer rod and silicone heel bead forming an internal seal; interior Santoprene™ bulb gasket threaded into aluminum glazing beads; glass description in paragraph 2.04; glazed by the window manufacturer. 1.07 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Page 4 of 11 A.Conformance to AW-PG80-HS specifications in AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-08 when tests are performed on the prescribed 99" x 79" minimum test size with the following test results: 1.Air Infiltration: after the AAMA 910-10 life cycle test, not to exceed AAMA 101 standard of maximum .3 cfm/square foot when tested per ASTM E283-12 at a static air pressure difference of 6.24 psf. 2.Water Penetration: after the AAMA 910-10 life cycle test, no uncontrolled water leakage when tested per ASTM E331-09 and ASTM E547-09 at a static air pressure difference of 12 psf. 3.Uniform Deflection: no more than L/175 when tested per ASTM E330-14 at a static air pressure difference of 80 psf. 4.Uniform Structural Load: no glass breakage or permanent damage to fasteners, and maximum .2% permanent deformation of the span of any frame member when tested per ASTM E330-14 at a static air pressure difference of 120 psf. 5.Forced Entry Resistance: latching devices shall provide reasonable security against forced entry and the test window shall achieve a Grade 10 when tested per ASTM F588-07. B.Thermal AAMA Testing: per AAMA 1503-09, on a 59" x 47" test size glazed with 1” insulating glass made with 1/4” soft coat low E coating on surface #2, plain air in the airspace made with a stainless steel spacer, and 1/4” clear glass, with the following test results: 1.Condensation Resistance Factor: minimum 62 frame CRF and 62 glass CRF. 2.Thermal Transmittance: maximum .44 BTU/HR/SQ.FT/°F U value. C.Thermal NFRC Testing: per NFRC 102-2010 on a 59” x 47" test size glazed with 1” insulating glass made with 1/4” soft coat low E coating on surface #2, plain air in the airspace made with a stainless steel spacer, and 1/4” clear glass, with the following test result: Standardized Thermal Transmittance to be maximum 0.43 BTU/HR/SQ.FT/°F. D.Thermal NFRC Simulation: thermal computer simulation per NFRC 100-2010 on a 99” x 79" test size glazed with 1” insulating made with 1/4” soft coat low E Page 5 of 11 coating on surface #2, argon gas in the airspace made with a stainless steel spacer, and 1/4” clear glass, with the following test result: Standardized Thermal Transmittance to be maximum 0.349 BTU/HR/SQ.FT/°F. 1.08 SUBMITTALS A.Shop drawings: window location chart; typical window elevations; details of assemblies, hardware, and glazing details for units glazed by the window manufacturer. B.Product data: test reports from an AAMA-accredited laboratory; manufacturer's specifications. C.Samples: each specified finish for aluminum; other samples as requested. 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Submit for prebid approval ten days prior to bid opening valid test reports from an AAMA-accredited laboratory conforming to test results in Paragraph 1.07, and a sample window representing the bid window except for color. B.Acceptance will be by addendum only as no verbal approvals will be allowed. C.Submit bid on prequalified products in prebid written addendum. Bidder must identify manufacturer and model of product on which the bid is based. D.Furnish a valid AAMA “Authorization for Product Certification” indicating that the windows for the project conform to AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-08. E.Furnish visible, permanent IGCC certification labels indicating conformance to ASTM E 2190-10 on the insulating glass units. F.Furnish visible, permanent SGCC certification labels indicating conformance to ANSI Z97.1-09 and/or 16 CFR 1201 on tempered glass lites, if included on the project, and laminated glass lites, if included on the project. G.Manufacturer's warranties: Page 6 of 11 1.Windows: warrant for one year against defects in material or workmanship under normal use. 2.Insulating glass units: warrant seal for ten years against visual obstruction from film formation or moisture collection between internal glass surfaces, excluding that caused by glass breakage or abuse. 3.Paint finish: PPG Industries Duranar® organic finish conforming to AAMA 2605-13: warrant for twenty years against chipping, peeling, blistering, cracking, chalking, or fading. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING - Handle and protect windows and accessories, in accordance with AAMA CW-10-12 until installation completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Peerless GSL2 Horizontal Sliding Thermal Aluminum Window or approved equal by Architect B.Other acceptable manufacturers who have demonstrated a successful history of manufacturing for *10* years equivalent products: 2.02 MATERIALS A.Aluminum extrusions: extruded by the window manufacturer from commercial quality 6063-T5 alloy; free from defects impairing strength and durability. B.Hardware: two zamac wheel housings per sash with one ball bearing heavy duty nylon wheel per housing; the wheel is contoured to fit over the sill track and keep the sash centered in the track; one double-action black [satin] nickle handle with multiple point locks per sash; when the handle is pointed up, the sash is lowered to seal it in the frame; when the handle is pointed down, the sash is lifted so it can be slid open and closed; each sash contains a concealed latch to prevent removal of the open sash for occupant security. C.Weatherstrip: secured in extruded ports; pile with polypropylene center fin conforming to AAMA 701-11: single row on each sash meeting stile; Page 7 of 11 Santoprene™ bulb seal conforming to AAMA 702-11: single row on each sash meeting stile and double row on each sash top rail, bottom rail, and plain stile. 2.03 FABRICATION A.Frame: double tubular head, sill, and jambs mitre cut and fastened with two zamac corner gussets per corner; upturned interior sill leg with end caps to conceal cut edges; corners sealed by window manufacturer with polyethylene foam gaskets. B.Sash: double tubular sash rails and stiles mitre cut and fastened with one zamac corner gusset per corner; corners sealed by window manufacturer with polyethylene foam gaskets. C.Sash design: mechanical meeting stile interlock; sash removed by removing take- out stop in frame head (and OX-XO sash stop in frame head), lifting sash, and swinging sash bottom to interior. D.Water control: tubular frame sill with separate weep slots for each track; exterior weep slots covered with weep flaps and weep hoods finished to match window; exterior weep slots allow water to drain by gravity and resist wind-driven water. 2.04 INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Materials 1.Spacer: tubular stainless steel. 2.Spacer color: stainless metal color. 3.Primary seal: polyisobutylene. 4.Secondary seal: silicone. 5.Airspace fill: plain air. [argon.] B. Performance 1.Dual-seal durability: conformance to ASTM E 2190-10; visible, permanent IGCC certification label. Page 8 of 11 (2. Other: *Enter center-of-glass U value, SHGC, and VT data as required*) C.Exterior glass lite 1.Thickness: [1/4".] 2.Tint: clear. 3.Type: annealed. [tempered.] 4. Coating: low E coating on #2 surface; Cardinal Glass 270 or Cardinal Glass 366 or equivalent. D.Interior glass lite 1.Thickness: [1/4".] 2.Tint: clear. 3.Type: annealed. [tempered.] 4. Coating: low E coating on #3 surface; Cardinal Glass 270 or Cardinal Glass 366 or equivalent. 5. Coating: low E coating on #4 surface; Cardinal Glass i89 or equivalent. E.Glass surface protection: Factory-apply removeable protective clear Cardinal Glass Preserve™ film on insulating glass exterior and interior surfaces for protection during window installation and building construction. 2.05 FINISH ON EXTERIOR ALUMINUM EXTRUSIONS A.Application: on clean extrusions free from serious surface blemishes; on exposed surfaces visible when installed product's operating sash are closed. B.Coating: PPG Duranar® with resin containing 70% fluoropolymer; thermosetting; alternative finishes will not be acceptable. C.Quality standard: conforming to AAMA 2605-13, including 10 years Florida exposure and 4000 hours humidity tests. Page 9 of 11 D.Pretreatment: five-stage; zinc chromate conversion coating. E.Application: electrostatic spray by a PPG Approved Duranar® Applicator and appropriate oven bake process. F.Coating quantity: minimum one primer coat and one color coat. G.Dry film thickness: minimum 1.2 mils on exposed surfaces, except inside corners and channels. H.Color: chosen from manufacturer's standards. B.Coating: bronze anodize. C.Quality standard: conforming to AAMA 611-12. D.Thickness: AAM10C22A41 Class I - .7 mils #215. or as required to meet impact resistance. 2.06 FINISH ON INTERIOR ALUMINUM EXTRUSIONS A.Application: on clean extrusions free from serious surface blemishes; on exposed surfaces visible when installed product's operating sash are closed. B.Coating: PPG Duranar®™ with resin containing 70% fluoropolymer; thermosetting; alternative finishes will not be acceptable. C.Quality standard: conforming to AAMA 2605-13, including 10 years Florida exposure and 4000 hours humidity tests. D.Pretreatment: five-stage; zinc chromate conversion coating. E.Application: electrostatic spray by a PPG Approved Duranar® Applicator and appropriate oven bake process. F.Coating quantity: minimum one primer coat and one color coat. Page 10 of 11 G.Dry film thickness: minimum 1.2 mils on exposed surfaces, except inside corners and channels. H.Color: chosen from manufacturer's standards. I.Coating: bronze anodize. J.Quality standard: conforming to AAMA 611-12. K.Thickness: AAM10C22A41 Class I - .7 mils #215. 2.08 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A.Material: extruded aluminum; nominal .062” wall; with exposed surfaces finished to match window color and finish performance; concealed fasteners; required weatherseals; designed for unrestricted expansion and contraction. B.Exterior: (10 psf subsill with polyamide strip thermal break and end dams sealed by the window manufacturer.) C.Interior: (two-piece snap trim and trim clip.) D.Other: (steel strap anchor.) (head expander with polyamide strip thermal break.) (sill angle.) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION - Prepare openings to be in tolerance, plumb, level, provide for secure anchoring, and in accordance with approved shop drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A.Install windows in accordance with approved shop drawings and window manufacturer's recommendations with skilled craftspeople who have demonstrated a successful history of installing windows for *Enter number* years. B.Provide required support and securely fasten and set windows plumb, square, and level without twist or bow. Page 11 of 11 C.Apply sealant per sealant manufacturer's recommendations at joints, wipe off excess, and leave exposed sealant surfaces clean and smooth. 3.03 FIELD TESTING A.Test installed units in conformance with AAMA 502-12 minimum requirements for air and water infiltration with the window manufacturer, dealer, contractor, and owner present. B.Select test units as directed by the owner's representative and use an AAMA- accredited laboratory provided by the owner or contractor. 3.04 ADJUSTING - Adjust windows as necessary for smooth and weathertight operation. 3.05 CLEANING A.Peel the Preserve™ protective film from the window glass surfaces when the window installation is complete, leaving these surfaces ready for use without the need for glass cleaning. B.Leave the installed windows clean and free of construction debris. 3.06 CARE PRIOR TO BUILDING COMPLETION - Protect surfaces of installed windows, in accordance with AAMA CW-10-12, from contact with contaminating substances resulting from surrounding construction. END OF SECTION Section 08700 Page 1 of 11 SECTION 08700 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of finish hardware is shown on the drawings and in schedules. B. Definition: "Finish Hardware" includes items known commercially as builders hardware which are required for swing, sliding and folding doors, except special types of unique and non-matching hardware specified in the same section as the door and door frame. Types of items in this section include (but are not necessarily limited to): Hinges Pivots Lock cylinders and keys Lock and latch sets Bolts Push/pull units Closers Overhead holders Miscellaneous door control devices Pneumatic closers Protection plates 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer: Obtain each kind of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from only one manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. B. Supplier: A recognized builders hardware supplier who has been furnishing hardware in the project's vicinity for a period of not less than 2 years, and who is, or employs an experienced hardware consultant who is available, at reasonable times during the course of the work, for consultation above project's hardware requirements, to Owner, Architect and Contractor. Section 08700 Page 2 of 11 C. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance with NFPA Standard No. 80. Provide only hardware which has been tested and listed by UL for types and sizes of doors required and complies with requirements of door and door frame labels. D. Handicapped Hardware: Provide hardware with tactile warning to comply with ANSI standards where required. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical information for each item of hardware. Include whatever information may be necessary to show compliance with requirements, and include instructions for installation and for maintenance of operating parts and finish. Include copies of UL test data on items for fire-rated openings. B. Hardware Schedule: Submit final hardware schedule in the manner indicated below. Hardware schedules are intended for coordination of work. 1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize hardware schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following: a. Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes, etc., contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. 2. Submittal Sequence: Submit schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work (e.g., hollow metal frames) which is critical in the project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by builders hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of hardware schedule. C. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. Keying shall match Owner's current system. Section 08700 Page 3 of 11 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. Packaging of hardware, on a set by set basis, is the responsibility of the supplier. As material is received by the hardware supplier from the various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers marked with the hardware set number. Two or more identical sets may be packed in the same container. B. Inventory hardware jointly with representatives of the hardware supplier and the hardware installer until each is satisfied that the count is correct. C. Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project, but not yet installed. Control and handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable, so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by the hardware losses, both before and after installation. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Coordination: Coordinate hardware with other work. Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to the final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions in the package. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of the thicknesses, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the proper times to the proper locations (shop or project site) for installation. B. Templates: Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be factory-prepared for the installation of hardware. Upon request, check the shop drawings of such other work, to confirm that adequate provisions are made for the proper installation of hardware. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULE HARDWARE: A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size and other distinctive qualities of each type of builders hardware is indicated in the Hardware Schedule at the end of this section. Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following: 1. Manufacturer's product designations: One or more manufacturers are listed for each hardware type required. Provide either the product designated, or, where more than one manufacturer is listed, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that comply with requirements including those specified elsewhere in this section. Section 08700 Page 4 of 11 2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATIONS: A. General: 1. Hand of door: The drawings show the direction of slide, swing or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of the door movement as shown. 2. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of the basic metal and forming methods indicated, using the manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for the applicable hardware units by FS FF- H-106, FS FF-G-111, FS FF-H-116 and FS FF-H-121. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified. 3. Fasteners: Manufacture hardware to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. 4. Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match the hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match the finish of such other work as closely as possible, including "prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive painted finish. 5. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when the door is closed, except to the extent no standard units of the type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where the bolt head or the nut on the opposite face is exposed in other work, except where it is not feasible to adequately reinforce the work. 6. Tools for Maintenance: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of builders hardware. 2.3 HINGES, BUTTS AND PIVOT: A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units. B. Screws: Furnish Phillips flat-head all-purpose or machine screws for installation of units, except furnish Phillips flat-head all-purpose or wood screws for installation of units into wood. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots. Section 08700 Page 5 of 11 C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: 1. Steel Hinges: Steel pins. 2. Non-ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins. 3. Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins. 4. Out-swing Corridor Doors: Non-removable pins. 5. Interior Doors: Non-rising pins. 6. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves. 7. Number of hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges for door leaf for doors 90" or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30" of additional height. 2.4 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING: A. General: Supplier will meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and obtain final instructions in writing. B. Existing System: Grandmasterkey the locks to the Owner's existing system, with a new masterkey for the project. C. Review the keying system with the Owner and provide the type required (master, grandmaster of great-grandmaster), either new or integrated with Owner's existing system. D. Equip locks with manufacturer's standard 6-pin tumbler cylinders. E. Equip locks on exterior doors with manufacturers special 6-pin tumbler cylinder, with construction master key feature, which permits voiding of construction keys without cylinder removal. F. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass/bronze, stainless steel or nickel silver. G. Comply with Owner's instructions for masterkeying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide individual change key for each lock, which is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks. Section 08700 Page 6 of 11 H. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only. I. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock; 5 master keys for each master system; and 5 grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system. 1. Deliver keys to Owner's representative and obtain receipt. J. Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet, all as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for 150% of the number of locks required for the project. 1. Key control manufacturer to set up complete cross index system. 2.5 LOCKS, LATCHES AND BOLTS: A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set. 1. Provide dust-proof strikes for foot bolts, except where special threshold construction provides non-recessed strike for bolt. 2. Provide roller type strikes where recommended by manufacturer of the latch and lock units. B. Lock Throw: Provide 5/8" minimum throw of latch and deadbolt used on pairs of doors. Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings. 1. Provide 1/2" minimum throw on other latch and deadlock bolts. C. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 1/2" diameter rods of brass, bronze or stainless steel, with minimum 12" long rod. D. Exit Device Dogging: Except on fire-rated doors, wherever closers are provided on doors equipped with exit devices, equip the units with keyed dogging device to hold the push bar down and the latch bolt in the open position. E. Provide 5" backset on all hospital latchsets. 2.6 PUSH/PULL UNITS: A. Exposed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for installation; through-bolted for matched pairs, but not for single units. Section 08700 Page 7 of 11 2.7 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES: A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit, depending upon size of door, exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of use. 1. Where parallel arms are indicated for closers, provide closer unit one size larger than recommended for use with standard arms. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS: A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units (kick plates, edge trim and similar units); either machine screws or self-tapping screws. B. Fabricate protection plates (armor, kick or mop) on stop side not more than 1-1/2" smaller than the door width, x the height 3" smaller indicated. 1. Plastic Plates: Plastic laminate (polyester), 1/8" thick. C. Weatherstrip and Thresholds: Extruded aluminum, size and profiles indicated. D. Astragals: Prime coated steel as indicated. E. Provide self-adhesive S88D siliconseal door gasketing in dark bronze color as manufactured by Pemko Manufacturing for fire and smoke doors. 2.9 HARDWARE FINISHES: A. Provide matching finishes for hardware units at each door or opening, to the greatest extent possible, and except as otherwise indicated. Reduce differences in color and textures as much as commercially possible where the base metal or metal forming process is different for individual units of hardware exposed at the same door or opening. In general, match items to the manufacturer's standard finish for the latch and lock set (or push-pull units if no latch-lock sets) for color texture. B. Provide finishes which match those established by BHMA or, if none established, match the Architect's sample. C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified for the applicable units of hardware by referenced standards. Section 08700 Page 8 of 11 D. Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze and aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. The suffix "-NL" is used with standard finish designations to indicate "no lacquer". E. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are the industry-recognized standard commercial finishes, except as otherwise noted. F. General Hardware finish: US26D. 2.10 HARDWARE COMPONENT MANUFACTURERS: A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as follows: 1. Bolts and Hinges: Hager. 2. Thresholds (see hardware schedule). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Location for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations, and except as may be otherwise directed by Architect. B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of surface protections with finishing work specified in the Division 9 sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. Section 08700 Page 9 of 11 B. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. C. Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware. D. Continued Maintenance Service: Approximately six months after the acceptance of hardware in each area, the Installer, accompanied by the representative of the latch and lock manufacturer, shall return to the project and re-adjust every item of hardware to restore proper function to doors and hardware. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials or installation of hardware units. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware. FINISH HARDWARE SCHEDULE Hardware Set #1 Doors 106.1 & 107.1 Lockset F86 Astragal Weatherstripping Threshold Rain Drip Deadbolt Tampered Plate Security Hinges Kickplates Section 08700 Page 10 of 11 Hardware Set #2 Doors 106.3 Lockset F86 Weatherstripping Threshold Rain Drip Deadbolt Tampered Plate Security Hinges Kickplates Hardware Set #3 Doors 106.2, 105.1, 102.1, 109.1, 108.1 Lockset F86 Butts Silencers Stops Hardware Set #4 Doors 103.1 Lockset F82 Weatherstripping Threshold Rain Drip Deadbolt Tampered Plate Security Hinges Closer Kick Plates Stop Louver Vent Silencers Section 08700 Page 11 of 11 Hardware Set #5 Doors 101.1 Lockset F82 Weatherstripping Threshold Rain Drip Deadbolt Tamper Plate Security Hinges Kickplate Stop Silencers Hardware Set #6 Doors 104.1 Lockset F82 Deadbolt Tamper Plate Security Hinges Stop Silencers END OF SECTION Section 8800 Page 1 of 4 SECTION 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of glass and glazing work is shown on drawings. B. Definitions: "Glass" includes prime glass, processed glass, and fabricated glass products. "Glazing" includes glass installation and materials used to install glass. Types of work in this section include glass and glazing for: 1. Window units, not indicated as "pre-glazed". C. "Glass products" is hereby defined to include glazing plastics. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Prime Glass Manufacturer: One of the following for each type/color/ pattern of glass: ASG Industries, Inc. C-E Glass Division Ford Glass Company Libbey-Owens-Ford Company PPG Industries, Inc. B. Prime Glass Standard: FS DD-G-451. C. Safety Glass Standard: CPSC 16 CFR 1201. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Samples: 2 samples, 12" square, of each glass product, except for clear single-pane units. B. Substitutions: Follow procedures noted in Section 01605. Section 8800 Page 2 of 4 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Pre-Installation: Meet with Glazier and other trades affected by glass installation, prior to beginning of installation. Do not perform work under adverse job conditions. Install liquid sealants when temperatures are within lower or middle third of temperature range recommended by manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS: A. 9/16” Impact resistant glazing. Type I, Quality q3 Tinted (Color as Selected by Architect) 2.2 PROCESSED GLASS: A. Mirror Glass: 1/4" Quality q2 clear float glass; full silver coating, copper coating and organic coating. 2.3 FABRICATED GLASS UNITS: A. Edge Construction: Twin primary seals of polyisobutylene; tubular aluminum or galvanized steel spacer-bar frame with welded or soldered sealed corners, and filled with dessicant; and secondary seal outside of bar, bonded to both sheets of glass and bar, of polysulfide, silicone or hot-melt butyl elastomeric sealant (fabricator's options). 2.4 MIRRORS: A. Mirror Glass: 1/4" thick, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, conforming to FS DD-G-451, with silvering, copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with FS DD-M-411. 1. Mirror Edges: Polished. 2. Mirror Hangers: Concealed tamperproof clips. 2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS AND COMPONENTS: A. General: Provide color of exposed sealant/compound indicated or if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors, or black if no color is so selected. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for selection of hardness, depending upon the location of each application, conditions at time of installation, and performance requirements as indicated. Select materials, and variations or modifications, carefully for compatibility with surfaces contacted in the installation. Section 8800 Page 3 of 4 2.6 GLAZING GASKETS: A. Molded Neoprene Glazing Gaskets: Molded or extended neoprene gaskets of the profile and hardness required for watertight construction; comply with ASTM D 2000 designation 2BC 415 to 3BC 62U, black. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 STANDARDS AND PERFORMANCE: A. Airtight installation of each glass product is required, except as otherwise shown. Each installation must withstand normal temperature changes, impact loading (for operating sash and doors), without failure including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in the work. B. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation, and subsequent operation of glazed components of the work. During installation, discard unit with significant edge damage or other imperfections. C. Glazing channel dimensions as shown are intended to provide for necessary bite on glass, minimum edge clearance, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by job conditions at time of installation. 3.2 PREPARATION FOR GLAZING: A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrates. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are indicated for use. B. Apply primer or sealant to joint surfaces where recommended by sealant manufacturer. 3.3 GLAZING: A. Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located 1/4th of glass width from each corner. Set blocks in thin course of heel- bead, if any. B. Force sealants into channel to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. Section 8800 Page 4 of 4 C. Clean and trim excess glazing materials from glass and stops or frames promptly after installation, and eliminate stains and discolorations. D. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket will not "walk" out when installation is subjected to movement. Anchor gasket to stop with matching ribs, or by proven adhesives, including embedment of gasket tail in cured heal head. E. Gasket Glazing: Miter cut and bond ends together at corners where gaskets are used for channel glazing, so that gaskets will not pull away from corners and result in voids or leaks in glazing system. 3.4 CURE, PROTECTION AND CLEANING: A. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. B. Clean glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Comply with glass product manufacturer's recommendations for final cleaning. 3.5 MIRROR INSTALLATION: A. Secure mirrors to walls in tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for type of substrate involved. B. Clean exposed surfaces of mirror units in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION Section 09220 Page 1 of 4 SECTION 09220 LATH, PLASTER AND STUCCO WORK PART 1 SCOPE 1.1 Supply and install all Lath and Plaster Work as shown on drawings and as specified herein. A. Coordination: Work herein requires coordination with trades whose work connects with, is affected, or concealed by lathing, and inspections have been made. B. Inspection: Inspect surfaces to receive lath and plaster before starting work and do not start until surfaces are acceptable. Starting work under this section implies acceptance of surfaces. C. Deliver and Storage: Deliver all manufactured materials in original packages bearing manufacturer's name and brand. Use only one brand of each material throughout job. Store materials in dry areas. D. General Requirements: 1. ASTM Reference Standards: C-847 – Metal lath and trims for interior and exterior application of portland cement stucco; C-841 – interior metal lath and trims for stucco; C-1063 – Application of metal lath and accessories. 2. Reference – ASTM C-926 – Application of portland cement based plaster. 3. All galvanized products produced from G-60 pre-galvanized steel coil, per ASTM C-847. Zinc accessories, per ASTM B-69, are produced from 99% zinc alloy and are recommended for exterior applications. 4. Chapter 25, Section 2507 of the 2003 International Building Code, with revisions. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 Metal Lath: A. Expanded type, diamond shaped, galvanized steel, weighing 3.4 lbs./sq. yd. backed with asphalt saturated kraft paper. Paper shall meet federal specification UU-B-790a, type 1, grade D, style 2. Use "dimpled" self furring type on solid surfaces. B. Installation: Apply to true surfaces, straight, without warps or buckles, long Section 09220 Page 2 of 4 dimension of lath at right angles to supports; lower sheet lapped over upper sheet where used on walls. Secure lath to supports at 6 inch intervals. Secure the side laps to supports, and tie between supports. Lap ½ inch at sides and 1 inch at ends; end laps must be staggered and supported. No sheet ends allowed less than one support distance from any angle or corner. For internal corners use corner laths. Install strip lath over joints between dissimilar base materials where surfaces lie in the same plane and where base materials cannot be effectively bonded together. Fasten securely at 6 inches o.c. Fasten lath to gypsum sheathing at 6 inch centers. 2.2 Accessories A. Install all accessories to plumb, true and level lines, and backing plates as located by the Trade furnishing these items. All accessories shall be galvanized. B. Corner Beads: #1 type, expanded metal flanges integral with nose of bead, galvanized, weighing 208 lb./1000 l.f. Install at all external corners. Use single length except where standard length is not sufficient. Miter or cope as required; fasten with tie wire at 6 inches o.c.r both sides. C. Corner Laths: As specified for expanded metal lath, 3 inch legs bent to a 105 degree corner, weighing 140 Ib./1000 l.f. Install at interior angles and where one or both abutting surfaces are metal lath. Corner laths are not required where metal lath is continued around corner at junction of walls and where ceiling lath turns down wall. Tie outer edges only to adjoining lath at 6 inches o.c, or stub nail to concrete block. Insure that stub nails are of proper length for anchoring. D. Casing Beads: Expanded metal flange, galvanized, depth as required by plaster thickness, weighing approximately 289 Ib./1000 l.f. for 3/4" type. Install at all edges of plaster, continuously, including where plaster butts all other materials, by securing to lath at 6 inches o.c. E. Control Joints: 3/4 inch ground, No. 50, expanded metal flanges, galvanized minimum 26 gauge. Install control joints in ceilings or walls exceeding 144 SF. Distance between control joints shall not exceed 18 ft. in either direction or a length to width ratio of 2-1/2 to 1. Coordinate locations of joints with Architect. F. Expansion Joints: #15 type, 3/4 inch ground, expanded metal flanges, galvanized, weighing 417 lb./lOOO l.f. Install where indicated on drawings, tied to lath at 6 inches o.c. Cut lath passing under expansion joints. Coordinate location with Architect. G. Channels: 3/4 inch furring channel weighing 300 lb./l000 l.f. and 1-1/2 inches runner channel weighing 500 lb./l000 l.f., 16 gauge galvanized throughout. H. Weep Screed: Manufactured from minimum 0.018-inch steel. Hot dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A653 having a minimum G-90 coating complying with ASTM A925. Section 09220 Page 3 of 4 I. Wire: Soft, annealed, galvanized steel; 8 gauge for hangers, 16 gauge for channel ties and 18 gauge for lath ties. J. Nails: Concrete nails, case hardened steel, 3/4 inch long. K. Building Paper: Grade D, Type 1, asphalt impregnated. L. Miscellaneous Items: Furnish all miscellaneous components not specified herein but shown on drawings and any other items required to complete the installation. M. Water: Clean and free of deleterious matter. N. Hydrated Lime: Conforming to ASTM C-206, Type S. O. Quick Lime: Conforming to ASTM C-5. P. Portland Cement Plaster: 1. Portland Cement: Conforming to ASTM C-150, Type 1. 2. Sand for Cement Plaster: Conforming to ASA A42.2. 2.3 Exterior, Cement Plaster: A. Scratch Coat: 1 part Portland cement, 4 parts sand and hydrated lime equal to 25% of volume of cement. Apply with sufficient material and pressure to shove material through metal lath and form a good key; 3/8 inch minimum thickness, score in horizontal direction with metal scorer with clipped teeth to provide good mechanical key for second coat. Dampen concrete and concrete block surfaces to reduce suction prior to application. B. Brown Coat: 1 part Portland cement, 5 parts sand and hydrated lime equal to 25% of volume of cement. Apply with sufficient material and pressure to shove material through metal lath and form a good key; 3/8 inch minimum thickness, score in horizontal direction with metal scorer with clipped teeth to provide good mechanical key for second coat. Dampen concrete and concrete block surfaces to reduce suction prior to application. C. Finish Coat: Hand apply finish coat (minimum 1/8” thick to match existing finish and color of building.) D. Curing: Keep each base coat moist for at least 48 hours; commence moistening as soon as plaster has hardened sufficiently so as to prevent injury; apply water in a fine fog spray; avoid soaking; curing shall proceed over holidays, Saturdays and Sundays if necessary. If atmospheric conditions are hot and dry, curing time shall be extended as necessary at no additional cost to the Owner. Allow plaster base coats to cure for minimum of 7 days before applying finish coat. Section 09220 Page 4 of 4 E. Thickness: 7/8 inch thick; measured from back of lath. PART 3 DETAIL REQUIREMENTS 3.1 General: Provide ventilation to properly dry plaster during and subsequent to application. In glazed buildings accomplish by keeping windows open sufficiently to provide air circulation; in enclosed areas lacking normal ventilation, mechanically remove moisture laden air. 3.2 Lathing: Apply lath with long dimension at right angles to supports; lap sides and ends as recommended by manufacturer. Stagger vertical laps. Make no vertical joints at any corner; bend lath around all corners, internal and external. Attach lath to studs by fastening at spacings required by local building codes. All attachments: corrosion resistant. 3.3 Accessories: Install all accessories to plumb, true and level lines, and backing plates as located by Trade furnishing items. Refer to paragraph 2.2 of this section. 3.4 Plastering: Do not apply plaster below 55 degree F. temperature. Apply no plaster to frosty surfaces. Dampen any surfaces on which suction must be reduced with fog-spray. Maintain all screeds plumb and true. Fill fissures or breaks in brown coat uniform in thickness with average thickness about 1/8 inch; minimum thickness anywhere, 1/16 inch. Apply finish coats to partially dry base coat that has been evenly wetted by brushing or spraying; avoid use of excessive water. Trowel all finish surfaces of plaster to perfectly true and even surface without scratches, ridges, voids, cracks, etc. Except when hand mixing small batches is approved, use approved mechanical mixers. Clean mixers, mixing boxes and tools after mixing each batch. Thoroughly mix with water until uniform in color and consistency. Re-tempering not permitted. Discard plaster which has begun to stiffen. Mix in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed directions. Except in the case of specifically formulated plasters which require only water added at jobsite, proportion by volume as specified. 3.5 Cleaning and Patching: Clean areas of droppings immediately after each coat is applied. At any exterior locations, remove droppings or splashes from all concrete, masonry or other finish surfaces. Patch after all other work except painting has been completed. Cut out damaged or broken plaster to straight lines with clean, sharp edges. Cut out cracks to width of at least 1 inch. Fill areas to be patched with base materials; then give a finish coat of same material as adjoining plaster. Patched areas shall match adjoining work in finish and texture. Joinings shall be flush and smooth so joints between patch and existing plaster are imperceptible. 3.6 Clean-up: At completion of work, remove excess plaster from beads, screeds, etc., and leave work clean and ready for glazing. Promptly remove plaster, rubbish, surplus material, scaffolding and other equipment from jobsite. Leave areas broom clean. END OF SECTION Section 09250 Page 1 of 16 SECTION 09250 GYPSUM DRYWALL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this Section includes all labor materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the gypsum drywall as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Gypsum board work for partitions, ceilings, column enclosures, furring, and elsewhere where gypsum drywall work is shown on drawings. 2. Metal supports for gypsum drywall construction. 3. Acoustical insulation for gypsum drywall work. 4. Sealant for gypsum drywall work. 5. Concealed metal/wood reinforcing for attachment of railings, grab & towel bars, toilet partitions and other items supported on drywall partitions and walls. 6. Taping and finishing of drywall joints. 7. Installing rings and frames in drywall surfaces for grilles, registers and lighting fixtures. 8. Bracing and connections. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07200 – Insulation. B. Section 08100 – Steel Doors and Frames. C. Section 08305 – Access Doors. D. Section 09900 – Painting. E. Section 01605 – Product Options & Substitutions Section 09250 Page 2 of 16 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The following standards as well as other standards which may be referred to in this Section, shall apply to the work of this Section: 1. Gypsum Drywall Construction Handbook, latest edition, U.S. Gypsum Co. 2. ASTM C645 "Standard Specification for Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels For Screw Application of Gypsum Board". 3. ASTM A568 "Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements For". 4. ASTM C1396 "Specification for Gypsum Board". 5. ASTM C442 "Specification for Gypsum Backing Board and Coreboard". 6. ASTM C475 "Standard Specification for Joint Treatment Materials For Gypsum Wallboard Construction". 7. ASTM C840 "Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board". 8. ASTM C919 "Standard Specification for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications". 9. ASTM C954 "Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws For the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. to 0.112 in. in Thickness". 10. ASTM C1002 "Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws For the Application of Gypsum Board". 11. ASTM C754 "Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum Board". B. Allowable Tolerances: 1/32" offsets between planes of board faces, and 1/16" in 8'-0" for plumb, level, warp and bow. C. System Design Load 1. Provide standard drywall assemblies designed and tested by manufacturer to withstand a lateral load of five (5) lbs. per sq. ft. for the maximum wall height required, and with deflection limited to 1/240 of partition height. a. Drywall assemblies with tile finish shall have a deflection limit of 1/360. Section 09250 Page 3 of 16 D. Fire-Resistance Rating: Where gypsum drywall with fire resistance ratings are indicated, provide materials and installations which are identical with those of applicable assemblies tested per ASTM E119 by fire testing laboratories, or to design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in listing of other testing agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Installer: Firm with not less than five (5) years of successful experience in the installation of specified materials. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawing for each drywall partition, furring and ceiling system showing size or gauges of framing members, hanger and anchorage devices, wallboard types, insulation, sealant, methods of assembly and fastening, control joints indicating column lines, corner details, joint finishing and relationship of drywall work to adjacent work. B. Samples: Each material specified herein, 12"x12", or 12" long, or in manufacturer's container, as applicable for type of material submitted. C. Manufacturer's Literature: Submit technical and installation instructions for each drywall partition, furring and ceiling system specified herein, and for each fire rating and sound rating gypsum board assembly. Submit other data as required to show compliance with these specifications. D. Test Reports: This Contractor shall submit test report, obtained by drywall manufacturer, indicating conformance of drywall assemblies to required fire ratings and sound ratings. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING AND PROTECTION A. Deliver, store and handle drywall work materials to prevent damage. Deliver materials in their original, unopened containers or bundles, and store where protected from moisture, damage and from exposure to the elements. Store wallboard in flat stacks. B. Protect wallboard from becoming wet. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Provide and maintain minimum temperature of fifty-five (55˚) degrees F. and adequate ventilation to eliminate excessive moisture within the building in the area of the drywall work for at least twenty-four (24) hours, prior to, during and after installation of drywall work. Installation shall not start until windows are glazed and doors are installed, unless openings are temporarily closed. Space Section 09250 Page 4 of 16 above suspended ceilings shall be vented sufficiently to prevent temperature and pressure build-up. 1.8 JOB MOCK-UP A. At a suitable location, where directed by the Architect, lay up a portion of a finished wall and ceiling demonstrating the quality of work, including finishing, to be obtained under this Section. Omit drywall boards in locations as directed by the Architect to show stud spacing and attachments; after acceptance, complete assembly. B. Adjust the finishing techniques as required to achieve the finish required by the Architect as described in this Section of these specifications. C. Upon approval of the mock-up, the mock-up may be left in place as a portion of the finished work of this Section. D. All drywall work shall be equal in quality to approved mock-up. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Materials specified below, unless noted otherwise or specified herein, are those of U.S. Gypsum Co. Equivalent materials of National Gypsum Co., Georgia Pacific and Domtar meeting specification requirements are acceptable. 2.2 METAL SUPPORTS A. Metal Floor and Ceiling Runners – Interior Walls 1. Channel Type: Formed from 20 U.S. Std. gauge (unless otherwise noted) galvanized steel, width to suit channel type metal studs. Use 20 ga. top runners with 1-1/4" minimum flanges. 2. Ceiling runners at fire rated partitions shall be "Fire Trak" made by the Fire Trak Corp. fabricated of 20 ga. galvanized steel. B. Metal Studs, Framing and Furring – Interior Walls 1. Channel Type Studs: Channel type with holes for passage of conduit formed from minimum 20 U.S. Std. gauge. (unless heavier gauge required to meet deflection limits) galvanized steel, width as shown on drawings. 2. Furring Channels: Hat shaped, formed from galvanized steel, 25 U.S. Std. gauge. Section 09250 Page 5 of 16 3. Continuous 16 gauge x 8" wide steel wall plate screwed to studs as required for support of railings, toilet partitions and other items supported on drywall partitions and walls. C. Suspended Ceiling and Fascia Supports 1. Main Runners: 1-1/2" steel channels, cold rolled at 0.475 lbs. per ft., rust -inhibitive paint finish. 2. Furring Members: Screw-type hat-shaped furring channels of 25 ga. zinc-coated steel; comply with ASTM C645. 3. Hangers: Galvanized, 1" x 3/16" flat steel slats capable of supporting 5x calculated load supported. 4. Hanger Anchorages: Provide inserts, clips, bolts, screws and other devices applicable to the required method of structural anchorage for ceiling hangers. Size devices for 5x calculated load supported. 5. Furring Anchorages: 16 ga. galvanized wire ties, manufacturer's standard clips, bolts or screws as recommended by furring manufacturer. 2.3 GYPSUM WALLBOARDS A. Gypsum Wall Board: 1/2" thick and 5/8" thick as indicated on drawings, "Sheetrock", 48" wide, in maximum lengths available to minimize end to end butt joints. B. Fire Rated Gypsum Wall Board: 1/2" thick and 5/8" thick as indicated on drawings, "Sheetrock Firecode C", 48" wide, in maximum lengths available to minimize end to end butt joints. C. Water Resistant Gypsum Wall Board (for tile finish and for non-tile areas in Toilet & shower rooms, Janitor's closets, Kitchen, Laundry, Utility rooms): 1/2" thick and 5/8" thick as indicated on drawings, "Sheetrock W/R" or "Sheetrock Firecode C W/R", 48" wide, in maximum lengths available to minimize end to end butt joints. D. Fasteners: #6-18 x 1¼” long bugle head screws at 6” OC in the field and panel edges at the front and at the backside of the parapet #6-18 x 1¼” long bugle head screws at 4” OC in the field and panel edges. See structural drawings for additional details and screw information. E. Joint Treatment: Provide Dow Corning 795 Building Sealant or approved equal sealant. Apply a 3/8” bead of sealant to the joint and trowel flat. Apply enough of the same material to each fastener to cover completely when trowel flat. Section 09250 Page 6 of 16 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: See Section 07200 – Insulation. B. Fasteners for Wall Board: USG Brand Screws; Type S Bugle Head for fastening wallboard to lighter gauge interior metal framing (up to 20 ga.). Type S-12 Bugle Head for fastening wallboard to heavier gauge interior metal framing (20 ga. to 12 ga.); Type S and Type S-12 Pan Head for attaching metal studs to door frames and runners; and Type G Bugle Head for fastening wallboard to wall board. Lengths specified below under "Part 3 – Execution" Articles and as recommended by drywall manufacturer. 1. Screws used for fastening water resistant backer boards to receive tile finish shall have corrosion resistant finish. C. Laminating Adhesive: "Perf-A-Joint Compound Taping." D. Metal Trim - Corner Beads: For 90 degree External Corners - "Dur-A-Bead" #103, U.S. Std. 27 ga. galvanized steel, 1-1/4" x 1-1/4", for 90 degree external corners. E. Metal Trim - Edge Beads: "Metal Trim No. 200-A", U.S. Std 28 ga. galvanized steel, channel type, or "Metal Trim No 200- B," L shape, where use of channel type 200-A is not possible. F. Metal Trim Treatment Materials and Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Drywall Boards: "Perf-A-Tape" for joint reinforcing; "Durabond 90 Joint Compound-Multi-Purpose" for taping and topping; and "Ready Mixed Compound-Topping" for finishing. G. Water: Clean, fresh and suitable for drinking. H. Control Joints: No. 93, USG. I. Acoustical Sealant: USG "Acoustical Sealant" or "Tremco Acoustical Caulking" of Tremco Mfg. Co., or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions where gypsum drywall is to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work. Section 09250 Page 7 of 16 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. General 1. Install drywall work in accordance with drywall manufacturer's printed instructions and as indicated on drawings and specified herein. 2. All metal framing for drywall partitions shall extend from floor to underside of structural deck above. 3. Spot-grout in metal door frames at the jamb-anchor clips with joint compound after the studs are installed and just before the wallboard is installed. If second layer of wallboard is indicated, rake out compound after installing first layer of wallboard. Grout frames in solid for door jambs where indicated. 4. Provide concealed reinforcement, 16 ga. thick by eight (8) inches wide or as detailed or as recommended by manufacturer, for attachment of railings, toilet partitions, and other items to be supported on the partitions which cannot be attached to the metal framing members. Concealed reinforcement shall span between metal studs and be attached thereto using two (2) self- tapping pan head screws at each stud. a. Back of drywall shall be scored or notched to prevent bulging out where reinforcement plate occurs. B. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install fire-rated assemblies in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, Underwriters' Laboratories and test results obtained and published by the drywall manufacturer, for the fire- rated drywall assembly types indicated on the drawings. C. Sealant 1. Install continuous acoustical sealant bead at top and bottom edges of wallboard where indicated or required for sound rating as wallboard is installed, and between metal trim edge beads and abutting construction. 2. Install acoustical sealant in 1/8" wide vertical control joints within the length of the wall or partitions, and in all other joints, specified below under "Control Joints". Install bead of acoustical sealant around electric switch and outlet boxes, piping, ducts, and around any other penetration in the wallboard; place sealant bead between penetrations and edge of wallboard. 3. Where sealant is exposed to view, protect adjacent surfaces from damage and from sealant material and tool sealant flush with and in same plane as wallboard surface. Sealant beads shall be 1/4" to 3/8" diameter. Section 09250 Page 8 of 16 D. Wall Board Application 1. See drawings for all board types. Use fire-rated wallboard for fire rated assemblies. Use water-resistant wallboard where indicated on drawings or in these specifications and where wallboard would be subject to moisture. Install water-resistant wallboard in full, large sheets (no scraps) to limit number of butt joints. 2. Apply wallboard with long dimension parallel to stud framing members, and with abutting edges occurring over stud flanges. 3. Install wallboard for partitions from floor to underside of structure above and secure rigidly in place by screw attachment, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Neatly cut wallboard to fit around outlets, switch boxes, framed openings, piping, ducts, and other items which penetrate wallboard; fill gaps with acoustic sealant. 5. Where wallboard is to be applied to curved surfaces, dampen wallboard on back side as required to obtain required curve. Finish surface shall present smooth, even curve without fluting or other imperfections. 6. Screw fasten wallboard with power-driven electric screw driver, screw heads to slightly depress surface of wallboard without cutting paper, screws not closer than 3/8" from ends and edges of wallboard. 7. Where studs are doubled-up, screw fasten wallboard to both studs in a staggered pattern. E. Metal Trim: Install and mechanically secure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; and finish with three (3) coats of joint compound, feathered and finish sanded smooth with adjacent wallboard surface, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Corner Beads: Install specified corner beads in single lengths at all external corners, unless corner lengths exceed standard stock lengths. 2. Edge Beads: Install specified edge beads in single lengths at all terminating edges of wallboard exposed to view, where edges abut dissimilar materials, where edges would be exposed to view, and elsewhere where shown on drawings. Where indicated on drawings, seal joint between metal edge bead and adjoining surface with specified gasket, 1/8" wide minimum and set back 1/8" from face of wallboard, unless other size and profile indicated on drawings. Section 09250 Page 9 of 16 3. Casing beads shall be set in long lengths, neatly butted at joints. Provide casing beads at juncture of board and vertical surfaces and at exposed perimeters. F. Control Joint Locations: Gypsum board surfaces shall be isolated with control joints where: 1. Ceiling abuts a structural element, ICF, dissimilar wall or other vertical penetration. 2. Construction changes within the plane of the partition or ceiling. 3. Shown on approved shop drawings. 4. Ceiling dimensions exceed thirty (30) feet in either direction. 5. Wings of "L," "U," and "T" shaped ceiling areas are joined. 6. Expansion or control joints occur in the structural elements of the building. 7. Partition or furring abuts a structural element or dissimilar wall or ceiling. 8. Partition or furring runs exceed 30' without interruption. 9. Where control joints are required, ceiling height door frames may be used as control joints. Less than ceiling height frames shall have control joints extending to the ceiling from both corners. G. Joint Treatment and Spackling 1. Joints between face wallboards in the same plane, joints at internal corners of intersecting partitions and joints at internal corners of intersections between ceilings and walls or partitions shall be filled with joint compound. 2. Screw heads and other depressions shall be filled with joint compound. Joint compound shall be applied in three (3) coats, feathered and finish surface sanded smooth with adjacent wallboard surface, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Treatment of joints and screw heads with joint compound is also required where wallboard will be covered by finish materials which require a smooth surface, such as vinyl wall coverings. 3.3 FURRED WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. Use specified metal furring channels. Run metal furring channel framing members vertically, space twenty four (24) inches o.c. maximum. Fasten furring channels to concrete or masonry surfaces with power-driven fasteners or concrete stub nails spaced twenty four (24) inches o.c. maximum through alternate wing flanges (staggered) of furring channel. Furring channels shall be Section 09250 Page 10 of 16 shimmed as necessary to provide a plumb and level backing for wallboard. At inside of exterior walls, an asphalt felt protection strip shall be installed between each furring channel and the wall. Furring channel and splices shall be provided by nesting channels at least eight (8) inches and securely anchoring to concrete or masonry with two (2) fasteners in each wing. B. Wallboard Installation: Same as specified under Article 3.4 - "Metal Stud Partitions". 3.4 METAL STUD PARTITIONS A. Runner Installation: Use channel type. Align accurately at floor according to partition layout. Anchor runners securely sixteen (16) inches o.c. maximum with power driven anchors to floor slab, with power-driven anchors to structural slab above. See "Stud Installation" below for runners over heads of metal door frames. Where required, carefully remove sprayed-on fireproofing to allow partition to be properly installed. B. Stud Installation 1. Use channel type, positioned vertically in runners, spaced as noted on drawings, but not more than twenty four (24) inches o.c. At toilet areas and all gypsum drywall partitions indicated to receive ceramic tile, space studs sixteen (16) inches o.c. 2. Anchor studs to floor runners with screw fasteners. Provide snap-in or slotted hole slip joint bolt connections of studs to ceiling runners leaving space for movement. Anchor studs at partition intersections, partition corners and where partition abuts other construction to floor and ceiling runners with sheet metal screws through each stud flange and runner flange. a. At fire rated partitions use Fire Trak ceiling runners with firestopping meeting the requirements of Section 07950 and additional drywall cover plates to meet appropriate U.L. design. 3. Connection at ceiling runner for non-rated partitions shall be snap-in or slotted hole slip joint bolt connection that shall allow for movement. Seal studs abutting other construction with 1/8" thick neoprene gasket continuously between stud and abutting construction. 4. Install metal stud horizontal bracing wherever vertical studs are cut or wallboard is cut for passage of pipes, ducts or other penetrations, and anchor horizontal bracing to vertical studs with sheet metal screws. 5. At jambs of door frames and borrow light frames, install doubled-up studs (not back to back) from floor to underside of structural deck, and securely Section 09250 Page 11 of 16 anchor studs to jamb anchors of frames and to runners with screws. Provide cross braces from hollow metal frames to underside of slab. 6. Over heads of door frames install cut-to-length section of runner with flanges slit and web bent to allow flanges to overlap adjacent vertical studs, and securely anchor runner to adjacent vertical studs with sheet metal screws. Install cut-to-length vertical studs from runner (over heads of door frame) to ceiling runner sixteen (16) inches maximum o.c. and at vertical joints of wallboard, and securely anchor studs to runners with sheet metal screws. 7. At control joints, in field of partition, install double-up studs (back to back) from floor to ceiling runner, with 1/4" thick continuous compressible gasket between studs. When necessary, splice studs with eight (8) inches minimum nested laps and attach flanges together with two (2) sheet metal screws in each flange. All screws shall be self-tapping sheet metal screws. C. Runners and Studs at Chase Wall: As specified above for "Runners" and "Studs" and as specified herein. Chase walls shall have either a single or double row of floor and ceiling runners with metal studs sixteen (16) inches o.c. maximum and positioned vertically in the runners so that the studs are opposite each other in pairs with the flanges pointing in the same direction. Anchor all studs to runner flanges with sheet metal screws through each stud flange and runner flange following requirements of paragraph 3.4, B. Provide cross bracing between the rows of studs by attaching runner channels or studs set full width of chase attached to vertical studs with one self-tapping screw at each end. Space cross bracing not over thirty-six (36”) inches o.c. vertically. D. Wallboard Installation - Single Layer Application (Screw Attached) 1. Install wallboard with long dimension parallel to framing member and with abutting edge joints over web of framing member. Install wallboard with long dimension perpendicular to framing members above and below openings in drywall extending to second stud at each side of opening. Joints on opposite sides of wall shall be arranged so as to occur on different studs. 2. Boards shall be fastened securely to metal studs with screws as specified. Where a free end occurs between studs, back blocking shall be required. Center abutting ends over studs. Correct work as necessary so that faces of boards are flush, smooth, true. 3. Wallboard screws shall be applied with an electric screw gun. Screws shall be driven not less than 3/8" from ends or edges of board to provide uniform dimple not over 1/32" deep. Screws shall be spaced twelve (12”) inches o.c. in the field of the board and 8" o.c. staggered along the abutting edges. Section 09250 Page 12 of 16 4. All ends and edges of wallboard shall occur over screwing members (studs or furring channels). Boards shall be brought into contact but shall not be forced into place. Where ends or edges abut, they shall be staggered. Joints on opposite sides of a partition shall be so arranged as to occur on different studs. 5. At locations where piping receptacles, conduit, switches, etc., penetrate drywall partitions, provide non-drying sealant and an approved sealant stop at cut board locations inside partition. E. Wallboard Installation – Double-Layer Application 1. General: See drawings for wallboard partition types required. 2. First Layer (Screw Attached): Install as described above for single layer application. 3. Second Layer (Screw Attached): Screw attach second layer, unless laminating method of attachment indicated on drawings or necessary to obtain required sound rating or fire rating. Install wallboard vertically with vertical joints offset thirty four (34) inches from first layer joints and staggered on opposite sides of wall. Attach wallboard with 1-5/8" screws sixteen (16) inches o.c. along vertical joints and sixteen (16”) inches o.c. in the field of the wallboard. Screw through first layer into metal framing members. 4. Second Layer (Laminated): Install wallboard vertically. Stagger joints of second layer from first layer joints. Laminate second layer with specified laminating adhesive in beads or strips running continuously from floor to ceiling in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. After laminating, screw wallboard to framing members with 1-5/8" screws, spaced twelve (12”) inches o.c. around perimeter of wallboard. F. Wallboard Installation - Laminated Application: Where laminated wallboard is indicated, use specified laminating adhesive, install wallboard vertically and maintain tolerances as specified for screw attached wallboard. G. Insulation Installation: Install where indicated on drawings. Place blanket tightly between studs. H. Deflection of Structure Above: To allow for possible deflection of structure above partitions, provide top runners for non-rated partitions with 1-1/4" minimum flanges and do not screw studs or drywall to top runner. Where positive anchorage of studs to top runner is required, anchorage device shall be by means of slotted hole in stud and bolted fastener, or other anchorage device approved by Architect. Section 09250 Page 13 of 16 I. Control Joints 1. Leave a 1/2" continuous opening between gypsum boards for insertion of surface mounted joint. 2. Back by double framing members. 3. Attach control joint to face layer with 9/16" galvanized staples six (6”) inches o.c. at both flanges along entire length of joint. 4. Provide two (2”) inch wide gypsum panel strip or other adequate seal behind control joint in fire rated partitions and partitions with safing insulation. 3.5 DRYWALL FASCIAS AND CEILINGS A. Furnish and install inserts, hanger clips and similar devices in coordination with other work. B. Secure hangers to inserts and clips. Clamp or bolt hangers to main runners. C. Space main runners 4'-0" o.c. and space hangers 4'-0" o.c. along runners, except as otherwise shown. D. Level main runners to a tolerance of 1/4" in 12'-0", measured both lengthwise on each runner and transversely between parallel runners. E. Metal Furring Channels: Space sixteen (16”) inches o.c. maximum. Attach to 1-1/2" main runner channels with furring channel clips (on alternate sides of main runner channels) or with two (2) strands of sixteen (16) ga. galvanized soft steel tie wire (saddle tied to main runner channel). Furring channels shall not be let into or come in contact with abutting masonry walls. End splices shall be provided by nesting furring channels no less than eight (8”) inches and securely wire tying. At any openings that interrupt the furring channels, install additional cross reinforcing to restore lateral stability. F. Mechanical accessories, hangers, splices, runner channels and other members used in suspension system shall be of metal, zinc coated, or coated with rust inhibitive paint, of suitable design of adequate strength to support units securely without sagging, and such as to bring unit faces to finished indicated lines and levels. 1. Provide special furring where ducts are over two (2) feet wide. G. Apply board with its long dimension at right angles to channels. Locate board butt joints over center of furring channels. Attach board with one (1”) inch self- drilling drywall screws twelve (12”) inches o.c. in field of board; eight (8”) inches o.c. at butt joints located not less than 3/8" from edges. Section 09250 Page 14 of 16 3.6 ERECTION AT COLUMN ENCLOSURES A. Metal furring supports shall be provided under work of this Section, and shall be cut to lengths as necessary for tight fit such that spacing is not more than sixteen (16”) inches o.c. B. Board shall be fastened securely to supports with screws as specified. Place boards in position with minimum amount of joints. Where free ends occur between supports, back-blocking or furring shall be required. Center abutting ends over supports. Correct work as necessary so that faces of boards are flush, smooth and true. Provide clips or cross furring for attachment as required. C. All layers shall be screw attached to furring. D. When column finish called for on drawings to be in the same plane as drywall finish layer, maintain even, level plane. 3.7 FIRE / SMOKE WALL ACCOMMODATIONS WITHIN GYPSUM BOARD CONSTRUCTION A. Intersection of Gypsum Board Assembly with Structural Beam 1. When a drywall partition that is to be constructed full height for fire/smoke wall reasons, intersects with a corrugated metal deck and a steel beam, special intersection details shall be used. 2. Wall Parallel or At a Shallow Angle to the Ribs: Construct the wall so that it seals tight to the deck as described below for “Intersection of Gypsum Board Assembly with Metal Decking”. As the wall intersects the beam, secure the top channel to the underside of the beam and fully around the beam forming out a box. Pack the void between the wall and the beam with fire sealant/blankets so that it is tight and compact with no air or light gaps. Extend the gypsum board into the web of the beam so that it is within 1/4” of the beam vertical member. Apply a continuous bead of fire/smoke Sealant between the gypsum board and the beam/fireproofing. 3. Wall Perpendicular or At a Sharp Angle to the Ribs: Seal the voids of the deck as described below for “Intersection of Gypsum Board Assembly with Metal Decking”. Secure the top channel to the underside of the beam. Attach the drywall to the stud stopping within 1/4” of the bottom of the beam. Run the drywall up past the beam if it is possible to within 1/4” of the deck above. Pack the space between the beam and the edge of the wall with fire/smoke sealant or blankets. Material shall be snug fit so that no device to hold the material in place is required. Apply a continuous bead of fire/smoke Sealant between the bottom flange of beam and blanket and the wall. Section 09250 Page 15 of 16 4. These intersections shall be installed in a manner that results in complete tightness through the structure. B. Intersection of Gypsum Board Assembly with Metal Decking 1. Wall Perpendicular or At a Sharp Angle to the Ribs: Secure top channel of wall to deck. Pack the void between the ribs with fire/smoke sealant Material for Acoustical Ceilings, Floating Floors and Penetrations so that it is tight and compact with no air or light gaps. Cover the rib openings on both sides of the wall with deck manufacturer supplied Metal Deck Closures to ensure a tight fit and seal. Bring drywall up to within 1/3” to 1/2” of the deck and fill gap with a continuous bead of fire/smoke Sealant. 2. These intersections shall be installed in a manner that results in complete tightness through the structure to prevent the passage of fire and smoke. 3.8 FINISHING A. Taping: A thin, uniform layer of taping compound shall be applied to all joints and angles to be reinforced. Reinforcing tape shall be applied immediately, centered over the joint, seated into the compound. A skim coat shall follow immediately, but shall not function as a fill or second coat. Tape shall be properly folded and embedded in all angles to provide a true angle. B. Filling: After taping compound has hardened, topping compound shall be applied, filling the board taper flush with the surface. The fill coat shall cover the tape and feather out slightly beyond the tape. On joints with no taper, the fill coat shall cover the tape and feather out at least four (4) inches on either side of the tape. No fill coat is necessary on interior angles. C. After topping compound is set, a finishing coat of topping compound shall be spread evenly over and extending slightly beyond the fill coat on all joints and feathered to a smooth, uniform finish. Over tapered edges, the finished joint shall not protrude beyond the plane of the surface. All taped angles shall receive a finish coat to cover the tape and taping compound, and provide a true angle. Where necessary, sanding shall be done between coats and following the final application of compound to provide a smooth surface, ready for texturing and painting. D. Fastener Depressions: Taping compound shall be applied to all fastener depressions followed, when hardened by at least two (2) coats of topping compound, leaving all depressions level with the plane of the surface. E. Finishing Beads and Trim: Taping compound shall be applied to all bead and trim and shall be feathered out from the ground to the plane of the surface. When hardened, this shall be followed by two (2) coats of topping compound Section 09250 Page 16 of 16 each extending slightly beyond the previous coat. The finish coat shall be feathered from the ground to the plane of the surface and sanded as necessary to provide a flat, smooth surface ready for decoration. F. Level of finish shall conform to Level 4 of ASTM C840 and GA-214 of the Gypsum Association. G. Wall & Ceiling Texturing: Provide a minimum of three types/styles of texture to be used on walls and ceilings. Texture(s) shall be approved by architect and sample shall remain on site for reference while contractor is installing texture. H. Drywall construction with defects of such character which will mar appearance of finished work, or which is otherwise defective, will be rejected and shall be removed and replaced at no expense to the Owner. Contractor shall rely on texturing of walls to be painted to hide imperfections in wall. 3.9 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT A. At the completion of installation of the work, all rubbish shall be removed from the building leaving floors broom clean. Excess material, scaffolding, tools and other equipment shall be removed from the building. B. Work shall be left in clean condition ready for painting or wall covering. All work shall be as approved by Architect. C. Cutting and Repairing: Include all cutting, fitting and repairing of the work included herein in connection with all mechanical trades and all other trades which come in conjunction with any part of the work, and leave all work complete and perfect after all trades have completed their work. 3.10 PROTECTION OF WORK A. Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures for protecting drywall work from damage and deterioration during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION Section 09650 Page 1 of 4 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes: A. Vinyl composition tile flooring, complete with accessories. B. Resilient top set wall base specified in Section 09655. 1.02 Reference Standards: A. ADA – Americans with Disabilities Act. B. ASTM E648 - Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using Radiant Heat Energy Source. C. ASTM E662 - Smoke Obscuration NBS Smoke. D. ASTM F1066 - Vinyl Composition Floor Tile. E. FS SS-T-312B - Tile, Floor: Asphalt, Rubber, Vinyl, Vinyl Composition. 1.03 Quality Assurance: A. Manufacturer: Provide vinyl composition tile flooring and accessories as produced by a single manufacturer, including primers, adhesives, sealants and leveling compounds. B. Installer: Installer shall be certified by vinyl tile flooring manufacturer. 1.04 Submittals: A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01340. B. Manufacturer's Product Data: Indicating all technical information, which specifies full compliance with requirements of this section, including installation instructions. C. Maintenance Data: Submit cleaning and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01720. D. Samples: 2" x 2" in size, illustrating the available colors and patterns for floor tiles, 4" long edge strips illustrating the available colors. Section 09650 Page 2 of 4 1. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Vinyl Composition Tile A. Type: Armstrong's "Excelon Series" vinyl composition tile composed of vinyl resins, plasticizers, stabilizers, filler and pigments, commercial quality, asbestos free, conforming to requirements of FS-SS-T-312B, Type IV, composition. 1. Tile flooring shall have design/pattern and color that extend uniformly throughout the wear thickness. 2. Smoke Development: 450 or less, ASTM E662. 3. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts/cm2 or more Class 1 ASTM E648. 4. Size: 12" x 12" x 1/8" thick. 5. Design/Pattern/Color: Maximum of 6 colors as selected by Architect. B. Type: Azrock Luxury Vinyl Tile, Stripwood, 3" wide, 36" long, enhanced woodgrain embossing. 1. Design/Pattern Color: Maximum of one color to be selected by Owner. 2.02 Accessories A. Subfloor Filler: type recommended by flooring material manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. No asbestos. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Preparation A. Before installing floor tiles: 1. Concrete surfaces shall be smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8" in 10 ft., and ready to receive tiles. 2. Concrete floors shall be dry to a maximum moisture content of 7%, and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization or dusting. B. Remove ridges and bumps from concrete surfaces. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes and other defects with subfloor filler. C. Remove coatings from surfaces that would prevent bond, including curing compounds incompatible with adhesives, paint, oils, waxes and sealers. Section 09650 Page 3 of 4 D. Vacuum or broom clean the substrate immediately before the application of flooring. E. Prepare and prime surfaces in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's published instructions. F. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate and site conditions. 3.02 Installation A. Install floor tile in accordance with latest edition of manufacturer's published instructions. B. Mix the tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent. C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of resilient tile before initial set. D. Set floor tiles in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. E. Tile Pattern: 1. Lay tiles with all joints aligned to square grid pattern and pattern grain parallel with all units and parallel to length of room. 2. Lay tiles to the pattern scheduled. 3. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter. F. Terminate floor tiles at centerline of doors where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. G. Edge Strips: Install at unprotected or exposed edges, and where flooring terminates. H. Scribe floor tiles to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. I. Floor tiles shall be installed over covers for telephone conduits, electrical conduits and other similar items which occurs within the finished floor areas. 1. Tiles must be cut sharp and clean around these covers so that the covers can be removed when required. 2. The tile must be applied to covers in a solid application of adhesive. 3.03 Protection and Cleaning A. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation. B. Remove excess adhesive from floor tiles and wall surfaces without damage. Section 09650 Page 4 of 4 C. Clean, apply polish, and buff with type of polish, number of coats and buffing procedures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Perform initial maintenance according to latest edition of manufacturer's maintenance manual. E. Contractor to leave at job five (5) full unopened boxes of field tile color and three (3) full unopened boxes of each accent tile color. END OF SECTION Section 09655 Page 1 of 4 SECTION 09655 RESILIENT RUBBER WALL BASE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 THIS SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall base and accessories as shown on the drawings and schedules and as indicated by the requirements of this section. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract (including General and Supplementary conditions and Division 1 sections) apply to the work of this section. B. ASTM D2240 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property – Durometer Hardness C. ASTM E648 Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source D. ASTM-1861 Type TP, Group 2 “Standard Specification Resilient Rubber Wall Base”. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Other Division 9 sections for floor finishes related to this section but not the work of this section. B. Division 3 Concrete; not the work of this section. C. Division 6 Wood and Plastics; not the work of this section. D. Division 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection; not the work of this section. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Select an installer who is competent in the installation of Mannington Wall Base. B. If required, provide types of wall base and accessories supplied by one manufacturer, including leveling and patching compounds, and adhesives. C. If required, provide wall base material to meet the following fire test performance criteria as tested by a recognized independent testing laboratory: a. ASTM E 648 Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45 watts per sq. cm. or greater, Class I. b. ASTM E 662 (Smoke Generation) Maximum Specific Optical Density of 450 or less. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings, seaming plan, coving details, and manufacturer's technical data, installation and maintenance instructions ("Mannington Wall Base Installation Instructions"). B. Submit the manufacturer's standard samples showing the required colors for wall base, corners, and applicable accessories. Section 09655 Page 2 of 4 C. If required, submit the manufacturer's certification that the wall base has been tested by an independent laboratory and complies with the required fire tests. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Deliver materials in good condition to the jobsite in the manufacturer's original unopened containers that bear the name and brand of the manufacturer, project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. B. Store materials in a clean, dry, enclosed space off the ground, and protected from the weather and from extremes of heat and cold. Protect adhesives from freezing. Store wall base, adhesives and accessories in the spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation. C. Maintain a minimum temperature in the spaces to receive the wall base and accessories of 65ºF (18ºC) and a maximum temperature of 85ºF (29ºC) for at least 48 hours before, during, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Thereafter, maintain a minimum temperature of 55ºF (13ºC) in areas where work is completed. Protect all materials from the direct flow of heat from hot-air registers, radiators, or other heating fixtures and appliances. D. Install wall base and accessories after the other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Close spaces to traffic during the installation of the wall base. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RESILIENT RUBBER WALL BASE A. Provide Mannington Optimum Edge™ Rubber Wall Base, co-extruded thermoplastic rubber – Type TS, with a minimum of 10% pre-consumer recycled content, manufactured by Mannington Mills, Inc., shall meet ASTM F-1861, Type TS, Group 2, “Standard Specification Resilient Rubber Wall Base.” B. Physical Characteristics: 1. 1/8” (3.175 mm) thick by 6” (152.4 mm) high flat surface wall base profile with coved toe base. C. Substitutions: Products of other manufacturers are acceptable ONLY after compliance with substitution requirements specified in Section 01605 and Architect's written approval. 2.02 WALL BASE MATERIALS A. Mannington Optimum Edge molded inside and outside corners are required for all profiles listed above. 2.03 ADHESIVES A. Provide Mannington MR-101 Acrylic Wall Base Adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer. Adhesive does meet VOC content limit of SCAQMD Rule 1168. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. For patching, smoothing, and leveling monolithic subfloors (concrete, terrazzo, Section 09655 Page 3 of 4 quarry tile, ceramic tile, and certain metals), provide Mannington MVP-2023 and MVP- 2023 additive. For sealing joints between the top of wall base or integral cove cap and irregular wall surfaces such as masonry, provide plastic filler applied according to the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Provide transition/reducing strips tapered to meet abutting materials. C. Provide threshold of thickness and width as shown on the drawings. D. Provide resilient edge strips of width shown on the drawings, of equal gauge to the flooring, Heterogeneous vinyl or rubber composition, tapered or bullnose edge, with color to match or contrast with the flooring, or as selected by the Architect from standard colors available. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine walls prior to installation to determine that surfaces are smooth and free from cracks, holes, ridges, and other defects that might prevent adhesive bond or impair durability or appearance of the flooring material. B. Inspect walls prior to installation to determine that surfaces are free from curing, sealing, parting and hardening compounds; residual adhesives; adhesive removers; and other foreign materials that might prevent adhesive bond. Visually inspect for evidence of moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, dusting, mold, or mildew. C. Report conditions contrary to contract requirements that would prevent a proper installation. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. Failure to call attention to defects or imperfections will be construed as acceptance and approval of the wall. Installation indicates acceptance of substrates with regard to conditions existing at the time of installation. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Smooth concrete surfaces, removing rough areas, projections, ridges, and bumps, and filling low spots, control or construction joints, and other defects with Mannington, Patch and Leveling Compound] as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Remove paint, varnish, oils, release agents, sealers, and waxes. Remove residual adhesives as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Remove curing and hardening compounds not compatible with the adhesives used, as indicated by a bond test or by the compound manufacturer's recommendations. Avoid organic solvents. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF WALL BASE A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. D. Do not scratch wall base during installation. Section 09655 Page 4 of 4 E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with manufacturer’s recommended adhesive filler material. F. Mol ded Corners: Install molded corners to match profile selection(s) as indicated in Paragraph 2.01 B before installing straight pieces. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform initial maintenance according to the "Mannington Wall Base Installation Instructions.” END OF SECTION Section 09900 Page 1 of 4 SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 - SCOPE 1.1 Furnish and perform all painting as shown and specified. Provide all labor, equipment, materials, operations, and incidentals necessary and required to complete the work. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 All paint products shall be Sherwin-Williams, Briner, Pittsburgh or Devoe Paints. Paint colors to be selected by Architect. PART 3 - DETAIL REQUIREMENTS 3.1 Exterior: System 1 Galvanized steel (acrylic gloss latex) Clean and treat per manufacturer's specifications. Prime one (1) coat zinc primer TTP-641. Finish two (2) coats gloss acrylic latex MIL-P-28578a. NOTE: No Portland cement primers. System 2 Ferrous Metal. Prime one (1) coat zinc primer TTP-645. Finish two (2) coats: various finishes. Metal-latex, gloss alkyd, urethane alkyd, or silicone alkyd. System 3 Concrete, masonry or brick (pigmented water- proofing) Prime coat per manufacturer's specifications. Finish two (2) elastomeric waterproofing (medium texture). 3.2 Interior: System 1 (CMU) Concrete masonry units. Prime and fill acrylic blockfiller as needed to fill block. Finish with two (2) coats of: alkyd semi-gloss TTE-509 Section 09900 Page 2 of 4 3.3 All materials shall be applied and cut in neatly so as to dry uniformly to the color and sheen specified, free from runs, sags, wrinkles, shiners, streaks and brush marks. 3.4 During the actual application and drying of the paint, and until normal occupancy of the space occurs, a minimum temperature of 60 degrees F. shall be maintained. This temperature shall be held as constant as possible to prevent condensation. Adequate ventilation shall be provided at all times so that the humidity cannot rise above the dew point at the coldest wall. The General Contractor is solely responsible for maintaining required temperatures, ventilation and room conditions. 3.5 Enamel undercoats shall be sanded smooth prior to re-coating. 3.6 End grain at door edges shall be finished in the same manner as the remainder of the wood surfaces. All plywood shall be edge-sealed. 3.7 No exterior painting shall be undertaken at temperatures under 45 degrees F., or immediately following rain, frost, or dew. Safe levels for painting will be determined by use of an electronic moisture meter. 3.8 All surfaces shall be free from rust, scale, oil, grease, chalk, excessive paint build-up, dirt, mildew, or other foreign substances. 3.9 Metal surfaces shall be clean and free from rust, scale dirt, etc. with all burrs and rough spots ground smooth. Pre-clean galvanized surfaces with vinegar or equal. 3.10 Putty nail holes, mars, cuts, etc. 3.11 Provide uniform sheen, color and texture. 3.12 Coats specified are in addition to shop or prime coats specified elsewhere. 3.13 Follow manufacturer's instructions concerning application of all finishes. 3.14 Materials shall be delivered and stored in unbroken packages bearing manufacturer's labels. 3.15 Remove all paint drippings and rubbish upon completion of construction. 3.16 Repair all damaged paint and finish work upon completion of construction. 3.17 All coats of paint shall be thoroughly dry before applying succeeding coats. All primer and intermediate coats of paint shall be sanded lightly and dusted before succeeding coats of paint are applied. Section 09900 Page 3 of 4 3.18 Any work which does not meet the approval of the Architect shall be immediately corrected. If the work is not corrected, the Architect reserves the right to deduct from the amount due the Contractor under his written Contract. 3.19 Guarantee all painting work and materials against all defects such as bli stering, scaling, peeling, chipping and spotting for a period of one year from date of acceptance. 3.20 All questions concerning finishing shall be addressed to Architect prior to beginning work on item in question. 3.21 Sample areas for typical finishes shall be prepared and approved by Architect prior to beginning finish work. Areas shall be of sufficient size to judge color and texture characteristics and shall be representative of all work to follow. 3.22 Architect shall select a maximum of 8 paint colors. 3.23 All surfaces to receive topcoats are to be deglossed by sanding, chemical deglossing agent or other abrasive methods. Patches shall be done in a manner as to be considered imperceptible to surrounding substrate. All areas where peeling, blistering or coating failure occurs are to be scraped, sanded and edges feathered. All bare substrates will be primed before topcoating. Areas requiring sandblasting will have separate specifications. PART 4 - FINISH SCHEDULE The following is intended as a guide and is not intended to be all-inclusive; any excluded items required by first-quality construction standards to be finished shall be so finished. 4.1 Exterior 4.1.1 Paint -- Metal doors and frames, flashing, gutters and downspouts, exposed metal structures. 4.1.2 Do not finish -- Brick veneer, aluminum storefront, and window wall frames. 4.2 Interior 4.2.1 Paint -- Walls, shelves, trim, door frames and hollow metal doors, R.A.G., exposed ductwork and all other unfinished items. 4.2.2 Do not finish -- Fixtures, suspended acoustical ceiling, prefinished door frames and doors, laminated plastic and prefinished cabinets. Section 09900 Page 4 of 4 4.2.3 All gypsum board walls & ceiling receiving paint shall be textured unless noted otherwise. Provide three (3) texture samples to Architect for approval. Sample size to be minimum 3' x 3'. END OF SECTION Section 10150 Page 1 of 5 SECTION 10150 TOILET PARTITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Stainless steel urinal screens and doors. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 10800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories: Accessories mounted on toilet partitions. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ADA - Americans with Disabilities (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design. B. ANSI A117.1 - American National Standard for Buildings and Facilities - Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People. C. ANSI A208.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard. D. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. E. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. F. ASTM A526 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Commercial Quality. G. NEMA LD-3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. H. UFAS - Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340. B. ( Product Data ): Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Literature indicating typical panel, pilaster, door, hardware and fastening. 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Installation methods. 5. Maintenance instructions. Section 10150 Page 2 of 5 C. Shop Drawings: 1. Dimensioned plans indicating layout of toilet partitions. 2. Dimensioned elevations indicating heights of doors, pilasters, separation partitions, and other components; indicate locations and sizes of openings in compartment separation partitions for toilet and bath accessories to be installed in partitions; indicate floor and ceiling clearances. 3. Details indicating anchoring components (bolt layouts) and methods for project conditions; indicate components required for installation, but not supplied by compartment and cubicle manufacturer. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, one complete set of color selection guides representing manufacturer's full range of available colors, textures and patterns. E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, texture and pattern. F. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. G. Touch-Up Paint: Provide 5 ounces of matching paint for field touch-up of baked enamel finish. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Lay cartons flat, with adequate support to ensure flatness and to prevent damage to pre-finished surfaces. C. Do not store where ambient temperature exceeds 120 degrees F (49 degrees C). 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. B. Do not deliver materials or begin installation until building is enclosed, with complete protection from outside weather, and building temperature maintained at a minimum of 60 degrees F (15.6 degrees C). Section 10150 Page 3 of 5 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products and installation shall comply with the following: 1. ADA Standards. 2. ANSI A117.1. 3. UFAS. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty for Partitions: Provide warranty for repair or replacement for defects in materials, hardware or workmanship for the period specified below from the date of Substantial Completion, when properly stored, handled and maintained under normal usage. 1. Powder Coated Steel Partitions: 1 year. 2. Plastic Laminate Partitions: 1 year. 3. Stainless Steel Partitions: 10 years. 4. Solid Phenolic Core Partitions: 15 years. 5. High Density Polymer Partitions: 15 years. 6. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Partitions: 15 years. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work with placement of support framing and anchors in walls and ceilings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: General Partitions Mfg. Corp., which is located at: 1702 Peninsula Dr. P. O. Box 8370 ; Erie, PA 16505; Tel: 814-833-1154; Fax: 814-838-3473; Email: request info; Web: www.generalpartitions.com B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01605. 2.2 STAINLESS STEEL UNITS A. Urinal Screens: 1. Floor Braced: Screens attached to wall and braced by pilasters anchored to floor; General Partitions Manuf. Co. FSH-3 with flange. a. Panel Height: As indicated on Drawings. B. Factory Finishing: 1. Satin: All exposed stainless steel components shall have “satin finish.” 2.3 FITTINGS AND ANCHORS A. Fittings: 1. Urinal and Privacy Screen Pilaster: Extruded aluminum member slotted Section 10150 Page 4 of 5 to receive screen panel, 3 inches wide by 82 inches (76 mm wide by 2083 mm) high. Designed to receive headrail overhead brace and attach to floor. Floor connection shall be covered by stainless steel pilaster shoe (Model FSH-3 with flange). 2. Attachment Hardware: Chrome plated, one-way vandal proof sex bolts and No. 14 plated steel metal screws of length recommended by manufacturer. 3. Connection Brackets: Non-ferrous cast alloy, chrome plated. 4. Pilaster Trim: Minimum 3 inches high 0.031 inch thick (76 mm by 0.76 mm thick) stainless steel shoe. 5. Heat Sincs: Provide 1/8 inch (3 mm) aluminum strips with screws to bottom edges of panels and doors to protect panel from being ignited by vandals. B. Anchors: 1. Bottom Anchor: Equip bottom end of pilasters with steel bar saddle for attachment to floor with threaded steel studs and leveling nuts. 2. Equip top end of pilasters with steel bar saddle for attachment to ceiling support member with threaded steel studs and leveling nuts. 2.4 HARDWARE A. Hinges: 1. Stainless steel full length hinges. B. Door Bumper: a. Combination coat hook and rubber bumper; cast alloy, chrome plated. C. Concealed Latch Operating Handle: Cast alloy, chrome plated mechanism that does not require twisting or turning of wrist to operate. Provide cover for exterior side. D. Latch: Surface mounted, extruded aluminum slide latch that does not require twisting or turning of wrist to operate. E. Combination Latch Keeper and Door Stop with Rubber Bumper: Extruded aluminum. F. Door pull: Cast alloy, chrome plated, straight loop design. Section 10150 Page 5 of 5 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until installation conditions and substrates have been properly prepared. B. Pilasters intersecting adjacent walls shall terminate as follows: 1. Extend to finished floor. C. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets with sheet metal screws. D. Anchor pilaster to floor with heavy duty galvanized steel angle plate, sheet metal, screws, and anchors. Conceal floor fastenings with pilaster shoes. E. Anchor urinal screen panels to walls with continuous aluminum channel. F. Door installation: Hang doors from masonry. Equip each door with the following: 1. Provide two hinges for 24 inch wide doors and three hinges for doors greater than 24 inches wide. 2. Door latch. 3. Door strike and keeper. 4. Door bumper. 5. Install door pull on outswinging doors. 3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum variation from true position: 1/4 inch (6 mm). B. Maximum variation from plumb: 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Touch-up minor scratches and nicks in paint finish with same color and type of paint as original finish. Repair such that damage and refinishing cannot be detected. Wax and polish repaired area. B. Replace significantly damaged, bent, deeply scratched, or dented panels. C. Adjust hinges to locate inswinging doors in partial open position and outswinging doors in closed position when unlatched. D. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces and wash with mild soap. Do not use abrasives. 10 51 26 PLASTIC LOCKERS SECTION 10 51 26 PLASTIC LOCKERS AND BENCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Solid plastic lockers and locker room benches. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for locker anchorage. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 2. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. US Federal Government: 1. U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG). C. GREENGUARD Environmental Institute (GREENGUARD): 1. GREENGUARD certified low emitting products. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets for each type of product indicated include fabrication details, description of materials and finishes. 1. Product Test Reports: When requested by Architect, provide documentation indicating compliance of products with requirements, from a qualified independent testing agency. B. Shop Drawings: Include overall locker dimensions, floor plan, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Include choice of options with details. C. Samples for Selection: Furnish samples of manufacturer's full range of colors for initial selection. D. Samples for Approval: Furnish a physical sample of the material in the selected color. 1. Size: 6 by 6 inch (102 by 102 mm) in type of finish specified. E. LEED Submittals: 10 51 26 PLASTIC LOCKERS 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. Include breakout costs for each product with recycled content. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Installation instructions. B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.6 MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Approved manufacturer listed in this section, with minimum [5] years experience in the manufacture of plastic lockers. Manufacturers seeking approval must submit the following in accordance with Instructions to Bidders and Division 01 requirements: 1. Product data, including test data from qualified independent testing agency indicating compliance with requirements. 2. Samples of each component of product specified. 3. List of successful installations of similar products available for evaluation by Architect. 4. Submit substitution request not less than 15 days prior to bid date. B. Installers Qualifications: An experienced Installer regularly engaged in the installation of lockers for a minimum of 3 years. C. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic lockers and trim accessories from single manufacturer. D. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with requirements of TAS/ADA/ABA and with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. See plans for accessible locker locations. E. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 100 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. F. Indoor Environmental Quality Certification: Provide certificate indicated that products have been certified under the following programs, or a comparable certification acceptable to Owner: 1. GREENGUARD Indoor Air Quality Certified. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver plastic lockers to the site until the building is enclosed and HVAC systems are in operation. Deliver plastic lockers in manufacturer's original packaging. Store in an upright condition. Protect plastic lockers from exposure to direct sunlight. 10 51 26 PLASTIC LOCKERS B. Ship plastic lockers fully assembled. C. Lift and handle plastic lockers from the base not the sides. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer’s Warranty: 20 year against rust, delamination or breakage of plastic parts under normal use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of Bradley Corporation, Menomonee Falls, WI 53051, (800)272-3539, fax (262)251-5817; Email info@BradleyCorp.com; Website www.bradleycorp.com. 1. Provide basis of design products or comparable products of one of the following approved manufacturers: a. General Partitions Mfg. Corp.; Website www.generalpartitions.com b. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Instructions to Bidders and Division 01 General Requirements. B. MATERIALS 1. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE): 30 percent pre-consumer recycled content polyethylene thermoplastic formed under high pressure into solid plastic components. 2. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE): 100 percent pre-consumer or post-consumer recycled content polyethylene thermoplastic formed under high pressure into solid plastic components. 3. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 4. Fasteners: Tamper-Resistant Fasteners: Stainless steel torx-head screws. a. Locker Connectors: No. 10-24 sex bolts. b. Anchors: Type and size required for secure anchorage. c. Drilled-in-place Masonry Anchors: Minimum 1/4 by 1-3/4 inch (6 by 44 mm) screws. 2.2 STANDARD PLASTIC LOCKERS 2.3 LOCKERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley LENOXZLOCKER. B. Locker Configurations: Multiple height two tier units with full-height garment and half-height accessory storage compartments. C. “Z” Locker Dimensions 1. Height, Nominal: 72 inch (1829 mm). 2. Width: 15 inch (381 mm) 10 51 26 PLASTIC LOCKERS 3. Depth: 12 inch (305 mm) D. Material: HDPE plastic, 30 percent recycled material. E. Sides, Tops, Bottoms, Dividers, and Shelves: 3/8 inch (10 mm) thick HDPE plastic with smooth finish. F. Locker Shelves: 3/8 inch (10 mm) HDPE plastic, mortised into sides and back. G. Locker Tops: Slope top. H. Doors: Fabricate from a single piece 1/2 inch (13 mm) HDPE plastic. 1. Doors and Frame: 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick HDPE plastic with matte texture finish with ventilation slots 2. Handle: ADA/ABA-compliant handle fabricated from injection molded plastic. 3. Locks: Standard hasp. 4. Hinges: Continuous piano hinges, .05 inch/18 gauge (1.27mm) type 304 stainless steel fabricated to wrap around edges of door and frame and attached with stainless steel tamper-resistant screws. a. Finish: Powder coated to match color of locker. 5. Latch Bar: Full-height latch bar constructed of 1/2 inch (13 mm) HDPE plastic secured to locker with stainless steel tamper-resistant screws. I. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. J. Accessories: 1. Coat Hooks: Black polycarbonate double hook. 2. End Panels: 3/8 inch (10 mm) thick, with color and finish matching locker body. 3. Filler Panels: 1/2 inch (13 mm) HDPE filler panel, with color and finish matching locker body, attached with 3/8 inch (10 mm) thick HDPE solid plastic angle bracket. 4. Wall Hooks: Black powder coated, cast zinc hook three per locker. 5. Number Plate: White acrylic with black film coating, laser etched with number specified. Provide one per locker. 6. Locker Base: 1 inch (26 mm) solid HDPE plastic, with color and finish matching locker body, 4 inch (101 mm) 7. Coat Rod: Schedule 40 PVC with plastic pole sockets and stainless stee l tamper-resistant screws. 2.4 PEDESTAL BENCH A. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley LENOXPEDESTAL. B. Pedestal Bench Dimensions 1. Length: 72 inch (1828 mm). 2. Width: 12 inch (305 mm) 3. Height: 18-1/2 inch (470 mm). 10 51 26 PLASTIC LOCKERS C. Materials: 1. Bench Top: 1-1/2 inch (39 mm) thick HDPE plastic, 30 percent recycled material, with matte texture finish. 2. Pedestal: Black anodized aluminum with welded aluminum flanges top and bottom. D. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 LOCKER FABRICATION A. Fabricate locker box from a single sheet of HDPE solid plastic with corners fused together. Weld frames and shelves to box assembly. Provide all welded construction of locker parts without dovetail slots or metal fasteners. Add welded gussets in single tier full height lockers. B. Center Dividers: Full-depth, vertical partitions between bottom and shelf; finished to match lockers. C. Hardware Attachment: All hinges, handles, hasps, hooks, latch bars, and locks attached with tamper-resistant screws. D. Continuous Base: Set toe clearance 3 inch (76 mm) from locker front. Notch end caps for ease of installation. E. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated in lengths indicated, without visible fasteners at splice locations; and finished to match lockers. F. Filler Panels: Fabricated in unequal leg angle shape; finished to match lockers. G. Finished End Panels: Fabricated with 3/8 inch (10 mm) wide edge dimension, configured to conceal fasteners and holes at exposed ends of plastic lockers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install lockers in climate controlled environment, shielded from direct sunlight. B. General: Install on floor or other firm support. Install level, plumb, and true. 1. Position locker base per approved shop drawing. Using fasteners provided by manufacturer, anchor base sections to the floor. 2. Attach filler pieces to lockers with male-female sex bolts. 3. Position first locker according to submittal layout. Square and plumb the locker using concealed shims. Secure the locker to the wall at the top and bottom of the locker. Position second locker next to first, square and plumb to align the tops and bottoms; and temporarily clamp lockers together. Drill four holes through the sides of the lockers and connect lockers using sex bolts provided by manufacturer. C. Accessories: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures together to form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates furnished by locker manufacturer. Install as indicated on approved shop drawings. 10 51 26 PLASTIC LOCKERS 1. Coat Hooks: Attach with at least two fasteners. 2. Identification Plates: Identify plastic lockers with approved identification numbers. Attach plates to each locker door. 3. Filler Panels: Attach with concealed fasteners. 4. Sloping Tops: Attach sloping-tops to plastic lockers, with closures at exposed ends. 5. Finished End Panels: Attach at ends indicated. D. Fixed Locker Benches: Provide no fewer than two pedestals for each bench , spaced as indicated. Securely fasten tops of pedestals to undersides of bench tops, and anchor bases to floor. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. Clean locker interior and exterior surfaces. B. Remove packaging and construction debris and legally dispose of off-site. END OF SECTION Section 10520 Page 1 of 1 SECTION 10520 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 SCOPE 1.1 Furnish and install all fire extinguisher equipment as shown and specified. Provide all labor, equipment, materials, operations and incidentals necessary and required to complete the work. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 Fire Extinguisher – J.L. Industries, Cosmic 10E, Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical with a UL Rating 4A-60B:C. Three (3) extinguishers. 2.2 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets – J.L. Industries, Ambassador with narrow style glass design, bronze aluminum. Three (3) cabinets required. PART 3 DETAIL REQUIREMENTS 3.1 Locate fire extinguishers and cabinets where noted on plans or indicated by Architect. 3.2 Install wall brackets and fire extinguisher cabinets per manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Section 10800 Page 1 of 1 SECTION 10800 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 - SCOPE: 1.1 Furnish and install all building specialties shown and/or specified. Provide all labor, equipment, materials operations and incidentals necessary and required to complete the work. PART 2 - MATERIALS: 2.1 Public Toilet Accessories: (also review interior elevations for additional accessory requirements) 1. Grab Bars - Bobrick #B-5806.99 X 42 & #B-5806.99 X 36. Grab bars to have concealed mounting kits. Refer to plans for additional grab bar requirements. 2. Toilet Tissue Dispenser – Surface Mounted Dual Roll Tissue Dispenser, Bobrick #B-274. 3. Clothes Hook - Bobrick #B-212, mount at 48” A.F.F. 4. Robe Hook – Bobrick #B-76717, mount at 48” A.F.F. 5. Mirror with Stainless Steel Frame – Bobrick #B-165 2436, mount bottom of reflective surface at 40” A.F.F. 6. Mop & Broom Holders with Shelf and Hooks - Bobrick #239 x 34, mount center at 6’-0” A.F.F. maximum. 7. Paper Towel Dispenser - Bobrick #B-3699. 8. Sanitary Napkin Disposal - Bobrick #B-270. 9. Folding Shower Bench Seat – Bobrick #B-5181. 10. ADA Shower Dressing Table/Bench 48”x24” – Seachrome Corporation #SSB2-480240-PWS. END OF SECTION 11480-1 SECTION 11480 BACKBOARDS PART 1 SCOPE Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, operations, incidentals and accessories for a complete installation of tennis backboards. PART 2 EQUIPMENT 2.1 Bakko Economy Flat Series fiberglass backboards. Backboards to be 6 panel, 8’-0” x 24’-0”. PART 3 DETAIL REQUIREMENTS 3.1 Provide shop drawings indicating details and instructions for installation of backboards. 3.2 Install backboards per manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.3 Provide two (2”) inch wide horizontal stripe at 3’-0” above court surface on all backboards to represent top of net. (See elevations in plan drawings.) END OF SECTION 11 65 00-1 SECTION 11 65 00 SPORT NETS AND RECREATIONAL EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sport nets and recreational equipment including the following: 1. Windscreens. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00 – Document Management. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Tuffy by AER-FLO 4455 18th Street East, Bradenton FL 34203 Phone 800.823.7356 www.aerflo.com B. Substitutions: as approved equal by Architect 2.2 APPLICATIONS/SCOPE – WINDSCREENS (9 FT. HIGH) Construction: 1000d X 800d Vipol Matrix Mesh (18 X 14 ends/inch). Fabric Weight: 10.0 oz per square yard. Shading: 78% Shading. Tensile Strength: 360 X 320 lbs Sewn Hems: Three-Ply hem with ends and corners sewn finished with two rows of lock stitched thread. Thread: High heat bonded polyester with UV inhibitors built into yarn. Grommets: #2 Brass Grommets every 12" on all four sides. 11 65 00-2 Seams: 9' Screens are prayer seamed with RF weld and one row of Black UV treated lock stitched thread at center of screen( 4'-6") with grommets every 12". RF welding takes the place of any reinforcing tapes providing a stronger seam. Colors: Midnight Green, Black, Navy and Royal Blue. 16 other colors are available. Logos: Not Required for this project ( Single or Multi-Colored ) Warranty Pro-rated 60 months on material and workmanship. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations. Provide installation that is complete and to the standards required by League rules. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Section 14420 Page 1 of 6 SECTION 14420 VERTICAL WHEELCHAIR LIFTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Enclosed, self-contained vertical platform wheelchair lift. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete shaftway and anchor placement. B. Section 04800 - Masonry Assemblies: Masonry shaftway and anchor placement. C. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking in framed construction for lift attachment. D. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum board shaftway. E. Division 16 - Electrical: Lighting and wiring connections at top of shaft. F. Division 16 - Electrical: Electrical power service and wiring connections. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. B. ASME A17.5 - Elevator and Escalator Electrical Equipment. C. ASME A18.1 - Safety Standard for Platform Lifts and Stairway Chairlifts. D. ICC/ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. E. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions, including preparation, storage and handling requirements. Section 14420 Page 2 of 6 2. Include complete description of performance and operating characteristics. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Show typical details of assembly, erection and anchorage. 2. Include wiring diagrams for power, control, and signal systems. 3. Show complete layout and location of equipment, including required clearances and coordination with shaftway. D. Selection Samples: For each finished product specified, provide two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm with minimum ten (10) years of experience in manufacturing of vertical platform lifts, with evidence of experience with similar installations of type specified. B. Installer Qualifications: Licensed to install equipment of this scope, with evidence of experience with specified equipment. Installer shall maintain an adequate stock of replacement parts, have qualified people available to ensure fulfillment of maintenance and callback service without unreasonable loss of time in reaching project site. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide platform lifts in compliance with: 1. ASME A18.1 - Safety Standard for Platform Lifts and Stairway Chairlifts. 2. ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. 3. ASME A17.5 - Elevator and Escalator Electrical Equipment. 4. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store components off the ground in a dry covered area, protected from adverse weather conditions. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not use wheelchair lift for hoisting materials or personnel during construction period. 1.9 WARRANTY Section 14420 Page 3 of 6 A. Warranty: Manufacturer shall warrant the wheelchair lift materials and workmanship for two years following completion of installation. B. Extended Warranty: Provide an extended manufacturer’s warranty for the entire warranty period covering the wheelchair lift materials and workmanship for the following additional extended period beyond the initial two year warranty. Preventive Maintenance agreement required. 1. Five additional years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Garaventa Lift; United States - P.O. Box 1769, Blaine, WA 98231-1769. Canada - 7505 134A St., Surrey, BC V3W 7B3. ASD. Toll Free: 800-663-6556. Tel: (604) 594-0422. Fax: (604) 594-9915. Email: productinfo@garaventalift.com. B. Web www.garaventalift.com C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01605. 2.2 ENCLOSED VERTICAL WHEELCHAIR LIFT A. Capacity: 750 lbs (340 kg) rated capacity. B. Mast Height: 1. Model GVL-EN-120; 123 inches (3124 mm) maximum lifting height. C. Nominal Clear Platform Dimensions: 1. Standard: 37-1/4 inches (947 mm) by 54 inches (1370 mm). D. Platform Configuration: 1. Straight Through Entry/Exit: Front and rear openings. E. Landing Openings: 1. Lower Landing: Door. 2. Upper Landing: Gate. F. Doors and Gates: Doors and gates shall be self closing type. 1. Door Height: Flush mount, 80 inches (2032 mm). 2. Gate Height: Flush mount, 42-1/8 inches (1070 mm). 3. Door Construction: Aluminum frame with: a. Panels of 1/4 inch (6 mm) laminated safety glass with 16 gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized steel kick plate. Section 14420 Page 4 of 6 b. D-Handle Pull: 12 inch (305 mm) offset D-Handle. G. Lift Components: 1. Machine Tower: Custom aluminum extrusion. 2. Base Frame: Structural steel. 3. Platform Side Wall Panels: 42-1/8 (1070 mm) inches high. 16 gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized steel sheet. Custom aluminum extrusion tubing frame. 4. Enclosure Panels: a. 1/4 inch (6 mm) laminated safety glass. H. Enclosure Height Above Upper landing: 1. Enclosure shall extend 42-1/8 inches (1070 mm) above the upper landing level I. Infill Panel Kit: Provide 16 gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized panels and mounting hardware to cover void between side of enclosure, drive mast and adjacent wall at the following locations: 1. Upper landing. J. Base Mounting and Access to Lift at Lower Landing: 1. Floor Mount: Base of lift shall be mounted on the floor surface of the lower landing. For access onto the platform provide a ramp of 16 gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized steel sheet with a slip resistant surface. K. Options: 1. Outdoor Protection: Lift shall include modifications recommended by manufacturer for reliable performance in outdoor climate of project site. L. Hydraulic Drive: 1. Drive Type: Chain hydraulic. 2. Emergency Operation: Manual device to lower platform and use auxiliary battery power to raise or lower platform. 3. Safety Devices: a. Slack chain safety device. b. Shoring device. 4. Travel Speed: 17 fpm (5.2 m/minute). 5. Motor: 3.0 hp (2.2 kW); 24 volts DC. 6. Power Supply: a. 120 VAC single phase; 60 Hz on a dedicated 15 amp circuit. M. Platform Controls: 24 VDC control circuit with the following features. 1. Direction Control: Illuminated tactile and constant pressure push buttons with dual platform courtesy lights and safety light. 2. Illuminated and audible emergency stop switch shuts off power to lift and activates audio alarm equipped with battery backup. 3. Keyless operation. Section 14420 Page 5 of 6 N. Call Station Controls: 24 VDC control circuit with the following features. 1. Direction Control: Illuminated tactile and constant pressure push buttons with illuminated "In Use" indicator. 2. Keyed operation. 3. Call Station Mounting: a. Lower: 1) Frame mounted. b. Upper: 1) Frame mounted. O. Safety Devices and Features: 1. Grounded electrical system with upper, lower, and final limit switches. 2. Tamper resistant interlock to electrically monitor that the door is in the closed position and the lock is engaged before lift can move from landing. 3. Pit stop switch mounted on mast wall. 4. Electrical disconnect shall shut off power to the lift. P. Finishes 1. Aluminum Extrusions: Champagne anodized finish. 2. Ferrous Components: Electrostatically applied baked powder finish, fine textured. a. Color: Satin Grey, RAL 7030. 3. Lift Finish: Baked powder coat finish, color as selected by the Architect from manufacturers optional RAL color chart. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Verify shaft and machine space are of correct size and within tolerances. C. Verify required landings and openings are of correct size and within tolerances. D. Verify electrical rough-in is at correct location. E. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION Section 14420 Page 6 of 6 A. Install platform lifts in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements including ASME A 17.1, ASME A 18.1 and the manufacturer's instructions. B. Install platform lifts in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements including CSA B355, and manufacturer's instructions. C. Install system components and connect to building utilities. D. Accommodate equipment in space indicated. E. Startup equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. F. Adjust for smooth operation. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests in compliance with ASME A 17.1 or A18.1 and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Schedule tests with agencies and Architect, Owner, and Contractor present. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Page 1 of 20 SECTION 15050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all Work herein. B. The Contract Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If any departure from the Contract Drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and the reasons therefore, shall be submitted to the Architect for approval as soon as practicable. No such departures shall be made without the prior written approval of the Architect. C. Notwithstanding any reference in the Specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction by name, make or catalog number, such reference shall not be construed as limiting competition; and the Contractor, in such cases, may at his option use any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction which in the judgment of the Architect, expressed in writing, is equal to that specified. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Work included under this Contract consists of the furnishing and installation of all equipment and material necessary and required to form the complete and functioning systems in all of its various phases, all as shown on the accompanying Drawings and/or described in these Specifications. The contractor shall review all pertinent drawings, including those of other contracts prior to commencement of Work. B. This Division requires the furnishing and installing of all items Specified herein, indicated on the Drawings or reasonably inferred as necessary for safe and proper operation; including every article, device or accessory (whether or not specifically called for by item) reasonably necessary to facilitate each system's functioning as indicated by the design and the equipment specified. Elements of the work include, but are not limited to, materials, labor, supervision, transportation, storage, equipment, utilities, all required permits, licenses and inspections. All work performed under this Section shall be in accordance with the Project Manual, Drawings and Specifications and is subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract. C. The approximate locations of Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing items are indicated on the Drawings. These Drawings are not intended to give complete and accurate details in regard to location of outlets, apparatus, etc. Exact locations are to be determined by actual measurements at the building, and will in all cases be subject to the Review of the Owner or Engineer, who reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in the locations indicated without additional cost to the Owner. D. Items specifically mentioned in the Specifications but not shown on the Drawings and/or items shown on Drawings but not specifically mentioned in the Specifications shall be installed by the Contractor under the appropriate section of work as if they were both specified and shown. E. All discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual job-site conditions shall be reported to the Owner or Engineer so that they will be resolved prior to the bidding, where this cannot be done at least 7 working days prior to bid; the greater or more costly of the Page 2 of 20 discrepancy shall be bid. All labor and materials required to perform the work described shall be included as part of this Contract. F. It is the intention of this Section of the Specifications to outline minimum requirements to furnish the Owner with a turn-key and fully operating system in cooperation with other trades. G. It is the intent of the above "Scope" to give the Contractor a general outline of the extent of the Work involved; however, it is not intended to include each and every item required for the Work. Anything omitted from the "Scope" but shown on the Drawings, or specified later, or necessary for a complete and functioning heating, ventilating and air conditioning system shall be considered a part of the overall "Scope". H. The Contractor shall rough-in fixtures and equipment furnished by others from rough-in and placement drawings furnished by others. The Contractor shall make final connection to fixtures and equipment furnished by others. 1.03 SCHEMATIC NATURE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The contract documents are schematic in nature in that they are only to establish scope and a minimum level of quality. They are not to be used as actual working construction drawings. The actual working construction drawings shall be the approved shop drawings. B. All duct or pipe or equipment locations as indicated on the documents do not indicate every transition, offset, or exact location. All transitions, offsets clearances and exact locations shall be established by actual field measurements, coordination with the structural, architectural and reflected ceiling plans, and other trades. Submit shop drawings for approval. C. All transitions, offsets and relocations as required by actual field conditions shall be performed by the contractor at no additional cost to the owner. D. Additional coordination with electrical contractor may be required to allow adequate clearances of electrical equipment, fixtures and associated appurtenances. Contractor to notify Architect and Engineer of unresolved clearances, conflicts or equipment locations. 1.04 SITE VISIT AND FAMILIARIZATION A. Before submitting a bid, it will be necessary for each Contractor whose work is involved to visit the site and ascertain for himself the conditions to be met therein in installing his work and make due provision for same in his bid. It will be assumed that this Contractor in submitting his bid has visited the premises and that his bid covers all work necessary to properly install the equipment shown. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with this requirement shall not be considered justification for the omission or faulty installation of any work covered by these Specifications and Drawings. B. Understand the existing utilities from which services will be supplied; verify locations of utility services, and determine requirements for connections. C. Determine in advance that equipment and materials proposed for installation fit into the confines indicated. Page 3 of 20 1.05 WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Finish painting is specified. Prime and protective painting are included in the work of this Division. B. Owner and General Contractor furnished equipment shall be properly connected to Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing systems. C. Furnishing and installing all required Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing equipment control relays and electrical interlock devices, conduit, wire and J-boxes are included in the Work of this Division. 1.06 PERMITS, TESTS, INSPECTIONS A. Arrange and pay for all permits, fees, tests, and all inspections as required by governmental authorities. 1.07 DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. The date of final acceptance shall be the date of owner occupancy, or the date all punch list items have been completed or final payment has been received. Refer to Division One for additional requirements. B. The date of final acceptance shall be documented in writing and signed by the architect, owner and contractor. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification. B. Deliver products to the project at such time as the project is ready to receive the equipment, pipe or duct properly protected from incidental damage and weather damage. C. Damaged equipment, duct or pipe shall be promptly removed from the site and new, undamaged equipment, pipe and duct shall be installed in its place promptly with no additional charge to the Owner. 1.09 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. The heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems, and the component parts there of, shall be guaranteed to operate without objectionable noise and vibration. B. Provide foundations, supports and isolators as specified or indicated, properly adjusted to prevent transmission of vibration to the Building structure, piping and other items. C. Carefully fabricate ductwork and fittings with smooth interior finish to prevent turbulence and generation or regeneration of noise. D. All equipment shall be selected to operate with minimum of noise and vibration. If, in the opinion of the Architect, objectionable noise or vibration is produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping, ducts or other parts of the Work, the Contractor shall rectify such conditions without extra cost to the Owner. Page 4 of 20 1.10 APPLICABLE CODES A. Obtain all required permits and inspections for all work required by the Contract Documents and pay all required fees in connection thereof. B. Arrange with the serving utility companies for the connection of all required utilities and pay all charges, meter charges, connection fees and inspection fees, if required. C. Comply with all applicable codes, specifications, local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the following nationally accepted codes and standards: 1. Air Moving & Conditioning Association, AMCA. 2. American Standards Association, ASA. 3. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc., ASHRAE. 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers, ASME. 5. American Society of Plumbing Engineers, ASPE. 6. American Society of Testing Materials, ASTM. 7. American Water Works Association, AWWA. 8. National Bureau of Standards, NBS. 9. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA. 10. Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, SMACNA. 11. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., UL. 12. International Energy Conservation Code, IECC. D. Where differences existing between the Contract Documents and applicable state or city building codes, state and local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the above listed nationally accepted codes and standards, the more stringent or costly application shall govern. Promptly notify the Engineer in writing of all differences. E. When directed in writing by the Engineer, remove all work installed that does not comply with the Contract Documents and applicable state or city building codes, state and local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the above listed nationally accepted codes and standards, correct the deficiencies, and complete the work at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.11 DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS A. General Explanation: A substantial amount of construction and Specification language constitutes definitions for terms found in other Contract Documents, including Drawings which must be recognized as diagrammatic and schematic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements indicated thereon. Certain terms used in Contract Documents are defined generally in this article, unless defined otherwise in Division 1. B. Definitions and explanations of this Section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for work to the extent not stated more explicitly in another provision of the Contract Documents. C. Indicated: The term "Indicated" is a cross-reference to details, notes or schedules on the Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and to similar means of recording requirements in Contract Documents. Where such terms as "Shown", "Noted", "Scheduled", "Specified" and "Detailed" are used in lieu of "Indicated", it is for the purpose of helping the reader locate cross-reference material, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically shown. Page 5 of 20 D. Directed: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "Directed", "Requested", "Accepted", and "Permitted" mean by the Architect or Engineer. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect's or Engineer's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision. E. Reviewed: Where used in conjunction with the Engineer's response to submittals, requests for information, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by the Contractor the meaning of the term "Reviewed" will be held to limitations of Architect's and Engineer's responsibilities and duties as specified in the General and Supplemental Conditions. In no case will "Reviewed" by Engineer be interpreted as a release of the Contractor from responsibility to fulfill the terms and requirements of the Contract Documents. F. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Furnish" is used to mean supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in each instance. G. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Install" is used to describe operations at the project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. H. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Provide" is used to mean "Furnish and Install", complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance. I. Installer: Entity (person or firm) engaged by the Contractor or its subcontractor or Sub-contractor for performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. It is a general requirement that such entities (Installers) be expert in the operations they are engaged to perform. J. Imperative Language: Used generally in Specifications. Except as otherwise indicated, requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor. For clarity of reading at certain locations, contrasting subjective language is used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or when so noted by other identified installers or entities. K. Minimum Quality/Quantity: In every instance, the quality level or quantity shown or specified is intended as minimum quality level or quantity of work to be performed or provided. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, the actual work may either comply exactly with that minimum (within specified tolerances), or may exceed that minimum within reasonable tolerance limits. In complying with requirements, indicated or scheduled numeric values are either minimums or maximums as noted or as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to Owner or Engineer via a request for information (RFI) for decision before proceeding. L. Abbreviations and Symbols: The language of Specifications and other Contract Documents including Drawings is of an abbreviated type in certain instances, and implies words and meanings which will be appropriately interpreted. Actual word abbreviations of a self explanatory nature have been included in text of Specifications and Drawings. Specific abbreviations and symbols have been established, principally for lengthy technical terminology and primarily in conjunction with coordination of Specification requirements with notations on Drawings and in Schedules. These are frequently defined in Section at first instance of use or on a Legend and Symbol Drawing. Trade and industry association names and titles of generally recognized industry standards are frequently abbreviated. Singular Page 6 of 20 words will be interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as singular where applicable and where full context of Contract Documents so indicate. Except as otherwise indicated, graphic symbols and abbreviations used on Drawings and in Specifications are those recognized in construction industry for indicated purposes. Where not otherwise noted symbols and abbreviations are defined by 1993 ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, chapter 34 "Abbreviations and Symbols", ASME and ASPE published standards. 1.12 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. These Specifications are intended to supplement the Drawings and it will not be the province of the Specifications to mention any part of the work which the Drawings are competent to fully explain in every particular and such omission is not to relieve the Contractor from carrying out portions indicated on the Drawings only. B. Should items be required by these Specifications and not indicated on the Drawings, they are to be supplied even if of such nature that they could have been indicated thereon. In case of disagreement between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Drawings or Specifications, the better quality or greater quantity of work shall be estimated and the matter referred to the Architect or Engineer for review with a request for information and clarification at least 7 working days prior to bid opening date for issuance of an addendum. C. The listing of product manufacturers, materials and methods in the various sections of the Specifications, and indicated on the Drawings, is intended to establish a standard of quality only. It is not the intention of the Owner or Engineer to discriminate against any product, material or method that is equal to the standards as indicated and/or specified, nor is it intended to preclude open, competitive bidding. The fact that a specific manufacturer is listed as an acceptable manufacturer should not be interpreted to mean that the manufacturers' standard product will meet the requirements of the project design, Drawings, Specifications and space constraints. D. The Architect or Engineer and Owner shall be the sole judge of quality and equivalence of equipment, materials and methods. E. Products by other reliable manufacturers, other materials, and other methods, will be accepted as outlined, provided they have equal capacity, construction, and performance. However, under no circumstances shall any substitution by made without the written permission of the Architect or Engineer and Owner. Request for prior approval must be made in writing 10 days prior to the bid date without fail. F. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is not a statement that another product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that the specified product, material or method is the only one that shall be used without prior approval. G. Wherever a definite material or manufacturer's product is specified and the Specification states that products of similar design and equal construction from the specified list of manufacturers may be substituted, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that products of manufacturers that are specified are the only products that will be acceptable and that products of other manufacturers will not be considered for substitution without approval. H. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is a statement that "OR EQUAL" product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that the specified product, material or method or an "OR EQUAL" product, material or method may be used if it complies with the specifications and is submitted for review to the Engineer as outline herein. Page 7 of 20 I. Where permission to use substituted or alternative equipment on the project is granted by the Owner or Engineer in writing, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor or Subcontractor involved to verify that the equipment will fit in the space available which includes allowances for all required Code and maintenance clearances, and to coordinate all equipment structural support, plumbing and electrical requirements and provisions with the Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing Design Documents and all other trades, including Division 16. J. Changes in architectural, structural, electrical, mechanical, and plumbing requirements for the substitution shall be the responsibility of the bidder wishing to make the substitution. This shall include the cost of redesign by the affected designer(s). Any additional cost incurred by affected subcontractors shall be the responsibility of this bidder and not the owner. K. If any request for a substitution of product, material or method is rejected, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. L. The Owner or Engineer will investigate all requests for substitutions when submitted in accordance with above and if accepted, will issue a letter allowing the substitutions. M. Where equipment other than that used in the design as specified or shown on the Drawings is substituted (either from an approved manufacturers list or by submittal review), it shall be the responsibility of the substituting Contractor to coordinate space requirements, building provisions and connection requirements with his trades and all other trades and pay all additional costs to other trades, the Owner, the Architect or Engineer, if any, due to the substitutions. N. The electrical design and electrical draw ings are based on the equipment and/or electric motors of the type, size and electrical characteristics shown and specified on the mechanical drawings. Any change in equipment and/or motor size or type brought on directly or indirectly by a substitution or mechanical equipment having characteristics requiring a change, shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor and the entire cost of such change, including conduit, wiring, motor starting equipment, etc., shall be paid for by the Mechanical Contractor at no additional charge, unless the substitution was initiated by the Owner. Submittals must clearly show and deviations. Mechanical Contractor is responsible for coordinating any required changes with the Electrical Contractor, prior to Electrical Contractors ordering of panels and associated equipment. 1.13 SUBMITTALS A. Coordinate with Division 1 for submittal timetable requirements, unless noted otherwise within thirty (30) days after the Contract is awarded the Contractor shall submit a minimum of eight (8) complete bound sets of shop drawings and complete data covering each item of equipment or material. The first submittal of each item requiring a submittal must be received by the Architect or Engineer within the above thirty day period. The Architect or Engineer shall not be responsible for any delays or costs incurred due to excessive shop drawing review time for submittals received after the thirty (30) day time limit. The Architect and Engineer will retain one (1) copy each of all shop drawings for their files. Where full size drawings are involved, submit one (1) print and one (1) reproducible sepia or mylar in lieu of eight (8) sets. All literature pertaining to an item subject to Shop Drawing submittal shall be submitted at one time. A submittal shall not contain information from more than one Specification section, but may have a section subdivided into items or equipment as listed in each section. The Contractor may elect to submit each item or type of equipment separately. Each submittal shall include the following items enclosed in a suitable binder: Page 8 of 20 1. A cover sheet with the names and addresses of the Project, Architect, MEP Engineer, General Contractor and the Subcontractor making the submittal. The cover sheet shall also contain the section number covering the item or items submitted and the item nomenclature or description. 2. An index page with a listing of all data included in the Submittal. 3. A list of variations page with a listing all variations, including unfurnished or additional required accessories, items or other features, between the submitted equipment and the specified equipment. If there are no variations, then this page shall state "NO VARIATIONS". Where variations affect the work of other Contractors, then the Contractor shall certify on this page that these variations have been fully coordinated with the affected Contractors and that all expenses associated with the variations will be paid by the submitting Contractor. This page will be signed by the submitting Contractor. 4. Equipment information including manufacturer's name and designation, size, performance and capacity data as applicable. All applicable Listings, Labels, Approvals and Standards shall be clearly indicated. 5. Dimensional data and scaled drawings as applicable to show that the submitted equipment will fit the space available with all required Code and maintenance clearances clearly indicated and labeled at a minimum scale of 1/4" = 1'-0", as required to demonstrate that the alternate or substituted product will fit in the space available. 6. Identification of each item of material or equipment matching that indicated on the Drawings. 7. Sufficient pictorial, descriptive and diagrammatic data on each item to show its conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Any options or special requirements or accessories shall be so indicated. All applicable information shall be clearly indicated with arrows or another approved method. 8. Additional information as required in other Sections of this Division. 9. Certification by the General Contractor and Subcontractor that the material submitted is in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, signed and dated in long hand. Submittals that do not comply with the above requirements shall be returned to the Contractor and shall be marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT". B. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on shop drawings and submittals. C. Equipment and materials submittals and shop drawings will be reviewed for compliance with design concept only. It will be assumed that the submitting Contractor has verified that all items submitted can be installed in the space allotted. Review of shop drawings and submittals shall not be considered as a verification or guarantee of measurements or building conditions. D. Where shop drawings and submittals are marked "REVIEWED", the review of the submittal does not indicate that submittals have been checked in detail nor does it in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to furnish material and perform work as required by the Contract Documents. E. Shop drawings shall be reviewed and returned to the Contractor with one of the following categories indicated: 1. REVIEWED: Contractor need take no further submittal action, shall include this submittal in the O&M manual and may order the equipment submitted on. 2. REVIEWED AS NOTED: Contractor shall submit a letter verifying that required exceptions to the submittal have been received and complied with including additional accessories or coordination action as noted, and shall include this submittal and compliance letter in the O&M manual. The contractor may order the Page 9 of 20 equipment submitted on at the time of the returned submittal providing the Contractor complies with the exceptions noted. 3. NOT APPROVED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is not approved, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment that is not approved. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 4. REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked revise and resubmit, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or provide as noted on previous shop drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment marked revise and resubmit. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 5. CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATION REQUIRED: Contractor shall resubmit submittal on material, equipment or method of installation. The Contractor’s stamp is required stating the submittal meets all conditions of the contract documents. The stamp shall be signed by the General Contractor. The submittal will not be reviewed if the stamp is not placed and signed on all shop drawings. 6. MANUFACTURER NOT AS SPECIFIED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked manufacturer not as specified, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the specifications. Contractor shall not order equipment where submittal is marked manufacturer not as specified. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. F. Materials and equipment which are purchased or installed without shop drawing review shall be at the risk of the Contractor and the cost for removal and replacement of such materials and equipment and related work which is judged unsatisfactory by the Owner or Engineer for any reason shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The responsible Contractor shall remove the material and equipment noted above and replace with specified equipment or material at his own expense when directed in writing by the Architect or Engineer. G. Shop Drawing Submittals shall be complete and checked prior to submission to the Engineer for review. H. Submittals are required for, but not limited to, the following items: 1. Pipe Material and Specialties. 2. Pipe Fabrication Drawings. 3. Basic Materials. 4. Variable Air Volume Boxes. 5. Air Handling Units. 6. Cooling Towers. 7. Chillers. 8. Air Cooled Condensing Units. 9. Water Treatment. 10. Expansion Compensation. 11. Variable Frequency Drives. 12. Noise and Vibration Controls. 13. Plumbing Fixtures and Specialties. 14. Plumbing Equipment. 15. Sanitary DWV Fittings, Pipe and Accessories. 16. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Pipe, Fittings and Accessories. 17. HVAC Pipe and Duct Insulation. 18. Hydronic and Plumbing Valves. 19. Hydronic Piping and Accessories. Page 10 of 20 20. Hydronic Pumps. 21. Roof-Top A/C Units. 22. Heating Water Boiler. 23. Portable Pipe Hanger and Equipment Supports. 24. Duct Specialties. 25. Duct Fabrication Drawings. 26. Air Distribution Devices. 27. Fan Coil Units. 28. Filters. 29. Fans. 30. Fire Dampers and Fire Smoke Dampers. 31. Temperature Controls and Control Sequences. 32. Test, Adjust and Balance Reports. 33. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Contractor Qualifications. 34. Coordination Drawings. I. Refer to other Division 15 sections for additional shop drawing requirements. Provide samples of actual materials and/or equipment to be used on the Project upon request of the Owner or Engineer. J. Contractor to submit Mechanical/Electrical equipment coordination sheet with equipment submittal for all AHU’s, ACCU’s, and Fans. Reference chart at end of section. Provide copy to electrical subcontractor. 1.14 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare coordination drawings to a scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger; detailing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following: 1. Indicate the proposed locations of pipe, duct, equipment, and other materials. Include the following: a. Wall and type locations. b. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. c. Locations of light fixtures and sprinkler heads. d. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal, filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. e. Equipment connections and support details. f. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. g. Routing of storm and sanitary sewer piping. h. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. i. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. j. Valve stem movement. k. Structural floor, wall and roof opening sizes and details. 2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. 3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. 4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air distribution devices, light fixtures, communication systems components, and other ceiling-mounted items. Page 11 of 20 B. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all items that will affect the installation of the work of this Division. This coordination shall include, but not be limited to: voltage, ampacity, capacity, electrical and piping connections, space requirements, sequence of construction, building requirements and special conditions. C. By submitting shop drawings on the project, this Contractor is indicating that all necessary coordination has been completed and that the systems, products and equipment submitted can be installed in the building and will operate as specified and intended, in full coordination with all other Contractors and Subcontractors. 1.15 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Special Project Requirements, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 15, indicate the following installed conditions: 1. Duct mains and branches, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of dampers, fire dampers, duct access panels, and other control devices; filters, fuel fired heaters, fan coils, condensing units, and roof-top A/C units requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 2. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.). Valve location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart. Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of underground piping. 3. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines. 4. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed. 5. Contract Modifications, actual equipment and materials installed. B. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the state in which the project is located as specified herein to record the locations and invert elevations of underground installations. C. The Contractor shall maintain a set of clearly marked black line record "AS-BUILT" prints on the job site on which he shall mark all work details, alterations to meet site conditions and changes made by "Change Order" notices. These shall be kept available for inspection by the Owner, Architect or Engineer at all times. D. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements concerning record drawings. If the Contractor does not keep an accurate set of as-built drawings, the pay request may be altered or delayed at the request of the Architect. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Delivery of as-built prints and reproducibles is a condition of final acceptance. E. The record prints shall be updated on a daily basis and shall indicate accurate dimensions for all buried or concealed work, precise locations of all concealed pipe or duct, locations of all concealed valves, controls and devices and any deviations from the work shown on the Construction Documents which are required for coordination. All dimensions shall include at least two dimensions to permanent structure points. F. Submit three prints of the tracings for approval. Make corrections to tracings as directed and delivered "Auto Positive Tracings" to the architect. "As-Built" drawings shall be furnished in addition to shop drawings. Page 12 of 20 G. When the option described in paragraph F., above is not exercised then upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall transfer all marks from the submit a set of clear concise set of reproducible record "AS-BUILT" drawings and shall submit the reproducible drawings with corrections made by a competent draftsman and three (3) sets of black line prints to the Architect or Engineer for review prior to scheduling the final inspection at the completion of the work. The reproducible record "AS-BUILT" drawings shall have the Engineers Name and Seal removed or blanked out and shall be clearly marked and signed on each sheet as follows: CERTIFIED RECORD DRAWINGS DATE: (NAME OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR) BY:_______________________________ (SIGNATURE) (NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR) BY:_______________________________ (SIGNATURE) 1.16 OPERATING MANUALS A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 and in addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items: 1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. 2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 1.17 CERTIFICATIONS AND TEST REPORTS A. Submit a detailed schedule for completion and testing of each system indicating scheduled dates for completion of system installation and outlining tests to be performed and schedule date for each test. This detailed completion and test schedule shall be submittal at least 90 days before the projected Project completion date. B. Test result reporting forms shall be submitted for review no later than the date of the detailed schedule submitted. C. Submit 4 copies of all certifications and test reports to the Architect or Engineer for review adequately in advance of completion of the Work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems. D. Certifications and test reports to be submitted shall include, but not be limited to those items outlined in Section of Division 15. Page 13 of 20 1.18 MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Coordinate with Division 1 for maintenance manual requirements, unless noted otherwise bind together in “D ring type” binders by National model no. 79-883 or equal, binders shall be large enough to allow ¼” of spare capacity. Three (3) sets of all approved shop drawing submittals, fabrication drawings, bulletins, maintenance instructions, operating instructions and parts exploded views and lists for each and every piece of equipment furnished under this Specification. All sections shall be typed and indexed into sections and labeled for easy reference and shall utilize the individual specification section numbers shown in the Mechanical Specifications as an organization guideline. Bulletins containing information about equipment that is not installed on the project shall be properly marked up or stripped and reassembled. All pertinent information required by the Owner for proper operation and maintenance of equipment supplied by Division 15 shall be clearly and legibly set forth in memoranda that shall, likewise, be bound with bulletins. B. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Special Project Conditions, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 15, include the following information for equipment items: 1. Identifying names, name tags designations and locations for all equipment. 2. Valve tag lists with valve number, type, color coding, location and function. 3. Reviewed shop drawing submittals with exceptions noted compliance letter. 4. Fabrication drawings. 5. Equipment and device bulletins and data sheets clearly highlighted to show equipment installed on the project and including performance curves and data as applicable, i.e., description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model numbers of replacement parts. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 7. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions, servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 8. Equipment and motor name plate data. 9. Wiring diagrams. 10. Exploded parts views and parts lists for all equipment and devices. 11. Color coding charts for all painted equipment and conduit. 12. Location and listing of all spare parts and special keys and tools furnished to the Owner. 13. Furnish recommended lubrication schedule for all required lubrication points with listing of type and approximate amount of lubricant required. C. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on Operating and Maintenance Manuals. D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be turned over to the Owner or Engineer a minimum of 14 working days prior to the beginning of the operator training period. 1.19 OPERATOR TRAINING A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of factory trained specialists to instruct the Owner's operating personnel. The Owner's operator training shall include 12 hours of on site training in three 4 hour shifts. B. Before proceeding with the instruction of Owner Personnel, prepare a typed outline in triplicate, listing the subjects that will be covered in this instruction, and submit the outline for Page 14 of 20 review by the Owner. At the conclusion of the instruction period obtain the signature of each person being instructed on each copy of the reviewed outline to signify that he has a proper understanding of the operation and maintenance of the systems and resubmit the signed outlines. C. Refer to other Division 15 Sections for additional Operator Training requirements. 1.20 FINAL COMPLETION A. At the completion of the work, all equipment and systems shall be tested and faulty equipment and material shall be repaired or replaced. Refer to Sections of Division 15 for additional requirements. B. Clean and adjust all air distribution devices and replace all air filters immediately prior to final acceptance. C. Touch up and/or refinish all scratched equipment and devices immediately prior to final acceptance. 1.21 CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE A. Use of the HVAC and Plumbing systems to provide temporary service during construction period will not be allowed without permission from the Owner in writing and if granted shall not be cause warranty period to start, except as defined below. B. Contractor shall guarantee to keep the entire installation in repair and perfect working order for a period of one year after its completion and final acceptance, and shall furnish free of additional cost to the Owner all materials and labor necessary to comply with the above guarantee throughout the year beginning from the date of issue of Substantial Completion, Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner or the Certificate of Final Payment as agreed upon by all parties. C. This guarantee shall not include cleaning or changing filters except as required by testing, adjusting and balancing. D. All air conditioning compressors shall have parts and labor guarantees for a period of not less than 5 years beyond the date of final acceptance. E. Refer to Sections in Division 15 for additional guarantee or warranty requirements. 1.22 TRANSFER OF ELECTRONIC FILES A. Project documents are not intended or represented to be suitable for reuse by Architect/Owner or others on extensions of this project or on any other project. Any such reuse or modification without written verification or adaptation by Engineer, as appropriate for the specific purpose intended, will be at Architect/Owner’s risk and without liability or legal exposure to Engineer or its consultants from all claims, damages, losses and expense, including attorney’s fees arising out of or resulting thereof. B. Because data stored in electric media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently, or otherwise without authorization of the data’s creator, the party receiving the electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within sixty (60) days of receipt, after which time the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred to be acceptable. Any errors detected within the sixty (60) day acceptance period will be corrected by the party delivering the electronic files. Engineer is not responsible for Page 15 of 20 maintaining documents stored in electronic media format after acceptance by the Architect/Owner. C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, Engineer makes no representations as to the long term compatibility, usability or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by Engineer at the beginning of the Project. D. Any reuse or modifications will be Contractor’s sole risk and without liability or legal exposure to Architect, Engineer or any consultant. E. The Texas Board of Architectural Examiners (TBAE) has stated that it is in violation of Texas law for persons other than the Architect of record to revise the Architectural drawings without the Architect’s written consent. It is agreed that “MEP” hard copy or computer-generated documents will not be issued to any other party except directly to the Architect/Owner. The contract documents are contractually copyrighted and cannot be used for any other project or purpose except as specifically indicated in AIA B-141 Standard Form of Agreement between Architect and Owner. If the client, Architect/Owner, or developer of the project requires electronic media for “record purposes”, then an AutoCAD based compact disc (“CD”) will be prepared. The “CD” will be submitted with all title block references intact and will be formatted in a “plot” format to permit the end user to only view and plot the drawings. Revisions will not be permitted in this configuration. F. At the Architect/Owner’s request, Engineer will prepare one “CD” of electronic media to assist the contractor in the preparation of submittals. The Engineer will prepare and submit the “CD” to the Architect/Owner for distribution to the contractor. All copies of the “CD” will be reproduced for a cost of reproduction fee of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per “CD”. The “CD” will be prepared and all title blocks, names and dates will be removed. The “CD” will be prepared in a “.dwg” format to permit the end user to revise the drawings. G. This Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per “CD” cost of reproduction will be paid directly from the Contractor to the Engineer. The “CD” will be prepared only after receipt of the Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00). The Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per “CD” cost of reproduction is to only recover the cost of the manhours necessary to reproduce the documents. It is not a contractual agreement between the Contractor and Engineer to provide any engineering services, nor any other service. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials and equipment manufactured by a domestic United States manufacturer. B. Access Doors: Provide access doors as required for access to equipment, valves, controls, cleanouts and other apparatus where concealed. Access doors shall have concealed hinges and screw driver cam locks. C. All access panels located in wet areas such as restrooms, locker rooms, shower rooms, kitchen and any other wet areas shall be constructed of stainless steel. D. Access Doors: shall be as follows: Page 16 of 20 1. Plastic Surfaces: Milcor Style K. 2. Ceramic Tile Surface: Milcor Style M. 3. Drywall Surfaces: Milcor Style DW. 4. Install panels only in locations approved by the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ROUGH-IN A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected via reviewed submittals. B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 16 for additional rough-in requirements. 3.02 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. 6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 7. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with architectural action markings on submittal, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, resolve conflicts and route proposed solution to the Architect for review. 9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces. 10. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location and label. 11. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified. 12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope. 13. Provide roof curbs for all roof mounted equipment. Coordinate with roof construction for pitched roof. Provide roof curb to match roof slope. Refer to architectural drawings and details. Page 17 of 20 14. The equipment to be furnished under this Specification shall be essentially the standard product of the manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, these units shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the system need not be the product of the same manufacturer. 15. The architectural and structural features of the building and the space limitations shall be considered in selection of all equipment. No equipment shall be furnished which will not suit the arrangement and space limitations indicated. 16. Lubrication: Prior to start-up, check and properly lubricate all bearings as recommended by the manufacturer. 17. Where the word "Concealed" is used in these Specifications in connection with insulating, painting, piping, ducts, etc., it shall be understood to mean hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces or suspended ceilings. "Exposed" shall be understood to mean the opposite of concealed. 18. Identification of Mechanical Equipment: a. Mechanical equipment shall be identified by means of nameplates permanently attached to the equipment. Nameplates shall be engraved laminated plastic or etched metal. Shop drawings shall include dimensions and lettering format for approval. Attachments shall be with escutcheon pins, self-tapping screws, or machine screws. b. Tags shall be attached to all valves, including control valves, with nonferrous chain. Tags shall be brass and at least 1-1/2 inches in diameter. Nameplate and tag symbols shall correspond to the identification symbols on the temperature control submittal and the "as-built" drawings. 3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations. B. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to: 1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. 2. Remove and replace defective Work. 3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. 6. Upon written instructions from the Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide for Engineer/Owner's observation of concealed Work, without additional cost to the Owner. 7. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials and experienced Installers. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the original installation and experienced Installers; refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched; Refer to Section "DEFINITIONS" for definition of "Installer." C. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, mechanical ducts and HVAC units, plumbing fixtures and trim, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new Work. D. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. Page 18 of 20 E. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 3.04 WORK SEQUENCE, TIMING, COORDINATION WITH OWNER A. The Owner will cooperate with the Contractor, however, the following provisions must be observed: 1. A meeting will be held at the project site, prior to any construction, between the Owner's Representative, the General Contractor, the Sub-Contractors and the Engineer to discuss Contractor's employee parking space, access, storage of equipment or materials, and use of the Owner's facilities or utilities. The Owner's decisions regarding such matters shall be final. 2. During the construction of this project, normal facility activities will continue in existing buildings until renovated areas are completed. Plumbing, fire protection, lighting, electrical, communications, heating, air conditioning, and ventilation systems will have to be maintained in service within the occupied spaces of the existing building. 3.05 DEMOLITION AND WORK WITHIN EXISTING BUILDINGS A. In the preparation of these documents every effort has been made to show the approximate locations of, and connections to the existing piping, duct, equipment and other apparatus related to this phase of the work. However, this Contractor shall be responsible for verifying all of the above information. This Contractor shall visit the existing site to inspect the facilities and related areas. This Contractor shall inspect and verify all details and requirements of all the Contract Documents, prior to the submission of a proposal. All discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual job-site conditions shall be resolved by his contractor, who shall produce drawings that shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review. All labor and materials required to perform the work described shall be apart of this Contract. B. All equipment and/or systems noted on the Drawings "To Remain" shall be inspected and tested on site to certify its working condition. A written report on the condition of all equipment to remain, including a copy of the test results and recommended remedial actions and costs shall be made by this Contractor to the Architect/Engineer for review. C. All equipment and/or systems noted on the Drawings "To Be Removed" shall be removed including, associated pipe and duct pipe and duct hangers and/or line supports. Where duct or pipe is to be capped for future or end of line use, it shall be properly tagged with its function or service appropriately identified. Where existing equipment is to be removed or relocated and has an electric motor or connection, the Electrical Contractor shall disconnect motor or connection, remove wiring to a safe point and this Contractor shall remove or relocate motor or connection along with the equipment. D. During the construction and remodeling, portions of the Project shall remain in service. Construction equipment, material tools, extension cords, etc., shall be arranged so as to present minimum hazard or interruption to the occupants of the building. None of the construction work shall interfere with the proper operation of the existing facility or be so conducted as to cause harm or danger to persons on the premises. All fire exits, stairs or corridors required for proper access, circulation or exit shall remain clear of equipment, materials or debris. The General Contractor shall maintain barricades, other separations in corridors and other spaces where work is conducted. E. Certain work during the demolition phase of construction may require overtime or night time shifts or temporary evacuation of the occupants. Coordinate and schedule all proposed down time at least seventy-two (72) hours in advance in writing. Page 19 of 20 F. Any salvageable equipment as determined by the Owner, shall be delivered to the Owner, and placed in storage at the location of his choice. All other debris shall be removed from the site immediately. G. Equipment, piping or other potential hazards to the working occupants of the building shall not be left overnight outside of the designated working or construction area. H. Make every effort to minimize damage to the existing building and the owner's property. Repair, patch or replace as required any damage that might occur as a result of work at the site. Care shall be taken to minimize interference with the Owner's activities during construction and to keep construction disrupted areas to a minimum. Corporate with the Owner and other trades in scheduling and performance of the work. I. Include in the contract price all rerouting of existing pipe, duct, etc., and the reconnecting of the existing equipment and plumbing fixtures as necessitated by field conditions to allow the installation of the new systems regardless of whether or not such rerouting, reconnecting or relocating is shown on the drawings. Furnish all temporary pipe, duct, controls, etc., as required to maintain heating, cooling, ventilation and plumbing services for the existing areas with a minimum of interruption. J. All existing plumbing fixtures, pipe, duct, materials, equipment, controls and appurtenances not included in the remodel or alteration areas are to remain in place. K. Pipe, duct, equipment and controls serving mechanical, plumbing and owner's equipment, etc., which is to remain but which is served by pipe, duct, equipment and controls that are disturbed by the remodeling work, shall be reconnected in such a manner as to leave this equipment in proper operating condition. L. It is the intention of this Section of the Specifications to outline minimum requirements to furnish the Owner with a turn-key and operating system in cooperation with other trades with a minimum of disruption or downtime. M. Refer to Architectural "Demolition and/or Alteration" plans for actual location of walls, ceiling, etc., being removed and/or remodeled. END OF SECTION Mech/Elec. Equipment Coordination Sheet Mark # Unit Type Manufacturer’s Recomm. Fuse Size (MOCP) Mark # Unit Type Manufacturer’s Recomm. Fuse Size (MOCP) Page 20 of 20 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 15051 STARTING OF SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Starting systems. B. Demonstration and instructions. C. Testing, adjusting, and balancing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturers field reports. B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: System operation and maintenance data and extra materials. C. Section 15950 – HVAC Controls. D. Section 15990 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. 1.03 STARTING SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect, Engineer and Owner seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or for other conditions that may cause damage. D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Adjust electrical amp draw on motors to within 80% of rated amp draw. F. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. G. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. H. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. I. Adjust return air to 500 fpm at each air unit inlet. Replace drive packages as necessary to achieve design airflows. J. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01400 that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 1.04 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS Page 2 of 2 A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of final inspection. B. Demonstrate Project equipment and provide instruction by a qualified manufacturers' representative who is knowledgeable about the Project. C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. D. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. E. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time, at equipment location. F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. 1.05 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING A. Mechanical Division will secure the services of an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. The independent firm will perform services specified in Section 15990. C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Architect/Engineer indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 15060 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Mechanical demolition. B. The drawings do not show all demolition work required. The contractor shall make himself familiar with the required scope of work to accomplish the work required by these documents. All demolition work implied or required shall be included in the scope of this contract. C. Outages of services as required by the new installation will be permitted but only at a time approved by the Owner. The contractor shall allow the Owner 2 weeks in order to schedule required outages. The time allowed for outages will not be during normal working hours unless otherwise approved by the Owner. All costs of outages, including overtime charges, shall be included in the contract amount. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01120 – Alteration Project Procedures. B. Section 02072 – Minor Demolition for Remodeling. 1.03 WORK SEQUENCE, TIMING, COORDINATION WITH OWNER A. The Owner will corporate with the Contractor, however, the following provisions must be observed: 1. During the construction of this project, normal facility activities will continue in existing buildings until new buildings or renovated areas are completed. Plumbing, fire protection, lighting, electrical, communications, heating, air conditioning, and ventilation systems will have to be maintained in service within the occupied spaces of the existing building. 2. A meeting will be held at the project site, prior to any construction, between the Owner's Representative, the General Contractor, the Sub-Contractors and the Engineer to discuss Contractor's employee parking space, access, storage of equipment or materials, and use of the Owner's facilities or utilities. The Owner's decisions regarding such matters shall be final. 1.04 DEMOLITION AND WORK WITHIN EXISTING BUILDINGS A. In the preparation of these documents every effort has been made to show the approximate locations of, and connections to the existing piping, duct, equipment and other apparatus related to this phase of the work. However, this Contractor shall be responsible for verifying all of the above information. This Contractor shall visit the existing site to inspect the facilities and related areas. This Contractor shall inspect and verify all details and requirements of all the Contract Documents, prior to the submission of a proposal. All discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual job-site conditions shall be resolved by his contractor, who shall produce drawings which shall be PAGE 2 of 6 submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review. All labor and materials required to perform the work described shall be apart of this Contract. B. All equipment and/or systems noted on the Drawings "To Remain" shall be inspected and tested on site to certify its working condition. A written report on the condition of all equipment to remain, including a copy of the test results and recommended remedial actions and costs shall be made by this Contractor to the Architect/Engineer for review. C. All equipment and/or systems noted on the Drawings "To Be Removed" should be removed including, associated pipe and duct pipe and duct hangers and/or line supports. Pipes should be removed back to its nearest active point and capped or plugged. Where entire systems are removed, remove all associated piping, ductwork, controls wire, etc. Where duct or pipe is to be capped for future or end of line use, it shall be properly tagged with its function or service appropriately identified. Where existing equipment is to be removed or relocated and has an electric motor or connection, the Electrical Contractor shall disconnect motor or connection, remove wiring to a safe point and this Contractor shall remove or relocate motor or connection along with the equipment. D. During the construction and remodeling, portions of the Project shall remain in service. Construction equipment, material tools, extension cords, etc., shall be arranged so as to present minimum hazard or interruption to the occupants of the building. None of the construction work shall interfere with the proper operation of the existing facility or be so conducted as to cause harm or danger to persons on the premises. All fire exits, stairs or corridors required for proper access, circulation or exit shall remain clear of equipment, materials or debris. The General Contractor shall maintain barricades, other separations in corridors and other spaces where work is conducted. E. Certain work during the demolition and construction phases of construction may require overtime or night time shifts or temporary evacuation of the occupants. Coordinate and schedule all proposed down time with the Project Administrator at least seventy-two (72) hours in advance in writing. F. Any salvageable equipment as determined by the Owner, shall be delivered to the Owner, and placed in storage at the location of his choice. All other debris shall be removed from the site immediately. G. Equipment, piping or other potential hazards to the occupants of the building shall not be left overnight outside of the designated working or construction area. H. Make every effort to minimize damage to the existing building and the owner's property. Repair, patch or replace as required any damage which might occur as a result of work at the site. Care shall be taken to minimize interference with the Owner's activities during construction and to keep construction disrupted areas to a minimum. Corporate with the Owner and other trades in scheduling and performance of the work. I. Include in the contract price all rerouting of existing pipe, duct, etc., and the reconnecting of the existing equipment and plumbing fixtures as necessitated by field conditions to allow the installation of the new systems regardless of whether or not such rerouting, reconnecting or relocating is shown on the drawings. Furnish all temporary pipe, duct, controls, etc., as required to maintain heating, cooling, ventilation and plumbing services for the existing areas with a minimum of interruption. J. All existing plumbing fixtures, pipe, duct, materials, equipment, controls and appurtenances not included in the remodel or alteration areas are to remain in place. PAGE 3 of 6 K. Pipe, duct, equipment and controls serving mechanical, plumbing and owner's equipment, etc., which is to remain but which is served by pipe, duct, equipment and controls that are disturbed by the remodeling work, shall be reconnected in such a manner as to leave this equipment in proper operating condition. L. No portion of the fire protection systems shall be turned off, modified or changed in any way without the express knowledge and written permission of the Owner's representative in order to protect systems that shall remain in service. M. It is the intention of this Section of the Specifications to outline minimum requirements to furnish the Owner with a turn-key and operating system in cooperation with other trades with a minimum of disruption or downtime. N. Refer to Architectural "Demolition and/or Alteration" plans for actual location of walls, ceiling, etc., being removed and/or remodeled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual Sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Field verify measurements and piping arrangements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify that abandoned piping and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. C. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to Owner before disturbing existing installation. D. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Disconnect mechanical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal. B. Coordinate utility service outages with Utility Company. C. Provide temporary connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment, use personnel experienced in such operations. D. Existing Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from Owner at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. PAGE 4 of 6 E. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is accepted. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Notify Owner and local fire service at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. 3.03 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING MECHANICAL WORK A. Demolish and extend existing mechanical work under provisions of Section 01120, Section 02072, and this Section. B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. C. Remove abandoned piping to source of supply. D. Remove exposed abandoned piping systems, including abandoned systems above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut systems flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. E. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. F. Maintain access to existing installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panels as appropriate. G. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing installations, or as specified. 3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIR A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused. 3.05 INSTALLATION A. Install relocated materials and equipment under the provisions of Section 01120. 3.06 REMOVAL OF MATERIALS A. The contractor shall modify, remove, and/or relocate all materials and items so indicated on the drawings or required by the installation of new facilities. All removals and/or dismantling shall be conducted in a manner as to produce maximum salvage. Salvage materials shall remain the property of the Owner, and shall be delivered to such destination as directed by the Owner. Materials and/or items scheduled for relocation and which are damaged during dismantling or reassembly operations shall be repaired and restored to good operative condition. The contractor may, at his discretion and upon the approval of the Owner, substitute new materials and/or items of like design and quality in lieu of materials and/or items to be relocated. B. All items which are to be relocated shall be carefully removed in reverse to original assembly or placement and protected until relocated. The contractor shall clean and repair and provide all new materials, fittings, and appurtenances required to complete the relocations and to restore to good operative order. All relocations shall be performed by workmen skilled in the work and in accordance with standard practice of the trades involved. PAGE 5 of 6 C. When items scheduled for relocation are found to be in damaged condition before work has been started on dismantling, the contractor shall call the attention of the Owner to such items and receive further instructions before removal. Items damaged in repositioning operations are the contractor's responsibility and shall be repaired or replaced by the contractor as approved by the Owner, at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Service lines and wiring to items to be removed, salvaged, or relocated shall be removed to points indicated on the drawings, specified, or acceptable to the Owner. Service lines and wiring not scheduled for reuse shall be removed to the points at which reuse is to be continued or service is to remain. Such services shall be sealed, capped, or otherwise tied-off or disconnected in a safe manner acceptable to the Owner. All disconnections or connections into the existing facilities shall be done in such a manner as to result in minimum interruption of services to adjacent occupied areas. Services to existing areas or facilities which must remain in operation during the construction period shall not be interrupted without prior specific approval of the Owner as hereinbefore specified. E. Certain work during the demolition phase of construction may require overtime or nighttime shifts or temporary evacuation of the occupants. Coordinate and schedule all proposed down time with the Owner's Representative at least 72 hours in advance. F. Make every effort to minimize damage to the existing building and the Owner's property. Repair, patch, or replace as required any damage which might occur as a result of work at the site. Care shall be taken to minimize interference with the Owner's activities during construction. Cooperate with the Owner and other trades in scheduling and performance of the work. G. Include in the contract price all rerouting of existing conduits, wiring, outlet boxes, fixtures, etc., and the reconnecting of existing fixtures as necessitated by field conditions to allow the installation of the new systems. Furnish all temporary conduit, wiring, boxes, etc., as required to maintain lighting and power service for the existing areas with a minimum of interruption. Remove wire and conduit back to nearest accessible active junction box and extend to existing homeruns as required. H. The contractor shall be responsible for loss or damage to the existing facilities caused by him and his workmen, and shall be responsible for repairing such loss or damage. The contractor shall send proper notices, make necessary arrangements, and perform other services required for the care, protection and in-service maintenance of all electrical services for the new and existing facilities. The contractor shall erect temporary barricades, with necessary safety devices, as required to protect personnel from injury, removing all such temporary protection upon completion of the work. I. Where existing construction is removed to provide working and extension access to existing utilities, contractor shall remove doors, piping, conduit, outlet boxes, wiring, light fixtures, air conditioning ductwork and equipment, etc., to provide this access and shall reinstall same upon completion of work in the areas affected. J. Where partitions, walls, floors, or ceilings of existing construction are being removed, all contractors shall remove and reinstall in locations approved by the Architect all devices required for the operation of the various systems installed in the existing construction. END OF SECTION Page 1 of 3 SECTION 15070 INSIDE UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND COMPACTION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section describes general requirements, products, and methods of execution relating to excavation, backfill and compaction of inside trenches for mechanical work. Inside trenches are those which occur within an arbitrary, imaginary boundary five feet beyond the outside perimeter of the structure.SG B. Scope: Provide all trench work for mechanical work of every description and of whatever substance encountered to the depth indicated, or to provide pipe slopes and elevations shown on the drawing. Excavate and backfill utility trenches. Place and compact bedding material. Compact backfill material. C. SPECIAL NOTE: All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of these specifications. The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for instructions and include all items pertaining to this work. The Contractor shall consult all other divisions of these specifications, determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the drawings. 1.02 APPLICABE CODES A. Local Codes and Ordinances B. Texas Safety Standards C. OSHA – Section 1926.650 1.03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS A. It shall be the duty and responsibility of the Contractor and all of its subcontractors to be familiar and comply with all requirements of Public Law 91-696, 29 U.S.C. Secs. 651 et. seq., the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, (OSHA) and all amendments thereto, and to enforce and comply with all of these provisions of this Act. IN ADDITION, ON PROJECTS IN WHICH TRENCH EXCAVATION WILL EXCEED A DEPTH OF FIVE FEET, THE CONTRACTOR AND ALL OF ITS SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL REQUIREMENTS OF 29 C.F.R. SECS. 1926.652 AND 1926.653, OSHA SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS. PART 2 – BEDDING MATERIAL 2.01 BEDDING MATERIAL A. Select bedding material from trench excavation using care to separate it from unsuitable material. If suitable bedding material is not available from trench excavation, import it from sources approved by the Architect. B. Use clean sand. Maintain moisture content within a range that will allow specified compaction. 2.02 TRENCH BACKFILL Page 2 of 3 A. Obtain trench backfill material from trench excavation. If sufficient suitable trench backfill material compatible with structural backfill is not available from trench excavation, import it from sources approved by Architect. B. Use granular material, free from large stones, boulders and debris. Maintain moisture content within a range that will allow specified compaction. Maximum aggregate size four inches (4”). PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. Place all excavated material suitable for backfill in an orderly manner, and in conformance with safety codes. B. Dispose of all material not suitable for backfilling. C. Form bell holes so pipelines rest on continuous undisturbed soil. If larger rocks or boulders are encountered, remove them. If trenches are below specified grade, backfill to required depth with select granular materials free from debris and rock, and compact to proper grade before installing piping. 3.02 LOCATION A. Locate trenches to accommodate utilities shown on drawings B. Construct trench with adequate width to allow compaction equipment to be used at the sides of pipes. C. Make trench side slopes conform to prevailing safety code requirements. 3.03 DEWATERING A. Perform whatever work is necessary to prevent the flow and accumulation of surface or ground water in the excavation. 3.04 TIMING A. Do not backfill until underground mechanical system has been properly tested, inspected and approved. B. Coordinate with the work of others, and complete all trench work in a timely manner. 3.05 BEDDING A. Place bedding material under, around, and over the pipe in lifts not exceeding 8” in depth, B. Work material around pipe by hand methods, taking care to keep any oversize or sharp stones out of contact with the pipe, and to provide uniform support for the pipe. B. Cover pipe with bedding material to building subgrade or to a minimum 12” depth before adding other backfill. 3.06 BACKFILLING Page 3 of 3 A. Continue placing backfill material until trench is completely filled to building subgrade, or as shown on drawings. B. Place backfill material in lifts not to exceed 12” in depth. 3.07 COMPACTION A. Compact all bedding material to at least 95% of maximum density, taking care not to damage the pipe. B. Compact all backfill under footings, slabs, and other structures to 95% of maximum density or more, if required by the Architect. C. Compact other areas to preclude future settlements, or at least 85% of maximum density. 3.08 FINISHING A. After completion of backfilling, dispose of excess material and smooth the surface of grade. B. Do not allow heavy equipment to be used over backfilled work that does not have sufficient cover to prevent pipe damage. 3.09 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS A. Avoid unauthorized and unnecessary excavations. B. Minimize number and size of excavations under footings or bearing walls. C. Support footings, foundations, and walls with timbers and jacks if there appears to be any possible chance of damage, and keep such precautions in place to eliminate possible damage. D. Backfill under footings and bearing walls, using maximum compaction or concrete or proportions as specified for footings. E. Avoid damage to all existing underground services, foundations, cables, conduit lines or foundations. Repair any existing underground work accidentally damaged at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.10 UNDER EXISTING SLAB INSTALLATION A. When breaking out an existing floor slab, make a saw cut and remove concrete. When repouring concrete, compact the fill to the same specifications as the building fill. Re: Architectural/Structural. Make necessary saw cuts and patching as required. END OF SECTION Page 1 of 3 SECTION 15080 OUTSIDE UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND COMPACTION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Section 15010 – General Provisions 2. Section 15050 – Basic Materials and Methods 3. Division 2 – Site Work B. Description: This section described general requirements, products, and methods of execution relating excavation, backfill, and compaction of utility trenches outside of buildings. The arbitrary line of demarcation between inside and outside of buildings occurs 5’ outside the building perimeters. C. It shall be the duty and responsibility of the Contractor and all of its subcontractors to be familiar and comply with all requirements of Public Law 91-696, 29 U.S.C. Secs. 651 et. seq., the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, (OSHA) and all amendments thereto, and to WHICH TRENCH EXCAVATION WILL EXCEED A DEPTH OF FIVE FEET, THE CONTRACTOR AND ALL OF ITS SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL REQUIREMENTS OF 29 C.F.R. SECS. 1926.652 AND 1926.653, OSHA SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS. D. SPECIAL NOTE: All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of these specifications. The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for instructions and include all items pertaining to this work. The Contractor shall consult all other divisions of these specifications, determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the drawings. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 BEDDING MATERIAL A. Select bedding material from trench excavation using care to separate it from unsuitable material. If suitable bedding material is not available from trench excavation, import it from sources approved by the Architect. B. Use granular material, free from large stones, boulders and debris. Maximum aggregate size passing a 2” sieve opening. Maintain moisture content within a range that will allow specified compaction. 2.02 TRENCH BACKFILL A. Obtain trench backfill material from trench excavation. If sufficient suitable trench backfill material is not available from trench excavation, import it from sources approved by the Architect. B. Use granular material, free from large stones, boulders, and debris. Maintain moisture content within range that will allow specified compaction. Maximum aggregate size 4 inches. Page 2 of 3 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. Excavate trenches to depth and grades as shown on drawings. B. Place all excavated material suitable for backfill in an orderly manner and in conformance with safety codes. C. Dispose of all material not suitable for backfill. D. Form bell holes so pipelines rest on continuous undisturbed soil. If larger rocks or boulders are encountered, remove them. If ground surface is below specified pipe grade, fill to required depth with granular materials free from debris and rock, and compact to proper grade before installing piping. 3.02 LOCATION A. Locate trenches to accommodate utilities shown on the drawings. B. Construct trench with adequate width to allow compaction equipment to be used at the side of pipes. B. Make trench side slopes conform to prevailing safety code requirements. 3.03 DE-WATERING A. Perform whatever work is necessary to prevent flow and accumulation of surface or ground water in the excavation. 3.04 TIMING A. Do not complete backfill until utility system has been properly tested, inspected, and approved. B. Coordinate with the work of others and complete all trench work in a timely manner. 3.05 BEDDING A. Place bedding material under, around, and over pipe in lifts not exceeding 8” in depth. B. Work material around pipe by hand methods, taking care to keep any oversize or sharp stones out of contact with the pipe, and provide uniform support for the pipe. C. Cover pipe with bedding material to a minimum 6” depth before adding other backfill. D. Cover water line with 18” bedding material before backfilling. 3.06 BACKFILLING A. Continue placing backfill material until trench is completely filled to finished grade, or as shown on the drawing. B. Place backfill material in lifts not to exceed 12” in depth. Page 3 of 3 3.07 COMPACTION A. Compact all bedding material to al least 95% of maximum density, taking care not to damage the pipe. B. Compact backfill material to preclude future settlement or at least to 90% of maximum density. 3.08 FINISHING A. After completion of backfilling, dispose of excess material and smooth the surface to grade. B. Restore all surface areas to original conditions, or improve as shown on the drawings. Replace all paving, base course, gravel surfacing, sub-base, topsoil or other existing finished surface as shown on drawings. C. Clean up and finish all construction areas to original condition or better. END OF SECTION PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 15140 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe, and equipment hangers, supports, and associated anchors. B. Sleeves and seals. C. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15240 - Vibration Isolation. B. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation. C. Section 15280 - Equipment Insulation. D. Section 15410 - Plumbing System. E. Section 15530 – Refrigerant Piping 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME B31.1 - Power Piping. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division One. B. Indicate hanger and support framing and attachment methods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger. D. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods; cast iron roll and stand for pipe sizes 6 inches and over. E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and over: adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll. G. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. PAGE 2 of 6 H. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. I. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support. J. Roof Pipe Supports and Hangers: Galvanized Steel Channel System as manufactured by Portable Pipe Hangers, Inc. or approved equal. For pipes 2-1/2” and smaller – Type PP10 with roller For pipes 3” through 8” – Type PS For multiple pipes – Type PSE - Custom K. Copper Pipe Support and Hangers: Electro-galvanized with thermoplastic elastomer cushions; Unistrut “Cush-A-Clamp” or equal. Hangers: Plastic coated; Unistrut or equal. L. For installation of protective shields refer to specification section 15140-3.03. M. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead. N. Pipe Rough-In Supports in Walls/Chases: Provide preformed plastic pipe supports, Sioux Chief “Pipe Titan” or equal. 2.02 HANGER RODS A. Galvanized Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded. 2.03 INSERTS A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.04 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 20 gage galvanized steel. B. Lead Flashing: 4 lb./sq. ft. sheet lead for waterproofing; 1 lb./sq. ft. sheet lead for soundproofing. C. Caps: Steel, 20 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements. D. Coordinate with roofing contractor/architect for type of flashing on metal roofs. 2.05 EQUIPMENT CURBS A. Fabricate curbs of hot dipped galvanized steel. 2.06 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: Form with 18 gage galvanized steel, tack welded to form a uniform sleeve. B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Form with steel pipe, schedule 40. PAGE 3 of 6 C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fireproofing: Prefabricated fire rated steel sleeves including seals, UL listed. D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. E. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. F. Fire Stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible, U.L. listed. G. Caulk: Paintable 25-year acrylic sealant. H. Pipe Alignment Guides: Factory fabricated, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted, two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider that bolts tightly to pipe. Length of guides shall be as recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe. C. Design roof supports without roof penetrations, flashing or damage to the roofing material. 2.08 FINISH A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSERTS A. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. Coordinate with structural engineer for placement of inserts. B. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. C. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts to be flush with slab surface. D. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab. Verify with structural engineer prior to start of work. 3.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as follows: PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING HANGER DIAMETER (Steel Pipe) 1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 7’-0” 3/8" PAGE 4 of 6 1-1/2 to 3 inch 10'-0" 3/8" 4 to 6 inch 10'-0" 1/2" 8 to 10 inch 10'-0" 5/8" 12 to 14 inch 10'-0" 3/4" 15 inch and over 10'-0" 7/8" (Copper Pipe) 1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 5'-0" 3/8" 1-1/2 to 2-1/2 inch 8'-0" 3/8" 3 to 4 inch 10'-0" 3/8" 6 to 8 inch 10'-0" 1/2" (Cast Iron) 2 to 3 inch 5'-0" 3/8" 4 to 6 inch 10'-0" 1/2" 8 to 10 inch 10'-0" 5/8" 12 to 14 inch 10'-0" 3/4" 15 inch and over 10'-0" 7/8" (PVC Pipe) 1-1/2 to 4 inch 4'-0" 3/8" 6 to 8 inch 4'-0" 1/2" 10 and over 4'-0" 5/8" B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow and at the vertical horizontal transition. D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. I. Install hangers with nut at base and above hanger; tighten upper nut to hanger after final PAGE 5 of 6 installation adjustments. J. Portable pipe hanger systems shall be installed per manufactures instructions. 3.03 Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements. A. Clamps: Attach galvanized clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9. B. Saddles: Install galvanized protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation. C. Shields: Install protective shields MSS Type 40 on cold and chilled water piping that has vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees and shall have dimensions in inches not less than the following: NPS LENGTH THICKNESS 1/4 THROUGH 3-1/2 12 0.048 4 12 0.060 5 & 6 18 0.060 8 THROUGH 14 24 0.075 16 THROUGH 24 24 0.105 D. Piping 2” and larger provide galvanized sheet metal shields with calcium silicate at hangers/supports. E. Insert material shall be at least as long as the protective shield. F. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install where indicated, with insulation of same thickness as piping. 3.04 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide equipment bases of concrete. B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. 3.05 FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counter flashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs. B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 8 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked one inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counter flash and seal. C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device. PAGE 6 of 6 D. Seal floor shower mop sink and all other drains watertight to adjacent materials. E. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 8 inches minimum high above roofing surface. Contact architect for all flashing details and roof construction. Seal penetrations watertight. 3.06 SLEEVES A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. B. Extend sleeves through floors minimum one inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves full depth with fire rated thermfiber and 3M caulking and provide floor plate. C. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with U.L. listed fire stopping insulation and caulk seal air tight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. D. Fire protection sleeves may be flush with floor of stairways. END OF SECTION Page 1 of 3 SECTION 15170 MOTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 15050, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. B. WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: 1. Painting 2. Automatic temperature controls. 3. Power control wiring to motors and equipment. 1.03 WARRANTY Warrant the Work specified herein for one year and motors for five years beginning on data of substantial completion against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials and workmanship. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance, fabrication procedures variations, and accessories. C. MOTOR NAMEPLATE INFORMATION: Manufacturer's name, address, utility and operating data. D. Refer to Division One for additional information. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. DELIVERY: Deliver clearly labeled, undamaged materials in the manufacturers' unopened containers. B. TIME AND COORDINATION: Deliver materials to allow for minimum storage time at the project site. Coordinate delivery with the scheduled time of installation. C. STORAGE: Store materials in a clean, dry location, protected from weather and abuse. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Page 2 of 3 2.01 ELECTRIC MOTORS A. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: Provide motors by a single manufacturer as much as possible. 1. Baldur 2. Marathon 3. Siemens-Allis 4. General Electric 5. U.S. Motor B. TEMPERATURE RATING: Provide insulation as follows: 1. CLASS B: 40 degrees C maximum. 2. CLASS F: a. Between 40 degrees C and 65 degrees C maximum. b. Totally enclosed motors. C. STARTING CAPABILITY: As required for service indicated five starts minimum per hour. D. PHASES AND CURRENT: Verify electrical service compatibility with motors to be used. 1. UP TO 1/2 HP: Provide permanent split, capacitor-start single phase with inherent overload protection. 2. 3/4 HP AND LARGER: Provide squirrel-cage induction polyphone. 3. Provide two separate windings on 2-speed polyphone motors. 4. Name plate voltage shall be the same as the circuit's normal voltage, serving the motor. E. SERVICE FACTOR: 1.15 for poly-phase; 1.35 for single phase. F. FRAMES: U-frames 1.5 Hp. and larger. G. BEARINGS: Provide sealed re-graspable ball bearings; with top mounted ale mite lubrication fittings and bottom side drains minimum average life 100,000 hours typically, and others as follows: 1. Design for thrust where applicable. 2. PERMANENTLY SEALED: Where not accessible for greasing. 3. SLEEVE-TYPE WITH OIL CUPS: Light duty fractional hp. motors or polyphone requiring minimum noise level. H. ENCLOSURE TYPE: Provide enclosures as follows: 1. CONCEALED INDOOR: Open drip proof. 2. EXPOSED INDOOR: Guarded. 3. OUTDOOR TYPICAL: Type II. TEC. 4. OUTDOOR WEATHER PROTECTED: Type I. TEA. I. OVERLOAD PROTECTION: Built-in sensing device for stopping motor in all phase legs and signaling where indicated for fractional horse power motors. J. NOISE RATING: "Quiet" except where otherwise indicated. K. EFFICIENCY: Minimum full load efficiency listed in the following table, when tested in accordance with IEEE Test Procedure 112A, Method B, including stray load loss measure. Page 3 of 3 NEMA Efficiency Motor Horsepower INDEX Letter Minimum Efficiency % 1800 RPM Synchronous Speed 7.5-10 F 89.5 15-20 E 91.0 25-30 E 92.4 40 D 93.0 50 C 93.0 60 C 93.6 75 C 94.1 100-125 B 94.5 150-200 B 95.0 1200 RPM Synchronous Speed 3-5 G 87.5 7.5 G 89.5 10 F 89.5 15 F 90.2 20 E 90.2 25-30 E 91.7 40-50 D 93.0 60 D 93.6 75 C 93.6 100-125 C 94.1 150-200 B 95.0 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations and printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Contractors’ price shall include all items required as per manufacturers’ requirements. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL: Install in a professional manner. Any part or parts not meeting this requirement shall be replaced or rebuilt without extra expense to Owner. B. Install rotating equipment in static and dynamic balance. C. Provide foundations, supports, and isolators properly adjusted to allow minimum vibration transmission within the building. D. Correct objectionable noise or vibration transmission in order to operate equipment satisfactorily as determined by the Engineer. END OF SECTION Page 1 of 6 SECTION 15171 COMBINATION AND NON-COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Motor Controllers – Combination and Non-combination Motor Starters B. Furnish and install a complete motor controller for the following item(s): 1. Constant volume air handling units 2. Constant volume supply and exhaust fans. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15050 – Basic Materials and Methods B. Section 15170 – Motors C. Section 15240 – Sound and Vibration Control D. Section 15854 – Fan Coil Unit E. Section 15950 – Controls F. Section 15990 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing G. Section 16075 – Electrical Identification 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer shall provide copies of the following documents: 1. Product data sheets on specified products. 2. Shop drawings for specified product. 3. Wiring Schematics for specified products. 4. Installation instructions. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components. 2. Provide manufacture’s written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and Motor Circuit Protection trip settings of combination controllers. 3. Provide manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays. 4. Provide manufacture’s written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming reduced-voltage solid-state controllers. 1.05 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Page 2 of 6 1. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type. 3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed. 4. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller installed. 5. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor installed. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer must have minimum of 20 years of documented experience, specializing in combination and non-combination starters. B. The starter assembly shall be UL listed under UL 508A 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept starters on site in original packing. Inspect for damage. B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping, or provide additional heavy canvas, or heavy plastic cover, to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. C. Handle carefully, in accordance of manufacturer’s written instruction, to avoid damage to components, enclosure, and finish. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall provide a five year warranty on the complete starter assembly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Enclosed FVNR combination single phase motor starter with electronic overload relay B. Enclosed FVNR non-combination motor starters with electronic overload relay C. Enclosed FVNR combination motor starters with electronic overload relay D. Enclosed FVNR Two-Speed motor starters with electronic overload relay 2.02 REFERENCES A. The starters referenced in this section are designed and manufactured to the following standards unless otherwise noted: 1. ANSI/NFPA -70, National Electric Code 2. UL 508, and UL508A Industrial Control Equipment 3. NEMA ICS-2, 2000 4. IEC 60947-5, 60947-4, 60947-3 2.03 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: Provide one of the following manufacturer's. 1. Cerus Industiral. 2. Square D. 3. Cutler Hammer. 4. ABB Page 3 of 6 2.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Single Phase Starter: Starters for 115VAC single phase motors less than 1 HP shall be capable of both manual and automatic operation. Refer to Section 2.03.1 for single phase starter requirements. B. Magnetic Starters: Starters for 3-phase motors shall be magnetic starters. Refer to Section 2.03.2 for magnetic starter requirements. C. Combination Starters: Provide combination magnetic starters for all motors requiring branch circuit protection or a line-of-sight disconnect. Refer to Section 2.03.3 for combination magnetic starter requirements. 2.04.1 ENCLOSED FULL VOLTAGE NON-REVERSING (FVNR) SINGLE PHASE STARTER A. Single Phase Motor Starter Control: The single phase motor starter shall consist of a manually operated quick-make toggle mechanism lockable in the “Off” position which shall also function as the motor disconnect. Additionally, the starter shall provide thermal overload protection, run status pilot light and fault pilot light. The starter must include the capability to operate in both manual and automatic control modes. In automatic mode, the starter shall have the capability to integrate with a building automation system by providing terminals for run input, run status output and fault output. All control terminals shall be integrated in the starter. At a minimum, each single phase starter shall include an interposing run relay and current sensing status output relay. Single phase motor starter shall be in a surface mount enclosure. B. Approved manufacturer: Cerus Industrial, model BAS-1P or approved equal. 2.04.2 ENCLOSED FULL VOLTAGE NON-REVERSING (FVNR) NON-COMBINATION STARTER A. Magnetic Motor Starters shall be enclosed in a general purpose electrical enclosure with the appropriate environmental rating. B. Starters shall consist of a horsepower rated magnetic contactor with a minimum of 1NO and 1NC auxiliary contacts and solid state electronic overload relay. Overload relay shall protect all three phases with a wide range current setting and trip class to allow field adjustment for specific motor FLA. Interchangeable heater elements are not acceptable. Overload relay shall provide phase failure, phase loss, locked rotor and stall protection. C. Provide a manual reset pushbutton on the starter cover to restore normal operation after a trip or fault condition. D. Each starter shall include an installed 50VA control power transformer (CPT) with protected secondary. The CPT must accept the available line voltage and the control voltage shall not exceed 120V. E. Installed accessories shall include Hand-Off-Auto operation switch with 22mm style operator interfaces. Include LED pilot light indicators for Hand, Off, Auto, Run and Overload conditions. All pilot devices shall be water tight and dust tight. F. When remotely controlled by an automation system, the starter shall include remote run terminals which accept both a voltage input signal and a contact closure. The voltage run input shall accept both AC and DC signals including 24VAC, 120VAC, 24VDC and 48VDC to allow direct connection of the transistorized automation signal to the starter. G. In applications where the motor is interlocked with a damper or valve, the actuator control must reside within the starter enclosure. The starter must provide a voltage output to operate the actuator to open the damper or valve without closing the motor circuit. The starter will only Page 4 of 6 close the motor circuit and start the motor after it has received a contact closure from a limit or end switch confirming the damper or valve position. H. The starter shall provide a provision for Fireman’s Override operation. When activated, the starter run the motor in any mode (Hand, Off or Auto) regardless of other inputs or lack of inputs either manual or auto. The purpose of the Fireman’s Override input is to act as a smoke purge function. Fireman’s Override has priority over the Emergency Shutdown input. I. If the starter is controlled by a fire alarm or life safety system, the starter shall include an Emergency Shutdown input which will disable the starter from operating in either Hand or Auto mode regardless of other inputs either manual or auto. J. Manufacturer shall provide and install tags with engraved white lettering to designate equipment served 2.04.3 ENCLOSED FULL VOLTAGE NON-REVERSING (FVNR) COMBINATION STARTER A. Enclosed combination starters shall include all of the magnetic starter requirements in addition to a disconnecting method. Acceptable disconnects include: motor circuit protectors, UL 489 circuit breakers, or a fused disconnects. All disconnects shall include a lock-out mechanism when in the off position. B. The Motor Circuit protector shall be a UL listed 508 current limiting manual motor starter with magnetic trip elements only. The breaker shall carry a UL 508F rating (up to 100A frame size) which provides for coordinated short circuit rating for use with the motor contactor and provides a minimum interrupting rating of 30,000 AIC for the combination starter. C. Fused disconnect shall be UL 98 suitable for service entrance protection. It shall accommodate time delay J-style fuses. D. UL 489 breaker shall include thermal and magnetic trip mechanisms. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations and printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Contractors’ price shall include all items required as per manufacturers’ requirements. 3.03 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet or moisture damaged. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Install wall mounted enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural steel channels bolted to the wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks of lightweight structural steel channels bolted to the floor. B. Install fuses in each fusible-switch enclosed controller. Page 5 of 6 C. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. D. Install heater in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed. E. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment. F. Comply with NECA 1. G. Install in a professional manner. Any part or parts not meeting this requirement shall be replaced or rebuilt without extra expense to Owner. H. Install rotating equipment in static and dynamic balance. I. Provide foundations, supports, and isolators properly adjusted to allow minimum vibration transmission within the building. J. Correct objectionable noise or vibration transmission in order to operate equipment satisfactorily as determined by the Engineer. 3.05 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 16075 “Electrical Identification”. 1. Label each enclosure with an engraved nameplate. 3.06 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices and facility's central control system. Comply with requirements in Section 16123 "Wire and Cables". B. All controls wiring shall be installed in conduit in compliance with Section 16136 “Raceways”. C. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. D. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable. 1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position. 2. Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high- temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors. 3.07 ADJUSTING A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges. B. Adjust overload-relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected to the load side of the overload relays. C. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load ampere ratings and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Architect/Engineer before increasing settings. Page 6 of 6 D. Set the taps on reduced-voltage autotransformer controllers at 65 percent. E. Set field-adjustable switches and program microprocessors for required start and stop sequences in reduced-voltage solid-state controllers. F. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges. End of Section Page 1 of 3 SECTION 15190 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND PIPE MARKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 15050, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. 1.03 Refer to Architectural Sections for additional requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVE AND PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. Valves: 1. All valves shall be identified with a 1-1/2" diameter brass disc wired onto the handle. The disc shall be stamped with 1/2" high depressed black filled identifying numbers. These numbers shall be numerically sequenced for all valves on the job. 2. The number and description indicating make, size, model number and service of each valve shall be listed in proper operational sequence, properly typewritten. Three copies to be turned over to Owner at completion. 3. Tags shall be fastened with approved meter seal and 4 ply 0.018 smooth copper wire. Tags and fastenings shall be manufactured by the Seton Name Plate Company or approved equal. 4. All valves shall be numbered serially with all valves of any one system and/or trade grouped together. B. Pipe Marking: 1. All interior visible piping located in accessible spaces such as above accessible ceilings, equipment rooms, attic space, under floor spaces, etc., shall be identified with all temperature pipe markers as manufactured by W.H. Brady Company, 431 West Rock Ave., New Haven, Connecticut, or approved equal. 2. All exterior visible piping shall be identified with UV and acid resistant outdoor grade acrylic plastic markers as manufactured by Set Mark distributed by Seton Nameplate Company. Factory location 20 Thompson Road, Branford, Connecticut, or approved equal. 3. Generally, markers shall be located on each side of each partition, on each side Page 2 of 3 of each tee, on each side of each valve and/or valve group, on each side of each piece of equipment, and, for straight runs, at equally spaced intervals not to exceed 75 feet. In congested area, marks shall be placed on each pipe at the points where it enters and leaves the area and at the point of connection of each piece of equipment and automatic control valve. All markers shall have directional arrows. 4. Markers shall be installed after final painting of all piping and equipment and in such a manner that they are visible from the normal maintenance position. Manufacturer's installation instructions shall be closely followed. 5. Markers shall be colored as indicated below per ANSI/OSHA Standards: SYSTEM COLOR LEGEND Sanitary Sewer Green Vent Sanitary Sewer Storm Drain Green Storm Drain Domestic Water Green Domestic Water Domestic Hot Water Yellow Domestic Hot Supply Water Supply Domestic Hot Water Yellow Domestic Hot Re-circulating Water Return Gas Yellow Natural Gas C. Pipe Painting: 1. All piping exposed to view shall be painted as indicated or as directed by the Architect in the field. Confirm all color selections with Architect prior to installation. 2. The entire fire protection piping system shall be painted red. 3. All piping located in mechanical rooms and exterior piping shall be painted as indicated below: System Color Storm Sewer White Sanitary Sewer Waste and Vent Light Gray Domestic Cold Water Dark Blue Domestic Hot Water Supply and Return Orange Gas Yellow D. CEILING TACKS: Manufacturers: 1. Brady. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a) LEM. b) Seton. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch (20 mm) diameter color coded head. Page 3 of 3 Color code as follows: 1. Yellow - HVAC equipment 2. Red - Fire dampers/smoke dampers 3. Green - Plumbing valves 4. Blue - Heating/cooling valves PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 All labeling equipment shall be installed as per manufacturers printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Contractor’s price shall include all items required as per manufacturers' requirements. 3.03 All piping shall be cleaned of rust, dirt, oil and all other contaminants prior to painting. Install primer and a quality latex paint over all surfaces of pipe. 3.04 Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment. END OF SECTION PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 15240 SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Vibration and sound control products. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division One specification sections, apply to work of this section B. This section is Division-15 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division-15 section making reference to vibration control products specified herein. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of vibration control products, of type, size, and capacity required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Vibration and sound control products shall conform to ASHRAE criteria for average noise criteria curves for all equipment at full load conditions. C. Except as otherwise indicated, sound and vibration control products shall be provided by a single manufacturer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance, fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. B. Mason Industries, Inc. C. Noise Control, Inc. 2.02 GENERAL A. Provide vibration isolation supports for equipment, piping and ductwork, to prevent transmission of vibration and noise to the building structures that may cause discomfort to the occupants. PAGE 2 of 4 B. Model numbers of Amber/Booth products are included for identification. Products of the additional manufacturers will be acceptable provided they comply with all of the requirements of this specification. 2.03 FLOOR MOUNTED AIR HANDLING UNITS A. Provide Amber/Booth XLW-2, style C aluminum housed isolators sized for 2” static deflection. Cast iron or steel housings may be used provided they are hot-dip galvanized after fabrication B. If floor mounted air handling units are furnished with internal vibration isolation option, provide 2” thick Amber/Booth type NRC ribbed neoprene pads to address high frequency breakout and afford additional unit elevation for condensate drains. Ribbed neoprene pads shall be located in accordance with the air handling unit manufacturer’s recommendations. 2.04 SUSPENDED AIR HANDLING UNITS A. Provide Amber/Booth type BSWR-2 combination spring and rubber-in-shear isolation hanger sized for 2’’ static deflection. B. If suspended air handling units are furnished with internal vibration isolation option, furnish Amber/Booth type BRD rubber-in-shear or NR AMPAD 3/8’’ thick neoprene pad isolation hangers sized for approximately ½’’ deflection to address high frequency break-out. 2.05 SUSPENDED FANS AND FAN COIL UNITS A. Provide Amber/Booth type BSS spring hangers sized for 1’’ static deflection. 2.06 PIPING A. Provide spring and rubber-in-shear hangers, Amber/Booth type BSR in mechanical equipment rooms, for a minimum distance of 50 feet from isolated equipment for all chilled water and hot water piping 1-1/2’’ diameter and larger. Springs shall be sized for 1’’ deflection. B. Floor supported piping is required to be isolated with Amber/Booth type SW-1 open springs sized for 1’’ deflection. C. Furnish line size flexible connectors at supply and return of pumps. 2.07 CORROSION PROTECTION A. All vibration isolators shall be designed and treated for resistance to corrosion. B. Steel components: PVC coated or phosphated and painted with industrial grade enamel. Nuts, bolts, and washers: zinc-electroplated. PAGE 3 of 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements. 3.03 If internal isolation option is used on air handling units, the mechanical contractor shall verify proper adjustment and operation of isolators prior to start-up. All shipping brackets and temporary restraint devices shall be removed. 3.04 The vibration isolation supplier shall certify in writing that he has inspected the installation and that all external isolation materials and devices are installed correctly and functioning properly. END OF SECTION Page 1 of 4 SECTION 15260 PIPING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 15050, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. B. Work specified elsewhere. 1. Painting. 2. Pipe hangers and supports. C. All pipes subject to freezing conditions shall be insulated. 1.03 WARRANTY A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials or workmanship. B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Mildewing. 2. Peeling, cracking, and blistering. 3. Condensation on exterior surfaces. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance, fabrication procedures, project variations, and accessories. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. DELIVERY: Deliver undamaged materials in the manufacturer's unopened containers. Containers shall be clearly labeled with the insulation's flame and smoke ratings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 It is the intent of these specifications to secure superior quality workmanship resulting in an absolutely satisfactory installation of insulation from the standpoint of both function and appearance. Particular attention shall be given to valves, fittings, pumps, etc., requiring low Page 2 of 4 temperature insulation to insure full thickness of insulation and proper application of the vapor seal. All flaps of vapor barrier jackets and/or canvas covering must be neatly and securely smoothed and sealed down. 2.02 The type of insulation and its installation shall be in strict accordance with these specifications for each service, and the application technique shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. All insulation types, together with adhesives and finishes shall be submitted and approved prior to installation. 2.03 A sample quantity of each type of insulation and each type application shall be installed and approval secured prior to proceeding with the main body of the work. Condensation caused by improper installation of insulation shall be corrected by Installing Contractor. Any damage caused by condensation shall be made good at no cost to the Owner or Architect/Engineer. 2.04 All insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the facing or jacket to insulation) fire and smoke hazard as tested by Procedure ASTM E084, NFPA 255 and UL 723 not exceeding: Flame Spread 25 Smoke Developed 50 2.05 Accessories, such as adhesives, mastics and cements shall have the same component ratings as listed above. 2.06 All products or their shipping cartons shall have a label affixed, indicating flame and smoke ratings do not exceed the above requirements. 2.07 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Calcium silicate materials shall be as manufactured by Johns Manville. B. Glass fiber materials shall be as manufactured by Johns Manville or Owens-Corning and shall have the same thermal properties, density, fire rating, vapor barrier, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. C. Adhesives shall be as manufactured by Childers, Foster, HB Fuller or Armstrong, and shall have the same adhesive properties, fire rating, vapor seal, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. D. Armaflex elastomeric cellular thermal insulation by Armstrong. E. Phenolic foam insulation shall be as manufactured by Insul-Phen Insulation (Insul-Phen). F. Polyisocyanurate insulation shall be as manufactured by Dow “Trymer 2000 XP”. G. Metal jacketing and fitting covers shall be as manufactured by Childers or RPR Products. 2.08 MATERIALS A. For insulation purpose piping is defined as the complete piping system including supplies and returns, pipes, valves, automatic control valve bodies, fittings, flanges, strainers, thermometer well, unions, reducing stations, and orifice assemblies. B. INTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPE: provide fiberglass pipe insulation with all service jackets with self sealing lap joint. Page 3 of 4 C. EXTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPE: Provide elastomeric cellular thermal, or preformed phenolic foam pipe insulation with secured metal jacketing. D. DRAIN BODIES AND DOWN SPOUTS: Insulate horizontal roof drain down spouts, underside of roof drain bodies, chilled water waste lines from drinking fountain to junction with main waste stacks, and branch lines including traps and exposed underside of floor drains receiving cooling coil condensate, same as water piping where exposed to building occupant view. When concealed, insulation may be same as specified for external duct wrap. E. CONDENSATE DRAINAGE PIPING: Fire resistant fiberglass insulation; insulation not required when piping is exposed on roof. F. REFRIGERANT PIPING: Refrigerant pipe insulation shall be model "AP-2000", fire rated for use in environmental air plenums. Apply manufacturers recommended finish and sealant for exterior applications. G. METAL JACKETING: Utilize Childers “Strap-On” jacketing. Provide preformed fitting covers for all elbows and tees. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 All insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations and printed installation instructions, including high density inserts at all hangers and pipe supports to prevent compression of insulation. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements. 3.03 Pipes located outdoors or in tunnels shall be insulated same as concealed piping; and in addition shall have a jacket of 0.016 inch thick, smooth aluminum with longitudinal modified Pittsburg Z- Lock seam and 2 inch overlap. Jacketing shall be easily removed and replaced without damage. All butt joints shall be sealed with gray silicone. Galvanized banding is not acceptable. 3.04 All insulated piping located over driveways shall have an aluminum shield permanently banded over insulation to protect it from damage from car antennas. 3.05 WATER PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. The insulation shall be applied to clean, dry pipes with all joints firmly butted together. Where piping is interrupted by fittings, flanges, valves or hangers and at intervals not to exceed 25 feet on straight runs, an isolating seal shall be formed between the vapor barrier jacket and the bare pipe. The seal shall be by the applications of adhesive to the exposed insulation joint faces, carried continuously down to and along 4 inches of pipe and up to and along 2 inches of jacket. B. Pipe fittings and valves shall be insulated with pre-molded or shop fabricated glass fiber covers finished with two brush coats of vapor barrier mastic reinforced with glass fabric. C. All under lap surfaces shall be clean and free of dust, etc. before the SSL is sealed. These laps shall be firmly rubbed to insure a positive seal. A brush coat of vapor retarder shall be applied to all edges of the vapor barrier jacket. 3.06 FIRE RATED INSULATION A. All pipe penetrations through walls and concrete floors shall be fire rated by applying USG Page 4 of 4 Thermafiber in the space between the concrete and the pipe. B. The fire rating shall be additionally sealed by using 3M brand model CP 25 or 303 fire barrier caulk and putty. C. All fire rating material shall be insulated in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. PART 4 - SCHEDULES 4.01 LOW TEMPERATURE SURFACES MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS BASED ON FIBERGLASS A. Exposed exterior domestic water pipe: 1½ inch B. Interior domestic cold water pipe exposed to freezing temperatures: 1 inch C. Condensate drain lines: ¾ inch D. Drains receiving condensate: 1 inch E. Concealed horizontal leader from roof drain: 1½ inch blanket wrap Exposed horizontal leader from roof drain: 1 inch thick rigid with all service jackets F. Chilled Water Piping: (1) Located outdoors: 2 inch (2) Located indoors: (a) 4 inch and smaller: 1½ inch (b) Larger than 4 inch: 2 inch G. Refrigerant Piping (1) 1½“ and smaller 1½ inch (2) Larger than 1½ inch 1½ inch 4.02 HIGH TEMPERATURE SURFACES MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS A. Domestic Hot Water and Hot Water Circulating Piping 1 inch END OF SECTION PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 15290 DUCT INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Ductwork system insulation. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods B. Section 15170 - Motors and Motor Controllers C. Section 15190 - System Identification and Pipe Marking 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer’s Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this project. B. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method. 1. Exception: Outdoor mechanical insulation may have flame spread index of 75 and smoke developed index of 150. C. Duct and plenum insulation shall comply with minimum R-value requirements of 2009 International Energy Conservation Code. D. Adhesive and other material shall comply with NFPA and NBFU Standards No. 90A and 90B. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance, fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories. Provide 8x11 sample of product along with submittal. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in unopened containers with manufacturer’s stamp, clearly labeled with flame and smoke rating, affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products. B. Protect insulation against dirt, water and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged or wet insulation; remove from project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS PAGE 2 of 4 2.01 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. The type of insulation and its installation shall be in strict accordance with these specifications for each service, and the application technique shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. All insulation types, together with adhesives and finishes shall be submitted and approved before any insulation is installed. B. A sample quantity of each type of insulation and each type of application shall be installed and approval secured prior to proceeding with the main body of the work. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Glass fiber materials shall be as manufactured by Knauf, Certain-Teed, Johns-Manville or Owens-Corning and shall have the same thermal properties, density, fire rating, vapor barrier, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. B. Adhesives shall be as manufactured by Minnesota Mining, Arabol, Benjamin-Foster, Armstrong or Insulmastic, Inc., and shall have the same adhesive properties, fire rating, vapor seal, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. C. Ceramic fiber materials shall be as manufactured by Primer Refractories, A.P. Green Refractories or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and printed installation instructions. B. All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer's requirements. 3.02 EXTERNAL DUCT INSULATION A. Fasten all longitudinal and circumferential laps with outward clinching staples 3" on center. On rectangular ducts over 24" wide apply as above and hold insulation in place on bottom side with mechanical pins and clips on 12" centers. B. Seal all joints, fastener penetrations and other breaks in vapor barrier with 3 inch wide strips of white glass fabric embedded between two coats of vapor barrier mastic, Childers CP-30 or approved equal. Contractor may choose to seal all joints, fastener penetrations and other breaks in vapor barrier with 3 inch wide strips of aluminum foil tape. Duct tape shall be UL listed 181 A-P/B-FX and UL 723. Shurtape No. AF-982 or approved equivalent. C. All external duct insulation shall be Johns Manville Type 75 fiberglass duct wrap insulation with reinforced aluminum facing or approved equal. D. External duct wrap is required on all outside air ducts, return ducts, and supply air ducts that are not internally insulated. Duct wrap shall be provided as follows: 1. A minimum installed R-value of 6 when ducts are located in unconditioned spaces, such as ceiling plenum space. 2. A minimum installed R-value of 8 when ducts are located outside of the building. PAGE 3 of 4 3.03 DUCT LINER A. Duct liner shall be kept clean and dry during transportation, storage and installation. Care should be taken to protect the liner from exposure to the elements or damage from mechanical abuse. B. All portions of duct designed to receive duct liner shall be completely covered with liner as specified. The smooth, black, acrylic-coated surfaces with flexible glass cloth reinforcement shall face the airstream. All duct liner shall be cut to assure tight, overlapped corner joints. The top pieces shall be supported by the sidepieces. Duct liner shall be installed following the guidelines in the NAIMA “Duct Liner Installation Standard”. C. The duct liner shall be tested according to erosion test method in UL 181 and shall be guaranteed to withstand velocities in the duct system up to 5000 fpm without surface erosion. D. Duct liner shall be adhered to the sheet metal with full coverage of an approved adhesive that conforms to ASTM C 916, and all exposed leading edges and transverse joints shall be coated with Permacote factory-applied or field-applied edge coating and shall be neatly butted without gaps. Shop or field cuts shall be liberally coated with Johns Manville SuperSeal® duct butter and Edge Treatment or approved adhesive. E. Metal nosings shall be securely installed over transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream at forward discharge and at any point where lined duct is preceded by unlined duct. F. When velocity exceeds 4000 fpm (20.3 m/sec), use metal nosing on every leading edge. Nosing may be formed on duct or be channel or zee attached by screws, rivets or welds. G. The liner shall further be secured with Graham welding pins and washers on not more than 18 inch centers both vertical and horizontal surfaces, and the pins and washers shall be pointed up with adhesive. H. Duct liner shall be Johns Manville Linacoustic RC fiberglass duct liner with factory-applied edge coating or approved equal. The liner shall meet the Life Safety Standards as established by NFPA 90A and 90B, FHC 25/50 and Limited Combustibility and the air stream surface coating should contain an immobilized, EPA-registered, anti microbial agent so it will not support microbial growth as tested in accordance with ASTM G21 and G22. The duct liner shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 1071, with an NRC not less than .70 as tested per ASTM C 423 using a Type “A” mounting, and a thermal conductivity no higher than .25 BTU•in/(hr•ft2•F) at 75F mean temperature. I. Duct liner is required on all return air ductwork, return air boots and supply air ductwork downstream of the terminal units. Duct liner shall be provided as follows: 1. A minimum installed R-value of 6 when ducts are located in unconditioned spaces, such as ceiling plenum space. 2. A minimum installed R-value of 8 when ducts are located outside of the building. J. Line supply and return ductwork at connection of HVAC unit to a point of 15 feet upstream and downstream of the equipment with Johns Manville, Linacoustic RC with an R-value of 5 or approved equal for thermal insulation and noise control. The liner shall meet the safety standards as indicated above with NRC not less than 0.75 as tested per ASTM C423 using a type “A” mounting and thermal conductivity no higher than 0.24 BTU•in/(hr•ft2•F) at 75°F mean temperature. Attach with full cover coat of cement, duct PAGE 4 of 4 dimensions up to 16 inches, provide stick clips or screws and cap for dimension over 16 inches, space 16 inches o.c. maximum. Provide sheet metal liner cap over all leading edges of internal insulation exposed to air stream. 3.04 EXPOSED DUCTWORK LOCATED INDOORS A. Duct routed exposed shall be internally lined as specified. 3.05 EXPOSED DUCT LOCATED OUTDOORS A. All duct located outdoors shall be internally lined as specified and also shall have a 2" thick, 6 lb. density rigid board external duct insulation, finished with a white weatherproofed canvas material. 3.06 AIR DEVICE AND MISCELLANEOUS DUCT INSULATION A. The backside of all supply air devices shall be insulated with taped and sealed with external duct wrap equivalent to the insulation specified. B. The contractor shall install an additional layer of 1½ inch thick external fiberglass duct wrap on any portion of the supply air, return air, outside air, or exhaust air system that has condensation forming during any period of operation. The insulation shall be taped and sealed and located until all evidence of the condensation had been eliminated at no additional cost to the owner. END OF SECTION PAGE 1 of 16 SECTION 15410 PLUMBING PIPING AND VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and pipe fittings. B. Valves. C. Sanitary sewer piping system. D. Storm water piping system. E. Domestic water piping system. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02222 - Excavating. B. Section 02223 - Backfilling. C. Section 02225 - Trenching. D. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors. E. Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification. F. Section 15240 - Vibration Isolation. G. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation. H. Section 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI B31.1 - Power Piping. B. ANSI B31.9 - Building Service Piping. C. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. D. ASME Sec. 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. E. ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250 and 800. F. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. G. ASME B16.4 - Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Class 125 and 250. H. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings I. ASTM A47 - Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. PAGE 2 of 16 J. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless. K. ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. L. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal. M. ASTM B42 - Seamless Copper Pipe. N. ASTM B306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV). O. ASTM D1785 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40, 80, and 120. P. ASTM D2241 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR). Q. ASTM D2466 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. R. ASTM D2564 - Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. S. ASTM D2729 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. T. ASTM D2846 - Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Pipe, Fittings, Solvent Cements and Adhesives for Potable Hot Water Systems. U. ASTM F493 - Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. V. AWWA C111- Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. W. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains. X. CISPI 301 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems. Y. CISPI 310 - Joints for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, Pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Record actual locations of valves. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. PAGE 3 of 16 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating cast or marked on valve body. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and applicable state labor regulations. C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME Sec 9. D. Foreign pipe, fittings or valves are unacceptable. E. Piping shall be labeled along entire length indicating size, class, material specification, manufacturers name and country of origin. 1.08 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum 5 years documented experience and must be a domestic manufacturer. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. 1.09 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with plumbing and building codes having jurisdiction. B. Conform to applicable codes for the provision and installation of all required backflow prevention devices. C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation of backflow prevention devices. D. No PVC pipe or fittings will be allowed for any areas where pipe is to penetrate a fire rated assembly or to be installed in a return air plenum unless the entire length of all such piping is encased within a minimum 2 hour fire rated enclosure. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division One. B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. Tape will not be allowed as an acceptable end cover. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Division One. PAGE 4 of 16 B. Provide two repacking kits for each size valve. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SANITARY SOIL WASTE AND VENT PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OUTSIDE OF BUILDING A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785/D 2729 schedule 40; installed per ASTM D 2321. 1. Fittings: PVC, ASTM D 3311/D 2665 drainage pattern, with bell and spigot ends. Furnished by the same manufacturer as pipe or approved equal. 2. Joints: solvent weld with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement, installed per the requirements of ASTM D 2855. ***OR*** B. PVC pipe: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35; installed per ASTM D 2321. 1. Fittings: ASTM F 1336 PVC, drainage pattern, with bell and spigot ends. Furnished by the same manufacturer as pipe or approved equal. 2. Joints: ASTM F 477 or F 913, elastomeric gaskets or solvent weld. 2.02 SANITARY SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING, BELOW GRADE A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785/D 2665 schedule 40 1. Fittings: PVC, ASTM D 3311/D 2665 drainage pattern, with bell and spigot ends to be furnished by the same manufacturer as pipe or approved equal. 2. Joints: solvent weld with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement, clear, medium bodied, for sizes 3" and smaller and gray, heavy bodied, for sizes 4" and larger, mating surfaces shall be prepared with ASTM F 656 purple primer immediately prior to cement application. 2.03 SANITARY SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPING, WITHIN BUILDING, ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 888, hubless, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron, ASTM A 888 drainage pattern. 2. Joints: No hub, ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets and standard stainless steel clamp and solid shield assemblies constructed of type 300 series stainless steel. Clamp assemblies shall conform to FM 1680 where required by the administrative authority. B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, DWV, sizes 2" and smaller. 1. Fittings: ASME B 16.23 cast bronze, or ASME B16.29, wrought copper. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, solder, Grade 50B. C. Brass Pipe: ASTM B 43, chrome plated. 1. Fittings: ASME B 16.23 cast bronze, chrome plated. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, solder, Grade 50B. D. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785/D 2665 schedule 40 1. Fittings: PVC, ASTM D 3311/D 2665 drainage pattern, with bell and spigot ends to be furnished by the same manufacturer as pipe or approved equal. PAGE 5 of 16 2. Joints: ASTM D 2855, solvent weld with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement. 2.04 DOMESTIC WATER PIPE, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING, BELOW GRADE A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L, soft annealed. 1. Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast bronze, ASTM B 16.22 wrought copper alloy or ASTM B 16.26 cast bronze for flared fittings. 2. Joints: Sweat solder or flared. Note: No joints will be permitted in pressure water pipe below slab on grade. All such piping must be brought up above finished floor line a minimum of 12" before joining. Exception may be taken when pipe is fully enclosed in pressure rated sleeve and pre-approved by the Architect and Engineer. 2.05 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, WITHIN BUILDING, ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast bronze, or ASTM B 16.22 wrought copper alloy. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, solder. B. CPVC Pipe, ASTM D2846, Schedule 40. 1. Fittings: ASTM D2846. C. Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) ASTM F877 tubing for hot and cold water distribution systems. Manufactured in accordance with ASTM F876 and ASTM F877 and tested for compliance by an independent third-party agency 1. ASTM F876 cross-linked polyethylene (PEX) tube, ASTM F1807 fittings and ASTM F2159 fittings. 2. Non-barrier type. 3. Shall have a pressure and temperature rating of 160 PSI at 73°F, 100 PSI at 180°F and 80 PSI at 200°F 4. Tubing shall have a minimum of 6 months UV protection. 5. Tubing shall have a 25/50 flame and smoke developed rating as per ASTM E84. 6. Tubing shall have a 25 year warranty. 7. Tubing shall be used with copper manifolds and nipples. 2.06 FLANGES AND UNIONS A. Pipe size 2 inches and under: 1. Ferrous pipe: ANSI B16.39, 150 psig malleable iron threaded unions. 2. Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig bronze unions with soldered ends. 3. Ferrous pipe: ANSI B16.5, 150 psig forged steel flanges; screwed neck, 1/16" thick preformed neoprene gaskets. B. Pipe size 2-1/2 inches and larger: 1. Ferrous pipe: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges; weld neck, 1/16" thick preformed neoprene gaskets. 2. Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig slip-on bronze flanges; 1/16" thick preformed neoprene gaskets. C. Dielectric Connections: PAGE 6 of 16 1. Pipe size 2 inches and under: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 2. Pipe size 2-1/2 inch and larger: flange, connection as above, with water impervious isolation barrier. 2.07 GATE VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco No. T-111 up to 2-1/2"; F-617-O 3" and over. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Crane No. 428 up to 2-1/2"; 465-1/2 3" and over. b. Stockham No. B-100 up to 2-1/2"; G-623 3" and over. c. Grinnell No. 3010 up to 2-1/2"; 6020A 3" and over. B. Up to and including 2-1/2" Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, solid wedge threaded ends. C. Over 3" Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, solid wedge, flanged ends. D. Provide bronze tee or cast iron square nut operator for all valves installed below ground. 1. Valves 2-1/2" and smaller shall be equipped with ASTM B62 solid red bronze tee securely affixed to the valve stem. 2. Valves 3" and larger shall be equipped with a standard 2" square combination nut/socket securely affixed to the valve stem. 3. Provide owner with two extended tee handle operating wrenches for each type of valve head installed. 2.08 BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco No. T-585-70-66 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Crane No. 9303-B b. Stockham Model S-216BR-1R-T c. Grinnell No. 3700-6 B. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze two 600 PSI piece body full port, stainless steel ball and stem, Teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle and balancing stops, threaded ends with union. C. Ball valves used for balancing shall have memory stops. D. CPVC valves shall be Nibco CPVC-CTS 4770 or equivalent. End connections as per ASTM D2846, NSF 61, with CPVC ball and body. ******Delete when not specifying CPVC******* 2.09 SWING CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco No. T-413-B up to 2-1/2"; F-918 3" and over. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Crane No. 37 up to 2-1/2"; 372 3" and over. PAGE 7 of 16 b. Stockham No. B-319; up to 2-1/2"; G931 3" and over. c. Grinnell No. 3300 up to 2-1/2"; 6300A 3" and over. B. Up to and including 2-1/2 Inches: Bronze swing disc, screwed ends. C. Over 2-1/2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends. Include outside lever and adjustable weight where required for quiet operation. 2.10 SPRING LOADED (SILENT) CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco No. W-910 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Grinnell No. 402 B. Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, renewable composition disc, screwed, wafer, or flanged ends. 2.11 SOLDER A. 95.5% tin, 4% copper, 0.5% silver. B. Lead free, antimony free, zinc-free. C. Silvabrite 100, by Engelhard Corporation or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Coordinate and verify excavations under provisions of Division Two. B. Verify that all excavations are to the required grade, dry, and not over-excavated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale, oil and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. Install, clean bank sand backfill in trench to a minimum of 6 inches below pipe, and to cover all piping a minimum of 12 inches above pipe. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. B. All exposed sewer and water pipe in toilet rooms or other finished areas of the building shall be chromium plated. C. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. PAGE 8 of 16 D. Route piping in orderly manner, parallel and perpendicular to building column grid lines, unless indicated otherwise on drawings, and maintain gradients. E. Install piping to conserve building space and not conflict with other trades or interfere with intended use of space. F. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. G. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. H. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Valves installed beyond reasonable reach shall be provided with chain operator. I. Provide access doors where valves and operable fittings are not exposed. Access doors shall be of approved types set in locations pre-approved by submittal to the Architect. J. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 2 feet of cover, or maximum depth of frost penetration, which ever is the greater. K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. L. Provide encasement for and support of utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies. M. Gate valves installed below grade shall be covered with an adjustable cast iron roadway box extended to grade. Cover shall be cast iron with 'water' cast on top and set flush to finished paving or 2" above finished earthen grade. Box shall be supported from undisturbed soil or concrete base and shall not introduce any stress to piping under all traffic conditions. N. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not pre-finished, ready for finish painting. O. Excavate in accordance with Division Two. P. Backfill in accordance with Division Two. Q. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. R. Maintain uniformity in the installation of piping materials and joining methods. Do not mix materials types. S. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. T. Solder joints shall be wiped clean at each joint, remove excess metal while molten and flux residue when cooled. U. No PVC pipe or fittings will be allowed for any areas where pipe is installed in return air plenum unless the entire length of all such piping is encased within a minimum 2 hour fire rated enclosure. V. Installations of thermoplastic piping systems shall be in strict conformity to the manufacturers published instructions. Under ground drainage pipe installations shall be in conformity to ASTM D 2321. PAGE 9 of 16 W. Installation of solvent cement joints for PVC piping shall be in strict conformity to the requirements outlined in ASTM D 2855. X. Waste nipple from wall to tapped tee shall be schedule 40 threaded galvanized steel pipe or brass or copper with threaded adapter. Y. Provide approved PVC slip by cast iron no hub adaptor at each transition from underground PVC piping to above ground cast iron pipe using standard or wide bodied no hub couplings for as specified elsewhere in this section. Transition shall be made as close as possible to floor for sanitary DWV piping systems and at test tee for storm drainage piping. Support vertical cast iron pipe from floor anchors with using riser clamp and galvanized all thread rod as specified in section 15140. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Install union downstream of all valves at equipment or apparatus connections. B. Install male adapters each side of threaded valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to tube prior to make-up of threaded connections. C. Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate all equipment items, distinct parts of systems, or vertical risers. D. Each plumbing fixture shall have a shut-off valve on each hot water and cold water supply line. E. Each plumbing water rough-in stub out shall be fitted with a shut off valve. F. Install globe, ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or balancing (manual flow control) services. G. Ball valves installed in insulated piping shall be fitted with extended lever operators of sufficient length to raise handle above the insulation jacket material. Where valve is used for throttling service valve handle shall be equipped with adjustable memory stop device. H. Provide spring loaded, non-slam, check valves on discharge of water pumps. 3.05 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. All drainage lines in the building shall have 1/4 inch to the foot fall where possible and not less than 1/8 inch to the foot fall toward the main sewer. Pipe must be so laid that the slope will be uniform and continuous. Permission shall be secured from the Architect and Engineer before proceeding with any Work where existing conditions prevent the installation at minimum grade specified. B. Slope all water piping and arrange to drain at low points. Provide loose key operated, polished chrome, sill cock flush to wall where fixture stop will not suffice for this requirement. 3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work, all domestic water systems shall be complete, thoroughly flushed clean and free of all foreign matter or erection residue. B. Ensure PH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). PAGE 10 of 16 C. On building side of the main shut off valve, provide a 3/4" connection through which chlorine can be introduced into the water piping D. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, in sufficient quantity to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual free chlorine solution throughout the entire domestic water piping systems. E. Bleed water from outlets as required to ensure complete distribution and test for disinfectant residual at a minimum 15 percent of total outlets. F. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. G. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. H. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. I. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 5 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. 3.07 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide new sanitary and storm sewer services connecting to existing building services or utility lines as shown on the drawings. B. Before commencing work, field verify invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover as required. C. Provide new domestic water service connecting to existing building services or utility lines as shown on plans. Assure connections are in compliance with requirements of the jurisdiction having authority. D. Extension of services to the building shall be fabricated from the same materials as the utility service lines or those materials specified herein. E. Should points of connection vary from those indicated on the drawings contractor shall properly allow for this in the actual connections field fabricated. 3.08 RODDING SEWERS A. All sanitary soil and waste lines, both in the building and out, shall be rodded out after completion of the installation. B. This Work shall be done, as part of the contract, to make certain that all lines are clear, and any obstruction that may be discovered shall be removed immediately. Rodding shall be accomplished by utilizing a rotary cutter, which shall be full size of pipe being cleaned. 3.09 TESTING OF PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS A. During the progress of the work and upon completion, tests shall be made as specified herein and as required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction, including Inspectors, Owner or Architect. The Architect or duly authorized Construction Inspector shall be notified in writing at least 2 working days prior to each test or other Specification requirement which requires action on PAGE 11 of 16 the part of the Construction Inspector. B. Tests shall be conducted as part of this work and shall include all necessary instruments, equipment, apparatus, and service as required to perform the tests with qualified personnel. Submit proposed test procedures, recording forms, and test equipment for approval prior to the execution of testing. C. Tests shall be performed before piping of various systems have been covered or furred-in. For insulated piping systems testing shall be accomplished prior to the application of insulation. D. All piping systems shall be tested and proved absolutely tight for a period of not less than 24 hours. Tests shall be witnessed by the Architect or an authorized representative and pronounced satisfactory before pressure is removed or any water drawn off. E. Leaks, damage or defects discovered or resulting from test shall be repaired or replaced to a like new condition. Leaking pipe joints, or defective pipe, shall be removed and replaced with acceptable materials. Test shall be repeated after repairs are completed and shall continue until such time as the entire test period expires without the discovery of any leaks. F. Wherever conditions permit, each piping system shall thereafter be subjected to its normal operating pressure and temperature for a period of no less than five 5 days. During that period, it shall be kept under the most careful observation. The piping systems must demonstrate the propriety of their installation by remaining absolutely tight during this period. G. Domestic Water: 1. .Pressure test at one and one half times the normal working pressure or 125 psig, which ever is the greater, for 24 hours. H. Sanitary Soil, Waste and Vents and Storm Sewer: 1. After the rough-in soil, waste and vent and other parts of the sanitary sewer including branch laterals have been set from the lowest level, at point of connection to existing utility lines, to above the floor line, all outlets shall be temporarily plugged or capped, except as are required for testing as described herein. Ground work shall not permit the backfill of trenches to cover any joints until the completion of testing. Back fill shall be limited to mid sections of full joints of piping only. For pipe in ground the piping shall be readied as described herein and filled with water to a verifiable and visible level to 10' above the lowest portions of the system being tested. 2. On multi-level buildings only one floor level shall be tested at a time. Each floor shall be tested from a level below the structure of the floor, or the outlet of the building in the case of the lowest level, to a level of 12 inches above the floor immediately above the floor being tested, or the top of the highest vent in the case of the highest building level. The pipes for the level being tested shall be filled with water to a verifiable and visible level as described above and be allowed to remain so for 24 hours. If after 24 hours the level of the water has been lowered by leakage, the leaks must be found and stopped, and the water level shall again be raised to the level described, and the test repeated until, after a 24 hour retention period, there shall be no perceptible lowering of the water level in the system being tested. 3. Should the completion of these tests leave any reasonable question or doubt of the integrity of the installation, additional tests including peppermint smoke, or other measures shall be performed to demonstrate the reliability of these systems to the complete satisfaction of the Owner's duly authorized representative. Such tests shall be conducted and completed before any joints in plumbing are concealed or made inaccessible. PAGE 12 of 16 3.10 COMPLETE FUNCTIONING OF WORK A. All work fairly implied as essential to the complete functioning of the systems shown on the Drawings and Specification shall be completed as part of the work of this Division unless specifically stated otherwise. It is the intention of the Drawings and Specification to establish the type and function of systems but not to set forth each item essential to the functioning of any system. In case of doubt as to the work intended or in the event of amplification or clarification thereof, the Contractor shall call upon the Architect for Supplementary Instructions and Drawings, etc. END OF SECTION PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Cleanouts. B. Backflow preventors. C. Water hammer arrestors. D. Thermostatic mixing valves. E. Hose bibbs hydrants. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 7 Roofing: Roof drains. B. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors. C. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping. D. Section 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventers with Immediate Atmospheric Vent. B. ANSI/ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers. C. ANSI/ASSE 1013 - Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle. D. ANSI/ASSE 1019 - Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining Anti-Backflow Types. E. ANSI A112.21.1 - Floor Drains. F. ANSI A112.21.2 - Roof Drains. G. ANSI A112.26.1 - Water Hammer Arresters. H. PDI WH-201 Water Hammer Arresters I. AWWA C506 - Backflow Prevention Devices - Reduced Pressure Principle and Double Check Valve Types. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by same manufacturer throughout. 1.05 SUBMITTALS PAGE 2 of 6 A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Submit product data under provisions of Division One. C. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements. 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, and backflow preventers. 1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Operation Data: Indicate frequency of treatment required for interceptors. C. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division One. B. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Division One. B. Provide two loose keys for hose bibbs and spare hose end vacuum breakers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - ROOF DRAINS A. Jay R. Smith B. Watts C. Zurn D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One. E. Roof Drains 1. Roof Drains: ANSI A112.21.2; Galvanized cast iron body with sump, removable cast aluminum dome strainer, membrane flange and membrane clamp with integral gravel stop, with adjustable underdeck clamp roof sump receiver waterproofing flange controlled flow weir leveling frame adjustable extension sleeve (for insulation) perforated or slotted ballast guard extension for inverted roof. 2. Roof Overflow Drains (OD): Galvanized cast iron body and clamp collar and bottom clamp ring; pipe extended to 2 inches above flood elevation. PAGE 3 of 6 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - CLEANOUTS A. Zurn B. Watts C. Jay R. Smith D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One. E. Cleanouts 1. Exterior Surfaced Areas: Square cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover; 2. Exterior Unsurfaced Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketted cover; 3. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Galvanized cast iron, two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and adjustable nickel-bronze strainer, round with scoriated cover in service areas and round with depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas; 4. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketted cover, and 6” round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw; 5. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Calked or threaded type., Provide bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders. 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - HOSE BIBBS/HYDRANTS A. Woodford B. Zurn C. Jay R. Smith D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One. E. HOSE BIBBS/HYDRANTS 1. Bronze or brass, replaceable hexagonal disc, hose thread spout, chrome plated where exposed to interior with lockshield and removable key, integral vacuum breaker in conformance with ANSI/ASSE 1011; 2. Wall Hydrant: ANSI/ASSE 1019; non-freeze, self-draining type with rough chrome plated lockable recessed box hose thread spout, lockshield and removable key, and vacuum breaker; 2.04 RECESSED VALVE BOX A. Manufacturers: 1. Oatey. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 3. Sioux Chief 4. Guy Gray. 5. Washing Machine: Plastic preformed rough-in box with brass quarter turn ball valves and water hammer arrestors on both hot and cold connections, socket for waste, slip in finishing cover; PAGE 4 of 6 6. Refrigerator: Plastic preformed rough-in box with quarter turn brass ball valve, slip in finishing cover; 2.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - BACKFLOW PREVENTORS A. Watts B. Wilkins C. Febco D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One. E. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 1. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: ANSI/ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze and plastic internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve which opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks; 2. Double Check Valve Assemblies: ANSI/ASSE 1012; Bronze body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating check valves with intermediate atmospheric vent; 2.06 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Sioux Chief B. Wilkins C. Zurn D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One. E. WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS 1. ANSI A112.26.1; sized in accordance with PDI WH-201, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range -100 to 300 degrees F (-73 to 149 degrees C) and maximum 250 psig (1700 kPa) working pressure; 2.07 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES A. Powers B. Bradley C. Leonard D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One. E. Thermostatic Mixing Valves 1. Provide thermostatic mixing valve, with check valve, volume control shut-off valve on outlet, stem type thermometer on outlet, strainer stop check on inlet, mounted in lockable cabinet of 16 gage (1.5 mm) prime coated steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION PAGE 5 of 6 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate cutting, forming of roof and/or floor construction to receive drains to required invert elevations. 3.02 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit intended performance. B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. D. Pipe relief from back flow preventer to nearest drain. END OF SECTION PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 15050, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. A. WORK INCLUDED: Include the following Work in addition to items normally part of this Section: 1. Plumbing fixtures. 2. Drains and cleanouts. B. WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: 1. Piping systems. 2. Pipe valves, and fittings. 3. Plumbing systems testing. 1.03 WARRANTY A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials and workmanship. B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Noisy operation. 2. Noticeable deterioration of finish. 3. Leakage of water. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance, fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories. C. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS: Provide pre-printed operating and maintenance instructions for each item specified. Instruct and demonstrate the proper operation and maintenance to the Owner's designated representative. PAGE 2 of 4 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. DELIVERY: Deliver clearly labeled, undamaged materials in the manufacturers' unopened containers. B. TIMING AND COORDINATION: Deliver materials to allow for minimum storage time at the project site. Coordinate delivery with the scheduled time of installation. C. STORAGE: Store materials in a clean, dry location, protected from weather and abuse. 1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Confirm and field coordinate that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. PLUMBING FIXTURES: 1. GENERAL: Provide plumbing fixtures as specified on drawings. The approved equal products manufacturers are as follows: a. Water closet, urinals, lavatories, bath tubs and showers: American Standard, Kohler, Eljer. b. Stainless steel sinks: Elkay, Just and Moen. c. Mop sinks: Stern-Williams, Fiat d. Faucets: American Standard, Kohler, Eljer, e. Faucets: Chicago, T&S Brass, Zurn f. Faucets: Moen, Delta Commercial, Speakman g. Shower valves: Leonard, Powers, Symmons, Chicago h. Shower Systems: Bradley, Acorn, Willoughby i. Flush Valves: Sloan “Royal” j. Flush Valves: Sloan “Regal Pro”, Zurn “AquaVantage” k. Flush Valves: Sloan “Regal”, Zurn “AquaFlush” l. Drinking fountains: Halsey Taylor, Elkay, Haws, Oasis and Sunroc. m. Floor drains and roof drains: Zurn, J.R. Smith, Josam and Wade. n. Emergency Fixtures: Bradley, Chicago, Haws, Speakman and Encon 2. CHAIR CARRIERS: ANSI/ASME A112.6.1.; Adjustable cast iron frame, integral drain hub and vent, adjustable spud, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs with nuts and washers. As manufactured by Zurn, J. R. Smith, Josam or Wade. 3. DRINKING FOUNTAIN & URINAL WALL SUPPORTS: ANSI/ASME A112.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs for fixture hanger, bearing studs. As manufactured by Zurn, J. R. Smith, Josam or Wade. 4. TRAPS, STOPS AND RISERS: Heavy pattern as manufactured by McGuire, Chicago or Zurn. B. CLEANOUTS: 1. GENERAL: Provide cleanouts as shown on Drawings and as required by the city building code. PAGE 3 of 4 2. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Zurn J. R. Smith, Josam and Wade. 3. TYPES: a. FINISHED FLOOR CLEANOUTS: Provide cast iron, adjustable floor level assembly with round nickel bronze top and gasket cover. b. RESILIENT OR TILE FINISHED FLOOR CLEANOUTS: Provide cast iron, adjustable assembly with round nickel-bronze top with gasketed water tight cover and depressed top to receive flooring finish material. c. DRY WALL CLEANOUTS: Provide cast iron tee and counter sink bronze plug with square nickel bronze frame and stainless steel cover. d. Provide membrane clamp rings for slab on grade cleanouts. e. All cleanouts shall have tapered bronze plugs. f. All cleanouts outside of building on grade shall be set in a 18" x 18" x 4" thick concrete pad. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. EXAMINATION OF CONDITIONS: Examine conditions affecting this Work. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the proper authority and do not proceed until those conditions have been corrected. Commencing Work implies acceptance of existing conditions as satisfactory to the outcome of this Work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures in locations and heights as shown on Drawings or as directed by the Architect. B. Install materials plumb, level, securely, and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. All rough-in pipe openings, for final connections with all supply waste soil and vent systems shall be closed with caps or plugs during early stages of construction and installation. Tape shall not be considered sufficient protection. D. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures. E. Provide gate valves in piping serving batteries of fixtures. Label stops "Hot" and "Cold." Valves to be located above accessible ceiling. If ceiling are not accessible, provide access panels of adequate size to make valves fully accessible. F. Plumbing fixtures shall be supported by a concealed chair carrier where required to properly support the fixture specified. All carriers to be securely mounted, bolted and checked prior to concealment. G. Caulk around fixtures with best grade white silicone caulking. Do not use grout. H. All handles on supply and drainage fittings or other brass items shall be properly lined up and adjusted. Fittings shall not be left in any haphazard manner. I. All fixtures shall have individual chrome plated loose key cutoff stops on supply lines. Where same are not specified as a part of the fixture trim, they shall be installed as close to fixtures as possible in the hot and cold water supply. J. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. PAGE 4 of 4 K. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons. L. Hot and cold water riser air chambers: Provide air chambers for hot and/or cold water riser located at the rough-in tee at all fixtures. The air chamber shall be of the same materials and the next larger diameter than the required rough-in supply pipe and a minimum of 24" tall. The contractor may install water hammer arrestors in lieu of air chambers. Water hammer arrestors shall be PDI Certified and sized and placed as recommended by manufacture. Provide an accessible isolation valve and proper access to arrestor for replacement. 3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Division One. B. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of Division One. B. At completion clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. 3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Division One. B. Do not permit use of fixtures. 3.07 ADA ACCESSIBLE FIXTURES A. Install fixtures to heights, indicated on architectural drawings. B. Handicapped fixtures shall be installed to required heights, shall be of types suitable for, and supplied with controls properly installed, to comply with requirements as directed by ADA Accessibility of Federal Registry, Part III, Department of Justice 28 CFR 36 and comply with all state and local ADA Code requirements. C. Exposed accessible sink or lavatory p-trap and angle valve assemblies shall be insulated with the fully molded, Truebro, Handi Lav-guard insulation kit. Provide the proper model for fixtures specified. All kits shall be White or as selected by Architect. D. Wall mounted drinking fountains and coolers which protrude into passages or corridor space, whether single or paired with adjacent accessible fixture, shall be supplied with skirt or apron to lower the underside clearance of non-accessible fixture equal to that required for accessible fixture. END OF SECTION PAGE 1 of 2 SECTION 15530 REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 15050, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL Provide for the systems as shown. Submit shop drawings of piping systems showing all traps, pipe sizes, and accessories; drawing to be marked "Approved", and signed by a representative of the Application Engineering Department of the condensing unit manufacturer. Pipe sizes shall be as recommended by unit manufacturer. Refer to piping schematic on drawings. 2.02 MATERIAL A. PIPE: Copper ACR tubing. B. FITTINGS: Wrought copper streamlined sweat fitting. C. SOLDER: Sil-Fos, except on valves use solder recommended by valve manufacturer. 2.03 ACCESSORIES All accessories shall be UL listed and rated in accordance with ARI Standard 710. A. On systems 7-1/2 tons and larger, each separate refrigerant circuit shall have a separate filter dryer. Each filter dryer shall have a replaceable core and a three valve bypass. The filter drier shall be full line size and installed in the refrigerant liquid line. The filter shall have a minimum 4-3/4 inches diameter shell with removable flange and gasket. Flange shall be tapped for 1/4 inch FPT access valve. Size filter-drier for maximum 2.0 psi pressure drop at evaporator operating temperature. Similar to Mueller Brass Company model Drymaster micro-guard refillable filter series SD-485 through SD19217 or Sporlan catch-all. B. On systems less than 7-1/2 tons, the filter dryer shall be the sealed type sizes as above. One drier per refrigerant circuit. C. Liquid-Moisture Indicator shall be installed in liquid refrigerant line full line size similar to Mueller Brass Company model "Vuemaster" with soldered ends. D. Thermostatic expansion valve shall have adjustable super heat and be as manufactured by Sporlan. PAGE 2 of 2 2.04 EVACUATION Evacuate moisture completely by applying a commercial vacuum pump for a minimum of 24 hours. Moisture indicator shall indicate a completely moisture-free condition at time of final inspection. The vacuum pump shall run until the system indicates a maximum of 35 degrees FDB. The system shall be flushed with the operating refrigerant and the vacuum pump connected and rerun to repeat the evacuation. Evaluation shall be performed under supervision of the Engineer. 2.05 FREON AND OIL A. Contractor shall leave the refrigeration system with a full charge of freon and oil and shall be responsible for the maintenance of a full charge of freon and oil in the systems for a period of one year from date of acceptance. B. Should any leaks in the refrigeration system occur during the guarantee period, the Contractor shall eliminate such leaks and recharge system to a full charge of freon and oil at no cost to the Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 All equipment and piping shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer’s requirements. END OF SECTION PAGE 1 of 2 SECTION 15671 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 15050, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS A. Air-cooled condensing unit shall be designed for use with split system having a remote direct-expansion (DX) cooling coil mounted in evaporator fan unit. Capacity shall be as called for on the drawings when matched to the appropriate evaporator coil. B. Condensing unit shall consist of high-efficiency hermetic compressor, air-cooled condenser with quiet fan, factory wired controls, R-22 refrigerant and refrigeration circuit and valves. C. Cabinet shall be heavy-gauge galvanized steel with bonding primer and baked-enamel finish coat. The entire cabinet shall be protected from rust. D. Compressor shall be protected from excessive current and temperatures and shall be provided with a thermostatically controlled crankcase heater to operate only when needed for protection of the compressor. Compressor shall be spring-mounted on rubber isolators. Compressor shall be located in compartment isolated from condenser fan and coil. Provide a high-capacity dryer in the system to remove moisture and dirt. E. Condenser fan shall be directly connected to a weather-protected, quiet, high-efficiency motor. Fan guard shall be provided and shall be protected from rust by PVC finish. Condenser coil shall be aluminum fin with copper tube. F. Connections for refrigerant suction and liquid lines shall be extended outside the cabinet and provided with service valves with gauge connections. G. Power connections shall be made to the connectors located inside the electrical connection box. H. Standard operating and safety controls shall include high-pressure switch, low pressure switch, compressor overload service, and solid-state timed-off control. I. All components (parts and labor) of the sealed refrigeration circuit shall be warranted by the manufacturer for five years. PAGE 2 of 2 2.02 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT A. Auxiliary equipment shall consist of refrigerant lines prepared for the unit involved. These lines shall be cleaned, dried, and pressurized at the factory. B. Low ambient kit to allow operation at outside temperature below 35 deg. F (2 deg. C) shall be provided. C. Expansion valve shall be provided with the evaporator coil. D. Provide thermostat to match the requirements of the job. Thermostat shall provide subbase with Heat-Cool-Off and Fan On-Auto switch. See section on controls for other related requirements. E. Provide polyethylene structural base designed for that service and intended to support the unit and eliminate vibration transmission. F. Provide hard-start kit with unit. G. Provide guards for condenser coils. 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Condensing unit shall be the make and model number shown on the drawings or acceptable equivalents by Lennox, Carrier, York, or Trane. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 All HVAC equipment shall be installed as per manufacturers printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install the condensing unit on proper foundation as shown on the drawings, and in location that will not restrict the air entry or discharge from the unit. B. Install refrigerant lines as recommended by the manufacturer, taking care not to lose the refrigerant charge contained in the lines, or allow air to enter the lines or equipment. Locate the lines in such a way as to not obstruct access to the condensing unit or other equipment. Lines located under ground or under concrete shall be installed in a PVC pipe conduit for protection. C. Provide electrical connections as required by the applicable codes. Provide control wiring required. All power wiring and control wiring shall be in conduit and located so as not to obstruct access to the unit or other equipment. 3.04 TESTING A. Operate the condensing unit and the system to assure that unit is operating properly and without excessive noise and vibration. B. Read and record the power draw and the refrigeration suction and liquid pressures as required by Balancing and Test, Section 15990. END OF SECTION PAGE 1 of 2 SECTION 15854 DX" FAN COIL UNIT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 15050, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FAN COIL UNITS Fan coil units shall be factory built, manufactured as scheduled on drawings. Carrier, York, Trane or McQuay shall be considered as equal, if they comply with the specification and schedule. Special Note: Contractor shall field verify exact clearances required for air handling units. Units shall be field located as required and shop drawings shall indicate final location for approval by Architect/Engineer. A. Furnish and install fan coil units of the type, capacities, ratings and drive motor horsepower shown on the drawings. B. Units shall be factory fabricated, draw-thru type, and shall have fan section, cooling coil section, condensate drain pan, adjustable blower drive with motor on resilient mounted base, vee-belts with guard, filter section, and mixing box (if scheduled) assembled as integrated air handling units. C. REQUIREMENTS: 1. Mill-galvanized steel, rigidly framed, braced, and reinforced; access panels each side of unit; minimum panel ga. - 18; minimum weight formed framing member 14 ga. 2. Fan section, cooling coil section, and outlet frame throats shall be internally insulated at the factory with 1" thick, 3/4 PCF density, Neoprene coated fiberglass cemented in place with water-proof adhesive, having fire-retardant characteristics in accordance with NFPA 90A. 3. Drain pan shall be not lighter than 14 ga.; extend completely under the coil section and be all-galvanized, foam insulated pan with drain connections. 4. When the fan coil unit is installed above an accessible ceiling, the unit shall incorporate a secondary drain pan. The secondary pan shall be fabricated from galvanized sheet metal, 16 gauge minimum with cross breaking sloped towards a drain. The sides shall be a minimum 2" tall and the corners shall be soldered watertight. The top edge shall have a 1/4" hem to provide additional rigidity and the secondary pan shall be supported at a minimum of six points. The pan shall extend on all sides a minimum of 3" beyond the sides of the unit casing. Route the secondary drain piping to a conspicuous location or install a float switch at the low point in the secondary pan. The secondary pan should be sloped a minimum PAGE 2 of 2 of 1/8" per foot and supported so that the unit is not in contact with the bottom of the secondary pan. 5. The fan section, including wheels, shafts, bearings, drive, etc., shall be statically and dynamically balanced as an assembly, and the shaft shall not pass through the first critical speed, while accelerating from rest to operating speed. Submittal data shall state the first critical shaft speed. Shaft bearings shall be of vacuum de-gassed steel, and shall be selected for 200,000 hours average life. 6. Coil shall be as hereinafter specified. 2.02 COILS A. Cooling coils shall be cartridge type and, when mounted in air handling units, shall be removable from either end. Coils shall be constructed of copper tubes with aluminum fins and shall be designed for even distribution of air across the face of the coils; air shall not pass around coil frames: Coils shall have same end connection for DX or chilled water piping. B. DX refrigerant coils shall be counter-flow refrigerant to air, shall have inlet and outlet connections permanently marked shall have thermostatic expansion valves with adjustable super heat. C. Maximum face velocity across cooling coils shall be 500 FPM, unless noted otherwise on schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 All HVAC equipment shall be installed as per manufacturers printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements. END OF SECTION PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 15860 POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Centrifugal roof ventilators. B. Ceiling and inline ventilators. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15050 – Basic Materials and Methods B. Section 15170 – Motors and Motor Controllers C. Section 15240 – Sound and Vibration Control D. Section 15950 – Controls E. Section 15990 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Compliance: Fans shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL 705 "Power Ventilators." B. UL Compliance: Fans and components shall be UL listed and labeled. C. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Compliance (NRTL): Fans and components shall be NRTL listed and labeled. The term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards. E. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code." F. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA Standard 301 "Method for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test Data." Test fans in accordance with AMCA Standard 300 "Test Code for Sound Rating." Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Sound Ratings Seal. G. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings in accordance with AMCA Standard 210/ASHRAE Standard 51 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating. 1.04 SUBMITTALS 1. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections: 2. Product data for selected models, including specialties, accessories, and the following: PAGE 2 of 6 a. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. b. Certified fan sound power ratings. c. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories. d. Materials gages and finishes, include color charts. e. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. f. Full color paint samples. 3. Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, components, and location and size of field connections. 4. Coordination drawings, in accordance with Division 15 Section "Basic Materials and Methods", for roof penetration requirements and for reflected ceiling plans drawn accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations and units mounted above ceiling. Show the following: a. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations. b. Ceiling suspension members. c. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. d. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. e. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinkler heads, access panels, and special moldings. 6. iring diagrams that detail power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed wiring and field- installed wiring. 7. Product certificates, signed by manufacturer, certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. 8. Maintenance data for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 15 Section "Basic Materials and Methods". 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Fans shall be stored and handled in accordance with the unit manufacturer’s instructions. B. B. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points. C. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the final location following manufacturer's written instructions. D. Deliver fan units as a factory-assembled unit to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. ACME, Inc. B. Loren Cook Company C. Greenheck Fan Corporation PAGE 3 of 6 D. Substitutions under provisions of Division One. 2.02 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Provide fans that are factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory finished with indicated capacities and characteristics. B. Fans and Shafts shall be statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. C. Provide factory baked-enamel finish coat after assembly. Color shall be verified during the submittal process. 2.03 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS A. Fan shall be a spun aluminum, centrifugal, roof mounted, direct driven or belt driven as indicated. B. Fan shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL 705). Fan shall bear the AMCA certified ratings seal for sound and air performance. C. The fan shall be of bolted and welded construction utilizing corrosion resistant fasteners. The spun aluminum structural components shall be constructed of minimum 16 gauge marine alloy aluminum, bolted to a rigid aluminum support structure. The aluminum base shall have continuously welded curb cap corners for maximum leak protection. The discharge baffle conduit chase shall be provided through the curb cap and into the motor compartment to facilitate wiring connections. The motor, bearings and drives shall be mounted on a minimum 14 gauge steel power assembly, isolated from the unit structure with rubber vibration isolators. These components shall be enclosed in a weather-tight compartment, separated from the exhaust airstream. Unit shall bear an engraved aluminum nameplate and shall be shipped in transit tested packaging. D. Wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of 100% aluminum, including a precision machined cast aluminum hub. Wheel inlet shall overlap an aerodynamic aluminum inlet cone to provide maximum performance and efficiency. Wheel shall be balanced in accordance with AMCA standard 204-96, balance quality and vibration levels for fans. E. Motor shall be heavy duty type with permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings. F. Bearings shall be designed and individually tested specifically for use in air handling applications. Construction shall be heavy duty regreasable ball type in a cast iron housing selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speed. G. Accessories: The following accessories are required. 1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory-wired through an internal aluminum conduit. 2. Bird Screens: Removable ½ inch mesh, 16 gauge, aluminum or brass wire. 3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base, factory set to close when fan stops. PAGE 4 of 6 4. Dampers: Motor-operated, parallel-blade, volume control dampers mounted in curb base. 5. Roof Curbs: Prefabricated, 12 inch high, heavy-gauge, galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 2 inch thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; built-in cant and mounting flange for flat roof decks; and 2 inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base. 2.04 CEILING AND INLINE VENTILATORS A. Ceiling and inline ventilators shall be direct drive or belt drive as indicated, centrifugal blower type. Fan wheel shall be constructed of galvanized steel and shall be dynamically balanced. The housing shall be constructed of minimum 20 gauge corrosion resistant galvanized steel and acoustically insulated for quiet operation. Blower and motor assembly shall be easily removable from the housing without disturbing the ductwork. The motor shall be permanently lubricated with built-in thermal overload protection and shall be factory tested prior to shipment. The ceiling ventilators shall be furnished standard with a powder- painted white steel grille. B. Ventilators shall be certified and licensed to bear the AMCA Seal for Air and Sound Performance. Ventilator performance shall be based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA publication 211 and comply with the requirements of the AMCA Certified Ratings Program. Fan sound power level ratings shall be based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA publication 311 and comply with the requirements of the AMCA Certified Ratings Program. Ventilators shall be UL listed and CSA certified. C. Accessories: The following accessories are required. 1. Dampers: a. Aluminum backdraft damper. b. Motor-operated volume control damper. c. U.L. listed ceiling radiation damper for ceiling fans comply with NFPA Standard 90A rated for 3 hours. 2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type with thermal overload protection. 3. Speed Controls: Fan mounted, solid state speed controller. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer’s requirements. END OF SECTION Page 1 of 3 SECTION 15881 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Ceiling air diffusers. B. Wall registers and grilles. C. Louvers. D. Other air devices indicated on drawings and schedules. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15050 – Basic Materials and Methods B. Section 15890 – Metal Ductwork C. Section 15910 – Ductwork Accessories D. Section 15990 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air distribution devices of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Codes and Standards: 1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air distribution devices in accordance with ARI 650 "Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets". 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air distribution devices in accordance with ASHRAE 70 "Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets". 3. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA 500 "Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters". 4. AMCA Seal: Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified Rating Seal. 5. NFPA Compliance: Install air distribution devices in accordance with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems". 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air distribution devices including the following: 1. Schedule of air distribution devices indicating drawing designation, room location, number furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished. 2. Data sheet for each type of air distribution devices, and accessory furnished; indicating construction, finish, and mounting details. Page 2 of 3 3. Performance data for each type of air distribution devices furnished, including aspiration ability, temperature and velocity traverses; throw and drop; and noise criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawing for each type of air distribution devices, indicating materials and methods of assembly of components. C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data, including cleaning instructions for finishes, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Division 1. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver air distribution devices wrapped in factory-fabricated fiber-board type containers. Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices. B. Store air distribution devices in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warrant the installation of the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from defective or nonconforming workmanship. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Titus Company B. Metalaire Industries, Inc. C. Nailor Industries D. Krueger E. Substitutions under provisions of Division One. 2.02 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard air devices when shown of size, shape, capacity, type and accessories indicated on drawings and schedules, constructed of materials and components as indicated and as required for complete installation and proper air distribution. B. Provide air devices that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device and listed in manufacturer’s current data. C. Unless noted otherwise on drawings, the finish shall be #26 white. The finish shall be an anodic acrylic paint, baked at 315F for 30 minutes. The pencil hardness must be HB to H. The paint must pass a 100 hour ASTM D117 Corrosive Environments Salt Spray Test without creepage, blistering, or deterioration of film. The paint must pass a 250 hour ASTM-870 Page 3 of 3 Water Immersion Test. The paint must also pass the ASTM D-2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a 50 inch pound force applied. D. Provide air device with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling or wall system, and that are specially manufactured to fit into the wall construction or ceiling module with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to architectural construction drawings and specifications for types of wall construction and ceiling systems. E. Provide integral volume damper with roll formed steel blades where indicated on drawings or schedules. Dampers shall be opposed blade design with a screw driver slot or a concealed lever operator for adjustment through the face of the air device. F. Air devices designated for fire rated systems shall be pre-assembled with UL classified radiation damper and thermal blanket. Fire rated air devices shall be shipped completely assembled; one assembly per carton. Each assembly shall be enclosed in plastic shrink wrap with installation instructions. 2.03 LOUVERS A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard louvers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation. B. Provide louvers that have minimum free area, and maximum pressure drop of each type as listed in manufacturer's current data, complying with louver schedule. C. Provide louvers with frame and sill styles that are compatible with adjacent substrate, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into construction openings with accurate fit and adequate support, for weatherproof installation. Refer to architectural construction drawings and specifications for types of substrate. D. Louvers shall be constructed of aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5. Weld units or use stainless steel fasteners. E. Louver Screens: On inside face of exterior louvers, provide 1/2" square mesh anodized aluminum wire bird screens mounted in removable extruded aluminum frames. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Ruskin Manufacturing Company 2. Greenheck Company 3. Louvers and Dampers, Inc. 4. Substitutions under provisions of Division One. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 All interior surfaces of all air devices shall be painted flat black. 3.02 See floor plans for type, neck size and CFM of air for all air distribution devices. 3.03 Install all air distribution devices as detailed on plans and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. END OF SECTION PAGE 1 of 1 SECTION 15885 AIR FILTERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 15050, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FILTERS A. The filters shall be FARR 30/30 2 inch thick or approved equal. B. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: The following manufacturers are approved subject to specification compliance. 1. American Air Filter. 2. Airguard Industries, Inc. 3. Cambridge. 2.02 LOW VELOCITY FILTER SECTION A. Filters shall be of the throwaway cartridge type in 24 inches X 24 inches X 2 inch frames. When installing multiple filters into slide-in frames tape adjacent filters together with duct tape to prevent bypassing of air around the filter. Media shall be rated at 500 feet per minute. B. Filtering media shall be formed of non-woven reinforced cotton fabric type filtering media bonded to 96% open area media support grid folded into a non-creased radial pleat design. The filter pack shall be bonded to the inclosing frame to prevent air bypass. Average efficiency shall be 25-30% on ASHRAE test standard 52-76. Initial resistance shall not exceed 0.20 inches water gauge at 350 FPM face velocity. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install differential pressure switch to activate "Filter Dirty" light when pressure difference across filters reaches 0.5 inch W.G. (adjustable). Locate "filter dirty" lights in mechanical rooms with identifying label B. Install and relocate filters in the mechanical or the storage room in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Refer to Section 15050 for additional filter information. END OF SECTION Page 1 of 6 SECTION 15890 METAL DUCTWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Low pressure ductwork. B. Casings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS Section 09900 - Painting: Weld priming, weather resistant, paint or coating. A. Section 15050 - Basic Material and Methods. B. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors. C. Section 15290 - Duct Insulation. D. Section 15910 - Ductwork Accessories. E. Section 15881 - Air Distribution Devices. F. Section 15990 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of metal ductwork products of types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer’s Qualifications: Firms with least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with metal ductwork systems similar to that required for project. C. Codes and Standards: 1. SMACNA Standards: Comply with latest SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible” for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. 2. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with ASHRAE Handbook, Equipment Volume, Chapter 1 “Duct Construction”, for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. 3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A “Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems”, NFPA 90B “Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems”, and NFPA 96 Standard. 4. IECC 2009: Comply with 2009 International Energy Conservation Code. 1.04 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Extent of metal ductwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS Page 2 of 6 A. Submit shop drawings, duct fabrication standards and product data under provisions of Division One. B. Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and configuration prior to start of work. C. The contract documents are schematic in nature and are to be used only for design intent. The contractor shall prepare sheet metal shop drawings, fully detailed and drawn to scale, indicating all structural conditions, all plumbing pipe and light fixture coordination, and all offsets and transitions as required to permit the duct to fit in the space allocated and built. All duct revisions required as a result of the contractor not preparing fully detailed shop drawings will be performed at no additional cost. 1.06 DEFINITIONS A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain indicated clear size inside lining. Where offsets or transitions are required, the duct shall be the equivalent size based on constant friction rate. B. Low Pressure: Three pressure classifications: ½ inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,000 fpm; 1 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,500 fpm, and 2 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,500 fpm. C. Medium Pressure: Three pressure classifications: 3 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 4,000 fpm, 4 inch WG positive static pressure and velocities greater than 2,000 fpm, and 6 inch WG positive static pressure and velocities greater than 2,000 fpm and; D. High Pressure: 10 inch WG positive static pressure and velocities greater than 2,000 fpm. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings, use sheet metal end caps on any lined duct exposed to the weather and use 3 mil vinyl wrap with duct tape on end pieces where stored inside. B. Storage: Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTWORK MATERIALS A. Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting. B. Sheet Metal.: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality, with G 90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 525; and mill phosphatized for exposed locations. Page 3 of 6 C. Stainless Steel Sheet: Where indicated, provide stainless steel complying with ASTM A167; Type 316; with No. 4 finish where exposed to view in occupied spaces, No. 1 finish elsewhere. Protect finished surfaces with mill-applied adhesive protective paper, maintained through fabrication and installation. D. Aluminum Sheet: Where indicated, provide aluminum sheet complying with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14. E. Ducts shall be constructed and sealed as per the latest SMACNA Duct Construction Standards and as follows: 1. VAV systems - Supply ducts from Air handlers to VAV Boxes constructed to 3” S.P. and Seal Class A. 2. Ducts downstream of VAV boxes constructed to 2” S.P. and Seal Class A. 3. Constant Volume – Supply ducts constructed to 2” S.P. and Seal Class A. 4. Outside/Return/Exhaust ducts constructed to 2” S.P. and Seal Class A. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS A. General: Non combustible and conforming to UL 181, Class 1 air duct materials. B. Flexible Ducts: Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. Type 1M or approved equal, corrosive resistant galvanized steel formed and mechanically locked to inner fabric with factory wrapped insulation blanket with aluminum vapor barrier and an R-6 thermal conductance. Flexible duct shall have reinforced metalized outer jacket comply with UL 181, Class 1 air duct. Equivalent manufactures are Thermaflex. C. Sealants: Hard-Cast “iron grip” or approved equal, non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive and shall not be a solvent curing product. Sealants shall be compatible with mating materials, liquid used alone or with tape or heavy mastic. D. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork. 1. For exposed stainless steel ductwork, provide matching stainless steel support materials. 2. For aluminum ductwork, provide aluminum support materials. 2.03 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK A. Fabricate and support in accordance with latest SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. B. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by approved shop drawings. Obtain engineer’s approval prior to using round duct in lieu of rectangular duct. C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil- turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. Page 4 of 6 D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible. Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees; convergence downstream shall not exceed 45 degrees. E. Use crimp joints with bead for joining round duct sizes 6 inch smaller with crimp in direction of airflow. F. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. 2.04 CASINGS A. Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and SMACNA High Pressure Duct Construction Standards and construct for operating pressures indicated. B. Mount floor mounted casings on 4 inch high concrete curbs. At floor, rivet panels on 8 inch centers to angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated, provide liner of 18 gage galvanized expanded metal mesh supported at 12 inch centers, turned up 12 inches at sides with sheet metal shields. C. Reinforce doorframes with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum supporting angles. Install hinged access doors where indicated or required for access to equipment for cleaning and inspection. Provide clear wire glass observation ports, minimum 6 X 6 inch size. D. Fabricate acoustic casings with reinforcing turned inward. Provide 16 gage back facing and 22 gage perforated front facing with 3/32 inch diameter holes on 5/32 inch centers. Construct panels 3 inches thick packed with 4.5 lb./cubic foot minimum glass fiber media, on inverted channels of 16 gage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Obtain manufacturer's inspection and acceptance of fabrication and installation of ductwork at beginning of installation. B. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. C. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. D. Connect terminal units to medium or high pressure ducts with four feet maximum length of flexible duct. Do not use flexible duct to change direction. E. Connect diffusers or troffer boots to low pressure ducts with 6 feet maximum, 4 feet minimum, length of flexible duct. Hold in place with strap or clamp. F. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. Page 5 of 6 G. The interior surface of all ductwork shall be smooth. No sheet metal parts, tabs, angles, or anything else may project into the ducts for any reason, except as specified to be so. All seams and joints shall be external. H. All ductwork located exposed on roof shall be "crowned" to prevent water from ponding. Ref: Insulation for additional requirements. I. Where ducts pass through floors, provide structural angles for duct support. Where ducts pass through walls in exposed areas, install suitable sheet metal escutcheons as closers. J. All angles shall be carried around all four sides of the duct or group of ducts. Angles shall overlap corners and be welded or riveted. K. All ductwork shall be fabricated in a manner to prevent the seams or joints being cut for the installation of grilles, registers, or ceiling outlets. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Determine the minimum length of flexible duct needed for each connection. Excess flex causing tight bends and increased pressure drops are not acceptable. Do not exceed 6’- 0” extended length. B. Install in accordance with Section III of SMACNA’s, “HVAC Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible”. C. Cut outer vapor barrier and insulation. Fold back insulation and outer vapor barrier to expose inner core. Using sheet metal snips, cut the inner core. D. Connect the inner core to the tap or collar by pulling it a minimum of 1” over the collar. E. Where collars are less than 1” in length, i.e. diffusers, connect a separate collar to the existing collar and proceed as described in 3.02.C above. F. Wrap the core twice with UL181 Tape over the collar. Secure the connection by placing a clamp over the tap or collar, UL listed Panduit clamps for collars with beads and Stainless Steel clamps for collars without beads are acceptable. G. Roll the insulation and vapor barrier back over the collar or tap as described in 3.02.C above and wrap twice with UL181 Tape. H. Secure the outer vapor barrier with a clamp as described in 3.02.F above if desired. I. For Medium to High Pressure applications, use duct sealer for 3.02.F and 3.02.G in lieu of UL181 Tape. J. Flexible duct shall be hung with proper support to minimize sagging and snaking between supports. Maximum of 4’-0” between supports. Hanger material will be a minimum of 1 1/2” wide. K. Supports will be used before all vertical 90° bends to prevent sagging and ensure a 1.5 center line turn radius of flexible duct. 3.03 REQUIREMENTS FOR UNIT CASINGS A. Set plenum doors 6 to 12 inches above floor. Arrange door swings so that fan static pressure holds door in closed position. Page 6 of 6 3.04 DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL Low Pressure Supply Steel Return and Relief Steel General Exhaust Steel, Aluminum Outside Air Intake Steel C o m b u s t i o n A i r S t e e l 3.05 DUCTWORK HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. All ductwork shall be properly suspended or supported from the building structure. Hangers shall be galvanized steel straps or hot-dipped galvanized rod with threads pointed after installation. Strap hanger shall be attached to the bottom of the ductwork, provide a minimum of two screws one at the bottom and one in the side of each strap on metal ductwork. The spacing, size and installation of hangers shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the latest SMACNA edition. B. All duct risers shall be supported by angles or channels secured to the sides of the ducts at each floor with sheet metal screws or rivets. The floor supports may also be secured to ducts by rods, angles or flat bar to the duct joint or reinforcing. Structural steel supports for duct risers shall be provided under this Division. 3.06 DUCT JOINTS AND SEAMS A. Seal all non-welded duct joints and seams with duct sealant as indicated. “All longitudinal and transverse joints, seams and connections in metallic and non- metallic ducts shall be constructed as per specified in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible and SMACNA Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards or NAIMA Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards. All longitudinal and transverse joints, seams and connections shall be sealed in accordance with the International Energy Conservation Code.” END OF SECTION PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Volume control dampers. B. Round Duct Taps. C. Fire dampers. D. Combination fire and smoke dampers. E. Back draft dampers. F. Air turning devices. G. Flexible duct connections. H. Duct access doors. I. Duct test holes. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15240 - Vibration Isolation. B. Section 15890 - Ductwork. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. B. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards. C. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service. D. UL 555 - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division One. B. Provide shop drawings for shop fabricated assemblies indicated, including volume control dampers duct access doors duct test holes. Provide product data for hardware used. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300, for fire dampers and combination fire and smoke dampers. PAGE 2 of 6 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated. B. Fabricate splitter dampers of material same gauge as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gauges heavier for sizes over 24 inches. C. Fabricate splitter dampers of double thickness sheet metal to streamline shape. Secure blade with continuous hinge or rod. Operate with minimum 1/2 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint, action flanged bushing, with set screw. D. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-1/2 x 24 inch. E. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12 x 72 inch. 1. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. 2. On outside air, return air, and all other dampers required to be low leakage type, provide galvanized blades and frames, seven inches wide maximum, with replaceable vinyl, EPDM, silicone rubber seals on blade edges and stainless steel side seals. Provide blades in a double sheet corrugated type construction for extra strength. Provide hat channel shape frames for strength and blade linkage enclosure to keep linkage out of the air stream. Construction leakage not to exceed 1/2%, based on 2,000 fpm and 4 inch static pressure. F. Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. G. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends. H. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. 2.02 ROUND DUCT TAPS A. Taps to trunk duct for round flexible duct shall be spin-in fitting with locking quadrant butterfly damper, model no. FLD-B03 by Flexmaster or approved equal. 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FIRE DAMPERS AND COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS A. Greenheck B. Louvers and Dampers Inc. C. Ruskin. D. Nailor Industries. PAGE 3 of 6 2.04 FIRE DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as indicated. B. Provide curtain type dampers of galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless steel closure springs and latches for horizontal installations. Configure with blades out of air stream. C. Fabricate multiple blade fire dampers per U.L. with 16 gauge minimum galvanized steel frame and blades, oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock. D. Fusible links, UL 33, shall separate at 160 degrees F. Provide adjustable link straps for combination fire/balancing dampers. 2.05 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A, UL555 and UL 555S, and as indicated. B. Provide factory sleeve for each damper. Install damper operator on exterior of sleeve and link to damper operating shaft. C. Fabricate with multiple blades with 16 gauge galvanized steel frame and blades, oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, stainless steel jamb seals, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock, and 1/2 inch actuator shaft. 1. Operators shall be spring return electric type suitable to operate on 120 V AC, 60 cycle. 2. Operators shall be UL listed and labeled. D. See smoke dampers for details and accessories to be included 2.06 SMOKE DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555S, and as indicated. B. Normally Closed Smoke Vent Dampers: Curtain type, opening by gravity upon actuation of electro-thermal link, flexible stainless steel blade edge seals to provide constant sealing pressure. C. Normally Open Smoke Damper: Curtain type, closing upon actuation of electro thermal link, flexible stainless steel blade edge seals to provide constant sealing pressure, stainless steel springs with locking devices ensure positive closure for units mounted horizontally. D. Motorized Smoke Dampers: Curtain type, normally open with power on, close automatically when power is interrupted, UL-listed and labeled damper and damper operator. E. Electro thermal Link: Fusible link which melts when subject to local heat of 165 degrees F and from external electrical impulse; UL listed and labeled. F. Each smoke damper and combination fire/smoke damper shall be equipped with end position indicators for remote indication of damper blade position. PAGE 4 of 6 G. Furnish each smoke damper with a duct mounted smoke detector and sensing tube for proper operation of smoke damper. Duct smoke detectors shall be of the photoelectronic type. Sensing tube shall run the entire width of the duct and comply with manufactures instructions. Smoke detector and sensing tube shall be furnished and factory installed by the damper manufacture. 2.07 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Greenheck B. American Warming and Vent. C. Louvers and Dampers Inc. D. Ruskin. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One. 2.08 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS. A. Gravity back draft dampers, size 18 x 18 inches or smaller, furnished with air moving equipment, may be air moving equipment manufacturers standard construction. B. Fabricate multi-blade, parallel action gravity balanced back draft dampers of 16 gauge galvanized steel, or extruded aluminum, with blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2.09 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - AIR TURNING DEVICES A. Young Regulator. B. Titus. C. Tuttle and Bailey. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One. 2.10 AIR TURNING DEVICES A. On duct sizes less than 12 x 12, multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel or aluminum construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. B. Multi-blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, steel or aluminum construction, with worm drive mechanism with 18 inch long removable key operator. 2.11 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Metaledge. B. Ventglass. PAGE 5 of 6 C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One. 2.12 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS TO AIR MOVING EQUIPMENT A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated. B. UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 20 oz per sq yd, approximately 6 inches wide, crimped into metal edging strip. 2.13 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Greenheck B. American Warming and Vent. C. Ruskin. D. Titus. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One. 2.14 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and as indicated. B. Review locations prior to fabrication. C. Fabricate rigid and close-fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. Insulation shall be replaceable without field cutting or patching. D. Access doors smaller than 12 inches square may be secured with sash locks. E. Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 18 inches square, three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles for sizes up to 24 x 48 inches. Provide an additional hinge for larger sizes. F. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable. 2.15 DUCT TEST HOLES A. Cut or drill temporary test holes in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps. B. Permanent test holes shall be factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PAGE 6 of 6 B. Balancing Dampers 1. Provide at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts and as required for air balancing. Use splitter dampers only where indicated. 2. All regulators mounted on externally insulated ductwork shall have 16 gauge elevated platforms at least 1/8 inch higher than the thickness of the insulation. Damper shaft shall have Ventlock No. 607 bearing mounted on ductwork within elevated platform. If duct is inaccessible the operating handle shall be extended and the regulator installed on the face of the wall or ceiling. Where regulators are exposed in finished parts of the building, they shall be flush type, Ventlock No. 666. All regulators shall be manufactured by Ventlock, or approved equal. 3. All dampers in lined ductwork shall have bushing to prevent damper damage to liner. C. Provide fire dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges. D. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to authorities having jurisdiction and Owner's representative. E. Provide back draft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated. F. Provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment. Provide at least one inch slack at all flexible duct connections. G. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated. H. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. END OF SECTION Page 1 of 10 SECTION 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART1- GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conditions of the contract and general requirements in Division 1 apply to work specified in all section of Division 15. B. All Division 15 specification sections, drawings, and general provisions of the contract apply to work of this section, as do other documents referred to this section. C. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. D. Requirements for submittals, shop drawings, and substitutions, Division 1, Section 01300 and 01600, apply to work specified in all sections of Division 15. E. The basic Materials and Methods, Section 15050, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. The publications listed below from a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE CONCIL (AABC) (2002) National Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems NATIONAL EVROMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB) (1998) National Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems (1994) Procedural Standards for the Measurement and Assessment of Sound and Vibration B. TAB shall be preformed in accordance with the requirements of the standard under which the TAB Firm’s qualifications are approved, i.e., AABC or NEBB procedural standards, unless otherwise specifies herein. All recommendations and suggested practices contained in the TAB standard shall be considered mandatory. The provisions of the TAB Standard, including checklists, report forms, etc. Shall, as nearly as practical, be used to satisfy the Contract requirements. The TAB standard shall be used for all aspects of TAB, including qualifications, for the TAB Firm and Specialist and calibration of TAB instruments. Where the instrument manufacturer calibration recommendations are more stringent than those listed in the TAB Standard, the manufacture’s recommendations shall be adhered to. All quality assurance provisions of the TAB Standard such as performance guarantees shall be part of this contract. For systems or system components not covered in the TAB standard TAB procedures shall be developed by the TAB Specialist. Where new procedures, requirements, etc. applicable to the Contact Page 2 of 10 requirements have been published or adopted by the body responsible for the TAB Standard used (AABC or NEBB), the requirements and recommendations contained in these procedures and requirements shall be considered mandatory. C. The TAB contractor shall submit all questions regarding interpretations and questions regarding these standards in writing or as required by documents to the A/E team who shall provide formal reply in ka reasonable time. Decisions of the A/E team shall be final. 1.03 DEFINITIONS AND SIMILAR TERMS A. In some instances, terminology differs between the Contract TAB Standard primarily because the intent of this section is to use the industry standards specified, along with the additional requirements listed herein to produce optimal results. The following table of similar terms is provided for clarification only. Contract requirements take precedent the corresponding AABC or NEBB where differences. CONTRACT TERM AABC TERM NEBB TERM TAB Standard National Standard Procedural Standards Testing and Balancing for Testing Adjusting Heating, Ventilating, and Environmental System Air Conditioning System TAB Specialist TAB Engineer TAB Supervisor System Readiness Construction Phase Field Readiness Check Inspection Check & Preliminary Field Procedures 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. The TAB of the air conditioning systems will be performed by an independent, impartial technical firm whose operations are limited only to the field of professional TAB, and is not a part or subsidiary of any other project contractor or subcontractor, to include, but not limited to General Contractor, and Mechanical; Contractor. The TAB work will be done under the direct supervision of qualified Professional Engineer employed as a full time employee of TAB firm. B. The TAB agency shall be either a member of AABC or certified by the NEBB and certified in all categories and functions where measurements or performance are specified on the plans and specifications. C. QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTOR PERSONAL: Submit evidence to show that the people who shall be in charge of correcting deficiencies for balancing the systems are qualified. The Owner and Engineer reserve the right to require that the originally approved personal be replaced with other qualified personnel if, in the Owner and Engineer’s opinion, the original personnel are not qualified to properly place the system in condition for balancing. D. QUALIFICATIONS OF TAB FIRM The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of specified herein. If, for any reason, the firm losses subject certification during this period, the Contractor shall immediately execute each certifying agency’s applicable Page 3 of 10 Performance Guaranty, then immediately notify the Contracting Officer and submit another TAB firm for approval, at no additional cost to Project Owner, Architect, Engineer, or their designated representatives. Any firm that has been the subject to disciplinary action by either the AABC or the NEBB within the five years preceding the contract award shall not be eligible to perform any duties related to the HVAC systems including TAB. All work specified in this section and in other related sections to be performed by the TAB firm shall be considered invalid if the TAB firm losses its certification prior to contract completion and must be performed by an approved successor, at no additional cost to Project Owner, Architect, Engineer, or their designated representative. The TAB firm shall have an occupied office within 100 miles of the project site. E. QUALIFICATIONS OF TAB FIRM PERSONAL: 1. A minimum of one registered Professional Engineer, licensed in the State the work is performed, is required to be in permanent employment of the firm. 2. The TAB Specialist shall be either a member of AABC or an experienced technician of the firm certified by NEBB. The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of duties specified herein. If, for any reason the Specialist losses subject certification during this period, the Contractor shall immediately execute each certifying agency’s applicable Performance Guaranty, then immediately notify the Contracting Officer and submit another TAB Specialist for approval, at no additional cost to Project Owner, Architect, Engineer, or their designated representatives. Any individual that has been the subject of disciplinary action by either the AABC or the NEBB within the five years preceding the contract award shall not be eligible performed any duties related to the HVAC systems, including TAB. All work specified in this section and other related sections to be performed by the TAB Specialist shall be considered invalid if the TAB Specialist losses certification prior to the contract completion and must be performed by an approved successor, at no additional cost to the Project Owner, Architect, Engineer, or their designated representatives. 3. Personal used on the job site shall be either Professional Engineers or technicians, who shall have been permanent, full time employees of the firm for a minimum of six months prior to the start of work for that specified project. 4. Evidence shall be submitted to show that the personal who actually balanced the systems are qualified. Evidence showing that the personnel have passed the tests required by the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) shall be required. F. ACCEPTABLE TAB FIRMS SHALL INCLUDE: 1. Engineering Air Balance Company (210-736-9494) 2. PHI Service Agency (361-248-4861) 3. Aerodynamics Inspecting of Texas (956-351-5285) 4. Testing Specialties (210-492-8885) Page 4 of 10 5. Professional Engr. Balance Lab (210-828-6622) 1.05 SCOPE OF WORK A. The General (Prime) Contractor will contract with a professional TAB firm under the provisions of paragraph 1.04 of this section. B. The TAB firm will be responsible for inspecting, adjusting, balancing, and logging the data on the performance of fans, dampers in the duct system, and air distribution devices. The Contactor and the various subcontractors of the equipment installed shall cooperate with the TAB firm to furnish necessary data on the design and proper applications of the system components and provide labor ad material required to eliminate deficiencies or poor performance. D. The work included in this section consists of furnishing labor, instruments, and tools required in testing, adjusting, and balancing the HVAC systems, as described in these specifications or shown on accompanying drawings. Services shall include checking equipment performance, taking specified measurements, recording and reporting the results. The items requiring testing, adjusting, and balancing include the following (as applicable to contract drawings): AIR SYSTEMS Air Handling Units Packaged Units Exhaust Fans VAV Terminal Units Diffusers, Registers, & Grilles Coils (Air Temperature 1.06 SUBMITTALS AND RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The name of the selected AABC or NEBB certified firm shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval within 30 days after contract award. B. Within 30 days after the award of contract, the TAB firm shall submit for approval an organizational chart and proof of current certification which shall identify all AABC or NEBB certified Supervisors or Specialist. The TAB firm shall submit a company resumes listing personal and project experience in air and hydronic system balancing. TAB firm will also provide information showing successful completion for three similar scope projects for which the firm is being contracted. C. Within 30 days after the award of contract, the TAB firm will submit for approval the name of the TAB Specialist and/or Professional Engineer, who will have direct supervision of all TAB related labor through completion of project. D. Within 30 days after the award of contract the TAB firm shall submit TAB procedures and agenda proposed to be used. E. Within 30 days after the award of contract, but prior to TAB field measurements, the TAB firm shall submit sample report forms, sample report forms, which shall include minimum data required by either the AABC or NEBB National Standards. Page 5 of 10 F. Within 15 days of notification of approval of TAB firm and TAB Specialist by engineer, TAB firm shall conduct a Design Review of contract drawings and submit a Design Review report. G. Proposed date and time for execution of Systems Readiness Inspection shall be submitted no later than 7 days prior to inspection. A copy of the Systems Readiness Inspection Report shall be signed by the TAB Specialist and shall bear the seal of the Professional Society or National Association used as the TAB Standard. H. Proposed date and time to begin field measurements, making adjusting, ext., for the TAB report, shall be submitted with the Systems Readiness Inspection Report. I. Six (6) copies of the completed TAB Report shall be submitted for approval no later than 7 days after the execution of TAB. All copies of TAB Report shall be signed by the TAB Specialist and shall bear the seal of the Professional Society or National Association used as the TAB Standard. J. Proposed date and time to begin TAB Completion Verification, shall be submitted with the TAB Report. Six (6) copies of TAB Completion Verification Report shall be submitted no later than 7 days after execution of TAB verification. K. Proposed date and time for execution of Opposite Season Inspection shall be submitted no later than 7 days prior to inspection. 1.07 INSTRUMENTATION A. All instruments used for measurements shall be accurate and calibrated. TAB firm shall submit list of all instruments, to include gauges, thermometers, flow measuring hoods, and other balancing devices to be used in balancing the system. The list will indicate name of equipment, function, model number, serial number, date of the last calibration, and date calibration is due. TAB firm shall submit copies of calibration certificates for all test instruments used showing all devices were properly calibrated before proceeding with system balancing. All instruments will be within one year of calibration for duration of the project. If duration of project exceeds the tenure of instrument calibration, then said instrument must be recalibrated, and copy of calibration certificate sent to Engineer, before the instrument is placed into continued use. 1.08 TAB PREPARATION AND COORDINATION A. It is the intent of this specification section to provide for a completely tested, adjusted, and balanced (TAB) installation without overlaps or omissions between the installing contractor and the TAB contractor. The installing contractors are those who perform the installation of this work and make all preparations for the TAB contractor who performs the testing, adjusting, and balancing described herein. B. The contactor Manager or General Contractor performing the General construction work shall coordinate the work of the contractors performing the Mechanical, Electrical, Automatic Temperature Control, and TAB work to provide complete properly tested, adjusted, and balanced systems. The Construction Manager or General Manager shall require and provide a start-up report for each piece of equipment furnished. C. The contractor performing the HVAC work shall coordinate all Mechanical work, including Sheet Metal work and Automatic Temperature Controls, to provide a complete, properly tested adjusted and balanced system throughout. He shall Page 6 of 10 furnish progress reports regarding this phase of the work on a regular basis as directed. At such time as the systems are started up, the Contractor performing the Mechanical work shall provide TAB Contractor with documentation that the duct systems have been tested to the satisfaction of the Duct Leak Test Specifications. The Mechanical Contractor shall insure that all comments are installed and operating, and the major components such as fans, pumps, refrigeration machines, and the like are capable of producing the scheduled capacity requirements. The requirement does not relieve the Mechanical Contractor of any other requirements specified elsewhere. Should any of these components or systems not be capable of producing these requirements, he shall make corrections within the limits of his responsibility or as otherwise authorized and shall certify in writing that the systems are ready for final testing and balancing by the Tab contractor. D. The contractor performing the Electrical work shall work coordinate all electrical work to provide complete, properly tested, adjusted and balanced mechanical systems throughout the project. He shall furnish progress reports on a regular basis as directed. He shall certify in writing when each system is electrically operable, including the check for proper rotation of equipment. E. The Contractor performing the Automatic Temperature Controls work shall coordinate all controls work to provide complete, properly tested, adjusted and balanced mechanical systems throughout the project. He shall furnish progress reports on a regular basis as directed. He shall certify in writing when each system is operational from an Automatic Temperature Controls standpoint. This contractor shall also provide to TAB contractor all necessary submittal information, software, and/or personal complete, properly tested, adjusted and balanced mechanical systems. F. The TAB contractor shall from the award of contract, begin preparation. PART 2-PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 SERVICES OF THE CONTRACTOR A. The drawing and specifications have indicated valves, dampers, and miscellaneous adjustment devices for the purpose of adjustment to obtain optimum operating conditions, install these devices in a manner that leaves them accessible, provide access as requested by the TAB firm. B. Have systems complete and in operational readiness prior to notifying the TAB firm the project is ready for their services, and certify in writing to the Construction Manager that such a condition exists. C. As a part of the Work of this Section, make changes in the sheaves, belts, and dampers or the addition of dampers required for correct balance of new work as required by TAB firm, at no additional cost to owner. D. Fully examine the existing system to be balanced, to determine, whether or not sufficient volume dampers, balancing valves, thermometers, gauges, pressure in the duct systems, means of determining water flow, and other means of taking data needed for proper water and air balancing are existing. Submit to the Engineer in writing a listing of omitted items considered necessary to balance existing systems. Submit the list and proposal as a cost add item. Page 7 of 10 E. Verify that fresh air louvers are free of blockage, coils are clean and fresh air ducts to each air handling unit has individually adjustable volume regulating dampers. F. Provide correct, repair, or replace deficient items or conditions found during the testing, adjusting, and balancing period. G. In order that systems may be properly tested, balanced, and adjusted as specified, operate the systems at no expense for the Owner at the length of time necessary to properly verify their completion and readiness for TAB period. H. Project Contract completion schedules shall allow time for allowance to permit the successful completion of TAB services to Owner’s final inspection and expectance. Complete, operational readiness, prior to commencement of TAB services, shall include the following services of the Contractor: 1. Construction status of building shall permit the closing of doors, window, ceilings, installed and penetrations complete, to obtain project operating conditions. 2. AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS: a. Verify installation for conformity to design. Supply, return, and exhaust ducts terminated and pressure tested for leakage as specified. b. Volume and fire dampers properly located and functional. Dampers serving requirements of minimum and maximum outside air, return and relief shall provide tight closure and full opening, smooth and free operation. c. Supply return, exhaust and transfer grilles, registers and diffusers. d. Air handling systems, units and associated apparatus, such as heating and cooling coils, filter sections, access doors, ect., shall be blanked and sealed to eliminate excessive bypass or leakage of air. e. Fans (supply and exhaust) operating and verified for freedom from vibrations, proper fan rotation and belt tension; overload heater elements shall be of proper size and rating ; record motor amperage and voltage and verify that these functions do not exceed nameplate ratings. f. Furnish or revise fan drives or motors as necessary to attain the specified air volumes. 3. WATER CIRCLULATING SYSTEMS a. Position valves pertinent to system design and require operation to permit full flow of water through system components. Operate hydronic systems under full flow conditions until circulating water is clean. Remove and clean strainers as required during this cycle of operation. b. Record each existing pump motor amperage and voltage, for retrofit. Readings shall not exceed nameplate rating. c. Verify, on new equipment, electrical starter overload heater elements to be of proper size and rating. d. Ensure that water circulating systems shall be full of water and free of air; expansion tanks set for proper water level, and air vents installed at high points of systems and operating freely. Advise Owner of deficiencies. e. Check and set operating temperatures of heat exchangers to design requirements. 4. AUTOMATIC CONTROLS Page 8 of 10 a. Verify that control components are installed in accordance with project documents and functional, electrical interlocks, damper sequences, air and water resets, fire and freeze stats. b. Controlling instruments shall be functional and set for design operating conditions. Factory pre-calibration of room thermostats and pneumatic equipment will not be acceptable. c. The temperature shall be regulation shall be adjusted for proper relationship between the controlling instruments and calibrated by the TAB Contractor. Advise Owner of deficiencies or malfunctions. 3.02 SERVICES OF THE TAB FIRM A. The TAB firm will act as liaison between the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor and inspect the installation of mechanical piping system, sheet metal work, temperature controls and other component parts of the heating, air conditioning and ventilating systems being retrofitted, repaired, or added under this Contract. The re-inspection of the Work will cover that part related to proper arrangement and adequate provision for the testing and balancing and will be done when the Work is 80 percent complete. B. Upon completion of the installation and start –up of the mechanical equipment, to check, adjust, and balance system components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space in the building. Prepare and submit to the Owner complete reports on the balance and operations of the systems. C. Measurements and recorded readings of air, water and electricity that appear in the TAB reports will be done by the permanently employed technicians or engineers of the TAB firm. D. Make an inspection in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made. At the time, make necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of system components to effect the proper conditions as indicated on the Drawings. At time of opposite season check-out, the Owner’s representative will be notified before readings and adjustments are made. E. In fan systems, the air quantities indicated on the Drawings may be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature variation of two degrees with each separately controlled space, but the total air quantity indicated for each zone must be obtained. It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to furnish or revise fan drive and motors if necessary, without cost to the Owner, to attain the specified air volumes. F. The various existing water circulating systems shall be cleaned, filled, purged, of air, and put into operation before hydronic balancing. 3.03 PROFESSIONAL REPORT A. Before the final acceptance of the report is made the TAB will furnish the Owner the following data to be approved by the Owner and Engineer. 1. Summary of main supply, return and exhaust duct pilot tube traverses and fan settings indicating minimum value required to achieve specified air volumes. 2. A listing of the measured air quantities at each outlet corresponding to the temperature tabulation as developed by the Engineer and TAB firm. Page 9 of 10 3. Air quantities at each return and exhaust air handling device. 4. Static pressure readings entering and leaving each supply fan exhaust fan, filter, coil, balancing dampers and other components of the systems included in the retrofit Work. These readings will be related to performance curves in terms of the CFM handled if available, 5. Motor current readings at each equipment motor on load side of capacitors. The voltages at the time of the reading shall be listed. 6. The final report shall certify test methods and instrumentation used, final velocity reading obtained, temperatures, pressure drops, RPM of equipment, amperage of motors, air balancing problems encountered, recommendations and uncompleted punch list items. The test results will be recorded on standard forms. 7. A summary of actual operating conditions shall be included with each system outlining normal and ventilation cycles of operation. The final report will act as a reference of actual operating conditions for the Owner’s operating personal. 3.03 BALANCING AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM A. GENERAL 1. Place all equipment into full operation, and shall continue the operating during each working day of balancing and testing. If the air conditioning system is balanced during OFF-Peak cooling seasons Balancing Contractor shall return to rebalance air side system as required to put system in proper balance at that time. 2. The contractor shall submit detailed balancing and recording forms for approval. After the approval by the Architect, prepare complete set of forms for recording test data on each system. All Work shall be done under the supervision of Registered Professional Engineer. All instruments used shall be accurately calibrated to within 1% of scale and maintained in good working order. 3. Upon completion of the balancing and testing, the Balancing Contractor shall compile the test data in report forms, and forward five copies to the Architect for evaluation 4. The final report shall contain logged results of all tests, including such data as a. Tabulation of air volume at each outlet. b. Outside dry bulb and wet bulb temperature. c. Inside dry bulb and wet bulb temperature in each conditioned space room or area. d. Actual fan capacities and static pressures. Motor current and voltage readings at each fan. B. AIR SYSTEMS: Perform the following operations as applicable to system balance and test: 1. Check fan rotation. 2. Check filters (balancing shall be done with clean filters). 3. Test and adjust blower rpm to design requirements. 4. Test and record motor full load amperes. 5. Test and record system static pressures, suction and discharge. 6. Test and adjust system for design cfm, return air and outside air (+2%). Change out fan sheaves as required to balance system. 7. Test and record entering air temperatures, db and wb. 8. Test and record leaving air temperature, db and wb 9. Adjust all zones to design cfm (+2%). 10. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille, and register to within 5% of design. Page 10 of 10 C. WATER SYSTEMS: Perform the following operations as applicable to system balance and test: 1. Check pump operation 2. Check operation of all control valves. 3. Test water flow rate at all coils. Adjust balancing valves as required. 4. Test water flow rate at all pumps. Adjust balancing valves as required. 5. Record chilled water temperature entering and leaving chiller and each AHU. 6. Record pump suction and discharge pressures. D. DX SYSTEMS: 1. Test and record suction and discharge pressures at each compressor and record ambient air temperature entering the condensing coils. 2. Test and record unit full load amps and voltage. 3. Test and record staging and unloading of unit required by sequence of operation or drawing schedule. E. Automatic temperature controls shall be calibrated and all thermostats and dampers, adjusted so that the control system is in proper operating condition, subject to approval of the Architect. F. The Air Balance Contractor shall report to Engineer all air distribution devices or other equipment that operate noisily so that corrective measures may be implemented by the Contractor at no additional cost to the owner. END OF SECTION P a g e 1 o f 6 SECTION T-16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: A. The Contractor shall execute all work as hereinafter specified, as shown on the drawings or as necessary to provide complete and functioning systems. All items of labor, material or equipment not required in detail by the specifications or drawings, but incidental to or necessary for the complete installation and proper operation of all phases of work described herein, or reasonably implied in connection therewith, shall be furnished as if called for in detail by the specifications or drawings. 1.02 LAWS AND ORDINANCES: A. All work and materials shall conform to the requirements of the federal, state, and local laws and ordinances having jurisdiction at the jobsite. The installation shall be in strict accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC). The Contractor at no increase in contract price shall make all modifications to the work, which may be required by an authority having legal jurisdiction over the work. 1.03 LICENSES, FEES AND PERMITS: A. The Contractor shall have a Master Electrician license issued by or acceptable to the city in which the work is to be performed. Additionally, and at all times while work is being performed, for every five or less craftsman working on the project site, at least one craftsman shall have a Journeyman Electrician license issued by or acceptable to the city in which the work is to be performed. A city electrical construction permit will be required for this project. 1.04 THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS: A. The drawings and specifications shall be interpreted together, and any and all work included in either, though not in both, shall be part of the contracted work. The drawings are diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual construction of the project and existing job site conditions will permit. Any changes due to equipment supplied, conflict with the work of other trades or to make this work conform to the National Electrical Code shall be made by the Contractor at no increase in contract price. 1.05 SITE CONDITIONS: A. Before submitting his bid, the Contractor shall visit the site and familiarize himself with all existing conditions and his bid shall be based on accepting conditions as they exist. 1.06 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: P a g e 2 o f 6 A. All materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be new. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such materials and equipment. Where two or more units of the same item are required, they shall be products of a single manufacturer. The Contractor shall unload and properly store all electrical materials and equipment delivered to the jobsite. 1.07 UTILITY CONNECTIONS AND SERVICE: A. The Contractor shall make arrangements for connection with the electrical utility company that will serve the jobsite and shall comply with all the rules, regulations and requirements of the utility company. The Contractor shall examine the site, confer with the utility company and verify the requirements for connections prior to bidding the work. The Contractor shall verify with the utility company the exact location of service tie-in points, cable routes, etc. Failure of the Contractor to contact the utility company and obtain such information prior to bidding the work shall not be considered as a basis for additional compensation. Where outages to existing electrical service are required, the Contractor shall coordinate the timing and duration of such outages with Owner's representative. B. The Contractor shall furnish and install a meter enclosure for the utility company meter. The enclosure and installation shall be in accordance with utility company requirements. 1.08 SAFETY: A. It shall be the responsibility of the electrical Contractor to initiate, maintain, and supervise all safety precautions required by local, state, and federal laws, including OSHA. 1.09 SUBMITTALS: A. Submittals for Approval: 1. Submit in accordance with Section 01300 except as otherwise stated herein. 2. Within 30 calendar days after award of contract, the Contractor shall furnish seven (7) sets of drawings and data as described herein for Engineer approval. No item of equipment or material shall be ordered or shipped to the job site until the Engineer has given written approval of the submittal data. 3. The submittal data shall be bound in a 3-ring binder with dividers. The binder shall include a cover and a table of contents with the contractors name as well as the name of the project. All data shall be divided by specification section. 4. The submittal data for each item shall include descriptive literature, performance data, shop drawings technical literature and any other necessary data to readily identify that the equipment will meet the requirements of the drawings and specifications. 5. One complete submittal of drawings and data shall be made for all required items. Partial or incomplete submittals will be returned without comment. All copies furnished shall be manufacturer’s original copies of good quality, P a g e 3 o f 6 legible photocopies or blue line prints. Copies transmitted by facsimile machine are not acceptable. 6. Submittal documents shall be job specific. Where manufacturer’s standard drawings or catalog sheets are provided, they shall be marked to show specifically what is being furnished. Drawings shall be marked to show Owner’s name, plant location, project description and equipment designation. 7. Substitutions for specified products shall be in compliance with Paragraph 1.10. 8. The Contractor shall review all manufacturers’ submittals for completeness, accuracy and compliance with project specifications before submitting to Engineer. 9. The Engineer will review the complete submittal package and return five (5) sets to the Contractor with individual items marked in one of the following three forms: Reviewed as submitted Reviewed with comments Disapproved Items that are disapproved shall be corrected as required and shall be resubmitted to the Engineer for approval. B. Approval of submittals, etc. shall not be construed as releasing the Contractor from further responsibility, but rather as a means to coordinate the work and to aid in the proper selection and installation of the materials and equipment. All materials and equipment shall be subject to final acceptance by the Engineer at completion of the project. C. Submittal of Record Data: 1. Record Data: Provide seven (7) sets of record data books containing information listed below. The material shall be bound into appropriately sized 3 ring binders, organized with dividers and index sheets. The binders shall be appropriately labeled with the Owner’s name, project name and location. The data books shall include: a. Certified as-built shop drawings for all fabricated equipment. b. Approved product data for all items required in Paragraph 1.09A. c. Spare parts lists d. Test records. 2. Record Drawings: Provide one (1) set of project drawings marked neatly and legibly in colored pencil to show any significant deviation between actual conditions and original design layout. 3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide seven (7) sets of manufacturer’s operation and maintenance data on equipment and components. The data shall be organized into loose-leaf binders with dividers and master index. 1.10 SUBSTITUTIONS: P a g e 4 o f 6 A. Requirements for Substitutions: It is the intention of the drawings and specifications to establish a definite standard when a particular manufacturer's product is mentioned. Written request for substitutions of equivalent products will be considered provided all the following conditions are met. Substitutions for specified products will not be permitted unless all of the following conditions are met: 1. Written request shall be received in the Engineer's office ten (10) days prior to the day of bid opening. Requests after ten days prior to the day of bid opening will not be considered. 2. Request shall include complete technical data, i.e. product data sheets, curve, ratings, etc. 3. Request shall include a complete written comparison of differences and similarities between the proposed and specified product. Provide a written comparison for each substitution being requested. 4. Space and clearance requirements are adequate for products mentioned. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to verify space and clearance requirements for products proposed for substitution. 5. If modifications to the drawings and specifications are necessary for the proper installation of a product proposed for substitution, the request shall explain such in detail, accompanied by drawings if necessary. B. Approval: If the above has been complied with, and in the Engineer's opinion the product proposed for substitution is equivalent to that mentioned, the product will be approved for substitution and all prospective bidders will be so notified. 1.11 PROTECTION: A. All new work, equipment and materials shall be protected at all times to prevent damage or breakage, either in transit, storage, installation or testing. All openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. All materials and equipment shall be covered and protected against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical injury. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters, cribbing of any apparatus above floor construction and covering of apparatus in incomplete buildings with tarpaulins or other protective covering. Temporary electric heaters shall be installed to keep apparatus dry. All rotating equipment and/or machinery shall be properly lubricated and rotated on a regular basis. All electrical materials and equipment damaged during handling, storage, and installation, until the Owner has accepted the project, shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor with no increase in contract price. 1.12 COORDINATION: A. The Contractor shall not hinder and/or delay any work being accomplished by other construction companies at or near the general construction site; nor shall P a g e 5 o f 6 the Contractor impede normal operation of the Owner at any time except as otherwise indicated. 1.13 WORKMANSHIP: A. All labor shall be performed in the best and most workmanlike manner by mechanics skilled in their particular trades. All installations shall be complete in both effectiveness and appearance whether finally enclosed or left exposed. The Engineer reserves the right to direct the removal or replacement of any item which, in his opinion, does not present a reasonably neat or workmanlike appearance, providing that same can be properly installed in an orderly way by usual methods for such work. All specialties and appurtenances shall be installed to conform to the manufacturer's recommendations unless otherwise specified. 1.14 EQUIPMENT BY OTHERS: A. This Contractor shall make electrical connections to equipment installed by other trades. The mechanical contractor shall install all motor driven equipment and motors furnished under this contract. 1. The Contractor shall verify the electrical requirements of equipment and appliances furnished by others with data provided by the successful vendor or vendors. The Contractor shall provide the proper sized circuits, circuit breakers, starters, disconnect switches, receptacles, etc. as required to connect this equipment. If changes are required to electrical systems shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall make these changes at no additional cost to Owner. 1.15 CUTTING AND REPAIRING: A. The Contractor shall coordinate the work to eliminate cutting of the construction except as specified. Where it becomes necessary to cut through the construction to permit the installation of work or the repair of defective work, it shall be done by mechanics skilled in the trade of erecting the type of work involved. The Contractor without additional compensation shall pay the cost of cutting and repairing. No cutting shall be done to any structural members unless the Engineer grants specific permission, in writing. 1.16 SLEEVES, INSERTS, SUPPORTS, ANCHOR BOLTS, FLASHING AND FOUNDATIONS: A. Furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, supports, anchor bolts, flashing, counter flashing and foundations required for the proper installation of the proposed work. 1.17 CLEANING: A. All debris resulting from the construction shall be removed from the project site daily. Upon completion of the project, unused materials and equipment shall be removed from the project site. All visible labels, dirt overspray, paint, grease, P a g e 6 o f 6 and stains shall be removed from all electrical equipment. Labels indicating testing laboratory approval or giving parts numbers shall be left in place. 1.18 TESTING: A. The Contractor shall test the entire wiring system for proper voltage level and balance, and for short circuits and grounds in accordance with established methods upon completion of work. The system shall operate satisfactorily in every respect. This Contractor shall make all corrections to accomplish such. 1.19 INSPECTIONS: A. The Contractor shall cooperate with and provide assistance to the Engineer or the Engineer's Inspector in making periodic and final inspections of the work. This assistance shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the furnishing of labor, tools, etc. to operate equipment and demonstrate its proper functioning. Also included shall be the removal of outlet, junction box and panel covers, etc. as necessary for the Engineer to inspect the work. 1.20 GUARANTEE: A. Any defects from imperfect or improper materials or faults arising from improper workmanship that may appear within a period of twelve (12) months from the date of final acceptance of the system shall be amended and made good by the Contractor at his own cost. Any defects or faults shall be attended to within ten (10) days after receiving written notice from the Engineer. Failure to promptly attend to said defects or faults shall be sufficient cause for the Owner to correct the problem with the Owner's forces or the forces of others and invoice the Contractor for any and all charges, including management and overhead, related to correcting said problem. END OF SECTION Page 1 of 5 SECTION T-16060 GROUNDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: 1. Solid grounding of electrical systems, equipment, machine frames, enclosures, appliances and structures. 2. Basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and systems. 3. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented in other sections of these Specifications. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. B3 Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. 2. B8 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard or Soft. 3. B33 Standard Specification for Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70 National Electrical Code 2. 78 Lightning Protection Code C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 1. 467 UL Standard for Safety Grounding and Bonding Equipment. 1.03 SUBMITTALS – FOR APPROVAL: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 01300 and 16010. B. Product Data: Submit for grounding conductors, ground rods, clamps, connectors, wells and insulating materials. Page 2 of 5 1.04 SUBMITTALS – RECORD DATA: A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Product Data: Approved, as furnished data as listed above. C. Test Reports 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Items provided under this Section shall be listed or labeled by UL. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC): Provide components and installation as required by National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70, Article 250. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL: A. Provide products in quantities, sizes and ratings to comply with the NEC or the design drawings, whichever requirements are more stringent. B. Conductor Materials: Copper C. Connector Materials: Copper or bronze, tin-plated where required for corrosion resistance. 2.02 CONDUCTORS: A. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Soft drawn copper, Class B stranded per ASTM B-8, 600 volt TW, THW or THWN insulation. Size per NEC 250. B. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Soft drawn copper, Class B stranded per ASTM B-8 except that conductor sizes Nos. 12 and 10 AWG used in lighting and receptacle branch circuits may be solid conductor. All conductors shall have 600 volt, TW, THW or THWN insulation. C. Grounding Grid Conductor: Medium hard drawn bare copper, Class B stranded per ASTM B-8, No. 2/0 AWG or as otherwise indicated on the drawings. D. Color Code: Insulation color shall be green, except that sizes No. 2 AWG and larger may be black with green colored tape spirally applied over all visible surfaces within enclosures. Page 3 of 5 2.03 WIRE CONNECTORS: A. Terminal Lugs: Copper alloy, tin-plated, compression type, Burndy type, YA, NEMA 1 hole for sizes No. 6 through No. 1/0 AWG. Burndy type YGHA, NEMA 2 hole pad for sizes No. 2/0 AWG and larger. B. Split Bolt Connectors: Burndy SERVIT, type KS C. Taps and Splices: 1. Grounding Grid below Grade: Exothermic type (Cadweld) or compression type (Burndy Hyground). 2. Above Grade: Compression type. 2.04 CONDUIT CONNECTORS: A. Conduit Clamps: Burndy type GAR or GD. B. Grounding Bushings: 0-Z/GEDNEY 2.05 GROUNDING ELECTRODES: A. Ground Rods: ¾ inch diameter, 10 feet long, copper clad steel with high strength sheath, molten welded to core. B. Rod Connectors: 1. Exothermic type: Cadweld 2. Mechanical type: Burndy type GAR or GD C. Test Wells: (Not Required) 2.06 INSULATING MATERIALS: A. Tape: Scotch 33+ vinyl plastic. B. Mastic Pads: Scotch EZ – Seal PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. General: 1. Provide grounding of systems, equipment and structures in accordance with NEC Article 250, the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and the design drawings. Page 4 of 5 B: Service Entrance: 1. Provide a main bonding jumper between the service neutral conductor, the service equipment ground bus and the service equipment enclosure. 2. Provide a grounding electrode conductor to connect the service neutral conductor to the main grounding electrode. B. Building Steel and Piping: 1. Provide bonding jumper from the service neutral to the building steel and metallic piping systems. E. Equipment Grounding: 1. Provide a green insulated equipment grounding conductor in all branch circuits and feeder conduits. Size conductor in accordance with NEC 250 unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 2. Connect the equipment grounding conductor to panelboard or switchgear ground bus and to all metallic raceways, outlet boxes, lighting fixtures, equipment enclosures, appliances and motor frames. 3. Where metallic raceways are installed, both the raceway and the internal equipment grounding conductor shall be utilized for equipment grounding. F. Grounding Grid: 1. Excavate and backfill for main grounding grid conductor. Locate conductors at least 3 feet away from foundation. Conductor depth shall be 18 to 24 inches below finished grade. 2. Install ground rods vertically in undisturbed soil so that the top of the rod is 18 to 24 inches below finished grade, except that in test wells the top of rods shall be 6 to 8 inches below grade. Space rods a minimum of 10 feet apart. 3. Make underground cable to cable connections using either exothermic or compression type connections. 4. Provide test wells where indicated on the drawings. Install top of test well flush with finished grade or pavement. Use only bolted type rod connectors in test wells. 5. In addition to equipment grounding conductor connections, make connections from the grounding grid to the following items using green, insulated conductors: Page 5 of 5 a. Electrical equipment ground busses b. Electrical equipment enclosures c. Motor frames d. Steel support frames for electrical equipment e. Building steel frame 6. Grounding conductors stubbed up from below grade shall be enclosed in a 1 inch Schedule 40 PVC protective sleeve. G. Conduit: 1. Provide grounding bushings where metallic conduits connect to non- metallic enclosures or stub-up into open-bottom, floor-mounted enclosures. 2. Provide conduit grounding clamps where metallic conduit stub-ups are connected to non-metallic underground conduits. END OF SECTION Page 1 of 4 SECTION T-16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment nameplates and labels 2. Warning and caution signs 3. Operational instruction signs 4. Identification labeling of conduits, cables B. Related Sections: 1. Additional identification requirements are specified in other Sections of Division 16. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1. 29CFR1910.145 Specification for Accident Prevention Signs B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. 70 National Electrical Code 1.03 SUBMITTALS FOR APPROVAL: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 01300 and 16010. B. Product Data: Submit for each type of product used on project. C. Schedules: Nameplate engraving schedule. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS: A. Engraved Nameplates and Signs: 1. Material: 3 ply plastic laminate, matte-finish, 0.125 inch thickness, white with black center core except that material used for warning signs shall be Page 2 of 4 red with white center core. Provide punched mounting holes for mechanical fasteners. 2. Size: Minimum size to be 1 inch by 2.5 inches, rectangular shape with square corners. 3. Engraving: Accurately align lettering and engrave into center core. Lettering shall be normal block style. Character size shall be 3/8 inch high for grouped equipment and load designation and ¼ inch for individual equipment, loads and devices. B. Warning Signs: 1. Fiberglass reinforced polyester, non-adhesive backed, indoor-outdoor with punched mounting holes, Brady B-120. 2. Polyester overlaminated with plastic coating, adhesive-backed, indoor- outdoor, Brady B-302. 3. High Voltage warning signs to read “Danger-High Voltage-Keep Out.” 4. Provide identical signs for each application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. General: 1. Provide labels and signs in accordance with NEC requirements. 2. Install labels and signs at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. 3. All nameplates and signs used on the project shall be of similar size, style and appearance. B. Equipment Nameplates: 1. Provide engraved identification nameplates for each of the following: a. Panelboards b. Circuit breakers c. Switches d. Contactors e. Pull and junction boxes 2. Nameplate legends shall include the equipment identification number as indicated on the design drawings and an appropriate service description. 3. Nameplates for switchgear assemblies, panelboards, and separately enclosed breakers, switches, starters and contactors shall include the operating voltage. Page 3 of 4 4. Attach engraved nameplates to equipment with self-tapping, stainless steel, round head screws. Use adhesive attachment only where the substrate material is not suitable for screw attachment. C. Warning Signs: 1. Voltage warning signs where required by the NEC, where indicated on drawing and as follows: a. Equipment Rooms: On all doors to equipment rooms containing equipment or circuits over 600 volts or containing exposed live parts. Minimum size shall be 7 inches x 10 inches. b. Pull Boxes: On removable covers for all pull and junction boxes containing circuits over 600 volts. c. Equipment: On front and rear compartment access doors and covers enclosing live parts. Signs provided as part of equipment that meet these requirements are acceptable. d. Fences: On each gate and on each side of fences that enclose equipment or circuits over 600 volts or exposed live parts. Minimum size shall be 10 inches by 14 inches. Locate at intervals not exceeding 30 feet. 2. Multiple Source Signs: a. Where enclosures contain voltages from more than one source which are not interrupted by opening the local unit disconnecting means, provide an engraved nameplate bearing the following (or similar) legend: “WARNING – MULTIPLE ELECTRICAL SOURCES EXIST WITHIN THIS ENCLOSURE” O R “WARNING – VOLTAGE MAY BE PRESENT WITH DISCONNECT SWITCH OPEN” 3. Hazardous Operation: a. Where operation of an electric switch or control device may create an unsafe or undesirable operating condition, provide an engraved plastic sign with appropriate warning statement. D. Multiple Services: 1. Where multiple services exist, provide each service disconnect with an additional sign which states the name and location of other service disconnects. Page 4 of 4 E. Conduits: 1. Identify conduits at each termination and at all transitions from exposed to concealed or underground installation. 2. Mark conduits legibly with a permanent marker pen to indicate conduit per circuit number. F. Cables: 1. Identify cables in pull and junction boxes, vaults, manholes and where entering switchgear panelboard assembly. 2. Provide an engraved plastic nameplate or other suitable permanent tag for each cable or cable assembly. Attach with self-locking nylon cable tie. 3. Cable identification shall include circuit number and phase as indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION Page 1 of 6 SECTION T-16123 WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section includes copper wire, cable, associated connectors, and termination hardware used on systems operating at 600 volts or less. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. B8 Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductor, Hard, Medium Hard, Or Soft. B. National Electrical Contractor Association (NECA) 1. Standard of Installation C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. 70 National Electrical Code D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 1. 44 Rubber-Insulated Wires and Cables 2. 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables 3. 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper Conductors 4. 486C Splicing Wire Connectors 5. 510 Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape 6. 1569 Metal-Clad Cables 1.03 SUBMITTALS – FOR APPROVAL: A. Procedures: Submit in accordance with Section 01300 and 16010. B. Product Data: Submit for each type of wire and cable, terminal lugs, connectors, and cable fittings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS – RECORD DATA: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Product Data: Approved, as furnished data as listed above. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Page 2 of 6 A. Furnish wire, cable, associated connectors, and termination hardware bearing UL label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BUILDING WIRE: A. Single conductor, soft drawn, annealed copper conductor, Class B stranded except that sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller used for lighting and power branch circuits may be solid. Insulation shall be 600 volt, type THHN/THWN per UL 83 or type XHHW per UL 44. 2.02 TYPE MC CABLE: Metal Clad Cable type MC multi-conductor cabling as manufactured by AFC Cable Systems or equivalent having the following construction features: A. Conductor: Bare, soft annealed copper, Class B stranded per ASTM B-8. B. Insulation: Polypropylene tape assembly with 600 volt, 90°C (dry) type THHN insulation with printed number and color identification. C. Neutral conductor: White – 120v circuits; Gray – 480Y277v circuits D. Grounding conductor: Green insulated copper ground conductor. E. Assembly: Three insulated conductors with grounding conductor, non- hygroscopic fillers and overall binder tape per UL 1569. F. Sheath: High strength, lightweight galvanized interlocking steel strip and color coded on the out side for easy identification. G. U.L rated 1569 2.03 CONNECTORS AND TERMINALS: A. Insulated Crimp Type Connectors and Terminals: Nylon insulated, Burndy INSULINK and INSULUG, or Thomas & Betts Sta-Kon. B. Split Bolts: High-conductivity copper alloy, Burndy SERVIT or Thomas & Betts Split-Bolt. C. Two Bolt Connectors: High-conductivity copper alloy, Burndy OKLIP, Type KVS or Blackburn 2BU. D. Compression Terminals: Copper, long barrel, Burndy HYLUG or Thomas & Betts Color-Keyed. E. Bolted Terminals: Cast copper alloy, Burndy QIKLUG or Thomas & Betts Locktite. Page 3 of 6 F. Spring Wire Connectors: Insulated, twist-on type, Ideal Wire Nut or 3M Scotchlok 2.04 CABLE TERMINATIONS: A. Type MC Cable: Steel set screw connectors 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS: A. Tape: UL 510 1. Vinyl Plastic: 3M Scotch 33+ or Scotch 88. 2. Varnished Cambric (VC): 3M Irvington 2920. 3. Friction: Black friction tape. B. Pulling Lubricants: Ideal Yellow 77 or Polywater Type J. C. Wire Markers: 1. Individual Wires: Heat shrink, machine printed, Raychem. 2. Multi-Conductor Cables or Groups of Wires as a Cable: Nylon tie on marker, Thomas & Betts Nylon I.D. Ties, Ty-Raps. D. Wire and Cable Ties: Thomas & Betts Ty-Raps. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION: A. Wire and Cable: 1. THWN-THHN for power wiring through No. 250 AWG and control wiring in conduit. XHHW for sizes above No. 250 AWG in conduit. 2. TW or THW for equipment grounding conductor. 3. Type MC cable for fixture wipes no longer than 6’ and in accordance with NEC Article 334. 4. No. 12 AWG minimum for power circuits and No. 14 AWG minimum for control circuits unless noted otherwise on drawings. B. Splices and Taps: 1. Use insulated spring wire connectors for lighting and receptacle branch circuits No. 10 AWG and smaller. 2. Use solderless pressure connectors for branch circuit conductors No. 8 AWG and larger. 3. Do not make splices or taps in feeder circuits or control circuits. C. Terminals: Page 4 of 6 1. Use copper compression terminals, NEMA 1 hole for sizes No. 4 AWG and smaller, NEMA 2 hole for sizes No. 2 AWG and larger. 2. Use insulated, ring tongue terminals for signal and control conductors. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Install wire and cable in accordance with the NECA Standard of Installation. B. Installation in Conduit: 1. Swab conduits completely and thoroughly before pulling in conductors. 2. Pull all conductors into conduit at same time. 3. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire No. 4 AWG and larger. 4. Do not pull in conductors until conduit system is completed. Do not pull through boxes, fittings or enclosures where a change of conduit alignment or direction occurs. 5. Limit pulling tension to maximum values as recommended by manufacturer. 6. Do not combine circuits into a common conduit other than as indicated on the drawings. C. Direct Burial Cable: 1. Trench and backfill for direct burial cables. Minimum depth of installation shall be 24 inches. 2. Terminate and ground metallic cable sheath with suitable fittings. D. Compression Connectors and Terminals: 1. Install on wire and cable with approved tool and die to recommended compression pressure. Do not cut strands from conductors to fit lugs or terminals. E. Bolted Connectors and Terminals: 1. Torque to manufacturer’s recommended foot-pounds for size and class of connector. 2. Where manufacturer’s published torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with UL 486A torque values. 3. Use galvanized steel bolts, nuts, split-lock washers and flat washers on terminal connections. F. Wiring in Enclosures: 1. Form and tie conductors in panelboards, cabinets, control panels, motor controllers, wireways, and wiring troughs in a neat and orderly manner. 2. Use Thomas & Betts wire and cable ties of appropriate size and type. 3. Limit spacing between ties to not more than 6 inches. Page 5 of 6 G. Taping: 1. Above Ground and Dry Locations: Fill voids and irregularities with half- lapped layers of VC (two minimum) or electrical insulation putty. Insulate with three half-lapped layers of vinyl plastic and one half-layer of friction tape. 2. In damp or wet locations, wrap insulated spring wire connectors with 2 layers of vinyl plastic tape. 3.03 COLOR CODING: A. Power Wiring: Provide color coding for single and multi-conductor power circuits as follows: Voltage ΦA ΦB ΦC Neutral 240 volts and below Black Red Blue White 250 – 600 volts Brown Purple Yellow Gray 1. For specified insulation and jackets not manufactured with integral colors, use conductors with black insulation or jacket and color-coding tape. 2. Color code conductors entering boxes, troughs, cabinets, and other enclosures. 3. Color code conductors in wireways, trenches, and other locations where conductors are continuously accessible at intervals not exceeding 5 feet. B. Insulated Equipment Ground: Green. C. Isolated Ground conductor: Green with Yellow tracer. 3.04 WIRING IDENTIFICATION A. Control Circuits: Install a permanent wire label at each termination. Identifying numbers shall match approved schematic and wiring diagrams. B. Feeder and Branch Circuits: Install a permanent wire label at each termination. Identifying numbers shall include source panel designation and circuit number. 3.05 FIELD TESTS: A. Test conductors after installation is complete and prior to connection to equipment. B. Perform insulation resistance test on each conductor phase-to-ground with adjacent conductors grounded and test conductor disconnected from equipment. Applied potential shall be 1000 volts dc for one minute. Minimum acceptable test values shall be 50 megohms. Investigate deviations in test values between adjacent phases. Page 6 of 6 C. Verify tightness of bolted connections with a calibrated torque wrench. Torque values shall be terminal lug manufacturer’s recommendations. END OF SECTION Page 1 of 9 SECTION T-16136 RACEWAYS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: 1. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS) 2. PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (CRGS) 3. Rigid Aluminum Conduit (RAC) 4. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 5. PVC Conduit (PVC) 6. Flexible Conduit 7. Associated Fittings 8. Wireways 9. Pull and Junction Boxes 1.02 REFERENCES: A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. C80.1 Rigid Steel Conduit – Zinc Coated 2. C80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing – Zinc Coated 3. C80.5 Rigid Aluminum Conduit B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. TC 2 Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80) 2. TC 3 PVC Fitting for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing 3. TC 13 Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (ENT) 4. TC 14 Filament-Wound Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit and Fittings. C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70 National Electrical Code D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 1 Flexible Metal Conduit 2. 5 Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings 3. 5A Nonmetallic Surface Raceways and Fittings 4. 6 Rigid Metal Conduit 5. 360 Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit 6. 514B Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes 7. 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing 8. 870 Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings 9. 886 Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations 10. 1660 Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit Page 2 of 9 1.03 SUBMITTALS – FOR APPROVAL: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 01300 and 16010. B. Product Data: Submit for each type of conduit, fitting, connector, pull and junction box, and wireway used on the project. 1.04 SUBMITTALS – RECORD DATA: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Product Data: Approved, as furnished data as listed above. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL (RGS): A. Conduit: Conduit including elbows, couplings, and nipples shall be standard weight zinc-coated steel, rigid threaded conduit; shall meet the requirements of ANSI C80.1; and shall be hot-dipped galvanized inside, outside and over threads and lacquered inside. B. Fittings: Conduit fittings and accessories for use with RGS conduit shall be cast malleable iron or ferrous alloy, hot-dipped galvanized or zinc-electro-plated and lacquered. Fittings shall have threaded hubs and gasketed covers. Fittings shall be the product of Crouse-Hinds, Appleton or Gedney or an equal. C. Boxes: Device and outlet boxes for use with RGS conduit shall be cast malleable iron, hot-dipped galvanized or zinc-electro-plated and lacquered. Boxes shall have threaded hubs and gasketed covers. Boxes shall be the product of Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, Gedney or equal. D. Fasteners and Supports: All clamps, straps, framing and supporting materials shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel or malleable iron. Bolts, nuts, screws, washers, etc. shall be stainless steel. Cadmium-plated or zinc-plated fasteners and hardware will not be acceptable. 2.02 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC - SCHEDULE 40): A. Conduit: Conduit, elbows and couplings shall be Schedule 40 rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit per NEMA TC 2 with a 900 UL rating, and shall be the standard product of Krayloy or Carlon or approved equal. B. Fittings: Fittings and accessories for use with Schedule 40 PVC conduit shall conform to NEMA TC 3 and shall be of the same material and manufacturer as the conduit. 2.03 PVC COATED STEEL CONDUIT (CRGS): A. Conduit: Prior to coating, all conduits, elbows, couplings, nipples etc. shall be standard weight rigid, threaded steel and shall be hot dipped galvanized inside and out and over the ends. The conduit shall meet the requirements of ANSI C80.1, UL 6, and NEMA RN-1, 1980. Page 3 of 9 B. Fittings: Prior to coating, fittings shall be cast malleable iron, hot dipped galvanized, Appleton Form 35 or Crouse-Hinds or equivalent with cast cover and neoprene gasket. C. Boxes: Device and outlet boxes for use with PVC coated conduit shall be cast malleable iron, hot dipped galvanized with threaded hubs and gasketed cast covers or device plates. Boxes shall be the product of Appleton or Crouse- Hinds. D. PVC Coating: Conduit, fittings, boxes and accessories shall be Plasti-Bond 2 coated, as produced by Robroy Industries Inc. or an approved equal. Before coating, the galvanized surfaces shall be coated with an epoxy-acrylic primer. Exterior surfaces shall have a 40 mil PVC coating applied by dip method. Interior surfaces of conduits, fittings, boxes, etc. shall have a fusion bonded phenolic coating with a thickness of 4-6 mils. E. Fasteners and Supports: U-bolts, conduit clamps, straps, modular framing channels shall be 1-5/8 1-5/8 minimum section dimensions, Type 304 stainless steel, and shall be the product of Unistrut. Fasteners and attachment hardware shall be Type 304 stainless steel. 2.04 RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT: A. Conduit: Conduit, including elbows, couplings and nipples shall be standard weight, threaded, rigid aluminum 6063 alloy, with a copper content not to exceed 0.20%. The conduit shall have a silicon or lacquer coating inside. B. Fittings: Fittings, accessories and device boxes for aluminum conduit systems shall be the standard threaded type as manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, or equal. Both fittings and covers shall be aluminum containing less than 0.4 of 1% copper. All screws shall be stainless steel. Covers shall be gasketed. C. Fasteners: All straps and clamps used to support aluminum conduit shall be hot- dipped galvanized steel or malleable iron, with a 40 mil fused PVC coating, Plastibond, Ocal or equivalent. Strut type framing channels shall be either PVC coated galvanized steel or fiberglass. D. Hardware: Nuts, bolts, screws, washers, etc. shall be stainless steel. Galvanized or cadmium-plated hardware will not be acceptable for use with aluminum conduit. 2.05 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT): A. Conduit: Conduit, including elbows, couplings, and nipples shall be hot dipped galvanized steel inside and out with an organic corrosion resistant coating applied to the inside. B. Fittings and Boxes: Conduit fittings, boxes, and accessories for use with EMT conduit shall be cast malleable iron or ferrous alloy, hot-dipped galvanized or zinc-electro-plated and lacquered. Fittings shall be compression type. Setscrew fittings are not acceptable. Fittings shall be the product of Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, OZ Gedney or an equal. C. Fasteners and Supports: All clamps, straps, framing and supporting materials shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel or malleable iron. Page 4 of 9 2.06 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: A. Flexible Conduit: Flexible conduit shall have a spiraled, flexible, galvanized steel inner core and an outer jacket of neoprene. Sizes 3/8" through 4" shall have a continuous, internal copper ground. Liquid-tight connectors shall be galvanized steel or malleable iron with neoprene sealing gaskets, external ground lugs and insulated throats. Connectors shall be Appleton type STB or Gedney or equal. 2.07 WIREWAYS: A. Sheet Metal: 1. Indoor, dry locations: NEMA 1, sheet steel per UL 870 with hinged cover per NEMA ICS 6. Finish being manufacturer’s standard gray enamel. 2. Outdoor and damp locations: NEMA 3R, galvanized sheet steel per UL 870 with hinged cover per NEMA ICS 6. B. Non-Metallic: 1. NEMA 4X, Robroy Industries fiberglass trough with gasketed cover attached with non-metallic fasteners. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, hubs, elbows, adapters, end caps and other fittings to match and mate with type of wireway furnished as required for a complete system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION: A. General: 1. All field wiring shall be installed in conduit except as otherwise indicated. 2. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2-inch nominal diameter. B. Exposed: 1. Conduit installed outdoors exposed shall be rigid galvanized steel. 2. Conduit installed indoors exposed and below 7 feet shall be rigid galvanized steel. Exposed conduit above 7 feet installed indoors may be EMT. C. Underground: 1. Conduit installed underground shall be Schedule 40 PVC. See section 3.02-E for additional requirements. 2. Elbows used for underground conduit stub-ups from below grade shall be PVC coated rigid galvanized steel, non-metallic Schedule 80 PVC, or Rigid Galvanized Steel completely taped with non-corrosive protective tape. D. Concealed: Page 5 of 9 1. Conduit installed concealed above lay-in ceilings and in dry wall construction shall be EMT. E. Flexible Connections: 1. Indoor-dry areas: Flexible metal conduit. 2. Indoor-wet, damp areas: Liquid-tight, flexible metal conduit. 3. Outdoors: Liquid-tight, flexible metal conduit. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. General: 1. Installation Methods: Conduit shall be installed concealed in walls or above ceiling or underground as indicated on the drawings. 2. Cleaning: All conduit systems shall be completed and shall be swabbed clean before conductors are pulled in. 3. Field cuts: Do not cut conduit with pipe cutters. 4. Bends: Field made bends and offsets shall be made with a hickey or conduit bending machine. Crushed or deformed raceways shall not be installed. The maximum number of 90 bends, or equivalent between pulling points in any conduit run shall be three. Pull and junction fittings and/or boxes shall be provided as necessary to satisfy this requirement. 5. Protection: The ends of all conduit runs shall be closed immediately after installation to prevent the accumulation of water, dirt and other foreign material. 6. Locknuts: Conduits shall be fastened to all sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts. Locknuts shall have sharp edges for digging into the wall of metal enclosures. Bushings shall be installed on the ends of all conduits and shall be the insulating type. 7. Conduit couplings shall be threaded type for RGS or RA conduit and compression type for EMT conduit. Set-screw couplings are not acceptable. 8. Spare conduits: Spare conduits shall have a pull cord installed. The pull cord shall be plastic with a minimum tensile strength of 200 pounds. Not less that 12 inches of slack shall be left at each end of the pull cord. 9. Supports: Supports shall be provided a minimum of every 10’ and within 3’ of all enclosures. In addition, conduits shall be rigidly supported between couplings, on either side of bends and at terminations and fittings. 10. Boxes: Boxes shall be provided in the raceway system as indicated on the drawings and also wherever required for pulling of wires or making connections. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, boxes installed in normally wet locations or on the outside of exterior surfaces shall be NEMA 3R, stainless steel sheet construction. Boxes shall be furnished with hinged and gasketed doors and stainless steel back panels. Each box shall have the volume required by the NEC for the number of Page 6 of 9 conductors enclosed in the box. All boxes shall be securely anchored in place. 11. Flexible Connections: Flexible connections of short length shall be provided for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission or movement. A separate ground conductor shall be provided across all flexible connections. Flexible conduit connections shall be rigidly and securely supported in an approved manner at intervals not exceeding 24 inches in length and within 12 inches of each conduit termination. Lengths of not more than 36 inches may be installed without such supports where flexibility is required. 12. Identification: Identify conduits in accordance with Section 16075. 13. PVC: PVC conduit joints shall be solvent cement welded and shall be watertight. All PVC conduits shall have a separate grounding conductor installed. Where transition is made to the metallic conduit or enclosures, the grounding conductor shall be bonded to the metal conduit or enclosure. 14. Penetrations through walls, floors, and roof: All penetrations shall be sealed with a UL listed fire sealant equal to Dow Corning #3-6548. B. Exposed Conduit: 1. Routing: Exposed conduit shall be run straight and true to structure lines. Changes in direction of runs shall be made with fittings or symmetrical bends. Conduit in damp locations or outdoors shall be exposed to the air on all sides and shall not be installed tight against walls, ceilings and structural members, etc. Clamp backs and/or offsets shall be used as necessary to maintain uniform clearances. 2. Supports: Acceptable supporting and clamping materials for exposed conduit include one-hole straps and clampback, "U" bolts, parallel or right angle conduit clamps, hot-dipped galvanized structural steel frames or modular stainless steel channel as manufactured by Unistrut or equal. Perforated steel tape, stamped steel one- and two-hole straps shall not be used. Conduits shall be supported in accordance with NEC 346-12. 3. Obstructions: Conduit shall be routed so as not to create any tripping or head banging hazard and so as not to create any obstruction to Owner's operation and maintenance activities. 4. Hubs: Watertight conduit hubs shall be installed where conduits enter the tops or sides of sheet metal or non-metallic enclosures. 5. Drains: Drain fittings shall be installed at low points throughout the conduit system where condensation is likely to occur. C. PVC Coated Conduit: 1. PVC coated conduit requires special care to minimize damage to the PVC coating during cutting, threading, bending and installation. Contractor shall install conduit in accordance with manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. Page 7 of 9 2. Contractor shall be responsible for providing strap wrenches, cutting dies, vises, and other special tools required to install PVC coated conduit. Standard pipe wrenches, chain wrenches or channel locks shall not be used. Conduit bending equipment shall have the proper diameter shoes or dies to allow for the thickness of the PVC coating. 3. PVC coated conduit shall be supported with Type 304 stainless steel clamps, straps, hangers and supports. Attachment hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 4. All PVC coated conduit and fittings that have teeth marks, cuts, nicks or are otherwise damaged shall be repaired by coating damaged area with a liquid PVC touch-up compound. Spray-type compound is not acceptable. 5. Unistrut channel supports and related accessories for use with PVC coated conduit shall be Type 304 stainless steel. D. Aluminum: 1. Aluminum conduit shall not be installed in direct contact with earth, concrete, steel, copper, brass or bronze. Where aluminum conduit comes into contact with dissimilar metals or passes through concrete walls or floors, it shall be wrapped with 2 layers, half-lapped, of corrosion preventative pipe tape, Scotch 50 or equal. 2. Aluminum conduit threads shall have a Penetrox, No-Ox-ld or equal, applied when installed. E. Underground Conduit: 1. Under Landscaping (i.e. sod or grass): a. Underground conduit runs shall be laid in sand and covered with a 4” red concrete cap. The conduit shall be surrounded by a minimum of 3-inches of virgin sand (top, bottom, and sides). b. Where conduits are routed under paved areas that are accessible to vehicles, the conduit shall be encased in steel reinforced concrete duct bank. See Section 16136-3.02-E-2. c. The top of concrete cap or duct bank shall be a minimum of 24 inches below grade, unless otherwise indicated and must go below conflicts, such as yard piping, if the 24 inches minimum depth cannot be met. Compact trench backfill to original density. 2. Concrete Encasement (Under Driveways and Roads): a. Underground conduit runs shall be encased in red concrete. The minimum thickness of cover shall be 3 inches. b. Where conduits rise above grade, the concrete encasement shall extend to 6 inches above grade. Exposed concrete shall be natural color, not red. Where conduits run through equipment foundations or floor slabs, the concrete encasement shall butt the underside of the slab. Page 8 of 9 c. The top of concrete encasement shall be a minimum of 24 inches below grade, unless otherwise indicated and must go below conflicts, such as yard piping, if the 24 inches minimum depth cannot be met. Compact trench backfill to original density. d. The concrete encasement shall be reinforced with a minimum of four (4) No. 4 steel reinforcing bars. 3. Separation: Minimum separation between the outside edges of adjacent conduits shall be 3 inches. 4. Elbows: All elbows shall be long radius type. 5. Spacers: Conduit spacers shall be installed at 5 feet on centers. 6. Expansion Fittings: Provide expansion fittings in aboveground, vertical portion of each underground conduit stub-up. END OF SECTION Page 1 of 4 SECTION T-16140 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: 1. Receptacles 2. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles 3. Snap Switches 4. Wall Plates 1.02 REFERENCES: A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. WD1-83 General Requirements for Wiring Devices B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70 National Electrical Code C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 20-86 Standard for Safety General Use Snap Switches 2. 94-91 Standard for Safety Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances 3. 498091 Standard for Safety Attachment Plugs and Receptacles 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Procedures: Submit for approval and record purposes in accordance with Section 01300 and 16010. B. Product Data: Submit for each type of device used on project. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be defined as they are in National Electrical Code, Article 100. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS Page 2 of 4 2.01 WIRING DEVICES: A. General: Provide wiring devices, in types, characteristics, grades, colors, and electrical ratings for applications indicated which are UL listed and which comply with NEMA WD 1 and other applicable UL and NEMA Standards. B: Receptacles, General Use Duplex Receptacles: 125 volt, 15 or 20 amp, heavy duty, grounding type: 5-15R 5-20-R Manufacturer Color Duplex Duplex Hubbell Ivory 5262-I 5362-I Leviton Ivory 5262-I 5362-I P& S Ivory 5262-I 5362-I C: Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Receptacles: 125 volt, 15 or 20 amp, heavy duty, grounding type "non feed-through" conforming to UL 498 and UL 943: Manufacturer Color 5 - 15R 5 - 20R Hubbell Ivory GF5262-I GF5362-IA Leviton Ivory 7599-I 7899-I P & S Ivory 1591-RI 2091-IL D: Snap Switches: 120/277 volt, 20 ampere, quiet rated, heavy duty, complying with UL 20 and NEMA WD1: Manufacturer Color 1 Pole 2 Pole 3 Way 4 Way Hubbell Ivory 1221-I 1222-I 1223-I 1224-I Leviton Ivory 1221-2I 1222-2I 1223-2I 1224-2I P & S Ivory 20AC1-I 20AC2-I 20AC3-I 20AC4-I 2.02 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES: A. Wall Plates: 1. Single and combination, of types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as required by devices. 2. Provide plates which mate and match with wiring devices to which attached. 3. Provide metal screws for securing plates to devices with screw heads colored to match finish of plates. 4. Provide plates possessing following additional construction features. a. Device plates: stainless steel. b. Device plates for surface mounted, 4 inch sq boxes: 1/2 inch stainless steel covers. c. Weatherproof covers for exterior devices or devices in damp locations: Raintight while in use, UL listed, molded UV stabilized poly-carbonate with stainless steel screws and mounting gaskets. Tay Mac Corporation safety outlet enclosure, or equal. Page 3 of 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install wiring devices and accessories as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. B. Coordinate with other Work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring installations, as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other Work. C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes that are clean; free from building materials, dirt and debris. D. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated or directed, boxes for wiring devices shall be mounted so that the centerline of the device is at the following height above finished floor (AFF) or above finished grade (AFG). FINISHED UNFINISHED DEVICE AREAS AREAS Snap switches 48" 48" Convenience Receptacles 18" 18" E. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed. F. Install wall plates after painting work is completed. G. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer's torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A. Use properly scaled torque indicating hand tool. H. Do not use terminals on wiring devices (hot or neutral) for feed-through connections, looped or otherwise. Make circuit connections via wire connectors and pigtails. I. Ground receptacles with insulated green ground wire from device ground screw to bolted outlet box connection. 3.02 PROTECTION: A. Protect installed components from damage. Replace damaged items prior to final acceptance. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Testing: Prior to energizing circuits, test wiring for electrical continuity and for short circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained. Subsequent to energizing, test wiring devices and demonstrate compliance with requirements, operating each operable device at least six (6) times. Page 4 of 4 B. Test receptacles with Hubbell 5200, Woodhead 1750 or equal for correct polarity, proper ground connection and wiring faults. C. Test ground fault interrupter operation with both local and remote fault simulations in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. END OF SECTION Page 1 of 4 SECTION T-16441 DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the low-voltage fused and non-fused switches as specified herein and as shown on the contract drawings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS 1.03 REFERENCES A. The switches and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of NEMA and UL. 1.04 SUBMITTALS -- FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 01300, 16010, and as stated herein. B. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Master drawing index 2. Dimensioned outline drawing 3. Conduit entry/exit locations 4. Switch ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage c. Continuous current 5. Fuse ratings and type 6. Cable terminal sizes. 1.05 SUBMITTALS -- FOR INFORMATION A. When requested by the Engineer the following product information shall be submitted: 1. Descriptive bulletins 2. Product sheets. 1.06 SUBMITTALS--FOR CLOSEOUT A. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes: 1. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed in section 1.04 Page 2 of 4 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9000, 9001 or 9002 certified. 1.08 NOT USED 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. A. FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Contractor shall field verify all dimensions prior to installation. Installation of all switches shall comply with the National Electric Codes clearance and mounting height requirements. B. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Three (3) copies of these instruction manuals shall be submitted with the closeout documents listed in section 1.06. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Cutler-Hammer B. Square D C. Siemens 2.02 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Provide switches as shown on drawings, with the following ratings: 1. 30 to 1200 amperes 2. 250 volts AC, DC; 600 volts AC (30A to 200A 600 volts DC) 3. 2, 3, 4, and 6 poles 4. Non-Fusible and Fusible 5. Copper/aluminum standard mechanical lugs. B. Construction 1. Switchblades and jaws shall be plated copper. 2. Switches shall have a handle that is easily pad lockable in the OFF position. Page 3 of 4 3. Switches shall have defeat-able door interlocks that prevent the door from opening when the handle is in the ON position. 4. Switch assembly and operating handle shall be an integral part of the enclosure base. 5. Fusible switches rated 100A to 1200A shall have reinforced fuse clips. 6. Switch blades shall be readily visible in the OFF position. 7. Switch operating mechanism shall be non-teasible, positive quick- make/quick-break type (except 30A plug fuse-type). 8. Fusible switches shall be suitable for service entrance equipment. 9. Switches shall have line terminal shields. 10. All exterior switches shall be heavy-duty type. 11. All interior switches shall be general-duty type unless otherwise noted. C. Enclosures A. Exterior: All enclosures shall be NEMA 3R rainproof unless otherwise noted. B. Interior: All enclosures shall be NEMA 1 unless otherwise noted. D. Fuses 1. Fuses shall be dual element, current limiting type such as Bussmann Low- Peak Yellow or equal. 2.04 NAMEPLATES A. Manufacturers nameplates shall be front cover mounted, contain a permanent record of switch type, ampere rating, and maximum voltage rating. PART 3 EXECUTION A. EXAMINATION A. All switches shall be cleaned free of debris after installation and prior to final acceptance by the owner. Remove all miscellaneous paint markings, grease and tar. 3.02 FACTORY TESTING A. Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of UL and NEMA standards. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. The equipment shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendations. Page 4 of 4 END OF SECTION Page 1 of 7 SECTION T-16442 LOW VOLTAGE PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: A. Furnish and install panelboards as specified herein and as indicated on the drawings. B. Panelboard types included in this Section are: 1. Power distribution panelboards 2. Lighting and appliance panelboards 1.02 REFERENCES: A. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) 1. Standard of Installation B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1. AB 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers 2. PB 1 Panelboards 3. PB1.1 General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 1. 50 Cabinets and Boxes 2. 67 Panelboards 1.03 SUBMITTALS - FOR APPROVAL: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 01300, 16010, and as stated herein. B. Product Data: 1. Descriptive bulletins 2. Enclosure outline drawing with complete dimensions 3. Breaker layout drawing 4. Component list 5. Conduit entry/exit locations 6. Assembly ratings including: a. Short circuit current b. Voltage c. Continuous current 7. Cable terminal sizes. 8. Installation Instructions Page 2 of 7 1.04 SUBMITTALS – RECORD DATA: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes: 1. Final (as-built) drawings and information for items listed in Paragraph 1.03 2. Installation, operation and maintenance instruction 3. Spare parts list 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS: A. The manufacturer of the panelboard shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly, including circuit breakers. B. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9000, 9001 or 9002 certified. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Cutler-Hammer B. Square D C. Siemens 2.02 RATINGS: A. Panelboards rated 240 Vac or less shall have short circuit ratings as indicated on the drawings or as herein scheduled, but not less than 10,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. B. Panelboards rated 480 Vac shall have short circuit ratings as indicated on the drawings or as herein scheduled, but not less than 14,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. C. Panelboards shall be labeled with a UL short circuit rating. All panelboards shall be fully rated. Series ratings shall not be used. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION: A. Interiors shall be completely factory assembled devices. They shall be designed such that switching and protective devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without removing the main bus connectors. Page 3 of 7 B. Trims for lighting and appliance panelboards shall be supplied with a hinged door covering all circuit breaker handles. Doors in panelboard trims shall not uncover any live parts. Doors shall have a semiflush, cylinder lock and catch assembly. Doors over 48 inches in height shall have auxiliary fasteners. C. Distribution panelboard trims shall cover all live parts. Switching device handles shall be accessible. D. Surface trims shall be same height and width as box. Flush trims shall overlap the box by 3/4 inch on all sides. Trims shall be secured to box with concealed clamps. E. A directory card with a clear plastic cover shall be supplied and mounted on the inside of each door in a metal frame. F. All locks shall be keyed alike. 2.04 BUS: A. Main bus bars shall be tin-plated copper, sized in accordance with UL standards to limit temperature rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 650 C above an ambient of 400 C maximum. B. A bolted ground bus shall be included in all panels. C. Full-size (100%-rated) insulated neutral bars shall be included for panelboards indicated to have a neutral bus. Bus bar taps for panels with single-pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. Neutral busing shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection. 200%-rated neutrals shall be supplied for panels designated on drawings with oversized neutral conductors. 2.05 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS: A. Distribution panelboards including circuit breakers contained therein shall have fully rated interrupting ratings as indicated on the drawings. Panelboards shall have bolt-on, molded case circuit breakers as indicated below. B. Molded case circuit breakers shall provide circuit overcurrent protection with inverse time and instantaneous tripping characteristics. Ground fault protection shall be provided where indicated. C. Circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle and shall have a quick-make, quick-break, over-center switching mechanism that is mechanically trip-free. Automatic tripping of the breaker shall be clearly indicated by the handle position. Contacts shall be nonwelding silver alloy and arc extinction shall be accomplished by means of arc chutes. A push-to-trip button on the front of the circuit breaker shall provide a local manual means to exercise the trip mechanism. D. Where indicated, circuit breakers shall be current limiting. E. Circuit breakers below 600-ampere shall have thermal-magnetic trip units and inverse time-current characteristics. Page 4 of 7 F. Circuit breakers 600-ampere through 1200-ampere shall be provided with microprocessor-based RMS sensing trip units. 1. Each molded case circuit breaker microprocessor-based tripping system shall consist of three (3) current sensors, a trip unit, and a flux-transfer shunt trip. The trip unit shall use microprocessor-based technology to provide the adjustable time-current protection functions. True RMS sensing circuit protection shall be achieved by analyzing the secondary current signals received from the circuit breaker current sensors and initiating trip signals to the circuit breaker trip actuators when predetermined trip levels and time delay settings are reached. 2. Interchangeable rating plugs shall establish the continuous trip ratings of each circuit breaker. Rating plugs shall be fixed or adjustable as indicated. Rating plugs shall be interlocked so they are not interchangeable between frames, and interlocked such that a breaker cannot be closed and latched with the rating plug removed. 3. The microprocessor-based trip unit shall have thermal memory capabilities to prevent the breaker from being reset following an overload condition until after a preset time delay. 4. When the adjustable instantaneous setting is omitted, the trip unit shall be provided with an instantaneous override. Internal ground fault protection adjustable pick-up ratings shall not exceed 1200 amperes. Provide neutral ground fault current sensor for four-wire loads. 5. Breakers shall have built-in test points for testing the long-time delay, instantaneous, and ground fault functions of the breaker, by means of a 120-volt operated test set. Provide one test set capable of testing all breakers 600-ampere and above. 6. System coordination shall be provided by the following microprocessor- based, time-current curve shaping adjustments: Adjustable long-time pick-up Adjustable short-time pick-up and delay, with selective curve shaping Adjustable instantaneous pick-up Adjustable ground fault pick-up and delay, with selective curve shaping. G. Where indicated, provide circuit breakers UL listed for application at 100% of their continuous ampere rating in their intended enclosure. H. Provide shunt trips, bell alarms, and auxiliary switches as indicated on the drawings. I. Circuit breakers supplying air conditioning branch circuits shall be UL listed as type HACR. 2.06 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS: Page 5 of 7 A. The minimum integrated short circuit rating for branch circuit panelboards shall be indicated on the drawings. B. Bolt-in type, heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, single- and multi-pole circuit breakers of the types specified herein, shall be provided for each circuit with toggle handles that indicate when unit has tripped. C. Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic type with common type handle for all multiple pole circuit breakers. Circuit breakers shall be minimum 100-ampere frame and through 100-ampere trip sizes shall take up the same pole spacing. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed as type SWD for lighting circuits and HACR for air conditioning branch circuits. 1. Circuit breaker handle locks shall be provided for all circuits that supply exit signs, emergency lights, energy management and control system (EMCS) panels and fire alarm panels. 2.07 ENCLOSURE: A. General: Enclosures shall be at least 20 inches wide and made from galvanized steel. Provide minimum gutter space in accordance with the National Electrical Code. Where feeder cables supplying the mains of a panel are carried through its box to supply other electrical equipment, the box shall be sized to include the additional required wiring space. At least four interior mounting studs with adjustable nuts shall be provided. Enclosures shall be provided with blank ends. B. Rating: NEMA type 12 enclosure except where other enclosure requirements are indicated. 2.08 FINISH: A. Surfaces of the trim assembly shall be properly cleaned, primed, and a finish coat of the manufacturers standard paint color shall be applied. 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES A. Provide TVSS system integral to distribution panelboards and appliance panelboards where indicated on drawings. Reference section 16671 for specifications on TVSS units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION: A. Confirm installation space and clearance requirements for panelboards in accordance with NEC requirements. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. General: Install panelboards as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions, NEMA PB 1.1, and NECA “Standard of Installation”. Page 6 of 7 B. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 6 feet 2 inches above finished floor, except as otherwise indicated. C. Mounting: 1. Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. 2. Mount flush panels uniformly flush with wall finish. D. Circuit Directory: Typed directory indicating final circuit connections. Obtain approval before installing. E. Install filler plates in unused breaker spaces. F. Provisions for Future Circuits at Flush Panelboards: 1. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panel into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in future. 2. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab other than slabs on grade. G. Wiring in Panel Gutters: Train conductors neatly in groups, bundle, and wrap with wire ties after completion of load balancing. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION: A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide unit nameplate in accordance with Section 16075. B. Provided one (1) 8-1/2”x11” stainless steel nameplate engraved with one-line diagram and year installed. One-line diagram shall include panel voltages, amps, AIC ratings, and feeder sizes. Nameplate shall be mounted to the exterior door of the main distribution panel – LB. 3.04 GROUNDING: A. Connections: Make equipment grounding connections for panelboards as required in Section 16060. B. Provide ground continuity to main electrical ground bus. C. Provide isolated ground bars for panels serving sensitive electronic equipment and as indicated on panel schedules. 3.05 CONNECTIONS: A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, in accordance with manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. 3.06 FIELD TESTING: A. Inspect for compliance with drawings and specifications. B. Inspect for defects, damaged or missing parts. Page 7 of 7 C. Operate each breaker a minimum of three (3) times to insure proper operation. D. Perform insulation resistance test on complete assembly at 1000 Vdc. Disconnect any solid-state devices prior to testing. Minimum acceptable test results are 100 megohms. 3.07 CLEANING: A. Upon completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. B. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. C. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. D. Clean interior of panelboard. 3.08 FIELD ADJUSTMENTS: A. Balancing Loads: Prior to final acceptance, conduct load-balancing measurements and circuit changes as follows: 1. Perform measurements during period of normal working load as advised by Owner. 2. Advise Engineer of load imbalances exceeding 20% or of loads exceeding 80% of circuit ratings. Reconnect branch circuit loads as directed by Engineer. 3. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside the normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility. Make special arrangements with Owner to avoid disrupting critical circuits. 4. Recheck loads after circuit changes during normal load period. Record load readings before and after changes and submit test records. END OF SECTION Page 1 of 6 SECTION 16461 DRY-TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS (1500 KVA AND BELOW) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The Contractor shall furnish and install single-phase and three-phase general purpose individually mounted dry-type transformers of the two-windings type, self-cooled as specified herein, and as shown on the contract drawings. Where indicated on the drawings provide K- factor transformers for nonsinusoidal loads. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS 1.03 REFERENCES A. The transformers and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of ANSI, NEMA, and UL. 1.04 SUBMITTALS – FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL A. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Outline dimensions and weights 2. Technical certification sheet 3. Transformer ratings including: a. kVA b. Primary and secondary voltage c. Taps d. Basic impulse level (BIL) for equipment over 600 volts e. Design impedance f. Insulation class and temperature rise g. Sound level. 4. Product data sheets. 1.05 SUBMITTALS – FOR CONSTRUCTION A. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes. 1. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed in paragraph 1.04 2. Connection diagrams 3. Installation information 4. Seismic certification and equipment anchorage details. B. The final (as-built) drawings shall include the same drawings as the construction drawings and shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. B. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of Page 2 of 6 installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. C. The equipment and major components shall be suitable for and certified to meet all applicable seismic requirements of Uniform Building Code (UBC) for Zone 4 application. Guidelines for the installation consistent with these requirements shall be provided by the switchgear manufacturer and be based upon testing of representative equipment. The test response spectrum shall be based upon a 5% minimum damping factor, UBC: a peak of 2.15g’s (3.2–11 Hz), and a ZPA of 0.86g’s applied at the base of the equipment. The tests shall fully envelop this response spectrum for all equipment natural frequencies up to at least 35 Hz. D. The following minimum mounting and installation guidelines shall be met, unless specifically modified by the above referenced standards. 1. The Contractor shall provide equipment anchorage details, coordinated with the equipment mounting provision, prepared and stamped by a licensed civil engineer in the state. Mounting recommendations shall be provided by the manufacturer based upon approved shake table tests used to verify the seismic design of the equipment. 2. The equipment manufacturer shall certify that the equipment can withstand, that is, function following the seismic event, including both vertical and lateral required response spectra as specified in above codes. 3. The equipment manufacturer shall document the requirements necessary for proper seismic mounting of the equipment. Seismic qualification shall be considered achieved when the capability of the equipment, meets or exceeds the specified response spectra. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. All transformers shall be UL listed and bear the UL label. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. 1.09 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided with each assembly shipped, and shall include instruction leaflets and instruction bulletins for the complete assembly and each major component. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Cutler-Hammer B. Square D C. Siemens The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. Products in compliance with the specification and manufactured by others not named will be considered only if pre-approved by the Engineer ten (10) days prior to bid date. 2.02 RATINGS Page 3 of 6 A. kVA and voltage ratings shall be as shown on the drawings. B. Transformers shall be designed for continuous operation at rated kVA, for 24 hours a day, 365 days a year operation, with normal life expectancy as defined in ANSI C57.96. C. Transformer sound levels shall not exceed the following ANSI and NEMA levels for self- cooled ratings: 0 to 9 kVA 40 dB 10 to 50 kVA 45 dB 51 to 150 kVA 50 dB 151 to 300 kVA 55 dB 301 to 500 kVA 60 dB 501 to 700 kVA 62 dB 701 to 1000 kVA 64 dB 1001 to 1500 kVA 65 dB D. Where K-factor transformers are indicated on the drawings, the transformers shall be specifically designed to supply circuits with a harmonic profile equal to or less than a K-factor of 4 without exceeding 115 degrees C temperature rise. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION – GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMERS A. Insulation Systems 1. Transformer insulation system shall be as follows: a. 5 - 75 kVA, three-phase (37.5 kVA, single-phase): 185 degrees C insulation system with 115 degree C rise, encapsulated design; 75 kVA and above: 220 degrees C insulation system with 115 degree C rise, ventilated design. 2. Required performance shall be obtained without exceeding the above indicated temperature rise in a 40 degrees C maximum ambient, and a 24 hour average ambient of 30 degrees C. 3. All insulation materials shall be flame-retardant and shall not support combustion as defined in ASTM Standard Test Method D635. B. Core and Coil Assemblies 1. Transformer core shall be constructed with high-grade, nonaging, grain-oriented silicon steel with high magnetic permeability, and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Maximum magnetic flux densities shall be substantially below the saturation point. The transformer core volume shall allow efficient transformer operation at 10% above the nominal tap voltage. The core laminations shall be tightly clamped and compressed. Coils shall be wound of electrical grade aluminum with continuous wound construction. 2. On three-phase units rated 30 kVA and below the core and coil assembly shall be completely encapsulated in a proportioned mixture of resin and aggregate to provide a moistureproof, shock-resistant seal. The core and coil encapsulation system shall minimize the sound level. 3. On three-phase units rated 30 kVA and above the core and coil assembly shall be impregnated with non-hydroscopic, thermosetting varnish and cured to reduce hot spots and seal out moisture. The assembly shall be installed on vibration-absorbing pads. C. Taps 1. Three-phase transformers rated 15 through 500 kVA shall be provided with six 2-1/2% taps, two above and four below rated primary voltage. 2. All single-phase transformers, and three-phase transformers rated below 15 kVA and above 500 kVA, shall be provided with the manufacturer’s standard tap configuration. Page 4 of 6 D. Electrostatic Shielding 1. Where shown on the drawings, provide shielded isolation transformers with an electrostatic shield consisting of a single turn of aluminum placed between the primary and secondary winding and grounded. E. NEMA TP-1-1996 Energy Star Labeled 1. Where shown on the drawings, provide transformers that are low loss type with minimum efficiencies per NEMA TP-1 when operated at 35% of full load capacity. Transformers shall bear the Energy Star label. F. Motor Drive Isolation 1. Where shown on the drawings, provide motor drive isolation transformers. 2. Motor drive isolation transformers shall be designed for use with three-phase AC adjustable frequency drives 600 volts and below to provide isolation between the incoming line and drive circuitry. These drives minimize the line disturbances caused by SCR firing within the drive unit. Thermoguards shall be included in all motor drive isolation transformers to provide additional protection for the transformer from increased heating due to the non-sinusoidal characteristics of drive currents. The transformer shall provide reduced short-circuit currents and voltage line transients. The transformer shall be specifically sized to the drive kVA requirements dictated by the horsepower of the motor and, as such, will be mechanically braced to withstand the stress of current reversals and short-circuit currents associated with the specific drive kVA rating. Transformers shall be low loss type with minimum efficiencies per NEMA TP-1 when operated at 35% of full load capacity. 2.04 CONSTRUCTION – K-FACTOR TRANSFORMERS A. Insulation Systems 1. Transformers shall be insulated with a UL recognized 220 degrees C insulation system. 2. Required performance shall be obtained without exceeding the above indicated temperature rise in a 40 degrees C maximum ambient and a 24-hour average ambient of 30 degrees C. 3. All insulation materials shall be flame-retardant and shall not support combustion as defined in ASTM Standard Test Method D635. B. Core and Coil Assemblies 1. Transformer core shall be constructed with high-grade, nonaging, grain-oriented silicon steel with high magnetic permeability, and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Maximum magnetic flux densities shall be substantially below the saturation point. The transformer core volume shall allow efficient transformer operation at 10% above the nominal tap voltage. The core laminations shall be tightly clamped and compressed. Coils shall be wound of electrical grade aluminum with continuous wound construction. The core shall provide reduced induced currents in the steel caused by the high ratios of peak-to-rms currents and voltages found in harmonic loads. 2. The neutral bus shall be configured to accommodate 200% of the rated current. 3. The core and coil assembly shall be impregnated with non-hydroscopic, thermosetting varnish and cured to reduce hot spots and seal out moisture. The assembly shall be installed on vibration-absorbing pads. C. Taps 1. Three-phase K-factor rated transformers through 300 kVA shall be provided with six 2-1/2% taps, two above and four below rated primary voltage. Page 5 of 6 2. Single-phase K-factor rated transformers shall be provided with manufacturer’s standard tap configuration. D. Electrostatic Shielding 1. Provide K-rated transformers with electrostatic shielding consisting of a single turn of aluminum placed between the primary and secondary winding and grounded. 2.05 WIRING/TERMINATIONS A. Recommended external cable shall be rated 90 degrees C (sized at 75 degrees C ampacity) for encapsulated and 75 degrees C for ventilated designs. Connectors should be selected on the basis of the type and cable size used to wire the specific transformer. 2.06 ENCLOSURE – GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMERS A. The enclosure shall be made of heavy-gauge steel. All transformers shall be equipped with a wiring compartment suitable for conduit entry and large enough to allow convenient wiring. The maximum temperature of the enclosure shall not exceed 90 degrees C. The core of the transformer shall be grounded to the enclosure. B. On three-phase units rated 45 kVA and below the enclosure construction shall be encapsulated, totally enclosed, non-ventilated, NEMA 3R, with lifting eyes. C. On three-phase units rated 75 kVA and above the enclosure construction shall be ventilated, NEMA 2, drip-proof, with lifting holes. All ventilation openings shall be protected against falling dirt. 2.07 ENCLOSURE – K-FACTOR TRANSFORMERS A. The enclosure shall be made of heavy-gauge steel. All transformers shall be equipped with a wiring compartment suitable for conduit entry and large enough to allow convenient wiring. The maximum temperature of the enclosure shall not exceed 50 degrees C rise above a 40 degree C maximum ambient (90 degrees C.) The core of the transformer shall be grounded to the enclosure. B. The enclosure construction shall be ventilated, NEMA 2 drip-proof, with lifting holes. All ventilation openings shall be protected against falling dirt. On outdoor units, provide weather-shields over ventilated openings. 2.08 FINISH A. Enclosures shall be finished with ANSI 61 color, weather-resistant enamel. 2.09 ACCESSORIES A. On ventilated outdoor units provide suitable weather-shields over ventilation openings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FACTORY TESTING A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of ANSI and NEMA standards. 1. Ratio tests at the rated voltage connection and at all tap connections Page 6 of 6 2. Polarity and phase relation tests on the rated voltage connection 3. Applied potential tests 4. Induced potential test 5. No-load and excitation current at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. The Contractors shall install all equipment per the manufacturer’s recommendations and the contract drawings. 3.03 FIELD ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust taps to deliver appropriate secondary voltage. 3.04 FIELD TESTING A. Measure primary and secondary voltages for proper tap settings. END OF SECTION Page 1 of 7 SECTION T-16510 LUMINAIRES PART I GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: 1. Lighting fixtures 2. Lamps 3. Ballasts 4. Emergency lighting units 1.02 REFERENCES: A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. C78 Series Lamps 2. C82.1-97 Electric Lamp Ballast - Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast 3. C82.2-84 Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts - Methods of Measurements 4. C82.4-92 Ballasts for High Intensity Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple Supply Type) 5. C82.11-93 High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. C62.11-93 IEEE Recommended Practice on Metal Oxide Surge Arresters for Alternating Current Power Circuits C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70 National Electrical Code D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 844-95 Electric Lighting Fixtures for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations 2. 924-95 Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment 3. 935-95 Fluorescent Lamp Ballast 4. 1029-94 High Intensity Discharge Lamp Ballasts 5. 1570-95 Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures 6. 1571-95 Incandescent Lighting Fixtures 7. 1572-97 High Intensity Discharge Lighting Fixtures 1.03 DEFINITIONS: Page 2 of 7 A. Emergency Lighting Unit: Fixture with integral emergency battery power supply and means for controlling and charging battery. Emergency units are available with integral lamps only. B. Fixture: Complete lighting unit, exit sign, or emergency lighting unit. Fixtures include lamps and parts required to distribute light, position and protect lamps, and connect lamps to power supply. Internal battery powered exit signs and emergency lighting units also include battery and means for controlling and recharging battery. Emergency lighting units are available with and without integral lamp heads and lamps. C. Luminaire: Fixture. D. Average Life: Time after which 50% will have failed and 50% will have survived under normal conditions. E. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): The root mean square (RMS) of all the harmonic current components divided by total fundamental (60 hz) current. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Procedures: Submit in accordance with Section 01300, 16010, and as stated herein. B. Product Data: 1. Describe fixtures, lamps, ballasts, and emergency lighting units. Arrange product data for fixtures in order of fixture designation. Include data on features and accessories and the following information: a. Outline drawings of fixtures indicating dimensions and principal features. b. Electrical ratings and photometric data with specified lamps and certified results of independent laboratory tests. c. Data on batteries and chargers of emergency lighting units. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Detail nonstandard fixtures indicating dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. D. Supplies: 1. Submit sample of fixture if different than specified. E. Miscellaneous: Page 3 of 7 1. For substitutes only, product certifications signed by manufacturers of lighting fixtures certifying that their fixtures comply with specified requirements. 2. Warranty for rechargeable battery. 3. Coordination drawings for fixtures that require coordination with other equipment installed in the same space. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver lighting fixtures in factory-fabricated containers or wrappings, which properly protect fixtures from damage. B. Store lighting fixtures in original packaging. Store inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, humidity; laid flat and blocked off ground. C. Handle lighting fixtures carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scarring of finishes. Do not install damaged units or components; replace with new. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 1. Term “NRTL” shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms “listed and “labeled” shall be as defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70. C. Coordinate fixtures mounting hardware and trim with ceiling system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIXTURES, GENERAL: A. Comply with requirements specified in Paragraphs below and lighting fixture schedule. 2.02 FIXTURE COMPONENTS, GENERAL: A. Metal Parts: Free from burrs, sharp corners and edges. Page 4 of 7 B. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, except as indicated. Form and support components to prevent warping and sagging. C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating and free from light leakage under operating conditions. Arrange to permit relamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames, lenses, diffusers and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when secured in operating position. D. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectances as follows, except as otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85% 2. Specular Surfaces: 83% 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75% 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90% E. Lenses, Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 100% virgin acrylic plastic or water white, annealed crystal glass except as indicated. 1. Plastic: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat and UV radiation. 2. Lens Thickness: 0.125 inch, minimum. 2.03 SUSPENDED FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS: A. Single-Stem Hangers: ½-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fitting and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture. B. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, ½-inch steel tubes with single canopy arranged to mount single fixture. Finish same as fixture. C. Rod Hangers: ¼-inch diameter cadmium plated, threaded steel rod. D. Hook Hanger: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord and locking-type plug. 2.04 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES: A. Fixtures: Conform to UL 1570. B. Ballasts: Electronic type. Conform to UL 935, ANSI C82.11 and NFPA 70. 1. Certification: By Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL). 2. Labeling: By Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association (CBM). 3. Type: Class P, 0.95 P.F. minimum. 4. Sound Rating: “A” rating, except as indicated otherwise. 5. Voltage: Match connected circuits. 6. Temperature: Start and operate at minimum of 500 F. 7. THD: 10 percent maximum. Page 5 of 7 C. Low Temperature Ballast: Start and maintain operation at a minimum of 00 F. D. T-8 Lamp Ballasts: Full-light output type, compatible with energy-saving lamps. Following are required average input wattages when tested according to ANSI C82.2. 1. 39 or less when operating one F32T8 lamp. 2. 62 or less when operating two F32T8 lamps. 3. 95 or less when operating three F32T8 lamps. 4. 114 or less when operating four F32T8 lamps. E. Recessed fluorescent fixtures shall have 100% acrylic prismatic lenses with a minimum thickness of 0.125 inch unless otherwise indicated. 2.05 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) FIXTURES: A. Fixtures: Conform to UL 1572. B. Ballasts: Conform to UL 1029 and ANSI C82.4. Provide ballasts with following features, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Constant wattage autotransformer (CWA) or regulator, high-power-factor type. 2. Voltage rating matches system voltage. 3. Single-Lamp Ballasts: Minimum starting temperature of –300 C. 4. Normal ambient operating temperature is 400 C. 5. Open circuit operation will not reduce average life. 6. Noise Suppression: Manufacturer’s standard epoxy encapsulated model designed to minimize audible fixture noise. 2.06 INCANDESCENT FIXTURES: A. Conform to UL 1571. 2.07 FIXTURES FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS: A. Conform to UL 844 or provide units that have Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Corporation (FM) certification for indicated class and division of hazard. 2.08 EXIT SIGNS: A. Conform to UL 924. 1. Sign Colors: Conform to local code. Page 6 of 7 B. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Backup): Integral automatic high/low trickle charger in self-contained power pack. 1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel cadmium type 1.5 hour minimum emergency run time. 2.09 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS: A. Conform to UL 924. Provide self-contained units with features and characteristics as indicated on the drawings. 2.10 LAMPS: A. Conform to ANSI C78 series applicable to each type of lamp. B. Fluorescent Lamps: Color temperature of 35000 K. 2.11 FINISH: A. Steel Parts: Manufacturer’s standard finish applied over corrosion-resistant primer, free of streaks, runs, holidays, stains, blisters and defects. Remove fixtures showing evidence of corrosion during project warranty period and replace with new fixtures. B. Other Parts: Manufacturer’s standard finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Set units plumb, square and level with ceiling and walls, in alignment with adjacent fixtures, and secure according to manufacturer’s printed instructions and approved submittals. B. Mounting heights specified or indicated shall be to the bottom of fixture for ceiling-mounted fixtures and to the center of fixture for wall-mounted fixtures. C. Obtain approval of the exact mounting for lighting fixtures on the job prior to commencing installation and, where applicable, after coordinating with the type, style and pattern of ceiling being installed. D. Where recessed fixtures are supported by ceiling support grid, install additional support wires near each corner of the fixture. E. Make branch circuit wiring connections with conductors having an insulation temperature rating suitable for the fixture. F. Ground and bond fixtures in accordance with Section 16060. Page 7 of 7 G. Install lamp units according to manufacturer’s instructions and fixture schedule. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. B. Give 7-days notice of dates and times for field tests. C. Verify normal operation of each fixture after fixtures have been installed and circuits have been energized with normal power source. D. Interrupt electrical energy to demonstrate proper operation of emergency lighting installation. 1. Duration of supply. 2. Low battery voltage shut-down. 3. Normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal. 4. Low supply voltage transfer. E. Replace or repair malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Clean fixtures upon completion of installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. B. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities. C. Set and adjust photocells and/or time switches for proper operation as directed by Owner. END OF SECTION Page 1 of 9 SECTION 16515 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 –GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The work covered in this section is subject to all of the requirements in the General Conditions of the Specifications. Contractor shall coordinate all of the work in this section with all of the trades covered in other sections of the specification to provide a complete and operable system. All Labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation and services necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with furnishing, delivery and installation of the work of this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish and install a complete system for the control of lighting and other equipment as indicated on the plans, detailed in the manufacturer submittal and as further defined herein. Contractor is solely responsible to verify quantity, installation locations and wiring requirements for this project. Specific manufacturer’s catalog numbers, when listed in this section are for reference only. It is the responsibility of the contractor to verify with lighting control manufacturer all catalog information and specific product acceptability. B. The system shall include but not be limited by the following list: Pre-wired, microprocessor controlled relay or dimming panels with latching relays controlled via a complete list of communication based accessories including digital switches, digital photocells, digital SmartBreaker panelboards, Digital Time Clock (DTC) and interface cards to dimming systems, building automation systems, thermostats, and other devices. The type of lighting control equipment and wiring specified in this section is covered by the description: Microprocessor Controlled Digital Lighting Control system with RS 485 Bus communications. Requirements are indicated elsewhere in these specifications for work including, but not limited to, raceways and electrical boxes and fittings required for installation of control equipment and wiring. They are not the work of this section. C. SmartBreaker panel boards shall operate as if each breaker were a relay in the lighting control system. All references in this spec to the operation of relays shall apply equally to the solenoid operated thermal magnetic breakers within SmartBreaker panel boards. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 16010 – Shop Drawing Requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of lighting control system and accessories including, but not necessarily limited to, relay panels, switches, DTC, photocells and other interfaces. Shop drawings shall indicate exact location of each device or a RFI to confirm location. Plans are diagrammatical. EC to verify all lighting control material requirements from approved shop drawings. “Cut Sheet” submittal not acceptable. C. Product Data: Submit for approval manufacturer's data on the specific lighting control system and components. Submittal shall be electronic format with hard copy available. To prevent departures from approved system operation, electronic files submitted shall be able to be directly downloaded to the specified system at manufacturer facility. Submit a complete bill of materials with part numbers, description and voltage specifications. Page 2 of 9 D. Manufacturer shall provide free software that can be used to specify the system, detail all programming and generate a single line in a format that can be dropped into industry standard CAD packages. E. One Line Diagram: Submit a one-line diagram of the system configuration indicating the type, size and number of conductors between each component if it differs from that illustrated in the riser diagram in these specifications. Submittals that show typical riser diagrams are not acceptable. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products shall be manufactured by Lighting Control & Design, Los Angeles, CA, 800.345.4448 or approved equal. Such firms shall be regularly engaged in manufacturing of lighting control equipment and ancillary equipment, of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Any product other than those listed in this specification must be pre-approved a minimum of 10 days before bid date. No exceptions. B. Control wiring shall be in accordance with the NEC requirements for Class 2 remote control systems, Article 725 and manufacturer specification. C. A licensed electrician shall functionally test each system component after installation, verify proper operation and confirm that all relay and dimming panels and switch wiring conform to the wiring documentation. The Electrical Contractor (EC) is required to phone LC&D a minimum of 7 days before turnover for system checkout. At time of LC&D contact, all components including phone line to modem must be installed, powered and operational. D. Comply with NEC and all local and state codes as applicable to electrical wiring work. E. Lighting control panels shall be UL 916 Listed. LCPs controlling emergency circuits shall be ETL listed to UL 924. Relay panels shall also be listed to comply with CSA C22.2#205 Emergency source circuits controlled in normal operation by a relay panel shall fully comply with NEC 700-9(b). Electrical contractor is responsible for verifying compliance. F. The lighting control system shall be listed, approved and comply as required with all national, state and local energy codes to include but not limited to California Title 24 and ASHRAE 90.1-2004. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. B. Provide 10% spare relays per LCP, up to the maximum capacity of the LCP. C. Provide CD version of manufacturers operating software to include graphical interface software. D. Provide 2 extra sets of as-built and operating manuals. 1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The lighting control system is a networked system that communicates via RS485. The system must be able to communicate with fully digital centralized relay panels, small distributed relay panels (Available with 0-10VDC dimming outputs), (also called Micro Panels), Fully distributed fixture level control by bus connected relays or dimmers, (also called X-Point) smart breaker panels, digital switches, photocells, various interfaces and operational software. The intent of the specification is to integrate all lighting control into one system. Distributed lighting control shall be provided using networked micro relay panels or bus connected fixture level control (X Point.) Lighting control system shall Page 3 of 9 include all hardware and software. Software shall be resident within the lighting control system. System shall provide local access to all programming functions at the master LCP and remote access to all programming functions via dial up modem and through any standard computer workstation. Lighting control system shall have the capability to be remotely controlled via the internet or building wide Ethernet LAN. Desktop computers are not part of this section and will be provided by others. B. System software shall provide real time status of each relay, each zone and each group. E. Lighting control system shall be able to be monitored by and take commands from a remote PC. At any time, should the remote PC go off-line all system programming uploaded to the lighting control system shall continue to operate as intended. Systems requiring an on line PC or server for normal operation are not acceptable F. All devices shall be pre-addressed at the factory. If required by the client the system may be specified without pre-addressing and simple software is to be provided to simplify addressing in place. This particularly applies to fixture level control where controls may be factory mounted on the fixture in advance to speed installation. G. All programs, schedules, time of day, etc, shall be held in non-volatile memory for an indefinite time exceeding 10 years in the event of power failure. At restoration of power, lighting control system shall implement programs required by current time and date. Time of day shall be battery backed for at least 10 years. H. System shall be capable of warning of an impending off sweep by flashing lights Off/On once or twice (programmable) by relay or by zone prior to the lights being turned off. The warning interval times between the flash and the final lights off signal shall be definable for each zone. Additionally an audible signal shall be able to be programmed that gives a mild note on the first flash and a more insistent signal on the second one. Occupant shall be able to override any scheduled Off sweep using local wall switches within the occupied space. Occupant override time shall be locally and remotely programmable and not exceed 2-hours. I. The system shall be capable of implementing On commands, Off commands, Raise (dimming) commands, Lower (dimming) commands for any relay, group or zone by means of digital wall switches, contact closure switches, time clock schedules including offsets from dusk and dawn by up to 10 hours, photocell, pc software or other devices connected to programmable inputs in a lighting control panel. J. The lighting control system shall provide the ability to control each relay and each relay group per this specifications requirement. All programming and scheduling shall be able to be done locally at the master LCP and remotely via dial up modem and via the Internet. Remote connection to the lighting control system shall provide real time control and real time feedback. K. Micro relay panels shall be capable of taking inputs from contact closure switches and outputting up to 8 independent 0-10VDC dimming signals. All micro relay panels and all devices connected to micro relay panels (switches, photocells and occupancy sensors, etc) shall be wired per lighting control manufacturers instructions. L. X Point relay or dimming modules shall be fed from an X Point router that sits on the GR 2400 Bus in the manner of a relay panel. Individual modules are fed from this panel on a separate bus. Each router may feed two strings of up to 64 modules on a 2000ft string. Each Module may be a single relay, a dual relay or a dimming (0-10Volt) module. Relays in the modules are to be capable of being separately controlled in the same manner as an individual relay or dimmer in a relay or dimmer panel. Additionally multiple relays may be collected together to act together as a single multi-pole load or dimmer for ease of programming. Graphical software shall be available that does these assignments and Page 4 of 9 reassignments in a straightforward and logical manner. Relays shall have the same specifications as laid out in 2.1.C. Modules with reduced current ratings may be supplied with Quick Connect connectors for more rapid installation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL AND COMPONENTS A. Relay Panels: 1. All LCP’s shall be in NEMA 1 rated enclosure with screw cover or hinged door. Other NEMA rated types optional. 2. A barrier shall separate the high voltage and low voltage compartments of the panel and separate 120VAC and 277VAC. 3. LCP input power shall be capable of accepting 120VAC or 277VAC without rewiring or 120VAC or 347VAC for Canadian applications. 4. Control electronics in the low voltage section shall be capable of driving 2 to 48, latching relays per section 2.1.C, control any individual or group of relays, provide individual relay overrides, provide a master override for each panel, store all programming in non-volatile memory, after power is restored return system to the correct state for time of day, provide programmable dual blink warn timers for each relay or zone of relays, and be able to control Normally Open Latching (NOL) or Normally Closed Latching (NCL) relays. 5. Lighting control system shall be digital and consist of a Master LCP, Remote LCPs, Micro LCPs with up to 8 individual relays, X Point Router and associated relays or dimmers emulating standard or Micro LCPs, digital switches, digital interface cards and if required, SmartBreaker panelboards. All system components shall connect and be controlled via Category 5, 4 twisted pair cable with RJ45 connectors, providing real time two-way communication with each system component. All Micro LCP’s shall provide multiple inputs for photocells and occupancy sensors. Analog systems are not acceptable. B. Micro Relay Panels 1. Micro relay panels shall have from 2 to 8 latching relays per section 2.1.C and shall control all lighting in the designated area indicated on the plans and be part of the lighting control network. Each micro relay panel shall provide minimum 300ma at 12/24VDC for powering occupancy sensors. Micro relay panels that require a separate occupancy sensor power pack are not acceptable. 2. Micro relay panel shall provide a minimum of 4-programmable photocell inputs, a minimum of 8-programmable occupancy sensor contact closure inputs. This requirement is to insure integration of entire lighting system into one networked, lighting control system. 3. Micro relay panels shall be capable of outputting minimum 4 and up to 8 independent 0-10VDC dimming signals, one independent dimming signal for each of 8 relays. In order to maximize daylight harvesting and minimize disruption to occupants, each dimming output shall provide adjustment for baseline, start point, mid point, end point, trim, fade up rate, fade down rate, time delay and enable/disable masking. All photocell settings must be remotely accessible. Systems providing On, Off with Time Delay only, and system that do not provide remote access are not acceptable. 4. MicroPanels shall have built in capability to take commands from a fully compatible wireless switch. Wireless switch shall contain no battery; have 32-bit unique ID and a minimum 90-foot range line of sight. C. Standard Output relays Page 5 of 9 1. UL Listed 30A @277VAC Ballast and HID, 20A Tungsten at 120VAC and 347VAC Ballast and HID at 20A Latching Relay with 18,000A SCCR @277VAC. 2. Relays shall be individually replaceable. Relay terminal blocks shall be capable of accepting two (2) #8AWG wires on both the line and the load side. Systems that do not allow for individual relay replacement or additions are not acceptable. Relays to be rated for 250,000 operations minimum at a full 30A lighting load. Standard relay shall default to closed at normal power loss, Normally Closed Latching (NCL). 3. Optional relay types available shall include: Normally Open Latching (NOL) relay rated for 250,000 operations, a 600VAC 2-pole NO or NC, and a Single Pole, Double Throw (SPDT) relay. D. Low Voltage Switches 1. All switches shall be digital and communicate via RS 485. Contact closure style switches, except as specified for connection to the micro relay panel programmable contact closure inputs, shall not be acceptable. The programming for a digital switch shall reside in the switch itself, via double EPROM memory. Any digital switch button function shall be able to be changed locally (at the DTC or a PC) or remotely, via modem, Internet or Ethernet. 2. Digital low voltage switch shall be a device that sits on the lighting control system bus. Digital switch shall connect to the system bus using the same cable and connection method required for relay panels. Each button shall be capable of being programmed for On only, Off only, Mix (Some on some off), On/Off (toggle), Raise (Dim up) and Lower (Dim down). Further each button shall be able to be enabled or disabled over the bus. An audible alarm shall be available on all switches that can be programmed to beep on button push or with warning light blinks. 3. Keyed switches shall be similarly programmable and connect to the lighting control system bus. 4. Digital switches for high abuse areas (common areas, gymnasiums, etc.) shall be vandal resistant, contain no moving parts, and be touch sensitive and available with up to two buttons in a single gang. Multi gang versions shall also be available. Touch pads shall be Stainless Steel and capable of handling both high abuse and wash down locations. High abuse switches shall connect to the lighting control system digital bus. Each high abuse touch button shall be able to be programmed in the same way as other digital switch buttons. Switches must be capable of handling electrostatic discharges of at least 30,000 volts (1cmspark) without any interruption or failure in operation. E. Wireless Switches-System shall have the capability to accept in inputs from 32-bit unique ID wireless switches. Wireless switches shall have no battery and be capable of On, Off, Raise and Lower commands. Wireless switches shall have a minimum 90 foot line of sight range F. DTC - Digital Electronic Time Clock 1. A Digital Time Clock (DTC) shall control and program the entire lighting control system and supply all time functions and accept modem (RS232) inputs. 2. DTC shall be capable of up to 32 schedules. Each schedule shall consist of one set of On and Off times per day for each day of the week and for each of two holiday lists. The schedules shall apply to any individual relay or group of relays. 3. The DTC shall be capable of controlling digital devices at up to 127 addresses on a single bus and capable of interfacing digitally with other buses using manufacturer supplied interface cards. 4. The DTC shall accept control locally using built in button prompts and use of an 8 line 21-space display or from a computer or modem via an on-board RS 232 port. All commands shall be in plain English. The DTC shall be run from non- Page 6 of 9 volatile memory so that all system programming is retained indefinitely and time of day is battery backed for up to 10 years. 5. Unity™ lighting control software shall provide via local or remote PC a visual representation of each device on the bus, show real time status and the ability to change the status of any individual device, relay or zone. System shall be capable of running optional Unity GX lighting control software. Unity GX shall provide for importing vector based graphics and a simple interface that allows users or a factory programmer to overlay color “controls” that are associated with relays or collections of relays. Clicking on the overlays changes the color and the status of the relays for visual display of large systems. 6. System shall come with a pre-Installed modem that allows for remote programming from any location using a PC and free remote control software. 7. DTC shall provide system wide timed overrides. Any relay, group or zone that is overridden ON, before or after hours, shall automatically be swept OFF by the DTC a maximum of 2 hours later. G. PHOTOCELL: Photocells to be mounted in location indicated on the plans, if applicable to project. Photocells used for exterior lights shall provide multiple trip points from 1 roof mounted unit. All trip points shall be able to be changed remotely via Internet or dial up modem. Photocells requiring manual trip point adjustment are not acceptable. Photocell used for interior lighting control shall have multiple settings such as start-point, mid-point, off-point, fade-up, fade-down, etc. All settings shall be remotely accessible and adjustable. Systems providing local adjustment only are not acceptable. Photocells to be certified to comply with the current energy code covering this project at time of submittal of plans for building permit. H. Interfaces: For future expansion capability, systems are to have available all of the following interfaces. Verify and install only those interfaces indicated on the plans. 1. A dry contact input interface card that provides 14 programmable dry contact closure inputs. Use shielded cable to connect input devices to interface card on runs over 200ft. 2. Uplink Interface card that allows a single bus to be part of a greater system connected together by a Back Bone Bus. The back Bone bus requires a server for the Modem and Ethernet connections to such a large system. 3. An interface card (T-LINK) that allows the DTC to control up to 32 digital XCI brand thermostats. Programming of thermostats is to be capable of being done locally (at the DTC) or remotely, via modem, Internet or Ethernet. 4. When Unity GX software is specified full graphic pages shall be designed to the owner’s specifications. Owner is to provide to manufacturer all necessary files and criteria. Provide ____ GX pages. 5. Direct digital interface to SmartBreaker panelboards. Relay panel and SmartBreaker panelboard circuits shall appear on the system software as similar, yet distinct, items and maintain all functions and features of the system software. 6. Direct digital interface to DMX 512 based systems. DMX interface shall provide 14 global commands, each of which can be modified locally or remotely using lighting controls manufacturer supplied software. DMX interface shall be integral to the system bus and shall connect and be controlled via a single Category 5, 4 twisted pair cable, providing real time response from the lighting control system to DMX commands. 8. Direct digital interface to building automation systems using DDC protocols such as BACnet, Metasys (N2) and ModBus that accept on/off commands, time schedules and report status of all relays in all panels in real time. Interface cards shall “self populate” each individual relay and each group to the BAS. All BAS system programming required shall be the responsibility of the BAS system provider. PART 3 -EXECUTION Page 7 of 9 3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Mount relay control cabinets adjacent to respective lighting panel board. Cabinet shall be surface or flush mount, per plans. Wiring between relay control cabinets and panelboards shall be in accordance with local codes and acceptable industry standards. Under no circumstances will any extra payment be authorized for the EC or GC due to the EC’s lack of knowledge or understanding of any and all prevailing codes or specified manufacturer’s installation requirements. Neatly lace and rack wiring in cabinets. During construction process, protect all interior components of each relay panel and each digital switch from dust and debris. Any damage done to electronic components due to failure to protect them shall be the sole responsibility of the installing contractor. B. Switches: Provide outlet boxes, single or multi-gang, as shown on the plans for the low voltage digital switches. Mount switches as per plans. Supply faceplates per plans and specifications. EC is specifically responsible to supply and install the required low voltage cable, Category 5, 4 twisted pair, with RJ45 connectors (commonly referred to as Cat 5 patch cable) between all switches and panels. Field-test all Cat 5 patch cable with a recognized cable tester. All low voltage wire to be run in conduit within walls and inaccessible ceilings. Wire may be installed as plenum rated, open cabling in accessible ceilings (partial conduit system) where other special systems are installed in partial conduit systems. Install wire in complete conduit systems where other special systems are required to be installed in complete conduit systems. C. Manufacturer to provide on all systems of more than 2 panels a crimping kit with sufficient approved EZ Brand RJ 45 connectors to populate the whole system. A simple manual that shows all the pitfalls of crimping RJ 45s and how to do it right must be both provided and read by the installing contractor. D. Wiring 1. Do not mix low voltage and high voltage conductors in the same conduit. No exceptions. 2. Ensure low voltage conduits or control wires do not run parallel to current carrying conduits. 3. Place manufacturer supplied “terminators” at each end of the system bus per manufacturer’s instructions. 4. Plug in Category 5 patch cable with RJ45 end connector that has been field- tested with a recognized cable tester, at the indicated RJ45 connector provided at each lighting control device, per manufacturer’s instructions. 5. Use Category 5 patch cable for all system low voltage connections. Additional conductors may be required to compensate for voltage drop with specific system designs. Contact LC&D or refer to the GR2400 manual for further information. Use shielded cable for dry contact inputs on runs over 200ft. 6. Do not exceed 4000ft-wire length for the system bus. 7. All items on the bus shall be connected in sequence (daisy chained). Star and spur topologies are not acceptable. 8. The specified lighting control system shall be installed by the electrical contractor who shall make all necessary wiring connections to external devices and equipment, to include photocell. EC to wire per manufacturer instructions. 3.2 INSTALLATION AND SET-UP A. Verify that conduit for line voltage wires enters panel in line voltage areas and conduit for low-voltage control wires enters panel in low-voltage areas. Refer to manufacturer's plans and approved shop drawings for location of line and low-voltage areas. This is especially applicable in jobs where back boxes are shipped in advance. It is the Page 8 of 9 responsibility of the contractor to verify with lighting control manufacturer all catalog information and specific product acceptability. B. For approved contact closure switches, use #18 AWG stranded conductors. For all other digital switches, provide wiring required by system manufacturer. C. For classroom digital switches provide wiring required by system manufacturer D. Contractor to test all low voltage cable for integrity and proper operation prior to turn over. Verify with system manufacturer all wiring and testing requirements. E. Before Substantial Completion, arrange and provide a one-day Owner instruction period to designated Owner personnel. Set-up, commissioning of the lighting control system and Owner instruction includes: 1. Confirmation of entire system operation and communication to each device. 2. Confirmation of operation of individual relays, switches, occupancy sensors and daylight sensors 3. Confirmation of system Programming, photocell settings, override settings, etc. 4. Provide training to cover installation, maintenance, troubleshooting, programming, and repair and operation of the lighting control system. F. Panels shall be located so that they are readily accessible and not exposed to physical damage. G. Panel locations shall be furnished with sufficient working space around panels to comply with the National Electric Electrical Code. H. Panels shall be securely fastened to the mounting surface by at least 4 points. I. Unused openings in the cabinet shall be effectively closed. J. Cabinets shall be grounded as specified in the National Electrical Code. K. Lugs shall be suitable and listed for installation with the conductor being connected. L. Conductor lengths shall be maintained to a minimum within the wiring gutter space. Conductors shall be long enough to reach the terminal location in a manner that avoids strain on the connecting lugs. M. Maintain the required bending radius of conductors inside cabinets. N. Clean cabinets of foreign material such as cement, plaster and paint. O. Distribute and arrange conductors neatly in the wiring gutters. P. Follow the manufacturer's torque values to tighten lugs. Q. Before energizing the panelboard, the following steps shall be taken: 1. Retighten relay connections to the manufacturer's torque specifications. Verify that required connections have been furnished. 2. Remove shipping blocks from component devices and the panel interior. 3. Remove debris from panelboard interior. R. Follow manufacturers’ instructions for installation and all low voltage wiring. S. Service and Operation Manuals: 1. Submit operation and service manuals. Complete manuals shall be bound in flexible binders and data shall be typewritten or drafted. Page 9 of 9 2. Manuals shall include instructions necessary for proper operation and servicing of system and shall include complete wiring circuit diagrams of system, wiring destination schedules for circuits and replacement part numbers. Manuals shall include as-built cable Project site plot plans and floor plans indicating cables, both underground and in each building with conduit, and as-built coding used on cables. Programming forms of systems shall be submitted with complete information. T. Comply with energy code lighting control system “Acceptance Requirements”. Acceptance tests are used to verify that lighting controls were installed and calibrated correctly. These tests may require that a responsible party certify that controls are installed and calibrated properly. This is the installing contractor’s responsibility. Verify requirements with building authority. 3.3 DOCUMENTATION A. Each relay shall have an identification label indicating the originating branch circuit number and panelboard name as indicated on the drawings. Each line side branch circuit conductor shall have an identification tag indicating the branch circuit number. B. Provide a point-to-point wiring diagram for the entire lighting control system. Diagram must indicate exact mounting location of each system device. This accurate “as built” shall indicate the loads controlled by each relay and the identification number for that relay, placement of switches and location of photocell. Original to be given to owner, copies placed inside the door of each LCP. 3.4 SERVICE AND SUPPORT A. Start Up: EC shall contact LC&D at least 7 days before turnover of project. LC&D will remotely dial into the lighting control system, run diagnostics and confirm system programming. EC shall be available at the time of dial in to perform any corrections required by LC&D. EC is responsible for coordinating with GC and the owner the installation of a dedicated telephone line or a shared phone line with an automatic Fax/Modem switch. Phone jack to be mounted within 12” of Master LCP. Label jack with phone number. EC to connect phone line from jack to Master LCP. B. Telephone factory support shall be available at no additional cost to the EC or Owner both during and after the warranty period. Factory to pre-program the lighting control system per plans and approved submittal, to the extent data is available. The specified manufacturer, at no added cost, shall provide additional remote programming via modem as required by the EC or Owner for as long as a phone line is available for the life of the system. Upon request manufacturer to provide remote dial up software at no added cost to system owner. No exceptions. C. Provide a factory technician for on-site training of the owners’ representatives and maintenance personnel. Coordinate timing with General Contractor. Provide 1 day (8 hours) of factory on-site training. 3.5 CLEANING A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Clean photocell lens as recommended by manufacturer. C. Clean all switch faceplates. END OF SECTION Page 1 of 7 SECTION 16789 – EXTERIOR ATHLETIC LIGHTING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work covered by this section of the specifications shall conform to the contract documents, engineering plans as well as state and local codes. B. The purpose of these specifications is to define the performance and design standards for the City of Corpus Christi – HEB Tennis Courts. The manufacturer / contractor shall supply lighting equipment to meet or exceed the standards set forth in these specifications. C. The sports lighting base bid will be for the following venues: 1. New Tennis Courts 20-22 2. New Practice Area (Courts 23-24) D. The sports lighting alternate bid will be for the following venues: 1. Existing Tennis Courts 9-10 (Replacing existing lighting for these courts. Courts 9-10 share common poles with courts 11-12. Lighting on common poles will be replaced. Remaining lighting for courts 11-12 is to remain.) E. The primary goals of this sports lighting project are: 3. Life-cycle Cost: In order to reduce the operating budget, the preferred lighting system shall be energy efficient and cost effective to operate. 4. Environmental Light Control: It is the primary goal of this project to minimize spill light and glare. 1.2 LIGHTING PERFORMANCE A. Performance Requirements: Playing surfaces shall be lit to an average constant light level and uniformity as specified in the chart below. Lighting calculations shall be developed and field measurements taken on the grid spacing with the minimum number of grid points specified below. Average illumination level shall be measured in accordance with the IESNA LM-5-04. B. Mounting Heights: To ensure proper aiming angles for reduced glare and to provide better playability, minimum mounting heights shall be 50 feet. Higher mounting heights may be required based on photometric report and ability to ensure the top of the beam angle is a minimum of 10 degrees below horizontal. Base Bid # of Poles Pole Designation Mounting Height / Number of Fixtures 2 T1, T4 50’ with (3)1500W fixtures each 2 T2, T3 50’ with (4)1500W fixtures each Alternate Bid # of Poles Pole Designation Mounting Height / Number of Fixtures 2 T5, T10 50’ with (2)1500W fixtures each 2 T6, T9 50’ with (4)1500W fixtures each Poles/Fixtures shall be configured such that: • Poles T1 & T4 fixtures are all on one control zone. • Poles T2 & T3 fixtures are on two control zones, one zone for the (6) fixtures serving courts 20-22 and one zone for the (2) fixtures serving the practice courts 23-24. • Poles T5 & T10 fixtures are all on one control zone. Page 2 of 7 • Poles T6 & T9 fixtures are on two control zones, one zone for the (4) fixtures serving courts 9-10 and one zone for the (4) fixtures serving partial courts 11-12. C. There are two methods that will be considered for calculation of the lighting designs for this project. The approved Lighting Method #1, automated timed power adjustments, as described in C.1 utilizes methodology that adjusts light levels through a series of programmed adjustments. The alternate Lighting Method #2, straight depreciation, as described in C.2 uses continuous lamp lumen depreciation which is recovered by relamping and cleaning lenses of the luminaires. Both methods must be at or above target light values throughout the 10 years of the contract/warranty provided by the manufacturer. A +/- 10% of targeted light levels is not acceptable. 1. Lighting Method #1: Automated Timed Power Adjustments: a. The lighting system shall use automated timed power adjustments to achieve a lumen maintenance control strategy as described in the IESNA Lighting Handbook 10th Edition, Lighting Controls Section page 16-8: "Lumen maintenance involves adjusting lamp output over time to maintain constant light output as lamps age and dirt accumulation reduces luminaire output. With lumen maintenance control, either lamps are dimmed when new, or the lamp's current is increased as the system ages." b. Independent Test Report: If lamp replacement interval is greater than 3,000 hours, manufacturer shall supply an independent test report with applicable recoverable light loss factors. Manufacturers bidding an automated timed power adjustment system must provide an independent test report certifying the system meets the lumen maintenance control strategy above and verifying the field performance of the system for the duration of the useful life of the lamp based on lamp replacement hours. Report shall be signed by a licensed professional engineer with outdoor lighting experience. If report is not provided at least 10 days prior to bid opening, the manufacturer shall provide the initial and maintained designs called for in this specification under Lighting Method #2: Alternate Manufacturers, section 1.2.C.2. c. Project References: Manufacturers bidding any form of Automated Timed Power Adjustment light system must provide a minimum of ten (10) project references within the state of Texas that have been completed within the last 12 months utilizing this exact technology. Manufacturer will include project name, project city, and if requested, contact name and contact phone number for each reference. Base Bid Area of Lighting Average Target Light Levels Max to Min Uniformity Ratio Grid Points Grid Spacing Tennis Courts 20-22 50 Footcandles 2;1 45 20’ X 20’ Practice Area 25 Footcandles 2.5:1 40 10’ X 10’ Alternate Bid Area of Lighting Average Target Light Levels Max to Min Uniformity Ratio Grid Points Grid Spacing Tennis Courts 9-10 30 Footcandles 2;1 30 30’ x 30’ 2. Method #2 – Straight Depreciation a. Light Level Requirements: Manufacturer shall provide computer models and guarantee target light levels on the field over 10 years. The specified maximum Recoverable Light Loss Factor of 0.65 and maintenance/group relamping schedule shall be provided in accordance with recommendations in the Leukos Abstract Volume 6, Number 3, January 2010, page 183-201: “Light Loss Factors for Sports Lighting”, and presented at the 2009 IESNA Annual Conference. For Lighting Method #2, scans for both initial and target light levels are required. Page 3 of 7 Base Bid Area of Lighting Average Initial Light Levels Average Target Light Levels Max to Min Uniformity Ratio Grid Points Grid Spacing Tennis Courts 20-22 76.9 Footcandles 50 Footcandles 2:1 45 20’ X 20’ Practice Area 38.4 Footcandles 25 Footcandles 2.5:1 40 10’ X 10’ Alternate Bid Area of Lighting Average Initial Light Levels Average Target Light Levels Max to Min Uniformity Ratio Grid Points Grid Spacing Tennis Courts 9-10 46.15 Footcandles 30 Footcandles 2:1 30 30’ X 30’ b. Revised Electrical Distribution: Manufacturer shall provide revised electrical distribution plans to include changes to service entrance, panel, and wire sizing if exceed specified design loads. 1.3 LIFE CYCLE ENERGY COSTS A. Energy Consumption: The average kW consumption for the field lighting system shall be 18.77 or less for tennis courts 20-22 and 3.13 or less for the practice area. B. 10-Year Life-cycle Cost: Manufacturer shall submit 10-year life-cycle cost calculations as follows. Equipment price and total life-cycle cost shall be entered separately on bid form Lamp replacement schedule per charts below: Lighting Method 1 Lighting Method 2 a. Luminaire energy consumption # luminaires x _____ kW demand per luminaire x $.10 kWh rate x 400 annual usage hours x 10 years b. Demand charges, if applicable + TOTAL 10 -Year Life Energy Operating Cost = Lighting Method 1 Lamp Replacement Lighting Method 2 Lamp Replacement 5,000 hour intervals 3,000 hour intervals PART 2 – PRODUCT 2.1 SPORTS LIGHTING SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION A. Manufacturing Requirements: All components shall be designed and manufactured as a system. All luminaires, wire harnesses, ballast and other enclosures shall be factory assembled, aimed, wired and tested. B. Durability: All exposed components shall be constructed of corrosion resistant material and/or coated to help prevent corrosion. All exposed carbon steel shall be hot dip galvanized per ASTM A123. All exposed aluminum shall be powder coated with high performance polyester or anodized. All exterior reflective inserts shall be anodized, coated, and protected from direct environmental exposure to prevent reflective degradation or corrosion. All exposed hardware and fasteners shall be stainless steel of 18-8 grade or better, passivated and coated with aluminum-based thermosetting epoxy resin for protection against corrosion and stress corrosion cracking. Structural fasteners may be carbon steel and galvanized meeting ASTM A153 and ISO/EN 1461 (for hot dipped galvanizing), or ASTM B695 (for Page 4 of 7 mechanical galvanizing). All wiring shall be enclosed within the cross-arms, pole, or electrical components enclosure. C. System Description: Lighting system shall consist of the following: 1. Galvanized steel poles and cross-arm assembly. 2. Pre-stressed concrete base embedded in concrete backfill allowed to cure for 12-24 hours before pole stress is applied. Alternate may be an anchor bolt foundation designed such that the steel pole and any exposed steel portion of the foundation is located a minimum of 18 inches above final grade. The concrete for anchor bolt foundations shall be allowed to cure for a minimum of 28 days before the pole stress is applied. 3. All luminaires shall be constructed with a die-cast aluminum housing or external hail shroud to protect the luminaire reflector system. 4. Manufacturer will remote all ballasts and supporting electrical equipment in aluminum enclosures mounted approximately 10’ above grade. The enclosures shall be touch-safe and include ballast, capacitor and fusing with indicator lights on fuses to notify when a fuse is to be replaced for each luminaire. Safety disconnect per circuit for each pole structure will be located in the enclosure. Integral ballast fixtures will not be accepted. 5. Wire harness complete with an abrasion protection sleeve, strain relief and plug-in connections for fast, trouble-free installation. 6. Contactor Cabinet(s) constructed of NEMA Type 4 aluminum, designed for easy installation with custom configured contactor modules for 30, 60, and 100 amps, labeled to match field diagrams and electrical design. Manual Off-On-Auto selector switches shall be provided. Coil voltage shall be 120v. Contactors/Contactor Cabinets shall be provided for Base Bid Item/Courts 20-22 and Base Bid Item/Practice Courts 23-24 only. They are not required for Alternate Bid Item #6/ Courts 9-12. Lighting for Courts 9-12 will be served from an existing branch panel that is entirely controlled by an existing line-side contactor for control. 7. Lightning Protection: Manufacturer shall provide integrated lightning grounding via concrete encased electrode grounding system as defined by NFPA 780 and be UL Listed per UL 96 and UL 96A. If grounding is not integrated into the structure, the Manufacturer shall supply grounding electrodes, copper down conductors and exothermic weld kits. Electrodes and conductors shall be sized as required by NFPA 780. The grounding electrode shall be not less than 5/8 inch diameter and 8 feet long, with a minimum of 10 feet embedment. Grounding electrode shall be connected to the structure by a grounding electrode conductor with a minimum size of 2 AWG for poles with 75 feet mounting height or less, and 2/0 AWG for poles with more than 75 feet mounting height. D. Safety: All system components shall be UL listed for the appropriate application. 2.2 ELECTRICAL A. Electric Power Requirements for the Sports Lighting Equipment: 1. Electric power: 240 Volt, 3 Phase for Courts 20-22 and Practice Courts; 208v, 3-phase for Courts 9-10. 2. Maximum total voltage drop: Voltage drop to the disconnect switch located on the poles shall not exceed three (3) percent of the rated voltage. B. Energy Consumption: The average kW consumption for the field lighting system shall be # kW for metal halide fixtures in Lighting Method 1. Lighting Method 2 kW will be defined in Life Cycle calculation chart (1.3) using a RLLF of 0.65. C. Revised Electrical Distribution: Manufacturer shall provide, at their cost, revised electrical distribution plans to include changes to service entrance, panel, and wire sizing if using Lighting Method 2. 2.3 STRUCTURAL PARAMETERS A. Mounting Heights: To ensure proper aiming angles for reduced glare and to provide better playability, the minimum pole mounting heights from the playing field surface shall be as noted in Section 1.2.B. Higher mounting heights may be required based on photometric performance of manufacturer’s luminaires to meet spill and glare requirements. B. Support Structure Wind Load Strength: Poles and other support structures, brackets, arms, bases, anchorages and foundations shall be determined based on the 2009 IBC Building Code, wind speed of Page 5 of 7 120 mph, exposure category C, and an importance factor of 1.0. Luminaire, visor, and cross-arm shall withstand 150 mph winds and maintain luminaire aiming alignment. C. Structural Design: The stress analysis and safety factor of the poles shall conform to ASSHTO 2009, Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals. D. Soil Conditions: The design criteria for these specifications are based on soil design parameters as outlined in the geotechnical report. If a geotechnical report is not provided by the owner, the foundation design shall be based on soils that meet or exceed those of a Class 5 material as defined by 2009 IBC. It shall be the contractor’s responsibility to notify the owner if soil conditions exist other than those on which the foundation design is based, or if the soil cannot be readily excavated. Contractor may issue a change order request / estimate for the owner’s approval / payment for additional costs associated with: 1. Providing engineered foundation embedment design by a registered engineer in the State of Texas. 2. Additional materials required to achieve alternate foundation. 3. Excavation and removal of materials other than normal soils, such as rock, caliche, etc. E. Foundation Drawings: Project specific foundation drawings stamped by a registered engineer in the state where the project is located are required. The foundation drawings must list the moment, shear (horizontal) force, and axial (vertical) force at ground level for each pole. These drawings must be submitted at time of bid to allow for accurate pricing. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Delivery Timing Equipment On-Site: The equipment must be on-site 4 to 6 weeks from receipt of approved submittals and receipt of complete order information. B. Illumination Measurements: Upon substantial completion of the project and in the presence of the Contractor, Project Engineer, Owner's Representative, and Manufacturer's Representative, illumination measurements shall be taken and verified. The illumination measurements shall be conducted in accordance with IESNA LM-5-04. For Lighting Method 1, Timed Power Adjustment systems, light levels must be measured and exceed the specified target levels. For Lighting Method 2, light levels must be measured and meet the specified initial light levels. C. Annual Testing: At the discretion of the owner, manufacturer is required to conduct annual light level testing during the warranty period to verify that light levels have not dropped below target values. D. Correcting Non-Conformance: If, in the opinion of the Owner or his appointed Representative, the actual performance levels including foot-candles, uniformity ratios, and maximum kilowatt consumptions are not in conformance with the requirements of the performance specifications and submitted information, the manufacturer shall be liable to any or all of the following: 1. Manufacturer shall at his expense provide and install any necessary additional fixtures to meet the minimum lighting standards. The Manufacturer shall also either replace the existing poles to meet the new wind load (EPA) requirements or verify by certification by a licensed structural engineer that the existing poles will withstand the additional wind load. 2. Manufacturer shall minimize the Owner's additional long term fixture maintenance and energy consumption costs created by the additional fixtures by reimbursing the Owner the amount of $1,000.00 (one thousand dollars) for each additional fixture required. 3. Manufacturer shall remove the entire unacceptable lighting system and install a new lighting system to meet the specifications 3.2 10-YEAR WARRANTY A. 10-Year Warranty: Each manufacturer shall supply a signed warranty covering the entire system, excluding fuses and lamps, for 10 years from the date of shipment. Labor shall be included for 2 years. Lamps shall be warranted for 2 years for parts, and 1 year for labor. Warranty may exclude fuses, storm damage, vandalism, abuse and unauthorized repairs or alterations. Page 6 of 7 3.3 PRE-BID SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Approved Product: Musco’s Green Generation Lighting® sports lighting system is the approved “Lighting Method 1” product. All submittal information at the end of this section must be submitted at least 10 days prior to bid. An addendum will be issued prior to bid, listing any approved lighting manufacturers, and the design method to be used. B. Design Approval: The owner / engineer will review pre-bid submittals per section 3.3A from all the manufacturers to ensure compliance to the specification. If the design meets the design requirements of the specifications, a letter and/or addendum will be issued to the manufacturer indicating approval for the specific design submitted. C. Bidders are required to bid only products that have been approved by this specification or addendum by the owner or owner’s representative. Bids received that do not utilize an approved system/design, will be rejected. REQUIRED SUBMITTAL INFORMATION FOR ALL MANUFACTURERS 10 DAYS PRIOR TO BID All items listed below are mandatory, shall comply with the specification and be submitted according to pre-bid submittal requirements Tab Item Description A Letter/ Checklist Listing of all information being submitted must be included on the table of contents. List the name of the manufacturer’s local representative and his/her phone number. Signed submittal checklist to be included. B Equipment Layout Drawing(s) showing field layouts with pole locations C On Field Lighting Design Lighting design drawing(s) showing: a. Field Name, date, file number, prepared by b. Outline of field(s) being lighted, as well as pole locations referenced to the center of the field (x & y), Illuminance levels at grid spacing specified c. Pole height, number of fixtures per pole, as well as luminaire information including wattage, lumens and optics d. Height of light test meter above field surface. e. Summary table showing the number and spacing of grid points; average, minimum and maximum illuminance levels in foot candles (fc); uniformity including maximum to minimum ratio, coefficient of variance (CV), coefficient of utilization (CU) uniformity gradient; number of luminaries, total kilowatts, average tilt factor; light loss factor. f. Manufacturer’s using Lighting Method 2 shall provide both initial and maintained light scans using a maximum Recoverable Light Loss Factor (RLLF) as specified in section 1.2.B.2 D Structural Calculations Pole structural calculations and foundation design showing foundation shape, depth backfill requirements, rebar and anchor bolts (if required). Pole base reaction forces shall be shown on the foundation drawing along with soil bearing pressures. Design must be stamped by a structural engineer in the state of Texas, if required by owner. E Control & Monitoring System Manufacturer of the control and monitoring system shall provide written definition and schematics for automated control system to include monitoring. They will also provide ten (10) references currently using proposed system in the state of Texas. F Electrical Distribution Plans Manufacturer using Lighting Method 2 must include a revised electrical distribution plan including changes to service entrance, panels and wire sizing, signed by a licensed Electrical Engineer in the state of Texas. G Warranty Provide written warranty information including all terms and conditions. Provide ten (10) references of customers currently under specified warranty in the state of Texas. H Independent Testing Report Manufacturer bidding Lighting Method 1 is to provide an independent test report certifying the system meets the lumen maintenance control strategy defined in Section 1.2.C.1.b, verifying the field performance of the system for the duration of the useful life of the lamp based on lamp replacement hours. Report shall be signed by a licensed professional engineer with outdoor lighting experience. I Project References Manufacturer to provide a list of ten (10) projects where the technology and specific fixture proposed for this project has been installed in the state of Texas. Reference list will include project name, project city, installation date, and if requested, contact name and contact phone number. Manufacturer bidding Lighting Method 2 must supply independent test report if lamp Page 7 of 7 life relamping projection is greater than 3000 hours. J Product Information Complete bill of material for all product being provided. K Non-Compliance Manufacturer shall list all items that do not comply with the specifications. If in full compliance, tab may be omitted. L Life-cycle Cost Calculation Document life-cycle cost calculations as defined in the specification. Identify energy costs for operating the luminaires, maintenance cost for the system including spot lamp replacement, and group relamping costs. All costs should be based on 10 Years. (complete table below) REQUIRED SUBMITTAL INFORMATION FOR ALL MANUFACTURERS 10 DAYS PRIOR TO BID All items listed below are mandatory, shall comply with the specification and be submitted according to pre-bid submittal requirements Lighting Method 1 Lighting Method 2 a. Luminaire energy consumption # luminaires x _____ kW demand per luminaire x $.10 kWh rate x 400 annual usage hours x 10 years b. Demand charges, if applicable + TOTAL 10 -Year Life Energy Operating Cost = The information supplied herein shall be used for the purpose of complying with the specifications for the City of Corpus Christi – HEB Tennis Courts. By signing below I agree that all requirements of the specifications have been met and that the manufacturer will be responsible for any future costs incurred to bring their equipment into compliance for all items not meeting specifications and not listed in the Non-Compliance section. Manufacturer: ___________________________________________________ Signature: ________________________________________________________ Contact Name: ___________________________________________________ Date: ______/______/_____ August 26, 2013 City of Corpus Christi Department of Engineering Sery ices Post Office Box 9277 Corpus Christi, Texas 78469-9277 • GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING • CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS ENGINEERING & TESTING • SOILS • ASPHALT • CONCRETE Attention: Mr. Daniel Biles, P.E. Director of Engineering Services SUBJECT: SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION, LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM AND FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE PROPOSED TENNIS CENTER REPAIRS AND UPGRADES City of Corpus Christi Project No.: E12118 HEB Tennis Complex 1520 Shelf Street Corpus Christi, 'Texas RETL Project Number: G113206 Dear Mr. Biles, In accordance with our agreement, we have conducted a subsurface investigation, laboratory testing program and foundation evaluation for the above referenced project. The results of this investigation. together with our recommendations, are to be found in the accompanying report, one electronic copy of which are being transmitted herewith for your use and distribution to the design team. In addition, one electronic copy of this report is being Forwarded to CLK Architects and Associates. Often, because of design and construction details that occur on a project. questions arise concerning soil conditions, and Rock Engineering and Testing Laborator), Inc. (RETL). a Teas Professional I .ngineering Firm (No. 2101), vs, ould be pleased to continue its role as Geotechnical Engineer during the project implementation. RE1 L also has great interest in providing materials testing and observation services during the construction phase of this project. If you will advise us of a convenient time to discuss these engineering services, we are pleased to meet with )ou at that time. Sincerely. Christopher A. Rock, P.E. Vice President Corpus Christi ROCK ENGINEERING & TESTING LABORATORY, INC. www.rocktesting.com 6817 LEOPARD STREET • CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS, 78409-1703 OFFICE: (361) 883-4555 • FAX: (361) 883-4711 10856 VANDALE ST. SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS 78216-3625 OFFICE. (210) 495-8000 • FAX: (210) 495-8015 1 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION, LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM AND FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE PROPOSED TENNIS CENTER REPAIRS AND UPGRADES CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI PROJECT NO. E12118 HEB TENNIS COMPLEX 1520 SIIELY STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS RE'I'L JOB NUMBER: G113206 PREPARED FOR: CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI DEPARTMENT OF ENGINEERING SERVICES P.O. BOX 9277 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 78469-9277 AUGUST 26, 2013 PREPARED BY: ROCK ENGINEERING AND TESTING LABORATORY, INC. 6817 LEOPARD STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 78409 PHONE: (361) 883-4555; FAX: (361) 883-4711 TEXAS BOARD OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS FIRM REGISTRATION NO. - 2101 .�E9 .1:41111 0000000000000 -4 OPHER A; ROCK �� CHRIST . • „•• ;moi Christopher A. Rock, P.E. 'cis% C586S6• `��-1 Vice President Corpus Christi 1��Fss``N iSe TABLE OF CONTENTS Page INTRODUCTION 1 Authorization Purpose and Scope General DESCRIPTION OF SITE 2 FIELD EXPLORATION 2 Scope 2 Drilling and Sampling Procedures 3 Field Tests and Observations 3 LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM 4 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 5 General 5 Soil Conditions 5 Groundwater Observations 6 FOUNDATION DISCUSSION 6 Project Description 6 PVR Discussion 6 FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS 7 PTI Slab -on -Grade Foundations Recommendations 7 SITE IMPROVEMENT METHODS 8 General Considerations 8 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS 9 Site Preparation 9 Select Fill 10 Earth ork and Foundation Acceptance 10 Vapor Retarder 10 Utilities I I Expansion Joints I I GENERAL COMMENTS 11 APPENDIX Grain Size Distribution Curves I3oring Location Plan Boring Logs B -I through B-8 Key to Soil Classifications August 26, 2013 Attn.: Mr. Daniel Biles, P.E. RETL Job No.: G 113206 PROPOSED TENNIS CENTER REPAIRS AND UPGRADES (#EI2118) HEB Tennis Complex; 1520 Shely Street Corpus Christi, Texas INTRODUCTION This report presents the results of a soils exploration, laboratory testing program and foundation recommendations for the proposed Tennis Center Repairs and Upgrades to be constructed at the HEB Tennis Complex located at 1520 Shely Street in Corpus Christi, Texas. Authorization The work for this project was performed in accordance with RETL Proposal No. P052313B (Revision No 2) dated June 12, 2013. The scope of work was approved and incorporated into a City of Corpus Christi's Agreement for "Construction Materials Engineering Laboratory's Inspection and Materials Testing Services" dated August 1, 2013. Purpose and Scope The purpose of this exploration was to evaluate the soil and groundwater conditions at the site and to provide slab -on -grade foundation recommendations suitable for the proposed project. The scope of the exploration and analysis included the subsurface exploration, field and laboratory testing, engineering analysis and evaluation of the subsurface soils, foundation recommendations and preparation of this report. The scope of services did not include an environmental assessment. Any statements in this report, or on the boring logs, regarding odors, colors, unusual or suspicious items or conditions are strictly for the information of the client. General The exploration and analysis of the subsurface conditions reported. herein are considered sufficient in detail and scope to form a reasonable basis for the foundation design. The recommendations submitted for the proposed project are based on the available soil information and the preliminary design details provided by Mr. Craig E. Forsythe, AIA, Architect/Sr. Project Manager, representing CLK Architects & Associates. if the designer requires additional soil parameters to complete the design of the proposed foundation systems and the requested information can be determined from the data obtained within the agreed scope of work provided in the proposal, then RETL will provide this information as a supplement to this report. 1 of 12 August 26, 2013 Attn.: Mr. Daniel Biles, P.E. RETL Job No.: GI 13206 PROPOSED TENNIS CENTER REPAIRS AND UPGRADES (#E12118) HEB Tennis Complex; 1520 Steely Street Corpus Christi, Texas The Geotechnical Engineer states that the fndings, recommendations, specifications or professional advice contained herein have been presented after being prepared in a manner consistent with that level of care and skill ordinarily exercised by reputable members of the Geotechnical Engineer's profession practicing contemporaneously under similar conditions in the locality of the project. RETL operates in general accordance with, "Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction, (ASTM D3740)." No other representations are expressed or implied. and no warranty or guarantee is included or intended. This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of City of Corpus Christi and CLK Architects & Associates for the specific purpose of the proposed Tennis Center Repairs and Upgrades to be constructed at the HEB Tennis Complex located at 1520 Shely Street in Corpus Christi, Texas. DESCRIPTION OF SITE The proposed project will be constructed at the HEB Tennis Complex located at 1520 Shely Street in Corpus Christi, Texas. The site of the proposed project is relatively level. The surface of the site is covered with numerous existing Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete (I -LMAC) tennis courts, pedestrian walkways, concrete pavement, fences and some landscaped areas. Overhead utilities and evidence of underground utilities were observed adjacent to the project site. At the time of our field investigation, the condition of the ground surface was firm and did not pose any significant difficulties to the drill crew moving their equipment. FIELD EXPLORATION Scope The field exploration, to evaluate the engineering characteristics of the foundation bearing materials, included reconnaissance of the project site, performing the test boring operations and obtaining disturbed hand auger soil samples. During the sample recovery operations, the soils encountered were classified and recorded on the boring logs in accordance with "Standard Guide for Field Logging of Subsurface Exploration of Soil and Rock, (ASTM D5434)." Eight borings were performed for the purpose of providing foundation recommendations for the proposed project. The table below provides the boring identification, boring location, boring depth and GPS coordinates: 201'12 August 26, 2013 Attn.: Mr. Daniel Biles, P.E. RETL Job No.: G 1 13206 PROPOSED TENNIS CENTER REPAIRS AND UPGRADES (#E12118) HEB Tennis Complex; 1520 Shely Street Corpus Christi, Texas Boring identification B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5 B-6 B-7 B-8 SUMMARY OF BORING INFORMATION Boring Location Boring Depth (ft) 15 Existing Tennis Court 1 Existing Tennis Court 2 Existing Tennis Court 5 Existing Tennis Court 6 GPS Coordinates N 27" 45.909' W 970 24.763' Existing Tennis Court 9 Existing Tennis Court 10 Existing Tennis Court 13 Existing Tennis Court 15 5 15 5 5 15 5 15 N 27- 45.893' W 97' 24.747' N 2T 45.885' W 97° 24.781' N 27° 45.903' W 970 24.798' N 270 45.907' W 970 24.776' N 27 45.924' W 970 24.792' N 270 45.929' W 970 24.776' N 27° 45.944' W 97'- 24.800' CLK Architects & Associates determined the number and depth of the borings. RETL located the borings in the field and performed the boring operations. Upon completion of the drilling operations and after obtaining the groundwater observations, the drill holes were backfilled with excavated soil and the site cleaned as required. GPS coordinates, obtained at the boring locations using a commercially available GPS and are provided in this report and on the boring logs. A Boring Location Plan, which is a reproduction of a drawing provided to RETL, is provided in the Appendix of this report. Drilling and Sampling Procedures A diamond tipped concrete core barrel was used to cut a hole in the existing HMAC surface in order to access the soils below. The borings were advanced using a hand auger and soil samples were obtained in accordance with ASTM D1452, "S'oil Investigation cmc/ Sampling by Auger Borings." All of the soil samples obtained were placed in plastic bags, narked according to boring number, depth and any other pertinent field data, stored in special containers and delivered to the laboratory for testing. Field Tests and Observations Static Cone Tests - Portable static cone penetrometer tests were performed at each sampling interval. The portable static cone penetrometer is a device used for measuring soil consistency. It is specifically designed for use in fine grained, soft soils. The device is equipped with dual rods enabling the cone stress to be measured directly. Soil friction on the outer rod does not influence the reading. The cone is forced into the soil in increments and retracted slightly after each increment to zero the gauge, then the cone is advanced to obtain the cone index (Qc). The cone index is always read directly from the gauge. It has units of kg/cm', which is essentially equal to tons/ft'. The results of the portable static cone penetrometer tests are provided on the boring log using the notation Qc. 3 of 12 August 26, 2013 Attn.: Mr. Daniel Biles. P.E. RETL Job No.: G 113206 PROPOSED TENNIS CENTER REPAIRS AND UPGRADES (#E12118) HEB Tennis Complex; 1520 Shely Street Corpus Christi, Texas The correlation between the cone index and soil constants is not absolute. The following empirical formula was provided by the portable static cone penetrometer manufacturer, Boart Longyear Company, and has been determined through extensive field use of the unit: The correlation between the cone index and soil constants is not absolute. The following empirical formulas were provided by the portable static cone penetrometer manufacturer, Boart Longyear Company, and have been determined through extensive field use of the unit: 1. Standard Penetration Test Value "N" N Qc'4 Unconfined Compressive Strength "Qu" (tst) Uniform clay and silty clays: Qu Qc 5 Clayey silts: Qu = Qc/(10 to 20) 3. Cohesion "C" or Undrained Shear Strength (tsf) Uniform clay and silty clays: C = Qc/l0 Clayey silts: C = Qc/(20 to 40) Water Level Observations - Water level observations were obtained during drilling and immediately upon completion of the test boring operations. Water level observations are noted in this report and on the boring logs provided in the Appendix. In relatively pervious soils, such as sandy soils, the indicated depths are usually reliable groundwater levels. In relatively impervious soils, a suitable estimate of the groundwater depth may not be possible, even after several days of observation. Seasonal variations, temperature, land -use, proximity to a waterway and recent rainfall may influence the depth to the groundwater. The amount of water in open boreholes largely depends on the permeability of the soils encountered at the boring locations. Ground Surface Elevations — The ground surface elevations were not provided at the boring locations. Therefore, all depths referred to in this report are from the actual ground surface at the boring locations during the time of our held investigation. LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM In addition to the field investigation, a laboratory testing program was conducted to determine additional pertinent engineering characteristics of the subsurface materials necessary in analyzing the behavior of the foundation systems for the proposed project. The laboratory testing program included supplementary visual classification (ASTM D2487) and water content tests (ASTM D2216) on all samples. In addition. selected samples were subjected to Atterberg limits tests (ASTM D4318), percent material finer than the #200 sieve tests (ASTM D1140) and particle -size distribution of soils tests (ASTM D422). 4 of 12 August 26, 2013 Attn.: Mr. Daniel Biles, P.E. RETL Job No.: G 113206 PROPOSED TENNIS CENTER REPAIRS AND UPGRADES (#E121 I8) HEB Tennis Complex; 1520 Shely Street Corpus Christi, Texas All phases of the laboratory testing program were conducted in general accordance with applicable ASTM Specifications. The results of these tests are to be found on the accompanying boring logs provided in the Appendix. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS General The types of foundation bearing materials encountered in the test borings have been visually classified and are described in detail on the boring logs. The results of the standard penetration tests, strength tests, water level observations and other laboratory tests are presented on the boring logs in numerical form. Representative samples of the soils were placed in polyethylene bags and are now stored in the laboratory for further analysis, if desired. Unless notified to the contrary, all samples will be disposed of three months after issuance of this report. The stratification of the soil, as shown on the boring logs, represents the soil conditions at the actual boring locations. Variations may occur between, or beyond, the actual boring locations. Lines of demarcation represent the approximate boundary between different soil types, but the transition may be gradual, or not clearly defined. It should be noted that, whereas the test borings were drilled and sampled by experienced drillers, it is sometimes difficult to record changes in stratification within narrow limits. In the absence of foreign substances, it is also difficult to distinguish between discolored soils and clean soil fill. Soil Conditions The pavement constituents encountered in the existing tennis courts included between 1.75 and 8 -inches of I-IMAC and 4 to 10.25 -inches of base material. It should be noted that base material was not encountered at boring B-3. The natural in situ soils at the site consist predominantly of a stratum of fat clay that extends to a depth of 15 -feet, the maximum termination depth of the test borings. The subsurface conditions encountered at the boring locations are summarized in the following paragraph. From below the paving material and extending to a depth of 15 -feet, a stratum of stiff to very stiff fat clay soil was encountered. Static cone penetrometer tests ranged from 5 to 28 tsf. Atterberg limits test results indicate that the clay soils encountered are predominantly high in plasticity. The liquid limits ranged from 53 to 75 -percent and plasticity indices ranged from 33 to 53. Minus 11200 sieve tests performed on selected soil samples obtained indicated that these soils contain approximately 74 to 86 -percent silt and clay size particles. Detailed descriptions of the soils encountered at the boring locations are provided on the boring logs included in the Appendix. 5 of 12 August 26, 2013 Attn.: Mr. Daniel Biles, P.E. RETL Job No.: G 113206 Groundwater Observations PROPOSED TENNIS CENTER REPAIRS AND UPGRADES (#E12118) HEB Tennis Complex; 1520 Shelf- Street Corpus Christi, Texas Groundwater (GW) was not encountered during drilling nor observed upon completion of the drilling operations. Therefore, based on observations made in the field and moisture contents obtained in the laboratory, it appears as if groundwater will be encountered at depths greater than 15 -feet, the maximum termination depth of the test borings. It should be noted that water levels in open boreholes may require several hours to several days to stabilize depending on the permeability of the soils and that groundwater levels at this site may be subject to seasonal conditions, recent rainfall, and drought or temperature effects. FOUNDATION DISCUSSION Project Description Based on the information provided to RETL, the project will include upgrades and repairs of nine tennis courts. It is understood that tennis courts 1 and 2 have a combined footprint on the order of approximately 12,840 square feet, tennis courts 5 and 6 have a combined footprint on the order of approximately 12,840 square feet, tennis courts 9 and 10 have a combined footprint on the order of approximately 12,840 square feet and tennis courts 13, 14 and 15 have a combined footprint on the order of approximately 18,000 square feet. It is understood that the existing tennis courts will remain in place and post tensioned slab -on - grade foundations will be constructed over the existing courts. PVR Discussion The laboratory test results indicate that the subsoils in the active zone at this site are high in plasticity. The maximum calculated total potential vertical rise (PVR) at this site is on the order of 4 to 41/4 -inches. The PVR \\ as calculated using the Texas Department of Transportation Method TEX-124E and took into account the depth of the active zone, estimated to extend to a depth of 15 -feet, and the Atterberg limits test results of the soils encountered within the active zone. 6 of 12 August 26, 2013 Attn.: Mr. Daniel Biles, P.E. RETL Job No.: G 1 13206 PROPOSED TENNIS CENTER REPAIRS AND UPGRADES (#E12I 18) HEB Tennis Complex; 1520 Shely Street Corpus Christi, Texas The estimated PVR values provided are based on the floor system applying a sustained surcharge load of approximately 1.0 -pound per square inch on the subgrade soils. The value represents the vertical rise that can be experienced by dry subsoils if they are subjected to conditions that allow then to become saturated, such as poor drainage. Using dry soil conditions to calculate the PVR is generally considered the worst case scenario. The actual movement of the subsoils is dependent upon their change in moisture content. Differential vertical movements can potentially be equal to the expected total movements. Worst case scenario can result in differential vertical movements at this site equal to the calculated PVR over a distance equal to the depth of the active zone, within the footprint of a slab -on -grade if dry soil conditions exist and a localized water source such as ponding water or a plumbing leak occurs resulting in non-uniform moisture conditions. Undercutting the natural expansive soils at this site and replacing them with properly compacted non -expansive select fill soils will reduce the PVR. The resulting reduction in PVR at this site to 1 -inch, utilizing undercutting and replacement operations, are included in the following table: Required Undercut Depth (ft) Thickness of Select Fill Pad (ft) Calculated PVR (in) 1 ? 3.3 2 3 2.7 3 4 3.1 4 5 1.7 5 6 1.4 6 7 1.1 7 8 0.9 Based on our calculations, to reduce the PVR to approximately 1 -inch, it will be necessary to remove the expansive soils to a depth of 61/2 -feet, moisture condition and compact the exposed subgrade soils, and place a minimum of 7'/2 -feet of properly compacted non -expansive select fill soils into the excavations. Additional, undercutting and replacement may be required to further reduce the PVR based on desired tennis court performance or structural considerations or if the finished floor slab elevation is something other than the assumed 11/2 -feet above the average existing grade at the site. Establishing the finished concrete floor slab elevations 11/2 -feet above the average existing grade at the site will assist with providing positive drainage away from the proposed courts. FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS PTI Slab -on -Grade Foundation Recommendations Laboratory test results and VOLFLO Version 1.5 software have been used to develop soil parameters based on the Post -Tensioning Institute 3rd Edition, "Design and Construction of Post - Tensioned Slabs -On -Ground." The recommended PTI soil parameters for the site, given natural in-situ conditions, are provided in the following table: 7 of 12 August 26, 2013 Attn.: Mr. Daniel Biles, P.E. RETL Job No.: G 1 13206 PROPOSED TENNIS CENTER REPAIRS AND UPGRADES (#EI21 18) HEB Tennis Complex; 1520 Shely Street Corpus Christi, Texas 3rd Edition PTI Design Criteria Potential Vertical Rise (PVR) 4" to 4 !.4" Differential Movement; Ym (shrink) (center) (in) -1.78 Moisture Penetration Distance; Em (center lift) (ft) 7.00 Differential Movement; Ym (swell) (edge) (in) 2.72 Moisture Penetration Distance; Em (edge lift) (ft) 3.70 The PTI. Design Criteria requires a value for the subgrade modules k, The appropriate value to use for PTI slabs constructed on undisturbed natural in-situ clay soils is ks = 100 pci. The stress -strain modulus (Es) for stiff clay is 3,500 psi. The foundation designer can utilize an allowable bearing pressure of 2,000 psf. The allowable bearing pressure provided takes into account a safety factor on the order of 3.0. Soil supported concrete slabs are subject to PVR movements, as discussed earlier in this report. Even slight differential movements can cause distress and cracking in slab -on -grade foundations. This amount of movement should be understood and addressed during the design phase of the proposed structures planned for construction at this site. If no movements or cracking can be tolerated, it is recommended that the tennis courts utilize drilled piers and structurally suspended foundation systems. SITE IMPROVEMENT METHODS General Considerations A majority of foundation related problems in the project area are attributable, at least in part. to poor drainage. Clays expand or shrink by absorbing or losing eater. Reducing a soil's variation in moisture content will reduce its variation in volume. A number of measures may be used to attain a reduction in subsoil moisture content variations, thus reducing the soil's shrink/swell volume change potential. Some of these measures are outlined below: 8 of 12 August 26, 2013 Attn.: Mr. Daniel Biles, P.E. RETL Job No.: G 113206 PROPOSED TENNIS CENTER REPAIRS AND UPGRADES (#EI2118) HEB Tennis Complex; 1520 Shel) Street Corpus Christi, Texas • During construction, positive drainage schemes should be implemented to prevent ponding of water on the subgrade. • Positive drainage should be maintained around the courts through roof/gutter systems connected to piping or directed to paved surfaces, transmitting water away from the foundation perimeters. In addition, positive grades sloping away from the foundations should be designed and implemented. We recommend that an effective site drainage plan be devised by others prior to commencement of construction, to provide positive drainage away from the foundation perimeters and off the site, both during, and after construction. • The top 2 -feet of utility trenches should be backfilled with low to moderate plasticity clays to assure the trenches do not serve as aqueducts that could transport water beneath the courts due to excessive surface water infiltration. Utility trenches shall have a water stop constructed from the bottom of the utility trench to the ground surface at least 4 -feet wide using properly compacted low to moderately plastic clays at a distance of approximately 5 - feet outside of the building footprint at the limits of the select fill building pad to prevent water froin percolating under the courts. • Vegetation placed in landscape beds that are adjacent to the courts should be limited to plants and shrubs that will not exceed a mature height of 3 -feet. Large bushes and trees should be planted away from the slab foundations at a distance that will exceed their full mature height and canopy width. All project features beyond the scope of those discussed above should be planned and designed similarly to attain a region of relatively uniform moisture content within the foundation areas. Poor drainage schemes are generally the primary cause of foundation problems on clay soils. CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS Site Preparation In areas where a soil -supported floor slab is to be constructed, the minimum site preparation will require demolishing the existing asphalt surface where required and compaction of the exposed subgrade soils to a minimum density of 95 -percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by the standard Proctor (ASTM D698), and at, or above, the optimum moisture content. If any soft areas arc identified, the soils should be removed and recomputed in place. Properly compacted non -expansive select fill soils shall be placed as necessary to achieve the final pad grades. 9 of 12 August 26, 2013 Attn.: Mr. Daniel Biles, P.E. RETL Job No.: G 113206 Select Fill PROPOSED TENNIS CENTER REPAIRS AND UPGRADES (#EI2118) HEB Tennis Complex; 1520 Shely Street Corpus Christi, Texas Imported select fill material used at this site shall be homogenous, free from organics, and clay balls, and other deleterious materials and shall have a maximum liquid limit of 40 -percent and a plasticity index (PI) between 7 and 18. The select fill soils shall have a minimum of 35 -percent passing the #200 sieve and no soil particles exceeding 1'/2 -inches will be permitted. The till should be placed in no greater than 8 -inch thick loose lifts and then compacted to a minimum density of 95 -percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by the standard Proctor (ASTM D698), and at, or above, the optimum moisture content. Earthwork and Foundation Acceptance Exposure to the environment may weaken the soils at the foundation bearing level if the excavations remain open for a long period of time. Therefore, it is recommended that the foundation excavations be extended to final grade and that the foundations be constructed as soon as possible to minimize potential damage to the bearing soils. The foundation bearing level should be free of loose soil, ponded water or debris and should be observed prior to concreting by the Geotechnical Engineer, or his designated representative. Foundation concrete should not be placed on soils that have been disturbed by rainfall or seepage. 11' the bearing soils are softened by surface water intrusion, or by desiccation, the unsuitable soils must be removed from the foundation excavations and be replaced with properly compacted select fill prior to placement of concrete. The Geotechnical Engineer, or his designated representative, should monitor subgrade preparation and placement of select fill. As a guideline, density tests should be performed on the exposed subgrade soils and each subsequent lift of compacted select fill at a rate of one test per 3,000 square feet or a minimum of three in-place nuclear tests per testing interval, whichever is greater. Any areas not meeting the required compaction should be recompacted and retested until compliance is met. Vapor Retarder A vapor retarder. with a permeance of less than 0.3 US perms (ASTM E96), should be placed under the concrete slabs to reduce the transmission of water vapor from the supporting soil through the concrete slab and to function as a slip sheet to reduce subgrade drag friction. Polyethylene film, or polyolefin, with a minimum thickness of 10 -mils (0.25 -mm) is typically used for reduced vapor transmission and durability during and after its installation. The vapor retarder should be installed according to the ASTM E1643, "Slcinclard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs." 10 of 12 August 26, 2013 Attn.: Mr. Daniel Biles, P.E. RETL Job No.: G 113206 PROPOSED TENNIS CENTER REPAIRS AND UPGRADES (#E12118) NEB Tennis Complex; 1520 Shely Street Corpus Christi, Texas All penetrations through the vapor retarder should be sealed to ensure its integrity. The vapor retarder should be taped around all openings to ensure the effectiveness of the barrier. Grade stakes should not be driven through the barrier and care should be taken to avoid punctures during reinforcement and concrete placement. Placement of slab concrete directly on the vapor retarder increases the risks of surface dusting. blistering and slab curling making good concrete practice critical. A low water to cement ratio concrete mix design, combined with proper and adequate curing procedures, will help ensure a good quality slab. Where vapor transmission is not a concern, elimination of the vapor retarder may provide improvements in finishing characteristics and reductions in the risks of surface dusting, blistering and slab curling. IIowever, exposure of portions of the subgrade or granular layer, such as at blockouts for columns or utility penetrations to inclement weather during construction, may create excessive or deficient moisture conditions beneath portions of the slabs that have already been placed. Blockouts for slab penetrations should be protected if a vapor retarder is omitted. ACI 302.1 R-96 "Guide jar Concrete Floor and Slab C'onnsiruciion, " recommends that a vapor retarder or vapor barrier be used only when required by the specific application. Utilities Utilities that project through slab -on -grade floors should be designed with either some degree of flexibility, or with sleeves, in order to prevent damage to these lines should vertical movement occur. Expansion and Control Joints Expansion joints should be designed and placed in various portions of the structures. Properly planned placement of these joints will assist in controlling the degree and location of material cracking that normally occurs due to material shrinkage, thermal affects, soil movements and other related structural conditions. GENERAL COMMENTS If significant changes are made in the character or location of the proposed project, a consultation should be arranged to review any changes with respect to the prevailing soil conditions. At that time, it may be necessary to submit supplementary recommendations. It is recommended that the services of RETL be engaged to test and evaluate the soils in the foundations excavations prior to concreting in order to verify that the bearing soils are consistent with those encountered during the subsurface investigation. RETL cannot accept any responsibility for any conditions that deviate from those described in this report or for the performance of the foundations if not engaged to also provide construction observation and testing for this project. If it is required for RETL to accept any liability, then RETL must agree with the plans and perform such observation during construction as we recommend. II of 12 August 26, 2013 Attn.: Mr. Daniel Biles, P.E. RETL Job No.: G 113206 PROPOSED TENNIS CENTER REPAIRS AND UPGRADES (#E12118) HEB Tennis Complex; 1520 She! Street Corpus Christi, Texas All sheeting, shoring, and bracing of trenches, pits and excavations should be made the responsibility of the contractor and should comply with all current and applicable local, state and federal safety codes, regulations and practices, including the Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 12 of 12 APPENDIX U.S. SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES I U.S. SIEVE NUMBERS I HYDROMETER 4 2 1 1/2 3 6 10 16 30 50 100 200 6 3 1.5 314 3/8 4 8 14 20 40 60 140 100 1 I 1 I I 1 I 161'1-4 I I 95 90 85 \I-----111\11L."‘...\\NN)11 80 75 70 1— 65 LI so >- 55 m o: z 50 L H 45 z w 1) ix 40 Lu o. 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 100 10 ' 1 0 1 GRAIN SIZE IN MILLIMETERS 0.01 0.001 GRAVEL SAND SILT OR CLAY COBBLES coarse fine coarse medium fine Specimen ID Depth Classification LL PL PI Cc Cu • B-1 3.5' B-1; 3.5' - 5.0' N W H 00 m N Specimen ID Depth D100 D60 D30 D10 %Gravel %Sand %Silt %Clay a • B-1 3.5' 2 0.003 0.0 C9 rz TENNIS CENTI 11 US GRAIN SIZE G1132 GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION �' OC $ Rock Engineering & Testing Lab., Inc. 6817 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78409 Telephone: (361) 883-4555 Fax: (361) 883-4711 Project: Prop. Tennis Center Repairs & Upgrades Location: 1520 Shely St.; Corpus Christi, TX Number: G113206 U.S. SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES I U.S. SIEVE NUMBERS I HYDROMETER 6 4 3 2 1.5 1 3/4 1/23/6 3 4 6 810 1416 20 30 40 50 60 100140200 100 1 1 I 111 I 1• T: I I I 95 90 85 80 75 70 \ ''''Illi 65 1 \ .----N w 60 \ >- 55 m o' C. z 50 \ 11 1— 45 z w \\II 40 w o_ 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 100 10 GRAIN SIZE ' 1 0 1 IN MILLIMETERS 0.01 0.001 GRAVEL SAND SILT OR CLAY COBBLES coarse fine coarse medium fine Specimen ID Depth Classification LL PL PI Cc Cu • B-8 13.5' B-8; 13.5' - 15.0' I H 0 0 E Specimen ID Depth D100 D60 D30 D10 %Gravel %Sand %Silt %Clay EL, • B-8 13.5' 2 0.014 0.001 0.0 w W 1- z W 0 N zZ W 1- 0, tC IS GRAIN SIZE G11320 GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION ' OC Rock Engineering & Testing Lab., Inc. 6817 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78409 Telephone: (361)883-4555 Fax: (361) 883-4711 Project: Prop. Tennis Center Repairs & Upgrades Location: 1520 Shely St.; Corpus Christi, TX Number: G113206 1- 0 J 1- 0 0 a 0 ww(1) IDw 0 Z W 0 O N 0 Z 0 0 0 J LOG OF BORING B- �0 FT `a� FST Rock Engineering & Testing Lab., Inc. *"% ' O c 0 6817 Leopard Street `` Corpus Christi, Texas 78409 831)883-4555 ao9aTo oPcP��Telephone 8(8363-47111) 9y � CLIENT: City of Corpus Christi (#E12118) PROJECT: Prop. Tennis Center Repairs & Upgrades LOCATION: 1520 Shely St.; Corpus Christi, TX NUMBER: G113206 DATE(S) DRILLED: 08/05/13 - 08/05/13 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ASTM D 1452, "Soil Investigation Sampling by Auger Borings" SOIL SYMBOL DEPTH (FT) SAMPLE NUMBER SAMPLES N. BLOWS/FT P: TONS/SQ FT T: TONS/SQ FT PERCENT RECOVERY/ ROCK QUALITY DESIGNATION MOISTURE CONTENT (%) ATTERBERG LIMITS DRY DENSITY POUNDS/CU.FT COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (TONS/SQ FT) MINUS NO. 200 SIEVE (%) LIQUID LIMIT PLASTIC LIMIT PLASTICITY INDEX GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Groundwater (GW) was nol encountered during drilling operations Dry and open upon completion of drilling operations. SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A LL PL PI DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM f �.3 0 �%- /// 010 4 R 1 2 - 4 5 6 7 8 - 9 - - 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 A 15 N - STANDARD P - POCKET T - POCKET AUS E AS -2 AUGEW S-3 AS -4 HUGE S-5 SSE ASPHALT (3.00") — Qc= 6 Qc= 10 Qc= 14 Qc= 13 Qc= 13 Qc= 15 36 34 38 32 42 26 58 75 63 36 53 42 76 85 78 BASE MATERIAL (4.00") 22 22 21 FAT CLAY, with sand, dark gray, very moist, stiff. (CH) Same as above. Same as above, gray and brown, very stiff. (CH) FAT CLAY with sand, brown, very moist, very stiff. (CH) Same as above. Same as above. (CH) Boring was terminated at a depth of 15 -feet. PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE PENETROMETER RESISTANCE TORVANE SHEAR STRENGTH REMARKS: Boring depth and location was determined by CLK Architects & Associates. Boring operations were performed by RETL at GPS Coord. N 27° 45.909' W 97° 24.763'. Boring Location: Existing Tennis Court 1 1- 0 J W 0 O a w z z 0 0 z z w 0 N 4 O z 0 LL 0 0 J LOG OF BORING B-2 HEE �\aU 4' Fsr Rock Engineering & Testing Lab., Inc. qG ' oc �O 6817 Leopard Street 4‘c' .� Corpus Christi, Texas 78409 6oA Telephone: (361) 883-4555 co* 4To 0 Fax: (361) 883-4711 Ry k'•� CLIENT: City of Corpus Christi (#E12118) PROJECT: Prop. Tennis Center Repairs & Upgrades LOCATION: 1520 Shely y St.; Corpus Christi, TX NUMBER: G113206 DATE(S) DRILLED: 08/05/13 - 08/05/13 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ASTM D 1452, "Soil Investigation Sampling by Auger Borings" SOIL SYMBOL DEPTH (FT) SAMPLES N: BLOWS/FT P: TONS/SQ FT T: TONS/SQ FT PERCENT RECOVERY/ ROCK QUALITY DESIGNATION MOISTURE CONTENT (%) ATTERBERG LIMITS DRY DENSITY POUNDS/CU.FT COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (TONS/SQ FT) MINUS NO. 200 SIEVE (%) LIQUID LIMIT PLASTIC LIMIT PLASTICITY INDEX GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Groundwater (GW) was not encountered during drilling operations Dry and open upon completion of drilling operations. SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A LL PL PI DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM -•-• • ••�0 •/ /AUGER, /Same 0 eld 1 2 - 3 - 4 AUS-2GER 5 N - STANDARD P - POCKET T - POCKET S-1 \ASPHALT (2.25") r BASE MATERIAL (9.25") Qc= 23 Qc= 16 33 36 72 23 49 86 FAT CLAY, with sand, dark gray, very moist, very stiff. as above. (CH) Boring was terminated at a depth of 5 -feet. PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE PENETROMETER RESISTANCE TORVANE SHEAR STRENGTH REMARKS: Boring depth and location was determined by CLK Architects & Associates. Boring operations were performed by RETL al GPS Coord. N 27° 45.893' W 970 24.747'. Boring Location: Existing Tennis Court 2 LOG OF BORING B-3 SHEET 1 of 1 `ate l' `a0 -FST Rock Engineering & Testing Lab., Inc. Ls hard Street Corpus Christi, Texas78409LOCATION: C6orpus <1 OC .0 4eo PP�� Telephone: (361)883-455.5 4T PC Fax: Fax: (361) 883-4711 4,' � CLIENT: City of Corpus Christi (#E12118) PROJECT: Prop. Tennis Center Repairs & Upgrades 1520 Shely St.; Corpus Christi, TX NUMBER: G113206 DATE(S) DRILLED: 08/05/13 - 08/05/13 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ASTM D 1452, "Soil Investigation Sampling by Auger Borings" SOIL SYMBOL DEPTH (FT) SAMPLE NUMBER SAMPLES N. BLOWS/FT P: TONS/SQ FT T: TONS/SQ FT PERCENT RECOVERY/ ROCK QUALITY DESIGNATION MOISTURE CONTENT (%) DRY DENSITY POUNDS/CU.FT COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (TONS/SO FT) MINUS NO. 200 SIEVE (%) -13 !PLASTIC LIMIT 'PLASTICITY INDEX GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Groundwater (GW) was not encountered during drilling operations_ Dryand open upon completion of drilling operations. SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM I! 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 / 8 9 p 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 i UGE S1 UGEP S-2 UGE` S-3 USGEP-4 UGEP S-5 S-6 Qc= 10 Qc= 10 Qc= 10 Qc= 13 Qc= 23 Qc= 22 35 34 35 27 23 20 72 64 21 21 51 43 82 78 ASPHALT (8.00" FAT CLAY with sand, dark gray, very moist, firm. Same as above. (CH) Same as above, gray and brown. FAT CLAY with sand, brown, very moist, very stiff. (CH) Same as above, moist. Same as above. Boring was terminated at a depth of 15 -feet. > N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE j. P -POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE ,' T - POCKET TORVANE SHEAR STRENGTH REMARKS: Boring depth and location was determined by CLK Architects & Associates. Boring operations were performed by RETL at GPS Coord. N 27" 45.885' W 970 24.781'. Boring Location. Existing Tennis Court 5 c� J F W 0 0 a w 2 z w U Z Z W F- 0 U Z 0 ro 0 O -- — —•--•-••--- 0 a r �`�` ,aFST Rock Engineering & Testing Lab., Inc. <xo ' OC 'No 6817 Leopard Street . Corpus Christi, Texas 78409 5 geo94r PQO9. Telephone:Fax883-47883 4555 NUMBER: 1 -- SHEET 1 01 t CLIENT: City of Corpus Christi (#E12118) PROJECT: Prop. Tennis Center Repairs & Upgrades LOCATION: 1520 Shely St.; Corpus Christi, TX G113206 DATE(S) DRILLED: 08/05/13 - 08/05/13 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): SOIL SYMBOL DEPTH (FT:: SAMPLE NUMBER SAMPLES N: BLOWS+FT P. TONS/SQ FT T' TONS/SQ FT PERCENT RECOVERY: ROCK QUALITY DESIGNATION MOISTURE CONTENT (%) LIQUID LIMIT >I r� PLASTIC LIMIT Co cnm PLASTICITY INDEX 0 DRY DENSITY POUNDS/CU.FT COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (TONS/SQ FT) MINUS NO. 200 SIEVE (%) ASTM D 1452, "Soil Investigation Sampling by Auger Borings" GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Groundwater (GW) was not encountered during drilling operations. Dry and open upon completion of drilling operations. SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A LL PL PI DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM -4i •�• •• ,- 1 2 3 - ,- 4 'JJ 5 A SGEF° AUGE S-2 \ASPHALT (2.25" 1 BASE MATERIAL (7.75") Qc= 28 Qc= 21 34 33 63 22 41 79 FAT CLAY with sand, dark gray, very moist,very stiff. (CH) Same as above. Boring was terminated at a depth of 5 -feet. N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE P - POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE T - POCKET TORVANE SHEAR STRENGTH REMARKS: Boring depth and location was determined by CLK Architects & Associates. Boring operations were performed by RETL at GPS Coord. N 27° 45.903' W 97° 24.798'. Boring Location: Existing Tennis Court 6 in F LL U O 0 0 w z Lu w U z 2 FW - N C7 0 z 0 O m of 0 J �`�G T \�4" FST Rock Engineering & Testing Lab., Inc. <q°' Oc �0 6817 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78409 ao9 T Fax: Telephone:61) 883-4761) 183-455,5 4.p911 6 ``a Q CLIENT: City of Corpus Christi (#E12118) PROJECT: Prop. Tennis Center Repairs & Upgrades LOCATION: 1520 Shely St.; Corpus Christi, TX NUMBER: G113206 DATE(S) DRILLED: 08/05/13 - 08/05/13 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): SOIL SYMBOL DEPTH (FT) SEP UGE S-2 SAMPLES N: BLOWS/FT P: TONS/SQ FT T: TONS/SQ FT PERCENT RECOVERY/ ROCK QUALITY DESIGNATION IIMOISTURE CONTENT (%) ATTERBERG LIMITS DRY DENSITY POUNDS/CU.FT COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (TONS/SQ FT) IIMINUS NO. 200 SIEVE (%) ASTM D 1452, "Soil Investigation Sampling by Auger Borings" 1LIQUID LIMIT PLASTIC LIMIT PLASTICITY INDEX GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Groundwater (GW) was not encountered during drilling operations. Dry and open upon completion of drilling operations. SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A LL PL PI DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM :O, .••. / d 1 2 3 4 5 N - STANDARD P -POCKET T - POCKET ASPHALT (1.75") BASE MATERIAL (7.25" l Qc= 10 Qc= 14 33 33 74 25 49 82 FAT CLAY with sand, dark gray, very moist, stiff. same as above, gray, very stiff. (CH) Boring was terminated at a depth of 5 -feet. PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE PENETROMETER RESISTANCE TORVANE SHEAR STRENGTH REMARKS: Boring depth and location was determined by CLK Architects & Associates. Boring operations were performed by RETL at GPS Coord. N 27° 45.907' W 97° 24.776'. Boring Location: Existing Tennis Court 9 0 0 0 J W 0 0 0 0 w r z 0 (/) z w 1- 0 0 N 0 0 2 O LL 0 0 J LOG OF BORING B-6 SHEET 1 �‘aG `a. " T Fsr Rock Engineering & Testing Lab., Inc. <q° ' Oc ' E� 6817 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78409 61)883-4555 aoR4ro o -s TeTelephone: (361) 883-455 (361)3-4711 0� CLIENT: City of Corpus Christi (#E12118) PROJECT: Prop. Tennis Center Repairs & Upgrades LOCATION: 1520 Shely St.; Corpus Christi, TX NUMBER: G113206 DATE(S) DRILLED: 08/05/13 - 08/05/13 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ASTM D 1452, "Soil Investigation Sampling by Auger Borings" SOIL SYMBOL DEPTH (FT) SAMPLE NUMBER SAMPLES N: BLOWS/FT P: TONS/SQ FT T: TONS/SQ FT PERCENT RECOVERY/ ROCK QUALITY DESIGNATION MOISTURE CONTENT (%) DRY DENSITY POUNDS/CU.FT COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (TONS/SQ FT) MINUS NO. 200 SIEVE (%) IPLASTIC LIMIT PLASTICITY INDEX GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Groundwater (GW) was not encountered during drilling operations. Dry and open upon completion of drilling operations. SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A LL PL PI DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM (2.00") rv: `ASPHALT BASE MATERIAL (5.00" V6 1 2 - 3 - 4 AUGE 5 7 8 - 9 10 - 11 4 12 - 13 - 14 iM6t 15 AUGE S-1 S-2 AUGE S-3 AUGE S-4 HUGE S-5 GE Qc= 5 Qc= 10 Qc= 13 Qc= 22 Qc= 22 Qc= 32 31 34 23 20 21 63 73 22 25 41 48 77 83 74 ) FAT CLAY, with sand, dark gray, very moist, firm. (CH) Same as above, stiff. Same as above, light gray and brown, very stiff (CH) FAT CLAY with sand, brown, moist, very stiff. Same as above. Same as above. Boring was terminated at a depth of 15 -feet. N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE P - POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE T - POCKET TORVANE SHEAR STRENGTH REMARKS: Boring depth and location was determined by CLK Architects & Associates. Boring operations were performed by RETL at GPS Coord. N 27" 45.924' W 97" 24.792'. Boring Location: Existing Tennis Court 10 LOG OF BORING B-7 SHEET 1 of 1 `0 `a��� FST Rock Engineering & Testing Lab., Inc. 1 OC.0 op Leopard Street CorpusChristi, Texas 78409 460 0.• Telephone: (361)883-4555 4T 0 Fax: (361) 883-4711 Ry `t‘�� CLIENT: City of Corpus Christi (#E12118) PROJECT: Prop. Tennis Center Repairs & Upgrades LOCATION: 1520 Shely St.; Corpus Christi, TX NUMBER: G113206 DATE(S) DRILLED: 08/05/13 - 08/05/13 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ASTM D 1452, "Soil Investigation Sampling by Auger Borings" SOIL SYMBOL DEPTH (FT) SAMPLE NUMBER SAMPLES N: BLOWS/FT P: TONS/SQ FT T: TONS/SQ FT PERCENT RECOVERY/ ROCK QUALITY DESIGNATION MOISTURE CONTENT (%) ATTERBERG LIMITS DRY DENSITY POUNDS/CU.FT COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (TONS/SQ FT) MINUS NO. 200 SIEVE (%) LIQUID LIMIT PLASTIC LIMIT PLASTICITY INDEX GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Groundwater (GVV) was not encountered during drilling operations Dry and open upon completion of drilling operations. SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A LL PL PI DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM -rr • ••• • • • :?:.- O 4 4 1 AUGE 2 3 4 5 N - STANDARD P - POCKET T - POCKET S-1 AS2 \ASPHALT (2.75" 1 BASE MATERIAL (10.25") Qc= 7 Qc=10 30 32 69 25 44 82 FAT CLAY with sand, dark gray, very moist, stiff. (CH) Same as above. Boring was terminated at a depth of 5 -feet. i 1' PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE PENETROMETER RESISTANCE TORVANE SHEAR STRENGTH REMARKS: Boring depth and location was determined by CLK Architects Associates. Boring operations were performed by RETL at GPS Coord. N 27° 45.929' VV 970 24.776'. Boring Location: Existing Tennis Court 13 0 c� J F W 0 0 cn 0 w w U z w N 0 Z LOG OF BORING B-8 SHEET 1 of 1 \�0 `a�� FST Rock Engineering & Testing Lab., Inc. ' oc �0 6817 Leopard Street Christi, 1Texas 78409 6p94To oav°QM Faxep(361) 883-47183 455.5 1 qr qac CLIENT: City of Corpus Christi (#E12118) PROJECT: Prop. Tennis Center Repairs & Upgrades y St.; Corpus Christi, TX LOCATION: 1520 ShelyT NUMBER: G113206 DATE(S) DRILLED: 08/05/13 - 08/05/13 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ASTM D 1452, "Soil Investigation Sampling by Auger Borings" SOIL SYMBOL DEPTH (FT) J SAMPLE NUMBER SAMPLES N: BLOWS/FT P: TONS/SQ FT T: TONS/SQ FT PERCENT RECOVERY/ ROCK QUALITY DESIGNATION MOISTURE CONTENT (%) ATTERBERG LIMITS DRY DENSITY POUNDS/CU.FT COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (TONS/SQ FT) MINUS NO. 200 SIEVE (%) J 0 3 PLASTIC LIMIT PLASTICITY INDEX GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Groundwater (GW) was not encountered during drilling operations. Dry and open upon completion of drilling operations. SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A PL PI DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM ,�� $•• • fid.. j / VSame /7 / 1 2 3 4 AUGE 5 8 - 9 10 - 11 12 - 13 - 14AUGES-6 15 N - STANDARD P - POCKET T - POCKET AUGE S-1 S-2 AUGES-3 AUGE S-4 AUGE S-5 (2.50") \ASPHALT �- BASE MATERIAL (10.25") Qc= 8 Qc= 9 Qc= 12 Qc= 14 Qc= 19 Qc= 22 37 36 35 26 21 22 73 53 1 24 20 49 33 82 82 FAT CLAY with sand, dark gray, very moist, stiff. Same as above. (CH) as above, light gray and brown, very stiff. FAT CLAY with sand, brown, very moist, very stiff. Same as above, moist. (CH) Same as above. Boring was terminated at a depth of 15 -feet. PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE PENETROMETER RESISTANCE TORVANE SHEAR STRENGTH REMARKS: Boring depth and location was determined by CLK Architects & Associates. Boring operations were performed by RETL at GPS Coord. N 27° 45.944' W 97° 24.800'. Boring Location: Existing Tennis Court 15 Engineering & Testing Laboratory, Inc. 6817 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78409 Office: (361) 883-4555 Fax: (361) 883-4711 KEY TO SOIL CLASSIFICATIONS AND SYMBOLS UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM Symbol TERMS CHARACTERIZING SOIL Major Divisions Letter Hatching Color NAME STRUCTURE GW • p ' Well – graded gravels or gravel – sand mixtures, little or no fines SLICKENSIDED – having inclined planes Of weakness that are slick and glossy in appearance GRAVEL GP o b I W Poorly -graded gravels or gravel – sand mixtures, little or no fines FISSURED – containing shrinkage cracks, frequently filled with fine sand AND GRAVELLY SOILSp GM y Silty gravels, gravel – sand – silt mixtures or silt; usually more or less vertical LAMINATED (VARVED) – composed of thin layers of varying color and COARSE GRAINED SOILS GC w >- Clayey gravels, gravel - sand – clay mixtures texture, usually grading from sand or silt at the bottom to clay at the top. SWor o Well - graded sands or gravelly sands, little no fines CRUMBLY – cohesive soils which break into small blocks or crumbs on drying CALCAREOUS – containing appreciable SAND SP W rt Poorly – graded sands or gravelly sands, little or no fines quantities of calcium carbonate, generally nodular. WELL GRADED – having wide range in AND SANDY SOILS SM 0 Silty sands, sand – silt mixtures grain sizes and substantial amounts of all Intermediate particle sizes. POORLY GRADED - predominantly of SC _1 >- Clayey sands, sand – clay mixtures one grain slze (uniformly graded) or having a range of sizes with some Intermediate size missing (gap or skip graded) 41.7 ML Inorganic silts and very fine sands, rock flour, fine SYMBOLS FOR TEST DATA silty or clayey sands or clayey silts with SILTS AND CLAYS CL w w (9 Inorganic Gays of low to medium plasticity, gravelly clays. sandy clays, silty clays, lean clays M/C = 15 – Natural moisture content in percent. FINE LL<50•— OL — — — Organic silts and organic silt -clays of low plasticity 7 = 95 – Dry unit weight in lbs/cu ft. Qu = 1.23 – Unconfined compression GRAINED SOILS MH Inorganic silts, micaceous or diatomaceous fine sandyor siltysoils, elastic silts strength in tons/ sq ft. 51 – 21 – 30 –Liquid limit, Plastic limit, and Plasticity Index. SILTS AND CLAYS LL> 50 CH / W co m Inorganic clays of high plasticity, fat clays 30% FINER – Percent finer than No. 200 mesh sieve OH Organic clays of medium to high plasticity, organic silts 30 B/F – Blows per foot, standard penetration test. HIGHLY ORGANIC_ SOILS P' �_ — w 2 a c o Peat and other highly organic soils 7 – Ground water table. TERMS DESCRIBING CONSISTENCY OF SOIL (2) COARSE GRAINED SOILS FINE GRAINED SOILS DESCRIPTIVE TERM NO. BLOWS / FT. STANDARD PEN. TEST DESCRIPTIVE TERM NO. BLOWS / FT. STANDARD PEN. TEST UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TONS PER SQ. FT. Very loose Loose Firm (medium) Dense Very Dense 0 – 4 4 – 10 10 – 30 30 – 50 over 50 Very Soft Soft Plastic (med. Stiff) Stiff Very Stiff Hard < 2 2 – 4 4 – 8 8 –15 15 – 30 over 30 < 0.25 0.25 – 0.50 0.50-1.00 1.0 – 2.00 2.00 – 4.00 over 4.00 Field classification for "Consistency" is determined with a 0.25" diameter penetrometer.